LiBRARY 

or  TMt 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/armyoffiGersexamOOpowericli 


THE 

AEMY    OFFICER'S    EXAMINER. 

CONTAINING 

QUESTIONS    AND    ANSWERS 

ON  ALL  SUBJECTS  PRESCRIBED   FOR  AN  OFFICER'S  EXAMINATION  ; 
TOGETHER  WITH 

RULES  TO  GUIDE  BOARDS  OF  EXAMINATION. 


By  Lieut.-Col.  WM.  H.  POWELL, 

llih  Infantry ^^n.JS^  Army. 


mmA 


FIRST 

FIRST   THOtJSXND. 


NEW  YORK: 

JOHN    WILEY    &    SONS, 

53  East  Tenth  Street. 

1894. 


^-'  ..^ 


Sf37S 

C6pyright,  1894, 

BY 

WM.  H.  POWELL. 


>-^   OF  TH3      ' 

;UNI7EF.:iTrl 


PREFACE. 


The  object  of  this  work  is  to  equalize  the  examinations  of 
officers  by  boards  and  to  relieve  the  War  Department  of  the  trou- 
ble of  preparing  sample  questions,  each  subject  being  exhausted 
with  questions  and  fair  approximate  answers  given  to  each,  fur- 
nishing thereby  a  guide  to  both  boards  and  candidates,  as  well  as 
data  to  refresh  their  memories  for  those  who  have  passed  the 
periods  of  examination. 

It  will  be  found  to  be  an  invaluable  aid  to  officers  of  the 
National  Guard  in  the  pursuit  of  knowledge  in  the  military 
service. 

The  work  has  been  prepared  with  great  labor,  and  the  sub- 
scriber has  received  the  valuable  assistance  in  its  preparation  of 
Lieut. -Col.  J.  W.  Clous,  Judge  Advocate,  Professor  of  Military 
Law  at  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy,  in  Military  Law  ;  Major  S.  0. 
Norvell,  10th  Cavalry,  in  Cavalry  Drill ;  First  Lieut.  Thos.  J. 
Lewis,  2d  Cavalry,  in  Hippology  ;  First  Lieut.  Wallis  O.  Clark, 
12th  Infantry  (distinguished  marksman),  in  Fire  Discipline  ;  and 
Second  Lieut.  Wm.  H.  Keynolds,  14th  Infantry,  in  Military 
Topography — to  all  of  whom  he  returns  his  sincere  thanks. 

Wm.  H.  Powell. 

New  York  City,  1894, 

ill 


BOARDS  OF  EXAMINATION. 


Boards  for  the  examination  of  all  officers  of  the  army  as  to 
their  physical  and  mental  qualification  were  instituted  by  the 
following  Act  of  Congress  : 

Act  op  Conorkss  Dirkctino  Examinations  fob  Promotion. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatwes  of  the  United 
States  of  America  in  Congress  assembled.  That  hereafter,  promotion  to  every 
grade  in  the  Army  below  the  rank  of  brigadier-general,  throughout  each  arm, 
corps,  or  department  of  the  service,  shall,  subject  to  the  examination  hereafter 
provided  for,  be  made  according  to  seniority  in  the  next  lower  grade  of  that 
arm,  corps,  or  department :  Provided,  That  \a  the  line  of  the  Army  all  officers 
now  above  the  grade  of  second  lieutenant  shall,  subject  to  such  examination, 
be  entitled  to  promotion  in  accordance  with  existing  laws  and  regulations. 

Sec.  2.  That  officers  of  *  grades  in  each  arm  of  the  service  shall  be  assigned 
to  regiments,  and  transferred  from  one  regiment  to  another,  as  the  interests  of 
the  service  may  require,  by  orders  from  the  War  Department,  and  hereafter  all 
appointments  in  the  litie  of  the  Army  shall  be  by  commission  in  an  arm  of  the 
service  and  not  by  commission  in  any  particular  regiment. 

Skc.  3.  That  the  President  be,  and  he  is  hereby,  authorized  to  prescribe  a 
system  of  examination  of  all  officers  of  the  Army  below  the  rank  of  major  to 
determine  their  fitness  for  promotion,  and  such  an  examination  to  be  conducted 
at  such  times  anterior  to  the  accruing  of  the  right  to  promotion  as  may  be  best 
for  the  interests  of  the  service  :  Provided,  That  the  President  may  waive  the 
examination  for  promotion  to  any  grade  in  the  case  of  any  officer  who,  in  pur- 
suance of  existing  law,  has  passed  a  satisfactory  examination  for  such  grade 
prior  to  the  passage  of  this  act :  And  provided.  That  if  any  officer  fails  to  pass 
a  satisfactory  examination  and  is  repoi-ted  unfit  for  promotion,  the  officer  next 
below  him  in  rank,  having  passed  said  examination,  shall  receive  the  promo- 
tion :  And  provided.  That  should  the  officer  fail  in  his  physical  examination  and 
be  found  incapacitated  for  service  by  reason  of  physical  disability  contracted  in 
line  of  duty,  he  shall  be  retired  with  the  rank  to  which  his  seniority  entitled  him 
to  be  promoted;  but  if  he  should  fail  for  any  other  reason,  he  shall  be  suspended 
from  promotion  for  one  year,  when  he  shall  be  re-examined,  and  in  case  of  fail- 
ure on  such  re-examination  he  shall  be  honorably  discharged  with  one  year  s 
pay  from  the  Army  :  And  provided  further.  That  the  examination  of  officers 
appointed  in  the  Army  from  civil  life,  or  of  officers  who  were  officers  of  volun- 
teers only,  or  were  officers  of  the  militia  of  the  several  States  called  into  service 
of  the  United  States,  or  were  enlisted  men  in  the  regular  or  volunteer  service, 
either  in  the  Army,  Navy,  or  Marine  Corps,  during  the  War  of  the  Rebellion,  shall 
be  conducted  bv  boards  composed  entirely  of  officers  who  were  appointed  from 
civil  life  or  of  offlcei-s  who  were  officers  of  volunteers  only  during  said  war,  and 
such  examination  shall  relate  to  fitness  for  practical  service  and  not  to  technical 
and  scientific  knowledge  ;  and  in  case  of  failure  of  any  such  officer  on  the  re- 

*  Sic  in  the  roll. 


Vi  BOARDS  OF  EXAMINATIOl?^. 

examination  hereinbefore  provided  for,  he  shall  be  placed  upon  the  retired  list 
of  the  Army;  and  no  act  now  in  force  shall  be  so  construed  as  to  limit  or  restrict 
the  retirement  of  officers  as  herein  provided  for. 
Approved,  October  1,  1890. 

Bt  gouhand  of  Major-Qekeral  Schofield  : 

CHAUNCY  McKEEVER, 

Acting  Adjutant-General. 

Upon  the  approval  of  this  act,  and  as  soon  as  the  rules  pre- 
scribed could  be  prepared,  the  following  order  was  issued  : 

General  Orders,  )  Headquarters  of  the  Army, 

v  Adjutant-General's  Office, 

No.  128.  )  Washington,  October  29,  1890. 

The  following  rules,  prescribed  by  the  President,  in  accordance  with  Section  3 
of  the  Act  of  Congress  approved  October  1,  1890,  providing  for  a  system  of  ex- 
amination to  determine  the  fitness  for  promotion  of  all  officers  of  the  Army 
below  a  certain  grade,  are,  by  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  published  for 
the  information  and  guidance  of  all  concerned  : 

I.  At  such  time,  anterior  to  the  accruing  of  the  right  to  promotion,  as  may  be 
best  for  the  intere  ts  of  the  service,  officers  of  the  line  of  the  Army  and  of  the 
Quartermaster's  and  Subsistence  Departments  below  the  rank  of  major  shall  be 
examined  by  a  board,  convened  by  the  War  Department,  consisting  of  five 
members,  two  of  whom  shall  be  selected  from  the  Medical  Corps,  and  a  recorder. 
The  board,  excepting  the  officers  of  the  Medical  Corps,  shall  be  composed  of 
officers  senior  in  rank  to  the  officers  to  be  examined,  and,  as  far  as  practicable, 
of  the  arm  of  service  or  department  to  which  the  officer  belongs.  The  duties 
of  the  medical  officers  will  be  confined  to  the  physical  examination. 

II.  Examination  shall  be  made  under  the  following  heads  : 

1.  Physical  condition. 

2.  Character  and  professional  efficiency, 

III.  When  tlie  board  finds  an  officer  physically  incapacitated  for  service  it  shall 
conclude  the  examination  by  finding  and  reporting  the  cause  which,  in  its  judg- 
ment, has  produced  his  disability,  and  whether  such  disability  was  contracted 
in  the  line  of  duty.  For  the  purpose  of  this  inquiry  the  proceedings  of  the  board 
shall  conform  to  those  of  a  retiring  board. 

IV.  When  the  board  finds  an  officer  physically  capable,  the  examination  shall 

Kroceed  under  the  second  head.  Any  evidence  submitted  as  to  character  will 
e  carefully  considered,  and  such  proceedings  taken  as,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
board,  the  case  requires;  provided;  that  an  adverse  finding  shall  not  be  entered 
until  the  officer  shall  have  been  fully  heard  in  his  own  behalf. 

V.  The  examination  in  respect  to  professional  proficiency  shall  relate  to  fit- 
ness for  practicable  service,  and  to  apply  to  all  officers  enumerated  in  par.agraph 
I.  For  the  present  it  shall  embrace  such  subjects  as  pertain  to  the  actual  prac- 
tical working  of  the  arm  of  the  service  or  department  to  which  the  officer 
belongs,  viz. :  drill  regulations,  authorized  manuals  of  instruction,  army  regula- 
tions, military  law  so  far  as  it  relates  to  practice  and  procedure  before  courts- 
martial,  records,  returns,  correspondence,  and  administration;  and  due  consid- 
eration will  be  given  to  the  officer's  record  for  professional  efficiency,  including 
his  standing  at  the  service  schools. 

Any  individual  investigations,  papers,  reports,  or  books  may  be  submitted  to 
the  board  by  the  officer,  and  the  boaid  is  authorized  to  consider  any  matter 
which  will,  in  its  judgment,  aid  it  in  determining  the  fitness  of  the  officer  for 
promotion. 

VI.  Subsequently  to  a  date  to  be  announced  hereafter,  but  not  less  than 
eighteen  months  hence,  the  scope  of  examination  for  officers  of  the  line  will  be 
extended.  To  this  end  officers  should  make  themselves  familiar  with  the  elements 
of  Field  Engineering  and  the  Art  of  War,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  fitness  for 
practical  service.  The  authorities  on  these  subjects  included  in  the  curriculum 
of  the  Artillery  School  at  Fort  Monroe  and  of  the  Infantry  and  Cavalry  School 
at  Fort  Leavenworth  are  regarded  as  standard.  The  result  of  special  inquiries 
involving  studies  of  professional  subjects  will  be  received  and  considered  as 
equivalents  of  the  above-mentioned  subjects,  so  far  as  in  the  opinion  of  the 
board  their  merits  justify. 

VII.  The  examination  of  the  following  officers  shall  be  conducted  by  boards 


BOARDS   OF   EXAMINATION".  VU 

composed  entirely  of  officers  who  were  appointed  from  civil  life  or  who  were 
officers  of  volunteers  only,  during  the  War  of  the  Rebellion: 

1.  Officers  appointed  in  the  Army  from  civil  life  during  the  War  of  the 
Rebellion, 

2.  Officers  who  were  officers  of  volunteers  onl.v  during  the  War  of  the 
Rebellion. 

3.  Officers  who  were  officers  of  militia  of  the  several  States  called  into  the 
service  of  the  United  States  during  the  War  of  the  Rebellion. 

4.  Officers  who  were  enlisted  men  in  the  Regular  or  Volunteer  Service, 
either  in  the  Army,  Navy,  or  Marine  Corps,  during  the  War  of  the  Rebellion. 

The  examination  of  the  following  officers  may  be  conducted  by  boards  organ- 
ized at  the  discretion  of  the  War  Department,  to  be  composed,  as  far  as 
practicable,  of  officers  of  the  same  professional  antecedents  as  the  officers  to  be 
examined  : 

1.  Graduates  of  the  Military  Academy. 

2.  Officers  appointed  from  civil  life  since  the  War  of  the  Rebellion. 

3.  Officers  appointed  from  the  Army  since  the  War  of  the  Rebellion. 

The  expression  "  during  the  War  of  the  Rebellion  "  is  understood  to  embrace 
the  period  between  April  15,  1861,  and  May  1,  1865. 

VIII.  Officers  of  the  Medical  Department,  Corps  of  Engineers,  and  Ordnance 
Department,  below  the  grade  of  major,  shall  be  examined  for  promotion  as 
hereinbefore  provided,  excepting  that  the  examination  as  to  professional 
efficiency  shall  be  conducted  as  heretofore  authorized  by  orders  and  regulations 
pertaining  to  the  department  and  corps  referred  to,  or  as  may  hereafter  be 
specially  prescribed  therefor. 

Two  medical  officers  will  be  added  to  the  board  as  now  authorized,  for  the 
examination  of  engineer  and  ordinance  officers,  whose  duties  shall  be  confined 
to  the  physical  examination. 

Officers  who,  m  pursuance  of  existing  law,  have  passed  a  satisfactory  ex- 
amination for  any  grade,  prior  to  the  passage  of  the  act  approved  October  1, 
1890,  will  not  be  required  to  undergo  the  examination  above  mentioned,  unless 
specially  ordered  bv  the  President. 

IX  Any  officer  heretofore  reported  by  a  retiring  board  as  incapacitated  by 
reason  of  physical  disability,  the  result  of  an  incident  of  service,  shall,  if  the 
proceedings  of  said  board  are  approved  by  the  President,  be  regarded  as  physi- 
cally unfit  for  promotion  within  the  meaning  of  Section  8  of  the  Act  of  October 
1,  1890,  and  will  be  retired  with  the  rank  to  which  his  seniority  entitles  him 
whenever  a  vacancy  occurs  that  otherwise  would  result  in  his  promotion  on  the 
active  list;  provided,  that  before  the  occurrence  of  such  vacancy  he  shall  not 
have  been  placed  on  the  limited  retired  list;  and  further  provided,  that  any 
officer  who  objects  to  retirement  under  the  provisions  of  this  paragraph  shnll, 
upon  his  own  application,  be  re-examined  under  the  general  provisions  of  this 
order. 

X.  The  examining  board  shall  report  its  recommendation  of  any  officer  for 
promotion  in  substantially  the  following  form : 

"  We  find  that has  the  physical,  moral,  and  professional  quali- 
fications to  perform  efficiently  all  the  duties  of  the  grade  to  which  he  will  next 
be  eligible,  and  recommend  him  for  promotion  thereto.'' 

Each  record  must  be  signed  by  every  member  and  by  the  recorder,  and  must 
show  who  of  the  members  concurred  in  and  who,  if  any,  dissented  from  the 
opinion  of  the  board. 

Whenever  the  board  fails  to  recommend  a  candidate  for  promotion,  the  record 
will  state  the  cause  of  such  failure. 

The  proceedings  shall  be  forwarded  to  the  Adjutant-General  of  the  Army  for 
the  final  action  or  the  Secretary  of  War. 

By  COMMAND  OF  Major-General  Schofield  : 

. CHAUNCY  McKEEVER, 
Acting  Adjutant-Qeneral. 


RULES  OF  PEOCEDURE. 


When  the  officers  who  are  ordered  to  appear  oefore  the  board 
report  to  the  president  thereof  (which  they  are  invariably 
directed  to  do  in  orders),  the  president,  through  the  recorder, 
notifies  the  medical  members  of  the  board  of  their  presence,  and 
requests  to  know  when  the  physical  examination  can  be  made. 

As  soon  as  the  fact  is  ascertained,  the  officers  to  be  examined 
are  directed  to  report  to  the  senior  surgeon,  who  will,  upon  com- 
pletion of  the  physical  examination,  transmit  to  the  recorder  a 
written  certificate  giving  the  condition  of  the  officer,  signed  by 
both  medical  officers. 

A  certificate  will  be  required  from  the  examined  officer  at  the 
commencement  of  the  physical  examination  that,  to  the  best  of 
his  knowledge  and  belief,  he  is  not  affected  with  any  form  of 
disease  or  disability.  (See  Circular  from  Surgeon-General's  Office, 
by  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  Dec.  18,  1890.) 

Upon  the  receipt  of  the  certificates,  the  president  will  direct 
the  recorder  to  convene  the  board  at  an  appointed  time,  and  the 
recorder  notifies  the  candidate  for  examination  to  be  present;  or, 
if  preferable  the  entire  board  can  be  convened  before  the  exami- 
nation by  the  medical  officers,  and  the  physical  examination  made 
during  a  recess  of  the  board,  taken  for  that  purpose. 

The  members,  recorder,  and  officers  to  be  examined  assemble  at 
the  place  and  hour  designated,  and  the  board  will  be  called  to 
order  by  the  president,  who  will  direct  tl^e  order  convening  the 
board  to  l)e  read. 

After  this  the  order  directing  the  candidate  to  appear  will  be 
read,  and  the  candidate  will  be  asked  if  he  has  any  objection  to 
bis  examination  by  any  member  present.* 

[IfUie  oJffUxr  should  object,  his  objection  will  be  made  in  writ- 
ing ;  and  after  consideration  by  the  board,  and  its  opinion  given, 
will  be  forwarded  to  the  War  Department  for  action  in  the 
matter.] 

•  The  rljfht  of  challenge  should  always  be  accorded.  The  statutes  as  to  the 
formation  of  a  retirinjr-board  intend  a  fair  hearing,  and  without  this  right  great 
Injustice  might  at  times  result.— ilea. 

viU 


RULES  OF   PEOCEDURE.  IX 

At  this  point  the  officer  should  ask  to  introduce  counsel,  if  he 
desires  so  to  do. 

If  the  candidate  has  no  objections  to  any  of  the  members,  the 
recorder  will  then  administer  the  following  oath: 

"Fot^  (A.  B.)  do  swear  that  you  will  honestly  and  impartially 
discharge  your  duties  as  a  member  of  this  hoard  in  the  matter 
now  before  you.     So  help  you  Ood.'''' 

After  which  the  president  of  the  board  will  administer  the  fol- 
lowing oath  to  the  recorder : 

"  Yoii  (A.  B.)  do  suiear  that  you  will,  according  to  your  best 
abilities,  accurately  and  impartially  record  the  proceedings  of 
the  board,  and  the  evidence  to  be  given  in  the  case  in  hearing. 
So  help  you  Qod.'''' 

The  board  is  now  organized  in  the  full  capacity  of  a  Retiring- 
board,  and  if  there  is  anything  found  in  the  medical  examination 
which  is  likely  to  render  the  officer  unfit  for  promotion,  all  other 
candidates  but  the  one  in  question  will  withdraw  from  the  board, 
and  a  further  examination  of  the  case  will  be  continued. 

The  examination  of  witnesses  is  next  in  order,  and,  when  called 
before  the  board,  the  following  oath  will  be  administered  by  the 
recorder: 

*'  You  (A.  B.)  do  swear  that  the  evidence  you  give  in  the  cause 
now  in  hearing  shall  he  the  truth,  the  whole  tmth,  and  nothing 
hut  the  truth.    So  help  you  Qod.''^ 

The  first  witnesses  (in  case  of  disability)  are  the  medical  officers, 
and  they  present  the  written  certificate  which  they  have  made, 
and  reply  to  any  oral  questions  propounded  by  the  board,  all  of 
which  must  be  made  a  matter  of  record. 

Note.— A  retiring-board  has  to  inquire  into  and  determine  the  facts  touching 
the  nature  and  occasion  of  tlie  disability  of  any  officer  who  appears  to  be  in- 
capable of  performing  the  duties  of  his  office,  and  has  such  powers  of  a  court- 
martial  and  of  a  court  of  inquiry  as  may  be  necessary  for  that  purpose.  Tlie 
board,  therefore,  las  power  to  summon  and  compel  the  attendance  of  witnesses, 
and  to  make  use  of  depositions  in  the  same  manner  and  under  the  same  re- 
strictions as  courts-martial.— /res. 

Other  oral  testimony  and  documentary  evidence  may  then  be 
introduced,  with  the  right  to  the  candidate  of  objecting  to  any 
improper  evidence,  and  of  cross-examining  the  witnesses  called 
by  the  board. 

The  candidate  can  then  produce  such  evidence  as  he  may  deem 
necessary  in  the  case. 

When  this  has  all  been  received,  should  the  board  desire,  it 
may  call  upon  the  Adjutant-General  of  the  Army  for  the  com- 
plete history  of  the  officer;  in  which  case,  or  in  the  event  of  a 
delay  granted  the  officer,  the  board  adjourns  to  meet  at  the  call 
of  the  president,  or  proceeds  to  other  business.        ^,,>>^'^'^^^^'^^^''^^^s^^ 

When  all  the  papers  relating  to  the  case  have  bei^iSce3rfed"by  x 
the  recorder,  the  president  will  call  the  board  together,  and  each  i'\\ 
individual  paper,  duly  attested,  will  be  read  in  the  presence  of  ^  " 

/ 
/■  ' 


X  EULES  OF  PROCEDUKE. 

tbe  officer  under  examination,  briefed  on  tbe  record  and  referred 
to  as  appended,  and  marked  A,  B,  or  0,  as  the  case  may  be. 

After  all  the  evidence  has  been  duly  entered,  the  board  will  sit 
with  closed  doors  (which  it  has  a  right  to  do  at  any  time  for  de- 
liberation, hut  not  for  the  taking  of  testimony) ,  and  the  decision 
at  which  it  arrives  is  entered  upon  the  record,  signed  by  the  presi- 
dent and  recorder  only,  if  the  officer  is  found  incapacitated  for 
active  duty. 

NoTK.— The  province  of  a  retiring-board  is  simply  to  determine  the  facts 
touching  the  nature  and  occasiop  of  the  disability  of  the  officers  examined. 
It  has  no  authority  to  entertain  any  charge  of  a  military  offence,  or  to  try  an 
lasue  of  fact  involving  the  moral  status  of  the  officer.  Its  deliberations  must 
be  directed  to  his  physical  and  mental  capacity  to  discharge  the  duties  incident 
to  his  rank  and  Office;  and  its  investigation  is  not  hmited  to  any  particular 
period  of  time;  for  the  length  of  service  of  an  officer  and  the  duration  and  con- 
upuaoce  of  bis  disability  are  all  material  to  be  considered.— ires. 

The  finding  of  the  board  must  be  considered  as  confidential. 

The  board  is  required  to  give  an  opinion  as  to  whether  the  in- 
valid officer  is  incapacitated  for  active  service  or  not.  When  it 
finds  an  officer  so  incapacitated,  it  is  further  required  to  report 
the  cause  which,  in  its  judgment,  has  produced  his  incapacity, 
aud  whether  such  cause  resulted  from  an  incident  of  service. 

This  conclusion  of  the  board  is  merely  to  assist  the  President 
of  the  United  States  in  deciding  the  case. 


PROCEDURE  WHEN  FOUND  NOT  INGA- 
PACITATED. 


If  the  oflScer  examined  has  been  reported  as  physically  capable 
of  discharging  the  duties  of  the  next  higher  grade  to  which  he  is 
eligible,  the  certificates  of  the  surgeons  will  be  read  to  the  board 
immediately  after  tlie  oaths  have  been  administered  to  the  mem- 
bers and  the  recorder,  and  the  board  determines  whether  it  will 
so  find  the  officer  or  otherwise.  If  found  capacitated  for  duty, 
the  medical  members  will  then  be  relieved  from  further  attend- 
ance in  the  case. 

The  remaining  members  then  become  a  board  of  examination 
as  to  professional  efficiency  and  proceed,  as  prescribed  in  General 
Orders  No.  128,  series  of  1890,  from  the  headquarters  of  the  Army, 
amended  by  the  following  order: 

Gfnfrat  OnnFRq  /  Headquarters  of  the  Army, 

Nn  ftff  ^^^^'  y  Adjutant-General's  Office, 

•  )  Wasfiingtoii,  October  6,  ISQl. 

The  following  rules  prescribed  by  the  President,  in  accordance 
with  section  3  of  the  act  of  Congress  approved  October  1,  1890, 
providing  for  a  system  of  examination  to  determine  the  fitness 
for  promotion  of  all  officers  of  the  Army  below  a  certain  grade, 
are,  by  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  published  for  the  infor- 
mation and  guidance  of  all  concerned : 

I.  After  January  1,  1893,  the  scope  of  examination  for  officers 
of  the  line  will  be  as  follows: 

Y\vs,i.— For  promotion  from  second  to  first  lieutenant. 
Manual  of  guard  duty. 
Military  law. 

Elements  of  field  engineering. 
Signalling. 

Drill  regulations  (candidate's  arm  only). 
Manuals  of  instruction: 
Cavalry — 

Hippology. 


Xii      PROCEDURE  WHEN  FOUND  NOT  INCAPACITATED. 

Artillery- 
Exterior  ballistics. 
Infantry- 
Fire  discipline. 
Minor  tactics.  ,  .  u     .  i  x 

Small-arms  firing  regulations  (cavalry  and  infantry  only). 
Administration. 

Second.— For  promotion  from  first  lieutenant  to  captain. 

Military  law. 

Elements  of  field  engineering. 

Signalling. 

Drill  regulations  (candidate's  arm  only). 

Manuals  of  instruction^  as  prescribed  for  second  lieutenants.  ., 

Minor  tactics. 

Military  topography. 

Small-arms  firing  regulations  (cavalry  and  infantry  only}. 

Administration. 

Third. — For  promotion  from  captain  to  major. 

Military  law. 

Drill  regulations  (candidate's  arm  only). 

Minor  tactics. 

Administration. 

Essay  of  not  less  than  3000  words  upon  a  professional  topic, 
selected  by  the  candidate,  and  submitted  to  the  Adjutant-General 
for  the  approval  of  the  Major-General  Commanding  the  Army. 
The  essay  to  be  prepared  at  any  time  during  the  three  months 
immediately  preceding  the  examination,  the  date  of  which  will  be 
communicated  by  the  Adjutant- General. 

Fourth.  First  and  second  lieutenants  of  artillery,  serving  with 
light  batteries  at  the  time  of  examination,  will  be  examined  in 
hippology  as  prescribed  for  cavalry.  ' 

Fifth.  Examinations  conducted  in  conformity  with  the  Memo- 
randum of  October  5,  1891,  from  this  office,  will,  for  the  purpose 
of  marking,  be  divided  into  two  parts,  as  follows: 

1.  To  each  written  question  a  numerical  value  will  be  attached, 
and  the  board  will  credit  each  answer  according  to  its  nature. 

2.  To  each  exercise  in  parade  examination,  and  the  attending 
oral  questions  if  any  are  propounded,  the  board  will  in  like  man- 
ner allot  a  numerical  value,  and  credit  each  test  according  to  its 
merit.  In  subjects  exclusively  or  almost  entirely  oral,  such  as 
small-arms  firing  regulations  and  administration,  a  numerical 
value  will  be  given  each  subject,  and  a  credit  given  on  the  gen- 
eral result  of  all  the  answers  therein.  . 

No  candidate  will  be  passed  who  shall  not  obtain  an  average 
of  60  per  cent  in  all  the  written  questions  propounded;  and  an 


PROCEDURE  WHEN   FOUKD  NOT  INCAPACITATED.    Xlll 

average  of  70  per  cent  in  parade  and  oral  examinations  consid- 
ered collectively. 

Sixth.    Graduating  diplomas  of  the    Infantry    and   Cavalry 
School,  and  the  Artillery  School,  dated  not  more  than  five  years 
anterior  to  examination,  shall  be  accepted,  as  sufficient  evidence 
of  proficiency  in  subjects  enumerated  therein. 
*  *       ,*  ***  *  *  * 

By  command  of  Major-General  Schofield: 
J.  C.  KELTON, 

Adjutant- General. 

The  professional  examination  defined  in  the  above-quoted  order 
will  therefore,  after  January  1,  1893,  be  conducted  as  prescribed 
in  the  following 

MEMORANDUM. 

SUBHEADS  FOR  THE  WRITTEN  EXAMINATION  OF  OFFICERS  FOR 
PROMOTION  AS  PRESCRIBED  IN  GENERAL  ORDERS,  NO.  128, 
OCTOBER  29,  1890,  AND  NO.  80,  OCTOBER  6,  1891,  FROM  THE 
ADJUTANT-QENERAVS  OFFICE;  GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR 
PARADE  AND  ORAL  EXAMINATIONS,  AND  TEXT-BOOKS  AND 
AUTHORITIES. 

SUBHEADS  FOR  THE  WRITTEN  EXAMINATION. 

For  2€l  liieutenants  of  the  Line. 

Manual  of  Guard  D 
Rosters. 

The  officer  of  the  day. 
The  officer  of  the  guard. 
The  sergeant  of  the  guard. 
The  corporal  of  the  guard. 
The  soldie,r  on  guard. 

Orders  for  sentinels  on  post  (paragraph  169  to  333) 
Miscellaneous  (paragraphs  234  to  242). 
Artillery-stable  and  park-guard. 
Miscellaneous  subjects  (paragraphs  278  to  360). 

Military  Law. 

:  The  subje<}t  defined  and  divided  ;  constitutional  provisions. 
The  written  military  law. 
The  unwritten  military  law. 
The  court-martial. 

The  constitution  and  composition  of  general  courts-martial. 
The  jurisdiction  of  general  courts-martial. 


Xiv      PROCEDURE   WHEK   FOUND  NOT   INCAPACITATED. 

The  procedure  of  general  courts-martial ;  arrest. 

The  charge. 

Assembling  and  opening  of  the  court;  the  president  and  mem- 
bers. 

The  judge  advocate. 

Challenges. 

Organization,  arraignment,  pleas  and  motions.   . 

The  trial. 

Evidence. 

The  finding. 

Sentence  and  punishment. 

Action  on  the  proceedings;  the  reviewing  authority. 

Inferior  courts-martial. 

The  court  of  inquiry. 

The  summary  court— General  Orders,  117  and  137,  1890,  an^ 
Circulars  1,  2,  5,  and  9,  1891,  Headquarters  of  the  Army. 

Punishment— General  Orders,  117,  1890,  and  General  Orders, 
21,  1891,  Headquarters  of  the  Army. 

Elementary  Field  Engikeering. 

General  principles  and  definitions. 

Clearing  the  ground. 

Hasty  entrenchments. 

Obstacles. 

Defense  of  posts. 

Field  level  and  field  geometry. 

Deliberate  entrenchments. 

Field  casemates. 

Brushwood. 

Revetments. 

Working-parties. 

Siege  trenches. 

Roads. 

Cordage  and  use  of  spars. 

Bridges. 

Floating  bridges. 

Camping  arrangements. 

Hasty  demolition. 

Signalling, 
theoretical. 

n  JS?**^xr®^.^  ^^^^  *°^  Telegraph  Code,  authorized  by  General 
Orders,  No.  59  Headquarters  of  the  Army,  1889,  copies  of  which 
^an  be  obtained  upon  application  to  the  Chief  Signal  Officer  of  the 


PROCEDURE   WHEN   FOUND   NOT   INCAPACITATED.      XV 


PRACTICAL. 

Transmission  of  simple  messages  with  flag,  at  distances  not  less 
than  one  mile,  using  authorized  code. 

Drill  Regulations. 
FOR  cavalry. 

Definitions,  signals,  general  principles. 

School  of  the  soldier. 

School  of  the  troop. 

School  of  the  squadron. 

Extended  order  (to  include  the  squadron). 

Employment  of  cavalry. 

Raids,  escorts,  escorts  to  convoys. 

Scouting  and  reconnoitring. 

Advance  and  rear  guards. 

Outposts,  marches,  camping. 

Stable-duty. 


Cavalry  horses. 
Packing. 


FOR  artillery. 
LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 


School  of  the  soldier  (dismounted). 

Squad  drill. 

School  of  the  cannoneer. 

School  of  the  battery  (dismounted). 

Horse  artillery. 

School  of  the  driver. 

School  of  the  battery. 

Organization  of  artillery. 

Artillery  in  the  field. 

Artificial  cover. 

Camping. 

Transportation  of  artillery. 

Artillery  horses. 

Stables. 

HEAVY  artillery. 

[Tidbairs  Manual.] 

Preliminary  instruction. 

Service  of  the  piece. 

Mechanical  manoeuvres. 

Care  and  preservation  of  artillery  material. 

Transportation  of  artillery. 

Harbor  defenses. 


Xn     PBOCEDUBE  WHEN  FOUND  NOT  INCAPACITATED. 

^rArSMers""o1oron888,  Headquarters  of  the  Army. 
GoneSl  SS,  No.  ISa!  of  1890,  Headquarters  of  the  Army. 

FOR  INFANTRY. 

Definitions,  signals,  general  principles. 

School  of  the  soldier. 

School  of  the  company. 

School  of  the  battalion. 

Extended  order  (to  include  the  battalion). 

Advance  and  rear  guards. 

Marching,  camping. 

Manuals  of  Instruction. 

for  cavalry. 

nrppoLOGY, 

HORSES  AND  STABLES. 

Ventilation  and  construction  of  stables. 
Improvement  of  stables  of  faulty  construction. 
Stable-fittings. 
Watering  and  feeding. 
Characteristics  of  good  oats. 
Various  defects  in  oats. 

Distinction  between  old  and  new  oats.  ^   ,.  ^.     ,.        , 

Upland,  lowland,  and  water-meadow  hay,  and  distinctions  be- 
tween the  same. 
Characteristics  of  good  upland  hay. 
Grooming. 
Exercise. 

Stable-management. 
Conformation. 
Principles  of  shoeing. 
Details  of  shoeing, 

BEATS  AND  SADDLES. 

The  framework  of  the  horse  considered  from  a  mechanical  point 
of  view. 
The  saddle,  and  its  influence  on  the  seat. 
Seats. 
The  military  seat. 

BITS  AND  BITTING, 

General  principles. 

The  neck,  the  head,  the  mouth,  the  tongue,  carriage,  feeling. 
The  cavesson,  snaffle,    nose-band,    training-halter,    running- 
reins. 


PROCEDURE  WHEK   FOUND   NOT  INCAPACITATED.   XVU 

The  lever,  the  bit  and  curb,  the  bridle. 

Taking  measure  for  the  bit — the  mouth-gauge,  the  trial-bit. 

BESTIVENESS. 

How  to  render  horses  obedient. 

General  rules  for  the  treatment  of  restiveness. 

Special  forms  of  restiveness. 

FOR  ARTILLERY. 
EXTERIOR  BALLISTICS. 

Introduction  and  not  less  than  three  problems  selected  indis- 
criminately from  Captain  Ingalls'  "Handbook  of  Problems  in 
Exterior  Ballistics." 


.  FOR  INFANTRY. 
FIBB  DISCIFLINB. 

The  trajectory. 

Variations  in  the  trajectory. 

Mean  and  practical  trajectory. 

Limit  of  individual  fire. 

Controlled  fire  and  combined  sights. 

Effects  of  collective  fire. 

Influence  of  ground. 

Long-range  fire. 

Direction  and  control  of  fire. 

Kinds  of  fire. 

The  fire  unit. 

Supply  of  ammunition. 

Rapidity  of  fire. 

Tactical  deductions. 

Indirect  and  plunging  fire,  etc. 


Minor  Tactics. 


Security  and  information. 
Reconnoitring. 


For  1st  liieutenants  of  the  Line. 

Military  law.  "I 

S^"amng°^  ^^^^  engineering,    g^^^  ^^  j^^  ^  lieutenants. 

Manuals  of  instruction.  J 


XViii  PROCEDURE  WHEH  FOUKD    KOT  INCAPACITATED. 

Drill  Kegulations. 

The  same  as  for  3d  lieutenants,  with  the  addition  of  evolutions 
of  the  regiment,  and  "The  Regiment"  in  extended-order  drill, 
for  infantry  and  cavalry ;  the  school  of  the  battalion  for  artillery. 

Minor  Tactics. 

General  principles  and  definitions. 

Functions  of  the  three  arms. 

Security  and  information. 

Reconnoitering. 

Rear-guards. 

Convoys. 

Military  Topography. 

Construction  of  scales;  copying,  reducing,  and  enlarging  plans; 
the  conventional  signs. 

Terms  used  in  describing  hills ;  the  representation  of  hills ;  the 
scale  of  horizontal  equivalents. 

Sections. 

Making  use  of  plans  on  the  ground ;  measurement  of  distance  ; 
the  plane-table  illustrated  in  intersection  and  resection. 

The  prismatic  compass  and  the  protractor;  their  uses  illustrated 
in  intersection  and  resection  ;  the  magnetic  variation. 

Traversing  with  compass  and  field-book  ;  plotting  ;  traversing 
and  plotting  at  sight. 

Traversing  with  the  plane-table. 

Hill  and  mountain  sketching. 

Sketching  without  instruments ;  general  remarks  on  sketching. 

Reading  contoured  plans. 

Reconnaissance  of  a  defensive  position ;  sketch  and  report. 

Sketching  on  horseback. 

Laying  out  and  constructing  roads. 

For  Captains  of  the  liine. 

Military  Law. 

Instructions  for  the  government  of  armies  of  the  United  States 
in  the  field. 
The  law  of  war. 
«ivil  functions  and  relations  of  the  military. 

Drill  Regulations. 

The  same  as  for  a  1st  lieutenant,  with  the  addition  according  to 
arm,  of  the  omitted  portions  of  the  cavalry,  light  artillery,  and 
infantry  drill  books.  ^ 


PROCEDURE   WHEN   FOUKD   NOT   INCAPACITATED^     XIX 

Minor  Tactics. 

General  principles  and  definitions. 

Functions  of  the  three  arms. 

Security  and  information. 

Keconnoitering. 

Attack  and  defense  of  infantry. 

Attack  and  defense  of  cavalry. 

Attack  and  defense  of  the  three  arms. 

Kear-guards.  , 

Convoys. 

Essay. 

As  prescribed  in  General  Orders,  No.  80,  Headquarters  of  the 
Army,  1891. 

For  Captains  of  Quartermaster'is  Department. 

Military  Law. 
(Same  as  for  captains  of  the  line.) 

HiPPOLOGY. 
HORSES  and  stables. 

(Same  as  for  cavalry.) 

DRAUGHT  AND  HARN? 

The  angle  of  traction. 

The  collar. 

The  harness. 

The  trace. 

The  pole  and  pole-chains. 

The  height  of  the  wheel. 

Training  for  draught. 

Army  Regulations. 

Article  56.  Advertising  and  printing. 
Article  57.  Contracts  and  purchases. 
Article  58.  Money  accountability. 
Article  59.  Property  accountability. 
Article  60.  Boards  of  survey. 
Article  62.  Staff  administration. 
Article  78.  Quartermaster's  Department. 


XX      PROCEDUKE  WHEN  FOUND  KOT   INCAPACITATED. 

Blanks  should  be  furnished  and  candidates  required  to  make  an 
aetount  current  and  a  return  of  stores,  accompanied  by  vouchers 
calculated  to  exemplify  the  use  of  the  most  important  blanks  per- 
taining to  the  department.  Contracts  of  various  kmds  should  be 
made,  bonds  executed,  and  general  rocedure  in  connection  there- 
with described. 

Fop  Captains  of  Subsistence  Department, 

•  Military  Law.  ' 

(Same  as  for  captains  of  the  line.) 
Army  Regulations. 

(Same  as  for  the  Quartermaster's  Department,  substituting 
paragraph  79  in  place  of  78.) 


GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  PARADE  AND  ORAL 
EXAMINATIONS. 

In  addition  to  the  theoretical  written  examination,  the  knowl- 
edge of  each  candidate  will  be  tested  in  drills,  mechanical  ma- 
Moeuvres,  and  such  other  practical  work  as  may  be  deemedex  pedi- 
ent  by  the  board. 

1st  and  2d  lieutenants  will  be  examined  on  the  parade  in  actual 
command  of  troops  in  the  school  of  the  soldier  and  the  school  of 
the  troop,  battery,  or  company,  according  to  arm,  and,  in  the 
case  of  cavalry  and  artillery,  dismounted  and  mounted.  The 
candidate  will  act  as  instructor,  and,  in  addition  to  giving  the 
words  of  command,  will  be  required  to  give  the  explanation  of 
each  movement  before  it  is  performed.  The  exercises  will  cover 
the  entire  scope  of  the  drill-book  pertaining  to  the  candidate's 
own  arm  in  regard  to  the  subjects  mentioned,  and  will  embrace 
the  primary  drill  of  unarmed  recruits  sabre-exercises,  bayonet- 
exercise,  and  extended-jorder  drill. 

In  the  artillery  the  board  will,  if  the  material  is  available,  satisfy 
itself  that  the  candidate  is  able  to  conduct  the  mechanical  ma- 
noeuvres of  a  light  battery,  and  to  mount  and  dismount  at  least 
one  gun  employed  in  seacoast  defense. 

Captains  will  in  like  manner  be  examined  on  the  parade  in  the 
school  of  the  troop,  battery,  or  company,  including  extended-order 
drill  of  cavalry  and  infantry,  and  the  school  of  the  battalion  or 
squadron,  according  to  arm. 

In  connection  with  parade  examinations  and  mechanical  ma- 


PEOCEDURE  WHEK  FOUND  KOT  INCAPACITATED,    xxi 

noeuvres,  oral  questions  may  be  propounded  at  the  discretion  of  the 
board. 

Cavalry  and  infantry  1st  and  2d  lieutenants  will  practically  ex- 
emplify, in  such  manner  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  board,  their 
method  of  instruction  in  small-arms  firing,  and  also  be  orally 
interrogated  in  the  regulations  thereof,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
board. 

The  board  will  enumerate  in  the  record  of  proceedings  the 
exercises  performed  in  pursuance  of  the  foregoing  require- 
ments, and  will  state  clearly  whether  the  candidate  is  able  to 
impart  instruction  in  an  effective  manner  ;  especially  1st  and  2d 
lieutenants,  to  recruits,  in  the  school  of  the  soldier  and  in  target- 
practice. 

1st  and  2d  lieutenants  will  be  examined  orally,  at  the  discretion 
of  the  board,  in  regard  to  the  interior  economy  and  administration 
of  a  troop,  battery,  or  company.  The  system  of  keeping  books, 
making  returns,  messing,  company-fund,  and  such  other  matters 
as  the  subject  suggests,  should  be  inquired  of. 

Captains  will  be  examined  in  like  manner  in  regard  to  their 
respective  organizations,  and  also  in  regard  to  regimental  and  post 
administration. 

Oral  questions  shall  be  embodied  in  the  proceedings  of  boards 
only  in  the  event  of  a  candidate  being  pronounced  deficient  in 
consequence  thereof ;  otherwise  a  simple  statement  that  the  can- 
didate was  questioned  as  required,  made  a  certain  percentage,  and 
was  found  proficient,  is  sufficient  to  make  of  record. 

Commanding  officers  of  posts  whereat  boards  are  convened,  or 
in  the  vicinity  thereof,  will  be  advised  to  comply,  as  far  as  possi- 
ble, with  requests  for  troops  and  material. 

All  the  officers  of  the  board  are  invariably  to  be  present  during 
parade  and  oral  examinations. 

TEXT-BOOKS  AND  AUTHORITIES. 

Military  Law : 

For  1st  and  2d  lieutenants,  Winthrop's  Abridgment  Mili- 
tary Law. 

For  captains.  General  Orders,  No.  100,  April  24,  1863,  War 
Department,  Adjutant-General's  Office. 

Parts  II  and  III,  "Winthrop's  Unabridged  Military  Law. 

Field  engineering.  ] 

Hippology.  Authorized  text-books  in  use  at  the 

Horses  and  stables.  Infantry  and  Cavalry  School,  which 

Seats  and  saddles,  etc.  >  can  be  obtained  through  the  secretary 

Draught  and  harness.  of  the  School  at  Fort  Leavenworth, 

Minor  tactics.  Kansas. 

Military  topography. 


Xxii    PROCEDURE  WHEN  FOUKD   NOT  INCAPACITATED. 

Authorized  text-books-infantry  Fire :  its  Use  in  Battle,  by 
Lieutenant  J.  B.  Batchelor,  Jr.,  Twenty- fourth  Infantry  ;  Infantry 
Fire  Tactics,  edition  1888,  by  Major  C  B.  Mayne. 

G.  0.  6,  H.  Q.  A.,  Jan.  26. 

The  following  rules  prescribed  by  the  President,  in  accordance 
with  Section  3  of  the  Act  of  Congress  approved  Oct  1,  1890,  pro- 
viding for  a  system  of  examination  to  determine  the  fitness  tor 
promotion  of  all  officers  of  the  Army  below  a  certain  grade,  are, 
by  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  pubhshed  for  the  informa- 
tion and  guidance  of  all  concerned  :  ^    .OAi    4-V.- 

I.  The  first  section  of  paragraph  1,  G.  O.  80,  Oct.  5,  1891,  this 
office,  is  amended  to  read  as  follows  : 

■pirst—^Fbr  promotion  from  2d  to  1st  lieutenant. 

Manual  of  guard  duty. 
Military  law. 

Elements  of  field  engineering. 
Signalling. 

Drill  regulations  (candidate's  arm  only). 
Manuals  of  instructions : 
Cavalry— Hippology. 
Artillery— Exterior  ballistics  and  miscellaneous  questions  in 

artillery. 
Infantry — Fire  discipline. 
Minor  tactics. 

Small-arms  firing  regulations  (cavalry  and  infantry  only). 
Administration. 

As  the  misceUaneous  artillery  examination  does  not  admit  of 
ready  classification  under  specific  subheads,  a  list  of  the  ques- 
tions, with  reference  to  the  various  sources  from  which  compiled, 
will  be  prepared  for  distribution  to  officers  concerned. 

II.  In  addition  to  subjects  heretofore  prescribed,  the  written 
examination  of  all  officers  of  the  line  will  embrace  Regulations 
for  the  Army  of  the  United  States  relating  to  troops  in  cam- 
paign. 

III.  The  relative  weights  of  the  subjects  embraced  in  examina- 
tions will  be  as  follows  : 


I.  THEORETICAL. 

1.  Manual  of  guard  duty -2 

2.  Military  law 2 

8.  Field  engineering 3 

4.  Signalling 1 

6.  Drill  regulations 3 


PROCEDURE  WHEK   FOUND   NOT  INCAPACITATED.    XXIU 

6.  Hippology 3 

7.  Exterior  ballistics  and  miscellaneous  questions  in  artillery .  3 

8.  Fire  discipline 3 

9.  Minor  tactics 4 

10.  Military  topography 3 

11.  Essay 2 

13.  Army  regulations 3 

13.  Troops  in  campaign 2 

II.    PARADE  AND  ORAL. 

1.  Drill 4 

2.  Signalling - 1 

3.  Small- arms  firing  regulations 3 

4.  Administration : 1 

5.  Mechanical  manoeuvres 4 

IV.  A  summary  of  the  examination  will  be  embraced  in  the 

record  of  proceedings  in  each  case,  according  to  the  following 
form: 

Summary  of  examination  of 

THEORETICAL. 


Subject. 


c8  ^  o 

at 


1.  Manual  of  guard  duty 

2.  Military  law ....   

3.  Field  engineering 

4.  Signalling 

5.  Drill  regulations 

6.  Hippology 

7.  Exterior  ballistics  and  miscel 

laneous  questions  in  artillery 

8.  Fire  discipline 

9.  Minor  tactics , 

10.  Military  topography , 

11.  Essay , 

12.  Army  Regulations 

13.  Troops  in  campaign , 


150 
250 
250 
100 
250 
250 

200 
800 
300 
250 
100 
150 
100 


134 
175 
165 
71 
238 
140 

100 
180 
180 
152 

85 
135 

94 


89 
70 
66 
71 
95 
56 

50 
60 
60 
64 
85 
90 
94 


3 
3 
4 
3 
2 
2 
2 

33 


178 
140 
198 
71 
285 
168 

150 
180 
240 
192 
VtO 
180 
188 

2340 

70.9 


Xxiv  PROCEDURE  WHBK   FOUKD   KOT  Ilf CAPACITATED. 


PARADE  AND   ORAL. 


Subject 


1.  Drill 

2.  Signalling •• 

8.  Small-arms  firing  regulations. 

4.  Administration 

5.  Mechanical  manoeuvres 


General  average. 


100 
100 
100 
100 
100 


85 
76 
95 
70 


13 


352 

85 
228 

95 
280 


1040 


80 


By  command  of  Maj.-Gen.  Schofield  : 


R.  Williams. 

Adjutant-  Oeneral. 


The  number  of  questions  on  each  subject  for  which  the  exami- 
nation is  required  is  governed  by  instructions  to  the  board  from 
the  War  Department. 

Officers  under  examination,  collectively,  are  not  to  discuss 
among  themselves  the  questions  propounded,  nor  consult  any 
books  or  papers  bearing  upon  the  examination. 

At  least  one  member  of  the  board  is  invariably  to  be  present 
while  the  written  examination  is  going  on. 

The  usual  method  of  conducting  the  examination  is  for  the 
president  of  the  board  to  apportion  the  subjects,  and  each  to 
prepare  the  questions  thereon,  and  then  submit  all  to  the  ex- 
ammers  as  a  board  for  approval.  When  approved,  each  member 
may  take  the  individual  or  class  (the  latter  preferable  if  officers 
of  the  same  rank  can  be  assembled  together)  and  pursue  the  ex- 
amination on  the  subjects  assigned  to  him,  thus  relieving  each 
other  until  the  examination  is  completed,  when  all  the  examining 
members  will  assemble,  read  the  answers  furnished,  and  deter- 
mine the  merits  thereof. 

At  such  time  as  the  board  may  determine,  the  knowledge  of 
each  candidate  will  be  tested  in  drills,  by  requiring  him  to  act  as 
instructor  in  actual  command  of  troops,  the  exercises  to  cover 
the  entire  scope  of  the  drill-book,  the  school  of  the  company,  and 
company  and  battalion  in  extended  order  for  lieutenants,  and  all 
else  in  the  drill  regulations  for  captains. 

The  proceedings  will  be  signed  only  by  the  three  members  con- 
stituting the  examining  board. 


PROCEDURE  WHEN  FOUND  KOT  INCAPACITATED.    XXY 

A  positive  finding  by  the  board  must  invariably  be  made,  in 
substantially  the  terms  expressed  in  Part  X  of  G.  O.  No.  128 — 
with,  of  course,  any  remarks  the  board  may  consider  necessary  to 
make  to  explain  its  action,  as  follows : 

♦'"We  find  that has  the  physical,  moral,  and  profes- 
sional qualifications  to  perform  efficiently  all  the  duties  of  the 
grade  to  which  he  will  next  be  eligible,  and  recommend  him  for 
promotion  thereto." 

Other  findings  would  necessarily  contain  the  words  *'has"  or 
"has  not"  the,  etc.,  with  reasons  explaining  the  finding  of  the 
board. 

If  anything  should  arise  during  the  examination  which  would 
indicate  to  the  board  a  necessity  for  investigation,  and  which 
might  require  the  introduction  of  evidence,  the  entire  board 
should  be  called  together,  and  the  inquiry  should  proceed  upon 
written  interrogatories  as  far  as  possible,  the  board  determining 
to  whom  questions  shall  be  forwarded  (such  as  the  colonel  of  the 
officers'  regiment,  his  post  or  company  commander,  etc.). 

When  in  the  opinion  of  the  board  it  becomes  necessary  to  take 
oral  testimony,  the  fact  should  be  reported  to  the  War  Depart- 
ment for  the  necessary  orders  in  regard  to  witnesses  to  be  sum- 
moned from  a  distance. 

In  making  up  the  record,  after  the  theoretical  examination 
has  begun,  it  is  not  necessary  to  state  that  each  day  the  board 
adjourned.     All  that  is  necessary  is  as  follows  : 

"  The  board  then  proceeded  with  the  theoretical  and  practical 

examination  of ,  and  continued  from  day  to  day  until 

concluded.  The  written  questions  and  answers  are  hereto  ap- 
pended and  marked  "  A,  B,  etc. 

REMARKS  ON  FINDINGS. 

If  examination  papers  submitted  by  a  candidate  do  not  in 
themselves  justify  a  favorable  finding,  and  it  is  considered  essen- 
tial to  examine  an  officer's  record  for  professional  efficiency,  as 
exemplified  by  past  services,  in  accordance  with  paragraph  5, 
General  Orders  No.  128,  of  1890,  from  the  Adjutant-General's  Office 
at  Washington,  inquiry  should  be  made  by  interrogatories,  as 
authorized  in  the  preceding  paragraph.  The  scope  of  inquiry 
should  be  such  as  to  secure  a  full  statement  of  accomplished  work, 
together  with  an  estimate  of  commanding  officers  as  to  practical 
professional  qualifications. 

Questions  as  to  matters  of  opinion  should  not  be  proposed  to 
any  officer  junior  in  rank  to  the  candidate. 

If  the  fact  is  established  by  evidence  that  the  officer  has  dis- 
charged all  duties  with  fidelity,  intelligence,  and  zeal,  great 
weight  may  be  given  thereto.  In  formulating  findings  in  such 
cases  the  board  should,  in  the  first  instance,  express  its  views  on 


XXV  i  PROCEDURE  WHEN"  FOUND   KOT  INCAPACITATED. 

the  merits  of  the  examination  papers,  and  enter  such  recom- 
mendation as  may  seem  expedient  in  the  light  of  the  whole 
record.  Whenever  a  favorable  recommendation  is  made  in  cases 
wherein  the  written  answers  to  questions  propounded  do  not  show 
requisite  qualifications  for  promotion,  the  reajSons  therefor  should 
be  specifically  set  forth. 

REMARKS  UPON  THE  ACTION  OF  BOARDS. 

The  law  does  not  contemplate  that  a  board  shall  make  its  find- 
ing directly  contrary  to  the  evidence  of  the  written  examination. 
AH  examinations  should  be  so  conducted  as  to  satisfy  the  board 
by  the  answers  furnished  that  the  candidate  is  sufficiently  well 
informed  in  his  profession  as  to  merit  his  promotion.  Otherwise 
the  law  becomes  inoperative. 

That  portion  of  the  law  which  provides  "  That  if  any  officer 
fails  to  pass  a  satisfactory  examination^  and  is  reported  unfit 
for  promotion^  the  officer  next  below  him  in  rajik,  having  passed 
said  examination,  shall  receive  the  promotion,'^''  would  be  a  dead 
letter  if  the  examinations  were  not  thorough  and  somewhat  simi- 
lar in  character.  The  universal  expression  of  officers  has  been  to 
have  a  thorough  examination,  in  order  that  the  record  of  their 
abilities  may  be  filed  in  the  War  Department,  if  not  for  immediate 
advancement  over  others. 

If  an  officer  is  to  be  examined  merely  to  comply  with  the  terms 
ftud  not  the  spirit  of  the  law,  and  without  reference  to  the  abili- 
ties of  others,  then  it  were  better  to  save  the  expense  of  examin- 
ing boards,  for  such  action  can  only  be  regarded  as  an  injustice 
to  those  who  make  a  study  of  their  profession  through  a  desire  to 
master  the  Art  of  War. 

An  officer's  record  for  previous' service  should,  however,  receive 
consideration,  and  boards  of  examination  should  take  all  possible 
means  to  secure  evidence  of  such  before  proceeding  to  an  adverse 
finding. 

Tl^e  certificates  of  graduation  from  either  the  Artillery  School 
or  the  School  of  Application  at  Fort  Leavenworth  should  enter 
largely  into  the  consideration  of  the  board  on  the  subjects  taught 
at  those  schools  for  the  advancement  of  one  grade. 

The  questions  in  this  work  are  numbered  consecutively  from 
beginning  to  end  in  order  to  facilitate  the  work  of  examining 
boards  when  making  up  the  list  of  questions  to  be  asked  a  candi- 
date. All  that  is  necessary  for  the  members  to  do  will  be  to  look 
for  the  subheads  designated  for  examination,  dot  down  the 
number  of  the  question  or  questions  to  be  asked,  and  give  them 
to  the  recorder,  who  will  then  prepare  the  questions  in  detail 
accordmg  to  the  memoranda.  When  the  examination  papers  are 
Bubmitted,  they  then  turn  to  the  number  of  the  question  and  find 


PROCEDURE   WHEN   FOUND   NOT  INCAPACITATED.  XXVll 

the  approximate  answer  to  each,  which  will  enable  them  to  iudge 
of  the  proficiency  of  the  candidate. 

SUBJECTS  AND   TEXT-BOOKS. 

Manual  of  Guard  Duty — Kennon's  Ke vised  Manual. 

Military  Law — Winthrop's  Military  Law  and  Courts-martial. 

Field  Engineering — Manual  of  Field  Engineering. 

Signalling— CodiQ  adopted  by  G.  O.  No.  —  A.  G.  O. 

Brill  Regulations— United  States  Army  (Cavalry,  Artillery,  and 
Infantry). 

Hippology.—¥itzwygrsim.^s  Horses  and  Stables  ;  Dwyer's  Seats 
and  Saddles. 

Exterior  Ballistics — Ingall's  Handbook. 

Fire  Discipline — Batchelor's. 

Minor  Tactics— ShsiYf's  Element's;  Wagner's  ''Security  and 
Information," 

Military  Topography — Richards'. 

Army  Regulations — U.  S. 

Troops  in  Campaign — U.  S.  A.  Regulations. 


M>n'^*?' 


^.if 


SUBJECTS  OF  EXAMINATION. 


FOR  SECOND  LIEUTENANTS  OF  CAVALRY. 

THEORETICAL. 

Manual  of  Guard  Duty Nos.      1-  199 

Military  Law 200-  351 

Field  Eugiiieering 442-599 

Signal  ling 600-  651 

Drill  Regulations  (Cavalry) 652-1155 

Hippology 2572-2975  and  3030-3079 

Minor  Tactics 3351-3590 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 

PARADE  AND  ORAL. 

Drill— Signalling— Administration. 

FOR  SECOND  LIEUTENANTS  OF  ARTILLERY. 

THEORETICAL. 

Manual  of  Guard  Duty 1-  199 

Military  Law 200-  351 

Field  Engineering 442-  599 

Signalling 600-  651 

Drill  Regulations  (Artillery) 1235-1584 

Exterior  Ballistics  and  Special  Questions ,  4428-4551 

Minor  Tactics 3351-3590 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 

PARADE   AND   ORAL. 

Drill — Signalling— Mechanical  Manoeuvres — Administration. 

xxix 


XXX  SUBJECTS  OF   EXAMINATIOlf. 

FOR  SECOND  LIEUTENANTS  OF  INFANTRY. 

THBOBBTICAL. 

Manual  of  Guard  Duty. 1-  1?9 

Military  Law 200-  351 

Field  Engineering 442-  599 

Signalling 600-651 

Drill  Regulations  anf antry) 1694-2377 

Fire  Discipline 3080-3247 

Minor  Tactics 3351-3590 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 

FAHADE  AND  OBAL^ 

Drill— Signalling— Small-arms  Firing  Regulations— Ad- 
ministration. 


FOR  FIRST  LIEUTENANTS  OF  CAVALRY. 

THEOBKTICAL. 

Military  Law 200-  351 

Field  EngineeTing  ....'.-....-'.'  i  j  .-.•*<..».*...  r 44^  599 

Signalling ..-..-.  .*.- .-.-if. -.-.... 600-  651 

Drill  Regulations  (Cavalry). 652-1191 

Hippology 2572-2975  and  3030-3079 

Minor  Tactics ......*..... ....  3248-3590  and  3772-3837 

Military  Topography. . . .. . .•.v.v..-.-. ;. .  3838-3939 

Troops  in  Campaign. .... i ; i. . . . . . . ., 4233-4427 

PARADE  AND  ORAt. 

Drill— Signalling— Small-arms   Firing  Regulations— Ad- 
ministration. 


FOR  FIRST  LOIUTENANTS  OF  ARTILLERY. 

THEORETICAL. 

Military  Law 200-  351 

Field  Engineerings. 442-  599 

Signalling 600-  651 

Drill  Regulations  (ArtllleTy) , 1235-1693 

Exterior  Ballistics. 4428-4551 

Minor  Tactics 3248-3590  and  3772-3837 

Military  Topography 3838-3939 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 

PARADE   AND   ORAL. 

Drill— Signalling— Mechanical  Manoeuvres —Administration. 


SUBJECTS  OF  EXAMIKATIOK.  XXXi 

FOR  FIRST  LIEUTENANTS  OF  INFANTRY. 

THEORETICAL^ 

Military  Law 200-  351 

Field  Engineering * 442-  599 

Signalling 600-  651 

Drill  Regulations  (Infantry) 1694-2467 

Fire  Discipline '. . .  3080-3247 

Minor  Tactics 3^48-3590  and  3772-3837 

Military  Topography 3838-3939 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 

PARADE   AND  ORAL. 

Drill— Signalling— Small-arms  Firing  Regulations— Ad- 
ministration. 

FOR  CAPTAINS  OF  CAVALRY. 

THEORETICAL. 

Military  Law 352-  441 

Drill  Regulations  (Cavalry) 652-1234 

MinorTactics 3248-3837 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 


PARADE  AND  ORAL. 

Drill— Small-arms  Firing  Regulations— Administration. 
FOR  CAPTAINS  OF  ARTILLERY. 

THEORETICAL. 

Military  Law 352-  441 

Drill  Regulations  (Artillery) 1235-1693 

Exterior  Ballistics,  etc 4428-4551 

Minor  Tactics 3248-3837 

Troops  in  Campaign 4232-4427 

Essay. 

PARADE  AND  ORAL. 

Drill— Administration— Mechanical  Manoeuvres. 

FOR  CAPTAINS  OF  INFANTRY. 

THEORETICAL. 

Military  Law 362-  441 

Drill  Regulations  (Infantry) 16S 

Fire  Discipline •308&^^41 

Minor  Tactics ^'^;: 3248-3837    <!' 


XXXll  SUBJECTS   OF   EXAMINATION. 

Troops  in  Campaign 4332-4427 

Essay. 

PARADE  AND  ORAL. 

Drill— Small-arms  Firing  Regulations— Administration. 
FOR  CAPTAINS  OF  Q.  M.  DEPT. 

THEORETICAL. 

MilitairLaw 352-  441 

Army  Regulations  . .   3940-4161 

Hippology. .......i 2592-3079 

FOR  CAPTAINS  OF  THE  SUBSISTENCE  DEP'T. 

THEORETICAL. 

Military  Law 352-  441 

Army  Regulations 3940-4073  and  4162-4230 


PART  I. 

MANUAL    OF    GUARD   DUTY. 


Text- BOOK— JEls7i?wn'«  Sevised  Manual. 


For  all  Second  Lieutenants — Nos.  1-199. 


PAET  I. 

MANUAL  OF  GUARD  DUTY. 


ROSTERS. 

1.  Q.  What  is  a  roster  ?  A.  A  list  of  officers  or  men  for  duty, 
on  which  is  kept  a  record  of  services  performed  by  them. 

3.  Q.  What  is  the  principle  in  general  on  which  the  details  for 
duty  are  made  ?  A.  That  the  one  longest  off  is  the  first  for  de- 
tail. 

3.  Q.  What  must  all  details  for  service  in  garrison  and  field  be 
made  by;  and  what  may  be  done  if  not  so  made?  A.  By  ros- 
ter ;  but  officers  or  men  detailed  must  serve  whether  a  roster 
be  kept  or  not;  after  performing  the  service,  they  may  appeal  to 
superior  authority  if  they  deem  themselves  aggrieved. 

4.  Q.  Into  how  many  classes  are  the  duties  performed  by  ros- 
ter divided  ?  Explain  what  they  comprise.  A.  Two  classes. 
The  first  class  comprises  :  1st,  outposts  ;  2d,  interior  guards,  in- 
cluding stable  guards;  3d,  detachments  to  protect  laborers  on 
military  works;  4th,  armed  working  parties  on  such  works.  The 
second  class  comprises  all  duties  and  fatigues,  without  arms,  in 
or  out  of  the  garrison  or  camp. 

5.  Q.  Are  the  rosters  distinct  for  each  class;  how  are  the  offi- 
cers named  ?  A.  They  are.  Officers  are  named  on  them  in  the 
order  of  rank,  and  the  details  are  taken  in  succession,  beginning 
at  the  head. 

6.  Q.  What  officers,  non-commissioned  oflScers,  and  privates 
form  a  distinct  roster,  and  from  what  duties  are  they  exempt  ? 
A.  Lieutenants  form  one  roster,  and  first  and  second  lieutenants 
are  entered  on  it  alternately.  Captains  form  one  roster,  and  are 
exempt  from  ordinary  fatigue  duties;  a  captain  commanding  a 
battalion  temporarily  is  exempt  from  detail  and  duty  falling  to 
him  passes.  Lieutenant-colonels  and  majors  form  one  roster, 
and  may  be  detailed  when  importance  of  duty  requires  it.  Ser- 
geants, corporals,  and  privates  form  distinct  rosters. 

7.  Q.  Where  is  the  roster  of  field  officers  kept  in  the  field  ?  A. 
At  division  and  brigade  headquarters. 

3 


4  THE  AKMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

8.  Q.  When  an  officer  or  soldier  is  prevented  by  sickness  from 
taking  his  tour  of  duty,  when  will  he  be  for  detail  ?  A.  On  being 
restored  to  duty  he  becomes  first  for  detail. 

9.  Q.  If  an  officer  or  soldier  whose  tour  it  is  be  not  present  at 
the  hour  of  marching,  on  whom  does  the  duty  fall  ?  A.  The 
next  after  him. 

10.  Q.  What  duty  does  any  officer  or  soldier  take  upon  being 
relieved  from  duties  of  the  first  class,  or  who  is  next  for  detail  ? 
A.  The  duty  of  the  second  class  which  has  fallen  to  him  during 
that  time. 

11.  Q.  How  must  soldiers  be  prepared  for  duties  of  the  first 
classes.^  A.  They  must  march  on  completely  armed,  and  if 
necessary  fully  equipped. 

12.  Q.  In  commands  where  light  batteries  are  serving  with 
other  troops,  how  must  guard  duty  be  performed  ?  A.  A  mount- 
ed battery,  serving  with  other  troops,  will  furnish  its  own  park 
and  stable  guards,  police,  etc. 

13.  Q.  What  duties  will  the  officers  and  soldiers  of  a  mounted 
battery  be  exempt  from  ?  A.  From  other  details  than  those  con- 
nected with  the  battery ;  the  men  will  not  be  detailed  for  extra 
duty  in  the  staff  departments,  nor  for  duty  interfering  with  bat- 
tery duties,  if  it  can  be  avoided. 

14.  Q.  When  should  post  and  camp  guards  be  relieved?  A. 
Every  twenty-four  hours. 

15.  Q.  What  rosters,  relative  to  guard  duty,  are  kept  at  post 
or  camp  headquarters?  A.  For  officers  of  the  day;  officers  of 
the  guard;  sergeants  of  the  guard;  corporals  of  the  guard;  and 
musicians  of  the  guard. 

16.  Q.  By  whom  are  the  rosters  at  post  or  camp  headquarters 
kept  ?  A.  For  officers  of  the  day  and  the  guard,  by  the  adjutant; 
all  others  by  the  sergeant-major. 

17.  Q.  Can  officers  serving  in  the  staff  departments  be  required 
to  perform  guard  duty  ?  A.  Ordinarilly  they  are  exempt,  but  at 
the  discretion  of  the  commanding  officer  they  may  be  placed  on 
the  rosters  for  such  duty. 

18.  Q.  How  will  detachments  for  armed  service  be  formed  ? 
A.  As  far  as  the  exigencies  of  the  service  will  permit,  detachments 
for  armed  service  will  be.  formed  by  taking  battalions,  companies, 
platoons,  or  other  subdivisions  in  turn,  according  to  the  roster. 

19.  Q.  When  may  a  company  be  detailed  to  form  the  guard; 
and  what  is  done  when  so  detailed  ?  A.  In  the  field,  when  the 
commanding  officer  deems  it  advisable.  The  captain  becomes  the 
officer  of  the  day,  and  the  lieutenants  officers  of  the  guard.  The 
company  is  inspected  on  its  own  parade  by  its  captain,  and 
marched  to  the  post  of  the  guard  by  the  senior  lieutenant. 

20.  Q.  At  what  points  are  guards  to  be  detailed  and  duly 
mounted  ?  A.  At  every  military  post  and  in  every  regiment  or 
separate  military  command  in  the  field. 


MAKtJAL  OF  GUARD   DUTY.  5 

21.  Q.  How  may  guard  duty  be  performed  by  a  brigade  in 
camp  ?  A.  It  may  have  one  guard  for  its  camp,  or  one  for  each 
regiment  in  camp,  the  latter  being  preferable;  in  this  case  the 
sentinels  between  the  flanks  of  regiments  may  be  omitted. 

22.  Q.  At  a  post  where  headquarters  of  more  than  one  regi- 
ment are  stationed,  or  in  the  case  of  a  small  brigade  in  the  field  and 
but  one  guard  is  necessary  for  the  whole,  how  will  details  be 
made  ?  A.  From  the  headquarters  of  the  command,  as  follows  : 
For  officer  of  the  day  and  officer  of  the  guard  by  name  ;  and  for 
all  enlisted  men  by  number. 

23.  Q.  How  are  the  officers  detailed  for  guard  duty  notified  ? 
A.  When  practicable,  they  are  personally  notified  of  their  detail 
by  written  orders ;  the  details  are  published  at  the  parade  the 
evening  before  the  tour  begins. 

24.  Q.  By  whom  are  the  rosters  of  privates  for  guard  duty 
kept  ?    A.  By  the  first  sergeants  of  companies. 

25.  Q.  What  is  a  supernumerary  of  the  guard  ?  A.  A  man 
mounted  with  the  detail  of  each  company  to  stand  ready  to  take 
the  place  of  any  member  of  the  guard  detail  of  his  company  who 
may  be  relieved  during  his  tour  for  sickness  or  other  cause. 

26.  Q.  Who  regulates  the  numberof  supernumeraries,  and  from 
what  place  on  the  roster  are  they  taken  ?  A.  The  number  is  regu- 
lated by  the  commanding  officer,  and  they  are  taken  from  the 
men  next  for  guard  on  the  roster. 

27  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  supernumeraries  ?  A.  They  shall 
not  leave  the  camp  or  post,  but  shall  hold  themselves  constantly 
in  readiness  for  duty  as  members  of  the  guard;  they  will  not  bo 
excused,  however,  from  ordinary  camp  or  garrison  duties. 

28  Q.  What  is  required  of  all  first  sergeants  at  first  sergeanVs 
call?  A.  They  repair  to  headquarters  and  take  from  the  bulletin- 
board,  or  receive  from  the  sergeant-major,  all  the  data  necessary 
for  them  to  make  their  required  details. 

29.  Q.  When  and  how  should  the  details  made  by  first  ser- 
geants be  published?  A.  At  retreat  roll-call,  and  they  should 
be  posted  on  the  company  bulletin-board. 

30.  Q.  "^iV^ho  keeps  the  record  by  which  each  day  is  determined 
the  number  of  privates  required  from  acompanj^,  and  what  method 
is  best  for  use  in  determining  this  number  ?  A.  The  sergeant- 
major  keeps  the  record,  and  that  of  keeping  by  decimals  is  pre- 
ferable. 

31.  Q.  Give  an  example  of  keeping  a  record  by  decimals  for 
tv;o  days,  for  a  command  of  four  companies,  where  twelve  men 
are  required  for  guard  ?    A.  (For  example,  see  p.  8,  M.  G.  D.) 

THE  COMMANDING  OFFICER. 

32  Q.  For  what  is  the  commanding  officer  re 
what  are  his  duties  relative  to  the  guard  ?    A.  Hj 


C  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

for  the  discipline  and  military  instruction  of  his  command.  His 
duty  is  to  exact  a  faithful,  correct,  and  vigilant  performance  of 
guard  duty ;  he  prescribes  the  position  of  the  color  line  and 
guard  tents  ;  and  will  fix  the  number  and  establish  the  posts  of 
the  sentinels  who  form  the  guard  of  his  post  or  camp.  He  will 
cause  the  sentinels  to  be  so  distributed  as  to  require  the  least  pos- 
sible number  of  men  for  guard  duty  consistent  with  the  objects 
for  which  the  guard  is  maintained. 

33.  Q.  What  rules  should  be  observed  regarding  the  posts  of 
sentinels  ?  A.  No  sentinel  should  be  posted  at  such  a  distance 
from  the  guard-house  that  he  cannot  be  heard  by  the  sentinel  at 
that  point,  either  directly  or  through  other  sentinels.  When  nec- 
essary small  posts  may  be  established  exterior  to  the  chain  of 
sentinels  ;  they  are  under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the 
camp-guard,  and  are  visited  by  his  patrols. 

34.  Q.  How  should  orders  be  communicated  to  the  commander 
of  the  guard  ?  A.  Through  the  ofiicer  of  the  day,  when  practica- 
ble. 

35.  Q.  Where  and  in  what  manner  should  the  commanding 
officer  receive  the  officers  of  the  day?  A.  He  will  be  at  his  of- 
fice, or  at  some  point  previously  designated,  immediately  after 
guard-mounting.  The  officers  of  the  day,  having  presented 
themselves,  he  will  acknowledge  their  salutes,  examine  the  re- 
port of  the  commander  of  the  guard  ;  will  relieve  the  old  officer 
of  the  day,  and  give  to  the  new  such  instructions  as  may  be  nec- 
essary. 

THE  OFFICER  OF  THE  DAT. 

86.  Q.  For  what  is  the'officer  of  the  day  responsible  ?  A.  For 
the  proper  performance  of  duty  by  the  guard  with  which  he 
marches  on,  and  for  the  enforcement  of  all  police  regulations  ; 
and  is  charged  with  the  execution  of  all  orders  of  the  command- 
ing officer  relating  to  the  safety  and  good  order  of  the  post  or 
camp. 

37.  Q.  When  does  the  actual  tour  of  an  officer  of  the  day  begin 
and  cease  ?  A.  When  he  receives  the  report  of  the  adjutant  at 
guard- mounting,  and  ceases  when  he  has  been  relieved  by  the 
commanding  officer. 

38.  Q.  Enumerate  some  of  the  regular  duties  of  the  officer  of 
the  day?  A.  In  the  absence  of  special  instructions  from  the 
commanding  officer,  he  will  inspect  the  guard  and  sentinels  dur- 
ing the  day  and  night  at  such  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary; 
he  will  prescribe  patrols  and  visits  of  inspection  to  be  made  by 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  guard;  he  will  see 
that  the  commanderof  the  guard  is  furnished  with  the  parole  and 
countersign  before  retreat,  and  will  inform  him  of  the  presence 
at  the  post  or  in  camp  of  any  person  entitled  to  compliment. 


)tfAi?^UAL  OF   GUARD   DUTY.  7 

89.  Q.  In  case  of  an  alarm  of  any  kind  in  post  or  camp,  what  is 
required  of  the  officer  of  the  day  ?  A.  He  will  at  once  take  such 
steps  as  may  be  necessary  to  insure  the  safety  of  public  property 
and  preserve  order  in  the  command,  disposing  his  guard  so  as 
best  to  accomplish  the  result. 

40.  Q.  To  whose  orders  is  the  officer  of  the  day  subjected  in 
the  performance  of  his  duty  ?  A.  To  those  only  of  the  command- 
ing officer,  except  in  case  of  an  alarm  of  any  kind,  and  at  a  time 
of  great  danger  the  senior  line  officer  present  is  competent  to  give 
orders  to  the  officer  of  the  day  for  tlie  employment  of  the  portion 
of  his  guard  not  already  occupied  witli  duties  prescribed  in  the 
Manual  of  Guard  Duty  and  the  standing  orders  of  the  post  or 
camp. 

41.  Q.  At  inspections  and  musters  where  will  the  officer  of  the 
day  be  present?  A.  At  the  post  of  the  guard ;  but  all  commands 
to  the  guard  will  be  given  by  the  commander  thereof. 

42.  Q.  At  what  places  are  the  new  and  old  officers  of  the  day 
required  to  be  present  ?  A.  The  new  officer  of  the  day  must  be 
present  at  guard-mounting ;  the  old  officer  of  the  day  also,  if 
directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

43.  Q.  After  the  guard  has  passed  in  review  or  ordered  to  its 
post,  what  is  required  of  the  old  and  new  officers  of  the  day  ?  A. 
They  proceed  to  the  guard-house,  where  each  will  return  the 
salute  of  his  own  guard.  "While  the  old  guard  is  being  relieved 
they  will  inspect  the  guard-liouse  or  tents,  verify  the  prisoners, 
and  the  new  officer  of  the  day  will  receipt  for  the  articles  in  charge 
of  tlie  guard  if  there  be  no  commander  of  the  guard.  Tlie  old 
officer  of  the  day  will  countersign  the  report  of  the  old  guard, 
after  having  released  all  prisoners  whose  sentences  expire  on  that 
day.  Both  officers  of  the  day  will  then  report  to  the  commanding 
officer,  the  old  officer  of  the  day  at  that  time  submitting  his 
guard  report. 

44.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  officer  of  the  day  regarding  the 
release  of  persons  under  guard  ?  A.  All  persons  under  guard 
without  written  charges  will  be  released  by  the  old  officer  of  the 
day  immediately  after  verifying  the  number  of  prisoners,  unless 
specific  orders  to  the  contrary  have  been  given  in  each  case  by  the 
commanding  officer.  He  will  also  release  at  the  same  time  all 
prisoners  whose  sentences  expire  on  that  day. 

45.  Q.  Who  receipts  for  the  articles  under  charge  of  the  guard  ? 
A.  The  officer  of  the  guard  ;  but  if  there  be  none,  then  the  new 
officer  of  the  day. 

46.  Q.  What  phraseology  is  used  in  reporting  to  the  command- 
ing officer  after  guard-mount  ?  Sir,  I  report  as  old  [or  "  new  "] 
officer  of  the  day. 


THE  AKMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 


COMMANDER  OF  THE  GUARD. 

47.  Q.  Who  is  the  commander  of  a  guard  ?  A.  The  senior  offi- 
cer or  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard. 

48.  Q.  For  what  is  the  commander  of  the  guard  responsible  ? 
A.  For  the  instruction  and  discipline  of  the  guard,  and  will  see 
that  all  its  members  are  correctly  instructed  in  their  orders  and 
duties,  and  that  they  understand  and  properly  perform  them  ; 
he  receives  and  obeys  the  orders  of  the  commanding  officer  and 
the  officer  of  the  day,  and  reports  to  the  latter  without  delay  all 
orders  relating  to  the  guard  not  given  or  transmitted  by  him  ;  he 
transmits  to  his  successor  all  material  instructions  and  informa- 
tion relating  to  his  duties  ;  he  is  responsible  for  the  general  safety 
of  the  camp  as  soon  as  the  old  guard  marches  off  from  the 
guard- house.  In  case  of  any  emergency  occurring  while  both 
guards  are  at  the  guard-house,  the  senior  commander  of  the  two 
guards  will  be  responsible  that  proper  action  is  taken. 

49.  Q.  What  is  enjoined  upon  the  officers  of  the  guard  with 
reference  to  their  presence  at  the  guard-house  ?  A.  They  will 
remain  constantly  with  their  guards,  except  while  visiting  sen- 
tinels or  engaged  elsewhere  in  the  performance  of  their  duty. 
The  commanding  officer  will  allow  a  reasonable  time  for  getting 
meals. 

50.  Q.  What  may  the  commander  of  a  guard  do  regarding  a 
division  of  the  night  watch  ?  A.  Except  in  emergencies,  he  may 
divide  the  night  with  the  next  in  command,  but  retains  his  re- 
sponsibility ;  the  one  whose  w^atch  it  is  must  be  constantly  on 
the  alert. 

51.  Q.  If  a  sentinel  calls,  "The  Guard,"  what  is  required  of 
the  commander  of  the  guard  ?  A.  He  will  at  once  send  a  patrol 
to  such  sentinel's  post.  If  the  danger  be  great,  in  wliich  case 
the  sentinel  will  discharge  his  piece,  the  patrol  must  be  as  strong 
as  possible. 

52.  Q.  What  number  of  the  men  of  the  guard  should  there 
always  be  at  the  guard-house  ?  A.  When  practicable,  an  officer 
or  non-commissioned  officer  and  at  least  two  privates  in  addition 
to  the  sentinels  there  on  post. 

53.  Q.  What  will  the  commander  of  the  guard  do  with  regard 
to  paying  compliments  to  those  entitled  to  receive  them  ?  A.  Be- 
tween reveille  and  retreat  the  guard  is  formed  and  arms  pre- 
sented; and  if  it  be  an  officer  who  is  entitled  to  inspect  the 
guard,  after  saluting  he  will  report  as  laid  down  in  the  Manual. 
Between  retreat  and  reveille  the  commander  of  the  guard  salutes 
and  reports,  but  does  not  bring  the  guard  to  a  present.  To  oth- 
ers entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  no  report  will  be  made, 
nor  will  any  report  be  made  to  any  officer  unless  he  halts  in  front 
of  the  guard. 


MAKUAL  OF   GUARD   DUTY.  9 

54.  Q.  What  is  required  of  an  officer  commanding  a  guard  as 
to  paying  compliments  while  marching  his  guard  to  or  from  the 
guard-house  ?  A.  He  will  salute  all  persons  entitled  to  compli- 
ment from  the  guard,  first  bringing  his  guard  to  a  carry  ;  a  non- 
commissioned officer  marching  a  guard  or  relief  will  salute  all 
officers  in  like  manner. 

55.  Q.  If  a  person  entitled  to  compliment  pass  in  rear  of  the 
guard,  what  is  done  ?  A.  The  guard  does  not  salute,  but  stands 
at  a  carry,  facing  the  front. 

56.  Q.  After  any  person  entitled  to  the  compliment  has  been 
saluted,  what  is  done  if  he  remains  in  the  same  vicinity  in  the 
way  of  official  recognition  ?  A.  Official  recognition  will  be  taken 
by  bringing  the  guard  or  guards  to  attention. 

57.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  commander  of  the  guard  with 
regard  to  each  relief  before  being  posted  ?  A.  It  will  be  inspected 
by  him  to  see  that  every  sentinel  is  properly  armed  and  equipped 
and  in  proper  condition  to  perform  his  duties. 

58.  Q.  When  must  sentinels  be  relieved  ?  A.  Every  two  hours, 
unless  a  shorter  time  is  designated  by  the  officer  of  the  day  or 
commanding  officer  on  account  of  the  weather. 

59.  Q.  What  is  done  if  a  member  of  the  guard  be  taken  sick, 
arrested,  desert,  or  leave  his  guard?  A.  The  adjutant  will  at 
once  be  notified. 

60.  Q.  What  sentinels  should  not  be  furnished  with  the  coun- 
tersign, and  when  must  those  entitled  to  receive  it  be  furnished 
with  it?  A.  The  sentinel  in  front  of  the  guard-house  or  tent  is 
not  furnished  with  it.  It  must  be  communicated  to  the  others 
before  twilight,  or  at  such  time  as  directed  by  the  commanding 
officer. 

61.  Q.  What  will  the  commander  of  the  guard  enter  in  the 
guard  report  ?  A.  A  report  of  his  tour  of  duty,  and  transmit 
with  it  all  passes  turned  in  at  the  post-guard. 

62.  Q.  How  often  must  the  commander  of  a  guard  inspect  the 
guard-rooms  and  cells  and  the  irons  of  prisoners  ?  A.  At  least 
once  during  his  tour,  and  at  such  other  times  as  he  may  deem 
necessary. 

63.  Q.  How  must  duty  be  arranged  for  sentinels  over  working 
parties  of  prisoners  ?  A.  The  sentinels  must  be  taken  from  those 
assigned  to  posts  guarded  at  night  only.  If  there  be  none  such, 
the  duty  will  be  divided  as  equally  as  possible  among  the  privates 
of  the  guard. 

64.  Q.  If  officers  entitled  to  a  salute  approach  the  guard-house 
while  both  guards  are  present,  what  is  done  ?  A.  Each  com- 
mander of  the  guard  will  bring  his  own  guard  to  a  carry  ;  the 
senior  of  the  two  guards  will  then  command,  Old  and  new  guards, 
present  amns ;  the  junior  will  salute  at  the  command  present 
arms ;  after  the  salute  is  acknowledged,  the  senior  brings  both 
guards  to  a  carry  and  order. 


10  THE  ARMY  officer's  EXAMIN^ER. 

65.  Q.  When  the  officers  of  the  day  have  received  the  compli- 
ments of  their  guards  at  the  guard-house,  what  is  done  by  the 
new  commander  of  the  guard?  A.  He  brings  his  guard  to  a 
carry  and  order ;  directs  the  orderly  or  orderlies  to  fall  out  and 
report,  and  causes  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  if  so  ordered  by  the  com- 
manding officer ;  bayonets  will  not  then  be  unfixed  during  the 
tour,  except  in  route  marches  while  the  guard  is  actually  march- 
ing, or  when  specially  directed  by  the  commanding  officer.  The 
commander  then  falls  out  members  of  the  guard  for  detached 
posts,  placing  them  under  charge  of  the  proper  non-commissioned 
officers,  divides  the  guard  into  three  reliefs,  from  right  to  left, 
and  directs  a  list  of  the  guard  to  be  made  by  reliefs.  The  sen- 
tinels and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  at  once  relieved  by 
members  of  the  new  guard  ;  while  this  is  being  done,  the  two 
guards  stand  at  ease  or  rest. 

66.  Q.  At  what  time  does  the  commander  of  the  old  guard 
turn  over  his  instructions  to  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  ? 
A.  While  both  guards  stand  at  ease  or  rest. 


SERGEANT  OF  THE  GUARD. 

67.  Q.  Who  is  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  ?  A.  The  senior  non- 
commissioned officer  of  the  guard  always  acts  as  sergeant  of  the 
guard,  and  if  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard,  will  perform  the 
duties  prescribed  for  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

68.  Q.  With  what  is  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  charged  ?  A. 
With  supervision  over  the  other  non-commissioned  officers  and 
privates  of  the  guard,  and  with  familiarizing  himself  with  all 
the  orders  and  duties  of  the  corporals  and  sentinels.  He  will  see 
that  reliefs  are  turned  out  at  the  proper  time,  and  that  the  cor- 
porals are  zealous  and  prompt  in  the  discharge  of  their  duties. 
He  will  designate  a  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard  to  take 
the  place  of  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post  should  the  latter 
be  called  away  from  the  guard-house. 

69.  Q.  Who  is  responsible  directly  for  the  articles  in  charge  of 
the  guard  ?  A.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard.  He  will  see  that  they 
are  properly  cared  for,  and  will  make  lists  of  articlec  taken  out 
by  working  parties,  and  sco  that  all  such  articles  are  duly  re- 
turned. 

70.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  immedi- 
ately after  guard- mounting  ?  A.  He  will  prepare  a  duplicate  list 
of  the  names,  reliefs,  and  posts  of  all  the  non-commissioned 
officers,  musicians,  and  privates  of  the  guard,  one  of  which  he 
will  retain  himself,  and  hand  the  other  as  soon  as  possible  to  the 
commander  of  the  guard. 

71.  Q.  When  will  the  guard-house  and  premises  be  thoroughly 
policed  ?    A.  After  breakfast  and  after  stable-duty  in  the  cavalry, 


MANUAL  OV   GUARD  DUTY.  11 

the  guard -house  or  guard-tent  will  be  policed  by  the  guard  or 
prisoners,  if  there  be  any. 

72.  Q.  What  will  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  do  at  first  sergeant's 
call  ?  A.  He  will  proceed  to  the  adjutant's  office  and  obtain  the 
guard-report  book. 

73.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  relative 
to  soldiers'  passes  ?  A.  He  will  receive  all  passes  upon  the  return 
of  the  soldiers  having  them,  and  indorse  the  time  at  which  each 
returns  upon  them  ;  at  guard-mounting  he  will  turn  over  all  such 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

74.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  whenever 
the  guard  is  turned  out  ?  A.  To  form  it  promptly,  call  the  roll, 
and  report  the  result  to  the  commander  of  the  guard.  When 
turned  out  as  a  matter  of  compliment  the  roll  will  not  be  called. 
The  same  rule  will  apply  when  the  guard  is  called  out  in  a  sudden 
emergency,  or  on  the  approach  of  an  armed  party.  In  such  cases 
the  roll  will  be  called  before  dismissing  the  guard. 

75.  Q.  Who  has  the  direct  charge  of  the  prisoners  under  guard  ? 
A.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard ;  and  he  is  responsible  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  for  their  security. 

76.  Q.  What  will  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  do  with  the  keys  of 
the  guard-room  and  cells  ?  A.  He  will  carry  them,  and  not  suffer 
them  to  leave  his  personal  possession  while  he  is  at  the  guard- 
house, except  when  he  leaves  the  guard-house  for  any  special 
purpose,  when  he  will  turn  the  keys  over  to  the  non-commissioned 
officer  who  takes  his  place;  or  before  forming  his  guard  he  will 
turn  over  his  keys  to  the  non-commissioned  officer  at  the  guard- 
house. 

77.  Q.  Where  are  prisoners  placed  when  paraded  with  the 
guard  ?    A.  In  line,  in  its  centre. 

78.  Q.  What  will  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  cause  the  corporal 
of  each  relief  to  do  regarding  the  prisoners?  A.  Verify  the 
number  whenever  his  relief  goes  on  post. 

79.  Q.  In  what  cases  will  sergeants  be  employed  to  relieve  and 
post  sentinels  ?  A.  When  the  sentinels  are  numerous  ;  but  they 
will  not  be  assigned  to  reliefs  unless  the  number  of  corporals 
detailed  for  guard  be  less  than  the  number  of  reliefs. 

THE  CORPORAL  OF  THE  GUARD. 

80.  Q.  By  whom  are  corporals  of  the  guard  assigned  to  their 
reliefs,  and  what  are  their  functions  ?  A.  They  are  assigned  by 
the  commander  of  the  guard,  and  their  functions  are  to  post  and 
relieve  sentinels,  and  to  instruct  the  members  of  their  respective 
reliefs  in  their  orders  and  duties. 

81.  Q.  At  what  time  will  corporals  take  charge  of  their  reliefs? 
A.  Immediately  after  the  division  of  the  guard  into  r 
that  time  they  will  assign  the  members  by  number  to 


r^ 


■"« 


12  THE  ARMY  OFFICBR'S   EXAMINER. 

a  soldier  so  assijrned  shall  not  be  clianged  to  another  during  his 
tour  of  guard-(lui\ ,  unless  by  direction  of  the  commander  of  the 
guard  or  the  officer  of  the  day. 

82.  Q.  What  list  does  the  corporal  of  a  relief  make,  and  what 
must  that  list  contain  ?  A.  He  must  make  a  list  of  the  members  of 
his  relief,  including  liimself.  It  will  contain  the  number  of  the 
relief,  the  name,  company,  and  regiment  of  every  member  thereof, 
and  the  post  to  which  each  is  assigned.  It  must  be  made  in  dupli- 
cate—one copy  to  be  given  to  the  sergeant  or  senior  non-commis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard,  the  other  to  be  retained  by  him. 

83.  Q.  In  posting  the  first  relief  of  a  new  guard,  where  do  the 
corporals  march  ?  A.  The  corporal  of  the  old  guard  marches  on 
the  right  of  the  leading  file,  while  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard 
marches  on  the  left  and  near  the  rear  file,  in  order  to  observe  the 
march.  When  the  last  one  of  the  old  sentinels  has  been  relieved, 
the  corporals  change  places. 

84.  Q.  Describe  the  method  of  relieving  a  sentinel  ?  A.  When 
the  relief  arrives  at  six  paces  from  a  sentinel,  the  corporal  halts 
it  and  commands,  according  to  the  number  of  the  post,  iVb.  ( — ). 
The  new  sentinel  comes  to  a  carry,  approaches  the  old,  halts  at 
about  one  pace  from  him,  and  both  execute  port  arras  or  sabre. 
Tiie  corporals  advance  and  place  themselves,  facing  eacli  other,  a 
little  in  advance  of  the  new  sentinel,  the  old  corporal  on  his  right, 
the  new  on  his  left,  both  at  carry  or  order,  and  observe  that  the 
old  sentinel  transmits  correctly  his  instructions.  The  instruction 
relative  to  the  post  having  been  communicated,  the  new  corporal 
commands.  Post,  then  steps  back  about  two  paces  and  commands, 
Forward^  march.  The  corporals  take  their  places  as  the  relief 
passes  them. 

85.  Q.  Is  the  sentinel  at  the  guard-house  relieved  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  other  sentinels  ?  A.  Yes,  except  that  he  is  the 
first  relieved,  and  is  left  at  the  guard -house. 

86  Q.  Are  all  reliefs  accompanied  by  two  corporals  ?  A.  No; 
only  the  first  relief  of  the  new  guard. 

87.  Q.  Should  any  sentinel  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard  or 
call  for  a  "relief,''  what  will  be  done?  A.  The  corporalof  that 
relief  will  at  once  proceed  to  such  sentinel;  if  relief  is  called  for, 
he  will  take  with  him  the  next  man  for  duty  on  that  post.  If 
relieved  for  a  short  time  only,  the  sentinel  relieved  will  again  be 
posted  as  soon  as  the  necessity  for  the  relief  ceases. 

88.  Q.  Should  the  sentinel  call.  The  Guard,  what  must  the  cor- 
poral do  ?    A.  Promptly  notify  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

89.  Q.  Whose  duty  is  it  to  communicate  the  countersign  to  the 
sentinels  ?  A.  The  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post,  excepting  to 
those  at  the  guard-house  immediately  before  the  hour  for  chal- 
lenging to  begin. 

90.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  corporal  during  the  hours  for 
challenging,  when  marching  with  his  relief  or  patrol  ?    A.  To 


MAl^^UAL   OF   GUARD   DUTY.  13 

challenge  all  suspicious-looking  persons  or  parties  he  may  observe, 
first  halting  his  relief  or  patrol,  and  advance  them  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  sentinels  on  posts  advance  like  parties.  If,  how- 
ever, the  route  be  along  a  continuous  chain  of  sentinels,  he  will 
not  challenge  unless  he  has  reason  to  believe  that  sentinels  are 
neglecting  their  duties. 

91.  Q.  What  is  required  of  corporals  regarding  the  tents  or 
bunks  of  their  men  ?  A.  They  must  ascertain  those  belonging  to 
the  members  of  their  reliefs,  in  order  to  turn  them  out  in  case  of 
necessity;  and  should  the  guard  be  turned  out,  each  corporal  will 
awaken  his  own  relief  and  cause  its  members  to  fall  in  promptly. 

93.  Q.  Who  should  keep  on  the  alert  constantly  at  the  guard- 
house or  tent  ?  A.  At  least  one  non-commissioned  officer,  usually 
the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post.  He  does  not  fall  in  witli  the 
guard  when  formed,  and  if  called  away  gives  notice  to  the  ser- 
geant of  the  guard. 

93.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  corporal  who  is  on  the  alert 
at  the  guard-house  or  tent  ?  A.  He  will  promptly  go  to  any  sen- 
tinel who  calls  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  or  for  relief;  he 
will  promptly  notify  the  officer  of  the  guard  if  a  sentinel  should 
call  for  the  guard;  he  will  see  that  no  one  enters  the  guard-house, 
or  crosses  the  post  of  the  sentinel  of  the  guard  without  proper 
authority;  if  the  hours  or  half-hours  are  to  be  called,  he  will  at 
the  proper  time  notify  No.  1  of  the  hour;  will  awaken  the  corpor- 
al whose  relief  comes  next  on  post  in  time  for  the  latter  to  prepare 
it  and  post  it  at  the  proper  hour. 

94.  Q,  Under  what  conditions  will  the  corporal  turn  out  the 
guard  between  retreat  and  reveille  ?  A.  Whenever  ordered  to  do 
so  by  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  announcing  the 
title  of  the  officer;  and  on  the  approach  of  an  armed  party  other 
than  a  returning  relief  or  detachment  of  the  guard,  adding  to  his 
order  armed  party  and  remaining  where  he  can  observe  the 
movements  of  the  party  while  the  guard  is  forming,  then  return 
to  his  post. 

95.  Q.  How  will  the  corporal  advance  parties  approaching  the 
guard  at  night  ?  A.  After  the  sentinel  has  performed  his  duty, 
the  corporal,  advancing  at  port  arms,  says.  Advance  (so  and  so) 
with  the  countersign,  or  to  he  recognized  if  no  countersign  is 
used.  The  countersign  being  correctly  given,  or  the  parly  being 
duly  recognized,  the  corporal  says,  Advance  (so  and  so),  repeat- 
ing the  answer  to  the  challenge  of  the  sentinel. 

96.  Q.  What  is  done  when  officers  of  different  rank  approach 
the  guard  from  different  directions  at  the  same  time  ?  A.  The 
senior  will  be  advanced  first,  and  will  not  be  made  to  wait  for  his 
junior. 

97.  Q.  When  and  how  will  a  corporal  salute  all  officers  ?  A. 
Out  of  ranks  and  under  arms,  with  the  rifle  salute.  He  will  salute 


14  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN'ER. 

all  officers  whether  by  day  or  night.     If  marching  his  relief,  he 
will  have  the  relief  at  a  carry  before  saluting. 

98.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  all  persons  arrested  by  corpor- 
als of  the  guard  or  by  sentinels  ?  A.  They  will  at  once  be  con- 
ducted to  the  commander  of  the  guard  by  the  corporal. 

MUSICIANS  OF  THE  GUARD. 

99.  Q.  To  whose  orders  are  the  musicians  of  the  guard  subject  ? 
A.  To  those  only  of  the  commanding  officer,  the  officer  of  the 
day,  and  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  guard. 

100.  Q.  Where  will  the  musicians  remain  during  their  tour  of 
duty  ?  A.  Unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  commanding  officer, 
they. will  remain  at  the  guard-house  and  will  fall  in  with  the 
guard  when  it  is  formed.  They  will  sleep  at  the  guard-house  un- 
less otherwise  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

101.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  musicians  of  the  guard  ?  A. 
To  sound  all  calls  prescribed,  and  such  other  calls  as  may  be  or- 
dered by  proper  authority  at  such  times  and  places  as  may  be  di- 
rected. 

ORDERLY  FOR  THE  COMMANDING  OFFICER.  • 

102.  Q.  How  is  an  orderly  for  the  commanding  officer  selected, 
and  how  is  a  decision  reached  as  to  whom  it  should  be  ?  A.  When 
directed  the  adjutant  will  select  the  orderly  from  the  members  of 
the  guard,  an  extra  man  being  detailed  for  guard  for  that  pur- 
pose. The  selection  is  usually  made  during  the  inspection  at 
guard-mounting.  That  soldier  will  be  chosen  who  is  the  most 
correct  in  the  performance  of  duty  and  in  military  bearing,  neat- 
est in  person  and  clothing,  and  whose  arms  and  at;coutrements 
are  in  the  best  condition.  If  there  be  doubt  as  to  the  relative 
merits  of  two  or  more  soldiers,  the  adjutant  may  cause  them  to 
form  in  line  a  few  paces  from  the  guard,  and  cause  them  to  exe- 
cute the  manual  of  arms,  march,  etc.,  to  decide  the  most 
worthy. 

103.  Q.  How  will  the  orderly  be  equipped  in  the  field  or  on 
the  march  ?    A.     As  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

104.  Q.  Under  whose  orders  is  the  orderly,  and  is  he  a  mem- 
ber of  the  guard  ?  A.  He  is  a  member  of  the  guard,  but  while 
on  duty  as  orderly  is  subject  only  to  the  orders  of  the  command- 
ing officer. 

PRIVATES  OF  THE  GUARD. 

105.  Q.  To  wliose  orders  is  a  soldier  subject  during  his  tour  of 
guard  duty  ?  A.  To  the  orders  of  the  commanding  officer,  the 
officer  of  the  day,  and  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
of  the  guard  only. 


MANUAL  OF   GUARD   DUTY.  15 

106.  Q.  When  is  a  member  of  the  guard  required  to  salute  offi- 
cers ?  A.  At  all  hours  of  the  day  or  night  when  not  engaged  in 
the  performance  of  a  special  duty. 

107.  Q.  Whenever  the  guard  or  a  relief  is  dismissed,  what  is  the 
duty  of  the  members  ?  A.  Those  not  at  once  required  for  duty 
will  place  their  rifles  in  the  arm  racks,  if  they  be  provided,  and 
will  not  remove  them  unless  required  in  the  performance  of  some 
duty. 

108  Q.  By  whom  are  privates  assigned  to  reliefs  and  posts  ? 
A.  To  reliefs  by  the  commander  of  the  guard;  to  posts  usually 
by  the  corporal  of  their  reliefs;  and  they  will  not  change  from 
one  relief  or  post  to  another  during  the  same  tour  of  guard  unless 
by  proper  authority. 

109.  Q.  Can  a  soldier  hire  another  to  do  his  duty  for  him  ?  A. 
No;  the  36th  Article  of  War  forbids  it. 

ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS  ON  POST. 

110.  Q.  How  should  a  sentinel  march,  turn,  and  carry  his  rifle 
on  post?  A.  He  carries  his  rifle  on  either  shoulder,  and  at 
night,  or  in  wet  and  severe  weather  when  not  in  the  sentry-box, 
may  carry  it  at  a  secure.  He  is  not  required  to  halt  and  change 
the  position  of  his  rifle  on  arriving  at  the  end  of  his  post,  nor  to 
execute  to  the  rem\  march,  but  faces  about  while  marching  in 
the  way  most  convenient  to  him,  and  either  to  the  right  about  or 
left  about,  and  at  any  part  of  his  post,  as  may  be  best  suited  to 
the  proper  performance  of  his  duties. 

111.  Q.  In  very  hot  weather,  what  may  sentinels  be  permitted 
to  do  ?  A.  Stand  at  ease  on  their  posts,  provided  they  can  in 
this  position  dicharge  their  duties.  Sentinels  will,  however,  be- 
fore taking  advantage  of  this  privilege,  obtain  the  express 
authority  of  the  commander  of  the  guard  or  officer  of  the  day. 

112.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  a  sentinel  quit  his 
piece  ?  A.  Not  at  all,  except  on  an  explicit  order  from  some  per- 
son from  whom  he  lawfully  receives  orders  while  on  post;  under 
no  circumstances  will  he  yield  it  to  any  other  person. 

113.  Q.  What  is  a  sentinel  required  to  do  regarding  the  arrest 
of  persons  ?  A.  He  will  arrest  suspicious  persons  prowling  about 
the  post  or  camp  at  any  time;  all  parties  to  a  disorder  occurring 
on  or  near  his  post;  or  any  one  who  attempts  to  enter  the  camp 
at  night— even  soldiers  of  other  corps — and  turn  over  all  persons 
arrested  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

114.  Q.  K  relief  becomes  necessary  on  account  of  sickness, 
what  call  will  the  sentinel  make  ?  A.  Corporal  of  the  Guard, 
No. ;  relief. 

115.  Q.  What  change  is  made  by  a  sentinel  in  the  call  for  the 
corporal  of  the  guard  for  any  purpose  other  than  relief  ?  A.  He 
omits  the  word  "relief." 


16  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIl^ER. 

116.  Q.  What  will  a  sentinel  do  when  he  is  to  be  relieved? 
A.  He  will  halt  and  face  toward  the  relief  with  arms  at  a  carry 
wiien  the  relief  is  fifteen  paces  from  him.  He  will  come  to  port 
arms  when  the  new  sentinel  halts;  he  gives  in  a  low  tone  his  in- 
structions to  the  one  taking  port.  Both  sentinels  then  resume 
the  carry,  face  toward  the  new  corporal,  and  step  back  so  as  to 
allow  the  relief  to  pass  in  front  of  them;  the  old  sentinel  takes 
his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief  as  it  passes  him,  his  piece  in  the 
same  position  as  that  of  the  relief's. 

117.  Q.  What  call  will  the  sentinel  make  for  challenging  par- 
ties at  night  ?    A.  Halt.     Who  is  there  ? 

118.  Q.  If  a  mounted  party  is  challenged,  what  will  the  sen- 
tinel call,  after  challenging?    A,  Dismount. 

119.  Q.  To  whom  may  a  sentinel  divulge  the  countersign  ?  A. 
To  no  one  except  the  sentinel  who  relieves  him,  or  to  a  person 
from  whom  he  properly  receives  orders,  on  such  person's  verbal 
order,  given  personally. 

120.  Q.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder,  what  calls  will  the  sentinel 

make  ?    A.  In  the  event  of  fire,  he  will  call.  Fire,  No. , 

giving  the  number  of  his  post;  if  possible  he  will  extinguish  the 
fire  by  his  own  efforts.    In  case  of  disorder,  he  will  call,  The 

Guard,  No. .     If  the  danger  be  great,  he  will  in  either  case 

discharge  his  piece  before  calling. 

121.  Q.  How  near  will  a  sentinel  permit  persons  to  approach 
him  at  night  ?  A.  Until  duly  recognized  by  countersign  or  oth- 
erwise, not  nearer  than  ten  feet;  and  then  only  one  of  a  party  to 
approach  him  for  the  purpose  of  giving  the  countersign. 

122.  Q.  If  a  party  be  already  advanced  and  in  communication 
with  a  sentinel,  what  will  he  do  if  any  other  party  approaches  ? 
A.  He  will  challenge  the  other  party,  and  if  the  latter  be  senior 
to  the  one  already  on  his  post,  the  sentinel  will  advance  such 
party  at  once.  The  senior,  if  competent  to  give  orders,  may 
direct  the  sentinel  to  advance  any  or  all  of  the  other  parties. 
Without  such  directions  the  sentinel  will  not  advance  any  of 
them  until  the  senior  leaves  him.  He  will  then  advance  the 
senior  only  of  the  remaining  parties,  and  so  on. 

123.  Q.  What  is  the  order  of  seniority  that  will  govern  a  sen- 
tinel in  his  actions  on  post  ?  A.  Commanding  officer,  officer  of 
the  day,  officer  of  the  guard,  officers,  patrols,  non-commissioned 
officers  of  the  guard  in  the  order  of  rank,  friends. 

124.  Q.  When  may  sentinels  be  permitted  to  call  the  hours, 
and  how  should  this  be  done  ?  A.  When  not  in  the  presence  of 
I  he  enemy.  They  will  call  successively,  in  the  numerical  order 
t)f  their  posts,  beginning  at  the  guard-house,  each  one  giving  the 
number  of  his  post,  repeating  the  hour  of  the  night,  then  add- 
ing. Airs  well,  thus  :  No  2,  eleven  o'clock.     All's  well. 

125.  Q.  If  the  call  of  the  hour  should  be  omitted  by  any  one 
sentinel  on  post,  what  is  the  duty  of  the  next  preceding  him  ? 


MANUAL  OF  GUARD  DUTY.  17 

A.  If  the  call  is  not  taken  up  within  a  reasonable  time,  he  will 
call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and  report  the  facts. 

ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS  AT  THE  POST  OF  THE  GUARD. 

126.  Q.  Give  examples  of  the  manner  in  which  a  sentinel 
turns  out  the  guard?  A.  Turn  out  the  guard — covimanding 
officer  ;  Turn  out  the  guard — Governor  of  Territory  ;  Turn  out 
the  guard — national  colors;  Turn  out  the  guard — armed  party. 

127.  Q.  What  is  the  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  required 
to  do  at  the  approach  of  the  new  guard  at  guard-mounting  ?  A. 
He  will  order  the  guard  turned  out  for  an  armed  party,  even 
though  the  guard  be  already  formed. 

128.  Q.  If  the  perso*n  for  whom  the  guard  is  ordered  turned 
out  does  not  wish  it  to  do  so,  what  is  done  ?  A.  He  will  salute 
the  sentinel  and  say.  Never  mind  the  guard,  whereupon  the  sen- 
tinel calls  out,  Never  mind  the  guard. 

129.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  will  a  guard  not  be  ordered 
to  be  turned  out  by  a  sentinel  ?  A.  The  guard  will  not  be  turned 
out  for  an  oiBcer  whiij  a  senior  entitled  to  the  compliment  is  at 
or  coming  to  the  post  of  the  guard. 

130.  Q.  Enumerate  some  of  the  duties  of  a  sentinel  at  the 
guard-house  ?  A.  At  the  approach  of  any  armed  body  he  will 
warn  the  commander  of  the  guard;  he  will  arrest  all  suspicious 
or  disorderly  persons;  he  will  not  permit  enlisted  men  to  pass 
unless  orders  to  the  contrary  have  been  given;  in  case  of  fire  or 
disorder  in  the  vicinity  of  the  guard-house  he  will  call  the  cor- 
poral of  the  guard  and  report  the  facts  to  him. 

131.  Q.  How  will  the  sentinel  at  the  guard  announce  the  hours 
of  the  night  ?  A,  At  the  direction  of  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cer of  the  guard  he  will  call,  No.  1,  (such)  o'clock.  After  the  call 
has  passed  around  the  chain  of  sentinels,  he  will  call,  AlVs  well. 

COMPLIMENTS  FROM   SENTINELS. 

132.  Q.  In  what  manner  shall  sentinels  pay  compliments  ?  A. 
The  salute  of  a  sentinel  will  habitually  be  rendered  without  halt- 
ing for  the  purpose;  an  infantry  sentinel  will  salute  with  the  rifle 
salute;  cavalry,  with  sabre  drawn,  whether  mounted  or  dis- 
mounted, will  salute  with  the  present;  armed  with  the  carbine, 
if  dismounted^  he  will  salute  with  the  carbine  ;  if  mounted,  he 
will  advance  carbine. 

133.  Q.  How  is  the  present  arms  used  ?  A.  As  the  simulta- 
neous salute  of  a  body  of  men  at  command. 

134.  Q.  At  what  distance  should  salutes  be  given  ?  A.  The 
limit  within  which  indivifluals  and  insignia  of  rank  can  be  read- 
ily recognized — about  thirty  paces. 

135.  Q.  When  will  a  sentinel  salute  an  officer  approaching 


18  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMHSTER. 

him  ?  A.  When  he  arrives  within  about  six  paces;  but  if,  after 
coming  within  saluting  distance,  the  officer  does  not  approach 
within  six  paces,  the  sentinel  salutes  when  the  officer  arrives 
nearest  to  him,  or  just  before  he  crosses  the  sentinel's  post. 

136.  Q.  What  rules  apply  to  a  sentinel  with  regard  to  saluting 
colors  carried  by  a  color  guard  or  armed  party,  or  when  the  offi- 
cer commanding  a  party,  or  the  remains  of  a  deceased  officer  or 
soldier  are  carried  past  ?  A.  The  same  as  those  for  saluting 
officers. 

137.  Q.  What  will  the  sentinel  do  in  the  case  of  an  armed 
party  with  regard  to  saluting  ?  A.  He  will  halt  when  it  is  about 
fifteen  paces  from  him,  facing  toward  the  party,  with  his  piece 
at  a  carry.  If  not  himself  relieved,  he  will,  as  the  party  passes, 
place  himself  so  that  it  will  pass  in  frofit  of  him;  he  resumes 
walking  his  post  when  the  party  has  passed  six  paces  beyond 
him. 

138.  Q.  What  will  a  sentinel  do  on  the  approach  of  an  officer 
from  whom  he  properly  receives  orders  ?  A.  He  will  walk  his 
post  toward  the  officer,  and  if  not  spoken  to,  will  salute  as  pre- 
scribed; if  spoken  to,  he  will  halt,  facing  toward  the  officer,  his 
piece  at  port  arms.     He  salutes  when  the  officer  leaves  him. 

139.  Q.  How  will  the  sentinel  act  with  regard  to  the  approach 
of  a  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard  ?  A.  The  same  as 
for  an  officer,  except  that  he  does  not  salute. 

140.  Q.  Are  officers  required  to  be  in  uniform  in  order  to  re- 
ceive a  salute  ?  A.  No;  they  are  to  be  saluted  whether  in  uni- 
form or  not. 

COMPLIMENTS  FROM  GUARDS.  . 

141.  Q.  When  will  guards  turn  out  and  present  arms  ?  A. 
When  the  national  or  regimental  colors,  or  standards,  not  cased, 
are  carried  past  by  a  color  guard  or  any  armed  party;  also  when 
the  party  carrying  the  colors  is  at  drill.  Colors  and  standards  when 
cased  will  not  be  saluted,  nor  will  the  guard  turn  out  for  them. 
All  guards  will  turn  out  when  armed  parties  approach  their 
posts ;  to  parties  commanded  by  commissioned  officers  they  will 
present  arms,  officers  saluting. 

142.  Q.  How  frequently  may  guards  be  turned  out  for  the 
^^?^foP?r'^^   ^'  ^^  ^^^®^  ^^  ^^^^^  entitled  to  the  compliment  pass. 

143.  Q.  J?  or  whom  does  the  guard  of  a  general  officer  turn  out  ? 
A.    lo  him  and  his  superiors  in  rank  only. 

144.  Q.  When  will  guards  not  turn  out  to  pay  compliments  ?  A. 
After  sunset;  nor  will  any  compliments  be  paid  by  the  guard  be- 
tween retreat  and  reveille.  *-        ^        & 


MANUAL   OF   GUARD   DUTY.  19 


SPECIAL    ORDEilL. 

145.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  special  orders  to  a  sentinel  ?  A. 
They  define  the  duties  to  be  performed  by  a  sentinel  on  a  par- 
ticular post,  and  are  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

146.  Q.  What  will  invariably  constitute  a  part  of  the  special 
orders  of  every  sentinel?  A.  The  number,  limits,  and  extent  of 
his  post. 

147.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  sentinel  at  the  commanding 
officer's  tent?  A.  He  will  warn  the  commanding  officer,  day  or 
night,  of  any  unusual  movement  in  or  about  camp. 

COLOR  LINE  AND  SENTINELS. 

148.  Q.  What  number  of  sentinels  is  placed  on  the  color  line, 
and  for  what  purpose  ?  A.  A  sufficient  number  not  to  exceed 
three,  to  guard  the  colors  and  stacks. 

149.  Q.  How  are  color  sentinels  selected  in  camps  of  instruc- 
tion ?  A.  By  the  adjutant,  in  the  same  manner  as  he  selects  the 
orderly. 

150.' Q.  In  what  manner  is  the  duty  of  selected  color  sentinels 
different  from  that  of  other  sentinels  ?  A.  They  remain  on  post 
only  so  long  as  the  stacks  are  formed;  when  stacks  are  broken, 
they  may  be  permitted  to  return  to  their  respective  companies.  If 
necessary,  their  places  are  taken  at  night  by  the  other  sentinels 
posted  on  the  color  front  or  on  the  flanks.  They  are  required  to 
report  in  person  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at  reveille  and 
retreat.  They  will  fall  in  with  the  guard,  under  arms,  at  guard- 
moimting.  They  are  not  placed  on  the  regular  reliefs,  nor  are 
their  posts  numbered.  In  calling  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard 
they  add  to  the  call  Color  line. 

151.  Q.  What  is  the  time  for  walking  post  on  the  color  line? 
A.  The  time  is  equally  divided  among  the  color  sentinels  by  the 
commander  of  the  guard. 

152.  Q.  'What  general  orders  will  color  sentinels  observe  ?  A. 
All  that  are  prescribed  for  sentinels  on  other  posts. 

153.  Q.  What  are  the  special  orders  for  color  sentinels?  A. 
They  will  not  permit  the  colors  to  be  moved  except  in  presence  of 
an  armed  escort,  nor  allow  any  one  to  touch  them  but  the  color- 
bearer  or  a  non-commi.ssioned  officer  of  the  guard  accompanied 
by  two  armed  men.  They  will  not  permit  any  arms  to  be  taken 
from  the  stacks,  except  by  order  of  an  officer  or  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard. 

154.  Q.  What  will  a  color  sentinel  do  with  regard  to  persons 
saluting  the  colors  ?    A.  If  any  one  passing  the  colorsrr«3rcj| 
ing  the  color  line  fails  to  salute  the  colors,  the^jJI^iR"}  AVillMiq 
tion  him  to  do  so,  and  if  the  caution  be  not  ^Jji^^cl,  ho  will  cfu 
the  corporal  of  the  guard  and  report  the  faci 


20  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIISfER. 


SUPERNUMERARIES. 

155.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  upon  supernumeraries  ? 
A.  They  will  not  be  allowed  to  leave  the  camp  or  garrison  ;  they 
will  hold  themselves  in  readiness  for  detail  as  members  of  the 
guard. 

156.  Q.  What  duties  are  supernumeraries  excused  from  ?  A. 
They  will  not  be  excused  from  ordinary  camp  or  garrison  duties; 
but  will  not  be  detailed  for  anything  that  will  interfere  with  their 
duties  as  supernumeraries. 

PRISONERS. 

157.  Q.  When  may  the  commander  of  a  guard  place  a  civilian 
in  confinement  ?  A.  Only  on  an  order  from  higher  authority, 
unless  arrested  in  the  act  of  committing  some  crime  within  the 
limits  of  the  military  jurisdiction,  in  which  case  the  commanding 
officer  will  be  immediately  notified. 

158.  Q.  What  is  required  of  an  officer  ordering  a  soldier  into 
confinement  ?  A.  He  will  send,  as  soon  as  practicable,  a  written 
statement,  signed  by  himself,  to  the  commander  of  the  guard,  set- 
ting forth  the  name,  company  and  regiment  of  such  soldier,  and 
a  brief  statement  of  his  alleged  offence.  To  give  the  number  of 
the  article  of  war  under  which  the  offences  is  charged  is  sufficient. 

159.  Q.  After  the  first  day's  confinement  of  a  prisoner,  under 
what  authority  is  he  considered  as  held  ?  A.  Under  the  author- 
ity of  the  commanding  officer  until  sentence  has  been  duly  pro- 
mulgated; after  promulgation  of  sentence,  by  authority  o^  the 
officer  who  reviews  the  proceedings  of  the  court. 

160.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  prisoners  at  parade  when 
orders  are  published  to  them  ?  A.  Three  paces  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  line  of  officers,  facing  to  the  front. 

161.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  prisoners  and  guard  prior 
to  being  brought  to  the  front  to  hear  their  sentences  read  ?  A. 
They  are  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file-closers,  the  outer 
flank  of  the  guard  opposite  the  outer  flank  of  the  battalion.  In 
the  parade  of  the  regiment  the  prisoners  and  guard  are  in  rear  of 
the  most  convenient  flank  of  the  centre  or  right  centre  battalion. 

162.  Q.  What  will  the  prisoners  do  when  their  sentences  are 
read  on  parade  ?  A.  Each  prisoner,  as  his  name  is  called,  will 
step  three  paces  to  the  front,  halt,  uncover,  and  remain  uncov- 
ered during  the  publication  of  the  orders  in  his  case.  He  will 
then  cover,  face  about,  and  take  his  place  in  the  detachment. 

163.  Q.  What  is  done  with  a  soldier  who  has  been  tried  and 
acquitted  wlien  sentences  are  promulgated  on  parade?  A.  He 
will  not  be  paraded  in  front  of  the  battalion. 

164.  Q.   When  orders  are  not  to  be  read  at  parade,  what  will  be 


MANUAL  OF  GUARD  DUTY.  21 

done  with  those  promulgating  the  sentence  of  a  man  in  confine- 
ment ?  A.  The  officer  of  the  guard,  or  the  officer  of  the  day,  if 
there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard,  will  read  the  sentences  of  pris- 
oners to  them  when  the  order  promulgating  the  same  is  received. 

165.  Q.  How  should  prisoners  be  separated  into  classes  ?  A. 
Those  awaiting  trial  by,  or  undergoing  sentence  of,  general  court- 
martial,  and  those  confined  for  serious  offences  will,  if  practicable, 
be  kept  apart  from  those  confined  by  sentence  of  a  garrison  court 
or  for  minor  offences.  As  far  as  practicable,  those  awaiting  trial 
or  sentence  will  not  be  sent  out  to  work  with  prisoners  undergo- 
ing sentence. 

166.  Q.  What  are  the  proper  working  hours  of  prisoners  ?  A. 
Except  when  otherwise  directed  by  the  commanding  officer,  from 
reveille  until  retreat,  with  proper  intermissions  for  meals. 

167.  Q.  When  will  prisoners  be  paraded  with  the  guard  ?  A. 
At  reveille  and  retreat,  roll-calls,  and,  except  those  out  at  work, 
at  guard-mounting ;  but  at  no  other  times. 

168.  Q.  What  is  the  sentinel  at  the  guard-house  charged  with 
in  relation  to  prisoners  ?  A.  He  has  charge  of  the  prisoners,  and 
shall  allow  none  to  escape  or  to  cross  his  post  except  under  guard ; 
he  shall  allow  no  one  to  communicate  with  them  without  permis- 
sion from  proper  authority;  he  shall  report  to  the  corporal  of  the 
guard  any  suspicious  noise  made  by  prisoners;  and  he  must 
remember  to  tell,  whenever  asked,  how  many  prisoners  are  in  the 
guard-house  and  how  many  are  at  work  elsewhere. 

169.  Q.  What  must  the  sentinel  at  the  guard-house  do  when- 
ever prisoners  pass  his  post  returning  from  work  ?  He  must  call, 
Corporal  of  the  guards  (so  many)  prisoners. 

170.  Q.  What  will  be  done  by  a  sentinel  if  a  prisoner  attempts 
to  escape  ?  A.  The  sentinel  will  call.  Halt.  If  he  fail  to  halt 
when  the  sentinel  has  once  repeated  his  call,  and  if  there  be  no 
other  possible  means  of  preventing  his  escape,  the  sentinel  will 
fire  on  him. 

171.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  a  sentinel  perform  his  duty 
while  in  charge  of  prisoners  ?  A.  He  will  not  allow  the  prisoners 
to  converse  with  each  other  nor  with  any  person  without  permis- 
sion from  proper  authority.  He  will  not  himself  speak  to  them, 
except  in  the  execution  of  his  duty;  he  will  see  that  they  do  not 
straggle,  that  they  are  orderly  in  deportment,  and  that  they  keep 
constantly  at  work ;  he  will  keep  the  prisoners  constantly  in  front 
of  him,  and  never  allow  them  to  walk  at  his  side  or  in  his  rear; 
he  will  not  at  any  time  lose  sight  of  them. 

172.  Q.  In  crossing  the  post  of  the  sentinel  at  the  guard-house 
what  will  a  sentinel  in  charge  of  prisoners  call  ?  A.  No.  1,  (so 
m^xi^)  prisoners. 


THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 


GUARD    PATROLS. 

173.  Q.  "What  is  the  guard  patrol  ?  A.  A  small  detachment  of 
two  or  more  men  detailed  to  observe  and  procure  information  of 
the  enemy,  or  for  the  performance  of  some  special  service  con- 
nected with  guard  duty. 

174.  Q.  How  are  guard  patrols  detailed  ?  A.  Usually  from 
the  guard,  and  receive  instructions  from  the  commander. 

175.  Q.  If  the  patrol  be  required  to  go  beyond  the  chain  of 
sentinels,  what  will  be  done?  A.  Its  commander  will  be  fur- 
nished with  the  countersign  and  the  outposts  and  sentinels  will 
be  warned. 

COUNTERSIGNS    AND  PAROLES. 

176.  Q.  What  is  a  countersign  ?  A.  A  word  given  daily  from 
the  principal  headquarters  of  a  command  to  aid  guards  and  sen- 
tinels in  identifying  persons  who  may  be  authorized  to  pass  at 
night. 

177.  Q.  To  whom  is  a  countersign  given  ?  A.  To  such  persons 
as  are  entitled  to  pass  and  repass  sentinels'  posts  during  the 
night,  and  to  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  sentinels  of 
the  guard. 

178.  Q.  What  is  a  parole  ?  A.  A  word  used  as  a  check  on  the 
countersign,  in  order  to  obtain  more  accurate  identification  of 
persons. 

179.  Q.  To  whom  should  a  parole  be  imparted  ?  A.  To  those 
who  are  entitled  to  inspect  guards  and  to  commanders  of  guards. 

180.  Q.  What  names  are  generally  used  for  countersigns  and 
paroles  ?  A.  The  countersign  is  usually  the  name  of  a  battle  ;  the 
parole,  that  of  a  general  or  other  distinguished  person. 

181.  Q.  If  the  countersign  be  lost,  or  if  the  member  of  the 
guard  desert  with  it,  what  is  done  ?  A.  The  commander  on  the 
spot  will  substitute  another  for  it,  and  report  the  case  at  once  to 
the  proper  superior,  that  immediate  notice  may  be  given  to  head- 
quarters. 

182.  Q.  What  is  required  of  all  persons  with  reference  to  sen- 
tinels ?    A.  They  are  required  to  observe  respect  toward  them. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

i83.  Q.  How  will  one  who  is  authorized  to  inspect  sentinels  at 
night  or  in  the  field  proceed  ?  A.  He  takes  from  the  main  body 
of  the  guard  an  escort,  if  necessary,  to  accompany  him  to  the 
next  guard,  on  reaching  which  he  orders  back  the  escort,  and 
takmg  a  new  one,  proceeds  in  like  manner  to  other  guards. 

184.  Q.  When  may  a  guard  be  turned  out  by  direction  of  any 


MANUAL   OF   GUARD    DUTY.  23 

person  entitled  to  inspect  it  ?    A.  At  any  time  between  retreat 
and  reveille. 

185.  Q.  What  does  the  band,  the  adjutant,  the  sergeant-major, 
the  first  sergeants,  and  the  supernumeraries  constitute  at  guard- 
mounting  ?  A.  They  are  held  to  be  a  portion  of  the  guard  until 
the  guard  has  passed  the  officer  of  the  day  in  review. 

186.  Q.  What  should  be  the  character  of  questions  propounded 
to  a  sentinel  by  one  authorized  to  visit  and  inspect  him  ?  A. 
They  should  be  such  as  to  ascertain  his  knowledge  of  his  duties 
and  surroundings,  without  seeking  to  confuse  him. 

187.  Q.  What  are  officers  and  men  required  to  do  when  passing 
the  colors  ?  A.  Give  the  prescribed  salute  ;  when  without  arms 
in  the  hand,  by  uncovering  ;  if  colors  are  on  the  stacks,  the  salute 
will  be  made  on  crossing  the  color  line,  or  on  passing  the  colors. 

188.  Q.  Where  will  the  camp  guard  march  while  en  route  ?  A. 
In  rear  of  the  regiment,  with  prisoners  ;  or  in  advance,  with  the 
camping  party. 

189.  Q.  When  the  camp  guard  marches  with  the  camping  party, 
where  does  it  form  ?  A.  On  the  ground  marked  for  the  regiment, 
on  reaching  camp  ;  and  the  commander  of  the  guard  furnishes 
the  sentinels  required  by  the  commander  of  the  camping  party. 

190.  Q.  Where  should  sentinels  be  placed  on  the  arrival  of  a 
camping  party  ?  A.  Over  the  stores  of  provisions,  fuel  and 
forage  in  the  vicinity,  and  over  the  water  when  it  is  scarce,  to 
prevent  waste  or  fouling. 

POLICE  AND    FATIGUE  DUTY. 

191.  Q.  Who  supervises  the  police  and  fatigue  duties  of  a  post 
or  camp  ?  A.  They  may  be  placed  under  the  supervision  of  an 
officer  detailed  for  the  purpose;  otherwise  they  are  under  the 
supervision  of  the  officer  of  the  day.  Either  of  these  officers  will 
have  general  supervision  under  the  orders  of  the  commanding 
officer.  Fatigue  parties  will  be  furnished  him  when  the  number 
of  prisoners  is  insufficient  for  the  necessary  police  purposes. 

192.  Q.  By  whom  is  the  general  police  duty  usually  done  in 
camp  ?  A.  By  the  old  guard,  under  the  direction  of  the  officer 
of  the  day. 

193.  Q.  What  is  the  tour  of  police  duty  and  when  does  it  begin  ? 
A.  It  is  for  24  hours,  beginning  with  fatigue  call  in  the  morning 
of  the  day  following  that  on  which  the  guard  marches  off. 

PROPERTY  UNDER  CHARGE  OP  THE  GUARD. 

194.  Q.  What  in  general  are  the  articles  kept  at  the  guard- 
house for  strictly  post  or  police  purposes?  A.  Flags,  spades, 
shovels,  axes,  hatchets,  pickaxes,  and  brooms. 

195.  Q.  In  what  manner  are  non-commissioned  officers  of  the 


24  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

guard  responsible  for  these  articles  ?  A.  They  do  not  receipt  for 
them,  but  are  held  accountable  to  the  officer  of  the  day  for  their 
safe-keeping.  In  case  of  loss,  destruction,  or  other  disposition, 
the  facts  relating  thereto  will  be  entered  on  the  guard  report. 

FLAGS  AND  COLORS. 

196.  Q.  What  is  the  designation  and  size  of  the  flags  issued  to 
military  posts,  and  when  will  they  be  hoisted  ?  A.  The  garrison 
flag  (36  X  20)  is  issued  only  to  posts  designated  from  headquarters 
of  the  army  ;  to  be  hoisted  only  on  holidays  and  important 
occasions.  The  post  flag  (20  x  10)  is  furnished  to  all  posts  garri- 
soned by  troops  ;  to  be  hoisted  only  in  pleasant  weather.  Tlie 
storm  flag  (8  x  4.2)  is  furnished  to  all  occupied  military  posts  ;  to 
be  hoisted  in  stormy  weather. 

197.  Q.  What  colors  and  standards  are  carried  by  troops  ?  A. 
Each  regiment  of  artillery  and  infantry  has  two  silken  colors,  the 
national  and  regimental ;  the  battalion  of  engineers  has  two 
colors,  the  national  and  the  battalion  ;  each  mounted  regiment 
has  a  silken  standard. 

198.  Q.  What  duty  is  imposed  on  the  post  commander  regard- 
ing the  post  flag  ?  A.  He  will  see  that  the  proper  flag  is  hoisted  ; 
that,  in  case  of  a  storm,  either  of  wind  or  rain,  the  storm  flag  is 
promptly  raised  ;  that  the  flag  is  hoisted  at  reveille  and  lowered 
at  retreat ;  that  the  national  flag  will  always  be  displayed  at  the 
time  of  firing  salutes  ;  and  that  the  flag  will  under  no  circum- 
stances be  dipped  by  way  of  salute  or  compliment. 

199.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  and  for  how  long  will  a 
flag  be  displayed  at  half-staff,  and  how  is  it  placed  so  ?  A.  On 
the  death  of  an  officer  at  a  military  post  the  flag  will  be  at  half- 
staff  between  the  hours  of  reveille  and  retreat,  until  the  last 
salvo  or  volley  is  fired  over  the  grave  ;  or  until  the  remains  are 
removed  from  the  post  if  they  are  not  interred  there.  During  the 
funeral  of  an  enlisted  man  the  flag  will  be  at  half-staff.  It  is 
hoisted  to  the  top  after  the  final  volley  or  gun  is  fired,  or  after 
the  remains  are  taken  from  the  post.  When  the  flag  is  to  be 
displayed  at  half-staff,  it  is  lowered  to  that  position  from  the  top. 
It  is  afterwards  hoisted  to  the  top  before  it  is  finally  lowered. 


PART  11. 

MILITARY  LAW. 


Winihrop'8  Abridgment  of  Military  Law, 
Text-books;  •{  Winthrop's  Unabridged,  Parts  II.  and  III. 
O.  0.  No.  100,  A.  O.  0.,  1863. 


For  Second  Lieutenants— Nos.  200-351. 
Tor  First  Lieutenants— Nos.  200-351. 
For  Captains  of  the  Line — Nos.  352-441. 
For  Captains  of  the  Q.  M.  D.— Nos.   352-441. 
For  Captains  of  Sub.  Dept.— Nos.  352-441. 


PAET   II. 
MILITARY  LAW. 

Chapter  I. 

200.  Q.  How  is  military  law  divided  ?  A.  Into  :  1.  Military 
law  proper  ;  2.  The  law  of  war. 

201.  Q.  What  is  military  law  proper  1  A.  The  specific  law 
which  governs  the  army  as  a  separate  community  alike  in  peace 
and  in  war. 

203.  Q.  What  is  the  law  of  war  ?  A.  An  exercise  of  military 
authority  and  jurisdiction  over  persons  both  military  and  civil, 
operative  only  in  time  of  war  or  similar  emergency. 

203.  Q.  Where  is  the  source  of  authority  for  military  law  and 
jurisdiction  to  be  found?  A.  In  the  constitution  of  the  United 
States. 

204.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  constitutional  provisions  which  may 
be  regarded  as  the  source  of  or  authority  for  our  existing  military 
law?  A.  Those  by  which  Congress  is  empowered  "  to  raise  and 
support  armies;"  "to  make  rules  for  the  government  of  the 
land  and  naval  forces  ; "  "  to  provide  for  calling  forth  the 
militia  to,  execute  the  laws  of  the  Union,  suppress  insurrections, 
and  repel  invasions  ;  "  "  to  provide  for  organizing,  arming,  and 
disciplining  the  militia,  and  for  governing  such  part  of  them  as 
may  be  employed  in  the  service  of  the  United  States  ; "  etc.  (or 
any  others  named  in  the  text-book). 

Chapter  II. 

205.  Q.  What  does  the  written  military  law  consist  of  ?  A.  1. 
The  Articles  of  War ;  2.  The  enactments  of  Congress  relating  to 
the  discipline  or  government  of  the  army,  not  included  in  the  Arti- 
cles of  War  ;  3.  The  Army  Regulations  ;  4.  General  and  special 
orders. 

27 


28  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIKER. 

206.  Q.  Under  what  authority  are  the  Articles  of  War  enacted 
by  Congress?  A.  Under  its  constitutional  authority  "  to  make 
rules  for  the  government  of  the  land  and  naval  forces." 

207.  Q.  Historically  considered  what  is  the  origin  of  the  major- 
ity of  our  present  Articles  of  War  ?  A.  Many  of  them  antedate 
the  Constitution  of  the  United  States,  being  derived  from  those 
adopted  by  the  Continental  Congress  between  1775  and  1786, 
which  are  themselves  taken  from  pre-existing  British  Articles 
having  their  inception  in  remote  antiquity. 

208.  Q.  What  are  Army  Regulations  ?  A.  Authoritative  rules 
or  directions,  as  distinguished  from  enactments,  relating  to  details 
01  military  duty  and  discipline. 

209.  Q.  Where  is  the  authority  for  Army  Regulations  to  be 
found  ?  A.  In  the  distinctive  functions  of  the  President  as  Com- 
mander-in-chief and  as  Executive.  Congress  has  also  authorized 
the  President  to  make  and  publish  regulations  for  the  government 
of  the  army  in  accordance  with  existing  laws.  The  President, 
however,  has  the  inherent  power  to  make  regulations  indepen- 
dently of  Congress. 

Chapter  III. 

210.  Q.  What  does  the  unwritten  military  law  consist  of  ?  A. 
I.  The  customs  of  the  service.  II.  The  unwritten  laws  and  cus- 
toms of  war. 

211.  Q.  In  what  particular  branch  of  military  administration 
are  these  customs  sanctioned  by  law  ?  A.  They  are  referred  to 
in  the  84th  Art.  of  War  as  a  means  of  guiding  courts-martial  in 
the  administration  of  justice. 

212.  Q.  Give  the  essentials  of  a  usage  or  custom  at  military 
law  ?  A.  A  usage  or  custom  must  consist  of  a  fixed  and  uniform 
practice  of  long  standing,  which  is  not  in  conflict  with  existing 
statute  laws  or  regulations.  It  cannot  be  established  by  proof  of 
isolated  or  occasional  instances,  but  must  be  built  up  out  of  a 
series  of  precedents. 

Chapter  IV. 

213.  Q.  By  what  tribunal  is  military  law  mostly  administered  ? 
A.  The  court-martial. 

214.  Q.  To  what  department  of  the  government  does  the  court- 
martial  belong,  and  what  is  its  nature?  A.  It  belongs  to  the 
Executive  Department  of  the  Government.  It  is  an  instrumen- 
tality of  the  executive  power :  a  temporary  summary  tribunal 
with  criminal  jurisdiction,  and  is  in  its  procedure  assimilated 
in  sundry  particulars  to  a  civil  judge  and  jury.  It  is  not  a  court 
of  record,  and  its  judgments  are  not  subject  to  be  appealed  from. 

215.  Q.  How  may  a  judgment  of  a  court-martial  be  collater- 


MILITAKY   LAW.  29 

ally  revised  by  a  civil  court  ?  A.  Where  the  action  of  a  court- 
martial  has  been  unauthorized  and  illegal,  and  upon  approval 
has  been  effectuated,  the  person  who  has  suffered  therefrom  may 
appeal  to  the  proper  civil  courts  for  redress.  If  confined  under 
an  illegal  sentence,  he  may  procure  himself  to  be  released  by  writ 
of  habeas  corpus.  For  any  illegal  punishment  adjudged. and  ex- 
ecuted he  may  recover  damages  in  a  civil  suit. 

216.  Q.  Name  the  different  kinds  of  courts-martial.  A.  The 
General  Court-martial,  the  Regimental  Court-martial,  the  Garri- 
son Court-martial,  the  Field  Officers'  Court,  and  the  Summary 
Court. 

Chapter  V. 

217.  Q.  Who  may  under,  the  law  constitute  General  Courts- 
martial?  A.  1.  The  President,  and  2.  Certain  military  com- 
manders. 

218.  Q.  Where  is  the  authority  found  empowering  the  Presi- 
dent to  institute  general  courts-martial  ?  A.  1.  In  the  Constitu- 
tion of  the  United  States,  making  the  President  eommander-in- 
chief  of  the  army.  2.  In  the  72d  Art.  of  War,  where  the  officer, 
authorized  under  the  law  to  appoint  a  general  court-martial,  is  the 
accuser  or  prosecutor  of  an  officer  of  his  command  proposed  to  be 
brought  to  trial.  3.  In  the  statute  requiring  the  President  to 
convene  a  general  court-martial  for  the  trial  of  an  officer  who, 
having  been  summarily  dismissed  in  time  of  war,  applies  in  writ- 
ing for  such  trial. 

219.  Q.  Define  the  meaning  of  the  words  "accuser"  and 
*'  prosecutor  "  used  in  the  72d  A.  W.  A.  "  Accuser  "  means  one 
who  either  originates  the  charge  or  adopts  and  becomes  responsi- 
ble for  it ;  "  prosecutor"  means  one  who  proposes  or  undertakes 
to  have  it  tried  and  proved. 

220.  Q.  What  military  commanders  are  authorized  by  law  to 
convene  general  courts-martial  ?  A.  Any  general  officer  com- 
manding an  army,  a  territorial  division,  or  a  department,  or  a 
colonel  commanding  a  separate  department,  any  commander — in 
time  of  war — of  a  division,  or  separate  brigade  of  troops,  and  the 
Superintendent  of  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy. 

221.  Q.  Give  the  provisions  of  law  regulating  the  composition 
of  general  courts-martial  in  relation  to  the  class,  rank,  and  num- 
ber of  members.  A.  Only  commissioned  officers  are  eligible  for 
detail.  No  officer  shall,  when  it  can  be  avoided,  be  tried  by  offi- 
cers inferior  to  him  in  rank.  Officers  of  the  regular  army  are  not 
competent  to  sit  on  courts-martial  to  try  officers  and  soldiers  of 
other  forces,  except  offenders  of  the  marine  corps  detached  for 
service  with  the  army  by  order  of  the  President.  Courts-martial 
for  the  trial  of  militia  must  be  composed  of  militia  officers  only. 
General  courts-martial  may  consist  of  any  number  of  officers 


30  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

from  five  to  thirteen  inclusive,  but  they  shall  not  consist  of  less 
than  thirteen  where  that  number  can  be  convened  without  mani- 
fest injury  to  the  service. 

Chapter  VI. 

222.  Q.  Give  the  place  or  field  of  the  jurisdiction  of  general 
courts-martial.  A.  The  jurisdiction  of  these  courts  is  coexten- 
sive with  the  territory  of  the  United  States.  It  also  extends  to 
the  places  or  territory  held  or  occupied  by  our  armies  when  in- 
vading the  domain  of  a  foreign  nation  with  which  we  are  at  war. 
And  it  includes  also  offenses  committed  by  our  officers  and  sol- 
diers within  the  line  or  neighborhood  of  our  armies,  when  in  the 
transit,  by  the  permission  of  its  Government,  through  the  domain 
of  a  foreign  nation  with  which  we  are  at  peace. 

223.  Q.  How  is  the  jurisdiction  of  a  general  court-martial 
limited  as  to  time  ?  A.  By  the  provisions  of  the  statute  of  limi- 
tation, and  by  the  termination  of  a  state  of  war  as  far  as  such 
offenses  are  concerned  over  which  the  jurisdiction  of  the  court  is 
restricted  to  the  period  of  war. 

224.  Q.  What  persons  are  subject  to  the  jurisdiction  of  courts- 
martial?  A.  1.  The  army  of  the  United  States;  2.  The  militia 
when  called  into  the  service  of  the  United  States;  3.  Officers  and 
soldiers  of  marines  when  detached  for  service  with  the  army;  4. 
Certain  civilians  subjected  to  military  discipline  in  time  of  war. 

225.  Q.  What  are  the  provisions  of  law  in  relation  to  the  juris- 
diction of  general  courts-martial  over  civilians  in  time  of  war  ? 
A.  All  retainers  to  the  camp  and  all  persons  serving  with  the 
armies  of  the  United  States  in  the  field,  though  not  enlisted  sol- 
diers, are  under  the  provisions  of  the  63d  Art.  of  War,  to  be  sub- 
ject to  orders  according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  and 
under  the  45th  and  46th  Art.  of  War  and  sec.  1343  of  the  Rev. 
Stat,  all  persons  who  shall  relieve,  correspond  with,  or  give  in- 
telligence to  the  enemy,  or  shall  act  as  spies,  are  triable  by  gen- 
eral courts-martial. 

Chapter  VII. 

226.  Q.  In  whom  do  the  Articles  of  War  and  Army  Regula- 
tions place  the  power  to  arrest  officers  ?  A.  In  the  commanding 
officer,  except  in  cases  and  for  offenses  especially  designated  in 
the  24th  Art.  of  War. 

227.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  commanding  officer  when  he 
places  an  officer  in  arrest  and  releases  him  without  preferring 
charges  ?  A.  To  make  a  written  report  of  his  action  to  the  De- 
partment Commander,  stating  the  cause. 

228.  Q.  What  is  the  provision  of  the  65th  Art.  of  War  in  re- 
lation to  the  arrest  of  officers  ?    A.  Officers  charged  with  crime 


MILITARY    LAW.  31 

shall  be  arrested  and  confined  in  their  barracks,  quarters  or 
tents,  and  deprived  of  their  swords  by  the  commanding  officer, 
and  any  officer  who  leaves  his  confinement  before  he  is  set  at 
liberty  by  his  commanding  officer  shall  be  dismissed  from  tlie 
service. 

229.  Q.  What  are  the  provisions  of  the  66th  Art.  of  War  in 
relation  to  the  confinement  of  soldiers?  A.  Soldiers  charged  with 
crimes  shall  be  confined  until  tried  by  courts-martial,  or  released 
by  proper  authority. 

230.  Q.  In  whom  is  the  authority  vested  to  confine  soldiers  ? 
A.  Except  as  provided  in  the  24th  Art.  of  War,  no  soldier  should 
be  confined  without  the  order  of  an  officer,  who  shall  previously 
inquire  into  his  ofifence. 

231.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  the  confinement  of  soldiers  who 
are  charged  with  offences  triable  by  a  summary  court  ?  A.  They 
should  not  be  confined  in  the  guard-house,  but  placed  in  Merest 
in  quarters  before  and  during  trial  and  while  awaiting  seuLeuce, 
unless  in  particular  cases  restraint  may  be  necessary. 

Chapter  VIII. 

232.  Q.  What  is  a  "charge"  in  military  procedure,  and  how  is 
it  divided?  A.  A  charge  is  simply  a  description  in  writing  of 
the  alleged  offence  of  the  accused.  It  is  divided  into  two  por- 
tions :  the  charge  or  designation  of  the  specific  military  offence 
believed  to  have  been  committed  ;  and  the  specification  or  state- 
ment of  the  acts  or  omissions  of  the  accused  claimed  to  consti- 
tute the  offence  named  in  the  charge. 

233.  What  are  the  recognized  forms  of  charges?  A.  A  charge 
may  be  expressed  (1)  in  a  word  or  words  specifying  the  offence, 
as  "Desertion,"  "Drunkenness  on  duty;"  or  (2)  as  "Violation 

of  the Art.  of  War,"  naming  the  article  under  which  it  is 

preferred;  or  (3)  it  may  contain  the  two  forms  and  be  phrased  as 
"False  muster  in  violation  of  the  14th  Art.  of  War,"  etc.  (The 
second  form,  viz..  Violation  of  the  62d  Art.  of  War,  with  an  ap- 
propriate specification  attached,  was  held  to  be  a  valid  pleading 
by  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States  in  the  case  of  Sergeant 
Mason.) 

234.  Q.  By  whom  are  charges  to  be  preferred  ?  A.  A  military 
charge  must  be  formally  preferred,  i.  e.,  officially  subscribed  by  a 
commissioned  officer  of  the  army.  But  it  may  originate  either 
with  the  preferrer  himself,  or  with  any  other  individual,  whether 
or  not  in  the  military  or  public  service. 

235.  Q.  To  whom  should  charges  be  preferred?  A.  To  the 
commander  authorized  to  order  the  court  through  the  proper 
military  channels. 

236.  Q.  When  may  additional  charge^!^5!fe1aoasider^33ga^.co<jrt  ? 


32  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIi^^ER. 

A.  When  they  have  been  brought  before  the  court  prior  to  its 
being  sworn. 

Chapter  IX. 

237.  Q.  Describe  the  assembling  and  opening  of  a  general 
court-martial.  A.  Pursuant  to  the  convening  order  (and  the 
supplementary  orders,  if  any)  the  officers  named  in  detail  for  the 
court  assemble  in  full  uniform,  at  the  time  and  place  designated, 
in  such  building  or  room  as  may  have  been  set  apart  for  the  pur- 
pose. When  five  or  more  members  and  the  judge-advocate  have 
arrived  they  may  proceed  to  business  ;  till  five  appear  those  pres- 
ent must  adjourn  from  day  to  day  to  await  at  least  the  minimum 
number.  A  quorum  of  members  and  the  judge-advocate  being 
present,  the  senior  member  calls  them  to  order ;  the  order  con- 
vening the  court  is  read  by  the  judge-advocate  ;  the  roll  is  called, 
the  members  taking  their  seats  according  to  their  relative  rank 
alternately  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  president.  The  judge- 
advocate  is  commonly  seated  opposite  the  president,  and  seats 
are  provided  near  him  for  the  accused  and  his  counsel  and  for 
the  witnesses. 

When  the  preliminary  business,  such  as  examining  the  order 
convening  the  court  and  the  charges  and  specifications  referred 
to  the  court  for  trial,  is  disposed  of,  the  accused  is  introduced, 
and  upon  his  application  his  counsel  may  be  admitted  and  intro- 
duced at  this  stage  of  the  proceedings. 

238.  Q.  Who  presides  over  a  general  court-martial,  and  what 
are  the  duties  of  the  president  ?  A.  The  senior  in  rank  of  the 
members  present  presides.  He  administers  the  oath  to  the  judge- 
advocate,  presides  during  all  the  proceedings,  opens  the  court, 
calls  it  to  order  at  each  session,  announces  the  decisions  and  ad- 
journments of  the  court,  preserves  order  and  decorum,  sees  that 
the  rights  of  all  persons  before  the  court  who  are  entitled  to  con- 
sideration are  respected,  conducts  the  routine  of  each  day's  busi- 
ness, and  in  general  acts  as  the  organ  of  the  court.  At  the  con- 
clusion he  authenticates  the  record  by  his  signature  in  connection 
with  the  judge-advocate. 

239.  Q.  What  rules  govern  members  of  general  courts-martial 
in  voting?  A.  In  voting  the  members  are  required  to  begin 
with  the  youngest  in  commission.  All  questions  and  issues  are 
decided  by  a  majority  vote,  except  in  the  single  instance  of 
adjudging  a  death  sentence,  for  which  a  two-thirds  vote  is 
required.  A  tie  vote  is  no  vote,  i.e.,  a  proposition  upon  which 
the  vote  is  a  tie  is  not  carried. 

Chapter  X. 

240.  Q.  By  whom  is  the  judge-advocate  of  a  court-martial  ap- 
pointed, and  what  should  be  principally  his  personal  qualifications  ? 


MILITARY  LAW.  33 

A.  By  the  officers  convening  the  court.  Of  the  personal  qualifi- 
cations of  an  officer  for  the  position  of  judge-advocate,  the 
principal  are  :  1.  Fitness,  i.e.,  proper  training  and  aptitude.  2. 
Absence  of  bias,  i.e.,  an  absence  of  any  such  prejudice  for  or 
against  the  accused  as  may  materially  affect  the  efficient,  fair  or 
courteous  preformance  of  his  functions. 

241.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  judge-advocate  before  the 
trial  ?  A.  To  serve  upon  the  accused  a  copy  of  the  charges  and 
of  the  convening  order,  to  notify  him  of  the  time  and  place  of 
meeting  of  court,  to  obtain  from  him  the  names  of  the  witnesses 
whom  he  desires  summoned,  to  summon  or  cause  to  be  served 
with  summons  the  material  witnesses,  to  confer  with  the  wit- 
nesses for  the  prosecution  when  accessible,  to  procure  the  written 
evidence  required  to  be  used  on  the  trial,  and  otherwise  to  prepare 
duly  to  prosecute.  It  also  devolves  on  the  judge-advocate  to 
maiie  requisition  upon  the  quartermaster's  department  for  a  court- 
room and  furniture,  and  for  the  requisite  stationery. 

242.  Q.  What  capacities  does  the  judge-advocate  sustain  at 
the  trial.    A.  Prosecutor,  adviser  to  the  court  and  recorder. 

243.  Q.  Give  in  their  proper  order  the  details  the  record  of  a 
general  court-martial  should  exhibit.  A.  It  should  exhibit  first 
copies  of  order  or  orders  convening  the  court,  detailing  the  mem- 
bers and  judge-advocate,  relieving  or  adding  members,  changing 
the  time  or  place  of  session,  etc.  It  should  set  forth  the  original 
assembling  of  the  court,  and  all  subsequent  assemblings,  as  also 
all  adjournments  and  continuances.  It  should  state,  in  order, 
challenges,  if  any,  and  the  proceedings  had  thereon,  the  swearing 
of  the  members  and  judge-advocate,  the  arraignment,  charges, 
pleas,  (with  special  pleas  or  motions,  if  any),  the  full  testimony  in 
the  words  as  nearly  as  possible  of  the  witnesses,  with  the  deposi- 
tions and  documentary  evidence,  if  any  (the  latter  being, 
perferably,  annexed  as  exhibits),  the  closing  arguments  or  state- 
ments, the  findings,  and  the  sentence  in  case  of  conviction.  It 
should  also  embrace  any  proceedings  which  may  be  had  by  the 
court  upon  a  revision  for  the  purpose  of  correcting  errors.  It 
should  further  show,  in  compliance  with  regulations,  that  the 
record  is  authenticated  by  the  signatures  of  the  president  and  the 
judge-advocate. 

244.  Q.  What  power  does  the  law  vest  in  the  judge-advocate 
in  relation  to  compelling  witnesses  to  appear  before  courts*-mar- 
tial?  A.  He  is  empowered  to  issue  like  process  to  compel 
witnesses  to  appear  and  testify  which  courts  of  criminal  jurisdic- 
tion within  the  state,  territory  or  district,  where  such  military 
courts  shall  be  ordered  to  sit,  may  lawfully  issue. 

Chapter  XI. 

245.  Q.  Give  the  written  law  on  the  subject  of  challenges.  A. 
The  Articles  of  War  say  that  a  member  of  a  court-martial  may  be 


34  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

challenged  by  a  prisoner,  but  only  for  cause  stated  to  the  court. 
The  court  shall  determine  the  relevancy  and  validity  thereof,  and 
shall  not  receive  a  challenge  to  more  than  one  member  at  a  time. 
Further,  the  army  regulations  direct  that  the  record  of  the  court 
shall  show  that  previously  to  the  swearing  of  the  court  the 
accused  was  "  asked  whether  he  had  any  objection  to  any  mem- 
ber and  his  answer  thereto." 

246.  Q.  Give  the  principal  grounds  of  challenge.  A.  Opinion 
formed  or  expressed  ;  personal  prejudice  or  hostility ;  having 
preferred  the  charges  ;  being  a  material  witness  ;  interest — hav- 
ing a  right  to  promotion,  intimate  personal  relations  ;  having 
taken  part  in  a  former  trial  or  inquiry. 

Chapter  XII. 

247.  Q.  What  engagements  does  an  officer  assume  in  being 
sworn  as  a  member  of  a  court-martial  ?  A.  To  try  according  to 
evidence.  To  try  the  matter  before  the  court,  to  duly  admin- 
ister justice  without  partiality,  favor  or  affection.  To  administer 
justice  according  to  the  Art.  of  War.  In  case  of  doubt  to  admin- 
ister justice  according  to  his  conscience,  but  understanding,  and 
the  custom  of  war.  Not  to  divulge  the  sentence,  except  to  the 
judge-advocate,  before  it  is  duly  published,  or  to  disclose  the  vote 
or  opinion  of  any  member,  unless  required  to  do  so  as  a  witness 
before  a  court  of  justice. 

248.  Q.  If  an  accused  has  pleaded  to  the  charge  and  specifica- 
tion, may  he  withdraw  his  plea  and  substitute  another  ?  A.  If  he 
has  pleaded  not  guilty  he  may  be  permitted  by  the  court  to  with- 
draw his  plea  and  substitute  the  plea  of  guilty,  and  also  vice 
versa. 

249.  Q.  Name  the  special  pleas,  or,  as  they  are  sometimes 
termed,  the  pleas  in  bar.  A.  The  plea  to  the  jurisdiction;  the 
plea  of  the  statute  of  limitation  ;  the  plea  of  former  trial  for  the 
same  offence,  and  the  plea  of  pardon. 

Chapter  XIII. 

250.  Q.  What  are  the  legal  hours  of  session  of  a  court-martial 
when  not  extended  by  the  officer  appointing  the  court?  A. 
From  eight  in  the  morning  to  three  in  the  afternoon. 

251.  Q.  How  are  the  witnesses  in  a  case  before  a  court-martial 
qualified  ?  A.  By  being  sworn  in  accordance  with  the  92d  Article 
of  War. 

252.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  special  defences  available  in  trials 
before  courts-martial.  A.  Alibi,  ignorance  of  fact,  drunkenness, 
insanity,  compulsion  of  the  enemy,  requirements  of  military  dis- 
cipline. 


MILITARY   LAW.  35 

253.  Q.  May  civilians  refusing  to  testify  before  military  courts 
be  proceeded  against  by  military  courts  under  existing  laws  ?  A. 
No. 

Chapter  XIV. 

254.  Q.  "What  rules  of  evidence  should  in  general  govern  courts- 
martial  ?  A.  The  rules  of  the  law  of  evidence  as  recognized  and 
followed  by  the  criminal  courts  of  the  United  States.  These  are 
the  common-law  rules  of  evidence  in  criminal  cases  except  when 
Congress  has  provided  otherwise. 

255.  Q.  What  is  to  be  proved  in  a  case  before  a  court-martial  ? 
A.  1.  That  the  act  charged  as  an  offense  was  really  committed. 
2.  That  the  accused  copmitted  it.  3.  That  he  committed  it  with 
the  requisite  criminal  intent. 

256.  Q.  How  much  is  to  be  proved  to  authorize  a  conviction  ? 
A.  The  guilt  of  the  accused  must  be  established  beyond  a  reason- 
able doubt. 

257.  Q.  What  is  a  presumption  of  law  ?  A.  A  conclusion  or 
general  principle  arrived  at  by  the  law  itself,  and  accepted  by  the 
courts  without  evidence,  or  in  the  absence  of  evidence  to  the  con- 
trary. 

258.  Q.  What  is  a  presumption  of  fact  ?  A.  An  inference  or 
inferences  as  to  the  existence  of  a  fact  derived  from  some  other 
fact  or  facts. 

259.  Q.  Name  the  general  rules  governing  the  admission  of 
testimony.  A.  1.  The  evidence  must  be  relevant.  2.  The  burden 
of  proof  of  guilt  is  always  on  the  government.  3.  The  best  evi- 
dence must  be  produced  of  which  the  case  is  susceptible. 

260.  Q.  What  is  the  species  of  secondary  evidence  known  as 
hearsay  ?  A.  It  is  that  kind  of  evidence  which  does  not  derive 
its  value  solely  from  the  credit  to  be  given  to  the  witness  himself, 
but  rests  also,  in  part,  on  the  veracity  and  competentcy  of  some 
other  person. 

261.  Q.  Why  is  hearsay  testimony  inadmissible  ?  A.  On  ac- 
count of  its  intrinsic  uncertainty  growing  out  of  the  fact  that  it 
consists  of  matters  repeated  at  second  hand,  as  well  as  because  it 
presumes  the  existence  of  better  testimony,  and  because  it  intro- 
duces into  the  case  statements  not  made  under  oath,  the  truth 
of  which  cannot  be  tested  by  the  criterion  of  cross-examination. 

262.  Q.  Is  the  wife  of  an  accused  person  a  competent  witness 
before  a  court-martial  ?  A.  No  ;  except  in  cases  where  the  trial 
is  for  bodily  injury  or  violence  inflicted  by  the  husband  on  the 
wife,  or  vice  versa. 

263.  Q,  What  is  the  order  of  examining  witnesses  ?  A.  1.  Di- 
rect examination.     2.    Cross-examination.     3.    Re-examination. 

264.  Q.  What  is  a  leading  question  ?  A.  1.  One  which  sug- 
gests to  the  witness  the  answer  desired.  2.  One  which  embodies 
a  material  fact,  admits  of  an  answer  by  a  simple  negative  or 


36  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

aflBrmative.  3.  One  which  in  its  form  assumes  facts  to  have  been 
proved  which  have  not  been  proved,  or  assumes  that  particular 
answers  have  been  given  which  have  not  been  given. 

265.  Q.  How  may  the  testimony  of  a  witness  be  impeached  ? 
A.  By  introducing  testimony  that  the  witness  has  made  specific 
statements  out  of  court  contrary  to  what  he  has  testified  on  the 
stand  ;  or  by  introducing  testimony  attacking  his  general  reputa- 
tion as  a  truthful  person. 

266.  Q.  In  what  class  of  cases  may  depositions  be  introduced 
in  evidence  ?    A.  In  cases  not  capital. 

267.  Q.  How  may  the  writing  of  a  person  be  proved  before  a 
court-martial  ?  A.  By  the  testimony  of  witnesses  having  personal 
knowledge  of  the  handwriting,  or  by  the  comparison  of  handwrit- 
ing with  other  writings  in  evidence. 

Chapter  XV. 

268.  Q.  In  voting  upon  a  finding,  with  whom  does  the  voting 
begin  ?    A.  With  the  youngest  in  commission. 

269.  Q.  How  is  the  result  upon  a  finding  determined  ?  A.  By 
a  majority  vote. 

270.  Q*  What  is  the  result  of  a  tie  vote  upon  a  finding  ? 
A.  It  inures  to  the  benefit  of  the  accused  and  is  equivalent  to  an 
acquittal. 

271.  Q.  What  are  the  general  forms  of  findings  upon  specifica- 
tions ?  A.  Guilty  or  not  guilty  ;  confirming  the  plea ;  find  the 
facts  as  alleged,  but  attach  no  criminality  thereto  ;  and  findings 
with  exceptions  and  substitutions, 

272.  Q.  In  what  case  may  there  be  a  conviction  of  a  lesser 
offence  ?  Give  some  examples.  A.  When  the  offense  charged  in- 
volves and  contains  a  lesser  offense  as  a  legal  part  of  it,  and  the 
evidence  falls  short  of  establishing  the  greater,  but  shows  that 
the  accused  was  guilty  of  the  lesser  offense.  Absence  without 
leave  maybe  found  under  a  charge  of  desertion.  Similarly,  man- 
slaughter may  be  found  under  a  charge  of  murder,  larceny  under 
robbery,  and  an  attempt  to  commit  an  offense  under  a  charge  for 
the  offence  itself. 

273.  Q.  May  an  accused  be  convicted  under  one  Art.  of  War  of 
a  violation  of  another  ?  A.  When  an  accused  is  charged  with  a 
violation  of  an  article  making  punishable  a  certain  specific 
offence,  he  cannot  legally  be  found  "not  guilty,  but  guilty" 
of  some  other  specific  offense  made  punishable  by  another  article. 
But  when  the  evidence  fails  to  fix  upon  the  accused  the  specific 
offence  charged,  but  shows  him  to  have  committed  a  military 
neglect  or  disorder  as  involved  in"  his  act  or  acts,  the  court  is 
always  authorized  to  find  him  guilty  under  the  62d  Art.  of  War. 

274.  Q.  At  what  stage  should  previous  convictions  be  intro- 
duced?   A.  Immediately  after  a  finding  of ''guilty." 


MILITAEY  LAW.  37 


Chapter  XVI. 

275.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  voting  upon  a  sentence  when 
the  punishment  is  not  mandatory  ?  A.  Each  member  of  the  court, 
or  such  members  as  see  lit,  write  a  sentence.  These  are  handed 
to  the  President,  who  reads  them  to  the  court,  and  then  proceeds 
to  take  its  vote,  commencing  with  the  highest  recommended.  If 
this  be  rejected,  he  takes  the  next  highest  in  order,  and  so  on 
until  one  is  agreed  to  by  the  proper  number  of  members. 

276.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  a  tie  vote  in  voting  upon  a  sen- 
tence?   A.  It  is  futile  and  determines  nothing. 

277.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  legal  and  appropriate  punishments 
for  officers.  A.  Suspension  from  rank,  suspension  from  com- 
mand, loss  of  files  or  relative  rank,  reprimand,  admonition,  arrest, 
imprisonment,  loss  of  pay,  dismissal,  death. 

278.  Q.  How  many  species  of  imprisonment  are  recognized  in 
military  law?  A.  Simple  confinement,  confinement  at  hard 
labor,  confinement  in  a  penitentiary,  solitary  confinement  on 
bread  and  water. 

279.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  laid  down  in  the  Article  of  War  in  re- 
lation to  sentences  of  confinement  in  a  penitentiary  ?  A.  No  per- 
son in  the  military  service  shall,  under  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial,  be  confined  in  a  penitentiary,  unless  the  offense  of  which 
he  may  be  convicted  would,  by  some  statute  of  the  United  States,  or 
by  some  statute  of  the  state,  territory,  or  district  in  which  such 
offenses  may  be  committed,  or  by  the  common  law,  as  the  same 
exists  in  such  state,  territory  or  district,  subject  such  convict  to 
such  punishment. 

Chapter  XVII. 

280.  Q.  In  what  cases  does  the  President  act  as  reviewing  offi- 
cer of  courts-martial  proceedings  ?  A.  1.  In  cases  in  which  he 
has  himself  convened  the  court.  2.  In  cases  where  the  law  pro- 
vides that  the  sentences  adjudged  cannot  be  carried  into  execu- 
tion until  confirmed  by  him.  3.  In  cases  arising  in  time  of  war 
under  the  111th  Art.  of  War. 

281.  Q.  In  cases  where  the  law  requires  that  the  sentence  ad- 
judged shall  be  confirmed  by  an  authority  superior  to  the  conven- 
ing officer,  what  action  is  necessary  on  the  part  of  the  latter 
before  the  former  can  exercise  the  power  conferred  ?  A.  The 
convening  authority  must  first  approve  the  sentence  adjudged 
before  the  higher  authority  can  act.  If  the  former  disapproves 
there  is  nothing  left  for  the  latter  to  act  upon. 

282.  Q.  When  the  record  of  a  court-martial  exhibits  errors  in 
preparation,  or  seemingly  erroneous  conclusions  on  the  part  of 
the  court,  what  remedy  may  the  reviewing  authority  employ  ?  A. 
Under  such  circumstances  army  regulations  authorize  the  review- 


38  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

ing  officer  to  reconvene  the  court  for  a  reconsideration  of  its  ac- 
tion with  suggestions  for  its  guidance. 

283.  Q.  If  a  court-martial  has  been  reconvened  for  the  correc- 
tion of  errors  in  the  record,  and  it  finds  the  errors  pointed  out  to 
exist,  how  should  they  be  corrected  ?  A.  In  addition  proceed- 
ings, and  without  disturbing  the  original  record  by  additions  or 
erasures. 

284.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  an  executed  sentence?  A.  A  sen- 
tence once  duly  approved  and  fully  executed  is  conclusive  and 
final  so  far  as  regards  the  reviewing  authority.  He  cannot  recall 
the  action  taken,  reopen  the  case,  or  revoke,  set  aside,  rescind, 
or  modify  the  sentence.  An  executed  sentence  is  also  beyond 
the  pardoning  power. 

285.  Q.  Irrespective  of  the  pardoning  power  vested  by  the  con- 
stitution of  the  United  States  in  the  President,  by  whom  may 
the  power  to  pardon  and  mitigate  punishment  adjudged  by 
court-martial  be  exercised  ?  A.  By  the  officer  authorized  to  con- 
vene the  court  by  which  the  sentence  has  been  imposed,  except 
the  punishment  of  death  or  dismissal  of  an  officer. 

286.  Q.  When  may  this  power  be  exercised  ?  A.  At  the  time 
of  the  formal  approval  of  the  sentence,  and  at  any  stage  of  the 
execution  of  the  punishment,  so  long  as  any  portion  of  the  same 
remains  unexecuted. 

287.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  the  term  of  "commutation"  of  a 
sentence,  and  by  whom  may  this  power  be  exercised?  A.  It  is  a 
form  of  conditional  pardon,  and  is  applied  to  punishments  not 
capable  of  being  mitigated,  i.  e.  reduced  in  amount  or  quantity, 
and  form  ;  therefore,  a  sentenced  person  can  be  relieved  only  by 
the  substitution  of  other  and  different  punishments  of  a  milder 
character. 

Chapter  XVIII. 

288.  Q.  How  many  and  what  inferior  courts-martial  are  known 
to  our  military  law?  A.  Four:  viz.  (1),  the  regimental  court- 
martial;  (2),  the  garrison  court-martial;  (3),  the  field  officers', 
court;  (4),  -the  summary  court. 

289.  Q.  What  is  the  law  as  to  the  jurisdiction  of  these  courts, 
and  their  power  of  punishment  ?  A.  They  have  no  power  to  try 
capital  cases  or  commissioned  officers,  and  are,  therefore,  legally 
authorized  to  take  cognizance  of  all  military  offenses  of  soldiers,  ■ 
provided  the  same  are  not  made  punishable  capitally,  or  exclu- 
sively by  a  general  court.  But  as  their  authority  to  punish  is  so 
inadequate  to  the  proper  disposition  of  serious  and  grave  offenses 
in  the  case  of  conviction,  their  jurisdiction  has  been,  in  practice, 
confined  to  minor  offenses.  Their  power  to  punish  is  limited  to 
a  fine,  not  exceeding  one  month's  pay,  or  to  imprisonment  at 
hard  labor  not  longer  than  one  month. 


MILITARY   LAW.  SO 

290.  Q.  What  limitations  have  been  placed  upon  the  field 
officers'  court  and  the  summary  court?  A.  The  former  is  au- 
thorized only  in  time  of  war,  and  the  latter  exclusively  in  time  of 
peace. 

291.  Q.  In  what  cases  is  the  summary  court  barred  from  the 
adjudication  of  cases  properly  brought  before  it  ?  A.  When  the 
offender  objects  to  a  hearing  and  determination  of  his  case  by 
such  court  and  requests  a  trial  by  court-martial,  and  when  the 
summary  court  is  the  accuser,  the  case  must  be  heard  by  the  post- 
commander  or  by  a  regimental  or  garrison  court-martial. 

Chapter  XIX. 

292.  Q.  By  whom  and  for  what  purpose  may,  under  the  law, 
courts  of  inquiry  be  instituted  ;  how  is  this  power  limited  ?  A. 
The  President  and  any  commanding  officer  may  institute  courts 
of  inquiry  for  the  purpose  of  examining  into  the  nature  of  any 
transaction  of,  or  accusation  or  imputation  against,  any  officer  or 
soldier.  But  they  shall  never  be  ordered  by  any  commanding 
officer,  except  upon  the  demand  by  the  officer  or  soldier  whose 
conduct  is  to  be  inquired  of. 

293.  Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  a  court  of  inquiry  ?  A.  It 
shall  consist  of  one  or  more  officers,  not  exceeding  three,  and  a 
recorder. 

294.  Q.  May  a  member  of  a  court  of  inquiry  be  challenged  ? 
A.  Yes  ;  but  the  law  is  silent  upon  the  subject.  The  privilege  is 
granted  by  the  usages  of  the  service. 

295.  Q.  In  what  case  and  under  what  circumstances  may  the 
proceedings  of  a  court  of  inquiry  be  admitted  as  evidence  by  a 
court-martial?  A.  In  cases  not  capital,  nor  extending  to  the 
dismissal  of  an  officer,  and  when  the  circumstances  are  such  that 
oral  testimony  cannot  be  obtained. 

Chapter  XX. 

296.  Q.  What  offences  are  specified  in  the  three  Articles  of  War 
relating  to  muster  ?  A.  The  knowingly  making  a  false  nvuster  of 
a  soldier  or  other  person,  or  of  a  put  in  animal  ;  the  signing, 
directing,  or  allowing  the  signing  of  a  muster-roll,  knowing  the 
same  to  contain  a  false  muster ;  and  the  incidental  offence  of 
taking  money  or  other  bribe,  or  "gratification,"  as  a  considera- 
tion for  the  mustering  of  a  regiment  or  company,  or  for  the  sign- 
ing of  a  muster-roll. 

297.  Q.  What  is  a  muster?  A.  The  assembling,  inspecting, 
entering  upon  formal  rolls,  and  officially  reporting  as  a  compo- 
nent part  of  the  command,  of  persons  or  public  animals. 

298.  Q.  What  is  a  false  muster?  A.  The  offense  consists  in 
the  including,  knowingly,  by  an  officer,  at  a  formal  muster,  or 


40  THE  AKMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

upon  an  oflScial  muster-roll,  as  a  component  part  of  his  command, 
or  of  a  body  under  his  charge,  of  a  person,  as  a  soldier  or  public 
employ^,  who  is  not  such,  or  of  a  soldier  or  person  as  present 
who  is  absent,  discharged,  or  deceased,  or  of  a  person  designated 
by  a  false  name,  or  of  a  person  as  effective  who  is,  in  fact,  dis- 
abled and  ineffective,  or  of  a  public  animal,  which  does  not  exist, 
or  is  not  present,  etc. 

299.  Q.  What  presumption  governs  if  guilty  knowledge  on  the 
part  of  an  oflficer  cannot  be  established  by  direct  evidence  ?  A. 
An  officer  is  chargeable  with  the  knowledge  of  what  it  is  his 
office  to  know,  or  what  he  is  bound  to  know  in  the  performance 
of  the  particular  duty  devolving  upon  him. 

300.  Q.  How  many  witnesses  are  required  to  establish  the 
offense  of  false  muster  ?    A.  Two. 

301.  Q.  What  offenses  are  made  punishable  by  the  21st  Art.  of 
War?  A.  1.  The  commission  of  a  battery  or  of  an  assault  upon 
a  superior  officer,  while  he  is  in  the  execution  o£  his  office,  by 
striking  him,  drawing  or  lifting  up  a  weapon  menacingly  against 
him,  or  offering  him  another  form  of  physical  violence.  2.  The 
disobedience  of  the  lawful  order  of  a  superior  officer. 

302.  Q.  What  is  the  presumption  as  to  the  legality  of  an  order 
given  by  an  official  superior  ?  A.  An  order  of  an  official  supe- 
rior, not  palpably  illegal  upon  its  face,  is  to  be  presumed  to  be 
authorized  and  legal,  and  an  inferior  must  unhesitatingly  obey  it. 

303.  Q.  Define  the  term  "  mutiny."  A.  Mutiny  is  an  unlaw- 
ful opposition  or  resistance  to,  or  defiance  of,  superior  military 
authority,  with  a  deliberate  purpose  to  subvert  or  prevail  over 
the  same. 

304.  Q.  How  is  the  intent  in  a  case  of  mutiny  established  ?  A. 
It  may  be  proved  from  words  openly  declared,  or  it  may  be  im- 
plied from  the  act  or  acts  done.  The  fact  of  combination— that 
the  opposition  or  resistance  is  the  proceeding  of  a  number  of  in- 
dividuals acting  together  apparently  with  a  common  purpose — is 
the  most  significant  evidence  of  the  existence  of  the  intent  in 
question. 

305.  Q.  Is  a  violent  act  necessary  to  establish  mutiny  ?  A.  No. 
It  may  consist  simply  in  a  persistent  refusal  or  omission  (with  the 
necessary  intent)  to  obey  orders,  or  to  do  duty. 

306.  Q.  Is  a  combination  necessary  in  mutiny  ?  A.  No.  A 
single  person  may  entertain  the  intent,  and  commit  the  act  of 
mutiny. 

307.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  sedition,  as  used  in  the  Articles  of 
War  ?  A.  An  opposition  or  resistance  by  military  persons  to  the 
civil  authorities,  demonstrated  by  riot  or  other  breach  of  the  peace. 

308.  Q.  What  duty  does  the  23d  Art.  of  War  impose  upon  an 
officer  or  soldier  who  is  present  at  a  mutiny  or  sedition,  or  has 
knowledge  of  an  intended  mutiny  or  sedition  ?  A.  He  must -use 
his  utmost  endeavor  to  suppress  the  same,  and  if  he  has  knowl- 


MILITARY   LAW.  41 

edge  of  an  intended  mutiny  or  sedition,  he  must  without  delay 
give  information  thereof  to  his  commanding  officer. 

309.  Q.  What  is  an  affray  ?  A.  A  fighting  or  hostile  conten- 
tion of  two  or  more  parties  in  public,  to  the  terror  o^  the  citizen. 

310.  Q.  What  is  the  purpose  of  the  three  Articles  of  War  in  rela- 
tion to  challenges  to  fight  duels?  A.  They  aim  at  preventing 
duelling  in  the  army,  by  rendering  liable  to  immediate  arrest, 
trial,  and  severe  punishment,  all  military  persons  without  dis- 
tinction, who  send  or  accept  challenges,  act  as  seconds,  know- 
ingly carry  challenges,  or  acceptances,  or  otherwise  promote 
duels,  as  well  as  commanders  of  guards,  who  neglect  to  stop 
parties  going  out  to  fight  duels,  or  even  persons  who  upbraid 
others  with  refusing  to  accept  challenges. 

311.  Q.  What  is  a  duel  ?  A.  A  concerted  fight  between  two 
parties  with  deadly  weapons,  having  for  its  alleged  object  the 
satisfaction  of  wounded  honor. 

312.  Q.  What  is  a  challenge  ?  A.  A  written  or  verbal  invita- 
tion to  another — whether  military  person  or  civilian — to  unite  in 
such  a  combat. 

313.  Q.  How  should  an  officer  proceed  if  he  believes  himself 
wronged  by  his  regimental  commander?  A.  He  should  make 
due  application  to  such  officer  for  redress,  and  if  refused  such  re- 
dress he  may  complain  or  appeal  to  the  general  commanding  in 
the  state  or  territory  where  his  regiment  is  stationed.  (It  is  to 
be  remarked  in  this  connection  that  the  word  "protest,"  some- 
times used  by  officers,  is  a  most  uumilitary  term,  and  ought  to 
be  unknown  in  the  proper  administration  of  military  affairs.) 

314.  Q.  Define  the  term  "  desertion."  A.  Absence  from  regi- 
ment, station,  or  duty,  and  from  the  service  without  authority, 
and  with  the  intention  of  not  returning. 

315.  Q.  What  is  necessary  to  establish  a  charge  of  desertion  ? 
A.  1.  The  fact  that  the  accused  has  received  pay,  or  been  duly  en- 
listed. 2.  That  he  absented  himself  without  authority.  3.  That 
he  did  so  with  the  intention  not  to  return. 

316.  Q.^  What  is  the  provision  of  the  38th  Art.  of  War  in  rela- 
tion to  drunkenness  ?  A.  Any  officer  who  is  found  drunk  on  his 
guard,  party,  or  other  duty,  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service. 
Any  soldier  so  offending  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

317.  Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  words  *' found  on?"  A. 
That  the  drunkenness  of  the  offender  must  exhibit  itself  after  he 
has  entered  upon  and  while  he  is  on  the  duty,  and  not  that  he 
shall  have  become  drunk,  but  that  he  shall  have  been  discovered 
or  perceived  to  be  drunk  when  on  duty. 

318.  Q.  What  does  the  term  "  duty  "  include  ?  A.  All  descrip- 
tions and  circumstances  of  duty. 

319.  Q.  In  the  case  of  an  officer,  what  is  embraced  in  the  term 
*'  military  duty  "  ?    A.  Every  duty  which  an  officer  is  legally  re- 


42  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

quired  by  superior  authority  to  execute,  and  for  the  proper  execu- 
tion of  which  he  is  answerable  to  such  authority. 

320.  Q.  What  is  the  provision  in  the  Articles  of  War  concerning 
the  oflFenses  of  sentinels  ?  A.  Any  sentinel  who  is  found  sleeping 
upon  his  post,  or  leaves  it  before  he  is  regularly  relieved,  shall 
suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

321.  Q.  What  is  the  provision  in  the  Articles  of  War  concerning 
misbehavior  before  the  enemy,  and  pillaging  ?  A.  Any  officer  or 
soldier  who  misbehaves  himself  before  the  enemy,  runs  away,  or 
shamefully  abandons  any  fort,  post,  or  guard,  which  he  is  com- 
manded to  defend,  or  speaks  words  inducing  others  to  do  the  like, 
or  casts  away  his  arms  or  ammunition,  or  quits  his  post  or  colors 
to  plunder  or  pillage,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

322.  Q.  What  application  has  the  word  "whosoever"  in  the 
45th  Art.  of  War  in  relation  to  relieving  the  enemy  with  money, 
victuals,  or  ammunition,  etc.?  A.  The  word  covers  civil  as  well 
as  military  persons. 

323.  Q.  What  is  necessary  to  constitute  this  offense  ?  A.  That 
the  enemy  must  be  actually  relieved — reached  by  the  succor  of 
assistance  tendered. 

324.  Q.  When  is  the  crime  of  holding  correspondence  with  the 
enemy  complete  ?  A.  In  the  writing  or  preparing  of  the  letter  or 
other  communication,  and  the  committing  it  to  a  messenger,  or 
otherwise  putting  it  in  the  way  to  be  delivered.  It  is  not  essen- 
tial that  it  be  received  by  the  person  for  whom  it  is  intended,  or 
that  it  reach  its  place  of  destination. 

325.  Q.  Does  the  same  rule  apply  to  the  crime  of  giving  intel- 
ligence to  the  enemy  ?  A.  No.  In  this  case  it  is  necessary  that 
the  enemy  shall  have  been  actually  informed. 

326.  Q.  What  is  a  safeguard  ?  A.  It  signifies  a  special  privi- 
lege of  protection  for  person,  household,  or  property — all  or 
either — against  military  marauders,  or  other  disorderly  parties, 
granted  by  a  military  commander  to  private  individuals,  to  cor- 
porations, or  to  hospitals,  or  other  public  institutions. 

327.  Q.  Name  the  civil  crimes  of  which  a  court-martial  has 
jurisdiction,  under  the  provisions  of  the  58th  Art.  of  War,  in 
time  of  war,  when  committed  by  persons  in  the  military  service. 
A.  Larceny,  robbery,  burglary,  arson,  mayhem,  manslaughter, 
murder,  assault  and  battery  with  an  intent  to  kill,  wounding  by 
shooting,  or  stabbing  with  an  intent  to  commit  murder,  rape,  or 
assault  and  battery  with  an  intent  to  commit  rape. 

328.  Q.  What  is  the  provision  concerning  the  punishment  to 
be  awarded  upon  conviction  for  any  of  the  crimes  named  ?  A. 
The  punishment  in  any  case  shall  not  be  less  than  the  punish- 
ment provided  for  the  like  offense  by  the  laws  of  the  state,  ter- 


MILITARY  LAW.  43 

ritory,  or  district  in  which  such  offense  may  have  been  com- 
mitted. 

329.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  58th  Art.  of  War  ?  A.  To 
provide  in  time  of  war  for  the  punishment  of  the  crifties  of  per- 
sons in  the  army  in  localities  where,  in  consequence  of  military 
occupation  or  the  prevalence  of  martial  law,  the  action  of  the 
civil  courts  is  suspended,  or  their  authority  cannot  be  exercised 
with  the  promptitude  and  efficiency  required  by  the  exigencies 
of  the  period  and  the  necessities  of  military  government. 

330.  Q.  Define  the  crime  of  murder.  A.  Homicide  with  malice 
aforethought. 

331.  Q.  Name  and  define  the  two  kinds  of  malice  aforethought. 
A.  Malice  aforethought  is  either  "express"  or  "implied"; 
"  express  "  when  the  intent — as  manifested  by  previous  enmity, 
threats,  the  absence  of  any  sufficient  provocation,  etc. — is  to  take 
the  life  of  the  particular  person  killed,  or  to  inflict  upon  him 
some  excessive  bodily  injury  which  may  naturally  result  in  death  ; 
"  implied,"  when  the  intent  is  to  commit  a  felonious  or  unlawful 
act,  but  not  to  kill  or  injure  the  particular  person. 

332.  Q.  What  is  the  presumption  of  law  in  every  case  of  appar- 
ently deliberate  and  unjustifiable  killing  ?  A.  The  existence  of 
the  malice  necessary  to  constitute  murder  is  presumed,  and  de- 
volves upon  the  accused  the  omis  of  rebutting  the  presumption. 

333.  Q.  What  is  justifiable  and  excusable  homicide  ?  A.  It  is 
"  justifiable  "  when  committed  by  a  public  officer  in  the  due  exe- 
cution of  the  laws  or  administration  of  public  justice,  or  when 
committed  by  any  person  in  the  due  prevention  of  a  violent 
crime.  It  is  "excusable"  when  it  is  the  result  of  accident  or 
mishap,  or  when  it  is  committed  in  self-defense. 

334.  Q.  Define  the  crime  of  manslaughter.  A.  An  unlawful 
killing  without  malice  aforethought,  expressed  or  implied. 

335.  Q.  What  is  voluntary  and  involuntary  manslaughter  ?  A. 
"Voluntary,"  when  committed  in  a  moment  of  excitement  or 
while  under  the  influence  of  passion,  and  commonly  either  in  the 
course  of.  a  sudden  fighting  or  upon  some  immediate  strong 
provocation.  "Involuntary,"  when  death  is  caused  accidentally 
and  unintentionally,  either  by  the  doing  of  an  act  which,  though 
unlawful,  is  not  felonious  or  highly  criminal  or  likely  to  be  dan- 
gerous to  human  life  ;  or  by  the  doing  of  a  lawful  act  in  an  in- 
cautious or  negligent  manner. 

336.  Q.  What  is  "mayhem"?  A.  The  violently  inflicting, 
upon  any  part  of  a  man's  body,  of  such  an  injury  as  to  render 
him  less  able  to  fight  or  defend  himself  against  his  adversary. 

337.  Q.  Define  "rape."  A.  The  unlawful  carnal  knowledge 
of  a  woman  forcibly  and  against  her  consent. 

338.  Q.  What  is  robbery  ?  A.  A  felonious  taking  of  his  prop- 
erty from  the  person,  or  presence,  of  an othgfg^gjjmtjatfe^  vio- 
lence or  putting  him  in  fear.  j^^^^^'^^^^^^^^ 


44  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

339.  Q.  Define  the  crime  of  "  arson."  A.  The  malicious  burn- 
ing of  the  house  of  another.  ,      o  , 

340.  Q.  Define  the  crime  of  ''burglary."  A.  An  unlawful 
breaking  and  entering,  in  the  night-time,  into  the  dwelling-house 
of  another,  with  the  intent  of  committing  a  felony  therein. 

341.  Q.  Define  the  crime  of  "larceny."  A.  A  taking  of  per- 
sonal property  from  the  possession  of  the  owner,  without  his 
consent,  with  the  intent  to  appropriate  the  same. 

342.  Q.  What  is  the  great  principle  established  in  our  public 
law  which  regulates  the  relations  of  the  military  to  the  civil  au- 
thority ?  A.  In  time  of  peace  and  on  common  ground  the  mili- 
tary is  subordinate  to  the  civil ;  and  that  military  persons  are 
am'enable  in  their  civil  capacity  to  the  civil  jurisdiction  for 
breaches  of  the  criminal  law. 

343.  Q.  What  Article  of  War  has  been  enacted  in  recognition 
of  these  principles,  and  what  is  its  general  purpose  ?  A.  The  fifty- 
ninth.  Its  general  purpose  is  to  aid  the  civil  authorities  in  the 
administration  of  justice,  and  to  place  it  out  of  the  power  of  a 
criminal  to  escape  the  just  civil  penalties  of  his  acts  by  entering 
the  military  service  or  claiming  its  protection  while  in  it. 

344.  Q.  What  is  the  nature  of  the  requirement,  in  this  article  ? 
A.  The  commanding  oflBcer  or  other  officers,  in  time  of  peace,  are 
required  to  cause  to  be  surrendered  upon  due  application  to  the 
civil  authorities,  and  to  aid  them  in  securing,  any  such  military 
persons  as  may  be  accused  of  the  crimes  or  offenses  specified. 

345.  Q.  Define  "  embezzlement."  A.  A  fraudulent  or  unlaw- 
ful appropriation  of  money  or  other  property,  by  a  person  in  a 
fiduciary  capacity,  to  whom,  in  such  capacity,  it  has  been  in- 
trusted by  the  owner. 

346.  Q.  In  a  general  sense,  what  acts  are  embraced  in  the 
term  "conduct  unbecoming  an  ofiicer  and  a  gentleman"?  A. 
Acts  of  military  oflScers  which  tend  to  bring  disgrace  and  reproach 
upon  the  service  of  which  they  are  members,  whether  these  acts 
are  done  in  the  performance  of  military  duty,  or  in  a  civil  position, 
or  in  a  social  relation,  or  in  private  business. 

347.  Q.  What  is  the  general  definition  of  "  conduct  unbecoming 
an  officer  and  a  gentleman"?  A.  Action  or  behavior  in  an 
official  capacity  which,  in  dishonoring  or  otherwise  disgracing  the 
individual  as  an  officer,  seriously  compromises  his  character  and 
standing  as  a  gentleman  ;  or,  action  or  behavior  in  an  unofficial 
or  private  capacity  which,  in  dishonoring  or  disgracing  the  indi- 
vidual personally  as  a  gentleman,  seriously  compromises  his 
position  as  an  officer,  and  exhibits  him  as  morally  unworthy  to 
remain  a  member  of  the  honorable  profession  of  arms. 

348.  Q.  What  offenses  are  made  punishable  by  courts-martial 
under  the  62d  Art.  of  War?  A.  1.  Crimes  not  capital,  i.e.,  not 
made  punishable  by  death  under  the  common  law  or  by  a  statute 
of  the  United  States  applicable  to  the  case.    2.  Neglects  of  duty, 


MILITARY  LAW.  45 

including  evasions  of  and  failures  to  fully  or  properly  perform 
duty.  3.  Disorders,  i.e.,  acts  of  insubordination,  violence,  im- 
morality, or  drunken  conduct,  or  other  serious  irregularity,  not 
punishable  under  any  other  articles — provided  the  same  are  such 
as  to  be  prejudicial  to  good  and  military  discipline. 

349.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  "good  order"?  A.  It 
refers  mainly  to  the  order  of  the  service,  though,  in  cases  of  some 
crimes  or  of  disorders  amounting  to  breaches  of  the  peace,  it  may 
be  deemed  to  include  also  the  order  of  the  civil  community. 

350.  Q.  Define  the  term  "spy."  A.  A  spy  is  a  person  who, 
without  authority,  secretly  collects,  or  attempts  to  collect,  material 
information  within  the  lines  of  one  of  the  hostile  armies,  with 
the  design  of  imparting  it  to  the  other. 

351.  Q.  Is  it  necessary  that  a  spy  shall  be  tried  by  a  court- 
martial,  or  military  commission?  A.  No.  The  military  com- 
mander may  proceed  summarily  against  him  and  have  him  shot 
without  trial,  if  the  facts  and  the  circumstances  of  the  emergency 
are  such  as  to  warrant  it. 


G.  O.,  No.  100,  of  1863. 
(For  Captains.) 

Section  I. 

352.  Q.  What  is  martial  law,  in  what  does  it  consist,  and  by 
whom  is  it  executed  and  carried  out  ?  A.  Martial  law  is  military 
authority  exercised  in  accordance  with  the  laws  and  usages  of 
war  in  a  place  or  district  occupied  by  an  enemy,  and  is  the  im- 
mediate and  direct  effect  and  consequence  of  occupation  or  con- 
quest ;  it  also  exists  in  the  commander's  own  country  upon  the 
theatre  of  war  when  face  to  face  with  the  enemy.  It  consists  in 
a  hostile  country  in  the  suspension  by  the  military  authority  of 
the  criminal  and  civil  law  and  of  the  domestic  administration 
and  government  in  the  occupied  place,  and  in  the  substitution  of 
military  rule  or  force  for  the  same,  as  well  as  in  the  dictation  of 
general  laws,  as  far  as  military  necessity  requires  this  suspension, 
substitution  or  dictation.  It  is  executed  by  military  force,  and 
whenever  possible  is  carried  out  in  cases  of  individual  offenders 
by  military  court. 

353.  Q.  What  is  military  jurisdiction  ?  A.  It  is  of  two  kinds  : 
1.  That  which  is  conferred  by  statute  ;  2.  That  which  is  derived 
from  the  common  law  of  war.  Cases  arising  under  the  first  are 
tried  by  courts-martial ;  offenses  under  the  latter  are  tried  by 
military  commission. 

354.  Q.  What  does  military  necessity  consist  of  ?  A.  In  the 
necessity  of  those  measures  which  are  indispensable  for  securing 


46  THE   AEMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

the  ends  of  war,  and  which  are  lawful  according  to  the  modern 
law  and  usages  of  war. 

355.  Q.  Define  the  term  "public  war."  A.  A  state  of  armed 
hostility  between  sovereign  nations  and  governments. 

356.  Q.  What  is  the  condition  of  a  citizen  or  native  of  a  hostile 
country  during  war  ?  A.  He  is  an  enemy  as  one  of  the  constitu- 
ents of  the  hostile  state  or  nation,  and  as  such  subjected  to  the 
hardships  of  the  war.  But  otherwise,  as  long  as  he  takes  no  part 
in  the  war,  he  is  entitled  to  protection  and  is  as  little  disturbed 
in  his  private  relations  as  the  commander  of  the  hostile  troops  can 
afford  to  grant  in  the  overruling  demands  of  a  rigorous  war. 

357.  Q.  When  may  retaliation  be  resorted  to  ?  A.  As  a  means 
of  protective  retribution,  after  careful  inquiry  into  the  real  occur- 
rence and  the  character  of  the  misdeeds  that  may  demand  retri- 
bution. 

Section  II. 

358.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  the  capture  of  the  public  prop- 
erty of  the  enemy  ?  A.  A  victorious  army  appropriates  all  pub- 
lic money,  seizes  all  public  movable  property  until  further  direc- 
tion by  its  government,  and  sequesters,  for  its  benefit  or  that  of 
its  government,  all  the  revenues  of  real  property  belonging  to 
the  hostile  nation.  Churches,  hospitals,  establishments  of  edu- 
cation, observatories,  museums  of  fine  arts  or  of  a  scientific  char- 
acter are  not  to  be  considered  public  property,  liable  to  capture 
and  appropriation,  and  should  be  secured  against  all  avoidable 
injury  and  wanton  destruction. 

359.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  private  property  in  the  enemy's 
country?  A.  Unless  forfeited  by  crimes  or  by  offenses  of  the 
owner,  private  property  can  be  seized  only  by  way  of  military 
necessity  for  the  support  of  the  army  of  the  United  States.  If 
the  owner  has  not  fled,  the  commanding  officer  will  cause  re- 
ceipts to  be  given,  which  may  serve  the  spoliated  owner  to  ob- 
tain indemnity. 

360.  Q.  What  is  the  provision  as  to  the  punishment  of  crimes 
against  the  inhabitants  of  hostile  countries?  A.  All  wanton 
violence  committed  against  persons  in  the  invaded  country,  all 
destruction  of  property  not  commanded  by  the  authorized  officer, 
all  robbery,  all  pillage  or  sacking,  rape,  wounding,  maiming,  or 
killing  of  such  inhabitants  are  prohibited  under  penalty  of  death 
or  other  punishment  as  may  seem  adequate  for  the  gravity  of  the 
offense. 

Section  III. 

361.  Q.  What  is  a  prisoner  of  war  ?  A.  A  public  enemy  armed 
or  attached  to  the  hostile  army  for  active  aid,  who  has  fallen  into 
the  hnnds  of  the  captor,  either  fighting  or  wounded  on  the  field 
or  in  the  hospital,  by  individual  surrender  or  by  capitulation. 


MILITARY   LAW.  47 

362.  Q.  What  other  classes  of  persons  are,  when  captured,  re- 
garded as  prisoners  of  war  ?  A.  All  citizens  accompanying  an 
army  for  whatever  purpose  ;  the  monarch  and  members  of  the 
hostile  reigning  family,  the  chief  and  chief  officers  of  the  hos- 
tile government,  and  all  persons  who  are  of  particular  and  sin- 
gular use  and  benefit  to  the  hostile  army  or  its  government. 

363.  Q.  What  is  a  hostage?  A.  A  person  accepted  as  a  pledge 
for  the  fulfilment  of  an  agreement  concluded  between  belligerents 
during  the  war,  or  in  consequence  of  war. 

364.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  fidng  upon  outposts  and  sen- 
tinels ?  A.  They  are  not  to  be  fired  upon,  except  to  drive  them 
in,  or  when  a  positive  order,  special  or  general,  has  been  issued 
to  that  effect. 

365.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  the  private  property  of  prisoners 
of  war?  A.  Money  and  other  valuables  on  the  person  of  a  pris- 
oner, such  as  watches  or  jewelry,  as  well  as  extra  clothing,  are 
regarded  as  the  private  property  of  the  prisoner,  and  the  appro- 
priation of  such  valuables  or  money  is  prohibited. 

366.  Q.  What  treatment  should  be  accorded  prisoners  of  war? 
A.  They  are  subject  to  confinement  such  as  may  be  deemed  nec- 
essary for  their  safety,  but  they  are  not  to  be  subjected  to  other 
intentional  suffering  or  indignity.  They  shall  be  fed  upon  plain 
and  wholesome  food  whenever  practicable,  and  treated  with  hu- 
manity. They  may  be  required  to  work  for  the  benefit  of  the 
captor's  government,  according  to  their  rank  and  condition. 

Section  IV. 

367.  Q.  What  are  partisans  ?  A.  They  are  soldiers  armed  and 
wearing  the  uniform  of  their  army,  but  belonging  to  a  corps  which 
acts  detached  from  the  main  body  for  the  purpose  of  making  in- 
roads into  the  territory  occupied  by  the  enemy  ;  they  are  entitled 
to  all  the  privileges  of  prisoners  of  war. 

368.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  armed  enemies  not  belonging  to 
the  hostile  army?  A.  Not  being  public  enemies,  they  are  not 
entitled  to  be  treated  as  prisoners  of  war,  but  shall  be  treated 
summarily  as  highway  robbers  or  pirates. 

369.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  scouts  and  armed  prowlers  ?  A. 
Scouts  or  single  soldiers,  if  disguised  in  the  dress  of  the  country, 
or  in  the  uniform  of  the  army  hostile  to  their  own,  employed  in 
obtaining  information,  if  found  within  or  working  about  the 
lines  of  the  captor,  are  treated  as  spies,  and  suffer  death. 
Armed  prowlers,  by  whatever  names  they  may  be  called,  or  per- 
sons in  the  enemy's  territory,  who  steal  within  the  lines  of  the 
hostile  army  for  the  purpose  of  committing  depredations,  are  not 
entitled  to  the  privileges  of  prisoners  of  war. 

370.  Q.  What  are  war-rebels,  and  what  is  the  rule  as  to  their 
treatment?    A.  They  are  persons  within  an  occupied  territory 


48  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

who  rise  in  arms  against  the  occupying  or  conquering  army,  oi 
against  the  authorities  established  by  the  same.  If  captured  they 
may  suffer  death  ;  they  are  not  prisoners  of  war. 

Section  V. 

371.  Q.  Define  the  term  "spy."  A.  A  spy  is  a  person  who 
secretly,  in  disguise  or  under  false  pretence,  seeks  information 
with  the  intention  of  communicating  it  to  the  enemy. 

372.  Q.  How  is  a  spy  pujiishable  ?  A.  With  death  by  hanging 
by  the  neck. 

373.  Q.  What  is  a  war-traitor  under  the  laws  of  war  ?  A.  A 
person  in  a  place  or  district  under  martial  law  who,  unauthorized 
by  the  military  commander,  gives  information  of  any  kind  to  the 
enemy  or  holds  intercourse  with  him. 

374.  Q.  What  is  the  treatment  of  a  captured  messenger  ?  A. 
A  messenger  carrying  written  despatches  or  other  messages 
in  the  territory  occupied  by  the  army  to  which  he  belongs,  if 
armed  and  in  the  uniform  of  his  army,  is  treated  by  the  captor 
as  a  prisoner  of  war ;  if  not  in  uniform,  nor  a  soldier,  the  cir- 
cumstances connected  with  his  capture  must  determine  the  dis- 
position which  shall  be  made  of  him.  But  a  messenger  who  at- 
tempts to  steal  through  the  territory  occupied  by  the  enemy,  if 
captured,  is  not  entitled  to  the  privileges  of  a  prisoner  of  war. 

375.  Q.  When  does  the  power  to  punish  a  spy  or  war-traitor 
cease  ?  A.  When  he  has  successfully  returned  to  his  own  army. 
Should  he  afterward  be  captured  as  an  en6my  he  is  not  subject 
to  punishment  for  his  acts  as  a  spy  or  war-traitor,  but  may  be 
held  in  closer  custody  as  a  person  individually  dangerous. 

Section  YI. 

376.  Q.  How  are  prisoners  of  war  exchanged  ?  A.  Exchanges 
of  prisoners  take  place — number  for  number — rank  for  rank — 
command  for  command — with  added  conditions  for  added  con- 
ditions— such,  for  instance,  as  not  to  serve  for  a  certain  period. 
Such  numbers  of  persons  of  inferior  rank  may  be  substituted  as 
an  equivalent  for  one  of  superior  rank  as  may  be  agreed  upon  by 
cartel,  which  requires  the  sanction  of  the  government,  or  of  the 
commander  of  the  army  in  the  field. 

377.  Q.  How  is  communication  established  between  belligerents 
in  the  field  ?  And  what  are  the  rules  governing  the  same  ?  A. 
Communication  is  established  by  means  of  a  flag  of  truce,  but  the 
bearer  thereof  cannot  insist  upon  being  admitted.  During  an 
enga.gement  he  can  be  admitted  as  a  very  rare  exception  only,  and 
if  so  admitted  it  is  no  breach  of  faith  to  retain  him.  Firing  in 
battle  is  not  required  to  cease  upon  the  appearance  of  a  flag  of  truce. 
If  it  be  discovered  and  fairly  proved  that  9.  flag  of  truce  has  been 


MILITAKY  LAW.  49 

abused  for  surreptitiously  obtaining  military  knowledge,  the 
bearer  of  a  flag  thus  abusing  his  sacred  character  is  deemed  a 
spy. 

Section  VII. 

378.  Q.  How  may  prisoners  of  war  be  exchanged  from  captiv- 
ity ?  A.  By  exchange,  and,  under  certain  circumstances,  also  by 
parole. 

379.  Q.  What  is  a  parole  ?  A.  A  promise  of  a  prisoner  of  war 
by  which,  in  consideration  of  certain  privileges  or  advantages,  he 
pledges  his  individual  good  faith  and  honor  to  do,  or  omit  doing, 
certain  acts. 

380.  Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  governing  the  giving  of  a 
parole  ?  A.  Commissioned  officers  only  are  allowed  to  give  their 
parole,  and  only  with  the  permission  of  their  superior  officer  as 
long  as  a  superior  in  rank  is  within  reach.  No  non-commissioned 
officer  can  give  his  parole  except  through  an  officer.  The  usual 
pledge  given  in  the  parole  is  not  to  serve  during  the  existing  war, 
unless  exchanged.  If  the  government  does  not  approve  the 
parole,  the  paroled  officer  must  return  into  captivity ;  and 
should  the  enemy  refuse  to  receive  him,  he  is  free  of  his  parole. 
No  prisoner  of  war  can  be  forced  by  the  hostile  government  to 
parole  himself. 

Section  VIII. 

381.  Q.  What  is  an  armistice  ?  A.  The  cessation  of  active 
hostilities  for  a  period  agreed  upon  between  belligerents. 

382.  Q.  When  does  an  armistice  become  binding  upon  belliger- 
ents ?  A.  From  the  day  of  the  agreed  commencement,  but  the 
officers  of  the  armies  are  responsible  from  the  day  only  when 
they  receive  official  information  of  the  evidence. 

383.  Q.  What  is  necessary  to  carry  out  a  stipulated  armistice  ? 
A.  It  must  be  agreed  upon  in  writing  and  be  ratified  by  the 
highest  authority  of  the  contending  parties. 

384.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  the  declaration  of  an  armistice 
without  conditions  ?  A.  It  extends  no  further  than  to  require  a 
total  cessations  of  hostilities  along  the  front  of  both  belligerents. 

Section  IX. 

385.  Q.  What  is  the  law  of  war  as  to  assassination  ?  A.  It  does 
not  allow  proclaiming  either  an  individual  belonging  to  the 
hostile  army,  or  a  citizen  or  subject  of  the  hostile  government,  an 
outlaw,  who  may  be  slain  without  trial  by  any  captor ;  and  civil- 
ized nations  look  with  horror  upon  offers  of  rewards  for  the 
assassination  of  enemies  as  relapses  into  barbarism. 


50  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

Section  X. 

386.  Q.  What  is  an  isurrection  ?  A.  The  rising  of  people  in 
arms  against  their  government  or  a  portion  of  it,  or  against  one 
or  more  of  its  laws,  or  against  an  officer  or  officers  of  the  govern- 
ment. 

387.  Q.  Define  the  term  "civil  war "  and  "rebellion."  A. 
Civil  war  is  war  between  two  or  more  portions  of  a  country  or  state, 
each  contending  for  the  mastery  of  the  whole,  and  each  claiming 
to  be  the  rightful  government.  The  term  rebellion  is  applied  to 
an  insurrection  of  large  extent,  and  is  usually  a  war  between  the 
legitimate  government  of  a  country  and  portions  or  provinces 
of  the  same  which  seek  to  throw  off  their  allegiance  to  it,  and  set 
up  a  government  of  their  own. 

388.  Q.  How  are  all  enemies  in  regular  war  divided  ?  A.  into 
two  classes  ;  that  is  to  say,  into  combatants  and  non-combatants, 
or  unarmed  citizens  of  the  hostile  government. 


WINTHROP'S  MILITARY  LAW,  VOL.  XL 
I. 

THE  LAW  OF  WAR. 

[That  portion  touched  upon  in  General  Orders  100  relating  to  the  law  of  war 
has  been  omitted.  The  text  on  "  Reconstruction  "  has  also  been  left  out,  as  it  is 
now  of  historical  value  only,  and  not  a  matter  of  instruction  for  oflBcers.] 

389.  Q.  What  is  the  leading  case  in  our  law  on  the  taking  of 
personal  property  of  our  own  people  in  time  of  war  ?  Give  the 
leading  features  of  it.  A.  It  is  the  case  of  Mitchell  v.  Harmony, 
decided  by  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States.  Judgment 
for  about  $90,000  was  given  against  Lieutenant-Colonel  Mitchell 
of  Colonel  Doniphan's  command,  on  account  of  the  appropriation 
at  Chihuahua  in  1847,  during  the  war  with  Mexico,  of  horses, 
mules,  wagons  and  goods  belonging  to  the  plaintiff,  a  trader,  at 
a  time  when  the  same,  though  important  for  facilitating  the 
operations  of  the  army,  were  not  necessary  for  its  use,  and  were 
not  in  danger  of  falling  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy,  then  more 
than  two  hundred  miles  distant  and  not  advancing. 

390.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  military  government  ?  A.  The  do- 
minion exercised  in  war  by  a  belligerent  power  over  territory  of 
the  enemy,  invaded  and  occupied  by  him,  and  over  the  inhabit- 
ants thereof. 

391.  Q.  Give  some  instances  of  military  government.  A.  In 
the  Revolutionary  War,  during  the  occupancy  by  the  British  of 
Boston,  New  York,  and  Philadelphia;  at  Castine,  Me.,  when  taken 
and  held  by  the  British  in  1814-15,  and  in  the  provinces  of 


MILITARY   LAW.  51 

Mexico,  in  the  course  of  the  conquest  of  the  same  by  our  forces 
in  1846-47. 

392.  Q.  By  whom  is  military  government  exercised  ?  A.  By 
the  military  commander  under  the  direction  of  the  President 
with  the  express  or  implied  sanction  of  Congress. 

393.  Q.  What  has  been  said  by  the  Supreme  Court  in  rela- 
tion to  the  power  of  military  government  ?  A.  The  governing 
authority  may  do  anything  necessary  to  strengthen  itself  and 
weaken  the  enemy.  There  is  no  limit  to  the  powers  that  may  be 
exerted  in  such  case  save  those  which  are  found  in  the  laws  and 
usages  of  war.  In  such  cases  the  laws  of  war  take  the  place  of 
the  Constitution  and  laws  of  the  United  States  as  applied  in  time 

of  peace. 

394.  Q.  Name  the  leading  cases  arising  during  the  Mexican 
War  in  which  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States  passed 
upon  some  of  the  features  of  the  exercise  of  military  government  ? 
A.  The  cases  of  Cross  v.  Harrison  and  Seitenstufer  v.  Webb,  in 
which  the  Supreme  Court  affirmed  the  legality  of  the  action  of 
General  Kearney  in  establishing  civil  governments  in  California 
and  New  Mexico,  respectively. 

395.  Q.  What  did  Chief  Justice  Chase  substantially  hold  in  re- 
lation to  the  authority  and  jurisdiction  of  the  courts  established 
by  military  power  during  the  occupation  of  the  enemy's  country 
in  the  late  Civil  War  ?  A.  He  held  in  his  address  at  Raleigh, 
N.  C,  in  June,  1867,  that  the  national  military  authorities  took  the 
place  of  all  ordinary  civil  jurisdiction,  or  controlled  its  exercise. 
The  military  tribunals  at  that  time  and  under  the  circumstances 
were  competent  to  the  exercise  of  all  jurisdiction,  criminal  and 
civil,  which  belongs  under  ordinary  circumstances  to  civil  courts. 

396.  Q.  What  is  martial  law  ?  A.  Military  rule  exercised  by 
the  United  States  (or  a  State)  over  its  own  citizens  in  an  emer- 
gency justifying  it. 

397.  Q.  What  is  its  occasion  and  field?  A.  Martial  law  is  con- 
fined to  the  locality  of  actual  war;  it  can  never  exist  when  the 
courts  are  open,  and  in  the  proper  and  unobstructed  exercise  of 
their  jurisdiction. 

398.  Q.  What  are  the  limitations  of  martial  law  ?  A.  The  em- 
ployment of  martial  law  has  been  likened  to  the  exercise  of  the 
right  of  self-defense  by  an  individual.  Its  occasion  and  justifi- 
cation thus  is  necessity.  It  can  be  continued  only  so  long  as  the 
public  exigency  on  account  of  which  it  was  declared  shall  pre- 
vail. 

399.  Q.  Give  some  instances  illustrating  the  operations  of  mar- 
tial law.  A.  General  Jackson  declared  martial  law  in  New  Or- 
leans in  December,  1814,  when  the  British  forces  threatened 
that  city.  President  Lincoln  declared  the  insurrectionary  States 
subject  to  martial  law  in  1862,  and  caused  martial  law  to  be  es- 
tablished in  Kentucky  in  1864. 


52 

400.  Q.  In  whom  is  the  power  vested  to  suspend  the  privilege 
of  the  writ  of  habeas  corpus?  A.  In  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States. 

401.  Q.  What  is  a  military  commission?  A.  A  tribunal  for  the 
investigation  and  punishment  of  violations  of  the  laws  of  war, 
and  other  offenses  not  cognizable  by  courts-martial ;  it  is  an  in- 
strumentality for  the  more  efficient  execution  of  the  war  powers 
vested  in  Congress,  and  the  power  vested  in  the  President  as 
commander-in-chief  in  time  of  war. 

402.  Q.  What  is  the  history  of  the  military  commission  in  our 
law  ?  A.  This  commission  was  instituted  by  General  Scott,  in 
Mexico,  in  1847,  for  certain  crimes,  ordinarily  cognizable  by  the 
civil  courts,  committed  by  civilians  and  soldiers  not  then  triable 
by  courts-martial.  At  the  same  time  he  organized  a  separate 
tribunal,  designated  as  the  "  Council  of  War,"  for  the  punish- 
ment of  offenses  peculiar  to  war,  and  especially  crimes  committed 
by  members  of  guerilla  bands.  Early  in  the  recent  war  these 
two  Jurisdictions  were,  by  the  practice  of  commanders,  sanctioned 
by  the  War  Department,  united  in  one  w^ar  court,  for  which  the 
designation  of  military  commission  was  retained. 

403.  Q.  By  whom  may  military  commissions  be  constituted  ? 
A.  In  the  absence  of  statutory  provisions  they  have  been  in 
practice  constituted  by  the  same  commanders  as  are  empowered 
to  order  general  courts-martial. 

404.  Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  military  commissions  ?  A. 
■They  have  been  commonly  composed  of  army  officers,  usually  from 
three  to  five  members;  a  separate  officer  has  been  invariably  de- 
tailed as  judge-advocate. 

405.  Q.  What  is  the  jurisdiction  of  a  military  commission  as  to 
place  and  time?  A.  A  military  commission  has  jurisdiction  only 
of  offenses  committed  either  on  the  theatre  of  war,  or  in  a  place 
under  military  government  or  martial  law,  or  committed  during 
the  war,  or  the  period  of  the  exercise  of  such  government  or  law. 

406.  Q.  What  is  its  jurisdiction  as  to  persons  ?  A.  The  classes 
"who  may  become  subject  to  its  jurisdiction  are  the  following  : 
a.  Individuals  of  the  enemy's  army  who  have  been  guilty  of  ille- 
gitimate warfare  or  other  offenses  in  violation  of  the  laws  of  war; 
h.  Inhabitants  of  the  enemy's  country,  occupied  and  held  by  the 
right  of  conquest;  c.  Inhabitants  of  places  or  districts  under  mar- 
tial law;  d.  Officers  or  soldiers  of  our  army,  or  persons  serving 
with  it  in  the  field,  who  in  time  of  war  become  chargeable  with 
crimes  or  offenses  not  cognizable  under  the  Articles  of  War. 

407.  Q.  What  is  its  jurisdiction  as  to  offenses  ?  A.  a.  Viola- 
tions of  the  laws  or  usages  of  war;  h.  Crimes  and  offenses  cog- 
nizable by  the  local  courts,  but  which  cannot  be  tried  by  such 
courts  because  not  open  or  in  operation;  c.  Breaches  of  military 
orders  or  regulations,  committed  by  persons  not  ti'iable  by  courts- 
martial  under  the  Articles  of  War. 


MILITARY  LAW.  53 

408.  Q.  Give  an  outline  of  the  procedure  of  military  commis- 
sions. A.  In  the  absence  of  any  statute  or  regulation  concern- 
ing the  proceedings  of  military  commissions,  the  same  are  com- 
monly conducted  according  to  the  rules  and  forms  governing 
courts-martial.  These  war  courts  are,  however,  more  summary 
in  their  action  than  are  the  courts  held  under  the  Articles  of  War, 
and  as  their  powers  are  not  defined  by  law,  their  proceedings 
will  not  be  rendered  illegal  by  the  omission  of  details  required 
upon  trials  by  courts-martial.  In  practice,  however,  their  pro- 
cedure is  nearly  identical  with  that  of  courts-martial,  and  upon 
the  hearing  as  well  as  in  the  judgment  they  substantially  ob- 
serve the  established  rules  and  principles  of  law  and  evidence. 

409.  Q.  What  is  the  power  of  punishment  by  sentence  of  mili- 
tary commission  ?  A.  Except  in  the  cases  of  spies,  the  existing 
law  makes  no  provision  whatever  in  regard  to  the  quality  or 
quantity  of  the  punishment  to  be  adjudged  by  the  military  com- 
mission. The  power  of  such  a  court  to  award  sentence  is  thus 
practically  without  restriction. 

410.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  an  appeal  from,  or  a  revision  by, 
a  civil  court  of  the  proceedings  or  sentence  of  a  military  commis- 
sion ?  A.  In  the  Vallandigham  case  the  Supreme  Court  held 
that  the  proceedings  or  sentences  of  military  commissions  as  such 
are  not  subject  to  be  appealed  from  to,  or  to  be  revised  by,  any  civil 
tribunal. 

CIVIL  FUNCTIONS  AND  RELATIONS  OP  THE  MILITARf. 

411.  Q.  What  is  the  provision  in  the  constitution  as  to  the  pro- 
tection of  States?  A.  "The  United  States  shall  guarantee  to 
every  state  in  this  Union  a  republican  form  of  government,  and 
shall  protect  each  of  them  ...  on  the  application  of  the  legis- 
lature, or  of  the  executive  when  the  legislature  cannot  be  con- 
vened, against  domestic  violence." 

412.  Q.  In  what  notable  instance  has  Congress  legislated  under 
the  first  part  of  this  constitutional  provision  ?  A.  In  the  legisla- 
ture of  1867,  providing  for  the  reconstruction  of  the  insurrection- 
ary States. 

413.  Q.  How  has  the  protection  under  the  second  part  of  this 
constitutional  provision  been  effected  ?  A.  By  the  President 
ordering  a  sufficient  military  force  to  the  disturbed  district  with 
the  proper  instructions  for  the  repression  of  the  existing  violence. 

414.  Q.  Under  whom  should  this  force  act  ?  A.  Under  the 
command  and  direction  of  the  President  and  its  own  officers. 
But  as  its  purpose  is  to  aid  in  the  execution  of  the  laws  and  the 
restoration  of  the  peace  of  the  State,  its  action  should  in  general, 
as  far  as  practicable,  be  in  assent  with  the  action  or  views  of  the 
State  authorities. 

415.  Q.  What  are  the  provisions  of  law  in  relation  to  the  use  of 


54  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

the  army  for  the  suppression  of  insurrection,  etc.  ?  A.  The  President 
is  authorized  to  employ  the  army,  for  the  suppression  of  insur- 
rection or  rebellion  against  the  government  and  the  execution  of 
the  laws  of  the  United  States  ;  as  also  for  the  purpose  of  main- 
taining the  civil  rights  of  the  people  of  the  States,  when  divested 
by  violent  combinations  or  conspiracies  against  the  laws  of  the 
State  or  of  the  United  States. 

416.  Q.  What  restriction  has  been  placed  by  Congress  upon  the 
employment  of  the  army  as  a  posse  comitatus  f  A.  In  an  act  of 
Congress  of  1878  it  has  been  declared  to  be  no  longer  lawful  to 
employ  any  part  of  the  army  as  a  posse  comitatus  or  otherwise 
for  the  purpose  of  executing  the  laws  except  when  expressly  au- 
thorized by  the  constitution  or  public  statute. 

417.  Q.  What  is  the  law  in  relation  to  the  use  of  military  force 
in  the  Indian  country  ?  A.  The  President  may  employ  the  mili- 
tary for  the  removal  of  intruders  from  the  Indian  country,  for 
the  prevention  of  the  introduction  therein  of  unauthorized  per- 
sons and  things,  for  suppressing  hostilities  between  Indian  tribes, 
and  in  making  arrests  of  criminals. 

418.  Q.  What  constitutes  Indian  country  ?  A.  1.  An  Indian 
reservation  occupied  by  Indians  ;  2.  Other  districts  so  occupied 
to  which  the  Indian  title  has  not  been  extinguished. 

419.  Q.  What  should  be  the  attitude  of  the  military  toward  the 
civil  community  when  not  authorized  to  be  employed  under  the 
constitution  and  laws  ?  A.  Except  as  and  when  employed  and 
ordered  under  the  statutes  and  authority  heretofore  indicated, 
the  United  States  military  are  not  empowered  to  intervene  or  act 
as  such  on  any  occasion  of  violation  of  local  law  or  civil  disorder, 
or  in  the  arrest  of  civil  criminals.  Their  attitude  toward  the  civil 
community  and  the  civil  authorities  should  be  a  strictly  neutral 
one. 

420.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  as  to  the  amenability  of  the 
military  to  civil  authority  ?  A.  Officers  and  soldiers  of  the  army 
do  not  become  relieved  of  their  civil  obligations  by  assuming  the 
military  character,  but,  as  citizens  or  civilian  inhabitants  of  the 
country,  remain  liable,  equally  with  other  civilians,  to  the  juris- 
diction of  the  civil  courts  for  offenses  against  the  local  laws,  as 
well  as  for  wrongs  done  or  responsibility  incurred  toward  in- 
dividuals. 

421.  Q.  What  is  the  law  as  to  the  exemption  of  soldiers  from 
arrests  ?  A.  Under  the  Revised  Statutes  enlisted  men  are  ex- 
pressly exempted  from  arrest  on  civil  process,  except  for  certain 
debts  contracted  before  enlistment. 

422.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  double  amenability  of  a  military 
person  ?  A.  That  a  military  person  may  be  amenable  both  to  the 
military  and  the  civil  jurisdiction  for  the  same  act. 

423.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  official  and  discretionary  acts  of 
officers  of  the  army  ?    Q.  They  cannot  be  made  civilly  responsi- 


MILITARY  LAW.  65 

ble  for  the  consequences  of  the  ordinary  and  regular  discharge  of 
their  official  duties,  and  if  they  are  invested  with  discretion  as  to 
the  matter  of  the  performing  of  an  official  act  they  cannot  be 
held  to  account  for  such  performance.  Their  acts,  though  mis- 
taken, are  in  general  to  be  presumed  to  be  authorized  and  legal. 

424.  Q.  How  may  a  military  person  become  amenable  to  the 
criminal  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States  courts?  A.  By  becom- 
ing chargeable  with  the  commission  of  a  felonious  crime  made 
punishable  by  the  statutes  of  the  United  States,  or  for  an  em- 
bezzlement of  public  property  or  money. 

425.  Q.  What  is  the  civil  liability  of  public  officers  to "  the 
United  States  ?  A.  They  are  liable  to  the  United  States  for  any 
pecuniary  loss  to  the  same  which  may  be  incurred  by  them  in  the 
course  of  the  discharge  of  their  public  duties. 

426.  Q.  What  is  the  amenability  of  officers  for  acts  as  members 
of  courts-martial  and  for  executing  an  illegal  sentence  ?  A.  They 
are  liable  to  damages  on  the  suit  of  the  injured  party  when  act- 
ing without  jurisdiction  or  adjudging  an  illegal  sentence.  An 
officer  executing  the  sentence  of  a  military  tribunal  which  was 
without  jurisdiction,  or  whose  proceedings  or  judgment  were 
otherwise  illegal,  so  that  the  sentence  is  invalidated,  is  a  tres- 
passer and  liable  to  an  action  for  damages  on  the  part  of  the 
person  sentenced. 

427.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  the  amenability  of  officers  for 
alleged  wrongs  and  injuries  to  inferiors  ?  A.  An  officer  may  be 
sued  by  an  inferior  for  an  alleged  illegal  or  excessive  punishment 
inflicted,  unreasonable  measure  of  discipline  enforced,  and  un- 
authorized arrest  or  confinement  imposed.  In  such  cases  the 
civil  courts  have  in  general  refused  to  afford  relief  except  where 
the  act  was  absolutely  illegal,  or  where  absence  of  probable  cause 
for  the  action  taken,  and  the  existence  of  malice,  on  the  part  of 
the  defendant,  have  been  established  by  the  evidence. 

428.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  the  amenability  of  a  military 
person  to  suit  by  a  civilian  ?  A.  An  officer  or  soldier  is  liable  in 
damages  to  a  civilian  for  any  transcending  of  authority  to  the 
detriment  of  the  latter,  however  honest  the  motive  of  the  act, 
the  matter  of  the  animus  affecting  only  the  measure  of  the  dam- 
ages. He  is  similarly  liable  for  the  execution  of  an  illegal  order, 
and  this  although  such  order  was  received  by  him  from  his  proper 
superior,  and  was  executed  by  him  in  good  faith.  If  both  superior 
and  inferior  are  subjected  to  suit  by  the  injured  party,  the  former 
is  usually  held  to  the  stricter  responsibility,  and  a  higher  pro- 
portion of  damages  awarded  against  him. 

429.  Q.  What  is  the  liability  of  a  military  person  for  injuries 
in  time  of  war  ?  A.  For  an  act  done  juri  belli,  or  for  the  exer- 
cise of  a  belligerent  right,  an  officer  or  soldier  cannot  be  called  to 
account  in  civil  proceedings.  But  the  existence  of  war  will  not 
justify  trespasses  upon  the  person  or  property  of  civilians  or  other 


56  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

injuries  not  sanctioned  by  the  laws  or  usages  of  war,  nor  will  it 
justify  wrongs  done  by  irresponsible  unauthorized  parties.  For 
such  acts  the  officer  or  soldier  may  be  made  liable  in  damages. 

430.  Q.  What  is  the  liability  of  an  officer  in  public  contracts  ? 
A.  An  action  will  not  lie  against  an  officer  of  the  army  on  a  con- 
tract made  by  him  for  the  United  States  in  an  official  capacity, 
except  where  he  has  acted  without  authority  or  exceeded  his  au- 
thority under  the  same. 

431.  Q.  Can  an  officer  of  the  army  be  sued  as  garnishee  or  trustee 
for  or  on  account  of  public  money  in  his  official  position  ?  A.  No  ; 
money  in  the  hands  of  a  disbursing  officer  remains  public  funds 
till  actually  paid  over  to  the  person  or  persons  entitled  to  receive 
it  as  due  them. 

432.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  procedure  on  the  part  of  an  officer 
when  made  a  respondent  in  civil  proceedings  by  the  service  upon 
him  of  a  writ  of  habeas  corpus  issuing  from  a  state  or  municipal 
tribunal  and  sent  out  by  or  in  behalf  of  an  enlisted  man  or 
military  prisoner  claiming  to  be  discharged  from  military  custody 
on  the  ground  of  illegal  enlistment,  or  absence  of  jurisdiction  or 
authority  over  him  on  the  part  of  the  military  authority  ?  A. 
"While  not  required  strictly  to  make  any  response  or  return,  he 
should,  as  a  matter  of  comity,  always  properly  do  so  as  far  as  to 
advise  the  court  that  he  holds  the  petitioner  by  the  authority  of 
the  United  States  as  an  enlisted  soldier,  military  convict,  etc., 
setting  forth  in  brief  the  status  of  the  individual.  He  should 
decline,  however,  in  respectful  terms  to  produce  the  body  of  the 
petitioner  before  the  court,  on  the  ground  of  its  want  of  juris- 
diction over  the  subject-matter,  as  laid  down  by  the  Supreme 
Court  in  the  Tarble  case.  Should  the  state  courts  assume  juris- 
diction and  actually  commit  the  officer  for  contempt,  he  should 
sue  out  a  writ  of  habeas  corpus  for  his  own  release  in  the  United 
States  district  or  circuit  court. 

433.  Q.  Should  a  like  writ  be  served  upon  an  officer  issuing 
from  a  United  States  court,  what  is  his  duty  ?  A.  To  make  full 
return  to  the  same,  setting  forth  all  the  facts  of  the  case  and  the 
authority  under  which  the  prisoner  is  held,  and  on  the  return- 
day  to  appear  with  the  body  of  the  petitioner  before  the  court  to 
abide  by  its  orders  thereupon. 

434.  Q.  When  an  officer  or  soldier  is  subjected  to  a  suit  or 
prosecution  on  account  of  an  act  done  in  the  performance  of 
official  duty,  what  is  the  proper  course  to  pursue  in  procuring 
defense  and  indemnification  ?  A.  Application  should  be  made  to 
the  Attorney-General  through  the  war  department  to  be  defended 
at  the  expense  of  the  Government.  If  his  application  is  denied 
he  should  himself  make  proper  provisions  for  his  defense.  If  the 
result  of  the  litigation  is  a  judgment  against  him  for  damages,  he 
should  apply  to  Congress  for  relief. 

435.  Q.  When  does  a  military  person  become  amenable  to 


MILITARY   LAW.  57 

criminal  prosecution  in  State  courts  ?  A.  Except  where  the  act 
was  committed  upon  a  reservation  or  other  premises  within  the 
exclusive  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States,  an  officer  or  soldier  is 
liable  for  a  criminal  offense  against  the  local  law  to  prosecution 
in  the  courts  of  the  State  or  Territory  in  the  same  manner  as  is 
a  civilian. 

436.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  restrictions  placed  by  the  statutes 
of  the  United  States  upon  the  civil  rights  of  persons  in  the  mili- 
tary service  of  the  United  States.  A.  oAcers  of  the  army  on  the 
active  list  are  precluded  from  holding  any  civil  office  ;  all  officers 
of  the  army,  except  certain  retired  officers,  are  specially  precluded 
from  holding  diplomatic  or  consular  office  ;  all  military  persons, 
except  retired  officers,  are  prohibited  from  holding  civil  offices  in 
the  Territories,  and  no  military  person  is  allowed  to  vote  in  any 
Territory  by  reason  of  being  in  service  therein,  unless  such 
Territory  is,  and  has  been  for  six  months,  his  permanent  domicile. 

437.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  restrictions  placed  by  State  laws 
upon  the  civil  rights  of  persons  in  the  military  service  of  the 
United  States.  A.  The  constitutions  or  laws  of  some  of  the  States 
disqualify  military  officers  in  whole  or  in  part  from  holding  office 
under  the  State ;  or  restrict  their  right  to  vote  by  declaring  in 
effect  that  they  shall  not  gain  a  residence  or  habitation  for  that 
purpose  merely  by  being  stationed  therein. 

438.  Q.  Is  an  officer  or  soldier  of  the  army  liable  to  taxation 
by  a  State  or  municipality  for  his  personal  property  ?  A.  Yes, 
unless  he  is  stationed  at  a  military  post  situated  upon  land  over 
which  the  United  States  exercises  constitutional  jurisdiction. 
But  in  no  event  can  a  State  or  municipality  legally  tax  the  pay  or 
allowances  of  an  officer  or  soldier  of  the  army,  or  the  dress,  uni- 
form, equipments,  horses,  etc.,  incident  to  his  rank  or  office,  or  re- 
quired or  intended  to  be  employed  by  him  in  the  military  service. 

439.  Q.  When  is  exclusive  jurisdiction  over  a  military  post  or 
reservation  situated  in  a  State  vested  in  the  United  States?  A. 
When  such  jurisdiction  has  been  reserved  by  the  United  States 
upon  the  admission  of  the  State,  or  when  the  State  subsequently 
cedes  it  own  jurisdiction,  or  when  the  State  has  given  its  consent 
to  the  purchase  of  the  land  by  the  United  States. 

440.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  effects  of  being  stationed  at  a 
place  over  which  the  United  States  exercises  exclusive  jurisdiction? 
A.  The  persons  stationed  or  commorant  upon  such  premises  be- 
come isolated,  both  territorially  and  as  to  their  civil  relations. 
In  a  political  sense  the  land  is  no  longer  a  part  of  the  soil  of  the 
State,  nor  are  the  occupants  inhabitants  of  the  State.  They  are 
severed  from  the  enjoyment  of  the  rights,  and  from  subjection 
to  the  liabilities  of  the  citizens  of  the  State  as  entirely  as  if  they 
were  residents  of  a  foreign  country.  They  have  no  right  to  vote, 
cannot  claim  the  benefits  of  the  public  schools,  of  libraries,  t)f  the 
fire  and  police  departments,  etc.     On  the  other  hand,  they  are  not 


58  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

liable  to  taxation  by  the  State  or  municipality  for  their  personal 
property  held  on  the  premises,  or  required  to  perform  jury  duty, 
furnish  labor  on  the  public  roads,  etc.,  in  the  State;  nor  are 
they  subject  to  the  civil  or  criminal  process  of  the  local  courts, 
except  in  so  far  as  the  right  to  execute  the  same  may  have  been 
reserved  to  the  State. 

441.  Q.  What  is  the  jurisdiction  of  the  Territorial  courts  over 
a  military  post  or  reseryation  situated  in  a  Territory  ?  A.  The 
authority  of  the  civil  officials  of  the  Territory  emanates,  either 
mediately  or  immediately,  from  Congress.  In  the  absence  of 
any  provisions  in  the  legislation  of  Congress  relating  to  the  or- 
ganization or  government  of  a  Territory,  by  which  officers  or 
soldiers  of  the  army  stationed  therein  are  "specially  exempted 
from  the  jurisdiction  of  the  Territorial  courts  or  authorities,  they 
will  be  amenable  thereto  in  the  same  manner  and  to  the  same 
extent  as  civilians,  except  in  so  far  as  their  liability  may  be 
affected  by  a  state  of  war. 


SUMMARY  COURT. 

441a.  Q.  What  is  a  summary  court?  A.  A  court  of  justice 
composed  of  the  officer  next  in  rank  to  the  commanding  officer  of 
a  post  for  the  summary  punishment  of  light  offenses  committed 
by  enlisted  men. 

4416.  Q.  What  is  the  extent  of  punishment  that  may  be  awarded 
by  a  summary  court?  A.  It  cannot  exceed  that  authorized  for 
the  Garrison  Court-martial. 

441c.  Q.  How  and  where  are  the  records  of  a  summary  court 
kept?  A.  They  are  kept  in  a  book  provided  by  the  Government 
for  the  purpose  at  the  headquarters  of  each  military  post. 

441c?.  Q.  Can  a  soldier  decline  to  be  tried  by  a  summary  court  ? 
A.  He  has  the  right,  if  he  so  desires,  to  request  to  be  tried  by  a 
court-martial. 


.ijyj 


MILITARY    LAW.  o8« 


ARTICLES  OF  THE  GENEVA  CONVENTION. 

The  Convention  between  the  United  States,  Baden,  Switzerland, 
Belgium,  Denmark,  Spain,  France,  Hesse,  Italy,  Netherlands,  Por- 
tugal, Prussia,  Wurtemberg,  Sweden,  Greece,  Great  Britain,  Meck- 
lenburg-Schwerin,  Turkey,  Bavaria,  Austria,  Russia,  Persia,  Rou- 
mania,  Salvador,  Montenegro,  Servia,  Bolivia,  Chili,  Argentine  Re- 
public, and  Peru  ;  with  additional  articles  :  for  the  amelioration  of 
the  wounded  in  armies  in  the  field  ;  concluded  August  23,  1864 ; 
acceded  to  by  the  President  March  1,  1882  ;  accession  concurred  in  by 
the  Senate  March  16,  1882  ;  proclaimed  as  to  the  original  convention, 
but  with  reserve  as  to  the  additional  articles,  July  26,  1882  ;  com- 
monly known  as  the  Geneva  Convention,  is  as  follows  : 


ORIGINAL  CONVENTION. 

Article  I.  Ambulances  and  military  hospitals  shall  be  acknowl- 
edged to  be  neuter,  and,  as  such,  shall  he,  protected  and  respected  by 
belligerents  so  long  as  any  sick  or  wounded  may  be  therein. 

Such  neutrality  shall  cease  if  the  ambulances  or  hospitals  should 
be  held  by  a  military  force. 

Art.  II.  Persons  employed  in  hospitals  and  ambulances,  compris- 
ing the  staff  for  superintendence,  medical  service,  administration, 
transport  of  wounded,  as  well  as  chaplains,  shall  participate  in  the 
benefit  of  neutrality,  whilst  so  employed,  and  so  long  as  there  remain 
any  wounded  to  bring  in  or  to  succor. 

Art.  III.  The  persons  designated  in  the  preceding  article  may,  even 
after  occu4)ation  by  the  enemy,  continue  to  fulfil  their  duties  in  the 
hospital  or  ambulance  which  they  serve,  or  may  withdraw  in  order 
to  rejoin  the  corps  to  which  they  belong. 

Under  such  circumstances,  when  these  persons  shall  cease  from 
their  functions,  they  shall  be  delivered  by  the  occupying  army  to  the 
outposts  of  the  enemy. 

Akt.  IV.  As  the  equipment  of  military  hospitals  remains  subject  to 
the  laws  of  war,  persons  attached  to  such  hospitals  cannot,  in  with- 
drawing, carry  away  any  articles  but  such  as  are  their  private  property. 

Under  the  same  circumstances  an  ambulance  shall,  on  the  contrary, 
retain  its  equipment. 

Art.  V.  Inhabitants  of  the  country  who  may  bring  help  to  the 
wounded  shall  be  respected,  and  shall  remain  free.  The  generals  of 
the  belligerent  powers  shall  make  it  their  care  to  inform  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  appeal  addressed  to  their  humanity,  and  of  the  neutrality 
which  will  be  the  consequence  of  it. 

Any  wounded  man  entertained  and  taken  care  of  in  a  house  shall 
be  considered  as  a  protection  thereto.  Any  inhabitant  who  shall  have 
entertained  wounded  men  in  his  house  shall  be  exempted  from  the 
quartering  of  troops,  as  well  as  from  a  part  of  the  contributions  of 
war  which  may  be  imposed. 

Art.  VI.  Wounded  or  sick  snldiprs  slmll  be  entertained  and  taken 
care  of,  to  whatever  nation 


586  THE    ARMY    OFFICER'S    EXAMIXER. 

Cominanders-in-cliief  shall  have  tlie  power  to  deliver  immediately 
to  the  outposts  of  the  enemy  soldiers  who  have  been  wounded  in  an 
engagement,  when  circumstances  permit  this  to  be  done,  and  with 
the  consent  of  both  parties. 

Those  who  are  recognized,  after  their  wounds  are  healed,  as  inca- 
pable of  serving,  shall  be  sent  back  to  their  country. 

The  others  may  also  be  sent  back,  on  condition  of  not  again  bear- 
ing arms  during  the  continuance  of  the  war. 

Evacuations,  together  with  the  persons  under  whose  directions 
they  take  place,  shall  be  protected  by  an  absolute  neutrality. 

Art.  VII.  A  distinctive  and  uniform  flag  shall  be  adopted  for 
hospitals,  ambulances,  and  evacuations.  It  must,  on  every  occasion, 
be  accompanied  by  the  national  flag.  An  arm-badge  (brassart)  shall 
also  be  allowed  for  individuals  neutralized,  but  the  delivery  thereof 
shall  be  left  to  military  authority. 

The  flag  and  the  arm-badge  shall  bear  a  red  cross  on  a  white  ground. 

Art.  VIII.  The  details  of  execution  of  the  present  convention  shall 
be  regulated  by  the  commanders-in-chief  of  belligerent  armies,  accord- 
ing to  the  instructions  of  their  respective  governments,  and  in  con- 
formity with  the  general  principles  laid  "down  in  this  Convention. 

ADDITIONAL   ARTICLES. 

Article  I.  The  persons  designated  in  Article  II  of  the  Convention 
shall,  after  the  occupation  by  the  enemy,  continue  to  fulfil  their 
duties,  according  to  their  wants,  to  the  sick  and  wounded  in  the  am- 
bulance or  the  hospital  which  they  serve.  When  they  request  to 
withdraw,  the  commander  of  the  occupying  troops  shall  fix  the  time 
of  departure,  which  he  shall  only  be  allowed  to  delay  for  a  short  time 
in  case  of  military  necessity. 

Art.  II.  Arrangements  will  have  to  be  made  by  the  belligerent 
powers  to  insure  to  the  neutralized  person,  fallen  into  the  hands  of 
the  army  of  the  enemy,  the  entire  enjoyment  of  his  salary. 

Art.  hi.  Under  the  conditions  provided  for  in  Articles  I  and  IV 
of  the  Convention,  the  uame  "ambulance"  applies  to  field-hospitals 
and  other  temporary  establishments  which  follow  the  troops  on  the 
field  of  battle  to  receive  the  sick  and  wounded. 

Art.  IV.  In  conformity  with  the  spirit  of  Article  V  of  the  Con- 
vention, and  to  the  reservations  contained  in  the  protocol  of  1864,  it 
is  explained  that  for  the  appointment  of  the  charges  relative  to  the 
quartering  of  troops,  and  of  the  contributions  of  war,  account  only 
shall  be  taken  in  an  equitable  manner  of  the  charitable  zeal  displayed 
by  the  inhabitants. 

Art.  V.  In  addition  to  Article  VI.  of  the  Convention,  it  is  stipu- 
lated that,  with  the  reservation  of  officers  whose  detention  might  be 
important  to  the  fate  of  arms  and  within  the  limits  fixed  by  the 
second  paragraph  of  that  article,  the  wounded  fallen  into  the  hands 
of  the  enemy  shall  be  sent  back  to  their  country,  after  they  are  cured, 
or  sooner  if  possible,  on  c(mdition,  nevertheless,  of  not  again  bearing 
arms  diirin":  the  continuance  of  the  war. 


PART  III. 
FIELD   ENGINEERING. 


Test-book— Manual  of  Field  Engineering, 


For  Second  Lieutenants— Nos.  442-599. 
For  First  Lieutenants— Nos.  442-599. 


PAET  III. 

FIELD  ENQINEERING. 


ELEMENTARY  FIELD  ENGINEERING. 

442.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  fortification  ?  A.  To  strengthen 
ground  on  which  it  has  been  decided  to  await  an  attack. 

443.  Q.  In  what  manner  does  fortification  strengthen  a  party 
on  the  defensive  ?  A.  It  economizes  the  numbers  of  the  defend- 
ers, and  enables  the  force  available  for  offensive  movements  to  be 
swelled. 

444.  Q.  State  briefly  the  general  principles  involved  in  fortify- 
ing a  position  ?  A.  1.  Choice  of  ground  ;  2.  Clearance  of  ground  ; 
3.  Provision  of  cover  ;  4.  Creation  of  obstacles  ;  5.  Improvement 
of  communications. 

445.  Q.  In  what  manner  are  engineers  attached  to  other 
troops?  A.  One  company  to  each  division  ;  four  companies  and 
a  field  park  to  an  army  corps. 

446.  Q.  What  thickness  of  earth  may  be  considered  proof  against 
rifle  bullets  at  any  range  ?    A.  Three  feet. 

CLEARING  THE  GROUND. 

447.  Q.  To  what  extent  should  ground  be  cleared  in  front  of  a 
defensive  position  ?  A.  For  at  least  300  yards,  and,  if  possible, 
to  the  extreme  limits  of  fire. 

448.  Q.  In  felling  trees  to  clear  the  ground,  how  should 
they  be  attacked  ?  A.  On  the  side  on  which  they  are  required  to 
fall,  a  rope  being  employed  if  necessary  to  pull  them  over.  When 
the  tree  has  been  cut  into  as  far  as  the  centre,  the  workman 
should  change  to  the  opposite  side,  and  cut  four  or  five  inches 
above  the  former  cut. 

449.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  large  trees  when  felled  ?  A. 
They  must  be  lopped,  to  prevent  their  acting  as  a  cover  for  an 
advancing  force. 

450.  Q.  How  should  brushwood  (say  about  1  inch  in  diameter) 
be  removed  ?    A.  By  deploying  troops  at  5  paces  apart. 

61 


62  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

451.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  tall  grass,  corn,  or  weeds, 
hedges,  hollows,  etc.  ?  A.  Tall  grass  or  corn  or  weeds  should  be 
trampled  down  by  men  in  line,  cut  down  or  burned  ;  hollows 
should  be  tilled  up  by  debris  or  abatis  ;  hedges  parallel  to  the 
front  must  be  removed  ;  walls  must  be  knocked  down. 


HASTY  ENTRENCHMENTS. 

452.  Q.  What  are  considered  as  hasty  entrenchments  ?  A.  1. 
Cover  for  skirmishers,  shelter-pits  and  rifle-pits  ;  2.  Cover  for 
shooting-line,  supports  and  reserves,  shelter-trenches,  breastworks 
and  epaulments ;  3.  Cover  for  artillery,  gun-pits  and  gun-epaul- 
ments. 

453.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  a  shelter-pit  used  and  what  are  its 
dimensions  ?  A.  For  the  shelter  of  one  man  ;  6  feet  long  and 
from  2  feet  3  inches  to  3  feet  broad. 

454.  Q.  What  are  rifle-pits,  and  for  what  purpose  used  ?  A. 
They  are  merely  shelter-pits  of  a  somewhat  stronger  type,  used  in 
positions  of  importance  where  a  very  limited  range  of  fire  is 
required. 

455.  Q.  Where  are  shelter-trenches  usually  located  ?  A.  The 
top  of  the  steepest  slope. 

456.  Q.  What  should  be  provided  for  men  in  all  cases  where 
they  are  to  fire  from  shelter-trenches  ?  A.  They  should  have 
cover  for  their  heads,  by  giving  extra  height  to  the  parapet 
between  every  two  rifles,  or,  better  still,  by  loopholes. 

457.  Q.  How  may  loopholes  be  formed  in  hasty  entrench- 
ments ?  A.  By  placing  a  bullet-proof  log  on  the  crest,  resting  on 
sand-bags  or  stones,  leaving  a  space  underneath  to  fire  from  ;  by 
blinded  loopholes,  made  by  covering  the  opening  with  a  layer  of 
brushwood  and  earth  ;  or  sand-bag  loopholes,  made  of  four  sand- 
bags, the  smallest  part  of  the  splay  towards  the  enemy,  the  bags 
being  well  filled  and  beaten,  and  the  two  lower  ones  placed  on 


458.  Q.  How  may  cover  for  guns  be  obtained  ?  A.  By  sink- 
ing them  in  a  pit,  or  covering  them  by  an  epaulment. 

459.  Q.  In  what  cases  should  pits  and  epaulments  be  con- 
structed ?  A.  The  pit  would  be  used  when  the  the  top  surface  of 
the  ground  is  soft  and  no  natural  cover  exists,  as  in  a  plowed 
field.  The  epaulment  where  existing  banks  can  easily  be  modi- 
fied into  the  requisite  epaulments,  or  where  the  natural  surface  of 
the  ground  is  hard  and  well  adapted  for  working  the  guns. 

460.  Q.  Wherein  is  the  epaulment  better  than  the  pit  ?  A.  In 
the  latter  the  gun  cannot  be  brought  into  action  until  the  pit  is 
completed  ;  while  in  the  former,  fire  can  be  opened  at  any 
moment,  the  construction  of  the  epaulment  even  going  on  while 
the  gun  is  in  actiou. 


FIELD  ENGIJ^EERING.  63 


OBSTACLES. 


461.  Q.  Where,  as  a  rule,  should  obstacles  intended  to 
strengthen  a  defensive  position  be  placed  ?  A.  Under  the  effect- 
ive fire  of  the  defender,  generally  between  100  and  300  yards. 

463.  Q.  What  should  be  the  conditions  relative  to  placing 
obstacles  ?  A.  They  should  be  so  placed  as  to  afford  the  enemy 
no  cover,  and  if  possible  be  sheltered  from  his  artillery  fire  ; 
they  should  be  difficult  to  remove  or  surmount ;  they  must  not 
interfere  with  counter-attack, 

463.  Q.  As  an  obstacle  how  may  military  pits  be  used  ?  A. 
The  shallow  pits  are  generally  covered  by  a  glacis  formed  from 
the  excavated  earth.  In  making  them  the  row  farthest  from  the 
glacis  should  be  excavated  first,  and  then  they  must  be  placed 
checker  wise  towards  the  enemy.  A  pointed  picket  is  driven  into 
each  pit.  They  should,  if  possible  be  supplemented  by  a  wire 
entanglement  over  them.  Deep  pits  are  impassable  by  cavalry  and 
good  protection  against  a  night  attack  ;  but,  on  account  of  the 
kibor  involved,  would  be  seldom  used. 

464.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  abatis?  A.  It  is  a  form  of 
obstacle  made  of  limbs  of  trees  firmly  secured  and  interlaced, 
with  the  branches  turned  towards  the  enemy  and  pointed. 

465.  Q.  What  is  the  best  form  of  abatis  ?  A.  Trees  half-sawn 
through  and  dropped  towards  the  enemy,  when  the  trees  are 
found  in  the  necessary  position,  at  the  edge  o*f  woods,  orchards, 
etc. 

466.  Q.  What  are  entanglements?  A.  Obstacles  formed  by 
cutting  trees,  brushwood,  etc.,  half-way  through  at  a  height  of 
about  3  feet  and  interlacing  or  securing  the  branches  by  pickets 
to  the  ground.  Wire  may  be  used  also  for  entanglements — the 
low  wire  entanglement  being  attached  to  stout  stakes  driven  in 
the  ground  arranged  checkerwise  in  rows,  the  wire  crossing  diag- 
onally about  12  or  18  inches  above  the  ground  ;  the  high  wire  en- 
tanglement is  formed  with  stakes  four  feet  above  ground,  the 
head  of  one  stake  being  connected  with  the  foot  of  another  diag- 
onally opposite  by  the  wire. 

467.  Q.  What  are  palisades,  and  how^  are  they  used  ?  A.  They 
are  made  of  timbers  about  10  feet  long,  arranged  so  as  to  form  a 
stout  open  paling,  and  pointed  or  spiked  at  the  top.  They  are 
used  for  the  defense  of  ditches,  and  for  closing  the  rear  or  gorges 
of  partially  enclosed  works. 

468.  Q.  What  are  f raises,  and  how  used  ?  A.  They  are  pali- 
sades placed  horizontally,  or  nearly  so.  If  on  the  defender's  side 
of  the  ditch,  they  should  point  downwards,  and  upwards  if  on 
the  enemy's  side. 

469.  Q.  What  is  a  chevaux-de-frise  ?  A.  It  is  a  form  of  ob- 
stacle, and  when  made  of  wood  is  fo^ioaed  of  a  barrel  or  cylinder 


.^  mm  '^         r  m  yji 


64 

from  6  to  8  feet  long,  with  holes  cut  through  at  intervals  to  in- 
sert from  12  to  16  spears  of  6  feet  in  length. 

470.  Q.  What  is  a  fougasse  ?  A.  Inclined  holes  dug  in  the 
ground,  charged  with  powder  placed  at  the  bottom,  and  loaded 
with  stones,  brick-bats,  or  live  shells. 

DEFENSE  OF  POSTS. 

471.  Q.  What  constitutes  the  important  features  of  defending 
walls  ?  A.  A  most  important  thing  is  to  render  them  useless  to 
the  enemy  ;  this  may  be  done  by  making  a  banquette  or  staging 
so  as  to  raise  the  defender's  rifle  six  feet  or  more  above  the 
ground  outside  ;  by  placing  obstacles  in  front ;  or  by  sinking  a 
ditch  outside  which  shall  keep  the  enemy  six  feet  below  the  top 
of  the  wall,  or  the  bottom  of  the  loopholes. 

472.  Q.  How  may  hedges  be  defended  ?  A.  A  hedge  with  a 
ditch  on  the  defender's  side  can  be  used  as  it  stands,  the  ditch 
being  improved  if  necessary.  To  defend  a  hedge  with  a  ditch  on 
the  enemy's  side,  deepen  the  ditch,  and  if  possible  throw  earth  to 
defender's  side  to  give  cover ;  if  not  possible,  scatter  it  about  and 
dig  trench  in  rear.  To  defend  a  hedge  with  a  ditch  on  both  sides, 
deepen  ditch  on  the  enemy's  side,  utilize  earth  to  obtain  cover. 
To  defend  a  hedge  on  sloping  ground,  gain  cover  by  a  small 
trench  in  rear,  and  scarp  away  the  ground  in  front. 

473.  Q.  What  is  the  natural  defense  of  a  wood  ?  A.  An 
abatis  or  entanglement  along  the  edge  ;  if  the  whole  front  cannot 
be  thus  prepared  for  lack  of  time,  the  salients  should  be  first 
prepared,  and  the  flanks  of  the  abatis  turned  back  for  a  short 
distance  into  the  wood.  Roads  entering  the  wood  should  be  bar- 
ricaded by  a  detached  abatis  and  the  communication  preserved. 

474.  Q.  With  reference  to  the  defense  of  a  wood,  where  is  the 
best  position  for  artillery  ?    A.  Outside  of  it. 

475.  Q.  What  should  be  done  regarding  a  wood  too  far  to  the 
front  to  be  occupied,  but  within  range  of  the  line  of  the  defense  ? 
A.  An  abatis  should  be  constructed  on  the  near  side  to  hinder  the 
enemy's  egress  from  it. 

476.  Q.  In  making  ^se  of  a  building  for  defense,  except  in 
cases  where  it  is  under  heavy  artillery  fire,  how  should  it  be  pre- 
pared ?  A.  Cover  in  the  vicinity  should  be  cleared  away  as  far 
as  time  and  means  will  allow ;  inhabitants  and  all  combustible 
materials  should  be  removed  ;  water  should  be  provided  ;  doors 
and  accessible  windows  should  be  barricaded  ;  inaccessible  win- 
dows should  be  masked  and  glass  removed  ;  loopholes  should  be 
made  in  doors,  shutters,  and  walls,  also  in  eaves  of  sloping  roof ; 
communications  should  be  opened  throughout,  and  a  means  of  re- 
treat prepared. 

477.  Q.  What  are  the  materials  most  likely  to  be  useful  in  prepar- 
ing a  building  for  defense?    A.  Sand-bags  and  stout  timbers, 


FIELD   ENGINEERING.  65 

large  boxes,  chests,  etc.  Furniture  and  bedding  is  good  for 
masking  windows  of  upper  floors. 

478.  Q.  How  is  stockading  constructed  ?  A.  By  placing  tim- 
bers, rails,  etc.,  either  horizontally  or  vertically. 

479.  Q.  How  are  vertical  stockades  constructed  ?  A.  By  plant- 
ing rows  of  timber  in  the  ground  close  together,  so  as  to  keep 
out  rifle-bullets,  and  loopholed  at  intervals  ;  the  timbers  must  be 
sunk  3  or  4  feet  into  the  ground,  according  to  size  and  weight, 
and  be  pointed  or  spiked  at  the  top.  A  riband  must  be  spiked 
along  inside,  near  the  top,  to  keep  the  timbers  together. 

480.  Q.  Why  should  the  rear  of  an  advance  post,  whether 
farm  or  village,  within  range  of  the  main  line  of  defense,  be  left 
weak  and  open  ?  A.  Kot  alone  to  facilitate  retreat,  but  to  ren- 
der e.asy  of  recapture. 

481.  Q.  How  should  the  successive  lines  of  defense  in  a  salient 
village  be  constructed  ?  A.  They  should  be  carried  well  out  into 
the  country  on  either  side  and  strengthened  at  the  flanks,  to 
avoid  having  them  turned  and  necessarily  fighting  in  the  streets. 

FIELD   GEOMETRY  AND   FIELD  LEVEL. 

482.  Q.  How  are  slopes  usually  described  ?  A.  By  fractions,  in 
which  the  numerator  expresses  the  height  and  the  denominator 

the  base  of  the  slope.     Thus,  ^ — —  ;  the  verti- 

A  ^ —     — ^'? 

cal  height  BC  is  \  part  of  the  horizontal  distance  AB.  The  slope 
AC  would  therefore  be  called  a  slope  of  \  (verbally  one  in  six). 
A  slope  in  which  the  vertical  height  is  greater  than  the  horizon- 


tal is  thus  expressed : 


the  vertical  height  BC  is  four 


times  as  great  as  the  horizontal  distance  AB.     The  slope  ^C  is 
called  f  (verbally  four  in  one  or  four  over  one). 
483.  Q.  In  what  manner  may  an  angle  be  laid  out  equal  to  a 


A 

given  angle  ?  A.  ""    x"^^^^     i  •  ^*  ^  ^®  ^^  point  in  the 

straight  line  AB  from  which  it  is  desired  to  lay  off  an  angle 

equal  to  the  angle  DEC  ^<Z  !  .   Fix  the  points  JD  and 


GG  -THE   AEMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIKEE. 

C  Sit  any  convenient  distance  from  JEJ,  and  from  the  point  x  meas- 
ure x9,  equal  to  £JC.  Then  from  the  point  x  as  centre  and  a 
distance  equal  to  ED  as  radius,  and  from  the  point  G  as  centre 
and  a  distance  equal  to  CD  as  radius,  describe  arcs  intersecting  at 
F.    Join  xF.     The  angle  FxG  is  equal  to  the  given  angle  J)FC. 

484.  Q.  How  would  you  find  the  distance  between  any  two 
points  A  and  B  when  it  cannot  be  measured  directly  ?    A.  Take 

a  point  C  in  the  same  straight  line  with 
A  and  B,  and  from  this  point  lay  ofC 
the  line  CD  at  any  convenient  angle. 
Take  a  point  E  in  this  line  at  a  con- 
venient distance  from  i),  and  lay  out 
the  angle  DEF  equal  to  the  angle  DCA. 
Make  EF  of  such  length  that  the  point 
F  is  in  the  same  straight  line  with  A 
and  D.  Then  AC:  CD: :  FE  :  ED, 
CDxFE 
and  AC  = — ^r^ — *     From  the  result  found 

subtract  the  distance  BC.  The  remainder  will  give  the  distance 
from  Ato  B. 

485.  Q.  What  is  the  service  field  level  used  for  ?  A.  For  lay- 
ing out  angles  on  the  ground  and  for  measuring  slopes. 

486.  Q.  How  is  the  use  of  the  field  level  best  learned  ?  A.  By 
actual  handling. 

DELIBERATE  ENTRENCHMENTS. 

487.  Q.  For  what  are  deliberate  entrenchments  used  ?  A.  For 
the  prolonged  occupation  of  important  points  and  positions. 
They  must  protect  their  defenders  against  both  artillery  and  in- 
fantry fire,  and  sometimes  be  spacious  enough  to  afford  both  day 
and  night  accommodations  for  their  garrisons. 

488.  Q.  What  are  the  fronts,  sides,  and  rear  of  a  work  called? 
A.  The  fronts  are  called  faces,  the  sides  flanks,  and  the  rear  the 
gorge. 

489.  Q.  Explain  the  difference  between  a  redoubt  and  a  re- 
dan. A.  A  .work  wholly  inclosed  is  called  a  redoubt,  and  a 
small  two-sided  work  to  fire  to  the  right  and  left  front  is  called 
a  redan. 

490.  Q.  What  is  a  lunette?  A.  A  work  firing  both  to  the 
front  and  fianks,  and  having  two  faces  and  two  flanks. 

491.  Q.  Define  the  angles  of  a  work.  A.  An  angle  projecting 
outwards  is  called  a  salient  angle  ;  one  projecting  inwards,  a  re- 
entering angle. 

492.  Q.  Give  the  technical  terms  used  in  connection  with  the 
profile  of  a  work.  A.  The  glacis,  escarp  and  counterscarp, 
berme,  exterior  slope,  superior  slope,  interior  slope,  tread  of  ban- 
quette, slope  of  banquette,  steps,  and  interior  trench.- 


FIELD  ENGIN^EERING.  67 

493.  Q.  On  what  does  the  height  of  the  interior  cresj;  above 
the  plane  of  sight  of  a  work  depend  ?  A.  On  the  lay  of  the 
ground  and  the  amount  of  tover  required. 

494.  Q.  On  what  does  the  thickness  or  horizontal  distance  be- 
tween the  interior  and  exterior  crests  of  a  work  depend  ?  A.  On 
the  artillery  power  of  the  enemy— 20  feet  to  resist  siege  guns,  10 
feet  for  field  guns,  and  3  feet  for  musketry. 

495.  Q.  In  what  proportion  does  earth  increase  by  excavation  ? 
A.  One  twelfth  in  volume  ;  in  excess  at  salients  and  deficient  at 
re-entering  angles. 

496.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  defilading  a  work  ?  A.  It  is  to 
so  arrange  the  heights  of  its  parapets  that  the  defenders  may  be 
screened  from  view  and  from  fire  in  all  parts  of  the  work. 

497.  Q.  How  is  a  defilade  much  assisted  ?  A.  By  a  judicious 
choice  of  position. 

498.  Q.  As  parapets  alone  rarely  suffice  to  defilade  the  whole 
interior  of  an  extensive  work,  how  must  they  be  supplemented  ? 
A.  By  traverses  or  parados,  the  earth  for  which  can  either  be 
obtained  from  a  ditch  or  by  lowering  a  foot  or  so  the  whole  or  a 
part  of  the  interior  of  the  work. 

FIELD  CASEMATES. 

499.  Q.  What  are  field  casemates  ?  A.  They  are  covered  ac- 
commodations for  troops  as  a  protection  against  shell-fire  and 
the  inclemency  of  the  weather.  They  are  generally  made  from 
rough  timbers,  covered  with  earth,  and,  while  rarely  bomb-proof, 
can  be  easily  made  splinter-proof.  The  vertical  timbers  sup- 
porting the  roof  are  generally  sunk  in  the  ground,  footed  on  a 
flat  slab  and  placed  four  or  five  feet  apart ;  they  are  connected 
by  cross-pieces,  which  can  be  strutted  if  necessary  ;  on  these  are 
laid  close  together  one  or  more  rows  of  timbers,  railroad  iron, 
or  fascines,  and  the  whole  covered  with  three  or  four  feet  of 
earth. 

500.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  brushwood  used  in  military  en- 
gineering ?  A.  For  road-making  and  revetting  purposes,  and  for 
the  construction  of  gabions,  fascines,  hurdles,  baskets,  etc. 

501.  Q.  What  kind  of  brushwood  and  what  size  is  most  de- 
sirable for  military  purposes?  A.  Willow,  birch,  ash,  Spanish 
chestnut,  and  hazel  when  the  leaf  is  off.  It  can  be  used  up  to 
li  inches  in  diameter  for  gabions  and  similar  work,  and  up  to  2^ 
inches  in  diameter  for  fascines  and  pickets. 

503.  Q.  What  are  withes  used  for,  and  of  what  wood  and  size 
most  suitable  ?  A,  They  are  used  for  binding  purposes,  and  are 
best  of  pliable  willow  and  hazel  f  inch  in  diameter. 

503.  Q.  What  is  a  fascine  ?  A.  A  long  faggot,  tightly  packed 
and  carefully  bound,  about  18  feet  long  and  9  inches  in  diameter. 

504.  Q.  How  is  a  fascine  made  ?    A.  It  is  made  in  a  cradle  of 


68  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIN"ER. 

five  trQ3tles  ;  the  two  outside  trestles  must  be  placed  16  feet  apart 
—a  line  stretched  between  them  and  the  other  three  trestles  in- 
terpolated, so  that  the  crutches  are  all  in  the  same  line.  The 
brushwood,  trimmed,  if  possible,  is  laid  in  the  cradle,  projecting 
about  2  feet  beyond  the  outside  trestles,  and  adjusted  so  that 
there  may  be  no  weak  place.  Crooked  rods  must  be  sawn  half 
through  and  straightened.  The  fascine  is  then  guaged  with  the 
choker,  which  consists  of  two  wooden  levers  4  feet  long,  connected 
at  18  inches  from  their  ends  by  a  chain  4  feet  long,  provided  with 
two  gauge  rings  2  feet  4  inches  apart,  corresponding  to  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  fascine.  Two  men  use  this,  standing  one  on 
each  side,  by  placing  the  centre  of  the  chain  under  the  fascine 
with  the  short  ends  of  the  levers  uppermost;  cross  the  levers  to 
each  other  over  the  fascine  with  the  short  ends  down,  and  bear 
down  on  the  long  ends  until  the  guage  rings  meet.  The  binding 
is  commenced  at  one  end;  the  fascine  is  choked  close  up  to  the 
position  of  the  binding  while  the  latter  is  being  put  on. 

505.  Q.  What  are  gabions  ?  A.  They  are  open  cylinders,  made 
of  brushwood  and  used  for  revetments. 

506.  Q.  For  what  purpose  are  hurdles  used;  in  what  shape  are 
they  manufactured  and  why  ?  A.  Hurdles  are  used  for  revet- 
ments, huts,  and  temporary  roadways.  They  are  generally  made 
on  a  curve,  and  then  flattened  out  as  a  safeguard  against  subse- 
quent warping. 

REVETMENTS. 

507.  Q.  For  what  are  revetments  made  and  what  materials 
are  used  in  making  them  ?  A.  Kevetments  are  used  when  it  is 
necessary  to  retain  earth  at  a  steeper  slope  than  it  would  naturally 
assume.  Brushwood,  in  the  rough,  or  in  the  form  of  gabions, 
fascines,  or  hurdle-work;  sand-bags,  sods,  and  timber  are  mate- 
rials that  are  used. 

508.  Q.  Which  is  the  most  durable  of  all  revetments,  and  when 
should  it  be  used  ?  A.  Sod  is  the  most  durable  if  revetments 
are  constructed  in  the  spring,  but  it  is  a  bad  revetment  if  made 
in  frosty  or  very  dry  weather. 

509.  Q.  With  what  should  a  work  be  crowned  ?  A.  With  sods 
or  sand-bags. 

510.  Q.  At  what  slope  are  fascines  built  up  ?  A.  f.  Each  fas- 
cine secured  by  four  or  five  pickets,,  which  should  be  driven  at  an 
angle  into  the  parapet. 

511.  Q.  How  should  sod  be  laid  for  revetments  ?  A.  In  alter- 
nate rows  of  headers  and  stretchers,  grass  downwards,  breaking 
joint,  and  perpendicular  to  the  slope.  The  top  layer  should  be 
laid  with  grass  upwards,  and  all  headers;  they  should  be  bedded 
and  backed  by  fine  earth  well  rammed  and  pickets  driven  through 
every  second  row. 


FIELD  EN^GIKEERIKG.  69 


WORKING  PARTIES. 


512.  Q.  How  should  working  parties  be  detailed  relative  to 
their  organizations,  and  what  reserve  should  they  have  ?  A.  Tiiey 
should  be  detailed  from  a  company,  battalion,  brigade,  or  divi- 
sion, according  to  the  strength  required,  and  not  formed  of  de- 
tachments from  different  companies  and  corps.  They  should 
have  a  reserve  of  one-tenth  necessary  for  the  work  in  hand. 

513.  Q.  In  proceeding  to  work  how  should  tools  be  carried  ?  A. 
Picks  and  shovels  are  carried  at  the  trail,  the  former  in  the  left 
and  the  latter  in  the  right  hand,  iron  to  the  front  and  vertical. 
In  turning,  the  iron  of  the  pick  must  be  dropped  and  that  of  the 
shovel  raised,  and  when  marching  in  file  the  handles  must  be 
splayed  outwards.  These  precautions  are  necessary  to  prevent 
clatter  and  betray  the  whereabouts  of  the  working  party. 

514.  Q.  In  siege  trench-work  how  should  a  large  body  be  set  to 
work  ?  A.  A  large  party  must  be  halted  at  a  distance  and  brought 
up  in  detaciiments,  and  no  work  commenced  till  the  distribution 
of  the  whole  party  is  complete,  in  order  to  prevent  confusion  by 
shifting  men  after  work  has  been  commenced. 

515.  Q.  How  long  should  reliefs  work,  and  how  far  apart 
should  the  men  be  at  work  ?  A.  Six-hour  reliefs  are  the  best. 
Men  cau'  work  as  close  as  4  feet  apart,  but  5  feet  is  safer. 

516.  Q.  How  should  men  use  the  shovel  in  order  to  prevent  the 
earth  from  scattering  ?  A.  In  throwing  the  earth  from  the  shovel 
the  left  (or  right)  hand  must  be  allowed  to  slide  freely  up  the 
handle. 

517.  Q.  What  is  the  responsibility  of  officers  in  connection 
with  trench-work  ?  A.  It  is  the  duty  of  superintending  officers 
to  lay  out  the  work,  adjust  the  tasks,  conduct  the  distribution, 
and  generally  supervise  the  execution.  It  is  the  duty  of  com- 
pany officers  to  see  that  the  wishes  of  the  superintending  officers 
are  fully  complied  with,  and  that  their  men  execute  the  tasks  al- 
lotted to  them  with  all  reasonable  rapidity, 

518.  Q.  What  is  an  ordinary  task  of  excavation  ?  A.  For  an 
untrained  workman  in  fair  soil  it  is  a  cubic  yard  per  hour  for 
four  successive  hours.  Six  hours  must  generally  be  allowed  for 
the  total  completion  of  such  a  task  by  a  large  working  party. 

SIEGE  TRENCHES. 

519.  Q.  When  regular  siege  is  laid  to  a  fortress,  in  how  many 
ways  are  the  trenches  constructed  by  which  access  to  the  place 
is  obtained  ?  A.  In  three  ways — by  common  trench-work,  flying 
trench -work,  and  sapping. 

520.  Q.  How  are  the  working  parties  formed  for  common  trench- 
work  ?  A.  Those  forming  the  first  relief,  of  a  strength  in  the 
proportion  of  1  man  to  every  2  paces  of  trench,  with  a  reserve 


70  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMII^ER. 

of  10  per  cent,  parade  in  fatigue  dress,  with  rifles  slung,  waist> 
belts,  bayonets,  field-belts,  and  at  least  40  rounds  of  ammunition, 
and  canteens.  Each  man  is  provided  with  a  pick  and  shovel. 
When  it  is  sufficiently  dark  to  escape  detection  from  the  fortress 
the  party  is  marched  to  within  20  yards  of  the  point  where  the 
extension  along  the  proposed  trench  is  to  commence,  and  is  formed 
in  line.  The  command  is  then  given  tactically  for  the  men  to 
form  along  the  tape  placed  by  the  engineers.  As  soon  as  the 
first  company  is  clear,  the  other  companies  follow  in  succession, 
by  command  of  their  captains,  As  each  man  gets  into  position 
he  drives  his  pick  into  the  ground  on  the  left  of  his  task,  and  lays 
his  shovel  along  the  front  of  it.  He  then  unslings  his  arms, 
takes  ofif  his  waist-belt,  and  lays  them  four  paces  in  rear  of  his 
task,  butt  of  the  rifle  towards  the  trench,  and  then  lies  down 
behind  his  shovel  until  the  order  is  passed  to  commence  work. 

521.  Q.  What  is  the  difiierence  between  flying  trench-work  and 
common  trench-work?  A.  In  flying  trench-work  gabions  are 
used  to  revet  the  interior  slope  of  the  parapet,  by  w^hich  means 
cover  is  more  easily  obtained.  In  this  case  each  man  of  the  first 
relief  carries  two  gabions,  behind  w^hich  he  works,  and  the  ex- 
tension is  made  from  single  rank  at  4  feet  intervals. 

ROADS. 

522.  Q.  What  should  be  the  ordinary  roadway  to  take  a  single 
line  of  vehicles,  and  how  may  this  be  utilized  for  wagons  going 
and  coming  ?  A.  Ten  feet  will  be  sufficient  for  a  single  line  of 
vehicles,  and  if  it  is  provided  with  sidings  made  at  intervals  can 
be  used  for  vehicles  passing  both  ways. 

523.  Q.  When  a  new  road  has  to  be  made,  how  should  it  be  laid 
out  ?  A.  As  straight  as  is  consistent  with  the  extreme  gradient 
permissable. 

524.  Q.  If  the  road  passes  through  a  wood,  what  will  it  be  well 
to  do?  A.  Cut  down  a  line  of  trees  in  the  required  direction. 
The  space  should  then  be  cleared  of  all  irregularities  and  the  tree 
roots  grubbed  up. 

525.  Q.  How  should  a  road  slope  ?  A.  From  the  centre  to  the 
side  at  about  one-thirtieth,  to  allow  the  water  to  drain  off. 

526.  Q.  When  a  road  is  cut  on  the  side  of  a  hill,  how  should  it 
slope  ?  A.  Inwards  toward  the  hill,  the  water  being  got  rid  of 
by  drains  at  intervals,  passing  under  the  road. 

527.  Q.  When  ascending  a  hill  by  zigzags,  how  should  the 
road  be  made  ?  A.  As  level  as  possible  at  each  angle  and  half  as 
wide  again  as  in  the  straight  portions. 

528.  Q.  How  should  a  road  be  made  when  passing  over  wet  or 
marshy  ground  ?  A.  When  brushwood  is  available,  it  should  be 
made  up  into  fascines  or  hurdles,  or  even  laid  loose  across  the 
road. 


FIELD   EN^GIKEERIN^G.  71 

529.  Q.  When  trees  are  plentiful,  what  kind  of  roads  are  the 
best  for  crossing  soft  or  marshy  places  ?    A.  Corduroy  roads. 

530.  Q.  When  an  army  is  occupying  a  position  in  which  it  is  in- 
tended to  give  battle,  how  may  temporary  communications  be 
facilitated  ?  A.  By  cutting  paths  througli  woods,  ramps  made  to 
ascend  steep  places  ;  swampy  places  have  fascines  or  brushwood 
laid  over  them,  or  corduroyed,  and  tracks  made  through  villages 
by  knocking  down  the  walls,  etc.  Sign-posts  should  be  put  up  at 
frequent  intervals  and  at  all  cross-roads  and  paths. 

531.  Q.  When  troops  are  to  march  along  an  unknown  road, 
what  should  the  advance  guard  do  ?  A.  Mark  the  direction  in 
which  they  are  to  march.  Sign-posts  with  the  words  "This  way  " 
roughly  written  on  them,  or  in  default,  wisps  of  straw  on  posts, 
or  even  heaps  of  stone  may  be  used. 


CORDAGE  AND  USE  OF  SPARS. 

•  532.  Q.  How  are  ropes  distinguished  as  to  size  ?    A.  By  their 
circumference  in  inches. 

533.  Q.  What  is  the  breaking  weight  of  hemp,  iron  wire,  and 
steel  rope  ?  A.  The  breaking  weight  of  hemp  rope  in  tons  is  ^ 
the  square  of  the  circumference  in  inches  ;  that  is,  the  breaking 
weight  of  a  2-inch  rope  =  f  x  2  =  1^  tons.  1  ron  wire  rope  is  about 
equal  to  the  square  of  the  circumference  in  inches.  Steel  wire 
rope  is  from  2  to  2^  times  as  strong  as  iron  wire.  In  other  words, 
the  breaking  weight  of  iron  wire  rope  is  3  times  that  of  hemp, 
and  steel  is  7  times  that  of  hemp. 

534.  Q.  Enumerate  some  of  the  principal  knots  and  their  uses. 
A.  Thumb-knot,  for  preventing  the  end  of  a  rope  from  slipping 
through  a  block  ;  reef-knot,  for  joining  two  ropes  of  the  same 
size  ;  draw-knot,  like  a  reef,  but  can  be  cast  off  from  a  distance 
by  pulling  on  the  bight ;  round-turn  and  two  half  hitches,  for 
securing  a  rope,  such  as  the  end  of  a  guy  to  a  picket.;  sheep- 
shank, for  shortening  a  rope  without  cutting  it ;  clove-hitch,  for 
fastening  a  rope  to  a  spar  ;  timber-hitch,  used  for  foot-ropes  and 
for  hauling  spars,  in  which  case  a  half  hitch  is  added  near  the 
end  ;  hawser-bend,  for  joining  large  cables  ;  bow-line,  for  mak- 
ing a  loop  which  will  not  slip. 

535.  Q.  How  should  a  block  be  lashed  to  a  spar  ?  A.  The  back 
of  the  hook  is  laid  against  the  spar,  a  clove-hitch  is  taken  around 
the  spar  above  the  hook  ;  then  several  turns  around  the  hook  and 
spar,  and  some  more  turns  round  the  spar  below  the  hook, 
finished  off  with  two  half  hitches. 

536.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  mousing  ?  A.  Taking  some  turns 
around  the  hook  of  a  block  with  spun  yam  or  very  light  lashing 
after  the  hook  is  lashed  to  the  spar. 

537.  Q.  For  what  are  blocks  used,  and  what  does  a  combination 


72  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

of  two  or  more  form  ?    A.  Blocks  are  used  for  changing  the  di- 
rection of  ropes  ;  in  combination  they  form  a  tackle. 

538.  Q.  What  are  snatch- blocks  ?  A.  They  are  single  blocks 
with  an  opening  in  the  strap  on  one  side  to  admit  a  rope  without 
passing  its  end  through. 

539.  Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  overhaul,  round  in,  and  chock  ? 
A.  Overhaul  is  to  separate  the  blocks  ;  round  in  is  to  bring  them 
closer  together,  and  chock  is  when  the  blocks  are  brought  to- 
gether. 

540.  Q.  Describe  a  crab  or  field  capstan.  A.  It  is  made  of 
wood,  and  has  vertical  and  slightly  conical  drum  and  is  worked 
by  capstan  bars. 

541.  Q.  What  is  a  winch  ?  A.  It  is  usually  made  of  iron  ;  has 
a  horizontal  drum,  worked  by  handles. 

543.  Q.  What  is  a  derrick  ?  A.  A  single  spar  set  up  with  four 
guys,  secured  with  a  carrick  bend  ;  a  tackle  is  lashed  to  the  head 
for  raising  and  swinging  weights  into  position.  The  belaying 
points  for  the  guys  should  be  at  a  distance  from  the  foot  of  the 
derrick  equal  to  twice  its  height. 

543.  Q.  How  should  lifting  jacks  be  used  ?  A.  When  lifting 
heavy  weights,  they  should  be  used  vertically  and  in  pairs  and 
the  weight  should  be  blocked  up  as  it  is  raised. 

BRIDGES. 

544.  Q.  What  materials  are  usually  available  for  the  construc- 
tion of  bridges  in  the  field  ?  A.  Timber,  hemp  and  wire  rope, 
railway  iron,  spikes,  dogs,  and  light  iron  forgings. 

545.  Q.  How  many  distinct  types  of  bridges  enter  into  military 
operations  ?  A.  Three :  bridges  on  dry  land,  restoration  of 
railway  bridges,  and  floating  bridges. 

546.  Q.  How  should  the  roadway  of  a  bridge  be  constructed 
as  regards  level?  A.  It  is  generally  constructed  with  a  slight 
rise  to  the  centre  of  the  bridge  to  allow  for  subsequent  settle- 
ment. 

547.  Q.  What  is  the  officer  superintending  the  construction  of 
a  bridge  responsible  for?  A.  That  it  is  strong  enough  to  sup- 
port the  weight  it  is  intended  to  carry.  To  prevent  it  being  over- 
strained, a  signboard  should  be  placed  at  either  end  stating  the 
greatest  permissible  load,  such  as,  "Bridge  to  carry  infantry  in 
fours,"  "  Bridge  to  carry  infantry  in  file,"  "  Bridge  to  carry  guns 
not  heavier  than  12  pounds,"  etc. 

548.  Q.  Give  the  technical  terms  of  the  various  timbers  used 
in  the  construction  of  a  trestle  bridge  and  their  uses.  A.  Tres- 
tles, formed  by  lashing  a  ledger  near  the  base  of  two  standards, 
whirh  have  diagonal  braces,  A  transom  is  then  lashed  to  the 
two  standards  of  the  trestle  just  above  the  braces.  Longitudinal 
baulks  in  their  turn  rest  on  the  transverse  transoms.     Chesses 


FIELD   ENGmEEEING.  73 

are  then  placed  across  the  width  of  roadway,  resting  on  the 
baulks. 

549.  Q.  If  there  are  five  baulks  in  a  roadway,  why  should 
each  baulk  be  calculated  to  bear  only  one  quarter  of  the  whole 
weight  ?  A.  Because  the  two  outside  baulks  are  supposed  to  do 
only  half  the  work  of  the  centre  ones. 

550.  Q.  When  bottom  can  be  touched  throughout,  what  is  the 
best  form  of  bridge  to  construct  ?  A.  A  trestle  bridge,  it  being 
the  most  economical  of  material  and  the  easiest  of  construction. 

551.  Q.  If  the  gap  to  be  bridged  partakes  of  the  nature  of  a 
chasm,  with  no  available  bottom,  what  kind  of  bridge  should  be 
constructed  ?  A.  A  frame  bridge,  which  is  the  engineer's  substi- 
tute for  an  arch. 

553.  Q.  If  timber  of  suflQcient  length  for  a  frame  bridge  is  not 
available,  what  must  be  done  ?  A.  A  tension  or  suspension 
bridge  must  be  used. 

553.  Q.  How  may  trestles  be  placed  if  it  is  impossible  to  do  so 
by  hand  ?  A.  They  can  be  boomed  out  in  succession  from  the 
head  of  the  bridge  by  lowering  them  down  inclined  baidks. 

554.  Q.  What  advantages  do  tripod  trestles  possess  ?  A.  They 
utilize  light  material,  will  stand  without  bracing  and  admit  of 
more  ready  adjustment,  raising  or  lowering  of  the  roadway  than 
either  of  the  other  forms ;  tliey  are,  however,  unsuitable  for  an 
uneven  bottom,  and  extremely  difficult  to  place  except  by  hand. 

555.  Q.  How  many  classes  of  frame  bridges  are  used?  A. 
Four  :  the  single  lock,  double  lock,  single  sling,  and  treble  sling. 

556.  Q.  What  points  must  be  observed  when  reconnoitering  a 
river  with  a  view  to  effecting  a  passage  ?  A.  The  nature  of  the 
banks ;  the  nature  of  the  bed ;  position  and  depth  of  fords  ; 
strength  of  the  current ;  whether  tidal  or  otherwise  ;  probability 
and  extent  of  floods. 

557.  Q.  At  what  depths  are  rivers  fordable  ?  A.  For  infantry, 
3  feet ;  cavalry,  4  feet ;  wagons  containing  ammunition,  2  feet  4 
inches. 

558.  Q.  Why  are  gravelly  bottoms  of  rivers  better  than  sandy 
bottoms  ?  A.  Because  the  sand  gets  stirred  up  and  the  depth  of 
water  increases. 

559.  Q.  How  should  fords  be  marked  ?  A.  By  long  pickets 
driven  into  the  river-bed  above  and  below  the  ford,  their  heads 
being  connected  by  a  strong  rope.  The  pickets  should  be  marked, 
so  that  any  rise  of  the  river  might  at  once  be  noted. 

560.  Q.  Whore  is  the  depth  of  a  river  generally  most  uniform  ? 
A.  In  straight  parts  ;  at  bends  the  depth  will  generally  be  greater 
at  the  concave  bank. 

561.  Q.  W^hat  is  the  simplest  plan  of  measuring  the  velocity  of 
a  stream  ?  A.  Use  a  light  rod  weighted  at  one  end,  so  as  to  float 
nearly  vertically  with  its  tip  j^ctJ^f^^te^gote  the  distance  it 


'^Iri^-n 


74 

floats  in  a  given  number  of  seconds  ;  then  seven-tenths  the  mean 
number  of  feet  a  second  gives  the  number  of  miles  an  hour. 

562.  Q.  Failing  fords,  how  is  the  passage  of  a  river  effected  ? 
A.  By  ferrying  or  the  construction  of  a  bridge. 

563.  Q.  What  is  a  flying  bridge  ?  A.  One  in  which  the  action 
of  the  current  is  made  to  move  a  boat  or  raft  across  the  stream 
by  acting  obliquely  against  its  side,  which  should  be  kept  at  an 
angle  of  55  degrees  with  the  current. 

564.  Q.  What  kind  of  boats  are  the  best  for  flying  bridges  ? 
A.  Long,  narrow,  deep  boats  with  vertical  sides,  to  which  lee- 
boards  can  be  attached. 

565.  Q.  What  points  must  be  attended  to  in  selecting  sites  for 
a  floating  bridge  ?  A.  Proximity  to  a  road  ;  the  bed  of  the  river, 
to  afford  good  holding-ground  for  anchors  if  required  ;  a  pos- 
sible use  of  islands  in  the  river ;  and  the  position  where  it  can 
best  be  defended. 

566.  Q.  Where  should  a  bridge  be  located  best  for  its  defense  ? 
A.  At  the  re-entering  bend  of  a  river. 

567.  Q.  How  should  the  roadway  of  a  floating  bridge  be  con- 
structed ?    A.  On  the  same  general  principles  as  trestle  bridges. 

568.  Q.  In  using  open  boats  for  bridges,  where  should  the 
baulks  rest  ?  A.  A  central  transom  should  be  used,  w^hich  can 
generally  be  done  by  resting  a  transom  on  the  thwarts  and  block- 
ing them  up  from  underneath,  thus  bringing  the  weight  directly 
on  the  kelson. 

569.  Q.  How  is  the  available  buoyancy  of  a  boat  determined  ? 
A.  By  loading  it  with  unarmed  men  to  such  a  depth  as  is  con- 
sidered safe.  For  bridging  purposes,  the  number  of  jnen  multi- 
plied by  160  is  the  available  buoyancy  in  pounds. 

570.  Q.  How  may  the  central  interval  between  boats  be  deter- 
mined ?  A.  If  the  number  of  men  which  the  boat  will  sustain 
be  divided  by  4,  the  result  will  be  the  interval  in  feet  at  which 
the  boats  may  be  placed  in  bridge  to  carry  infantry  in  fours 
crowded. 

571.  Q.  How  may  the  buoyancy  of  a  cask  be  determined  ?  A. 
Multiply  the  contents  in  gallons  by  10 ;  the  result  gives  a  safe 
buoyancy  in  pounds. 

572.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  forming  a  raft  ?  A.  The  logs 
should  be  placed  side  by  side,  thick  and  thin  ends  alternating ; 
they  should  then  be  strongly  secured  with  rope,  and,  if  possible, 
by  cross  and  diagonal  pieces  of  scantling,  fastened  by  spikes 
or  wooden  trenails ;  or  the  logs  themselves  can  be  connected  by 
dogs. 

573.  Q.  What  are  good  substitutes  for  anchors  for  floating 
bridges  ?  A.  Two  or  more  pickaxes  lashed  together ;  heavy 
weights,  such  as  large  stones  or  railway  irons  ;  nets  filled  with 
stones, —these  are  remarkably  effective  on  rocky  bottoms. 

574.  Q.  How  is  a  bridge  put  together  in  rafting  ?    A.  It  is  put 


FIELD   ENGINEERING.  75 

together  in  different  portions  or  rafts  along  the  shore,  each  raft 
consisting  of  two  or  more  piers,  which  rafts  are  successively 
warped,  rowed,  or  towed  into  their  proper  positions  in  bridge. 

575.  Q.  In  swinging  how  is  a  bridge  constructed  ?  A.  The 
bridge  is  constructed  entire  along  shore,  and  then  swung  across 
the  stream. 

576.  Q.  If  material  is  scarce  and  heavy  siege  artillery  has  to 
be  passed  over  it,  what  should  be  done  ?  A.  The  bridge  should 
be  constructed  of  only  sufficient  strength  for  the  ordinary  traffic, 
and  the  guns  should  be  warped  across  on  rafts  of  sufficient 
strength  for  the  purpose. 

CAMPING  ARRANGEMENTS. 

577.  Q.  In  a  defensive  camp  what  arrangements  should  be 
made  as  soon  as  the  limits  of  the  camp  have  been  marked  out  ? 
A.  Shelter  or  other  intrenchments  should  be  prepared  for  accord- 
ing to  circumstances.  The  troops  are  then  told  off  to  their  re- 
spective positions,  reserves  detailed,  pickets  and  outposts  posted, 
and  every  precaution  taken  for  the  safety  of  the  camp. 

578.  Q.  How  are  latrines,  or  sinks,  constructed  ?  A.  In  stand- 
ing camps  a  trench  about  6  feet  long  and  3  feet  in  width  (or  2 
feet  6  inches  will  answer  if  the  ground  is  hard)  should  be  made, 
with  a  pole  stretching  along  the  front,  either  end  resting  in  the 
forks  of  stakes  driven  in  the  ground  and  braced.  Fresh  dirt 
should  be  thrown  into  it  each  morning. 

579.  Q.  What  care  should  be  exercised  in  locating  latrines  ? 
A.  They  should  be  so  placed  that  no  filtration  from  them  may 
reach  the  water  supply. 

580.  Q.  In  a  running  stream  where  should  the  water  be 
obtained  ?  A.  The  men  should  draw  water  above  the  place  for 
the  animals,  while  washing,  etc.,  should  be  done  below,  and 
drainage  should  enter  below  the  others  as  far  down  stream  as 
possible. 

581.  Q.  If  the  supply  of  water  is  obtained  from  springs  for  a 
camp,  how  should  they  be  made  available  ?  A.  Each  spring-head 
should  be  opened  up  and  surrounded  by  a  low  puddled  wall  to 
keep  out  surface  water.  Casks  or  cylinders  made,  of  brushwood, 
like  gabions,  make  good  linings  for  springs. 

582.  Q.  What  kind  of  water  should  be  avoided  ?  A.  That  from 
small  ponds  and  shallow  wells. 

583.  Q.  How  may  water  be  improved  for  drinking  purposes? 
A.  Muddy  water  may  be  cleared  by  alum  ;  six  grains  per  gallon 
are  sufficient.  It  should  be  added  some  hours  before  the  water 
is  required.  Tea-leaves  that  have  been  used  to  make  tea  may  be 
put  into  drinking  water,  as  they  help  to  remove  organic  matter. 
Charcoal  is  an  efficient  purifier  of  water  containing  organic 
matter. 


76  THE   AEMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

584.  Q.  How  may  water  be  filtered  in  camp  ?  A.  It  may  be 
filtered  through  clean  sand  and  gravel ;  but.  this  only  removes 
suspended  matter  and  some  organic  and  mineral  impurities.  The 
best  method  is  by  passing  it  through  layers  of  gravel,  sand,  and 
charcoal  contained  in  casks.  The  layers  should  be  as  thick  as 
possible  and  should  be  strongly  compressed,  so  that  the  water 
takes  a  few  minutes  to  pass  through  them  ;  the  gravel,  sand,  and 
charcoal  should  be  thoroughly  washed  before  being  put  into  the 
casks.  The  layers  may  be  prevented  from  intermixing  by  a 
perforated  board  or  sheet  of  iron,  or  a  layer  of  clean  straw ;  a 
space  of  6  inches  is  left  clear  at  the  bottom  of  the  cask  by  sup- 
porting a  perforated  board  at  that  height. 

585.  Q.  When  no  existing  source  of  water  supply  is  available, 
how  may  it  be  found  ?    By  sinking  drive- wells  if  furnished. 

586.  Q.  Where  should  bivouacs  be  established  ?  A.  On  ground 
sheltered  as  much  as  possible  from  the  wind  and  within  reach  of 
wood  and  water. 

587.  Q.  How  should  men  sleep  in  bivouac  if  not  compelled  to 
lie  in  line  of  battle?  A.  When  camp-fires  are  permitted  they 
should  sleep  round  them  in  a  circle,  with  their  feet  to  the  fire. 
Sleeping  under  trees  or  in  woods  gives  some  protection  from  cold 
and  dew.  A  bed  of  straw,  leaves,  or  small  boughs  should  be  made 
to  lie  on  ;  when  these  are  not  available  a  hollow  should  be  scraped 
for  the  hip.  A  rubber  blanket  is  an  excellent  article  to  use, 
either  flat  on  the  ground  or  covering  straw,  etc. 

588.  Q.  What  may  be  done  as  a  protection  from  cold  winds  ? 
A.  A  pile  of  earth,  sods,  stones,  logs,  brushwood,  or  anything  of 
like  character  should  be  built  up  to  windward. 

HASTY    DEMOLITION. 

589.  Q.  What  are  the  explosives  available  for  hasty  demolition  ? 
A.  Gunpowder,  gun-cotton,  and  dynamite. 

590.  Q.  What  is  the  relative  explosive  force  of  gun-cotton  and 
dynamite  as  compared  with  gunpowder?  A.  Gun-cotton  and 
dynamite  is  from  2  to  2|-  times  that  of  gunpowder. 

591.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  tamping,  and  of  what  use  is  it  ?  A. 
^t  is  covering  the  charge  over  with  earth  or  other  material  so  as 
to  confine  the  gases  at  the  commencement  of  the  explosion,  and 
thus  more  fully  develop  the  force. 

592.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  gun-cotton  be  used  ?  A.  For 
small  charges  it  is  better  that  the  whole  of  the  charge  should  be 
dry ;  but  if  the  charge  be  large,  wet  cotton  is  used,  care  being 
taken  that  the  primer  be  thoroughly  dry.  Wet  gun-cotton  should 
not  be  used  in  blast-holes. 

593.  Q.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  in  firing  gun-cotton  ? 
A.  The  primer  should  be  thoroughly  dry;  the  charge  should  be 
in  close  contact  with  the  object  to  be  demolished  ;  in  placing  the 


FIELD    EKGINEEEING.  '  77 

detonator  in  tlie  charge  it  must  be  inserted  so  far  that  all  the 
fulminate  is  in  contact  with  the  gun-cotton. 

594.  Q.  How  should  different  objects  be  attacked  in  order  to 
demolish  them  ?  A.  To  blow  down  a  house,  the  portions  of  the 
walls  between  the  windows ;  for  trees,  boring  auger-holes  and 
filling  them  with  gun-cotton  ;  in  wooden  bridges,  the  uprights  of 
the  piers  ;  when  bridges  are  of  masonry  and  of  a  single  arch, 
the  haunches  are  the  best  points ;  if  a  bridge  consist  of  a  series  of 
masonry  arches  and  piers  are  short  and  thick,  the  haunches  should 
be  attacked,  but  if  high  and  thin  the  charges  should  be  placed 
against  them. 

595.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  regard  to  destroying  rail- 
roads ?    A.  They  should  not  be  injured  except  by  special  order. 

596.  Q.  How  is  a  railroad  disabled  ?  A.  Temporarily,  by 
removing  a  rail  or  two;  the  outside  rail  on  a  curve  is  the  best  to 
select ;  when  a  railroad  is  ordered  to  be  destroyed  the  rails  should 
be  tjiken  up,  a  stack  of  sleepers  or  logs  made,  the  rails  laid  across 
and  the  logs  set  on  fire  ;  the  rails  will  thus  be  bent,  and  no 
further  use  can  be  made  of  them  for  railroad  purposes.  Blowing 
in  a  tunnel  is  a  very  effectual  way  of  stopping  a  line. 

597.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  regard  to  destroying  a  line 
of  telegraph  ?    A.  It  should  not  be  injured  without  special  orders. 

598.  Q.  How  may  a  telegraph  line  be  disabled?  A.  By  remov- 
ing the  instruments,  by  binding  all  the  wires  forming  it  together 
with  fine  wire,  taking  care  to  scrape  them  well  previously  till 
quite  clean  and  bright. 

599.  Q.  How  may  a  telegraph  line  be  destroyed  ?  A.  Cut  the 
wires,  cut  down  the  posts,  break  the  insulators,  and  break  or 
carry  off  the  instruments  and  batteries. 


r' 


PART  IV. 


SIGNALLING 


Text— (7<?cfo  adopted  hy  G.  O.  No.  59,  A.  O.  0.,  1889. 


For  Second  Lieutenants— Nos.  600-651. 
For  First  Lieutenants — Nos.  600-651. 


rx^   0?  THE        ^ 


PAKT  IV. 

jsiGWALzma. 


V.  S.  ARMY  SIGNAL  AND  TELEGEAPH  CODE. 
(Authorized  by  G.  O.  No.  59,  A.  G.  O.,  June  28, 1889.) 

600.  Q.  Give  the  characters  used  for  the  alphabet  and  numerals 
in  the  Signal  and  Telegraph  Code.     A. : 


ALPHABET. 

A 

F 

K 

P 

U 

B 

C--  - 

D 

E- 

G. 

H 

I-- 

J 

Z- 

L 

M 

N— - 
0-    - 

&• 

NUMERALS. 

Q 

R-  -- 

S--- 
T  — 

V 

w 

X 

Y--  .- 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

8 

9 

0 

601.  Q.  Give  the  characters  used  for  punctuation  marks,  and 
state  how  a  fraction  is  made.     A. : 

PUNCTUATION  MARKS. 

Comma, Interrogation, Parenthesis,  Pn 

Semicolon,  Si  Quotation,  Qn  Brackets,  Bx 

Colon,  Ko  Paragraph, Dollar  mark,  Sx 

Period, Exclamation, Dash,  Dx 

Hyphen,  Hx  Underline,  Ux 

A  fraction  is  made  by  inserting  a  dot  between  the  numerator 

and  denomi  nator — Example,  |, '--- 

81 


82  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

603.  Q.  Plaoe  opposite  the  following  numbers  the  meaning 
when  those  ntimbers  are  signalled  :  1,  4,  5,  7,  8,  9,  13,  18,  27,  30, 
44,  73,  92,  134.  A.  1.  Wait  a  moment.  4.  Start  me.  5.  Have 
you  anything  for  me  ?  7.  Are  you  ready  ?  8.  Busy  on  other 
wires  (or  stations).  9.  Train  order  (or  important  military  mes- 
sage)— give  way.  13.  Do  you  understand?  18.  What  is  the 
matter?  27.  Adjust  your  magnet  (or  flash).  30.  Circuit  closed 
(or  close  station).  44.  Answer  quick.  73.  Accept  compliments. 
92.  Deliver  (ed.).    134.  Who  is  at  the  key  (flag,  lantern,  or  torch)  ? 

603.  Q.  State  what  letters  indicate  certain  abbreviations  in  the 
Code.  A.  Ahr.  Another.  Ans.  Answer.  Ck.  Check.  Col.  Col- 
lect. D  H.  Dead-head.  G  A.  Go  ahead.  G  E.  Good-evening. 
G  M.  Good-morning.  GK  Good- night.  G  K.  Government  rate. 
N  M.  No  more.  O  B.  Official  business.  O  K.  All  right.  Opr. 
Operator.     Pd.  Paid.     Qk.  Quick.     Srg.  Signature. 

604.  Q.  How  will  the  flagman  face  when  signalling?  A.  Ex- 
actly toward  the  communicating  station;  staff  is  vertical  in  front 
of  centre  of  body,  butt  at  height  of  waist. 

605.  Q,  How  is  the  dot,  dash,  and  space  represented  ?  A. 
The  dot  by  a  motion  to  the  right;  the  dash  by  a  motion  to  the 
left  of  the  sender  ;  the  space,  whether  separating  elements  of 
spaced  characters  or  separating  words  will  be  represented  by  a 
"front"  motion. 

606.  Q.  Describe  some  of  these  motions  and  state  what  they 
represent.  A.  Right,  right,  front,  right,  reprogent  C  ;  right, 
front,  right,  represent  O;  right,  right,  right,  front,  right,  repre- 
sent Z  ;  etc. 

607.  Q.  What  curvature  will  these  motions  embrace  ?  A.  An 
arc  of  90°,  starting  from  and  returning  to  the  vertical. 

608.  Q.  How  is  the  long  dash  (L  and  numeral  0)  distinguished 
from  the  letter  "  T  "  dash  ?  A.  By  a  slight  pause  at  the  lowest 
point  of  dip,  and  with  this  exception  there  will  be  no  pause  what- 
ever between  the  motions  required  for  any  single  letter. 

609.  Q.  State  where  pauses  will  be  made.  A.  A  slight  pause 
will  be  made  between  letters.  At  the  end  of  each  word,  abbre- 
viation, or  conventional  signal,  the  space  signal,  or  "  front  "  mo- 
tion is  made,  preceded  and  followed  by  a  pause  equivalent  to 
that  made  between  letters. 

CONVENTIONAL  SIGNALS  FOR  FLAG  OR  TORCH. 

610.  Q.  What  should  each  station  have  for  the  purpose,  of  sig- 
nalling, etc.  ?  A.  Its  characteristic  signal  or  call-letter,  and  each 
operator  his  personal  signal. 

611.  Q.  How  would  you  call  a  station?  A.  Signal  the  "call- 
letter"  of  the  station  wanted;  or,  if  the  call-letter  be  not  known, 
signal  "A"  without  pause  until  acknowledged.  The  calling 
station  will  then  proceed  with  the  message. 


SIGNALLII^G.  83 

612.  Q.  How  is  a  call  acknowledged?  A.  Signal  **I"  three 
times,  followed  by  "front"  and  the  call-letter  of  the  acknowl- 
edging station. 

613.  Q.  How  would  you  break  or  stop  the  signals  from  the  send- 
ing station  ?    A.  Signal  ' '  A"  without  pause  until  acknowledged. 

614.  Q.  How  will  the  sending  station  be  started  after  breaking  ? 
A.  Signal  "  G  A  "  followed  by  "  front,  "  and  the  last  word  cor- 
rectly received ;  the  sender  will  immediately  resume  the  message, 
beginning  with  the  word  indicated  by  the  receiver.  If  nothing 
has  been  received  signal  "  R  R  "  the  sender  will  then  repeat  all. 

615.  Q.  How  is  an  error  in  sending  noted  ?  A.  Signal  seven 
dots  rapidly,  followed  by  "front,"  and  resume  the  message,  be- 
ginning with  the  last  word  correctly  sent. 

616.  Q.  How  is  the  end  of  an  address  terminated  ?  A.  Signal 
the  period  followed  by  "  front." 

617.  Q.  How  is  a  signature  denoted?  A.  Signal  "Sig."  fol- 
lowed by  "  front." 

618.  Q.  How  do  you  acknowledge  receipt  of  a  message?  A.  Sig- 
nal "OK"  followed  by  "  front"  and  personal  signal  or  initial 
of  receiver. 

CONVENTIONAL  SIGNALS   FOR   HELIOGRAPH  OR  FLASH   LANTERN. 

619.  Q.  How  may  a  station  be  called  ?  A.  Signal  the  call-let- 
ter of  the  station  wanted,  or,  if  the  call-letter  be  not  known, 
signal  "A"  without  pause  until  acknowledged.  Both  stations 
will  then  adjust,  each  on  the  other's  flash.  When  adjustments 
are  satisfactory,  the  station  called  will  acknowledge  and  cut  off 
its  flash,  and  the  calling  station  will  proceed  with  the  message. 

620.  Q.  How  is  a  call  acknowledged?  A.  Signal  "I"  three 
times,  followed  by  the  call-letter  of  the  acknowledging  station. 

621.  Q.  How  would  you  bi^eak  or  stop  the  signals  from  the  send- 
ing station^  A.  Signal  "  A  "  without  pause  until  answered  by  a 
steady  flash. 

622.  Q.  How  would  you  start  the  sending  station  after  hredk- 
ing?  A.  Signal  "  G  A  "  followed  by  the  last  word  correctly  re- 
ceived; the  sender  will  immediately  resume  his  message,  begin- 
ning with  the  word  indicated  by  the  receiver.  If  nothing  has 
been  received  signal  "R  R,"  the  sender  will  then  repeat  all. 

623.  Q.  How  would  you  note  an  error  in  sending?  A.  Signal 
several  dots  rapidly  and  resume  'the  message,  beginning  with  the 
last  word  correctly  sent. 

624.  Q.  How  is  an  adjustment  called  for  ?  A.  If  the  receiver 
sees  that  the  sender's  mirror  needs  adjusting,  he  will  turn  on  a 
steady  flash  until  answered  by  a  steady  flash.  When  adjustment 
is  satisfactory,  the  receiver  will  signal  "O  K,"  and  the  sender 
will  resume  his  message. 

625.  Q.  How  is  the  end  of  an  address  denoted  ?  A.  By  simply 
signalling  the  period. 


84  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

626.  Q.  How  is  the  signature  denoted  ?    A.  By  sigiialli-ng  "  Sig," 

637.  Q.  Plow  would  you  acknoidedge  receipt  of  a  message  f  A. 
Signal  "  O  K,"  followed  by  personal  signal  or  initial  of  receiver. 

CONVENTIONAL   SIGNALS   FOR   TELEGRAPH. 

638.  Q.  How  would  you  call  a  station  ?  A.  Signal  the  "  call- 
letter  "  of  the  station  required  until  acknowledged,  signing  at  in- 
tervals the  "call-letter  "  of  the  station  calling. 

639.  Q.  How  is  a  call  acknowledged?  A.  Signal  "  I "  three 
times  followed  by  call-letter  of  acknowledging  station. 

630.  Q.  How  would  you  break  the  sending  station  ?  A.  Open 
the  key. 

631.  Q.  How  would  you  start  the  sending  station  after  break- 
ing? A.  Signal  "  G  A,"  followed  by  the  last  word  correctly  re- 
ceived ;  the  sender  will  immediately  resume  his  message,  begin- 
ning with  the  word  indicated  by  the  receiver.  If  nothing  has 
been  received,  signal  "  K  R  ;"  the  sender  will  then  repeat  all. 

633.  Q.  How  do  you  denote  an  error  in  sending  ?  A.  Signal 
seven  dots  rapidly  and  resume  the  message,  beginning  with  the 
last  word  correctly  sent. 

633.  Q.  How  is  the  end  of  the  address  denoted  ?  A.  Signal 
the  period. 

634.  Q.  How  is  the  signature  denoted  ?    A.  Signal  "  Sig." 

635.  Q.  How  is  the  receipt  of  the  message  acknowledged  ?  A. 
Signal  "OK,"  followed  by  personal  signal  or  initial  of  receiver. 

636.  Q.  What  is  the  order  of  transmitting  the  several  parts  of 
a  message  by  flag,  heliograph,  telegraph,  etc.?  A.  1st.  Number 
of  message  and  call-letter  of  sending  station  ;  2d.  Operator's  per- 
sonal signal ;  3d.  The  check  ;  4th.  Place  from  and  date ;  5th. 
Address  in  full ;  6th.  Period  (address  complete) ;  7th.  Body  of 
message ;  8th.  Sig.  (signature  follows) ;  9th.  Signature. 

U.   S.   NAVAL   CODE   FOR  VISUAL   AND   TELEGRAPHIC 
SIGNALLING. 

(Authorized  by  G.  O.  No.  34,  Headquarters  of  the  Army,  A.  G,  O.,  April  26, 1893, 
for  use  only  in  communicating  with  the  United  States  Navy.) 

637.  Q.  Give  the  characters  used  for  the  alphabet  and  numer- 
als under  this  code.    A.: — 

ALPHABET. 

J 1132  S 213 

K....3131  T 3 

L 331  U 113 

M....1331  V 1333 

N 11  W....1131 

0 31  X...    3133 

P 1313  Y Ill 

Q    ...1311  Z    ...2333 

R 3U 


A  .. 

33 

B... 

.  ..3113 

C. 

....131 

D  ., 

....333 

E  .. 

13 

F... 

..3331 

G... 

,..3311 

H. 

....133 

T.... 

1 

SIGKALLma.  85 


NUMERALS. 

1 1111  2 2222 

3 1112  4 2221 

5 1122  6 2211 

7 1222  8 2111 

9 ; 1221  0 2112 

638.  Q.  State  what  letters  indicate  certain  abbreviations  in  the 
Naval  Code.     A. ; — 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

a after.  n not.  ur your. 

b before.  r are.  w word. 

c can.  t the.  wi with. 

h have,  u you.  y why. 

X  X  3,  "  numerals  follow  "  or  '*  numerals  end." 

sig.  3,  signature. 

639.  Q.  Give  the  character  denoting  what  follows  (select  any 
of  those  enumerated).     A. : — 

End  of  a  word 8 

End  of  n  sentence 33 

End  of  a  message 333 

I  understand 22.22. 3 

Cease  signalling 22. 22. 22. 333 

Repeat  last  word  121.121.3 

Repeat  last  message 121.121.121.3 

Error 12.12  3 

Move  a  little  to  right 211.211.3 

Move  a  little  to  left 221.221.3 

640.  Q.  Give  the  code-call  for  use  for  the  Navy.     A.: — 

A.  S.  U. — Action  or  Battle  Signals  Use. 

I.  C.  U. — International  Code  Use. 

T.  D.  U. — Telegraphic  Dictionary  Use. 

G.  L.  U. — Geographical  List  Use. 

G.  S.  U.— General  Signals  Use. 

C.  A.  U.— Cipher  "A"  Use. 

C.  B.  U.— Cipher  "  B  "  Use,  etc. 

N.  L.  U.  -Navy  List  Use. 

V.  N.  U. — Vessel's  Number  Use, 

641.  Q.  What  are  the  instructions  for  using  the  code?  A. 
The  whole  number  opposite  each  letter  or  numeral  stands  for  that 
letter  or  numeral. 

TO  SIGNAL  WITH  FLAG  OR  TORCH. 

642.  Q.  How  many  positions  and  motions  are  used  under  the 
Naval  Code  ?    A.  One  position  and  three  motions. 


j36  THE  AEMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIKER. 

643.  Q.  What  is  the  position  to  be  assumed  ?  A.  The  position  is 
with  the  flag  held  vertically  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body, 
butt  of  staff  at  height  of  waist,  signalman  facing  squarely  toward 
the  station  with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate. 

644.  Q.  Describe  the  motions  to  be  made  under  the  Naval 
Code.  A.  ThQ  first  motion,  cr  "one"  or  "  1,"  is  a  motion  of 
the  flag  to  the  right  of  the  sender,  and  will  embrace  an  arc  of  90°, 
starting  with  the  vertical  and  returning  to  it,  and  will  be  made 
in  a  plane  exactly  at  right  angles  to  the  line  connecting  the  two 
signal  stations.  The  second  motion,  or  "  two  "  or  "  2,"  is  a  simi- 
lar motion  to  the  left  of  the  sender.  To  make  the  third  motion 
"  front,"  or  "  three  "  or  "  3,"  the  flag  is  waived  to  the  ground  di- 
rectly in  front  of  the  sender,  and  instantly  returned  to  the  first 
position. 

645.  Q.  How  must  numbers  in  the  body  of  a  message  be  sent  ? 
A.  They  must  be  spelled  out  in  full. 

646.  Q.  How  may  numerals  be  used  ?  A.  Numerals  may  be 
used  in  signalling  between  stations  having  Naval  Signal-books, 
using  the  Code-Calls. 

647.  Q.  What  is  done  in  order  to  send  a  message  by  the  Naval 
Code  ?  A.  "To  call "  a  station  signal  its  initial  or  "  call-letter" 
until  "acknowledged."  "To  acknowledge,"  signal  "I  under- 
stand," followed  by  its  initial  or  "call-letter."  Make  a  slight 
pause  after  each  "letter,"  also  after  each  "front." 


FOG-SIGNALS. 

648.  Q.  How  would  you  apply  this  code  to  the  "fog- whistle,'' 
or  "  fog-horn "  ?  A.  One  (1)  toot  (about  \  second)  will  be  "one " 
or  "1."  Two  (2)  toots  (in  quick  succession)  will  be  "two"  or 
"2."  A  llast  (about  2  seconds  long)  will  be  "  three"  or  "  3." 
The  signal  of  execution  for  all  tactical  or  drill  signals  will  be 
one  (1)  long  blast,  followed  by  two  (2)  toots  in  quick  succession. 
The  ear,  and  not  the  watch,  is  to  be  relied  upon  for  the  ifitervals. 

649.  Q.  How  would  you  signal  with  flash-lantern?  A. 
Same  as  in  fog-signals;  substitute  "short  flash"  for  "toot," 
and  "long  steady  flash"  for  "  blast."  The  elements  of  a  letter 
should  be  slightly  longer.  "  To  calV  a  station.—li^ke  the  initial 
or  "call-letter"  until  "  answered."  Then  turn  on  a  steady  flash 
until  answered  by  a  steady  flash.  The  station  called  will  "  ac- 
knowledge "  and  cut  off  its  flash,  and  the  calling  station  will  pro- 
ceed with  the  message. 

650.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  on  abbreviations  under 
this  code  ?  A.  No  abbreviations  will  be  used  in  the  body  of  the 
message. 

651.  Q.  How  are  other  conventional  signals  designated?  A. 
All  other  conventional  signals  are  the  same  as  for  flag  or  torch. 


PAKT  V. 

DRILL— CAVALRY. 


Text-book— 27.  8.  Di-ill  Begulations. 


For  Second  Lieutenants  of  Cavalry— Nos.  652-1155. 
For  First  Lieutenants  of  Cavalry — Nos.  652-1191. 
For  Captains  of  Cavalry — Nos.  652-1234. 


PAET  V. 

DRILL  REGULATIONS— CAVALRY. 


FOR  SECOND  LIEUTENANTS. 


Definitions— Signals— General  Principles. 

definitions. 

652.  Q.  What  is  an  alignment  ?  A.  A  straight  line  npon  which 
several  men  or  bodies  of  troops  are  formed  or  are  to  be  formed. 

653.  Q.  What  is  a  hose  f  A.  The  unit  on  which  a  movement  is 
'regulated  ;  as,  base  trooper,  troop,  or  squadron. 

654.  Q.  What  is  a  coluimi  f  A.  A  formation  in  which  the 
elements  are  placed  one  behind  another. 

655.  Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  deploy  f  A.  To  extend  the 
front ;  as,  to  pass  from  column  into  line. 

656.  Q.  What  is  depth  ?  A.  The  space  from  head  to  rear  of 
any  formation. 

657.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  disposition  ?  A.  The  distribution 
of  fractions  of  a  body  of  troops  and  the  formations  and  duties 
assigned  to  each  for  the  accomplishment  of  a  common  end. 

658.  Q.  What  is  distance  ?  A.  An  open  space  in  the  direction 
of  depth. 

659.  Q.  How  are  distances  measured  ?  A.  From  the  heads  of 
horses  in  rank  to  the  croups  of  horses  posted  in  front  of  the  line, 
and  from  the  croups  of  horses  in  rank  to  the  heads  of  the  horses 
in  rear  of  the  line. 

660.  Q.  How  is  the  distance  measured  between  two  subdivisions 
in  column  ?  A.  From  the  croups  of  the  horses  in  front  to  the 
heads  of  the  horses  in  rear. 

661.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  fidl  distance  ?  A.  Full  distance  is 
equal  to  the  front  of  the  subdivision,  plus  its  interval  in  line,  less 
three  yards. 


90  THE  AKMY  OFFICER*S  EXAMIKER. 

662.  Q.  "What  is  meant  by  echelon  f  A.  When  the  subdivis- 
ions are  placed  one  behind  another,  extending  beyond  and  un- 
masking one  another,  either  wholly  or  in  part. 

663.  Q.  How  is  the  term  used  in  battle  formations?  A.  To 
designate  the  different  elements  or  lines  in  the  direction  of  depth. 
Example  :  The  first  echelon,,  the  attacking  line,  or  the  firing  line; 
the  second  echelon,  the  support,  etc. 

664.  Q.  What  is  facing  distance 'i  A.  Sixteen  inches;  i.e., 
the  difference  between  the  front  of  a  man  in  rank  and  his  depth. 

665.  Q.  What  are  file  closers  ?  A.  Officers  or  non-commis- 
sioned officers  posted  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

666.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  file  closers  ?  A.  To  rectify  mis- 
takes and  to  insure  steadiness  and  promptness  in  the  rank. 

667.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  flank  ?  A.  The  right  or  left  of  a 
command  in  line  or  column  ;  also  the  element  on  the  right  or  left 
of  a  line. 

668.  Q.  Wl\p,t  are  flankers  f  A.  Men  so  posted  or  marched  as 
to  protect  the  flank  of  a  column. 

669.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  flanli  march  ?  A.  A  march,  what- 
ever the  formation,  by  which  troops  move  parallel  to  the  enemy's 
position. 

670.  Q.  In  estimating  the  front,  what  is  the  space  occupied  by 
one  mounted  man  ?  A.  One  yard,  which  includes  the  six  inches 
between  knees. 

671.  Q.  What  is  an  advance  guard  f  A.  A  body  of  troops 
marching  in  front  of  a  command  to  reconnoiter  and  to  protect  its 
march. 

672.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  i7iterval  f  A.  An  open  space  be- 
tween elements  of  the  same  line. 

673.  Q,  How  is  the  interval  between  two  mounted  men  in  line 
measured  ?    A.  From  knee  to  knee. 

674.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  manoeuvre  .?  A.  A  movement  made 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  with  reference  to  the  posi- 
tion and  movements  of  the  enemy. 

675.  Q.  What  is  extended  order  f  A.  The  formation  in  which 
troopers  or  subdivisions,  or  both,  are  separated  by  intervals 
greater  than  in  close  order. 

676.  What  is  a  pace  f    A.  Thirty  inches. 

677.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  _pZo^.^    A.  To  diminish  front. 

678.  Q.  What  are  scouts  f  A.  Men  detailed  to  precede  a  com- 
mand on  the  march  and  when  forming  for  battle. 

679.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  scouts  ?  A.  To  gather  and  re- 
port information  concerning  the  enemy  and  the  nature  of  the 
ground. 

680.  Q.  Define  tactics.  A.  The  art  of  handling  troops  in  the 
presence  of  the  enemy  ;  i.e.,  applying  on  the  battle-field  the 
movements  learned  at  drill. 


DRILL  EEGULATIOKS— CAVALRY.  91 


SIGNALS. 

681.  Q.  How  are  preparatory  signals  made  ?  A.  From  the 
guard. 

682.  Q.  What  is  the  signal  of  execution?  A.  Return  to  the 
guard. 

683.  Q.  What  does  the  return  to  the  carry  by  the  instructor 
indicate  ?    A.  That  no  further  signals  are  to  be  made. 

684.  Q.  What  is  the  signal  for  Attention  ?  A.  Raise  the  arm 
vertically  to  its  full  extent,  sabre  in  prolongation  of  the  arm,  and 
describe  small  horizontal  circles  with  the  point. 

685.  Q.  What  is  the  signal  for  Forivard  f  A.  Raise  the  sabre, 
arm  half  extended,  hand  in  front  of  right  shoulder  and  a  little 
higher  than  the  head,  edge  up,  point  to  the  rear  and  higher  than 
the  hand,  blade  inclined  about  45  degrees.  Cut  to  the  front,  ex- 
tending the  arm  to  its  full  extent.  (First  and  second  motions  of 
front  cut.) 

686.  Q.  Right  oblique  f  A.  Extend  the  arm  and  sabre  ob- 
liquely to  the  right  until  both  are  horizontal. 

687.  Q.  Left  oblique  f    A.  Same  to  the  left. 

688.  Q.  Fours  right ;  or,  By  the  right  flank  f  A.  Extend  the 
arm  and  sabre  to  the  right  until  both  are  horizontal. 

689.  Q.  Fours  left ;  or,  Bij  the  left  flank  f  A.  Same  to  the  left. 

690.  Q.  After  the  preparatory  signal  by  the  instructor,  what 
does  he  do  in  the  forward,  oblique,  and  flank  marches  ?  A.  He 
moves  his  horse  in  the  direction  indicated. 

691.  Q.  To  change  direction  to  the  right  or  left?  A.  Raise 
the  arm  until  horizontal,  sabre  pointing  toward  the  marching 
flank ;  carry  the  arm  and  sabre  horizontally  to  the  front,  at  the 
same  time  turn  the  horse  in  the  direction  to  be  taken. 

693.  Q.  Fours  right  about.  Fours  left  about ;  or.  To  the  rear  ? 
A.  Turn  the  head  and  shoulder  to  the  right  and  rear,  bring  the 
hand  in  quarte  near  the  left  breast,  point  to  the  rear  and  as 
high  as  the  hand,  edge  upward.  Thrust  to  the  rear  (rear  point)  ; 
at  the  same  time  turn  the  horse  about  in  the  direction  the  fours 
-are  to  wheel. 

693.  Q.  To  increase  the  gait  one  degree  f  (Passing  from  a 
walk  to  a  trot,  or  from  a  trot  to  a  gallop.)  A.  Carry  the  hand 
to  the  right  shoulder,  sabre  vertical  ;  raise  and  lower  the  hand, 
keeping  the  sabre  vertical ;  to  be  repeated  several  times. 

694.  Q.  To  decrease  the  gait  one  degree  f  A.  Raise  the  hand 
six  inches  above  and  in  front  of  the  head  and  slightly  in  front 
of  the  right  shoulder,  edge  of  the  blade  up,  point  to  the  left  and 
slightly  higher  than  the  hand.     (First  motion  of  head  parry.) 

695.  Q.  Halt  f  A.  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent, 
sabre  in  the  prolongation  of  the  arm. 

696.  Q.  Right  front  into  line  f  A.  Extend  the  arm  to  the 
front  to  its  full  length,  the  hand  in  quarte  and  as  high  as  the 


92  THE   ARMY  OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

eyes,  the  point  in  front  of  the  right  shoulder  and  a  little  higher 
than  the  hilt.  Lower  the  blade,  edge  to  the  front,  making  rap- 
idly a  circle  around  the  hand,  to  the  right  of  and  near  the 
horse's  neck,  the  blade  passing  close  to  the  right  elbow.  (Right 
moulinet.) 

697.  Q.  Left  front  into  line  f  A.  Same  to  the  left,  the  hand 
in  tierce.     (Left  moulinet.) 

698.  Q.  As  sMrmisliers  ?  A.  Wave  the  sabre  several  times  to 
the  right  and  left  in  front  of  the  body.  When  dismounted,  raise 
both  arms  until  horizontal,  extended  laterally. 

699.  Q.  Rally  f  A.  Extend  the  arm  vertically,  and  rapidly 
circle  the  sabre  horizontally  around  the  head. 

700.  Q.  To  fight  on  foot  ?  A.  Raise  the  arm  to  the  right  and 
rear  to  its  full  extent,  point  of  the  sabre  upward,  edge  to  the 
right,  body  slightly  turned  to  the  right.  Begin  by  moving  the 
point  of  the  sabre  toward  the  left  and  describe  a  circle  in  rear. 
(Rear  moulinet.) 

701.  Q.  Action  right  front  f    A.  Execute  right  moulinet. 
703.  Q.  Action  left  front  ?    A.  Execute  left  moulinet. 

703.  Q.  Action  right?  A.  Turn  the  head  to  the  right;  carry 
the  hand  in  quarte  near  the  left  breast,  edge  upward  ;  point  to 
the  right  and  as  high  as  the  hand.  Thrust  to  the  right.  (Right 
point.) 

704.  Q.  Action  left  f  A.  Turn  the  head  and  shoulder  to  the 
left,  draw;  back  the  hand  in  tierce  toward  the  right  and  near  the 
right  shoulder ;  hand  at  the  height  of  the  neck,  edge  upward, 
point  to  the  left  and  as  high  as  the  hand.  Thrust  to  the  left. 
(Left  point.) 

705.  Q.  Cease  firing  f    A.  A  w^histle-call. 

706.  How  may  the  signals  be  made  when  necessary  ?  A.  With 
the  carbine  or  headdress,  or  with  the  hand. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

707.  Q.  What  is  the  habitual  formation  for  all  details,  detach- 
ments, and  other  bodies  of  troops  1    A.  Single  rank. 

708.  Q.  How  may  all  movements  on  foot  be  executed  not  spe- 
cially excepted  ?    A.  From  the  halt. 

709.  Q.  How  may  all  movements  mounted  be  executed  not 
specially  excepted  ?    A.  At  a  trot  or  gallop. 

710.  Q.  How  should  the  gait  be  increased  and  decreased  gen- 
erally ?  A.  Progressively,  the  trot  being  executed  from  a  walk, 
the  gallop  from  a  trot.  If  marching  at  a  gallop,  the  gait  will  be 
decreased  to  a  trot,  and  then  to  a  walk  before  halting  ;  the  halt- 
ing from  a  trot  being  considered  an  exceptional  movement. 

711.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  for  movements  from  the  halt,  or  when 
marching  at  the  walk,  if  the  gait  is  not  specitied  in  the  com- 
mand ?  A.  Movements  are  executed  at  the  walk  and  terminate 
at  the  halt. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  93 

713.  Q.  If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  at  the  walk,  the  command 
is  trot,  what  is  the  rule?  A.  The  leading  unit  moves  at  the 
walk  until  halted  ;  the  others  execute  the  movement  at  the  trot, 
and  upon  its  completion  take  the  walk. 

713.  Q.  If  marching  at  the  gallop,  what  is  the  rule?  A.  The 
leading  unit  takes  the  trot ;  the  others  execute  the  movement 
at  a  gallop,  and  upon  its  completion  take  the  trot. 

714.  Q.  How  many  kinds  of  commands  are  there?  A.  Two: 
the  preparatory,  such  as  Forward,  indicating  the  movement  that 
is  to  be  executed,  and  the  command  of  Execution,  such  as  March 
or  Halt. 

715.  Q.  How  does  an  instructor  revoke  a  preparatory  com- 
mand ?    A.  By  commanding,  As  you  were. 

ELEMENTARY  DRILLS. 

716.  Q.  Who  are  generally  the  instructors  ?  A.  Sergeants  and 
corporals  under  the  supervision  of  an  officer,  but  the  captain 
occasionally  requires  the  lieutenants  to  act  as  instructors. 

School  of  the  Soldier, 
close  order. 

717.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  this  school  ?  A.  The  instruction 
of  the  individual  recruit  on  foot,,  and  afterward  that  of  the 
squad. 

718.  Q.  When  a  movement  is  divided  into  motions,  what  deter- 
mines the  execution  of  the  motions?  A.  The  command  of  exe- 
cution determines  the  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  com- 
mands. Two,  Three,  etc.,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

719.  Q.  To  execute  a  movement  in  detail,  what  is  the  first  com- 
mand of  the  instructor  ?  A.  He  first  commands,  By  the  num- 
bers. 

720.  Q.  How  are  recruits  taught  to  assemble?  A.  The  in- 
structor requires  them  to  close  the  left  hand  and  place  the 
knuckles  against  the  waist  above  the  hip,  wrist  straight,  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  fi-ont ;  he  then  places  them  on  the  same  line, 
so  that  the  right  arm  of  each  man  rests  lightly  against  the  left 
elbow  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  and  then  directs  the  left 
hands  to  be  replaced  by  the  side. 

721.  Q.  When  recruits  have  learned  how  to  take  their  places, 
and  are  required  to  assemble  without  assistance,  what  command 
does  the  instructor  give  ?    A.  Fall  in. 

722.  Q.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  rest  the  men,  what  commands  may 
the  instructor  give  ?    A.  Fall  out,  or  Best,  or.  At  ease. 

723.  Q.  If  marching,  what  are  the  commands  ?  A.  Route  step, 
March ;  or,  At  ease,  March. 

734.  Q.  If  the  command  is  given  to  Fall  out,  what  may  the 


94 

men  do  ?    A.  They  may  leave  the  rank,  but  will  remain  in  the 
immediate  vicinity. 

725.  Q.  What  command  is  given  for  them  to  resume  their  for- 
mer places  ?    A.  Fall  in. 

726.  Q.  How  is  a  squad  dismissed  ?  A.  By  giving  the  com- 
mand, Dismissed. 

727.  Q.  Having  a  squad,  give  the  command  to  face  to  the  right, 
and  explain.  A.  1.  Right ;  2.  Face.  Pwaise  slightly  the  right 
heel  and  left  toe  and  face  to  the  right,  turning  on  the  left  heel, 
assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the  ball  of  the  right  foot ;  replace 
the  right  foot. 

SETTING  UP  EXERCISES. 

{The  same  as  for  Infantry,) 

THE   STEPS. 

{The  same  as  for  Infantry.') 

INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION  WITH  ARMS. 

728.  Q.  Give  fully  the  armament  of  trooper  for  garrison  duty 
dismounted.  A.  Complete  armament  :  Carbine,  pistol,  and 
sabre.  For  drill  and  inspection,  as  may  be  directed.  For  duty 
out  of  rank,  as  orderly,  witness,  etc. ,  sabre  and  sabre-belt.  Full 
dress  :  Carbine  (without  sling)  and  cartridge-box.  Undress  :  Car- 
bine (without  sling)  and  cartridge-belt  ;  or  pistol  and  ijartridge- 
belt ;  or  sabre  and  sabre-belt,  with  or  without  pistol.  The  sabre 
will  always  be  worn  with  full  dress.  The  sabre  is  not  worn  when 
in  rank,  except  for  sabre-drill,  inspection  of  sabre,  or  on  duty 
that  does  not  require  marching.  Spurs  are  not  worn  on  dis- 
mounted duty.  The  carbine-sling  will  be  worn  for  drill  when 
ordered. 

729.  Q.  How  many  recruits  should  be  instructed  by  one  in- 
structor, and  what  command  does  he  give  for  them  to  assemble  ? 
A.  Usually  not  exceeding  four.     Fall  in. 

730.  Q.  After  falling  in,  what  should  be  done  to  prevent  acci- 
dents ?    A.  Chambers  will  be  opened. 

731.  Q.  In  the  manual  of  the  carbine,  what  is  the  cadence  of 
the  motions  ?    A.  It  is  that  of  quick  time. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  CARBINE. 

732.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  in  regard  to  resuming  the 
carry  from  any  position  for  the  motion  next  to  and  the  last  in 
the  manual  ?  A.  The  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the 
left  hand  as  high  as  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  fingers  ex- 
tended and  joined,  thumb  close  to  the  forefinger,  back  of  the 
hand  to  the  front,  elbow  close  to  the  body,  right  hand  embracing 


DEILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  95 

the  guard  with  thumb  and  forefinger  ;  the  last  motion  consists  in 
dropping  the  left  hand  to  the  side. 

733.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  in  all  positions  of  the  left 
hand  at  the  sight?  A.  Thumb  is  extended  along  the  stock,  the 
end  of  it  touching  the  band,  except  in  port  arms. 

734.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  carrying  the  piece  with 
regard  to  the  hammer  ?  A,  The  piece  is  habitually  carried  with 
the  hammer  at  the  safety-notch. 

735.  Q.  Being  at  the  order,  explain  (giving  commands)  Carry 
Arms.  A.  1.  Carry,  2.  Arms.  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with 
the  right  hand;  grasp  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  left  above  the 
right ;  resume  the  Carry.     (Two)  Drop  the  left  hand. 

736.  Q.  Being  at  the  Carry,  explain  Order  Anns.  A.  1. 
Order,  2.  Arms.  Advance  the  piece;  grasp  it  with  the  left  hand, 
forearm  horizontal  ;  let  got  with  the  right  hand  ;  lower  the  piece 
quickly  with  the  left ;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  above  the  sight, 
hand  near  the  thigh,  butt  about  three  inches  from  the  ground, 
left  hand  steadying  the  piece  near  the  right,  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  forearm  and  wrist  straight  and  inclined  downward. 
(Two)  Lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground  with  the  right  hand; 
drop  the  left  by  the  side. 

737.  Q.  Being  at  the  Carry,  explain  Present  Anns.  A.  1. 
Present,  2.  Arms.  Carry  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  the  body  ;  at  the  same  time  grasp  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  sight,  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body.  (Two)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand 
below  and  against  the  guard. 

738.  Q.  How  many  motions  are  there  from  a  Carry  to  Right 
Shoulder  Arm  ?    A.  Three. 

739.  Q.  Being  at  the  right  shoulder,  explain  Carry  Arms.  A. 
1.  Carry,  2.  Arms.  Carry  the  butt  slightly  to  the  left  and  lower 
the  piece  with  the  right  hand  ;  grasp  it  with  the  left  at  the  sight, 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  at  the 
same  inclination  to  the  front  as  at  the  order.  (Two)  Resume  the 
Carry.     (Three)  Drop  the  left  hand. 

740.  Q.  Being  at  the  Carry  or  Order,  explain  Port  Arms.  A. 
1.  Port,  2.  Arms.  Raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally  across 
the  body,  lock  plate  to  the  front;  grasp  it  smartly  with  both 
hands,  the  right  palm  down  at  the  small  of  the  stock;  the  left 
palm  up,  just  below  the  sight,  thumb  clasping  the  piece  ;  barrel 
sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the  middle  of  the  left 
shoulder,  right  forearm  horizontal ;  forearms  and  piece  near  the 
body. 

741.  Q.  How  many  motions  from  a  port  to  carry  arms  f  A. 
Two. 

742.  Q.  From  what  other  position  can  port  arms  be  ordered  ? 
A.  From  the  right  shoulder. 

743.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  the  r^tf    A.  -"ii::?*^-^-*-*^  ^-^ 


4^'" 

&. 


96  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMIiq"ER. 

Rest,  and  At  ease.     On  the  march  :  Route  step,  March,  and  At 
ease,  March. 

744.  Q.  Being  at  the  order,  explain  pa7"a(ie  7*65^.  A.  1.  Parade; 
2.  Rest.  Carry  the  right  foot  straight  six  inches  to  the  rear  ;  left 
knee  slightly  bent,  carry  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  left ;  right  hand  near  the  muzzle,  muzzle  be- 
tween thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand. 

745.  Q.  Dismiss  a  squad  with  arms.  A.  1.  Port,  3.  Arms,  3. 
Dismissed. 

746.  Q.  Being  at  the  order,  explain  kneeling.  A.  Kneel. 
Half-face  to  the  right,  carrying  the  right  foot  so  that  the  toe  shall 
be  about  ten  inches  to  the  rear  and  ten  inches  to  the  left  of  left 
heel ;  kneel  on  right  knee,  bending  the  left,  left  toe  slightly  in- 
clined to  the  riglit,  right  leg  pointing  directly  to  the  right  ; 
weight  of  body  resting  on  right  heel ;  place  left  forearm  across 
left  thigh,  hand  hanging  naturally  ;  the  piece  remains  in  position 
of  order  arms,  right  liand  grasping  it  above  sight. 

747.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  feet  at  the  load.  A.  Left  foot 
as  at  the  Attention,  the  right  so  that  the  heel  is  six  inches  to  the 
rear  and  three  inches  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel ;  the  toes  of 
both  feet  turning  slightly  inward. 

748.  Q.  Being  in  the  position  of  load,  give  the  commands  for 
firing  and  continue  the  same.  A.  1.  Squad,  2.  Ready,  3.  Aim. 
4.  Fire,  5.  Load,  etc. 

749.  Q.  What  commands  are  given  in  teaching  men  to  aim 
using  the  different  lines  of  sight  ?  A.  1.  At  (so  many)  yards,  2. 
Squad,  3.  Ready,  4.  Aim. 

750.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  about  cartridges  in  the  instruction  of 
a  squad  ?  A.  No  cartridges  will  be  used,  except  when  indicated 
in  the  first  command  of  load,  thus :  1.  With  dummy  (blank  or 
ball)  Cartridges,  2.  Load. 

751.  Q.  Being  fully  armed,  with  carbine  at  the  order,  and  the 
command  for  inspection  of  arms  given,  when  are  the  cartridge- 
boxes  opened  ?    A.  At  the  command  Arms. 

752.  Q.  Give  the  order  in  which  the  arms  are  inspected.  A. 
Carbines,  pistols,  sabres. 

753.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  pistol  as  held  for  inspection. 
A.  It  is  held  about  six  inches  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body, 
barrel  up,  pointing  to  the  left  front  and  upward  at  an  angle  of 
about  forty  five  degrees,  wrist  straight  and  as  high  as  the  breast. 

SQUAD  DRILL,  DISMOUNTED. 

Same  as  for  infantry,  including  alignme7its,  to  march  in  line, 
to  march  backward,  to  march  to  the  rear,  to  march  by  the  jlank, 
to  change  direction,  the  oblique  mar^h,  to  march  in  double  time, 
to  pass  from-  quick  to  dotible  time  and  the  reverse,  turnings, 
movements  by  fours,  to  change  direction,  movements  by  twos^ 
and  ti\Q  firings. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.  97 


MANUAL  OF    THE  PISTOL. 

764:.  Q.  Explain  the  manner  in  which  a  lanyard  is  used.  A. 
One  end  is  attached  to  the  butt  of  a  pistol ;  the  other  end  forms 
a  sliding  loop,  which  is  passed  over  the  head  and  drawn  snug 
against  the  right  arm-pit.  Tlie  lanyard  should  be  of  just  such 
length  that  the  arm  can  be  extended  without  constraint. 

755.  Q.  1.  liaise,  2.  Pistol.  A.  At  the  first  command  unbut- 
ton the  holster-flap  with  the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  stock,  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  body.  At  the  command  pistol,  draw  the  pistol 
from  the  holster,  reverse  it,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the 
stock  with  the  thuftib  and  last  three  fingers,  the  little  finger  may 
be  placed  under  the  butt;  back  of  forefinger  pressed  against  in- 
side of  the  front  of  the  guard  ;  guard  to  the  "front ;  barrel  nearly 
vertical ;  hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  six  inches  to  the  right  and 
front  of  the  right  shoulder. 

756.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  right  foot  and  left  hand  at  raise 
pistol  dismounted.  A.  The  right  foot  is  about  twenty  inches  to 
the  right,  and  the  left  hand  in  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand. 

757.  Q.  Being  mounted  and  at  raisepistol,  explain  lower  pistol. 
A.  1.  Lower,  2.  Pistol.  At  the  command  pts^oZ,  lower  the  pistol 
without  changing  the  grasp,  and  rest  the  hand  and  pistol  on  the 
right  thigh,  back  of  the  hand  up,  muzzle  in  front  of  the  right 
knee. 

758.  Q.  How  dismounted  f  A.  The  same  as  mounted  except 
the  wrist  rests  against  the  right  hip,  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
right ;  barrel  inclined  to  the  front  and  downward  at  an  angle  of 
forty  five  degrees. 

759.  Q.  Being  at  a  raise  or  lower  pistol,  give  the  commands 
for  firing  at  an  object.  A.  1.  Ready,  2.  At  (such  an  object),  3. 
Fire. 

760.  Q.  What  is  done  at  the  command  ready  ?  A.  The  right 
thumb  is  placed  on  the  hammer. 

761.  Q.  At  the  second  command  ?  A.  Direct  the  eyes  toward 
the  object  indicated. 

762.  Q.  At  the  command  j^?'e.?  A.  Thrust  and  point  the  pistol 
toward  the  objective,  arm  nearly  or  quite  extended,  at  the  same 
time  cocking  the  pistol,  and  fire,  and  resume  the  raise  or  lower 
pistol  according  to  the  position  before  firing. 

763.  Q.  Give  the  commands  to  fire  at  will.  A.  1.  To  the  front, 
etc.  ;   or,  1.  At  (such  an  object) ;  2.  Fire  at  will;  3.  Ready  ;  4. 


THE  SABRE. 

764.  Q.  Give  the  normal  interval  and  distance  between  men. 
A.  Three  yards. 

765.  Q.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  give  the  commands  to  take  iu- 


98  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

tervals  to  the  right.    A.  1.  To  the  right  take  intervals;  3.  March  ; 

3,  Squad;  4.  Halt ;  5.  Left ;  6.  Face. 

766.  Q.  Give  commands  and  explain  to  take  distances,  being 
in  line  at  a  halt.    A.  1.  Front  take  distance;  2.  March;  3.  Squad; 

4.  Halt.  No.  1  of  each  four  moves  straight  to  the  front  ;  No.  2 
moves  straight  to  the  front  when  No.  1  has  a  distance  of  three 
yards;  Nos.  3  and  4  move  off  in  succession  in  like  manner  ;  the 
command  halt  is  given  when  No.  4  has  his  distance. 

767.  Q.  Form  line  again  and  explain.  A.  1.  Form  ;  2.  Rank. 
No.  1  of  each  four  stands  fast ;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  move  up  into 
their  intervals  and  halt. 

.  MANUAL  OF  THE  SABRE. 

768.  Q.  Give  the  different  parts  of  the  sabre  and  sabre-knot. 
A.  Sabre:  Hilt  (gripe,  guard,  pommel,  base);  Blade  (back,  edge, 
point) ;  Scabbard  (bands,  rings,  springs).  Sabre-knot  (tassel, 
strap,  sliding  loops). 

769.  Q.  When  is  the  hand  in  tierce  and  when  in  quarte  ?  A. 
In  tierce  when  it  holds  the  gripe  back  of  the  hand  up;  in  quarte, 
when  it  holds  the  gripe  back  of  the  hand  down. 

770.  Q.  Explain  the  position  of  Carry  Sabre.  A.  Back  of  the 
blade  against  the  shoulder,  edge  to  the  front,  arm  nearly  ex- 
tended, hand  by  the  side,  elbow  back,  third  and  fourth  fingers 
back  of  the  gripe,  left  hand  by  the  side. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  SABRE  FOR  OFFICERS. 

771.  Q.  When  dismounted,  being  at  the  carry  sabre,  what  is 
done  by  officers  at  the  command.  Order  Arms  f  A.  Drop  the 
sabre  directly  to  the  front,  point  on  or  near  the  ground,  back  of 
the  blade  to  the  front,  thumb  along  the  back  of  the  gripe,  back 
of  hand  to  the  right,  arm  extended. 

SABRE    EXERCISE. 

772.  Q.  Being  dismounted  and  at  carry  sahre,  how  is  guard 
executed  ?  A.  Carry  the  right  foot  about  twenty  inches  to  the 
right,  heels  on  the  same  line  ;  place  the  left,  closed,  six  inches 
from  the  body,  and  as  high  as  the  elbow,  fingers  toward  the  body, 
little  finger  nearer  than  the  thumb  (position  of  bridle-hand) ;  at 
the  same  time  place  the  right  hand  in  tierce  in  front  of  the  hip 
and  at  the  height  of  the  waist,  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of 
the  gripe,  little  finger  by  the  side  of  the  others;  the  point  of  the 
sabre  to  the  left,  and  a  little  higher  than  the  hand  ;  the  blade, 
edge  to  the  front,  resting  on  the  left  forearm  near  the  waist. 

773.  Q.  Explain  right  moulinet  by  the  numbers.  A.  At  the 
command  motdinet  extend  the  arm  to  the  front  to  its  full  length, 
the  hand  in  quarte  and  as  high  as  the  eyes,  the  point  in  front  of 
the  right  shoulder  and  a  little  higher  than  the  hilt.    (Two)  Lower 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.  99 

the  blade,  edge  to  the  front,  make  rapidly  a  circle  around  the 
hand,  to  the  right  of  and  near  the  horse's  neck,  the  blade  passing 
close  to  the  right  elbow ;  return  to  the  first  position.  (Three) 
Resume  the  guard. 

774.  Q.  Explain  right  point.  A.  At  the  command  point  turn 
the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand  in  quarte  near  the  left 
breast,  edge  upward,  point  to  the  right,  and  as  high  as  the  hand. 
(Two)  Thrust  to  the  right,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length, 
edge  to  the  front.     (Three)  Resume  the  guard, 

775.  Q.  1.  Rear,  2.  Cut.  A.  Turn  the  head  to  the  right,  throw- 
ing back  the  right  shoulder  ;  carry  the  hand  near  the  left  breast, 
blade  vertical,  edge  to  the  left.  (Two)  Extend  the  arm  quickly 
to  its  full  length  and  cut  horizontally  to  the  rear  in  tierce.  (Three) 
Resume  the  guard. 

776.  Q.  1.  Right,  2.  Parry.  A.  Carry  the  hand  quickly  a  lit- 
tle to  the  right,  point  of  the  sabre  as  high  as  the  eyes  and  oppo- 
site the  right  shoulder,  edge  to  the  right  so  as  to  cover  the  right 
arm  and  shoulder.     (Two)  Resume  the  guard. 

FENCING    EXERCISE. 

777.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  fencing  exercise,  and  how 
must  all  movements  be  executed  ?  A.  To  develop  the  agility, 
intelligence,  and  esprit  of  the  trooper,  as  well  as  his  adroitness 
and  confidence  in  the  use  of  the  sabre  ;  all  movements  must  be 
executed  with  the  greatest  possible  quickness  and  lightness. 

778.  Q.  When  practicable,  what  should  be  provided  for  this 
instruction  ?  A.  Masks,  wooden  sabres,  plastrons,  and  right- 
hand  gloves. 

779.  Q.  In  the  leg  movements,  being  at  the  guard,  explain 
Advance.  A.  Raise  slightly  and  advance  the  right  foot  twice 
its  length;  follow  quickly  with  the  left  the  same  distance. 

780.  Q.  Retreat.  A.  Raise  slightly  and  move  the  left  foot 
twice  its  length  to  the  rear  ;  follow  quickly  with  the  right  foot 
the  same  distance. 

781.  Q.  Left  volt.  A.  Face  to  the  left,  turning  on  the  ball  of 
the  right  foot;  at  the  same  time  carry  the  left  foot  to  its  posi- 
tion in  rear. 

782.  Q.  How  are  all  sabre  movements  (from  what  position) 
executed?    A.  From  the ^warcZ,  if  not  especially  excepted. 

783.  Q.  How  are  the  cuts  principally  made  ?  A.  By  movements 
of  the  wrist,  keeping  the  hand  in  front  of  the  body  near  the  line 
of  defense  (an  imaginary  vertical  line  through  the  centre  of  the 
body). 

784.  Q.  What  are  the  principal  cuts  ?  A.  Front,  right,  and  left. 

785.  Q.  Explain  Against  right  shoulder,  right  cut — giving  the 
commands.  A.  1.  Against  right  shoulder ;  2.  Right  cut ;  3. 
Guard.  Move  the  point  about  eighteen  to  twenty-four  inches  to 
the  left  of  the  line  of  defense.     (Two)  Cut  to  the  right,  at  the 


100  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

same  time  extending  the  right  arm  and  left  leg,  throwing  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg. 

786.  Q.  In  the  fencing  exercise  mounted,  when  is  the  engage- 
ment in  tierce  ?  A.  When  a  trooper  has  his  opponent  to  the  (his) 
right;  and  in  quarte  when  to  his  left. 

School  of  the  Trooper. 

787.  Q.  How  should  each  mounted  drill  begin  and  end— with 
reference  to  gait  ?    A.  Begins  and  ends  at  a  w^alk. 

788.  Q.  Mention  some  of  the  rules  that  should  be  taught  to 
recruits  for  the  care  of  horses.  A.  Never  threaten,  strike,  or  other- 
wise abuse  a  horse.  Before  entering  a  stall,  speak  to  the  horse 
gently  and  then  go  in  quietly,  etc.  (See  par.  256,  Drill  Regula- 
tions.) 

789.  Q.  How  many  thicknesses  is  a  saddle-blanket  folded  into 
preparatory  to  placing  it  on  a  horse  ?    A.  Six. 

790.  Q.  Giye  the  nomenclature  of  the  saddle.  A.  Pommel, 
cantle,  sidebar,  quarter-straps— front  and  rear  forming  spider, 
spider  ring,  cincha,  cincha-strap,  cincha-ring,  stirrup-loop,  stir- 
rup-strap, stirrup-tread,  stirrup-hood,  rings — front  and  rear, 
cantle-staple,  saddle-bag  stud,  coat-straps,  cincha-ring  safes. 

791.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  to  approximate  the  length  of  the  stir- 
rup-straps before  mounting?  A.  They  are  adjusted  so  that 
their  length,  including  stirrups,  is  about  one  inch  less  than  the 
length  of  the  arm,  fingers  extended. 

793.  Q.  What  should  be  the  length  of  the  overcoat  rolled  for 
packing  ?    A.  Not  more  than  thirty-four  inches. 

793.  Q.  Of  the  bed-blanket  and  shelter  tent  ?  A.  Twenty-four 
inches. 

794.  Q.  Pack  the  saddle  ?  A.  Overcoat  rolled  and  strapped  on 
the  pommel ;  blanket,  with  change  of  underclothing  inside,  is 
rolled  in  the  shelter-tent  (the  roll  not  more  than  twenty-eight 
inches  in  length,  according  to  bulk)  ;  nose-bag  slipped  over  the 
roll  outside  of  the  shelter-tent,  on  the  near  end,  and  the  strap 
buckled  over  the  off  end  ;  side-lines^  when  carried,  to  be  spread 
over  the  blanket-roll,  the  leather  ends  being  brought  together 
and  the  whole  secured  by  the  can  tie-straps  ;  lariat  rolled  around 
the  picket-pin  and  snapped  into  near  cantle-ring  ;  canteen  with 
cup  on  strap  attached  to  off  cantle-ring  ;  tin-plate  or  meat-can, 
knife,  fork,  and  spoon  in  off  saddle-bag;  currycomb,  brush,  and 
watering-bridle  in  near  saddle-bag.  Extra  ammunition  and  ra- 
tions to  be  divided  so  as  to  equalize  the  weight  in  the  saddle-bags. 
On  the  march  the  lariat  to  be  coiled  and  fastened  wnth  a  thong 
to  the  near  cantle-ring— the  free  end  passing  under  stirrup-strap 
and  snapped  into  halter-ring. 

795.  Q.  Explain  the  position  of  stand  to  Jiorse.  A.  At  the 
command,  each  trooper  places  himself,  facing  to  the  front,  on 
the  near  side  of  the  horse,  eyes  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.         101 

horse's  head,  so  he  can  see  along  the  front,  and  takes  the  po- 
sition of  the  soldier,  except  that  the  right  hand,  nails  down, 
grasps  both  reins,  the  forefinger  separating  them  six  inches  from 
the  bit. 

796.  Q.  The  troopers  standing  to  horse,  give  the  command  to 
leave  the  stable.     A.  Lead  out. 

797.  Q,  What  are  the  commands  to  mount  (without  saddle)  ? 
A.  1.  Prepare  to  mount;  2.  Mount. 

798.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  to  dismount  on  the  off  side  ? 
A.  1.  To  the  right ;  2.  Prepare  to  dismount;  3.  Dismount. 

799.  Q.  Supposing  the  commands  be:  1.  Squad,  2.  Mount,  what 
do  the  men  do  ?  A.  They  execute  all  that  has  been  prescribed 
(at  the  command  Mount)  for  prepare  to  mount  and  mount. 

800.  Q.  It  being  dismounted,  dismiss  the  squad.  A.  1.  By  the 
right  (left,  or  right  and  lefj;);  2.  Fall  out. 

801.  Q.  Being  mounted,  give  the  first  mounted  exercise.  A. 
1.  Lean  back ;  2.  Up.  Lean  back  until  the  head  rests  upon  the 
horse's  croup;  hands  resting  upon  the  thighs,  toes  turned  in,  legs 
kept  in  place.  Up:  Resume  gradually  the  position  of  the  trooper 
without  deranging  the  position  of  the  feet  and  legs. 

802.  Q.  Fourth  exercise.  A.  1.  Right  (or  left) ;  2.  Face  ;  3. 
Front.  Turn  the  body  to  the  right,  carry  right  knee  toward  the 
rear,  legs  astride  the  horse,  feet  pointing  to  the  right,  body  erect; 
hands  resting  on  right  thigh.  Front :  Resume  the  position  of  the 
trooper. 

803.  Q.  Seventh  exercise.  <  A.  1.  Right  (or  left)  rear;  2.  Reach. 
Carry  right  hand,  back  up,  straight  to  the  front,  fingers  and  arms 
extended  and  horizontal.  (Two)  Sweep  the  hand  quickly  by  the 
right  to  the  rear,  keeping  the  arm  horizontal,  at  the  same  time 
making  a  right  face  and  leaning  the  body  to  the  rear.  (Three) 
Resume  the  position  of  the  trooper. 

804.  Q.  Give  the  tenth  exercise,  the  trooper  mounted  at  turn 
to  the  left.  A.  1.  Prepare  to  dismount;  2.  Dismount.  At  the 
first  command,  place  the  right  hand  on  the  withers  ;  seize  a  lock 
of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand.  At  the  command  dismount  sup- 
port the  weight  on  the  hands,  turning  the  body  to  the  right-about, 
descend  lightly  to  the  ground  on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  bending 
the  knees  a  little. 

805.  Q.  Give  the  commands  for  the  fourteenth  exercise,  march- 
ing. A.  1.  Prepare  to  dismount ;  2.  Dismount  ;  or,  1.  To  the 
right ;  2.  Prepare  to  dismount ;  3.  Dismount, 

806.  Q.  "When  is  a  horse  bit-wise  ?  A.  When  he  obeys  the 
lightest  pressure  upon  either  bar. 

807.  Q.  There  being  no  riding-hall,  how  could  one  be  made  ? 
A.  By  laying  out  a  rectangular  track  one  hundred  yards  long 
and  thirty-three  yards  wide.  Mark  the  corners  with  stakes  or 
stones,  and  caution  the  troopers  to  keep  within  the  prescribed 
limits. 


103  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

808.  Q.  Give  the  commands  to  increase  and  diminish  the 
.  rapidity  of  the  trot.     A.  1.  Trot  out ;  2.  March.     1.  Slow  trot ; 

2.  March. 

809.  Q.  Explain  the  spiral  to  the  right.  A.  Marching  to  the 
right  and  at  least  seventeen  yards  from  a  corner,  the  commands 
are  :  1.  Spiral  to  the  right ;  2.  March.  The  conductor,  followed 
by  the  other  troopers,  gradually  diminishes  the  circle  until  the 
column  is  riding  inward  on  a  spiral.  On  approaching  the  cen- 
tre :  1.  Column  left  about ;  2.  March.  The  conductor  turns  left 
about  and  rides  outward  on  a  spiral,  and  resumes  the  march  to 
the  right. 

School  of  the  Troop. 

810.  Q.  Give  the  formation  of  the  troop.  A.  It  is  formed  in 
single  rank  and  is  divided  into  two,  three,  or  four  platoons,  ac- 
cording to  its  strength  ;  the  division  is  so  made  that  the  platoons 
may  be  of  nearly  equal  strength. 

811.  Q.  How  many  sets  of  fours  should  be  in  each  platoon  ? 
A.  Habitually  the  platoons  should  consist  of  not  less  than  four 
nor  more  than  six. 

812.  Q.  How  many  squads  should  there  be  in  a  platoon  ?  A. 
Two  when  there  are  four  or  more  sets  of  fours  in  a  platoon. 

813.  Q.  Where  is  a  leader  of  a  squad  placed  in  rank?  A.  No. 
1  of  its  right  four. 

814.  Q.  How  are  the  squads  designated  ?  A.  Right  and  left 
squad  of  such  a  platoon. 

815.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  oflBcers  of  a  troop  in  line  divided  in 
two  platoons.  A.  The  captain  six  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
the  troop,  the  first-lieutenant  two  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
the  first  platoon,  and  the  second-lieutenant  two  yards  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

816.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  second  sergeant.  A.  Two 
yards  in  rear  of  the  second  four  from  the  left. 

817.  Q.  When  marching  in  line  what  does  the  guidon  indi- 
cate ?    A.  The  direction  of  the  guide. 

818.  Q.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  .or  at  a  walk,  give  commands 
and  explain,  "  To  turn  and  advance."  A.  1.  Right  (or  left)  turn  ; 
2.  March ;  3.  Guide  right  (left  or  centre).  The  trooper  on  the 
right  turns  his  horse  ninety  degrees  to  the  right  on  an  arc  with  a 
radius  of  two  yards  and  moves  forward  in  the  new  direction 
without  changing  the  speed  ;  each  of  the  other  troopers  turns  his 
horse  thirty  degrees  to  the  right  as  in  oblique,  and,  moving  at  a 
trot  by  the  shortest  line,  places  himself  on  the  new  line,  when  he 
resumes  the  gait  of  the  pivot  trooper  and  dresses  on  him. 

819.  Q.  During  the  turn  where  is  the  guide  ?  A.  It  is  (with- 
out command)  on  the  pivot  flank. 

820.  Q.  If  marching  at  a  gallop,  how  is  the  movement  per- 
formed ?    A.  The  pivot  takes  the  canter  ;  all  the  other  troopers 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  103 

take  the  canter  on  arriving  in  line  ;  as  soon  as  all  the  troopers 
have  arrived  on  the  line  the  commands  are  :  1.  Gallop  ;  2.  March  ; 
3.  Guide  (right,  left,  or  centre). 

821.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  give  the  com- 
mands to  change  the  guide  or  the  chiefs  of  platoons  to  the  oppo- 
site flank.     A.  1.  Chiefs  of  platoons  on  the  right  (or  left)  flank  ; 

2.  March. 

822.  Q.  "What  is  a  platoon  column  ?  A.  A  troop  in  column  of 
platoons. 

823.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  platoons?  A.  Three 
yards  less  than  platoon  front. 

824.  Q.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  give  commands  and  explain.  To 
march  in  column  of  platoons  to  the  front.  A.  1.  Eight  (or  left) 
by  platoon  ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  left  (or  right).  The  right  pla- 
toon advances  at  a  walk  ;  the  other  platoons  successively  execute 
riyht  half'tiirn,  each  when  the  guide  of  the  preceding  platoon 
has  advanced  about  half-platoon  front ;  each  chief  of  platoon,  on 
completion  of  the  half-turn,  commands  :  Guide  left,  and  the  pla- 
toon marches  in  the  new  direction  until  tlie  left  guide  arrives 
near  the  trace  of  the  leading  platoon,  when  he  commands  :  1. 
Left  half-turn  ;  2.  March. 

825.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  give  the  command  to 
form  line  to  the  right  and  halt.     A.  1.  Platoons  right ;  2.  March  ; 

3.  Front. 

826.  Q.  In  this  movement  where  does  the  guidon  take  post? 
A.  On  the  pivot  flank  of  the  rear  platoon. 

827.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  platoon  marching  at  a  walk,  give 
commands  to  form  on  right  into  line.  A.  On  right  into  line  ;  2. 
March  ;  3.  Front. 

828.  Q.  Give  commands  of  its  chief  and  movements  of  first 
platoon.  A.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  commands  :  1.  Eight 
turn.  At  the  command  march  repeated  by  the  chief  the  platoon 
turns  to  the  right ;  when  it  has  advanced  thirty  yards  the  chief 
halts  it  and  commands  :  1.  Eight  ;  2.  Dress. 

829.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours  at  a  halt,  give  commands  to 
form  front  into  line  of  platoons  in  columns  of  fours.  A,  1.  Eight 
front  into  line  ;  2.  Platoons  in  columns  of  fours  ;  3.  March. 

830.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  platoons  in  columns  of  fours,  march- 
ing at  a  walk,  give  commands  to  form  line  without  increasing 
the  gait.  A.  1.  Platoons  ;  2.  Eight  (or  left)  front  into  line  ;  3. 
March  ;  4.  Troop  ;  5.  Halt ;  6.  Left  (or right);  7.  Dress;  8.  Front. 

831.  Q.  At  what  time  is  the  command  Halt  given  in  the 
above  ?    A.  When  the  leading  fours  have  advanced  thirty  yards. 

832.  Being  in  column  of  fours  marching  at  a  walk,  give  com- 
mands to  form  column  of  platoons  without  halting.  A.  1.  Pla- 
toons ;  2.  Eight  (or  left)  front  into  line  ;  3.  Trot  ;  4.  March ;  5. 
Guide  left  (or  right). 

833.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  platoons  in  columns  of  fours,  in  march, 


X04  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

give  commands  to  change  direction  to  the  left.     A.  Change  di- 
rection to  the  left ;  3.  March. 

834.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of  platoons  ?  A. 
The  one  nearest  the  change  of  direction  commands  :  Column  left ; 
the  other  chiefs  command  :  1.  Column  half-left ;  2.  Trot. 

835.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  give  commands  to  form  echelon. 
A.  1.  Form  echelon ;  3.  First  (or  fourth)  the  base  platoon ;  3. 
March. 

836.  Q.  Explain  the  movement.  A.  The  designated  platoon 
marches  to  the  front ;  the  second  platoon,  at  the  command  of  its 
chief,  moves  to  the  front  when  at  platoon  distance  from  the 
first ;  the  other  platoons  successively  advance  as  explained  for 
the  second. 

837.  Q.  In  this  movement  where  is  the  post  of  the  captain  ? 
A.  Six  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  or  right  centre  platoon. 

838.  Q.  Being  in  columns  of  platoons,  give  commands  to  form 
oblique  echelon.  A.  1.  Platoons ;  Left  (or  right)  half-turn ;  3. 
March. 

839.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  ground  scouts?  A.  To  look 
for  information  concerning  the  ground. 

840.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  combat  patrols  ?  A.  To  seek 
for  information  concerning  the  enemy. 

841.  Q.  What  qualifications  should  ground  scouts  and  combat 
patrols  have  ?    A.  Intelligence  and  daring. 

843.  Q.  In  actual  service,  what  should  ground  scouts  be  fur- 
nished with  ?    A.  Wire  nippers. 

843.  Q.  As  a  rule,  when  the  troop  is  acting  alone  in  charging 
the  enemy,  how  is  it  divided  ?  A.  It  is  divided  in  two  or  three 
parts — viz.,  into  the  attaGM7ig  line  and  support;  or,  when  the 
troop  is  of  nearly  full  strength,  into  the  attacking  line,  support, 
and  reserve. 

844.  Q.  If  the  attacking  line,  support,  or  reserve  consist  of 
only  one  platoon,  who  is  it  led  by  ?    A.  By  its  chief. 

845.  Q.  If  it  consists  of  two  or  more  platoons,  who  then  ?  A. 
By  the  senior  chief  of  platoon  or  by  the  captain. 

846.  Q.  When  the  rally  or  assembly  is  sounded,  where  does  tlie 
guidon  go?  A.  It  goes  at  once  to  the  position  of  the  captain,  or 
to  the  rallying  or  assembling  point  indicated  by  the  captain. 

847.  Q.  Who  designates  the  attacking  line,  the  support,  and, 
if  there  be  one,  the  reserve  ?    A.  The  captain. 

848.  Q.  The  troop  being  at  the  place  to  take  the  formation  for 
the  charge,  what  does  the  captain  do?  A.  He  points  out  the 
direction  or  object  of  attack  and  commands  :  1.  To  the  charge  ; 
2.  March. 

849.  Q.  What  is  then  the  command  of  the  leader  of  the  attack- 
ing line  ?    A.  Gallop. 

850.  Q.  And  of  the  leaders  of  the  support  and  reserve  ?  A. 
They  caution,  Trot. 


DRILL  REGULATION'S— CAVALRY.  105 

851.  Q.  Describe  the  charge.  A.  The  attacking  line  is  con- 
ducted at  a  gradually  increasing  gallop  ;  when  about  fifty  or 
seventy-five  yards  from  the  object,  the  leader  commands  :  Charge. 
All  the  troopers  charge  sabre,  and  the  speed  is  increased  to  that 
of  the  slower  horses ;  when  near  the  object  the  leader  com- 
mands :  1.  Trot ;  2.  March  ;  the  men  resume  the  carry  sabre  and 
take  the  trot ;  after  advancing  twenty  or  thirty  yards  the  leader 
commands  :  1.  Walk ;  2.  March  ;  and  soon  thereafter :  1.  Pla- 
toon ;  2.  Halt.  When  the  support  has  a  distance  of  about  eighty 
yards  from  the  attacking  line  it  takes  the  gallop  and  follows"  the 
movement  of  that  line  ;  when  it  arrives  at  the  proper  distance  it 
charges  to  support  the  first  line.  The  reserve  follows  the  sup- 
port at  a  distance  not  greater  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards, 
unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  captain,  and  charges  when  at 
the  proper  distance. 

852.  Q.  How  does  the  troop  in  the  squadron  charge  ?  A,  On 
the  same  principles  as  when  acting  alone,  except  that  it  does 
not  have  a  support  or  reserve,  unless  so  ordered  by  the  major. 

School  of  the  Squadron. 

853.  Q.  How  many  troops  constitute  a  squadron  ?  A.  Two 
and  not  more  than  four. 

854.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  troops  in  line?  A.  Eight 
yards. 

855.  Q.  In  forming  the  squadron  how  are  troops  arranged? 
A.  According  to  the  rank  of  captains  ;  the  senior  on  the  right, 
the  second  on  the  left,  the  third  on  the  right  centre  (or  centre,  if 
there  be  but  three  troops),  and  the  fourth  on  the  left  centre. 

856.  Q.  How  are  the  troops  designated  ?  A.  In  whatever  di- 
rection the  squadron  faces,  the  troops  are  designated  numerically 
from  right  to  left  in  line  an-d  line  of  columns,  and  from  head  to 
rear  in  column,  first  troop,  second  troop,  and  so  on.  When  a 
new  formation  necessitates  a  change  of  numbers,  the  change 
takes  effect  upon  the  completion  of  the  movement.  In  designat- 
ing their  troops,  the  captains  use  the  letter  designation  ;  as,  Troop 
"D,"  etc. 

857.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  for  captains  when  dressing  their 
troops  ?  A.  They  place  themselves  on  the  line,  on  the  flank 
toward  which  they  dress,  facing  to  the  front. 

858.  Q.  Besides  forming  on  the  centre  troop,  what  other  ways 
can  a  squadron  be  formed  ?  A.  It  can  be  formed  in  line  on  the 
right  or  left  troop  ;  it  may  also  be  assembled  in  columns  of 
fours. 

859.  Q.  What  is  the  command  of  the  major  to  dismiss  the 
squadron  ?    A.  Dismiss  your  troops. 

860.  Q.  Marching  in  line  with  the  guide  right,  who  is  the 
guide  of  the  squadron  ?    A.  The  centre  guide  of  the  right  troop, 

861.  Q.  Marching  in  line,  give  the  commands  of  the  major  to  face 


106  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

the  squadron  to  the  rear,  and  to  march  it  to  the  rear.  A.  1. 
Fours  right  (or  left)  about ;  2.  March ;  3.  Squadron  ;  4.  Halt, 
or,  3.  Guide  centre. 

863.  Q.  After  halting,  should  the  major  wish  to  rectify  the 
alignment,  what  does  he  command?  A.  Captains,  rectify  the 
alignment. 

863.  Q.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  give  the  commands  and  explain. 
To  break  from  the  right  to  march  to  the  left  in  columns  of  fours. 
A.  1.  Column  of  fours  ;  2.  Break  from  the  right  to  march  to 
the  left  ;  3.  March.  At  the  second  command  the  captain  of  the 
right  troop  commands  :  1.  Eight  forward  ;  2.  Fours  right.  At 
the  command  march  the  right  troop  breaks  into  column  of  fours 
to  the  front ;  when  the  leading  four  has  advanced  thirty  yards, 
the  captain  commands  :  1.  Column  left ;  2.  March  ;  the  guide 
directs  his  march  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  squadron.  Each  of 
the  other  troops  executes  the  movements  explained  for  the  right 
troop  in  time  to  follow  nine  yards  in  rear  of  the  one  preceding. 

864.  Q.  If  marching  and  the  movement  is  to  terminate  at  a 
halt,  at  what  time  do  the  guides  of  the  base  troop  move  out  ?  A. 
They  hasten  to  the  point  of  rest  at  the  preparatory  command, 
and  are  established  at  the  command  march. 

865.  Q.  In  formations  into  line  by  two  movements,  what 
guides  are  established  ?    A.  Only  those  of  the  rear  troops  are 


866.  How  do  all  formations  faced  to  the  rear  terminate  ?  A. 
At  the  halt. 

867.  Q.  Are  there  any  other  formations  that  terminate  at  the 
halt  ?    A.  Yes,  to  form  on  right  or  left  into  line. 

868.  Q.  A  part  of  a  column  of  fours  having  changed  direction  to 
the  right,  give  commands  and  explain.  To  form  line  to  the  left  by 
two  movements.  A.  1.  Fours  left ;  2.  Rear  troops  left  front 
into  line  ;  3.  March.  The  troops  that  have  changed  direction 
wheel  by  fours  to  the  left ;  each  captain  halts  his  troop  as  the 
fours  unite  in  line.  The  rear  troops  execute  left  front  into  line, 
the  leading  fours  advancing  only  so  far  as  to  be  in  line  with  the 
troops  that  have  wheeled  into  line.  If  it  is  intended  to  advance 
without  halting  the  commands  would  be  :  1.  Fours  left;  2.  Eear 
troops  left  front  into  line  ;  3.  Trot  (or  gallop)  ;  4.  March  ;  5. 
Guide  centre.  The  captains  of  the  rear  troops  repeat  the  com- 
mand trot,  and  left  front  into  line  in  time  to  command  march 
when  their  leading  fours  arrive  abreast  of  the  line  already 
formed. 

869.  Q.  Give  post  of  a  captain  in  column  of  troops.  A.  On 
the  side  of  the  guide,  six  yards  to  the  front  and  six  yards  to  the 
right  or  left  of  his  troop.  If  the  guide  be  centre,  he  takes  post 
on  the  same  flank  as  the  major. 

870.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  troops  in  column  at  full 
distance  ?    A.  Troop  front  and  five  yards. 


DRILL   REGULATIOKS— CAVALRY.  107 

871.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  troops,  give  commands  to  form 
front  into  line.  A.  1,  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  ;  2.  March  ; 
or,  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  ;  3.  Troops  ;  3.  Right  (or 
left)  half- turn;  4.  March. 

872.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  commands  to  change  front  faced  to 
the  rear  on  first  troop^  and  explain  the  movement.  A.  1.  Change 
front  on  first  troop,  faced  to  the  rear  ;  2.  Troops  ;  3.  Right  half- 
turn  ;  4.  March.  At  the  third  command  the  captain  of  the  first 
troop  commands  :  Right  turn.  At  the  command  march,  this 
troop  executes  right  turn,  is  marched  just  beyond  the  line, 
wheeled  about  by  fours  and  halted.  The  other  troops  execute 
right  half-turn,  each  captain 'giving  the  command  guide  right 
upon  the  completion  of  the  half-turn ;  when  the  right  guide  is 
opposite  his  place  in  line,  each  captain  gives  the  command  :  1. 
Right  half-turn ;  2.  March,  and  the  movement  is  completed  as 
for  the  first  troop. 

873.  Q.  In  this  movement,  how  should  the  fours  be  wheeled 
about  and  the  troops  dressed  ?  A.  To  the  right  about  and  dressed 
to  the  left. 

874.  Q.  Being  inline,  give  commands  to  advance  in  Line  of 
Columns  of  Fours.  A.  1.  Troops  ;  2.  Right  (or  left)  forward  ;  3. 
Fours  right  (or  left)  ;  4.  March  ;  5.  Guide  (right,  left  or  centre). 

875.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  the  captains  in  the  foregoing  move- 
ment. A.  On  the  side  of  their  chiefs  of  platoons,  six  yards  in 
front  of  their  leading  fours  and  six  yards  from  the  flank  of  the 
column. 

876.  Q.  Give  the  full  and  closed  intervals  in  Line  of  Troops  in 
Columns  of  Fours.  A.  Full  interval  is  troop  front  and  four 
yards  ;  closed,  eleven  yards. 

877.  Q.  Marching  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands  to  form 
fro7it  into  line  of  Troops  in  Columns  of  Fours.  A.  1.  Right  (or 
left)  front  into  line  ;  2.  Troops  in  columns  of  fours  ;  3.  March. 

878.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  Troops  in  Columns  of  Four  at  close  in- 
terval, give  commands  to  form  Column  of  Fours.  A.  1.  Column 
of  fours  ;  2.  First  (or  fourth  troop) ;  3.  Forward  ;  4.  March. 

879.  Q.  What.is  the  distance  between  troops  in  Close  Column  ? 
also,  give  posts  of  the  captains  and  major  in  close  column.  A. 
Twelve  yards ;  captains  on  the  side  of  the  guide  six  yards  in 
front  and  six  yards  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  flank  ;  if  the  guide 
is  centre  they  are  on  the  same  flank  as  the  major  ;  the  major  is 
twenty  yards  from  the  flank  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

880.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  troops  at  a  halt,  give  commands 
to  form  close  column  (the  troops  being  at  full  distance).  A.  1. 
Close  in  mass ;  2.  Guide  right  (left  or  centre)  ;  3.  March. 

881.  Q.  In  this  movement,  give  the  commands  of  the  captains. 
A.  The  captain  of  the  first  troop,  at  the  second  command,  cau- 
tions it  to  stand  fast ;  the  other  captains  commands  :  1.  For- 
ward ;  2.  Guide  right. 


108  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

882.  Q.  Being  in  close  column  at  a  halt,  give  commands  to 
talie  full  distance.  A.  1.  Take  full  distance  ;  2.  Guide  right 
(left  or  centre)  ;  3.  March. 

883.  Q.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  ploy  into  Close  Column  and 
explain.  A.  1.  Close  column  on  first  (or  fourth)  troop  ;  2. 
Fours  right  (or  left)  ;  3.  March.  At  the  first  command  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  troop  commands  :  1.  Forward  ;  2.  Guide  left. 
At  the  command  march,  the  first  troop  advances  eighteen  yards, 
is  halted  and  dressed  to  the  left ;  the  other  troops  execute  fours 
right.  The  captain  of  the  second  troop  halts  in  rear  of  the  left 
of  the  first,  and  as  his  rear  four  passes  him,  commands  :  1.  Fours 
left;  2.  March  ;  3.  Troop  ;  4.  Halt;  5.  Left;  6.  Dress;  7. 
Front.  The  other  troops  incline  to  the  right,  and  each  moves  by 
the  shortest  line  so  as  to  enter  the  column  and  form  line  to  the 
left,  halts  and  dresses  to  the  left,  twelve  yards  in  rear  of  and 
parallel  to  the  preceding  troop. 

884.  Q,  Being  in  close  column,  give  the  commands  to  clmvge 
direction  by  the  flanli.  A.  1.  Change  direction  by  the  right  ^or 
left)  flank;  2.  Fours  right  (or  left) ;  3.  March. 

885.  Q.  In  this  movement,  give  command  of  the  captain  of  the 
first  troop,  and  when  is  it  given  ?  A.  1.  Right  forward  ;  2.  Fours 
right.     Given  at  the  second  command  of  the  major. 

886.  Q.  Being  in  close  column  at  a  halt,  deploy  the  column. 
A.  The  commands  are :  1.  Deploy  column  ;  2.  Fours  left  (or 
right)  ;  3.  March.  At  the  second  command  the  captain  of  the 
first  troop  cautions  :  Stand  fast.  At  the  command  march,  the 
first  troop  is  dressed  to  the  right ;  the  other  troops  execute  fours 
left  ;  each  captain  halts  when  eight  yards  beyond  the  left  of  the 
preceding  troop  and  as  the  rear  of  his  troop  passes  him  commands  : 
1.  Fours  right ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  right ;  halts  the  troop  near 
the  line,  and  dresses  it  to  the  right. 

887.  Q.  The  squadron  being  in  Column  of  Platoons  explain — 
giving  commands — to  form  on  right  into  line  (the  squadron  being 
in  march).  A.  1.  On  right  into  line;  2.  March.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  first  troop  executes  on  right  into  line  ;  the 
other  troops  march  beyond  the  first,  each  captain  commanding  : 
1.  On  right  into  line,  2.  March,  when  his  leading  platoon  is  six 
yards  beyond  the  left  flank  of  the  preceding  troop.  Each  chief 
of  platoon  halts  his  platoon  when  near  the  line  and  commands : 
1.  Right ;  2.  Dress.    The  captains  give  the  command  :  1.  Front. 

888.  Q.  In  this  movement  where  is  the  guidon  posted  ?  A.  At 
the  point  of  rest,  thirty  yards  to  the  right  of  the  head  of  the 
column. 

889.  Q.  How  and  where  are  the  guides  posted  in  successive 
formations  terminating  at  a  halt  ?  A.  By  the  adjutant  or  ser- 
geant-major, or  both,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  major.  The  guidon 
is  posted  at  the  point  of  rest,  and  the  principal  guide  of  the 
opposite  flank  takes  position  a  little  more  than  troop  front  from 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.  109 

him,  both  facing  to  the  front.  If  marching  they  hasten  toward 
the  point  of  rest  at  the  preparatory  command,  and  are  established 
at  the  command  march.  In  formations  into  line  by  two  move- 
ments the  guides  of  the  rear  troops  are  posted  on  a  line  with 
those  troops  wheeled  into  line.  In  deployment  the  guides  are 
posted  on  the  line  of  the  leading  troop.  In  forming  front  into 
line,  they  are  established  thirty  yards  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line,  thirty  yards  to  the  right  or 
left  of  the  column.  In  changes  of  front,  the  guidon  is  posted 
thirty  yards  from  the  right  or  left  of  the  designated  troop,  ac- 
cording as  the  change  of  front  is  to  the  right  or  left.  In  form- 
ing line  facing  to  the  rear,  the  guides  of  each  troop  are  so  posted 
as  to  permit  the  troops  to  pass  between  them,  the  one  then  far- 
thest from  the  point  of  rest  closes  to  a  little  greater  than  troop 
front.  The  guides  should  be  taught  to  post  themselves  without 
aid. 

890.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  (close)  between  troops  in  Line  of 
Platoon  Columns  ?    A.  Twelve  yards. 

891.  Q.  Give  the  positions  of  the  captains  in  line  of  platoon 
columns.     A.  Six  yards  in  front  of  their  guidons. 

893.  Q.  In  the  movement.  To  form  line  of  Platoon  Columns  to 
the  right  or  left,  when  does  the  captain  of  the  leading  troop  halt 
it  ?    A.  When  its  rear.has  cleared  the  column  by  twelve  yards. 

893.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  at  a  halt,  give  the  com- 
mands of  the  major  to  iovm  front  into  line  of  Platoon  Cohimns. 
A.  1.  Right(or  left)  front  into  line  of  platoon  columns;  2.  March. 

894.  Q.  Give  the  commands  of  all  the  captains  to  carry  out  the 
movement.  A.  At  the  first  comftiand.  all  the  captains  command  : 
1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  left  (or  right);  the  captain  of  the  second 
troop  adds  :  Column  right  (or  left);  the  captains  in  rear  of  the 
second  add  :  Column  half-right  (or  left).  At  the  command 
march,  the  first  troop  having  advanced  thirty  yards,  the  captain 
commands:  1.  Troop  ;  2.  Halt ;  3.  Left  (or  right)  ;  4.  Dress. 

895.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  at  the  halt,  give  the 
command  of  the  major  to  Change  Front  on  First  Troop.  A.  1. 
Change  front  on  first  troop  ;  2.  March. 

896.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  of  the  captains  ?  A.  At  the 
first  command  the  captain  of  the  first  troop  commands  :  1.  For- 
ward ;  2.  Guide  right ;  3.  Column  right ;  the  other  captain '. 
comniand  :  1.  Forward  ;  2.  Guide  right ;  3.  Column  half-right. 

897.  Q.  When  is  the  first  troop  halted?    A.  When  the  pivot, 
trooper  of  its  rear  platoon  has  advanced  twelve  yards  in  the  new 
direction. 

898.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  the  commands  of  the  major  to  form 
Double  Column  of  Fours.  A.  1.  Double  column  of  fours;  2. 
Centre  forward;  3.  March  ;  4.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

899.  Q.  In  the  "Order  in  Echelon,"  what  is  the  distance  be- 
tween troops  ?    A.  Troop  front  and  five  yards. 


110  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

900.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  the  commands  of  the  major  to  form 
echelon  with  the  right  troop  as  the  base.  A.  1.  Form  echelon  ; 
2.  First  the  base  troop  ;  3.  March. 

901.  Q.  In  charging  by  squadron,  where  does  the  major  take 
post  ?    A.  In  the  line  of  captains. 

902.  Q.  Describe  charging  the  enemy  by  subdivisions.  A. 
The  subdivisions  charge  successively,  each  at  such  distance  from 
the  one  preceding  as  to  support  it  promptly  or  to  enable  it,  if 
repulsed,  to  clear  the  flanks  of  the  column  and  reform  in  its  rear. 
The  successive  subdivisions  continue  the  attack,  break  through 
the  enemy's  line,  rally  in  his  rear,  and  charge  again  as  they 
return. 

903.  Q.  In  the  instructions  of  the  squadron  (acting  alone)  in 
the  charge,  how  is  it  formed  ?    A.  In  two  or  three  lines. 

904.  Who  are  the  leaders  of  the  lines  ?  A.  The  senior  officer 
with  each. 

905.  Q.  How  many  troops  in  the  attacking  line  ?  A.  One,  two, 
or  three  troops. 

906.  Q.  The  major  having  designated  the  three  lines,  and  the 
squadron  having  arrived  at  the  position  for  taking  the  formation, 
what  does  he  command  ?    A.  1.  Form  for  attack  ;  2.  March. 

907.  Q.  At  the  foregoing  command,  what  does  each  captain  do 
in  regard  to  arms  ?  (In  the  attacking  line,)  A.  They  cause  their 
troops  to  draw  sabre,  or  raise  pistol  if  that  arm  has  been  desig- 
nated by  the  major. 

908.  Q.  And  the  captains  of  the  support  and  reserve  ?  A. 
They  cause  their  troops  to  draw  sabre. 

909.  Q.  The  attacking  line  taking  the  trot,  w^hat  becomes  of 
the  support  and  reserve  ?  A.  They  move  tow^ard  their  positions 
on  the  flanks,  and  each  takes  the  trot  when  the  attacking  line  has 
gained  the  proper  distance. 

910.  Q.  What  are  the  proper  distances?  A.  The  support 
should  have  about  eighty  yards  from  the  attacking  line  ;  the 
reserve  at  a  distance  not  greater  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards 
from  the  support,  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

911.  Q.  What  is  the  next  command  of  the  major,  and  wiien 
given?  A.  1.  To  the  charge;  2.  March,  when  the  attacking 
line  has  arrived  at  the  proper  place  to  begin  the  rapid  advance. 

Extended  Order, 
general  principles. 

912.  Q.  What  is  the  basis  of  extended  order  ?    A.  The  squad. 

913.  Q.  How  should  men  be  taught  to  regard  the  squad  ?  A. 
As  the  unit  from  which  they  ought  never  to  be  separated  ;  but 
if  the  squad  should  be  broken  up  or  the  men  separated,  they 
place  themselves  under  the  orders  of  the  nearest  squad-leader, 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  Ill 

and  remain  with  his  squad  as  if  it  were  the  one  to  which  tliey 
originally  belonged. 

914.  Q.  In  this  connection,  what  should  oflBcers  and  non-com- 
missioned officers  give  their  attention  to  ?  A.  To  preserving  the 
integrity  of  the  squads  ;  they  appoint  new  leaders  to  replace 
those  disabled,  organize  new  squads  when  necessary,  and  see  that 
every  man  is  placed  in  a  squad. 

915.  Q.  From  what  formations  may  extended  order  be  taken? 
A.  From  any. 

916.  Q.  Upon  halting  upon  the  line,  what  position  do  men 
take  with  their  arms?  A.  Advance  carbine.  If  the  pistol  is  to 
be  used,  that  arm  will  be  designated  before  deploying,  and  the 
men  take  the  position  of  raise  or  lower  pistol. 

Leading  the  Squad. 

917.  Q.  In  the  exercise  in  leading,  how  should  the  commands, 
as  a  rule,  be  given  by  the  corporal  ?  A.  By  signals ;  as  far  as 
possible  without  commands  or  cautions. 

918.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  corporal.  A.  He  is  posted 
two  yards  in  front  of  the  squad. 

919.  Q.  Who  is  the  guide  of  the  squad  ?  A.  The  man  in  front 
of  whom  the  corporal  places  himself. 

920.  Q.  Supposing  the  corporal  does  not  wish  the  squad  to 
follow  him,  what  does  he  do  ?  A.  He  commands  :  Guide  (right, 
left,  or  centre),  and  indicates  the  point  of  direction  ;  if  marching 
by  the  flank  he  indicates  the  direction. 

921.  Q.  In  marching  to  the  rear,  where  does  the  corporal  take 
post?    A.  In  front  of  the  squad. 

The  Squad. 

922.  Q.  When  is  the  squad  deployed  forward,  and  which  is  the 
habitual  gait  of  the  deployment  forward  ?  A.  When  it  is  in  rear 
of  the  line  to  be  occupied.     The  gallop. 

923.  Q.  In  the  deployment  by  the  flank,  which  is  the  habitual 
gait  ?    A.  The  trot. 

924.  Q.  Give  the  normal  interval  between  skirmishers.  A. 
Four  yards. 

925.  Q.  Give  the  post  of  the  corporal  before  giving  the  com- 
mands for  marching  ;  also  upon  halting.  A.  He  places  himself 
two  yards  in  front  of  the  trooper  tliat  is  to  be  the  base  or  guide. 
Upon  halting  he  places  himself  two  yards  in  rear  of  his  squad. 

926.  Q.  The  squad  being  in  line,  give  the  commands  to  deploy 
forward  on  the  left  skirmisher.     A.  1.  As  skirmishers;  2. 
front  into  line  ;  3.  March.  .^^^"^ SkJ'R  X 

927.  Q.  Explain  the  movement.     A.  The  left  troopej^^t^eT^       ** 
at  the  trot  straight  forward,  or  in  the  direction  indi(M^^Si|tQ^    ^t^ 

0>  ' 


112  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIKBR. 

corporal ;  the  other  troopers  oblique  to  the  right  at  the  gallop, 
eacli  taking  the  direction  and  gait  of  the  left  trooper  when  at  his 
interval  from  the  trooper  on  his  left  and  when  on  the  alignment. 
The  troopei-s  on  the  right  increase  the  angle  of  obliquity  to  more 
tlian  forty-five  degrees.  The  squad  having  arrived  on  the  line  to 
be  occupied,  the  corporal  commands  :  1.  Squad  ;  2.  Halt. 

928.  Q.  Give  the  commands,  and  explain,  to  deploy  forward 
on  centre  trooper.  A.  1.  As  skirmishers  ;  2.  Right  and  left  front 
into  line  ;  3.  March.  The  centre  skirmisher  trots  straight  to  the 
front ;  the  other  skirmishers  oblique  to  the  right  and  left  at  a 
gallop. 

929.  Q.  Being  in  line,  explain,  to  deploy  by  the  right  flank.  A. 
The  fours  wheel  to  the  right  and  move  at  the  trot ;  No.  4  of  the 
left  four  moves  directly  to  the  position  he  would  occupy  if.  upon 
completion  of  the  wheel,  he  had  turned  to  the  left  and  halted  ; 
No.  3  of  that  four  turns  to  the  left  and  halts  so  as  to  be  abreast 
of  and  four  yards  to  the  right  of  No.  4  ;  then  No.  2  and  then  No. 
1,  then  No.  4  of  the  now  rear  four,  and  so  on  from  the  rear  of 
the  column,  each  trooper  in  succession  turning  to  the  left  and 
halting  so  as  to  be  abreast  of  and  four  yards  from  the  next 
trooper  on  his  left. 

930.  Q.  Marching  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands,  and  ex- 
plain, to  deploy  by  a  flank.  A.  As  skirmishers;  2.  To  the  left 
(or  right) ;  3.  March.  The  skirmishers  deploy  as  when  deploying 
by  a  flank.     (See  answer  to  preceding  question.) 

931.  Q.  To  make  the  original  deployment— say  to  the  front— 
at  a  greater  or  less  interval  than  four  yards,  what  would  be  the 
commands  of  the  corporal  ?  A.  1.  As  skirmishers,  at  (so  many) 
yards  ;  2.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  ;  3.  March. 

932.  Q.  Being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  what  would  be  the 
commands?  A.  1.  To  (so  many), yards  extend  (or  close);  2. 
March. 

933.  Q.  Being  deployed  in  line,  give  commands  and  explain, 
to  change  front  or  direction  to  the  left.  A.  1.  Squad  left ;  2. 
March  ;  or  1.  Left  turn  ;  2.  March  ;  or  1.  Left  half -turn  ;  2. . 
March.  Executed  on  the  same  principles  as  when  in  close  order  ; 
the  skirmishers  move  directly  to  their  places  and  take  intervals 
on  the  new  line  from  the  pivot.  The  first  two  or  three  troopers 
are  established  by  the  corporal  on  the  new  line  as  the  base  of  the 
new  front. 

934.  Q.  What  is  the  rally  used  for  ?  A.  For  immediate  and 
concentrated  action  when  there  is  not  time  to  form  in  the  normal 
order, 

935.  Q.  Explain  the  rally.  A.  The  corporal  signals  or  com- 
mands, Rally.  The  troopers  return  carbine,  move  at  a  gallop, 
and  form  quickly,  faced  to  the  front,  in  rear  of  the  corporal, 
without  reference  to  their  previous  or^er  m  the  rank,  and  draw 
sabre. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.  113 

936.  Q.  Being  deployed  or  rallied,  what  are  the  commands  of 
the  covpoval  to  assemble ?    A.  1.  Assemble;  2.  March. 

937.  Q.  Explain  the  movement.  A.  The  men  move  toward 
the  corporal  and  form  in  their  proper  places ;  if  deployed  they 
close  toward  the  corporal  at  the  trot. 

938.  Q.  Give  any  other  ways  that  you  know  of  to  assemble  the 
squad.  A.  The  corporal  may  direct  the  squad  to  assemble  in 
column  of  foura  ;  or,  he  may  cause  the  assembly  or  rally  to  be 
executed  on  the  march.  In  this  case  the  corporal  and  base 
troopers  march  forward ;  the  other  troopers  gain  their  positions 
by  obliquing  and  increasing  the  gait. 

939.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  for  carbine  firing  by  mounted  skir- 
mishers? A.  It  is  confined  to  temporary  resistance  by  small 
scouting  parties  ;  by  the  advance  patrol  of  the  advance  guard  ; 
under  circumstances  which  forbid  the  mounted  charge  it  may  be 
used  to  accelerate  the  retreat  of  the  enemy's  rear  guard ;  and 
during  a  retreat,  for  checking  the  'enemy,  by  compelling  him  to 
advance  more  cautiously. 

940.  Q.  Supposing  a  halted  skirmisher  exposed  to  fire  without 
cover,  what  must  he  do  except  when  firing  ?  A.  He  must  keep 
in  motion  by  describing  a  figure  8  around  his  post  as  a  centre. 

941.  Q.  Being  deployed,  at  the  signal  or  command  Charge^  what 
does  each  skirmisher  do  ?  A.  He  returns  pistol  or  carbine,  and 
draws  sabre. 

942.  Q.  How  does  the  line  charge  ?    A.  As  foragers. 

943.  Q.  Being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  give  the  commands  and 
explain,  To  dismount  and  mount  on  the  skirmish  line.  A.  1. 
Squad  ;  2.  Dismount.  Each  skirmisher  quickly  dismounts  in  place, 
detaches  his  lariat,  seizes  the  loose  end  of  it,  and  runs  forward 
its  full  length,  or  to  such  a  point  short  of  that  distance,  as  may 
afford  advantageous  shelter.  To  mount :  1.  Squad  ;  2.  Mount. 
The  skirmishers  sling  carbine,  go  quietly  to  their  horses,  coiling 
the  lariat  on  the  way,  secure  the  lariat  to  the  saddle,  and  mount. 

944.  Q.  Before  dismounting  to  fight  on  foot,  what  is  the  gen- 
eral rule  for  the  formation  of  the  squad  ?  A.  It  is  formed  in 
column  of  fours. 

945.  Q.  In  the  drill  to  fight  on  foot,  who  is  the  horse-holder? 
A.  No.  4.  No.  2  or  No.  3  may  be  when  so  directed  by  the  cor- 
poral, which  must  always  be  done  before  giving  the  command,  To 
fight  on  foot ;  he  keeps  the  horses  of  the  dismounted  troopers  on 
his  right  and  left,  and  the  reins  of  the  two  next  to  his  right  and 
left  are  held  in  his  right  hand. 

946.  Q.  In  a  defensive  position,  how  may  all  the  horses  of  the 
squad  be  linked  and  cared  for  ?  A.  Together  in  a  circle,  and 
left  to  the  care  of  one  horse-holder,  who  dismounts;  or,  this  horse- 
holder  may  hold  the  horses  of  numbers  4  by  the  reins. 

947.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  give  the  commands  to  dis- 


114  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

mount  to  fight  on  foot — to  the  front.     A.  1.  To  fight  on  foot ;  3. 
Action  left  (or  right)  front. 

948.  Q.  Explain  fully  all  that  is  done  at  the  first  command. 
A.  Nos.  1  and  2  oblique  to  the  right ;  Nos.  3  and  4  to  the  left ; 
and  all  halt ;  the  troopers  only  oblique  far  enough  to  allow  room 
to  dismount  without  interfering  with  one  another  ;  Nos.  1,  2,  and 
3  dismount ;  No.  3  passes  his  reins  over  his*  horse's  head,  faces 
about,  gives  them  to  No.  4,  who  holds  them  at  such  length  that 
he  can  best  control  the  horses;  No.  4  now  moves  his  horse's 
shoulders  to  the  right  to  straighten  him  in  the  column ;  No.  2 
disengages  the  link-strap,  faces  towards  the  rear,  seizes  the  hal- 
ter-ring of  No.  3's  horse  with  the  right  hand,  pulls  his  horse's 
head  inward,  and  with  the  left  hand,  back  up,  engages  the  snap 
in  the  halter-ring  ;  No.  1  executes  the  same  with  No.  2's  horse  ; 
the  reins  of  Nos.  1  and  2  should  be  placed  behind  the  pommel. 

949.  Q.  Explain  whJit  is  done  at  the  second  command.  A.  The 
dismounted  troopers  of  each  four  unsling  carbine  and  form,  facing 
to  the  front,  in  their  normal  order,  one  yard  to  the  front  of  their 
horses'  heads,  and  one  yard  to  the  left  of  the  column,  the  rear 
fours,  at  double  time,  execute  left  front  into  line  on  the  leading 
four;  if  sets  in  rear  arrive  in  line  before  others  that  precede  them 
in  column,  they  must  leave  room  to  form  line  in  normal  order. 

950.  Q.  Give  commands,  and  explain,  to  fight  on  foot  to  the 
right.  A.  1.  To  fight  on  foot ;  2.  Action  right.  Nos.  1,  2,  and 
3  dismount  and  link;  then  unsling  carbine  and  form  five  yards 
to  the  right  of  their  horses,  facing  to  the  right. 

951.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  what  is  done  at  the  com- 
mand to  fight  on  foot  f  A.  Nos.  1  and  2  dismount  without  clos- 
ing distance  ;  Nos.  3  and  4  oblique  quickly  to  the  left  and  form 
four;  No.  3  dismounts  and  the  horses  are  linked;  the  horses  are 
then  closed. 

952.  Q.  In  this  drill  (to  fight  on  foot)  what  may  be  done  in 
emergencies  ?  A.  One  half  the  squad  may  be  dismounted  by  the 
commands  :  Nos.  1  and  3  (or  Nos.  2  and  4)  ;  2.  Dismount ;  3. 
Action  right  (or  left). 

953.  Q.  Being  dismounted  to  fight  on  foot,  explain  the  different 
methods  of  To  mount.  A.  The  corporal  causes  the  squad  to  as- 
semble, marches  it  to  the  vicinity  of  the  led  horses,  or  he  may 
cause  the  led  horses  to  be  advanced  to  meet  the  troopers  ;  he 
then  commands  :  Stand  to  horse  ;  or,  1.  Squad  ;  2.  Mount.  In 
the  first  instance  the  troopers  sling  carbine,  unlink  and  take  the 
position  of  stand  to  horse  ;  the  squad  may  then  be  mounted.  In 
the  second,  the  troopers  sling  carbine,  unlink  and  mount. 

954.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  troopers  dismounted  to 
fight  on  foot  ?    A.  Except  otherwise  directed,  two  yards. 

955.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  for  the  squad  to  kneel  or  lie  down  upon 
being  deployed,  when  is  the  command  given,  when  executed,  and 
what  becomes  of  the  instructor  ?    A.  The  corporal  designates  the 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  115 

position  before  deploying;  it  is  executed  at  each  halt,  and  the 
corporal,  as  instructor,  remains  standing. 

956.  Q.  Give  the  first,  third,  and  fifth  general  rules  of  fire  dis- 
cipline. A.  1st.  Never  load  until  the  moment  of  firing;  3d.  Never 
fire  after  the  command  or  signal  cease  firing ;  5th.  Never  fail  to 
adjust  the  sight  at  the  range  named. 

957.  Q.  What  are  the  exceptions  to  the  foregoing  rules  ?  A. 
It  is  allowable,  especially  for  scouts,  vedettes,  or  patrols,  to  fire 
when  necessary  to  give  the  alarm,  in  self-defense,  and  when  a  good 
opportunity  occurs  to  fire  upon  a  leader  of  the  enemy. 

958.  Q.  What  rules  should  be  observed  by  men  armed  with  the 
carbine,  when  acting  beyond  the  immediate  control  of  leaders, 
not  to  fire  ?  A.  Never  fire  at  a  distance  over  400  yards  at  a  man 
lying  down;  500  yards  at  a  man  kneeling  ;  600  yards  at  a  man 
standing  ;  700  yards  at  a  horseman;  800  yards  at  a  small  squad 
of  men,  or  thin  line  of  skirmishers. 

959.  Q.  How  about  volley  firing  f  A.  Can  be  fired  by  squads 
at  troops  in  close  order  at  distances  not  exceeding  600  yards  at  a 
line  equal  to  the  front  of  four  men  ;  800  yards  at  a  line  equal  to 
the  front  of  a  squad  of  twelve  men ;  900  yards  at  a  line  equal  to 
the  front  of  a  platoon  ;  1000  yards  at  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of 
a  troop. 

960.  Q.  Give  the  commands  to  fire  at  will.  A.  1.  Fire  at  will; 
or,  1.  Fire  at  will  kneeling  (or  lying  down)  ;  2.  At  (such  an  ob- 
ject); 3.  At  (so  many)  yards;  4.  Commence  firing. 

961.  Q.  Give  the  commands  to  fire  as  skirmishers  with  counted 
cartridges.  A.  1.  Fire  one  (two  or  three)  round;  2.  At  (such  an 
object);  3.  At  (so  many)  yards;  4.  Commence  firing. 

962.  Q.  Give  explanation  of  the  7'ap/cZ^re.  A.  In  this  fire  the 
number  of  cartridges  is  not  limited ;  the  objective  is  not  indi- 
cated ;  when  used  before  making  the  assault,  the  instructor  orders 
the  sights  laid  down,  and  then  commands:  1.  Rapid  fire ;  2.  Com- 
mence firing. 

THE   TROOP. 

963.  Q.  Give  the  post  of  officers.  A.  The  captain  is  the  in- 
structor, and  takes  post  between  the  attacking  line  and  support. 
One  lieutenant  commands  the  attacking  line;  the  other  commands 
the  reserve,  or  if  there  be  no  reserve  he  commands  the  support. 

964.  Q.  Which  lieutenant  commands  the  attacking  line,  and 
where  does  he  take  post  ?  A.  It  is  commanded  by  the  one  whose 
platoon  is  on  the  line ;  he  takes  post  about  thirty  yards  in  rear 
of  the  line. 

965.  Q.  In  action  where  does  the  commander  of  the  support 
take  position  ?  A.  One  from  which  he  can  observe  the  progress 
of  the  action,  and,  if  possible,  watch  the  scouts  or  patrols,  keep- 
ing a  good  lookout  for  the  commands  and  signals  of  the  cap- 
tain. 


116  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN'ER. 

966.  Q.  Which  flank  of  a  troop  should  an  attacking  line  be 
taken  from  when  the  troop  is  in  line  ;  and  which  platoons  are 
designated' when  ihe  troop  is  in  column  ?  A.  As  a  rule,  from  the 
left  when  in  line,  and  the  leading  platoons  when  in  column. 

967.  Q.  Give  the  duties  of  squad-leaders  in  movements  by  squads 
in  the  troop  drill.  A.  He  gives  the  commands  necessary  for  the 
movements  of  his  squad  and  leads  it  into  position.  In  deploy- 
ing as  skirmishers  by  the  flank,  he  supervises  the  deployment 
from  opposite  the  rear  of  his  squad  and  then  takes  his  place  in 
the  line  of  skirmishers ;  in  forming  line  of  platoons  and  deploy- 
ing as  skirmishers  to  the  front  he  takes  or  keeps  his  place  in  rank 
— retaining,  however,  supervision  of  his  squad. 

968.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  interval  between  squads  in  line  of 
squads  ?    A.  Forty-eight  yards. 

969.  Q.  The  troop  marcliing  in  line,  give  commands  for  form- 
ing line  of  squads  to  the  front  on  an  interior  squad,  and  explain 
the  movement.  A.  1.  Line  of  squads;  2.  On  (such)  squad,  (such) 
platoon;  3.  Fours  right  and  left;  4.  March.  At  the  command 
march,  the  leader  of  the  designated  squad  marches  it  to  the 
front;  the  squads  to  the  right  to  execute  fours  right,  column 
half-left,  and  those  to  the  left  fours  left,  column  half-right ; 
each  is  marched  in  line  to  the  front,  when  it  has  attained  its  in- 
terval from  the  squad  next  toward  the  base  squad. 

970.  Q.  Where  are  the  posts  of  chiefs  of  platoons  in  line  of 
squads  ?    A.  Ten  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

971.  Q.  Line  of  squads  being  halted,  where  do  the  leaders  of 
squads  take  post  ?    A.  Two  yards  in  rear  of  their  squads. 

972.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours  give  commands  to  form  line 
of  squads  to  the  front.  A.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of 
squads;  2.  March;  3.  Troop;  4.  Halt. 

973.  Q,  Give  commands  and  explain,  to  form  line  of  squads  to 
the  right  from  column  of  fours.  A.  1.  Line  of  squads;  2.  To 
the  right;  3.  March.  At  the  second  command  the  squad  leader  of 
the  rear  squad  commands  Fours  right.  At  the  command  march, 
the  rear  squad  forms  line  to  the  right,  advances  six  yards  and  is 
halted;  the  other  squads  continue  the  march,  and  each  in  suc- 
cession from  the  rear  of  the  column,  when  it  has  its  interval,  is 
formed  into  line  to  the  right  and  is  halted  on  the  line  of  the  base 
squad. 

974.  Q.  Give  the  commands  for  deploying  a  line  of  squads  as 
skirmishers  to  the  right  or  left  front ;  also  to  a  flank.  A.  1.  As 
skirmishers ;  2.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line ;  3.  March.  As 
skirmishers  ;  2.  Fours  right  (or  left)  ;  3.  March. 

975.  Q.  The  troop  being  in  column  of  fours,  can  it  be  deployed 
as  skirmishers  ?    A.  Yes,  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the  squad. 

976.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  squads  or  deployed  as  skirmishers,  as- 
semble the  troop  and  describe  the  movement.  A.  The  captain 
takes  post,  or  sends  the  guidon,  where  he  wishes  to  form  the 


DKILL   REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  11? 

troop,  and  commands  :  1.  Assemble;  2.  March.  The  skirmish- 
ers or  squads  move  promptly  toward  him.  and  reform  in  their 
normal  order;  also  the  support  and  reserve. 

977.  Q.  Explain  the  rally.  A.  The  captain  goes  quickly,  or 
sends  the  guidon,  to  the  squad  or  place  selected  as  the  ral lying- 
point  and  signals  or  commands  :  Rally.  It  is  executed  by  the 
attacking  line  as  explained  for  the  squad.  The  support  forms  on 
the  line,  or  acts  under  special  instructions.  As  soon  as  practica- 
ble after  rallying,  the  troop  is  assembled  again  or  deployed.  The 
captain  may  command  :  Rally  by  platoons;  or.  Rally  by  squads. 

978.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  squads,  give  commands* and  explain, 
To  march  to  the  rear.  A.  1.  To  the  rear;  2.  March;  3.  Guide 
centre  (right  or  left).  Each  squad-leader  wheels  his  squad  left 
about  by  fours.  The  captain  designates  the  point  of  direction  to 
the  base-squad. 

979.  Q.  How  is  the  firing  line  relieved  ?  A.  Tke  captain  noti- 
fies the  commander  of  the  firing  line  and  support.  The  com- 
mander of  the  firing  line  notifies  his  group-leaders.  The  support 
is  deployed  or  extended  so  as  to  complete  the  movement  in  rear 
of  the  firing  line,  and  is  advanced  to  the  position  to  be  occupied, 
either  in  advance  or  in  rear  of  the  old  line  ;  the  latter  is  then 
marched  to  the  rear  and  assembled,  and  becomes  the  support. 


THE  SQUADRON. 

980.  Q.  How  is  the  squadron  in  extended  order  formed,  whether 
operating  alone  or  in  regiment?  A.  In  three  echelons,  viz.: 
The  attacking  (or  firing)  line,  the  troop  support,  and  the  reserve. 

981.  Q.  What  does  the  attacking  line  consist  of  ?  A.  One,  two, 
or  three  troops. 

982.  Q.  Who  designates  them?  A.  The  major;  he  also  desig- 
nates the  reserve,  and,  if  necessary,  the  size  of  the  troop  sup- 
ports. 

983.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  the  commands  of  the  major  to  form 
line  of  squads.  A.  1.  Line  of  squads  ;  2.  Ou  (such)  squad,  (such) 
troop ;  3.  March. 

984.  Q.  Explain  the  movement.  A.  At  the  second  command, 
the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  take  their  posts,  and, 
when  necessary,  the  support  of  the  base-troop  and  the  reserve  are 
halted  or  moved  a  little  to  the  rear,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
deployment.  At  the  command  march,  the  base  troop  forms 
line  of  squads ;  the  troops  to  the  right  are  marched  in  columns 
of  fours  to  the  right,  and  each  when  the  rear  of  its  column  is 
opposite  to  the  left  of  its  position,  forms  line  of  squads  to  the 
left ;  in  a  similar  manner  the  troops  to  the  left  are  moved  to  the 
left  and  form  line  of  squads  to  the  right.  The  troops  other  than 
the  base  may  march  diagonally  to  position.     Before  reaching 


118 

position  for  deployment,  the  captains  may  detach  their  supports, 
which  then  march  to  their  positions  without  interfering  with  the 
other  troops. 

985.  Q.  To  halt  the  squadron.  A.  The  major  commands  :  1. 
Squadron  ;  3.  Halt ;  or  he  may  designate  the  line  to  be  occupied; 
the  captain  of  the  base-troop  halts  it  on  arriving  at  that  line. 

986.  Q.  How  is  line  of  squads  formed  from  column  of  troops  ? 
A.  By  the  same  commands  ;  the  first  troop  forms  line  of  squads 
on  its  left  or  right  squad,  according  as  the  formation  is  to  be  to 
the  right  or  left  front ;  the  other  troops  of  the  attacking  line  are 
marched  opposite  the  left  or  right  of  their  positions,  and  then 
form  line  of  squads. 

987.  Q.  The  squadron  being  in  column  of  fours,  how  is  the  line 
of  squads  formed  to  the  right  or  left  ?  A.  By  the  commands  and 
means  explained  for  the  troop.  Each  captain  forms  his  troop  in 
line  of  squads  w^iien  opposite  its  position  in  line. 

988.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  the  commands  of  the  major  to  de- 
ploy as  skirmisJiers,  and  explain  the  movement.  A.  1.  As  skir- 
mishers; 2.  On  (such)  squad,  (such  troop);  3.  March.  The  base- 
troop  deploys  at  once ;  the  troops  to  the  right  gain  their  inter- 
vals to  the  right  and  deploy ;  those  to  the  left  gain  their  inter- 
vals to  the  left  and  deploy.  If  marching,  the  deployment  is  made 
gaining  ground  to  the  front. 

989.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  squads  or  as  skirmishers,  give  the 
major's  commands  to  increase  or  diminish  intervals.  A.  1.  On 
(such)  squad,  (such)  troop,  to  (so  many)  yards  extend  (or  close); 
2.  March. 

990.  Q.  Explain  the  movement.  A.  The  squads  open  from  or 
close  toward  the  base-squad.  If  marching,  the  squads  are 
marched  obliquely  at  an  increased  gait ;  if  at  a  halt,  they  are 
marched  by  the  flank.  Skirmishers  open  from  or  close  toward 
the  base-trooper.  If  marching,  the  movement  is  executed  by 
obliquing  and  increasing  the  gait;  if  at  a  halt,  the  movement  is 
executed  by  the  flank,  the  base-trooper  moving  six  yards  to  the 
front. 

991.  Q.  Explain  the  assemlly.  A.  The  major  causes  the  re- 
call to  be  sounded.  The  captains  assemble  or  rally  their  troops. 
The  major  causes  the  adjutant's  call  to  be  sounded,  or  com- 
mands :  1.  On  (such)  troop  ;  2.  Assemble  ;  8.  March  ;  the 
troops,  including  the  reserve,  are  marched  to  the  point  occupied 
by  the  major,  or  to  the  designated  troop;  the  squadron  is  formed 
in  its  normal  order  in  such  formation  as  the  major  may  direct. 

992.  Q.  To  assemble  at  the  trot  or  gallop.  A.  The  trot  or 
gallop  is  sounded  immediately  after  the  adjutant's  call. 

993.  Q.  To  fight  on  foot  w'hen  the  squadron  is  acting  alone, 
what  is  the  rule  for  the  reserve  ?  A.  It  remains  mounted,  and 
guards  or  furnishes  the  guard  for  the  led  horses. 

994.  Q.  How  is  it  when  the  squadron  is  with  the  regiment? 


DRILL   REG  ULATIOKS— CAVALRY.  119 

A.  The  squadron  reserve  is  dismounted,  but  the  major  may 
designate  a  mounted  escort  for  the  led  horses. 

995.  Q.  Being  in  columns  of  fours,  give  the  commands  of  the 
major,  To  fight  on  foot.  A.  1.  Troops;  2.  To  fight  on  foot;  3. 
Action  right  (or  left) ;  or,  3.  Action  right  (or  left)  front. 

996.  Q.  After  dismounting,  how  do  the  captains  assemble  their 
troops  ?  A.  The  squad  falls  in,  and  each  captain  assembles  his 
troop  on  what  was  his  leading  squad  before  dismounting. 

997.  Q.  Give  another  way  of  forming  the  column  of  fours  to 
fight  on  foot.  A.  Form  the  column  front  into  line  of  troops  in 
columns  of  fours,  and  then  dismount  to  fight  on  foot. 

998.  Q.  State  an  object  for  this  movement.  A.  Each  troop  on 
arriving  on  the  line  could,  at  once,  be  dismounted  to  fight  on 
foot. 

999.  Q.  Being  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  what  would  first  have 
to  be  done  before  dismounting  to  fight  on  foot  ?  A.  The  major 
would  have  to  break  the  line  of  platoon  columns  into  troops  in 
columns  of  fours  to  the  front,  and  then  dismount  them. 

1000.  Q.  How  may  the  double  column  of  fours  be  dismounted 
to  fight  on  foot  ?  A.  It  is  dismounted  to  fight  on  foot  to  the 
right  and  left,  so  as  to  form  on  its  outer  flanks. 

1001.  Q.  Explain  the  assembly  of  the  dismounted  squadron. 
A.  Adjutant's  call  is  sounded,  or  the  major  commands  :  1.  On 
(such)  troop ;  3.  Assemble  ;  3.  March.  The  designated  troop 
stands  fast  or  takes  such  position  as  the  major  may  direct ;  the 
other  troops  are  closed  toward  the  designated  troop,  and  form  on 
it  with  intervals  of  two  yards  between  troops. 

1002.  Q.  Explain  To  remount  the  squadron.  A.  The  major 
causes  the  recall  to  be  sounded,  at  which  each  captain  rallies  or 
assembles  his  troop,  marches  it  to  the  led  hoi*ses,  and  mounts  it. 
The  squadron  is  then  assembled. 

1003.  Q.  What  other  way  may  the  dismounted  squadron  be 
assembled  ?  A.  The  major  may  cause  the  led  horses  to  be  con- 
ducted to  the  dismounted  line,  the  captains  assemble  their  troops 
and  mount  them,  or  mount  them  deployed,  according  as  the  re- 
call or  prepare  to  mount  is  sounded.  The  squadron  may  then  be 
assembled. 


The  Dismounted  Squadron  in  Action. 

1004.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  duties  of  the  major  in  "The 
dismounted  squadron  in  action "  ?  A.  He  regulates  the  prog- 
ress of  the  action,  sees  that  the  firing  line  advances  upon  the 
indicated  objective,  hastens  or  delays  the  reinforcement  by  the 
support,  and  disposes  the  reserve  so  as  to  guard  against  surprise. 

1005.  Q.  To  whom  does  he  leave  the  execution  of  the  de- 
tails ?   A.  To  his  subordinates;  but  he  exercises  a  general  and  ac- 


120  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

tive  control  in  such  manner  as  to  increase  the  energy  of  the  action 
up  to  the  decisive  moment. 

1006.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  each  captain  in  the  fighting  line  ? 
A.  He  regulates  the  march  of  the  line  within  the  limits  assigned 
to  him,  keeps  in  communication  with  his  support,  and  brings  it 
upon  the  firing  line  pursuant  to  orders,  or  without  orders  when 
necessary;  he  directs  the  fire  and  regulates  its  intensity. 


The  Front  of  Action. 

1007.  Q.  Where  does  the  field  of  action  extend  ?  and  explain 
where  the  action  of  the  squadron  should  be  concentrated.  A. 
The  field  of  action  extends  forward  to  the  enemy's  troops  and  to 
the  right  and  left  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  intervals  between  it 
and  the  adjacent  squadrons,  with  which  it  should  keep  touch  and 
act  in  concert.  In  this  space  the  action  of  the  squadron  should 
be  concentrated. 

1008.  Q.  When  and  how  may  the  enemy  be  outflanked  and  be 
attacked  both  in  front  and  flank  ?  A.  When  the  relative  strength 
of  the  command  warrants  it,  provided  such  attacks  can  be  made 
simultaneously. 

1009.  Q.  Before  forming  for  attack  or  defense,  what  precaution- 
ary measures  should  be  taken  ?  A.  Ground  scouts  and  combat 
patrols  are  sent  forward  and  on  the  flanks,  under  specific  instruc- 
tions ;  they  remain  mounted,  as  far  as  practicable,  and  convey 
information  acquired  by  signals  previously  agreed  upon. 

1010.  Q.  When  the  action  commences,  what  becomes  of  the 
ground  scouts  and  combat  patrols  ?  A.  The  former  are  drawn 
in ;  the  latter  remain  upon  the  flanks. 


The  Offensive, 
squadron  in  regiment. 

1011.  Q.  How  should  the  squadron  be  formed  on  first  coming 
within  the  zone  of  artillery  fire  ?  A.  In  line  or  in  line  of  col- 
umns. 

1012.  Q.  What  does  it  then  do?  A.  It  advances  until  the 
artillery  fire  becomes  effective  (about  3000  to  3500  yards  from 
the  enemy  on  open  ground).  The  squadron,  under  cover  if  pos- 
sible, is  then  dismounted  to  fight  on  foot  and  assembled. 

1013.  Q.  What  should  be  the  fighting  front,  dismounted,  on 
the  offensive  ?  A.  It  should  rarely  exceed  one  half  the  front  of 
the  squadron  when  mounted  and  in  line,  and  this  should  include 
a  space  of  from  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  yards  between  the 
squadrons. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  121 

1014.  Q.  The  squadron  being  on  the  offensive,  and  the  precau- 
tionary measures  taken,  when  does  the  major  give  the  commands 
for  advancing?  A.  When  the  ground  scouts  have  advanced 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards. 

1015.  Q.  When  is  each  support  put  in  march  ?  A.  When  the 
firing  line  has  advanced  about  two  hundred  yards. 

1016.  Q.  When  does  the  firing  line  form  line  of  platoons  ; 
when  line  of  squads  ;  and  when  does  it  deploy  as  skirmishers  ? 
A.  At  about  1700  yards  line  of  platoons,  at  about  1200  yards 
line  of  squads,  and  at  about  900  yards  it  deploys  as  skirmishers. 

1017.  Q.  At  what  distance  may  the  scouts  find  it  necessary  to 
halt  and  await  the  arrival  of  the  firing  line  ?  A.  At  800  yards  or 
less. 

1018.  Q.  How  may  the  firing  line  be  advanced  while  under 
fire  ?  A.  From  cover  to  cover  by  rushes  executed  by  the  whole 
line,  if  possible,  or  by  alternate  troops. 

1019.  Q.  In  emergencies,  the  commander  of  the  support  may 
reinforce  without  waiting  for  orders.  Explain  how  it  is  done. 
A.  The  platoons  of  the  support  generally  reinforce  on  the  flank 
from  whicU  detached  and  are  moved  forward  rapidly  to  avoid 
loss. 

1020.  Q.  In  battle,  what  should  the  reserve  do  ?  A.  It  should 
conform  to  the  varying  circumstances  of  the  battle,  and,  with- 
out waiting  for  the  orders  of  the  major,  gradually  draw  nearer 
to  the  fighting  line,  so  as  to  be  ready  to  replace  the  supports  when 
the  latter  have  been  absorbed;  the  reserve  troops  then  take  the 
battle  formation. 

1021.  Q.  Supposing  the  firing  line  has  advanced  near  enough 
to  the  enemy  to  make  alternate  rushes  necessary,  how  are  the 
rushes  ordered  and  what  are  the  major's  commands  ?  A.  The 
major  notifies  the  captains,  who  give  the  necessary  instructions 

•while  the  men  are  lying  down  or  behind  cover.  The  major  then 
commands :  1.  Advance  by  rushes ;  2.  Second  (or  such)  troop, 
fire  two  (or  three)  volleys  ;  3.  First  (or  such)  troop  forward. 

1022.  Q.  Explain  the  movement.  A.  The  captain  of  the  sec- 
ond troop  gives  the  commands  for  the  volleys  ;  the  captain  of  the 
first  gives  the  commands  to  rush  forward.  The  instant  of  the 
first  volley  the  first  troop  runs  forward  about  fifteen  yards,  or  to 
cover,  if  there  be  any  ;  the  captain  then  commands  :  1.  Fire  by 
troop  ;  the  troop  halts,  and  he  then  completes  the  commands  for 
firing. 

1023.  Q.  How  if  the  firing  is  to  be  executed  by  platoons,  by 
squads,  or  as  skirmishers  ?  A.  The  captain  indicates  the  kind  of 
fire,  number  of  volleys  or  rounds,  and  commands  :  Commence 
firing  ;  the  chiefs  of  platoons  or  squad-leaders  complete  the  com- 
mands for  firing. 

1024.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  second  troop  at  the  instant  of 
the  delivery  of  the  first  volley  by  the  first  troop  ?    A.  The  second 


122  THE  AEMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

troop  rushes  about  fifteen  yards  in  advance  of  the  line  of  the  first 
troop,  or  to  cover  if  there  be  any,  when  it  is  halted,  and  fires  the 
specified  number  of  volleys  ;  the  first  troop  is  then  advanced  in 
the  same  way  beyond  the  second,  and  so  on, 

1025.  Q.  When  the  time  for  the  assault  has  arrived,  what  does 
the  major  signal  ?  and  explain  what  is  executed.  A.  The  major 
signals :  Cease  firing,  and  commands  :  1.  To  the  charge  ;  2. 
March.  The  men  rise  and  advance  in  double  time.  Having  ar- 
rived at  about  thirty  yards  from  the  enemy,  the  captains  com- 
mand :  Charge.  The  men  advance  on  the  enemy  at  the  run. 
Having  driven  the  enemy  from  the  position,  each  captain  selects 
ground  in  his  front,  or  the  major  assigns  a  position  favorable  for 
firing  upon  the  retreating  enemy,  or  for  resisting  a  counter-attack. 

The  Squadron  Acting  Alone. 

1026.  Q.  What  does  the  advance  guard  usually  do?  A.  It 
opens  the  action  and,  if  possible,  compels  the  enemy  to  deploy. 

1027.  Q.  What  becomes  the  duty  of  the  major  when  the  enemy 
is  signalled  ?  A.  He  decides  upon  the  character  of  the  attack  and 
makes  the  necessary  dispositions.  He  must  keep  a  reserve,  hus- 
band his  strength,  and  cover  his  flanks  and  rear  with  mounted 
patrols  or  scouts. 

1028.  Q.  How  is  the  attack  conducted?  A.  Conformably  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  squadron  in  regiment. 

1029.  Q.  While  the  final  assault  is  being  made,  what  is  done 
with  the  led  horses  ?    A.  They  should  be  brought  forward. 

1030.  Q.  If  the  success  of  the  assault  is  assured,  what  does  the 
reserve  do  ?  A.  It  is  mounted,  and  at  a  signal  from  the  major 
takes  up  the  pursuit.  If  the  occasion  seems  opportune,  the  com- 
mander of  the  reserve  does  not  wait  for  orders. 


The  Defensive, 
squadron  in  regiment. 

1031.  Q.  Having  conducted  his  squadron  to  the  position  desig- 
nated, what  duties  then  devolve  upon  the  major  ?  A.  He  sends 
out  his  patrols  and  ground  scouts,  who  connect  with  those  from 
adjacent  squadrons.  He  then  reconnoitres  the  position — its  ap- 
proaches and  flanks,  and  means  of  communications,  front  and 
rear  ;  he  also  selects  ral lying-points.  He  designates  to  each  sub- 
division the  position  it  is  to  occupy  and  the  defensive  works  it  is 
to  construct— such  as  abatis,  shelter  trenches,  etc.  ;  also  the  posi- 
tion of  the  led  horses  if  they  be  not  assembled  with  the  regiment. 

1032.  Q.  What  formation  is  taken  ?  A.  Generally  the  same  as 
on  the  offensive. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  123 

1033.  Q.  If  the  enemy  is  repulsed,  what  follows  ?  A.  The 
squadron  takes  the  offensive,  remaining  dismounted  unless  or- 
dered by  the  colonel  to  mount. 

1034.  Q.  How  if  the  enemy  succeed  ?  A.  The  squadron  is 
withdrawn  to,  or  is  rallied  at,  the  rallying-point. 

The  Squadron  Acting  Alone. 

1035.  Q.  The  squadron  being  in  position  in  battle  formation, 
what  is  first  done  ?  A.  The  firing  line  is  established  on  the  posi- 
tion; the  supports,  reserve,  and  led  horses  are  placed  undercover. 

1036.  Q.  The  squadron  being  in  the  order  of  march  owing  to 
the  distance  of  the  enemy,  what  is  done?  A.  The  advance  guard 
establishes  itself  on  the  position  and  sends  out  patrols  and  scouts. 

1037.  Q.  How  does  the  major  make  his  dispositions  and  recon- 
noissance  ?    A.  The  same  as  when  in  the  regiment. 


Employment  of  Cavalry. 

1038.  Q.  What  do  the  duties  of  the  cavalry  division  comprise  ? 
A.  Those  pertaining  to  independent  operations  of  cavalry  and  of 
cavalry  attached  to  infantry  divisions  and  corps. 

1039.  Q.  To  whom  is  the  commander  of  the  cavalry  division 
responsible  ?  A.  To  the  commander  of  the  army  ;  must  have 
perfect  independence,  and  never  wait  for  orders  to  attack. 

Against  Cavalry. 

1040.  Q.  What,  in  offensive  operations,  must  cavalry  never 
wait  for  ?  A.  To  be  attacked,  but  must  always  take  the  initia- 
tive. 

1041.  Q.  What  are  the  essentials  necessary  to  success?  A. 
Order,  uniformity,  and  the  proper  employment  of  reserves  ;  the 
object  being  to  ride  the  enemy  down  and  complete  his  overthrow 
with  the  sabre  and  pistol. 

1042.  Q.  In  attacking,  what  kind  of  field  is  best  adapted  to  a 
charge  ?    A.  One  slightly  undulating  is  better  than  a  level  plain. 

1043.  Q.  What  are  the  most  favorable  opportunities  for  attack- 
ing cavalry  ?  A.  When  the  enemy  is  issuing  from  a  defile  with 
a  narrow  front ;  when  it  is  possible  to  surprise  him  in  column 
formation ;  when  he  can  be  taken  in  flank  while  charging  an- 
other body  ;  when  he  is  in  the  act  of  changing  formation  ;  and 
when  he  is  on  ground  unfavorable  for  his  deployment. 

1044.  Q.  As  the  attacking  line  gives  the  main  blow,  what  should 
be  its  size,  if  possible,  with  reference  to  the  enemy;  also  to  the 
command  to  which  it  belongs  ?    A.  It  ought  to  be  stronger  and 


124  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

cover  a  greater  front  than  the  enemy.     It  should  consist  of  at 
least  half  of  the  entire  force. 

1045.  Q.  In  what  formation  should  it  generally  advance  to  the 
attack,  giving  reasons  therefor?  A.  Generally  in  line  of  col- 
umns, preferably  in  line  of  columns  of  fours  at  full  intervals  ;  in 
this  formation  the  intervals  and  general  alignment  can  be  pre- 
served or  regained  with  less  confusion  than  in  any  other,  and 
ground  may  more  easily  be  gained  toward  a  flank  by  obliquing 
by  heads  of  columns. 

1046.  Q.  What  gaits  should  be  used  against  formed  cavalry  ? 
A.  The  trot  should  be  continued  as  long  as  possible,  or  until 
within  a  few  hundred  yards,  when  the  gallop  should  be  taken 
and  progressively  increased. 

1047.  Q.  In  the  attack  what  should  be  done  to  infuse  vigor  and 
enthusiasm  in  the  command  ?  A.  At  the  signal  to  charge  all  the 
trumpeters  should  sound  and  repeat  the  signal  and  the  troops  cheer. 

1048.  Q.  After  the  signal  charge,  what  should  each  troop  do  ? 
A.  It  should  follow  its  captain  as  a  unit,  keeping  touch  of  stirrup, 
toward  the  centre. 

1049.  Q.  What  comprises  the  support?  how  is  it  posted  and 
manoeuvred  ?  its  formation,  and  distance  from  the  reserve.  A. 
It  comprises  from  one  fourth  to  one  third  of  the  whole  command, 
and  is  so  posted  and  manoeuvred  as  to  give  direct  and  timely  sup- 
port to,  and  assure  the  success  of,  the  attacking  line.  It  is  usually 
formed  in  line  of  columns,  and  at  a  distance  of  about  two  hun- 
dred and  seventy-five  yards  from  the  attacking  line.  The  greater 
part  of  the  support  will  be  formed  in  echelon  to  the  attacking 
line,  the  inner  flank  of  this  part  being  from  fifty  to  seventy-five 
yards  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  right  or  left  flank  of  the  attack- 
ing line.  The  remaining  squadron  or  squadrons  of  the  support 
will  be  placed  at  rather  wide  intervals  in  rear,  or  so  placed  as  to 
cover  the  less  exposed  flank  of  the  attacking  line. 

Against  Infantry. 

1050.  Q.  What  are  the  most  favorable  occasions  for  cavalry 
action  against  infantry  ?  A.  When  the  infantry  have  exhausted 
their  ammunition  ;  when  in  disordered  retreat,  or  when  much 
shaken  by  artillery  fire. 

1051.  Q.  If  choice  be  permitted,  what  kind  of  ground  should 
cavalry  charge  infantry  on,  or  what,  part  of  its  line  should  the 
charge  be  directed  against  ?  A.  Up  hill  (not  steep),  or  against 
its  right  flank. 

Against  Artillery. 

1052.  Q.  What  are  the  most  suitable  times  for  attacking  artil- 
lery ?  A.  When  withdrawing  from  or  going  into  position,  the 
pieces  limbered. 


DKILL   REGULATIONS — CAYALRY.  125 

1053.  Q.  What  force  would  be  ordinarily  sufficient  for  an 
assault  on  one  battery  ?  A.  A  troop  or  squadron  to  do  effective 
work  among  the  horses  and  guns. 

1054.  Q.  How  is  the  attacking  force  divided?  A.  Into  two 
or  three  parts. 

1055.  Q.  Explain  how  the  force  should  be  used.  A.  The  attack- 
ing line  charges  as  foragers,  the  troop  or  squadron  dividing  near 
the  centre  as  they  advance.  The  foragers  assault  the  battery 
on  both  flanks,  attacking  the  cannoneers  and  the  battery  sup- 
port. The  support  advances  to  secure  the  battery.  The  reserve 
follows  and  is  held  in  hand  to  meet  any  hostile  cavalry  that  may 
attempt  to  recover  the  guns. 

1056.  Q.  If,  after  overpowering  it,  it  is  found  that  the  battery 
cannot  be  held,  what  should  be  done  ?  A.  The  guns  should  be 
disabled,  horses  killed,  or  traces  cut. 

1057.  Q.  How  would  you  disable  a  field  gun  ?  A.  By  opening 
the  breech-block,  and  then  breaking  it  with  a  heavy  hammer  ;  or 
load  the  piece,  close  the  breech  without  locking  it,  and  fire  the 
piece ;  or  place  two  or  three  blank  cartridges  in  the  gun,  close 
and  lock  the  breech-block,  ram  from  the  muzzle  a  ball  of  clay  or 
sod,  then  unlock  the  breech-block  and  fire  ;  or  fire  a  shotted  gun 
with  its  muzzle  against  the  ciiase  of  another.  Guns  of  the  Krupp 
system  may  be  temporarily  disabled  by  carrying  off  the  breech- 
block or  breaking  the  handle  of  the  breech-block. 

Foragers  and  Skirmishers. 

1058.  Q.  How  may  the  charge  as  foragers  be  used  to  advantage  ? 
A.  Against  artillery,  infantry  in  extended  order,  and  shaken  or 
broken  forces  of  any  arm. 

1059.  Q.  How  are  mounted  skirmishers  principally  used  ?  A. 
To  clear  or  beat  up  wooded  or  broken  localities,  in  convoying 
supply  trains,  and  in  partisan  or  Indian  warfare. 

PURSUIT. 

1060.  Q.  Who  should  make  the  immediate  pursuit  of  an  enemy 
that  has  been  routed  ?    A.  The  troops  engaged  in  the  mel5e. 

1031.  Q.  For  the  more  extended  pursuit  ?  A.  The  commander 
of  the  Cavalry  Division,  without  waiting  for  orders  from  superior 
authority,  should  at  once  send  a  force  to  keep  in  contact  with  the 
enemy,  and  organize  and  place  the  remainder  of  his  division  to 
make  the  pursuit.  He  should  communicate  with  his  superior 
officers,  reporting  concisely  what  has  been  done,  his  plans  of 
operation,  and  the  apparent  condition  and  plans  of  the  enemy, 
requesting  orders  for  his  guidance.  The  cavalry  should  be  ac- 
companied by  as  many  horse  batteries  as  are  available. 


126  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 


DISMOUNTED. 

1062.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  cavalry  be  dismounted 
to  fight  on  foot?  A.  1.  In  an  inclosed,  wooded,  or  rough, 
broken  country  that  cannot  be  turned,  where  mounted  action 
is  impracticable  ;  e.g.,  small  villages,  buildings,  hedges,  defiles, 
fords,  etc.,  either  offensively  or  defensively.  2.  When  an 
obstacle,  such  as  a  bridge  or  ford,  intervenes  to  prevent  the 
enemy's  rapid  pursuit  and  presents  an  opportunity  for  delaying 
or  keeping  him  in  check  by  the  use  of  a  few  dismounted  men.  3. 
To  occupy  distant  and  important  points,  and  hold  them  against 
the  enemy  until  the  arrival  of  the  infantry.  4.  To  occupy  posi- 
tions held  by  infantry,  to  permit  the  withdrawal  of  the  latter, 
thus  misleading  the  enemy  to  suppose  them  to  be  still  occupied 
in  force.  5.  During  a  retreat,  to  offer  resistance  to  compel  the 
enemy  to  deploy,  thus  gaining  time. 

KAIDS. 

1063.  Q.  What  are  raids?  what  should  they  be  composed  of, 
and  what  are  their  object  ?  A.  Raids  are  isolated,  independent 
cavalry  operations,  conducted  with  secrecy,  by  rapid  marches, 
usually  avoiding  general  engagements.  The  force  should  be  com- 
posed of  the  best  mounted  and  most  self-reliant  troops,  and  should 
consist  of  complete  organizations  ;  as  regiments,  squadrons,  etc. 
Their  objects  are  :  To  harass  and  weaken  the  enemy  by  drawing 
off  in  pursuit  his  cavalry  or  other  troops,  or  by  causing  him  to 
guard  a  great  number  of  points  ;  to  threaten,  interrupt,  and 
destroy  his  communications  ;  to  destroy  his  depots  and  source  of 
supplies. 

ESCORTS. 

1064.  Q.  How  far  should  escorts  to  persons,  mails,  etc.,  travel 
per  day,  and  how  should  details  be  made  ?  A.  For  any  con- 
siderable distance,  not  more  than  twenty-five  miles.  If  possible, 
details  should  be  made  from  one  troop  at  a  time. 

1065.  Q.  Who  regulates  the  time  and  distance  of  the  marches 
and  the  location  of  the  camps  ?  A.  The  commander  of  the  escort, 
if  a  commissioned  officer. 

1066.  Q.  What  kind  of  an  escort  should  trains  be  furnished 
with  ?  A.  Dismounted  men  ;  mounted  men  are  posted  as  flank- 
ers and  patrols. 

ESCORTS  OF  CONVOYS. 

1067.  Q.  The  commander  of  the  escort  being  responsible  for  the 
convoy,  what  are  his  duties  ?  A.  He  directs  the  march,  keeping 
as  many  wagons  abreast  as  practicable  ;  enforces  train  discipline, 
placing  for  this  purpose  a  small  part  of  the  escort  with  the  con- 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.         127 

voy,  and,  with  the  main  body,  protects  the  convoy  and  expedites 
the  march. 

1068.  Q.  What  does  the  main  body  furnish?  A.  Advance- 
guard,  rear-guard,  and  flankers  ;  reconnoitering  patrols  are  de- 
tached to  considerable  distances. 

1069.  Q.  What  is  done  in  case  of  an  attack  ?  A.  The  escort 
should,  if  possible,  hold  the  enemy  at  a  distance,  keeping  up  the 
march  of  the  convoy  ;  when  this  is  not  pi-acticable,  the  train 
should  be  parked  and  the  defense  concentrated  ;  if  the  defense 
cannot  be  made  successful,  such  part  of  the  convoy  as  cannot 
escape  by  flight  must  be  destroyed  ;  the  animals  must  be  taken 
away  or  shot. 

SCREENING  AND  RECONNOITERING. 

1070.  Q.  How  should  the  main  body  of  the  force  for  this  pur- 
pose be  held  ?  A.  Concentrated,  pushing  out  contact  squadrons 
and  patrols  well  to  the  front  and  flanks. 

1071.  Q.  What  front  should  a  division  of  cavalry  cover  per- 
forming this  duty?  A.  About  ten  miles',  varying  according  to 
circumstances. 

ADVANCE  AND   REAR  GUARDS. 

1073.  Q.  What  is  an  advance-guard  ?  A.  A  body  of  troops 
thrown  out  in  front  of  a  marching  column,  to  cover  its  move- 
ments, to  prevent  surprise,  and  to  gain  information. 

1073.  Q.  What  are  some  of  its  duties  in  an  advance,  and  in  a 
retreat  ?  A.  In  an  advance  it  seizes  advantageous  positions  and 
holds  them  until  the  column  comes  up,  or  holds  in  check  the  ad- 
vancing enemy  until  the  column  can  deploy  and  take  up  a  posi- 
tion to  meet  him.  In  retreat  it  prepares  the  way  for  the  main 
body,  guarding  and  repairing  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  sweeping  away 
partisans  or  guerillas.  If  hostile  troops  have  outmarched  the 
column  and  are  in  front  of  it,  the  advance-guard  performs  duties 
of  the  same  nature  as  in  the  advance. 

1074.  Q.  Explain  fully  how  the  advance-guard  is  divided.  A. 
In  two  nearly  equal  parts,  the  vanguard  and  the  reserve.  The 
vanguard  is  subdivided  into  i\\Q  advance  party  and  the  support. 
The  advance  party  furnishes  the  leading  and  flanking  groups ; 
The  support  furnishes  its  own  flankers. 

1075.  Q.  Explain  how  the  groups,  etc.,  constituting  the  ad- 
vance party  are  posted.  A.  A  pointy  or  leading  group,  of  three 
or  four  men  under  a  corporal ;  &,  flanking  group  of  three  or  four 
men  on  either  side  of  the  main  route,  at  from  two  hundred  to 
three  hundred  yards  distance,  and  somewhat  retired  ;  twfiCJ^-pn  -.^;:^ 
three  men  of  the  advance  party  at  intervals  on  the  DM^^^wfer'^  -^^ 
preserve  communication  with  the  support.  JI^K^  \  t^^'  ^  t  -^^ 


lt^^l4> 


.^^ 


128  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

1076.  Q.  What  follows  the  advance  party  ?  A.  The  sii^pport, 
mill  flaiikers  at  about  five  hundred  yards  in  rear  of  the  point. 

1077.  Q.  Explain  about  the  reserve.  A.  The  reserve,  one-half 
of  the  advance-guard,  follows  at  about  five  hundred  yards  in  rear 
of  -the  support ;  the  reserve  may  throw  out  flanking  groups  at 
about  five  hundred  yards  on  either  or  both  flanks,  and  somewhat 
in  advance  and  in  rear  of  its  position. 

1078.  Q.  With  wbich  parties  are  commanders  of  the  van- 
guard and  advance-guard  ?  A.  The  first  is  with  the  support;  the 
latter  with  the  reserve. 

1079.  Q.  At  what  distance  from  the  reserve  is  the  main  column? 
A.  Five  hundred  yards  in  rear. 

1080.  Q.  What  are  rear-guards,  and  what  are  their  duties  in  a 
forward  movement?  A.  Kear-guards  are  corresponding  bodies 
in  rear  of  the  column.  They  protect  the  rear  of  the  column  from 
raiding  parties  or  detachments,  arrest  stragglers,  prevent  pillag- 
ing, etc. 

1081.  Q.  What  are  their  duties  in  a  retreat  ?  A.  They  cover 
the  column,  checking  the  enemy,  and  delaying  him  so  as  to  insure 
the  safety  of  the  column. 

1083.  Q.  As  a  rule  what  should  be  the  strength  of  the  advance 
and  rear-guards  in  a  forward  movement  ?  A.  The  advance-guard 
varies  from  one  eighth  to  one  fourth  of  the  whole  force  ;  in  a  very 
small  force,  one  eighth  ;  in  a  very  large  force,  one  fourth,  and, 
generally,  one  sixth.  The  rear-guard  is  generally  one  half  the 
strength  of  the  advance-guard. 

1083.  Q.  How^  would  it  be  in  a  retreat  ?  A.  The  strength  of 
the  guards  would  be  reversed. 


OUTPOSTS. 

1084.  Q.  What  are  the  principal  duties  of  outposts  ?  A.  1st. 
to  guard  all  approaches  ;  3d.  To  Obtain  the  earliest  information 
of  the  enemy's  movements;  3d.  To  obstruct  and  delay  his  ad- 
vance. 

1085.  Q.  What  should  be  the  size  of  the  detachment  for  out- 
post duty  ?  A.  It  should  not,  as  a  rule,  exceed  one  sixth  of  the 
whole  force.  It  depends  upon  the  strength  of  the  main  com- 
mand, the  proximity  of  the  enemy,  the  extent  of  front  to  be  cov- 
ered, the  character  of  the  country,  etc. 

1086.  Q.  What  extent  (in  regard  to  the  main  body)  should  out- 
posts cover,  and  how  disposed  ?  A.  They  should  cover  the  entire 
front,  extend  w^ell  beyond  the  flanks  and  toward  the  rear.  They 
are  generally  disposed  as  follows :  First — A  line  of  vedettes  or 
Cossack  posts.  Second — A  line  of  small  groups  called  pickets. 
Third — A  line  of  larger  groups  called  supports.  Fourth— A  re- 
serve.    The  latter  may  be  omitted. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  129 

1087.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  posts  in  the  line  of  ve- 
dettes ?    A.  From  four  to  six  hundred  yards. 

1088.  Q.  What  does  a  vedette-post  consist  of,  and  how  are  the 
men  posted  ?  A.  Of  two  men  placed  twenty  or  thirty  yards 
apart,  who  should  be  relieved  every  two  hours  from  the  pickets. 
They  remain  mounted;  one  man  patrols  to  the  right  or  left;  the 
other  remains  on  the  alert  at  the  post. 

1089.  Q.  What  does  a  Cossack-post  consist  of  ?  A.  A  non-com- 
missioned oflScer  and  three  men,  one  of  whom  "remains  mounted; 
the  others  are  dismounted,  but  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity, 
with  their  horses  saddled  and  bridled,  and  properly  secured. 

1090.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  the  picket,  the  support  and  reserve. 
A.  The  picket  is  posted  about  five  hundred  yards  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  line  of  vedettes,  for  which  it  furnishes  reliefs;  the 
support  is  posted  about  one  thousand  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  pickets ;  and  if  there  be  no  reserve,  about  the  same 
distance  in  advance  of  the  force  it  is  to  cover  ;  and  the  reserve 
about  fifteen  hundred  yards  in  rear  of  the  line  of  supports, 
and  about  the  same  distance  in  advance  of  the  main  body. 

MARCHES. 

1091.  Q.  What  is  the  habitual  route  march  ?  A.  In  column  of 
fours. 

1092.  Q.  How  is  it  when  the  road  is  unsuitable  for  this  forma- 
tion, or  when  the  command  is  small  ?  A.  The  column  of  twos  is 
permissible. 

1093.  Q.  What  formation  may  be  used  to  shorten  the  column  ? 
A.  The  double  column  of  fours,  or  regiments  or  brigades,  may 
be  marched  in  parallel  columns. 

1094.  Q.  On  starting  from  camp,  what  should  the  gait  be,  and 
at  what  rate  ?  A.  The  first  two  miles  should  be  at  an  easy  walk, 
at  a  less  rate  than  four  miles  an  hour. 

1095.  Q.  How  about  the  halts,  and  what  should  be  done  at  the 
end  of  each  ?  A.  A  halt  of  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  at  the  end  of 
the  first  hour,  and  five  minutes  at  the  end  of  each  hour  there- 
after. At  the  end  of  each  halt  the  horses'  feet  should  be  exam- 
ined, saddles  replaced  if  they  have  moved,  and  cinchas  tightened 
when  necessary. 

1096.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  after  the  first  hour  in  regard  to  gaits, 
rate  of  same,  etc.?  A.  The  march  should  average  five  miles  an 
hour,  alternating  the  walk  and  the  trot;  the  walk  should  be  at  the 
rate  of  four  miles,  and  the  trot  not  less  than  six  and  a  half  miles 
an  hour. 

1097.  Q.  Should  the  day's  march  be  unusually  prolonged, 
what  should  be  done  ?  A.  A  halt  of  one  hour  should  be  made, 
near  water,  if  possible,  when  about  two  thirds  of  the  distance  has 
been  covered. 


130  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIKER. 

1098.  Q.  If  the  march  should  be  continued  for  a  long  period^ 
what  rests  should  be  taken,  and  what  is  important  to  see  to  at 
these  rests  ?  A.  At  least  one  day  in  seven  should  be  devoted  to 
rest.  It  is  important  that  the  horses  and  equipments  be  in- 
spected. 

1099.  Q.  In  large  commands,  how  should  the  order  in  which 
troops  march  be  regulated?  A.  The  order  of  brigades  in  the 
division,  regiments  in  brigade,  squadrons  in  regiment,  and  troops 
in  the  squadron  should  be  changed  each  day;  the  organization  at 
the  head  of  a  unit  one  day  takes  the  rear  next  day,  and  so  on. 

1100.  Q.  How  should  marches  be  conducted  of  large  commands 
composed  of  cavalry,  horse  artillery  and  infantry  ?  A.  When  par- 
allel roads  are  available,  the  mounted  troops  should  take  separate- 
roads  from  the  foot  troops.  The  roads,  if  possible,  should  be  left 
to  the  artillery  and  trains.  The  order  of  march  should  state- 
whether  the  troops  or  trains  have  the  right  of  way.  The  position 
of  the  commanding  officer  should  be  designated  each  day,  as  at 
the  head  of  a  certain  brigade,  etc. 

1101.  Q.  Where  does  the  provost-guard  of  a  brigade  march  ?  A. 
In  rear  of  the  brigade. 

1102.  Q.  By  what  signals  should  every  duty  on  the  march,  or  in 
camp,  be  performed,  and  what  duties  are  designated  in  advance  ? 
A.  By  trumpet-calls  under  the  direction  of  the  commanding  offi- 
cer.   Reveille  and  stables  should  be  designated  in  advance. 

1103.  Q.  When  the  general  sounds,  what  should  be  done  by  one 
or  more  officers  of  each  troop  ?  A.  They  should  repair  to  their 
troop-grounds  and  superintend  the  details  of  preparation. 

1104.  Q.  In  exigencies,  how  far  can  cavalry  march  each  day  for 
from  three  to  five  days  ?    A.  Fifty  miles  in  twenty-four  hours. 

1105.  Q.  How  long  would  it  take  cavalry  to  make  a  single 
march  of  one  hundred  miles  ?  A.  It  could  be  accomplished  in 
twenty-four  to  thirty  hours. 

CAMPING. 

1106.  Q.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  with  the  usual  intervals, 
describe  the  method  of  going  into  camp.  A.  The  troops  are  dis- 
mounted, and,  without  forming  rank,  the  men  unsaddle  and 
place  their  arms  and  equipments  in  line,  ten  yards  in  front  of 
the  horses  ;  the  blankets  are  placed  over  the  equipments,  moist 
side  folded  in.  The  picket-line  of  each  troop  is  stretched  between 
posts  about  six  feet  high,  or  is  stretched  on  the  ground,  the  ends 
being  firmly  secured  ;  the  horses  are  tied  to  the  picket-line  by 
the  halter,  at  intervals  of  about  one  yard.  The  tents  of  the  men 
are  pitched  in  line,  about  fifteen  yards  in  rear  of  the  picket-line, 
the  intervals  between  troops  being  left  free;  the  tent  of  the  first 
sergeant  is  on  the  right;  the  arms  and  equipments  are  kept  in 
the  tents  of  the  men.    The  kitchen  of  each  troop  is  uear  the 


DEILL  REGULATIONS  — CAVALRY.  131 

left,  in  front  of  the  line  of  tents,  the  sinks  in  front  of  the  line 
of  kitchens.  The  tents  of  the  officers  of  each  troop  are  about 
thirty  yards  in  rear  of  the  line  of  tents,  the  captain  on  the 
right  :  the  officers'  kitchens  are  in  rear  of  their  tents.  The 
tent  of  the  commanding  officer  is  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
line  of  troop  officers  ;  if  there  be  other  field  officers  they  are  on 
his  right ;  the  adjutant  is  on  the  left  of  the  commanding  offi- 
cer; the  other  staff  officers  are  on  the  left  of  the  adjutant;  the 
kitchen  of  the  field  and  staff  are  in  rear  of  their  tents  ;  the  tents 
of  the  non-commissioned  staff  are  in  rear  of  the  staff.  The  sinks 
of  the  officers  are  in  rear  of  the  camp.  The  positions  of  the  band, 
guard-tent,  canteen,  officers'  horses,  and  baggage  and  forage 
wagons  are  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

1107.  Q.  May  the  squadron  be  encamped  in  any  other  way  ?  A. 
Yes,  in  column  of  troops. 

1108.  Q.  In  column,  where  are  the  tents  of  the  men  and  officers 
placed?  A.  The  tents  of  the  men  are  in  line,  in  rear  of  their 
horses,  about  half-way  between  them  and  the  horses  of  the  troop 
next  in  rear.  The  tents  of  the  officers  are  in  line,  parallel  to  and 
thirty  yards  from  the  flank  of  the  column  toward  which  the 
troops  are  dressed  ;  the  tents  of  the  first  sergeants  are  on  the 
flank  next  to  the  officers'  tents.  The  tents  of  the  field,  staff, 
and  non-commissioned  staff  are  arranged  as  prescribed  for  a 
squadron,  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  line  of  troop  officers' 
tents. 

1109.  Q.  Wliere  are  the  kitchens  placed  ?  A.  In  line,  on  the  flank 
opposite  the  officers. 

1110.  Q.  How  is  the  camp  of  a  regiment  arranged  ?  A.  On  the 
same  principles  as  the  camp  of  a  squadron.  The  regiment  camps 
by  squadrons;  the  tents  of  the  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel, 
and  non-commissioned  staff  are  in  line  in  rear  of  the  tents  of 
the  squadron  commanders,  near  the  centre  of  the  regiment.  It 
may  be  in  the  form  of  a  parallelogram.  The  three  squadrons 
encamp,  each  in  line,  on  one  of  the  three  sides*;  the  regimental 
headquarters  and  headquarters  of  the  camp-guard  form  the  fourth 
side.     The  picket-lines  are  stretched  inside  the  camp. 

1111.  Q.  How  should  a  camp  be  located  ?  A.  The  camp  should 
be  susceptible  of  good  drainage,  and  be  near  fuel,  water,  and 
the  road.  When  the  horses  are  subsisted  by  grazing  the  camp 
must  be  near  grass. 

Stable  Duty. 

1112.  Q.  Who  is  responsible  for  the  proper  performance  of 
stable  duty  in  a  troop  ?    A.  The  captain. 

1113.  Q.  Give  the  details  for  the  management  of  a  stable.  A. 
A  non-commissioned  officer,  designated  stable  sergeant,  or  cor- 
poral^ is  detailed  in  each  troop  to  take  immediate  general  charge 


133  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

of  tlie  forage  and  stable.  He  is  held  responsible  for  the  proper 
policing  and  sanitary  condition  of  the  stable,  picket-line,  and 
ground  pertaining  to  them.  Two  or  more  men,  called  stable 
police,  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of  policing,  removing  manure, 
feeding,  etc.,  under  the  direction  of  the  stable  sergeant. 

1114.  Q.  How  long  should  a  horse  be  groomed?  A.  Not  less 
than  twenty  minutes,  and  as  much  longer  as  may  be  necessary. 

1115.  Q.  When  the  horses  are  sufficiently  groomed,  who  reports 
the  fact,  and  what  is  the  reply  of  the  captain  or  other  officer  in 
charge  ?  A.  The  first  sergeant,  who  is  then  directed  by  the  cap- 
tain to  dismiss  the  troop,  or  he  notifies  tlie  first  sergeant  that  he 
wishes  to  inspect  the  horses. 

1116.  Q.  Give  the  commands  of  the  first  sergeant  in  each  case. 
A.  In  tlie  first  case  he  commands  :  Cease  grooming ;  Lead  in. 
In  the  second  case  he  commands :  Cease  grooming  ;  Stand  to 
heel. 

1117.  Q.  In  grooming,  how  is  the  currycomb  held  and  used  on 
a  horse  ?  A.  In  the  right  hand,  fingers  over  back  of  comb;  begin 
on  the  near  side  at  the  upper  part  of  the  neck,  thence  proceed  to 
the  chest,  arms,  shoulders,  back,  belly,  flank,  loins,  and  croup  in 
the  order  named.  Then  go  to  the  off  side,  taking  the  currycomb 
in  the  left  hand,  and  proceed  as  before.  It  is  applied  gently  and 
is  used  only  to  loosen  the  scurf  and  matted  hair. 

1118.  Q.  In  garrison,  at  what  hours  should  horses  be  fed  ?  A. 
In  the  morning  at  the  first  call  for  reveille.  Grain  is  fed  again 
at  evening  stables,  but  not  until  the  hay  has  been  distributed 
and  the  stable  swept  out  and  the  dust  thoroughly  settled. 

1119.  Q.  Give  the  daily  allowance  of  grain  and  hay  for  a  horse; 
also  straw  for  bedding  for  a  month.  A.  Twelve  pounds  of  oats, 
barley,  or  corn  ;  fourteen  pounds  of  hay.  One  hundred  pounds 
of  straw  for  bedding. 

1120.  Q.  What  is  the  weight  of  a  bushel  of  barley?  Oats? 
Corn  ?    A.  Fortjj-eight,  forty,  and  fifty-six  pounds. 


Cavalry  Horses. 

1121.  Q.  How  are  horses  assigned  when  received  at  the  regi- 
ment ?  A.  According  to  color,  under  the  direction  of  the  com- 
manding officer. 

1122.  Q.  How  are  they  branded  ?  A.  On  the  near  hip  with 
the  letter  of  the  troop,  the  number  of  the  regiment  on  the  same 
horizontal  line  ;  as  (give  an  example). 

1123.  Q.  About  what  weight  can  a  horse  carry  and  travel 
twenty-five  miles  in  a  day  of  eight  hours,  including  ordinary 
resting  stops  ?    A.  About  two  hundred  and  twenty-five  pounds. 

1124.  Q.  What  can  a  pack  animal  carry  for  the  same  dis- 
tance ?    A.  About  two  hundred  and*  forty  pounds. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  133 

1125.  Q.  Give  the  general  directions  for  shoeing  a  horse.  A. 
In  preparing  the  horse's  feet  for  the  shoe,  no  cutting  whatever 
with  the  knife  is  permitted  except  when  necessary  to  fit  the  toe- 
clip.  In  removing  surplus  growth  of  that  part  of  the  foot  which 
is  the  seat  of  the  shoe,  use  the  cutting  pincers  and  rasp.  Open- 
ing the  heels  or  making  a  cut  in  the  angle  of  the  wall  at  the  heel 
must  not  be  allowed.  Flat-footed  horses  should  be  treated  as  the 
necessity  of  each  case  may  require.  In  forging  the  shoe  to  fit 
the  foot,  be  careful  that  the  shoe  is  fitted  to  and  follows  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  foot  clear  around  to  the  heel ;  the  heels  of  the 
shoe  should  not  be  extended  back  straight  and  outside  of  the 
walls  at  the  heel  of  the  horse's  foot,  as  is  frequently  done.  Care 
must  be  used  that  the  shoe  is  not  too  small,  and  the  outer  surface 
of  the  wall  then  rasped  down  to  make  the  foot  suit  the  shoe. 
The  hot  shoe  must  never  be  applied  to  the  horse's  foot  under  any 
circumstances.  Make  the  upper  or  foot  surface  of  the  shoe  per- 
fectly flat,  so  as  to  give  a  leveV  bearing.  A  shoe  with  a  concave 
ground  surface  should  be  used. 

1126.  Q.  What  should  be  the  size  of  a  double  stall?  A.  Not 
less  than  nine  by  nine  feet. 

1127.  Q.  Of  a  single  stall  ?  A.  Should  be  at  least  five  by  nine 
feet. 

1128.  Q.  In  stable  management,  give  a  rule  for  police,  clean- 
liness, etc.,  of  a  stable.  A.  It  should  be  kept  thoroughly  po- 
liced, free  from  smells,  and,  except  portions  of  stalls  that  horses 
can  reach,  should  be  well  lime-washed.  There  must  be  no  accu- 
mulation of  manure  or  foul  litter  inside,  nor  near  the  doors  or 
windows  without.  The  feed-boxes  are  washed  from  time  to  time 
and  kept  clean.  The  ground  about  the  picket  line  is  swept  daily, 
and  all  dung,  etc. ,  carried  to  the  manure-heap. 

1129  Q.  What  is  best  for  earthen  floors  ?  A.  Clay.  Gravel 
or  sandy  earth  is  not  suitable. 

1130.  Q.  How  much  exercise  per  day  is  necessary  for  the  good 
health  and  condition  of  a  horse  ?    A.  At  least  two  hours. 

1131.  Q.  When  is  it  particularly  necessary  to  hand-rub  a 
horse's  legs  ?    A.  After  severe  exercise. 

1132.  Q.  In  the  absence  of  a  veterinary  surgeon,  who  has 
charge  of  the  sick  horses  of  a  troop  ?  A.  The  stable  sergeant, 
who  reports  daily  to  the  captain  for  instructions  as  to  their  treat- 
ment. 

1133.  Q.  What  should  be  done  to  prevent  contagion  ?  A.  An 
animal  that  shows  any  symptoms  of  glanders  must  be  isolated  at 
once,  and  confined  or  tied  up  in  some  locality  where  no  other 
animals  can  come  in  contact  with  him. 

1134.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  a  glandered  horse  ?  A. 
He  should  be  killed  as  soon  as  possible. 

1135.  Q.  Wha.t  SLTG  cathartics  f  A.  Agents  that  cause  purga- 
tion. 


134  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

1136.  Q.  Name  some  of  them.  A.  Aloes,  calomel,  epsom  salts, 
common  salt,  and  sulphur ;  croton,  linseed,  and  castor  oils  ;  in- 
jections and  mashes. 

1137.  Q.  What  are  narcotics?  A.  Agents  that  are  excitants, 
but  whose  action  is  followed  by  depression  of  energy — camphor, 
henbane,  belladonna,  opium. 

1138.  Q.  What  are  stimulants  ?  A.  Agents  that  act  upon  the 
glands  generally:  Calomel,  oxide  of  mercury,  iodine,  and  its 
compounds. 

1139.  Q.  What  SLve  astringents  ?  A.  Agents  that  cause  con- 
traction of  muscular  fibre :  Alum,  catechu,  oak  bark,  tannic  acid. 

1140.  Q.  Among  the  medicines  externally  administered,  what 
are  refrigerants  ?  and  name  some.  A.  Agents  that  diminish  mor- 
bid heat  of  a  part :  Salt  and  cold  water,  solutions  of  acetate,  and 
subacetate  of  lead. 

1141.  Q.  What  are  vesicants?  A.  Agents  that  produce  blis- 
ters :  Cantharides,  tartar  emetic,  cl-oton  oil,  hot  water. 

1142.  Q.  yfhsit  SiVQ  pyogenics  ?  A.  Agents  that  induce  suppu- 
ration of  wounds :  Liniment  and  ointment  of  turpentine,  black 
hellebore. 

1143.  Q.  What  are  traumatics  f  A.  Agents  that  excite  heal- 
ing in  wounds :  Aloes,  myrrh,  collodion,  oil  of  tar,  resin,  solu- 
tions of  sulphate  of  copper  and  zinc. 

Packing. 

1144.  Q.  Describe  the  most  suitable  animals  for  packing.  A. 
Active,  short-coupled,  short-legged,  "blocky"  mules,  weighing 
from  eight  hundred  to  one  thousand  pounds,  are  considered  the 
best  for  pack  animals. 

1145.  Q.  How  many  packers  should  there  be  with  fifty  packs  ? 
A.  Twelve. 

1146.  Q.  What  does  the  pack-saddle  consist  of?  A.  The 
saddle  proper ;  two  pads ;  crupper;  corona;  manta,  or  pack- 
cover  ;  two  pieces  of  canvas,  each  84  inches  by  22  inches,  stitched 
together  on  the  long  edges  ;  halter  and  strap ;  canvas  cincha, 
ten  inches  wide  ;  sling-rope^  one-half  inch  best  hand-laid  man  ilia 
whale-line,  twenty  to  thirty-two  feet  long;  and  leather  cincha^ 
with  lash-rope  five-eighth  inch  whale-line  forty-two  feet  long. 

1147.  Q.  What  does  a  "  full-rigged "  saddle  have?  A.  mng- 
straps  and  cargo-dncha  in  place  of  the  sling  and  lash-ropes. 

1148.  Q.  Describe  how  the  rations  should  be  packed  for  load- 
ing. A.  In  one  hundred  pound  packs,  lashed  solidly,  each  pack 
being  plainly  marked  with  its  weight  and  contents.  Salt,  sugar, 
coffee,  and  beans  are  double  sacked  and  lashed  in  one  hundred 
pound  packages.  Bacon,  in  one  hundred  pound  packages,  is 
packed  in  from  five  to  eight  pounds  of  clean  straw  or  hay,  double 
sacked,  and  lashed  firmly.     The  yeast-powder  cases  should  be 


DRILL  REGULATIOKS— CAVALRY.  135 

opened,  and  hay  or  straw  stuffed  closely  around  the  boxes  to  pre- 
vent shaking. 

1149.  Q.  How  many  packs  in  each  cargo,  and  weight  of  same  ? 
A.  Two  side-packs  of  about  one  hundred  to  one  hundred  and 
twenty-five  pounds  each,  and  should  match  in  size,  shape,  and 
weight  as  nearly  as  possible. 

1150.  How  should  ammunition  be  carried?  A.  In  cargoes  by 
itself. 

1151.  Q.  How  should  packers  work  (what  number  together)  ? 
How  designated?  Give  their  positions.  A.  By  threes,  desig- 
nated Nos.  1,  2,  and  3.  No.  1  is  on  the  near  side,  No.  3  on  the  off 
side  of  the  mule  ;  when  No.  3  works  with  No.  1,  he  is  nearest  the 
croup  ;  when  with  No.  2,  he  is  opposite  the  mule's  shoulders. 

1152.  Q.  Describe  the  placing  of  the  mule  for  packing.  A. 
The  mule  is  placed  near  to,  and  with  its  left  side  next  to  the 
cargo  by  No.  2,  who  then  puts  on  the  blind. 

1153.  Q.  Describe  in  detail  the  loading  of  the  cargo  as  far  as 
and  including  Settle.  A.  No.  1,  on  the  near  side,  passes  the  centre 
of  the  sling-rope  over  the  saddle  to  the  off  side  far  enough  to 
allow  the  rope  to  pass  over  the  off-side  pack  and  come  back  with- 
in his  reach,  the  parts  of  the  rope  separated  by  six  to  twelve 
inches.  Nos.  2  and  3  take  the  off-side  pack,  place  it  well  up  on 
the  saddle  ;  No.  2  grasps  the  loop  of  the  sling-rope  with  his  right 
hand,  brings  the  rope  up  against  the  pack  and  lets  the  loops  drop 
over  his  right  shoulder,  in  readiness  to  pass  it  over  the  pack ; 
No.  2  holds  the  pack  in  place.  No.  3  passes  to  the  near  side;  and 
with  No.  1  takes  the  near  side-pack  and  places  it,  flat  side  next 
the  mule,  well  up  on  the  saddle,  lapping  the  upper  edge  well  over 
the  upper  edge  of  the  off-side  pack.  No.  1,  with  his  back  to  the 
mule's  shoulder,  takes  the  end  of  the  front  part  of  the  sling-rope, 
passes  it  from  the  outside  through  the  loop,  and  pulls  it  down 
with  the  right  hand  ;  he  now  grasps  the  rear  end  of  the  sling-rope 
with  the  left  hand,  and  ties  the  ends  together  in  a  square  bow- 
knot,  the  packs  high  up.  No.  1  calls  out:  Settle ;  No.  1  and  No. 
2  each  grasps  his  side  of  the  cargo  by  the  lower  corners,  lifts  up- 
ward and  outward,  settling  the  upper  edges  well  together  and 
balancing  the  load. 

1154.  Q.  How  many  men  are  necessary  to  unload  a  cargo  ?  A. 
Two,  Nos.  1  and  2. 

1155.  Q.  What  should  be  done  before  taking  the  saddles  off 
the  mules?  A.  Cinchas  should  be  slackened  and  the  mules 
allowed  to  cool. 

ADDITIONAL  FOR  FIRST  LIEUTENANTS  OF   CAVALRY. 
Evolutions  of  the  Regiment. 

1156.  Q.  How  are  the  squadrons  designated  ?  A.  In  whatever 
direction  the  regiment  faces,  the  squadrons  are  designated  from 


136  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINEIU 

the  right  in  line  and  from  the  head  in  column,  first  squadron, 
second  squadron,  and  third  squadron. 

1157.  Q.  How  are  the  troops  designated  by  the  colonel  ?  A. 
As  first  (or  such)  troop,  first  (or  such)  squadron,  etc. 

1158.  Q.  If  the  regiment  is  in  two  lines,  how  are  the  squad- 
rons designated  ?  A.  From  the  right  in  the  first  line,  fi7'st  and 
seco7id  ;  in  the  second  line,  third. 

1159.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  colonel  in  the  various  forma- 
tions. A.  In  line,  and  in  line  of  columns,  he  takes  post  sixty 
yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  regiment ;  in  line  of  masses, 
thirty  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  regiment.  In  column, 
sixty  yards,  and  in  column  of  masses,  thirty  yards  from  the  cen- 
tre of  the  column,  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

1160.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  band.  A.  In  line,  the  left 
of  its  front  rank  is  sixteen  yards  to  the  right  and  in  line  with  the 
rank  of  the  first  squadron.  In  column,  it  is  sixteen  yards  in 
front  of  the  officers  of  the  leading  subdivision. 

1161.  Q.  Where  is  the  guard  of  the  standard  posted  ?  A.  As 
the  left  four  of  the  centre  or  right  centre  troop  of  the  centre 
squadron,  or  of  a  single  squadron  ;  if  there  be  but  two  squad- 
rons, it  is  posted  as  the  left  four  of  the  left  troop  of  the  first 
squadron. 

1162.  Q.  Where  is  the  position  of  the  colonel  and  staff  in  route 
marches?  A.  At  the  head  of  the  column  accompanied  by  the 
staff,  except  the  surgeons  and  quartermaster,  and  by  the  non- 
commissioned staff,  regimental  non-commissioned  officers,  and 
orderlies.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  surgeons  are  in  rear  of 
the  column,  or  as  the  colonel  may  direct.  The  quartermaster 
and  quartermaster  sergeant  are  with  the  train. 

1163.  Q.  How  may  the  regiment  be  formed  ?  A.  In  line,  in 
line  of  platoon  columns,  or  in  line  of  masses,  in  separate  lines, 
or  in  echelon  in  any  combination  of  the  above  formations. 

1164.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  squadrons  in  line  ?  A. 
Sixteen  yards. 

1165.  Q.  Being  at  a  halt  to  march  in  line,  give  the  commands 
of  the  colonel.  A.  1.  Forward ;  2.  Second  (or  such)  the  base 
squadron ;  3.  March. 

1166.  Q.  In  this  movement,  what  are  the  commands  of  the 
'majors?    A.  The  major  of  the  designated  squadron  commands, 

Guide  centre  ;  majors  of  squadrons  on  its  right  command,  Guide 
left ;  majors  of  squadrons  on  its  left  command.  Guide  right. 

1167.  Q.  If  the  colonel  wishes  to  wheel  the  line  about  by  fours 
and  halt,  what  are  his  and  the  majors'  commands  ?  A.  The  colo- 
nel's commands  are  :  1.  Face  to  the  rear  ;  2.  Fours  right  (or  left) 
about ;  3.  March.  Each  major  halts  his  squadron  as  the  fours 
unite  in  line. 

1168.  Q.  In  successive  formations  of  the  regiment,  what  is 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.         137 

the  rule  upon  the  completion  of  a  movement  ?    A.  It  should  find 
the  regiment  halted. 

1169.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  distance  between  squadrons  in 
two  or  more  lines  or  in  column  of  squadrons?  A.  Squadron 
front  and  seventeen  yards. 

1170.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  squadrons  in  column  of 
fours  ?    A.  Seventeen  yards. 

1171.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands  of  the  colo- 
nel to  form  in  two  lines  to  the  rights  and  describe  the  movement. 
A.  1.  In  two  lines  ;  2.  Fours  right ;  3.  Third  squadron,  second 
line  ;  4.  March.  The  first  and  second  squadrons  form  line  to  the 
right  and  halt.  The  third  squadron  inclines  to  the  left  until  it 
gains  the  required  distance,  when  it  resumes  the  original  direc- 
tion, and  is  formed  in  line  to  the  right  and  halted  with  its  centre 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  first  line. 

1172.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  form  on  right  into  line  by  squadrons,  and  explain 
movement.  A.  1.  On  right  into  line  by  squadrons  ;  2.  March. 
The  first  squadron  is  wheeled  by  fours  to  the  right  and  is  halted 
after  advancing  thirty  yards  ;  each  of  the  other  squadrons 
marches  beyond  the  one  preceding,  is  wheeled  by  fours  to  the 
right  at  its  proper  interval,  and  is  halted  on  the  line. 

1173.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands  of  the  colo- 
nel to  form  right  front  into  line  in  two  lines,  and  explain  move- 
ment. A.  1.  In  two  lines ;  2.  Right  front  into  line  ;  3.  Third 
squadron,  second  line  ;  4.  March.  The  first  and  second  squad- 
rons execute  right  front  into  line.  The  third  squadron  inclines 
to  the  right,  and  forms  right  front  into  line  in  rear  of  the  first 
line. 

1174.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  form  line  by  two  movements — the  column  having  partly 
changed  direction  to  the  right,  and  he  wishes  to  form  line  to  the 
left — and  explain.  A.  1.  Fours  left ;  2.  Rear  squadrons,  left 
front  into  line ;  3.  March.  The  squadron  that  has  changed  di- 
rection to  the  right  forms  line  to  the  left  and  halts  ;  the  squad- 
rons in  rear  execute  left  front  into  line,  the  leading  fours  advanc- 
ing only  so  far  as  to  be  in  line  with  the  squadron  that  formed 
line  to  the  left. 

1175.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  commands  of  the  colonel  to  ploy 
in  column  of  masses  on  the  first  troop  of  the  first  squadron,  and 
explain.  A.  1.  Column  of  masses  ;  2.  On  first  troop,  first  squad- 
ron ;  3,  March.  The  first  squadron  ploys  into  close  column  on 
its  first  troop  ;  the  other  squadrons  wheel  by  fours  to  the  right. 
Incline  to  the  right,  and  each  marches  so  that  its  leading  troop 
may  enter  the  column  at  troop  distance  and  fifteen  yards  in  rear 
of  the  rear  troop  of  the  preceding  squadron.  The  second  squad- 
ron ploys  faced  to  the  left  in  rear  of  the  first,  and  the  third  ploys 
in  rear  of  the  second  ;  the  left  guides  cover. 


138  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

1176.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  masses,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  change  direction  by  the  right  flank,  and  explain  move- 
ment. A.  1.  Change  direction  by  the  right  flank ;  3.  March. 
The  first  squadron  changes  direction  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  squadron  ;  each  of  the  others  wheels  by  fours  to  the  right, 
is  marched  with  the  guide  to  the  left,  by  two  partial  changes  of 
direction  to  the  left,  to  its  position  in  the  new  column,  and  is 
then  wheeled  by  fours  to  the  left  and  halted. 

1177.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  masses,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  deploy  to  the  right  and  left,  and  explain  movement. 
A.  1.  Deploy  column  ;  2.  Fours  right  and  left  (or  left  and  right); 
3.  March.  The  first  squadron  deploys  to  the  right ;  the  second 
and  third  deploy  on  the  line,  the  second  to  the  left  of  the  first, 
and  the  third  to  the  left  of  the  second. 

1178.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  masses,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  deplog  in  three  lines.  A.  1.  Squadrons ;  2.  Deploy 
column  ;  3.  Fours  right  (or  left);  4.  March. 

1179.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  masses,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  march  to  the  right  in  line  of  squadrons  in  columns 
of  fours.  A.  1.  Squadrons ;  2.  Columns  of  fours ;  3.  First 
troop ;  4.  Fours  right ;  5.  March ;  6.  First  (or  such)  the  base 
squadron. 

1180.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  commands  of  the  colonel  to  ploy 
into  column  of  squadrons  on  second  squadron,  and  explain.  A. 
1.  Column  of  squadrons ;  2.  On  second  squadron ;  3.  Fours  left 
and  right ;  4.  March.  The  second  squadron  stands  fast ;  the 
first  squadron  executes  fours  left  and  forms  line  to  the  right  in 
rear  of  the  second  ;  the  third  executes  fours  right  and  forms  line 
to  the  left  in  rear  of  the  first ;  the  right  flanks  cover. 

1181.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  squadrons  in  line  of 
masses,  and  what  are  the  posts  of  the  majors  ?  A.  Forty-eight 
yards  ;  each  major  takes  post  twenty  yards  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  his  first  troop. 

1182.  Q.  Being  in  line,  give  commands  of  the  colonel  to  form 
line  of  masses,  and  explain.  A.  1.  Line  of  masses ;  2.  On  first 
troop,  first  squadron  ;  3.  March.  The  first  squadron  ploys  into 
close  column  on  its  first  troop  ;  the  second  squadron  moves  by  the 
right  flank  and  ploys  into  close  column  faced  to  the  left  so  as  to 
have  forty-eight  yards'  interval  from  the  left  flank  of  the  first ;  in 
the  same  manner  the  third  ploys  on  the  left  of  the  second. 

1183.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  give  commands  of  the 
colonel  to  form  on  right  into  line  of  masses,  and  explain  the 
movement.  A.  1.  On  right  into  line  of  masses  ;  2.  March.  The 
major  of  the  first  squadron  commands :  1.  Column  right  ;  2. 
March  ;  and  his  first  troop  having  advanced  sixty  yards  in  the 
new  direction,  he  commands  :  1.  Close  column  ;  2.  First  troop ; 
3.  Column  left ;  4.  March.  Each  of  the  other  squadrons  passes 
in  rear  of  and  beyond  the  one  preceding,  and  executes  the  same 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.         139 

movement  as  explained  for  the  first,  so  as  to  have  the  interval  of 
forty-eight  yards  from  the  squadron  on  its  right. 

EXTENDED  ORDER. 

1184.  Q.  What  are  the  principles  for  movements  in  extended 
order  and  to  fight  on  foot  ?    A.  The  same  as  for  the  squadron. 

1185.  Q.  Supposing  the  deployment  to  be  from  line,  what  is 
the  colonel's  action  ?  A.  He  designates  the  troop  and  squadron 
on  which  the  deployment  is  to  be  executed  ;  the  designated  de- 
ploys as  directed ;  each  of  the  other  squadrons  is  marched  by 
the  flank  until  opposite  its  place  in  the  line,  wiien  it  is  deployed 
on  the  troop  nearest  the  designated  squadron. 

1186.  Q.  How  if  the  deployment  be  from  column?  A.  The 
leading  squadron  deploys  ;  each  of  the  others  is  conducted  oppo- 
site its  place  on  the  line  and  is  then  deployed  to  its  right  or  left 
front. 

THE  REGIMENT  IN  BRIGADE. 

1187.  Q.  In  battle,  how  is  the  regiment  dismounted  usually 
formed  ?  A.  In  two  lines ;  two  squadrons  formed  for  dis- 
mounted action  constitute  the  fighting  line. 

1188.  Q.  What  is  the  third  squadron,  and  where  is  it  posted? 
A.  It  is  the  regimental  reserve,  and  is  posted  about  600  yards  in 
rear  of  the  firing  line. 

1189.  Q.  Give  the  position  of  the  colonel.  A.  Near  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  the  squadron  reserves  of  the  first  line ;  if  called 
elsewhere,  he  indicates  his  position. 

1190.  Q.  Explain  the  duty  of  the  reserve  squadron.  A.  It  re- 
inforces the  fighting  line  as  circumstances  require.  If  the  firing 
line  be  driven  back,  the  reserve  squadron  is  formed  in  a  selected 
position  to  check  the  enemy  and  to  enable  the  firing  line  to  re- 
form. 

1191.  Q.  When  should  the  entire  regimental  reserve  be  ordered 
on  the  firing  line?  A.  At  the  time  for  assault;  and  its  arrival 
should  be  the  signal  for  the  advance.  It  should  then  be  replaced 
by  a  squadron  from  the  brigade  reserve. 


FOR  CAPTAINS, 
(lo  addition  to  what  is  prescribed  for  First  Lieutenants.) 

The  Brigade. 

1192.  Q.  How  many  regiments  are  there  in  a  brigade?    A. 
Three  ;  but  there  can  be  more  or  a  less  number  in  one. 

1193.  Q.  How  are  the  regiments  designated  in  line,  also  in  col- 
umn?   A.  Right,  centre,  and  left;  or,  if  one  be  in  rear,  right, 


140  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

left,  and  rear;  in  column  they  are  designated  leading,  centre, 
and  rear. 

1194.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  regiments,  and  what 
additional  interval  is  allowed  for  a  battery  ?  A.  Sixty- four  yards  ; 
an  additional  interval  of  one  hundred  yards  between  regiments 
or  squadrons  should  be  allowed  for  the  battery. 

1195.  Q.  Give  the  post  of  the  general  in  line  and  in  column. 
A.  In  line,  one  hundred  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  bri- 
gade ;  in  column,  at  the  head  of  the  brigade. 

1196.  Q.  Who  is  the  general  attended  by  ?  Give  their  posts, 
also  of  other  staff  officers.  A.  He  is  attended  by  his  adjutant 
general,  riding  on  his  left,  and  his  aides,  six  yards  in  rear.  The 
remaining  officers  of  his  staff  ride  on  the  left  or  in  rear  of  the 
aides,  according  as  they  form  one  or  more  ranks,  the  senior  on 
the  right. 

1197.  Q.  Where  must  the  flag  be  carried  and  orderlies  ride? 
A.  Three  yards  in  rear  of  the  staff. 

1198.  Q.  What  should  the  drill  exercises  be  limited  to  ?  A.  To 
movements  used  in  campaign. 

1199.  Q.  What  part  of  the  drill  regulations  are  applicable  to 
the  brigade  ?    A.  Evolutions  of  the  regiment. 

1200.  Q.  What  points  should  the  orders  of  a  general  to  a  regi- 
mental or  battery  commander  cover  ?  A.  First.  The  manoeuvre 
to  be  executed  by  the  brigade.  Second.  The  particular  formation 
the  regiment  is  to  take  ;  as,  in  two  lines,  line  of  masses,  etc. 
When  the  formation  is  not  specified,  the  regiment  forms  in  line. 
Third.  When  forming  the  brigade  in  two  or  more  lines  by  regi- 
ment, the  order  should  state  the  number  of  lines,  the  distance 
between  the  lines,  the  line  in  which  the  regiment  is  to  form,  and 
its  point  of  rest.  Fourth.  Whether  the  right  or  left  of  the  regi- 
ment is  to  connect  with  the  left  or  right  of  another  regiment  that 
precedes  it  on  the  line.  Fifth.  Whether  the  battery  is  to  be  on 
the  right  or  left  of  the  regiment.  Sixth.  Whether  the  right  or 
left  flank  of  the  regiment  will  be  exposed. 

1201.  Q.  How  is  the  point  of  rest  indicated  ?  A.  When  neces- 
sary by  staff  officers. 

1202.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  what  are  the  general's  or- 
ders to  iovTO.  front  into  line  f  A.  To  each  colonel :  The  brigade 
to  form  front  into  line;  to  the  leading  regiment  :  Foi^m  right 
front  into  line;  to  the  centre  regiment :  Form  left  front  into 
line,  your  right,  with  interval  for  battery,  connecting  with  left 
of  leading  regiment ;  to  the  rear  regiment :  Form  right  front 
into  line,  your  left  connecting  with  right  of  leading  regime^it, 
your  right  flank  exposed  ;  to  the  battery  :  Take  position  on  left 
of  (such)  regiment. 

1203.  Q.  Explain  the  action  of  the  colonels  and  battery  com- 
mander in  carrying  out  the  foregoing  orders  of  the  general.  A. 
The  colonel  of  the  leading  regiment  forms  it  right  front  into  line  ; 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — CAVALRY.  141 

the  colonelof  the  centre  regiment  marches  it  forward  to  the  line, 
to  the  left  of  the  leading  regiment,  so  as  to  have  an  interval  of 
one  hundred  and  sixty-four  yards,  and  forms  it  left  front  into 
line  ;  the  colonel  of  the  rear  regiment  marches  it  forward  to  the 
line,  to  the  right  of  the  leading  regiment,  and  forms  it  right 
front  into  line  ;  the  captain  of  the  battery  marches  it  to  its  posi- 
tion to  the  left  of  the  leading  regiment. 

1304.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  what  orders  are  given  by 
the  general  to  form  line  to  the  right,  and  what  are  the  commands 
of  the  colonels  ?  A.  The  general  sends  order :  Form  line  to  the 
right.  The  colonels  command :  1.  Fours  right ;  3.  March ;  3. 
Squadrons ;  4.'  Halt. 

1305.  Q.  How  are  changes  of  front  usually  executed  ?  A.  By 
forming  in  column  of  fours  and  then  forming  front  into  line. 

• 
The  Division. 

1306.  Q.  What  does  the  division  consist  of,  and  by  whom  com- 
manded ?  A.  Three  brigades  of  cavalry  and  two  or  more  bat- 
teries of  horse  artillery ;  it  is  commanded  by  a  major-general. 

1307.  Q.  Give  the  post  of  the  division  commander  in  line  and 
in  column.  A.  In  line,  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  division  ;  in  column,  at  the  head  of  the  division. 

1308.  Q.  How  are  the  brigades  designated,  and  how  are  they 
posted  ?  A.  In  line,  right,  centre,  and  left;  or  if  one  be  in  rear, 
right,  left,  and  rear;  in  column,  leading,  ceritre,  audi  rear.  Un- 
less otherwise  directed,  the  brigades  are  posted  according  to  the 
rank  of  brigade  commanders,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  post- 
ing regiments  in  the  brigade. 

1309.  Q.  What  principles  apply  for  the  evolutions  of  the 
division  ?    A.  The  same  as  for  a  brigade. 

1310.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  brigades  ?  A.  Ninety- 
six  yards,  which  is  increased  whenever  necessary  for  artillery. 

The  Corps. 

1311.  Q.  What  does  a  corps  consist  of,  and  what  principles  ap- 
ply for  the  evolutions  of  the  same  or  a  large  command  ?  A.  Three 
divisions  of  cavalry.  The  principles  prescribed  for  the  evolutions 
of  the  division. 

Ceremonies, 
general  rules. 

1312.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  the  arrangement  of 
troops,  except  funeral  escorts,  on  occasions  of  ceremony  ?  A. 
First,  infantry  ;  second,  light  artillery;  third,  cavalry.     Artillery 


142  THE   ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINEE. 

serving  as  infantry  is  posted  as  infantry;  dismounted  cavalry 
and  marines  are  on  the  left  of  the  infantry;  engineer  troops  are 
on  the  right  of  the  command  to  which  they  are  attached. 

1213.  Q.  In  rendering  honors,  at  the  command  Present  arms^ 
how  is  the  command  executed  by  cavalry  armed  with  the  car- 
bine, or  carbine  and  pistol  only  ?  A.  By  executing  advance  car- 
bine. . 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  REVIEWS. 

1214.  Q.  How  are  the  points  marked ;  in  what  manner,  and 
by  whom,  for  changes  of  direction  ?  A.  By  men  or  otherwise  ; 
in  such  manner  that  the  right  flank  of  the  column  in  passing 
shall  be  about  ten  yards  from  the  reviewing  olficer  ;  by  the  adju- 
tant or  adjutant-general. 

1215.  Q.  How  is  the  post  of  the  reviewing  oflBcer  marked,  and 
when  should  he  be  there  ?  A.  By  a  flag  opposite  the  centre  of 
the  line  ;  the  reviewing  officer  should  be  there  before  the  head  of 
the  column  reaches  that  point ;  before  that  time  he  may  take  any 
position  to  observe  the  movements  of  the  troops. 

1216.  Q.  How,  and  by  whom,  is  the  standard  saluted  in  pass- 
ing the  reviewing  officer  ?  A.  By  uncovering  ;  by  the  reviewing 
officer,  his  staff,  and  others  accompanying  him.  This  is  done 
whether  the  standard  salutes  or  not. 

1217.  Q.  Whom  in  the  column  does  the  reviewing  officer  salute  ? 
A.  He  salutes  (returns  the  salute  of)  commanders  of  squadrons, 
batteries,  and  battalions,  and  all  higher  units. 

1218.  Q.  Give  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer's  staff  at  re- 
views. A.  Six  yards  in  rear  of  him,  in  the  following  order  from 
right  to  left :  chief  of  staff,  adjutant-general,  aides,  then  the 
other  members  of  the  staff  in  the  order  of  rank,  the  senior  on 
the  right ;  his  flag  and  orderlies  place  themselves  three  yards  in 
rear  of  the  staff,  the  flag  on  the  right. 

1219.  Q.  At  what  time  do  commanders  of  brigades  and  divis- 
ions take  their  places  in  column  ?  A.  In  time  to  allow  the  com- 
manders in  front  of  them  to  take  their  places  when  at  one  hun- 
dred yards  from  the  reviewing  officer. 

1230.  Q.  Who  repeat  the  commands  of  the  brigade  command- 
ers ?    A.  The  colonels. 

1221.  Q.  When  the  colonel  faces  the  line  to  give  commands, 
what  is  the  rule  for  the  majors  ?  A.  They  face  at  the  same  time  ; 
they  repeat  the  commands,  which  are  then  executed ;  they  re- 
sume their  front  after  seeing  the  movements  executed. 

1222.  Q.  When  the  command  is  Present  sabre ^  repeated  by  the 
majors,  when  does  the  colonel's  staff  salute,  and  when  do  the 
colonel  and  majors  salute  ?  A.  At  the  command  of  the  colonel. 
After  resuming  their  front. 

1223.  Q.  In  line,  at  the  command,  Prepare  for  review^  marcJi^ 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— CAVALRY.  143 

where  does  the  standard-bearer  take  post  ?    A.  In  front  of  his 
position,  on  the  line  of  troop  officers. 

1224.  Q.  When  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles  him 
to  the  honor,  when  does  the  standard  salute  ?  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Present  arms,  repeated  by  the  major  of  the  squadron  with 
which  it  is  posted,  and  again  in  passing  in  review,  when  it  is  six 
yards  from  the  reviewing  officer  ;  the  standard  is  raised  when 
it  has  passed  six  yards  beyond  the  reviewing  officer. 

ESCORT  OF  HONOR. 

1225.  Q.  For  what  purpose  are  escorts  of  honor  detailed  ?  A. 
For  the  purpose  of  receiving  and  escorting  personages  of  high 
rank,  civil  or  military. 

1226.  Q.  How  are  troops  selected  for  escorts?  A.  For  their 
soldierly  appearance  and  superior  discipline. 

1227.  Q.  Describe  the  manner  of  receiving,  escorting,  etc.,  in 
detail,  the  person  to  be  escorted.  A.  The  escort  forms  in  line, 
opposite  the  place  where  the  personage  presents  himself,  the  band 
on  the  flank  of  the  escort  toward  which  it  will  march.  On  the 
appearance  of  the  personage,  he  is  received  with  the  honors  due 
to  his  rank.  The  escort  is  formed  into  column  of  troops,  pla- 
toons, or  fours,  and  takes  up  the  march,  the  personage  and  his 
staff  or  retinue  taking  position  in  rear  of  the  column.  On  leav- 
ing the  escort,  line  is  formed,  and  the  same  honors  are  paid  as 
before.  When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable  dis- 
tance from  the  point  where  the  person  is  to  be  received,  as,  for 
instance,  where  a  court-yard  or  wharf  intervenes,  a  double  line 
of  sentinels  is  posted  from  that  point  to  the  escort,  facing  in- 
ward ;  the  sentinels  successively  salute  as  he  passes,  and  are 
then  relieved  and  join  the  escort.  An  officer  is  appointed  to  at- 
tend him,  to  bear  such  communications  as  he  may  have  to  make 
to  the  commander  of  the  escort. 

FUNERAL  ESCORTS,   DISMOUNTED. 

1228.  Q.  To  receive  the  coffin,  how  is  the  escort  formed,  and 
what  is  done  on  its  appearance  ?  A.  The  commander  commands  : 
1.  Carry;  2.  Arms  ;  3.  Present ;  4.  Arms.  The  band  plays  appro- 
priate music  ;  arms  are  then  carried,  after  which  the  coffin  is 
taken  to  the  flank  of  the  escort  opposite  the  band. 

1229.  Q.  How  is  the  escort  formed  ?  A.  In  column  of  troops, 
platoons,  or  fours.  If  the  escort  be  small,  it  may  be  marched  in 
line. 

1230.  Q.  Give  the  order  of  the  procession.  A.  1.  Music  ;  2. 
Escort ;  3.  Clergy;  4.  Coffin  and  pall  bearers ;  5.  Mourners  ;  6. 
Members  of  the  former  command  of  the  deceased  ;  7.  Other 
cers  and  enlisted  men  ;  8.  Distinguished  persons  ;  9.  Dele- 


144  THE  AEMY   OFFICEE^S   EXAMINER. 

10.  Societies;  11.  Civilians.     Nos.  6  and  7  are  with  side  arms, 
in  the  order  of  rank,  seniors  in  front. 

1231.  Q.  At  the  funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  enlisted  man, 
what  follows  the  hearse?  A.  The  horse  of  the  deceased,  in 
mourning  caparison. 

1232.  Q.  The  escort  being  in  march,  how  are  the  arms  carried  ? 
A.  At  the  right  shoulder. 

1233.  Q.  On  reaching  the  grave,  describe  what  follows.  A. 
Line  is  formed  facing  the  grave.  The  coffin  is  then  carried  along 
the  front  of  the  escort  to  the  grave,  arms  are  presented,  and  the 
band  plays  appropriate  music  ;  the  coffin  having  been  placed  over 
the  grave,  the  music  ceases  and  arms  are  brought  to  the  order. 
The  commander  next  commands  :  1.  Parade  ;  2.  Eest.  The  es- 
cort executes  parade  rest,  officers  and  men  inclining  the  head  to 
the  front.  After  the  funeral  services,  and  the  coffin  is  lowered  in 
the  grave,  the  commander  of  the  escort  causes  the  escort  to  re- 
sume attention  and  fire  three  rounds  of  blank  cartridges.  A 
trumpeter  then,  at  the  head  of  the  grave,  sounds  taps.  The  es- 
cort is  then  formed  into  column,  marched  in  quick  time  to  its 
place  of  assembly,  and  dismissed. 

FUNERAL  ESCORTS,    MOUNTED. 

1234.  Q.  How  are  the  ceremonies  conducted  ?  A.  According 
to  the  principles  prescribed  when  dismounted,  except  that  while 
mounted  the  sabre  is  drawn,  and  honors  are  rendered  by  present- 
ing sabre.  When  the  cavalry  are  to  fire  the  salute  over  the  grave 
it  is  dismounted,  as  prescribed  to  fight  on  foot,  assembled,  and 
marched  to  the  grave,  where  the  ceremonies  are  completed  as 
prescribed  when  dismounted. 


PART  VI. 

DRILL— LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 


Text-book— 27.  S.  Drill  Regulations. 


For  Second  Lieutenants  of  Artillery— Nos.  1235-1584. 
For  First  Lieutenants  of  Artillery— Nos.  1235-1693. 
For  Captains  of  Artillery— Nos.  1235-1693. 


PAET  VI. 
DRILL  REaULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY, 


General  Principles. 

1235.  Q.  How  are  the  commands  for  the  instructor  given,  and 
how  are  the  movements  in  the  drill  regulations  explained  ? 
A.  The  commands  are  given  for  the  execution  of  the  movements 
toward  both  the  right  and  left  flanks  ;  but  the  movements  are 
explained  toward  one  flank  only,  it  being  only  necessary  to  sub- 
stitute "left"  for  "right,"  or  the  reverse,  for  a  corresponding 
movement  on  the  other  flank. 

1236.  Q.  How  may  all  movements  be  executed  that  are  not 
prescribed  from  a  halt  or  on  the  march  ?  A.  Either  at  a  halt  or 
marching. 

1237.  Q.  By  what  means  may  movements  on  foot  in  double 
time  be  executed  ?  A.  All  those  not  specially  excepted  may  be 
executed  in  double  time,  the  command  double  time  preceding  the 
command  march;  if  marching  in  double  time,  the  command 
double  time  is  omitted. 

1238.  Q.  By  what  means  may  all  mounted  movements  be  exe- 
cuted at  a  trot  or  gallop  ?  A.  All  those  not  specially  excepted 
may  be  executed  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  the  commands  trot  or  gallop 
preceding  the  command  march;  if  marching  at  a  trot  or  gallop, 
the  command  trot  or  gallop  is  omitted. 

1239.  Q.  How  should  the  gait  be  increased  in  mounted  move- 
ments ?  A.  Progressively,  the  trot  being  executed  from  a  walk, 
and  the  gallop  from  a  trot ;  if  at  a  gallop,  the  trot  will  be  executed 
before  the  walk  is  resumed. 

1240.  Q.  What  determines  the  execution  of  commands  when 
movements  are  separated  into  motions  for  purposes  of  instruc- 
tion? A.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  determines  the 
prompt  performance  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  commands  two, 
three,  etc.,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

1241.  Q.  By  what  commands  are  movements  executed  in  detail  ? 
A.  The  instructor  first  commands,  By  the  tiumbers,  and  all  move- 

147. 


148  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

inenls  divided  into  iiiotions  are  then  executed  until  he  commands, 
Witnout  the  jucuibers. 

Commands. 

1242.  Q.  Describe  the  number  and  kinds  of  commands  for  the 
execution  of  movements.  A.  There  are  two  kinds  :  the  prepara- 
tory^ which  indicates  the  movement  that  is  to  be  executed  ;  and 
the  command  of  execution^  which  causes  the  movement  to 
commence. 

1243.  Q,  How  should  commands  be  given?  A.  The  tone 
should  be  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to 
the  number  of  men  under  instruction.  Each  preparatory  com- 
mand is  pronounced  in  an  ascending  tone  of  voice,  but  in  such 
manner  that  the  command  of  execution  may  be  more  energetic 
and  elevated. 

1244.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  the  commands  given  on  foot 
and  while  mounted  vary  ?  A.  On  foot  the  command  of  execution 
should  be  pronounced  in  a  tone  firm  and  brief.  In  mounted 
movements  the  preparatory  commands  are  more  or  less  prolonged 
to  insure  their  being  heard  ;  the  command  of  execution  should  be 
always  prolonged. 

School  of  the  Soldier,  Dismounted. 

{For  questions  in  this  school^  any  f7'om  717  to  727  and  from 
753  to  786). 

School  of  the  Cannoneer. 

1245.  Q.  What  are  cannoneers?  A.  Men  assigned  to  the 
service  of  the  guns. 

1246.  Q.  What  constitutes  a  gun  detachment?  A.  The  can- 
noneers belonging  to  a  single  gun  formed  in  double  rank. 

1247.  Q.  How  many  men  compose  a  gun  detachment  for  a  3.2- 
ineh  gun,  and  how  is  the  detachment  formed  ?  A.  Two  corporals 
and  five  privates,  formed  in  double  rank,  and  told  off  from  the 
right,  No.  1  being  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank ;  No.  2  in  front 
of  No.  1  ;  No.  3  on  the  left  of  No.  1 ;  No.  4  on  the  left  of  No.  2, 
and  so  on — the  even  numbers  in  the  front  rank  and  the  odd  num- 
bers in  the  rear  rank.  The  senior  corporal,  who  is  gunner,  is  on 
the  right  of  No.  2 ;  the  junior  corporal,  who  is  the  caisson  cor- 
poral, is  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  covered  by  the  highest  odd- 
numbered  cannoneer. 

1248.  Q.  How  are  the  men  of  a  gun  detachment  arranged  in 
actual  service  ?  A.  They  are  permanently  assigned  to  the  duties 
for  which  they  are  best  fitted. 

1249.  Q.  How  is  the  detachment  told  off?  A.  The  command 
Call  off  is  given,  and  each  man  belonging  to  the  detachment, 


DETLL  REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  149 

beginning  with  the  gunner,  calls  off:  Qunnei\  One,  Two,  etc., 
Caisson  corporal. 

1250.  Q.  What  is  the  front  of  a  piece  ?  A.  Of  a  piece  limbered, 
of  a  limber,  or  of  a  caisson,  it  is  the  direction  in  which  the  pole 
points ;  of  a  piece  unlimbered,  it  is  the  direction  in  which  the 
muzzle  points. 

1251.  Q.  How  is  the  gun  detachment  posted  when  in  front  and 
in  rear  of  a  piece  limbered  ?  A.  It  is  in  line  facing  to  the  front 
(when  in  front),  its  rear  and  centre  two  yards  from  the  end  of  the 
pole,  or  from  the  heads  of  the  lead  hoi'ses.  When  in  rear,  it  is 
in  line  facing  to  the  front,  its  front  and  centre  two  yards  from 
the  muzzle. 

1252.  Q.  How  is  the  gun  detachment  posted  with  its  piece? 
A.  The  instructor  commands,  Detachment,  opposite  your  piece ; 
and  as  the  detachment  arrives  opposite  its  piece,  the  gunner  halts 
it,  and  directs.  Left  (or  right)  face,  right  dress,  front.  The  gun- 
ner aligns  the  detachment  always. 

1253.  Q.  In  changing  the  position  of  the  gun  detachment  at  the 
limbered  piece  from  front  to  rear  or  rear  to  front,  in  what  manner 
do  the  men  reach  the  new  position  ?  A.  In  moving  to  the  rear, 
Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  oblique  sufficiently  to  the  left,  and  the  other 
cannoneers,  if  any,  and  the  caisson  corporal,  sufficiently  to  their 
right  to  move  along  the  sides  of  the  piece,  reunite  in  a  similar 
manner  as  soon  as  they  have  passed  the  muzzle,  are  halted,  faced 
about,  and  dressed  to  the  right  by  the  gunner.  If  changing  from 
rear  to  front,  the  gunner  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  go  to  the  right 
and  the  others  to  the  left,  and  unite  in  similar  manner. 

1254.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  cannoneers  at  a  limbered 
piece  ?  A.  Nos.  1  and  2  opposite  the  gun-axle  ;  the  gunner  and 
No.  3  opposite  the  middle  of  the  flask.  Nos.  4  and  5  opposite  the 
limber  axle.  All  face  to  the  front  and  cover  each  other  in  lines 
one  yard  outside  the  wheels,  the  gunner  and  even  numbers  on  the 
right,  the  odd  numbers  on  the  left. 

1255.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  caisson  corporal  dis- 
mounted ?  A.  He  is  on  the  left  of  the  caisson,  in  line  with  the 
limber  axle  and  one  yard  outside  of  it ;  he  faces  in  the  direction 
the  pole  of  the  caisson  points. 

1256.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  supernumerary  cannoneers,  if 
there  are  any  present  ?  A.  Nos.  6,  7,  and  8  are  at  the  caisson, 
facing  in  the  same  direction  as  the  caisson  corporal.  No.  6  is  on 
the  right,  corresponding  to  that  of  the  caisson  corporal  on  the  left. 
Nos.  7  and  8  are  in  line  with  the  axle  of  the  caisson  body,  cover- 
ing the  caisson  corporal  and  No.  6  respectively.  When  pieces  are 
not  accompanied  by  caissons,  Nos.  6  and  7,  if  present,  are  opposite 
the  double-tree  of  the  piece,  one  yard  from  it,  facing  to  the  front. 
No.  6  on  the  right  and  No.  7  on  the  left. 

1257.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  cannoneers,  with  regard  to 
the  horses,  when  projectiles  are  fired?     A.  One  cannoneer  in. 


150  THE  ARMY   OFPICER^S  EXAMIKER. 

each  platoon  is  required  to  hold  the  horses  of  the  chief  of  platoon 
and  chiefs  of  sections.  No.  6  of  one  of  the  pieces,  ordinarily  the 
left,  performs  this  duty. 

1258.  Q.  What  command  is  given  to  post  cannoneers  at  the 
piece  limbered  from  front  and  rear,  and  by  whose  order  is  the 
movement  made  and  completed  ?  A.  The  detachment  being  at  the 
front  or  rear,  the  command  is.  Cannoneers,  to  your  posts,  march. 
The  instructor  gives  the  first  command  and  the  gunners  complete 
the  movement  by  commanding.  Right  face,  to  your  posts,  before 
the  command  March. 

1259.  Q.  By  what  commands  may  the  detachment  be  re-formed 
in  front  or  rear,  piece  limbered,  cannoneers  at  their  posts  ?  A.  By 
the  command  Detachment  front  (or  reur),  march.  The  gunner 
commands,  in  the  first  case,  Forward,  and  repeats  the  command 
March,  and  places  the  men  in  front  by  the  command  Column  left, 
march ;  detachment,  halt ;  right  face  ;  right  dress  ;  front.  In 
the  movement  to  the  rear,  at  the  first  command  of  the  instructor, 
the  gunner  commands,  Detachment,  about  face;  forward,  and 
repeats  the  command  March,  and  posts  the  men  in  rear  by  the 
same  commands  as  for  posting  them  in  front,  substituting  left 
face  for  right  face. 

1260.  Q.  In  moving  the  piece  by  hand,  piece  limbered,  what  is 
done  at  the  command  Forward  ?  A.  Nos.  4  and  5  hasten  to  the 
end  of  the  pole  and  seize  it  with  both  hands ;  the  gunner  and 
No.  3  take  hold  of  the  spokes  of  the  limber  wheels  with  both 
hands,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  the  spokes  of  the  gun  wheels.  Those 
who  take  hold  of  the  spokes  of  the  wheels  break  to  their  rear 
with  the  feet  nearest  the  carriage. 

1261.  Q.  If,  in  moving  the  piece  by  hand,  piece  limbered,  Nos. 
6  and  7  are  with  the  piece,  what  is  their  duty  ?  A.  They  go  to 
the  end  of  the  pole,  Nos.  4  and  5  assist  the  gunner,  and  No.  3  at 
the  limber  wheels. 

1262.  Q.  Describe  the  position  of  the  cannoneers  at  the  piece 
unlimbered.  A.  The  gunner  is  at  the  left  and  at  the  end  of  the 
trail  handspike,  right  leg  nearly  touching  it  and  heels  on  a  line 
with  the  end  ;  No.  1  is  facing  the  piece,  the  right  hip  on  line  with 
the  rear  of  the  right  wheel  and  two  feet  outside  of  it ;  No.  2  is 
at  the  left  wheel,  iu  position  corresponding  to  that  of  No.  1  nt 
the  right ;  No.  3  is  in  rear  of  the  post  of  No.  1,  opposite  the  end 
of  the  trail-handspike  and  facing  to  the  front ;  No.  4  is  five  yards 
in  rear  of  No.  2  and  facing  to  the  front ;  No.  5  is  behind  the 
limber. 

1263.  Q.  In  how  many  different  positions  may  the  piece  be 
unlimbered  by  command  and  prepared  for  firing,  and  what  are 
they  ?  A.  ^o\xv— action  front,  action  rear,  action  right,  and 
action  left. 

1264.  Q.  In  bringing  the  piece  into  the  position  of  action  front, 
what  are  the  gunner's  duties?    A.  At  the  command  Front  he 


DEILL  KEGULATIOKS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  151 

takes  out  the  pintle-key  and  seizes  the  trail-handle  on  his  side  ; 
with  the  assistance  of  No.  3  at  the  opposite  trail-handle  he  raises 
the  trail  from  the  pintle-hook  and  commands,  Drive  on;  as  soon 
as  the  limber  moves  off,  the  piece  is  brought  about  (Nos.  1  and 
2  at  the  gun-wheels) ;  the  gunner  and  No.  3,  without  lowering 
the  trail,  carry  it  around  180  degrees,  so  that  the  limber  passes 
the  muzzle,  when  the  trail  is  lowered  to  the  ground  ;  the  gunner 
then  turns  the  trail- handspike  to  the  rear  and  pushes  it  forward 
so  as  to  engage  the  blades  in  the  catch. 

1265.  Q.  In  action  front,  how  is  the  limber  placed  in  position 
and  when  do  cannoneers  take  post  ?  A.  At  the  command  Drive 
on,  the  limber  executes  a  left  about,  proceeds  to  the  rear  and 
executes  another  left  about  so  as  to  be  directly  in  rear  of  the 
piece  to  which  it  belongs,  with  the  end  of  the  pole  or  heads  of 
lead  horses  (when  used)  ten  yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail-hand- 
spike. If  the  piece  be  not  horsed,  the  limber,  when  moved,  is 
drawn  by  Nos.  4  and  5,  who  take  hold  with  both  hands  near  the 
end  of  the  pole.  If  Nos.  6  and  7  are  posted  with  the  piece,  the 
limber  will  be  drawn  by  them  ;  if  the  piece  be  heavy  or  the 
ground  bad  Nos.  4  and  5  will  assist  Nos.  2  and  1.  The  cannon- 
eers take  post  as  soon  as  the  gun  is  in  position,  without  com- 
mand. 

1266.  Q.  What  change  in  action  right  takes  place  in  what  is 
described  for  action  front  f  A.  No.  1  faces  about  instead  of 
No.  2,  and  turns  his  wheel  toward  the  muzzle  and  No.  2  turns 
his  toward  the  trail ;  the  trail  is  carried  only  90  degrees  in  the 
opposite  direction,  and  the  limber  wheels  to  the  left  and  takes 
its  place  in  rear  by  a  left  about. 

1267.  Q.  What  change  in  action  left  takes  place  in  what  is  de- 
scribed for  action  front  f  A.  The  trail  is  carried  around  90  de- 
grees and  the  limber  wheels  to  the  right  and  takes  its  place  in 
rear  by  a  right  about. 

1268.  Q.  What  change  in  action  rear  takes  place  in  what  is  de- 
scribed for  action  front  ?  A.  As  soon  as  the  limber  moves  off,  the 
trail  is  let  down  and  the  piece  prepared  for  action  ;  the  limber 
moves  directly  forward  at  the  command  Drive  on,  and  takes  its 
place  by  a  reverse. 

1269.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  a  limber  in  battery  faced  to 
the  rear,  and  how  is  it  placed  there  ?  A.  The  back  of  the  limber 
is  ten  yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail-handspike.  Whenever  this 
position  is  to  be  taken  the  instructor  cautions.  Limber  faced  to  the 
rear,  before  giving  the  command  Action  front,  etc. 

1270.  Q.  Where  are  the  equipments  carried  ?  A.  Two  cartridge- 
pouches  and  one  gunner's  sight-pouch  are  on  top  of  the  cartridges 
in  the  limber-chest ;  one  gunner's  sight  in  limber-chest  in  the 
place  prepared  for  it ;  two  primer-pouches  in  the  trail-box. 

1271.  Q.  What  is  done  at  the  command  Take  equipments,  and 
when  may  this  command  be  given  ?    A.  The  gunner  repeats  the 


152  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIIS^ER. 

command  and  Nos.  1,  3,  3,  and  4  approach  him.  He  hands  1 
and  3  each  a  primer-pouch,  which  they  fasten  to  the  waist-belt 
in  front  of  the  right  side  ;  to  2  and  4  each  he  hands  a  cartridge- 
pouch,  which  they  sling  over  the  left  shoulder  and  under  the 
right  arm  ;  the  gunner  then  places  the  sight  in  his  pouch,  which 
he  slings  over  his  left  shoulder  and  under  his  right  arm.  Nos.  1, 
2,  3,  and  4  then  resume  their  posts.  The  equipments  may  be  dis- 
tributed or  replaced  either  when  the  cannoneers  are  at  their 
posts,  piece  limbered,  or  when  the  gun  detachment  is  at  its  post 
in  rear. 

1272.  Q.  How  should  recruits,  the  cannoneers  being  at  their 
posts,  piece  unlimbered,  be  first  instructed  ?  A.  The  instructor 
should  assemble  them  about  the  piece,  tell  them  the  meaning  of 
the  terms  cannon  and  piece,  point  out  and  name  the  principal 
part  of  the  gun,  the  breech  mechanism,  gun-carriage,  limber  and 
caisson,  give  the  name  and  explain  the  uses  of  the  various  equip- 
ments, implements,  and  tools,  and  show  where  they  are  carried, 
and  explain  the  method  of  working  the  breech  mechanism. 

1273.  Q.  In  what  order  are  the  duties  of  the  different  men 
taught  in  loading  and  firing  ?  A.  First,  those  of  the  gunner  : 
commanding,  opening  and  closing  the  breech,  inserting  the 
charge,  and  pointing.  Second,  those  of  No.  1  :  attending  the 
brake,  ramming  and  firing.  Third,  those  of  No.  2  :  attending 
the  brake  and  serving  the  ammunition.  Fourth,  those  of  No. 
4 :  serving  ammunition.  Fifth,  those  of  No.  3  :  assisting  the 
gunner.  Sixth,  those  of  No.  5  :  preparing  and  serving  ammu- 
nition. 

1274.  Q.  The  breech  being  open,  how  is  the  loading  of  the  piece 
explained  by  the  instructor  ?  A.  The  projectile  is  first  inserted, 
then  the  cartridge,  choke  foremost ;  the  projectile  is  pushed  by 
hand  until  its  base  is  beyond  the  seat  of  the  gas-check  ;  the  ram- 
mer-head is  then  placed  against  it,  and  it  is  rammed  smartly  to 
drive  it  home  to  its  seat  in  the  bore,  where  it  will  grip  the  lands 
and  its  base  will  be  at  the  junction  of  the  bore  with  the  chamber, 
which  is  designed  for  the  cartridge  alone  ;  the  cartridge  is  then 
pushed  in  by  hand  and  is  not  rammed. 

1275.  Q.  Describe  the  method  of  opening  the  breech  of  a  3.2- 
inch  gun.  A.  Seize  the  lever  with  the  left  hand,  thumb  down, 
and  raise  it  as  high  as  possible  to  release  it  from  the  safety-notch  ; 
then  turn  it  to  the  left  until  the  block  strikes  the  stop,  at  which 
time  the  threaded  sections  of  the  block  are  opposite  the  planed 
sections  of  the  seat ;  the  breech-block  handle  is  then  grasped 
with  the  right  hand,  back  down,  the  block  is  drawn  out  and 
swung  to  the  left  to  clear  the  bore. 

1276.  Q.  What  is  done  if  the  block  sticks  in  opening  the  breech 
of  a  3.2-inch  gun?  A.  The  lever  should  be  pressed  down  with 
the  left  hand,  and,  as  the  cam  is  no  longer  opposite  the  safety- 


DEILL   KEGULATTONS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  153 

notch,  it  will  bear  against  the  face  of  the  carrier-ring  and  start 
the  block  to  the  rear. 

1277.  Q.  Describe  the  method  of  closing  and  locking  the  breech 
of  a  3.2-inch  gun.  A.  Seize  the  lever  with  the  left  hand,  raising 
it  as  high  as  possible,  grasp  the  breech-block  handle  with  the 
right  hand,  back  down,  and  swing  the  block  gently  around,  keep- 
ing the  lever  extended  as  in  opening,  and  push  the  screw  into  its 
place  ;  then  turn  the  lever  to  the  right  until  it  will  fall  into  its 
place  with  a  very  slight  pressure ;  see  that  the  end  of  the  lever 
engages  in  the  slot.  Never  attempt  to  force  the  lever  down  ;  if 
it  does  not  move  comparatively  freely,  the  breech-screw  is  not  in 
place  and  requires  to  be  moved  still  further  to  the  right. 

1278.  Q.  What  should  be  done  if  the  latch  fails  to  work  in  clos- 
ing the  breech  of  a  3.2-inch  gun  ?  A.  The  latch  is  an  auxiliary, 
but  not  an  absolutely  essential  part  of  the  breech  mechanism. 
If  it  fails  to  work,  it  may  be  removed  by  taking  off  the  latch- cover. 
This  should  never  be  done,  however,  except  when  necessary. 

1279.  Q.  In  firing  a  3.2-inch  gun,  what  care  should  be  taken 
when  the  latch  has  been  removed  ?  A.  Not  to  attempt  to  push 
the  block  home  until  its  axis  is  in  line  with  the  axis  of  the  gun. 
In  opening  the  block,  the  carrier-ring  must  be  held  in  place  by 
hand  until  the  block  is  withdrawn  to  the  stop. 

1280.  Q.  When  the  instructor  does  not  wish  to  fire  immediately 
after  the  piece  is  loaded,  what  does  he  caution?  A.  Before  giv- 
ing the  command  to  load  he  cautions,  Without  making  ready. 

1281.  Q.  What  are  the  general  duties  of  the  gunner?  A.  He 
sees  that  the  other  cannoneers  perform  their  duties  properly;  that 
the  projectiles  prescribed  are  used ;  that  the  fuses  are  properly 
prepared ;  and  that  the  breech-sight  is  set  for  the  range  and  de- 
flection given.  He  is  responsible  that  the  gun,  and  especially  the 
breech  mechanism,  is  in  good  order  before  loading,  and  that  the 
breech-block  is  properly  locked  after  loading. 

1282.  Q.  What  must  the  gunner  do  at  the  command  Load  f  A. 
He  takes  hold  of  the  handspike,  looks  over  the  top  of  the  piece, 
and  gives  the  general  direction  to  the  gun;  then  steps  to  the 
breech,  opens  and  inspects  the  bore,  breech,  mechanism  and  gas- 
check  to  see  that  all  are  in  good  order;  he  examines  the  face  of 
the  carrier-ring  and  its  seat,  and  removes  with  the  wiping-cloth 
any  deposit  observed  upon  them;  he  then  receives  the  projectile 
from  No.  2  or  4,  inserts  it  in  the  bore,  point  foremost, and  pushes 
it  by  hand  and  until  its  base  is  just  beyond  the  seat  of  the  gas- 
check,  and  as  soon  as  No.  1  has  rammed  the  projectile,  inserts  the 
cartridge,  choke  foremost,  pushes  it  home  with  his  hand  and  closes 
the  breech.  He  then  takes  the  breech-sight  from  its  pouch  and 
places  it  in  its  socket,  grasps  the  handle  of  the  elevating-screw 
with  the  right  hand,  draws  back  his  right  foot,  bends  over  his 
left  knee  and  points  the  piece.  He  may  straddle  the  flask  in 
pointing  if  more  convenient  to  him.     He  taps  the  right  of  the 


154  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

trail  for  No.  3  to  move  it  to  the  left,  and  the  left  of  the  trail  for 
him  to  move  it  to  the  right.  As  soon  as  the  gun  is  pointed  he 
raises  both  hands  as  a  signal  to  that  effect,  removes  the  sight, 
takes  his  post  and  replaces  the  sight  in  its  pouch. 

1283.  Q.  Explain  the  method  of  sponging  a  piece.  A.  At  the 
command  Sponge,  No.  2  steps  between  the  wheel  and  the  flask, 
and  No.  1  runs  to  the  front  of  the  piece  ;  No.  2  unkeys  the 
jointed  sponge-staff  and,  assisted  by  No.  1,  opens  it;  No.  2  then 
inserts  the  rammer-head  and  passes  it  through  the  bore  from  rear 
to  front;  as  soon  as  the  staff  projects  beyond  the  muzzle  it  is  seized 
by  No.  1,  who  draws  the  sponge  through  the  bore;  No.  2,  assisted 
by  No.  1,  then  closes  the  staff,  No.  2  keys  it  up,  and  both  num- 
bers resume  their  posts. 

1284.  Q.  Describe  how  a  load  may  be  withdrawn  from  a  piece. 
A.  No.  2  unkeys  and,  assisted  by  No.  1  (who  runs  to  the  front  of 
the  piece),  opens  the  jointed  staff  ;  No.  1  takes  the  staff  and  No. 
2  resumes  his  post  outside  the  wheel;  the  gunner  steps  to  the 
breech,  opens  it,  takes  out  the  cartridge  and  then  the  projectile, 
and  passes  them  to  No.  4,  who  takes  them  back  to  the  chest  from 
which  they  were  issued.  No.  1,  as  soon  as  the  cartridge  has 
been  removed,  inserts  the  rammer-head,  gently  taps  the  projectile 
to  loosen  it,  and  then  pushes  it  back  into  the  chamber.  If  the 
projectile  to  be  removed  has  a  percussion-fuse,  it  should  not  be 
tapped.  If  it  cannot  be  pushed  back  by  a  steady  pressure,  it  must 
be  gotten  rid  of  by  discharging  the  piece.  No.  2,  assisted  by  No.  1, 
closes  the  staff,  No.  2  keys  it  up,  and  both  resume  their  posts. 

1285.  Q.  The  piece  being  unlimbered,  explain  the  method  of 
changing  posts.  A.  At  the  command  Change  posts,  all  the  can- 
noneers who  have  equipments  take  them  off  and  lay  them  down 
in  front  of  them;  Nos.  1  and  5  face  to  the  left  (No.  5  faces  to 
the  right  if  the  limber  is  faced  to  the  rear);  No.  3  faces  about. 
At  the  command  March,  1  takes  the  place  of  3  ;  3  takes  the  place 
of  5 ;  5  takes  the  place  of  4;  4  takes  the  place  of  2;  2  takes  the 
place  of  1,  stepping  over  the  flask.  As  soon  as  posts  are  changed, 
equipments  are  resumed  without  orders. 

1286.  Q.  How  are  the  changes  of  the  posts  of  cannoneers  ef- 
fected when  the  piece  is  limbered  ?  A.  The  changes  are  made 
the  same  as  when  the  piece  is  unlimbered,  except  that  No.  4  in 
changing  passes  outside  the  gunner. 

1287.  Q.  How  is  the  piece  brought  about  in  limber  front  f  A. 
The  gunner  and  No.  3  spring  to  the  end  of  the  trail-handspike  ; 
both  raise  it  and  carry  it  180  degrees  to  the  left;  No.  1  takes  the 
position  for  hy  hand  to  the  rear,  brings  the  right  wheel  around, 
turning  it  towards  the  trail;  No.  2  takes  the  position  of  hy  hand  to 
the  front,  and  brings  the  left  wheel  around,  turning  it  toward 
the  muzzle.  The  instant  the  piece  is  about,  the  trail  is  let  down; 
the  gunner  turns  the  trail-handspike  over  on  the  flask  and  secures 
it.     To  avoid  accident  from  the  movement  of  the  limber  Nos.  1 


DRILL   REGULATIOKS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  155 

and  2  step  inside  the  wheels  and  place  themselves  with  their 
backs  against  the  axle-seats,  and  No.  3  and  the  gunner  step  directly 
in  front  of  them,  respectively.  As  soon  as  the  limber  is  in  front 
of  the  piece  the  gunner  commands,  Limber  halt,  and  he  and  No. 
3  spring  to  the  trail-handles  and  raise  the  trail ;  Nos.  1  and  2 
spring  outside  the  wheels  and  seize  the  spokes  ;  all  run  the  piece 
forward  ;  the  lunette  is  placed  upon  the  pintle-hook  and  keyed  by 
the  gunner,  and  all  take  posts  at  the  piece  limbered. 

1288.  Q.  In  what  respect  does  limher  left  differ  from  that  of 
limber  front  ?  A.  It  is  executed  the  same,  the  trail  being  car- 
ried only  90  degrees  to  the  left,  and  the  limber  inclining  to  the 
left  and  taking  its  place  by  a  left  wheel.  If  the  limber  is  facing 
to  the  rear,  it  executes  a  right  about  and  then  goes  to  its  place. 

1289.  Q.  J)Q?,QY'\hQ\\ovfio  fix  prolongs?  A.  the  limber  inclines 
to  the  right  and  takes  its  place  as  in  limbering  to  the  rear,  halt- 
ing about  four  yards  from  the  trail  of  the  piece.  Nos.  1  and  3 
uncoil  the  prolonge  and  pass  both  ends  to  the  gunner,  who  passes 
the  hook  upward  through  the  lunette  and  then  engages  the  hook 
in  the  ring  about  one  yard  from  the  lunette.  No.  5  pulls  the 
double  prolonge  taut,  sees  that  the  joined  hook  and  ring  are  at 
least  one  yard  from  the  lunette,  makes  a  loop  at  his  end  and 
passes  it  over  the  pintle- hook  and  puts  in  the  key. 

1290.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  cannoneers  when  mounted  ? 
A.  Tile  gunner  and  Nos.  8  and  4  on  the  limber-chest  of  the  piece, 
gunner  on  the  right  and  3  on  the  left ;  1,  2,  and  5  on  the  limber- 
chest  of  the  caisson — 2  on  the  right  and  1  on  the  left;  6,  7,  and 
8  on  the  middle  chest  of  the  caisson — 6  on  the  right  and  7  on  the 
left. 

1291.  Q.  If  the  instructor  should  command  Cannoneers  moimt, 
instead  of  Cannoneers  prepare  to  mount,  mount,  what  will  they 
do  ?  A.  Execute  the  movement  the  same  as  if  Prepare  to  mount 
had  been  given. 

1292.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  cannoneers  mounted 
when  caissons  do  not  accompany  the  pieces  ?  A.  The  only  change 
is  that  Nos.  1  and  2  are  on  the  axle-seats — 1  on  the  left  and  2  on 
the  right ;  6,  7,  and  5,  on  the  off  wheel,  off  swing,  and  off  lead 
horses  respectively. 

1293.  Q.  Should  the  command  Action  {right,  left,  or  rear)  be 
given  when  the  men  are  mounted  on  the  chests,  etc.,  what  will 
they  do  ?    A.  Immediately  dismount  and  run  to  their  posts. 

1294.  Q.  Does  the  service  of  the  3.6-inch  gun  differ  from  the 
3.2-inch  gun?  A.  It  is  essentially  the  same  ;  but  to  avoid  fatigue 
to  the  men  in  handling  it,  Nos.  6  and  7  should  be  added  to  the 
detachment  for  its  service. 

1295.  Q.  Describe  the  posts  of  the  cannoneers  at  a  3.6-inch 
gun  limbered.  A.  Nos.  1  and  2  opposite  the  muzzle  ;  3  and  4  oppo- 
site the  gun-axle;  gunner  and  5  opposite  the  middle  of  the  flask; 
6   and  7  opposite    the  limber-axle.     All  face  to  the  front  and 


156  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

cover  each  other  one  yard  outside  the  wheels,  the  gunner  and 
even  numbers  on  the  right,  and  the  odd  numbers  on  the  left. 
The  caisson  corporal,  dismounted,  is  on  the  left  of  the  caisson  in 
line  with  the  limber-axle  ;  he  faces  in  the  direction  the  pole  of 
the  caisson  points.  Supernumerary  cannoneers  8,  9,  and  10,  if 
present,  are  at  the  caisson,  facing  the  same  as  the  caisson  corporal 
— 8  on  the  right,  opposite  the  corporal,  and  9  and  10  are  in  line 
with  the  axle  of  the  caisson  body,  covering  the  corporal  and  8 
respectively. 

1296.  Q.  Describe  the  posts  of  the  cannoneers  at  a  3.6-inch  gun 
unlimbered.  A.  Gunner,  same  as  3.2-inch  gun  ;  No.  1  facing  the 
piece,  the  right  hip  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  right  wheel 
and  2  feet  outside  of  it;  2  at  the  left  wheel  corresponding  to  No. 
1;  3  same  as  1  at  the  3.2-inch  gun  ;  4  same  as  2  at  the  3.2-inch 
gun;  5  same  as  3  at  the  3.2-inch  gun;  6  same  as  4  at  the  3.2-inch 
gun;  7  same  as  5  at  the  3.2-inch  gun.  If  each  piece  is  accom- 
panied by  the  caisson,  the  caisson  corporal  and  8,  9,  and  10  take 
the  posts  prescribed  for  the  piece  limbered. 

1297.  Q.  Of  how  many  men  is  the  detachment  of  a  machine- 
gun  composed?  A.  Ordinarily  of  two  corporals  and  six  can- 
noneers. 

1298.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  loading  and  firing  a 
machine-gun?  A.  Load,  ready,  commence  firing,  given  by  the 
instructor,  the  gunner  repeating  the  command,  Load.  If,  instead 
of  load,  the  instructor  gives  the  command  Commence  firing,  the 
gunner  commands,  Load,  ready,  commence  firing. 

1299.  Which  of  the  machine-gun  detachment'  turns  the  crank, 
and  how  is  the  ammunition  supplied?  A.  No.  1  turns  the  crank, 
and  No.  2  receives  from  No.  4  or  6  the  filled  feed-case  and  inserts 
it  in  the  hopper  ;  he  keeps  his  eye  on  the  hopper  to  see  that  the 
cartridges  are  feeding  properly,  calls  Case  as  the  feed-case  in  the 
hopper  is  nearly  empty  ;  holds  this  case  in  his  right  hand,  with- 
drawing the  empty  case  with  his  left  as  soon  as  the  last  cartridge 
has  passed,  and  at  once  inserts  the  filled  feed-case  ;  then  passes 
the  empty  case  over  his  left  shoulder  to  No.  4  or  6. 

1300.  Q.  How  is  a  gun  detachment  marched  to  the  park  ?  A. 
In  column  of  files  or  column  of  detachments.  The  column  enters 
the  park  by  the  left  if  marching  right  in  front— by  the  right  if 
marching  left  in  front.  The  column  approaches  the  park  parallel 
to  its  front  and  either  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  pieces  ;  the  flank 
of  the  column  being  at  such  a  distance  from  the  poles,  lead-horses, 
or  muzzles  that  the  detachments  when  formed  in  line  near  the 
pieces  can  be  readily  established  in  their  proper  positions  by  the 
gunners. 

1301.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  posting  the  gun  detach- 
.ments  with  their  pieces  ?  A.  The  instructor  commands,  Detach- 
ments opposite  your  pieces.  If  in  column  of  files,  as  each  detach- 
ment arrives  opposite  its  piece,  the  gunner  halts  it  and  commands 


DEILL  KEGULATIONS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  157 

(according  as  the  right  or  left  is  in  front),  Left  (or  right)  face; 
Right  dress ;  Front.  If  in  column  of  detachments,  the  gunner 
commands,  Detachment  left  (or  right) ;  March  ;  Front. 

1303.  Q.  The  gun  detachments  being  at  their  pieces,  give  the 
commands  for  the  different  kinds  of  fire  ?  A.  To  fire  by  piece, 
the  captain  commands,  Fire  by  piece ;  No.  one  (two,  th7'ee,'eic.), 
Fire.  To  fire  by  platoon,  tlie  captain  commands,  Fire  by  platoon  ; 
Right,  {left  or  centre)  platoon.  Fire.  To  fire  by  battery,  the 
captain  commands.  Fire  by  battery  ;  -Battery,  Fire. 

1303.  Q.  In  firing  by  piece,  platoon,  and  battery,  what  command 
is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons  ?    A.  The  first  command. 

1304.  Q.  In  the  firing  by  platoon  and  piece,  when  do  the  chiefs 
of  platoons  designate  their  platoons  and  the  pieces  of  same  ?  A. 
As  soon  as  the  chiefs  of  platoon  have  repeated  the  first  command. 

1305.  Q.  When  the  last  platoon  or  last  piece  of  the  battery  is 
fired,  what  notification  is  given  by  the  chief  of  this  platoon,  and 
what  follows  until  the  command  cease  firing  %  A.  The  chief  of 
platoon  will  call  out.  Round  completed  ;  this  will  be  repeated  by 
the  chief  of  the  centre  platoon,  and  will  be  notification  to  the 
chief  of  the  right  (or  left)  platoon  to  recommence  the  fire  with  his 
platoon  or  outer  piece,  as  the  case  my  be.  The  firing  will  be  thus 
continued  with  the  elevation,  deflection,  and  length  of  fuse  fixed 
by  the  captain  until  the  command  cease  firing  is  given. 

1306.  Q.  In  ordinary  fire,  how  many  shots  will  be  fired  in  two 
minutes  ?  A.  Six  for  a  six-gun  battery,  or  an  interval  of  20 
seconds  between  successive  shots.  In  slow  fire,  not  less  than  30 
seconds. 

1307.  Q.  How  is  the  rapidity  of  fire  of  a  battery  regulated  ?  A. 
If  a  slower  or  more  rapid  rate  of  fire  is  required,  the  captain  will 
caution  sloiv  fire  or  rapid  fire;  to  resume  the  usual  rate,  he  calls 
out  ordinary  fire. 

1308.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  is  the^re  at  will  resorted 
to  ?  A.  It  is  used  in  action  for  short  ranges  only,  and  will  not  be 
used  in  instruction  at  drill  for  firing  blank  cartridges. 

1309.  Q.  When  ammunition  is  used  what  commands  will  the 
captain  give  before  designating  the  kind  of  fire?  A.  With  blank 
cartridges;  or.  Range  (so  many)  yards,  with  ball  cartridges, 
load. 

1310.  Q.  How  are  the  gun  detachments  marched  from  the 
park,  and  how  formed  for  that  purpose  ?  A.  They  are  marched 
in  column  of  files  or  column  of  detachments.  To  form  the 
column  of  files,  the  detachments  being  in  front  or  rear,  they  are 
simply  faced  to  the  right.  To  form  column  of  detachments,  the 
instructor  commands,  Detachments  right  (or  left),  March  ;  Close, 


1311.  Q.  For  purposes  of  instruction,  what  constitutes  a ' 
ment  for  mechanical  manoeuvres  ?    A.  Gunner,  caisson  cori 
and  seven  cannoneers. 


158  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIN^ER. 

1312.  Q.  When  are  mechanical  manoeuvres  not  to  be  executed  ? 
A.  At  drill  when  the  carriages  are  horsed. 

1313.  Q.  Give  the  command  for  changing  wheels  ?  A.  Pre- 
pare to  change  rigM  (or  left)  wheel ;  change  wheel. 

1314.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  duties  of  the  different  men  in 
changing  wheel?  A.  Nos.  1  and  2  remove  the  linch-pin  and 
washer  of  the  disabled  wheel ;  5,  6,  and  7  dismount  the  spare 
wheel,  and  No.  5  runs  it  near  and  parallel  to  the  disabled  wheel, 
leaving  room  for  it  to  be  taken  off  ;  No.  2  steadies  the  spare  wheel", 
while  1  and  5  take  off  the  disabled  wheel,  which  No.  5  runs  to  the 
rear;  1  and  2  put  on  the  spare  wheel,  the  caisson  corporal  and 
3,  4,  6,  and  7  using  the  spare  pole  to  raise  the  axle  ;  1  and  2 
replace  the  linch-pin  and  washer ;  5,  6,  and  7  place  the  disabled 
wheel  on  the  spare  wheel  axle,  and  the  caisson  corporal  and  7 
replace  the  spare  pole. 

1315.  Q.  Give  commands  for  dismounting  apiece.  A.  Prepare 
to  dismotmt  piece  ;  Dismount  piece. 

1316.  Q.  Describe  briefly  how  to  mount  piece  ?  A.  At  the  com- 
mand prepare  to  mount  piece,  the  gunner  and  No.  5  at  the  trail, 
assisted  by  1,  2,  3,  and  4  at  the  wheels  place  the  carriage  so  that 
the  breech  may  be  opposite  the  front  of  the  wheels  and  half  way 
between  them.  The  gunner,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  then  adjust 
the  rope  as  in  dismounting  piece  and  the  caisson  corporal  inserts 
his  handspike  in  the  bore.  At  the  Qomxnsiwdi  Mount  piece,  1,  2,  3, 
and  4  at  the  wheels,  run  the  carriage  to  the  rear ;  the  caisson 
corporal  and  6  and  7  lift  the  muzzle,  keeping  the  piece  nearly 
horizontal,  and  follow  the  movement  of  the  carriage  to  the  rear. 
When  the  trunnions  are  over  the  beds  the  rope  is  loosened,  and 
the  trunnions  will  fall  in  place.  The  gunner  and  No.  5  give 
direction  to  the  carriage. 

1317.  Q.  How  is  a  gun-carriage  dismounted  ?  A.  The  piece 
being  dismounted,  the  gunner  runs  the  elevating  screw  up  or 
down,  according  as  it  is  the  double  screw  or  lazy-tongs.  The 
sides  of  the  carriage  are  successively  raised  by  means  of  the  spare 
pole,  and  the  wheels  removed  by  Nos.  1  and  5  ;  care  is  taken  to 
lower  the  axle  gently  to  the  ground.  If  blocks  are  available,  the 
gunner  places  them  to  receive  the  carriage. 

1318.  Q.  In  mounting  or  dismounting  gun-carriage  and  limbers 
what  may  be  used  in  place  of  the  spare  pole  ?  A.  A  lifting-jack, 
if  available. 


THE  SABRE  AND  PISTOL. 

1319.  Q.  How  is  the  sabre  worn  when  on  foot?  A.  It  is 
habitually  hooked  up ;  if  the  sabre  be  drawn,  the  scabbard  is 
hooked. 

1320.  Q.  When  is  the  hand  said  to  be  en  tierce^  and  when  en 
quarte  ?  The  hand  is  en  tierce  when  it  holds  the  gripe,  back  of  the 


DRILL   BEGULATIOI^rS—LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  159 

hand  up  ;  en  quarte^  when  it  holds  the  gripe,  back  of  the  hand 
down. 

1321.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  taking  intervals  and  how 
executed  ?  A.  After  specifying  the  interval  in  yards,  the  in- 
structor commands,  To  the  right  (or  left)  take  intervals^  March ; 
Halt ;  Left  (or  Right)  Face.  At  the  command  March,  the  leading 
file  steps  off,  followed  in  succession  by  the  others  at  the  specified 
interval ;  the  command  halt  is  given  when  the  last  file  has  its 
interval. 

1322.  Q.  What  is  the  order  in  which  the  manual  of  the  sabre 
is  taught  ?  A.  In  the  following  order :  Ih^aw,  present^  carry ^ 
inspection,  port,  carry,  and  return  sabre. 

1323.  Q.  In  sabre  exercises,  how  are  the  men  armed  ?  A.  Only 
with  the  sabre. 

1324.  Q.  Describe  the  movement  of  port  sabre  from  carry, 
A.  Place  the  right  hand  en  tierce,  in  front  of  the  right  hip,  at  the 
height  of  the  waist,  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe, 
third  and  fourth  fingers  by  the  side  of  the  others,  edge  to  the 
front,  blade  inclined  to  the  left  and  front,  point  two  feet  higher 
than  the  hand. 

1325.  Q.  What  is  the  use  of  the  moulinets  in  sabre  exercise  ? 
A.  To  give  suppleness  to  the  wrist,  which  increases  the  dexterity 
and  confidence  of  the  men. 

1326.  Q.  Why,  in  teaching  the  sabre  exercise  on  foot,  should 
special  reference  be  had  to  its  application  when  mounted  ?  A. 
Because  if  they  should  be  permitted  to  lean  one  side  they  would 
derange  their  seats  on  horseback,  and  they  must  be  taught  to 
direct  the  blade  so  as  not  to  strike  the  head  or  haunches  of  the 
horse  or  knee  of  the  rider. 

1327.  Q.  How  are  all  cuts,  when  not  executed  by  motions,  termi- 
nated ?  A.  By  a  half-moulinet  in  bringing  the  sabre  to  the  posi- 
tion of  guard. 

[For  further  sabre  and  pistol  exercises,  see  questions  from 
to       .] 

School  of  the  Battery,  Dismounted. 

1328.  Q.  What  does  the  School  of  the  Battery,  dismounted,  in- 
clude? A.  That  of  the  platoon,  section,  and  gun  detachment 
dismounted,  and  the  manoeuvres  of  two  or  more  gun  detachments 
dismounted. 

1329.  Q.  What  comprises  a  section,  dismounted  ?  A.  All  the 
men  belonging  to  a  single  piece  and  its  caisson,  consisting  of  one 
sergeant,  who  is  chief  of  section,  two  corporals,  the  cannoneers 
of  the  piece,  and  the  drivers  of  the  piece  and  caisson,  together 
with  such  artificers,  wagoners,  spare-caisson  drivers,  and  pri- 
vates as  may  be  assigned  to  it  for  convenience  of  administration. 

1330.  Q.  How  are  the  men  assigned  to  sections  ?    A.  They  are 


160  THE  ABMT  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

attached  permanently,  and  only  transferred  by  order  of  the  cap- 
tain ;  but  they  may  be  temporarily  attached  to  sections  not  their 
own  to  equalize  subdivisions  at  drill  or  other  duty. 

1331.  Q.  Of  what  does  a  platoon,  dismounted,  consist?  A.  Of 
two  sections,  dismounted. 

1333.  Q.  Of  what  does  a  battery,  dismounted,  consist  ?  A.  Of 
two  or  three  platoons,  dismounted. 

1333.  Q.  Who  are  the  guides  of  a  battery,  platoon,  section,  and 
gun  detachment?  A.  Of  a  battery,  the  chief  of  section  and 
caisson  corporal,  posted  on  its  right  and  left ;  those  of  a  platoon 
or  section,  the  non-coramissiohed  officers  posted  on  its  right  and 
left ;  those  of  a  gun  detachment,  the  gunner  and  the  front-rank 
man  on  the  opposite  flank. 

1334.  Q.  By  whom  is  a  caisson  corporal,  guide  of  a  battery, 
platoon,  or  section  covered  in  the  rear  rank  ?  A.  He  is  not  cov- 
ered. 

1335.  Q.  What  commands  do  chiefs  of  platoons  and  sections 
repeat  ?  A.  They  repeat  or  give  commands  only  when  pre- 
scribed ;  in  movements  by  section,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  do  not 
repeat  or  give  commands. 

1336.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  officers,  non-commissioned  officers, 
etc.,  of  a  battery  formed  in  line,  dismounted?  A.  The  captain 
is  foar  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  ;  the  senior  lieutenant  is  with 
the  right  platoon  ;  the  next  in  rank  is  with  the  left  platoon,  and 
the  fourth  in  rank  with  the  centre  platoon,  each  two  yards  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  his  platoon  ;  the  lieutenant  who  is  third  in 
rank  is  chief  of  caissons,  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
battery  ;  the  first  sergeant  is  on  the  right  of  the  battery,  aligned 
on  the  front  rank  and  one  yard  from  it ;  ^he  quartermaster  and 
stable  sergeants  are  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  battery,  aligned 
on  the  front  rank  and  one  yard  from  it,  the  quartermaster  ser- 
geant on  the  right ;  each  chief  of  section  is  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  his  section  ;  each  gunner  is  one  yard  in  rear  of  the 
right  file  of  his  section  ;  each  caisson  corporal  is  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  of  his  section  ;  the  guidon  is  the  left  file  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  third  section  ;  but  if  there  be  but  two  platoons, 
he  is  the  left  file  of  the  front  rank  of  the  second  section  ;  the 
trumpeters  are  in  one  rank  on  the  right  of  the  first  sergeant  and 
two  yards  from  him. 

1337.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  senior  lieutenant  of  a  bat- 
tery, dismounted,  in  column  of  files  ?  A.  He  is  at  the  side  of  the 
leading  guide. 

1338.  Q.  By  whom  are  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  chiefs  of 
sections  replaced  when  absent  ?  A.  By  the  first  sergeant,  quar- 
termaster sergeant,  and  other  sergeants  in  the  order  of  rank, 
except  that  the  first  sergeant,  if  performing  the  duty  of  an  offi- 
cer, the  quartermaster  sergeant  and  stable  sergeant  are  not  re- 
placed.    Gunners  replace  absent  chiefs  of  sections,  caisson  cor- 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  161 

porals  absent  gunners,  and  privates  selected  for  efficiency  absent 
caisson  corporals. 

1339.  Q.  Describe  as  briefly  as  possible  the  formation  of  a  bat- 
tery, dismounted,  at  the  sounding  of  the  "assembly"?  A.  The 
first  sergeant  places  himself  six  yards  in  front  of  where  the  bat- 
tery is  to  form,  and  commands,  Fall  in;  Left  face  ;  Call  rolls; 
Report.  At  the  command  Fall  in  the  chiefs  of  sections  place 
themselves  on  the  line  facing  to  the  right,  at  sufficient  distance 
apart  for  the  formation  of  their  sections,  the  men  of  each  section 
fall  in,  facing  to  the  right,  the  front-rank  men  covering  their 
chief  ;  the  signal  having  ceased,  the  first  sergeant  causes  the  sec- 
tions to  close  up  or  give  way  if  necessary  ;  the  men  are  then 
faced  to  the  left,  and  the  chiefs  of  sections  step  out  two  yards  in 
front  of  centre  of  sections,  face  toward  them,  call  rolls,  resume 
their  places  in  ranks,  and  at  the  command  Report  salute  the  first 
sergeant  and  report  in  succession  from  right  to  left ;  first  ser- 
geant faces  about,  salutes  the  captain  or  battery  officer  of  the 
day,  reports  the  result  of  the  roll-call,  and  takes  his  post  in  line. 
The  chiefs  of  platoons  and  chief  of  caissons  take  post  imme- 
diately after  the  first  sergeant  has  taken  his  place. 

1340.  Q.  When  should  sabres  be  drawn  by  the  officers?  A. 
During  instruction  the  officers  have  the  sabre  drawn,  or  in  the 
scabbard,  at  the  discretion  of  the  captain.  When  the  captain 
draws  sabre  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  chief  of  caissons  will  also 
draw  theirs.  The  captain  will  himself  draw  sabre  before  he 
orders  the  battery  to  draw  sabre. 

1341.  Q.  In  drawing  or  returning  sabre  at  close  order,  what  is 
required  of  the  rear-rank  men  ?  A.  They  march  backward  two 
yards  at  the  command.  Draw  or  Return^  closing  to  its  proper 
distance  on  the  completion  of  the  movement.  The  sabres  are  not 
drawn  until  the  ranks  are  opened,  whenever  that  movement  is  to 
be  executed  before  moving  off. 

1342.  Q.  How  is  the  battery,  dismounted,  dismissed  ?  A.  If 
sabres  be  drawn,  the  captain  commands  Return  sabre,  and  then 
directs  the  first  sergeant,  Dismiss  the  battery.  The  officers  fall 
out  and  the  first  sergeant  commands,  Dismissed. 

1343.  Q.  How  is  the  march  in  short  step,  mark  time,  change 
step,  side  step,  march  backward,  oblique  in  line,  parsing  from 
quick  to  double  time  and  the  reverse,  executed  ?  A.  As  explained 
in  the  School  of  the  Soldier,  dismounted,  substituting  battery  for 
squad.  In  the  oblique  march  the  ranks  remain  parallel  to  their 
former  position.  In  marching  in  double  time  the  left  hand,  in- 
stead of  being  raised,  steadies  the  scabbard  ;  the  sabre,  if  drawn, 
is  held  in  a  vertical  position  in  the  right  hand,  forearm  horizon- 
tal and  swinging  naturally. 

1344.  Q.  If  the  battery,  dismounted,  is  marching,  and  the  in- 
structor wishes  to  march  the  battery  to  the  rear  and  exercise  it 
in  that  position,  what  command  must  he  give  after  the  battery  has 


162  THE  AEMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMI:N^ER. 

faced  to  the  rear,  and  what  is  done  ?  A.  He  commands,  File-closers 
to  the  rea7\  March,  at  which  the  chiefs  of  platoons  hasten  to  the 
front  and  the  file-closers  to  the  rear  of  their  subdivisions,  the 
chiefs  of  the  right  and  left  platoons  passing  around  the  outer 
flanks  of  their  platoons  ;  the  chief  of  the  centre  platoon  through 
the  interval  of  the  two  sections  of  his  platoon,  after  the  file- 
closers,  who  use  this  same  interval.  The  file-closers  pass  by  the 
nearest  flank  of  their  sections.  Each  chief  of  section,  except  the 
one  on  the  flank  of  the  battery,  falls  back  into  the  line  of  file- 
closers,  and  resumes  his  place  in  line  when  the  change  is  effected. 

1345.  Q.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  or  marching,  give  commands 
for  turning  and  advancing.  A.  Battery  right  (or  left)  turn  ;  or, 
Battery  right  (or  left),  half -turn,  march;  Forward,  march; 
Guide  right  (or  left). 

1346.  Q.  If  the  march  in  column  of  files  is  made  in  double 
time,  what  is  the  distance  between  files  ?  A.  Thirty-six  inches  ; 
this  distance  may  also  be  taken  while  marching  in  quick  time,  if 
necessary,  by  the  captain  commanding  Fall  back. 

1347.  Q.  By  what  method  is  increased  distance  gained  while 
marching  in  column  of  files?  A.  If  marching,  all  the  files 
except  the  first  shorten  step  and  resume  the  full  step  when  each 
has  thirty-six  inches  from  the  file  in  front.  If  halted,  the  rear 
files  remain  halted  until  the  file  in  front  has  gained  the  distance. 

1348.  Q.  If  the  column  of  files  be  halted  while  marching  with 
increased  distance,  what  is  done  ?  A.  The  leading  file  halts,  and 
the  others  close  up  to  facing  distance  and  then  halt. 

1349.  Q.  If  the  column  of  files  at  increased  distance  be  marched 
by  the  flank,  how  is  it  executed  ?  A.  The  men  close  in  gradually 
at  the  command  for  the  guide,  and  take  the  proper  interval 
from  his  side. 

1350.  Q.  If  in  line  at  a  halt,  and  the  captain  gives  a  command 
to  form  subdivisions,  what  is  done  at  the  first  command? 
A.  Each  chief  of  subdivision,  if  not  already  there,  steps  briskly 
in  front  of  his  subdivision,  faces  it,  and  cautions,  Platoon  (or 
section)  right. 

1351.  Q.  Who  replaces  each  chief  of  section  when  he  leaves  his 
place  on  the  flank  ?    A.  The  gunner. 

1353.  Q.  If  in  line  at  a  halt,  and  the  captain  desires  to  form 
subdivisions  and  move  forward  without  halting,  what  are  the 
commands?  A.  Platoons {ov sections)  right  {ov left)  turn^  m^irch ; 
Forward,  march;  Guide  {right  or  left). 

1353.  Q.  In  obliquing  in  column  of  subdivisions,  who  are  the 
guides  ?  A.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  on  the  side  toward 
which  the  oblique  is  made  is  the  guide  of  the  subdivision  ;  the 
guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  is  the  guide  of  the  column. 

1354.  Q.  If  the  column  resumes  the  direct  march  from  an 
oblique,  where  is  the  guide  ?  A.  It  is,  without  indication,  on 
the  side  it  was  previous  to  the  oblique  ;  but  if  the  oblique  be 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  163 

executed  from  a  halt,  the  guide  is  announced  upon  taking  the 
direct  march. 

1355.  Q.  How  may  the  column  of  subdivisions  be  put  in  march 
and  change  direction  at  the  same  time  ?  A.  The  captain  com- 
mands, Forward,  column  right  (or  left),  march  ;  Guide  right  (or 
left).  The  leading  subdivision  executes  the  turn  and  advance ; 
the  other  subdivisions  move  forward  and  turn  on  the  same  ground 
as  the  first ;  the  guide  is  announced  when  the  leading  subdivision 
has  changed  direction. 

1356.  Q.  If  marching  in  column  of  subdivisions  and  the  com- 
mands are  to  march  by  the  flank,  what  does  each  chief  of  sub- 
division do?  A.  He  places  himself  by  the  side  of  the  non-com- 
missioned officer  at  the  head  of  his  subdivision,  dresses  on  the 
chief  who  conducts  the  subdivision  on  the  side  of.  the  guide,  and 
preserves  the  proper  interval. 

1357.  Q.  If  marching  in  column  of  subdivisions  and  the  captain 
"wishes  to  form  column  of  files,  what  is  the  command  ?  A.  By 
the  right  (or  left)  flank;  Platoons  (or  sections)  column  left  (or 
right) ;  march. 

1358.  Q.  When  line  is  formed,  to  the  right  or  left  from  column 
of  platoons,  when  does  each  chief  of  platoon  face  about?  A.  At 
the  command  Front  of  the  captain. 

1359.  Q.  When  line  is  formed  to  the  right  or  left  from  column 
of  sections,  what  is  done  by  the  various  chiefs  at  the  command 
front  of  the  captain  ?  A.  Each  chief  of  platoon  takes  his  place 
in  line  and  each  chief  of  section  and  gunner  takes  his  post  on  the 
flank  of  his  section  and  in  the  line  of  file-closers. 

1360.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  how  to  form  line  to  the 
front  from  column  of  subdivisions  from  a  halt.  A.  The  captain 
commands.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line ;  march ;  Fiont,  At 
the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision  commands, 
Forward,  guide  left ;  the  other  chiefs  command  Right  oblique. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the  chiefs,  the  leading 
subdivision  advances  nineteen  yards,  when  its  chief  commands. 
Platoon  (or  sectio?}),  halt;  Left  dress.  The  other  subdivisions 
oblique  to  the  right  until  opposite  their  places  in  line,  when  their 
chiefs  command.  Forward,  march;  Guide  left,  adding,  as  they 
arrive  near  the  line,  Platoon  (or  section),  halt;  Left  dress.  The 
captain  superintends  the  alignment  from  the  left  flank,  and  conj- 
mands  front  on  its  completion. 

EXERCISES  OF  TWO  OR  MORE  GUN  DETACHMENTS. 

1361.  Q.  What  are  the  exercises  of  two  or  more  gun  detach- 
ments similar  to,  and  what  is  substituted  in  the  words  of  com- 
mand ?  A.  They  are  similar  to  those  ef  a  battery  or  platoon,  dis- 
mounted, the  words  detachment  and  detachments  being  substituted 
for  the  designation  of  one  or  more  subdivisions. 


164  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIIfER. 

1362.  Q.  When  chiefs  of  sections  are  present  during  the  exer- 
cise of  gun  detachments,  where  do  they  take  post  and  what  com- 
mands do  they  give  ?  A.  They  take  post  in  line  on  the  right  of 
tlie  front  rank,  the  gunners  stepping  back  one  yard  in  rear  of  the 
right  file  of  their  detachments.  In  column  of  detachments,  the 
chiefs  of  sections  are  on  the  side  of  the  guide  one  yard  from  the 
front  rank  ;  in  column  of  files,  they  are  as  if  they  had  faced  with 
the  detachment  in  line.  The  chiefs  of  sections  do  not  repeat  or 
give  commands. 

1363.  Q.  In  what  way  do  gunners  command  their  detachments  ? 
A.  Without  leaving  their  places  on  the  right.  When  a  detach- 
ment is  aligned  to  left  at  the  command  of  the  gunner,  the  men 
dress  on  the  left  file  of  the  front  rank. 

1364.  Q.  Who  are  the  guides  of  a  detachment  ?  A.  The  gunner 
and  the  front-rank  man  of  the  file  on  the  opposite  flank. 


School  of  the  Soldier,  Mounted. 

1365.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 
mounted  ?  A.  The  instruction  of  the  recruits  in  horsemanship 
as  regards  giving  them  confidence,  a  correct  carriage,  and  a  firm 
well-balanced  seat,  as  well  as  to  teach  them  to  control  the  move- 
ments and  paces  of  the  horse. 

1366.  Q.  What  men  should  be  instructed  in  this  school? 
A.  All  the  cannoneers  of  field  batteries  as  well  as  those  of  horse 
artillery,  and  it  is  an  indispensable  preparation  for  the  duties 
of  a  non-commissoned  officer  as  well  as  for  those  of  a  driver. 

1367.  Q.  What  general  rule  governs  the  gait  of  the  horse  in  all 
mounted  instruction  ?  A.  The  rule  that  all  mounted  instruction 
should  begin  and  end  at  a  walk. 

1368.  Q.  Enumerate  some  of  the  rules  which  should  be  im- 
pressed upon  recruits  as  regards  the  care  of  a  horse  ?  A.  Never 
threaten,  strike,  or  abuse  a  horse  ;  before  entering  a  stall  speak 
to  him  gently,  and  then  go  in  quietly;  never  put  him  up  in  the 
stable  or  at  the  line  heated  without  throwing  a  blanket  over  him, 
or  walk  him  until  he  is  cool;  never  feed  him  grain  when  heated; 
never  water  a  horse  when  heated,  unless  the  exercise  or  march  is 
to  be  continued;  never  allow  his  back  to  be  cooled  suddenly  by 
washing  or  removing  the  blanket  unnecessarily,  etc. 

1369.  Q.  Into  how  many  thicknesses  should  the  saddle-blanket 
be  folded  ?    A.  Six. 

1370.  Q.  Describe  the  principal  points  to  be  observed  in  placing 
a  saddle-blanket  on  a  horse  ?  A.  The  blanket  should  be  placed 
from  the  left  side,  well  forward  on  his  back;  the  blanket  should 
be  slid  once  or  twice  from  front  to  rear  to  smooth  down  the  hair, 
and  never  under  any  circumstances  should  it  be  drawn  forward 
against  the  lay  of  the  hair  ;  remove  the  locks  of  the  mane  that 


DRILL   REGULATIOKfi— LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  165 

may  lie  under  the  blanket  ;  the  surcingle  should  be  buckled  on 
the  near  side,  a  little  below  the  edge  of  the  blanket. 

1371.  Q.  Describe  the  position  of  stand  to  horse.  A.  Each  re- 
cruit places  himself  face  to  the  front  on  the  near  side  of  the 
horse,  his  eyes  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  horse's  head,  and 
takes  the  position  of  the  soldier  dismounted,  except  that  his  right 
hand,  nails  down,  is  well  up  and  grasps  both  reins,  the  forefinger 
separating  them  six  inches  from  the  bit. 

1372.  Q.  What  interval  is  taken  between  horses  when  led  out  ? 
A.  Three  yards. 

1373.  Q.  What  part  of  the  body  of  a  man  mounted  should  be 
movable  and  which  immovable?  A.  The  body  from  the  hips  up 
and  from  the  knees  down  should  be  movable  ;  from  the  hips  to 
the  knees  should  be  immovable  and  close  to  the  horse.  The  arms 
move  freely  at  the  shoulders  to  avoid  communicating  the  motion 
of  the  body  to  the  reins  ;  the  hands  oscillate  slightly  with  the 
motion  of  the  horse,  but  otherwise  they  are  stationary. 

1374.  Q.  By  what  commands  may  men  be  dismounted  from  the 
off  side  of  their  horses  ?  A.  To  the  right,  prepare  to  dismount; 
dismount. 

1375.  Q.  What  are  men  permitted  to  do  when  the  command 
rest  is  given  while  mounted?  A.  They  are  permitted  to  turn  their 
heads,  to  talk,  and  to  make  slight  changes  of  position;  but  they 
must  not  lounge  on  their  horses. 

1376.  Q.  How  many  mounted  exercises  are  prescribed  for  ar- 
tillery instruction  ?    A.  Seventeen. 

1377.  Q,  How  is  a  horse  governed  by  the  use  of  a  rider's  legs  ? 
A.  The  legs  serve  to  urge  a  horse  forward,  to  support  him  and 
guide  him;  when  closed  without  pressure  tliey  tend  to  steady  the 
horse  in  his  position;  when  both  legs  are  closed  equally,  pressing 
the  horse,  they  tend  to  moving  him  forward  ;  when  closed,  the 
right  more  to  the  rear  than  the  left,  they  tend  to  turn  him  to 
the  right,  and  the  same  movement  with  the  left  leg  tends  to  turn 
him  to  the  left. 

1378.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  gathering  the  horse  ?  A.  It  means 
that  by  closing  both  legs  lightly  and  raising  the  hands  gently 
until  the  horse  feels  the  bit,  it  prepares  the  horse  for  whatever 
movement  is  to  follow. 

1379.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  opening  the  right  reinf  A.  It 
means  that  less  pressure  is  brought  upon  the  right  of  the  bit 
than  the  left. 

1380.  Q.  How  is  the  horse  wheeled  to  the  right  (or  left)  ?  A. 
Open  the  right  (or  left)  rein  and  close  the  right  (or  left)  leg, 
pressing  slightly  with  the  left  (or  right)  knee,  the  right  (or  left) 
leg  more  to  the  rear  than  the  other, 

1381.  Q.  In  making  an  about  mounted,  how  is  the  movement 
executed  ?  A.  Each  recruit  describes  a  half-circle  whose  radius 
is  two  yards,  and  then  moves  off  in  the  new  direction. 


166  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

1383.  Q.  In  making  an  oblique,  mounted,  how  is  the  movement 
executed?  A.  Each  recruit  makes  a  half- wheel  to  the  right, 
describing  the  eighth  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  two  yards,  and 
then  moves  off  in  the  new  direction. 

1383.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  movement  for  rein  back. 
A.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  command  backward^  march,  squad,  halt 
is  given.  At  the  command  backward,  the  horse  is  gathered  ;  at 
the  command  march  keep  a  firm  seat,  holding  both  legs  close  ; 
rein  in  gradually  until  the  horse  yields  to  the  pressure  of  the  bit 
and  steps  to  the  rear ;  then  immediately  yield  the  hand  slightly 
to  allow  the  horse  to  regain  his  balance  and  relax  the  legs  ;  con- 
tinue in  the  same  manner  to  yield  the  hand  and  relax  the  legs 
and  rein  in  and  close  the  legs  so  as  to  keep  the  horse  in  con- 
tinuous motion. 

1384.  Q.  Give  commands,  and  describe  how  to  mount  in  line 
(horse  unsaddled)  ?  A.  The  instructor  causes  the  men  to  call  off 
from  right  to  left,  and  commands  Prepare  to  mount;  mount; 
form  rank.  At  the  first  command  the  odd  numbers,  stepping 
off  with  the  left  foot,  lead  their  horses  four  yards  to  the  front, 
keeping  opposite  their  intervals  and  regulating  by  the  right.  All 
then  prepare  to  mount ;  at  the  second  command  they  mount,  and 
at  the  last  command  the  even  numbers  move  up  in  the  intervals 
and  form  rank. 

1385.  Q.  In  dismounting  in  line  (horses  unsaddled),  which  of 
the  numbers  move  forward?    A.  The  odd  numbers. 

1386.  Q.  Being  at  a  walk,  mounted,  how  is  the  horse  made  to 
trot  ?  A.  By  first  gathering  the  horse,  then  lowering  the  hands 
a  little  and  closing  the  legs  by  degrees  until  the  horse  obeys,  when 
the  hands  are  gradually  replaced  and  the  legs  relaxed. 

1387.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  canter  and  £i  gallop  ? 
A.  The  canter  is  a  short  collected  gallop,  at  the  rate  of  about  8 
miles  an  hour,  while  the  gallop  proper  is  a  freer  movement  of 
the  canter,  increasing  the  gait  to  12  miles  an  hour. 

1388.  Q.  Being  at  a  trot,  mounted,  how  is  the  horse  made  to 
canter  ?  A.  First  gather  the  horse,  close  both  legs,  and  rein  in 
with  a  light,  firm  hand  to  bring  his  haunches  under  him;  then 
carry  the  bridle  hand  to  the  left  and  increase  the  pressure  of  the 
left  leg,  in  order  to  throw  the  weight  on  the  near  hind  leg,  and 
allow  the  off,  fore  and  hind  legs  to  lead;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
rises  give  the  hand  and  relax  the  left  leg  ;  rein  in  slightly  and 
close  the  legs  with  a  light  even  pressure,  to  keep  the  horse  at  the 
gait  and  up  to  the  hand.  If  the  horse  leans  on  the  hand,  yield  it 
and  play  the  reins  slightly;  then  close  the  legs  and  rein  in  a  little 
abruptly  ;  when  the  horse  obeys,  yield  the  hand. 

1389.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  turns  on  the  forehand  and 
haunches  and  the  passage  ?  A.  It  is  to  teach  the  horse  to  be 
obedient  to  the  pressure  of  the  legs  and  reins,  and  to  instruct 
the  recruits  in  the  application  of  the  aids. 


toRiLL  REGULATIOIS-S — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  167 

1390.  Q.  Mention  some  of  the  other  exercises,  not  already  enu- 
merated, by  which  the  men  and  horses  may  be  perfected  in  move- 
ments ?  A.  The  standing  and  flying  jump,  ditch- jumping,  leap- 
ing the  bar  dismounted  with  the  horse,  wrestling  mounted,  the 
pursuit,  and  running  at  heads. 

1391.  Q.  Describe  Draw  sabre.  A.  At  the  command  draw 
reach  with  the  right  hand  over  the  bridle-hand  and  pass  it 
through  the  sabre-knot ;  seize  the  gripe  and  draw  the  blade  six 
inches  out  of  the  scabbard.  At  the  command  sahre  draw  the  sabre 
quickly,  raising  the  arm  to  its  full  extent  at  an  angle  of  about  45 
degrees,  the  sabre  edge  down  in  a  straight  line  with  the  arm; 
make  a  slight  pause,  bring  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  hol- 
low of  the  shoulder,  the  wrist  resting  on  the  top  of  the  thigh, 
forearm  against  the  body,  the  little  finger  on  the  outside  of  the 
gripe. 

1392.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  taking  intervals  for  sabre 
exercise  mounted  ?  A.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  commands 
are.  To  the  Hght  (or  left)  take  intervals^  march  ;  hy  the  left  (or 
right)  flank^  march  ;  squad^  halt;  right  (or  left)  dress;  front. 

1393.  Q.  What  difference  exists  in  the  sabre  exercise  mounted 
and  that  dismounted  ?  A.  Mounted  it  is  the  same  as  dismounted, 
except  that  at  the  command  guard  the  men  move  the  right  hand 
and  sabre  only. 

Horse  Artillery. 

1394.  Q.  What  does  the  special  instruction  require  for  the 
cannoneers  of  a  battery  of  horse  artillery  embrace  ?  A.  That  of 
a  gun  detachment  mounted,  and  that  of  two  or  more  gun  detach- 
ments mounted. 

1395.  Q.  How  are  the  men  of  a  horse  battery  equipped,  and 
with  what  are  they  armed  ?  A.  They  have  spurs  and  belts,  and 
in  garrison  may  be  armed  with  the  sabre,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
instructor. 

1396.  Q.  How  is  a  gun  detachment,  mounted,  formed  ?  A.  In 
two  ranks,  boot  to  boot,  with  the  distance  of  one  yard  from  the 
croups  of  the  front-rank  horses  to  the  heads  of  the  rear-rank 
horses.  The  gunner  and  even  numbers  are  in  the  front  rank  and 
the  odd  numbers  in  the  rear  rank,  the  gunner  being  covered  on 
the  right  by  No.  1.  No.  3  is  on  the  left  of  the  gunner,  who  is 
covered  by  No.  3. 

1397.  Q.  What  does  a  gun  detachment,  mounted,  include  be- 
sides the  cannoneers  for  the  service  of  the  gun  ?  A.  Two  addi- 
tional men,  Nos.  6  and  7,  who  are  required  as  horse- iiolders  for 
the  cannoneers'  horses.  When  projectiles  are  fired,  another  man, 
No.  8.  is  required  in  each  platoon  to  hold  the  horses  of  the  chief 
of  platoon  and  the  chiefs  of  sections  ;  he  is  assigned  to  the  right 
gun  detachment  of  the  platoon,  as  a  rule. 


168  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

>)  1398.  Q.  How  is  the  alignment  to  the  rear  of  a  gun  detach- 
tnont,  mounted,  effected?  A.  The  instructor  causes  two  files 
from  either  flank  to  rein  back  a  few  yards,  aligns  them  parallel 
to  the  line  and  opposite  their  places,  and  commands,  Bight  (or 
left)  backward^  dress;  Front.  At  the  command  dress  the  can- 
noneers rein  back,  keeping  their  horses  straight,  pass  a  little  to 
the  rear  of  the  line,  and  dress  up  to  the  men  who  have  been  es- 
tablished. 

1399.  Q.  Explain  how  a  right  oblique  is  made  with  a  gun  de- 
tachment, mounted  ?  A.  At  the  command.  Right  oblique,  march, 
the  cannoneers  open  out  slightly  and  each  man  makes  a  half- 
wheel  to  the  right,  so  that  the  head  of  his  horse  may  be  opposite 
the  shoulders  of  the  horse  on  his  right ;  each  rear-rank  man  fol- 
lows the  second  man  on  the  right  of  his  front-rank  man,  the  two 
cannoneers  nearest  the  flank  toward  w^hich  the  oblique  is  made 
maintaining  the  same  degree  of  obliquity  as  the  front  rank  ;  all 
the  cannoneers  then  move  off  in  the  new  direction,  regulating 
themselves  upon  the  guide,  w^hich  is,  without  indication  on  the 
side  toward  which  the  oblique  is  made. 

1400.  Q.  When  is  the  guide  announced  if  the  oblique  of  a  gun 
detachment,  mounted,  is  made  from  a  halt  ?  A.  On  taking  the 
direct  march. 

1401.  Q.  In  making  a  right  wheel  from  a  halt  with  a  gun  de- 
tachment, mounted,  on  what  kind  of  a  pivot  is  the  wheel  made, 
and  how  is  it  executed  by  the  pivot-man  ?  A.  It  is  made  on  a 
movable  pivot — the  pivot-man  moving  over  a  quarter-circle  whose 
radius  is  two  yards  ;  upon  completing  the  wheel  he  moves  off  at 
right  angles  to  the  original  direction. 

1402.  Q.  How  is  the  ahout  executed  by  a  gun  detachment, 
mounted  ?  A.  It  is  executed  the  same  as  the  wheel,  except  that 
the  leading  pivot-man  describes  a  half-circle  whose  radius  is 
two  yards,  and  then  moves  off  in  the  new  direction. 

1403.  Q.  What  must  be  done  in  making  an  about  by  a  gun  de- 
tachment, mounted,  as  soon  as  the  front-rank  man  on  the  march- 
ing flank  has  completed  the  about  ?  A.  The  guide  must  be  an- 
nounced or  the  detachment  halted. 

1404.  Q.  If  a  gun  detachment,  mounted,  be  marching,  and 
the  command  is  given.  By  file,  by  the  right  flank,  march,  how  is 
it  executed  ?  A.  The  men  on  the  flank  toward  which  the  move- 
ment is  to  be  made  execute  the  wheel  at  the  command  March  ; 
the  others  halt  and  then  wheel  in  succession. 

1405.  Q.  When  the  gun  detachment,  mounted,  is  in  column  of 
files,  marching,  how  should  each  cannoneer  conduct  his  horse  ? 
A.  So  that  the  man  of  his  rank  who  immediately  precedes  him 
may  hide  all  the  other  men  in  his  front. 

1406.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  forming  line  to  the  right 
or  left  from  column  of  files?  A.  Left  (or  right)  into  line,  march; 
Detachment  halt;  Right  (or  left)  dress ;  Front. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  169 

1407.  Q.  How  is  a  line  formed  to  the  front  from  a  column  of 
files  from  a  halt  or  at  a  walk  ?  A.  At  the  command,  Right  front 
iiito  line,  the  rear-rank  men  slacken  their  gait  until  each  is 
abreast  the  file  in  rear  of  his  proper  front-rank  file.  At  the  com- 
mand March,  the  front  rank  executes  right  front  into  line,  the 
rear-rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  each  man  moving  forward  so 
as  to  come  up  behind  his  file-leader. 

1408.  Q.  Describe  the  posts  of  the  gun  detachment,  mounted, 
at  the  piece,  limbered.  A.  In  rear  the  detachment  is  in  line, 
facing  to  the  front,  its  centre  opposite  the  muzzle  and  the  head 
of  the  front-rank  centre  horse  two  yards  from  it.  In  front,  the 
detachment  is  in  line  facing  to  the  front,  the  centre  opposite  the 
pole  and  the  croups  of  the  centre  horses  in  the  rear  rank,  two 
yards  from  the  heads  of  the  lead-horses. 

1409.  Q.  Describe  how  to  change  post  at  a  halt  from  rear  to 
front  of  the  mounted  detachment  at  the  piece  limbered.  A.  The 
instructor  commands,  Detachment  front,  march.  The  gunner 
commands  Right  oblique  at  the  first  command  and  repeats  the 
command  March.  As  soon  as  the  piece  is  unmasked  he  commands. 
Forward,  march;  when  the  detachment  has  advanced  far  enough 
he  adds :  Left  oblique,  march  ;  Forward,  march ;  Detachment, 
halt;  Left  dress;  Front. 

1410.  Q.  In  moving  the  mounted  gun  detachment  at  a  halt  from 
front  to  rear  at  the  piece  limbered,  what  are  the  commands  of  the 
gunner?  A.  At  the  first  command  of  the  instructor  the  gunner 
from  his  place  in  ranks  commands,  Detachment  left  about,  and 
repeats  the  command  March.  When  the  detachment  has  passed 
the  muzzle,  he  commands  :  Detachment  left  about,  March  ;  De- 
tachment halt ;  Left  dress;  Front. 

School  op  the  Driver. 

1411.  Q.  How  many  horses  has  a  driver  the  care  of,  what  are 
they  called,  and  which  does  he  mount  ?  A.  He  has  the  care  of 
two  horses,  called  a  pair;  the  one  he  mounts  is  called  the  near 
Jiorse,-  the  other  the  q/f  horse. 

1412.  Q.  How  many  harness-pegs  are  arranged  for  each  pair 
of  horses,  and  how  are  they  used  ?  A.  Three  pegs  to  each  pair  ; 
the  upper  peg  holds  the  pole-yoke  with  martingales  attached,  bri- 
dles and  collars  of  the  near  and  off  horses.  The  middle  peg  holds 
the  off  harness  and  the  saddle  with  its  attachments  over  the  seat. 
The  leg-guard  is  slipped  over  the  lower  peg,  and  the  nenr-harness 
is  placed  on  it ;  each  hair-pad  is  placed  on  top  of  its  saddle. 

1413.  Q.  Where  is  the  harness  placed  when  taken  from  the 
horses  in  the  field  ?  A.  The  pole-prop  is  placed  under  the  end  of 
the  pole  ;  the  single-trees  are  left  attached  to  the  double-trees  ; 
the  wheel-traces  are  unhitched  from  the  collars  only  and  laid 
over  the  chest  from  front  to  rear  or  on  the  footboard  ;  the  collars 


I'/O  'THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMISTER. 

of  the  wheel-team  on  top  of  the  limber-chest,  and  the  remainoer 
of  the  harness  is  placed  on  the  pole,  except  the  neck-yoke,  wliich 
is  placed  on  the  footboard. 

1414.  Q.  When  it  is  intended  to  lead  out,  what  does  the  driver 
do  as  soon  as  each  swing  and  lead  pair  has  been  harnessed  ?  A, 
He  turns  his  pair  about  at  the  line  or  in  a  double  stall,  so  that 
they  can  move  off  promptly,  and  then  stands  to  horse. 

1415.  Q.  To  what  part  of  the  harness  is  the  coupling-rein  at- 
tached? A.  To  the  off  ring  of  the  off  horse's  bit,  and  passes 
through  the  near  ring. 

1416.  Q.  How  is  the  off  horse  managed  when  in  harness  ?  A. 
By  the  coupling-rein,  the  whip,  and  the  bridle-reins. 

1417.  Q.  How  are  the  reins  used  for  the  off  horse  in  harness  ? 
A.  Whenever  the  driver  has  occasion  to  use  the  coupling-rein  he 
takes  hold  of  it,  in  front  of  the  left  hand,  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed for  the  right  rein  of  the  watering-bridle  ;  to  use  the  bridle- 
reins  of  the  off  horse  he  takes  hold  of  the  lash,  or  that  part  of 
the  reins  in  rear  of  the  collar  in  the  same  manner. 

1418.  Q.  What  are  the  bridle-reins  of  the  off  horse  auxiliary 
to,  and  for  what  purposes  will  they  be  used  ?  A.  They  are  aux- 
iliary to  the  coupling-rein,  and  they  will  be  used  for  halting  the 
off  horse  and  moderating  his  gait  whenever  the  driver  does  not 
need  the  coupling-rein  to  control  the  movements  of  the  horse. 
In  applying  them  the  right  hand  is  drawn  toward  the  thigh,  as 
by  means  of  the  collar  an  equal  tension  is  transmitted  to  each 
rein. 

1419.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  drivers  to  gather  their 
horses  when  in  harness  ?  A.  In  simultaneous  movements  all 
gather  their  horses  at  the  preparatory  command  ;  in  successive 
movements  the  men  who  are  to  move  at  the  command  of  execu- 
tion gather  their  horses  at  the  preparatory  command  ;  the  others 
just  before  they  begin  the  movement. 

1420.  Q.  In  marching  from  line  by  the  flank  with  intervals, 
what  does  each  driver  do  ?  A.  He  wheels  his  pair  to  the  right 
by  moving  the  pivot-horse  over  a  quarter- circle  whose  radius  is 
three  and  one  quarter  yards  ;  the  other  horse  quickens  his.  move- 
ments to  keep  in  line  with  the  pivot-horse.  On  the  completion 
of  the  wheel,  he  moves  off  his  pair  at  right  angles  to  the  original 
direction. 

1421.  Q.  In  marching  to  the  rear,  what  does  each  driver  do  ? 
A.  Instead  of  wheeling,  he  makes  his  pivot-horse  describe  a  half 
circle  whose  radius  is  3^  yards. 

1422.  Q.  In  marching  to  the  right  or  left  oblique,  what  part  of 
a  circle  is  described  ?  A.  The  eighth  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is 
3J  yards. 

1423.  Q.  To  leave  the  stable  or  picket-line  and  form  the  team 
in  line  of  pairs,  who  leads  and  how  is  the  line  formed  ?  A.  The 
lead-driver  begins  the  movement,  and  is  followed  by  the  swing 


DRILL  UEGtJLATiONS — LlGST  ARTILLERY.  I'}'! 

and  wheel -drivers.  The  team  is  formed  in  line  with  intervals  of 
two  feet  between  the  pairs,  the  lead-horses  on  the  right,  the  wheel- 
horses  on  the  left. 

1434.  Q.  When  horses  have  been  led  ont  by  teams,  describe 
how  they  may  be  connected  for  being  posted  with  their  carriages  ? 
A.  After  they  are  coupled  they  may  be  connected  by  the  traces. 
For  this  purpose  the  instructor  commands,  Hook  traces.  The 
swing-driver  goes  behind  his  off  horse,  passing  by  his  off  side, 
untrusses  and  hooks  the  rear  ends  of  the  swing-traces  to  the  front 
ends  of  the  corresponding  wheel-traces,  beginning  with  the  outer 
trace  of  the  off  horse  and  ending  with  the  outer  trace  of  the  near 
horse.  Each  lead-driver  conforms  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  swing-driver,  beginning  with  the  outer  trace  of 
his  off  horse  as  soon  as  the  swing-driver  has  hooked  the  corre- 
sponding trace  of  his  pair. 

1425.  Q.  In  disconnecting  the  pairs  of  a  team,  which  traces  are 
first  unhooked  ?    A.  The  outer  traces  of  the  near  horses. 

1426.  Q.  How  must  a  column  of  teams  enter  the  park  ?  A.  If 
right  in  front,  it  enters  at  its  left ;  if  left  in  front  it  enters  at  its 
right. 

1427.  Q.  When  a  connected  team  has  been  ordered  to  be  hitched, 
by  whom  is  it  hitched.to  the  carriage  ?    A.  By  the  cannoneers. 

1428.  Q.  When  a  disconnected  team  is  ordered  to  be  hitched, 
what  is  done?  A.  The  instructor  dismounts  the  drivers  and 
commands.  Drivers  Intch. 

1429.  Q.  When  the  command  UtiMtch  is  given,  who  unhitches 
the  team  ?    A.  The  cannoneers. 

1430.  Q.  When  it  is  desired  to  disconnect  the  pairs  and  unhitch 
at  the  same  lime,  what  command  is  given  ?  A.  Drivers,  tinhitch. 

1431.  Q.  When  a  team  is  hitched  to  a  carriage  and  a  prepara- 
tory command  is  given  for  a  movement  of  the  animals,  what  is 
the  general  rule  regarding  tlie  traces  ?  A.  Before  a  team  (hitched), 
moves,  the  traces  must  always  be  stretched  by  a  slight  movement 
of  the  horses  forward. 

1432.  Q.  When  the  team  is  halted,  on  the  execution  of  a  move- 
ment, are  the  traces  to  remain  slack  ?  A.  No ;  the  traces  are 
stretched  as  soon  as  the  carriage  stops,  by  moving  the  horses  a 
step  or  two  forward. 

1433.  Q.  How  are  the  rests  executed  with  a  team  hitched  ?  A. 
They  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Driver, 
except  that  the  drivers,  when  dismounted,  need  not  hold  the  reins, 
but  must  remain  on  the  left  of  their  horses  and  close  to  them. 

1434.  Q.  In  all  changes  of  direction  under  whose  control  is  the 
movement  of  the  carriage,  and  what  caution  must  be  preserved  by 
the  drivers?  A.  The  carriage  is  under  the  control  of  the  wheel- 
driver,  who  is  responsible  for  the  correct  execution  of  the  move- 
ment. The  lead  and  swing  drivers  keep  their  traces  stretched, 
and  aid  in  the  draft  as  much  as  possible  ;  but  they  must  be  careful 


172 

to  avoid  the  tension  that  would  pull  the  wheel-pair  out  of  its 
proper  direction. 

1435.  Q.  In  making  an  about,  with  a  team  hitched,  what  dif- 
ference is  made  in  the  radius  of  the  circle  as  described  for  a  team 
unhitched.  A.  There  is  no  difference  except  when  the  movement 
is  made  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  in  which  case  the  radius  is  somewhat 
increased. 

1436.  Q.  How  is  the  reverse  executed  with  the  team  hitched  ? 
A.  The  drivers  oblique  to  the  right ;  the  lead-driver  after  gaining 
7|-  yards  in  that  direction,  moves  his  horses  towards  the  left,  so 
that  the  extreme  part  of  the  curve  described  by  the  off  horse  will 
be  15  yards  from  the  line  of  departure  and  that,  after  passing 
three  yards  to  the  left  of  the  original  left  flank  of  the  team  and 
carriage,  they  will  return  to  the  ground  occupied  by  the  carriage 
at  the  beginning  of  the  movement.  The  swing-driver  follows  the 
lead-driver ;  the  wheel-driver  directs  his  horses  so  that  the  right 
limber-wheel  describes  a  loop  which,  extending  7|-  yards  to  the 
right  and  12  yards  to  the  front  of  the  line  of  departure,  passes  a 
little  to  the  left  of  the  original  left  flank  and  then  returns,  bring- 
ing the  hind  wheels  in  such  a  position  that  the  rear  of  the  carriage 
occupies  the  line  of  departure. 

1437.  Q.  How  is  a  carriage  moved  a  shoj't  distance  to  the  rear? 
A.  From  a  halt,  the  command  is  given.  Backward^  march ;  at 
which  the  drivers  rein  back  their  horses,  keeping  the  pole  straight, 
and  when  the  command  lialt  is  given  they  stretch  the  traces  and 
halt. 

1438.  Q.  How  is  a  carriage  backed  to  the  right  or  left  ?  A. 
From  a  halt,  the  command  is  given,  Right  (or  left)  backward, 
march ;  at  the  first  command  the  drivers  swing  the  team  to  the 
right,  without  advancing  or  backing  the  carriage  until  the  limber 
wheel  comes  against  the  wheel-guard  plate  ;  at  the  command 
march,  they  rein  the  horses  back,  taking  care  to  keep  them  to  the 
right ;  when  the  command  halt  is  given  they  straighten  the  team 
and  carriage,  stretch  the  traces  and  halt. 

Exercise  of  a  Section. 

1439.  Q.  "What  constitutes  a  section  of  a  battery  ?  A.  A  piece 
and  its  caisson. 

1440.  Q.  Describe  the  positions  occupied  by  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers  with  a  section  hitched  and  the  position  of  the  car- 
riages ?  A.  The  carriages  are  placed  in  column  with  two  yards, 
distance  between  the  rear  part  of  the  leading  carriage  and  the 
heads  of  the  lead-horses  of  the  carriage  which  follows.  The  chief  of 
section  takes  post  boot  to  boot  with  the  lead-driver  of  the  leading 
carriage,  and  on  his  left ;  the  caisson  corporal,  if  horsed,  is  with 
the  caisson  and  boot  to  boot  with  its  lead  or  swing-driver,  according 
as  the  piece  or  caisson  is  in  front.     The  chief  of  section  is  the  guide 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  173 

of  the  section  ;  the  guide  of  the  carriage  is  the  non-commissioned 
officer  boot  to  boot  with  its  lead-driver  ;  the  lead-driver  is  the  guide 
of  a  carriage  temporarily  without  a  non-commissioned  officer. 

1441.  Q.  At  the  command,  Caisson  pass  piece,  march,  while  at 
a  halt,  what  is  done  ?  A.  The  piece  stands  fast ;  the  caisson 
inclines  to  the  right,  passes  the  piece,  takes  its  place  in  front  by 
inclining  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward  ;  the  piece  then  follows 
in  the  track  of  the  caisson  at  two  yards'  distance.  The  chief  of 
section  moves  forward  and  joins  the  lead-driver  of  the  caisson  as 
he  passes  ;  the  caisson  corporal,  during  the  passage  is  boot  to  boot 
with  the  lead-driver ;  upon  passing  the  lead-horses  of  the  piece, 
he  falls  back  and  moves  boot  to  boot  with  his  swing-driver. 

1442.  Q.  How  is  the  gait  of  the  leading  piece  governed  in  the 
passage  of  carriages  ?  A.  If  at  a  walk,  the  piece  halts  at  the 
command  March  ;  if  at  a  trot  or  at  a  walk  and  the  command  be 
trot,  the  piece  moves  at  a  walk  until  the  caisson  passes,  and  then 
takes  up  the  trot ;  if  at  a  gallop  or  trot,  the  same  principle  ap- 
plies, the  piece  moving  at  a  trot. 

1443.  Q.  Upon  the  completion  of  the  about  and  the  reverse 
with  a  section,  hitched,  what  is  required  of  the  chief  of  section 
and  the  caisson  corporal  ?  A.  The  chief  of  section  moves  forward 
and  places  himself  beside  the  lead-driver  of  the  leading  carriage  ; 
the  caisson  corporal  falls  back  with  the  swing-driver  ;  or  moves 
forward  beside  the  lead-driver  of  the  caisson,  according  as  the 
piece  or  caisson  was  in  front  at  the  beginning  of  the  movement. 

1444.  Q.  What  is  a  coimtermarch  f  A.  It  is  a  movement  to 
place  a  piece  and  its  caisson  in  the  same  relative  position  on  the 
ground  they  occupied  before,  but  facing  in  the  opposite  direction. 

School  of  the  Battery. 

1445.  Q.  Of  what  does  a  section  and  platoon  and  battery  con- 
sist ?  A.  A  section  consists  of  a  piece  of  light  artillery  and  its 
caisson  manned,  horsed,  and  equipped  ;  a  platoon  consists  of  two 
sections  ;  a  battery  of  manoeuvres  consists  of  two  or  three  pla- 
toons, either  with  or  without  caissons  ;  in  a  battery  of  machine 
guns  the  number  of  platoons  may  be  increased  to  four  or  five. 

1446.  Q.  What  is  the  front  of  a  battery  ?  A.  In  the  order  in 
battery  it  is  the  line  occupied  by  its  pieces  ;  in  the  other  forma- 
tions, it  is  the  line  occupied  by  the  lead-drivers  of  the  front-rank 
carriages. 

1447.  Q.  What  does  the  personnel  of  a  battery  of  manoeuvre 
comprise  ?  A.  One  captain,  who  commands  the  battery  ;  four 
lieutenants,  three  who  are  chiefs  of  platoons  and  one  who  is  chief 
of  caissons  ;  one  first  sergeant,  who  reports  all  emergencies  to 
the  captain  and  acts  as  his  assistant ;  one  quartermaster  ser- 
geant, whose  duty  it  is  to  supply  the  battery  and  care  for  its  ma- 
tiriel ;  one  stable  and  veterinary  sergeant,  whose  duties  in  camp 


174  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

and  garrison  are  connected  with  the  picket  line  and  stables  and 
the  care  of  sick  horses,  and  on  the  march  and  in  action  with  tlie 
reserve  of  the  battery  ;  six  sergeants,  who  are  chiefs  of  sections  ; 
six  gun  detachments,  each  composed  of  seven  men  (two  corporals 
and  five  privates),  and  in  horse  and  heavy  field  batteries  each  de- 
tachment is  composed  of  two  corporals  and  seven  privates  ;  one 
driver  to  each  pair  of  horses  ;  two  trumpeters,  and  one  guidon, 
who  ordinarily  indicates  the  position  of  the  guide. 

1448.  Q.  What  non-commissioned  officers  are  not  a  component 
part  of  the  battery  of  manoeuvre  ?  A.  The  quartermaster  ser- 
geant and  the  stable  sergeant ;  they  have,  however,  positions  as- 
signed them  for  inspections  and  reviews. 

1449.  Q.  How  are  the  enlisted  men  of  a  battery  armed  in  the 
field  ?  A.  The  first  sergeant,  quartermaster  sergeant,  stable  ser- 
geant, and  chiefs  of  sections  are  armed  with  the  sabre  and  re- 
volver ;  all  other  men  are  armed  with  the  revolver  and  knife. 

Formations  of  the  Battery. 

1450.  Q.  "What  are  the  habitual  formations  of  a  battery  ?  A. 
The  order  in  line,  order  in  column,  and  the  order  in  battery. 

1451.  Q.  What  is  the  o7'der  in  line  of  a  battery  ?  A.  That  in 
which  the  carriages  are  formed  in  one  or  two  ranks,  the  horses 
all  facing  in  the  same  direction  ;  the  pieces  limbered  and  in  one 
rank,  and  each  preceded  or  followed  by  its  caisson  when  caissons 
are  present. 

1453.  Q.  What  is  the  order  in  column  of  a  battery  ?  A.  That 
in  which  the  battery  is  formed  in  column  of  platoons  or  in  col- 
umn of  sections,  the  pieces  being  limbered  and  each  followed  or 
preceded  by  its  caisson  when  caissons  are  present. 

1453.  Q.  What  is  the  order  in  battery  of  a  battery  ?  A.  That 
in  which  the  pieces  are  prepared  for  firing,  the  pieces  and  limbers 
being  formed  in  two  parallel  lines  ;  if  the  caissons  are  present 
they  form  a  third  line  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  limbers.  The 
pieces  are  turned  toward  the  enemy  ;  the  limbers  and  caissons, 
unless  otherwise  directed,  face  to  the  front. 

1454.  Q.  What  are  the  intervals  between  carriages  ?  A.  In 
column  of  platoons,  in  line,  and  in  battery  the  interval  between 
carriages  is  fifteen  yards  ;  in  horse  batteries,  nineteen  yards.  In 
column  or  in  line,  the  distance  between  two  carriages,  or  between 
a  carriage  and  mounted  detachment,  is  two  yards  ;  in  battery, 
the  distance  between  the  lines  of  limbers  and  pieces  is  ten  yards, 
measured  from  the  end  of  the  handspike  to  the  heads  of  the  lead- 
horses  or  to  the  backs  of  the  limbers,  according  as  the  limbers 
are  faced  to  the  front  or  rear  ;  between  the  lines  of  limbers  and 
caissons  the  distance  is  eleven  yards. 

1455.  Q.  In  what  cases  are  intervals  between  carriages  dimin- 
ished, and  how  much  ?    A.  When  carriages  have  but  one  or  two 


DRILL   REGULATION'S — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  175 

pairs  of  horses ;  with  one  pair  the  distance  is  diminished  six 
yards  ;  with  two  pair,  three  yards. 

1456.  Q.  Describe  the  posts  of  officers  of  a  battery  in  the  order 
in  line.  A.  The  captain  is  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  battery, 
four  yards  from  the  line  of  the  heads  of  the  lead-horses ;  each 
chief  of  platoon  is  half-way  between  the  leading  carriages  of  his 
platoon  and  in  line  with  the  lead-drivers. 

1457.  Q.  Describe  the  posts  of  the  non-commissioned  officers 
and  musicians  of  a  battery  in  the  order  in  line  ?  A.  The  chief  of 
caissons  is  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  battery,  the  head  of  his 
horse  four  yards  from  the  line  of  the  rear  of  the  rear-rank  car- 
riages ;  the  first  sergeant  is  half-way  between  the  central  sec- 
tions, in  line  with  the  limber  wheels  of  the  pieces  ;  the  quarter- 
master sergeant  is  four  yards  from  the  left  flank  of  the  battery, 
aligned  on  the  lead-drivers  of  the  front-rank  carriages ;  the 
stable  sergeant  is  on  the  left  of  the  quartermaster  sergeant  and 
boot  to  boot  with  him  ;  each  chief  of  section  is  boot  to  boot  with 
the  lead-driver  of  his  section  and  on  his  left ;  each  caisson  cor- 
poral is  on  the  left  and  boot  to  boot  with  the  lead  or  swing-driver 
of  the  caisson,  according  as  the  pieces  or  caissons  are  in  front ; 
the  guidon  is  four  yards  from  the  right  flank  of  the  battery, 
aligned  on  the  lead-drivers  of  the  front-rank  carriages  at  inspec- 
tions and  reviews  and  before  leaving  the  park,  but  on  otlier  occa- 
sions he  is  boot  to  boot  with  the  right  or  left  guide  of  the  battery, 
and  on  his  left ;  the  trumpeters  at  inspections  and  reviews  are  in 
line  on  the  right  of  the  guidon,  each  feeling  the  boot  of  the  man 
on  his  left ;  on  other  occasions  they  have  the  same  positions  as 
in  column. 

1458.  Q.  Describe  the  positions  of  the  cannoneers  of  a  battery 
in  the  order  in  line  ?  A.  They  are  at  their  posts  or  mounted  on 
the  chests.  In  horse  batteries  they  are  in  the  ranks  of  the 
mounted  detachments,  two  yards  in  rear  of  their  pieces,  whether 
the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 

1459.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  the  officers  of  a  battery  in  the  order 
in  battery  ?  A.  The  captain  is  on  the  left  of  the  chief  of  the 
centre  platoon,  but  goes  wherever  his  presence  is  necessary  ;  each 
chief  of  platoon  is  habitually  in  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  half- 
way between  the  lines  of  pieces  and  limbers. 

1460.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  the  horse-holders  in  a  horse  battery 
in  the  order  in  battery  ?  A.  The  horse-holders,  with  the  horses 
of  the  detachment,  are  either  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  limbers  or 
two  yards  in  front  of  the  lead-horses  of  the  limbers,  according 
as  the  limbers  face  to  the  front  or  rear  ;  in  either  case  the  horse- 
holders  face  to  the  front. 

1461.  Q.  What  do  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  sections  do  with 
their  horses  when  projectiles  are  fired  ?    A.  They  habitually  di^ 
mount  and  give  the  reins  of  their  horses  to  a  supernumeran^Jra^^JE?."^ 
noneer  of  the  platoon.  J^^^*^^ 


.v^^ 


»rr  A^"^ 


176  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

1462.  Q.  To  whom  do  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  sections  give 
their  horses  when  there  is  no  spare  cannoneer  for  the  purpose  ? 
A.  The  chief  of  platoon  gives  the  reins  of  his  horse  to  the  swing- 
driver  of  his  right-limber,  if  the  limbers  are  facing  the  front,  or 
to  the  swing-driver  of  his  left  limber  if  the  limber  is  facing  to 
the  rear ;  the  chiefs  of  sections  give  the  reins  of  their  horses  to 
the  wheel-drivers  of  their  limbers. 

1463.  Q.  When  does  the  caisson  corporal  dismount  in  the  order 
in  battery,  and  what  does  he  do  with  his  horse?  A.  He  dis- 
mounts when  ammunition  is  served  from  a  caisson,  and  gives 
the  reins  of  his  horse  to  the  wheel  driver. 

1464.  Q.  What  is  the  depth  and  front  of  a  field,  as  well  as 
horse  battery,  of  three  platoons  in  order  in  battery  ?  A.  Field 
battery,  53  yards  depth,  87  yards  front ;  horse  battery,  53  yards 
depth,  107  yards  front. 

1465.  Q.  When  preparatory  signals  are  given  with  the  sabre, 
what  is  the  signal  of  execution?  A.  The  return  to  guard  ivom 
the  preparatory  signal. 

1466.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  the  sabre  for 
Forward  f  A.  The  first  and  second  motions  of  front  cut ;  the 
captain  moves  his  horse  forward, 

1467.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Right 
and  left  oblique  ?  A.  Extend  the  arm  and  sabre  obliquely  to  the 
right  (or  left)  until  both  are  horizontal. 

1468.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  By  the 
right  (or  left)  flank  ?  A.  Extend  the  arm  and  sabre  directly  to 
the  right  (or  left)  until  both  are  horizontal. 

1469.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  To  increase 
the  gait  one  degree  ?  A.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  right  shoulder, 
blade  vertical ;  raise  and  lower  the  hand,  keeping  the  blade  ver- 
tical ;  to  be  several  times  repeated. 

1470.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  To  decrease 
the  gait  one  degree  ?    A.  The  first  motion  of  the  head  parry. 

1471.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Halt? 
A.  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent,  the  blade  in  pro- 
longation of  the  arm. 

1472.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Platoons 
right  (or  left)  wheel  ?  A.  The  first  and  second  motions  of  right 
(or  left)  cut. 

1473.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Reverse  f 
A.  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent,  the  blade  in  pro- 
longation of  the  arm,  and  describe  several  horizontal  circles  with 
the  point  of  the  sabre. 

1474.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Right 
(or  left)  front  into  li7ie  ?  A.  The  first  and  second  motions  of 
right  (or  left)  moulinet. 

1475.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  In  hat- 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  177 

tery  ?    A.  The  first  and  second  motions  of  tierce-point,  followed 
by  the  signal  for  reverse  when  the  guns  have  advanced  21  yards. 

1476.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Action 
real-  ?    A.  The  first  and  second  motions  of  rear  point. 

1477.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Right 
(or  left)  front  into  battery  f  A.  T^e  first  and  second  motions  of 
right  (or  left)  moulinet,  followed  by  the  first  and  second  motions 
of  tierce-point. 

1478.  Q.  What  is  the  preparatory  signal  with  sabre  for  Right 
(or  left)  front  into  battery  faced  to  the  rear  f  A.  The  first  and 
second  motions  of  right  (or  left)  moulinet,  followed  by  the  first 
and  second  motions  of  rear-point. 

ROUTE  MARCHES. 

1479.  Q.  What  is  the  habitual  column  of  route  of  a  battery  ? 
A.  The  column  of  sections ;  but  the  column  of  platoons  is  pref- 
erable when  that  formation  can  be  maintained  for  a  considerable 
distance. 

1480.  Q.  Where,  in  a  general  way,  are  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned oflBcers  of  a  battery  on  route  marches  ?  A.  The 
captain  is  about  15  yards  in  front,  followed  by  the  trumpeters  ; 
the  chiefs  of  platoons  opposite  the  rear  carriage  of  their  pla- 
toons ;  the  chief  of  caissons  at  the  rear  of  the  column. 

1481.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  in  a  general  way  how 
to  park  the  battery  to  the  right  ?  A.  The  captain  directs  the  col- 
umn 50  yards  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  line  to  be  occupied 
by  the  lead-drivers  and  commands.  Right  into  park;  at  (so 
many)  yards'  interval.  Chiefs  of  platoons  repeat  command.  The 
chief  of  leading  section  commands,  Section  right  wheel;  captain 
then  commands  March,  at  which  the  leading  section  wheels  to 
the  riglit,  and  is  halted  by  its  chief  when  the  leading  driver  ar- 
rives in  line  with  the  guidon.  The  other  sections  move  forward 
until  3^  yards  from  the  point  opposite  its  place  in  park,  when  it 
wheels  to  the  right  at  the  command  of  its  chief  and  is  halted 
three  yards  from  the  line,  when  the  chief  commands,  /Section 
halt ;  Left  dress. 

1482.  Q.  Describe  the  movement  of  Right,  front,  into  park,  at 
(so  many)  yards  iiiterval  f  A.  The  leading  section  moves  for- 
ward and  halts  at  the  command  of  its  chief  on  arriving  at  the 
point  established  by  the  guidon;  all  the  other  sections  oblique  to 
the  right  until  nearly  opposite  their  places  in  park,  when  the 
chief  commands  Forward,  march,  and  when  at  three  yards  from 
the  line  halts  his  section  and  commands  left  dress. 

1483.  Q.  In  horse  batteries,  if  it  is  necessary  to  park  with  but 
8  yards  distance,  what  is  done  with  the  detachments  ?  A.  The 
captain  directs  them  to  leave  the  column  by  an  oblique  as  the 
battery  approaches  the  park. 


178 

1484.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  forming  column  of  pla- 
toons from  column  of  sections  ?  A.  Captain  commands  Form 
platoom;  left  (or  right)  oblique.  Chief  of  leading  platoon,  Form 
platoon;  left  (or  right)  oblique.  Chief  of  other  platoons,  Forward; 
chief  of  leading  section,  Forward.  Captain  (repeated  by  chiefs 
of  platoons  and  chief  of  leadijig  section),  march.  The  chiefs  of 
rear  platoons,  Form  platoon;  left  oblique  in  time  to  add  march., 
when  each  leading  section  is  8  yards  from  the  rear  carriage  of  the 
preceding  section. 

1485.  Q.  In  what  way  is  the  oblique  in  column  executed  by 
horse  batteries  different  from  field  batteries  ?  A.  The  carriages 
of  the  left  sections  do  not  march  in  the  trace  of  the  carriages 
which  preceded  the  carriages  on  their  right  before  the  oblique, 
and  the  spaces  between  the  carriages,  measured  perpendicularly 
to  the  oblique  direction  are  different  from  those  in  field  bat- 
teries. 

1486.  Q.  Give  command  and  describe  how  to  form  caissons  on 
the  flank  from  column  of  sections.  A.  Captain  commands. 
Caisson  right  (or  left),  repeated  by  chiefs  of  platoons.  At  the 
command  march  Dy  the  captain,  the  pieces  move  forward  and  the 
caissons  oblique  to  the  right;  the  leading  piece  halts  after  advanc- 
ing 18  yards;  the  other  pieces  halt  when  each  has  closed  to  3 
yards ;  each  caisson  moves  forward  as  soon  as  it  has  gained  15 
yards,  and  halts  when  in  line  with  its  piece. 

1487.  Q.  When  caissons  are  ordered  on  the  flank  from  column 
of  sections,  what  is  the  formation  called  ?  A.  A  flank  coluynn. 

1488.  Q.  Without  giving  commands,  describe  forming  front 
into  line  from  column  of  platoons  at  a  halt  ?  A.  The  leading  pla- 
toon advances  19  yards  and  is  halted;  the  other  platoons  oblique 
to  the  right  (or  left),  and  then  move  forward  by  half- wheeling 
to  the  left  (or  right)  when  the  carriages  are  in  rear  of  their  places 
inline;  on  arriving  at  three  yards  from  the  line  each  platoon  is 
halted,  and  then  dressed  to  the  left  (or  right). 

1489.  Q.  If  forming  front  into  line  from  column  of  platoons, 
and  the  guide  is  not  on  the  flank  to  which  the  movement  is  made, 
what  must  the  captain  do?  A.  Announce  it  on  that  flank  of  the 
column  which  will  become  the  point  of  rest  before  giving  any 
commands. 

1490.  Q.  What  modifications  are  necessary  in  forming/row^  into 
line  faced  to  the  rear  from  column  of  platoons  of  the  movement 
of  forming  front  into  line  ?  A.  The  chief  of  the  leading  platoon 
commands.  Countermarch,  march,  as  soon  as  his  platoon  has  ad- 
vanced 19  yards,  the  guidon  halting  at  the  command  march  ;  on 
the  completion  of  the  countermarch  the  platoon  is  halted  and 
dressed.  The  chief  of  the  centre  platoon  commands  Countermarch 
as  soon  as  his  lead-drivers  are  in  line  with  the  guidon,  and  adds 
march  when  they  have  advanced  three  yards  beyond  him;  on  the 
completion  of  the  countermarch  the  platoon  is  halted  and  dressed. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  179 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  by  the  rear  pla- 
toon as  described  for  the  centre. 

1491.  Q.  Without  giving  commands,  describe  in  a  general  way 
the  movement  of  forming  double  column  from  line  at  a  halt  ?  A. 
The  centre  platoon  moves  forward,  the  guidon  taking  post  when 
the  guide  is  announced.  The  right  platoon  makes  a  left  oblique, 
and  the  left  platoon  makes  a  right  oblique.  When  the  section 
nearest  the  column  in  each  platoon  is  about  to  enter  it,  the  pla- 
toons are  formed  in  column  of  sections,  the  right  forming  in  rear 
of  the  right  and  the  left  in  rear  of  the  left  sections  of  the  centre 
platoon. 

1492.  Q.  In  double  column  what  is  the  position  of  the  captain, 
the  first  sergeant,  and  chief  of  caissons  ?  A.  The  captain  takes 
post  as -in  column  of  platoons;  the  first  sergeant  retains  his  post 
as  in  line  ;  the  chief  of  caissons  follows  the  movement  and 
places  himself  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  column,  opposite  the 
centre. 

1493.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  movement  of  forming 
to  and  on  right  (or  left)  into  line  from  double  column  ?  A.  Cap- 
tain commands,  To  and  on  right  (or  left)  i7ito  line.  Chief  of 
leading  platoon.  Platoon  righl  (or  left)  wheel.  Chiefs  of  other 
platoons,  Forward.  Captain  (repeated  by  chiefs  of  platoons), 
March.  At  this,  the  leading  platoon'wheels  to  tjie  right  and  is 
dressed  towards  the  pivot  when  its  rear  pivot-carriage  has  ad- 
vanced its  own  length  in  the  new  direction.  The  other  platoons 
advance  :  that  on  the  right  execute  to  the  right,  and  that  on  the 
left  on  right  into  line  when  the  leading  section  of  each  arrives 
opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  chiefs  of  sections  giving  the  com- 
mands for  their  sections  to  wheel,  halt  and  dress. 

1494.  Q.  In  wheeling  a  battery  in  line  how  will  the  section 
move?  A.  The  pivot-section  describes  a  quarter  circle  whose 
radius  is  15  yards,  and  then  moves  off  in  the  new  direction  ;  the 
other  sections  move  at  an  increased  gait,  proportioning  their  swift- 
ness to  their  distances  from  the  pivot  and  preserving  their  inter- 
vals from  it;  they  arrive  on  the  line  in  succession,  remaining  as 
short  a  time  as  possible  in  rear,  without  urging  their  horses  too 
much. 

1495.  Q.  How  is  a  battery  in  forming  column  from  line  wheeled 
on  a  fixed  pivot  ?  A.  Captain  commands.  Battery  right  (or  left) 
march.  This  is  executed  as  described  for  the  wheel,  except  that 
the  radius  is  3;^  yards,  and  the  chief  of  the  right  platoon  halts 
his  platoon  as  soon  as  the  pivot-section  is  straightened  out  in  the 
new  direction. 

1496.  Q.  By  what  means  may  a  battery  in  line,  at  a  walk,  close 
and  extend  intervals  ?  A.  Captain  (repeated  by  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons) commands.  On  first  (or  such)  section,  to  (so  many)  yards 
close  (or  extend)  intervals  ;  trot.  Chiefs  of  sections  (except  desig- 
nated one)  command,  Right  oblique;  trot.    The  captain  com- 


180  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

mands,  March,  and  then  Guide  rigid  (or  left).  The  designated 
section  moves  straight  to  the  front  at  a  walk  ;  each  of  the  other 
sections  oblique. 

1497.  Q.  Without  giving  commands,  describe  how  a  battery  in 
line,  at  a  halt,  may  be  countermarched  with  diminished  inter- 
vals. A.  The  right  section  of  each  platoon  moves  forward;  when 
the  sections  are  all  disengaged  the  sections  countermarch;  when 
the  guide  is  given  at  the  completion  of  the  countermarch  the 
sections  in  rear  take  the  trot,  and  resume  the  walk  when  in  line. 

1498.  Q.  How  is  the  passage  of  obstacles  accomplished  ?  A. 
If  any  obstacle  presents  itself  in  front  of  a  platoon  during 
the  march,  the  necessary  commands  either  to  break  the  platoon 
into  column  of  sections,  to  close  the  interval,  or  to  halt  it  and 
form  it  in  column  behind  the  adjoining  platoon,  are  given  by  its 
chief  without  waiting  for  orders;  after  which  the  platoon  resumes 
its  place  in  line  by  increasing  the  gait,  its  chief  habitually  caus- 
ing it  to  execute  the  movement  the  reverse  of  that  by  which  it 
left  its  place  in  line. 

1499.  Q,  Previous  to  all  formations  in  battery,  either  from 
line  or  column,  what  must  the  captain  do  ?  A.  By  passage  of 
carriages,  he  places  the  pieces  in  front  or  rear,  if  not  already 
there,  according  as  he  desires  forming  in  battery  to  the  front  or 
rear. 

1500.  Q.  If  at  a  halt  in  line,  and  the  captain  commands.  In 
hattery  march,  how  is  the  movement  executed  ?  A.  The  cais- 
sons stand  fast,  and  are  dressed  to  their  left  by  their  chief. 
The  chiefs  of  platoons  and  sections  and  the  pieces  march  to  the 
front  in  line  at  a  walk.  When  the  pieces  have  advanced  twen- 
ty-one yards  they  reverse.  Each  chief  of  section  commands, 
Action  in  time  to  add  Rear,  when  the  muzzle  of  his  piece  is  in 
line  with  his  horse's  head;  the  piece  halts  at  the  command  rear, 
and  is  prepared  for  firing. 

1501.  Q.  How  are  the  pieces  in  battery  aligned  ?  A.  On  their 
wheels. 

1502.  Q.  If  the  pieces  be  in  front  at  a  halt,  what  is  the  method 
of  coming  in  battery  when  the  pieces  are  already  on  the  line  of 
battle?  A.  The  captain  commands  (repeated  by  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons), Action  front.  At  the  command  Front,  each  piece  is  pre- 
pared for  firing  ;  each  caisson  moves  at  a  trot,  executes  a  left 
about,  and  takes  its  place  in  battery  by  another  left  about,  at  a 
signal  from  the  chief  of  caissons,  who  also  halts  the  caissons  by 
signal  and  aligns  them  to  the  left. 

1503.  Q.  Describe  how  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear  from  line, 
being  at  a  halt.  A.  Captain  commands  (repeated  by  chiefs  of 
platoons).  Action  rear.  At  the  command  Rear,  the  caissons  ad- 
vance at  a  trot  21  yards  and  take  their  place  in  battery  by  a  Re- 
vei'se. 

1504.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  forming  line  to  the  front 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  181 

irom.in  battery?  A.  Limber  rear  ;  Pieces  reverse;  Caissons  for- 
ward, march  ;  Guide  right  (or  left),  or  Battery  halt. 

1505.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  forming  line  to  the  front 
from  in  battery  when  the  caissons  are  in  front?  A.  Limber 
front;  Caissons  pass  pieces,  march;  Guide  right  (or  left),  or 
Battery  halt. 

1506"  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  how  to  form  in  battery 
on  the  right  from  column  of  platoons  ?  A.  The  captain  com- 
mands, On  right  into  battery,  march.  This  is  executed  as  for 
forming  on  right  into  line,  except,  the  leading  platoon  having 
•wheeled  to  the  right,  its  chief  commands,  In  battery,  march,  the 
first  command  being  given  when  his  pivot  caisson,  after  complet- 
ing the  wheel,  has  advanced  its  own  length  in  the  new  direction. 
The  other  platoons  having  wheeled  to  the  right,  the  chiefs  give 
their  commands  so  as  to  form  them  in  battery  on  a  line  with  the 
leading  platoon. 

1507.  Q.  How  do  you  form  in  battery  from  double  column  ? 
A.  The  captain  commands,  Right  and  left  front  into  battery, 
march.  This  is  executed  as  for  forming  line  to  the  front  from 
double  column,  except  that  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  com- 
mands, l7i  battery,  march,  the  command  In  battery  being  given 
when  the  platoon  has  advanced  six  yards.  As  each  of  the  other 
sections  arrives  in  line  its  chief  of  section  forms  it  in  battery  by 
the  same  commands. 

1508.  Q.  If  the  pieces  cannot  be  brought  about  by  hand,  give 
commands  for  forming  in  battery  to  the  rear  from  battery.  A. 
Fire  to  the  rear ;  Limber  rear  ;  Caissons  pass  pieces,  march; 
Pieces  reverse,  march  ;  Action  rear. 

1509.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  how  the  battery,  being 
in  line  at  a  halt,  with  pieces  in  front,  is  advanced  in  echelon  of 
sections.  A.  Captain  commands  (repeated  by  chiefs  of  platoons), 
Sections  from  the  right  (or  left)  ;  Front  into  echelon.  Chief  of 
right  section  commands,  Forward.  Captain  commands,  March, 
at  which  the  right  section  moves  forward,  followed  by  its  caisson. 
The  next  section  moves  forward  by  command  of  its  chief  as  soon 
as  its  leaders  are  abreast  the  leaders  of  the  rear  carriage  on  the 
right ;  the  other  sections  commence  the  movement  in  succession, 
according  to  the  same  rule. 

1510.  Q.  Without  giving  commands,  describe  how  to  retire  a 
battery  firing  with  prolonge  fixed.  A.  Prolonges  having  been 
fixed,  the  caissons  reverse  so  that  their  horses  may  face  in  the 
same  direction  as  those  of  the  limbers  ;  the  cannoneers  at  each 
piece  face  about  at  the  command  Retire,  and  at  the  command 
March  the  limber  moves  off,  dragging  the  piece  ;  the  cannoneers, 
except  Nos.  1  and  3,  march  on  the  left  of  the  piece  ;  the  gunner 
attends  to  the  handspike,  folding  it  over  the  flask  in  passing 
ditches,  etc.,  and  moves  the  trail  to  the  right  or  left  whenever 


182  THE   AHMY   0F1?ICER*S  EXAMTKEE. 

the  direction  is  changed,  so  that  the  wheels  will  not  cut  the  pro- 
longe  ;  No.  5  keeps  it  clear  of  the  limber-wheels. 

1511.  Q.  When  a  battery  is  to  be  marched  a  considerable  dis- 
tance in  column  of  platoons,  to  what  extent  can  the  distance  be- 
tween platoons  be  reduced  ?    A.  To  two  yards. 

1512.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  closing  the  column  of  pla- 
toons ?    A.  Close  171  mass  ;  Guide  right  (or  left) ,  march. 

Organization  of  Artillery. 

1513.  Q.  Into  what  are  artillery  troops  divided  ?  A.  Into  light 
artillery  and  heavy  artille7-y. 

1514.  Q.  What  does  light  artillery  include,  and  what  service 
especially  belongs  to  it  ?  A.  It  includes  horse  batteries^  field  bat- 
teries, and  mowntain  batteries.  To  it  belongs  the  service  of  the 
batteries  that  manoeuvre  with  troops  in  the  field. 

1515.  Q.  How  are  machine  batteries  designated  ?  A.  Accord- 
ing to  their  equipment  and  model  of  gun,  as  horse,  field,  or  moun- 
tain. 

1516.  Q.  What  calibre  guns  are  used  for  field  and  horse  bat- 
teries? A.  The  3.2  gun  is  used  in  both  field  and  horse  ;  the  3.6 
is  used  only  in  field  batteries. 

1517.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  in  the  designation  of  the  3.3 
and  the  3.6  inch  gun?  A.  The  former  is  designated  light  field 
and  the  latter  heavy  field  battery. 

1518.  Q.  What  is  considered  the  heavy  artillei-y  of  an  army 
in  the  field  ?  A.  Those  batteries  which  serve  the  siege  and  posi- 
tion guns  and  the  artillery-ammunition  and  supply  trains. 

1519.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  divisional  artillei^y  f  A.  It 
consists  of  a  battalion  of  from  two  to  four  batteries.  It  is  an  in- 
tegral part  of  the  division. 

1520.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  corps  artillery  f  A.  It  con- 
sists of  two  or  more  battalions,  composed  of  field  and  horse  bat- 
teries in  suitable  proportions,  commanded  by  a  colonel  with  proper 
staff  of  his  rank. 

1521.  Q.  What  constitutes  an  artillery  brigade  ?  A.  All  the 
artillery  attached  to  an  army  corps. 

1522.  Q.  What  is  the  proportion  of  light  artillery  to  troops  ? 
A.  From  three  to  four  guns  to  1000  men. 

1523.  Q.  What  does  a  battery  consist  of  ?  A.  A  fixed  number 
of  pieces  and  caissons,  a  battery  wagon  and  forge,  and  a  store 
wagon,  together  with  a  sufficient  number  of  officers,  men,  and 
horses  for  its  efficient  service. 

Artillery  in  the  Field. 

1524.  Q.  As  a  tactical  principle,  how  is  artillery  employed  ? 
A.  In  battalions  of  three  or  four  batteries,  or  in  groups  of  two 
or  three  battalions. 


DRILL  REGULATION'S — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  183 

1525.  Q.  What  should  a  battery  do  that  has  expended  all  its 
ammunition  ?  A.  Remain  in  its  position  until  orders  are  received 
for  it  to  change,  as  long  as  ammunition  can  be  supplied.  When 
no  more  ammunition  can  be  had  it  should  retire. 

1526.  Q.  What  is  the  principal  duty  of  artillery  in  the  offen- 
sive ?  A.  To  prepare  for  the  infantry  attack  by  coming  into 
action  at  the  earliest  moment,  and  to  endeavor  to  subdue  hostile 
artillery  fire.  After  preparing  the  attack  the  artillery  energeti- 
cally supports  the  action  of  the  other  arms. 

1527.  Q.  What  is  the  principal  duty  of  the  artillery  in  defense  ? 
A.  It  acts  first  to  prevent  the  assault,  and  afterward  to  defeat  it. 
The  artillery  duel  should  not  be  declined  unless  the  artillery  of 
the  defense  is  weak  or  the  ground  is  such  as  to  compel  the  enemy 
to  deploy  at  a  great  distance  ;  otherwise  the  batteries  should  be 
kept  concealed  until  the  beginning  of  the  infantry  attack,  and 
then  devote  its  energies  to  the  repulse. 

1528.  Q.  When  a  battery  is  to  be  engaged,  and  arrives  near  its 
position,  how  is  it  divided  ?  A.  Into  three  echelons  :  the  first, 
called  the^r*^  line^  comprises  all  the  guns  and  the  three  caissons 
belonging  to  the  right  piece  of  each  platoon  in  line  or  the  leading 
piece  of  each  platoon  in  column  ;  the  second  echelon,  called  the 
reserve^  comprises  the  remaining  caissons,  one  pair  harnessed 
wheel-horses,  the  unharnessed  spare  horses,  and  all  the  spare 
men  for  whom  places  cannot  be  provided  on  the  caissons  and 
spare  horses  for  rapid  movements ;  the  third  echelon,  called  the 
train,  comprises  the  remaining  spare  men  and  the  other  para- 
phernalia of  the  battery. 

1529.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  how  the  battery  is  sub- 
divided for  action.  A.  Captain  commands  (repeated  by  chiefs 
of  platoons).  Prepare  for  action.  At  this  command  the  guidon 
joins  the  reserve  and  the  cannoneers  take  post ;  the  tompions  and 
breech-covers  are  removed,  and  inspection  is  made  to  see  that 
everything  is  in  order.  If  the  battery  is  in  line,  the  captain 
commands  (repeated  by  chiefs  of  platoons),  Form  lines  ;  First  line 
forivard,  march,  at  which  the  pieces  and  the  three  caissons  move 
to  the  front.  If  in  column  of  platoons,  the  command  is.  Form 
lines ;  Reserve  Uft  oblique,  or  First  line  right  oblique,  march, 
at  which  the  designated  carriages  oblique  out  of  the  column.  If 
the  battery  is  in  column  of  sections,  the  command  is.  Form  lines; 
Reserve  right  oblique,  or  First  line  right  oblique. 

1530.  Q.  When  the  fighting  battery  moves  forward,  what 
becomes  of  the  reserve  ?  A.  It  follows  so  as  not  to  be  over  1000 
yards  in  rear  when  the  guns  are  placed  in  position,  and  the  chief 
of  caissons  looks  about  for  a  suitable  place  to  establish  it  with 
reference  to  security  and  easy  communication  with  the  fighting 
line.    When  such  is  found  it  is  at  once  reported  to  the  captain. 

1531.  Q.  What  duty  is  imposed  on  the  reserve  during  action  ? 


184  THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

A.  It  makes  good  the  losses  of  the  battery  in  men  and  horses, 
and  keeps  it  supplied  with  ammunition. 

1533.  Q.  Should  the  fighting  battery  change  position  during 
action,  what  must  be  done  regarding  the  reserve?  A.  The  chief 
of  caissons  must  be  notified,  and  the  reserve  will  follow  the  battery 
if  it  moves  forward  or  by  the  flank,  but  will  precede  it  if  it  mov«s 
to  the  rear  and  at  the  same  gait. 

1533.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  train  when  the  fighting  battery 
goes  into  action?  A.  The  quartermaster  sergeant  in  charge  of 
the  train  follows  the  reserve  as  closely  as  possible  without  unnec- 
essary exposure  to  the  enemy's  fire  and  without  interference 
with  the  movements  of  troops  ;  keeps  up  communication  with 
the  battery  by  means  of  mounted  men,  and  rejoins  the  battery 
with  his  train  at  the  end  of  the  day's  operations. 

1534.  Q.  Into  how  many  zones  of  fire-action  is  the  battle-field 
divided,  and  what  are  their  limits  ?  A.  Three  :  the  first  from 
3000  to  2000  yards  from  the  artillery  line  of  defense  ;  the  second 
extends  from  2000  to  800  yards ;  the  third  extends  from  800  to 
the  position. 

1535.  Q.  Describe  the  kinds  of  fire  to  be  encountered  in  the 
three  zones.  A.  The  outer  limit  of  the  first  zone  is  within  the 
range  of  effective  artillery  fire  and  the  inner  limit  within  the 
range  of  very  effective  artillery  fire  and  also  the  range  of  unaimed 
infantry  fire.  Within  the  second  zone,  artillery  fire  is  deadly  ; 
the  infantry  fire  increases  in  effect  up  to  the  inner  border,  which 
is  within  the  limits  of  aimed  infantry  fire.  In  the  third  zone  the 
infantry  fire  is  deadly. 

1536.  Q.  What  are  the  main  points  to  be  sought  for  in  choosing 
a  position  for  a  battery  going  into  action  ?  A.  A  clear  open  range 
to  the  front  and  flanks,  and  especially  the  absence  of  cover  for 
hostile  skirmishers  within  effective  rifle-range  of  the  guns — if 
there  is  cover  within  range  of  the  position,  its  approaches,  espe- 
cially the  farther  one,  should  be  commanded  ;  good  cover  for 
cannoneers  and  horses  ;  a  general  front  perpendicular  to  the  line 
of  fire  ;  facility  of  movement  in  every  direction  ;  the  avoidance 
of  any  conspicuous  object' in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  guns  ; 
the  avoidance  of  stony  ground.  An  abrupt  slope,  marsh,  soft 
meadow,  newly-ploughed  ground,  railroad  cut,  sunken  road, 
canal,  etc.,  in  front  of  the  guns  is  always  desirable. 

1537.  Q.  What  is  the  best  position  that  can  be  found  for  a 
battery  going  into  action  ?  A.  Generally  that  in  rear  of  the 
crests  of  ridges  and  low  hills,  the  pieces  being  withdrawn  as  far 
as  possible  without  losing  the  command. 

1538.  Q.  To  what  extent  may  artillery  advance  under  infantry 
fire  ?  A.  Seldom  to  less  than  1000  yards  if  the  infantry  be  firm, 
unless  the  latter  itself  is  under  infantry  fire  at  a  shorter  range, 
or  under  a  very  effective  artillery  fire. 

1539.  Q.  How  should  cannoneers  protect  themselves  when  the 


DRILL  REGULATION'S — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  185 

enemy  has  penetrated  the  battery?    A.  By  placing  themselves 
between  the  gun-wheels  and  using  their  revolvers. 

1540.  Q.  If  the  advance  of  the  firing  line  masks  the  divisional 
batteries,  what  should  they  do  ?  A.  They  should,  if  practicable, 
limber  up  and  come  into  action  on  the  firing  line. 

1541.  Q.  If  the  attack  succeeds,  what  should  the  divisional 
batteries  do  ?  A.  The  nearest  batteries  should  move  rapidly  to 
•the  captured  position  and  come  into  action  on  the  flank  of  the 
infantry  and,  if  practicable,  abreast  its  firing  line,  to  aid  in 
driving  back  the  enemy  and  repelling  any  counter-attack. 

1542.  Q.  If  the  infantry  attack  fails,  what  should  the  batteries 
do?  A.  All  the  batteries  within  range  should  concentrate  their 
fire  on  the  enemy's  troops  so  as  to  cover  the  infantry  and  permit 
it  to  re-form.  The  batteries  that  accompanied  the  attack,  if  not 
already  engaged,  should  immediately  come  into  action. 

:;.  1543.  Q.  What  general  principles  govern  a  battery  serving  with 
a  rear- guard,  concerning  close  ranges  ?  A.  Artillery  with  a  rear- 
guard avoids  action  at  close  ranges  ;  it  retires  on  successive 
defensive  positions  and  delays  the  enemy  by  forcing  his  columns 
to  deploy. 

1544.  Q.  Where,  as  a  rule,  are  the  supports  to  artillery  placed  ? 
A,  Infantry  supports  are  placed  in  front  and  cavalry  supports  in 
rear  of  the  flanks  of  artillery.  They  should  never  be  placed  so 
as  to  mask  the  fire  of  a  battery. 

1545.  Q.  How  are  the  different  ranges  for  guns  found  ?  A. 
Either  by  trial  shots  or  by  means  of  the  range-finder.  The 
latter  should  be  used  whenever  time  and  circumstances  permit. 

1546.  Q.  How  may  the  inconvenience  of  smoke  be  diminished 
when  the  wind  is  across  the  range  where  a  battalion  of  artillery  is 
engaged  ?  A.  By  increasing  the  interval  between  batteries;  or  it 
may  be  avoided  by  advancing  the  batteries  in  echelon,  from  the 
leeward  flank,  so  that  the  smoke  of  each  windward  battery  will 
drift  behind  those  to  the  leeward  of  it. 

1547.  Q.  Which  of  the  projectiles  used  by  artillery  is  the  most 
effective  against  men  and  horses,  and  why?  A.  Shrapnel  ;  its 
effect  is  due  to  the  penetration  of  its  bullets  and  splinters.  It 
can  be  made  to  burst  either  in  the  air  or  on  the  first  graze,  and 
can  therefore  be  made  independent  of  the  nature  of  the  ground. 
Made  to  burst  high  by  means  of  its  time-fuse,  it  can  be  used 
against  living  targets  behind  cover;  with  its  fuse  cut  short  it  can 
be  used  instead  of  canister  at  short  ranges. 

1548.  Q.  What  is  the  habitual  order  of  fire  in  each  battery  ? 
A.  By  piece. 

1549.  Q.  When  should  the  fire  at  will  be  used  ?  A.  Only  in  the 
defense  of  the  guns  at  very  short  ranges. 

1550.  Q.  What  does  Fire  control  include  ?  A.  The  method  to 
be  adopted  for  finding  the  range,  the  target,  and  the  particular 
part  to  be  fired  at,  the  projectile  used,  the  order  and  rapidity 


186 

of  fire,  and  the  concentration  or  distribution  of  fire  upon  the 
different  targets  within  range. 

1551.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  the  ammunition  be  furnished 
to  the  guns  while  in  action  ?  A.  Ordinarily  the  ammunition  is 
drawn  from  one  of  the  caissons,  conveniently  placed  for  the  ser- 
vice of  both  guns.  As  soon  as  a  caisson  is  emptied,  it  is  replaced 
by  one  from  the  battery  reserve,  and  the  empty  one,  after 
joining  the  reserve,  is  sent  to  the  ammunition  column  to  be  re- 
filled. The  limber  ammunition  should  be  regarded  as  a  last 
reserve,  to  be  used  in  emergencies  only  ;  whenever  any  of  it  is 
expended,  it  is  replaced  as  soon  as  practicable. 

1552.  Q.  What  does  the  fighting  battery  of  horse  artillery,  serv- 
ing with  a  cavalry  division,  consist  of  ?  A.  The  pieces  only,  all 
the  caissons  marching  with  the  battery  reserve. 

1553.  Q.  Where  do  the  battery  reserves  of  horse  batteries  with 
cavalry  divisions  march  ?  A.  They  are  consolidated  and  move  in 
rear  of  the  mam  body. 

Cover  for  Field  Artillery. 

1554.  Q.  What  is  understood  as  natural  cover  for  artillery? 
A.  That  which  the  ground  affords,  which  includes  soft  meadows, 
marshes,  heights,  slight  unevenness,  and  ruts,  low  dikes,  ledges 
of  earth,  hollow  ways,  etc. ;  and  hedges,  fences,  thickets,  woods, 
fields  of  grain,  and  the  reverse  side  of  hills,  etc. 

1555.  Q.  What  is  understood  as  artificial  cover  for  artillery  ? 
A.  Pits  or  intrench  ments. 

1556.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  objections  to  gun-pits  ?  A. 
They  are  conspicuous  targets  ;  they  restrict  the  free  movement 
and  full  employment  of  the  guns  ;  they  are  limited  in  their 
application  to  the  offensive,  and  there  is  difficulty  in  draining 
them. 

1557.  Q.  Give  some  of  the  reasons  favorable  to  the  use  of  gun- 
pits.     A.  They  furnish  shelter  to  men  and  horses. 

1558.  Q.  As  no  definite  method  has  been  provided  for  the  con- 
struction of  gun-pits,  what  foreign  traces  for  them  are  considered 
the  best  ?  A.  Those  of  the  Austrian  or  German  trace,  as  being 
the  simplest  and  most  speedily  constructed. 

1559.  Q.  In  the  construction  of  gun-pits  what  should  be 
avoided?  A.  Narrow  embrasures,  as  presenting  an  easy  mark 
and  as  likely  to  draw  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

1560.  Q.  If  the  position  is  occupied  for  some  time,  how  should 
the  parapet  of  a  gun-pit  be  strengthened  ?  A.  By  earth  from  a 
ditch  in  front. 

1561.  Q.  How  should  the  fresh  earth  of  gun-pits  be  concealed 
from  the  enemy  ?  A.  By  covering  them  with  boughs,  sod,  or  top 
soil  of  the  surrounding  color. 

1562.  Q.  If  pits  for  the  limbers  are  constructed,  what  differ- 


BMLL  REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  187 

ence  should  be  made  in  them  from  that  of  the  gun-pits  ?    A. 
They  should  be  one  foot  deeper. 

Camping. 

1563.  Q.  Give  diagram  illustrating  a  battery  in  park.  A.  (See 
pages  456  and  458,  D.  R.) 

1564.  Q.  What  is  the  first  thing  to  be  done  with  reference  to 
the  encampment  of  a  battalion  of  light  artillery  ?  A.  The  adju- 
tant assembles  the  guidons  and  conducts  them  to  the  camping 
ground,  which  has  previously  been  selected,  and  establishes  eacli 
one  at  the  point  where  the  lead  team  on  the  interior  flank  of  his 
battery  is  to  rest.  After  all  are  established,  he  returns  to  the 
column  and  indicates  to  each  battery  commander  how  and  where 
his  battery  shall  be  parked. 

1565.  Q.  At  what  distance  from  each  other  should  the  guidons 
be  placed  for  the  encampment  of  a  battalion  of  artillery  ?  A. 
There  should  be  a  distance  of  94  yards  where  there  are  two  lines 
of  carriages  of  six  horses  each,  and  the  picket  line  is  in  rear  of 
the  park. 

1566.  Q.  Where  should  the  tent  of  an  artillery-battalion  com- 
mander be  placed  when  in  park  ?  A.  Sixty  yards  from  the  line 
of  guidons  and  on  a  perpendicular  line  passing  17  yards  in  rear 
of  the  second  guidon,  for  an  encampment  of  two  or  three  bat- 
teries, and  in  a  corresponding  position  in  rear  of  the  third 
guidon  for  an  encampment  of  four  batteries. 

1567.  Q.  Where  are  the  battery  officers'  tents  in  a  battalion 
encampment  of  artillery  ?  A.  The  captain's  tent  is  75  yards  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  guidons  and  30  yards  to  the  flank;  the  other 
officers'  tents  on  a  line  with  the  captain's,  at  intervals  of  five  yards 
— all  facing  the  interior  flank. 

1568.  Q.  Where  is  the  picket  line,  and  where  the  line  of  men's 
tents  in  a  battalion  encampment  of  artillery  ?  A.  The  picket 
line  is  15  yards  in  rear  of  the  carriages,  and  the  enlisted  men's 
tents  30  yards  in  rear  of  the  picket  line,  the  first  sergeant  being 
on  the  interior  and  the  guard-tent  on  the  exterior  flanks. 

1569.  Q.  In  bivouacs  how  may  the  picket  line  be  stretched  ? 
A.  Through  the  hind  wheels  of  the  carriages  of  the  third  line;  but 
whenever  practicable  it  should  be  stretched  along  the  ground  or 
between  trees  or  posts. 

Transportation  of  Artillery. 

1570.  Q.  When  artillery  and  its  stores  are  to  be  shipped  for  an 
expedition,  what  should  first  be  done  ?  A.  There  should  be  pre- 
pared a  list  of  all  the  articles,  stating  their  number,  weight  of 
each,  and  the  total  weight  of  each  kind.  Divide  the  total  quan- 
tity to  be  transported  among  the  vessels,  and  make  statements  in 


188  THE   AKMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMIKER. 

duplicate  of  the  articles  on  board  each  vessel,  and  the  position  of 
the  different  articles  noted  in  a  column  in  the  list  on  board. 

1571.  Q.  What  is  the  most  suitable  car  for  carrying  horses  in 
railroad  transportation  ?  A.  The  slat  stock  car,  built  of  slats  and 
open  all  around.  Another  kind,  known  as  the  "combination 
car,"  is  made  with  five  doors  on  each  side  and  one  at  each  end, 
which  may  be  closed  tight  for  stores  or  with  iron  grates  when 
carrying  horses. 

1572.  Q.  In  loading  horses  on  cars,  how  should  it  be  done  ? 
A.  They  will  be  driven  or  led  in,  but  should  not  be  tied.  They 
should,  have  nothing  more  on  them  than  their  halter  head- 
stalls. 

1573.  Q.  In  the  transportation  of  horses  by  rail  for  a  journey 
of  more  than  thirty-six  hours,  how  should  they  be  cared  for  ?  A. 
They  should  be  unloaded  every  twenty-four  hours,  and  should  be 
watered,  fed,  groomed,  and  exercised  before  being  led  back.  If 
there  be  stock  yards,  they  should  be  turned  loose  in  them  for 
exercise. 

1574.  Q.  On  what  kind  of  cars  should  artillery  carriages  be 
transported  by  rail,  and  how  should  the  carriages  be  loaded  ?  A. 
On  platform  cars.  The  carriages  are  unlimbered  and  the  spare 
wheels  removed  from  the  caissons  ;  the  body  of  a  caisson,  its 
stock  to  the  rear,  is  run  to  the  front  end  of  the  car,  and  its  stock 
rested  on  the  floor  ;  another  rear  train  is  run  forward  in  like 
manner  until  its  wheels  stl-ike  or  overlap  those  of  the  first,  when 
its  stock  is  rested  on  the  floor.  A  limber  is  then  placed  on  the 
car,  pole  to  the  front,  resting  on  the  rear  train  ;  the  second  lim- 
ber is  backed  on  and  its  pole  held  up  until  a  gun,  trail  foremost, 
is  run  under  it  ;  the  trail  of  the  gun  is  rested  on  the  floor  and 
the  pole  of  the  limber  on  the  gun-carriage  ;  the  other  gun  is  run 
on  in  the  same  manner  ;  a  limber  is  next  run  on,  and  its  pole 
rested  on  the  last  gun  ;  the  remaining  limber  is  then  run  on  with 
its  pole  under  the  proceeding  limber.  In  this  manner  two  field 
guns  and  two  caissons  complete  may  be  placed  on  one  car. 

1575.  Q.  With  what  kind  of  food  should  men  be  provided  when 
transported  by  rail?  A.  Cooked  rations  for  the  whole  trip. 
Warm  coffee,  however,  may  be  purchased  at  railroad  stations. 

1576.  Q.  In  the  transportation  of  horses  by  sea,  what  condi- 
tions should  obtain  as  to  the  transport  ?  A.  The  larger  the  ves- 
sel the  better;  ventilation  is  of  primary  importance  ;  large  air- 
ports or  scuttles  are  indispensable,  and  wind- sails  down  every 
hatch  to  each  deck  should  be  insisted  upon. 

1577  Q.  How  should  the  horses  be  placed  with  regard  to  the 
mapner  in  which  they  stand,  on  board  of  a  transport  ?  A.  They 
should  in  all  cases  stand  athwartship,  as  in  this  position  they 
adapt  themselves  better  to  the  motion  of  the  vessel,  and  by 
facing  each  other  they  suffer  less  from  fright  and  nervous  excite- 
ment. 


DRILL   REGULATIOI^S— LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  189 

1578.  Q'  What  ratio  of  spare  stalls  should  be  provided  on  a 
vessel  transporting  horses,  and  for  wlint  purpose  ?  A.  There 
should  be  ten  per  cent  of  spare  stalls  and  at  least  one  loose  box  ; 
the  former  to  admit  of  horses  being  shifted,  rubbed  down,  their 
feet  waslied,  and  the  stalls  cleaned  out  every  day  that  the 
weather  permits.  The  loose  box  is  to  admit  of  a  sick  horse  lying 
down. 

1579.  Q.  How  should  horses  be  fed  at  sea  ?  A.  For  the  first 
few  days  on  shipboard  food  is  to  be  given  rather  sparingly  and 
bran  is  to  form  a  large  portion  of  it  ;  after  the  horse  becomes 
more  accustomed  to  his  situation  and  his  appetite  increases,  he 
should  be  more  liberally  fed.  A  bran  mash,  or  oats  and  bran 
mixed,  is  to  be  given  to  him  every  other  day. 

1580.  Q.  Should  any  contagious  disease  appear  among  the 
horses  at  sea,  what  is  done  ?  A.  The  horse  or  horses  attacked 
should  be  promptly  thrown  overboard  and  due  precautions  taken 
with  the  others. 

1581.  Q.  How  are  the  feed-troughs  and  nostrils  of  horses  at 
sea  cared  for  ?  A.  Both  should  be  washed  every  morning  and 
evening  with  diluted  vinegar. 

1582.  Q.  At  what  rate  is  water  allowed  at  sea?  A.  Six  gallons 
a  day  per  horse  and  one  gallon  per  man. 

1583.  Q.  Whose  duty  is  it  to  see  that  everything  is  properly 
provided  for  the  proper  transportation  of  artillery  by  water? 
A.  The  fitting  up  of  the  vessel  is  generally  done  by  the  quarter- 
master's department ;  but  the  commander  of  the  artillery  to  be 
embarked  will,  as  the  one  most  concerned,  give  his  special  atten- 
tion to  see  that  the  work  is  thorough  and  complete. 

1584.  Q.  What  should  be  done  regarding  the  care  of  horses 
after  disembarking  them  from  a  long  voyage  ?  A.  For  some  days 
they  should  be  led  about  at  a  walk,  and  no  weight  put  upon  their 
backs,  unless  it  is  absolutely  necessary. 

[For  Q.  and  A.  on  the  subject  of  "  Artillery  Horses, "  see  "  Hip- 
pology."] 

[For  Q.  and  A.  on  the  subject  of  "  Stables,"  see  "  Hippology."] 

School  of  the  Battalion. 

1585.  Q.  Are  the  means  prescribed  for  the  execution  of  the 
various  movements  of  artillery  to  be  strictly  followed  in  field 
practice  and  actual  service  ?  A.  No  ;  the  methods  prescribed 
should  be  regarded  as  types,  to  be  followed  as  closely  as  possible, 
each  captain  conducting  his  battery  by  the  simplest  means  and 
the  shortest  practicable  route  to  the  nearest  available  place  for  it 
in  the  new  formation. 

1586.  Q.  When  the  battalion  is  formed  for  ceremonies  or  in- 
struction, how  will  the  batteries  take  their  places?  A.  In  an 
order  depending  on  the  rank  of  their  captains,  the  first  battery 


190  THE  AEMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

on  the  right,  the  second  on  the  left,  the  third  at  the  right  centre 
(or  centre,  if  there  be  an  odd  number  of  batteries). 

1587.  Q.  How  are  batteries  placed  on  marches  and  in  the 
field  ?  A.  They  take  any  place  assigned  them  by  the  command- 
ing officer. 

1588.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  interval  of  batteries  in  line  ?  A. 
In  light  batteries  30  yards  ;  in  horse  batteries  38  yards. 

1589.  Q.  Give  the  posts  of  the  major  and  staff  of  an  artillery 
battalion.  A.  In  line  the  major  is  30  yards  in  front  of  the  cen- 
tre. The  adjutant  is  in  line  with  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  seven 
yards  outside  the  right  flank  of  the  battalion.  When  the  bat- 
talion faces  to  the  rear,  the  adjutant  executes  an  about  and  as- 
sumes his  position  in  line,  but  does  not  change  to  the  other  flank. 
The  sergeant-majDr  is  in  line  with  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  seven 
yards  from  the  left  flank,  and  in  facing  to  the  rear  executes  on 
his  flank  what  is  prescribed  for  the  adjutant.  In  line,  at  cere- 
monies, other  staff  officers  are  on  the  right  of  the  adjutant,  in 
order  of  rank  from  right  to  left ;  in  column,  they  are  in  rear  of 
the  major.     On  all  other  occasions  they  accompany  the  major. 

1590.  Q.  In  formations,  when  will  officers  draw  sabres?  A. 
At  formations  preparatory  to  ceremonies  the  battery  officers  have 
the  sabre  drawn  ;  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  draw  sabres 
before  executing  the  about  to  leave  the  posts  where  they  had 
marked  the  position  for  the  right  centre  battery.  At  instruction 
the  officers'  sabres  may  be  either  drawn  or  in  the  scabbard,  at  the 
discretion  of  the  major. 

1591.  Q.  How  is  a  successive  alignment  executed?  A.  The 
major  causes  one  of  the  flank  batteries  to  be  advanced,  and  when 
it  has  been  correctly  aligned  by  its  captain,  he  commands  :  By 
battery,  right  (or  left)  dress.  At  the  command  Dress,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  second  battery  commands  Forward,  inarch ;  Guide 
right ;  and  when  his  battery  is  three  yards  from  the  new  line  he 
commands  Battery  halt,  places  himself  on  the  left,  commands. 
Right  dress,  and  when  it  is  aligned.  Front.  Each  of  the  other 
captains  executes  the  same  movement  in  succession. 

1592.  Q.  When  the  batteries  of  a  battalion  in  line  are  dressed, 
how  are  they  aligned  ?  A.  The  carriages  are  aligned  by  aligning 
the  wheel-drivers. 

1593.  Q.  What  difference  exists  in  the  method  of  aligning  some 
of  the  batteries  of  a  battalion  ?  A.  The  captain  and  chief  of 
caissons  of  the  battery  first  established,  or  nearest  the  point  of 
rest,  superintend  the  alignment  from  the  flank  of  their  battery 
nearest  the  point  of  rest.     The  captains  and  chief  of  caissons  of 

-  the  other  batteries  superintend  the  alignment  from  the  flank  of 
their  battery  farthest  from  the  point  of  rest. 

1594.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  marching  a  battalion  of 
artillery  in  line  ?  A.  The  second  (or  such)  the  battery  of  direc- 
tion; Forward^  march. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  191 

1595.  Q.  Give  the  eomraands  necessary  to  close  and  extend 
intervals  between  the  sections  of  a  battalion  in  line  ?  A.  On  first 
(or  such)  sectio7i,  first  (or  such)  battery  ;  to  (so  many)  yards  close 
(or  extend)  intervals :  Trot,  march  ;  the  second  (or  such)  the  bat- 
tery of  direction. 

1596.  Q.  Before  extending  intervals  simultaneously  in  each 
battery,  what  must  be  done  ?  A.  The  major  must  first  extend 
intervals  between  batteries. 

1597.  Q.  How  is  a  column  of  platoons  formed  to  the  right  or 
left  from  a  battalion  of  batteries  in  line  ?  A.  The  major  com- 
mands, Platoons  right  (or  left)  wheel,  march;  Guide  {right  or 
left);  or  Batteries  halt. 

1598.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  batteries  in  column  of 
platoons  ?  A.  In  light  batteries,  17  yards  ;  in  horse  batteries,  20 
yards. 

1599.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  major,  adjutant,  and  the 
captains  in  column  of  platoons  ?  A.  The  major  is  on  the  side  of 
the  guide,  30  yards  from  the  column  and  abreast  of  the  centre  ; 
the  adjutant  is  abreast  of  the  leading  carriage  of  the  column,  on 
the  side  of  the  guide,  7  yards  from  the  column  ;  each  captain  is 
on  the  side  of  the  guide,  15  yards  from  the  flank  of  his  battery, 
abreast  of  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon. 

1600.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  major  and  staff  of  a  bat- 
talion of  batteries  in  a  route  march  ?  A.  The  major  is  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  the  adjutant  one  yard  on  his  left  ;  the  trum- 
peter is  in  rear  of  the  commanding  officer,  the  sergeant  major  in 
rear  of  the  adjutant.  If  there  be  other  staff  officers,  they  ride  in- 
rear  of  the  major  and  adjutant ;  the  trumpeter  and  sergeant 
major  in  their  rear. 

1601.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  successive  formations?  A.  All  the 
formations  in  which  the  several  subdivisions  arrive  successively 
on  the  line,  such  as,  on  right  or  left,  into  line,  front  into  line  ; 
the  deployment  of  columns;  formations  into  line  by  two  move- 
ments, etc. 

1602.  Q.  In  forming  on  right  or  left  into  line  from  column  of 
platoons,  at  what  distance  is  the  point  of  rest  marked  ?  A.  It 
is  marked  50  yards  to  the  right  of  the  head  of  the  column. 

1603.  Q.  In  forming  on  right  or  left  into  line  from  column  of 
batteries,  at  what  distance  is  the  point  of  rest  marked  ?  A.  It  is 
marked  62  yards  to  the  right  of  the  head  of  the  column. 

1604.  Q.  In  forming  front  into  line  from  column  of  platoons, 
at  what  distance  is  the  point  of  rest  marked  ?  A.  It  is  marked 
19  yards  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column. 

1605.  Q.  In  forming  front  into  line  from  column  of  batterie 
at  what  distance  is  the  point  of  rest  marked  ?    A.  It  is  ii^aj|^^^;£^ 
battery  distance  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column.        j^^^^'^C^* 

1606.  Q.  At  what  distance  is  the  point  of  rest  mar]^w!^S&;4^S^  '  -<  V 
ploying?    A.  It  is  marked  3  yards  in  front  of  tbejP^'oP^lgJ^^-4''^ 


192  THE  AKMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINEE. 

column  when  the  deployment  is  on  the  first  battery,  and  30 
yards  in  front  of  the  column  when  the  deployment  is  on  a  rear 
battery. 

1607.  Q.  Without  giving  commands,  explain  briefly  how  to  form 
column  of  platoons  front  into  line  from  a  halt.  A.  The  first 
battery  executes  right  front  into  line,  and  moves  to  the  front ; 
the  second  battery  executes  column  right,  and  the  other  batteries 
column  half-right ;  the  second  battery  is  conducted  opposite  its 
place  in  line,  changes  direction  to  the  left,  and  is  brought  right 
front  into  line  at  19  yards  from  the  line,  then  moved  forward, 
halted,  and  dressed  on  the  leading  battery  ;  the  other  batteries 
are  conducted  to  a  point  battery  distance  and  19  yards  in  rear  of 
the  left  of  its  place  in  line,  change  direction  half-left,  and  when 
at  19  yards  from  the  line  conform  to  what  is  explained,  for  the 
second  battery. 

1608.  Q.  Give  commands  and  explain  how  to  form  front  into 
line  on  the  head  of  an  interior  battery  at  a  halt.  A,  The  major 
commands,  On  third  (or  such)  battery^  Right  (or  left^  front  into 
line,  inarch.  At  the  second  command  the  captain  of  the  fourth 
battery  commands,  Forward,  column  right ;  the  captains  of  the 
first  and  second  batteries,  Left  into  line  wheel,  and  all  repeat  the 
command  March.  The  third  and  fourth  batteries  execute  right 
front  into  line  at  the  command  March ;  the  second  battery  is 
marched  in  line,  with  guide  left,  and  when  the  front  of  it  has  to 
move  3i  yards  to  be  opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  platoons  are 
wheeled  into  line,  and  when  this  is  completed  the  battery  is 
formed  right  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear.  The  first  battery 
marches  in  line  with  guide  left,  and  when  the  front  of  the  bat- 
tery has  to  move  3|^  yards  to  be  opposite  its  place  in  line,  it  wheels 
by  platoons  to  the  left,  advances  in  column  with  guide  left,  and 
when  19  yards  from  the  line  executes  right  front  into  line  faced 
to  the  rear. 

1609.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  forming  column  of 
platoons  into  line  by  two  movements  ?  A.  To  form  to  the  left,  a 
part  of  the  column  having  changed  to  the  right,  the  commands 
are,  Left  into  line  wheel ;  Rear  batteries,  left  front  into  line ; 
march.  To  form  line  to  the  right,  the  commands  are.  Right  into 
line  wheel ;  Rear  batteries,  left  front  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear  ; 
march. 

1610.  Q.  In  forming  from  line  into  column  and  vice  versa,  when 
do  the  batteries  change  their  designations?  A.  They  preserve 
their  line  or  column  designations  until  the  movement  is  completed. 

1611.  Q.  1^\\^\.  \%2i  platoon  column  f  A.  A  battery  in  column 
of  platoons. 

1612.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  advancing  in-  line  of 
platoon  columns  from  line?  K.  Batteries,  Right  (or  left)  by 
platoons  march  ;  the  second  (or  such)  the  battery  of  direction. 

1613.  Q.  To  retire  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  what  must  first 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  193 

be  done  ?    The  major  causes  the  batteries  to  reverse  or  counter- 
march, and  then  gives  the  commands  for  advancing. 

1614.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  phitoons  at  a  halt,  give  commands 
and  explain  how  to  form  front  into  line  of  platoon  columns. 
A.  The  major  commands,  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of  platoon 
columns^  march.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
battery  commands,  Forward;  the  captain  of  the  second  battery, 
Forward,  column  right;  the  other  captains,  Forward^  column 
half-right,  and  all  repeat  the  command  March,  and  announce 
Guide  left.  The  leading  battery  advances  platoon  distance  and 
halts  ;  the  second  battery  moves  opposite  the  left  of  its  place  in 
line,  changes  direction  to  the  left,  and  then  moves  up  to  within 
three  yards  of  the  line,  halts  and  dresses  the  leading  platoon  of 
his  battery  upon  the  leading  platoon  of  the  first,  superintending 
the  alignment  from  the  right  flank  of  his  battery,  and  then  takes 
his  place  in  line  of  platoon  columns  ;  chiefs  of  the  centre  and  rear 
platoons,  see  that  they  are  aligned  and  at  the  proper  distance. 
Each  of  the  other  captains  conducts  his  battery  to  a  point  battery, 
plus  platoon,  distance  in  rear  of  the  left  of  its  place  in  line, 
changes  direction  half-left,  and  conforms  to  what  is  explained 
for  the  second  battery. 

1615.  Q.  When  the  intervals  between  the  batteries  is  less  than 
thirty  yards,  where  will  the  captains  take  post  ?  A.  At  one  half 
the  intervals  from  the  flanks  of  their  batteries. 

1616.  Q.  Give  the  commands  for  advancing  in  line  of  double 
columns  from  line.  A.  The  major  commands.  Batteries,  centre 
forward,  march;  the  second  (or  such)  the  battery  of  direction. 

1617.  Q.  What  are  the  positions  of  the  major  and  staff  and 
captains  in  double  column  ?  A.  The  same  as  when  advancing  in 
line  of  platoon  columns. 

1618.  Q.  In  changing  direction  in  line  of  platoon  columns, 
where  does-  the  first  battery  halt,  and  how  should  the  other 
batteries  move?  A.  The  first  battery  is  halted  when  its  rear 
pivot-carriage  has  advanced  its  own  length  in  the  new  direction. 
The  other  batteries  move  forward,  change  direction  half-right  (or 
inclines  to  the  right),  and  moves  to  a  point  battery  distance  and 
nineteen  yards  behind  its  place  in  the  new  line,  again  changes 
direction  half-right  (or  inclines  to  the  right),  is  halted  on  the  line, 
and  the  leading  platoon  is  dressed  to  the  right. 

1619.  Q.  In  what  manner  is  a  close  column  formed?  A.  From 
line  it  is  formed  with  the  designated  battery  in  front ;  from 
column,  with  the  leading  battery  in  front. 

1620.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  batteries  in  close 
column?    A.  Fifteen  yards. 

1621.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  how  a  column  may  be 
closed  in  mass  from  a  halt.  A.  The  major  commands.  Close  in 
mass,  march;  guide  right  (or  left).  The  first  battery  stands  fast. 
Each  of  the  other  batteries  moves  forward  at  the  command  Marchy 


194  THE  ABMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

and  halts  when  it  arrives  at  fifteen  yards  from  the  one  pre- 
ceding. 

1622.  Q.  How  may  a  close  column  be  formed  from  column  of 
platoons  or  sections?  A.  To  form  it  to  the  front,  the  major 
cammands,  Close  column;  batteries  right  (or  left)  front  into  line; 
march.  The  first  battery  executes  right  front  into  line  ;  the  other 
batteries  move  forward  and  execute  right  front  into  line  at  the 
proper  distances.  To  form  it  to  the  right  or  left,  the  major  com- 
mands, Close  column  ;  first  battery,  column  right  (or  left) ;  march. 
The  first  battery  changes  direction  to  the  right  and  forma  line  to 
the  left  after  moving  fifteen  yards  in  the  new  direction.  The 
other  batteries  are  formed  in  rear  of  the  first,  at  proper  distances. 

1623.  Q.  In  changing  direction  by  the  flank  in  close  column, 
where  does  the  adjutant  post  himself  to  mark  the  new  alignment? 
A.  He  places  himself  in  prolongation  of  the  first  section  and 
about  thirty  yards  in  front  of  it. 

1624.  Q.  In  changing  direction  by  the  right  flank  in  close 
column,  how  do  the  batteries  reach  their  new  positions  ?  A.  The 
first  executes  by  the  right  flank  and  then  moves  column  left,  the 
captain  halting  opposite  the  point  of  rest,  and  as  the  lead-horses 
of  the  rear  carriages  of  his  rear  platoon  approach  moves  by  the 
left  flank  and  dresses  his  battery  to  the  left.  The  other  batteries 
move  by  the  right  flank,  make  two  changes  of  direction  half-left, 
and  enter  the  new  column  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  first. 

1625.  Q.  Give  commands  for  forming  column  of  platoons 
from  close  column.  A.  Column  of  platoons;  first  battery  right 
(or  left)  by  platoons  ;  ynarch  ;  guide  right  (or  left). 

1626.  Q.  To  form  line  to  the  right  or  left  from  close  column, 
what  must  be  done  ?  A.  The  major  first  causes  distance  to  be 
taken  and  then  gives  the  commands  for  wheeling  into  line  ;  or  he 
breaks  into  column  of  platoons  from  the  head  of  the  column,  and 
then  wheels  by  platoons  into  line. 

1627.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  how  a  close  column  may 
be  deployed  on  the  fourth  battery.  A.  The  major  commands : 
On  fourth  battery  deploy  column ;  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank^ 
march.  The  fourth  battery  stands  fast  until  unmasked ;  then 
moves  forward  to  the  line  with  the  guide  left,  where  it  is  halted 
and  dressed  to  the  left.  The  other  batteries  move  by  the  right 
flank,  with  the  guide  left,  until  opposite  their  places  in  line  ;  then 
by  the  left  flank,  with  the  guide  left,  to  their  places,  and  all 
dressed  to  the  left.  The  captain  of  each  battery  in  front  of  the 
fourth  halts  opposite  the  left  of  his  position,  and  marches  his 
battery  by  the  left  flank  when  the  leaders  of  the  rear  carriages  of 
his  rear  platoon  are  3|^  yards  from  him.  The  third  and  second 
batteries  are  halted  immediately  after  the  march  by  the  left  flank 
and  move  up  to  the  line  as  soon  as  unmasked. 

1628.  Q.  Being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  give  the  commaiids  to  advance 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  195 

by  echelon  ?    A.  Batteries  from  the  right  (or  left)  at  (so  many) 
yards  distance^  front  into  echelon  ;  march. 

1629.  Q.  Describe  how  the  batteries  move  to  the  front  in 
echelon,  from  the  right  in  line.  A.  The  right  battery  moves 
forward  with  the  guide  to  the  right;  when  it  has  advanced  the 
specified  distance  the  captain  of  the  second  battery  puts  his  bat- 
tery in  march,  with  guide  right,  and  so  on  to  the  left  of  the  line. 

1630.  Q.  Where  will  the. guidons  of  each  rear  battery  march, 
advancing  in  echelon  from  the  right  ?  A.  A  guidon  of  each  rear 
battery  marches  on  a  line  with  the  lead-drivers,  and  directly  in 
rear  of  the  left  section  of  the  battery  preceding. 

1631.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  executing  an  oblique 
change  of  front  in  echelon  ?  A.  Batteries,  left  (or  right)  half- 
wheel ;  march  ;  the  fourth  (or  first)  the  battery  of  direction;  or, 
Batteries,  halt. 

1632.  Q.  Previous  to  all  formations  in  battery,  either  from  line 
or  column,  if  the  pieces  are  not  already  there,  what  must  the 
major  do  ?  A.  By  a  passage  of  carriages,  he  places  them  in  front 
or  rear,  according^  as  he  designs  forming  in  battery  to  the  front 
or  rear. 

1633.  Q.  Give  the  different  commands  for  forming  in  battery 
from  line.  A.  To  form  to  the  front,  M  battery,  inarch;  to 
form  to  the  front  by  moving  the  caissons  to  the  rear,  Action 
front  ;  to  form  to  the  rear.  Action  rear. 

1634.  Q.  Give  the  commands  for  forming  in  battery  to  the  right 
and  left,  and  on  right  and  left  from  column  of  platoons.  A.  The 
pieces  being  in  front  to  form  to  the  right  or  left,  Fire  to  the  right 
(or  left) ;  Right  into  line  wheel,  march  ;  in  battery,  march.  The 
caissons  being  in  front,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left,  Fire  to  the 
right;  left  (or  right)  into  line  wheel,  march,  action  rear.  To 
form  on  right  or  left  into  battery,  On  right  (or  left)  into  battery, 
march.  To  form  front  into  battery,  Right  (or  left)  front  into 
battery,  march. 

1635.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  forming  in  battery  from 
line  of  double  columns,  with  deploying  intervals,  or  greater  ?  A. 
Batteries,  right  and  left  front  into  battery;  or,  right  and  left 
front  into  battery  faced  to  the  rear;  march. 

1636.  Q.  Give  the  different  commands  for  firing.  A.  To  fire 
by  piece,  Fire  by  piece;  commence  firing ;  To  fire  by  platoon. 
Fire  by  platoon;  commence  firing.  To  fire  by  battery.  Fire  by 
battery  ;  commence  firing.  To  fire  at  will,  Fire  at  will ;  com- 
mence firing, 

1637.  Q,  Should  the  major  command.  Battalion,  fire  by  piece^ 
Wo.  1,  fi?'st  (or  6,  fourth)  battery,  commence  firing,  what  is 
done  ?  A.  The  pieces  are  fired  under  the  direction  of  the  cap- 
tains, at  the  major's  command  Continue  the  fire.  Each  captain 
finds  the  range,  and  regulates  the  fire  of  his  battery. 

1638.  If  firing  by  battery,  when  the  battalion  consists  ot  four 


196  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

batteries,  wliat  will  ordinarily  be  the  interval  between  salvos  ? 
A.  Thirty  seconds;  after  the  major  has  commanded  continue  the 
fire.  If  a  slower  or  more  rapid  rate  of  fire  is  required,  the  major 
will  command  Slow  fire  (one  minute  between  salvos),  or  Rapid  fire^ 
which  should  have  an  interval  sufficient  to  observe  the  effect  of 
one  salvo  before  the  next  is  fired. 

CEREMONIES. 

1639.  Q.  On  occasions  of  ceremony,  how  are  troops  arranged  ? 
A.  Except  funeral  escorts,  they  are  arranged  from  right  to  left 
in  line,  and  from  head  to  rear  in  column,  as  follows  :  Ist^  in- 
fanty  ;  2d,  light  artillery  ;  3d,  cavalry.  Artillery  serving  as  in- 
fantry is  posted  as  infantry ;  dismounted  cavalry  and  marines 
are  on  the  left  of  infantry  ;  engineer  troops  are  on  the  right  of 
the  command  to  which  they  are  attached.  When  cavalry  and 
light  artillery  are  posted  together,  the  artillery  is  on  the  left.  In 
the  same  arm,  regulars,  volunteers,  and  militia  are  posted  in  line 
from  right  to  left,  or  in  column  from  head  to  rear  in  the  order 
named. 

1640.  Q.  When  two  or  more  battalions  of  artillery  are  formed 
for  ceremonies,  how  are  they  posted  ?  A.  As  may  be  directed 
by  the  officer  in  command  ;  generally,  horse-artillery  is  on  the 
right  of  the  line,  or  at  the  head  of  the  column. 

1641.  Q.  At  ceremonies,  mounted,  where  should  the  pieces  be  ? 
A.  Always  in  front. 

1642.  Q.  When  a  column,  at  full  distance,  composed  of  two  or  all 
three  arms  of  the  service,  forms  line  to  the  right  or  left,  how  does 
the  battery  or  batteries  come  into  position  ?  A.  They  are  wheeled 
into  line  to  the  rear,  and  when  they  have  gained  sufficient  dis- 
tance, they  are  countermarched  and  halted  on  the  line. 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  REVIEWS. 

1643.  Q.  When  a  corps  is  reviewed,  where  is  the  artillery  posted  ? 
A.  The  divisional  and  corps  artillery  are  placed  between  the 
divisions;  or,  all  the  artillery  of  the  corps  may  be  massed  and 
placed  on  the  left  of  the  infantry. 

1644.  Q.  When  artillery  is  reviewed  with  large  bodies  of  in- 
fantry or  cavalry,  should  the  reviewing  officer  not  approach  the 
front  of  the  artillery,  when  should  he  receive  its  salute?  A. 
When  he  arrives  at  its  right. 

1645.  Q.  When  a  commander  turns  out  of  the  column  to  place 
himself  near  the  reviewing  officer,  what  is  his  position  ?  A.  His 
place  is  on  the  right  of  the  commanders  already  there. 

1646.  Q.  When  the  commanding  officer  faces  the  line  to  give 
commands,  what  change  is  made  by  the  staff  and  orderlies  ?  A. 
They  do  not  change  their  positions. 


DKILL   REGULATION'S— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  197 

1647.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  captains  whenever  a  battalion 
commander  faces  towards  the  battalions  to  give  commands  ?  A. 
They  face  their  batteries  at  the  same  time,  resuming  their  front 
after  seeing  the  movement  executed.  In  the  same  manner,  cap- 
tains and  battalion  commanders  face  toward  the  line  when  the 
review  is  by  two  or  more  battalions. 

1648.  Q.  When  two  or  more  battalions  are  reviewed,  what 
must  each  battery  do  after  passing  the  reviewing  oflBcer  ?  A. 
After  its  rear  has  passed  some  30  yards  it  takes  the  trot  for  100 
yards,  in  order  not  to  interfere  with  the  march  of  the  column  in 
rear,  and  then,  unless  otherwise  directed,  returns  to  its  camp 
by  the  most  practicable  route. 

1649.  Q.  When  it  is  necessary  that  an  organization  should 
be  reviewed  before  an  inspector,  junior  in  rank  to  the  command- 
ing officer,  what  is  done?  A.  The  commanding  officer  will 
receive  the  review,  and  will  be  accompanied  by  the  inspector. 

REVIEW  OF  A  BATTERY, 

1650.  Q.  The  battery  being  in  line,  what  are  the  commands  of 
the  captain  to  prepare  it  for  review?  A.  Prepare  for  review; 
action  front ;  right  dress  ;  front. 

1651.  Q.  In  preparing  for  the  review  of  a  battery,  what  is  done 
at  the  command  Front  by  the  captain  ?  A.  The  chief  of  caissons 
takes  his  post  in  battery;  the  captain  passes  by  the  shortest  line 
in  front  of  the  chiefs  of  platoons  to  the  centre,  places  himself  with 
the  croup  of  his  horse  four  yards  in  front  of  the  heads  of  the 
horses  of  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  executes  a  left  about  and  com- 
mands, Draw  sabre,  at  which  the  first  sergeant,  quartermaster  ser- 
geant, stable  sergeant,  chiefs  of  sections  and  caisson  corporals 
(if  mounted)  draw  sabre. 

1652.  Q.  State  briefly  how  a  reviewing  officer  should  ^proceed 
with  his  review  after  the  battery  has  been  presented.  A.  He 
proceeds  to  the  right  of  the  battery,  and  is  joined  by  the  captain. 
He  passes  in  front  of  the  chiefs  of  platoons  to  the  left  of  the 
line,  and  returns  to  the  right,  passing  in  rear  of  the  chief  of 
caissons,  or  between  the  lines  of  carriages.  On  reaching  the  right 
of  the  line,  the  captain  passes  to  the  rear  of  and  takes  his  place 
on  the  left  of  the  reviewing  officer.  He  accompanies  him  a  few 
yards,  and  then  takes  his  post  in  front  of  the  battery,  the  review- 
ing officer  returning  to  the  post  for  review. 

1653.  Q.  By  what  commands  is  the  battery  put  in  motion  for 
review  ?  A.  The  captain  first  commands,  Limber  front ;  then, 
after  seeing  that  movement  executed,  Platoons  right  wheel, 
march;  Battery,  halt.  When  the  column  is  thus  formed,  the 
captain  causes  the  cannoneers  to  mount,  and  commands,  Pass  in 
remew;  Forward,  march;  Guide  right. 

1654.  Q.  After  the  battery  is  put  in  march  for  review,  where 


198  .        THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN^ER. 

and  when  does  the  captain  take  post  ?  A.  He  takes  post  four 
yards  in  front  of  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  immediately  after 
the  second  change  of  direction. 

1655.  Q.  What  meraJbers  of  the  battery  salute  the  reviewing 
officer  when  passing  in  review  ?  A.  All  the  officers,  the  first  ser- 
geant, the  quartermaster  and  stable  sergeants,  and  non-commis- 
sioned officers  in  command  of  platoons. 

1656.  Q.  Is  the  reviewing  officer  required  to  return  the  salutes 
of  all  persons  ?  A.  No  ;  he  returns  the  salute  of  the  captain 
only. 

1657.  Q.  How  is  a  battery  formed  in  line  when  reviewed  with 
cavalry  or  infantry  ?  A.  It  will  be  formed  in  line  with  the  lead- 
drivers  of  the  pieces  dressed  on  the  front  rank  of  the  infantry,  or 
on  the  rank  of  the  cavalry. 

1658.  Q.  What  commands  will  the  captain  give  at  the  com- 
mands Close  rariks^  'inarch^  with  infantry,  or  Attention,  posts, 
with  cavalry,  at  review  ?  A.  Limber  rear;  Pieces  reverse;  Cais- 
sons foi'ward,  march;  Battery,  halt. 

REVIEW  OF  A  BATTALION. 

1659.  Q.  The  battalion  being  in  line,  what  commands  are  neces- 
sary to  prepare  it  for  review  ?  A.  The  major  simply  commands. 
Prepare  for  review,  when  the  captains  prepare  their  respective, 
batteries  according  to  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  for 
the  review  of  a  single  battery. 

1660.  Q.  In  the  review  of  a  battalion  in  line,  where  will  the 
adjutant  and  sergeant  major  take  post  ?  A.  They  take  post  seven 
yards  outside  the  flanks  of  the  battalion,  the  adjutant  in  line 
with  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  the  sergeant  major  in  line  with  the 
lead-drivers  of  the  pieces. 

1661.  Q.  Is  there  any  special  difference  in  the  commands  and 
means  for  putting  a  battalion  in  march  for  review  than  that  of  a 
single  battery  \  A.  None,  except  that  the  major  gives  the  com- 
mands necessary,  substituting  battalion  for  battery  wherever  nec- 
essary, and  each  captain  takes  his  post  in  column  as  soon  as  the 
column  is  formed. 

1662.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  to  march  the  battalion  in  review  in  col- 
umn of  batteries  in  close  column,  what  must  be  done  ?  A.  The 
close  column  must  be  formed  on  the  leading  battery  immediately^ 
after  the  batteries  have  wheeled  to  the  right. 

1663.  Q.  When  a  battalion  line  is  formed  with  diminished  in- 
tervals for  review,  what  difference  exists  from  that  of  a  review, 
with  full  intervals  ?  A.  The  guns  are  not  unlimbered  when  line 
is  formed. 

REVIEW  OF  TWO  OR  MORE  BATTALIONS. 

1664.  Q.  How  is  the  commanding  officer  of  two  or  more  bat- 
talions of  artillery  designated  ?    A.  As  colonel. 


DRILL   REGULATION'S — LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  199 

1665.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  battalions  of  artillery 
formed  in  line  for  review  ?    A.  Sixty  yards. 

1666.  Q.  What  is  done  upon  the  arrival  of  the  reviewing  officer 
of  two  or  more  battalions  ?  A.  The  colonel  causes  the  trumpeter 
to  sound  attention,  which,  being  repeated  in  each  battalion,  each 
major  at  once  prepares  his  battalion  for  review. 

1667.  Q.  When  passing  down  the  front  of  the  line  at  a  review 
of  two  or  more  battalions,  how  will  the  reviewing  officer  pro- 
ceed? A.  In  rear  of  the  line  of  battalion  commanders  to  the 
left. 

1668.  Q.  How  is  the  interval  between  battalions  of  artillery  in 
column  at  review  estimated  ?  A.  The  distance  between  the  rear 
of  the  rear-rank  carriages  of  a  battalion  and  the  lead-horses  of 
the  following  battalion  is  the  interval  between  battalions  in  line, 
plus  the  front  of  the  subdivision  in  column  (platoon  or  battery), 
less  33  yards  (depth  of  a  section). 

1669.  Q.  In  what  manner  may  two  or  more  battalions  be  formed 
in  line  for  review  ?  A.  With  full  intervals,  with  closed  intervals, 
or  in  two  or  more  lines  with  full  or  closed  intervals. 

REVIEW  OF  A  BRIGADE. 

1670.  Q.  How  is  the  review  of  a  brigade  of  artillery  con- 
ducted ?  A.  As  prescribed  for  the  review  of  two  or  more  bat- 
talions ;  the  battalions  are  posted  as  directed  by  the  corps  com- 
mander. 

1671.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  brigade  commander  at 
review  of  a  brigade  of  artillery  ?  A.  He  is  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  the  brigade,  60  yards  in  front  of  the  line  of  majors. 

1672.  Q.  When  will  the  brigade  commander  and  staff  draw 
sabre  at  a  review  of  the  brigade  ?  A.  When  the  reviewing  officer 
halts  to  receive  the  salute  of  the  brigade,  and  when  they  take 
their  places  in  column. 

1673.  Q.  When  and  where  does  the  brigade  commander  take 
position  in  column  when  the  brigade  passes  in  review  ?  A.  He 
takes  post  in  column  when  at  100  yards  from  the  reviewing  offi- 
cer ;  if  the  corps  artillery  leads,  he  is  30  yards  in  front  of  the 
colonel  commanding  it ;  if  the  divisional  artillery  leads,  he  is  30 
yards  in  front  of  the  trumpeters  of  the  leading  battalion. 

BATTALION  PARADE. 

1674.  Q.  Describe  the  adjutant's  duties  at  the  parade  of  a  bat- 
talion of  artillery  up  to  the  point  when  the  parade  is  formed.  A. 
The  captains  having  placed  their  batteries  in  line,  the  adjutant 
faces  to  the  left,  has  attention  sounded,  and  commands,  Action 
front,  which  is  executed  by  the  captain  as  prescribed.  The  com- 
manding officer  having  taken  his  post,  the  adjutant  commands. 


200  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

Sound  off^  at  which  the  trumpeters  pass  down  the  front  of  the  the 
battalion  to  the  left  and  return  in  front  of  the  captains.  The  ad- 
jutant then  passes  at  a  trot  by  the  shortest  line  to  a  point  half- 
way between  the  commanding  officer  and  the  centre  of  the  line, 
faces  the  line,  halts,  and  commands.  Present  sabre ;  after  which 
he  executes  a  left  about,  salutes  the  commanding  officer,  reports, 
Sir^  the  parade  is  formed. 

1675.  Q.  Explain  the  adjutant's  duties  at  the  dress  parade  of 
a  battalion  of  artillery  from  the  time  the  commanding  officer 
directs  him  to  receive  the  reports  to  the  termination  of  the  parade. 
A.  The  adjutant  executes  a  left  about,  commands,  Carry  sabre^ 
and  adds.  First  sergeants,  front  and  centre,  trot ;  March.  The 
first  sergeants  move  to  the  centre  in  rear  of  the  line  of  officers, 
and  face  to  the  front,  when  the  adjutant  commands,  Report. 
After  each  has  reported  the  result  of  his  formation,  the  adjutant 
commands,  First  sergeants,  posts;  Trot ;  March.  When  they 
have  resumed  their  posts,  he  turns  left  about,  salutes  the  com- 
manding officer,  and  reports,  Sir,  all  are  present  or  accounted 
for ;  or,  Sir,  (so  many)  officers  (or  enlisted  men)  are  absent.  The 
commanding  officer  then  directs  him  to  publish  his  orders,  at 
which  the  adjutant  faces  left  about  and  commands.  Attention  to 
orders;  reads  the  orders,  and  then  commands,  Officers,  centre, 
march;  the  officers  proceed  to  the  centre,  the  adjutant  passes 
through  an  interval  left  for  him,  moves  four  yards  to  the  rear, 
turns  about  and  halts.  All  the  officers  having  formed,  the  adju- 
tant rides  up  to  his  place  in  line. 

1676.  Q.  At  the  dress  parade  of  a  battalion  of  artillery,  vvho 
gives  the  commands  for  the  line  of  officers  to  advance  and  to 
halt  ?  A.  The  senior  battery  officer  gives  the  command  to  ad- 
vance and  to  halt. 

1677.  Q.  At  the  dress  parade  of  a  battalion  of  artillery,  what 
is  the  distance  from  the  line  of  batteries  at  which  the  line  of 
officers  is  formed  at  the  centre  ?    A.  Eleven  yards. 

INSPECTION  OF  A  BATTERY. 

1678.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  of  the  captain  in  preparing 
his  battery  for  inspection  after  being  notified  to  do  so  ?  A.  Pre-, 
pare  for  inspection  ;  Action  front ;  Right  dress  ;  Front. 

1679.  Q.  Where  is  the  battery  wagon  and  forge,  if  present,  at 
an  inspection  of  a  battery  ?  A.  Fifteen  yards  from  the  left  of  the 
battery,  in  line  with  the  pieces  ;  the  quartermaster  sergeant  four 
yards  to  the  left  of,  and  the  stable  sergeant  boot  to  boot  with,  its 
lead-driver. 

1680.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  battery  wagon  and  forge  at 
the  command  Action  front  at  an  inspection  of  a  battery?  A.  It 
executes  two  left  abouts,  as  prescribed  for  the  limbers,  and  takes 
its  place  in  line  with  them. 


DRILL   REaULATIOlS'S— LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  201 

1681.  Q.  What  numbered  men  open  the  chests  of  the  battery 
at  inspection  ?  A.  No.  5  opens  the  lid  of  the  Umber-chests  of 
the  pieces  ;  No.  6  opens  the  lid  of  the  caisson  limber-chest,  and, 
when  so  directed,  the  lids  of  the  other  chests.  As  soon  as  the  bat- 
tery wagon  and  forge  have  taken  their  places  with  the  limbers  the 
senior  artificer  opens  the  lids  of  the  chests  and  resumes  his  post. 

1682.  Q.  What  should  a  battery  carry  for  inspection  ?  A.  Every 
article  that  is  furnished  as  part  of  its  regular  equipment,  and  for 
which  there  is  a  specially  designated  place  assigned  on  the  gun- 
carriage,  limber,  or  caisson. 

16'83.  Q.  How  should  a  battery  appear  in  full  marching  order 
for  inspection*?  A.  The  men  in  blouses  and  equipped  with  haver- 
sacks and  canteens ;  knapsacks  and  saddle-bags  packed  ;  over- 
coats (when  not  worn)  rolled  and  strapped  to  the  knapsacks  or 
saddles  ;  blankets  for  mounted  men  strapped  to  the  saddles  ;  horses 
equipped  with  nose-bags  and  halters  ;  caissons  loadefl  with  one 
day's  forage. 

1684.  Q.  If  the  battery  be  dismounted,  in  what  formation  is 
it  inspected  ?    A.  In  line  at  open  order,  with  sabres  drawn. 

1685.  Q.  In  the  muster  of  a  battery,  what  must  each  man  do 
as  he  answers  to  his  name  ?  A.  Each  cannoneer  steps  one  yard 
to  his  right  or  left,  according  as  he  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
piece,  and  returns  to  his  place  when  the  calling  of  the  roll  is  fin- 
ished ;  each  mounted  man,  as  he  answers  to  his  name,  dismounts 
and  stands  to  horse.  They  remount  at  the  commands  for  the 
drivers. 

1686.  Q.  If  the  battery  be  mustered  dismounted,  what  is  done  ? 
A.  The  ranks  are  opened  and  sabres  drawn  ;  each  man  after  an- 
swering to  his  name  returns  his  sabre. 

FUNERAL  ESCORT. 

1687.  Q.  What  are  the  escorts  prescribed  for  officers  of  light 
artillery  ?  A.  Colonel,  twelve  pieces ;  lieutenant-colonel  and 
major,  eight  pieces  ;  captain,  four  pieces  ;  lieutenant,  two  pieces. 

1688.  Q.  By  whom  should  an  officer's  funeral  escort  be  com- 
manded ?    A.  When  practicable,  by  an  officer  of  the  same  grade. 

1689.  Q.  By  whom  should  enlisted  men's  funeral  escorts  be 
commanded,  and  what  constitutes  the  escort?  A.  The  escort 
consists  of  one  piece,  and  is  commanded  by  a  sergeant. 

1690.  Q.  In  what  order  is  a  funeral -procession  formed?  A, 
Trumpeters,  escort,  clergy,  remains  and  pall-bearers,  mourners, 
members  of  the  former  command  of  the  deceased,  other  officers 
and  enlisted  men,  distinguished  persons,  delegations,  societies, 
civilians. 

1691.  Q.  Describe  the  movement  of  the  escort  from  the  house 
to  the  grave,  etc.  A.  The  escort  marches  at  a  walk  to  solemn 
music,  and  on  arriving  at  the  grave  is  formed  in  line  with  the 


202  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

centre  opposite  the  grave ;  the  detachments  are  next  brought  to  the 
front ;  the  remains  are  then  carried  along  the  front  of  the  escort 
ifo  thelgrave,  sabres  are  presented,  and  the  trumpeters  sound  an 
appropriate  air ;  sabres  are  then  carried,  and  the  escort  brought 
to  parade  rest.  After  the  coffin  'has  been  lowered  into  tjie  grave 
and  the  funeral  services  completed,  attention  is  ordered,  cannon- 
eers are  sent  to  their  post,  three  salvos  with  blank  cartridges  are 
fired,  and  then  "taps"  are  sounded  by  the  trumpeters.  The 
escort  is  then  formed  in  column,  marched  to  its  assembling  point, 
and  dismissed. 

1692.  Q.  When  it  is  impracticable  for  the  pieces  of  a  funeral 
escort  to  approach  the  grave,  what  is  done  ?  A.»  They  are  left 
outside  the  inclosure  ;  all  officers  and  enlisted  men,  except  drivers, 
dismount  and  turn  over  their  horses  to  the  drivers  ;  the  detach- 
ments are  next  formed  in  column  of  detachments  ;  all  except 
trumpeters,  draw  sabres  ;  the  remains  are  escorted  then  to  the 
grave,  and  the  ceremonies  as  prescribed  are  performed.  The 
ceremony  at  the  grave  being  completed,  the  detachments  are 
marched  to  the  guns  and  three  salvos  fired. 

1693.  Q.  What  pall-bearers  are  provided  in  funeral  ceremo- 
nies ?  A.  Six,  selected  from  the  grade  of  the  deceased,  or  the 
grades  next  above  or  below  it.  If  a  commissioned  officer,  the 
coffin  is  borne  by  six  non-commissioned  officers ;  if  a  non-com- 
missioned officer  or  private,  by  six  privates. 


PART  VII. 

DRILL— INFANTRY. 


Text-book— Cr.  S.  Drill  Regulations. 


For  Second  Lieutenants  of  Infantry— Nos.  1694-2377. 
For  First  Lieutenants  of  Infantry — Nos.  1694-2467. 
For  Captains  of  Infantry — Nos.  1694-2571. 


PAKT  VII. 

DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY. 


DEFINITIONS. 


1694.  Q.  What  is  an  alignment?  A.  A  straight  line,  upon 
which  several  men,  or  bodies  of  troops,  are  formed  or  are  to  be 
formed. 

1695.  Q.  "What  is  a  hasef  A.  It  is  the  unit  on  which  a  move- 
ment is  regulated. 

1696.  Q.  What  is  a  centre  f  A.  It  is  the  middle  point  or  ele- 
ment of  a  command. 

1697.  Q.  What  is  a  column?  A.  A  formation  in  which  the 
elements  are  placed  one  behind  another,  whether  these  elements 
are  files,  fours,  platoons,  companies,  or  larger  bodies. 

1698.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  word  deploy?  A.  A  movement 
to  extend  the  front,  as  to  pass  from  column  into  line. 

1699.  Q.  What  is  depth  f  A.  The  space  from  head  to  rear  of 
any  formation,  including  the  leading  and  rear  elements. 

1700.  Q.  What  is  disposition  f  A.  The  distribution  of  the 
fractions  of  a  body  of  troops,  and  the  formations  and  duties  as- 
signed to  each  for  the  accomplishment  of  a  common  end. 

1701.  Q.  What  is  distance  f  A.  An  open  space  in  the  direction 
of  depth.  The  distance  between  ranks  in  the  same  unit  is  meas- 
ured from  the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear  to  the  back  of  the  man 
in  front. 

1702.  Q.  How  is  the  distance  between  two  subdivisions  in 
column  measured  ?    A.  From  guide  to  guide. 

1703.  Q.  How  is  the  distance  between  two  commands  in  column 
— one  in  rear  of  the  other,  each  comprising  several  fractions 
— measured  ?  A.  From  the  rear-guide  of  the  command  that  is  in 
front  to  the  leading  guide  of  the  following  command. 

1704.  Q.  What  is  understood  hy  drill?  A.  The  exercises  and 
evolutions  taught  soldiers  and  executed  in  the  precise  and  formal 
manner  prescribed. 

1705.  Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  echelon?    A.  It  is  a  word  to 

205 


206  THE   AKMY    officer's   EXAMIKER. 

express  the  fact  that  subdivisions  of  a  command  are  placed  one 
behind  the  other,  extending  beyond  and  unmasking  one  another, 
either  wholly,  or  in  part. 

1706.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  this  term  employed  in  battle 
formation  ?  A.  To  designate  the  different  elements  or  lines  in 
the  direction  of  depth;  as,  Jirst  echelon,  firing  line;  the  secoiid 
echelon,  the  support,  etc. 

1707.  Q.  What  is  meant  hy  evolution?  A.  A  movement  exe- 
cuted by  several  battalions  for  the  purpose  of  passing  from  one 
formation  to  another. 

1708.  Q.  What  \& facing  distance?  A.  The  difference  between 
the  front  of  a  man  in  ranks  and  his  depth — about  sixteen  inches. 

1709.  Q.  What  is  Si  file?  A.  Two  men,  the  front-rank  man 
and  the  corresponding  man  of  the  rear  rank,  whether  placed  one 
behind  the  other  or  side  by  side. 

1710.  Q.  What  is  ^file-leader?  A.  The  front-rank  man  of  a 
file. 

1711.  Q.  When  is  a  file  said  to  be  Uanlc  f  A.  When  it  has  no 
rear-rank  man. 

1712.  Q.  When  the  troops  are  in  one  rank,  may  the  men  be 
termed  files  ?    A.  Yes,  when  organized  without  a  rear  rank. 

1713.  Q.  What  is  ?k  file-closer,  and  for  what  purpose  used  ?  A. 
OflScers  or  non-commissioned  officers  posted  two  paces  in  rear 
of  the  line  ;  used  to  rectify  mistakes  and  insure  steadiness  and 
promptness  in  the  ranks. 

1714.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  jffawZ;.?  A.  A  term  to  signify  the 
right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  column — the  element  on  the 
right  or  left  of  a  line. 

1715.  Q.  What  is  understood  hy  a, fianJc  attach?  A.  A  move- 
ment made  against  the  enemy's  flank, 

1716.  Q.  What  arefianJcers?  A.  Men  so  posted  or  marched  as 
to  protect  the  flank  of  a  column. 

1717.  Q.  'What  is  8. fianJc  march?  A.  A  march,  whatever  the 
formation,  by  which  troops  move  along  the  front  of  the  enemy's 
position. 

1718.  Q.  What  is  the  arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  com- 
mand termed  ?  A.  Formation;  and  signifies  the  placing  of  all 
the  fractions  in  regular  order  in  line,  in  column,  or  for  battle. 

1719.  Q.  What  is  the  space  or  width  occupied  by  a  command, 
whether  in  line  or  column,  termed  ?    A.  The  front. 

1720.  Q.  In  estimating  the  extent  of  the  front,  what  is  the 
space  occupied  by  one  man  taken  at  ?  A.  Twenty-eight  inches, 
which  includes  the  interval  between  files. 

1721.  Q.  In  what  other  manner  is  the  term  front  used  ?  A. 
It  denotes  the  direction  of  the  enemy. 

1722.  Q.  What  is  a  body  of  troops  marching  in  front  of  a  com- 
mand to  reconnoitre  and  to  protect  its  march  termed  ?  A.  Ad- 
vance-guard. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — FOR   INFANTRY.  207 

1723.  Q.  What  is  a  body  of  troops  to  protect  the  rear  of  a  com- 
mand termed  ?     A.  Rear-guard. 

1724.  Q.  Wliat  is  a  guide?  A.  An  officer,  non-commissioned 
officer,  or  private,  upon  whom  the  command  regulates  its  march. 

1725.  Q.  What  is  the  leading  element  of  a  command  termed? 
A.  The  head. 

1726.  Q.  What  is  an  interval  ?  A.  An  open  space  between  ele- 
ments of  the  same  line. 

1727.  Q.  How  is  the  interval  between  two  men  measured?  A. 
From  elbow  to  elbow. 

1728.  Q.  Howls  the  interval  between  companies,  squads,  etc., 
measured  ?  A.  From  the  left  elbow  of  the  left  man  or  guide  of 
the  group  on  the  right  to  the  right  elbow  of  the  right  man  or 
guide  of  the  group  on  the  left.  *■ 

1729.  Q.  What  Is  meant  by  the  term  left?  A.  It  is  the  extrem- 
ity, or  element  of  a  body  of  troops,  towards  the  left  hand  from 
the  front  of  a  command. 

1730.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  linef  A.  A  formation  in  which 
the  different  elements  are  abreast  of  each  other. 

1731.  Q.  When  these  elements  are  in  column,  what  is  the  forma- 
tion termed  ?    A.  A  line  of  columns. 

1732.  Q.  What  is  the  term  manmuvre  used  for  ?  A.  To  repre- 
sent a  mo  v^ement  made,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground, 
with  reference  to  the  position  and  movements  of  the  enemy. 

1733.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  formation  in  which  soldiers  are 
regularly  arranged  in  line  or  column  termed  ?    A.  Close  order. 

1734.  Q.  ^\\Ki\9>  extended  order?  A.  The  formation  in  which 
the  soldiers,  or  the  subdivisions,  or  both,  are  separated  by  inter- 
vals greater  than  in  close  order. 

1735.  Q.  What  isapacd.?  A  Thirty  inches — the  length  of  the 
full  step  in  quick  time. 

1736.  Q.  How  are  the  intervals  and  distances  given  in  the 
tactics  so  that  they  may  be  verified  ?  A.  Those  that  can  be  veri- 
fied by  pacing  are  given  in  paces;  those  less  than  one  pace,  in 
inches;  considerable  distances,  in  yards. 

1737.  Q.  What  does  the  word  ploy  mean  ?  A.  To  diminish 
front,  as  to  ploy  into  close  column. 

1738.  Q.  What  is  a  point  of  rest  ?  A.  The  point  at  which  a 
formation  begins. 

1739.  Q.  What  is  a  line  of  men  placed  side  by  side  called  ?  A. 
A  rank. 

1740.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  right  ?  A.  The  extremity 
or  element  of  a  body  of  troops  towards  the  right  hand  from  the 
front  of  a  command. 

1741.  Q.  What  are  scouts?  A.  Men  detailed  to  precede  a  com- 
mand on  the  march  and  when  forming  for  battle. 

1742.  Q.   What  are  the  duties  of  scouts?    A.  They  gather  and 


208  THE  AKMY   OFFICEE^S   EXAMINER. 

report  information  concerning  the  enemy  and  the  nature  of  the 
ground. 

1743.  Q.  What  is  meant  hy  tactics?  A,  It  is  the  art  of  hand- 
ling troops  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy  ;  or,  in  other  words, 
applying  on  the  battle-field  the  movements  learned  at  drill. 

1744.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  turning  moveme?it?  A.  It  is  an 
extended  movement  around  the  enemy's  flank,  for  the  purpose  of 
threatening  or  attacking  his  flank  or  rear. 

1745.  Q.  What  does  the  term  wi7ig  apply  to  ?  A.  The  portion 
of  a  command  between  the  centre  and  the  flank ;  the  battalion 
is  the  smallest  body  which  is  divided  into  wings. 

SIGNALS. 

1746.  Q.  In  what  manner  may  signals  be  used  ?  A.  They  may 
be  used  alone  or  in  conjunction  with  verbal  commands,  or  trum- 
pet-calls. The  whistle-call,  to  fix  the  attention,  may  precede  the 
signal. 

1 747.  Q.  In  making  signals,  what  may  be  held  in  the  hand  ? 
A.  The  sword,  rifle,  or  head-dress. 

1748.  Q.  When  the  sword  is  used,  how  should  it  be  held  ?  A. 
In  prolongation  of  the  arm. 

1749.  Q.  How  would  you  indicate  Forward?  A.  Eaise  the 
arm  until  horizontal,  extended  to  the  front ;  at  the  same  time 
move  to  the  front. 

1750.  Q.  How  would  a  person  indicate  Bight  oUiqve?  A.  Kaise 
the  arm  until  horizontal,  extended  obliquely  to  the  right  ;  at  the 
same  time  move  in  that  direction. 

1751.  Q.  How  would  the  Left  oblique  be  executed  ?  A.  The 
same  to  the  left. 

1752.  Q.  How  would  you  indicate  :  By  the  right  flank?  A.  Raise 
the  arm  until  horizontal,  extended  to  the  right ;  at  the  same  time 
move  to  the  right. 

1753.  Q.  Indicate  By  the  left  flank.  A.  The  same  as  pre- 
viously explained,  except  to  the  left. 

1754.  Q.  What  would  indicate  To  the  rear?  A.  Fac  eto  the 
rear,  raise  the  arm  until  horizontal,  extended  to  the  rear  ;  at  the 
same  time  move  to  the  rear. 

1755.  Q.  What  would  indicate  Change  direction  to  the  right  or 
left?  A.  Raise  the  arm  until  horizontal,  extended  toward  the 
marching  flank,  carrying  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  front  and 
right  ;  at  the  same  time  facing  and  moving  in  the  direction  to  be 
taken. 

1756.  Q.  How  should  As  skirmishers  be  signalled?  A.  Raise 
both  arms  until  horizontal,  extended  laterally. 

1757.  Q.  W hilt  is  the  signal  for  ^aZi.?  A.  Raise  the  arm  verti- 
cally to  its  full  extent. 

1758.  Q.  What  is  the  signal  io  Assmlle?    A.  Raise  the  arm 


DKILL  REGULATIONS — FOR   IISTFANTRY.  209 

vertically  to  its  full  extent  and  slowly  describe  small  horizontal 
circles. 

1759.  Q.  How  may  the  Rally  be  signalled  ?  A.  Raise  the  arm 
vertically  to  its  full  extent,  and  circle  it  very  rapidly, 

1760.  Q.  What  is  the  signal  for  Cease  firing?  A.  A  whistle- 
call. 

1761.  Q.  What  signal  is  used  to  fix  the  attention?  A.  A 
whistle-call. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

1762.  Q.  How  will  all  details,  detachments,  and  other  bodies 
of  troops  be  habitually  formed  ?    A.  in  double  rank. 

1763.  Q  How  may  movements  that  are  explained  for  execu- 
tion toward  one  flank  be  used  for  the  other  flank  ?  A.  By  sub- 
stituting the  word  left  for  Hght,  or  the  reverse. 

1764.  Q.  How  is  it  indicated  in  the  command  for  movements 
where  the  guide  may  be  either  right  or  left  ?  A.  Guide  {right  or 
left). 

1765.  Q.  Can  all  movements  be  executed  either  from  the  halt 
or  when  marching?    A.  Yes,  if  not  otherwise  prescribed. 

1766.  Q.  May  all  movements  be  executed  in  double  time? 
A.  Yes,  if  not  specially  excepted. 

1767.  Q.  When  must  the  command  Double  time  precede  the 
command  march  ?  A.  When  the  movement  is  from  a  halt  or 
when  marching  in  quick  time. 

1768.  Q.  When  should  the  command  Double  time  be  omitted? 
A.  When  marchiug  in  double  time. 

1769.  Q.  How  many  kinds  of  commands  are  used  ?  Explain 
them.  A.  There  are  two  kinds — the  jjreparatory ^  such  RSforicard, 
which  indicates  the  movement  that  is  to  be  executed  ;  and  the 
command  of  execution,  such  as  march,  halt,  or  arms,  which  causes 
the  execution. 

1770.  Q.  How  are  these  two  commands  distinguished  ?  A.  The 
preparatory  command  is  printed  in  italics,  and  those  of  execution 
in  CAPITALS  in  the  Drill  Regulations. 

1771.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  these  commands  be  given? 
A.  The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an  interval 
of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit  of  its  being 
properly  understood.  The  command  of  execution  should  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  movement  is  to  commence. 

1772.  Q.  What  should  be  the  tone  of  a  command?    A.  It 
should  be  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to 
the  number  of  men  under  instruction.     Each  preparatory  com- 
mand should  be  pronounced  in  an  ascending  tone  of  voice,  iuith--^^^:==5:^ 
always  in  such  manner  that  the  command  of  execution  maybe      ^"^^ 
more  energetic  and  elevated.     The  command  of  executj.pi5t^houl(i  ^ 
be  pronounced  in  a  firm  and  brief  tone.                       /      >^l  '--'        -  ^  v 


210  THE  AKMY   OFFICEE'S   EXAMINER. 

1773.  Q.  How  should  officers  face  when  giving  commands  to 
troops  ?    A.  It  is  usually  best  to  face  towards  them. 

1774.  Q.  How  is  uniformity  in  giving  commands  secured? 
A.  By  practising  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  in 
giving  commands. 

1775.  Q.  Who  gives  the  commands  where  it  is  not  mentioned 
in  the  text  of  the  drill  regulations  ?  A.  They  are  the  commands 
of  the  instructor. 

1776.  Q.  For  what  purpose  should  the  signals  and  trumpet- 
calls  be  frequently  used  in  instruction?  A.  In  order  that  by 
accustoming  the  ear  to  them,  the  officers  and  men  may  readily 
recognize  them. 

1777.  Q.  Are  instructors  confined  to  the  posts  prescribed  in 
the  different  schools  ?  A.  No  ;  they  go  wherever  their  presence 
is  necessary. 

School  of  the  Soldier. 
CLOSE  order. 

1778.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  school  of  the  soldier  f  A.  The 
instruction  of  the  individual  recruit  and  afterwards  that  of  the 
squad. 

1779.  Q.  How  should  drills  be  held  ?  A.  They  should  be  short 
and  frequent  to  prevent  exhausting  the  attention  of  both  instructor 
and  recruit. 

1780.  Q.  Who  are  the  instructors  of  recruits  and  squads? 
A.  Generally,  sergeants  and  corporals,  under  the  supervision  of 
an  officer  ;  but  the  captain  should  occasionally  require  the  lieu- 
tenants to  act  in  that  capacity. 

1781.  Q.  What  should  be  the  bearing  and  demeanor  of  an 
instructor  ?  A.  He  should  always  maintain  a  military  bearing 
and  by  a  quiet,  firm  demeanor  set  a  proper  example  to  the  men. 

1782.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  instructor?  A.  He  is  to 
explain  each  movement  in  as  few  words  as  possible,  at  the 'same 
time  executing  it  himself.  He  requires  recruits  to  take  by  them- 
selves the  proper  positions,  and  does  not  touch  them  for  the  pur- 
pose of  correcting  them,  except  when  they  are  unable  to  correct 
themselves  ;  he  avoids  keeping  them  too  long  at  the  same  move- 
ment, although  each  should  be  understood  before  passing  to 
another  ;  he  exacts  by  degrees  the  desired  precision  and  uni- 
formity. 

1783.  Q.  When  does  the  instructor  cease  to  confine  himself  to 
the  order  of  movements  laid  down  ?  A.  After  the  movements 
have  been  properly  executed  by  the  recruits. 

1784.  Q.  As  the  instruction  progresses,  what  is  done  with  the 
recruits?  A.  They  are  grouped  according  to  proficiency,  in 
order  that  all  may  advance  as  rapidly  as  their  abilities  permit. 

1785.  Q.  What  is  done  with  those  recruits  who  lack  aptitude 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.       211 

and  proficiency  ?    A.  They  will  be  separated  from  the  others  and 
placed  under  experienced  drill-masters. 

1786.  Q.  When  the  execution  of  a  movement  is  improperly 
begun  and  the  instructor  wishes  to  begin  it  anew  for  the  purpose 
of  correcting  it,  what  command  does  he  give  ?  A.  As  you  were ; 
at  which  the  movement  ceases  and  the  former  position  is  resumed. 

1787.  Q.  How  are  recruits  placed  for  individual  instruction 
without  arms  ?  A.  A  few,  usually  not  exceeding  four,  are  placed 
in  a  single  rank,  facing  to  the  front,  and  about  six  inches  apart, 
arranged  according  to  height,  the  tallest  man  on  the  right. 

1788.  Q.  How  should  recruits  be  taught  to  assemble  ?  A.  The 
instructor  requires  them  to  close  the  left  hand  and  place  the 
knuckles  against  the  waist,  above  the  hip,  wrist  straight,  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  front ;  he  then  places  them  on  the  same  line, 
so  that  the  right  arm  of  each  man  rests  lightly  against  the  left 
elbow  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  and  then  directs  the  left 
hands  to  be  replaced  by  the  side. 

1789.  Q.  What  command  is  given  for  the  recruits  to  take  their 
places  after  they  have  learned  liow  to  do  so?  A.  Fall  in;  when 
they  assemble  as  prescribed,  at  attention,  each  man  dropping  the 
left  hand  as  soon  as  the  man  next  on  his  left  has  his  interval. 

1790.  Q.  Describe  the  position  of  the  soldier  at  attention. 
A.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  and  as  near  each  other  as  the  con- 
formation of  the  man  permits ;  feet  turned  out  equally,  and 
forming  with  each  other  an  angle  of  about  sixty  degrees  ;  knees 
straight  without  stiffness ;  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a 
little  forward  ;  sh(5ulders  square  and  falling  equally  ;  arms  and 
hands  hanging  naturally ;  backs  of  the  hands  outward  ;  little 
fingers  opposite  the  seams  of  the  trousers,  elbows  near  the  body  ; 
head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  the  chin  slightly  drawn  in, 
without  constraint ;  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

1791.  Q.  Describe  the  various  Rests.  A.  Fall  out;  at  which 
the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but  will  remain  in  the  vicinity  ; 
Best^  at  which  the  men  keep  one  heel  in  place,  but  are  not 
required  to  preserve  silence,  nor  immobility  ;  At  ease,  when  the 
men  keep  one  heel  in  place  and  preserve  silence,  but  not  immo- 
bility ;  Parade  rest,  when  the  right  foot  is  carried  six  inches 
straight  to  the  rear,  with  the  left  knee  slightly  bent,  hands 
clasped  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body,  left  hand  uppermost, 
and  preserve  silence  and  steadiness  of  position. 

1793.  Q.  How  is  the  position  of  the  soldier  resumed  from  the 
various  positions  of  Rest  ?  A.  If  the  command  Fall  out  has  been 
given,  the  command  Fall  in;  in  all  the  others,  the  command 
Squad,  attention. 

1793.  Q.  How  is  a  squad  dismissed?  A.  By  the  simple 
command,  Dismissed. 

1794.  Q.  What  should  the  soldier  do  at  the  command  Eyes  right 
(or  left)  ?    A.    At  the  command  right  he  should  turn  his  head 


^12  THE  ARMY  OFFIOER'S  EXAMINER. 

gently,  so  as  to  bring  the  left  eye  in  line  with  the  centre  of  the 
body,  the  eyes  fixed  on  tlie  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed 
to  be  in,  the  same  rank  ;  the  shoulders  should  not  be  deranged. 

1795.  Q.  What  command  is  given  to  cause  the  men  to  look  to 
tbe front?    A.  Frofit. 

17M.  Q.  What  are  fadfifsf  A.  They  are  moTements  made 
by  the  i»divldual  soldier  to  change  his  front  withoat  moving  for- 
ward. 

17^7.  <^.  Describe  the  various  faeings.  A.  Right  (ar  left)  fate; 
at  this  the  right  heel  and  left  toe  is  raised  slightly  and  the  soldier 
turns  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure 
on  the  ball  of  the  right  foot ;  he  ttien  replaces  the  ri^it  foot. 
The  facings  to  the  left  are  also  executed  upon  the  left  heel.  About 
face;  at  this  <iommand  the  left  heel  and  right  toe  are  raised 
slightly,  and  the  soldier  faees  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the  right  on 
the  right  heel  and  the  ball  of  the  left  foot  ;  he  rej>laees  the  left 
foot  beside  the  right. 

1798.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  salute  with  the  hand  ?  A.  It 
is  the  form  of  military  courtesy  which  should  be  extended  by  all 
inferiors  to  superiors,  and  must  be  acknowledged  in  the  same 
manner  by  the  latter. 

1799.  Q.  Describe  the  salute  with  the  hand.  A.  The  hand  is 
raised  smartly  till  the  forefinger  touches  the  lower  part  of  the 
head-dress  above  the  right  eye,  the  thumb  and  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  palm  to  the  left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  forty-five 
degrees,  hand  and  wrist  straight.  When  the  salute  is  acknowl- 
edged, the  hand  is  dropped  <juietly  by  the  side.  If  uncovered, 
the  forefinger  touches  the  forehead  above  the  eye.  Enlisted  men 
salute  with  the  hand  farthest  from  the  party  saluted,  giving  the 
salute  six  paces  before  passing,  and  holding  the  hand  at  the  visor 
until  the  salute  is  acknowledged. 

1800.  Q.  Is  the  hand  salute  the  same  for  officers  as  for  enlisted 
men  ?  A.  Yes,  except  that  the  left  hand  is  used  only  when  the 
right  is  engaged. 

1801.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  setting-up  exercises  ?  A.  To 
develop  the  soldier  physically  and  give  him  a  freedom  of  move- 
ment of  all  parts  of  the  body,  in  order  that  the  suppleness  will 
relieve  him  as  much  as  possible  from  fatigue  in  his  various  mili- 
tary duties. 

1802.  Q.  In  what  particular  exercises  should  the  drill  be  alter- 
nated by  frequent  rests  and  varied  by  other  instruction  ?  A.  In 
those  which  pertain  to  the  arm,  hand,  trunk,  leg,  and  foot. 

1803.  Q.  By  what  command  does  any  particular  exercise  cease  ? 
A.  By  the  command  Halt. 

1804.  Q.  How  should  the  recruits  be  placed  for  the  setting-up 
exercises  ?    A.  In  single  rank,  three  paces  apart. 

1805.  Q.  Describe  the  first  exercise.  A.  At  the  command  Arm 
exercise,  the  arms  are  raised  laterally  until  horizontal,  palms  up- 


ward.  At  the  command  Head,  the  arms  are  raised  in  a  circular 
direction  o-ver  the  head,  tips  of  the  fingers  touching  the  top  of 
the  cap  over  the  forehead,  backs  of  fingers  in  contact  their  full 
length,  the  thumbs  pointing  to  the  rear,  elbows  pressed  back. 
At  the  command  Up,  the  arms  are  extended  upward  their  full 
length,  palms  touching.  At  the  command  Down,  the  arms  are 
forced  obliquely  back,  and  are  gradually  permitted  to  fall  by  the 
sides.  At  the  command  Riise,  the  arms  are  brought  to  the  posi- 
tion as  first  described,  and  the  exercise  is  continued  by  repeating 
Hmd,  up,  down,  raise. 

1806.  Q.  Describe  the  arm  exercise,  front  amd  rear.  A.  At  the 
command  Exercise,  the  arms  are  raised  laterally,  as  in  the  first  ex- 
ercise. At  the  command  Front,  swing  the  extended  arms  horizon- 
tally to  the  front,  palms  touching,  heels  on  the  ground.  At  the 
command  Rear,  swing  the  arms  tathe  rear,  inclining  them  slightly 
downward,  raising  the  body  upon  the  toes.  The  exercise  is  con- 
tinued by  repeating  Front,  rmr. 

1807.  Q.  Describe  the  circle  exercise  with  the  arm.  A.  At  the 
command  Exercise,  the  arms  are  raised  as  described  in  the  first 
exercise.  At  Circle,  slowly  describe  a  small  circle  with  each  arm, 
upward  and  backward,  from  front  to  rear,  the  arms  not  passing 
in  front  of  the  line  of  the  breast.  This  is  continued  by  repeat- 
ing Circle. 

1808.  Q.  Describe  the  shoulder  exercise  with  the  arm.  A.  At 
the  command  Exercise,  the  arms  are  raised  as  in  the  first  exercise. 
At  Shoulder,  place  the  tips  of  the  fingers  lightly  on  top  of  the 
shoulders,  keeping  upper  arm  horizontal.  At  Front,  the  elbows 
are  forced  to  the  front.  At  Rear,  the  elbows  are  forced  back  as 
far  as  possible.     This  is  continued  by  repeating  Front,  rear. 

1809.  Q.  Describe  the  hand  exercise.  A.  At  the  command  Ex- 
ercise, the  arms  are  raised  as  in  the  first  exercise.  At  Close,  close 
the  hands  with  force.  At  Oj^en,  open  the  hands  quickly,  spread- 
ing the  fingers  and  thumbs  apart  as  much  as  possible.  This  is 
continued  by  repeating  Close,  open. 

1810.  Q.  Describe  the  forearm  vei'tical  exercise.  A.  At  the 
command  Rue,  raise  the  forearms  until  nearly  vertical,  fingers 
extended  and  joined,  palms  toward  each  other.  At  Up,  thrust 
upward  with  force^  extending  the  arms  to  their  full  length.  At 
Down,  force  the  arms  obliquely  back,  and  gradually  let  them  fall 
by  the  sides.     This  is  continued  by  repeating  Raise,  up,  down. 

1811.  Q.  DesGrihe  the  forearm  horizontal  exercise.  A.  At  the 
command  Riise,  raise  the  forearms  to  the  front  until  horizontal, 
elbows  forced  back,  hands  tightly  closed,  backs  down.  At  Front, 
thrust  the  arms  forcibly  to  the  front,  turning  the  backs  of  the 
hands  up,  arms  horizontal.  At  Rear,  bring  the  arms  back  quickly 
to  the  first  position,  forcing  elbows  and  shoulders  to  the  rear. 
This  is  continued  by  repeating  Front,  rear. 

1812.  Q.  Describe  the  trunk  down  exercise.     A.  At  the  com- 


214  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

mand  Exerdse,  raise  the  hands  and  place  them  on  the  hips,  fingers 
to  the  rear,  thumbs  to  the  front,  elbows  pressed  back.  At  J)own, 
bend  the  trunk  forward  at  the  hips  as  far  as  possible.  At  Bach, 
raise  and  bend  the  trunk  to  the  rear  as  far  as  possible.  These 
motions  should  be  executed  slowly  without  bending  the  knees. 
This  is  continued  by  repeating  Down,  lack. 

1813.  Q.  Describe  the  trunk  right  exercise.  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in  the  trunk  down 
exercise.  At  Bight,  bend  the  trunk  to  the  right  without  twisting 
it  or  raising  either  heel.  At  Left,  bend  the  trunk  similarly  to  the 
left.  Execute  both  motions  slowly.  This  is  continued  by  repeat- 
ing Right,  left. 

1814.  Q.  Describe  the  trunk  circle  exercise.  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in  the  trunk  down 
exercise.  At  GireZe  right,  bend  the  trunk  to  the  right,  and  then 
turn  it  to  the  rear  ;  turn  the  trunk  to  the  left  and  bend  to  the 
left ;  turn  the  trunk  to  the  front  and  bend  forward.  This  is  con- 
tinued by  repeating  Circle  right. 

\%\f).  Q.  Describe  the  arms  vertical  exercise.  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Baise,  raise  the  arms  from  the  side,  extended  to  their  full 
length,  till  the  hands  meet  above  the  head,  palms  to  the  front, 
fingers  pointed  upward,  thumbs  locked,  right  thumb  in  front, 
shoulders  pressed  back.  At  Down,  bend  over  till  the  hands,  if 
possible,  touch  the  ground,  keeping  arms  and  knees  straight.  At 
Up,  straighten  the  body  and  swing  the  arms,  extended,  to  the 
vertical  position.     This  is  continued  by  repeating  Down,  up. 

1810.  Q.  Describe  the  arms  forward  exercise.  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Baise,  raise  the  arms  to  the  front,  extended  to  their  full 
lengtb,  till  the  hands  are  in  front  of  and  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulders,  palms  down,  fingers  extended  and  joined,  thumbs 
under  forefingers.  At  Down,  bend  the  trunk  forward  at  the  hips 
as  far  as  possible  and  swing  the  arms  backward,  knees  and  arras 
straight.  At  Up,  straighten  the  trunk  and  swing  the  arms  to 
the  forward  position.     This  is  continued  by  repeating  Down,  up. 

1817.  Q.  Describe  the  leg  half -lend  exercise.  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips  as  in  the  trunk  exer- 
cise. At  Down,  lower  the  body,  separating  the  knees  and  bending 
them  as  much  as  possible,  heels  on  the  ground,  head  and  trunk 
erect.  At  Up,  raise  the  body,  straightening  and  closing  the  knees. 
This  is  continued  by  repeating  Down,  up. 

1818.  Q.  Describe  the  leg  full-lend  exercise.  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in  the  trunk  exer- 
cise. At  Down,  lower  the  body,  separating  the  knees,  and  bend- 
ing them  as  much  as  possible,  head  and  trunk  erect,  heels  raised, 
weight  of  body  resting  on  the  balls  of  the  feet.  At  Up,  raise  the 
body,  straightening  and  closing  the  knees,  and  lower  the  heels 
to  the  ground.    This  is  continued  by  repeating  Down,  up. 

1819.  Q.  Describe  the  leg  left  (or  right)  exercise.    A.  At  the 


DRILL   REGtJLATlOITS— FOR  II^TFANTRY.  215 

command  Exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in  the  trunk  ex- 
ercise. At  Forward^  move  the  left  leg  to  the  front,  knee  straight, 
so  as  to  advance  the  foot  about  fifteen  inches,  toe  turned  out, 
sole  nearly  horizontal,  body  balanced  on  right  foot.  At  Rear, 
move  the  leg  to  the  rear,  knee  straight,  toe  on  a  line  with  the 
right  heel,  sole  nearly  horizontal.  This  is  continued  by  repeat- 
ing Forward,  rear.  When  the  recruit  has  learned  to  balance  him- 
self the  command  forward  is  followed  by  Ground,  at  which  the 
weight  of  the  body  is  thrown  forward  by  rising  on  the  ball  of 
the  right  foot,  and  then  advancing  and  planting  the  left,  left  heel 
thirty  inches  from  the  right,  and  advance  the  right  leg  quickly 
to  the  position  of  forward.  This  is  continued  by  repeating 
Ground  when  the  right  and  left  legs  are  alternately  in  the  position 
of  forward. 

1820.  Q.  Describe  the  leg  up  exercise.  A.  At  the  command 
Exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in  the  trunk  exercise. 
At  Up,  raise  the  left  leg  to  the  front,  bending  and  elevating  the 
knee  as  much  as  possible,  leg  from  knee  to  instep  vertical,  toe 
depressed.  At  Up,  replace  the  left  foot  and  raise  the  right  leg  as 
prescribed  for  the  left.  Execute  slowly  at  first,  then  gradually 
increase  to  the  cadence  of  double  time.  This  is  continued  by 
repeating  Up  when  the  right  and  left  legs  are  alternately  in  posi- 
tion. 

1821.  Q.  Describe  the  foot  exercise.  A.  At  the  command 
Exe7'ci8e,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in  the  trunk  exercise. 
At  Up,  raise  the  body  upon  the  toes,  knees  straight,  heels  to- 
gether. At  Down,  lower  the  heels  slowly  to  the  ground.  This  is 
continued  by  repeating  Up,  down. 

1822.  Q.  How  may  the  exercises  be  continued  without  repeat- 
ing the  commands  ?  A.  After  they  are  well  understood,  the 
instructor  gives  the  commands  as  prescribed,  and  adds.  Continue 
the  exercise,  upon  which  the  movements  will  be  continuously  exe- 
cuted until  the  command  Halt  is  given. 

1823.  Q.  When  may  the  exercises  be  discontinued  with  well- 
trained  soldiers  ?  A.  When  there  is  a  regular  system  of  gym- 
nastic instruction. 


THE  STEPS. 

1824.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  quich  time?  A.  It  is  the  time 
prescribed  in  which  the  soldiers  shall  take  steps  of  thirty  inches 
in  marching,  at  the  cadence  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  steps  per 
minute. 

1825.  Q.  What  is  understood  when  the  command  Forward, 
march,  is  given?  A.  That  the  soldier  should  move  directly  to 
the  front  in  quick  time. 

1826.  Q.  How  is  the  command  Forward^  march,  executed  ?  A. 
At  the  command  Forward,  the  weight  of  the  body  must  be  thrown 


216  THE  ARMY  OFFICEE'S  EXAMINER. 

upon  the  right  leg  without  bending  the  left  knee.  At  March  the 
left  leg  is  moved  smartly  without  jerk,  and  the  right  foot  is  car- 
ried forward  thirty  inches  from  the  right,  measuring  from  heel 
to  heel,  sole  near  the  ground,  knee  straight  and  slightly  turned 
out ;  at  the  same  thne  the  weight  of  the  body  is  thrown  for- 
ward, and  the  foot  is  planted  without  shock,  the  weight  of  the 
body  resting  on  it;  next  in  manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and 
plant  it  as  above.  Then  continue  the  march,  keeping  the  face  to 
the  front. 

1827.  Q.  How  is  the  cadence  of  the  step  indicated  from  time 
to  time  ?  A.  The  instructor  calls  out,  one,  two,  three,  four;  or, 
left,  right,  the  instant  the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should 
be  planted. 

1828.  Q.  What  is  double  time  f  A.  It  is  a  movement  to  increase 
the  rate  of  swiftness  of  a  soldier's  march  to  one  hundred  and 
eighty  steps  per  minute  with  a  thirty-six  inch  step. 

1829.  Q.  In  what  manner  is  double  time^n-dicated  ?  A.  By 
always  giving  (he  command  Double  time  just  oefore  the  command 
March. 

1830.  Q.  How  should  double  time  be  executed  ?  A.  At  the 
command  Forward  the  weight  of  the  body  is  thrown  upon  the 
right  leg.  At  Double  time  raise  the  hands  until  the  forearm 
is  horizontal,  fingers  closed,  nails  toward  the  body,  elbows  to  the 
rear.  At  March  carry  forward  the  left  foot,  leg  slightly  bent, 
knee  somewhat  raised,  and  plant  the  left  foot  thirty-six  inches 
from  the  right ;  then  execute  the  same  motion  with  the  right 
foot ;  continue  this  alternate  movement  of  the  feet,  throwing  the 
weight  of  the  body  forward,  and  allow  a  natural  swinging  mo- 
tion to  the  arms. 

1831.  Q.  What  fact  should  be  impressed  upon  the  men  with 
regard  to  breathing,  when  marching  in  double  time?  A.  That 
they  should  breathe  as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping 
the  mouth  closed. 

1832.  Q.  Explain  how  to  marh  time.  A  .  The  command  is, 
Mark  time,  march.  At  the  command  March,  given  as  either  foot 
is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  cadence  of  the  step  is  continued, 
making  a  semblance  of  marching  without  gaining  ground,  by 
alternately  advancing  each  foot  about  half  its  length  and  bring- 
ing it  back  on  a  line  with  the  other. 

1833.  Q.  How  is  the  full  step  resumed  from  marTc  time?  A. 
By  giving  the  command  Forward^  march. 

1834.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  the  short  step  ?  A.  It  is  a 
step  of  fifteen  inches,  in  quick  time,  and  eighteen  inches  in  double 
time. 

1835.  Q.  What  is  a  side  step?  A.  It  is  a  step  to  the  right  or 
left  of  twelve  inches,  by  carrying  the  foot  to  the  right  or  left  to 
that  distance,  keeping  the  knees  straight  and  shoulders  square  to 
the  front ;  as  soon  as  either  foot  is  planted  the  other  is  brought 


DRILL  REGULATIOKS— FOR  IKFAKTRY.      217 

up  alongside  of  it,  and  the  movements  continued,  observing  the 
cadence  for  each  foot  as  for  quick  time. 

1836.  Q.  Can  the  side  step  be  executed  in  doiMe  time  or  on 
the  march  ?    A.  It  cannot. 

1837.  Q.  What  is  the  hack  step  ?  A.  It  is  intended  for  a  move- 
ment of  a  few  paces  to  the  rear  without  facing  in  that  direction. 

1838.  Q.  How  may  the  back  step  be  executed  ?  A.  It  can  only 
be  executed  from  a  halt  by  the  command  Backward,  march,  at 
which,  step  back  with  the  left  foot  fifteen  inches  straight  to  the 
rear,  measuring  from  heel  to  heel  ;  then  with  the  right,  and  so 
on  until  the  command  halt,  at  which  the  foot  in  front  is  planted 
beside  the  one  in  rear. 

1839.  Q.  Can  the  back  step  be  executed  in  douUe  time  f  A.  It 
cannot. 

1840.  Q.  What  steps  may  be  executed  from  mark  time^  and  con- 
vei"sely  ?    A.  The  sliort,  side,  and  lack  steps. 

1841.  Q.  Explain  how  to  change  step.  A.  The  command  is, 
Change  step,  march.  At  the  command  March,  given  as  the  right 
foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  left  foot  is  advanced  and  planted; 
the  toe  of  the  right  is  then  advanced  near  the  heel  of  the  left,  ^nd 
again  stepping  off  with  the  left.  The  movement  may  be  made 
with  the  left  as  explained  for  the  right. 

1842.  Q.  How  should  recruits  be  instructed  in  what  is  called 
covering?  A.  The  instructor  selects  two  points  on  the  ground,  or 
two  stationary  objects  in  the  distance,  and  requires  tlie  recruit 
to  march  on  them,  so  that  the  prolongation  of  the  straight  line 
through  these  points  shall  pass  between  his  heels.  Two  recruit 
should  also  be  established,  one  covering  the  other,  and  the  others 
required  to  cover  them  at  considerable  distances  apart.  If  covered 
properly,  but  one  man  or  object  is  seen  in  front. 


INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION  WITH  ARMS. 

1843.  Q.  What  must  part  of  each  drill*  with  arms  be  devoted 
to  ?    A.  Marching. 

1844.  Q.  In  the  instruction  of  recruits,  in  what  manner  is  the 
manual  of  arms  first  executed  ?    A.  In  single  rank. 

1845.  Q.  At  the  command  Fall  in,  in  what  position  should  the 
pieces  be  placed  ?  A.  The  men  assemble  with  their  pieces  afc 
order  arms. 

1846.  Q.  What  should  be  done  to  prevent  accidents  when  the 
men  assemble  under  arms  ?  A.  The  chambers  should  be  opened 
by  the  instructor  whenever  the  squad  is  first  formed,  and  just 
before  it  is  dismissed.  This  should  be  done  with  all  squads,  de- 
tachments, or  companies. 

1847.  Q.  What  movements  of  the  piece  are  not  executed  in 
cadence,   but  with  promptness  and  regularity  ?    A.  The  move- 


SI 8  THE   ARMY   OFFICER*S  EXAMI15"ER. 

ments  relative  to  the  cartridge,  fixing  and  unfixing  bayonet,  ad- 
justing sight,  and  breaking  and  forming  stack. 

1848.  Q.  How  are  the  movements  in  the  Manual  of  Arms  di- 
vided for  the  purpose  of  instruction  ?  A.  They  are  divided  into 
motions,  and  executed  in  detail. 

1849.  Q.  By  what  command  are  movements  executed  in  detail  ? 
A.  The  instructor  first  cautions — By  the  numbers;  all  movements 
divided  into  motions  are  then  executed  as  follows  :  The  command 
of  execution  determines  the  prompt  execution  of  the  first  mo- 
tion ;  two,  three,  etc.,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

1850.  Q.  What  command  relieves  the  squad  from  the  execution 
of  movements  in  detail  ?  A.  Without  the  numbers,  or  when  the 
instructor  commands  other  movements  than  those  in  the  Manual 
of  Arms. 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS. 

1851.  Q.  In  resuming  the  carry  from  any  position  in  the  Man- 
ual, what  is  the  general  rule  regarding  the  motion  next  to  the 
last 'and  the  last  ?  A.  It  concludes  with  the  left  hand  as  high  as 
the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
thumb  close  to  forefinger,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front,  elbow 
close  to  the  body,  right  hand  embracing  the  guard  with  thumb 
and  forefinger.  The  last  motion  consists  in  dropping  the  left 
hand  by  the  side. 

1852.  Q.  What  is  termed  the  balance  in  the  Manual  of  Arras  ? 
A.  It  is  the  centre  of  gramty  of  the 'piece  with  the  bayonet  unfixed. 

1853.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  as  regarding  the  left  hand 
at  the  balance  ?  A.  In  all  positions  at  the  balance,  except  at  the 
port  arms  and  charge  bayonet,  the  thumb  is  extended  along  the 
stock. 

1854.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  with  regard  to  the  positions 
of  the  piece  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body  ?  A.  The  barrel  is  to 
the  rear,  and  vertical. 

1855.  Q.  How  is  the  ^ieee  to  be  habitually  carried  with  refer- 
ence to  the  hammer  ?    A.  The  hammer  must  be  at  the  safety-notch. 

[To  the  questions  which  are  only  answerable  in  the  text  of  the 
Drill  Regulations,  the  page  of  the  D.  E.  is  given  in  the  answer. 
The  paragraphs  are  simply  numbered  for  the  guidance  of  exam- 
iners.] 

1856.  Q.  Describe  the  position  of  order  arms.    A.  (Par.  50.) 

1857.  Q.  Describe  the  position  of  carry  arms.     A.  (Par.  51.) 

1858.  Q.  Explain  the  carry  arms  from  an  order.    A.  (Par.  52.) 

1859.  Q.  Describe  the  prsent  from  a  carry.     A.  (Par.  53.) 

1860.  Q.  The  recruit  being  at  a  carry  or  order,  describe  the 
right-shoulder  arms.     A.  (Par.  54.) 

1861.  Q.  Describe  the  carry  arms  from  right  shoulder.  A, 
(Par.  55.) 


DRILL  HtJGtJLATlONS— FOR  IKFAKTRY.  219 

1862.  Q.  Describe  the  order  from  right  shoulder.    A.  (Par.  56.) 

1863.  Q.  The  recruit  being  at  a  carry  or  07'der,  describe  port 
arms.     A.  (Par.  57.)  : 

1864.  Q.  Being  atpor^,  to  carry  arms  A.  Kesume  the  carry y 
and  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

1865.  Q.  Being  at  port,  to  resume  the  07'der  arms.  A.  Take 
the  second  and  third  positions  of  order  from  right  shoulder. 

1866.  Q.  Being  at  right  shoulder  describe,  port  arms.  A.  (Par. 
58.) 

1867.  Q.  To  return  to  right-shoiilde?'  arms  from  port.  A. 
Take  the  second  and  third  positions  of  right  shoulder  from  the 
carry. 

1868.  Q.  What  rests  are  executed  as  without  arms  ?  A.  Fall 
out.  Rest,  and  At  ease. 

1869.  Q.  On  resuming  attention  from  rests,  what  position  is 
taken  ?    A.  The  position  of  order  arms. 

1870.  Q.  Being  at  the  order,  describe  parade  rest.  A.  (Par. 
60.) 

1871.  Q.  Upon  the  command  Squad,  attention,  what  is  done  ? 
A.  The  order  arms  is  resumed,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  piece 
opposite  the  right  breast. 

1872.  Q.  How  is  an  armed  squad  dismissed  ?  A.  By  the  com- 
mand Port  arms,  dismissed. 

1873.  Q.  IIow  is  the  bayonet  fixed  from  a  carry  ?    A.  (Par.  62.) 

1874.  Q.  How  is  the  bayonet  unfixed  from  a  carry  ?  A.  (Par. 
63.) 

1875.  Q.  Can  bayonets  be  fixed  and  unfixed  from  an  order  by 
the  same  commands  as  from  a  carry  ?  A.  They  can  ;  the  piece 
being  shifted  from  the  right  to  the  left  side. 

1876.  Q,  In  fixing  and  unfixing  bayonets  from  an  order,  and 
in  returning  to  the  order,  where  do  the  hands  change  ?  A.  In 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  left  hand  grasping  the  piece 
above  the  right. 

1877.  Q.  How  is  the  bayonet  unfixed  from  port  arms  f  A.  As 
from  the  carry,  quitting  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  low- 
ering it  with  the  left. 

1878.  Q.  How  should  the  rod-bayonet  be  fixed  and  unfixed? 
A.  (Par.  65.) 

1879.  Q.  How  are  bayonets  fixed  and  unfixed  while  marching  ? 
A.  In  the  most  expeditious  and  convenient  manner. 

1880.  Q.  Describe  the  charge  bayonet  from  a  carry.  A.  (Par. 
67.) 

1881.  Q.  Describe  the  charge  bayonet  from  an  order.  A.  (Par. 
68.)  . 

1882.  Q.  How  are  the  movements  of  kneeling,  lying  down  and 
rising  first  taught  ?  A.  They  are  first  taught  without  arms  ;  but 
they  are  executed  as  with  arms,  except  that  in  the  position  kneel- 
ing the  right  hand  rests  on  the  right  thigh,  and  in  moving  to  and 


S30  TPSIB  ARMY  Of FICER^S  EXAMINER. 

from  the  lying  position,  the  right  hand  is  placed  on  the  ground  ; 
in  the  position  lying  down  the  forearms  are  against  each  other 
on  the  ground,  left  arm  in  front. 

1883.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  to  prevent  accidents,  on  re- 
ceiving the  command  to  kneel,  lie  down  or  rise  ?  A.  Before  exe- 
cuting the  command  the  hammer  will  be  lowered  to  the  safety- 
notch. 

1884.  Q.  In  the  position  of  order  kneeling^  which  rank  faces 
half  right  ?    A.  The  front-rank  men. 

1885.  Q.  How  far  do  the  front-rank  men  carry  their  feet  to  the 
rear,  and  which  of  the  two  feet?  A.  So  that  the  right  toe  shall 
be  about  ten  inches  to  the  rear  and  ten  inches  to  the  left  of  the 
left  heel. 

1886.  Q.  How  is  the  kneeling  accomplished  ?  A.  Kneel  on  the 
right  knee,  bending^  the  left,  with  the  left  toe  inclined  slightly  to 
the  right,  and  right  leg  pointing  directly  to  the  right. 

1887.  Q.  Where  does  the  vjeight  of  the  body  rest  in  kneeling  ? 
A.  On  the  right  heel. 

1888.  Q.  Where  is  the  left  forearm  in  the  position  of  order 
kneeling  ?    A.  Across  the  left  thigh,  hand  hanging  naturally. 

1889.  Q.  Where  is  the  7'i^e  in  the  position  of  order  kneeling?" 
A.  It  i&  not  moved.  It  remains  in  the  position  of  order  arms, 
the  right  hand  grasping  it  above  the  balance. 

1890.  Q.  How  do  the  men  in  the  rear  rank  come  to  the  position 
of  order  kneeling  ?  A.  At  the  command  Kneel^  each  rear-rank 
man  steps  off  obliquely  to  the  right  with  the  left  foot,  planting 
the  toe  opposite  the  middle  of  the  interval  to  his  right  and  in 
line  with  the  left  heel  of  his  front-rank  man,  at  the  same  time 
placing  the  butt  of  his  piece  against  his  left  toe;  he  then  kneels 
as  prescribed  for  the  front-rank  man. 

1890a.  Q.  What  is  done  at  the  command  Rise,  from  the  position 
of  order  kneeling  ?  A.  The  men  rise  and  take  the  position  of 
order  arms,  the  rear-rank  men  covering  their  file-leaders. 

1891.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  placing  the  men  in  a  prone 
position  ?    A.  Lie.  down. 

1892.  Q.  If  in  the  position  of  order  kneeling,  and  the  command 
Lie  down  is  given,  what  is  the  first  thing  to  be  done  by  the  front- 
rank  men  ?  A.  Each  man  places  the  right  knee  against  the  left  heel, 
and  draws  back  the  left  foot,  placing  the  left  knee  on  the  ground 
beside  the  other. 

1893.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  body  when  prone  ?  A. 
It  is  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  the  body  about  thirty-five  de- 
grees to.  the  right. 

1894.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  rifle  in  a  prone  move- 
ment ?  A.  The  toe  of  the  piece  rests  on  the  ground,  barrel  up, 
left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  elbow  on  the  ground,  and  the  right 
hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  opposite  the  neck. 


DRILL  EEGULATIO>fS — FOR  IKFANTRY.  221 

1895.  Q.  What  movement  is  made  by  the  rear-rank  men  before 
assuming  the  prone  position  ?    A.  They  move  back  one  pace. 

1896.  Q.  If  lying  down,  how  do  the  men  risef  A.  By  rever&iiig 
the  second  motion  of  lie  down. 

1897.  Q.  In  what  position  must  the  rifle  be  to  execute  the 
load  f    A.  It  may  be  either  at  the  carry  or  order. 

1898.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  rifle  at  the  termination 
of  load  ?  A.  The  muzzle  must  be  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the 
right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  against  the  right  side  at  the 
waist,  the  rifle  resting  in  the  left  hand  at  the  balance. 

1899.  Q.  Where  does  the  left  forearm  rest  if  loading  while 
kneeling  ?    A.  It  rests  across  the  left  thigh. 

1900.  Q.  When  should  cartridge-boxes  be  closed  ?  A.  After 
executing  the  order  or  order  hneeling. 

1901.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  command  Ready  f  A.  It  is  in- 
tended to  prepare  the  men  and  pieces  for  instant  firing;  to  do  this 
the  piece  should  simply  be  cocked  with  the  right  thumb,  and  the 
thumb  returned  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

1902.  Q.  Can  the  piece  be  brought  to  a  ready  from  any  posi- 
tion by  the  simple  command  ready  ?  A.  Yes,  but  in  executing  it 
the  position  of  load  must  be  first  resumed. 

1903.  Q.  If  in  the  position  of  load  or  ready  and  the  command 
Order  amis  is  given,  what  must  first  be  done  ?  A.  The  hammer 
must  first  be  lowered  to  the  safety-notch. 

1904.  Q.  How  may  it  be  ascertained  if  any  of  the  pieces  are 
loaded?    A.  The  instructor  commands  Open  diamher. 

1905.  Q.  Are  all  the  pieces  held  at  open  chamber  until  the 
squad  or  company  is  inspected  ?  A.  No  ;  as  soon  as  his  piece  is 
examined  each  man  closes  his  chamber,  lowers  the  hammer  to 
the  safety-notch,  and  I'eturns  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock. 

1906.  Q.  If  the  instructor  does  not  wish  to  examine  each  piece 
after  opening  chambers,  what  command  should  he  give?  A. 
Close  chamber.^  and  port  arms  resumed. 

1907.  Q.  How  do  the  rear-rank  men  execute  the  aim  ami  fire  ? 
A.  Each  man  aims  through  the  interval  at  the  right  of  his  file- 
leader,  and  inclines  slightly  forward,  in  order  to  advance  the 
muzzle  of  his  piece  beyond  the  front  rank. 

1908.  Q.  Wlien  lying  down  in  double  rank,  how  do  the  rear- 
rank  men  aim  and  fire  ?    A.  They  neither  aim  nor  tire. 

1909.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  commanding  Recover  arms  ? 
A.  To  accustom  the  men  in  the  position  of  aim  to  wait  for  the 
command  to  fire. 

1910.  Q.  In  aiming  kneeling,  where  does  the  left  elbow  rest  ? 
A.  On  the  left  knee,  point  of  elbow  in  front  of  knee-cap. 

1911.  Q.  What  command  must  always  precede  that  of  aim? 
A.  At  (such  and  such  an  object),  at  (so  many)  yards,  squad. 


222  THE  AKMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINEE. 

1913.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  this  given  ?  A.  In  order  that 
the  men  may  look  at  the  object  and  arrange  the  sights  on  their 
pieces. 

1913.  Q.  What  is  the  rifle  salute  f  A.  Having  the  piece  at  a 
carry,  and  throwing  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  hollow  of  the 
right  shoulder,  forearm  horizontal,  palm  of  the  hand  down, 
thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger  against  the 
piece. 

1914.  Q.  How  are  cartridge-boxes  opened  ?  A.  With  the  right 
hand,  the  left  hand  steadying  the  piece  near  the  muzzle. 

1915.  Q.  At  inspection  of  arms,  with  which  hand  does  the 
soldier  receive  the  piece  from  the  inspector  ?  A.  With  the  left 
hand,  at  the  balance. 

1916.  Q.  What  does  the  soldier  do  after  receiving  his  piece 
back  from  an  inspector  ?  A.  He  resumes  the  port  arms,  closes 
chamber,  brings  the  hammer  to  the  safety-notch,  unfixes  bayo- 
net, and  returns  to  the  order. 

1917.  Q,  Where  should  an  inspector  always  begin  the  inspec- 
tion of  a  squad  ?  A.  He  should  begin  on  the  right,  but  after- 
wards may  pass  in  rear  and  iuspect  boxes  from  the  left. 

1918.  Q.  For  what  purpose  do  the  front-rank  men  step  back 
one  pace  when  ordered  to  unsling  knapsacks  ?  A.  For  the  pur- 
pose of  clearing  the  stacks  iu  facing  about. 

1919.  Q.  How  far  do  the  rear-rank  men  move  back  when  or- 
dered to  unsling  knapsacks  ?    A.  Three  paces. 

1920.  Q.  Which  of  the  straps  is  unhooked  in  unslinging  knap- 
sacks ?    A.  The  right-hand  strap. 

1931.  Q.  In  slinging  knapsacks,  what  is  the  position  of  the 
knapsack  after  executing  the  command  Sling  f  A.  It  is  held  by 
the  straps,  the  flap  next  to  the  knees,  the  man  standing  erect. 

1933.  Q.  What  is  the  imperative  rule  regarding  the  stacking 
of  arms  ?  A.  Stacks  will  not  be  made  with  the  bayonet  if  the 
rifles  have  the  stacking-swivel. 

1933.  Q.  How  must  troops  be  arranged  in  order  to  stack  arms  ? 
A.  They  must  be  in  line,  at  an  order,  and  fours  counted. 

1934.  Q.  What  men  make  the  stack  ?  A.  Each  even  number 
of  the  front  rank  with  his  own  and  that  of  each  even  number  of 
the  rear  rank  assisted  by  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  with 
his  own  piece. 

1935.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  pieces  of  the  odd  numbers  of 
the  rear  rank  in  stacking  arms,  as  well  as  those  of  the  guides  and 
file-closers?  A.  The  pieces  of  the  odd  numbers  are  passed  to 
the  even  numbers  in  the  front  rank,  who  lay  them  against  the 
stack.  The  pieces  of  the  guides  and  file- closers  are  laid  against 
the  stacks  nearest  to  them  at  the  same  time. 

1936.  Q.  In  taking  arms,  do  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank 
grasp  their  pieces  with  the  right  or  left  hand?  A.  With  the 
right  hand. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFAIJ^TRY.  223 

1927.  Q.  In  taking  arms,  who  passes  the  loose  pieces  to  the 
rear  ?    A.  The  even-numbered  men  of  the  front  rank. 

1928.  Q.  In  breaking  the  stack  made  with  the  swivel,  what 
movement  is  necessary  to  be  made  by  the  front-rank  men  in 
order  to  disengage  the  pieces  ?  A.  The  odd-numbered  men  should 
turn  their  pieces  to  the  right,  while  the  even-numbers  should  turn 
theirs  to  the  left. 

1929.  Q.  In  stacking  arms  with  the  bayonet,  what  is  the  posi- 
tion of  the  barrel  of  each  piece  as  held  by  the  front-rank  men  in 
forming  the  stack.  A.  The  barrel  of  each  even-numbered  man 
of  the  front  rank  is  to  the  rear  ;  that  of  each  even-numbered  man 
of  the  rear  rank  is  to  the  riglit ;  and  that  of  the  odd-numbered 
men  of  the  front  rank  is  to  the  front. 

1930.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  butts  of  the  pieces  when 
placed  on  the  ground,  in  stacking  arms,  with  both  swivel  and 
bayonet?  A.  The  butts  of  the  pieces  of  the  even-numbered  men 
of  the  front  rank  are  between  their  feet ;  that  of  the  even-num- 
bered men  of  the  rear  rank  28  inches  to  the  front  and  opposite 
the  interval  between  the  men ;  that  of  the  odd  numbers  between 
the  feet  of  the  odd  numbers. 

1931.  Q.  How  are  arms  stacked  and  stacks  broken  when  troops 
are  in  single  rank  ?  A.  On  the  same  principle  as  established  for 
double  rank,  except  that,  at  the  preparatory  command.  No.  3 
steps  back  and  covers  No.  2,  resuming  his  place  after  executing 
what  is  prescribed  for  him  in  forming  the  stack,  and  passes  the 
piece  of  No.  4  to  lay  against  the  stack.  In  breaking  the  stack 
No.  3  passes  the  piece  of  No.  4  before  taking  his  place  in  the  rear 
rank. 

1932.  Q.  What  positions  of  the  arms  are  intended  mainly  for 
extended  order  and  route  marches?  A.  Trails  left  shoylder^ 
sUng^  and  secure  arms. 

1933.  Q.  How  should  the  pieces  be  shifted  when  any  of  these 
commands  are  given  ?  A.  In  the  most  convenient  manner.  The 
reduction  of  these  movements  to  regular  motions  and  cadence  is 
prohibited. 

1934.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  piece  at  trail  arms? 
A.  It  is  in  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand  above  the  balance,  barrel 
up,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front.  When  it  can  be  done 
without  inconvenience  to  others,  the  piece  may  be  grasped  at 
the  balance  and  the  muzzle  lowered  until  the  piece  is  horizontal. 
It  may  be  carried  in  the  left  hand  in  a  similar  position  to  the 
latter. 

1935.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  piece  at  left  sTioulder 
arms  f  A.  It  rests  on  the  left  shoulder,  barrel  up,  muzzle  ele- 
vated so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  men  in  rear,  trigger-guard 
in  front  of  and  near  shoulder ;  left  hand  embracing  the  butt,  the 
heel  of  which  is  between  the  first  and  second  fingers. 

1936.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  piece  at  sling  arinsf 


224 

A.  The  right  arm  is  passed  between  the  rifle  and  the  sling,  which 
rests  upon  the  shoulder  ;  the  piece  is  in  rear  of  the  shoulder  and 
nearly  vertical,  muzzle  up. 

1987.  Q.  When  may  the  piece  be  slung  on  the  left  shoulder  ? 
A.  On  route  marches. 

1938.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  piece  at  secure  arms? 
A.  It  is  held  in  the  right  hand  at  the  balance,  barrel  uppermost, 
sloping  downward  and  to  the  front ;  the  right  hand  supported 
against  the  front  of  the  hip,  u|  per  arm  against  the  stock.  A 
corresponding  position  in  the  lett  hand  may  be  used. 

1939.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  regarding  the  piece  at  the 
preparatory  command  for  marching  in  quick  time  ?  A.  If  at  an 
order,  it  should  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder. 

1940.  Q.  Suppose  the  command  Double  time  be  given,  what  is 
done  with  the  piece  ?  A.  If  at  the  order  or  carry,  it  is  brought 
to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command. 

1941.  Q.  How  is  the  disengaged  hand  held  during  double  time  ? 
A.  As  when  without  arms. 

1942.  Q.  From  what  positions  may  the  piece  be  brought  to  an 
order  on  halting  ?    A.  Right  or  left  shoulder,  or  trail. 

1943.  Q.  At  what  movements  of  the  body  may  the  piece,  if  at 
an  order,  simply  be  raised  to  the  trail  ?  A.  Facings,  side  or  back 
steps,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  and  loadings. 

1944.  Q.  What  is  laid  down  as  a  general  principle  with  regard 
to  the  manual  of  arms  and  firings,  in  the  battle  exercises,  or 
whenever  circumstances  require  ?  A.  That  these  movements  may 
be  ordered  without  regard  to  the  previous  positions  of  the  piece  ; 
such  movements  as  are  not  in  the  manual  will  be  executed  with- 
out regard  to  motions  or  cadence,  in  order  that  the  effective  use 
of  the  weapon  may  not  be  impeded  by  the  formalities  of  drill. 

Squad  Drill. 

1945.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  making  a  corporal  the  instructor 
of  a  squad  ?  A.  In  order  to  give  him  the  confidence  and  experi- 
ence necessary  to  qualify  him  as  a  squad-leader,  while  at  the  same 
time  teaching  the  recruits  the  movements  in  close  and  extended 
order. 

1946.  Q.  Where  is  the  corporal  posted  as  squad-leader  ?  A.  The 
left  man  in  the  front  rank.  His  rear-rank  man  steps  into  his 
place  whenever  it  is  necessary  for  Mm  to  leave  it. 

1947.  Q.  Who  conducts  the  march  when  the  guide  is  announced  ? 
A.  The  man  on  the  designated  flank. 

1948.  Q.  When  may  facing  distance  be  increased  to  thirty-six 
inches  ?    A.  When  on  rough  ground  or  marching  in  double  time. 

1949.  Q.  When  must  the  rear-rank  resume  the  proper  facing 
distance  after  marching  at  an  increased  distance?  A.  Upon 
halting. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  IKFANTRY.       225 

1950.  Q.  How  much  is  facing  distance  increased  wlien  the 
knapsack  is  worn  ?    A.  The  depth  of  the  knapsack. 

1951.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  corporal  in  forming  a 
squad  ?  A.  He  places  himself  in  front  of  where  the  centre  is  to 
be. 

1953.  Q.  After  first  sizing  a  squad,  is  it  alwa3's  necessary  to  go 
through  this  manoeuvre  when  the  squad  is  formed?  A.  No  ;  the 
men  are  cautioned  to  take  the  same  relative  positions  as  at  first 
given. 

1953.  Q.  How  are  alignments  first  taught?  A.  By  requiring 
the  recruits  to  align  themselves  upon  two  files  which  the  instructor 
establishes  as  a  base. 

1954.  Q.  By  what  command  is  this  base  established  ?  A.  Tioo 
files  from  the  right  (or  l^ft)^  three  paces  to  the  fronts  march. 

1955.  Q.  By  what  command  do  the  others  move  up  ?  A.  By 
the  simple  command  Next. 

1956.  Q.  How  close  to  the  line  should  a  man  approach  before 
he  commences  to  dress  up  to  it  ?    A.  To  about  six  inches  in  rear. 

1957.  Q.  In  dressing  to  the  right  or  left,  what  is  the  differ- 
ence with  regard  to  placing  the  hand  upon  the  hip  ?  A.  In 
dressing  to  either  the  right  or  left  the  left  hand  is  placed  upon 
the  hip  ;  but  in  dressing  to  the  right  the  man  places  his  right  arm 
against  the  elbow  of  the  man  on  his  right,  while  in  dressing  to 
the  left  he  places  his  left  elbow  against  the  arm  of  the  man  on 
his  left. 

1958.  Q.  How  do  the  men  execute  a  right  (or  left)  lachward 
dress  f  A.  By  stepping  backward  and  halting  a  little  in  rear  of 
the  base-files,  and  then  dressing  up  by  steps  of  two  or  three 
inches. 

1959.  Q.  What  is  meant  hy  marching  in  line?  A.  The  entire 
squad  marching  side  by  side,  preserving  a  regular  alignment 
from  one  flank  to  the  other. 

1960.  Q.  If  marching  to  the  front,  and  the  command  To  the 
rear,  march,  is  given,  when  should  the  command  March  be  given  ? 
A.  As  the  right  foot  strikes  the  ground. 

1961.  Q.  How  is  the  movement  of  marching  to  the  rear  exe- 
cuted ?  A.  By  advancing  and  planting  the  left  foot,  then  turn- 
ing on  the  balls  of  both  feet,  and  stepping  off  with  the  left  foot. 

1962.  Q.  If  marching  in  double  time,  how  is  the  march  to  the 
rear  executed  ?  A.  By  turning  to  the  right  about,  taking  four 
short  steps  in  place,  preserving  the  cadence,  and  then  stepping 
off  with  the  left  foot. 

1963.  Q.  To  march  in  column  of  files,  what  is  the  difference  in 
the  command  from  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  or  marching  ?  A.  From 
a  halt,  the  command  should  be.  Right  (or  left)  face,  forward,  march  ; 
while  marching,  it  should  be,  By  the  right  (or  left)  flank,  march. 

1964.  Q.  If  marching,  how  is  a  change  of  direction  in  column 
of  files  executed?    A.  The  leading  file  wheels  to  the  right,  the 


226  THE  ARMY   OFEICER^S  EXAMINER. 

pivot-man  shortening  two  or  three  steps  and  moving  over  a  quarter 
or  an  eighth  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  about  eighteen  inches  ; 
the  other  files  follow  the  first  and  wheel  on  the  same  ground. 

1965.  Q.  What  is  the  position  to  he  maintained  in  an  oblique 
march  from  being  in  line  ?  A.  Each  man  preserves  his  relative 
position,  keeping  his  shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  next  man 
on  his  right  (if  obliquing  to  the  right),  and  so  regulates  his  step 
as  to  make  the  head  of  this  man  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other 
men  in  the  rank. 

1966.  Q.  At  the  command  Halt,  on  an  oblique  march,  how  do 
the  men  face  ?    A.  To  the  original  front. 

1967. 'Q.  If  the  command  Marh  time  is  given  while  obliquing, 
how  do  the  men  face  ?  A.  In  the  direction  in  which  they  are 
obliquing. 

1968.  Q.  If  the  command  Forward  is  given  while  marking  time 
at  an  oblique,  in  which  direction  is  the  march  continued  ?  A.  In 
the  direction  of  the  march  previous  to  obliquing. 

1969.  Q.  If  marking  time  in  an  oblique  movement,  how  is  the 
march  continued  in  the  oblique  direction  ?  A.  By  the  command 
Oblique,  march. 

1970.  Q.  What  step  is  prohibited  in  the  oblique  march  ?  A.  The 
short  step. 

1971.  Q.  Where  is  the  guide  in  an  oblique  movement  ?  A.  He 
is  always,  without  indication,  on  the  side  toward  which  the  oblique 
is  made. 


TURNINGS. 

1972.  Q.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  line,  or  at  a  halt,  and 
the  command  Squad,  right  (or  left),  maixh,  is  given,  how  is  it  exe- 
cuted ?  A.  At  the  command  March,  the  right  file  halts  and  the 
front-rank  man,  or  pivot,  faces  to  the  right ;  the  others  half-face 
to  the  right,  and,  without  changing  cadence  or  step,  move  up  and 
place  themselves  successively  upon  the  alignment. 

1973.  Q.  If  the  men  are  at  a  halt  and  order  arms  when  the 
command  Squad,  right,  march,  is  given,  how  are  the  pieces  held  ? 
A.  At  trail  arms. 

1974.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  to  change  direction  and  advance,  what 
command  is  given,  and  what  is  the  difference  of  execution  from 
that  of  Squad,  right?  A.  The  front-rank  man  on  the  right, 
instead  of  halting,  turnst  o  the  right  and  moves  off  in  the  new 
direction  with  a  short  step,  but  without  changing  cadence  ;  the 
other  men  half-face  to  the  right  and  move  up  on  the  line,  when 
they  take  the  short  step.  When  the  last  man  has  arrived  on  the 
new  line  the  instructor  commands,  Forward,  march,  when  all 
resume  the  full  step. 

1975.  Q.  Where  is  the  guide  during  a  turn?  A.  He  is,  with- 
out command,  on  the  pivot-flank. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.       227 

1976.  Q.  If  the  command  Halt  be  given  during  a  turn,  what  is 
done  ?  A.  Those  men  already  on  the  line  halt,  while  those  in 
rear  move  up  and  place  themselves  in  line. 

FIRINGS. 

1977.  Q.  Where  is  the  post  of  the  instructor  in  the  firings  ? 
A.  Three  paces  in  rear  of  the  squad,  but  in  actual  firing  he 
places  himself  where  he  can  best  be  heard  and  at  the  same  time 
observe  the  effect  of  the  fire. 

1978.  Q.  Are  the  commands  the  same  for  firing  from  all  des- 
ignated positions  ?  A.  They  are,  whether  standing,  kneeling,  or 
lying  down. 

"  1979.  Q.  What  must  the  rear- rank  men  do  at  the  preparatory 
command  for  firing  ?  A.  If  in  line  standing,  they  close,  as  ex- 
plained for  loading,  and  the  cartridge-box,  if  worn,  is  slipped  to 
the  right  hip  and  opened. 

1980.  Q.  When  should  the  cartridge-box  be  closed?  A.  After 
executing  cease  firing. 

1981.  Q.  What  must  be  indicated  in  the  preparatory  com- 
mands for  all  kinds  of  fire  ?    A.  The  objective  and  range. 

1982.  Q.  Suppose  the  objective  to  be  at  a  considerable  angle  to 
the  front  of  the  squad,  what  must  be  done  ?  A.  The  instructor 
must  change  the  front  of  the  squad  so  as  to  face  it. 

1983.  Q.  What  must  be  done  at  the  command  Cease  firing?  A. 
The  men  must  stop  firing  at  once,  draw  cartridge  or  eject  the 
empty  shell,  lower  the  sight-leaf  if  raised,  and  take  the  order — 
order  kneeling  or  the  position  lying  down.  If  standing,  the  rear- 
rank  men  step  back  and  cover  their  leaders. 

1984.  Q.  What  command  is  given  if  the  instructor  desires  the 
men  to  cease  firing,  but  have  the  pieces  ready  for  other  firing  ? 
A.   Cease  fi^ring^  load. 

1985.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  firing  at  will  ?  A.  At  the  command 
Commence  firing  each  man  aims,  fires,  loads,  and  continues  firing 
independently  of  the  others  until  the  command  Cease  firing  is 
given. 

Bayonet  Exercise. 

1986.  Q^  What  is  the  object  of  the  bayonet  exercise  ?  A.  To 
teach  the  soldier  to  be  quick  and  proficient  in  handling  his  piece. 

1987.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  interval  and  distance  between 
men  when  armed  and  unarmed  in  bayonet  exercise  ?  A.  Four 
paces  when  armed  and  two  when  unarmed. 

1988.  Q.  How  are  tlie  distances  in  bayonet  exercise  obtained 
from  line  at  a  halt  ?  A.  By  commanding.  To  the  right  (or  left)  taJce 
intervals^  march;  the  rear  rank  moves  back  four  paces  at  the 
preparatory  command,  and  at  the  command  March  the  left  man 


228  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

of  each  rank  stands  fast,  while  the  others  face  to  the  right 
and  move  off,  each  man  hahing  and  facing  to  the  front  as  he 
obtains  his  interval  from  the  left. 

1989.  Q.  When  it  is  desired  to  assemble  the  squad,  on  which 
flank  is  it  assembled  ?  A.  On  either  right  or  left,  the  man  on  the 
designated  flank  standing  fast,  while  the  others  close  in  on  him 
and  face  to  the  front. 

1990.  Q.  How  may  distances  be  taken  to  the  front  from  line  at 
a  halt  ?  A.  By  giving  the  command  Front,  take  distance,  march; 
at  which  Number  1  of  each  set  of  fours  of  the  front  rank  moves 
straight  to  the  front ;  Number  2  moves  off  as  soon  as  Num- 
ber 1  has  the  specified  distance  ;  the  other  numbers  move  off  in 
like  manner  ;  the  rear  rank  executes  the  same  movement  as  soon 
as  Number  4  of  the  front  rank  has  advanced  the  proper  dis- 
tance. All  having  their  distances,  the  instructor  gives  the  com- 
mand to  halt. 

1991.  Q.  In  what  manner  is  the  assembly  made  when  at  in- 
tervals to  the  front  ?  A.  Number  1  of  the  front  rank  stands 
fast ;  all  the  others  move  up  and  take  their  proper  places. 

1992.  Q.  Describe  the  names  of  the  movements  in  bayonet  ex- 
ercise. A.  Guard;  advance ;  retire ;  front  and  rear  joas*/  right 
and  left,  and  right  and  left  rear  volt ;  right  or  left,  right  and 
left  low,  and  head  parry ;  thrust;  lunge;  butt  to  fronts  right, 
and  rear. 

1993.  Q.  What  should  every  movement  to  the  front  or  rear  be 
followed  by  ?  A.  To  the  front  by  an  attack  ;  to  the  rear  by  a 
parry  and  a  thrust. 

1994.  Q.  What  movements  may  be  designated  as  foot  move- 
ments, what  are  the  piece  movements,  and  which  are  those  com- 
bining the  two  ?  A.  The  foot  movements  comprise  the  ad'vance, 
retire,  pass,  and  volt.  The  piece  movements  are  guard,  parry, 
thrust,  lunge,  and  l)utt  to  the  front.  The  combined  movements 
are  guard,  lunge,  and  hutt  to  the  right  and  rear. 

School  of  the  Company. 

1996.  Q.  How  should  a  company  be  grouped,  who  controls,  the 
groups,  and  what  is  the  object  of  grouping  ?  A.  It  is  grouped  into 
squads,  under  the  leadership  and  immediate  control  of  the  non- 
commissioned officers,  for  the  purpose  of  discipline  and  order  in 
camp  and  quarters  and  recognition  as  leaders  on  the  battle-field. 

1997.  Q.  Of  how  many  men  does  the  squad  consist,  and  who 
is  the  authorized  leader  ?  A.  Of  four  files — a  corporal  and  seven 
privates,  the  corporal  being  the  squad-leader. 

1998.  Q.  In  what  other  manner  is  the  company  subdivided, 
and  of  what  are  these  subdivisions  composed  ?  A.  Into  sections, 
composed  of  two  or  three  squads,  under  a  sergeant  as  chief  of 


DRILL  REGULATTOKS— FOR  INFANTRY.       229 

section  ;  and  into  two  platoons,  composed  of  two  sections  com- 
manded by  the  first  and  second  lieutenants  respectively. 

1999.  Q.  How  are  front-rank  men  who  are  absent  replaced  ? 
A.  By  their  rear-rank  men. 

2000.  Q.  Which  platoon  should  be  the  stronger  in  the  event  of 
an  odd  number  of  fours  ?    A.  The  first  platoon. 

2001.  Q.  Can  the  division  by  platoons  be  omitted  ?  A.  Yes, 
when  less  than  four  sets  of  fours  are  present. 

2002.  Q.  When  is  the  division  into  sections  omitted  ?  A.  When 
the  platoon  consists  of  less  than  four  sets  of  fours. 

2003.  Q.  Which  section  will  be  the  stronger  when  a  platoon 
consists  of  an  odd  number  of  fours  ?    A.  The  right  section. 

2004.  Q.  How  are  platoons  and  sections  numbered  ?  A.  From 
right  to  left  in  line,  and  from  head  to  rear  when  in  column. 

2005.  Q.  In  what  manner  are  these  designations  changed 
when  faced  about  ?  A.  The  right  becomes  the  left  of  the,  line  or 
the  head  becomes  the  rear  of  the  column. 

2006.  Q.  Give  diagram  of  posts  of  officers,  non-commissioned 
officers,  and  the  field-music  of  a  company,  and  describe  them. 
A.  (See  p.  64,  Drill  Regulations.) 

2007.  Q.  Who  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and  practical 
instruction  of  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  a 
company,  and  how  is  this  accomplished  ?  A.  The  captain, 
who  requires  them  to  study  and  recite  the  drill  regulations, 
so  that  they  can  explain  thoroughly  every  movement  before  it  is 
put  into  execution. 

2008.  Q.  In  sizing  a  company,  how  must  the  non-commissioned 
officers  place  themselves  ?  A.  The  corporals  place  themselves 
according  to  height,  the  tallest  as  the  seventh  man,  the  others  as 
every  eighth  man  in  rear.  After  the  company  has  been  divided 
into  platoons  and  sections,  the  sergeants  take  their  posts. 

2009.  Q.  After  a  company  has  been  once  sized,  is  it  necessaiy 
at  every  formation  to  resize  it  ?  A.  It  is  not ;  the  men  should 
fall  in  in  their  proper  places. 

2010.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  forming  a  company  after  it 
has  once  been  sized  ?  A.  The  first  sergeant  takes  a  position  in 
front  of  where  the  centre  of  the  company  is  to  be,  and,  facing  it, 
commands.  Fall  in,  at  which  the  second  sergeant  places  himself, 
facing  to  the  front,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest, 
and  at  such  a  point  that  the  centre  of  the  company  will  be  six 
paces  from  and  opposite  the  first  sergeant ;  the  fours  form  in 
their  proper  places  on  the  left  of  the  second  sergeant,  directed  by 
the  other  sergeants,  who  then  take  their  posts.  The  first  ser- 
geant brings  the  company  to  right  shoulder  arms,  calls  the  roll 
(each  man  answering  "Here,"  and  bringing  his  piece  to  an  or- 
der), faces  about,  salutes  the  captain,  and  reports  the  result  of 
the  roll-call.  He  then  takes  his  post  by  passing  around  the  right 
flank. 


230  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

2011.  Q.  If  any  of  the  sets  of  fours  contain  less  than  six  men, 
what  is  done  by  the  first  sergeant  ?  A.  He  increases  them  to  six 
or  seven  men  by  taking  the  required  number  from  a  like  number 
of  fours,  at  the  rate  of  one  from  each,  Number  3  or  Numbers 
2  and  3  being  blank  files ;  if  the  four  on  the  left  consists 
of  less  than  four  men,  they  are  assigned  to  other  fours  nnd 
placed  in  the  line  of  file-closers  in  rear  of  the  four  to  which 
assigned. 

2012.  Q.  In  forming  the  company,  when  do  the  lieutenants 
take  their  posts  ?  A.  They  take  post  and  draw  swords  as  soon  as 
the  first  sergeant  has  reported. 

2013.  Q.  If  a  company  becomes  reduced  in  number  and  the 
fours  broken  up,  how  is  the  organization  preserved  ?  A.  By  the 
men  falling  in  regardless  of  fours,  but  in  their  relative  order, 
closing  to  the  right  so  as  to  leave  no  blank  files — the  corporals 
placing  themselves  as  Number  4  of  the  front  rank ;  the  roll  is 
called,  fours  counted,  and,  if  large  enough,  the  company  is 
divided  into  sections  and  platoons. 

2014.  Q.  What  does  the  captain  do  at  each  alignment  of  the 
company  ?  A.  He  steps  back  two  paces  in  prolongation  of  the 
line  before  he  gives  his  command. 

2015.  Q.  To  whom  else  does  this  rule  apply  ?  A.  To  chiefs  of 
subdivisions  in  column  in  company  and  battalion  drill. 

2016.  Q.  When  do  guides  take  their  posts  ?  A.  At  the  com- 
mand Front. 

2017.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  captain  in  opening  and 
closing  ranks  ?  A.  After  giving  his  preparatory  command,  he 
goes  to  the  right  flank  and  sees  that  tlip  guides  are  on  a  line 
parallel  to  the  front  rank,  then  places  himself  facing  to  the  left 
three  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  company  and  commands, 
March;  he  then  aligns  the  officers  and  the  front  rank,  and  veri- 
fies the  alignment  of  the  rear  rank  (which  is  aligned  by  the  right 
guide)  and  file-closers  ;  after  which  he  commands,  Fronts  and 
takes  his  post  three  paces  in  front  of  the  right  guide,  facing  to 
the  front.  In  closing  ranks,  the  captain  faces  the  company,  com- 
mands, Close  ranks,  march,  and  takes  his  post  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  company. 

2018.  Q.  What  movements  does  the  company  execute  the  same 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier  by  substituting  in  the 
command  company  for  squad  ?  A.  Halts,  rests,  facings,  settings 
up,  steps,  marchings,  tnfmings,  manual  of  arms,  and  firings ; 
resumes  attention,  kneels,  lies  down,  and  rises. 

2019.  Q.  Where  does  the  captain  go  when  executing  the  turn 
and  halt  f    A.  He  goes  to  the  pivot-flank. 

2020.  Q.  When  does  the  captain  place  himself  in  rear  of  the 
company  in  the  different  firings  ?  A.  At  the  first  command  for 
loading  or  for  firing. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.  231 

2021.  Q.  What  men  are  exempt  from  executing  the  loadings 
and  firings  ?    A.  The  men  in  the  line  of  file-closers. 

2022.  Q.  What  portion  of  the  manual  of  arms  are  any  of  the 
men  excused  from  executing  on  drill  and  during  ceremonies? 
A,  Guides  and  enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file-closers  execute  the 
manual  of  arms  during  drill,  unless  specially  excused,  when  they 
remain  at  an  order.  During  ceremonies  they  execute  all  move- 
ments. 

2023.  Q.  How  do  the  guides  in  front  marking  the  line  stand  ? 
A.  At  an  orrder,  facing  the  point  of  rest. 

2024.  Q,  Being  in  line,  what  is  the  command  for  marching  a 
company  by  the  flank  ?    A.  Fours  right  (or  left),  march. 

2025.  Q.  Is  the  wheel  by  fours  made  on  a  fixed  or  movable 
pivot  ?    A.  Fixed  pivot. 

2026.  Q.  What  does  the  rear  rank  do  to  get  its  distance  ?  A. 
After  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  rear  rank  shortens  its  step  until 
forty-four  inches  is  gained. 

2027.  Q.  Where  is  the  captain's  position  in  marching  by  the 
flank,  and  when  does  he  take  that  position?  A.  In  column  of 
fours,  twos,  or  files  he  is  by  the  side  of  the  leading  guide,  on 
the  flank  opposite  the  file-closers.  He  takes  that  position  at  the 
command  March. 

2028.  Q.  Is  it  necessary  to  give  any  commands  in  order  to 
continue  the  march  after  wheeling  by  fours  to  the  riglit  or  left? 
A.  The  forward  march  is  taken  in  all  cases  upon  the  completion 
of  the  wheel,  unless  the  command  Halt  be  given. 

2029.  Q.  By  what  command  is  a  change  of  direction  made  by 
a  column  of  fours  in  march  ?    A.  Column  right  (or  left),  march. 

2030.  Q.  How  may  a  column  of  fours  be  put  in  march  and 
change  direction  at  the  same  time  ?  A.  By  commanding.  For- 
ward, column  right  (or  left);  or,  Column  half -right  (or  half -left), 
march. 

2031.  Q.  If  in  line,  how  can  you  form  column  and  change  di- 
rection? A.  By  commanding,  Fours  right  (or  left),  column 
right  (or  left);  or,  Column  half -right  (or  half -left),  march. 

2032.  Q.  What  movement  is  intended  by  giving  the  command 
Right  forward,  fours  right,  march,  from  line?  A.  It  is  in- 
tended to  march  in  column  of  fours  by  the  right  to  the  front. 

2033.  Q.  In  making  an  oblique  movement  in  column  of  fours, 
who  is  the  guide  of  the  column  ?  A.  The  leading  guide  when  the 
oblique  is  toward  his  flank,  and  the  guide  of  the  front  rank  of 
the  leading  four  when  the  oblique  is  toward  the  opposite  flank. 

2034.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  file-closers  when  the  column  of 
fours  is  marched  to  the  rear  ?  A.  They  retain  their  relative  po- 
sitions on  facing  about,  but  gain  the  space  to  the  right  or  left 
necessary  to  preserve  their  interval  from  the  flank. 

2035.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  file-closers  in  forming  line  from 
column  of  fours  toward  their  side?    A.  They  close  in   to  the 


232  THE   A.RMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

flunk  of  the  column  at  the  preparatory  command,  and  at  the 
command  March  dart  through  the  column,  taking  their  places 
in  rear. 

2036.  Q.  In  forming  on  right  into  line  from  column  of  fours, 
where  do  the  right  and  left  guides  march  ?  A.  The  right  guide 
on  the  right  of  the  leading  four,  and  the  left  guide  in  rear  of  the 
left  four  until  it  halts,  when  he  places  himself  on  its  left. 

2037.  Q.  When  does  the  rear  rank  close  to  facing  distance  in 
forming  on  right  (or  left)  into  linef  A.  As  each  set  of  fours 
commences  to  wheel. 

2038.  Q.  When  is  the  command  Halt  given  in  forming  on  right 
(or  left)  into  line?  A.  When  the  leading  four  has  advanced 
company  distance  in  the  new  direction. 

2039.  Q.  When  should  the  command  Front  be  given  in  forming 
on  right  (or  left)  into  line  ?  A.  When  the  left  four  completes  its 
dressing. 

2040.  Q.  Suppose  the  movement  of  on  right  (or  left)  into  line 
be  executed  toward  the  side  opposite  the  file-closers,  what  will 
they  do?  A.  They  will  follow  the  four  nearest  them,  passing  in 
front  of  the  following  four. 

2041.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  front  into  line  from  column  of 
fours  ?  A.  A  movement  by  which  all  the  fours  except  the  lead- 
ing four  pass  obliquely  to  the  right  or  left  until  opposite  their 
places  in  line,  and  then  move  up  squarely  to  the  line  established 
by  the  leading  four,  halting  and  dressing  thereon. 

2042.  Q.  If  the  movement  of  front  into  line  be  made  toward 
the  side  of  the  file-closers,  what  will  they  do  ?  A.  They  will  dart 
through  the  column  as  the  oblique  commences. 

2043.  Q.  Suppose  the  movement  of  front  into  line  is  made  in 
double  time,  how  is  it  executed  ?  A.  The  leading  four  moves 
forward  in  quick  time,  while  all  the  other  fours  move  in  double 
time,  taking  the  quick  time  when  arriving  in  line,  dressing  toward 
the  side  of  the  guide — the  instructor  having  announced  the  guide 
immediately  after  giving  the  command  March. 

2044.  Q.  Being  at  a  halt  in  line,  how  may  the  company  be 
marched  to  the  rear?  A.  If  of  any  distance,  the  fours  will  be 
wheeled  about ;  but  if  only  a  short  distance  is  to  be  gained  the 
command  will  be.  Company,  about  face,  forward,  guide  right  (or 
left),  march. 

2045.  Q.  How  are  obstacles  in  the  line  of  march  passed  when 
marching  in  line  ?  A.  By  breaking  one  or  more  fours  from  the 
right  or  left  to  the  rear  ;  if  from  the  right,  the  designated  fours 
execute  left  forward,  fours  left,  on  the  four  that  remains  in  line 
next  on  their  left ;  if  from  the  left,  the  reverse  is  executed.  If 
the  obstacle  is  so  great  as  to  cover  all  the  front  of  the  company, 
except  one  set  of  fours,  then  the  entire  company  is  thrown  into  a 
column  of  fours  by  executing  right  {ov  left)  forward,  fours  right 
(or  left). 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  IKFANTRY.  233 

2046.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  a  column  of  fours  reduced  to  a 
column  of  twos  or  files,  and  what  is  the  rule  regarding  the  execu- 
tion of  the  movement  ?  A.  It  is  used  only  for  the  purpose  of 
reducing  the  front  of  the  column  to  enable  it  to  pass  a  defile  or 
other  narrow  place,  after  which  the  column  of  fours  should  be 
immediately  re-formed.  The  movement  is  always  executed  toward 
the  file-closers. 

2047.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  ranks  in  column  of 
twos  ?    A.  Facing  distance. 

2048.  Q.  Explain  briefly  the  manner  of  forming  column  of 
files  from  column  of  fours  at  a  halt.  A.  At  the  command  Right 
by  file  ^  the  rear  rank  of  each  four  closes  to  facing  distance  ;  at 
the  command  March^  the  right  file  of  the  leading  file  moves  for- 
ward, followed  in  succession  by  the  files  on  its  left ;  when  the  left 
tile  of  the  leading  four  is  about  to  commence  to  oblique,  the  right 
file  of  the  second  four  moves  to  the  front,  and  so  on. 

2049.  Q.  Can  column  of  files  be  formed  from  column  of  fours 
While  marching?  A.  Yes;  the  movement  is  executed  the  same 
as  from  a  halt,  except  that  the  leading  file  continues  the  march  ; 
the  others  halt  witliout  coming  to  the  order,  and  resume  the 
march  at  the  proper  time. 

2050.  Q.  In  what  time  is  the  march  to  be  made  in  column  of 
twos  or  files  ?    A.  Always  in  quick  time. 

2051.  Q.  In  facing  a  column  of  twos  or  files  to  the  rear  or  to  a 
flank  to  march  a  short  distance,  how  do  the  officers  and  non-com- 
missioned officers  execute  the  movement  ?  A.  They  face  with  the 
column  and  retain  their  positions. 

2052.  Q.  In  forming  column  of  fours  from  column  of  twos  or 
files,  which  men  make  the  short  step  and  which  the  oblique,  and 
what  rule  applies  to  the  execution  of  the  movement?  A.  The 
leading  two  of  each  four  make  the  short  step  and  the  rear  two 
make  the  oblique.  The  movement  is  always  executed  away  from 
the  file-closers. 

2053.  Q.  How  is  the  column  of  fours  formed  from  column  of 
twos  or  files  ?  A.  At  the  command  March,  the  leading  file  of  the 
first  four  halts,  the  rear-rank  man  falling  back  to  forty-four 
inches  as  soon  as  the  file  in  rear  has  obliqued  ;  the  other  files  of 
the  first  four  then  oblique  and  place  themselves  successively  on 
the  left  of  the  leading  file  ;  the  other  fours  form  as  explained  for 
the  first. 

PLATOON  MOVEMENTS. 

2054.  Q.  In  movements  by  platoons,  what  should  each  chief  do 
with  reference  to  the  commands?  A.  Each  chief  should  repeat 
such  commands  as  are  to  be  immediately  executed  by  his  platoon, 
and  should  give  them  so  as  to  insure  the  execution  of  movements 
by  his  platoon  at  the  proper  time. 

2055.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  the  proper  time  for  each 


234  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

chief  of  subdivision  taking  his  place  in  front  of  its  centre  ?  A.  In 
column,  whenever  a  subdivision  is  dressed,  after  commanding, 
Front;  in  movements  where  the  subdivisions  are  not  dressed,  as 
soon  as  the  column  is  formed. 

2056.  Q.  The  company  being  in  line,  by  what  movements  may 
a  column  of  platoons  be  formed  ?  A.  By  executing  platoons 
right  (or  left)^  in  which  case  the  column  is  formed  to  the  right 
(or  left),  halted,  and  dressed  ;  also  by  executing  right  (or  left) 
hy  platoons,  in  which  case  the  column  is  formed  to  the  front,  the 
right  (or  left)  platoon  moving  straight  to  the  front,  and  the  other 
obliquing  until  its  guide  arrives  in  the  trace  of  the  tirst,  when  it 
is  moved  directly  to  the  front. 

2057.  Q.  At  what  particular  time  do  the  fourth  and  fifth  ser- 
geants place  themselves  as  guides  when  a  company  is  formed  in 
column  of  platoons  or  line  of  platoons  in  column  of  fours,  and 
when  do  they  return  to  their  posts  ?  A.  They  place  themselves 
as  guides  as  soon  as  practicable,  and  return  to  the  line  of  file- 
closers  when  the  company  unites  in  line  or  column  of  fours, 
unless  they  mark  an  alignment. 

2058.  Q.  Where  is  the  position  of  the  captain  in  column  of 
platoons  ?  A.  On  the  side  of  the  guide,  three  paces  from  the 
flank  of  the  column,  abreast  of  the  leading  platoon. 

2059.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  to  form  column  of  platoons  to  the 
right  (or  left)  and  move  forward  or  to  halt,  what  are  the  com- 
mands ?  A.  To  form  to  the  right  and  halt  the  command  is, 
Platoons  right,  march,  while  in  the  other  ease  it  would  be,  Platoons 
right  turn,  forward,  march. 

2060.  Q.  In  changing  direction  in  column  of  subdivisions,  what 
is  the  duty  of  each  chief  regarding  the  guide  ?  A.  On  the  com- 
pletion of  the  movement  by  his  subdivision  he  announces  the 
guide  on  the  side  it  was  previous  to  the  turn. 

2061.  Q.  In  forming  line  from  column  of  platoons,  what  is  it 
necessary  for  the  captain  to  do  before  forming  it  ?  A.  He  re- 
quires the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  on  the  flank  toward 
which  the  movement  is  to  be  made  to  cover  if  at  a  halt  ;  if 
marching,  he  announces  the  guide  on  that  flank,  if  not  already 
there. 

2062.  Q,  In  forming  line  to  the  right  or  left  from  column  of 
platoons,  how  does  each  chief  gain  his  place  ?  A.  By  obliquing 
until  he  clears  the  marching  flank,  when  he  takes  his  post  as  a 
file-closer. 

2063.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  to  form  line  from  column  of  platoons 
and  continue  the  march,  what  is  the  command  ?  A.  Platoons 
right  (or  left)  turn,  march;  guide  right  (or  left),  forward, 
march. 

2064.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  forming  line  from  column  of  pla- 
toons on  the  right  (or  left)  ?  A.  It  is  a  movement  by  which  the 
line  is  established  by  the  leading  platoon  making  a  turn  to  the 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.       235 

right  (or  left)  and  the  rear  platoon  passing  beyond  and  turning 
at  a  point  which  will  establish  it  in  line  on  the  furthermost  flank 
of  the  one  which  marks  the  line. 

2065.  Q.  If  at  a  halt  in  column  of  platoons  right  in  front,  and 
it  is  desired  to  form  the  company  by  the  command  Form  com- 
pany, left  oblique,  what  command  does  each  chief  of  platoon 
give,  and  how  does  he  dress  his  platoon  when  halted  ?  A.  The 
chief  of  first  platoon  gives  the  command  Forward,  guide  right, 
and  the  chief  of  the  second  Left  oblique.  They  both  dress  their 
platoons  to  the  right. 

2066.  Q.  From  what  point  would  the  captain  superintend  the 
alignment  of  a  line  formed  to  the  left  front  from  a  column  of 
platoons  ?     A.  From  the  right  flank. 

2067.  Q.  If  marching,  and  it  is  desired  to  form  line  to  the 
front  from  column  of  platoons,  what  is  the  difference  of  com- 
mand from  at  a  halt  ?  A.  If  marching  in  quick  time,  the  chief 
of  the  leading  platoon  simply  commands,  Guide  right  (or  left), 
and  the  movement  is  executed  as  from  a  halt  ;  but  if  the  com- 
mand Double  time  be  given,  the  captain  announces  the  guide  im- 
mediately after  the  command  March.  The  chief  of  the  leading 
platoon,  however,  cautions  it  to  advance  in  quick  time  and  com- 
mands, Guide  right  (or  left),  while  the  chief  of  the  second  com- 
mands, Double  time,  and  when  his  platoon  is  abreast  of  the  lead- 
ing platoon  commands.  Quick  time,  march. 

2068.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  line  of  platoons  in  column  of 
fours  7  A.  It  is  a  line  formed  by  the  leading  four  of  each  pla- 
toon marching  by  the  flank  in  column  of  fours,  with  intervals 
sufficient  between  the  leading  fours  to  bring  all  the  fours  of  each 
column  into  line. 

2069.  Q.  By  what  commands  may  a  line  of  platoons  in  column 
of  fours  be  formed  and  advanced  ?  A.  Platoons  right  (or  left), 
forward  ;  fours  right  (or  left),  march. 

2070.  Q.  How  may  a  company  be  formed  in  line  while  march- 
ing in  line  of  platoons  in  column  of  fours  ?  A.  By  commanding, 
Platoons  right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  march ;  company  halt, 
front. 

2071.  Q.  When  should  the  command  Halt  be  given  in  forming 
a  company  into  line  while  marching  in  line  of  platoons  in  column 
of  fours  ?  A.  It  is  given  when  the  leading  fours  have  advanced 
platoon  distance. 

2072.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  how  may  a  line  of  platoons 
in  column  of  fours  be  formed  to  the  front  ?  A.  By  the  command 
Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of  platoons  in  column  of  fours, 
march.  The  first  platoon  is  marched  platoon  distance  to  the  front 
and  halted  ;  the  second  executes  column  half-right,  and,  after 
gaining  its  interval,  column  half-left,  and  is  halted  abreast  of 
the  first  platoon. 

2073.  Q.    How  is  the  column  of  fours  formed  into  line  of 


236  THE  AEMY  OFFICEK's  EXAMIKER. 

platoons  in  column  of  fours  on  the  right  ?  A.  By  commanding, 
On  right  into  line  of  platoons  in  column  of  fours  ^  march.  The 
first  platoon  executes  column  right,  advances  platoon  distance 
and  twelve  paces,  and  is  halted  ;  the  second  is  marched  beyond 
the  first  and  executes  column  right  when  opposite  its  place,  and 
is  halted  abreast  of  the  first  platoon. 

3074.  Q.  Can  a  column  of  platoons  be  formed  to  the  front 
from  a  column  of  fours  ?  A.  Yes,  by  commanding,  Platoons  right 
(or  left)  front  into  line^  double  time,  march. 

3075.  Q.  When  marching  in  route-step,  and  the  command  At- 
tention is  given,  what  is  done  with  the  pieces?  A.  They  are 
brought  to  the  right  shoulder  immediately. 

8076.  Q.  What  are  the  men  permitted  to  do,  if  halted,  while 
marching  in  route-step  ?  A.  They  come  to  a  rest  at  the  order 
arms. 

3077.  Q.  How  may  the  ofiicers  carry  their  swords  when  not  at 
attention  ?    A.  At  will,  or  in  the  scabbard. 

3078.  Q.  When  the  flanks  become  the  centre,  what  change  takes 
place  in  the  posts  of  sergeants  ?  A.  The  second  and  third  ser- 
geants take  post  in  the  line  of  file-closers  prescribed  for  the 
fifth  and  fourth  sergeants,  each  with  his  own  platoon  ;  the  fourth 
and  fifth  sergeants  take  the  posts  prescribed  for  the  third  and 
second  sergeants.  The  first  sergeant  always  remains  with  the 
original  first  platoon. 

School  of  the  Battalion. 

2079.  Q.  Who  is  the  instructor  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion  ? 
A.  The  senior  officer  present. 

3080.  Q.  What  commands  are  repeated  by  the  captains  ?  A. 
Only  those  that  are  to  be  immediately  executed,  such  as  Forward., 
Fours  right,  March,  Halt,  etc.  They  do  not  repeat  the  major's 
commands  in  executing  the  manual,  nor  those  which  are  not 
essential  to  the  execution  of  a  movement  by  their  companies  ;  as, 
Deploy  column,  etc. 

3081.  Q.  When  may  the  major  have  the  companies  execute 
movements  in  the  School  of  the  Company,  and  how  are  his  wishes 
made  known  ?  A.  When  the  formation  will  admit  of  the  simul- 
taneous execution  of  such  movements,  he  prefixes  the  word  com- 
panies {ov  platoons)  to  the  commands  therein  prescribed. 

3083.  Q.  Who  is  responsible  for  the  instruction  of  the  battal- 
ion ?  A.  The  major,  who  assembles  the  officers  for  theoretical 
and  practical  instruction. 

3083.  Q.  Of  how  many  companies  may  a  battalion  be  composed  ? 
A.  Not  less  than  two,  nor  more  than  six. 

3084.  Q.  Give  diagram  showing  the  arrangement  in  line  of 
companies  from  two  to  six  inclusive.  A.  (See  diagram,  par. 
353,  D.  R.) 


.  DRILL  KEGULATIOXS— FOR  INFAXTRY.       26  ^ 

2085.  Q.  How  are  companies  whose  captains  are  absent  posted 
in  line  ?  A.  According  to  the  relative  rank  of  the  officers  pres- 
ent in  command  of  them. 

2086.  Q.  Does  a  company  lose  its  place  whose  captain  is  absent 
for  a  few  days  only  ?  A.  Not  necessarily.  It  retains  its  place 
unless  otherwise  directed. 

2087.  Q.  How  are  companies  designated  in  line  and  column, 
and  does  any  change  take  place  ?  A.  In  whatever  direction  tlie 
battalion  faces,  tlie  companies  are  designated  numerically  from 
right  to  left  in  line  and  in  line  of  columns,  and  from  head  to 
rear  in  column,  ^V.9^,  second,  etc. 

2088.  Q,  How  is  tlie  battalion  separated  into  wings  ?  A.  The 
companies  to  the  right  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion  constitute 
the  light  wing,  and  those  to  the  left  the  left  wing. 

2089.  Q.  What  are  the  two  companies  nearest  the  centre  termed  1 
A.  That  to  the  right  the  right  centre  company^  that  to  the  left 
the  left  centre  company. 

2090.  Q.  In  case  of  an  uneven  number  of  companies,  where  is 
the  odd  company  placed  ?    A.  In  the  original  right  wing. 

2091.  Q.  When  a  new  formation  necessitates  a  change  of  des- 
ignation, when  does  that  change  take  place  ?  A.  Upon  the  com- 
pletion of  the  movement. 

2092.  Q.  How  do  captains  designate  their  companies  ?  A.  By 
using  the  letter  designation,  as,  Company  A,  etc. 

2093.  Q.  If  a  battalion  is  composed  of  fractions  of  several 
regiments,  how  are  the  companies  arranged  ?  A.  The  companies 
of  each  regiment  are  arranged  according  to  the  diagram  given  in 
the  Drill  Regulations  ;  the  fractions  are  then  arranged  in  line 
from  ri^ht  to  left,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  senior  officer 
present  in  each — the  senior  on  the  right. 

2094.  Q.  Which  is  the  color  company  if  the  color  be  with  the 
battalion  ?    A.  The  right  centre  company. 

COLOR-GUARD. 

2995.  Q.  How  is  the  color-guard  constituted,  and  where  is  its 
position  with  the  battalion  ?  A.  It  is  composed  of  one  sergeant, 
who  is  the  color-bearer,  and  two  experienced  soldiers,  selected 
by  the  colonel.  In  line,  the  color-bearer  is  between  the  guides  of 
the  right  and  left  centre  companies  ;  the  other  members  of  the 
guard  are  in  his  rear,  in  the  line  of  file-closers.  The  color-bearer 
takes  the  same  position  relative  to  the  color  company  when  in 
column  at  full  distance  or  in  mass.  In  column  of  fours  the  color- 
bearer  is  between  the  wings,  abreast  of  the  guide  of  the  color  com- 
pany, in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  file  next  the  file-closers;  the  othei- 
members  of  the  guard  retain  their  places  in  the  line  of  file- 
closers.  y^^^:,J^t  *^ 


2096.  Q.  If  by  movements  of  the  battalion  the  original  ^p ^'  \*, 


238  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

the  color  company  is  changed  so  as  not  to  be  the  centre,  what 
becomes  of  the  colors  ?  A.  The  color-bearer  and  guard  will  take 
post  between  the  wings,  either  in  line  or  column. 

POSTS  OF  FIELD,    STAFF,    AND  BAND. 

2097.  Q.  Describe  the  positions  of  the  field  and  staff  in  line. 
A.  The  major  is  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion ;  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  are  opposite  the  right 
and  left  of  the  battalion,  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers;  the 
staff  officers,  except  the  adjutant,  in  the  order  of  rank,  the  senior 
on  the  right,. one  pace  apart,  six  paces  to  the  right,  and  in  line 
with  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion.  The  non-commissioned 
staff  officers,  except  the  sergeant-major,  take  post  similarly  on 
the  left  of  the  front  rank. 

2098.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  field  and  staff  in  column  ? 
A.  The  major  is  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  twenty  paces  from  and 
opposite  the  centre  ;  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  on  the  side 
of  the  guide,  opposite  and  six  paces  from  the  head  and  rear  of 
the  column  respectively ;  the  other  staff  and  non-commissioned 
staff  officers  take  post,  in  column  of  subdivisions,  in  their  respect- 
ive wings,  on  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of  the  column,  in  order  of 
rank,  the  senior  on  the  right,  six  paces  in  front  of  the  captain  of 
the  leading  company  or  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers  of  the 
rear  company.     In  column  of  fours  they  take  post  similarly. 

2099.  Q.  When  the  column  faces  to  the  rear,  what  is  the  posi- 
tion of  the  staff  officers  ?  A.  They  face  about  individually  and 
maintain  their  relative  positions. 

2100.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  field  and  staff  in-  line  of 
columns  ?  A.  The  major  is  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  ; 
the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  are  abreast  of  and  six  paces 
outside  of  the  leading  guides  ;  the  other  staff  officers  are  in  the 
same  relative  order  as  in  line,  one  pace  to  the  right  and  left  of 
the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  respectively. 

2101.  Q.  Should  the  line  of  columns  face  to  the  rear,  what  is 
the  position  of  the  field  and  staff  ?  A.  The  staff  and  non-com- 
missioned staff  officers  face  about  individually  and  move  up 
abreast  of  the  front  rank  or  leading  guides,  keeping  their  relative 
positions. 

2102.  Q.  How  should  a  mounted  officer  face  about?  A.  By 
habitually  turning  his  horse  to  the  left. 

2103.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  band  and  field-music? 
A.  It  is  posted  with  the  left  of  its  front  rank  twenty-four  paces 
to  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion.  In  column,  it 
marches  with  its  rear  rank  twenty-four  paces  in  front  of  the  lead- 
ing company,  or  its  front  rank  twenty-four  paces  in  rear  of  the 
rear  company,  according  as  the  battalion  is  facing.  In  line  of 
columns,  it  retains  its  line  position,  marching  abreast  of  the  lead- 


DRILL  EEGULATION'S— FOR  IN^FAN^TRY.  239 

ing  guides.  The  field-music,  except  at  inspection  of  companies, 
is  posted  in  rear  of  and  forms  part  of  the  band ;  at  inspection, 
they  take  post  with  their  companies. 

TO   FORM  THE  BATTALION. 

2104.  Q,  In  the  formation  of  a  battalion,  which  is  the  first 
company  to  be  posted  on  the  line,  and  how  should  it  be  placed 
there  ?  A.  The  right  centre  company.  Its  captain  having  moved 
forward  at  adjutant's  call,  should  conduct  his  company  so  as  to 
arrive  from  the  rear,  parallel  to  the  line  ;  the  right  and  left  guides 
precede  it  on  the  line  about  twenty  paces,  taking  post,  facing  each 
other,  at  order  arms,  under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant  and 
sergeant-major.  When  the  company  arrives  near  the  line,  the 
captain  halts  it,  places  himself  facing  to  the  front  near  the  left 
guide  and  dresses  the  company  to  the  left,  commands.  Fronts 
and  takes  his  post. 

2105.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  regarding  the  dressing  of 
companies  on  the  line  by  the  captains  ?  A.  They  should  place 
themselves  on  the  line  on  the  flank  toward  which  they  dress, 
facing  the  front,  and,  afterdressingthe  company,  command.  Fronts 
and  take  their  posts. 

2106.  Q.  In  the  formation  of  a  battalion,  where  does  a  non- 
commissioned officer  in  command  of  his  company  take  post  ? 
A.  On  the  right  of  the  right  guide  at  the  command  Q^ tides  post ^ 
and,  except  in  formations  for  ceremonies,  when  the  major  com- 
mands. Carry  arms,  after  receiving  the  report  of  the  adjutant,  he 
takes  the  post  prescribed  for  the  captain. 

2107.  Q.  Should  the  band  be  stationed  on  the  line  of  formation 
before  sounding  the  adjutant's  call  ?  A.  No ;  it  should  take  a 
position  designated  by  the  adjutant  and  march  at  the  same  time 
as  the  companies  to  the  line. 

2108.  Q.  After  the  line  has  been  formed,  what  are  the  duties 
of  the  adjutant  ?  A.  When  the  last  company  arriving  on  the  line 
is  dressed,  he  commands,  Guides  post ;  he  then  moves  off  at  a 
trot,  if  mounted  (if  dismounted,  in  quick  time),  by  the  shortest 
line,  to  a  point  midway  between  the  major  and  the  centre  of  the 
battalion,  faces  the  latter,  and  halts;  then  faces  the  battalion, 
brings  it  to  a  carry  and  present,  faces  about,  salutes  the  major 
and  reports  :  Sir,  the  battalion  is  formed.  After  the  salute  is 
acknowledged  by  the  major,  he  faces  about,  and  returns  around 
the  right  of  the  battalion  to  his  post. 

2109.  Q.  Can  the  battalion  be  formed  in  line  in  any  other 
manner  than  on  the  right  centre  company  ?  A.  Yes  ;  it  may  be 
formed  on  the  right  or  left  company  on  the  same  principles  as  the 
centre. 

2110.  Q.  Can  the  battalion  ever  be  assembled  in  column  of 
fours  ?    A.  Yes ;  the  companies  are  arranged  in  the  same  rela- 


240  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIKBR. 

live  order  as  in  line,  and  the  adjutant  reports  to  the  major  as 
soon  as  the  last  company  has  taken  its  place. 

2111.  Q.  What  is  the  usual  and  easiest  way  of  equalizing  a 
battalion  ?  A.  By  transfers  from  one  company  to  another  before 
the  battalion  is  formed. 

2112.  Q.  In  what  other  manner  may  a  battalion  be  equalized 
than  by  transfer  before  it  is  formed  ?  A.  The  major  may  form 
column  of  companies  and  direct  the  adjutant,  first,  to  transfer 
men  from  the  larger  to  the  smaller  companies  ;  second,  to  break 
up  one  company  and  transfer  the  men  to  other  companies  ; 
third,  to  form  an  additional  company  by  taking  men  from  the 
other  companies. 

OPENING  AND  CLOSING  RANKS  AND  MANUAL. 

2113.  Q.  In  opening  ranks,  what  does  the  major  do  after  giving 
the  command  ?  A.  At  the  command  Open  ranks,  he  goes  to  the 
right  of  the  battalion  ;  after  the  guides  have  placed  themselves 
to  mark  the  new  line  of  the  rear  rank,  he  commands,  March;  then 
verifies  the  alignment  of  the  officers  and  the  ranks,  gives  the 
command  Front,  and  takes  post  facing  to  the  front,  twenty  paces 
in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

2114.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  adjutant  in  opening  ranks  ? 
A.  At  the  command  Open  ranks,  he  places  himself,  facing  to  the 
left,  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  opposite  the  right  of 
the  battalion,  and  aligns  the  guides  as  they  step  back  to  mark 
the  new  line  of  the  rear  rank  ;  at  the  command  March,  he  verifies 
the  alignment  of  the  file-closers  on  the  left  file-closer  ;  and  at  the 
command  Front,  he  takes  post  three  paces  to  the  right  of  the  bat- 
talion in  line  with  the  company  officers. 

2115.  Q.  In  opening  ranks,  which  guides  step  back  to  mark  the 
new  line  of  the  rear  rank,  and  when  do  they  take  their  proper 
places  ?  A.  The  right  guides  of  each  company  ;  they  take  their 
places  in  the  front  rank  at  the  command  Front. 

2116.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  color-guard  in  opening  ranks? 
A.  The  color-bearer  remains  in  his  place  ;  the  other  members  of 
the  color-guard  step  back  with  the  file-closers. 

2117.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  drum-major  in  opening 
ranks  ?  A.  His  duties  are  to  see  that  the  band  takes  three  paces 
between  ranks,  and  returns  to  his  place  in  line  at  the  command 
Front. 

Si  18.  Q.  Should  the  battalion  be  faced  about  by  fours  when 
the  ranks  are  opened,  what  is  the  duty  of  the  sergeant-major? 
A.  He  performs  the  duties  of  the  adjutant. 

2119.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  command  Close  ranks,  march  ? 
A.  To  return  the  officers  and  men  to  the  positions  they  occupied 
before  the  ranks  were  opened. 

2120.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  color-guard  during  the  exe- 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— FOR   INFANTRY.  241 

cution  of  the  manual  of  arms?  A.  They  do  not  execute  the 
loadings  and  firings  ;  in  rendering  honors,  they  execute  all  the 
movements  in  the  manual,  and  on  drill,  except  when  specially 
excused. 


THE  FIRINGS. 

2121.  Q.  "Where  is  the  post  of  the  major  during  the  loadings 
and  firings  ?  A.  Twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

2122.  Q.  After  ceasing  to  fire,  what  command  does  the  major 
give  ?    A.  Posts,  wheu  the^  captains  return  to  their  posts  in  line. 

2123.  Q.  In  the  battalion  firings,  who  designates  the  objective 
and  number  of  volleys  to  be  fired?    A.  The  major. 

2124.  Q.  To  fire  by  company,  what  commands  are  given  by  the 
major  ?  A.  Mre  by  company ^  one  {two  or  three)  volley,  commence 
firing. 

2125.  Q.  What  commands  are  given  by  the  captains  in  firing 
by  company?  A.  (Such)  company,  at  (sucli  an  object),  at  (so 
many)  yards,  compa7iy  ready,  aim,  fire,  load. 

2126.  Q,  Do  all  the  companies  fire  at  once  ?  A.  No  ;  the  odd- 
numbered  companies  fire  first,  and  when  the  captain  of  each 
even-numbered  company  sees  the  pieces  in  the  company  on  his 
right  in  the  position  of  load,  he  gives  the  commands  for  firing ; 
the  captains  of  the  odd-numbered  companies  conform  to  the 
same  rules  with  regard  to  the  even-numbered  companies  on  their 
left. 

2127.  Q.  By  what  means  is  the  fire  by  battalion  and  at  will 
executed  ?  A.  By  the  same  command  and  means  as  in  the 
squad,  substituting  battalion  for  squad. 

MOVEMENTS. 

2128.  Q.  What  movements  are  executed  by  the  battalion  the 
same  as  by  the  company,  by  substituting  battalion  for  company  f 
A.  The  rests,  resuming  attention,  and  stacking  and  taking  arms. 

2129.  Q.  What  is  done  at  the  command  of  the  major,  Dismiss 
yonr  companies  ?  A.  Each  captain  conducts  his  company  to  its 
parade-ground,  where  it  is  dismissed  as  prescribed. 

2130.  Q.  When  a  battalion  is  marching  in  line  with  guide  cen- 
tre, who  is  the  guide?  A.  The  left  guide  of  the  right  centre 
company;  he  regulates  the  step  and  direction. 

2131.  Q.  How  do  the  companies  dress  at  the  command  Guide 
centre,  while  marching  in  line  ?  A.  At  that  command  the  cap- 
tains caution,  Guide  left  (or  right),  according  as  they  are  in  the 
right  or  left  wing. 

2132.  Q.  To  make  a  slight  change  of  direction  while  marching 
in  line,  what  is  required  ?    A.  The  major  commands,  Incline  to 


342  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

the  right  (or  left).,  and  indicates  the  new  direction.  The  guide 
gradually  advances  his  left  shoulder,  giving  time  for  the  align- 
ment to  conform  to  his  movement. 

2133.  Q.  What  line  formation  does  the  battalion  habitually 
take  in  marching  considerable  distances  ?  A,  The  line  of  columns 
of  fours. 

2134.  Q.  If  marching  in  line,  what  difference  is  there  in  the 
command  to  face  the  battalion  to  the  rear  and  the  command  to 
march  to  the  rear?  A.  To  simply  face  to  the  rear  the  command 
Halt  must  be  given  after  the  fours  have  wheeled  about ;  to  march 
to  the  rear  the  command  Guide  centre  is  given  as  the  fours  unite 
in  line. 

2135.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  color-guard  in  an  about  move- 
ment while  marching  in  line  ?  A.  The  color-bearer  turns  about 
and  takes  his  place  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  other  members  of  the 
color-guard  dart  through  to  their  places  in  the  line  of  file- 
closers. 

2136.  Q.  If  the  battalion  be  marched  to  the  rear  by  the  com- 
mand Aboiit  face,  forward,  guide  centre,  march,  what  becomes 
of  the  officers,  file-closers,  and  guides  ?  A.  Tlie  officers,  ser- 
geant-major, and  file-closers,  upon  facing  about,  remain  in  their 
relative  positions ;  the  guides  step  into  the  rear,  now  the  front 
rank. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

2137.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  giving  the  battalion  a  general 
alignment  ?  A.  It  is  a  line  formed  by  a  general  movement  under 
the  direction  of  the  major,  who  gives  the  command  Guides  (such) 
company  on  the  line,  and  establishes  the  designated  guides  on 
the  new  line  he  wishes  to  give  the  battalion  ;  he  then  commands, 
Guides  on  the  line,  when  the  guides  of  the  other  companies  are 
posted  as  in  forming  the  battalion  ;  he  then  commands.  On  the 
centre  {right  or  left)  dress,  when  the  base  company  first  dresses 
up  to  the  guides,  and  all  others  toward  the  base  company. 

2138.  Q.  What  is  a  base  company,  and  how  is  it  designated  ? 
A.  It  is  the  company  first  established  on  the  line,  and  is  desig- 
nated by  the  commands  of  the  major  for  the  guides  (such)  com- 
pany on  the  line. 

2139.  Q.  How  may  an  alignment  be  corrected  without  the  de- 
tails of  a  general  alignment  ?  A.  By  the  command  of  the  major, 
CaptatJis,  rectify  the  alignment,  when  the  captains  dress  their 
companies  successively  toward  the  centre,  the  centre  companies 
dressing  first,  without  waiting  for  each  other. 

2140.  Q.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  be  such  that  one  or 
more  companies  find  themselves  in  advance  of  it,  or  be  oblique 
to,  or  at  a  considerable  distance  from,  the  battalion,  what  is 
done  ?    A.  If  companies  are  in  advance  of  the  line,  the  major, 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFAKTRY.       243 

before  establishing  the  guides,  directs  them  to  be  moved  to  the 
rear ;  if  at  a  distance  from  or  oblique  to  the  line,  the  captains 
conduct  their  companies  so  as  to  arrive  parallel  to  the  line,  then 
halt  and  dress  them. 

2141.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  commanding,  Posts?  A.  So 
that  at  that  command  the  guides  will  return  to  their  posts. 

2142.  Q.  If  obstacles  occur  in  the  line  of  march,  is  it  necessary 
for  the  major  to  give  any  commands  for  the  companies  to  pass 
them  ?  A.  No  ;  captains  will  conduct  their  companies  so  as  to 
pass  obstacles  with  the  greatest  facility,  and  when  passed  resume 
the  original  formation. 

2143.  Q.  In  marching  by  the  flank  in  column  of  fours,  what 
distance  must  the  leading  guide  of  each  company  preserve  be- 
tween himself  and  the  rear  guide  of  the  preceding  company  ? 
A.  All  except  the  first  maintains  seventy-two  inches. 

2144.  Q.  To  march  a  battalion  a  short  distance  to  the  right  or 
left,  must  it  be  done  by  fours  ?  A.  No ;  if  at  a  halt  it  can  be 
done  by  simply  facing  it ;  or  if  on  the  march,  by  the  commands 
By  the  right  (or  left)  flank,  march. 

2145.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  breaking  into  column  of  fours,  from 
the  right  or  left,  to  march  to  the  left  or  right,  from  being  in  line 
at  a  halt  ?  A.  The  movement  is  to  form  column  of  fours  and 
march  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  battalion  in  line,  each  company 
breaking  successively  from  the  original  line  by  the  command  of 
the  captains.  Right  (or  left)  forward ,  fours  right  {or  left),  march, 
in  time  to  join  the  column  in  the  traces  of  the  preceding  com- 
pany ;  the  captain  of  the  first  company  marching  company  dis- 
tance to  the  front  before  he  changes  direction. 

2146.  Q.  What  movements  may  be  executed  by  a  battalion  in 
column  of  fours  the  same  as  by  a  company,  by  substituting  in 
the  commands  battalion  for  company  f  A.  Halts,  advances,  ob- 
liques, changes  of  direction,  marches  by  the  flMnk  and  to  the  rear^ 
forming  columns  of  twos  and  files,  and  re-forming  in  columns  of 
twos  and  fours. 

2147.  Q.  In  forming  line  to  the  right  or  left  from  column  of 
fours,  by  what  means  is  it  determined  if  the  march  is  to  be  con- 
tinued in  line  ?  A.  If  the  march  is  to  be  continued,  the  command 
Guide  centre  is  given  by  the  major  as  the  fours  unite  in  line ;  if 
not,  the  command  Halt  is  given. 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  SUCCESSIVE  FORMATIONS. 

2148.  Q.  What  are  successive  formations?  A.  They  include 
formations,  either  into  line  or  column,  in  which  the  several  sub- 
divisions arrive  in  their  places  successively. 

2149.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  adjutant  or  sergeant-major  at 
the  head  of  the  column  or  nearest  the  point  of  rest  with  regard 
to  guides  in  successive  formations  ?    A.  In  all  successive  forma- 


244  THE  ARMY  OFFICEll'S  EXAMINER. 

tions,  except  formations  by  two  movements,  to  post  on  the  line 
opposite  its  right  and  left  files,  the  two  guides  of  the  company 
first  to  arrive  facing  toward  the  point  of  rest ;  if  the  formation 
be  central,  they  are  posted  on  the  line  in  front  of  the  leading 
company,  facing  each  other. 

2150.  Q.  When  should  the  guides  be  posted  for  successive  for- 
mations ?  A,  In  all  formations  from  a  halt  they  are  posted  at 
the  preparatory  command  indicating  the  direction  ;  if  marching, 
they  hasten  toward  the  point  of  rest  at  the  preparatory  command, 
and  are  posted  at  the  command  March. 

2151.  Q.  In  the  formations  on  right  (or  left)  into  line,  how  are 
the  guides  posted,  and  how  in  the  formations  front  into  line  ? 
A.  The  first  guide  is  posted  company  distance  to  the  right  (or 
left)  of  the  head  of  the  column,  on  right  (or  left)  into  line  ;  and 
in  formations  front  into  line,  the  guides  are  posted  company  dis- 
tance in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column. 

2152.  Q.  How  are  the  guides  posted  in  the  deployments  ?  A. 
They  are  posted  against  the  leading  company,  in  front  of  the 
head  of  the  column. 

2153.  Q.  How  are  the  guides  posted  in  changes  of  front  ? 
A.  The  first  is  posted  company  distance  to  the  right  of  the  first 
or  left  of  the  fourth  company,  according  as  the  change  of  front 
is  to  the  right  or  left. 

2154.  Q.  How  is  a  line  prolonged  ?  A.  As  in  forming  the  bat- 
talion. 

2155.  Q.  By  whom  are  the  guides  assured  position?  A.  By 
the  adjutant  or  sergeant-major  nearest  the  point  of  rest,  or  by 
both  if  the  formation  be  central. 

2156.  Q.  When  a  line  is  to  be  formed  facing  to  the  rear,  how 
are  the  guides  posted  ?  A.  They  are  posted  so  as  to  permit  the 
leading  company  to  pass  between  them,  after  which  the  second 
guide  closes  to  a  little  less  than  company  distance  from  the  first. 
The  same  rule  is  followed  by  the  guides  of  the  other  companies. 

2157.  Q.  At  the  completion  of  all  successive  formations  into 
line,  what  command  does  the  major  give  ?    A.  Guides  post. 

2158.  Q.  In  successive  formations,  if  it  be  desirable  to  com- 
mence firing  pending  the  completion  of  the  movement,  what  is 
done  ?  A.  The  major  instructs  the  captains  as  to  the  kind  of 
fire,  and  the  adjutant  or  sergeant-major  at  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn cautions  the  guides  not  to  take  post  marking  the  line. 

2159.  Q.  In  forming  on  right  or  left  into  line  from  column  of 
fours,  what  commands  do  the  captains  give  ?  A.  If  from  a  halt, 
the  first  captain  gives  no  command,  but  his  company  executes 
the  movement ;  the  other  captains  give  the  command  Forward, 
after  which  each  gives  the  commands  On  right  into  line  and 
March,  when  his  leading  four  is  nearly  opposite  its  place  in  line. 
If  marching,  the  captains  of  the  companies  in  rear  of  the  first 
omit  the  command  Forward, 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFAKTRY.  245 

2160.  Q.  If  marching  in  column  of  fours  and  an  enemy  ap- 
peared in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column,  what  movements  would 
soonest  place  the  battalion  in  line  for  defense  ?  A.  Right  (or  left) 
front  into  line. 

2161.  Q.  If  the  major  commands,  Left  front  into  line,  march, 
how  does  the  second  company  execute  the  movement  ?  A.  The 
captain  commands.  Forward,  column  left,  and  conducts  it  oppo- 
site the  right  of  its  place  in  line,  changes  direction  to  the  right, 
and  commands.  Left  front  into  line,  double  time,  march,  when 
at  company  distance  from  the  line. 

2162.  Q.  What  difference  is  there  between  the  movement  of 
the  second  and  the  other  rear  companies  in  coming  left  front  into 
line  ?  A.  The  captains  give  the  command  Half-left,  conduct  their 
companies  to  a  point  at  twice  company  distance  in  rear  of  the 
right  of  their  places  in  line,  change  direction  half-right,  and  con- 
form to  what  is  explained  for  the  second  company. 

2163.  Q.  What  portion  of  the  captain's  command  is  omitted 
by  the  captains  of  the  rear  companies  if  the  battalion  be  march- 
ing when  left  (or  right)  front  into  line  is  ordered  ?  A.  The  com- 
mand Forward. 

2164.  Q.  How  is  left  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear  executed  ? 
A.  The  same  as  left  front  into  line,  except  that  each  captain 
marches  his  company  beyond  the  line,  wheels  his  company  about 
by  fours  towards  the  point  of  rest,  halts  it  and  dresses  it  towards 
the  point  of  rest. 

2165.  Q.  In  forming  line  by  two  movements  from  column  of 
fours,  when  should  the  command  March  be  given  ?  A.  As  the 
bead  of  an  interior  company  is  about  to  change  direction. 

2166.  Q.  What  guides  are  established  in  forming  line  by  two 
movements  ?    A.  Only  those  of  the  rear  companies. 

2167.  Q.  A  part  of  a  column  having  changed  direction,  what 
difference  is  made  in  the  movement  of  companies  between  form- 
ing line  to  the  right,  left,  or  faced  to  the  right  f  A.  If  the  change 
of  direction  is  to  the  right,  and  the  line  is  to  e  formed  to  the 
left,  the  leading  companies  execute /ours  left,  while  the  rear  com- 
panies execute  left  front  into  line.  If  it  is  desired  to  form  line 
faced  to  the  right,  the  leading  companies  would  execute /<?W5 
right,  while  the  rear  companies  would  execute  left  front  into  line 
faced  to  the  rear.  If  the  column  has  changed  direction  to  the 
left,  to  form  line  to  the  right  the  leading  companies  would  exe- 
cute/om?**  right,  and  the  rear  companies,  right  front  into  line  ; 
and  to  form  line  to  the  left  the  leading  companies  would  execute 
fours  Ufty  and  the  rear  companies,  right  front  into  line  faced  to 
the  rear. 

2168.  Q.  Being  in  line,  how  may  a  column  of  companies  be 
formed  ?  A.  If  at  a  halt,  by  commanding.  Companies  right  (or 
left),  march;  or  to  form  column  without  halting,  the  command  is. 
Companies  right  (or  left)j  turn,  march,  forward^  march^  guide  right 


246  THE  ARMY  OPFICER*S  EXAMIKER. 

(or  left),  the  command  Forward  to  be  given  when  all  the  com- 
panies have  completed  the  turn. 

2169.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  breaking  by  i\\%  right  (or  left)  of 
companies  to  the  rear  into  column  ?  A.  It  is  a  movement  by  which 
a  column  of  companies  is  formed  in  rear  of  the  original  battal- 
ion line,  each  company  executing /owrs  right  (or  left),  column  right 
(or  left),  the  captains  halting  on  the  original  line  and  permitting 
their  companies  to  file  past  them,  when  they  form  line,  are  halted 
and  dressed. 

2170.  Q.  If  marching  in  column  of  fours,  how  may  a  column  of. 
companies  be  successively  formed  to  the  right  or  left  ?  A.  By 
commanding.  Column  of  companies,  first  company  fours  right 
(or  left),  inarch,  guide  right  (or  left),  when  the  leading  company 
executes  fours  right  and  the  other  companies  continue  the  march 
in  column  of  fours  and  successively  form  line  to  the  right  on  the 
same  ground  as  the  first  company. 

2171.  Q.  If  marching  in  column  of  companies  at  full  distance, 
how  may  the  companies  be  formed  successively  to  the  right  or 
left  into  column  of  fours?  A.  By  the  command  Column  of  fours, 
first  company  fours  right  (or  left),  march,  when  the  leading  com- 
pany executes  fours  right ;  the  other  companies  continue  the 
march  in  column  of  companies,  and  execute  fours  right  on  the 
same  ground  as  the  first. 

2172.  Q.  What  is /wZ/  distatice  in  column  of  companies?  A. 
It  is  company  distance  and  three  paces. 

2173.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  of  the  captains  in  breaking 
by  companies  from  the  right  (or  left)  to  march  to  the  left  (or 
right)  ?  A.  At  the  preparatory  command  of  the  major  for  the 
movement  the  captain  of  the  first  company  commands,  Forward, 
guide  left,  and  when  the  guide  has  advanced  company  distance 
commands,  Left  turn,  march.  The  captains  of  the  other  com- 
panies give  the  same  commands  as  the  first  in  time  to  enter  the 
column  at  full  distance. 

2174.  Q.  What  is  the  command  of  the  major  and  that  of  the 
captains  for  a  column  of  companies  marching  at  full  distance  to 
change  direction  ?  A,  The  major  commands,  Column  right  (or  left); 
or,  Column  half -right  {qy  half -left),  march.  The  captain  of  the  first 
company  commands.  Right  (or  left)  turn,  and  when  his  company 
has  executed  that  movement  commands,  Foricard,  march.  Tlie 
other  subdivisions  march  squarely  up  to  the  turning-point,  each 
chief  adding  march  to  the  command  Right  (or  left)  turn,  then  the 
command  Forward,  march. 

2175.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  companies  at  full  distance,  at  a 
halt,  what  must  be  the  difference  in  the  commands  in  order  to 
form  line  to  the  right  or  left,  and  halt  or  advance  ?  A.  To  form 
line  and  halt  the  commands  are,  Com.pnnies  right  (or  left),  march; 
to  form  line  and  advance  the  commands  are.  Companies  right  {ov 
left),  turn.,  march^  guide  centre,  forward,  march. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.  ^47 

2176.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  command  Guides  cover?  A. 
That  command  is  given  when  some  of  the  guides  are  not  exactly 
in  the  trace  of  the  leading  guide,  and  when  given  it  means  that 
each  guide  should  so  correct  his  position  that  he  cannot  see  any 
portion  of  any  guide  except  the  one  immediately  iu  front  of 
him. 

2177.  Q.  Marching  in  column  of  companies  at  full  distance, 
what  commands  should  be  given  to  form  line  to  the  right,  the 
right  of  the  line  resting  opposite  tlie  head  of  the  column  ?  A. 
On  right  into  line,  march,  the  first  company  making  a  right  turn 
at  the  command  Afarch,  and  the  other  companies  continuing  the 
column  movement  until  opposite  their  places  in  line,  when  they 
execute  the  right  turn. 

3178.  Q.  Where  is  the  guide  during  the  movement  on  right  into 
line  ?    A.  The  guide  is  right. 

2179.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  in  the  movements  of  forming 
front  into  line  from  column  of  companies  and  that  of  forming 
front  into  line  from  column  of  fours?  A.  From  column  of  com- 
panies line  is  formed  to  the  right  front  as  follows  :  The  first  com- 
pany moves  straight  to  the  front  company  distance  and  halts  ; 
the  second  company  moves  right  forward,  fours  right  until  near 
the  right  of  the  first  company,  when  it  changes  direction  to  the 
right,  and  then  forms  line  by  fours  left  ;  the  other  companies 
move  by  fours  right,  column  half-left  until  opposite  the  right  of 
the  company  preceding  them  on  the  line,  when  they  change 
direction  half-left,  move  up  near  the  line,  and  complete  the 
movement  as  prescribed  for  the  second  company.  In  forming 
line  from  column  of  fours  to  the  right  front,  the  first  company 
is  brought  right  front  into  line  ;  the  second,  by  fours  right,  moves 
company  distance  lo  the  right  and  then  changes  direction  to  the 
left,  and  is  brought  riglit  front  into  line  before  reaching  the  new 
line  of  the  battalion  ;  the  other  companies  move  by  fours  right 
column  half-left  twice  company  distance,  and  then  follow  what  is 
prescribed  for  the  second. 

2180.  Q.  Being  in  line  to  meet  an  enemy  appearing  on  the 
right  flank,  what  movement  would  place  the  battalion  in  position 
the  quickest  to  receive  him  ?  A.  A  change  of  front  on  first  com- 
pany, in  which  the  first  company  executes  a  full  right  turn,  while 
the  other  companies  execute  together  a  right  half -turn,  and 
when  opposite  their  places  in  line  each  another  right  half-turn^ 
and  move  up  to  the  line. 

2181.  Q.  Can  a  change  of  front  be  executed  other  than  as  de- 
scribed ?  A.  Yes  ;  by  first  forming  a  column  of  fours,  and  then 
front  into  line. 

2182.  Q.  In  route  marches,  where  do  the  officers  and  non-com- 
missioned staff  officers  march?  A.  The  major,  adjutant,  and 
sergeant-major  at  the  head  of  the  column  ;  the  surgeon  and  hos- 
pital steward  at  the  rear  of  the  column  ;  the  other  staff  and  non- 


248  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIN"ER. 

commissioned  staff  officers  wherever  the  major  directs  ;  the  band 
in  front  of  the  leading  company;  the  captains  at  the  head  or  rear 
of  their  companies,  as  directed  by  the  major. 

2183.  Q.  Being  in  line,  what  are  the  commands  for  advancing 
in  line  of  companies  in  columns  of  fours  ?  A.  Companies  right 
(or  left),  forward,  fours  right  (or  left),  march,  guide  {right,  left, 
or  centre). 

2184.  Q.  By  what  means  is  the  line  of  columns  of  fours  put  in 
march,  halted,  marched  to  the  rear,  and  at  the  oblique  ?  A.  By 
the  same  commands  and  means  as  the  battalion  in  line. 

2185.  Q.  How  is  ground  gained  to  the  right  or  left  and  front 
by  a  line  of  companies  in  columns  of  fours?  A.  By  the  com- 
mand Coinpanies,  column  half-right  (or  left),  march,  and  the 
companies  regulate  their  movements  by  those  of  the  company 
toward  which  the  movement  is  made,  as  when  obliquing. 

2186.  Q.  When  is  the  guide  again  announced  after  a  move- 
ment of  this  kind  ?    A.  When  the  direct  march  is  resumed. 

2187.  Q.  By  what  commands  may  a  line  of  companies  in  col- 
umn of  fours  change  direction,  and  how  is  it  executed  ?  A. 
Change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left),  march,  battalion  halt ;  or, 
Otiide  {right,  left,  or  centre).  The  first  company  changes  direc- 
tion to  the  right ;  the  other  companies  are  conducted  by  the 
shortest  line  to  their  places  abreast  of  the  first.  If  marching  in 
double  time,  or  in  quick  time  and  the  command  be  double  time, 
the  captain  of  the  first  company  cautions,  Quick  time  ;  the  other 
companies  execute  the  movement  in  double  time,  and  on  arriving 
abreast  of  the  first  the  captains  command,  Quick  time,  march. 

2188.  Q.  Where  is  the  guide  in  changing  direction  ?  A.  Dur- 
ing the  movement  he  is  on  the  side  toward  which  the  change  is 
made. 

2189.  Q.  If  the  command  Halt  be  given  during  the  execution 
of  a  change  of  direction  by  line  of  companies  in  columns  of 
fours,  what  is  done  ?  A.  Only  those  companies  halt  that  have 
arrived  in  place  ;  the  others  successively  halt  when  they  reach 
their  places. 

2190.  Q.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  a  column  of  fours,  how 
may  it  be  formed  front  into  line  of  companies  in  columns  of 
fours  ?  A.  By  the  commands  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of 
companies  in  columns  of  fours,  march.  The  first  company  con- 
tinues the  march  and  is  halted  at  company  distance ;  the  other 
companies  move  column  half-right,  and  when  they  have  gained 
their  full  intervals  move  half-left  and  halt  abreast  of  the  first 
company. 

2191.  Q.  If  marching  in  a  column  of  fours,  how  is  a  line  of  com- 
panies in  columns  of  fours  formed  on  the  right  or  left  ?  A.  By 
the  commands  On  right  (or  left)  into  line  o/  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  march,  when  the  first  company  executes  column 
right,  advances  company  distance  and  twelve  paces  in  the  new 


DRILL  LEGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY.  249 

direction,  and  halts ;  each  of  the  other  companies  marches  be- 
yond the  preceding  one,  and  when  opposite  its  place  follows  what 
is  prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

3192.  Q.  If  marching  in  column  of  companies,  what  is  the 
command  for  marching  in  line  of  companies  in  columns  of  fours  ? 
A.  Fours  right  (or  left)-,  inarch^  guide  {rights  left^  or  cetitre). 

2193.  Q.  If  advancing  in  line  of  companies  in  columns  of 
fours,  how  are  intervals  extended  and  closed  ?  A.  To  close  in- 
tervals, by  the  commands  On  (such)  company  close  intervals, 
march,  battalion  halt;  or.  Guide  {right,  left,  or  centime).  The 
captain  of  the  designated  company  cautions,  Contimie  the  march  ; 
the  captains  to  the  right  command.  Column  half -left ;  those  to 
the  left.  Column  half-right.  The  designated  company  halts  at 
the  command  Halt,  and  the  other  companies  incline  towards  it 
until  they  gain  the  glose  interval,  when  they  change  direction 
half-right  or  half-left  and  halt  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  one 
designated.  Intervals  are  extended,  gaining  ground  to  the  front, 
on  the  same  principles. 

2194.  Q.  How  may  intervals  be  closed  without  gaining  ground 
to  the  front  in  line  of  companies  in  columns  of  fours  ?  A.  The 
major  wheels  the  battalion  by  fours  into  column  of  companies  ; 
the  column  is  then  closed  on  a  designated  company,  and  then 
wheeled  by  fours  into  line  of  columns  of  fours. 

2195.  Q.  How  may  intervals  be  extended  without  gaining 
ground  to  the  front?  A.  On  the  same  principles  as  described 
for  closing  intervals  without  gaining  ground ;  that  is,  wheeling 
by  fours  into  close  column,  taking  full  distance,  and  wheeling 
again  into  line  of  columns  of  fours. 

2196.  Q.  What  is  the  dista,nce  between  companies  in  close 
column  ?    A.  Eight  paces. 

2197.  Q.  What  is  prescribed  for  file-closers  in  close  column? 
A.  They  close  to  one  pace  from  the  rear  rank  whenever  a  sub- 
division takes  its  place  in  close  column,  and  fall  back  to  two 
paces  when  the  full  distance  is  again  taken. 

2198.  Q.  How  is  a  column  of  companies  at  full  distance  and  at 
a  halt  closed  in  mass  ?  A.  The  major  commands,  Close  in  mass, 
guide  right  (or  left),  march;  the  first  company  stands  fast,  all  the 
others  move  up,  and  as  each  arrives  at  eight  paces  from  the  pre- 
ceding one  it  is  halted  and  dressed,  each  captain  establishing  the 
guide. 

2199.  Q.  What  difference  occurs  if  the  column  be  marching 
when  ordered  to  close  in  mass  ?  A.  The  major  omits  giving  the 
guide  ;  at  the  command  March,  the  first  company  is  halted  ;  and 
the  captains  of  the  rear  companies  omit  the  commands  Forward, 
guide  right  (or  left). 

2200.  Q.  If  the  command  Halt  be  given  during  the  movement 
of  closing  in  mass  in  double  time,  must  the  entire  column  halt  ? 
A.  No ;  only  those  companies  that  have  closed  to  eight  paces ; 


^50  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

the  others  halt  successively  upon  arriving  at  that  distance  from 
the  preceding  company. 

2201.  Q.  How  is  the  column  closed  in  mass  on  the  rearmost 
company?  A.  The  major  wheels  the  battalion  about  by  fours, 
closes  it  on  the  same  principles  as  prescribed  for  closing  on  the 
leading  company,  and  when  closed,  wheels  it  about  by  fours 
again. 

2202.  Q.  Being  in  close  column,  how  is  full  distance  taken 
from  a  halt  and  wiiile  marching?  A.  If  at  a  halt,  the  major 
commands,  Take  full  distance^  guide  right  {or  left),  ma?'ch.  The 
captain  of  the  first  company  commands,  Forward,  guide  right ;  the 
captains  of  the  other  companies  move  forward  by  the  same  com- 
mands, adding  maixh  when  they  have  full  distance  from  the  pre- 
ceding company.  If  marching,  the  major  omits  giving  the  guide, 
and  if  in  quick  time,  the  captains  of  the  real*  companies  halt  them 
at  the  command  March  of  the  major,  and  put  them  in  march  when 
they  have  full  distance.  If  marching  in  quick  time  and  the  com- 
mand be  Double  time,  the  first  company  takes  double  time  and  the 
others  continue  in  quick  time  until  they  have  full  distance,  when 
double  time  is  taken.  If  marching  in  double  time,  the  first  com- 
pany advances  in  double  time  and  the  other  companies  take  quick 
time  until  full  distance  is  gained,  when  they  resume  double  time. 

2203.  Q.  How  is  a  close  column  always  ployed  ?  A.  With  the 
designated  or  leading  company  in  front. 

2204.  Q.  If  in  line  at  a  halt,  and  the  command  is  given  by  the 
major.  Close  column  on  first  comijany,  fours  right,  march,  how  is  the 
movement  executed  ?  A.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  com- 
mands. Forward,  guide  left,  advances  his  company  twelve  paces, 
halts  and  dresses  it  to  the  left ;  the  other  companies  execute  fours 
right.  The  captain  of  the  second  company  halts  in  rear  of  the 
left  of  the  first,  and  when  his  rear  four  passes  him  forms  line  to 
the  left,  halts  it,  establishes  his  guide  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the 
left  guide  of  the  first,  and  dresses  to  the  left.  The  other  compa- 
nies incline  to  the  right  and  move  by  the  shortest  line  to  their 
places  in  column,  and  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  the  second 
company. 

2205.  Q.  What  is  done  if  close  column  is  formed  while  march- 
ing? A.  The  first  company  will  continue  the  march  ;  the  others 
wheel  by  fours  to  the  right,  enter  the  column,  and  when  in  the 
trace  of  the  preceding  company  form  line  to  the  left. 

2206.  Q.  By  what  commands  is  a  column  of  fours  ployed  into 
close  column,  faced  to  the  front?  Describe  tlie  movement. 
A.  Lilose  column,  first  comjmvy  column  right  (or  left),  march.  The 
first  company  executes  column  right,  and  the  leading  guide  having 
advanced  twelve  paces  in  the  new  direction,  the  captain  halts, 
and  as  his  rear  four  passes  him  forms  line  to  the  left,  halts  and 
dresses  his  company  to  the  left;  the  other  companies  move 


BRILL  REGULATIONS— S-OR  I^-FAKTRY.  251 

forward  and  execute  the  same  movement  eight  paces  in  rear  of 
the  preceding  company. 

2207.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  in  forming  a  cohimn  of  fours 
into  close  column  faced  to  tlie  rear  and  that  oi  faced  to  the  front? 
A.  To  face  it  to  the  rear,  the  major  adds  faced  to  the  rear  after 
Close  column.  The  movement  is  executed  as  in  faced  to  the  front, 
except  that  the  companies  in  rear  of  the  first  pass  beyond  it  and 
enter  the  column  in  rear  of  the  first,  forming  line  to  the  right  or 
left,  according  as  the  company  changed  direction  to  the  riglit  or  left. 

2208.  Q.  How  may  a  column  of  fours  ploy  into  close  column 
faced  to  the  right  (or  left)  ?  A.  By  the  commands,  XJlose  column, 
first  company ,  fours  right  (or  left),  march.  The  first  company  exe- 
cutes the  command,  and  the  captain  adds  guide  right,  moves  it 
eight  paces,  halts  and  dresses  it  to  the  right.  The  other  compa- 
nies form  close  column  as  prescribed  from  line. 

2209.  Q.  If  in  close  column  and  a  change  of  direction  is  or- 
dered by  the  flank,  how  do  the  companies  obtain  their  new  posi- 
tions ?  A.  The  first  company  executes  right  forward,  fours  right, 
and  as  the  rear  four  completes  its  wheel  it  is  formed  in  line,  to 
the  right  or  left,  halted,  and  dressed  to  the  right  or  left.  The 
other  companies,  after  executing  fours  right,  direct  their  march 
so  as  to  enter  the  new  column  eight  paces  in  rear  of  and  form 
line  as  with  the  preceding  company,  the  captain  halting  at  the 
flank  of  the  column  and  permitting  his  company  to  file  past  him. 

2210.  Q.  How  is  a  close  colifmn  deployed  from  a  halt  ?  A.  The 
major  commands,  Deploy  column,  fours  right  (or  left),  march. 
The  first  company  stands  fast  by  a  caution  from  the  captain,  and 
is  dressed  to  the  left ;  the  other  companies  execute  fours  right, 
and  wh(yi  each  captain  reaches  three  paces  beyond  the  right  of 
the  preceding  company  wheels  it  by  fours  to  the  left,  halts  it  near 
the  line,  and  dresses  it  to  the  left.  If  marching,  the  first  com- 
pany halts  at  the  command  march. 

MOVEMENTS  BY  PLATOONS. 

2211.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  re-forming  companies  when 
in  column  of  platoons  ?  A.  Form  companies,  right  (or  left)  ob- 
lique, march,  battalion  halt ;  or,  Guide  left  (or  right). 

2212.  Q.  What  is  the  exception  if  companies  are  formed  from 
column  of  platoons  while  marching?  A.  The  chiefs  of  the  lead- 
ing platoons  do  not  halt  them  until  the  major  commands.  Halt. 

2213.  Q.  What  is  a  platoon  column  ?  A.  It  is  a  company  in 
column  of  platoons. 

2214.  Q.  What  is  a  line  of  platoon  columns  ?  A.  It  is  a  line 
of  companies  formed  in  platoon  column. 

2215.  Q.  What  is  the  full  interval  between  companies  in  line 
of  platoon  columns?    A.  Platoon  front  and  three  paces. 

2216.  Q.  How  are  the  companies  moved  in  closing  intervals 


352  THE  AKMY  OPFICER^S  EXAMIKER. 

while  in  line  of  platoon  columns  ?  A.  The  designated  company 
stands  fast  and  the  other  companies  move  by  the  flank  toward  it, 
inclining  slightly  to  the  rear,  and  when  twelve  paces  from  the 
preceding  company  is  wheeled  by  fours  to  the  front,  halted,  and 
dressed  on  the  line  of  the  designated  company. 

2317.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  advancing  in  line  of  pla- 
toon columns  with  full  intervals  from  being  inline?  A.  Com- 
panies right  (or  left)  by  platoons,  march,  guide  {right,  left,  or 
centre). 

2218.  Q.  If  in  line  of  platoon  columns  and  it  is  desired  to  form 
column  of  ccTmpanies  to  the  right  or  left,  what  is  the  command  ? 
A.  Platoons  {right  or  left)  march. 

2219.  Q.  If  marching  in  line  of  platoon  columns  and  it  is  de- 
sired to  form  column  of  platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  what  is  the 
command  ?  A.  Companies,  column  right  (or  left),  march,  guide 
{right,  left,  or  centre). 

2220.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  how  may  the  battalion 
be  formed  on  right  or  left  into  line  of  platoon  columns  ?  A.  The 
major  commands,  Oil  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  platoon  columns. 
The  platoons  of  the  first  company  change  direction  on  the  same 
ground,  while  those  of  the  other  companies  pass  platoon  dis- 
tance and  three  paces,  and  then  follow  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
first. 

2221.  Q.  If  in  column  of  platoons,  how  may  the  battalion  be 
formed  front  into  line  of  platoon  columns?  A.  By  the  command 
Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of  platoon  columns,  march.  The 
first  company  advances  in  column  of  platoons  and  halts  ;  the 
other  companies  by  platoons  execute  column  half-right,  advance 
until  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is  opposite  its  place^in  line, 
when  direction  is  changed  half-left,  and  the  company  is  halted 
and  dressed  on  the  line  of  the  preceding  company. 

2222.  Q.  If  in  column  of  fours,  how  may  the  battalion  be 
formed  front  into  line  of  platoon  columns?  A.  By  tlie  same 
commands  as  when  in  columns  of  platoons.  The  first  company 
executes  right  front  into  line  ;  the  second  company  executes  col- 
umn right,  changes  direction  at  the  proper  distance,  and  then,  at 
platoon  distance  from  the  line,  executes  platoons  rigid  front  into 
line.  The  only  change  with  the  other  companies  is  that  they 
execute  half-right  and  move  by  the  shortest  line,  when  they  fol- 
low what  is  prescribed  for  the  second, 

2223.  Q.  If  in  column  of  companies  at  full  distance,  how  is  a 
street  column  formed  ?  A.  By  the  command  Street  column, 
march,  when  the  first  company  halts  and  stands  fast ;  the  second 
and  third  form  in  columns  of  fours  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  right 
and  left  fours  respectively  of  the  first  company,  and  the  fourth 
company  closes  upon  the  second  and  third,  the  captains  opposite 
the  centre  of  their  companies,  together  with  all  other  oflicers  and 
non-commissioned  oflBcers  and  the  color -guard  inside  near  their 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.  253 

posts  in  line  or  column.  If  but  three  companies  in  the  battalion, 
the  first  and  second  platoons  of  the  second  company  execute 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  second  and  third  companies.  With 
five  companies  the  platoons  of  the  fourth  company  form  in  rear 
of  the  second  and  third  companies;  with  six  companies  the 
fourth  follows  the  second;  and  the  fifth  follows  the  third  in  their 
movements. 

2224.  Q.  Tf  in  street  column,  how  is  a  square  formed  ?  A.  By 
the  command  Form  square,  march.  The  leading  company  halts 
or  stands  fast ;  the  right  and  left  flank  companies  wheel  by  fours 
to  the  right  and  left  respectively  and  halt ;  the  rear  company 
executes  about  face. 

2225.  Q.  If  in  street  column  and  the  command  be  given,  Col- 
umn of  co7npanies,  march,  guide  right  (or  left),  how  is  it  exe- 
cuted ?  A.  The  first  company  advances,  the  flank  companies 
execute  front  into  line  in  double  time,  each  when  at  full  distance 
from  the  preceding  company,  and  the  rear  company  advances 
when  at  full  distance.  Officers,  guides,  etc.,  return  to  their 
posts. 

Extended  Order. 

general  principles. 

2226.  Q.  What  is  the  basis  of  extended  order  ?    A.  The  squad. 

2227.  Q  What  becomes  of  the  men  of  a  squad  if  the  squad 
should  be  broken  up,  or  the  men  belonging  to  it  separated  ?  A. 
They  should  place  themselves  under  the  orders  of  the  nearest 
squad-leader,  and  serve  with  his  squad,  as  if  it  were  their  own 
original  squad. 

2228.  Q.  When  is  an  enemy  said  to  be  imaginary?  A.  When 
his  position  and  force  are  merely  assumed. 

2229.  Q.  When  is  an  enemy  outlined  ?  A.  When  his  position 
and  force  are  indicated  by  a  few  men. 

2230.  Q.  When  is  an  enemy  said  to  be  represented  ?  A.  When 
a  body  of  troops  acting  as  such  has  its  supposed  force  and 
position. 

2231.  Q.  What  formation  are  the  troops  required  to  be  in  to 
pass  to  extended  order  ?  A.  Extended  order  may  be  taken  from 
any  formation. 

2232.  Q.  What  general  rule  is  given  regarding  facing  to  the 
front  in  extended  order  ?  A.  In  arriving  upon  the  line  and 
upon  halting,  men  will  face  to  the  front,  whether  in  squads  or  as 
individual  skirmishers. 

2233.  Q.  Are  any  commands  given  for  dressing  in  extended 
order  ?  A.  No ;  the  general  alignment  is  taken  toward  the  base- 
file  ;  the  men  stand  and  march  at  ease,  but  pay  close  attention. 

2234.  Q.  By  what  means  are  the  movements  executed  ii 
exercise  in  leading,  and  for  what  purpose  ?    A.  At  signals ^^__„ 


254  THE   AKMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMTJ^TER. 

the  corporal,  and  as  far  as  possible  without  commands  or  cau- 
tions ;  in  order  to  prepare  the  squad  for  the  battle  exercises  by 
training  the  men  to  co-operate  with  their  leader  and  conform 
instantly  to  his  wishes. 

2235.  Q.  In  what  way  should  the  movements  be  executed  ?  A. 
In  the  most  direct  manner — first  in  quick  time,  then  in  double 
time,  and  finally  at  a  run. 

2236.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  corporal?  A.  Three 
paces  in  front  of  the  squad. 

2237.  Q.  Who  is  the  guide  of  the  squad?  A.  The  man  in 
front  of  whom  the  corporal  places  himself,  and  he  follows  in  the 
trace  of  the  corporal  at  three  paces. 

2238.  Q.  How  does  the  corporal  direct  the  squad  not  to  follow 
him  ?  A.  He  commands,  Qidde  rigid  (or  left)^  and  indicates  the 
point  of  direction  ;  if  marching  by  the  flank  he  indicates  the 
direction. 

2239.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  corporal  when  the  squad 
is  marched  to  the  rear  ?    A.  In  front  of  the  squad. 

2240.  Q.  When  is  a  squad  deployed  forward,  and  when  by  the 
flank  ?  A.  It  is  deployed /ort/;arrf  when  it  is  in  rear  of  the  line 
to  be  occupied,  and  by  the  fla7ik  when  it  is  already  on  that  line. 

2241.  Q.  Can  a  squad  be  deployed  by  the  flank  while  march- 
ing ?    A.  No  ;  it  is  halted  before  deploying. 

2242.  Q.  Can  the  squad  be  deployed  forward  from  a  halt  ?  A. 
No  ;  it  must  first  be  placed  in  march. 

2243.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  interval  between  skirmishers  ? 
A.  Two  paces  ;  if  greater  or  less  is  desired,  it  must  be  stated  in 
the  preparatory  command. 

2244.  Q.  What  must  the  corporal  do  before  giving  the  com- 
mands for  marching,  deploying,  or  assembling,  or  for  increasing 
or  diminishing  intervals?  A.  He  must  indicate  the  file  which  is 
to  be  the  base  or  guide,  by  placing  himself  in  front  of  it. 

2245.  Q.  On  halting,  where  does  the  corporal  go  ?  A.  Three 
paces  in  rear  of  his  squad. 

2246.  Q.  In  deploying  as  skirmishers,  on  what  man  is  the  de- 
ployment made,  and  how  do  the  rear-rank  men  take  position  ? 
A.  The  deployment  is  made  on  the  front-rank  man  of  the  second 
file  from  the  right ;  the  rear-rank  men  place  themselves  on  the 
right  of  their  file-leaders,  each  as  soon  as  there  is  interval. 

2247.  Q.  If  the  squad  is  to  kneel  or  lie  down  upon  halting, 
how  is  this  indicated  ?  A.  The  corporal  gives  the  cautionary 
command  Kneel,  or  Lie  down,  upon  halting  before  giving  the 
commands  to  deploy.  The  squad  w'ill  then  kneel  or  lie  down  at 
each  halt  until  otherwise  directed. 

2248.  Q.  In  deploying  forward  as  skirmishers,  how  is  the  move- 
ment executed  ?  A.  The  front-rank  man  of  the  second  file 
moves  straight  to  the  front,  or  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the 
corporal ;  the  other  men  oblique  to  the  right  or  left,  according 


DRILL   REGULATIOI^S — FOR  IN^FANTRY.  255 

as  they  are  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  second  file,  increasing  the 
cadence,  each  resuming  the  direction  and  cadence  of  the  guide 
when  on  the  alignment  at  his  proper  interval.  Tlie  rear- rank 
men  follow,  or  precede  their  file-leaders  on  the  line,  according 
as  they  gain  intervals  to.  the  right  or  left. 

2249.  Q.  How  is  the  deployment  as  skirmishers  by  the  flank 
executed?  A.  The  base  stands  fast;  the  other  men  move  rap- 
idly to  the  right  or  left,  according  as  they  are  on  his  right  or  left. 

2250.  Q.  In  increasing  or  decreasing  intervals,  how  is  the 
movement  executed, and  on  what  point  is  the  increase  or  diminish- 
ment  made  ?  A.  If  marching,  the  movement  is  executed  by 
obliquing  and  increasing  the  cadence  :  if  at  a  halt,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  by  the  flank.  The  skirmishers  open  from  or 
close  toward  the  base. 

2251.  Q.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  rear,  how  may 
they  again  be  marched  to  the  front?  A.  By  the  command 
Forward,  march. 

2252.  Q.  For  what  is  the  rally  used  ?  A.  For  immediate  and 
concentrated  action,  when  there  is  not  time  to  form  in  the  normal 
order. 

2253.  Q.  Should  a  rally  be  made  in  rear  of  the  line  occupied  ? 
A.  No  ;  it  should  be  either  on  the  line  or  in  advance  of  it. 

2254.  Q.  How  is  a  rally  executed  ?  A.  The  men  run  toward 
the  corporal,  and  group  themselves  in  any  formation  he  directs, 
and  fix  bayonets. 

2255.  Q.  If  the  corporal  orders  an  assembly  while  on  the  march, 
how  is  it  executed  ?  A.  The  men  move  in  double  time,  form 
and  follow  him  ;  the  men  must  not  be  assembled  when  faced  or 
marching  to  the  rear. 

2256.  Q.  When  skirmishers  are  so  located  as  not  to  be  able  to 
see  or  hear  the  corporal,  how  do  they  regulate  their  movements  ? 
A.  On  the  nearest  men,  who  should  transmit  the  commands  to 
them  in  a  low  tone. 

2257.  Q.  "Who  is  the  instructor  of  the  platoon,  and  what  is  his 
duty  before  forming  line  of  squads  or  deploying?  A.  The  chief 
of  the  platoon  is  the  instructor ;  he  designates  the  centre  squad 
of  the  firing  line  and  indicates  the  point  of  direction  to  the  leader 
of  the  base  squad. 

2258.  Q.  In  forming  line  of  squads  or  skirmishers,  where  do  the 
chiefs  of  sections  place  themselves?  A,  At  the  preparatory  com- 
mand they  place  themselves  in  rear  of  their  base  squads  in  line, 
or  abreast  of  them  in  column. 

2259.  Q.  "When  and  where  do  the  corporals  take  post  in  form- 
ing line  of  squads  or  skirmishers  ?  A.  They  take  post  in  front  of 
their  squads  in  line  at  the  preparatory  command  for  forming  line  of 
squads  ;  in  deploying  as  skirmishers  they  take  or  keep  their  places 
in  ranks,  retaining  supervision  of  their  squads. 

2260.  Q.  What  part  of  a  platoon  forms  the  firing  line  ?    A.  It 


256  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMII^ER. 

may  be  formed  of  one  section,  while  the  other  forms  the  support, 
or  the  entire  platoon  may  be  placed  in  the  firing  line. 

2361.  Q.  Give  commands  for  forming  line  of  squads,  and  dia- 
gram of  same  after  the  formation.  A.  Line  of  squads  on  (such) 
squad,  march.     (For  diagram,  see  page  199,  D.  R.) 

3362.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  interval  between  squads  on  the 
firing  line  ?    A.  About  fifteen  paces. 

3263.  Q.  Give  diagram  showing  a  platoon  formed  into  line  of 
squads  from  marching  in  line.     A.  (See  page  199,  D.  R.) 

3364.  Q.  If  marching  in  double  time,  or  in  quick  time  and  the 
command  be  Double  time,  how  is  the  line  of  squads  formed  ? 
A.  The  base  squad  advances  in  quick  time  ;  the  others  move  in 
double  time  and  take  quick  time  on  arriving  on  the  line  ;  the  cor- 
porals keep  their  places  in  front  of  their  squads. 

3365.  Q.  If  line  of  squads  be  ordered  from  a  halt,  how  is  it 
executed  ?  A.  The  base  squad  stands  fast ;  the  others  face  and 
march  away  ;  each  corporal  halts  his  squad  when  it  has  gained  its 
interval. 

3366.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  forming  line  of  squads  to 
the  front  from  column  of  fours,  and  how  is  it  executed  ?  A.  Right 
(or  left)  front  into  litie  of  squads,  march  ;  platoon,  halt,  the 
leading  four  moves  straight  to  the  front,  the  others  move  half- 
right  (or  left)  by  the  shortest  route  until  the  proper  interval  is 
obtained,  on  the  line  of  the  leading  squad. 

2367.  Q.  How  is  a  line  of  squads  formed  on  right  into  line 
from  column  of  fours  ?  A.  The  leading  four  turns  to  the  right  at 
the  command  March  ;  as  soon  as  uncovered  the  second  four  moves 
obliquely  by  the  shortest  route  to  its  proper  interval  on  the  line 
to  the  left  of  the  first ;  as  each  successive  squad  becomes  uncov- 
ered, it  follows  Vt^hat  is  prescribed  for  the  second. 

3368.  Q.  If  a  platoon  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  how  is  the 
base  squad  determined  and  what  man  is  the  base  skirmisher? 
A.  The  base  squad  must  be  designated  in  the  commands  of  the 
chief,  and  number  two  of  the  front  rank  of  such  designated  squad 
becomes  the  base  skirmisher. 

3369.  Q.  Is  the  deployment  of  a  platoon  made  individually,  or 
by  squad  ?  A.  All  the  men  of  the  line  deploy  on  the  base  skir- 
misher, but  the  squad  leaders  direct  the  men  of  their  squads  in 
their  individual  movements. 

3370.  Q.  If  the  platoon  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  how  may 
it  be  assembled  ?  A.  In  two  ways  :  by  a  signal  or  the  command 
Assemble,  march,  in  which  case  it  assembles  individually  on  the 
chief  of  platoon  wherever  he  may  be  ;  or  by  the  command  Assem- 
ble by  squads,  march,  when  the  assembly  is  executed  by  squads. 

2271.  Q.  What  general  rule  governs  the  movements  of  a  line  of 
squads  while  marching?  A.  The  squads  conform  promptly  to 
the  movements  of  the  base  squad. 

2272.  Q.  If  a  considerable  change  of  direction  to  the  right  or 


DEILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.       257 

left  is  desired  in  the  marcli  of  a  line  squads,  which  is  the  base  and 
what  must  it  do  ?  A.  The  squad  on  the  flank  towards  which  the 
change  of  direction  is  made  becomes  the  base  ;  it  changes  direc- 
tion as  if  alone,  and  halts  ;  the  others  conform  to  the  new 
alignment. 

2273.  Q.  How  may  the  firings  be  executed  by  the  platoon  and 
section  ?  A.  They  may  be  executed  as  explained  for  the  squad  by 
the  platoon  or  section,  whether  closed  or  extended  ;  volley  firing 
may  be  used  when  the  front  is  of  such  extent  as  to  be  controlled 
by  the  voice  ;  to  fire  by  section  or  squad  the  command  given  will 
indicate  which,  as  w^ell  as  the  number  of  volleys  to  be  tired  ;  when 
desirable,  the  objective  and  range  will  also  be  given,  and  then  the 
chief  will  add,  Commence  firing.  Each  section  or  squad  executes 
the  firings  as  if  alone  ;  the  corporals  take  part  in  the  firing  except 
when  the  fire  is  by  squad. 

2274.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  interval  between  sections  in  line  ? 
A.  Thirty-five  paces  between  sections  of  two  squads  each  and 
forty-five  between  sections  of  three  squads  each. 

2275.  Q.  In  reinforcing  the  firing  line,  where  is  the  reinforce- 
ment placed  ?  A.  When  there  are  intervals  in  the  firing  line, 
either  on  the  outer  flanks  or  between  the  groups,  it  is  placed  in 
these  intervals. 

2276.  Q.  How  may  the  firing  line  be  reinforced  if  at  a  halt  or 
advancing  under  cover?  A.  The  firing  line  may  diminish  inter- 
vals toward  one  flank,  while  the  support  deploys  and  moves  up 
into  the  space  made  vacant. 

2277.  Q.  How  may  the  firing  line  be  reinforced  under  a  heavy 
fire?  A.  By  deploying  the  support  on  the  march,  the  support 
placing  themselves  on  the  line  between  the  skirmishers. 

2278.  Q.  When  the  firing  line  is  reinforced,  by  whom  is  author- 
ity exercised  in  the  line?  A.  Officers  and  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers take  charge  of  their  proportionate  parts  of  the  front,  and  the 
action  progresses  as  if  no  mixing  had  taken  place. 

2279.  Q.  Should  reinforcement  of  the  firing  line  under  a  heavy 
fire  be  frequently  resorted  to  ?  A.  No ;  it  should  be  used  only 
when  the  emergency  demands  a  prompt  reinforcement  above  all 
other  considerations. 

2280.  Q.  How  may  platoons  be  rallied  ?  A.  Either  by  platoon, 
section,  or  squad  ;  if  by  platoon,  the  simple  command  Rally  is 
given  or  signal  made ;  if  otherwise,  the  chief  designates  as  to 
the  manner  of  making  the  rally. 

THE  COMPANY. 

2281.  Q.  What  is  the  battle  formation  of  a  company  when  part 
of  a  battalion  and  when  acting  alone  'i  A.  In  battalion  it  is  in 
two  echelons — a  firing  line  and  a  support ;  when  acting  jdone  it 
is  in  three  echelons — a  firing  line,  a  support,  and  a  reserve. 


258 

2282.  Q.  "What  is  the  distance  between  echelons  in  battle  forma- 
tion ?  A.  They  vary  with  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  the 
effectiveness  of  the  enemy's  fire. 

2283.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  fighting  front  of  a  com- 
pany in  battalion  battle  formation  ?  A.  Twice  its  front  in  close 
order. 

2384.  Q.  On  the  defensive,  how  is  the  firing  line  constituted  ? 
A.  Two  sections  constitute  the  firing  line— one  the  support,  and 
one  the  reserve. 

2285.  Q.  What  sections,  as  a  rule,  are  designated  for  the  firing 
line  ?  A.  The  centre  sections  in  line  or  the  leading  sections  in 
column  or  line  of  columns. 


POSITIONS   AND  DUTIES  OF  OFFICERS. 

2286.  Q.  What  is  the  position  and  duty  of  the  captain  in  bat- 
tle formation  ?  A.  He  takes  post  between  the  firing  line  and  the 
support,  or,  if  the  formation  be  in  three  echelons,  near  the  sup- 
port. He  designates  the  sections  for  their  various  duties,  directs 
the  action  of  the  whole  company,  controls  the  reinforcement  of 
the  firing  line  and  keeps  up  the  supply  of  ammunition,  regulating 
distribution  and  expenditure.  His  orders,  given  by  word  of  com- 
mand, signals,  or  delivered  by  orderlies,  are  directed  to  the  com- 
manders of  the  firing  line,  support,  or  reserve.  He  keeps  a  mu- 
sician with  him. 

2287.  Q.  What  is  the  position  and  duty  of  a  first  lieutenant  in 
battle  formation  ?  A.  He  is  ten  paces  in  front  of  and  commands 
the  reserve,  if  there  be  one  ;  if  not,  the  support,  and  maintains 
communication  with  the  support  and  with  the  captain,  sending 
forward  men  to  act  as  messengers  and  repeat  signals.  When  the 
whole  company  is  in  the  firing  line  he  commands  his  own  platoon. 

2288.  Q.  What  is  the  position  and  duty  of  the  second  lieuten- 
ant in  battle  formation  ?  A.  He  commands  the  firing  line  when 
it  consists  of  only  one  section,  or  of  one  section  from  each,  pla- 
toon. If  the  firing  line  consists  of  an  entire  platoon,  it  is  com- 
manded by  its  own  lieutenant,  and  the  other  commands  the  re- 
serve or  support.  The  commander  of  the  firing  line  is  ten  paces 
in  rear  of  it, 

2289.  Q,  What  is  the  duty  of  a  commander  acting  alone  before 
forming  for  attack  or  defense  ?  A.  He  should  make  the  recon- 
naissance necessary  to  determine  the  best  disposition  of  his  force, 
and  should  throw  out  scouts  in  his  immediate  vicinity,  the  num- 
ber depending  upon  the  nature  of  their  duties  and  the  extent 
and  character  of  the  front.  These  should  be  directed  to  convey 
information  acquired  by  means  of  signals  previously  agreed  upon. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANARY.  259 


THE   COMPANY   IN  BATTALION  ON  THE  OFFENSIVE. 

2290.  Q.  At  what  point  within  the  zone  of  fire  should  a  com- 
pany no  longer  advance  in  line  ?  A.  When  artillery  fire  becomes 
effective — that  is,  on  open  ground  about  2500  yards  from  the 
enemy. 

2291.  Q.  How  is  a  company  in  battalion  formed  for  attack  ? 
A.  Scouts  are  sent  forward  (usually  from  sections  to  be  in  sup- 
port), a  non-commissioned  ofiicer  is  designated  to  command  them, 
the  objective  is  indicated  to  him  and  to  the  chiefs  of  platoons  ; 
sections  are  designated  for  the  firing  line  and  support,  and  when 
the  scouts  have  advanced  about  150  yards  to  the  front  the  cap- 
tain commands,  Form  for  attack,  march.  The  second  lieutenant 
designates  the  centre  squad  and  commands.  Guide  centre.  The 
first  lieutenant  commands,  First  and  fourth  sections  halt. 

2292.  Q.  Give  diagram  showing  company  formed  for  attack. 
A.  (See  page  208,  D.  R.) 

2293.  Q.  When  is  the  support  of  a  company  formed  for  attack 
placed  in  march  ?  A.  When  the  firing  line  has  advanced  about 
200  yards. 

2294.  Q.  At  what  distance  should  the  firing  line  form  line  of 
sections,  squads,  and  skirmishers  ?  A.  At  1400  yards  forms  line 
of  sections  ;  at  1200  yards  line  of  squads ;  at  900  yards  deploys 
as  skirmishers. 

2295.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  scouts  in  advancing  against  an 
enemy  ?  A.  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary,  generally  at  800 
yards  or  less,  the  scouts  should  halt  and  wait  for  the  firing  line, 
and  upon  its  arrival  join  the  support,  if  detailed  from  that. 

2296.  Q.  What  movement  should  be  adopted  when  within  about 
500  yards  of  the  enemy's  position  ?  A.  At  this  point  alternate 
rushes  will  probably  be  necessary  ;  the  men  should  be  lying  down 
or  behind  cover,  and  the  lieutenant  commands,  Advancehy  rushes; 
third  (or  second)  section^  Jive  two  (or  three)  volleys ;  second  (or 
third)  section,  forward.  [The  command  March  is  not  given  in 
this  movement.] 

2297.  Q.  How  are  the  rushes  of  a  firing  line  conducted  ? 
A.  The  instant  the  first  volley  is  fired  by  the  third  section,  the 
chief  of  the  second  orders  his  section  forward  at  double  time,  and 
advances  about  fifteen  yards,  or  to  cover  if  there  be  any,  when 
he  halts  it  and  fires  two  (or  three)  volleys,  kneeling  or  lying 
down.  The  instant  of  the  delivery  of  the  first  volley  by  the  sec- 
ond section,  the  third  moves  forward  the  same  as  prescribed  for 
the  second,  halting  about  fifteen  yards  in  advance  of  the  second. 
This  movement  is  repeated  alternately. 

2298.  Q.  When  should  the  captain  send  forward  the  support 
to  reinforce  the  firing  line  ?  A.  As  soon  as  it  becomes  necessary 
to  increase  the  intensity  of  the  fire  during  the  period  of  attack 
by  rushes. 


260  THE   AKMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIKER. 

2399.  Q.  In  the  attack  by  rushes,  what  part  of  the  line  should 
the  support  reinforce  without  indication  ?  A.  The  sections  of 
the  support  reinforce  the  sections  of  their  own  platoons,  and  take 
position  so  as  to  join  in  ttie  next  rush,  and  each  lieutenant  takes 
command  of  his  own  platoon,  when  the  rushes  may  then  be 
made  by  platoons. 

2300.  Q.  Can  a  support  reinforce  the  firing  line  without  wait- 
ing for  orders  to  do  so  ?  A.  Yes  ;  in  emergencies  the  commander 
of  the  support  may  take  the  responsibility  of  moving  it  forward. 

2301.  Q.  What  does  the  captain  do  when  preparing  to  make  an 
assault  ?  A.  He  selects  favorable  ground  and  commands,  Rapid 
fire,  at  which  platoon  commanders  order  bayonets  fixed,  caution 
the  men  to  lay  down  their  sights,  and  command,  liapidfire^  kneel- 
ing ;  commence  firing. 

2302.  Q.  What  should  any  of  the  supports  that  are  in  rear  do 
at  the  command  Rapid  fire  f  A,  They  sliould  join  the  firing  line 
at  once. 

2303.  Q.  How  is  the  charge  executed  ?  A.  When  the  charge  is 
to  be  made  the  captain  signals.  Cease  firing,  and  commands,  To 
the  charge,  march,  when  the  men  rise  and  advance  in  double 
time  ;  when  within  about  thirty  yards  of  the  enemy's  position 
the  captain  commands,  Charge,  when  the  men  quicken  their  pace 
and  charge  upon  the  enemy  with  fixed  bayonets. 

2304.  Q.  W'hat  should  the  captain  do  if  he  drives  the  enemy 
or  should  be  repulsed  ?  A.  If  the  enemy  be  driven  from  his 
position,  he  should  select  ground  favorable  for  firing  upon  the 
retreating  enemy,  or  for  resisting  a  counter-attack.  In  case  of 
repulse,  he  at  once  prepares  to  renew  the  attack. 

2305.  Q.  How  is  a  firing  line  relieved?  A.  The  support  de- 
ploys so  as  to  complete  the  movement  in  rear  of  the  line,  and 
moves  up  into  the  intervals,  or  passes  through  the  firing  line, 
which  is  then  marched  to  the  rear  and  assembled.  If  the  line  be 
marching  to  the  rear,  the  support  is  deployed,  the  firing  line  passes 
through  the  line  thus  formed,  is  assembled,  and  becomes  the  sup- 
port, or  part  of  it. 


THE  COMPANY  ALONE  ON  THE  OFFENSIVE. 

2306.  Q.  W^hat  are  the  duties  of  the  captain  when  conducting 
an  attack  with  his  company  alone?  A.  He  determines  upon  the 
direction  and  character  of  the  attack,  and  indicates  the  rallying- 
point,  and  then  conducts  it  on  the  principles  explained  for  the 
company  in  battalion,  with  the  exception  that  the  firing  line 
makes  the  front  attack  ;  the  support  reconnoitres,  protects  the 
flanks,  and  supports  the  front  attack  ;  the  reserve,  according  to 
circumstances,  makes  a  flank  attack  or  participates  in  the  front 
attack ;  and  when  the  support  is  absorbed  in  the  firing  line  the 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY,       2(31 

reserve  should  advance  so  as  to  be  about  150  yards  from  the 
firing  line. 

THE  COMPANY  IN  BATTALION  ON  THE  DEFENSIVE. 

2307.  Q.  How  is  the  company  in  battalion  disposed  for  de- 
fense ?  A.  The  captain  conducts  it  to  the  point  selected,  sends 
forward  scouts  to  connect  with  those  of  adjacent  companies,  in- 
dicates to  each  subdivision  the  position  it  is  to  occupy  and  the 
defensive  works  to  be  constructed.  Should  the  scouts  cause  the 
enemy  to  deploy  and  disclose  his  intentions,  the  captain  orders 
the  battle  formation,  and  opens  fire  as  soon  as  it  can  be  made 
effective. 

2308.  Q.  When  should  the  support  be  habitually  absorbed  in 
the  firing  line  while  on  the  defensive  ?  A.  When  the  enemy 
arrives  at  about  500  yards  from  the  position. 

TH5  COMPANY  ALONE  ON  THE  DEFENSIVE, 

2309.  Q.  What  should  be  done  if  the  company  alone  arrives 
at  the  position  in  battle  formation  or  in  order  of  march?  A.  If 
in  battle  formation,  the  firing  line  is  established  on  the  position 
to  be  defended  ;  the  support  and  reserve  are  placed  under  cover, 
and  patrols  are  sent  out  to  the  front  and  on  the  flanks  to  recon- 
noitre. If  in  order  of  march,  the  advance-guard  halts  at  the 
position  and  sends  scouts  and  small  patrols  to  the  front  and  on 
the  flanks,  and  the  captain  takes  the  battle  formation,  disposing 
the  support  and  reserve  so  as  to  protect  the  flanks  of  the  firing 
line ;  the  supports,  either  wholly  or  in  part,  may  be  placed  in 
the  firing  line  from  the  beginning,  but  he  should  keep  a  portion 
of  the  reserve  in  hand  for  a  counter-attack  or  to  cover  a  retreat. 

2310.  Q.  How  should  a  retreat  be  conducted  ?  A.  The  reserve 
is  disposed  in  such  position  as  to  most  readily  hold  the  enemy  in 
check,  near  one  of  the  flanks  if  possible  ;  the  firing  line  unmasks 
the  reserve  and  takes  position  in  rear  of  it ;  the  reserve  protects 
the  retreat  of  the  firing  line  and  retires  in  turn  uuder  its  pro- 
tection. 

ACTION  AGAINST  CAVALRY. 

2311.  Q.  How  should  cavalry  be  kept  at  a  distance?  A.  By 
means  of  volleys  executed  by  subdivisions  designated  for  the 
purpose. 

2312.  Q.  How  should  a  charge  of  cavalry  be  received  if  the  com- 
pany be  in  line  and  attacked  in  front  ?  A.  It  should  receive 
the  charge  without  changing  its  formation.  The  advance  or 
attack  of  infantry  should,  as  a  principle,  never  be  checked  by 
the  appearance  of  cavalry. 


262  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

2313.  Q.  What  disposition  is  made  if  a  company  is  attacked  in 
flank  ?  A.  The  company,  or  a  part  of  it  on  the  threatened  flank, 
changes  front  to  face  the  attack. 

2314.  Q.  What  dispositions  should  be  made  if  the  company 
be  in  battle  formation  and  cavalry  attack  as  foragers  or  in  mass  ? 
A.  If  attacked  in  front,  the  firing  line  opens  fire  ;  the  sections  of 
the  support  are  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  flanks  to  guard  the 
latter  and  fire  upon  the  horsemen  who  envelop  them.  If  at- 
tacked in  flank,  the  sections  of  the  support  and  reserve  face  so  as 
to  find  themselves  arranged  in  echelon.  If  attacked  by  echelon, 
the  fire  will  not  be  directed  upon  a  fraction  already  repulsed,  but 
upon  the  one  following  it.  In  a  personal  encounter  the  foot  sol- 
dier should  gain  the  left  flank  of  the  horseman. 

DEFENSE  AND   ATTACK  OF  ARTILLERY. 

2315.  Q.  How  should  an  infantry  support  defend  artillery  1  A. 
By  protecting  the  flanks  and  rear  of  the  batteries,  and  oppose  the 
enemy's  infantry  or  cavalry  acting  against  theni ;  it  is  usually 
posted  on  the  flanks. 

2316.  Q.  How  should  infantry  be  disposed  for  the  attack  of 
artillery  ?  A.  As  for  the  attack  of  a  position,  but  the  firing  line 
may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  at  a  greater  distance,  and  the 
front  may  be  more  extended  ;  the  rear  echelons,  if  need  be,  are 
also  deployed.  If  the  artillery  be  in  motion,  the  fire  is  directed 
preferably  upon  the  horses. 

THE  BATTALION  IN  EXTENDED  ORDER. 

2317.  Q.  How  is  the  battalion  formed  for  battle  ?  A.  In  three 
echelons — a  firing  line,  support,  and  reserve. 

2318.  Q.  What  constitutes  the  fighting  line?  A.  The  firing 
line  and  the  supports  together. 

2319.  Q.  Of  how  many  companies  may  the  fighting  line  con- 
sist ?  A.  It  may  be  composed  of  one,  two,  or  even  three  com- 
panies. 

2320.  Q.  Give  the  duties  of  the  major  connected  with  the  ex- 
tension of  the  battalion.  A.  He  designates  the  company  or 
companies  to  form  the  fighting  line  and  those  for  the  reserve, 
gives  instructions  for  forming  line  of  sections  or  squads,  or  de- 
ploying as  skirmishers,  indicates  the  point  of  direction  and  the 
object  of  the  movement,  and  commands.  Form  for  attack,  (such) 
the  base  company;  march. 

2321.  Q.  Give  diagram  showing  the  battalion  in  extended 
order.     A.  (See  page  216,  D.  R.) 

2322.  Q.  When  the  extension  is  completed,  what  distance  should 
there  be  between  companies  in  the  line  of  skirmishers  ?  A.  Fif- 
teen paces,  which  should  be  preserved  during  the  advance. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY.  263 

2323.  Q.  What  is  the  extent  of  the  fighting  front  of  a  battalion 
in  regiment,  and  where  is  the  reserve  held  ?  A.  The  front  should 
not  exceed  one  and  one-half  times  the  front  of  a  battalion  in 
close  order.  The  reserve  is  held  about  three  hundred  yards  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  supports. 

2324.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  major  if  he  leaves  the  post 
designated  for  him  ?  A.  He  should  leave  a  man  there  to  tell 
where  he  may  be  found. 

2325.  Q.  Who  commands  the  reserve  of  a  battalion  in  ex- 
tended order  ?  A.  The  senior  officer  takes  command  only  when 
the  companies  are  united  in  close  order. 

2326.  Q.  What  is  required  of  mounted  officers  when  the  bat- 
talion opens  fire  ?  A.  They  must  dismount  and  send  their  horses 
to  the  reserve. 

2327.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  color  of  the  regiment  when  the 
battalion  it  is  with  takes  the  battle  formation  ?  A.  It  joins  the 
regimental  reserve,  whose  commander  either  directs  it  to  join 
a  certain  company  or  detaches  a  guard  to  remain  with  it  during 
the  action. 

2328.  Q.  How  is  the  firing  line  of  a  battle  relieved  and  rein- 
forced ?  A.  On  the  same  principles  as  for  a  company,  either  as 
ordered  by  the  major  or  in  each  company  by  its  captain.  Reliev- 
ing skirmishers,  however,  is  an  exceptional  movement. 

2329.  Q.  What  general  rules  govern  the  major  when  the  bat- 
talion is  in  action  ?  A.  He  exercises  a  general  control,  regulates 
the  progress  of  the  action,  sees  that  the  firing  line  advances  to- 
wards the  objeqtive,  hastens  or  delays  reinforcement  by  the  sup- 
ports, disposes  the  reserve  to  guard  against  surprise,  and  indi- 
cates what  measures  are  to  be  taken  to  secure  the  position  ;  but 
should  leave  to  each  commander  the  discretion  necessary  to  en- 
able him  to  profit  by  all  circumstances,  and  leave  the  execution 
of  details  to  his  subordinates. 

2330.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  captains  in  the  fighting  line 
of  a  battalion  in  action  ?  A.  Each  captain  regulates  the  march 
of  the  line  within  the  limits  assigned  him,  determines  the  dis- 
ta«ce  to  be  passed  over  in  rushes,  and  brings  his  support  on  tbe 
firing  line,  pursuant  to  orders,  or  without  orders  if  the  necessities 
of  the  moment  require  ;  he  also  directs  the  fire  and  regulates  its 
intensity. 

THE  BATTALION  IN  REGIMENT  ON  THE  OFFENSIVE. 

2331.  Q.  How  is  the  attack  made  by  a  battalion  in  regiment  ? 
A.  On  the  same  principles  as  prescribed  for  a  company. 

2332.  Q.  Where  should  the  reserve  be  when  the  firing  line  gets 
to  within  500  yards  of  the  enemy's  position  ?  A.  The  first  echelon 
should  draw  near  during  the  advance  so  as  to  be  about  100  yards, 
and  the  second  about  200  yards,  in  rear  of  the  firing  line. 


264  THE   ARMY   OFFIOER^S   EXAMIN^ER. 

2333.  Q.  At  what  point  in  the  advance  should  bayonets  be 
fixed  and  rapid  fire  opened  ?  A.  At  about  200  yards  from  the 
enemy,  at  which  time  the  last  of  the  reserve  in  rear  of  the  point 
at  which  the  main  effort  is  to  be  made  is  held  in  readiness  to 
reinforce  the  line,  and  the  battalion  in  the  second  line  of  the 
regiment  draws  nearer  so  as  to  replace  the  battalion  reserve,  if 
necessary,  and  take  part  in  the  charge. 

2334.  Q.  What  is  done  if  the  rapid  fire  does  not  shake  the 
enemy  ?  A.  The  remainder  of  the  battalion  reserve  is  quickly 
brought  up  and  another  rush  made,  followed  by  rapid  fire  ; 
during  this  fire  the  battalion  of  the  second  line  reinforces  the 
firing  line. 

2335.  Q.  When  should  the  whole  line  rush  upon  the  enemy  ? 
A.  When  the  field-music  sounds  the  charge,  at  a  signal  from  the 
colonel. 

2336.  Q.  What  is  done  if  the  line  is  repulsed  ?  A.  It  rallies 
under  the  protection  of  the  reserve. 

THE  BATTALION  ACTING   ALONE   ON  THE   OFFENSIVE. 

2337.  Q.  In  what  way  is  the  battalion  acting  alone  on  the 
offensive  different  from  acting  with  the  regiment  ?  A.  The 
front  may  be  more  extended,  and  if  the  strength  of  the  battalion 
warrants  it,  the  major  may  attack  both  in  front  and  flank. 

THE  BATTALION  IN  REGIMENT  ON  THE  DEFENSIVE. 

2338.  Q.  What  is  the  battle  formation  for  a  battalion  in  regi- 
ment on  the  defensive  ?    A.  The  same  as  on  the  offensive.     The 
reconnaissance  and  occupation  of  the  position  are  made  on  the 
principles  explained  for  the  company  acting  alone,   under  the  . 
protection  of  the  patrols. 

2339.  Q.  If  it  is  desirable  to  have  an  extended  and  dense 
firing  line  from  the  start,  what  may  be  done  ?  A.  The  two  com- 
panies in  the  fighting  line  may  be  directed  to  keep  but  one  section 
each  in  support.  The  same  result  may  be  obtained  by  placing 
three  companies  in  the  fighting  line,  each  having  two  sections  in 
support. 

2340.  Q.  What  rules  govern  in  the  selection  of  a  line  of 
defense  ?  A.  The  configuration  of  the  ground  ;  the  points  that 
command  a  clear  field  of  fire  in  front  and  afford  cover  should  be 
strongly  occupied  ;  the  different  parts  of  the  front  should  be  able 
to  assist  each  other,  and  should  not  be  separated  by  impassable 
obstacles. 

2341.  Q.  On  what  does  the  disposition  of  the  rear  echelons  of 
the  battalion  depend  ?  A.  Upon  the  movements  of  the  assailant. 
The  supports  are  placed  in  the  firing  line  in  proportion  to  the 
necessities  of  the  case. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS— FOK  INFANTRY.  265 

2342.  Q.  What  kind  of  fire  should  be  used  by  troops  in  rear 
when  firing  over  the  heads  of  others  ?    A.  Volley  fire  only. 

2343.  Q.  When  may  the  firing  line  be  reinforced  by  the  entire 
reserve  ?    A.  In  the  last  stage  of  the  action, 

2344.  Q.  If  retreat  becomes  necessary,  how  is  it  accomplished  ? 
A.  The  same  as  for  a  company.  If  all  the  battalion  reserves 
have  been  absorbed  in  the  firing  line  the  troops  in  the  second 
line  take  position  and  protect  the  battalion  while  rallying,  or  by 
an  energetic  counter-attack  endeavor  to  gain  the  ascendancy. 
If,  in  obedience  to  orders,  resistance  is  not  to  be  carried  to  the 
last  extremity,  the  retreat  is  executed  by  echelons  from  position 
to  position. 

THE  BATTALION  ACTING  ALONE  ON  THE  DEFENSIVE. 

2345.  Q.  When  should  the  battalion  deploy  when  acting  alone 
on  the  defensive  ?    A.  Not  until  the  enemy's  position  b^ known. 

2346.  Q.  What  conditions  should  be  observed  after  the  battalion 
has  taken  position  preparatory  to  receiving  an  attack  ?  A.  The 
front  must  be  sufficiently  occupied  and  extended  ;  this  will  usu- 
ally require  two  companies  in  the  fighting  line  ;  the  other  two 
companies  are  held  in  reserve  in  rear  of  the  supports,  covering 
the  flanks  and  extending  beyond  them.  When  the  supports  have 
been  absorbed  they  are  replaced  by  the  reserve  companies,  which 
are  disposed  so  as  to  protect  the  flanks. 

2347.  Q.  What  may  be  the  special  objects  of  a  battalion  operat- 
ing on  the  flank  of  a  line?  A.  They  may  be  to  secure  the  flank, 
to  envelop  the  enemy's  flank,  or  to  engage  the  enemy  at  one- 
point  while  the  regiment  or  brigade  prepares  and  executes  the 
principal  attack  at  another  point. 

2348.  Q.  What  rules  should  govern  in  a  night  attack  upon  aa 
enemy  in  order  to  be  successful  ?  A.  It  should  be  a  surprise  ;  it 
should  be  prepared  secretly,  avoiding  indications  that  might 
attract  the  attention  of  the  enemy.  Once  engaged,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  act  vigorously  and  promptly,  and  it  is  essential  to  operate 
over  ground  known  in  advance.  The  leaders  of  the  different 
units  should  be  carefully  instructed  as  to  the  parts  they  are  to 
take,  the  field  assigned  them,  the  rallying  points,  and  the  line  of 
retreat. 

2349.  Q.  In  what  formation  should  troops  operate  in  a  night 
attack,  and  how  should  the  attack  be  conducted?  A.  The  troops 
usually  operate  in  compact  formation,  so  as  to  be  kept  in  hand 
and  prevent  misunderstandings.  The  assailant  approaches  in 
silence  under  cover  of  darkness,  and,  without  firing,  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  enemy's  position  ;  he  then  assaults  resolutely,  not 
replying  to  the  fire,  and  comes  as  quickly  as  possible  to  the  en- 
counter, hand  to  hand. 

2350.  Q.  How  should  troops  act  on  the  defensive  in  a  night 


266  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

attack  ?  A.  If  the  night  attack  be  expected,  the  position  is  re- 
inforced by  troops,  or  strengthened  by  obstacles  or  hasty  intrench- 
ments ;  the  positions  to  be  occupied  by  the  different  units  are 
indicated  and  understood  beforehand. 

ADVANCE  AND  REAR  GUARDS, 

2351.  Q.  What  is  an  advance  and  what  a  rear  guard  f  A.  An 
advance- guard  is  a  body  of  troops  thrown  out  in  front  of  a 
marching  column  to  cover  its  movements,  to  prevent  surprise, 
and  gain  information.  Kear-guards  are  corresponding  bodies  in 
rear  of  the  column. 

2352.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  an  advance-guard?  A.  In 
advance  it  seizes  advantageous  positions  and  holds  them  until  the 
main  body  comes  up,  or  holds  in  check  the  advancing  enemy 
until  the  main  body  can  deploy  and  take  up  a  position  to  meet 
him.  In  retreat  it  prepares  the  way  for  the  main  body,  guarding 
and  repairing  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  sweeping  away  partisans  or 
guerillas. 

2353.  Q.  How  is  an  advance-guard  divided  and  subdivided  ? 
A.  It  is  divided  into  two  nearly  equal  parts,  the  vanguard  and 
the  reserve.  The  vanguard  is  subdivided  into  the  advance  party 
and  the  support.  The  advance  party  furnishes  the  leading  and 
flanking  groups.     The  support  furnishes  its  own  flankers. 

2354.  Q.  Give  diagram  showing  an  advance-guard  on  the 
march.     A.  (See  page  232,  D.  K.) 

2355.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  imposed  on  rear-guards  f  A.  In 
a  forward  movement  they  protect  the  rear  of  the  column  from 
raiding  parties  or  detachments,  arrest  stragglers,  prevent  pil- 
laging, etc.  In  a  retreat  they  cover  the  column,  checking  the 
enemy,  and  delaying  him  so  as  to  insure  the  safety  of  the  column. 

2356.  Q.  What  should  be  the  strength  of  an  advance  and  a 
rear  guard  in  a  forward  movement  ?  A.  It  varies  from  one  eighth 
to  one  fourth  of  the  whole  force  :  in  a  very  small  force  one 
eighth,  in  a  very  large  force  one  fourth,  and  generally  one  sixth. 
The  rear-guard  is  generally  one  half  the  strength  of  the  advance- 
guard  ;  but  in  retreat  the  proportions  given  for  the  advance-guard 
will  apply  to  the  rear-guard,  and  the  advance-guard  would  be 
half  the  strength  of  the  rear-guard. 

OUTPOST  DUTY. 

2357.  Q.  What  does  the  size  of  the  detachment  for  outpost  duty 
depend  on  ?  A.  The  strength  of  the  main  command,  the  prox- 
imity of  the  enemy,  the  extent  of  front  to  be  covered,  the  char- 
acter of  the  country,  etc.  It  should  not,  as  a  rule,  exceed  one 
sixth  of  the  whole  force. 

2358.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  having  outposts  ?    A.  To  guard 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY.      267 

all  approaches,  to  obtain  the  earliest  information  of  the  enemy's 
movements,  and  to  obstruct  and  delay  his  advance. 

2359.  Q.  How  are  outposts  generally  disposed  ?  A.  First,  a 
line  of  sentinels  ;  second,  a  line  of  small  groups,  called  pickets  ; 
third,  a  line  of  larger  troops,  called  supports ;  fourth,  the  re- 
serve. 

2360.  Q.  Give  diagram  showing  the  position  of  the  officers  and 
soldiers  after  being  placed  on  outpost  duty.  A.  (See  page  235, 
D.  R.) 


MARCHES. 

2361.  Q.  What  is  the  average  march  for  infantry  ?  A.  From 
fifteen  to  twenty  miles  per  day. 

2362.  Q.  When  troops  move  in  large  bodies,  and  particularly  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  enemy,  how  should  the  march  be  conducted  ? 
A.  In  several  columns,  in  order  to  diminish  the  depth  of  the  col- 
umns and  to  expedite  the  deployment  into  line  of  battle. 

2363.  Q.  What  should  the  order  of  march  state  ?  A.  The  time 
for  each  division  to  commence  its  movement,  and  the  points 
where  the  division  or  its  elements  should  enter  the  main  route, 
and  also  whether  the  troops  or  trains  should  have  the  right  of 
way. 

2364.  Q.  What  portion  of  a  command  should  be  provided  with 
pioneers  ;  where  do  they  march,  and  what  are  their  duties  ?  A. 
Each  brigade  is  provided  with  a  corps  of  pioneers;  they  should 
precede  the  column  for  the  purpose  of  removing  obstructions  and 
preparing  the  way.  Pioneers,  mounted  or  in  wagons,  should  re- 
pair the  roads  for  the  trains. 

2365.  Q.  When  should  marches  begin?  A.  When  practicable,  in 
the  morning,  after  the  men  have  had  breakfast. 

2366.  Q.  What  period  of  rest  should  be  given  troops  on  the 
march  during  the  day  ?  A.  After  marching  half  or  three  quar- 
ters of  an  hour,  a  rest  of  fifteen  minutes  should  be  given  ;  there- 
after, ten  minutes  during  each  hour,  except  that  on  long  marches 
halts  of  one  half  or  three  quarters  of  an  hour  should  be  made 
for  meals,  and  this  should  be  in  the  vicinity  of  wood  and  water. 

2367.  Q.  How  should  a  man  obtain  permission  to  leave  the  ranks 
on  the  march  ?  A.  Permission  must  be  obtained  from  the  cap- 
tain ;  if  a  man  needs  medical  attendance,  the  captain  gives  him  a 
pass  to  the  surgeon,  showing  his  name,  company,  and  regiment ; 
if  he  is  unable  to  return  to  his  company,  the  surgeon  admits  him 
to  the  ambulance,  or  indorses  the  pass,  stating  that  he  is  per- 
mitted to  fall  out  on  account  of  sickness. 

2368.  Q.  Where  does  the  provost-guard  of  a  brigade  march, 
and  what  are  its  duties  ?  A.  In  rear  of  the  brigade.  Its 
duties  are  to  examine  men  who  fall  out  of  ranks,  and  if  absent 


268  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

without  authority  they  are  arrested  and  sent  to  their  regiments 
upon  arriving  in  camp  or  bivouac. 

2369.  Q.  When  delays  occur  in  front,  how  may  the  brigades  be 
formed,  and  what  is  the  duty  of  staff  otiicers  regarding  the  delay  ? 
A.  They  may  be  formed  in  column  of  battalions  and  stack  arras. 
Staff  officers  should  investigate  the  cause  of  delay  and  report  the 
same  to  their  commanders.  They  should  frequently  be  .sent 
ahead  during  the  march  to  gain  any  information  that  may 
shorten  the  march  or  lessen  the  fatigue  of  the  troops. 


CAMPING. 

2370.  Q.  How  should  troops  be  placed  in  the  presence  of  the 
enemy  when  halted  for  repose  ?  A.  They  should  bivouac  in  posi- 
tion ;  if  safety  permits,  tents  may  be  pitched  in  rear  of  the  line 
of  stacks,  those  of  the  company  officers  in  rear  of  their  companies 
— the  field  and  staff  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line  of  company 
officers. 

2371.  Q.  How  should  troops  be  placed  when  not  in  the  presence 
of  the  enemy  when  halted  for  repose  ?  A.  Usually  in  column  of 
companies  at  convenient  distances,  the  tents  of  companies  being 
arranged  in  two  lines,  facing  each  other,  or  in  one  line  all  facing 
in  the  same  direction. 

2372.  Q,  Give  diagram  of  a  regimental  camp.  A.  (See  p.  238, 
D.  K.) 

2373.  Q.  What  is  the  width  of  company  or  other  streets  of  the 
camp  ?  A.  These  vary  with  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  the 
strength  of  the  command,  and  must  be  regulated  by  the  com- 
mander. 

2374.  Q.  What  should  be  considered  as  good  ground  for  camp- 
ing? A.  It  should  be  susceptible  of  good  drainage,  and  near 
wood  and  water. 

2375.  Q.  What  portions  of  the  camjT  are  ditched  ?  A.  All  the 
streets,  and  a  shallow  one  around  each  tent. 

2376.  Q.  How  may  the  number  and  frequency  of  camp  dis- 
eases be  greatly  diminished  ?  A.  When  straw,  leaves,  or  boughs 
are  at  hand,  the  men  should  be  required  to  raise  their  beds  above 
the  ground. 

2377.  Q.  When  and  how  should  sinks  be  dug?  A.  On  arriving 
in  camp,  if  orders  are  not  communicated  for  resuming  the  march 
the  following  morning.  They  should  be  concealed  by  bushes  or 
tents,  and  should  be  covered  daily  with  fresh  earth. 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY.  369 


ADDITIONAL   FOR   FIRST  LIEUTENANTS  OF  INFANTRY. 

EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 

2378.  Q.  Of  how  many  battalions  does  a  regiment  consist,  and 
who  is  the  instructor?  A.  Of  three '  battalions,  but  the  rules 
prescribed  are  applicable  to  a  greater  or  less  number.  The  col- 
onel is  the  instructor. 

2379.  Q.  Give  diagram  of  a  regiment  in  line,  with  positions  of 
officers,  etc.,  noted  therein.    A.  (See  page  139,  D.  R.) 

2380.  Q.  What  position  does  the  lieutenant-colonel  occupy  in 
the  various  formations  of  the  regiment  ?  A.  In  line,  in  line  of 
columns,  or  in  line  of  masses,  the  lieutenant-colonel  is  posted 
on  a  line  with  the«majors,  opposite  the  right  of  the  first  battal- 
ion ;  in  column,  he  is  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  abreast  of  and 
twenty  paces  from  the  head  ;  during  field  movements  and  on  the 
march  he  is  not  restricted  to  any  particular  post — he  acts  as  an 
assistant  to  the  colonel  as  the  latter  may  direct. 

2381.  Q.  In  route  marches  what  are  the  positions  of  the  colonel 
and  staff  ?  A.  They  march  at  the  head  of  the  column,  the  non- 
commissioned staff  in  their  rear,  or  in  rear  of  the  mounted  trum- 
peters and  orderlies,  the  band  in  rear  of  the  non-commissioned 
staff.  The  colonel  may  direct  a  surgeon  to  march  in  rear  of  the 
regiment,  or  one  in  rear  of  each  battalion  if  there  be  a  suflicient 
number. 

2382.  Q.  How  are  the  colonel's  commands  given  ?  A.  Orally, 
by  the  trumpet,  or  communicated  by  staff  officers  or  orderlies. 

2383.  Q.  What  are  the  majors  required  to  do  concerning  the 
commands  of  the  colonel  ?  A.  Repeat  them,  unless  otherwise 
directed,  and  add  such  commands  and  cause  their  battalions  to 
execute  such  movements  as  may  be  necessary  before  the  general 
movement.  They  also  give  commands  necessary  to  insure  the 
execution  of  the  movements  by  their  battalions  at  the  proper 
time  ;  and,  after  the  general  movement,  add  such  commands  as 
may  be  necessary  to  complete  the  movement  in  their  battalions. 

2384.  Q.  How  may  the  colonel  preface  his  commands  ?  A.  By 
commanding,  Battalions,  attention. 

2385.  Q.  When  the  regiment  is  in  more  than  one  line,  if  a 
movement  is  to  be  executed  by  one  of  the  lines,  what  is  specified 
in  the  preparatory  command  of  the  colonel  ?  A.  He  specifies. 
First  line,  second  line,  or  third  line,  and  the  battalion  com- 
manders in  the  designated  line  repeat  the  commands. 

2386.  Q.  When  the  formation  will  admit  of  the  simultaneous 
execution  of  movements  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion, 
what  will  the  colonel  prefix  to  his  commands?    A.  Battalions. 

2387.  Q.  When  the  formation  will  admit  of  the  simultaneous 


270  THE  AEMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

execution  of  movements  by  companies  or  platoons,  how  are  the 
movements  executed,  and  who  gives  the  commands  ?  A.  They 
are  executed  as  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion,  and  the  colonel 
gives  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  major,  except,  in  announc- 
ing the  guide,  in  line,  and  in  line  of  columns,  he  commands, 
(Such)  the  base  battalion. 

2388.  Q.  How  may  the  colonel  designate  a  battalion  to  execute 
a  separate  movemeut  ?  *A.  By  prefixing  the  command  (Such) 
battalion  to  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Bat- 
talion. 

3389.  Q.  How  may  a  regiment  be  /ormed  ?  A.  By  battalions, 
in  line,  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  or  in  line  of  masses  ;  it  may 
also  be  formed  in  separate  lines  in  any  of  those  formations. 

2390.  Q.  At  reviews  and  other  forms  of  ceremony  how  are  the 
battalions  posted  ?  A.  From  right  to  left,  according  to  the  rank 
of  the  battalion  commanders  present,  the  senior  on  the  right ; 
but  a  battalion  whose  major  is  in  command  of  the  regiment  re- 
tains its  place.  On  other  occasions  the  battalions  are  posted  as 
the  colonel  may  direct. 

2391.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  battalions  in  line  or  in 
line  of  masses  ?    A.  Twenty-four  paces. 

2392.  Q.  How  are  the  battalions  of  a  regiment  designated  ? 
A.  In  whatever  direction  the  regiment  faces  they  are  designated 
from  the  right  when  in  line  and  the  head  when  in  column,  First 
battalion^  second  battalion,  etc.  If  in  two  lines,  the  battalions 
in  the  first  line  are  designated  from  the  right,  First  and  second; 
in  the  second  line,  Third,  etc. 

2393.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  forming  a  regiment  ?  A,  The 
adjutant  indicates  to  the  adjutant  of  the  base  battalion  the  point 
of  rest  and  the  direction  of  the  line,  then  takes  post  facing  the 
line,  about  30  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
and  non-commissioned  staff  take  post  as  the  last  battalion  is 
formed  ;  to  receive  the  regiment  the  colonel  takes  post  facing  the 
line.  The  formation  completed,  the  adjutant  commands.  Bat- 
talions, attention,  presents  the  regiment  to  the  colonel  as  ex- 
plained for  a  battalion,  and  takes  post  with  the  colonel,  passing 
by  his  right. 

2394.  Q.  How  are  ranks  opened  and  closed  in  the  regiment  ? 
A.  They  are  executed  in  each  battalion,  regulating  on  the  first. 

2395.  Q.  How  are  the  firings  conducted  ?  A.  By  the  battalion 
commanders,  under  direction  of  the  colonel  ;  the  colonel,  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, and  staff  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  line. 

2396.  Q  How  is  a  regiment  dismissed  ?  A.  The  colonel  com- 
mands. Dismiss  your  battalions,  when  each  major  conducts  his 
battalion  to  its  own  parade-ground  and  dismisses  it. 

2397.  Q.  Being  in  line,  how  may  the  regiment  be  advanced  ? 
A.  The  colonel  gives  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  School  of 
the  Battalion  for  advancing  in  line  of  columns,  when  the  major 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — FOR  INFAKTRY.      371 

of  the  base  battalion  adds,  Q^uide  centre  ;  the  other  majors  an- 
nounce the  guide  toward  the  base  battalion. 

2398.  Q.  How  may  the  regiment  be  advanced  a  short  distance 
in  line  ?  A.  The  colonel  commands  :  (Such)  tlie  base  battalion, 
forward,  march;  at  the  command /or2^;ar(i,  each  major  adds, 
Quide  centre. 

2399.  Q.  The  regiment  being  halted,  how  may  a  general  align- 
ment be  given  ?  A.  The  colonel  selects  a  base  company  from  one 
of  the  battalions,  posts  its  guides  at  the  point  of  rest,  and  com- 
mands, Guides  on  the  line;  on  the  centre  {right  or  left),  dress. 
The  guides  of  each  company  post  themselves  as  in  forming  a 
battalion,  and  each  battalion  is  dressed  as  in  battalion  align- 
ment. If  a  battalion  be  at  considerable  distance  from  or  in  front 
of  the  position  it  is  to  occupy,  its  major  will  at  the  first  command 
move  it  to  its  proper  position  for  dressing. 

2400.  Q.  If  in  line  at  a  halt,  how  may  a  column  of  fours  be 
formed  by  breaking  from  the  right  to  march  to  the  left  ?  A.  By 
the  same  commands  as  for  a  battalion  ;  the  first  battalion  exe- 
cutes the  movement,  and  the  other  battalions  follow  successively 
at  the  commands  of  their  majors,  preserving  the  intervals  between 
battalions. 

2401.  Q.  In  successive  formations,  what  persons  indicate  the 
point  of  rest  of  each  battalion  ?  A.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant- 
major  of  each  battalion ;  they  precede  it  on  the  line  for  that 
purpose. 

2402.  Q.  W.hat  guides  are  first  established  on  the  line  ?  A.  The 
guides  of  the  leading  company  of  the  base  battalion. 

2403.  Q.  How  are  the  guides  of  the  leading  companies  of  the 
rear  battalions  established  ?  A.  Facing  the  point  of  rest  of  the 
general  line,  the  nearest  guide  being  twenty-four  paces  from  the 
flank  of  the  battalion  next  preceding. 

2404.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  when  forming  two  or  more  lines 
or  column  of  battalions  ?  A.  The  front  of  the  battalion  in  line 
and  twenty-four  paces. 

2405.  Q.  How  is  the  second  line  of  a  regiment  manoeuvred 
when  in  two  lines  ?  A.  It  preserves  its  position  relative  to  the 
first  and  conforms  to  its  movements. 

2406.  Q.  Tf  marching  in  column  of  fours,  how  may  two  lines 
be  formed  to  the  right  or  left  ?  A.  By  the  commands  In  two 
lines,  fours  right,  third  battalion  second  line;  march.  The 
first  and  second  battalions  form  line  to  right ;  third  battalion  in- 
clines to  left  until  the  proper  distance  is  gained,  when  it  resumes 
original  direction  and  forms  line  to  right  when  its  centre  is  oppo- 
site the  centre  of  the  other  two  battalions. 

2407.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  to  form  column  of  fours  again,  what 
is  the  manoeuvre  of  the  second  line  ?  A.  The  battalion  com- 
mander gives  the  command,  Fours  right,  march,  and  moves  i 


272  THE   AKMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

by  the  shortest  line  to  unite  in  column  with  the  first  line  at  the 
proper  interval. 

2408.  Q.  In  forming  on  right  or  left  into  line  in  two  lines  from 
column  of  fours,  how  is  the  second  line  formed  ?  A.  If  on  right 
into  line,  the  rear  battalion  inclines  to  the  left  until  it  gains  its 
distance,  when  it  resumes  its  original  direction,  and  then  forms 
on  right  into  line  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  first  line. 

2409.  Q.  To  form  right  or  left  front  into  line,  what  must  the 
rear  battalions  do  ?  A.  The  majors  in  rear  of  the  first  move  their 
battalions  column  half-right  (or  left),  so  that  when  the  head 
arrives  opposite  its  point  of  rest  it  will  be  at  least  twice  company- 
distance  in  rear  of  the  line  when  it  changes  direction  half-left  (or 
right),  and  on  arriving  at  company  distance  the  battalion  executes 
right  (or  left)  front  into  line. 

2410.  Q.  How  may  a  column  of  fours  be  formed  front  into  line 
and  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear  on  the  rear  of  the  column  ? 
A.  By  first  wheeling  about  by  fours  and  then  executing  the 
movement  designated. 

2411.  Q.  How  may  a  column  of  fours  be  formed  front  into  line 
on  the  head  of  a  rear  battalion  ?  A.  The  colonel  commands.  On 
second  (or  such)  battalion,  inght  (or  left)  front  into  line;  march. 
The  major  of  the  first  battalion  wheels  to  the  left  by  fours,  moves 
twenty-four  paces,  wheels  by  fours  to  the  left  again,  and  then 
forms  right  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear.  The  other  two 
battalions  simply  perform  the  movement  of  right  front  into  line. 
If  the  third  battalion  be  designated,  the  second  battalion  executes 
the  movements  here  described  for  the  first,  and  the  major  of  the 
first  wiieels  his  battalion  about  by  fours,  changes  direction  half- 
right,  and  forms  his  battalion  on  the  left  of  the  line,  by  right 
front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2412.  Q.  From  column  of  fours  form  front  into  line  in  two 
lines.  A.  The  colonel  commands,  In  tivo  lines,  7'ight  (or  left) 
front  into  line ;  third  (or  such)  battalion,  second  line ;  march. 
The  first  and  second  form  right  front  into  line,  while  the  third 
inclines  to  the  right  and  forms  right  front  into  line  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  first  line.  To  form  three  lines — the  third  in  close 
column  of  companies  or  in  line  of  platoon  columns, — the  colonel 
sends  special  instructions  to  the  major  of  third  battalion  and  gives 
the  commands  to  the  other  two. 

2413.  Q.  If  in  column  of  fours,  how  is  a  line  formed  to  the  left 
by  two  movements  ?  A.  The  same  as  by  a  battalion,  except  that 
the  colonel  uses  the  word  battalions  instead  of  companies  in  his 
commands  ;  if  he  desires  to  form  line  to  the  right  the  rear 
battalions  execute  left  front  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear. 

2414.  Q.  Describe  the  formation  of  right  and  left  front  into 
line  from  column  of  fours.  A.  The  colonel  commands.  Right 
and  left  front  into  line ;  march.  The  first  battalion  executes 
right  front  into  line  ;  the  second  aacl  third  are  marched  to  the 


DKILL  KEGULATIONS — FOR  IKFA]S^TRY.  373 

left,  and  form  left  front  into  line — the  second  at  twenty-four 
paces  from  the  first,  and  the  third  the  same  distance  from  the 
second.  If  the  command  be  Left  and  right  front  into  line,  the 
rear  battalions  execute  right  front  and  the  first  left  front  into 
line. 

2415.  Q.  How  is  the  movement  executed  of  forming  right  and 
left  front  into  line  in  two  lines  from  column  of  fours  ?  A.  Tlie 
first  battalion  forms  right  front  and  the  second  left  front  into  line 
on  the  left  of  the  first ;  the  third  forms  line  by  two  movements, 
and  is  established  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  first  line.  If  the 
command  be  Left  and  right,  the  first  battalion  forms  left  and  the 
second  right  front  into  line. 

2416.  Q.  By  what  means  may  all  movements  in  line  of  columns 
of  fours,  School  of  the  Battalion,  be  executed  by  the  regiment  ? 
A.  By  similar  commands  and  means,  the  colonel  designating 
(such)  hattalion  when  necessary. 

2417.  Q.  Can  the  regiment,  being  in  line,  form  column  of 
companies  or  platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  or  right  or  left  of  com- 
panies rear  into  column  ?  A.  Yes  ;  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion. 

2418.  Q.  What  movements  may  be  executed  from  column  of 
companies  at  full  distance  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Battalion  ?  A.  Advances,  form  line 
to  the  right  or  left,  and  marches  to  the  rear. 

2419.  Q.  What  commands  do  the  majors  give  when  a  column 
at  full  distance  is  ordered  to  face  to  the  rear  ?  A.  They  add, 
Battalion,  halt,  as  the  fours  unite  in  line  after  wheeling  about. 

2420.  Q.  At  what  point  should  the  rear  battalions  begin  to 
execute  the  command  On  right  into  line,  being  in  column  at  full 
distance  ?  A.  Each  when  its  leading  company  is  twenty-four 
paces  beyond  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion  preceding. 

2421.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  companies  at  full  distance,  give 
commands  of  majors  and  describe  the  movement  of  right  front 
into  line.  A.  The  majors  of  the  two  rear  battalions  command, 
Fours  right ;  oompanies,  column  half-left,  at  the  first  command 
of  the  colonel.  At  the  command  March  from  him  the  first 
battalion  executes  the  movement  of  right  front  into  line  ;  the 
other  battalions  march  in  the  new  direction,  each  until  its  lead- 
ing guides  are  opposite  the  point  of  rest  of  the  battalion,  when 
the  major  commands,  Companies,  column  half-right,  march; 
guide  left;  and  when  the  rear  four  of  his  left  company  is  oppo- 
site the  point  of  rest,  commands,  Fours  left,  march;  guide  left ; 
and  when  at  company  distance  from  the  line,  forms  his  battalion 
right  front  into  line  on  the  right  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

2422.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  battalions  at  close 
intervals  ?    A.  Company  front. 

2423.  Q.  What  rules  govern  the  movements  of  battalions  in 
forming  column  of  masses  from  line?    A.  The  designated  bat- 


274  THE   AEMT   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

talion  ploys  into  close  column  ;  the  others  ploy  in  rear  of  the 
one  designated  ;  the  battalion  nearest  the  point  of  rest  taking 
precedence  in  the  column.  The  rear  battalions  are  dressed  to 
the  same  flank  as  the  designated  or  leading  battalion. 

2424.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  movement  of  ploying  a 
line  into  column  of  masses.  A.  Column  of  'masses^  on  first  com- 
pany^ first  battalion ;  march.  The  first  battalion  ploys  on  its 
first  company  ;  the  others  wheel  by  fours  to  the  right,  and  each 
marches  so  that  its  leading  company  may  enter  the  column  at 
company  distance  and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear  company  of 
the  preceding  battalion,  the  second  in  rear  of  the  first.  Should 
it  be  an  interior  battalion  on  which  the  ployment  is  made,  the 
company  and  battalion  will  be  designated  by  the  colonel ;  the 
major  of  the  first  battalion  commands,  Fours  left,  march;  com- 
panies,  column,  {left  or  right)  ;  march;  guide  right,  and  when 
his  leading  guides  are  opposite  a  point  company  distance  and  eight 
paces  in  rear  of  the  second  battalion,  commands.  Companies^ 
column  {right  or  left),  march,  and  ploys  in  rear  of  the  second ; 
the  captains  pass  through  the  column,  establish  their  guides,  and 
dress  to  the  left ;  the  captain  of  the  first  company  announces 
guide  left  as  his  company  forms  line.  The  third  ploys  in  rear  of 
the  first. 

2425.  Q.  If  the  ployment  into  column  of  masses  is  made  on  the 
fourth  company  instead  of  the  first  of  an  interior  battalion,  in 
what  positions  are  the  battalions  placed  in  column  ?  A.  The 
third  battalion  ploys  in  rear  of  the  second  and  the  first  in  rear  of 
the  third. 

2426.  Q.  What  is  the  command  for  ploying  a  column  of  fours 
into  column  of  masses  faced  to  the  front  ?  A.  Column  of  masses; 
first  company,  first  battalion,  column  right  (or  left)  ;  tnarch. 

2427.  Q.  If  column  half-right  (or  left)  is  given  in  the  commands 
of  the  colonel,  in  the  ployment  from  column  of  fours  into  column 
of  masses,  what  does  it  signify  ?  A.  That  the  column  is  to  face 
in  an  oblique  direction. 

2428.  Q.  If,  in  the  ployment  of  column  of  fours  into  column 
of  masses,  the  colonel  adds.  Faced  to  the  rear  after  Column  of 
masses,  how  is  it  executed  ?  A.  The  leading  battalion  ploys  faced 
to  the  rear  on  its  first  company  ;  the  other  battalions  pass  on,  and 
each  major  gives  his  commands  so  that  his  first  company  may 
enter  the  column  company  distance  beyond  where  the  last  com- 
pany of  the  preceding  battalion  entered  it. 

2429.  Q.  AVhat  is  the  movement  for  the  deployment  of  a  col- 
umn of  fours  into  column  of  masses  faced  to  the  right  ?  A.  The 
first  battalion  ploys  faced  to  the  right ;  the  other  battalions 
incline  to  the  left,  each  major  giving  his  commands  for  the  ploy- 
ment of  his  battalion  to  the  right  in  rear  of  the  preceding  one. 

2430.  Q.  What  movements  may  be  made  in  column  of  masses 
by  the  same  commands  as  when  at  full  distance  ?    A.  Advances, 


DRILL  REGULATIONS — fOR  INFANTRY.  275 

halts,  obliques,  marches  by  the  flank,  resuming  the  march  in 
column,  facing  to  the  rear,  marches  to  the  rear,  and  changes  of 
direction  on  the  march. 

2431.  Q.  Being  in  column  of  masses,  how  is  a  change  of 
direction  by  the  flank  executed  ?  A.  The  leading  battalion 
changes  direction  by  the  (right  or  left)  flank  ;  each  of  the  other 
battalions  wheels  by  fours,  and  is  marched,  with  the  guide  right 
or  left  by  two  partial  changes  of  direction,  to  its  position  in  the 
new  column,  and  then  wheeled  by  fours.  The  partial  changes  of 
direction  are  executed  in  double  time. 

2432.  Q.  Describe  the  deployment  of  the  regiment  to  the  left 
from  a  column  of  masses.  A.  The  first  battalion  deploys  to  the 
left  ;  the  second  is  marched  in  close  column  to  its  position  on 
the  line  to  the  left  of  the  first,  and  there  deployed  ;  the  third  is 
marched  to  its  position  to  the  left  of  the  second  and  then  de- 
ployed ;  the  second  and  third  battalions  may  be  marched  in  col- 
umn of  fours  to  their  places  on  the  line. 

2433.  Q.  How  may  a  line  be  formed  on  the  rear  of  the  column 
from  column  of  masses  ?  A.  The  colonel  first  faces  the  column  to 
the  rear,  and  then  the  movement  is  executed  as  if  deploying  from 
the  head  of  column. 

2434.  Q.  How  is  the  deployment  made  to  the  right  and  left 
from  column  of  masses  ?  A.  The  first  battalion  deploys  to  the 
right;  the  second  and  third  deploy  on  the  line— the  second  to 
the  left  of  the  first,  and  the  third  to  the  left  of  the  second.  If 
the  colonel  should  command,  Left  and  right  instead  of  Right  and 
left,  the  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  left ;  the  others  deploy  on 
the  line — the  second  on  the  right  of  the  first  and  the  third  on 
the  right  of  the  secoid. 

2435.  Q.  Give  ih,  commands  and  describe  the  movement  of  de- 
ploying in  two  lines  from  column  of  masses.  A.  In  two  lines, 
deploy  column;  third  (or  &\n:\\y  battalion^  second  line;  fours 
rig  Id  {ov  left) ,  inarch.  The  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  right  ; 
the  second  deploys  on  the  line  of  the  first  and  to  its  right ;  the 
third  moves  in  column  of  fours  and  forms  line  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  first  line.  If  the  colonel  commands.  Fours  right 
and  left,  the  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  right,  the  second  to 
the  left  of  the  first;  the  third  deploys  to  the  left.  If  the  com- 
mand should  be  Left  and  right,  the  first  deploys  to  the  left,  the 
second  on  line  to  its  right,  and  the  third  deploys  to  the  right. 

2436.  Q.  Give  the  commands  and  describe  the  movement  of 
ploying  into  column  of  battalions  from  line.  A.  Column  of  bat- 
talions, on  first  (or  third)  battalion  ;  fours  right  (or  left),  march. 
The  first  battalion  stands  fast ;  the  second  executes  fours  right, 
column  right,  marches  the  normal  or  specified  distance  to  the 
rear,  changes  direction  to  the  left  and  forms  line  to  the  left  in 
rear  of  the  first  battalion.  The  third  battalion  executes  fours 
right,  caiman  half -right,  and  forms  in  rear  of  the  second. 


376  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMII^BR. 

2437.  Q.  What  change  is  made  if  the  column  of  battalions  is 
formed  on  the  second  battalion  from  line  ?  A.  The  second  stands 
fast ;  the  first  executes  fours  left  and  forms  in  rear  of  the  second; 
the  third  executes  fours  right  and  forms  in  rear  of  the  first;  the 
right  guides  cover. 

2438.  Q.  How  is  a  column  of  battalions  faced  to  the  7'ight 
formed  from  column  of  fours  ?  A.  The  colonel  commands,  Col- 
umn of  battalions  ;  first  battalion,  fours  right  (or  left),  march. 
The  first  battalion  forms  line  and  is  halted;  thie  others  incline  to 
the  left  and  form  line  in  rear  of  the  first,  right  guides  covering. 

2439.  Q.  How  is  a  column  of  battalions  faced  to  the  rear  formed 
from  column  of  fours?  A.  The  colonel  commands,  Column 
of  battalions  faced  to  the  rear  ;  first  battalion,  column  right  (or 
left),  march.  The  first  battalion  changes  direction  to  the  right, 
and  when  its  rear  has  cleared  the  flank  of  the  column  by  twelve 
paces,  forms  line  to  the  right  and  halts;  the  battalions  in  rear 
move  forward,  and  each,  when  it  has  passed  battalion  distance 
and  twenty-four  paces  beyond  the  preceding  battalion,  changes 
direction  to  the  right  and  forms  line,  right  guides  covering. 

2440.  Q.  Describe  the  movements  of  the  battalions  in  forming 
front  into  line  from  column  of  battalions.  A.  If  right  front 
into  line,  the  first  battalion  stands  fast ;  the  second  forms  line  on 
the  right  of  the  first,  and  the  third  on  the  right  of  the  second  ; 
but  the  colonel  may  direct  the  major  of  the  third  battalion  to 
form  it  on  the  left  of  the  second. 

2441.  Q.  Where  is  the  major's  post  in  line  of  masses?  A. 
Twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  first  company. 

2442.  Q.  Who  posts  the  guides  of  the  leading  company  in 
forming  line  of  masses?  A.  The  adjutant  or  the  sergeant- 
major  of  each  battalion. 

2443.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  the  formation  of  a  line 
of  masses  on  the  first  or  third  battalion  from  line.  A.  Commands, 
Line  of  masses;  on  first  company,  first  battalion;  march.  The 
first  battalion  ploys  on  its  first  company;  the  second  and  third 
battalions  move  by  the  right,  and  each  ploys  with  the  interval 
of  twenty-four  paces  from  the  left  of  the  preceding  battalion. 
If  the  formation  be  on  an  interior  battalion,  the  colonel  desig- 
nates the  first  or  fourth  company,  and  the  designated  bat- 
talion ploys  on  that ;  the  other  battalions  on  the  company  near- 
est the  point  of  rest,  first  closing,  if  not  at  the  proper  interval. 

2444.  Q.  How  may  a  column  of  fours  be  formed  on  right  or 
left  into  line  of  masses  ?  A.  The  major  of  first  battalion  gives 
command  and  moves  his  battalion  column  right,  advances  in 
new  direction  forty  paces,  and  then  commands,  Close  column  ; 
first  company,  column  left;  march.  Each  of  the  othei-  battal- 
ions pass  beyond  the  preceding  one,  and  execute  the  same 
movement  at  their  proper  intervals. 

2445.  Q.  How  may  a  column  of  fours  be  formed  front  into  line 


DRILL   REGULATIOKS— FOR  IK^FAKTRY.  277 

in  column  of  masses  ?  A.  The  major  of  the  first  battalion  com- 
mands, Close  column  ;  first  company^  coluuui  rights  and  the  bat- 
talion ploys  faced  to  the  front.  The  other  battalion  commanders 
move  column  half-right^  march  to  the  right  front  and  execute 
the  movement  as  the  first, 

2446.  Q.  In  executing  right  and  left  front  into  line  of  masses 
from  column  of  fours,  how  are  the  battalions  ployed  ?  A.  The 
first  battalion  ploys  to  the  right ;  the  second  and  third  to  the  left 
on  a  line  with  the  first.  If  Left  and  right  is  given,  the  first 
ploys  to  the  left,  the  others  to  the  right. 

2447.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  movement  of  forming 
front  into  line  of  masses  faced  to  the  rear  from  column  of 
fours.  A.  Command,  Right  front  into  line  of  masses  faced 
to  the  rear,  march.  The  first  battalion  ploys  faced  to  the  rear; 
the  others  are  moved  column  half-right  and  then  half-left  when 
they  arrive  at  the  proper  intervals  from  the  preceding  battalion, 
after  which  they  execute  the  movement  the  same  as  the  first  bat- 
talion and  on  a  line  with  it. 

2448.  Q.  In  aligning  a  line  of  masses,  what  is  required  of  the 
battalion  and  company  commanders  after  the  guides  of  the  lead- 
ing company  of  each  battalion  have  been  established  on  the  line? 
A.  The  majors  dress  their  battalions  toward  the  point  of  rest ; 
the  first  company  of  each  battalion  is  dressed  up  to  the  guides  ; 
the  captains  of  each  of  the  other  companies  dress  them  at  close 
distance. 

2449.  Q.  Being  inline  of  masses  on  the  march,  how  is  a  change 
of  front  effected  and  by  what  command  ?  A.  Change  front  on 
first  (or  third)  battalion,  march.  The  first  battalion  moves  col- 
umn right,  and  when  the  first  company  has  advanced  forty  paces 
the  battalion  is  halted  ;  the  other  battalions  change  direction 
half -right,  and  are  so  marched  that  by  another  change  of  direc- 
tion half-right  each  may  arrive  on  the  line  to  the  left  of  the  pre- 
ceding battalion. 

2450.  Q.  Describe  a  change  of  direction  by  a  line  of  masses 
marching  by  the  flank  in  quick  time.  A.  The  leading  battalion 
changes  direction  in  double  time,  and  the  others  at  the  com- 
mands of  their  majors  change  direction  similarly  on  the  same 
ground  as  the  first. 

2451.  Q.  What  are  the  commands  for  forming  column  of  fours 
from  line  of  masses  at  a  halt?  A.  Column  of  fours ;  first  com- 
pany, first  (or  third)  battalion,  right  (or  left)  forward,  fours 
right;  march.  Or,  First  {or  fourth)  company, > first  battalion, 
fours  right.  Or,  Mrst  (or  fourth)  company,  third  battalion, 
fours  left;  march. 

2452.  Q.  Give  commands  and  describe  movement  of  forming 
column  of  masses  faced  to  the  front  from  line  of  masses.  A.  The 
colonel  commands.  Column  of  masses  on  first  (or  such)  battalion  ; 
march.    The  first  battalion  stands  fast  or  is  halted  at  the  com- 


278  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

mand  March;  the  second  is  placed  in  close  column  in  rear  of  the 
first,  and  the  third  in  rear  of  the  second.  If  the  third  be  desig- 
nated, the  second  moves  in  rear  of  the  third.  If  the  second  be 
designated,  the  first  takes  position  in  rear  of  the  second  and  the 
third  in  rear  of  the  first.  In  this  latter  movement  each  major 
may  manoeuvre  his  battalion  into  position  in  mass  or  in  column 
of  fours. 

2453.  Q.  Who  indicates  the  point  at  which  each  battalion 
moves  by  the  flank  or  changes  direction  to  enter  the  column  ?  A. 
The  adjutant  or  sergeant-major  of  each  battalion,  according  to 
flank. 

2454.  Q.  In  addition  to  the  movement  of  changing  direction 
by  the  flank,  by  battalion,  by  what  commands  can  a  column  of 
masses  be  formed  into  line  of  masses  to  the  right  ?  A.  Forward^ 
battalions,  column  right;  march;  battalions,  halt;  or  if  the  march 
is  continued,  (such)  the  base  battalion. 

2455.  Q.  In  forming  on  right  into  line  of  masses  from  column 
of  masses  what  kind  of  tim.e  is  used  in  changing  direction,  and 
how  far  must  the  first  battalion  march  before  being  halted?  A. 
Double  time  must  be  ordered  by  the  major  in  changing  direction, 
and  forty  paces  is  the  distance  marched. 

2456.  Q.  In  the  movement  of  right  front  into  line  of  masses 
from  column  of  masses,  in  what  direction  must  the  rear  bat- 
talions move  ?  A.  They  are  moved  in  masses  to  their  places, 
the  second  on  the  right  of  the  first  and  the  third  on  the  right  of 
the  second.  The  colonel,  however,  m.ay  direct  the  major  of  the 
third  battalion  to  form  on  the  left  of  the  first. 

MOVEMENTS  BY  PLATOONS. 

2457.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  battalions  in  line  of  pla- 
toon columns  ?    A.  Platoon  front  and  twenty- four  paces. 

2458.  Q.  What  difference  exists  in  the  commands  and  execution 
of  movements  in  column  of  platoons  and  line  of  platoon  columns 
between  the  regiment  and  the  battalion  ?  A.  They  are  the  same, 
except  the  colonel  designates  (such)  battalion  when  necessary. 

2459.  Q.  In  forming  line  or  line  of  platoon  columns,  what  must 
each  major  do  ?  A.  He  must  first  move  his  battalion  into  posi- 
tion on  the  principles  of  forming  line  from  column  of  fours,  and 
at  the  proper  time  give  the  commands  for  forming  line  or  line  of 
platoon  columns. 

ORDER  IN  ECHELON. 

2460.  Q.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  at  a  halt,  give  commands 
and  describe  movement  of  advancing  in  echelon.  A.  Command, 
Form  echelon  at  (so  many)  yards ;  (such)  the  base  battalion; 
march.    At  the  command  designating  the  battalion  the  major  of 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — FOR  IN-pANTRY.  279 

the  battalion  commands,  Forward^  guide  centre  ;  the  others  cau- 
tion, Standfast.  At  the  command  March  t\\Q  designated  bat- 
talion advances  ;  the  others  take  up  the  march,  each  when  it  has 
the  specified  distance  from  the  one  next  preceding.  A  file-closer 
from  each  rear  battalion  marches  at  the  specified  distance  directly 
in  rear  of  the  guide  on  the  nearest  flank  of  the  preceding  bat- 
talion, and  each  rear  battalion  marches  abreast  of  and  preserves 
the  proper  interval  from  the  file-closer  thus  posted. 

THE  REGIMENT  IN  EXTENDED  ORDER. 

2461.  Q.  What  principles  apply  to  the  regiment  for  extended 
order  manoeuvres  ?    A.  Those  explained  for  the  battalion. 

2462.  Q.  When  is  a  battalion  in  battle  formation  said  to  be  in 
the  fighting  line  ?  A.  When  it  has  any  part  in  the  firing  line. 
The  rule  also  applies  to  larger  commands. 

2463.  Q.  Upon  what  does  the  formation  of  the  regiment  in  two 
or  three  lines  for  battle  depend  ?  A.  Upon  the  extent  of  front  to 
be  occupied  ;  but  this  should  not  exceed  the  front  of  the  regi- 
ment in  one  line  in  close  order  increased  by  one  half  the  interval 
between  it  and  the  adjacent  regiments. 

2464.  Q.  When  in  two  or  three  lines,  what  portion  of  the  regi- 
ment constitutes  the  fighting  line  ?  A.  When  in  two  lines,  two 
battalions  ;  the  other  is  posted  as  a  reserve.  If  in  three  lines, 
one  forms  the  fighting  line,  one  about  six  hundred  and  the  other 
twelve  hundred  yards  in  rear. 

2465.  Q.  How  may  the  reserve  be  posted  ?  A.  It  may  be  posted 
in  rear  of  the  centre,  or  in  rear  of  one  or  both  flanks. 

2466.  Q.  Where  does  the  colonel  take  post  ?  A.  Near  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  battalion  reserves  of  the  fighting  line;  if  called  else- 
where he  indicates  his  position. 

2467.  Q.  What  are  the  majors  required  to  do  if  the  colonel 
fails  to  specify  the  formations  for  battalions  in  reserve  ?  A.  They 
adopt  the  formations  they  deem  best  suited  to  the  ground  and 
other  circumstances. 


ADDITIONAL  FOR  CAPTAINS   OF  INFANTRY. 

The  Brigade. 

2468.  Q.  Of  how  many  regiments  does  the  brigade  consist? 
A.  Three  ;  but  the  rules  prescribed  are  applicable  to  a  greater  or 
less  number. 

2469.  Q.  How  are  regiments  in  line  and  column  designated  ? 
A.  In  line  they  are  right,  centre,  and  left ;  or  if  one  be  in  rear, 
right,  left,  and  rear.  In  column  they  are  leading,  centre,  and 
rear. 


280  ^      THE  ABMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN"ER. 

2470.  Q.  In  what  order  are  the  regiments  posted  ?  A.  In  the 
order  of  rank  of  the  colonels  from  right  to  left,  the  senior  on  the 
right,  unless  otherwise  directed.  In  two  or  three  lines  by  regi- 
ments the  senior  is  in  the  first  line  and  the  junior  in  the  rear 
line.  In  column  they  are  posted  from  head  to  rear,  the  senior  at 
the  head. 

2471.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  regiments  in  line  ? 
A.  Forty-eight  paces. 

2472.  Q.  Where  does  the  general  take  post  ?  A.  In  line,  100 
paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  brigade ;  in  column,  at  the 
head. 

2473.  Q.  In  moving  into  position,  how  should  the  regiments 
and  battalions  be  habitually  marched  ?  A.  In  column  of  fours, 
and  by  the  shortest  practicable  route. 

2474.  Q.  When  the  general  communicates  his  orders  to  regi- 
mental commanders  through  staff  officers,  what  points  should  be 
covered  by  those  orders  ?  A.  First,  the  manoeuvre  to  be  executed 
by  the  brigade.  Second,  the  particular  formation  the  regiment 
is  to  take,  as  in  two  Unes^  line  of  masses^  etc.  When  the  forma- 
tion is  not  specified  the  regiment  forms  in  line.  Third,  if  formed 
in  two  or  more  lines,  the  orders  should  specify  the  number  of 
lines,  the  distance  between  the  lines,  the  line  in  which  the  regi- 
ment is  to  form,  and  its  point  of  rest.  When  necessary,  staff 
officers  are  sent  to  indicate  the  point  of  rest.  Fourth,  whether 
the  right  or  left  of  the  regiment  is  to  connect  with  the  left  or 
right  of  another.  Fifth,  w^hether  the  right  or  left  flank  of  the 
regiment  will  be  exposed. 

2475.  Q.  If  it  is  desired  to  form  front  into  line  from  column 
of  fours,  what  orders  must  the  general  send  ?  A.  To  each  colo- 
nel, TJie  brigade  to  form  front  into  line;  to  the  leading  regi- 
ment. Form  right  front  into  line  ;  to  the  centre  regiment,  Form 
left  front  into  line,  your  right  connecting  ivith  left  of  leading 
regiment ;  to  the  rear  regiment.  Form  right  front  i7ito  line,  your 
left  connecting  with  the  right  of  leading  regiment,  right  flank 
exposed. 

2476.  Q.  To  form  the  brigade  from  column  of  fours  into  two 
or  three  lines,  give  orders  and  state  how  it  is  accomplished. 
A.  The  general  sends  orders.  Form  in  two  (or  three)  lines  to  the 
right  (or  left),  or  adds  At  (so  many)  paces  distance.  Tiie  colo- 
nel of  the  leading  regiment  forms  his  regiment  in  two  lines  to 
the  right  and  halts  ;  the  colonels  of  the  rear  regiments  give  the 
commands  for  forming  in  two  lines  each,  when  his  first  battalion 
has  closed  to  forty-eight  paces  from  the  right  flank  of  the  first 
line  of  the  regiment  preceding  it. 

2477.  Q.  When  forming  in  two  lines,  what  should  the  colonel 
of  the  first  regiment  do  regarding  the  distance  he  must  take 
before  forming  line?    A.  He  must  advance  the  first  line  far 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY  S81 

enough  to  allow  the  second  or  third  line  to  clear  the  line  of 
march. 

2478.  Q.  How  is  a  march  to  the  rear  conducted  ?  A.  The  gen- 
eral sends  orders,  March  to  the  rear^  and  designates  the  base 
battalion  ;  each  colonel  causes  the  regiment  to  face  to  the  rear, 
and  gives  preparatory  commands  to  march  in  line.  ThQforivard 
is  then  sounded  by  orders  of  the  general. 

2479.  Q.  Being  in  line  or  line  of  columns,  how  is  the  march  by 
the  flank  conducted  ?  A.  The  general  sends  orders,  March  hy 
the  right  (or  left)  flank.  Each  colonel  wheels  his  regiment  by 
fours  to  the  right  and  halts  it  until  the  general  causes  forward  to 
be  sounded. 

2480.  Q.  When  at  close  interval  in  line  of  platoon  columns, 
give  commands  and  describe  movement  of  re-forming  line.  A. 
Tlie  general  sends  orders,  Reform  line,  and  designates  the  base 
battalion,  the  colonel  of  which  causes  it  to  take  deploying  inter- 
vals and  form  line;  the  other  colonels  cause  their  regiments  to 
move  by  the  flank  until  opposite  their  positions,  then  take  de- 
ploying intervals  and  form  line. 

2481.  Q.  How  are  changes  of  front  executed  ?  A.  By  forming 
in  column  of  fours  and  then  forming  front  into  line,  or  front 
into  line  faced  to  the  rear.  If  in  two  or  three  lines,  the  simplest 
methods  are  used  for  moving  the  second  and  third  lines  to  their 
new  position. 

THE  DIVISION. 

2482.  Q.  Of  what  does  a  division  consist  ?  A.  Three  brigades 
of  infantry  and  two  or  more  batteries  of  artillery.  The  rules 
prescribed  are,  however,  applicable  to  a  greater  or  less  number. 

2483.  Q.  What  principles  apply  to  the  manoeuvres  of  a  division  ? 
A.  Those  prescribed  for  the  evolutions  of  a  brigade. 

2484.  Q.  Where  is  the  post  of  the  division  commander  ?  A. 
He  takes  post  150  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  division  in 
line,  and  at  the  head  in  column. 

2485.  Q.  How  are  the  brigades  designated  ?  A.  In  line,  n^^#,, 
centre,  and  left ;  in  column,  leading,  centre,  and  rear. 

2486.  Q.  How  are  the  brigades  posted  ?  A.  According  to  the 
rank  of  brigade  commanders  as  given  in  brigade  drill,  unless 
otherwise  directed  by  the  division  commander. 

2487.  Q.  What  is  the  interval  between  brigades  ?  A.  Seventy- 
two  paces,  which  is  increased  when  an  interval  is  left  for  artil-^ 
lery. 

THE  CORPS. 

2488.  Q.  Of  what  does  a  corps  consist  ?  A.  One  or  more 
regiments  of  cavalry  and  the  corps  artillery,  which  is  in  addition 
to  the  divisional  artillery,  and  three  divisions  of  infantry. 


282  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIKER. 


THE   BRIGADE    IN  BATTLE. 

2489.  Q.  Upon  what  does  the  formation  of  a  brigade  in  battle 
depend  ?  A.  Upon  whether  the  brigade  is  acting  alone  or  with 
other  troops,  and  varies  in  each  case  to  suit  the  extent  and  char- 
acter of  the  front  to  be  occupied. 

2490.  Q.  If  the  brigade  be  formed  for  battle  in  one  or  two  lines, 
what  constitutes  the  fighting  line  of  each  regiment  ?  A.  If  in 
one  line,  two  battalions ;  the  third  forming  the  regimental  re- 
serve. If  in  two  lines,  the  two  leading  regiments,  and  the 
second  line  constitutes  the  brigade  reserve,  and  is  posted  six 
hundred  yards  in  rear  of  the  reserve  battalions  of  the  leading 
regiments. 

2491.  Q.  If  the  brigade  approaches  the  field  of  battle  in  column 
of  fours,  what  may  the  general  order  with  regard  to  the  fighting 
line  ?  A.  He  may  order  the  leading  regiments  on  the  fighting 
line  without  regimental  reserves,  and  supply  a  battalion  from  the 
rear  regiment  to  each  regiment  in  the  fighting  line  as  a  reserve. 

2492.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  should  this  latter  method 
be  resorted  to  ?  A.  Only  when  a  rapid  extension  of  front  is  of 
the  first  importance. 

2493.  Q.  What  formation  of  the  brigade  may  be  made  for  a 
more  powerful  attack  ?  A.  The  regiments  may  be  formed  side 
by  side,  each  regiment  in  three  lines,  in  which  case  the  colonels 
will  avoid  calling  on  their  second' battalions  prematurely;  the 
third  should  not  enter  action  without  orders  from  the  general. 

2494.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  general  in  battle  forma- 
tion? A.  He  has  no  fixed  position,  but  will  always  indicate 
where  reports  will  be  received. 

2495.  Q.  What  should  the  general  do  if  compelled  to  give  an 
order  to  a  battalion  commander  ?  A.  He  should  inform  the  colonel 
of  the  regiment  to  which  the  battalion  belongs  as  soon  as  practi- 
cable. 

2496.  Q.  Is  it  absolutely  necessary  that  a  reserve  should  be 
posted  in  rear  of  the  line  ?  A.  No  ;  it  may  be  formed  advantage- 
ously in  echelon  with  that  line. 

2497.  Q,  If  the  general  desires  to  withdraw  his  brigade  from 
the  fighting  line,  what  commands  are  given  ?  A.  He  sends  orders 
to  the  colonels,  Withdraw  and  form  in  one  (or  two)  line  on 
(such)  battalion^  (such)  regiment;  or,  Withdraiv  and  form  in 
column  on  (such)  battalion,  (such)  regiment.  The  general  indi- 
cates the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the  designated  battalion.  If 
the  order  be  to  form  in  column,  column  of  fours  is  understood, 
unless  another  formation  is  indicated. 

THE  DIVISION  IN  BATTLE. 

2498.  Q.  How  may  the  division  be  formed  for  battle  ?  A.  With 
one  or  two  brigades  in  the  fighting  line,  and  the  others  in  reserve ; 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFAKTRY.      283 

or  the  three  brigades  may  be  placed  in  the  fighting  line  ;  in  either 
case,  each  brigade  takes  one  of  the  formations  prescribed  for  the 
brigade  in  battle. 

2499.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  officers  in  command  of  the 
reserves  ?  A.  They  will  adopt  such  formations  as  will  not  un- 
necessarily interfere  with  the  manoeuvres  of  the  other  arms. 

2500.  Q.  Wliere  may  the  reserve  be  posted  ?  A.  It  is  not  neces- 
sarily united  ;  the  regiments  and  battalions  composing  it  may  be 
posted  in  rear  of  different  parts  of  the  first  line. 

OUTPOSTS. 

2501.  Q.  Upon  what  does  the  size  of  the  detachment  for  out- 
post duty  depend  ?  A.  Upon  the  strength  of  the  main  command, 
the  proximity  of  the  enemy,  the  extent  of  front  to  be  covered, 
the  character  of  the  country,  etc.;  it  should  not,  as  a  rule,  ex- 
ceed one  sixth  of  the  whole  force. 

2502.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  having  outposts?  A.  The 
object  is  to  guard  all  approaches,  to  obtain  the  earliest  informa- 
tion of  the  enemy's  movements,  and  to  obstruct  and  delay  his 
advance.  They  should  cover  the  entire  front,  extend  well  beyond 
the  flanks  and  toward  the  rear. 

2503.  Q.  What  terms  are  used  for  the  disposition  of  troops  on 
outpost  duty  ?  A.  First,  a  line  of  sentinels ;  second^  a  line  of 
small  groups,  called  pickets;  third,  a  line  of  larger  groups, 
called  supports  ;  fourth,  the  reserve. 

2504.  Q.  Can  the  reserve  be  omitted  on  outpost  duty?  A. 
Yes,  when  the  supports  hold  a  strong  defensive  line. 

2505.  Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  posts  in  the  line  of 
sentinels,  and  how  many  men  at  each  post?  A.  From  one  to 
three  hundred  yards  apart.     Two  men  at  each  post. 

2506.  Q.  Where  are  the  picket,  support,  and  reserve  posted? 
A.  The  picket  about  400  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line 
of  sentinels  for  which  it  furnishes  reliefs  ;  the  support,  600  yards 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line  of  pickets ;  the  reserve,  1000 
yards  in  rear  of  the  line  of  supports  and  about  2000  yards  in 
front  of  the  main  body. 

2507.  Q.  What  must  be  impressed  on  sentinels  regarding  their 
duty  ?  A.  They  should  keep  themselves  concealed,  and  watch 
the  ground  in  their  front  and  between  them  and  the  posts  on 
their  right  and  left ;  at  least  one  man  on  each  post  must  always 
be  on  the  alert. 

2508.  Q.  Give  diagram  illustrating  the  disposition  of  troops  on 
outpost  duty.     A.  (See  page  235,  D.  R.) 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  CEREMONIES. 

2509.  Q.  How  are  troops  arranged  on  occasions  of  ceremony  ? 
A.  Except  funeral  escorts,  they  are  arranged  from  right  to  left 


284  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMll!?-EK* 

in  line  and  from  head  to  rear  in  column  as  follows :  first,  in- 
fantry ;  second^  light  artillery  ;  thirds  cavalry.  Artillery  serving 
as  infantry  is  posted  as  infantry.  Dismounted  cavalry  and 
marines  are  on  the  left  of  the  infantry.  Engineer  troops  on  the 
right  of  any  command  to  which  attached.  In  the  same  arm, 
regulars,  volunteers,  and  militia  are  posted  in  the  order  named. 

2510.  Q.  When  should  the  field  and  staff  be  mounted,  and 
when  dismounted  ?  A.  At  parades  and  reviews  the  field  and 
staff  are  habitually  mounted  ;  they  are  dismounted  when  the 
reviewing  officer  is  dismounted. 

2511.  Q.  What  position  will  a  non-commissioned  officer  in 
command  of  a  company  occupy  on  occasions  of  ceremony  ?  A. 
He  retains  his  post  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide  in  line,  and 
takes  the  post  of  the  captain  when  in  column.  At  parade,  before 
bringing  his  company  to  parade  rest,  he  steps  two  paces  to  the 
front  and  faces  to  the  left,  gives  his  commands  and  resumes  his 
post  on  the  right.  At  inspection,  when  ranks  are  open,  his  post 
is  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide. 


GENERAL  RULES  FOR  REVIEWS. 

2512.  Q.  What  points  will  the  adjutant  or  adjutant-general 
mark  for  the  purpose  of  review  ?  A.  Men  are  posted  or  points 
otherwise  marked  where  the  column  changes  direction,  in  such 
manner  that  the  right  flank  in  passing  shall  be  about  twelve 
paces  from  the  reviewing  officer.  A  point  is  also  marked  about 
fifty  paces  to  the  left  of  the  reviewing  officer,  to  indicate  where 
each  company  is  brought  to  the  carry  at  the  command  of  its  cap- 
tain. 

2513.  Q.  After  coming  to  a  carry  for  the  reviewing  officer, 
when  should  arms  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  ?  A.  After 
passing  fifty  paces  beyond  the  reviewing  officer. 

2514.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  reviewing  officer  and  all  those 
accompanying  him  with  regard  to  the  colors  ?  A.  They  should 
salute  the  colors  by  uncovering,  whether  the  color  salutes  or  not. 

2515.  Q.  Who  returns  the  salute  of  battalion  and  other  com- 
manders ?    A.  The  reviewing  officer  alone. 

2516.  Q.  Where  and  in  what  order  should  the  staff  of  the 
reviewing  officer  be  placed?  A.  In  single  rank,  six  paces  in 
rear  of  him,  in  the  following  order  from  right  to  left :  chief  of 
staff,  adjutant-general,  aids  ;  then  the  other  members  of  the  staff 
in  the  order  of  their  rank,  the  senior  on  the  right. 

2517.  Q.  What  position  should  officers  of  the  same  or  higher 
rank  and  distinguished  personages  occupy  ?  A.  On  the  left  of 
the  reviewing  officer. 

2518.  Q.  AVhen  should  commanders  of  brigades  and  divisions 
take  their  places  in  the  column  ?    A.  In  time  to  allow  the  com- 


DRILL  REGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY.      385 

manders  in  front  of  them  to  take  their  places  when  at  one  hun- 
dred yards  from  the  reviewing  officer. 

2519.  Q.  Should  the  commanders  of  brigades,  divisions,  and 
corps  draw  swords  when  passing  in  review  ?  A.  Yes  ;  they  and 
their  staff  officers  draw  swords  when  they  take  their  places  in 
column  before  passing  in  review,  and  return  them  immediately 
after  placing  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

2520.  Q.  Where  should  the  commander  of  a  corps,  division, 
brigade,  or  regiment,  with  his  staff,  place  themselves  when  turn- 
ing out  of  the  column  to  be  near  the  reviewing  officer  ?  A.  On 
the  right  of  the  commanders  already  there  ;  his  staff  will  arrange 
themselves  in  single  rank  on  the  right  of  the  staff  already  there. 

2521.  At  what  time  does  each  commander  leave  the  reviewing 
officer  ?  A.  When  his  rear  company  has  passed ;  he  salutes 
upon  leaving. 

2522.  Q.  When  the  reviewing  officer  is  not  in  front  or  rear  of 
a  brigade,  what  is  the  commander  permitted  to  do  regarding  the 
comfort  of  the  troops  ?  A.  He  may  cause  the  brigade  to  stand 
at  ease,  rest,  or  stack  arms  and  fall  out,  and  resume  attention  so 
as  not  to  interfere  with  the  ceremony. 

2523.  Q.  Are  the  commands  of  the  brigade  commander  re- 
peated ?    A.  Yes,  by  the  colonels. 

2524.  When  the  colonel  faces  the  line  to  give  commands,  what 
should  the  majors  do  ?  A.  They  should  face  at  the  same  time. 
All  such  commands  are  executed  when  repeated  by  the  majors. 
After  seeing  the  movement  executed  the  majors  resume  their 
front. 

2525.  Q.  If  the  command  be  Pi-esent  arms,  when  should  the 
field  and  staff  salute?  A.  The  battalion  staff  at  command  of 
the  major ;  the  colonel's  staff  at  command  of  the  colonel ;  the 
majors  and  colonel  when  they  resume  their  front. 

2526.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  bands  during  a  review? 
A.  The  band  of  each  regiment  plays  while  the  reviewing  officer 
is  passing  in  front  and  rear  of  the  regiment.  After  passing  the 
reviewing  officer,  it  turns  out  of  column  and  takes  post  in  front 
of  the  reviewing  officer,  continues  to  play  until  its  regiment  has 
passed,  then  ceases  playing  and  follows  in  rear  of  his  regiment ; 
the  band  of  the  next  following  regiment  then  commences.  While 
marching  in  review,  but  one  band  in  each  brigade  plays  at  a  time, 
and  but  one  band  at  a  time  when  within  one  hundred  paces  of 
the  reviewing  officer. 

2527.  Q.  Can  the  present  in  line  and  the  ride  around  the  line 
be  dispensed  with  at  review  ?  A.  Yes,  if  the  ground  be  unfavor- 
able or  other  conditions  arise  which  make  it  necessary  ;  in  which 
case  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer  may  be  on  the  flank  opposite 
the  usual  one,  and  the  troops  march  with  guide  left  instead  of 
right — officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  changing  flanks 
accordingly. 


286  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINEE. 

2528.  Q.  In  reviews  of  divisions  and  corps,  what  is  required  of 
the  battalions  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer  ?  A.  Each  bat- 
talion, after  its  rear  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer  fifty  paces, 
takes  the  double  time  for  one  hundred  paces,  so  as  not  to  inter- 
fere with  the  march  of  the  column  ;  they  then  return  to  camp  by 
the  most  practicable  route,  being  careful  not  to  interfere  with  the 
march  of  the  troops  in  rear  of  them. 

BATTALION  REVIEW. 

2529.  Q.  The  battalion  being  in  line  at  order  arms  for  review, 
what  commands  will  the  major  give  ?  A.  Prepare  for  review ; 
open  ranks,  march ;  front.  After  seeing  the  movement  executed 
ho  returns  to  his  position  in  front  of  the  battalion,  and  when  the 
reviewing  officer  moves  several  paces  towards  him  and  halts,  he 
faces  about  and  commands,  Carry  arms;  present  arms. 

2530.  Q.  After  the  reviewing  officer  acknowledges  the  pres- 
entation of  the  battalion,  what  are  the  duties  of  the  major  up  to 
the  point  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer  ?  A.  The  major 
faces  about,  brings  the  battalion  to  order  arms,  turns  again  to 
the  front,  sheathes  his  sword,  and  as  the  reviewing  officer  passes 
to  the  right  of  the  line,  joins  him,  salutes  and  takes  post  on  his 
right,  accompanying  him  around  the  battalion.  When  the  review- 
ing officer  leaves  the  right  of  the  line  to  return  to  his  post,  the 
major  takes  post  on  his  left,  accompanies  him  a  few  paces,  salutes, 
moves  directly  to  his  post,  faces  the  battalion,  draws  sword  and 
commands,  Close  ranks,  march;  companies  right,  march.  The 
column  being  formed,  he  commands,  Pass  in  review  ;  foi^ward, 
guide  right;  march.  He  takes  his  post  in  column  immediately 
after  the  second  change  of  direction.  He  salutes  the  reviewing 
officer  when  at  six  paces  from  him  and  returns  to  the  carry  at 
six  paces  beyond.  He  then  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  review- 
ing officer,  and  remains  there  until  the  rear  of  his  battalion  has 
passed.    He  then  rejoins  his  command. 

2531.  Q.  What  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  salute 
the  reviewing  officer,  and  what  salutes  will  the  latter  return  ? 
A.  All  officers,  the  non-commissioned  staff,  the  dnim-major,  and 
non-commissioned  officers  in  command  of  subdivisions  salute  the 
reviewing  officer ;  he  returns  the  salute  of  the  major  and  the 
color,  if  entitled  to  a  salute  from  it. 

2532.  Q.  When  should  the  band  cease  to  play  during  a  battalion 
review  ?  A.  When  the  column  has  completed  its  first  change  of 
direction  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer. 

2533.  Q.  In  the  event  of  the  battalion  being  reviewed  by  an 
inspector  junior  in  rank  to  the  commanding  officer,  what  is  done  ? 
A.  The  commanding  officer  will  receive  the  review  and  be  accom- 
panied by  the  inspector. 


DRILL   REGULATIONS — FOR  INFANTRY.  287 


REGIMENTAL  REVIEW. 

2534.  Q.  How  may  the  regiment  be  formed  for  review  ?  A.  In 
line,  in  line  of  platoon  columns  at  close  interval,  or  in  line  of 
masses. 

2535.  Q.  In  what  way  is  a  regimental  review  different  from  a 
battalion  review  ?  A.  If  formed  in  line,  it  is  conducted  on  the 
same  principles,  the  colonel  giving  commands  and  the  majors  of 
battalions  executing  them.  He  does  not  present  the  regiment 
until  the  reviewing  oflBcer  halts  some  thirty  paces  in  front  of  him. 
He  accompanies  the  reviewing  officer  and  his  staff  place  them- 
selves on  the  right  of  the  staff  of  the  reviewing  officer,  unless  the 
latter  advances  alone,  in  which  case  the  colonel  alone  accompanies 
him. 

2536.  Q.  What  positions  do  the  field  officers  occupy  in  the 
review  of  a  regiment  ?  A.  The  column  having  been  formed, 
each  major  takes  post  six  paces  in  front  of  his  staff,  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel six  paces  to  the  right  of  the  column  abreast  of  the 
major  of  the  first  battalion,  and  the  colonel  places  himself  twenty- 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  band  when  the  head  of  the  column  has 
made  its  second  change  of  direction.  The  majors  do  not  turn  out 
of  the  column  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer. 

2587.  Q.  What  modifications  of  the  rules  for  a  regimental 
review  in  line  are  required  for  a  review  in  line  of  platoon  col- 
umns ?  A.  Ranks  are  not  opened.  The  colonel  commands.  Pre- 
pare for  review,  and  faces  to  the  front.  When  the  reviewing  officer 
has  passed  around  the  regiment  the  colonel  commands.  Platoons 
right;  march.  The  column  having  been  formed,  the  colonel  com- 
mands, Pass  in  review ;  take  full  distance ;  guide  right ;  march. 
Each  company  moves  off  when  it  has  full  distance  from  the  pre- 
ceding one,  and  the  majors  enter  the  column  when  all  of  their 
companies  have  full  distance. 

2538.  Q.  How  is  the  review  conducted  in  line  of  masses? 
A.  The  same  as  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  except  that  to  form 
column  for  passing  in  review  the  colonel  commands,  Battalions, 
.  change  direction  hy  the  left  flank  ;  march. 


BRIGADE  REVIEW. 

2539.  Q.  How  is  a  brigade  formed  for  review  ?  A.  In  line  of 
masses  with  an  interval  of  sixty  paces  between'  regiments,  the 
brigade  commander  taking  post  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  line 
of  colonels. 

2540.  Q.  Should  the  colonels  accompany  the  reviewing  officer  ? 
A.  No  ;  they  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

2541.  Q.  By  what  means  is  the  column  formed  for  passing  in 
review  ?    A.  By  changing  direction  by  the  left  flank  by  battalions. 

2542.  Q.  In    passing  in    review,    where    should  the    ti^i^ade 


f^^^V.. 


288  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIN"ER. 

commander  be  ?  A.  The  brigade  commander  takes  post  twenty- 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  leading  colonel  when  at  one  hundred 
paces  from  the  reviewing  officer. 

2543.  Q.  What  officers  leave  the  column  to  place  themselves 
on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer  in  brigade  review  ?  A.  The 
brigade  commander  and  colonels. 

DIVISION  REVIEW. 

2544.  Q.  How  is  the  division  formed  for  review  ?  A.  In  one, 
two,  or  three  lines  of  masses. 

2545.  Q.  How  is  a  division  review  conducted  ?  A.  Upon  the  ar- 
rival of  the  reviewing  officer,  the  general  commanding  the  division 
joins  him  and  causes  attention  to  be  sounded,  which  is  taken  up 
in  the  right  brigade  of  the  first  line.  If  in  one  line,  the  review- 
ing officer  receives  the  salute  of  each  brigade  when  he  arrives  at 
its  right,  except  when  he  approaches  a  brigade  from  its  left  or 
front ;  in  that  case  he  receives  the  salute  as  prescribed  for  bri- 
gade review.  Each  brigade  commander  salutes,  facing  to  the 
front,  then  faces  his  brigade  and  brings  it  to  order  arms  and  re- 
mains at  his  post.  After  the  reviewing  officer  has  passed  around 
the  division,  the  commander  of  the  right  brigade  forms  it  in  col- 
umn, and  when  forward  is  sounded  gives  the  commands  for  pass- 
ing in  review.  Each  of  the  other  brigade  commanders  follows 
the  movements  of  the  first  brigade  at  a  distance  of  one  hundred 
paces  from  it. 


CORPS  REVIEW. 

2546.  Q.  How  is  the  corps  formed  for  review  ?  A.  In  one,  two, 
or  three  lines,  with  each  division  in  a  single  line  of  masses. 

2547.  Q.  What  modifications  of  the  rules  for  a  division  review 
are  necessary  for  that  of  a  corps  ?  A.  The  same  rules  apply,  ex- 
cept that  each  division  commander  accompanies  the  reviewing 
officer  while  passing  in  front  and  rear  of  his  division,  and  then 
remains  near  the  right  of  his  division.  The  artillery  of  the  corps 
is  reviewed  as  prescribed  in  the  Drill  Regulations  for  Artillery. 


BATTALION  INSPECTION. 

2548.  Q.  The  battalion  being  in  column  of  companies  at  full 
distance,  what  are  the  commands  of  the  major  and  how  is  the 
battalion  prepared  for  inspection?  A.  The  major  commands. 
Prepare  for  inspection;  march.  At  the  preparatory  command 
the  captains  command,  Open  ranks.  The  field  musicians  join 
their  companies  ;  the  drum-major  conducts  the  band  to  its  posi- 
tion in  rear  of  the  column,  if  not  already  there,  and  opens  ranks  ; 


DKILL  KEGULATIOKS — FOR  INFANTRY.       289 

the  staff  officers  form  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of  the  column 
fifteen  paces  in  front  of  the  leading  company,  the  adjutant  on  the 
right,,  the  others  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left ;  the  non- 
commissioned staff  form  in  similar  manner  three  paces  in  rear  of 
the  staff,  the  sergeant-major  on  the  right ;  the  color  guard,  in 
one  rank,  marches  to  the  front  and  takes  post  three  paces  in  rear 
of  the  centre  of  the  line  of  non-commissioned  staff ;  the  major 
takes  post  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  column  six  paces  in  front 
of  the  staff. 

2549.  Q.  When  the  field  and  staff  are  inspected,  what  command 
does  the  major  give  ?    A.  Rest. 

2550.  Q.  What  command  does  each  captain  give  as  the  inspec- 
tor approaches  him  ?    A.  Company  attention  ;  inspection  arms. 

2551.  Q.  What  command  does  the  captain  give  after  the  in- 
spection of  the  arms  and  ammunition  ?  A.  He  orders  the  ranks 
closed,  stacks  arms,  and  reopens  ranks,  then  comtnands.  Tin- 
sling  knapsacks;  open  knapsacks;  and  when  the  inspection  of 
them  is  completed,  closes  and  slings  knapsacks,  closes  ranks,  takes 
arms,  and  on  intimation  from  the  inspector  marches  the  company 
to  its  quarters. 

2552.  Q.  How  is  the  band  inspected  ?  A.  The  adjutant  com- 
mands. Inspection  instruments ;  and  each  man,  as  the  inspector 
approaches  him,  raises  his  instrument  in  front  of  the  body,  re- 
verses it  so  as  to  show  both  sides,  and  then  returns  it  to  its  former 
position. 

2553.  Q.  How  is  the  inspection  of  quarters  conducted?  A. 
The  men,  without  accoutrements,  stand  uncovered,  in  front  of 
their  respective  bunks  ;  in  camp  they  stand  covered,  without  ac- 
coutrements, in  front  of  their  tents  ;  the  senior  non-commissioned 
officer,  upon  the  approach  of  the  inspector,  commands.  Company 
(or  squad)  attention^  when  the  men  come  to  attention,  but  do 
not  salute. 

REGIMENTAL  INSPECTION. 

2554.  Q.  Wherein  differ  the  rules  for  the  inspection  of  a  regi- 
ment from  those  for  a  battalion  ?  A.  The  commands  and  means 
are  the  same  ;  but  the  staff  officers  of  the  colonel  form  as  the  bat- 
talion staff  fifteen  paces  in  front  of  the  major  of  the  first  battal- 
ion ;  the  colonel  is  opposite  the  centre  of  the  column,  six  paces 
in  front  of  his  staff,  the  lieutenant-colonel  four  paces  to  his  left. 

2555.  Q.  What  should  each  major  do  with  regard  to  the  com- 
fort of  the  men  under  him  while  on  review  ?  A.  As  soon  as  the 
inspector  leaves  it,  he  brings  his  battalion  to  a  rest. 

2556.  Q.  Who  accompanies  the  inspector  in  a  regimental  in- 
spection ?  A.  Each  major  with  his  staff  officers  accompanies  the 
inspector  through  his  battalion. 


290  THE   ARMY   OFFICEE^S   EXAMINER. 

MUSTER. 

2557.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  muster  of  the  troops  ?  A.  It  is  a 
proceeding  in  which  the  names  of  all  men  of  a  command  are 
called  from  a  roll  of  the  company  to  prepare  them  for  pay. 

2558.  Q.  What  ceremony  generally  precedes  muster  ?  A.  It  is 
preceded  by  an  inspection,  and  whenever  practicable,  by  a  re- 
view. 

2559.  Q.  How  is  the  muster  conducted  ?  A.  Being  in  column 
of  companies  at  open  ranks,  each  captain,  as  the  mustering  offi- 
cer approaches  him,  brings  his  company  to  right  shoulder  arms 
and  commands.  Attention  to  muster.  The  mustering  officer  or 
captain  then  calls  the  names  on  the  roll  ;  each  man,  as  his  name 
is  called,  answers  "  here,"  and  brings  his  piece  to  order  arms. 

ESCORT  OF  THE  COLOR. 

2560.  Q.  What  company  should  be  sent  to  escort  the  color  ? 
A.  Any  one  other  than  the  color  company. 

2561.  Q.  How  is  the  escort  formed?  A.  In  column  of  pla- 
toons, the  band  in  front,  the  color-bearer  between  the  platoons. 
Marching  without  music  to  the  colonel's  office  or  quarters,  it  is 
formed  in  line  facing  the  entrance,  and  halted,  with  the  band  on 
the  right,  the  color-bearer  in  the  line  of  file-closers. 

2562.  Q.  How  are  the  colors  obtained  from  the  house  ?  A. 
The  color-bearer,  preceded  by  the  first-lieutenant,  and  followed 
by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  then  goes  to  the  house  or  tent,  when 
the  colors  are  delivered  to  the  color-bearer.  On  coming  out  of 
the  quarters,  the  color-bearer,  followed  by  the  lieutenant  and 
sergeant,  halts  before  the  entrance,  facing  the  escort ;  the  lieu- 
tenant places  himself  on  the  right  and  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of 
the  color-bearer ;  the  escort  presents  arms,  and  the  field-music 
sounds  to  the  color. 

2563.  Q.  How  are  the  colors  delivered  to  the  regiment  ?  A. 
In  quick  time;  the  band  playing  the  march  of  the  escort  is  so 
conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at  fifty  paces  in  front  of 
the  right  of  the  regiment,  the  direction  of  the  march  shall  be 
parallel  to  its  front ;  when  the  color  arrives  opposite  its  place  in 
line,  the  escort  is  formed  in  line  to  the  left  and  halted  ;  the  color- 
bearer,  passing  between  the  platoons,  advances  and  halts  twelve 
paces  in  front  of  the  colonel  ;  the  colonel  faces  the  regiment, 
brings  it  to  a  present  arms,  resumes  his  front  and  salutes  ;  the 
field  music  sounds  to  the  color,  and  the  color-bearer  returns  the 
color  salute  ;  the  colonel  then  brings  the  regiment  to  a  carry, 
after  which  the  color-bearer  takes  his  post  with  the  color  com- 
pany. 

2564.  Q.  How  is  the  color  returned  to  the  colonel's  quarters  ? 
A.  It  is  escorted  from  the  parade-ground  of  the  color  company 
by  the  color-guard. 


DRILL  EEGULATIONS— FOR  INFANTRY.  291 


ESCORTS  OF  HONOR. 

3565.  Q.  What  are  escorts  of  honor  ?  A.  They  are  detailed  for 
the  purpose  of  receiving  and  escorting  personages  of  high  rank, 
civil  or  military. 

2566.  Q.  How  is  the  escort  of  honor  formed  ?  A.  In  line,  op- 
posite the  place  where  the  personage  presents  himself,  the  band 
on  the  flank  of  the  escort  toward  which  it  will  march.  After  re- 
ceiving the  personage  witli  the  honors  due,  the  escort  is  formed 
in  columns  of  companies,  platoons  or  fours,  the  personage  and 
his  staff  or  retinue  taking  position  in  rear  of  the  column. 

3567.  Q.  When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  considerable 
distance  from  the  point  where  the  personage  is  to  be  received, 
what  is  done  ?  A.  A  double  Hue  of  sentinels  is  posted  from  that 
point-  to  the  escort,  facing  inward  ;  the  sentinels  successively 
salute  as  he  passes,  and  are  then  relieved  and  join  the  escort ;  an 
officer  is  appointed  to  attend  him,  to  bear  such  communications 
as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  commander  of  the  escort. 

FUNERAL  ESCORTS. 

3568.  Q.  How  is  a  funeral  escort  formed?  A.  It  is  formed 
opposite  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the  deceased,  the  band  on  that 
flank  of  the  escort  toward  which  it  is  to  march.  After  the  coffin 
is  carried  to  that  flank  opposite  the  music,  the  escort  is  formed 
into  column  of  companies,  platoons,  or  fours.  If  the  escort  be 
small,  it  may  be  marched  in  line. 

2569.  Q.  How  is  the  funeral  procession  formed  ?  A.  In  the 
following  order  :  1,  Music  ;  3,  Escort ;  3,  Clergy  ;  4,  Coffin  and 
Pall-bearers  ;  5,  Mourners  ;  6,  Members  of  the  former  command 
of  the  deceased  ;  7,  Other  officers  and  enlisted  men  ;  8,  Distin- 
guished persons;  9,  Delegations;  10,  Societies;  11,  Civilians. 

3570.  Q.  What  are  the  ceremonies  of  the  escort  at  the  grave  ? 
A.  When  the  coffin  is  placed  over  the  grave,  the  escort  is  brought 
to  a  parade  rest,  and  when  the  funeral  exercises  are  completed 
and  the  coffin  lowered  into  the  grave,  the  commander  causes  the 
escort  to  resume  attention  and  fires  three  rounds  of  blank  car- 
tridges ;  a  trumpeter  then  sounds  taps. 

3571.  Q.  At  the  funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  enlisted  man, 
what  follows  the  hearse  ?  A.  His  horse,  in  mourning  capari- 
son. 


PART  VIII. 
HIPPOLOQY, 


Text-books-  \  ^i^^^yaram'^  "  Worses  and  Stables. 
' }  Dwyer'8  '*  Seats  and  Saddles." 


For  Second  Lieutenants  of  Cavalry— Nos.  2572-2975. 
For  First  Lieutenants  of  Cavalry— Nos.  2572-2975. 
For  Captains  of  the  Q.  M.  Deft.— Nos.  2572-3079. 


PAET  VIII. 

HIPPOLOQY. 


Horses  and  Stables, 
ventilation  and  construction  of  stables. 

2572.  Q.  Of  what  importance  is  pure  air  in  the  stable?  A. 
Pure  air  is  as  important  to  the  integrity  of  the  blood  as  whole- 
some food  to  the  maintenance  of  the  body. 

2573.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  circulation  of  the  blood.  A.  By 
each  contraction  or  beat  of  the  heart  bright  scarlet,  highly  vital- 
ized blood,  fresh  from  the  lungs,  is  forced  through  the  arteries  to 
all  parts  of  the  body.  The  arteries  dividing  and  subdividing  be- 
come smaller  and  smaller,  and  ultimately  terminate  in  very 
minute,  hair-like  tubes,  called  capillary  vessels  or  capillaries. 
These  vessels  abound  in  every  vascular  structure,  and  from  them 
each  structure  absorbs  those  special  nutrient  particles  which  are 
required  for  its  growth  or  repair.  In  the  capillaries  the  arterial 
or  outward-bound  system  of  the  circulation  ends.  In  these  same 
capillaries  the  venous  or  return  circulation  commences.  Into 
them  also  are  returned  the  waste  and  used-up  products  of  the 
system.  Reversing  the  previous  order,  the  capillary  veins  now 
enlarge  and  coalesce,  and  carry  back  to  the  heart  dark,  purple, 
venous  blood,  charged  with  waste  matters  of  the  tissues,  and 
among  these  with  carbonic-acid  gas.  The  impure  blood  thus 
brought  back  by  the  veins  is  carried  to  the  right  side  of  the  heart, 
and  thence  at  each  contraction  or  beat  of  that  organ  is  forced 
into  the  lungs.  The  lungs  contain  an  infinite  number  of  cells, 
which  through  the  bronchise  and  windpipe  communicate  with  the 
outer  air.  On  the  outside  of  these  cells  the  blood-vessels  are 
spread.  The  blood  thus  exposed  to  the  air  takes  up  from  it  a 
portion  of  its  oxygen,  and  gives  off  the  carbonic-acid  gas,  and 
various  volatile  organic  matters  which  have  accumulated  in  it,  as 
described  above.  Thus  freed  from  impurity,  and  containing  more 
oxygen,  the  blood  again  becomes  scarlet,  and  adapted  for  the 

295 


296  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

nutrition  of  the  body,  and  in  this  state  it  is  returned  to  the  left 
side  of  the  heart  for  renewed  circulation  through  the  frame. 

2574.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  breath  on  the  air?  A.  Air 
which  has  been  much  breathed  in  contains  too  little  oxygen  and 
too  much  carbonic-acid  gas,  and  is,  besides,  loaded  with  organic 
impurities  given  off  by  the  lungs  and  also  by  the  skin. 

2575.  Q.  Upon  what  does  the  condition  of  the  blood  and  health 
of  the  animal  depend  in  regard  to  the  air  supplied  to  it  ?  A.  It 
depends  very  much  on  the  purity  of  the  air  supplied  to  the  lungs. 

2576.  Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  the  air?  A.  Pure  air 
consists  of  about  four  fifths  of  nitrogen  and  one  fifth  oxj'gen, 
with  small  proportions  of  carbonic-acid  gas,  aqueous  vapor,  am- 
monia, ozone,  and  other  constituents. 

2577.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  the  oxygen,  nitrogen,  and  car- 
bonic-acid gas  on  the  circulation  of  the  blood  ?  A.  Oxygen  is  the 
chief  useful  part  of  air,  and  purifies  the  blood  ;  nitrogen  dilutes 
the  oxygen,  adding  to  its  volume  and  decreasing  its  activity.  Car- 
bonic-acid gas  is  unwholesome,  and  an  addition  of  five  per  cent  is 
sufficient  to  render  air  irrespirable. 

2578.  Q.  Why  is  it  necessary  to  provide  ventilation  in  a  closed 
stable  ?  A.  In  a  closed  stable  there  are  no  means  by  which  nature 
can  utilize  her  restorative  processes — hence  the  need  of  ventila- 
tion. It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  maintain  or  restore  the  proper 
constituents  of  the  air,  if  we  wish  for  health  for  ourselves  or  our 
horses. 

2579.  Q.  Explain  how  the  peculiar  properties,  or  rather  state 
of  the  gases,  which  respectively  constitute  foul  and  pure  air,  af- 
ford great  facilities  for  ventilation.  A.  Heat  causes  all  matters 
to  expand— more  or  less ;  but  gases  under  the  influence  of 
heat  expand  very  rapidly,  and  to  a  very  great  degree  ;  and  as 
they  expand  they  become  lighter.  As  a  general  rule,  foul  air  in 
a  stable  is  also  heated  air.  Besides  the  breath,  a  certain  amount 
of  heat  is  given  off  from  the  bodies  of  all  living  animals.  Car- 
bonic-acid gas,  though  at  equal  temperatures  heavier,  is  neverthe- 
less, when  heated,  as  it  is  when  first  given  off  from  the  lungs, 
lighter  than  pure  air ;  therefore  it  is  only  necessary  to  provide 
the  means  of  exit  in  the  highest  part  of  the  stable,  and  it  will  es- 
cape by  its  own  inherent  lightness. 

2580.  Q.  Supposing  that  there  are  no  means  of  escape  for  the 
foul  air  in  the  stable,  what  becomes  of  it  ?  A.  Since  there  are 
no  means  of  escape,  the  heated  foul  air  remains  in  the  upper  part 
of  the  stable  until  it  gradually  cools,  and  as  it  cools  descends 
and  becomes  mingled  with  the  air  of  the  stable,  and  is  in  due 
course  again  presented  to  the  nostrils  to  be  breathed. 

2581.  Q.  Supposing  the  foul  air  to  have  an  exit  above,  how  is 
the  vacancy  caused  by  its  escape  to  be  supplied  by  fresh  air  ?  A. 
If  there  are  no  apertures  except  those  above,  it  is  clear  that  by 
continued  ascent  and  escape  of  heated  foul  air  a  tendency  to  a 


HIPPOLOGY. 

vacuum  will  be  created  in  the  stable.  The  pressure  of  the  at- 
mosphere is  fourteen  pounds  per  square  inch  ;  hence,  whenever  a 
tendency  to  a  vacuum  has  been  created,  the  pressure  of  air  on 
the  outside  is  sufficient  to  overcome  the  upward  current  of  heated 
air,  and  cold,  fresh  air  will  rush  in  at  intervals  to  supply  the  va- 
cancy. When  the  vacancy  is  supplied,  the  upward  current  and 
escape  of  heated  air  will  be  resumed  until  another  tendency  to 
a  vacuum  is  created,  when  a  similar  indraught  will  occur  again. 
Hence  the  unpleasant  sensation  of  cold  draughts  coming  down 
suddenly  from  above. 

2582.  Q.  What  should  be  done  to  provide  against  any  sudden 
change  in  the  direction  of  the  current  of  foul  air  ?  A.  By  means 
of  another  and  lower  series  of  apertures,  admit  a  certain  propor- 
tion of  fresh  air  sufficient  to  maintain  the  proper  direction  of  the 
current. 

2583.  Q.  Is  it  necessary  to  make 'the  apertures  for  the  admis- 
sion of  fresh  air  as  large  as  those  for  the  escape  of  the  foul  air  ? 
A.  No  ;  because  if  the  upper  apertures  are  properly  constructed 
a  considerable  proportion  of  air  comes  in  through  the  windows 
and  under  the  doors,  even  though  closed. 

2584.  Q.  What  is  the  most  difficult  part  of  ventilation  ?  A.  It 
consists  in  so  arranging  the  apertures  for  the  admission  of  fresh 
air  without  causing  an  unpleasant  cold  draught  in  some  portion 
of  the  stable. 

2585.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  cold  or  cold  draughts  on  horses  ? 
A;  Tlieir  food  goes  less  far,  their  coats  become  less  sleek,  and 
the  highest  development  of  condition  cannot  be  obtained  when 
the  animals  are  subjected  to  such  discomforts. 

2586.  Q.  What  is  the  amount  of  cubical  air-space  required  by 
horses  in  stables  ?  A.  The  minimum  quantity  of  fresh  air  required 
by  horses  in  stables  has  not  yet  been  definitely  ascertained,  but  it 
is  believed  that  with  good  ventilation,  drainage,  paving,  light 
and  cleanliness,  1200  cubic  ft.,  with  a  ground  area  of  about  87 
feet  per  horse,  will  be  sufficient,  tlH)ugh  probably  theminimum 
required,  for  the  maintenance  of  health. 

2587.  Q.  What  circumstances  modify  the  amount  of  cubical 
air-space  required  by  horses  in  stables  ?  A.  Since  the  horse  is  not 
fed  on  animal  food,  the  emanations  given  off  from  his  body  are 
less  noxious  than  those  proceeding  from  human  beings ;  and,  as 
he  is  far  less  susceptible  of  injury  from  draughts  or  cold  than 
man,  it  is  possible  to  give  to  stables  a  greater  degree  of  ventila- 
tion than  would  be  tolerable  in  a  room  ;  and,  lastly  and  chiefly, 
the  horse  cannot,  as  men  too  often  do,  close  the  means  of  ventila- 
tion. 

2588.  Q.  In  the  proper  construction  of  stables,  what  is  the  real 
difficulty  as  regards  proper  ventilation  ?  A.  To  admit  fresh  air 
in  sufficient  quantities  to  maintain  the  purity  of  the  stable,  with- 
out causing  in  some  part  or  other  a  sensible  and  inconvenient 


'298 

draught.  The  need  of  draught  decreases  in  proportion  as  the 
air  has  a  less  distance  to  travel  before  it  is  presented  to  the  nos- 
trils of  the  horse. 

2589.  Q.  When  practicable,  where  should  windows  be  placed 
in  stables  ?  A.  Along  the  whole  length  of  the  stable,  above  the 
head  of  each  horse. 

2590.  Q.  What  should  be  the  dimensions  of  each  window  ?  A. 
Two  feet  six  inches  by  three  feet. 

2591.  Q.  In  a  brick  stable  what  contrivance  should  be  provided 
for  admitting  fresh  air  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  close  the 
windows  ?  A.  A  row  of  air-bricks  should  be  placed  immediately 
above  the  windows  on  both  sides,  and  running  the  whole  length 
of  the  stable.  The  air  entering  through  these  numerous  but 
minute  apertures  will  be  considerable,  but  it  can  never  amount  to 
an  excessive  draught.  It  will, be  sufficient  at  most  times  to  main- 
tain the  upward  current  of  the  air,*  and  prevent  an  excessive  down- 
cast current  from  the  roof  apertures. 

2592.  Q.  How  is  a  current  of  fresh  air  to  be  supplied  to  the 
horse  while  lying  down  in  the  stall  ?  A.  By  means  of  a  line  of 
air-bricks  placed  fourteen  inches  above  the  floor  of  the  stable, 
and  above  the  bedding,  a  scarcely  perceptible  stream  of  fresh  air 
will  be  supplied  almost  directly  to  the  horse's  nostrils  when  he  is 
lying  down.  The  air  entering  at  these  low  points  is  also  of  great 
use  in  keeping  in  motion  the  air  in  the  lower  part  of  the  stable, 
where  it  is  otherwise  especially  apt  to  become  stagnant. 

2593.  Q.  Of  what  use  are  louvre-boards  in  stables  ?  A.  They 
are  a  ready  means  of  affording  exit  for  foul  air,  and  no  construc- 
tion offers  so  great  facilities  for  doing  this  as  an  open  roof  with 
louvre-boards  running  the  whole  length  of  the  stable. 

2594.  Q.  In  .stables  in  which  the  horses  stand  ki  double  row 
what  should  be  the  depth  of  the  louvre,  and  about  how  much  ven- 
tilating outlet  per  horse  will  it  afford  ?  A.  The  depth  between 
the  louvres  should  be  sixteen  inches,  which  will  afford  a  ventilat- 
ing outlet  of  about  four  feet* per  horse. 

2595.  Q.  What  should  be  the  depth  of  the  louvre  in  stables 
where  horses  stand  in  a  single  row  ?  A.  The  depth  may  be  re- 
duced one  half  of  that  when  the  horses  are  in  double  row,  or 
eight  inches. 

2596.  Q.  What  is  the  objection  urged  against  open  roofs  ?  A. 
Open  roofs,  notwithstanding  the  great  facilities  they  afford  for 
ventilation,  are  often  objected  to,  because  the  absence  of  ceiling 
generally  implied  in  the  term  "open  roof"  is  apt  to  render  the 
stable  unduly  hot  in  summer,  and  unduly  cold  in  winter,  especially 
at  night. 

2597.  Q.  How  may  the  objections  against  "open  roofs"  be 
obviated  ?  A.  By  putting  a  ceiling  on  the  roof,  but  at  a  distance 
of  twelve  inches  from  it.  The  current  of  air  between  the  ceiling 
and  the  roof  will  keep  the  stable  cool  in  summer,  whilst  the  dis- 


HIPPOLOGY. 

tance  between  the  ceiling  and  the  roof  will  prevent  the  cold  from 
striking  through  in  winter  or  at  night.  Or,  the  stable  may  be 
ceiled  in  the  ordinary  manner,  with  the  exception  of  an  opening 
of  a  yard  wide  in  the  middle,  along  the  whole  length  of  the  stable. 

2598.  Q.  How  would  you  ventilate  a  stable  with  a  loft  or  rooms 
over  it  ?  A.  Where  louvre-boards  cannot  be  used,  there  should 
be  one  air-shaft  twenty-four  inches  in  diameter,  lined  with  zinc, 
for  every  two  horses,  and  running  through  the  roof  into  the  ex- 
ternal air.  The  openings  into  the  air  should  be  protected  by 
small  louvre-boards  or  cowls.  The  position  of  the  air-shafts  will 
depend  largely  on  the  use  made  of  the  rooms  above.  If  the  loft 
is  used  to  store  forage,  it  should  have  no  connection  with  the  body 
of  the  stable;  otherwise  the  forage  will  become  more  or  less 
tainted,  and  unfit  for  food.  Each  air-shaft  should  be  provided 
with  a  board  placed  about  six  inches  below  the  bottom  of  it,  to 
break  or  diffuse  any  occasional  downcast  current. 

2599.  Q,  What  are  the  requisites  of  a  good  kind  of  paving  for 
stables  ?  A.  A  really  good  paving  must  be  non-absorbent,  water- 
tight, easily  cleaned,  durable,  and  not  slippery. 

2600.  Q.  Discuss  briefly  the  different  paving  materials  suitable 
for  stables.  A.  Square-cut  granite  blocks  are  very  durable,  can 
be  roughened  to  prevent  slipping,  as  often  as  may  be  neces- 
sary, and  are  easily  kept  cleaned.  Hard-burnt  bricks,  while 
cheaper  than  granite  blocks,  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  baking 
the  bricks  equally  hard  throughout,  wear  rapidly  into  holes.  To 
diminish  slipperiness,  the  bricks  are  indented  with  transverse  and 
longitudinal  channels.  Such  paving  is  not  easily  kept  clean,  the 
urine  and  debris  of  the  dung  lodging  in  the  transverse  channels. 
It  is  better  to  have  only  longitudinal  channels  about  one  and  one 
quarter  indies  in  width,  and  three  eighths  of  an  inch  deep.  These 
will  give  sufficient  foothold ;  they  can  be  kept  perfectly  clean, 
and  drain  every  part  of  the  stall.  The  channel  is  formed  by 
bevelling  off  the  long  sides  of  the  brick,  and  should  be  set  together 
in  cement,  which  will  make  the  channel  water-tight.  The  bricks 
should  be  of  the  very  best  quality.  Granitoid,  a  material  made 
of  the  best  Portland  cement,  and  crushed  granite,  in  proper  pro- 
portions, on  a  foundation  of  four  to  five  inches  of  concrete  laid 
in  the  best  grade  of  Louisville  cement,  and  whose  upper  surface 
is  locked  and  finished  with  a  smooth  finish  of  Portland  cement 
and  granite  flour,  makes  a  very  durable,  non-absorbent,-  water- 
tight, and  altogether  very  satis fac-tory  and  comparatively  cheap 
pavement,  and  is  now  being  used  in  several  modern  stables  lately 
constructed  at  military  posts. 

2601.  Q.  On  what  kind  of  bed  or  foundation  .should  paving  be 
laid  ?    A.  All  paving  requires  to  be  laid  on  a  substantial  bed 
concrete  six  inches  thick,  and  the  concrete  itself  should  ^^^j^^^^^J^  ^ 
bed  of  broken  stones  twelve  inches  deep.  ^^^^^'"'^i         -f 

2602.  Q,  How  is  the  paving  to  be  kept  fresh  smdjffmr^^^'  **.V  ■ 


K..^^i 


300  THE   ARMY  OFFICER*S  EXAM:i]S"ER. 

All  the  bedding  must  be  removed  from  the  stable  at  the  morning 
stable  hour,  and  turned  outside.  The  paving  must  then  be  swept 
thoroughly  clean,  and  left  to  the  drying  and  purifying  influence 
of  the  air  until  the  horses  are  dressed,  when  they  may  be  bedded 
down.  Every  door  and  window  in  the  stable  should  be  set  open 
whilst  the  horses  are  out. 

2603.  Q.  What  are  litter-sheds,  and  what  are  they  used  for  ? 
A.  Litter-sheds  are  open  sheds,  apart  from  and  convenient  to 
the  stable,  in  which  the  litter  is  spread  in  inclement  weather  to 
get  a  thorough  airing.  In  fine  weather  the  litter  should  be  spread 
out  in  the  open,  when  it  w'ill,  if  turned  over  twice  during  the 
morning,  get  thoroughly  ventilated  and  dried. 

2604.  Q.  How  high  above  the  surrounding  ground  should  the 
floor  of  a  new  stable  be  placed,  and  why  ?  A.  The  floor  of  a  new 
stable  should  be  made  {at  least)  eighteen  inches  higher  than  the 
ground  outside.  This  facilitates  natural  and  surface  drainage, 
and  in  some  degree  secures  the  stable  from  damp,  partly  on  ac- 
count of  the  tendency  of  new  floors  to  sink,  and  still  more  on 
account  of  the  probability  of  the  soil  outside  becoming  higher 
from  constant  gravelling  and  repairs. 

2605.  What  kind  of  drains  are  best  for  stables  ?  A.  Surface 
drains  answer  best  for  stables,  except  where  concrete  or  bricks 
with  longitudinal  channels  are  used  ;  a  drain  should  be  provided 
for  the  lower  half  of  each  stall,  running  down  the  middle  of  it, 
and  connected  with  a  drain  passing  behind  the  line  of  the  stalls. 
The  latter  drain  should  run  without  any  curve  or  angle  to  the 
outside  of  the  stable,  and  should  be  continued  about  ten  feet 
further  as  a  surface  drain,  after  w^hich  it  may,  if  thought  desir- 
able, be  discharged  into  an  underground  drain. 

2606.  Q.  Where  open  drains  are  provided  in  stables  paved  with 
brick,  cement,  or  other  material,  what  slope  should  be  given  to 
them  ?  A.  For  the  drain  in  the  stall  a  fall  of  one  inch  in  thirty 
will  be  required,  but  for  the  main  drain  in  rear  of  the  stall  a  fall 
of  one  inch  in  sixty  wall  be  sufficient.  At  its  starting-point  the 
level  of  the  drain  should  be  very  little  below  the  surface  of 
the  floor,  but  its  depth,  in  order  to  give  an  easy  flow  to  the  urine, 
etc.,  may  increase  gradually  towards  the  outfall.  In  long  stables 
undue  depth  of  the  main  drain  may  be  avoided,  by  making  it  fall 
from  the  centre  to  both  ends  of  the  stable. 

2607.  Q.  How  should  the  ground  immediately  around  the 
stable  be  drained  ?  A.  Around  the  whole  exterior  of  the  stable,  at 
a  distance  of  sixteen  feet  from  it,  a  surface  drain  should  be  pro- 
vided. The  intervening  space  should  be  paved  with  a  gentle 
slope  from  the  stable  towards  the  drain.  The  pavement  will  be 
useful  in  throwing  off  the  rain,  which  might  otherwise  sink  into 
the  foundations,  and  it  will  afford  a  convenient  dry  place  for 
airing  the  bedding  in  fine  weather. 

2608.  Q.  What  are  the  objections  to  underground  drains  in 


HIPPOLOGY.  301 

Stables  ?  A.  They  require  an  amount  of  water  which  is  not 
always  available  ;  hence  the  drain  is  apt  'to  choke  up  with  the 
debris  of  the  dung  and  bedding,  and  in  general  is  little  better 
than  a  cesspool.  Where  underground  drains  are  used  their 
openings  into  the  stable  should  be  carefully  trapped. 

2609.  Q.  What  slope,  if  any,  should  be  given  to  the  floors  of 
stalls?  A.  Horses  stand  most  comfortably  on  a  perfect  level; 
and  any  slope  more  than  is  absolutely  necessary  for  drainage 
purposes  is  decidedly  objectionable,  in  that  it  throws  an  undue 
stress  on  the  hind  quarters,  and  also  on  the  flexor  tendons  of  the 
fore  legs  by  reason  of  tlie  toe  being  more  elevated  than  the  heel. 

2610.  Q.  What  slope  should  be  given  to  floors  of  stalls  which 
are  provided  with  underground  drains  in  the  centre?  A.  The 
floor  should  be  made  to  slope  from  all  four  sides  to  the  centre, 
and  the  horse  will  practically  stand  on  a  level. 

2611.  Q.  What  slope  should  be  given  to  floors  of  stalls  which 
are  provided  with  surface  drains?  A.  The  upper  third  of  the 
stall  may  be  level,  whilst  the  rear  part  will  require  a  fall  of  one 
in  eighty  towards  the  main  drain.  The  floor  should  also  be  made 
to  slope  in  the  rate  of  one  in  forty  from  both  sides  of  the  parti- 
tions towards  the  central  drain.  When  cement  or  bricks  with 
longitudinal  channels  are  used,  the  slope  from  the  sides  to  the 
centre  of  the  stall  will  not  be  needed. 

2612.  Q.  What  are  the  requisites  of  a  good  site  for  stables? 
why  ?  A.  The  well-bred  horse  is  a  native  of  a  dry  climate,  and 
loves  dryness.  In  damp  he  soon  loses  all  life  and  spirits,  and 
becomes  debilitated.  Disea^^e  of  any  sort  is  very  apt  to  super- 
vene on  debility  ;  hence  the  site  of  every  stable  should  be  deeply, 
thoroughly  drained.  The  soil  selected  should,  if  possible,  be 
gravel.  The  situation  should  be  moderately  high,  open,  and  with 
facilities  for  natural  drainage.     Bleak  situations  are  not  desirable. 

2613.  Q.  Which  is  the  most  desirable  aspect  for  stables?  why  ? 
A.  In  stables  with  windows  on  both  sides  east  and  west  aspect 
will,  as  a  general  rule,  be  found  most  advantageous.  The  one 
side  will  have  the  morning,  the  other  the  afternoon,  sun.  There 
should  be  a  door  at  each  end  or  in  the  middle  on  each  side,  as 
may  be  most  convenient  to  the  particular  locality.  In  long  stables 
it  is  desirable  to  have  doors  at  the  ends  and  on  both  sides. 

2614.  Q.  Discuss  briefly  the  subject  of  walls  and  foundations 
of  stables.  A.  The  thickness  of  the  walls  will  be  governed 
entirely  by  the  material  used  in  construction,  the  temperature 
required,  and  the  span  and  weight  of  the  roof.  To  maintain  an 
even  temperature  in  the  stable,  the  walls  must  be  thick,  and  should 
be  plastered  on  the  inside  ;  but,  except  for  such  special  purpose, 
nothing  answers  so  well  for  the  inside  of  the  stable  as  glazed 
bricks  of  white  or  any  neutral  tint.  If  they  cannot  be  procured, 
the  inside  walls  should  be  well  pointed  and  whitewashed.  In  the 
ordinary  plan  of  rectangular  stable  with  a  broad  passage  down 


302  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

the  centre,  the  walls  will  need  to  be  at  least  fourteen  inches  thick, 
if  built  of  brick,  on  account  of  the  wide  span  and  weight  of  tlie 
roof.  To  prevent  the  dampness  from  rising  up  the  wall  by  capil- 
lary attraction,  the  foundations  should  be  laid  on  slate,  or  on  two 
courses  of  hard  brick  set  in  cement,  or  on  asphalt. 


STABLE  FITTINGS. 

2615.  Q.  Discuss  the  subject  of  the  size  of  stalls  and  partitions. 
A.  For  stalls  divided  by  partitions  a  width  of  six  feet  is  desirable 
for  horses  of  ordinary  size.  The  length  of  the  partition  should  be 
ten  feet  or  preferably  ten  feet  six  inches,  exclusive  of  heel  post. 
The  heel  post,  into  which  the  partition  is  inserted,  should  be 
rounded,  so  as  to  be  as  little  likely  as  possible  to  injure  the  horse 
if  he  kicks  against  it.  A  height  of  seven  feet  and  a  half  should 
be  given  to  the  upper  end  of  the  partition,  in  order  to  prevent  the 
horses  from  biting  each  other  ;  whilst  five  and  one  half  feet  will 
be  suflQcient  for  the  remainder.  To  permit  the  horses  to  see  each 
other,  and  to  impede  the  current  of  air  through  the  stable  as  little 
as  possible,  the  extra  height  of  the  upper  end  should  be  made  of 
open  iron- work,  of  any  ornamental  pattern  ;  straight  iron  railings 
do  not  answer,  as  horses  are  apt  to  catch  them  with  their  teeth. 
The  boarding  of  the  partition  should  not  be  continued  within  nine 
inches  of  the  wall.  Tliis  open  space  will  act  beneficially  by  allow- 
ing the  air  to  circulate  freely  along  the  back  wall  of  the  stable. 
With  a  like  view  to  ventilation,  and  also  in  order  to  preserve  the 
woodwork  from  the  injurious  effect  of  damp,  an  interval  of  two 
inches  should  be  left  between  the  bottom  partition  and  the  floor 
of  the  stable.  The  partition  boards  should  be  one  and  one  quar- 
ter inches  thick,  the  kind  of  lumber  employed  depending  entirely 
on  the  cost  of  construction.  The  boards  should  be  placed  longi- 
tudinally, to  decrease  the  liability  to  splinter. 

2616.  Q.  What  should  be  the  dimensions  and  how  should  loose 
boxes  for  sick  horses  be  arranged  ?  A.  Twelve  feet  by  fourteen, 
with  a  height  of  twelve  feet,  is  sufficient  dimensions  for  loose 
boxes.  They  should  be  provided  with  a  staple  fixed  in  the  wall 
about  two  feet  six  inches  from  the  ground,  on  which  a  pail  may 
be  hung,  as  sick  horses  carry  their  heads  low  and  always  prefer 
to  feed  near  the  ground.  The  door  should  preferably  open  out- 
wards, and  be  divided  into  two  parts  ;  the  lower  part  not  exceed- 
ing three  feet  six  inches  in  height,  to  enable  the  horse  to  hang  his 
head  over  it,  and  enjoy  the  fresh  air  coming  through  the  main 
passage  of  the  stable.  Where  traverse  doors  are  used,  three  bars 
should  be  provided  for  the  same  purpose. 

2617.  Q.  Describe  the  best  form  of  latches  for  use  on  stable- 
doors.  A.  The  best  latches  are  those  which  are  countersunk 
and  mortised  into  the  doors.     While  more  expensive,  they  are 


HIPPOLOGY.  303 

safer  than  the  ordinary  latch,  in  that  the  chance  ot  catching  on 
them  is  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

2618.  Q.  What  is  a  better  substitute  for  latches  ?  A.  Slides  or 
bolts,  if  countersunk  and  furnished  with  a  flushing  bolt,  are  in 
some  respects  preferable  to  the  best  latches. 

2619.  Q.  What  is  the  best  form  of  hinge  for  hanging  stable- 
doors  ?  A.  The  only  really  serviceable  hinges  for  large  doors  are 
those  of  the  old-fashioned  T-pattern.  Doors  on  such  hinges  will 
generally  hang  true  for  years,  whilst  the  hinge  itself  adds  to  the 
strength  of  the  door  by  bracing  and  binding  it  together. 

2620.  Q.  What  are  collar  ropes  or  chains  and  logs  ?  A.  They 
are  contrivances  used  to  fasten  horses  in  stables  ;  and  consist  of 
a  leather  collar,  a  rope  or  chain  attached  to  the  collar,  and  run- 
ning through  a  good-sized  ring  fastened  to  the  manger,  carrying 
at  its  other  end  a  log  heavy  enough  to  keep  the  rope  or  chain 
taut,  whenever  the  horse  moves  back  beyond  a  certain  distance. 

2621.  Q.  What  are  collar  ropes  or  chains  and  logs  used  for  ? 
A.  They  are  intended  to  prevent  accidents  to  the  horse,  such  as 
getting  the  foot  or  leg  caught  in  the  halter  strap,  and  casting  in 
the  stall. 

2622.  Q.  How  may  the  horse  be  relieved  of  the  weight  of  the 
log,  when  collar  ropes  or  chains  and  logs  are  used  ?  A.  By  plac- 
ing a  large  ring  or  T  on  the  rope  immediately  above  the  manger 
ring. 

2623.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  length  for  a  collar  rope  or  chain 
used  with  a  log  ?  A.  The  rope  should  be  just  long  enough  to  allow 
the  horse  to  lie  down  comfortably.  Any  greater  length  is  objec- 
tionable. As  an  ordinary  rule,  the  log  should  just  reach  the 
ground  when  the  horse  is  standing  near  his  manger.  If  longer 
than  this,  the  rope  or  chain  will  become  slack  in  the  portion  be- 
tween the  collar  and  manger,  and  then  the  horse  may  get  his  foot 
over  it.  If  shorter  it  will  interfere  with  the  convenience  of  the 
animal  in  lying  down. 

2624.  Q.  From  what  does  casting  in  the  stall  generally  arise  ? 
A.  Casting  in  the  stall  generally  arises  from  the  animal  getting 
his  legs  entangled  in  the  rope  or  halter  strap;  and  when  the 
length  of  the  rope  is  properly  adjusted  and  the  log  used,  this 
accident  will  rarely  occur.  It  occasionally  arises  from  the  horse 
endeavoring  to  turn  or  roll  in  his  stall. 

2625.  Q.  In  what  manner  can  a  horse  which  habitually  breaks 
or  slips  the  halter  be  secured  ?  A.  Such  an  animal  may  be  effec- 
tually secured  by  a  strap  buckled  round  one  of  the  fore  fetlocks 
and  attached  to  a  peg  driven  fast  into  the  ground.  The  strap 
should  be  about  twelve  inches  long.  The  animal  may  resist  at 
first,  but  will  soon  find  it  useless  to  struggle,  and  give  up  with  a 
good  grace  the  attempt  at  getting  loose. 

2626.  Q.  Of  what  use. are  muzzles  in  stable  management?  A. 
They  are  contrivances  made  of  wire  and  leather  to  be  drawn  over 


304 

the  muzzles  of  horses  known  to  be  greedy  feeders,  to  prevent 
them  from  eating  the  litter  of  their  stalls.  They  should  iu  no 
case  interfere  with  the  breathing  of  the  horse. 

2627.  Q.  Describe  what  a  good  manger  should  be.  A.  A  good 
manger  should  be  sufficiently  deep  to  contain  the  full  allowance 
of  feed,  and  be  provided  with  a  slight  lip  on  the  inside,  so  as  to 
prevent  the  horse  from  spilling  the  grain,  which  he  is  very  apt  to 
do.  It  should  be  free  of  corners  or  angles  in  which  the  grain  can 
lodge,  and  so  placed  that  it  can  be  easily  kept  clean  and  sweet. 
The  material  should  be  non-absorbent,  the  cost  largely  aflPecting 
dts  character.  Iron  lined  with  china  is  perhaps  the  best;  slabs  of 
glazed  fire-brick  answer  well.  Iron  mangers  are  largely  used, 
and  answer  exceedingly  well  in  barrack  stables. 

2628.  Q.  What  are  the  relative  merits  of  low  hay-racks  and 
those  placed  above  the  horse's  head  ?  A.  The  low  rack,  while  it 
enables  a  horse  to  gather  its  food  in  its  natural  position,  is  more 
or  less  dangerous  in  that  the  horse  frequently  jumps  into  it  and  is 
in  position  to  be  seriously  injured — which  can  never  be  the  case 
with  a  rack  placed  above  his  head.  Where  low  racks  are  used 
they  should  be  made  shallow,  and  without  any  projecting  rim  on 
the  inside  of  the  upper  bar.  Where  the  high  rack  is  used  there 
should  be  no  communication  between  it  and  the  loft. 

2629.  Q.  What  is  the  objection  to  storing  forage  in  stables  ? 
A.  Unless  the  room  or  loft  in  which  the  forage  is  stored  be  free 
from  communication  with  the  rest  of  the  stable,  the  emanations 
from  the  stable  will  more  or  less  taint  the  forage. 

2630.  Q.  What  is  the  value  of  ample  light  in  the  stable?  A. 
Ample  light  is  essential  to  the  health  of  the  eyes.  Light  is  food 
and  exercise  to  them.  Without  ample  light  the  eyes  cannot  be 
strong.  When  altogether  deprived  of  liglit  the  optic  nerve  be- 
comes paralyzed,  and  blindness  is  the  result.  Again,  ample  light 
is  essential  to  the  cleanliness  of  the  stable.  A  dark  stable  is 
usually  more  or  less  dirty,  and  a  dirty  stable  must  be  unhealthy. 
Both  eyes  and  lungs  are  especially  liable  to  injury  from  gases 
produced  by  impurity. 

2631.  Q.  Describe  and  discuss  the  four  kinds  of  windows 
generally  used  in  stables.  A.  1st.  The  ordinary  sash  windows. 
They  are  objectionable  from  the  fact  that  a  direct  draught  may 
come  on  the  horses,  and  on  that  account  are  frequently  closed  at 
night  in  cold  and  windy  weather.  A  couple  of  panes  of  per- 
forated glass  are  useful  in  such  windows.  2d.  Windows  which 
turn  on  a  pivot  in  the  centre.  These  may  be  set  open  to  any 
required  degree.  They  answer  well  enough  where  many  of  them 
are  used  ;  but  they  are  still  open  to  the  objection  of  causing 
direct  draught  on  the  horse.  3d,  Windows  which  do  not  open 
wholly,  but  are  furnished  with  glass  louvres.  They  are  objection- 
able, inasmuch  as  they  are  notcalculated  to  admit  a  sufficient 
amount  of  air.    4th.  Windows  working  on  hinges  at  the  bottom, 


HIPPOLOGY.  305 

which  may  beopened  to  any  required  degree.  They  offer  every 
advantage  They  afford  ample  ventilation,  and  yet  do  not  throw 
direct  draught  on  the  horses.  They  should  be  blocked,  so  as  to 
prevent  their  closing  within  six  inches  at  the  top. 


WATERING  AND  FEEDING. 

2633.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  course  of  the  food  from  its 
reception  by  the  mouth  to  its  passage  into  the  stomach.  A.  The 
food  gathered  by  the  lips  and  front  teeth  is  worked  about  by  the* 
tongue  and  cheeks,  and  is  carried  by  their  action  to  the  back  teeth 
or  grinders,  which  by  a  lateral  and  slightly  rotatory  motion  of 
the  lower  jaw  reduce  it  to  pulp,  at  the  same  time  being  thoroughly 
mixed  with  the  saliva  and  mucous  secretions  of  the  glands  of  the 
mouth.  Saliva  is  essential  to  the  due  preparation  of  the  food  for 
digestion.  When  it  is  sufficiently  prepared,  it  is  passed  on  in  por- 
tions by  the  action  of  the  muscles  of  the  tongue  to  the  gullet,  and 
thence  to  the  stomach. 

2633.  Q.  Describe  the  structure  of  the  stomach.  A.  The 
stomach  is  a  pouch  lined  for  about  one  third  of  its  surface  with  a 
dense  cuticular  membrane,  and  the  remaining  two  thirds  is  lined 
with  a  soft  reddish  villous  mucous  membrane.  Its  muscular  coat 
is  furnished  with  three  layers  of  fibres,  namely,  the  circular, 
longitudinal,  and  oblique. 

2634.  Q.  Describe  the  action  of  the  stomach  on  the  fooil. 
A.  By  the  action  of  the  three  series  of  muscles  of  the  muscular 
coat  the  food  is  rotated  over  the  cuticular  and  villous  linings  of 
the  stomach  ;  whilst  by  the  secretions  of  the  softer  or  villous 
lining  it  is  supplied  with  a  fluid  called  gastric  juice,  which  is 
essential  to  the  further  process  of  digestion.  The  food  at  this 
stage  is  called  chyme. 

2635.  Q.  What  is  the  action  of  the  muscular  coat  of  the 
stomach  due  to?  A.  Nervous  influence  produced  by  the  pres- 
ence of  the  food.  When  the  stomach  is  quite  empty  the  rotary 
motion  ceases  and  the  pouch  is  then  in  a  state  of  contraction  and 
quiescence. 

2636.  Q.  Describe  the  further  preparation  of  the  food  after  it 
leaves  the  stomach.  A.  During  the  successive  rotations  of  the 
stomach,  such  portions  of  the  food  as  have  become  sufficiently 
soluble,  are  gradually  pressed  forward  and  passed  to  the  small 
intestines.  In  them  it  is  further  mixed  with  the  secretions  of  the 
pancreas,  liver,  and  intestinal  glands.  The  admixture  of  these 
juices  completes  the  preparation  of  the  food,  and  it  is  now  ready 
for  absorption  into  the  system. 

2637.  Q.  Describe  the  manner  in  which  the  absorption  of  the 
food  is  effected.  A.  The  abdominal  veins  and  the  lacteal  absorb- 
ent vessels  of  the  intestinal  linings  take  up  from  the  food  its 


306  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

nutritive  parts,  which  in  this  state  are  called  chyle.  The  chyle 
is  carried  by  the  absorbent  vessels  through  the  mesenteric  glands 
into  the  thoracic  duct,  and  by  it  is  ultimately  discharged  into  one 
large  blood-vessel  on  the  left  side  of  the  neck  near  the  heart.  It 
is  by  this  constant  admixture  of  material  taken  from  the  food  by 
the  absorbents  that  the  necessary  supply  of  blood  is  maintained. 
From  the  blood  thus  maintained  by  the  food  are  furnished  the 
materials  required  for  the  maintenance  and  renewal  of  the  body. 
The  food  supplies  the  blood,  which  in  turn  supplies  the  body. 

2638.  Q.  After  the  veins  and  absorbents  of  the  small  intes- 
tines have  taken  up  from  the  food  its  nutritive  parts,   what 

•becomes  of  the  refuse  ?  A.  The  refuse  is  passed  on  to  the  large 
intestines.  In  them  a  further  system  of  absorbents  take  up 
from  the  refuse  whatever  little  nutriment  may  yet  remain  in  it, 
and  the  residuum  along  with  the  waste  products  of  the  body, 
excreted  into  the  intestines,  is  cast  forth  by  the  anus  as  dung. 

2639.  Q.  Describe  the  course  of  water  taken  by  the  horse. 
A.  Water  does  not  lodge  in  the  stomach,  but  passes  rapidly 
through  it  and  the  small  intestines  on  its  way  to  the  caecum  or 
blind  gut,  which  may  be  considered  as  the  real  water  stomach  of 
the  horse.  From  the  caecum  the  water  is  gradually  taken  up  by 
the  veins  and  absorbents  according  to  the  requirements  of  the 
system,  and  poured  into  the  large  blood-vessels  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  heart.  Along  with  worn-out  nitrogenous  matters 
and  certain  salts,  it  is  excreted  partly  from  the  lungs  in  tiie  form 
of  aqueous  vapor,  partly  from  the  skin  in  the  form  of  perspira- 
tion, and  in  larger  and  more  notable  quantities  it  is  discharged 
from  the  body  as  urine  through  the  medium  of  the  kidneys. 

2640.  Q.  What  is  the  capacity  of  the  horse's  stomach  ?  A.  Its 
capacity  is  small  in  comparison  to  the  horse's  frame.  He  requires 
frequent  feeding.  In  a  state  of  nature  he  is  almost  constantly 
browsing,  and  yet  it  is  rarely  so  full  as  to  be  unable  to  exert  his 
powers  of  flight. 

2641.  Q.  How  often  should  a  horse  be  fed?  A.  Experience 
has  shown  that  three  feeds  a  day  is  sufficient.  Less  feeding  is 
decidedly  objectionable.  The  grain  should  be  divided  into  three 
portions,  the  hay  into  two.  Hay  should  not  be  fed  at  the  feed 
preceding  the  time  for  work.  A  horse  works  easier  on  a  some- 
what empty  stomach  than  on  one  distended  with  hay. 

2642.  Q.  What  care  should  be  exercised  as  regards  the  feeding 
of  horses  when  heated  and  immediately  after  work  ?  A.  Horses 
in  this  condition  should  not  be  fed,  as  the  stomach  at  this  time  is 
not  in  a  good  state  for  the  proper  digestion  of  the  food.  In  the 
case  of  exhaustion  from  long  and  rapid  marching,  it  would  be 
beneficial  to  give  at  once  a  bucket  of  warm  gruel  when  pro- 
curable. This  being  easily  digested  will  serve  to  sustain  the 
horses's  strength,  while  under  its  influence  and  rest  the 
stomach  will  recover  its  tone  and  be  in  condition  to  receive  the 


HIPPOLOGY.  307 

grain,  which  should  not  be  given  until  the  horse  is  cool  and  has 
been  groomed. 

2643.  Q.  What  is  the  best  time  for  feeding?  A.  The  best 
time  for  feeding,  as  a  general  rule,  is  at  the  close  of  each  stable 
hour.  The  horse  will  then  feed  more  quietly,  comfortably,  and 
more  at  his  leisure  than  when  the  men  are  about. 

2644.  Q.  Is  regularity  in  the  hours  of  feeding  desirable? 
A.  Regularity  in  the  hours  of  feeding  is  a  matter  of  some  im- 
portance. Over-lengthened  abstinence  is,  for  the  reason  of  the 
small  capacity  of  the  stomach,  in  itself  injurious,  and  the  mis- 
chief is  often  aggravated  by  the  animal  eating  to  excess  when  he 
gets  his  food.  An  over-hearty  meal  is  hurtful  at  any  time,  but 
it  is  especially  so  when  the  stomach  is  weakened  by  long  fasting. 
Undue  pressure  and  irritation  are  the  result,  producing  indigestion, 
and  in  some  cases  gastritis,  colic,  etc. 

2645.  Q.  What  is  the  result  of  feeding  forage  of  poor  quality? 
A.  It  is  absolutely  necessary  that  the  forage  supplied  should  be 
good  and  sound.  Inferior  or  damaged  forage  of  any  sort,  such  as 
mouldy  hay,  damp  or  kiln  dried  oats  or  green  meat  kept  till  stale, 
or  grazing  on  foul  ground,  very  readily  produce  intestinal  dis- 
turbance or  disease.  Besides  which,  we  cannot  expect  to  develop 
the  best  powers  of  the  animal  unless  we  supply  him  liberally  with 
the  best  nutriment. 

2646.  Q.  How  often  should  horses  be  watered,  and  what  quan- 
tity should  be  given  at  one  time  ?  A.  The  caecum  or  water-gut 
being  very  large,  it  is  probable  that  the  horse  does  not  require  to 
be  watered  often.  It  is  not  an  uncommon  thing  to  see  a  horse 
drink  two  or  even  three  pails  of  water  at  one  time,  most  of  this 
passing  directly  to  the  caecum.  In  a  state  of  nature,  though  no 
doubt  the  succulent  character  of  the  food,  in  part  at  least,  supplies 
the  place  or  want  of  water,  it  would  be  impossible  that  all  horses 
on  a  large  plain  could  be  constantly  at  the  riverside.  In  camp 
in  the  open  air,  even  when  feeding  on  dry  food,  the  horse 
seldom  ever  drinks  more  than  twice  a  day  ;  but  in  the  stable  he 
drinks  readily,  and  is  refreshed  by  being  watered  at  least  three  or 
four  times  a  day. 

2647.  Q.  What  quantity  of  water  should  be  allowed  at  one 
time  ?  A.  Excepting  in  the  few  cases,  such  as  where  the  horse  is 
excessively  hot  or  exhausted,  or  has  from  any  cause  been  kept 
without  water  for  an  undue  length  of  time,  or  where  there  is  a 
tendency  to  purgation  or  diuresis,  the  horse  may  safely  be  allowed 
to  drink  as  much  as  he  likes. 

2648.  Q.  Should  horses  be  watered  before  or  after  feeding? 
why  ?  A.  Horses  should  be  watered  before  being  fed.  Water- 
ing after  feeding  is  likely  to  cause  colic,  since  water  does  not 
remain  in  the  stomach,  but  passes  rapidly  through  it  to  the 
caecum  ;  and  when  this  occurs  with  a  full  stomach,  the  water  is 
very  apt  to  carry  with  it,  from  the  stomach  into  the  small  intes- 


308  THE  AKMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIISTER. 

tines,  some  portions  of  the  food  before  it  is  properly  prepared  for 
transmission.  Undigested  food,  though  natural  to  the  stomach 
in  which  it  ought  to  be  digested  and  prepared  for  transmission  to 
the  intestines,  acts  on  the  latter  as  a  foreign  body,  and  produces 
irritation. 

3649.  Q.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  in  watering  horses 
when  warm  ?  A.  There  is  no  objection  to  watering  horses  when 
warm,  providing  the  horse  is  immediately  groomed  and  properly 
cared  for,  or  is  soon  thereafter  to  resume  the  march  ;  the  friction 
caused  by  grooming,  or  the  exercise  of  marching,  however  slight, 
seems  to  prevent  the  occurrence  of  a  chill.  There  is  less  risk  in 
drinking  cold  water  when  the  body  is  still  actively  warm  than 
when  the  system  has  begun  to  flag.  In  the  case  of  a  horse  thor- 
oughly tired  and  fagged  the  water  should  be  made  slightly  tepid, 
as  in  such  case  there  may  not  be  sufficient  vitality  to  raise  a  large 
quantity  of  water  to  the  temperature  of  the  body ;  hence  the 
animal  may  become  chilled,  and  his  coat  will  stare,  his  bowels 
become  deranged,  and  further  serious  consequences  may  result. 

2650.  Q.  Discuss  the  subject  of  dirty  vs.  clean  water,  and  hard 
vs.  soft  water,  in  stable  management.  A.  The  horse  naturally 
prefers  soft  to  hard  water,  and  will  often  drink  of  muddy  soft 
water  than  clean  hard  water.  He  will  never  drink  bad  soft 
water  in  preference  to  good  soft  water,  nor  bad  hard  water  in 
preference  to  good  hard  water.  All  things  being  equal,  the  horse 
will  always  drink  of  the  cleanest  water.  Hard  water,  containing 
an  excess  of  saline  and  mineral  substances,  does  not,  as  a  gen- 
eral rule,  agree  with  horses  as  soft  water,  such  as  that  obtained 
from  rivers  or  ponds.  It  is  apt  to  produce  irritation  of  the 
bowels,  and,  as  a  secondary  effect,  a  staring  coat. 

2651.  Q.  How  may  the  salts  contained  in  hard  be  easily  pre- 
cipitated ?  A.  The  salts  may  be  in  a  great  degree  precipitated 
by  boiling,  and  most  water  becomes  soft  by  being  exposed  to  the 
air. 

2652.  Q.  "What  is  the  effect  of  sudden  changes  in  the  kind  of 
water  supplied  to  horses  ?  A.  It  is  apt  to  cause  derangement  of 
the  bowels,  and  even  irritation  of  the  mucous  membranes  of  the 
bowels,  especially  a  change  from  soft  to  hard  water. 

2653.  Q.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  in  watering  a 
horse  predisposed  to  scouring  ?  A.  To  such  a  horse  water  in  re- 
duced quantities  should  frequently  be  given.  In  cold  weather 
the  chill  should  be  taken  off  by  mixing  it  with  a  little  warm 
water.  The  better  plan  is  to  leave  water  always  before  such  horses  : 
>n  such  case  they  will  drink  less  than  when  watered  at  inter- 
vals ;  the  diminished  quantity  of  water  taken  into  the  system,  by 
lessening  the  secretions  of  the  intestines,  decreases  the  tendency 
to  purgation. 

2654.  Q.  What  is  frequently  the  real  cause  of  scouring  ?  A. 
An   irritable  state  of  the  bowels,  induced  by  the  presence  of 


HIPPOLOGY.  309 

various  crudities,  arising  from  imperfect  digestion  or  previous 
torpidity. 

2655.  Q.  How  should  the  animal  be  treated  for  scours  ?  A.  If 
the  animal  is  strong  and  hearty,  and  not  usually  predisposed  to 
the  complaint,  a  mild  dose  of  purgative  medicine,  followed  by 
tonics,  may  be  beneficial. 

2656.  Q.  Where  there  is  a  tendency  in  the  horse  to  scouring, 
what  bad  management  may  readily  induce  it  ?  A.  Any  sort  of 
neglect  or  bad  management,  such  as  washing  the  legs  and  not 
drying  them  ;  by  letting  the  animal  stand  sweating  after  exer- 
cise without  being  dried  and  cleaned  ;  by  copious  draughts  of 
cold  water  when  the  body  is  heated;  or  by  being  watered  imme- 
diately before  fast  work. 

2657.  Q.  What  measures  should  be  taken  to  tempt  the  appetite 
and  regulate  the  diet  of  delicate  feeders  ?  A.  First,  carefully  note 
the  peculiar  habits  of  feeding  of  the  animal,  and  as  far  as  pos- 
sible follow  them  in  feeding.  Some  reject  their  food  when  given 
in  large  quantities,  hence  feed  in  small  quantities  at  a  time  and 
frequently ;  others  require  Wjater  constantly  before  them  while 
feeding  ;  others  are  nervous  and  timid,  and  ,will  not  feed  unless 
protected  from  their  neighbors.  Some  require  a  change  of  diet, 
such  as  a  little  beans  mixed  with  the  oats,  which  might  be  first 
crushed,  or  some  wet  bran  with  the  oats,  etc.  For  others,  carrots 
or  green  forage  may  be  substituted  for  or  mixed  with  the  hay. 

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  GOOD  OATS. 

2658.  Q.  What  are  the  characteristics  of  good  oats  ?  A.  Good 
oats  should  be  clean,  hard,  dry,  sweet,  heavy,  plump,  and  full  of 
meat.  They  should  have  a  clean  and  almost  met  a' lie  lustre,  the 
grains  of  nearly  the  same  size,  with  few  small  or  imperfect  ones. 
The  pressure  of  tiae  nail  on  an  oat  should  leave  little  or  no  mark. 
The  kernel,  when  pressed  between  the  teeth,  should  chip  rather 
than  tear.  The  skin  should  be  thin.  White  oats,  on  account  of 
the  thinness  of  the  skin,  are  preferable  to  black  oats.  Short, 
plump  grains  are  preferable  to  large,  long  grains.  Bearded  oats 
must  have  an  excess  of  husk.  Good  oats  are  entirely  without 
smell  of  any  kind,  except  that  of  the  earth,  in  new  samples. 

2659.  Q.  What  is  the  usual  manner  of  testing  oats  ?  A.  Oats 
are  tested  by  smell  and  taste.  In  testing  by  smell,  a  good  hand- 
ful should  be  taken  for  the  purpose,  and  not  merely  a  few  grains. 
In  tasting  oats,  a  considerable  number  of  grains  should  be  taken 
into  the  mouth  in  order  to  get  a  fair  average  of  the  grains.  The 
flour  should  be  almost  tasteless,  except  a  slight  sense  of  milky 
sweetness.  In  testing  for  quality,  a  quantity  should  be  spread 
out  on  a  sheet  of  paper,  when  small  and  imperfect  grains,  and 
foreign  substances,  such  as  small  black  seeds,  can  at  once  be  de- 
tected.   The  small  black  seeds  are  principally  seeds  of  the  wild 


310  THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

rape,  tares,  and  wild  mustard  ;  tliey  are  heavier  than  oats,  and 
therefore  add  greatly  to  the  weight  of  a  sample  when  found  in 
large  quantities. 

2660.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  kiln-drying  oats  ?  A.  It  is  a 
process  resorted  to  in  order  to  get  rid  of  either  dampness  or 
softness,  or  of  both  defects,  in  oats. 

2661.  Q.  How  can  we  tell  when  oats  have  undergone  the  pro- 
cess of  kiln-drying?  A.  Kiln-dried  oats  have  a  peculiar  and 
easily  recognized  smell  and  taste.  In  some  cases  there  is  a  loose 
and  shrivelled  appearance  about  the  ends  of  the  husks,  arising 
from  the  contraction,  under  heat,  of  the  kernel,  which  had  pre- 
viously been  swollen  from  damp.  The  color  is  deepened,  and 
often  of  a  reddish  hue;  but  this  color  may  be  gotten  rid  of  by 
fumigation. 

2663.  Q.  Why  should  we  object  to  kiln-dried  oats  generally  ? 
A.  While  kiln-drying  may  slightly  damage  the  flour  of  perfectly 
sound  oats,  yet  as  a  general  rule  the  oats  are  already  damaged 
when  subjected  to  the  process,  which  is  only  resorted  to  for  the 
purpose  of  fraud  ;  no  amount  of  drying  will  restore  or  improve 
the  original  character  of  the  flour. 

2663.  Q.  What  is*sometimes  done  by  dealers  to  get  rid  of  the 
smell  of  kiln-dried  oats  ?  A.  The  oats  are  spread  out  in  thin 
layers  to  the  action  of  the  air,  and  just  before  being  oifered  for 
sale  a  quantity  of  new  fresh-smelling  oats  are  well  mixed  in. 

2664.  Q.  What  are  foxy  oats,  how  may  they  be  detected,  and 
what  is  the  objection  to  feeding  them  ?  A.  Foxy  oats  are  those 
which  have  been  heated  from  being  kept  in  bulk  when  not  per- 
fectly dry,  and  in  consequence  have'  undergone  to  a  certain  de- 
gree a  process  of  fermentation.  They  are  easily  recognized  by 
a  reddish  and  sometimes  very  red  color,  and  by  a  peculiar  bit- 
terness of  smell  and  taste.  They  are  unfit  for  horses,  the  nutri- 
tive quality  of  the  flour  being  destroyed.  They  act  injuriously, 
especially  on  the  kidneys,  produce  excessive  staling,  and  cause 
the  horse  rapidly  to  lose  condition.  The  red  color  is  sometimes 
gotten  rid  of  by  fumigation. 

2665.  Q.  Why  are  oats  fumigated  or  bleached,  and  how  can  it 
be  detected  ?  A.  To  get  rid  of  the  color  given  by  kiln-drying  or 
by  the  oats  having  become  foxy.  The  oats  are  exposed  to  the 
fumes  of  sulphur,  which  give  them  an  unnaturally  white  hue. 
If  we  take  a  handful  of  the  oats  from  the  heap  and  bring  it 
quickly  to  the  nose,  the  odor  of  the  sulphur  will  condemn  the 
oats.  When  the  process  is  well  managed  the  odor  is  quite  faint, 
and  should  be  carefully  guarded  against. 

2666.  Q.  What  is  the  objection  to  damp  oats  ?  A.  Oats  which 
have  become  damp  and  have  been  stored  in  bull<  for  some  time 
soon  become  musty,  soft,  or  begin  to  sprout.  Dampness,  how- 
ever, is  in  some  measure  a  question  of  degree,  and  of  the  length 
of  time  during  which  it  has  existed. 


HIPPOLOGY.  311 

2667.  Q.  What  is  mnstiness  in  oats,  and  how  may  musty  oats 
lie  recognized  ?  A.  Mustiness  is  a  stage  of  decomposition  result- 
ing from  dampness.  They  are  recognized  by  the  smell.  They 
are  altogether  unfit  for  food,  and  are  sometimes  poisonous.  When 
examined  under  a  microscope  a  fungoid  growth  may  be  detected 
on  the  inner  skin. 

2668.  Q.  What  are  mouldy  oats  ?  A.  They  are  oats  in  a  positive 
state  of  decomposition,  and  are  wholly  unfit  for  food. 

2669.  Q.  Explain  what  is  meant  by  sprouting  in  oats,  and  its 
cause.  A.  Sprouting  is  a  process  of  new  growth  or  germination 
in  the  oat,  induced  by  damp,  combined  with  some  amount  of 
warmth  under  certain  conditions  of  the  weather. 

2670.  Q.  In  what  does  sprouting  differ  from  mustiness  or 
mouldiness  ?  A.  Sprouting  is  a  process  of  new  life,  while  musti- 
ness or  mouldiness  are  processes  of  decomposition  and  death  of 
the  grain. 

2671.  Q.  Are  sprouting  oats  fit  for  food  ?  A.  They  are  quite 
unfit  for  food. 

2672.  Q.  How  can  old  oats  be  distinguished  from  new  oats  by 
the  smell  ?  A.  The  chief  distinction  between  old  and  new  oats 
lies  in  the  smell.  New  oats  snnell  fresh  and  of  the  earth.  Old 
oats,  even  while  they  may  smell  fresh,  have  lost  this  earthy  smell ; 
as  a  rule,  they  will  smell  musty,  and  frequently  of  rats. 

2673.  Q.  How  can  old  oats  be  distinguished  from  new  oats  by 
its  general  appearance  ?  A.  The  outside  of  the  husks  of  new  oats 
is  bright  and  shining,  having  almost  a  glazed  appearance,  espe- 
cially in  the  black  variety.  In  old  oats  the  glazing  is  lost.  The 
outside,  though  it  may  be  perfectly  clean,  is  dim,  and  the  ends  of 
the  husks,  in  white  oats,  are  always  a  little  darkened.  Badly 
saved  new  oats  may  in  these  respects  sometimes  resemble  old 
oats,  but  in  such  cases  they  will  probably  be  distinguished  by 
their  softness. 

2674.  Q.  How  can  old  oats  be  distinguished  from  new  oats  by 
taste  ?  A.  The  taste  of  new  oats  is  fresh  and  somewhat  milky, 
and  its  flour  when  moistened  in  the  mouth  readily  adheres 
together.  The  taste  of  the  old  oat  is  slightly  bitter.  In  the 
mouth  the  flour  feels  dry,  and  is  not  easily  moistened.  In  the 
new  oat  there  is  a  certain  degree  of  juiciness,  sweetness,  and 
milkiness  about  its  flour. 

2675.  Q.  How  can  old  oats  be  distinguished  from  new  oats  by 
the  sense  of  touch  ?  A.  New  oats  as  a  general  rule  are  softer 
than  old  ;  but  the  season,  the  state  of  the  weather,  and  the  damp- 
ness perhaps  of  the  place  in  which  they  have  been  stored  may 
cause  old  oats  to  handle  as  soft  as  new.  On  the  other  hand,  in 
very  fine  seasons  new  oats  may  come  to  market  almost  as  dry  and 
hard  as  old  oats. 

2676.  Q.  How  can  old  oats  be  distinguished  from  new  oats  by 
the  skin  of  the  kernel  ?    A.  The  skin  of  the  kernel  of  a  new  oat 


312  THE  AKMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN^ER. 

is  covered  with  very  fine  prickly  down,  composed  of  very  minute 
hairs.  In  the  old  oats  the  kernel  appears  and  feels  more  smooth. 
If  the  husks  are  stripped  off,  this  distinction  will  be  quite  per- 
ceptible to  the  palate  in  chewing  a  few  grains  of  each. 

HAY. 

2677.  Q.  Into  what  classes  may  hay  be  generally  divided? 
A.  Into  upland,  lowland,  and  water-meadow  hay. 

2678.  Q.  Describe  briefly  each  classification.  A.  Upland  hay, 
which  is  the  best,  comprises  all  grasses  which  grow  on  upland 
meadows,  and  sometimes  on  low-lying  well-drained  meadows, 
lying  on  dry  foundations,  the  best  upland  grasses  being  found 
only  on  upland  meadows.  Lowland  hay  comprises  those  grasses 
found  in  low-lying  meadows,  and  is  inferior  to  upland  hay, 
although  grasses  are  found  in  them  which  are  also  found  in 
upland  hay.  Water-meadow  hay  comprises  the  grasses  found  in 
water-meadows,  and  is  unfit  for  food.  Grasses  growing  in  low-: 
lying  meadows  may  also  be  found  in  water-meadows,  while  the 
best  water-meadow  grasses  may  be  found  in  low-lying  meadows. 
¥0  line  of  demarcation  can  be  drawn  between  the  several  classi- 
fications, which  are  general  only. 

2679.  Q.  What  is  the  distinction  between  upland,  lowland,  and 
water-meadow  hay  ?  A.  Upland  hay  is  known  generally  by  the 
fineness  and  firmness  of  the  stalks  or  stems,  and  by  the  narrow- 
ness of  the  leaves  of  its  grasses ;  specially,  it  is  recognized  by  the 
prevalence  of  certain  grasses,  such  as  rye  grass,  meadow  fescue, 
meadow  fox-tail,  meadow  cat's-tail  or  timothy,  etc.,  which  do  not 
grow  on  low  land  ;  and,  again,  by  the  presence  of  certain  sorts  of 
herbage,  such  as  white  or  Dutch  clover,  common  red  clover,  little 
yellow  clover,  yellow  vetch,  sainfoin,  which  do  not  grow  on  low 
land.  Lowland  hay  is  known  by  the  coarseness  of  the  stalks  and 
by  the  broad  leaves  of  its  grasses,  and  by  the  absence  of  good 
upland  herbage.  The  direction  of  the  stems  and  leaves  is  not 
well  preserved  ;  it  is  a  tangled  mass  ;  the  color  is  darker  than  that 
of  well -saved  upland  hay.  It  has  a  stronger  and  less  delicate 
aroma,  the  texture  is  more  woolly,  and  it  feels  more  soft  or  less 
firm.  Altogether,  it  lacks  firmness,  crispness,  cleanliness,  fresh- 
ness of  appearance,  and  delicacy,  both  of  substance  and  aroma  of 
good  upland  hay.  Water-meadow  hay  is  at  once  recognized  by 
its  very  coarse,  broad,  often  reed-like  stalks,  and  by  the  very 
broad,  often  flag-like,  leaves  of  its  grasses,  and  by  a  large  admix- 
ture of  sedge,  and  plants  approaching  the  nature  of  sedges  and 
rushes. 

2680.  Q.  What  are  the  characteristics  of  good  upland  hay? 
A.  The  characteristics  of  the  best  hay  are  clearness,  firmness, 
crispness,  and  green  color  ;  delicacy  in  taste,  aroma,  and  appear- 
ance ;  the  presence  of  flowers  of  their  natural  color  ;  of  numerous 


HIPPOLOGT.  313 

grasses,  with  sweet  vernal  and  other  early  grasses  in  flower  ;  and 
a  proportion  of  good  herbage. 

2681.  Q.  What  can  be  told  as  to  the  proper  saving  of  the  hay- 
by  its  color  ?  A.  Whether  or  not  heating  or  fermentation  to  any 
extent  has  taken  place  in  the  stack.  Slight  heating  is  almost 
unavoidable  where  the  hay  has  been  cut  early,  whilst  the  juices 
are  still  in  the  grasses.  This  slight  heating  will  darken  the  bright- 
green  color  of  the  hay  somewhat,  A  shower  of  rain  falling  on 
new-cut  hay  or  exposure  to  a  very  hot  sun  may  cause  hay  to  lose 
its  bright-green  color,  although  the  hay  may  have  suffered  no 
damage. 

2682.  Q.  What  does  the  presence  of  flowering  heads  of  grasses 
indicate  in  hay  as  to  the  time  of  cutting?  A.  It  indicates  that 
the  hay  was  cut  early,  before  the  grasses  ran  to  seed  and  lost 
their  juiciness  and  nutritive  qualities. 

2683.  Q.  Is  a  good  proportion  of  herbage  desirable  in  hay,  and 
why  ?  A.  A  good  proportion  of  herbage  is  desirable ;  herbage 
makes  the  hay  sweet  and  palatable,  horses  preferring  good  hay 
mixed  with  a  proportion  of  herbage  to  hay  composed  of  the  best 
grasses  alone.    A  great  variety  of  grasses  is  also  desirable  in  hay. 

GROOMING. 

2684.  Q.  What  fact,  as  regards  its  care,  constitutes  the  differ- 
ence between  the  care  and  management  of  the  domesticated 
horse  and  the  animal  in  a  state  of  nature  ?  A.  Work  and  food 
constitute  the  difference.  Work  increases  the  secretions  of  the 
glands  of  the  skin.  Hard  work  requires  high  feeding  to  keep 
the  animal  in  strength.  High  feeding  increases  these  same 
secretions.  To  give  free  and  easy  exit  to  these  secretions,  the  skin 
must  be  kept  clean  and  the  pores  opened.  Fast  work  increases 
the  action  of  the  skin,  hence  the  necessity  of  exciting  the  skin  to 
the  healthy  performance  of  its  function,  and  therefore  grooming 
becomes  a  necessity.  The  horse  in  nature  feeds  on  food  more  or 
less  laxative  in  character,  the  debris  of  the  food  and  the  excre- 
tions of  the  system  are  mainly  carried  off  by  the  action  of  the 
bowels  and  kidneys;  hence  the  necessity  of  exciting  the  action  of 
the  skin  does  not  exist,  and  grooming  is  not  necessary  to  his  gen- 
eral health. 

2685.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  structure  of  the  skin.  A.  The 
skin  is  a  dense,  porous  membrane,  investing  the  whole  body.  It 
is  composed  of  two  layers,  namely,  the  outer  or  upper,  called  the 
cuticle  or  scarf-skin,  which  is  hard  and  insensitive  ;  and  an  under 
or  inner  layer,  called  the  cutis  or  true  skin,  which  is  sensitive 
and  vascular.  These  two  layers  are  easily  separated,  as  is  seen, 
in  cases  of  slight  burns  or  in  the  vesicles  raised  by  a  blister,. 
The  cutis  or  true  skin  is  thick,  and  full  of  blood-vessels,  nerves, 
and  absorbents.     From  it  the  layers  of  cells  which  constitute  the^ 


314  THE   ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

cuticle  or  outer  skin  are  formed.  Each  celVis  originally  round, 
and  filled  with  moisture;  but  as  the  moisture  evaporates  the 
cells  become  flattened,  and  being  laid  in  a  series  one  over  the 
other,  they  form  the  cuticle,  or  outer  skin.  The  outer  scales  are 
constantly  being  cast  off  in  the  form  of  dandriff  or  scurf,  and 
are  as  constantly  renewed  by  the  secretion  of  new  cells  from  the 
true  skin  below. 

2686.  Q.  How  does  the  skin  vary  in  substance  over  the  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  body  ?  A.  In  parts  much  exposed,  as  in  front  of 
the  knee,  it  is  very  thick  ;  in  parts  less  exposed,  as  behind  the 
knee,  it  is  thin  ;  whilst  on  the  inside  of  the  thigh,  where  it  is  not 
exposed  at  all,  it  is  very  thin. 

2687.  Q.  Describe  the  glands  of  the  skin.  A.  The  skin  has 
two  sets  of  glands,  having  their  origin  a  little  below  the  true  skin, 
namely,  the  "sweat"  and  "oil "glands.  The  " sweat "  glands 
secrete  perspiration,  and  terminate  by  long-necked  tubes  on  the 
surface  of  the  skin.  They  are  very  minute,  but  cover  the  body  in 
such  large  quantities  as  to  form  one  of  the  largest  secreting 
organs  in  the  body.  The  "oil"  glands  secrete  an  oily  material. 
They  open,  some  on  the  surface,  but  mostly  into  the  tubes  of  the 
hairs.  Each  hair-tube  is  furnished  with  one  or  more  of  these 
glands.  Wherever  there  is  much  friction  or  motion  in  the  skin, 
the  oil-glands  are  very  numerous,  as,  for  example,  at  the  heels, 
and  in  the  bend  of  the  knee  and  hock. 

2688.  Q.  What  relative  quantity  of  worn-out  material  is  throwm 
off  the  system  of  a  horsCj  in  hard  condition,  through  the  glands, 
and  what  artificial  means  must  be  taken  to  promote  this  activity 
of  the  glands  ?  A.  It  is  estimated  that  the  excretions  through 
the  pores  of  the  skin  in  the  form  of  perspiration  during  twenty- 
four  hours  are  equal  to  the  amount  of  dung  excreted  in  the  same 
time,  since  perspiration  is  constantly  taking  place,  whether  at 
rest  or  in  motion.  In  the  domesticated  horse  these  glands  are 
highly  developed  by  hard  work,  high  feeding,  and  by  grooming  ; 
the  pores  of  the  skin  are  kept  open,  and  their  activity  increased. 

2689.  Q.  Describe  the  structure  of  hair.  A.  Hair  springs  from 
the  cellular  tissue,  on  which  the  true  skin  rests.  Each  hair  root 
is  enclosed  in  a  distinct  sac  of  its  own,  called  a  follicle.  The 
base  of  the  sac  is  supplied  with  blood-vessels,  from  which  the 
materials  for  the  formation  of  the  hair  are  secreted.  The  man- 
ner of  the  growth  of  the  hair  is  similar  to  that  of  the  outer  skin, 
namely,  by  cells.  The  cells  are  pushed  up  by  new  cells  forming 
below.  They  gradually  become  flattened  and  elongated  into 
fibres  to  form  the  central  shaft  of  the  hair,  while  the  outer  part 
is  covered  by  flattened  cells  or  scales  overlapping  each  other,  like 
slates  on  the  roof  of  a  house.  The  cells  are  cemented  together 
by  adhesive  matter,  which  is  secreted  as  they  grow. 

2690.  Q.  How  often  does  the  horse  shed  his  coat  ?  State  the 
manner  of  its  shedding,  and  the  reasons  therefor.    A.  The  horse 


HIPPOLOGY.  815 

sheds  his  coat  twice  a  year — in  spring  and  autumn.  At  those 
seasons  the  nourishpaent  of  the  old  hair  is  arrested,  the  soft 
pulpy  extremities  shrink  and  dry  up,  and  the  hair  becomes 
detached  and  falls  off ;  whilst  at  the  same  time  a  new  hair  is 
formed  and  pushed  up  by  its  side. 

2691.  Q.  Describe  the  whiskers  and  their  function.  A.  The 
whiskers  have  a  similar  origin  to  the  hairs  of  the  mane  and  tail. 
They  are  supplied  for  protection,  and  are  consequently  made  stiff 
and  supplied  with  a  nerve,  rendering  them  delicate  feelers. 

2692.  Q.  What  are  the  two  principal  objects  gained  by  groom- 
ing ?  A.  1.  Keeping  tlie  skin  free  from  particles  of  sweat,  dust, 
or  other  matter,  which  might  clog  or  impede  the  free  action  of  its 
glands.  2.  Removing  scurf  or  worn-out  cells,  which  have  the 
same  action  on  the  glands  as  other  foreign  matter. 

2693.  Q.  How  should  the  brush  be  used  in  grooming  ?  A.  To 
thoroughly  cleanse  the  skin  and  excite  the  action  of  its  glands, 
the  groom  should  stand  well  away  from  the  horse,  when  his 
w^eight  and  muscular  strength  should  be  vigorously  applied  to 
the  brush,  to  cause  it  to  penetrate  to  the  skin.  The  general 
direction  of  brushing  should  follow  the  direction  in  w^hich  the 
hair  lies;  but  when  necessary  to  remove  dirt  or  matted  hair,  it 
should  be  rubbed  against  the  hair.  Grooming  requires  skill  and 
hard  labor. 

2694.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  results  of  neglect  of  grooming  ? 
A.  Loss  of  flesh  and  condition,  deterioration  in  health,  some- 
times actual  disease,  the  most  common  being  caused  by  the 
presence  of  parasites — such  as  mange  and  lousiness.  These  para- 
sites breed  extensively  in  the  neglected  horse,  while  they  will 
never  remain  where  constantly  disturbed  by  grooming.  They 
are  positive  signs  of  neglect. 

2695.  Q.  Mention  some  of  the  subsidiary  uses  of  grooming.  A. 
Glossiness  and  shortness  of  coat,  and  the  development  of  the 
highest  powers  of  the  animal. 

2696.  Q.  What  is  glossiness  of  coat  due  to  ?  A.  To  the  absence 
of  dirt,  debris  of  worn-out  materials,  and  particles  of  perspiration 
among  the  hairs  ;  partly  to  the  mere  mechanical  effort  of  friction 
in  polishing  the  hair,  but  mainly  to  the  increased  secretion  drawn 
forth  from  thh  oil-glands  of  the  skin  under  the  friction  of  good 
grooming. 

2697.  Q.  What  are  short  coats  due  to  ?  A.  Partly  to  the 
warmth  produced  in  the  skin  by  the  frequent  friction  of  groom- 
ing, and  partly  to  the  maintenance  of  an  even  and  moderately 
warm  temperature  in  the  stable. 

2698.  Q.  What  improper  means  are  sometimes  used  to  produce 
short  and  glossy  coats  ?  A.  The  administration  of  tonics  and 
other  stimulants,  which  by  artificially  exciting  the  system  ^ 
duce  temporarily  a  good  external  appearance,  but  in  the  loi 
are  the  fruitful  parents  of  disease. 


316  THE  AKMY   OFFICER^S  EXAMINER* 

2699.  Q.  On  what  grounds  is  the  practice  of  grooming  at 
morning  and  evening  stables  based  ?  A.  Horses  are  groomed  in 
the  morning  to  remove  from  the  skin  the  insensible  emanations 
of  the  pores  which  have  accumulated  during  the  night ;  and  at 
evening,  after  exercise,  to  remove  from  their  skin  the  more 
sensible  emanations  of  the  pores,  commonly  called  sweat. 

2700.  Q.  How  does  exercise  assist  in  keeping  the  skin  clean  ? 
A.  A  horse  which  has  not  been  exercised  daring  the  day  in  some 
respects  requires  more  labor  to  get  his  skin  thoroughly  clean 
than  if  he  had  been  at  work.  A  little  gentle  perspiration  every 
day,  and  occasionally  a  somewhat  freer  opening  of  the  pores, 
greatly  assist  the  process  of  grooming  ;  the  brush  is  aided  by  in- 
creasing the  active  use  of  the  glands  by  means  of  sensible  perspi- 
ration. 

2701.  Q.  Why  should  a  horse  be  groomed  immediately  after 
exercise  ?  A.  All  the  pores  of  the  skin  are  then  open,  and  the 
brush  will  more  effectually  clean  the  skin  than  if  the  operation 
is  delayed  untilthe  skin  has  cooled  and  its  pores  closed,  and  the 
perspiration  has  dried  and  caked  over  them. 

2703.  Q.  When  it  is  not  practicable  to  groom,  how  should  a 
horse  be  cared  for  immediately  after  exercise  ?  A.  He  should  be 
warmly  clothed,  and  flannel  bandages  placed  on  his  legs  if  the 
exercise  was  of  a  violent  character.  When  this  is  not  practica- 
ble his  saddle  or  harness  should  be  kept  on,  and  the  animal  pro- 
tected from  draughts.  Leading  at  a  gentle  pace  until  cooled  is 
very  desirable. 

2703.  Q.  What  is  the  danger  of  allowing  a  horse,  when  heated, 
to  stand  undried  ?  A.  When  a  horse  is  heated  his  whole  circula- 
tion is  quickened,  and  an  increased  quantity  of  blood  determined 
to  the  surface  of  the  body.  A  chill  will  drive  this  blood  suddenly 
to  the  inward  and  vital  parts.  Though  the  horse  may  be  chilled 
externally,  the  excited  state  of  the  circulation  continues  for  som6 
time  longer.  The  heart  continues  to  send  blood  rapidly  through 
the  system.  This  continued  supply,  repelled  from  the  surface,  is 
forced  on  the  already  overloaded  internal  vessels ;  hence  may 
arise  serious  diseases,  such  as  inflammation  of  the  lungs  or 
pleurae,  bronchitis,  or  other  inflammatory  or  congestive  affections. 

2704.  Q.  What  care  should  be  given  to  horses  coming  in  wet, 
either  from  rain  or  the  wet  and  muddy  condition  of  the  road  ? 
A.  To  eliminate  all  chances  of  producing  cold  from  the  evapora- 
tion from  the  wet  coat,  the  saddle  or  harness  should  not  be 
removed,  as  it  protects  the  back  and  loins.  The  animal  should 
be  covered  with  a  rug  or  warm  blankets,  and  if  necessary  a 
second  blanket  should  be  thrown  over  the  loins.  The  legs  should 
be  thoroughly  dried,  as  they  are  sooner  susceptible  to  chill  than 
the  other  parts  of  the  body.  Washing  the  legs  with  water  to 
remove  the  dirt  or  mud,  if  practised,  must  be  immediately 
followed  by  a  careful  drying  of  the  legs.    The  use  of  wisps  of 


HIPPOLOGY.  317 

straw  in  drying  the  animal  is  recommended.  Bandaging  the  legs 
after  washing,  to  dry  them,  if  followed  by  brushing  them  thor- 
oughly, cannot  be  seriously  objected  to.  ^After  the  legs  have 
been  thoroughly  dried,  the  body  should  then  be  dried  by  the  use 
of  wisps  of  straw  and  grooming-cloths.  The  clothing  should  be 
removed  gradually,  and  only  from  that  part  of  the  body  which  is 
under  friction.  After  the  skin  is  thoroughly  dried  the  brush 
should  be  applied. 

2705.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  washing  the  skin  with  water  to 
cleanse  it  ?  A.  Water  has  very  little  effect  in  cleaning  the  skin 
of  a  horse.  The  hair  acts  as  a  thatch,  and  water  penetrates 
through  it  with  difficulty,  except  it  is  out  of  order,  and  then  it 
acts  as  an  irritant.  Besides  this,  it  tends  to  check  the  action  of 
the  oil-glands  and  to  render  the  coat  dry  and  harsh  by  removing 
the  oily  secretion. 

2706.  Q.  How  should  the  nostrils,  the  eyes  and  ears,  the  dock 
and  the  hoofs,  be  cared  for  ?  A.  The  nostrils  should  be  carefully 
and  gently  distended  by  the  fingers  and  gently  wiped  out  with  a 
slightly  moistened  sponge  or  grooming-cloth  ;  then,  likewise,  the 
corners  of  the  eyes,  the  ears,  the  dock.  After  which,  commencing 
with  the  near  fore-foot,  each  foot  should  be  picked  up,  carefully 
examined,  and  cleaned  out. 

2707.  Q.  How  much  time  is  required  to  properly  groom  a 
horse  ?  A.  In  the  morning  or  after  ordinary  work  about  thirty 
minutes  will  be  required.  This  does  not  include  the  time  required 
to  lead  out  and  water.  The  condition  of  the  horse  upon  his  return 
from  work  or  exercise  determines  how  much  more  time  will  be 
required  for  his  proper  care. 

2708.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  breaking  out  after  cleaning  ? 
A.  The  appearance,  in  some  horses,  of  a  cold  sweat  after  being 
dried  and  cleaned  after  exercise.  It  results  either  from  debility, 
a  thick  woolly  coat,  or  a  combination  of  both. 

2709.  Q.  How  do  the  horses  of  a  mounted  command  bear  wit- 
ness to  their  proper  care  ?  A.  By  the  bright,  clean,  and  healthy 
appearance  of  their  coats  ;  absence  of  long,  shaggy  coated  animals. 

EXERCISE. 

2710.  Q.  Why  is  regular  exercise  essential  to  the  well-being 
and  development  of  the  horse?  A.  As  air  is  to  the  lungs  or 
food  to  the  stomach,  so  is  exercise  to  the  due  development  of  the 
muscles,  tendons,  ligaments,  and  respiratory  organs.  In  the 
horse,  on  account  of  the  active  exertions  which  we  require  from 
him,  we  wish  to  get  the  muscles  as  firm,  the  tendons  and  hga- 
ments  as  strong,  and  the  respiratory  organs  as  vigorous  as  possi- 
ble ;  we  therefore  give  exercise  more  or  less  severe,  according  to 
the  use  for  which  the  particular  horse  may  at  the  time  be  required. 

2711.  Q.  What  is  muscle?    A.  Muscle  is  simply  flesh,  made  up 


318  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

of  bundles  of  fibres  laid  parallel  to  each  other,  which  under  ner- 
vous influence  possesses  the  power  of  contraction. 

2712.  Q.  On  what  does  the  strength  or  tenacity  of  the  fibres 
chiefly  depend  ?  A.  On  the  use  to  which  they  are  subjected, 
becoming  soft  and  flaccid,  and  incapable  of  sustaining  strain  when 
disused. 

2713.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  paralysis  of  the  nerve  of  a 
muscle  ?    A.  Loss  of  power  of  contraction  in  the  muscle. 

2714.  Q.  What  are  tendons?  A.  Tendons  are  dense,  firm, 
fibrous,  and  almost  inelastic  organs,  attached  at  their  upper 
extremities  to  the  ends  of  the  muscles,  and  at  their  lower  ex- 
tremities are  generally  inserted  into  eminences  of  bone.  They 
possess  no  power  of  motion  or  contraction  in  themselves ;  they 
are  found  wherever  strength  combined  with  lightness  is  required, 
and  where  muscle  on  account  of  its  bulk  would  be  inadmissible. 

2715.  Q.  How  are  tendons  strengthened  and  developed  ?  A.  By 
regular  use.  They  require  constant  use  to  give  them  the  strength 
required  to  enable  them  to  sustain  the  violent  usage  to  which  in 
the  horse  they  are  so  often  subjected. 

2716.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  regular  and  gradual  exercise  or 
work  on  the  animal  frame  ?  A.  The  power  of  the  lungs,  muscles, 
tendons,  and  ligaments  to  sustain  long  and  violent  exertions  is 
gradually  increased,  and  they  are  brought  to  such  a  condition  as 
to  safely  perform  an  amount  of  work  and  to  support  a  strain 
which  without  progressive  training  they  would  be  wholly  unable 
to  stand. 

2717.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  neglect  of  exercise?  A.  The 
horse  in  high  condition,  if  not  exercised  for  even  a  few  days, 
will  pat  on  fat.  The  supply  of  the  large  amount  of  material 
required  for  consumption  caused  by  his  work  still  continues  ;  fat 
followed  by  plethora,  and  frequently  by  disease,  will  be  the  speedy 
consequence. 

2718.  Q.  What  should  be  considered  in  regulating  the  amount 
of  exercise?  A.  The  age,  condition,  constitution,  make  and 
shape,  the  state  of  the  legs,  purpose  for  which  the  animal  is 
intended,  and  feed  should  all  be  considered  in  regulating  the 
amount  of  exercise  required  to  develop  the  fullest  powers  of  the 
animal  without  overworking  or  overstraining  them. 

2719.  Q.  Why  is  good  feeding  particularly  necessary  in  regular 
exercise?  A.  To  replace  the  consumption  and  waste  caused  by 
exercise,  and  thus  prevent  weakness  or  debility. 

2720.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  amount  of  exercise  required  for 
saddle-horses  ?  A.  For  horses  in  ordinary  condition,  two  hours' 
work  in  the  course  of  a  day,  provided  in  that  time  a  distance  of 
ten  miles  is  traversed. 


HIPPOLOGY.  319 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT. 

3721.  Q.  What  six  essentials  are  required  in  successful  stable 
management?  A.  1.  Ample  supply  of  pure  fresh  air  at  all  times 
in  the  stable  ;  2.  Judicious  watering  and  feeding  ;  3.  Good  for- 
age ;  4.  Good  grooming ;  5.  Good  shoeing  ;  6.  Sufficient  well- 
regulated  exercise. 

2722.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  temperature  for  stables,  and  what 
should  govern  it  ?  A.  The  stable  should  be  kept  at  an  even  and 
moderately  warm  temperature.  In  spring,  autumn,  and  winter 
the  stable  should  be  kept  as  comfortably  warm  as  possible  with- 
out making  it  close  and  offensive.  The  aspect  of  the  stable, 
thickness  of  walls,  ceiling  or  absence  of  ceiling,  rooms  over- 
head or  adjacent  buildings  must  all  be  considered.  From  fifty 
to  sixty  degrees  is  recommended  in  well-paved,  well-drained, 
well-ventilated,  and  clean  stables. 

2723.  Q.  In  the  artificial  warming  of  stables  what  is  recom- 
mended as  the  best  form?  A.  Open  fires,  which  assist  in  the 
ventilation  of  the  stable. 

2724.  Q.  What  should  be  the  general  temperature  ©f  stables  in 
summer  ?  A.  Stables  should  be  kept  as  cool  as  possible.  Doors 
and  windows  must  be  freely  opened. 

2725.  Q.  Of  what  benefit  is  a  registering  thermometer  in  a 
stable?  A.  It  serves  as  a  good  check  on  the  bad  practice  of 
closing  up  stables,  and  keeping  them  too  warm. 

2726.  Q.  What  care  should  be  taken  before  putting  horses  in  a 
new  stable  ?  A.  New  stables  are  generally  damp.  Damp  stables 
are  very  objectionable  ;  hence  a  new  stable  should  be  thoroughly 
aired -and  dried  before  horses  are  put  in  them. 

2727.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  suddenly  changing  a  horse  from 
a  warm  to  a  cold  stable,  and  the  reverse  ?  A.  Horses  rarely  suffer 
in  health  from  sudden  change  from  a  warm  to  a  cold  stable,  while 
the  reverse  change  is  often  followed  by  coughs  and  colds. 

2728.  Q.  What  care  should  be  given  to  the  manes  and  tails  of 
horses?  A.  Manes  and  tails  should  be  brushed,  not  combed. 
Combing  pulls  out  the  hair  and  soon  destroys  it. 

2729.  Q.  On  what  side  should  the  manes  of  troop  horses  be 
dressed  ?  A.  On  the  near  side,  to  enable  the  trooper  to  readily 
grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  in  mounting. 

2730.  Q.  How  should  the  horse  be  bedded  ?  A.  After  the 
horses  are  removed  from  the  stable  in  the  morning,  the  bedding 
should  be  entirely  taken  out  of  the  stable,  thoroughly  shaken  out, 
and  cleaned  ;  the  refuse  removed,  and  the  straw  allowed  to  dry, 
exposed  to  the  purifying  action  of  the  air,  care  being  taken  to 
turn  it  over  several  times  so  that  all  parts  of  it  may  be  acted  on. 
At  a  convenient  time  ft  can  be  mixed  with  the  daily  allowance  of 
new  straw  and  the  stalls  bedded.    In  wet  weather  it  should  be 


320  THE   ABMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

removed  from  the  stalls  and  placed  in  the  main  passage  of  the 
stable,  where  it  should  be  thoroughly  well  shaken  to  free  it  of  the 
dung  and  rotten  or  matted  straw.  The  refuse  should  be  removed 
from  the  stable,  while  the  serviceable  straw  should  be  permitted 
to  lie  in  the  passage  until  it  is  thoroughly  aired  and  dried. 

2731.  Q.  How  should  kicking  in  stalls  be  treated  ?  A.  Many 
remedies  are  suggested,  but  it  is  believed  that  sufficient  light  and 
the  exercise  of  care,  placing  in  the  same  stall  only  those  animals 
which  are  congenial  to  one  another  ;  or,  in  the  case  of  a  particu- 
larly confirmed  kicker,  a  horse  fully  capable  of  protecting  himself 
in  this  respect,  that  the  friendship  in  one  case  and  the  return  in 
kind  in  the  other  case,  will  soon  cause  a  disappearance  of  the  vice. 

2732.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  weaving  ?  A.  It  is  a  constant 
oscillation  from  side  to  side,  and  is  the  result  of  ennui  from  want 
of  proper  exercise.     It  results  in  no  particular  harm. 

2733.  Q.  What  is  crib-biting,  and  what  should  be  done  to  check 
it  ?  A.  It  is  a  trick  of  catching  at  the  manger  or  picket  rope  with 
the  upper  incisor  teeth,  and  is  accompanied  by  a  muscular  spasm 
and  peculiar  guttural  sound  easily  recognized.  The  evil  arises 
from  the  amount  of  wind  sucked  into  the  stomach  and  the  injury 
to  the  incisor  teeth.  Many  devices  for  correcting  this  evil  have 
been  suggested,  all  of  a  mechanical  character ;  but  it  is  believed 
that  the  use  of  a  loose  box,  offering  no  projections  or  convenience 
for  the  accomplishment  of  the  trick,  together  with  plenty  of 
exercise,  will  give  better  results.  When  once  confirmed,  the 
habit  is  difficult  to  overcome,  and  is  directly  traced  to  want  of 
proper  exercise  and  the  consequent  ennui. 

2734.  Q.  What  is  the  value  of  bran  mashes  in  stable  manage- 
ment? A.  Bran  mashes  are  cooling  and  slightly  laxative,  and 
therefore  a  fitting  preparation  for  a  day  of  rest.  A  cold  bran 
mash  should  consequently  be  fed  on  Saturday  evening.  Warm 
bran  mashes  for  sick  horses  are  made  by  pouring  boiling  water 
on  bran  in  a  pail,  and  covering  it  with  a  cloth  to  retain  the  steam. 
A  handful  of  dry  bran  thrown  over  the  top  of  the  mash  will 
answer  the  same  purpose. 

CONFORMATION. 

2735.  Q.  Describe  the  essentials  of  a  good  horse.  A.  A  good 
horse  is  an  animal  with  many  good,  few  indifferent,  and  no  bad 
points. 

2736.  Q.  How  does  the  work  for  which  the  animal  is  intended 
affect  the  importance  to  be  attached  to  defects  in  his  conforma- 
tion ?  A.  Shapes  which  are  objectionable  for  one  kind  of  work, 
as  saddle  work,  may  often  be  unobjectionable  for  light-draught 
purposes.  Thus,  a  hollow  back  or  very  high  withers,  which  arc 
objectionable  in  a  saddle-horse,  could  possibly  not  be  seriously 
objected  to  where  weight  is  not  to  be  placed  on  the  back. 


HIPPOLOGY.  321 

2737.  Q.  Do  certain  kinds  of  work  call  for  special  points  in 
he  horse  ?  A.  Yes  ;  for  it  is  plain  that  points  required  in  a  race- 
horse, a  charger,  or  trooper  are  not  necessarily  required  in  a 
draught-horse.  In  the  draught  animal  we  want  all  that  con- 
tributes to  strength  and  weight  and  aptitude  to  put  on  flesh  ; 
whilst  in  the  racer,  charger,  or  trooper  we  need  those  shapes 
which  are  most  likely  to  give  speed  combined  with  endurance. 

2738.  Q.  Discuss  briefly  the  shape  of  the  head.  A.  The  head 
should  be  small.  A  large  head  acts  like  a  heavy  weight  at  the  end 
of  a  long  lever.  It  has  a  tendency  to  make  the  horse  heavy  in 
hand  ;  though  this  also  much  depends  on  its  setting  on,  and  on 
the  obliquity  or  otherwise  of  the  shoulders.  It  also  operates  un- 
favorably on  the  progression,  is  apt  to  make  the  horse  stumble, 
may  help  to  overbalance  him.  For  riding-horses  large  heads  are 
objectionable.  A  small  head  is  a  marked  sign  of  breeding,  whilst 
a  large  head  denotes  an  underbred  animal.  A  long,  lean  head 
is,  however,  often  found  in  well-bred  horses. 

2739.  Q.  Describe  the  points  of  a  well-bred  head.  A.  The 
well-bred  head,  though  small,  is  wide  across  the  forehead,  lean, 
unencumbered  with  flesh,  finely  chiselled,  and  terminates  rather 
wide  at  the  nostrils.  The  base  of  the  skull  is  wide.  The  distance 
from  the  eye  to  the  angle  of  the  jaw  is  great.  It  is  also  wide 
under  the  jaw,  in  order  to  allow  ample  room  for  the  larynx  and 
respiratory  passages.  In  high-bred  horses  we  often  have  a 
prominence  in  the  forehead,  with  a  sinking  in  just  above  the  nose. 

2740.  Q.  Describe  the  proportions  of  the  forehead  in  a  well- 
shaped  head.  A.  The  forehead  and  base  of  the  skull  is  not  only 
relatively  but  absolutely  broad,  in  order  to  give  due  capacity  for 
the  cavity  containing  the  brain  and  great  nervous  centres.  Energy 
and  resolution  largely  depend  on  the  development  of  the  nervous 
system  ;  pluck  and  endurance  will  assuredly  be  wanting  if  the 
nervous  power  is  deficient.  It  is  rather  a  curious  fact  that  small, 
well-bred  heads  are  actually  wider  between  the  eyes  than  large, 
coarse,  underbred  heads  ;  or,  in  other  words,  the  brain  region  is 
larger  in  high  than  in  underbred  animals. 

2741.  Q.  Describe  a  good  nose,  nostrils,  and  muzzle.  A,  It 
should  be  nearly  straight,  well  developed,  and  slightly  promi- 
nent ;  the  nostrils  wide,  free  from  hairs  in  the  entrances,  the 
borders  scanty  and  ending  abruptly.  They  should  occupy  the 
whole  lower  part  of  the  facial  structure.  The  horse  breathes 
entirely  through  his  nostrils  ;  hence  large,  well-developed  nostrils 
indicate  capacity  for  speed  and  endurance,  and  are  of  great 
importance.  The  muzzle  should  be  fine  and  well  shaped.  Coarse 
muzzles  indicate  coarse  breeding. 

2742.  Q.  Describe  the  essentials  of  a  good  mouth.  A.  It 
should  be  small,  with  thin,  firm  lips ;  a  small,  prominent  tongue 
fihong  its  cavity  snugly,  the  bars  sharp  and  firm.     Coarse  flabby 


323  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMII^^ER. 

lips,  large  flat  tongue,  with  flat-topped  bars,  indicate  coarse  breed- 
ing, and  are  highly  undesirable  in  a  trooper. 

2743.  Q.  Describe  the  qualities  desired  in  the  eye.  A.  The 
eye  should  be  large,  prominent,  and  mild,  with  a  well-developed 
brow  and  fine  eyelids. 

2744.  Q.  How  does  the  eye  assist  in  determining  the  character 
of  the  horse  ?  A.  The  expression  of  the  eye  largely  indicates  the 
character  of  the  horse.  An  eye  set  in  prominent  sockets,  per- 
mitting a  large  range  of  vision,  accompanied  by  a  mild  expres- 
sion, generally  indicates  a  bold,  fearless,  gentle,  and  tractable 
character.  Deep-sunk,  narrow  eyes  are  generally  indications  of 
vice  in  one  form  or  other. 

2745.  Q.  Describe  the  •  qualities  desired  in  the  ear.  A.  The 
ears  should  be  thin,  delicate,  small,  and  pointed,  that  is,  directed 
forwards.  The  points  should  be  nearer  to  each  other  than  the 
roots.  Horses  with  their  ears  close  at  their  base  are  generally 
nervous.  When  the  horse  is  at  work  the  ears  should  be  kept  firm. 
If  they  hang  loosely,  it  indicates  want  of  tone  and  muscular 
development.     Large  flabby  ears  mark  an  underbred  horse. 

2746.  Q.  Describe  the  character  of  the  mane  in  the  well-bred 
the  and  underbred  horse.  A.  In  the  well-bred  horse  the  hair  of 
the  mane  is  fine,  silky,  and  generally  rather  scanty.  In  the 
underbred  animal  it  is  coarse,  curly,  and  generally  thick  and 
abundant. 

2747.  Q.  Discuss  the  proper  form  of  the  neck.  A.  The  neck 
should  be  light,  moderately  long,  and  taper  off  towards  its  upper 
end,  in  order  that  the  head  may  be  set  on  at  a  suitable  angle.  It 
should  be  "  long  in  the  rein" — that  is,  longer  at  its  upper  than  at 
its  under  side.  Unless  it  is  so  formed  the  neck  cannot  be 
properly  arched,  nor  can  the  head  be  well  set  on.  The  upper 
line  of  the  neck  from  th^  witliers  to  the  head  should  form  an 
elegant  curve,  while  its  lower  surface  should  be  gracefully  in- 
curvated  as  it  approaches  the  jowl,  and  it  should  join  the  chest 
by  an  easy-flowing  line  rather  above  the  point  of  the  shoulder. 
The  crest  should  be  firm  under  the  grasp  of  the  hand.  The 
throttle,  or  commencement  of  the  larynx,  should  stand  out  boldly, 
and  the  lower  branches  of  the  jaw-bone  adjoining  the  neck 
should  be  wide  apart,  so  as  to  give  ample  room  for  the  respiratory 
passages. 

2748.  Q.  How  does  a  short,  thick  neck  affect  the  horse's  handi- 
ness  ?  A.  A  short,  thick  neck  continued  to  its  junction  with  the 
head  will  interfere  with  its  proper  bending,  and  the  horse  will 
generally  poke  out  his  nose. 

2749.  Q.  Describe  the  formation  and  shape  of  the  withers. 
A.  The  withers  are  formed  by  the  spinous  processes  of  the 
anterior  dorsal  vertebrae,  which  in  this  region  are  more  fully 
developed,  or,  in  other  words,  rise  higher  than  in  other  parts  of 
the  back.     To  these  processes  are  attached  many  muscles,  liga- 


HIPPOLOGY.  323 

meiits,  and  tendons,  which  control  the  motion  of  the  forehand. 
Horses  with  very  fine,  high  withers,  though  the  formation  is  hand- 
some andjDcrhaps  suitable  for  a  charger,  will  not,  as  a  general 
rule,  stand  severe  work  as  well  as  those  a  little  coarser  at  this 
point.  Low  withers  do  not  afford  sufficient  leverage  for  the 
muscles,  ligaments,  and  tendons  of  the  forehand.  Low  withers 
are  generally  combined  with  rather  straight  shoulders. 

2750.  Q.  What  two  bones  compose  the  shoulder?  A.  The 
scapula  and  humerus. 

2751.  Q.  Describe  the  scapula.  A.  The  scapula,  or  upper  bone 
of  the  shoulder  is  a  triangular  flat  bone  with  a  spinous  process 
on  its  outer  surface,  and  extends  obliquely  forward  from  a  point 
a  little  below  the  withers  to  the  point  of  tlie  shoulder. 

2752.  Q.  What  position  and  formation  of  the  scapula  is  most 
favorable  for  the  mechanical  working  of  the  muscles  and  tendons 
which  elevate  the  forehand?  A.  Its  position  should  be  oblique, 
and  the  bone  itself  long  and  broad. 

2753.  Q.  Discuss  the  relative  merits  of  "straight"  and 
"  oblique  "  shoulders.  A.  When  the  angle  formed  by  the  scapula 
and  humerus  is  more  or  less  obtuse,  the  shoulder  is  said  to  be 
more  or  less  straight,  and  there  is  a  mechanical  deficiency  of 
power,  since  the  humerus  can  only  be  brought  by  muscular 
action  in  the  same  line  as  the  scapula,  and  the  action  is  conse- 
quently diminished.  When,  however,  this  angle  approaches  or 
is  nearly  a  right  angle,  the  shoulder  is  then  said  to  be  oblique, 
and  the  mechanical  power  is  at  its  greatest ;  and  therefore  it  is 
of  much  consequence,  in  selecting  a  saddle-horse,  to  carefully 
observe  that  the  scapula  and  humerus  form  as  nearly  as  possible 
a  right  angle. 

2754.  Q.  Describe  the  humerus.  A.  The  humerus,  or  lower 
bone  of  the  slioulder,  should  be  rather  short.  When  very  short 
the  mechanical  action  of  the  shoulder  is  placed  at  a  disadvantage ; 
while,  if  over-long,  it  has  the  effect  of  placing  the  forelegs  too 
much  under  the  horse,  and  the  weight  of  the  animal  is  thereby 
thrown  too  much  forward.      Such  formation  is  unsuitable  for 

ridinir. 

2755.  Q.  Describe  the  chest.  A.  The  chest  should  be  deep, 
moderately  broad,  and  plump  in  front.  Breadth  and  depth  give 
capacity  to  the  cavity  of  the  chest,  in  which  are  situated  the  lungs 
and  the  heart.  Undue  breadth  and  circularity  of  the  chest  is 
objectionable,  because  it  has  the  effect  of  placing  the  fore-legs  too 
far  apart,  and  thereby  causes  a  rolling  motion  in  the  gait.  Depth 
of  chest  is  desired,  because  it  increases  the  breathing  capacity 
without  adding  the  disadvantage  due  to  excessive  breadth  and 
circularity,  and  assists  in  maintaining  the  saddle  in  its  proper 
place. 

2756.  Q.  Describe  the  radius,  or  upper  bone  of  the  leg.  A. 
The  radius,  or  upper  bone  of  the  leg,  should  be  long  in  proportion 


324  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

to  the  length  of  the  leg  ;  it  should  be  thick  and  big,  and  well  sup- 
plied with  muscles.  Muscular  development  in  the  arm,  and  in 
the  corresponding  portion  of  the  thigh  just  above  the  hock,  are 
points  of  primary  importance. 

2757.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  position  of  the  point  of  the  elbow  ? 
A.  In  a  well-made  horse  the  point  of  the  elbow  should  be  full 
and  clear  of  the  chest.  It  should  not  incline  inwards,  and  it 
should  not  appear  to  "  dig"  into,  the  chest  at  every  step,  as  either 
of  these  two  positions  will  interfere  seriously  with  the  action  of 
the  fore-legs. 

2758.  Q.  Describe  the  points  required  in  a  well- formed  knee. 
A.  The  knee  should  be  large  and  prominent ;  wide  laterally — flat 
when  viewed  in  front ;  narrow  when  viewed  from  behind,  owing 
to  the  well-developed  and  long  trapezium-bone,  which  gives  good 
attachment  to  the  muscles  and  ligaments. 

2759.  Describe  the  metacarpal  bones.  A.  The  metacarpal 
bones,  between  the  knee  and  fetlock,  are  three  in  number ;  the 
centre  or  great  metacarpal  bone  and  the  two  small  metacarpals, 
or  splint-bones,  which  lie  on  each  side  of  the  great  bone.  The 
centre  metacarpal,  called  the  shank  or  cannon-bone,  should  be 
short  and  strong.  It  is  subjected  to  much  strain  or  overwork, 
and  cannot  have  too  much  strength.  It  should  lie  "straight" 
in  its  course  from  the  knee  to  the  fetlock,  neither  bowed  back- 
wards or  forwards,  nor  curved  laterally.  Any  deviation  from  a 
straight  line  is  both  a  cause  and  sign  of  weakness.  The  small 
metacarpals  do  not  descend  to  the  pasterns,  their  office  being  to 
support  the  outer  bones  of  the  knee-joint. 

2760.  Q.  Describe  the  fetlocks.  A.  The  fetlock  comprises  the 
large  or  upper  pastern-bone,  or  os  suffraginis,  and  the  small  or 
lower  pastern-bone,  or  os  coronoe.  It  should  be  of  moderate 
length.  When  very  long  it  is  necessarily  weak  with  undue 
strain  on  the  ligaments  and  tendons.  If  short  it  will  be  too  up- 
right, and  cause  more  or  less  concussion. 

2761.  Q.  What  is  the  function  of  the  sesamoid  bones?  A. 
They  give  attachment  to  the  suspensory  ligaments,  and  should, 
therefore,  be  large  and  well  developed.  They  also  act  as  rollers 
for  the  great  flexor  tendons  of  the  legs,  which  pass  over  them. 

2762.  Q.  What  is  the  os  pedis^  or  coflin-bone  ?  A.  It  is  the  bone 
of  the  foot,  and  rests  on  innumerable  springs.  Concussion  is 
thereby  so  expended  as  to  be  greatly  lessened  in  the  frame  above. 
It  varies  in  size  in  different  horses. 

2763.  Describe  the  position  and  function  of  the  navicular  bone. 
A.  The  navicular  bone  is  a  small  bone  placed  at  the  inferior  and 
,posterior  part  of  the  coffin-bone.  It  acts  chiefly  as  a  roller  for 
the  flexor  perforans  tendon,  where  it  makes  its  bend  prior  to 
insertion  into  the  lower  part  of  the  coffin-bone. 

2764.  Q.  Describe  the  proper  size  of  the  fore-feet.  A.  With 
regard  to  the  shape  and  make  of  the  horse,  the  fore-feet  should  be 


HIPPOLOGY.  325 

of  medium  size.  Large  feet  usually  have  a  weak  crust ;  the 
animal  is  likely  to  brush  ;  the  action  is  rendered  heavy  and 
lumbering,  and  the  horse  soon  becomes  fatigued.  Small  feet  are 
generally  brittle  and  too  upright,  and  more  likely  to  be  contracted. 
Any  difference  in  size  of  the  feet  of  the  same  horse  should  be 
looked  upon  with  suspicion,  as  indicating  disease  past  or  present 
in  the  feet.  The  slope  of  the  crust  of  the  fore-feet  should  form 
an  angle  of  between  50  and  53  degrees  with  the  ground.  The 
horse  should  be  tough  and  sound.  A  ringy  condition  of  the  horn 
is  very  objectionable,  as  indicating  weakness  and  want  of  tone  in 
the  secreting  organs.  It  is  usually  the  result  of  inflammation  of 
the  feet  or  any  debilitating  disease. 

3765.  Q.  Describe  the  sole  of  the  foot.  A.  The  sole  in  a  well- 
formed  foot  is  moderately  concave,  so  that  its  margins  receive  a 
sufficient  portion  of  the  pressure  to  preserve  the  health  of  its 
tissues.  In  the  upright  foot  the  sole  is  usually  excessively  con- 
cave or  shrunk  in,  and  is  very  hard,  while  in  the  flat  foot  the 
sole  is  almost  flat  and  in  some  cases  nearly  convex,  when  it  is 
very  susceptible  to  injury. 

3766.  Q.  Describe  the  frog.  A.  The  frog  is  an  elastic  cushion 
placed  at  the  back  of  the  foot  in  order  to  lessen  concussion  in  the 
animal's  frame,  and  also  to  act  as  a  stay  in  slipping.  To  preserve 
it  in  a  healthy  condition,  the  frog  should  at  all  times  be  permitted 
to  perform  its  function.  Any  arrangement  or  circumstance  which 
removes  it  permanently  from  contact  with  the  ground,  and  pre- 
vents it  from  receiving  pressure,  will  cause  it  to  shrink  and  become 
diseased.  It  should  be  moderately  large,  bold,  and  clean,  and 
should  feel  firm  and  elastic  to  the  touch. 

3767.  Q.  Describe  the  proper  appearance  of  the  leg  below  the 
knee.  A.  The  leg  from  the  knee  to  the  fetlock  should  be  straight, 
flat,  and  broad.  The  tendons  should  stand  out  from  the  bone, 
and  should  feel  tense,  distinct,  and  hard  ;  and  the  interspace 
between  the  tendon  and  the  bone  should  give  to  sight  and  feel 
hollow.  If  this  space  is  filled  up  with  soft  substances,  the  leg  will 
appear  gummy.  The  leg  from  the  knee  to  the  pastern  should  be 
straight.  If  the  bone  deviates  from  the  straight  line  it  will  be 
weak,  and  we  shall  probably  find  splints  or  some  other  indication 
of  weakness  at  the  point  of  deviation  if  the  horse  is  put  to  hard 
work.  If  the  bones  incline  outwards,  we  shall  probably  find  the 
toes  turned  out ;  while  if  the  bones  incline  inwards  the  horse 
will  probably  be  pigeon  or  in-toed.  Prominence  of  the  trape-  • 
zium— a  bone  at  the  back  of  the  knee — is  a  most  important  point. 
If  this  bone  is  small  and  undefined,  the  ligaments  and  tendons 
will  also  be  small  and  undefined,  and  the  leg  will  be  small  imme- 
diately below  the  knee. 

2768.  Q.  Describe  the  shape  and  form  of  the  back.  A.  The 
back  should  be  straight  and  not  over-long.  It  is  strongest  when 
straight  and  short,  and  weakest  when  both  long  and  hollow.     A 


326  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMIKEB. 

certain  amount  of  length  in  the  back  is,  however,  essential  to 
speed.  A  short-back  horse  is  apt  to  overreach,  unless  his  shoul- 
ders are  very  oblique  and  his  action  good.  Moreover,  he  cannot 
get  his  hind-legs  sufficiently  under  him. 

2769.  Q.  Discuss  the  shape  and  form  of  the  ribs.  A.  The  ribs 
should  be  deep  and  oval  throughout,  and  especially  behind  the 
saddle.  This  formation  is  essential  in  order  to  give  due  capacity 
to  the  cavity  of  the  chest  and  that  of  the  stomach.  Flat-sided 
horses  are  very  objectionable.  The  ribs  should  be  continued  well 
back  towards  the  pelvis.  If  there  is  an  undue  interval, — that  is, 
an  interval  exceeding  a  hand's  breadth  between  the  last  rib  and 
the  point  of  the  hips, — the  horse  will  be  certain  to  run  up  light  if 
subjected  to  work.  A  similar  incapacity  to  stand  hard  work  will 
be  found  in  horses  whose  posterior  ribs  are  wanting  in  due  length 
and  insufficient  arch.  In  the  former  case  the  animal  is  said  to  be 
slack,  and  in  the  latter  case  light  in  the  ribs. 

2770.  Q.  Describe  the  form  and  shape  of  a  good  pelvis. 
A.  The  pelvis  should  be  broad,  deep,  and  oblique,  and  its  spinous 
processes,  called  the  hips,  should  be  moderately  wide ;  but  they 
need  not  be  so  wide  as  to  be  unsightly,  or  to  give  the  appearance 
known  as  "ragged  hipped."  Breadth  and  depth  are  needed,  in 
order  to  give  space  for  and  attachment  to  the  muscles  of  the  hind- 
quarters. All  propelling  power  in  the  horse  is  derived  from  these 
muscles.  They  should  therefore  be  large  and  well  developed, 
and  it  is  essential  to  appearance  that  they  should  be  laid  smoothly 
and  evenly.  Obliquity  in  the  pelvis  is  needed  in  order  to  give 
due  length  to  the  quarters. 

2771.  Q.  Describe  the  form  of  the  loins.  A.  The  loins  should 
be  large,  well  arched,  and  fully  furnished  with  muscle.  The 
muscle  should  be  evenly  supplied,  so  that  the  outward  appearance 
may  be  smooth  and  round.  The  thighs  should  be  deep  and  full. 
There  should,  however,  be  sufficient  interval  between  them  to 
prevent  friction.  Horses  with  heavy,  thick  thighs  set  closely 
together  will  not  answer  for  fast  work.  A  want  of  muscular 
development,  such  as  is  indicated  by  the  animal  being  split  up 
behind,  is  most  objectionable. 

2772.  Q.  Describe  the  hind-quarters  generally.  A.  The  hind- 
quarters, taken  as  a  whole,  should  be  long,  deep,  full,  round 
externally,  and  placed  well  under  the  centre  of  gravity.  The 
portion  of  the  back  from  the  pelvis  to  the  tail  should  be  straight 

*and  long.  Due  length  in  this  part  is  essential  both  to  power  and 
to  appearance.  Length  from  pelvis  to  hock  is  essential  for 
speed  and  power  ;  the  muscles  will  be  thereby  increased  in  length 
and  volume,  and  the  animal  will  gain  in  power  and  speed. 

2773.  Q.  Describe  the  form  and  shape  of  the  hock.  A.  The 
outline  of  the  hock  should  be  clean,  rigid,  and  well  defined. 
PufEness  or  swelling  in  any  part  is  a  sign  of  weakness  or  disease. 
The  bones  should  be  large  and  prominent.     Size  is  essential  to 


SIPPOLOGY,  327 

strength,  and  prominence  is  necessary  in  order  to  afford  due  lever- 
age and  attachment  to  the  ligaments  and  tendons.  Large  and 
prominent  bones  are  usually  accompanied  by  large  and  well- 
developed  tendons  and  ligaments.  The  hock  as  seen  laterally 
should  be  wide  both  above  and  below.  Strength  and  size  of 
bones  and  ligaments  are  both  indicated  by  lateral  width. 

2774.  Q.  What  should  be  the  inclination  of  the  leg  from  the 
point  of  the  hock  down  ?  A.  It  should  be  inclined  a  little  under 
the  body — this  conformation  being  the  one  best  adapted  for  jump- 
ing and  speed,  because  it  allows  the  legs  to  be  brought  well  forward 
in  action.  If  the  leg  is  inclined  very  much  forward,  the  forma- 
tion becomes  weak,  because  the  great  bend  made  at  the  hock  will 
occasion  strain  on  the  ligaments  and  tendons  of  that  important 
structure. 

2775.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  when  the  leg  is  placed  perpendicu- 
larly under  the  hock  ?  A.  Excessive  concussion  and  great  strain, 
especially  in  halting  and  turning,  and  consequent  liability  to 
diseases  such  as  spavin,  bog-spavin,  and  thorough-pin. 

2776.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  when  the  leg  inclines  backwards? 
A.  The  horse  cannot  draw  it  well  under  his  body,  and  there  will 
be  want  of  propelling  power.  The  hock  will  be  liable  to  sprain, 
etc. 

2777.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  lateral  deviation  in  the  leg  from 
the  hock  down  ?  A.  When  the  hocks  are  inclined  either  too  much 
out  or  too  much  in,  they  are  very  liable  to  weakness  and  therefore 
disease.  In  the  first  case  the  horse  is  said  to  go  wide  behind  ;  in 
the  second  he  is  said  to  be  cow-hocked.  In  either  case  the  action 
is  defective  and  unsightly. 

2778.  Q.  What  should  be  the  formation  and  shape  of  the  os 
calcis  f  A.  It  should  be  well  developed,  very  prominent,  and 
isolated  as  it  were  from  the  substance  of  the  thigh,  in  order  to  give 
due  leverage  to  the  tendons  passing  over  it  and  attached  to  it, 
and  also  attachment  to  the  ligaments  belonging  to  it. 

2779.  Q.  Describe  the  form  and  shape  of  the  body.  A.  The 
body  should  be  long  and  low  ;  that  is,  it  should  stand  over  a  good 
deal  of  ground,  and  yet  be  deep  and  broad  in  all  parts.  The 
length  should  be  due  to  a  large,  long,  and  oblique  scapula  and 
long  quarters  ;  not  too  long  and  badly  coupled  loins.  Length  is 
essential  to  speed  and  breadth  to  endurance. 

2780.  Q.  Give  the  general  rules  for  determining  the  exact 
position  in  standing  by  means  of  a  plumb-line,  A.  1.  A  vertical ' 
line  falling  from  the  point  of  the  shoulder  should  meet  the  ground 
nearly  at  the  point  of  the  toe ;  if  it  meets  the  ground  much  in 
front  of  the  toe,  the  equilibrium  is  imperfect  and  the  horse  unsafe. 
If  it  falls  behind  the  foot,  the  horse  is  probably  long  in  the  fetlock 
and  with  low  heels,  and  he  will  in  consequence  be  very  liable  to 
sprain  of  the  ligaments  of  the  fetlock.  2.  A  vertical  line  falling 
from  the  middle  and  back  part  of  the  arm  should  equally  divide 


328 

the  knee,  cannon,  and  pastern,  and  should  reach  the  ground  a 
little  behind  the  heels.  If  the  line  falls  within  the  heels,  the  horse 
must  have  an  upright  pastern  ;  while  if  it  falls  at  a  considerable 
distance  behind  that  point,  the  pastern  is  unduly  long.  3.  A 
vertical  line  let  fall  from  the  middle  of  the  fore-arm  ought  to 
divide  equally  all  inferior  parts.  If  the  said  line  falls  more  exte- 
riorly, the  legs  are  too  close ;  while  if  it  falls  within,  the  legs  are 
too  wide  apart.  4.  If  the  said  line  divides  equally  the  knee  and 
leg  as  far  as  the  fetlock,  but  afterwards  falls  on  the  inside,  the 
toes  will  be  turned  out ;  while  "if  the  line  falls  more  exteriorly, 
the  horse  will  be  pigeon-toed. 

2781.  Q.  Why  is  the  cavalry  horse  required  to  be  of  uniform 
and  hardy  color  ?  A.  Uniform  and  hardy  color,  as,  for  instance,  a 
bright  bay  with  dark  legs,  or  a  rich  brown,  indicates  a  more  or  less 
vigorous  constitution  ?  while  lighter  shades  of  these  colors,  such 
as  a  common  brown  running  to  bay  about  the  legs  and  flanks,  or 
a  bay  with  light,  mealy  legs,  generally  indicate  weakness  of  con- 
stitution. The  explanation  of  this  peculiarity  is  said  to  be  that 
all  color  is  dependent  on  light  and  heat.  Now  the  heat  of  the 
body  is  greatly  dependent  on  the  circulation,  which  again  is 
dependent  on  the  vigor  of  the  constitution.  If  the  circulation  be 
weak,  there  will  be  a  want  of  tone  throughout  the  body  producing 
the  weakness  or  washiness  of  color.  This  weakness  will,  of  course, 
be  felt  especially  in  the  extremities  which  are  furthest  removed 
from  the  centre  of  circulation. 

2783.  Q.  What  information  is  required  in  preparing  the  descrip- 
tive  list  of  a  cavalry  horse?  A.  Color,  sex,  age,  fieight,  and 
distinctive  marks. 

2783.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  terms  star,  race,  snip,  and 
blaze  ?  A.  A  star  is  a  round  or  roundish  white  spot  on  the  fore- 
head. A  race  is  a  narrow  white  streak  down  the  face.  It  may 
be  a  continuation  of  a  star,  or  it  may  be  separate  and  distinct 
from  it.  It  may  be  straight  or  crooked.  A  snip  is  a  white  mark 
on  a  nostril  or  side  of  a  nostril  running  down  to  the  mouth.  It 
is  sometimes  continued  to  the  lower  lip.  The  part  is  often  devoid 
of  hair,  and  in  such  case  has  a  flesh-colored  appearance.  All  the 
marks  may  be  separate  or  they  may  be  combined.  A  blaze  con- 
sists in  the  whole  half  of  the  face  being  marked  by  a  broad  streak 
extending  to  the  mouth. 

2784.  Q.  In  addition  to  the  distinctive  marks,  such  as  star, 
race,  snip,  etc.,  what  others  should  be  mentioned  in  describing  a 
horse  ?  A.  White  legs  or  heels,  spots  of  any  color,  gray  hairs  in 
the  mane  or  tail,  or  about  the  body.  Blemishes,  if  any,  such  as 
saddle-marks,  scars,  broken  knees,  permanent  enlargements  about 
any  part. 

2785.  Q.  When  examining  a  horse  for  purchase,  what  is  the 
only  safe  rule  to  follow  as  to  soundness  ?  A.  Look  for  faults,  and 
reject  for  "any  one  really  bad  fault." 


HIPPOLOGY.  329 


PRINCIPLES  OF  SHOEING. 

2786.  Q.  What  is  the  principal  aim  of  all  shoeing?  A.  The 
preservation  of  the  outer  case  of  the  foot,  which  includes  :  1.  The 
preservation  of  the  crust  and  bars  whole  ;  2.  The  preservation  of 
the  frog ;  3.  The  preservation  of  the  sole. 

2787.  Q.  Describe  the  general  structure  of  the  foot.  A.  The 
foot  is  a  sensitive,  vascular  structure,  with  a  bone  or  rather  two 
bones,  and  a  portion  of  a  third  inclosed  within  its  outer  case. 
The  outer  case  consists  of :  1.  The'  crust  or  wall  and  the  bars ; 
2.  The  sole  ;  3.  The  frog. 

2788.  Q.  Describe  the  structure  of  the  crust  or  wall  of  the  foot. 
A.  It  consists  of  a  number  of  fibres  containing  a  soft,  cellular,- 
nutritive  material  running  down  longitudinally  from  the  crust. 
It  grows  from  the  thickened  skin  round  the  coronet,  as  the  finger- 
nail in  the  human  subject.  The  crust  is  overlaid  externally  by  a 
gluey,  glazed,  superficial  layer.  The  fibres  of  the  crust  contain 
the  above-mentioned  soft,  cellular  material  in  an  organized  form, 
perhaps  two  thirds  of  the  distance  down.  In  the  lower  portion, 
the  crust  becomes  dry  and  hard,  and  the  fibres  are  then  in  a 
condition,  first,  to  stand  wear,  and,  secondly,  they  are  in  a  state 
to  be  worn  off  by  friction  with  the  ground.  The  fibres  are  con- 
stantly being  removed  by  growth  from  above. 

2789.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  rasping  the  crust  high  up  where 
the  fibres  are  vitalized  ?  A.  Rasping  produces  two  evils  :  1.  The 
outer  and  strongest  layer  of  fibres  is  destroyed  ;  and,  2.  The 
gluey,  superficial  layer  which  overlies  the  outside  of  the  crust  is 
destroyed,  and  then  the  moisture  of  the  horn,  which  is  essential 
to  its  toughness,  escapes.  In  consequence,  the  horn  becomes 
brittle,  and  then  shrinks  and  contracts.  Again,  the  moisture 
having  escaped,  the  horn  becomes  hard.  In  this  condition  the 
horn  presses  unduly  on  the  vascular  and  sensitive  parts  within, 
especially  on  the  sensitive  laminae,  and  causes  them  to  become 
hot,  inflamed,  and  ultimately  diseased. 

2790.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  rasping  the  crust  below  the  point 
to  w^hich  vitality  extends  ?  A.  Two  evils  result— the  one  mechan- 
ical, the  other  vital  through  injury  to  the  mechanical  arrange- 
ment of  the  foot.  Since  the  width  of  the  crust,  including  the 
fibres  which  interlace  it  with  the  laminae,  may  be  said  to  be  about 
three  quarters  of  an  inch,  by  rasping  the  width  is  probably 
reduced  to  half  an  inch,  destroying  the  strongest  fibres.  Hence 
undue  concussion,  heat,  inflammation,  and  disease.  The  first 
portion  of  the  injury  is  mechanical  ;  the  second,  a  result  of  the 
mechanical  injury,  is  vital.  The  sensitive  internal  structures  are 
injured.  Moreover,  the  strongest  horn-fibres  having  been  des- 
troyed, the  nails  have  a  less  firm  hold,  and  consequently  the  shoe 
is  easily  pulled  off,  and  probably  a  considerable  portion  of  the 
weakened  crust  will  come  away  with  it. 


330  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMIIsTER. 

2791.  Q.  Why  do  farriers  rasp  the  crust?  A.  Because  they 
find  it  less  difficult  to  fit  the  foot  to  the  shoe  than  to  shape  the 
shoe  to  fit  the  foot. 

2792.  Q.  What  is  the  primary  essential  of  all  good  shoeing  as 
regards  the  crust  ?    A.  That  the  outside  of  the  crust  be  not  rasped. 

2793.  Q.  How  is  the  crust  to  be  lowered  without  causing  injury 
to  its  structure  ?  A.  By  removing  all  that  requires  to  be  removed 
from  the  ground  surface  of  the  crust  without  touching  the  superior 
part.  This  will  be  best  done  by  the  rasp  from  underneath,  though, 
if  the  crust  be  very  long,  the  knife  may  be  used.  After  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  has  been  removed,  the  ground  surface  must  be 
made  perfectly  level  for  the  reception  of  the  shoe  by  the  use  of 
'the  rasp.  The  strength  of  the  fibres  of  the  crust  will  not  be  in 
any  degree  lessened  by  shortening  them. 

2794.  Q.  What  should  be  done  to  prevent  splitting  of  the  crust 
after  having  lowered  it?  A.  After  lowering  and  levelling  the 
crust,  it  will  be  sharp  all  round  its  exterior  circle.  It  is  recom- 
mended that  this  sharp  or  feather  edge  of  the  crust  be  removed 
by  applying  the  rasp  from  below  to  the  under  edge  of  the  crust, 
and  drawing  it  round  so  as  to  produce  a  blunt  edge.  This  should 
be  invariably  done  before  applying  the  shoe  ;  and,  when  properly 
done,  no  marks  of  the  rasp  will  be  visible  above  the  rounding. 

2795.  Q.  Describe  the  bars  and  their  function.  A.  The  bars 
are  a  reduplication  inwards  of  the  crust  at  the  heels.  They  are 
stays  provided  by  nature  to  the  back  part  of  the  foot  against 
contraction.  The  continuity  of  the  circle  of  the  crust  is  broken 
at  the  heels  by  the  intervention  of  the  frog.  Here  some  stay  or 
buttress  is  needed  to  prevent  wiring  of  the  crust  of  the  heels. 

2796.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  cutting  them  away  to  open  the 
heel  ?  A.  It  results  in  contraction,  a  condition  opposite  to  the 
one  desired.  After  several  years  of  this  practice  the  bars  almost 
cease  to  exist,  since  pressure  and  weight  are  essential  to  their 
development. 

2797.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  paring  away  the  sole  from  the 
angle  between  the  crust  and  bars  ?  A.  Since  this  portion  of  the 
sole  is  intended  by  nature  to  assist  in  sustaining  the  bars  in  their 
proper  position,  paring  it  away  may  cause  the  bars  from  want  of 
due  and  natural  support  to  wire  in  towards  the  crust.  This  wiring 
produces  undue  pressure  on  the  seat  of  corn  situated  at  this  point, 
and  may  ultimately  induce  corn. 

2798.  Q.  Describe  the  sole  of  the  foot.  A.  The  sole  consists 
of  two  layers,  an  outer  and  insensitive,  and  an  inner  or  upper  and 
sensitive  layer.  Immediately  above  the  upper  and  sensitive  layer 
is  the  coffin-bone,  or  os  pedis.  Hence  the  sensitive  sole  is  placed  be- 
tween two  hard  substances,  namely,  the  low^er  insensitive  layer 
and  the  bone  of  the  foot.  Thus,  if  undue  pressure  comes  on 
the  lower  layer,  the  upper  and  sensitive  layer  will  be  crushed 
between  the  two  hard  substances,  and  great  pain  and  perhaps 


HIPPOLOGY.  331 

inflammation  will  ensue.  The  sole  is  not  constructed  for  sustain- 
ing weight,  except  at  its  junction  with  the  crust  or  wall,  where  it 
is  thickest  and  strongest.  Its  fibres  are  composed  of  softer  horn- 
cells  than  those  of  the  crust ;  nor  is  it  intended  for  sustaining 
pressure  except  at  this  particular  point.  It  is  a  recessed  surface, 
and  is  therefore  not  intended  to  be  exposed  to  pressure.  While 
the  crust  is  worn  away  by  friction  with  the  ground,  the  sole, 
which  from  its  recessed  position  is  not  exposed  to  any  such  wear, 
of  its  own  accord,  from  some  peculiarity  in  the  material  com- 
posing its  fibres,  exfoliates  in  flakes  when  its  outer  surface 
becomes  effete. 

2799.  Q.  From  what  mechanical  causes  may  undue  pressure  be 
brought  on  the  sole?  A.  1.  From  paring  away  the  outer  or 
insensitive  layer,  which  renders  it  incapable  of  duly  protecting 
the  sensitive  sole  ;  and,  2.  From  mutilation  of  the  crust  and  frog. 

2800.  Q.  Explain  how  undue  pressure  may  be  brought  on  the 
sensitive  sole  as  a  result  of  paring.  A.  The  farrier  cuts  away  the 
insensitive  sole  under  the  erroneous  impression  that  if  not 
removed  it  accumulates,  becomes  very  hard,  and  causes  pressure 
on  the  sensitive  sole,  and  this  cutting  is  carried  on  to  the  point 
at  which  the  insensitive  sole  will  yield  to  the  pressure  of  the 
thumb.  The  actual  result  is  undue  pressure  caused  by  the  dry- 
ing and  shrinking  up  of  the  remaining  fibres  of  the  insen- 
sitive sole,  which  become  very  hard  instead  of  soft  and  moist, 
having  at  once  lost  the  protection  of  the  outer  fibres  instead  of 
gradually  when  no  longer  required. 

2801.  Q.  How  may  the  sensitive  sole  be  subjected  to  undue 
pressure  from  the  mutilation  of  the  crust  and  frog  ?  A.  The 
frog  and  the  crust  or  wall  of  the  foot  are  intended  by  nature  to 
sustain  the  greater  part  of  the  whole  weight  of  the  frame.  If 
the  crust  be  weakened  by  rasping  and  thereby  rendered  insuffi- 
cient to  sustain  the  weight,  a  portion  of  the  weight  will  come  on 
the  sole  at  the  part  not  intended  by  nature  to  bear  weight  or 
pressure.  A  similar  effect  is  produced  by  the  mutilation  of  the 
frog.  The  frog  is  intended  by  nature  to  sustain  a  large  portion 
of  the  weight  of  the  animal. 

2802.  Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  the  frog  ?  A.  The  frog  is 
intended  by  nature  for  pressure  and  friction,  and  under  the  influ- 
ence of  its  natural  use  will  thrive,  develop,  and  become  strong. 
Without  pressure  and  friction  it  will  shrink  up  and  dwindle 
away,  and  almost  cease  to  exist.  The  healthy,  well-developed, 
and  strong  frog  has  three  principal  uses  :  1.  By  receiving  on 
itself  a  large  portion  of  the  jar  and  concussion  due  to  the  move- 
ments of  the  animal,  it  transmits  the  same  to  other  portions  of 
the  frame  in  a  greatly  diminished  degree.  2.  By  its  elasticity  and 
wedge  shape  it  acts  as  a  stay  on  the  ground  against  slippii 
3.  It  acts  as  a  support  to  the  coffin-joint,  especially  to 
of  the  navicular  bone. 


332  THE   AEMY   OFFlCER^S   EXAMIKER. 

2803.  Q.  Discuss  the  shape  of  the  foot  generally,  and  the 
apparent  reasons  therefor.  A.  The  shape  of  a  good  foot  at  its 
lower  or  ground  surface  approaches  that  of  the  circle.  The  crust 
should  grow  down  at  an  angle  of  between  50  and  52  degrees. 
The  ground  surface  has  doubtless  been  made  circular,  because 
that  form  affords  within  a  given  circumference  a  greater  weight- 
bearing  space  than  any  other.  Other  circumstances,  however, 
require  a  slight  modification  of  the  circular  form.  The  continu- 
ity of  the  circle  is  somewhat  broken  at  the  heels  by  the  insertion 
of  the  wedge-shaped  frog,  and  anteriorly  it  is  somewhat  squared 
off  by  the  wearing  down  of  the  toes.  Again,  the  circular  form  is 
less  perfect  on  the  inner  than  on  the  outer  side,  because  the  crust 
is  thinner  on  the  inside  than  on  the  outside  and  more  upright. 

2804.  Q.  What  advantages  are  gained  by  the  diminution  of  the 
thickness  of  the  crust  on  the  inside  and  by  its  uprightness? 
A.  1.  The  chance  of  interference  of  one  foot  with  the  other  is 
lessened.  2.  Greater  elasticity  is  afforded,  thus  obviating  the 
greater  concussion  which  falls  on  the  inside  due  to  the  greater 
weight  falling  on  that  side. 

2805.  Q.  In  considering  the  strength  required  on  the  inside  of 
the  foot,  what  three  points  should  be  borne  in  mind?  A.  1,  Weight 
falls  more  perpendicularly  on  the- inside  than  the  outside  of  the 
foot,  and  the  two  inside  crusts  are  more  directly  under  the  centre 
of  gravity  than  the  two  outside  crusts.  2.  The  two  inside  crusts 
are  nearer  each  other  than  the  two  outside  crusts,  and  therefore 
each  requires  less  strength.  3.  The  fibres  of  the  crusts  on  the 
inside  are  more  perpendicular  than  those  of  the  outside,  and  are 
thereby  better  placed  for  sustaiiiing  weight. 

2806.  Q.  Should  the  feet  be  pairs,  and  if  not  what  inference 
should  be  drawn  from  the  fact?  A.  They  should  be  pairs,  any 
difference  in  size  between  the  fore-feet  or  between  the  two  hind- 
feet  is  almost  sure  and  certain  sign  of  disease,  either  past  or  pres- 
ent, in  the  foot  or  in  some  part  of  the  limb  directly  or  indirectly 
connected  with  it,  or  of  some  irregularity  of  action. 

DETAILS    OF   SHOEING. 

3807.  Q.  What  should  properly  be  the  breadth  of  the  fore-shoe? 
A.  The  crust  or  wall  of  the  foot,  including  the  substance  inter- 
vening between  the  crust  proper  and  the  sensitive  laminae  is 
about  three  fourths  of  an  inch.  This  is  the  proper  weight-bearing 
structure  of  the  foot.  The  shoe  should  then  be  as  wide  as  the 
weight-bearing  structure  ;  and,  since  it  must  rest  not  on  a  part, 
but  on  the  whole  of  this  structure,  it  must  be  made  flat  towards  the 
foot.  A  greater  width  of  shoe  than  that  stated  above  isust  less  and 
objectionable,  in  that  it  will  afford  a  receptacle  for  dirt,  gravel, 
etc.,  to  lodge,  and  will  also  render  the  shoe  liable  to  be  sucked  off 
in  deep  mud.      The  shoe  should  be  of  even  width  until  it  ap- 


HIPPOLOGY.  333 

proaches  the  heels.  Towards  the  heels,  where  the  crust  gradually 
comes  to  a  point  at  its  junction  with  the  bars,  the  shoe  must  also 
come  to  a  poiut,  the  inner  edge  of  its  heel  exactly  following  and 
resting  on  the  bars. 

2808.  Q.  What  should  govern  the  thickness  and  weight  of  the 
shoe  ?  A.  Since  the  growth  of  the  foot  renders  it  necessary  that 
the  shoe  be  refitted  at  the  end  of  a  month,  the  thickness  and 
weight  of  the  shoe  will  be  governed  entirely  by  the  work  required, 
the  peculiarity  of  the  wear  of  the  shoe  in  each  case,  and  the  char- 
acter of  the  ground  on  which  the  horse  is  worked,  allowing  in 
addition  a  small  amount  for  contingencies. 

2809.  Q.  Describe  the  under  or  ground  surface  of  the  shoe.  A. 
The  ground  surface  of  the  shoe  should  be  concave.  This  is  the 
form  in  whicli  nature  has  moulded  the  horse's  foot.  A  concave 
ground  surface  has  a  great  practical  advantage,  inasmuch  as  the 
shoe  gets  a  much  greater  hold  on  the  ground,  and  the  horse  is 
therefore  less  liable  to  slip  or  pick  stones. 

2810.  Q.  What  determines  the  length  of  the  shoes?  A.  The 
length  is  determined  by  the  length  of  the  crust.  The  shoe  must 
be  the  exact  and  full  length  of  the  crust.  If  shorter  than  the 
crust,  the  heels  of  the  shoe  will  be  apt  to  press  upon  and  dig 
into  the  seat  of  corn.  If  made  longer  than  the  crust,  the  hind- 
shoes  may  catch  in  the  heels  of  the  fore-shoes  and  pull  them  off. 

2811.  Q.  Describe  the  manner  of  fitting  the  shoe.  A.  The 
crust  having  been  lowered  by  the  rasp,  and  rendered  smooth  and 
its  sharp  edge  rounded  off  by  the  rasp,  the  shoe  must  then  be  so 
fitted  that  its  outer  edge  corresponds  exactly  with  the  crust.  It 
must  not  be  smaller  than  the  crust,  nor  overlap  it  in  the  slightest 
degree.  If  the  shoe  is  too  small,  the  crust  would  have  to  be  rasped 
down  to  it ;  if  too  large,  treads  and  other  injuries  may  result. 
The  shoe  must  be  moulded  to  fit  the  foot. 

2812.  Q.  Describe  the  manner  of  removing  the  old  shoes.  A. 
The  clenches  should  be  cut  carefully  without  injury  to  the  crust, 
and  then  each  nail  should  be  drawn  separately. 

2813.  Q.  How  many  nails  are  required  to  fasten  the  shoe, 
and  how  determined  ?  A. "  The  fewest  that  will  retain  the  shoe 
securely  in  its  place.  The  number  depends  on  various  consider- 
ations— such  as  size  of  foot,  soundness  and  toughness  of  crust, 
accuracy  of  fitting  of  the  shoe,  and  the  nature  of  the  ground  on 
which  the  horse  is  to  be  worked.  For  riding-horses  witli  sound 
crust  and  accurately  fitting  shoe,  five  nails  will  be  found  sufficient ; 
namely,  three  on  the  outside,  and  two  on  the  inside  of  the  shoe. 

2814.  Q.  Where  should  the  nails  be  placed  in  the  shoe,  and 
why  ?  A.  Since  the  greater  wear  of  the  shoe  comes  on  the  toe, 
it  is  obvious  that  by  placing  the  nails  at  the  toe  their  heads  will 
soon  wear  out,  and  consequently  their  hold  greatly  diminish 
— hence  the  first  nail  on  the  outside  should  be  placed  just 
back  of  the  point  of  extra  wear,  and  the  other  two  nails  on 


334 

that  side  should  divide  evenly  the  distance  from  the  first  nail  to 
the  lieels.  On  the  inside,  on  which  there  should  be  only  two  nails, 
the  second  nail  should  be  placed  exactly  opposite  the  second  nail 
on  the  outside,  as  nails  placed  exactly  opposite  each  other  have 
greater  liolding  power  than  when  placed  irregularly. 

2815.  Q.  How  should  the  nails  be  driven  in  the  foot?  A.  The 
nails  should  be  so  driven  as  not  to  bend  them  in  the  crust,  and 
be  brought  out  about  an  inch  above  the  shoe.  If  brought  out 
higher,  there  will  be  risk  of  injury  to  the  sensitive  part  of  the 
horn.  If  lower,  they  will  not  get  sufficient  hold.  The  heel-nails 
may  be  brought  out  somewhat  lower  than  the  toe  and  quarter 
nails. 

2816.  Q.  What  is  the  advantage  gained  by  countersinking  the 
nail-heads  in  the  shoe  ?  A.  The  nail-heads  are  thus  made  to 
wear  evenly  with  the  shoe,  if  the  countersinking  is  accurately 
done.  No  portion  of  the  thin  part  of  the  nail  should  be  in  the 
shoe,  nor  any  portion  of  the  thick  part  in  the  crust.  The  thin 
part  should  begin  where  the  nail  quits  the  shoe  to  enter  the  crust. 

2817.  Q.  Describe  the  manner  of  clenching  the  nail.  A. 
Clenching  is  the  technical  term  for  turning  down  the  end  of  the 
nail  after  it  has  been  driven  through  the  crust.  The  nail  should 
be  broken  off  as  short  as  possible,  and  turned  down  and  flattened 
with  a  hammer.  The  rasp  should  not  be  api)lied  to  the  clench. 
Any  filing  will  weaken  it,  and  may  cause  it  to  break  off.  It 
should  be  flattened  with  the  hammer  ;  where  the  crust  is  thin 
and  brittle,  it  may  be  advisable  to  rasp  the  underneath  side  of 
the  clench,  so  as  to  make  it  bend  easier. 

2818.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  "nail-bound"?  A.  It 
is  applied  to  irritation  of  the  feet,  occasioning  slight  lameness 
from  the  nails  having  been  driven  too  near  the  quick.  The 
remedy  consists  in  carefully  drawing  the  nails  and  replacing  them 
by  others  driven  more  carefully. 

2819.  Q.  What  are  tips  ?  A.  A  tip  is  a  piece  of  iron  designed 
to  cover  the  toe  and  anterior  portion  only  of  the  quarter  while 
the  heels  and  bars  are  left  uncovered  or  unprotected.  The  length 
of  the  tip  should  be  one  half  that  of  the  ordinary  shoe. 

2820.  Q.  What  are  the  advantages  gained  by  the  use  of  tips  ? 
A.  1.  Freedom  is  secured  to  the  heels,  which  are  the  most  com- 
mon seat  of  contraction.  2.  Concussion,  and  the  diseases  which 
arise  from  it,  must  be  greatly  diminished  by  substituting  the 
natural  action  of  the  heels  and  frog  for  the  jar  of  the  iron  shoe 
against  the  ground.  3.  The  heels  and  frog  are  strengthened  and 
developed  by  being  brought  more  actively  and  prominently  into 
work  and  wear.     4.  The  liability  to  slip  is  much  lessened. 

2821.  Q.  What  are  the  principal  objections  urged  against  tips  ? 
A.  1.  That  they  do  not  afford  sufficient  protection  to  the  foot ; 
that  a  horse,  for  instance,  cannot  travel  safely  over  stones.     2. 


HIPPOLOGY.  335 

It  is  urged  that  with  hard  roads  and  hard  work  the  heels  and 
frogs  will  wear  away. 

2833.  Q.  Describe  what  is  known  as  the  Charlier  method  of 
shoeing.  A.  The  Charlier  system  consists  in  fitting  a  narrow 
rim  of  iron  into  a  groove  cut  round  the  lower  margin  of  the  crust 
of  the  hoof  by  means  of  a  special  knife  protected  by  a  movable 
guide.  The  shoe  is  made  less  than  one  half  an  inch  in  width  at 
the.  toe,  narrowing  gradually  and  becoming  thinner  as  it  ap- 
proaches the  heels,  and  shorter  than  the  ordinary  shoe.  The 
inner  and  upper  edge  of  the  shoe  is  rounded  off  to  prevent  injury 
to  the  adjacent  sensitive  structure.  The  nail-holes  are  made 
oval  to  prevent  splitting  or  spreading  out  of  the  narrow  rim  of 
metal.  The  heads  of  the  nails  should  be  of  the  same  shape,  and 
fit  well  in  the  holes.  For  ordinary  feet  four  nails  are  sufficient. 
At  the  first  shoeing  the  groove  in  the  crust  should  be  made  rather 
shallow,  and  the  shoe  should  be  let  in  only  half  its  depth.  At 
each  shoeing  thereafter  the  groove  may  be  cut  deeper,  until 
eventually  the  under  surface  of  the  shoe  is  flush  with  the  sole. 
Tiie  shoe  must  be  fitted  hot,  as  it  is  important  that  it  should  have 
a  level  bed  to  rest  on,  and  it  must  fit  the  groove  perfectly.  The 
shoes  are  not  well  adapted  to  the  hind-feet. 

2823.  Q.  What  are  the  advantages  claimed  for  the  Charlier 
method  of  shoeing  ?  A.  Preservation  of  the  natural  condition 
and  functions  of  the  foot.  It  is  valuable  if  judiciously  applied, 
in  cases  where  from  previous  mutilation  or  other  causes  it  would 
be  difficult,  if  not  nnpossible,  to  bring  the  frog  to  the  ground;  in 
cases  of  contracted  feet,  weak  heels,  ossified  cartilages,  brush, 
etc.,  provided  the  hoof  is  strong.     It  is  unsuited  to  flat  feet. 

2824.  Q.  What  general  principles  govern  the  shoeing  of  the 
hind-feet?  A.  The  general  principles  are  the  same  as  those 
which  regulate  the  shoeing  of  the  fore-feet.  The  crust  must  not 
be  rasped,  the  sole  must  not  be  pared  out,  the  frog  must  not  be 
mutilated,  and  the  shoe  must  be  accurately  fitted.  Since  the 
crust  or  wall  of  the  hind-foot  is  thinner,  i.e.,  narrower  than  the 
fore-foot,  the  web  of  the  shoe  must  also  be  narrower.  It  should 
not  exceed  one  half  inch,  which  is  the  width  of  the  crust. 

Seats  and  Saddles. 

the  frame-work  of  the  horse  considered  from  a  mechanical 
point  of  view. 

.  2825.  Q,  Give  a  brief  description  of  the  inclination  of  the  pro- 
cesses of  the  spinal  column  of  the  horse.  A.  Looking  at  the 
spinal  column,  the  frame-work  of  the  back,  on  which  the  rider's 
weight  is  placed,  we  perceive  that,  while  the  under  line  of  the 
vertebraB  is  nearly  straight,  although  not  quite  horizontal,  in- 
clining somewhat  towards  the  forehand,  the  spinal  processes  of 


336  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

the  first  thirteen  vertebrae  of  the  back  (dorsal  vertebrae^  reckon- 
ing from  the  point  where  the  neck  is  attached,  incline  backwards, 
whereas  those  of  the  fifteenth,  sixteenth,  seventeenth,  and  eigh- 
teenth dorsal  vertebrae,  and  the  six  lumbar  vertebra,  incline 
forwards,  the  fourteenth  dorsal  vertebra,  with  its  process,  stand- 
ing perfectly  upright. 

2826.  Q.  What  mechanical  contrivance  may  it  be  assumed  to 
resemble?  A.  The  arch  ;  the  fourteenth  vertebra  and  its  pro- 
cess forming  the  keystone. 

2827.  Q.  What  is  this  inclination  of  the  processes  of  the 
vertebrae  towards  a  central  point  intended  to  do  as  regards  mo- 
tion ?  A.  It  limits  the  motion  of  the  back  downwards  and  up- 
wards (i.e.,  vertically). 

2828.  Q.  What  vertebra  is  the  centre  of  motion  of  the  horse's 
body  ?  A.  The  fourteenth  ;  the  point  about  which  the  several 
movements  of  the  fore  and  hind  legs  are  performed  with  various 
degrees  of  rapidity,  either  simultaneously  or  successively. 

2829.  Q.  What  do  these  movements  of  the  fore  and  hind  legs 
about  this  point  constitute  ?    A.  The  various  paces  of  the  horse. 

2830.  Q.  How  is  it  further  shown  that  this  vertebra  is  the 
point  about  which  these  various  movements  are  performed  ?  A. 
By  the  distribution  and  points  of  attachment  of  the  muscles  of 
the  back  and  adjacent  parts  of  the  fore  and  hind  quarters. 

2831.  Q.  Patting  the  progressive  movement  of  the  animal  out 
of  the  question,  as  being  equally  applicable  to  all  its  parts,  in 
what  proportion  does  the  internal  motion  of  the  several  parts  of 
the  body  increase  ?  A.  In  proportion  to  their  distance  from  the 
fourteenth  vertebra. 

2832.  Q.  How  does  this  affect  burdens  placed  on  the  animal's 
back  ?  A.  The  same  is  applicable  to  burdens  placed  on  the 
horse's  back,  especially  a  rider  whose  frame  is  subject  to  its  own 
peculiar  motions,  some  of  which  are  caused  by  the  progressive 
movement  of  the  bearer. 

2833.  Q.  Examining  the  horse  standing  at  ease,  what  facts  in 
regard  to  the  fore  and  hind  legs  are  indicated  ?  A.  That  the  fore- 
legs are  essentially  bearers  ;  and  that  the  hinder  ones,  although 
chiefly  propellers,  are  also  to  a  certain  extent  bearers. 

2834.  Q.  What  in  regard  to  the  centre  of  gravity  ?  A.  That  a 
perpendicular  line  falling  through  the  centre  of  gravity  would 
lie  nearer  the  shoulder  than  the  perpendicular  falling  through 
the  centre  of  motion,  and  would  probably  cut  the  twelfth  or 
perhaps  the  eleventh  vertebra  in  some  horses. 

2835.  Q.  How  does  the  distribution  of  the  weight  to  be  carried 
affect  the  horse's  speed  ?  A.  In  action  the  fore-legs  are  chiefly 
bearers,  and  only  in  a  small  degree  propellers,  while  the  hind-legs 
act  chiefly  as  propellers;  hence  the  propelling  powers  of  the  hind- 
legs  may  be  favored  by  weighting  forwards  within  certain  limits  ; 
while  weighting  too  far  forwards  makes  the  fove-legs  exclusively 


HIPPOLOGT.  337 

bearers,  thus  interfering  seriously  with  the  lifting  action  of  the 
forehand,  and  this  occurring  simultaneously  with  the  propulsion 
from  the  hind-quarters,  the  animal  is  in  danger  of  falling  for- 
wards. Weighting  too  far  back  diminishes  the  propelling  power 
of  the  hind-legs,  by  converting  them  in  a  great  degree  into 
bearers,  thus  diminishing  the  speed. 

2836.  Q.  How  does  action  affect  equilibrium  and  balance  in 
walking  and  trotting  ?  A.  In  walking  and  trotting  the  horse 
moves  its  diagonal  legs  simultaneously,  or  nearly  so  ;  that  is  to 
say,  the  off  fore  and  the  near  hind  leg  move  together  and  alter- 
nate in  this  action  with  the  near  fore  and  off  hind  ones  ;  so  that 
while  the  one  pair  is  being  moved  forwards  the  other  sustains 
the  weight  of  the  animal ;  and  supposing  the  horse  to  be  in 
equilihrio  or  balance,  it  might  be  supposed  that  the  perpendicular 
line  passing  through  the  centre  of  gravity  would  fall  exactly  in 
the  centre  of  the  line  connecting  the  fore  and  hind  foot  that 
remains  on  the  ground.  But  this  is  not  the  case  except  for  the 
moment  the  movement  is  half  completed. 

2837.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  action  on  equilibrium  in  canter- 
ing and  galloping  ?  A.  In  cantering  and  galloping,  the  two  legs 
at  the  same  side  are  advanced  simultaneously,  the  other  two 
remaining  behind.  Supposing  the  animal  to  be  in  equilibrium, 
we  observe  the  following  to  occur  :  the  horse  "  leads  "  with  the 
two  off  feet  ;  that  is,  canters  on  the  right  hand,  the  two  near 
ones  remaining  behind  so  long  as  he  remains  on  this  hand  ;  there 
is,  therefore,  not  the  same  alternate  vibration  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  from  right  to  left,  and  vice  versa,  as  in  trotting  and 
walking,  for  it  is  always  the  same  pair  of  feet  that  mainly  sup- 
port the  weight. 

2838.  Q.  How  does  absence  of  perfect  equilibrium  affect  the 
action  of  the  horse  ?  A.  Where  it  does  not  exist,  a  horse  is  either 
liable  to  overstep — that  is,  when  weighted  too  far  forward — or  to 
step  short  when  weighted  too  far  back.  When  a  horse  oversteps 
with  his  hind-leg  the  track  of  the  fore  feet,  the  succession  of  full 
lines  connecting  the  diagonal  feet  in  each  alternate  movement  is 
not  continuous,  but  broken;  there  is,  therefore,  an  interval  of  time 
during  which  the  weight  of  the  horse  and  rider  is  not  supported 
diagonally,  but  vibrates,  as  it  were,  from  one  fixed  basis  to  a 
more  forward  one.  The  animal  is  off  the  ground  with  all  four 
legs  for  a  moment  in  rapid  trotting,  for  instance ;  the  conse- 
quence is,  that  there  must  be  less  stability,  and  we  know  from 
experience  that,  when  this  is  carried  to  a  great  extent,  the  horse 
"overreaches,"  and  is  in  danger  of  coming  down. 

2839.  Q.  For  military  purposes,  what  position  should  the  centre 
of  gravity  of  the  horse  and  rider  have  with  reference  to  the  centre 
of  motion  ?  A.  They  should  coincide,  to  enable  the  cavalryman 
to  turn  in  sharp  curves  at  the  higher  degrees  of  speed. 

2840.  Q.  How  does  the  construction  of  the  horse's  legs  and  the 


338  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

relative  position  of  the  various  bones  composing  them  furnish 
clear  proof  that  the  fourteenth  vertebra  is  the  real  centre  of  mo- 
tion, both  at  rest  and  in  action  ?  A.  There  is  one  bone  in  each 
of  the  hind  and  fore  legs  through  which  the  remainder  of  the 
limb  acts  as  a  lever  on  the  whole  frame,  either  for  the  purpose  of 
propelling  (hind-legs)  or  of  supporting  and  lifting  it  (fore-legs). 
They  are  the  thigh-bone  and  the  arm-bone,  whose  upper  ends 
have  their  fulcrum  or  points  of  support  in  the  hip-bones  and 
shoulder-blades  respectively,  the  power  being  applied  through 
the  medium  of  the  remaining  portion  of  the  legs  at  their  lower 
ends.  The  greatest  result  of  lever-action  is  exercised  at  right 
angles  to  the  lever. 

2841.  Q.  With  respect  to  the  arm-bone  and  thigh-bone,  what 
should  be  particularly  observed  in  the  examination  of  a  horse  ? 
A.  That  the  arm-bones  and  thigh-bones  should  lie  at  right  angles 
01  nearly  so  to  the  shoulder-blades  and  hip-bones  respectively, 
which  is  recognized  by  the  form  of  the  haunch  and  what  is  called 
a  "good  shoulder,"  the  length  of  the  blade  and  its  power  depend- 
ing on  these  particulars  to  a  great  extent. 

2842.  Q.  How  do  the  principal  muscles  and  their  arrangement 
further  prove  that  the  fourteenth  vertebra  is  the  centre  of  motion  ? 
A.  The  principal  muscles  of  the  back,  loins,  hips,  and  shoulders 
coalesce  into  the  large,  flat  tendon  covering  the  portion  of  the 
back  pointed  out  as  the  centre  of  motion.  The  tendon  has  no 
contractile  power,  and  the  corresponding  sets  of  muscles  of  the 
fore  and  back  hand  exert  their  contractile  powers  upon  it  in 
opposite  directions  while  it  remains  stationary. 

2843.  Q.  Where  will  the  weight  of  the  rider  be  best  met? 
A.  The  weight  of  the  rider  will  be  best  met  when  it  acts  in  the 
opposite  direction  to  the  resultant  of  the  two  forces  exerted  to 
support  and  propel  it,  and  this  position  would  in  most  horses 
be  over  the  centre  of  motion  ;  but  as  in  many  horses  the  two  forces 
of  the  fore  and  hind  legs  may  not  be  equal  in  intensity,  the  judi- 
cious rider  must  endeavor  to  find  the  proper  balance  of  forces, 
and  place  himself  over  that  point. 


THE  SADDLE,    AND   ITS  INFLUENCE  ON  THE  SEAT. 

2844.  Q.  What  general  mechanical  principle  applies  to  the 
shape  of  the  surface  of  the  saddle  coming  in  contact  with  the 
horse's  back  ?  A.  That  the  larger  the  surface  over  which  a  given 
amount  of  pressure  is  equally  divided,  the  less  will  be  the  action 
on  any  given  point  of  the  other  surface  in  contact ;  that  is  to  say, 
the  under  surface  of  the  saddle  should  bear  as  nearly  as  possible 
the  same  relation  to  that  part  of  the  horse's  back  it  is  intended  to 
occupy  as  a  mould  does  to  a  cast  that  is  taken  from  it,  with  the 
exception  of  the  back-bone,  which  should  never  be  in  contact. 


HIPPOLOGY.  339 

2845.  Q.  What  general  mechanical  principle  applies  to  the  size 
or  extent  of  the  under  surface  of  the  saddle  ?  A.  That  the  greater 
this  is  with  a  given  weight,  the  less  will  be  the  pressure  on  any- 
given  point,  provided  always  that  the  pressure  be  equally  dis- 
tributed over  the  whole  surface. 

2846.  Q.  What  would  be  the  result  of  attempting  to  make  one 
portion  of  the  saddle  come  into  closer  contact  than  another? 
A.  Since  the  cohesion  between  two  surfaces  is  produced  by  the 
sum  total  of  the  pressure,  concentrating  the  pressure  on  one  point 
does  not  increase  the  cohesion,  but  is  more  likely  to  produce  a  sore 
back. 

2847.  Q.  What  should  govern  the  size  of  a  saddle  ?  A.  The 
size  should  be  proportioned  to  the  weight  to  be  carried. 

2848.  Q.  How  may  the  weight  of  the  saddle  be  decreased  with- 
out making  the  side-bars  too  narrow  ?  A.  By  not  extending  the 
tree  beyond  the  surfaces  where  it  really  has  to  support  pressure  ; 
and  the  use  of  materials  combining  great  strength  and  moderate 
elasticity  w^ith  the  least  possible  weight. 

2849.  Q.  Suppose  the  saddle  to  have  the  proper  form  and  size, 
how  should  the  rider  sit  in  it  to  divide  and  spread  his  weight 
equally  over  its  bearing  surface  ?  A.  The  rider's  centre  of  gravity 
should  be  exactly  over  the  centre  of  the  bearing  surface  of  the 
saddle,  for  this  is  the  only  single  point  which,  being  loaded, 
transmits  the  pressure  equally  to  the  rest  of  the  surface. 

2850.  Q.  Give  a  practical  illustration  of  this.  A.  Place  a 
small  common  table  exactly  level  on  sand,  grass,  or  soft  ground. 
Put  a  weight  exactly  in  the  centre  of  the  table,  and  when  meas- 
ured it  will  be  found,  if  the  surface  on  which  the  table  stands  is 
equally  soft  throughout,  that  the  depth  penetrated  by  the  feet  is 
equal.  Remove  the  weight  towards  one  end  :  the  pair  of  feet 
nearest  the  weight  will  penetrate  much  deeper  than  the  others. 
Therefore,  in  order  to  equalize  the  pressure,  the  rider's  weight 
should  be  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  saddle. 

2851.  Q.  Give  an  illustration  of  the  result  of  placing  the  rider's 
weight  near  or  on  the  hinder  end  of  the  saddle.  A.  Place  a 
piece  of  stout  board  about  two  feet  long  on  soft  ground.  Stand 
on  one  end  of  it,  and  it  will  be  found  that  the  other  end  loses 
contact  with  the  ground  and  is  more  or  less  tilted  up  in  the  air  : 
the  board  has  become  a  lever.  Make  a  motion  as  if  about  to 
jump,  but  without  quitting  your  position  on  the  board  :  the  board, 
being  out  of  contact  with  the  ground  at  the  farther  end,  will  be 
shoved  onwards  in  that  direction.  This  is  precisely  what  happens 
when  a  rider  sits  at  one  end  of  the  saddle,  generally  the  hinder 
one :  this  one  is  pressed  down  into  the  horse's  back  ;  the  other, 
generally  the  front  end,  is  tilted  up ;  and  at  every  movement  of 
the  horse  and  rider  the  whole  saddle  is  shoved  forwards  till  stopped 
by  the  withers,  wiiich  it  will  probably  w^ound. 

2852.  Q.  Suppose  the  saddle  placed  wdth  its  centre  exactly  over 


340  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIIS^ER. 

the  combined  centres  of  gravity  and  motion,  and  the  rider  in  the 
centre  of  it,  what  would  be  the  results?  A.  First,  an  equable 
distribution  of  the  combined  weight  of  horse  and  rider  on  all 
four  legs,  both  in  a  state  of  rest  and  in  action.  Second,  the  move- 
ments of  the  horse,  centring  in  this  point,  have  the  least  possible 
tendency  to  disturb  the  seat  of  the  rider  or  the  position  of  the 
saddle.  Third,  the  weight  of  the  rider,  being  equably  distributed 
over  the  whole  surface  of  the  saddle  in  contact  with  the  horse's 
back,  is  therefore  less  likely  to  injure  any  portion  of  this  surface, 
or  to  convert  the  saddle  into  a  lever  and  shove  it  forwards  or 
backwards. 

2853.  Q.  Suppose  the  saddle  placed  as  before,  but  the  rider 
sitting  altogether  at  its  rear  end,  what  would  result  ?  A.  First,  the 
horse's  equilibrium  is  destroyed.  Second,  the  rider  himself,  being 
nearer  to  the  hind-legs,  will  receive  an  impulse  from  the  direction 
of  the  haunches,  and  be  thrown  forwards  till  he  meets  that  coming 
from  the  direction  of  the  shoulders  ;  and  these  two  forces,  instead 
of  resolving  each  other  from  one  common  point  into  their  sura 
total,  neutralize  each  other  partially  in  successive  shocks  at  the 
expense  of  the  horse's  legs.  The  rider  transmits  the  shock  from 
the  hind-legs  to  the  fore  ones,  shoving  the  saddle  forwards,  it 
being  impossible  to  so  tighten  the  girth  as  to  prevent  the  saddle 
from  tilting  up  in  front.  Third,  his  weight  is  not  distributed 
equally  over  the  whole  under  surface  of  the  saddle,  and  the 
general  result  would  be,  in  time,  sore  back  and  an  unserviceable 
horse. 

2854.  Q.  With  regard  to  the  muscles  of  the  fore  and  back  hand, 
what  should  be  considered  in  placing  the  saddle?  A.  That  it 
should  interfere  the  least  possible  with  their  action. 

2855.  Q.  Explain  why  this  should  be  so.  A.  The  back  is 
covered  with  a  broad  tendon  into  which  the  muscles  of  the  fore 
and  back  hand  are  inserted,  and  on  which  their  contractile  action 
is  exercised.  The  saddle  should  not  extend  much,  if  at  all, 
beyond  the  limits  of  this  flat  tendon,  because  by  doing  so  it  will 
impede  more  or  less  the  free  action  of  the  muscles,  whereas  the 
tendon  is  rather  assisted  than  impeded  in  its  function  by  a  weight 
placed  upon  it. 

2856.  Q.  To  what  part  of  the  saddle  should  the  girth  be 
attached,  and  why  ?  A.  The  centre  of  the  saddle  ;  for  if  placing 
the  weight  in  the  centre  of  the  saddle  has  the  effect  of  trans- 
mitting an  equal  amount  of  pressure  to  all  that  part  of  the  horse's 
back  with  wliich  the  saddle  is  in  contact,  attaching  the  girths 
j80  as  to  act  directly  on  the  centre  of  the  saddle  will  have  pre- 
cisely the  same  effect ;  that  is,  the  adhesiveness  produced  by 
pressure  will  be  equable  throughout,  and  of  course  least  likely  to 
injure  any  one  particular  point. 

2857.  Q.  What  is  the  legitimate  use  of  stirrups  besides  enabling 
us  to  mount  horses  ?    A.  First,  to  give  the  rider  lateral  support ; 


HIPPOLOGY.  341 

second,  to  enable  the  rider  for  various  purposes  to  rise  in  the 
saddle  by  standing  in  his  stirrups. 

2858.  Q.  How  do  the  stirrups  give  lateral  support  ?  A.  By- 
offering  resistance  perpendicularly  upwards,  while  the  weight  falls 
in  the  opposite  direction. 

2859.  Q.  How  would  it  be  best  to  fix  the  stirrups  to  facilitate 
standing  on  them  ?  A.  Exactly  under  the  rider's  seat ;  for,  put- 
ting aside  any  changes  in  the  position  of  his  own  body  he  may  be 
pleased  to  make,  his  weight  is  transmitted  indirectly  to  the  saddle 
through  the  stirrups  at  the  same  point  at  which  he  previously 
applied  it  directly  with  his  seat,  and  the  equilibrium  is  not  dis- 
turbed. 

2860.  Q.  What  would  the  effect  be  if  the  stirrups  were  fixed 
far  forwards,  and  the  rider  far  back  in  the  saddle  ?  A.  Standing 
in  the  stirrups  will  throw  the  weight  from  one  end  of  the  saddle 
to  the  other,  make  the  saddle  press  partially  on  the  back  instead 
of  equably,  which  tends  to  make  the  saddle  shift,  and  must  also 
alter  the  equilibrium  of  the  horse,  throwing  its  weight  forward, 
and  rendering  the  animal  incapable  of  turning  sharply  and 
handily. 

2861.  Q.  For  military  purposes,  where  is  it  best  to  place  the 
stirrups  ?  Why  ?  A.  Directly  under  the  rider's  seat ;  the  cavalry 
man  is  often  compelled  in  the  use  of  his  weapons  to  stand  in  the 
stirrups.  If  by  so  doing  the  equilibrium  of  his  horse  is  altered, 
he  to  a  certain  extent  disables  his  mount  and  himself  in  the 
most  critical  moment. 

2862.  Q.  How  should  the  length  of  the  stirrups  be  adjusted  ? 
A.  To  adjust  the  length  of  the  stirrups  precisely,  the  rider  should 
first  mount,  letting  the  stirrup-straps  loose,  shake  himself  well 
down  into  the  lowest  part  of  the  saddle;  then  adjust  the  stirrups 
to  a  convenient  length,  never  making  them  so  long  as  to  make 
the  tread  on  them  insecure,  nor  so  short  as  to  allow  them  to 
cramp  the  legs  and  deprive  them  of  the  requisite  power  of  motion. 

2863.  Q.  How  does  the  form  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  saddle 
affect  the  seat  of  the  rider  ?  A.  It  has  a  direct  influence  on  the 
permanence  of  the  seat.  If  what  may  be  called  the  ridge  of  the 
saddle  be  perfectly  horizontal,  the  seat  will  be  determined  chiefly 
by  the  length  and  position  of  the  stirrups,  because  the  two  sur- 
faces, rider  and  saddle,  are  in  imperfect  contact.  It  is  usual, 
therefore,  to  dip  this  ridge  at  some  point,  and  spread  it  out  into  a 
more  or  less  concave  surface. 

2864.  Q.  What  does  the  form  of  the  seat  depend  on?  A. 
Altogether  on  the  relative  position  of  the  lowest  point  of  the  dip. 
If  placed  far  back  the  rider  will  remain  there,  and  if  in  the  centre 
the  seat  will  also  be  central ;  and  for  military  purposes  this  is  its 
proper  position. 

2865.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  governing  the  influence  of 
the  saddle  on  the  seat  ?    A.  The  larger  the  surfaces  of  the  rider 


342  THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S  EXAMIKER. 

and  saddle  brought  into  permanent  contact,  the  firmer  will  be 
the  seat,  and  the  less  will  it  depend  on  the  stirrups  or  the  reins. 

2866.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  seats  ?  A.  The  saddle 
in  the  centre  of  the  horse's  back;  the  girths,  stirrups,  and  rider 
in  the  centre  of  the  saddle. 


SEATS. 

2867.  Q.  By  what  means  is  the  seat  on  horseback  maintained? 
A.  By  balancing  or  by  friction — that  is  to  say,  the  greater  or 
less  amount  of  the  rider's  sitting  parts  brought  into  contact  with 
the  saddle  or  by  the  support  given  by  the  stirrups. 

2868. "  Q.  What  is  the  best  and  safest  seat  ?  A.  It  will  always 
be  that  seat  which  depends  on  no  one  means  of  support,  but  uses 
them  all  in  the  best  manner. 

2869.  Q.  Give  a  short  discussion  of  the  relative  importance  of 
balance  or  poise  as  it  affects  the  seat.  A.  The  safety  of  the 
horse  and  stability  of  the  saddle  depend  to  a  great  extent  on  the 
arability  of  the  rider's  weight — that  is  to  say,  on  his  poise  or 
balance.  This  being  absent  the  rider's  seat  is  insecure,  more  or 
less  shifting,  thereby  disturbing  the  equilibrium  of  the  horse,  and 
the  rider  is  liable  to  a  fall.  Poise  or  balance  is  one  of  the  first 
essentials  of  a  secure  and  graceful  seat. 

2870.  Q.  Give  a  short  discussion  of  the  relative  importance  of 
friction  as  it  affects  the  seat.  A.  Friction  between  two  inanimate 
bodies  coming  in  contact  depends,  first,  on  the  nature  of  the 
surfaces,  and,  second,  on  the  absolute  weight  with  which 
the  upper  one  presses  on  the  lower  one.  In  the  case  of  a  rider's 
seat  and  legs  and  the  saddle,  we  have  a  live  surface  in  contact 
with  an  inanimate  one.  The  motion  of  the  former  surface  is 
attended  by  muscular  action,  which  forms  an  important  adjunct 
in  increasing  the  friction,  and  the  amount  of  this  action  in- 
creases with  the  surfaces  in  contact,  because  a  greater  number  of 
muscles  are  brought  into  action  ;  therefore,  too  great  an  amount 
of  the  surfaces  of  the  seat  and  legs  cannot  be  brought  into  con- 
tact with  the  saddle  ;  the  difference  between  seats  being  deter- 
mined either  by  the  proper  application  of  the  friction  derived 
from  muscular  action  simultaneously  at  the  same  point  and  in 
the  same  direction  as  that  derived  by  the  weight  of  the  rider,  or, 
whether  the  rider  depends  first  on  one  and  then  the  other  for 
security. 

2871.  Q.  What  is  the  grand  cardinal  rule  for  a  good  seat? 
A.  From  the  hips  upwards  movable,  in  order  to  enable  the  rider 
to  vary  his  balance  or  use  his  weapons ;  from  the  knee  down- 
wards movable,  for  the  use  of  the  spur  and  the  control  of  the 
horse's  hind-legs  ;  and  between  the  two  points,  hip  and  knee, 
fixed  for  the  seat. 


EIPPOLOGY.  S43 

2872.  Q.  What  is  the  relative  importance  of  the  stirrup  as  a 
means  of  support  ?  A.  The  stirrups  are  very  subordinate  in  value 
to  balance  and  friction  taken  together,  being  merely  intended  to 
give  the  rider  further  aid  in  addition  to  that  derived  from  balance 
and  friction. 

2873.  Q.  In  addition  to  the  fact  that  fixing  the  stirrups  directly 
under  the  rider's  seat  favors  the  equilibrium  of  the  horse,  what 
physiological  reasons  point  to  this  being  the  proper  place  for  it  ? 
A.  The  interior  surfaces  of  a  well-built  man's  thighs  and  legs, 
from  the  fork  to  the  heels,  are  curved  in  concave  or  hollow  sweeps, 
that  may  be  varied  from  the  knee  downwards  by  turning  the  toes 
more  or  less  outwards.  A  cross- section  of  the  horse  through  the 
fourteenth  vertebra  coincides  very  accurately  with  the  sweep  of 
the  rider's  leg  ;  hence  the  stirrups  hung  from  a  point  coinciding 
with  this  vertebra  favors  the  greatest  possible  contact  of  the 
entire  leg,  enabling  the  rider  by  varying  the  curve  of  the  leg  to 
encircle  nearly  two  thirds  of  the  horse.  If  the  stirrups  be  placed 
too  far  forwards,  the  thighs  run  diagonally  forwards  towards  the 
horse's  shoulders.  A  section  through  this  position  of  the  stirrup 
will  show  the  animal  to  be  narrower  at  the  shoulders  than  at  the 
section  through  the  fourteenth  vertebra,  and  presents  a  concave 
curve  to  the  shoulders,  then  a  convex  one  over  the  shoulders. 
This  not  being  adapted  to  the  sweep  of  the  leg,  prevents  the 
desired  intimate  contact  with  the  horse's  body.  In  addition  to 
the  foregoing,  the  stirrups  hung  centrally  enable  the  rider  to 
quickly  apply  the  legs  so  as  to  promptly  control  the  hind-legs  and 
make  the  horse  place  them  as  desired,  whereas  when  hung  for- 
wards the  legs  are  generally  applied  too  late,  the  rider  having  to 
overcome  the  resistance  offered  by  the  stirrup-straps. 

2874.  Q.  In  addition  to  balance,  friction,  and  the  proper  posi- 
tion of  the  stirrups,  on  what  part  of  the  buttocks  should  the  rider 
sit  to  secure  a  proper  form  of  seat  ?  A.  On  the  triangle  formed  by 
the  two  lower  extremities  of  the  pelvis  and  the  coccygeal  bone, 
the  form  of  seat  depending  largely  as  to  whether  the  perpen- 
dicular through  the  hip-bone  falls  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  lower 
extremities  of  the  pelvis.  In  the  first  case  the  fork  seat  is 
attained  ;  in  the  other  the  leg  and  thigh  are  thrown  forwards  and 
the  weight  is  largely  sustained  by  the  coccygeal  bone,  and  the 
body  consequently  unsteady. 


344  THE  AKMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMII^ER. 

Bits  and  Bitting, 
general  principles. 

2875.  Q.  To  what  mechanical  contrivance  may  the  neck  of  the 
horse  be  compared  as  it  affects  the  direction  of  its  motion  ?  A.  Tt 
may  be  compared  to  the  tiller  of  a  boat :  it  is  the  lev.er  by  which 
the  whole  animal  is  steered,  or,  in  a  state  of  nature,  steers  itself, 
the  reins  being  the  tiller  ropes. 

2876.  Q.  On  what  part  of  the  back  does  the  lever  formed  by 
the  neck  act  ?  A.  On  that  part  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae  which  is 
the  centre  of  motion  :  when  the  horse  is  in  motion,  the  lever 
action  of  the  limbs,  derived  from  the  muscles,  is  propagated  to 
this  same  point,  the  neck  and  the  tail  being  the  regulators  of  the 
movement. 

2877.  Q.  Of  what  value  to  the  rider  is  the  proper  command 
over  the  horse's  neck  ?  A.  Since  the  neck  is  used  by  the  animal 
to  adjust  its  equilibrium  according  to  the  degree  of  velocity 
required,  and  according  as  its  motion  is  on  straight  or  curved 
lines,  proper  command  over  it  enables  the  rider  to  vary  the 
condition  of  equilibrium  to  suit  his  purpose,  and  to  weight  one 
or  both  hind-legs  alternately  or  simultaneously,  as  may  best  suit 
his  purpose. 

2878.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  principle  upon  which  the  Baucher 
system  of  handling  horses  rested.  A.  According  to  Baucher,  the 
power  of  resisting  the  will  of  the  rider,  and  therefore  the  seat  of 
all  restiveness,  is  located  in  that  part  of  the  neck  wiiich  forms  the 
articulation  with  the  head.  He  found  that  by  getting  the  horse's 
head  into  a  particular  position  and  fixing  it  there,  he  could  more 
or  less  perfectly  master  the  volition  of  the  animal. 

2879.  Q.  What  is  the  radical  defect  of  this  system  ?  A.  The 
horse's  neck  is  the  lever  by  which  we  obtain  a  command  over  the 
entire  motive  mechanism  of  the  animal,  especially  the  hind-legs  ; 
it  is  only  by  varying  its  position  that  this  can  be  usefully  effected 
— by  suiting  this  to  the  pace  and  the  direction  of  the  animaPs 
movements.  M.  Baucher  insisted  on  one  invariable  position  of 
the  head  and  neck.  The  pull  on  the  reins  was  not  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  centre  of  motion,  and  could  not  act  with  precision  on 
the  hind-legs ;  finally,  the  position  of  the  horse's  head  and  neck 
was  such  as  rather  to  increase  than  diminish  the  overhanging 
weight  of  these  members.  The  "handling"  was  almost  all  done 
when  the  horse  was  standing  still,  and  its  effects  either  became 
null  when  the  animal  was  put  in  motion,  or,  if  preserved,  the 
power  of  locomotion  was  seriously  impeded.  He  overlooked  the 
problem  of  equilibrium  in  motion,  and  mistook  diminution  or 
restriction  of  motive  power  for  a  perfect  command  over  it,  under 
all  circumstances  and  at  every  degree  of  speed. 


HIPPOLOGY.  345 

2880.  Q.  What  general  principle  applies  to  the  various  pur- 
poses horses  are  put  to  ?  A.  The  whole  lever-power  of  .the  ani- 
mal should  act  in  conjunction  with  its  weight  in  the  required 
direction  with  such  a  degree  of  leaning  on  the  bit  that  the  power 
of  controlling  all  its  motions  with  certainty  and  ease  is  secured, 
without  the  necessity  of  interfering  in  so  abrupt  a  manner  with 
the  animal's  efforts  as  to  impede  them  unnecessarily. 

2881.  Q.  Explain  what  is  meant  by  the  terms  "hard"  and 
"  soft "  mouth.  A.  When  a  horse  is  mounted  for  the  first  time,  the 
equilibrium  of  the  whole  machine  is  disturbed,  w'hich  becomes 
especially  remarkable  in  the  neck.  The  young  horse  bores  on 
his  bridle  and  tries  to  acquire  a  new  point  to  lean  on  (he  is  "  hard  " 
mouthed)  ;  but  when  the  animal  has  learned  how  to  carry  itself 
and  rider,  or  acquired  an  artificial  equilibrium  suited  to  the  al- 
tered circumstances,  then  it  no  longer  seeks  this  support,  and  the 
mouth  is  called  "  soft." 

2882.  Q.  How  do  you  explain  the  fact  that  the  same  horse 
will  go  "light"  with  one  rider,  and  heavy  on  the  bit  with  an- 
other rider?  A.  It  is  mainly  a  question  of  equilibrium.  One 
rider  assumes  a  seat  that  favors,  another,  one  that  more  or  less 
seriously  impedes,  the  efforts  of  the  horse  to  get  into  balance. 
Supposing  the  seat,  so  far  as  the  distribution  of  the  weight  is  con- 
cerned, to  be  identical,  the  unsteady  rider  will  seek  support  for 
himself  in  the  reins,  and  the  horse  immediately  bores  against 
this  and  becomes  a  hard  puller,  while  the  steady  seat  makes  a 
light  hand  and  a  "soft"  mouth. 

2883.  Q.  Since  the  direction  in  which  the  pull  of  the  reins  is 
made  to  act  on  the  centre  of  motion  determines  both  the  direc- 
tion and  intensity  of  the  lever-action  transmitted  in  succession  to 
the  other  parts  of  the  animal's  frame,  how  does  this  enable  the 
rider  to  alter  the  conditions  of  the  horse's  equilibrium  ?  A.  It  is 
in  consequence  of  this  that  by  merely  elevating  or  depressing 
the  hands,  employing  a  certain  amount  of  pressure  with  the 
rider's  legs,  and  throwing  his  weight  backwards  or  forwards,  it 
becomes  possible  to  make  the  horse  alter  the  conditions  of  his  own 
equilibrium  by  bringing  his  hind-legs  more  under  him,  or  the 
contrary.  In  like  manner,  it  is  possible,  supposing  the  pull  to 
be  horizontal, — which  is  the  normal  direction  for  a  well-set-up 
cavalry  horse, — to  concentrate  the  lever-action  on  one  of  the  hind- 
legs  in  preference  to  the  other  by  simply  throwing  the  rider's 
weight  slightly  to  the  same  side,  which  enables  him  to  fix  cer- 
tain legs  to  the  ground,  or  detain  them  longer  in  contact  with  it, 
setting  the  others  free,  and  determining  with  accuracy  the  mode 
and  the  moment  of  their  employment. 

2884.  Q.  Why  is  the  art  of  bitting  and  bridling  a  very  useful 
and  essential  one  in  horsemanship,  and  in  what  does  it  consist  ? 
A.  It  enables  us  to  avoid  the  infliction  of  pain,  while  it  secures 
to  us  a  perfect  control  over  the  horse's  movements.     It  consists 


346  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIN^ER. 

in  enabling  us  to  exercise  the  mechanical  action  of  the  reins  in  a 
proper  degree,  and  the  right  direction  for  every  horse  and  for 
every  movement. 

2885.  Q.  What  is  the  influence  of  good  and  careful  bitting  on 
cavalry  ?  A.  The  steadiness  of  a  troop  or  squadron  in  its  evo- 
lutions, and  especially  in  skirmishing,  charging,  and  rallying,  de- 
pends mainly  on  it— doing  largely  away  with  bolting  and  restive- 
ness. 


THE    NECK — THE    HEAD— THE  MOUTH — THE  TONGUE —CARRIAGE. 

2886.  Q.  Describe  the  qualities  of  a  well-shaped  neck  as  regards 
lever-action.  A.  The  horse's  neck  forms  a  double  curve,  one 
being  turned  upwards,  the  other  downwards  ;  the  mechanical 
action  results  in  a  straight  line  forming  the  axis  of  the  whole.  A 
well-shaped  neck,  well  clothed  with  firm  muscles,  possesses  both 
straightness  and  inflexibility  sufficient  to  render  it  possible  to 
apply  to  it  the  theory  of  lever-action  with  perfect  propriety. 
Such  a  neck  will  only  deviate  from  the  straight  line  to  any  con- 
siderable amount  near  its  point  of  junction  with  the  head ;  this 
latter  acting  as  a  lever,  and  imparting  to  the  whole  that  graceful 
curvature  which  is  evidence  of  perfection  of  equilibrium  and 
power. 

2887.  Q.  State  the  principle  on  which  the  effect  produced  by  a 
lever  depends,  and  apply  it  to  the  horse's  head  considered  as  a 
lever  acting  on  the  neck.  A.  The  effect  produced  depends  not 
only  on  the  absolute  power  applied,  but  also  on  the  direction  in 
which  this  is  done.  Considering  the  horse's  head  as  a  lever  which 
is  to  act  on  the  neck  and  bring  it  towards  the  rider's  hand,  it  is 
evident  that  if  the  head  be  stretched  out  so  as  to  form  a  con- 
tinuation of  the  neck,  there  would  be  no  lever-action.  In  the  same 
marnner,  if  the  horse's  chin  could  be  brought  under  so  as  to  touch 
his  neck,  there  would  be  little,  if  any,  lever-action.  The  lever- 
action  is  greatest  when  the  head  is  at  right  angles  with  the  neck  ; 
the  more  it  departs  from  this  line,  either  forwards  or  to  the  rear, 
the  less  will  be  the  useful  lever-action  on  the  neck. 

2S88.  Q.  How  may  the  depth  of  the  jaw-bone,  measured  per- 
pendicularly to  the  forehead  on  the  line  passing  through  the  eyes, 
interfere  with  the  proper  position  of  the  horse's  head  ?  A.  This 
depth  may  be  so  great  that,  if  coupled  with  a  coarse,  fleshy,  short 
neck,  the  angle  of  the  jaw  coming  in  contact  wath  the  latter,  a 
jam  ensues  before  the  head  can  be  brought  round  to  the  proper 
angle. 

2889.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  on  the  proper  position  of  the  head 
when  the  jaws  converge  inwards  ?  A.  The  space  contained  be- 
tween being  narrowed  in  prevents  the  neck  fitting  properly  in  the 
cavity  to  some  extent,  as  it  would  in  a  perfectly  well-shaped  head, 


HIPPOLOGY.  847 

limiting  the  angle  of  flexion,  and  offers  a  serious  impediment  to 
the  breaking-in  and  bitting  of  the  animal. 

2890.  Q.  Describe  the  glands  lying  under  the  angles  of  the 
two  jaws,  and  explain  how  they  may  influence  the  position  of  the 
head  and  actions  of  the  animal.  A.  There  are  certain  glands  in 
the  neck  lying  under  the  angles  of  the  jaw,  which  run  up  in  the 
direction  of  the  ear.  They  are  the  seat  of  "  strangles."  It  is  not 
unusual  among  the  common  breed  of  horses  to  find  these  glands 
large  and  flabby  in  texture.  Sometimes  their  abnormal  size  is 
constitutional — sometimes,  the  consequence  of  disease,  usually 
"strangles;"  and  sometimes  it  arises  wholly  from  the  pressure 
of  the  angles  of  the  jaws,  especially  when  these  lie  too  close  to- 
gether, and  the  rider  has  attempted  to  force  a  certain  position  of 
the  head  by  the  use  of  severe  bits.  Undue  pressure  on  these 
glands  is  attended  with  more  or  less  pain  and  discomfort  to  the 
animal,  and  owing  to  their  intimate  connection  with  the  eyes,  both 
by  absorbent  vessels  and  the  nerves,  undue  pressure,  it  is  said, 
has  caused  many  cases  of  premaiure  blindness  in  young  animals. 
The  glands  are  sometimes  affected  on  one  side,  in  which  case  the 
animal  exhibits  what  is  called  one-sided  restiveness — obeying 
willingly  on  the  side  not  affected,  and  refusing  on  the  affected 
side. 

2891.  Q.  Describe  what  is  known  as  the  chin-groove  as  regards 
bitting.  A.  The  lower  lip  is  covered  with  a  very  thick  skin, 
underneath  which  lie  the  roots  of  the  beard,  fat,  an*d  membrane  ; 
this  structure  is  continued  up  into  a  certain  depression  above  the 
chin,  known  as  the  chin-groove.  The  bone  immediately  beneath 
the  thick  and  very  sensitive  skin  of  the  chin-groove  is  flat  and 
rounded  off  in  all  directions,  being  that  point  where  the  two 
branches  of  the  jaw  begin  to  unite  together.  A  considerable 
amount  of  pressure  may" be  applied  by  a  properly  fitting  curb- 
chain  or  strap  at  this  point,  without  causing  any  very  unpleasant 
sensation  to  the  horse.  Passing  the  finger  upwards  along  the  jaws 
from  this  point,  it  will  be  found  that  both  the  character  of  the 
bone  and  that  of  the  skin  covering  it  have  become  very  much 
changed  ;  the  former  has  sharp  edges  covered  by  very  sensitive 
skin,  so  that  a  very  slight  pressure  of  this  thin  skin  on  the  sharp 
edges  of  bone  causes  very  considerable  pain.  In  bitting,  these 
peculiarities  must  be  borne  in  mind,  and  due  allowance  made  for 
them. 

2892.  Q.  What  three  dimensions  of  the  interior  of  the  horse's 
mouth  must  be  accurately  ascertained  before  fitting  him  with  a 
proper  bit  ?  A.  First,  the  transversal  width  of  the  mouth  from 
side  to  side,  measured  at  the  same  height  as  the  chin-groove,  and 
including  the  thickness  of  the  lips.  Second,  the  width  of  the 
channel  in  which  the  tongue  lies,  or  the  distance  between  the  two 
bars  internally.  Third,  the  height  of  the  bars— that  is  to  say,  the 
distance  between  a  straight  edge  supposed  to  rest  on  the  upper 


348  THE   ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

surface  of  the  bars  opposite  the  chin-grove,  and  another  placed 
exactly  parallel  to  it,  and  touching  the  undermost  point  of  the 
chin-groove. 

2893.  Q.  What  dimension  of  the  bit  are  determined  by  the  trans- 
versal width  of  the  mouth  ?  A.  Tlie  width  of  the  month-piece, 
which  must  be  made  to  fit  exactly;  for  if  too  narrow  the  lips  are 
compressed  and  subject  to  injury,  and  if  too  wide  the  bit  slips 
from  side  to  side,  displaces  the  post  from  its  proper  position, 
causing  the  corners  of  the  post  to  wound  the  bars. 

2894.  Q.  What  dimensions  of  the  bit  is  determined  by  width  of 
the  tongue-channel  ?  A.  It  determines  how  much  of  the  mouth- 
piece may  be  allowed  for  the  post,  the  remainder  being  reserved 
for  action  on  the  bars. 

2895.  Q.  What  dimensions  of  the  bit  are  determined  by  the 
height  of  the  bars  ?  A.  All  the  remaining  dimensions ;  that  is,  the 
length  of  the  upper  and  lower  cheek,  and  curb-chain  or  strap. 

2896.  Q.  What  kind  of  quantity  is  the  width  of  the  mouth  ? 
A.  It  is  a  variable  quantity,  depending  on  the  breed  and  sizes  of 
the  animals,  and  should  be  invariably  determined  for  each  horse. 

2897.  Q.  What  proportion  does  the  width  of  the  tongue- 
channel  bear  to  the  height  of  bars  ?  A.  It  is  nearly  always  three 
fourths  the  height  of  the  bars. 

2898.  Q.  What  has  been  found  to  be  the  average  height  of  the 
bars,  and  what  part  of  the  bit  should  never  exceed  it  ?  A.  One 
and  one  eighth  inches.  The  upper  cheek  of  the  bit  should  never 
exceed  it." 

2899.  Q.  Are  the  shape  and  texture  of  the  bars  of  the  mouth 
uniform  ?  A.  There  is  great  diversity  in  their  shape  and  texture, 
some  being  flat-topped  and  broad,  others  presenting  a  ridge-like 
surface;  some  also  spongy,  soft,  and  comparatively  devoid  of 
feeling,  while  others  appear  firmer,  finer,  and  more  sensitive — 
all  this  exercising  an  immense  influence  on  the  bitting. 

2900.  Q.  What  is  the  width,  in  inches,  of  the  channel  for  the 
tongue  ?  A.  It  is  pretty  nearly  three  fourths  of  the  height  of  the 
bars;  and  this  being  very  constantly  one  and  eight  tenths  inches, 
the  other  will  be  about  one  and  one  third  inches,  wiiich  gives  the 
maximum  width  of  the  post. 

2901.  Q.  Suppose  the  mouth-piece  to  have  the  proper  width, 
what  would  be  the  effect  of  having  a  post  too  wide  ?  A.  If  the 
post  be  wider  than  the  lingual  canal,  at  every  pull  of  the  reins 
its  corners  will  come  on  to  the  bars,  either  on  one  side  or  the 
other,  producing  much  pain — all  of  which  is  wholly  inconsistent 
with  good  bitting. 

2902.  Q.  Discuss  the  influence  of  the  texture  or  form  of  the 
tongue  on  bitting.  A.  This  organ  varies  very  much  both  in 
thickness  and  texture.  In  some  horses  it  just  fills  its  own  canal 
neatly,  rising  towards  its  axis  in  a  gentle  curve,  whose  summit  is 
two  tenths  to  three  tenths  of  an  inch  above  the  level  of  the  bars; 


HIPPOLOGY.  349 

in  others  it  seems  much  too  thick  and  fleshy  for  the  interior  of 
the  mouth,  and  projects  in  all  directions.  The  volume  of  the 
tongue  is  a  matter  of  much  importance,  because  the  action  of  the 
mouth- piece  is  divided  between  this  organ  and  the  bars  of  the 
mouth;  and  the  great  nicety  in  bitting  is  practically  to  determine 
for  each  individual  horse  how  much  of  the  lever-action  is  to  fall 
on  the  tongue  and  how  much  on  the  bars. 

3903.  Q.  What  should  the  carriage  of  the  cavalry  horse  be  ? 
A.  That  position  of  the  head  is  best  with  which  the  horse's  paces 
are  clean  and  free — wiiich  allows  him  to  turn  willingly  and  with- 
out an  effort  or  disturbance  of  his  pace  ;  to  diminish  or  increase 
the  pace  without  hesitation  ;  to  rein  back,  preserving  a  proper 
degree  of  feeling,  and  immediately  to  advance  again  freely  if 
called  upon  to  do  so. 

2904.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  tho  paces  being  "clean"  and 
"free  "  ?  A.  To  be  clean,  they  must  be  equable  and  their  rhythm 
perfect;  to  be  free,  they  must  be  made  without  apparent  effort 
or  marks  of  distress. 

2905.  Q.  Is  the  carriage  of  the  horse  the  result  of  bitting  alone  ? 
A.  It  depends  on  a  judicious  system  of  saddling,  packing,  and 
riding — the  bitting  completing  the  whole. 

2906.  Q.  What  qualities  possessed  by  the  internal  conformation 
of  the  mouth  would  indicate  naturally  a  "soft"  mouth  ?  A.  A 
thin  tongue,  high  and  sharp  bars,  a  wide  tongue-ch&nnel,  and 
fine  lips;  the  tongue  filling  up  its  channel  nearly  to  the  brim,  and 
projecting  only  a  few  lines  over  the  surface  of  the  bars,  per- 
mitting the  mouth-piece  to  exert  a  certain  degree  of  pressure  on 
the  bars. 

2907.  Q.  What  qualities  possessed  by  the  internal  conformation 
of  the  mouth  would  indicate  a  naturally  "  hard  "  mouth  ?  A.  A 
thick,  fleshy  tongue,  not  only  totally  filling  up  its  channel,  but 
protruding  over  it,  and  rising  above  the  level  of  the  bars  ;  a  flat 
surface  to  the  bars,  and  thick,  fleshy  lips,  in  which  case  pressure 
of  the  mouth-piece  is  mainly  spent  on  the  tongue  and  lips. 


THE  CAVESSON — SNAFFLE — NOSE-BAND  -TRAINING-HALTER — 
RUNNING  REINS. 

2908.  Q.  Of  what  value  is  the  cavesson  in  training  remounts  ? 
A.  It  is  used  with  the  longe  to  teach  the  young  horse  to  go  for- 
ward ;  to  supple  and  teach  him  the  proper  use  of  the  legs.  It 
thus  aids  in  forming  his  gaits  and  in  fitting  him  for  the  cavalry 
service.     (U.  S.  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations.) 

2909.  Q.  Describe  the  cavesson  and  longe.  A.  It  is  a  light 
halter  with  the  brow-band,  throat-latch,  and  cheek-pieces  like 
the  bridle  head-stall,  and  has  a  nose-band  that  may  be  adjusted 


350  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

with  a  buckle  ;  there  is  also  a  running-ring  on  the  chin-strap 
for  the  longe.  The  longeing-strap  is  from  twenty  to  thirty- 
feet  long.  The  lariat  may  be  used.  (U.  S.  Cavalry  Drill  Kegu- 
lations.) 

3910.  Q.  How  is  the  cavesson  fitted  to  the  horse  ?  A.  The 
cavesson  is  put  on  after  the  snaffle  has  been  fitted;  the  nose-band 
should  be  placed  about  three  inches  above  the  nostrils,  so  as  not 
to  affect  the  breathing  ;  it  should  act  both  as  a  nose-band  and 
curb,  and  be  over  the  snaffle.  It  must  not  be  buckled  so  tightly 
as  to  make  the  horse  uneasy.  (U.  S.  Cavalry  Drill  Regula- 
tions.) 

2911.  Q.  What  is  the  danger  attending  a  too  sharp  pull  on  the 
cavesson  ?  A.  Young  horses  are  in  danger,  of  being  spavined  by 
applying  the  lever-action  of  the  neck  too  suddenly  on  the  hind- 


2912.  Q.  Describe  the  manner  of  using  the  cavesson  and  longe 
in  the  early  lessons  of  the  young  horse.  A.  The  lesson  is  begun 
on  a  circle  from  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  in  diameter.  As  horses  are 
usually  handled  on  the  left  side  more  than  on  the  right,  it  will 
be  found  necessary  to  give  two  lessons  on  the  right  to  one  on  the 
left.  If  the  horse  stands  still,  he  should  be  encouraged  to  move  on, 
as  this  hesitation  is  oftener  the  result  of  fear  or  ignorance  than 
disobedience  or  vice.  At  first  the  horse  is  led  around  the  circle 
several  times  at  a  walk.  A  man  with  a  whip  follows  at  a  short 
distance,  and  show^s  the  whip  w^henever  the  horse  hangs  back  ;  if 
this  does  not  produce  the  desired  effect,  he  should  strike  the 
ground  in  rear  of  the  horse,  or  touch  him  lightly  with  it  until  he 
obeys.  When  he  moves  freely  at  a  walk,  he  should  be  gently  en- 
couraged to  trot,  the  man  gradually  paying  out  the  longe  until 
he  stands  in  the  centre  of  the  circle,  and  has  merely  to  turn  in 
place.  The  horse  should  be  frequently  halted  by  gently  feeling 
the  longe,  and  urged  to  move  forward  again.  He  should  be 
frequently  brought  to  the  centre  of  the  circle,  caressed,  and  the 
lesson  repeated.  The  first  lessons  should  be  short,  so  as  not  to 
fatigue  or  bore  the  animal.     (U.  S.  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations.) 

2913.  Q.  What  is  the  value  of  the  snaffle  in  training  remounts  ? 
A.  The  great  value  of  the  snaffle  is  that  by  its  use  the  horse 
acquires  confidence  and  insight  into  the  means  by  which  the 
rider  proposes  to  direct  its  motions.  He  wdllingly  assumes  a 
steady  and  regular  feeling,  the  action  of  the  mouth-piece  being 
gentle  and  capable  of  gradation ;  and  in  consequence  of  its  act- 
ing on  nearly  the  same  part  of  the  mouth  as  the  curb-bit,  it 
becomes  the  best  preparative  for  the  curb-bit. 

2914.  Q.  What  is  the  best  form  of  snaffle  to  employ  in  the  train- 
ing of  remounts  ?  A.  A  snaffle,  which  is  neither  too  long,  too 
thin,  nor  too  much  curved,  and  with  only  one  joint  in  the  mid- 
dle. 

?915.  Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  of  a  snaffle  whose  mouth-piece 


HIPPOLOGY.  351 

was  two  straight  pieces  of  iron,  jointed  in  tbe  middle  and  equally 
thick  throughout  ?  A.  The  pressure,  with  most  horses,  would 
come  to  act  on  the  tongue  exclusively,  and  the  bars  of  the  mouth 
remaining  untouched,  there  would  be  scarcely  any  action. 

2916.  Q.  What  general  shape  is  given  to  the  mouth-piece  of  the 
snaffle  ?  A.  It  is  usual  to  make  each  half  of  the  mouth-piece 
thicker  toward  the  cheeks,  and  tapering  off  finer  to  the  joint 
connecting  them,  by  which  means  a  portion  of  the  pressure  is 
transferred  from  the  tongue  to  the  bars  ;  and,  in  addition  to  this, 
they  may  be  slightly  curved,  which  has  the  same  effect. 

2917.  Q.  Is  power  gained  by  making  the  mouth-piece  of  the 
snaffle  very  thin  in  the  centre  and  very  thick  on  each  side,  and 
why  ?  A.  Practically,  very  little,  if  any  ;  because,  although  a 
greater  amount  of  action  is  transferred  from  the  tongue  to  the 
bars,  the  thick  portion  of  the  iron  acting  on  the  bars  produces 
comparatively  little  impression. 

2918.  Q.  What  is  the  action  of  a  snaffle  whose  mouth-piece,  is 
equally  thick  throughout,  but  much  curved,  and  projects  an  inch 
or  more  at  each  side?  A.  The  action,  while  increased,  is  in  a 
wrong  direction  ;  instead  of  being  a  fore-and-aft  pull  it  is  con- 
verted into  a  pincer-like  twitch  on  the  lower  jaw,  which  becomes 
so  painful  that  restiveness  is  likely  to  result. 

2919.  Q.  Describe  the  double-jointed  snaffle  and  its  action. 
A.  It  consists  of  a  double  mouth-piece,  the  joints  being  placed 
right  and  left  of  the  centre ;  it  acts  with  a  pincer-like  twitch, 
and  its  general  use  is  not  recommended. 

2920.  Q.  Describe  the  training-halter  invented  by  Lieut. -Col. 
Olynhausen  of  the  Austrian  cavalry.  A.  It  consists  of  two 
cheek-straps  whose  upper  ends  are  made  fast  in  the  buckles  of  the 
snaffle  head-stall.  These  cheek-straps  support  by  means  of  two 
rings  a  nose-band  composed  of  three  pieces :  1.  The  nose-band 
proper  ;  2.  A  strap  about  seven  inches  long,  sewed  into  the  ring 
on  the  off  side  ;  and,  3.  A  shorter  strap,  two  to  three  inches  long 
and  terminating  with«a  buckle,  which  is  sewed  into  the  ring  on 
the  near  side.  The  cheek-straps  are  buckled  into  the  head-stall 
outside,  so  that  the  nose-band  comes  to  hang  below  the  rings  of  the 
snaffle,  and  the  two  back-straps  are  then  buckled  together,  so  that 
the  longer  one  comes  to  lie  in  the  chin-groove,  as  a  curb  would 
with  a  bit,  leaving  a  sufficient  play  to  the  horse's  under-jaw  with- 
out allowing  the  animal  to  open  it  beyond  a  certain  distance,  and 
thus  securing  perfect  independence  to  the  mouth-piece  and  per- 
mitting its  acting  in  the  proper  place  and  direction. 

2921.  Q.  Of  what  value  is  the  training-halter  in  the  first 
handling  of  remounts?  A.  It  enables  us,  by  preventing  the 
young  horse  from  escaping  the  action  of  the  light  snaffle-mouth- 
l)iece,  to  avoid  the  necessity  for  employing  sharper  ones  ;  in  fact, 
all  violent  measures  are  thereby  rendered  unnecessary  during  the 


353 

earlier  period  of  training,  and  it  prepares  the  mouth  for  the  recep- 
tion of  the  plain  snaffle  or  curb-bit. 

2923.  Q.  Where  should  the  mouth-piece  of  the  snaffle  be  placed 
in  the  horse's  mouth  ?  A.  About  one  fourth  of  an  inch  below  the 
angle  of  the  mouth  ;  in  this  position  it  does  not  interfere  with 
the  tusks  or  front  teeth,  nor  does  it  draw  up  the  corners  of  the 
mouth. 

2923.  Q.  "What  are  running-reins  ?  A.  An  arrangement  made 
of  buckles  and  straps,  by  which  the  horse's  head  may  be  made  to 
assume  any  position  desired  in  a  vertical  plane  through  the  spinal 
column. 

2924.  Q.  What  is  the  best  form  of  running-rein?  A.  That 
one  which  acts  directly  on  the  bit  or  snaffle,  and  is  wholly  inde- 
pendent of  the  reins,  and  affords  a  facility  for  adjusting  its  action 
without  altering  either  buckle  or  strap. 

2925.  Q.  Describe  Seeger's  running-rein.  A.  It  consists  of 
three  distinct  pieces  :  the  chin-strap,  the  running-rein,  and  the 
martingale.  The  chin-strap  consists  of  a  leather  curb  furnished 
at  each  end  with  a  small  buckle  and  strap,  and  is  attached  to  the 
cheek-rings  of  the  snaffle.  The  curb  carries  a  rounded  strap  in 
rear,  supporting  an  ivory  ring,  whose  internal  diameter  is  about 
one  inch,  the  external  one  being  one  and  five  eighths  inches, 
making  the  ring  about  one  half  inch  thick.  The  running-rein  is 
an  ordinary  rein  eight  and  one  half  feet  long.  The  martingale  is 
an  ordinary  one  but  with  a  single  ring,  the  strap  being  about  one 
inch  wide  ;  the  ring  being  about  one  and  one  half  inches  internal 
diameter  and  three  fourths  of  an  inch  thick.  An  ordinary  neck- 
strap  carries  the  martingale. 

2926.  Q.  How  is  the  running-rein  adjusted  on  the  horse? 
A.  The  horse  is  saddled,  and  bridled  with  a 'plain  snaffle-buckle, 
the  chin-strap  of  the  running-rein  into  the  rings  of  the  mouth- 
piece ;  run  the  girth  through  the  loop  of  the  martingale  and 
adjust  its  length  so  that  the  ring  may  be  on  a  level  with  the 
points  of  the  shoulders  ;  buckle  one  end  «f  the  running-rein  to 
the  near  pommel-ring  of  the  saddle,  thence  carry  it  through  the 
martingale-ring  from  rear  to  front,  and  through  the  curb-strap 
ring  from  left  to  right ;  back  again  through  the  martingale-ring 
from  front  to  rear,  whence  it  goes  to  the  rider's  right  hand. 

2927.  Q.  Describe  the  action  of  Seeger's  running-rein.  A.  A 
pull  on  the  running-rein  acts  directly  on  the  mouth-piece  of  the 
snaffle,  drawing  it  back  and  somewhat  downwards  towards  the 
horse's  breast-bone  ;  by  taking  the  running-rein  and  right  snaffle- 
rein  into  the  right  hand  and  the  other  snaffle  rein  into  the  left, 
the  horse's  head  can  be  placed  in  any  position  desired  ;  the  pull 
being  exercised  on  the  horse's  mouth  either  horizontally,  upwards, 
or  downwards. 

2928.  Q.  What  is  the  main  value  of  all  such  contrivances  as 
the  training-halter  and  running-rein  in  the  handling  of  horses  ? 


HIPPOLOGY.  353 

A.  They  enable  us  to  accomplish  the  object  sought  for  gradually 
and  noiselessly,  as  it  were,  with  perfect  certainty,  and  afford  us 
the  means  of  avoiding  all  unnecessary  violence  or  any  approach 
to  ill  treatment. 

THE  LEVER — THE  BIT  AND  CURB— BITTING — THE  BRIDLE. 

2929.  Q.  Discuss  the  subject  of  levers  of  the  first  and  second 
order  with  reference  to  the  curb-bit.  A.  In  a  lever  of  the  first 
order  the  power  is  applied  at  one  end,  the  weight  at  the  other, 
and  the  fulcrum  between  the  two.  The  power  obtained  is  propor- 
tionate to  the  relative  lengths  of  the  two  arms.  In  this  case  the 
power  and  weight  move  in  opposite  directions,  rotating  around 
the  fulcrum.  Applying  this  principle  to  the  curb-bit,  the  power 
acts  at  the  rings  of  the  bit  in  the  direction  of  the  hand  ;  the  ful- 
crum is  the  mouth-piece  of  the  bit ;  then  the  pressure  of  the  curb 
on  the  chin  would  represent  the  weight  to  be  raised.  But,  since 
the  power  and  weight  move  in  opposite  directions  about  the  prop, 
the  horse's  chin,  in  consequence  of  the  pressure  exercised  by  the 
curb,  should  move  forward — that  is  to  say,  away  from  the  rider's 
hand.  And  the  greater  the  lever-power  of  the  bit,  so  much  the 
more  would  the  horse  be  induced  to  stick  out  his  nose,  which  is 
the  reverse  of  the  action  desired  in  a  good  bit.  In  a  lever  of  the 
second  order,  the  power  and  fulcrum  are  placed  at  its  opposite 
extremities,  the  weight  between  them.  The  mechanical  advantage 
is  proportioned  to  the  relative  distances  of  the  power  and  weight 
from  the  prop,  the  power  and  weight  moving  in  the  same  direction 
in  rotating  around  the  fulcrum.  This  is  what  is  wanted  for 
bitting  ;  the  weight  in  this  case  is  represented  by  the  pressure  on 
the  bars  of  the  mouth,  the  curb  acting  merely  as  a  fulcrum  ;  the 
horse's  head  follows  immediately  the  pressure  on  the  bars  in  the 
direction  of  the  rider's  hand. 

2930.  Q.  How  does  the  horse  discover,  from  the  action  of  the 
bit,  the  direction  in  which  his  head  should  bem  oved  ?  A.  The 
relative  amount  of  painful  pressure  exercised  by  the  mouth-piece 
on  the  bars  and  the  curb-strap  in  the  chin-groove — the  animal  de- 
ducing from  the  balance  of  pain  what  the  rider's  will  may  be— if 
the  bit  is  properly  constructed. 

2931.  Q.  From  what  point  of  the  mouth-piece  is  the  relative 
length  of  the  upper  and  lower  branches  of  the  bit  measured  ?  A. 
From  the  axis  of  the  mouth- piece  in  that  form  of  mouth-piece 
which  consists  of  a  post  and  two  lateral  straight  portions.  If  the 
mouth-piece  forms  one  curve,  then  from  the  line  of  bearing — that 
is  to  say,  the  line  connecting  the  two  points  of  the  mouth-piece 
which  rest  on  the  bars  of  the  horse's  mouth. 

2932.  Q.  What  determines  the  length  of  the  upper  cheek  of  the 
bit  ?  A.  Taken  from  the  "  line  of  bearing"  to  the  point  at  which 
the  curb-hook  acts,  its  length  should  be  equal  to  the  height  of  the 


354  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

bftrs  of  the  horse's  mouth,  which  has  been  found  by  observation 
to  be  very  nearly  a  constant  quantity,  equal  to  about  one  and 
three  fourths  inches. 

2933.  Q.  When  is  a  curb-bit  said  to  "fall  through,"  and  when 
to  "  stand  stiff  "  ?  A.  When  the  curb  is  so  loose  as  to  permit  the 
branches  of  the  bit  to  lie  in  a  line  with  the  reins,  there  being  no 
lever-action,  the  bit  is  said  to  "fall  through."  When  the  curb  is 
so  tight  as  to  prevent  the  branches  from  revolving  a  certain  num- 
ber of  degrees  around  the  mouth-piece,  it  is  said  to  "  stand  stiff." 
Good  bitting  will  be  equally  removed  from  stiffness  and  falling 
through  ;  it  lies  between  the  two  extremes. 

2934.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  governing  the  length  of  the  lower 
cheek  of  the  bit  ?  A.  The  lower  cheek  should  be  twice  as  long  as 
the  upper  one. 

2935.  Q.  In  what  proportion  is  the  lever-action  increased  by 
making  the  length  of  the  lower  cheek  twice  as  long  as  the  upper 
cheek  ?    A.  Three  to  one. 

2936.  Q.  What  error  do  bit-makers  generally  fall  into  in  con- 
structing bits  ?  A.  While  generally  adhering  to  the  rule  that  the 
lower  cheek  should  equal  twice  the  upper  cheek,  not  having  a 
standard  for  the  length  of  the  upper  one,  they  generally  make  the 
lower  one  too  long. 

2937.  Q.  Since  the  upper  cheek  should  be  equal  in  length  to  the 
height  of  the  horse's  bars,  what  would  in  general  be  the  length  of 
the  lower  cheek  ?    A.  Three  and  one  half  inches. 

2938.  Q.  What  would  be  the  entire  length  of  the  bit  ?  A.  Upper 
cheek  If  in.  plus  lower  cheek  3i  in. — equal  to  5^  in. 

2939.  Q.  Between  what  points  is  the  length  of  the  bit  measured  ? 
A.  From  the  point  where  the  curb-hook  acts  to  where  the  lower 
ring  acts. 

2940.  Q.  What  would  be  the  minimum  length  of  a  bit  suitable 
for  small  horses  or  large  ponies  ?     A.  Four  and  one  half  inches. 

2941.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  position  of  the  curb?  A.  The 
curb  must  lie  in  the  curb-groove,  without  any  tendency  to  mount 
up  out  of  it  on  to  the  sharp  bones  of  the  lower  jaw,  when  power 
is  applied  to  the  reins;  otherwise  it  ceases  to  be  a  painless  fulcrum, 
and  renders  the  best-constructed  bit  uncertain,  or  even  still  worse 
in  its  action. 

2942.  Q.  What  is  the  best  manner  of  attaining  the  painless 
action  of  a  curb  in  a  properly  constructed  bit  ?  A.  By  placing 
the  mouth-piece  of  the  bit  on  that  part  of  the  bars  exactly  oppo- 
site to  the  chin-groove. 

2943.  Q.  Are  the  "tusks  "found  always  in  the  same  relative 
position  in  all  horses'  mouths,  and  would  they  afford  a  good  point 
from  which  to  measure  the  position  of  the  mouth-piece  in  the 
horses'  mouths  ?  A.  There  is  great  irregularity  in  their  position, 
some  horses  having  them  relatively  higher  than  others  ;  nor  do 
the  "tusks  "  of  the  upper  jaw  always  correspond  with  those  of  the 


HIPPOLOGY.  S6§ 

lower;  mares  have  very  frequently  no  tusks  whatever.  It  is,  there- 
fore, quite  impossible  to  determine  the  proper  place  for  the  mouth- 
piece with  reference  to  these  teeth. 

2944.  Q.  Discuss  the  relative  value  of  the  curb  made  of  a  double 
chain,  worked  flat,  and  one  made  of  leather.  A.  Tlie  chain-curb, 
provided  it  does  not  overtwist  and  is  exactly  of  the  right  length, 
is  the  best  kind  of  curb.  A  leather  curb  would  be  in  some  re- 
spects better  than  a  chain;  it  is,  however,  not  only  perishable, 
but  also  subject  to  stretch  or  contract  when  exposed  to  moisture, 
and  after  having  been  once  or  twice  thoroughly  soaked,  becoming 
hard  and  inflexible,  it  is  more  likely  to  injure  the  horse's  chin 
than  a  well-made  chain. 

2945.  Q.  What  should  be  the  width  of  the  curb-chain  or  strap  ? 
A.  It  should  not  be  wider  than  is  necessary  to  nearly  fill  up  the 
chin-groove.  If  too  narrow,  it  may  cause  more  or  less  pain  from 
pinching  or  cutting;  if  too  wide,  its  edges  may  wound  the  bones 
of  the  jaw  above  the  chin-groove,  and  consequently  impair  the 
action  of  the  bit.  It  should  fit  the  chin-groove  snugly  and  evenly, 
so  as  to  distribute  the  pressure  on  it  equally  at  all  points  of  bear- 
ing. 

2946.  Q.  To  what  two  dimensions  of  the  mouth  should  the 
length  of  the  curb-strap  bear  a  certain  proportion?  A.  The 
width  of  the  horse's  mouth  and  the  height  of  the  bars. 

2947.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  length  of  the  curb  ?  A.  About 
one  fourth  more  than  the  width  of  the  mouth,  the  curb-hooks  not 
being  included;  or,  including  the  hooks,  once  and  one  half  the 
same  dimensions. 

2948.  Q.  Where  curb-hooks  are  used,  what  would  be  their 
proper  dimensions  ?  A.  Three  fourths  the  length  of  the  upper 
cheek,  or  about  one  and  one  fourth  inches. 

2949.  Q.  Of  what  importance  is  the  mouth-piece  of  the  bit,  and 
where  should  the  entire  action  of  the  bit  be  concentrated  ?  A.  It 
is  the  part  of  the  bit  through  which  the  immediate  impression  is 
made  on  the  mouth,  and  the  entire  action  of  the  bit  should  be 
concentrated  upon  it. 

2950.  Q.  What  should  the  operation  of  the  curb  of  the  bit  be 
confined  to  ?  A.  It  should  be  wholly  confined  to  the  function  of 
a  painless  fulcrum. 

2951.  Q.  From  what  is  the  form  and  proportions  of  the  mouth- 
piece deduced  ?  A.  The  form  and  proportions  of  the  mouth-piece 
must  be  deduced  wholly  from  the  interior  conformation  of  that 
part  of  the  mouth  on  which  it  is  intended  to  act;  and  these  are 
the  tongue  in  the  centre  and  the  bars  of  the  mouth  on  each  side. 

2953.  Q.  Discuss  the  form  of  the  mouth-piece  with  regard  to 
the  relative  "hardness"  or  "softness"  of  the  mouth,  and  ex- 
plain how  it  affects  the  art  of  bitting.  A.  Relative  "  hardness" 
or  "softness,"  so  far  as  this  depends  on  the  conformation  of  the 
mouth  itself,  is  a  consequence  of  the  greater  or  less  thickness  of 


356 

the  tongue,  and  the  greater  or  less  sharpness  and  sensitiveness  of 
the  bars.  The  soft,  fleshy  tongue  being  less  sensitive  to  pressure 
than  the  sharp  long  bars,  a  perfectly  straight,  unjointed  mouth- 
piece resting  wholly  on  the  tongue  would,  notwithstanding  a 
certain  amount  of  lever-action,  be  the  very  lightest  form  of  bit 
that  could  be  devised — a  good  snaffle  bit  being  more  effective. 
If  by  means  of  a  "port"  or  passage  for  the  tongue,  all  pressure 
be  removed  from  the  tongue  and  brought  on  the  bars,  we  obtain, 
with  precisely  the  same  amount  of  lever-action  as  before,  a  much 
greater  amount  of  powder,  the  painful  action  being  wholly  trans- 
ferred to  the  bars — the  art  of  bitting  consisting,  so  far  as  the 
mouth-piece  goes,  in  determining  how  much  of  the  pressure  shall 
fall  on  the  tongue  and  how  much  on  the  bars.  Consequently,  by 
a  system  of  gradations,  we  are  enabled  to  obtain  exactly  the  de- 
gree of  action  required  in  each  particular  instance  by  the  nature 
of  the  service  we  demand,  w'hatever  the  relative  thickness  of  the 
tongue  and  sensitiveness  of  the  bars  may  chance  to  be. 

2953.  Q.  What  rule  governs  the  construction  of  the  mouth 
piece  of  the  bit?  A.  The  first  rule  must  be,  in  all  cases,  to  make 
the  mouth-piece  precisely  so  wide  that,  when  placed  in  the  mouth, 
it  fits  close  to  the  outer  surface  of  the  lips  without  either  pressing 
on  these  or  being  subject  to  be  displaced  laterally,  and  the  width 
of  the  port  exactly  that  of  the  tongue-channel. 

2954.  Q.  What  is  the  injurious  eflEect  of  a  badly  fitting  mouth- 
piece? A.  If  the  mouth-piece  be  too  wide,  a  very  slight  pull  on 
one  rein  will  suffice  to  displace  it,  so  that  the  bar  of  the  mouth 
at  that  side  gets  either  altogether  under  the  port,  in  which  case 
the  whole  pressure  is  thrown  on  the  tongue,  or  partially  so,  when 
the  corner  of  the  port  will,  by  being  pressed  into  it,  cause  great 
pain ;  in  fact,  the  action  of  the  mouth-piece,  whether  with  or  with- 
out a  port,  becomes  altogether  irregular,  and  cannot  be  depended 
on.  If  the  mouth-piece  be  too  narrow,  the  lips  are  jammed  in 
over  the  bars,  the  mouth-piece  rests  more  or  less  on  them,  and 
the  whole  actionals  disturbed,  besides  w^hich,  the  horse  is  sure 
sooner  or  later  to' get  ulcerated  lips. 

2955.  Q.  What  width  is  commonly  given  by  bit-makers  to  the 
port  of  the  bit  ?  A.  The  common  practice  seems  to  be  to  make 
it  one  third  of  the  total  width  of  the  mouth-piece  in  all  cases. 

2956.  Q.  What  would  be  the  maximum  width  of  the  port, 
where  the  total  width  of  the  mouth-piece  amounts  to  four  and 
three  fourths  and  five  and  one  tenth  inches  ?  A.  About  one  and 
one  third  inches. 

2957.  Q.  State  the  different  conditions  which  govern  the 
height  of  the  port  of  a  bit  ?  A.  The  height  of  the  port  is  the 
most  variable  dimension  of  all,  depending  on  the  relative  thick- 
ness of  the  tongue  and  sensitiveness  of  the  bars,  on  the  tempera- 
ment and  general  conformation  of  the  animal,  on  the  description 


HIPPOLOGY.  357 

of  service  to  which  it  is  to  be  applied,  and  in  some  cases  the 
peculiar  style  of  riding  of  the  individual  who  uses  it. 

2958.  Q.  What  is  the  greatest  height  that  can  be  properly  given 
to  the  port  of  the  bit  ?  A.  A  height  equal  to  its  width,  that  is  to 
say,  one  and  one  third  inches. 

2959.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  giving  a  port  a  height  greater 
than  its  width  ?  A.  The  slightest  pull  on  the  reins  would,  by 
altering  the  position  of  the  lever,  bring  the  top  of  the  port  to 
press  against  the  palate,  causing  more  or  less  pain,  and  therefore 
inducing  the  horse  to  bore  with  its  head  in  the  contrary  direction 
to  the  pressure — that  is,  away  from  the  rider's  haijd. 

2960.  Q.  Discuss  the  effect  of  increasing  or  decreasing  the 
diameter  of  the  straight  portion  of  the  mouth-piece  on  the  action 
of  the  bit.  A.  The  diameter  of  the  straight  portion  of  the  mouth- 
piece may  vary  from  half  to  three  quarters  of  an  inch,  and  its 
action  on  the  bars  will  vary  with  its  thickness  :  when  under  half 
an  inch  it  pinches  to  a  certain  extent,  and  should  only  be  em- 
ployed when  quite  certain  that  this  is  desirable.  A  greater  thick- 
ness of  the  mouth-piece  adds  to  the  height  of  the  port,  and 
renders  the  action  on  the  bars  less  painful,  and  enables  us  to 
meet  the  exigencies  of  special  cases,  as  for  instance  where  a 
horse  has  a  thick,  fleshy  tongue  and  very  sensitive  bar,  and  would 
not  bear  anything  like  sharp  bitting. 

2961.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  inclining  the  port  of  the  bit  a 
little  forward  to  the  plane  of  the  bit  ?  A.  It  increases  the  tongue 
freedom  without  making  the  port  itself  higher  ;  this  can  only  be 
done  with  a  port  of  very  moderate  height,  else  thereof  of  *^  the 
palate  may  be  endangered. 

2962.  Q.  What  is  the  supposed  use  of  rings  or  other  devices 
fastened  to  the  port  of  a  bit  ?  A.  They  are  supposed  to  prevent 
the  horse  from  seizing  the  bit  between  his  grinders,  and  thereby 
neutralize  the  lever  action  ;  they  are  also  very  useful  with  what 
are  called  "  dead  mouths,"  and  favor  the  very  desirable  process 
of  "  champing  the  bit." 

2963.  Q.  Give  a  summary  of  the  fixed  dimensions  of  a  properly 
constructed  bit.  A.  The  average  height  of  the  bar  of  the  horse's 
mouth  being  one  and  three  quarters  inches,  then  upper  cheek  is 
equal  to  it ;  lower  cheek  is  equal  to  twice  the  length  of  upper 
cheek,  that  is,  three  and  one  half  inches  :  making  total  length  of 
cheek-pieces  five  and  one  quarter  inches,  measured  from  curb- 
hook  to  lower  rings. 

2964.  Q.  What  is  the  value  of  the  nose  band  with  young 
animals  ?  A.  It  prevents  the  animal  from  opening  its  mouth  too 
wide,  and  bolting  the  bit,  or  catching  hold  of  it  between  its 
teeth  ;  in  fact,  evading  its  action  one  way  or  the  other. 

2965.  What  is  the  proper  position  of  the  nose-band  on  the 
horse  ?  A.  It  should  be  adjusted  so  as  to  fall  just  across  the 
nose  at  the  point  where  the  bone  ceases  and  the  cartilage  com- 


358 

mences,  and  it  should  always  be  buckled  so  lightly  as  to  admit  of 
a  proper  amount  of  free  motion. 

2966.  Q.  What  is"*  the  rule  for  properly  placing  the  bit  in  the 
horse's  mouth  ?  A.  The  head-stall  of  the  bridle  should  tirst  be 
carefully  fitted  to  the  animal's  head  by  means  of  the  upper-cheek 
strap-buckles ;  and  the  bit  should  be  adjusted  by  the  lower 
buckles  of  the  cheek- strap  so  that  the  mouth -piece  shall  come  to 
rest  on  the  bars  of  the  mouth  exactly  opposite  the  chin-groove, 
unless  some  irregular  disposition  of  the  "tusks"  should  render 
this  impossible,  in  which  case  it  must  be  moved  only  just  so 
much  higher  as  is  absolutely  necessary  to  clear  the  obstacle. 
The  curb  may  then  be  hooked  in. 

2967.  Q.  How  tight  should  the  curb  be  fastened  ?  A.  There 
should  always  be  room  for  the  first  and  second  fingers  of  the 
right  hand  to  pass  flat  between  it  and  the  chin,  and  by  gently 
pulling  the  reins  with  the  left  hand,  whilst  the  two  fingers  of 
the  right  are  in  this  position,  it  will  be  easy  to  ascertain  whether 
any  pinching  action  occurs,  in  which  case  there  is  sure  to  be 
something  wrong. 

2968.  Q.  What  is  the  best  way  to  determine  the  proper  length 
of  curb  for  each  horse  ?  A.  If  after  buckling  the  curb-strap  it  is 
found  on  gently  pulling  on  the  reins  that  the  bit  stands  "stiff," 
the  curb  will  be  too  short,  and  on  the  pressure  being  increased 
the  horse  will  almost  entirely  either  turn  his  mouth  askew,  or 
bear  back  suddenly  to  escape  it  altogether  ;  we  therefore  loosen 
the  curb  a  little.  Drawing  the  reins  gently  as  before,  we  observe 
whether,  after  the  lower  bar  moves  through  an  angle  of  about 
eight  degrees,  the  horse  gives  his  head  gently  and  gradually  in 
the  direction  of  your  hand  as  it  increases  the  pressure  without 
either  poking  his  nose  or  shrinking  back.  If  this  is  the  case,  the 
curb-strap  is  properly  adjusted,  but  if  the  lower  bar  moves  through 
a  much  greater  angle  than  eight  degrees,  say  fifteen  to  twenty, 
before  the  horse  yields  perceptibly,  then  the  curb  will  probably 
be  too  long. 

2969.  Q.  What  are  the  characteristics  of  good  bitting,  and  what 
are  the  results  ?  A.  Lightness,  accuracy,  easy  motion,  a  total 
absence  of  stiffness,  constraint,  or  painful  action  ;  and  if  these  be 
attained,  ready  obedience  to  the  rider's  hand  and  heel  will  be  the 
result. 

TAKING  MEASURE  FOR    THE    BIT— THE    MOUTH-GAUGE— THE    TRIAL- 
BIT. 

2970.  Q.  What  is  the  manner  of  measuring  the  width  of  the 
mouth  with  a  bit  and  rule?  A.  Put  the  bit  into  the  horse's 
mouth,  hold  it  gently  up  to  one  side  of  the  mouth,  measure  off 
with  a  small  rule,  divided  into  inches  and  eighths  or  tenths,  how 
much  of  the  mouth-piece,  if  any,  protrudes  beyond  the  side  of 


HIPPOLOGY.  to^ 

the  lips  on  the  other  side ;  deduct  this  amount  from  the  actual 
dimensions  of  the  mouth-piece,  and  the  remainder  is  the  width 
of  the  mouth. 

2971.  Q.  What  is  the  value  of  the  ''  mouth-gauge"  invented  by 
Von  Weyrother?  A.  It  is  an  instrument  for  accurately  meas- 
uring the  width  of  the  mouth  and  height  of  the  bars  ;  and  is  of 
much  assistance  in  enabling  one  to  select  a  proper  bit  for  each 
animal. 

2972.  Q.  Describe  the  "  mouth -gauge  "  invented  by  Von  "Wey- 
rother. A.  It  consists  of  four  pieces,  namely,  a  graduated  mouth- 
piece ;  a  fixed  cheek-piece  ;  a  sliding  cheek-piece  graduated  into 
inches  and  eighths  or  tenths  of  inches,  provided  with  a  set-screw 
for  fixing  it,  where  required,  on  the  mouth-piece  ;  and  attached  to 
this  sliding  cheek-piece  is  a  sliding-rod  graduated  in  the  same 
manner,  which  by  means  of  a  screw  can  be  fixed  to  the  cheek- 
piece  at  pleasure. 

2973.  Q.  How  is  the  width  of  the  mouth  taken  with  Von 
Weyrother's  "mouth-gauge"?  A.  Place  the  mouth-piece  in  the 
horse's  mouth  opposite  the  chin-groove,  hold  the  fixed  cheek- 
piece  gently  up  to  the  off  side  of  the  mouth,  slide  the  movable 
one  up  to  the  lips  on  the  near  side  without  displacing  them, 
clamp  the  sliding  cheek-piece,  remove  the  gauge,  and  read  off 
the  dimension  required  on  the  mouth-piece. 

2974.  Q.  How  is  the  height  of  the  bars  measured  by  the 
mouth-gauge  ?  A.  Adjust  the  instrument  at  the  proper  width  of 
the  mouth,  place  it  in  the  mouth  opposite  the  chin-groove  but 
underneath  the  tongue,  turn  it  around  on  the  mouth-piece  until 
the  upper  limits  of  the  cheek-pieces  stand  nearly  perpendicular  to 
the  general  line  of  the  nose,  push  the  movable  rod  along  the 
sliding  cheek-piece  until  it  is  tangent  to  the  chin-groove,  then 
clamp,  remove  the  sliding  cheek-piece,  and  read  off  the  height  of 
the  bar. 

2975.  Q.  Describe  what  is  known  as  the  "trial-bit."  A.  It  is 
an  adjustable  bit,  which  enables  one  to  practically  ascertain  the 
proper  bit  for  each  individual  horse.  It  consists  of  a  certain 
number  of  spare  mouth-pieces  which  may  be  fixed  in  succession 
into  the  side-pieces  of  the  bit,  their  width  being  adjusted  by 
means  of  a  number  of  small  plates  one  tenth  of  an  inch  in  thick- 
ness, removable  at  pleasure  from  inside  to  outside  of  the  side- 
pieces,  this  giving  the  width  of  the  mouth.  Having  determined 
the  height  of  the  bars,  the  movable  ring-pieces  of  the  upper 
cheek-piece  are  moved  up  to  correspond.  The  sliding  ring-pieces 
of  the  lower  cheek-piece,  in  which  the  reins  are  buckled,  are 
moved  up  or  down  till  the  proper  proportional  length  of  the 
lower  cheek  has  been  attained.  The  adjustment  is  altered  to 
suit  the  circumstances  of  each  case  until,  by  actual  trial,  a 
certain  one  is  found  which  will  give  the  desired  result. 


360 


THE  ANGLE  OF    TRACTION. 


2976.  Q.  What  is  the  point  of  traction  with  harnessed  animals  ? 
A.  The  trace-hooks. 

2977.  Q.  What  is  the  angle  of  traction  ?  A.  The  angle  made 
with  a  given  plane  by  the  line  of  direction  in  which  the  power 
acts. 

2978.  Q.  What  is  the  general  mathematical  rule  for  the  best 
disposition  of  the  traces  in  draught,  and  why  ?  A.  When  they 
are  perpendicular  to  the  collar,  for  a  horse  will  apply  a  greater 
amount  of  force  to  the  trace  when  the  collar  neither  causes  him 
pain  nor  interferes  with  his  muscular  action  than  in  the  contrary 
case  ;  therefore  a  greater  useful  effect  may  be  attained  with 
traces  that  are  so  disposed  as  to  enable  a  horse  to  exert  its  entire 
strength  under  a  theoretically  less  favorable  angle  of  traction 
than  when  the  ease  of  the  animal  is  sacrificed  to  a  correct,  but 
in  such  a  case  inapplicable,  mathematical  principle. 

2979.  Q.  How  should  the  angle  of  traction  be  regulated  ?  A. 
It  should  be  regulated  with  reference  to  the  horse,  and  not  to  the 
carriage  exclusively. 

2980.  Q.  What  is  the  essential  point  with  regard  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  traces  ?  A.  That  the  trace  should  be  perpendicular 
to  the  horse's  shoulder-blade,  through  which  the  effort  is  exerted, 
and  whose  form  cannot  be  altered,  and  not  to  the  collar,  which 
may  be  made  of  variable  thickness. 

2981.  Q.  What  is  the  reason  for  a  value  attaching  to  a  long 
shoulder-blade  in  a  draught-horse?  A.  Because  the  larger  the 
arms  of  the  lever  above  and  below  the  fulcrum  the  more  power- 
ful will  be  the  action. 

2982.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  breast  harness  or  the  attachment 
of  the  trace  too  low  down  on  the  hames?  A.  It  has  the  effect 
of  bringing  the  pull  opposite,  or  nearly  so,  to  the  articulation  of 
the  shoulder-blade  with  the  arm-bone,  and  is  therefore  analogous 
to  a  man  running  a  race  in  a  sack. 

2983.  Q.  Where  should  the  trace  be  attached?  A.  Opposite 
to  the  immovable  point  of  the  shoulder-blade,  where  it  would  not 
cause  the  slightest  inconvenience. 

THE    COLLAR. 

2984.  Q.  At  what  point  of  the  collar  should  a  trace  be  attached, 
in  order  to  derive  the  greatest  amount  of  pulling  power?  A. 
Injury  to  the  neck  and  shoulder  is  best  avoided  by  getting  the 
pull  from  the  middle  of  the  collar,  for  the  reason  that  the  press- 
ure is  then  distributed  over  the  whole  surface,  instead  of  being 
concentrated  upon  a  point, 

2985.  Q.  What  is  the  ordinary  effect  produced  by  having  the 
pull  below  the  middle  of  a  collar  ?    A.  The  pull  on  one  end  of 


HIPPOLOGY.  361 

the  collar  will  cause  it  to  gape  away  from  the  horse's  neck  at  the 
other  end  and  grind  up  or  dowmwards.  If  the  pull  on  the  collar 
occurs  in  an  upward  direction,  the  lower  part  of  the  collar  is 
pulled  against  the  horse's  windpipe,  and  chokes  him  more  or  less  ; 
and  if  in  a  direction  downwards,  then  it  wounds  the  withers. 

2986.  Q.  What  portion  of  the  collar  should  be  the  widest  ?  A. 
The  base,  which  should  be  from  one  to  one  and  one  half  inches 
wider  there  than  anywhere  else. 

2987.  Q.  How  should  a  collar  be  fitted  to  a  horse?  A.  I^'ot 
only  should  it  be  adjusted  to  the  horse's  neck  and  shoulders  when 
standing,  but  the  horse  should  be  put  into  action,  because  the 
shape  and  dimensions  of  the  neck  and  shoulders  are  wonderfully 
altered  in  some  horses  when  they  are  put  in  motion. 

THE    HAMES. 

2988.  Q.  "What  is  the  most  desirable  method  of  attaching  the 
trace  to  the  hames,  and  what  objection  is  there  to  it  ?  A.  The 
trace,  whether  a  chain,  or  cord,  or  made  of  leather,  working 
directly  in  the  draught  eye  of  the  hames.  The  only  objection  it 
has  is  that  the  friction  of  the  trace,  as  it  changes  its  position  up 
and  down,  chafes  the  outer  side  of  the  collar  and  wears  it  out. 

2989.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  construction  of 
hames  on  rules  laid  down  by  mathematicians  and  that  of  harness- 
makers?  A.  The  former  insist  on  the  trace  being  adjusted  so  as 
to  work  horizontally,  while  the  constructors  of  hames  place  the 
bar  or  the  scroll  as  if  the  pull  were  to  be  exerted  at  right-angles 
to  the  leg  of  the  hames,  through  this  to  the  collar,  and  finally  to 
the  horse's  shoulder-blades. 

2990.  Q.  Why  is  the  hames-maker's  principle  the  correct  one  ? 
A.  As  the  horse's  shoulder-blade  is  never  (or  at  least  only  in  very 
miserably-built  horses)  qnite  perpendicular,  it  follows  that  the 
horizontal  trace  must  always  act  at  an  angle  on  the  bar  or  scroll, 
instead  of  on  the  prolongation  of  their  axis. 

THE  TRACE. 

2991.  Q.  What  advantages  are  derived  from  harnessing  horses 
near  to  their  work  ?  A.  Where  roadways  are  good,  it  is  desirable 
to  do  so  when  work  is  to  be  done  on  crowded  thoroughfares  with 
frequent  stoppages  and  sharp  turnings.  Even  for  military  pur- 
poses there  is  an  advantage  in  making  the  teams  as  short  as  is 
otherwise  consistent  with  the  ease  of  the  horses,  because  the  length 
of  the  columns  is  thereby  kept  within  limits.  • 

2992.  Q.  Does  the  short  trace  confer  a  greater  mechanical 
advantage  on  the  motor  (horse)  than  a  longer  one  ?  A.  The  con- 
trary may  be  the  case,  for  the  angle  of  traction  may  be  made 
more  favorable  with  a  long  than  with  a  short  trace.    The  well- 


362  THE   ABMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIi^ER. 

known  advantage  of  applying  force  as  near  as  possible  to  the 
centre  of  gravity  of  the  object  to  be  moved  depends  to  so  great 
an  extent  on  the  possibility  thereby  acquired  of  avoiding  waste  of 
power  by  the  force  being  exerted  at  a  wrong  angle,  or  in  a  wrong 
direction,  that  this  consideration  (the  angle  or  the  direction)  be- 
comes the  principal  one. 

2993.  Q.  What  lesson  is  taught  by  the  fact  that  over-fatigued 
or  over-weighted  draught-horses  put  their  heads  together  and 
pulj  towards  a  central  line?  A.  That  in  carriage-draught  the 
inclination  of  the  traces  to  the  longitudinal  axis  of  the  vehicle 
cannot  safely  be  neglected. 

2994.  Q.  Why  is  it  that  considerably  greater  M'eight  per  horse 
may  be  calculated  on  for  teams  of  four  than  for  those  composed 
of  six,  eight,  or  twelve  horses  ?  A.  Because  there  is  always 
difficulty  in  getting  the  increased  nnmber  to  act  simultaneously 
and  in  the  proper  direction. 

2995.  Q.  Are  short  traces  an  impediment  to  draught  ?  Not  in 
themselves,  if  the  construction  of  the  horse  and  that  of  our  car- 
riages and  the  mode  in  which  the  horse  is  necessarily  attached 
to  them  did  not  create  obstacles  that  must  necessarily  be  sur- 
mounted at  the  expense  of  the  horse's  legs. 

2996.  Q.  What  advantage  does  a  long  trace  possess  over  and 
above  a  short  one  ?  A.  The  longer  the  traces  up  to  a  certain 
point,  the  more  nearly  will  the  lines  which  they  describe  corre- 
spond with  the  line  of  traction,  and  therefore  the  more  usefully 
will  the  power  be  employed  ;  they  prevent  sudden  lateral  shocks 
to  the  collar,  the  whole  weight  of  which  falls  on  the  fore-legs, 
and  nothing  wears  or  fatigues  a  horse  more  than  this. 

THE  LENGTH  OF  THE  POLE  AND   POLE-CHAINS. 

2997.  Q.  What  does  a  longer  trace  necessarily  involve  regard- 
ing the  pole  of  a  vehicle  ?  A.  The  longer  the  trace  the  longer 
must  be  the  pole,  as  the  end  of  the  latter  should  always  project 
to  a  certain  extent  beyond  the  horse's  chests. 

2998.  Q.  What  is  this  certain  length  of  pole,  and  why  should  it 
be  so  ?  A.  When  the  end  of  a  pole  projects  but  very  little  beyond 
the  line  of  the  horses'  chests,  the  animals  must,  when  suddenly 
called  upon  to  stop,  inevitably  throw  out  their  croups  to  the  side, 
which  when  carried  to  excess  is  unsightly  ;  whereas  by  prolong- 
ing the  pole  they  reduce  this  outward  movement  of  the  croups. 

2999.  Q.  As  gentleman's  carriages  and  the  like  are  used  with 
short  poles,  how  is  the  necessity  for  the  long  pole  overcome  ?  A. 
By  putting  a  cf  oss-tree  at  the  head  of  the  pole,  to  each  end  of 
wrhich  the  pole  chain  or  strap  is  attached. 


HIPPOLOGY.  863 


THE  HEIGHT  OF  THE  WHEEL. 

3§00.  Q.  Regarding  the  wheels  of  a  vehicle,  how  would  draught 
of  the  vehicle  be  easiest  ?  A.  If  the  axles  were  placed  on  a  level 
with  the  trace-hooks  or  point  of  traction,  the  trace  itself  being 
also  horizontal. 

3001.  Q.  Although  the  principle  of  high  wheels  being  the  cor- 
rect one  for  easy  draught,  are  there  any  limitations  in  the  prac- 
tice of  it  ?  A.  There  must  be,  even  with  the  horizontal  trace. 
With  a  horse  16  hands  high,  the  point  of  attachment  of  the  trace 
to  the  haraes  could  scarcely  be  brought  nearer  to  the  ground  than 
44  inches,  and  with  a  horizontal  trace  this  would  involve  a  fore- 
wheel  of  seven  feet  four  inches  in  diameter.  As  the  highest 
wheel  used  for  field-guns  is  only  five  feet  in  diameter,  it  will  be 
seen  that  it  is  quite  impossible  to  carry  out  the  i)rinciple. 

3002.  Q.  Admitting  that  the  horizontal  trace  is  the  most  favor- 
able for  traction  on  a  perfectly  level  and  smooth  surface,  how 
is  the  draught  affected  on  an  inclined  plane  ?  A.  When  the  car- 
riage leaves  the  level  and  gets  on  an  inclined  plane,  the  horizontal 
trace  becomes  parallel  to  the  road,  and  is  no  longer  at  right 
angles  with  the  perpendicular  passing  through  the  nave  of  the 
wheel,  therefore  greater  power  must  be  applied. 

3003.  Q.  What  is  the  lever-power  of  any  two  wheels  in  over- 
coming obstacles  proportionate  to  ?  A.  To  the  height  or  diameter 
of  the  wheels. 

3004.  Q.  Why  are  the  fore-wheels  of  vehicles  as  a  rule  made  of 
considerably  less  diameter  than  the  hind  ones  ?  A.  For  the  con- 
venience of  turning,  the  room  required  being  thereby  considerably 
lessened. 

3005.  Q.  Why  is  it  a  mistake  to  throw  the  heaviest  part  of  a 
load  on  the  fore  wheels  of  a  vehicle?  A.  In  the  first  place,  being 
smaller,  they  are  weaker ;  in  the  second  place,  whatever  their 
relative  height  may  be,  the  fore  wheels  have  always  heavier  work 
to  do  than  the  hind  wheels,  for  whom  they  crush  obstacles  and 
open  smooth  tracks — planing  the  way,  as  it  were,  for  them. 

3006.  Q.  Why  is  the  same  height  applied  to  the  fore  wheel  in 
artillery  carriages  as  to  the  hind  wheel  ?  A.  In  order  to  support 
the  greater  weight  of  the  limber,  when  filled  with  ammunition 
and  carrying  two  or  three  men,  than  the  weight  of  the  gun  itself, 
as  well  as  to  obtain  the  leverage  in  overcoming  obstacles  which  a 
large  wheel  possesses  over  a  small  one. 

TRAINING  FOR  DRAUGHT. 

3007.  Q.  What  is  the  greatest  and  most  frequent  mistake  made 
in  training  for  draught  ?  A.  It  is  the  undertaking  of  too  much 
at  a  time  with  young  horses. 

3008.  Q.  What  is  the  result  generally  of  undertaking  too  much  at 


364  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

a  time  in  training  for  drauglit  ?  A.  While  some  horses  may  submit 
patiently,  many  others  will  resist,  become  frightened  or  infuriated, 
and  smash  everything,  and  in  the  end  spoiled  for  draught  forever. 

3009.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  one  begin  to  train  a  horse  for 
draught  ?  A.  It  is  much  better,  and  in  the  end  shorter,  to  begin 
by  putting  some  portions  of  the  harness  on  the  horse  in  the  stable, 
working  up  to  the  whole  set  by  degrees. 

3010.  Q.  What  is  next  to  be  done  after  putting  all  the  harness 
on  in  the  stable  ?  A.  Take  the  horse  out  and  walk  him  quietly 
about,  taking  care  that  the  traces  do  not  dangle.  Then  the  traces 
may  be  taken  down,  lengthened  a  yard  or  two  by  a  piece  of  rope, 
and  held  by  an  assistant  in  rear  whilst  the  trainer  takes  the  reins. 

3011.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  a  young  horse  prior  to 
training  him  for  draught  ?  A.  A  perfectly  raw  horse  should 
first  of  all  be  lounged  and  trained  to  a  certain  extent  under  the 
saddle.  The  more  carefully  and  completely  this  has  been  done 
the  less  trouble  there  will  be  afterwards. 

3012.  Q.  In  training  young  horses  for  draught  what  two  things 
does  he  come  in  contact  with  first,  and  what  is  the  consequent 
action  of  the  horse?  A.  First  of  all  the  collar,  and  then  the 
bridle,  or  more  properly  the  bit.  At  first  starting  young  horses 
usually  make  a  violent  elfort,  plunging,  as  it  were,  into  the  collar 
and  then  recoiling  again  to  make  a  new  plunge  and  a  new  recoil, 
which  sometimes  ends  in  their  throwing  themselves  down  or 
perhaps  running  away. 

3013.  Q.  What  is  it  that  the  horse  recoils  from  in  this  sudden 
plunge?  A.  He  recoils  from  the  sudden  pain  inflicted  on  the 
neck  and  shoulders,  and  perhaps  from  a  sharp  bit  he  has  in  his 
mouth. 

3014.  Q.  Why  is  it  that  mules  and  oxen  w^ork  better  than  horses 
for  heavily  loaded  vehicles?  A.  Heavy  and  slow  draught  ani- 
mals acquire  the  habit  of  throwing  their  weight  gradually  into 
the  collar,  thus  bringing  the  vehicle  by  slow  degrees  into  motion, 
for  it  is  a  well  known  fact  that  it  requires  twice  or  even  thrice 
the  effort  which  suffices  to  keep  a  loaded  vehicle  in  motion  to 
start  it.  When  horses  (except  large,  well-trained  draught-horses) 
are  required  to  start  a  wagon,  omnibus,  tram-car,  or  other  toler- 
ably heavy  vehicle  quickly,  they  almost  always  effect  this  by 
making  a  sort  of  plunge  into  the  collar,  and  a  large  proportion  of 
the  effort  thus  made  is  expended  on  straining  tlie  harness  and 
carriage,  and  inflicting  unnecessary  pj^in  on  themselves. 

3015.  Q.  Is  there  anything  known  whereby  this  plunging  into 
the  collar  may  be  remedied  ?  A.  Yes  ;  Fehrman's  "  horse-saver," 
which  consists  of  a  hollow  cylinder  of  iron  about  12  inches  long, 
closed  at  one  end  by  a  permanently-fixed  bottom,  through  the 
middle  of  which  a  hole  is  bored  sufficiently  large  to  admit  the 
free  passage  of  a  |-inch  to  |-ineh  thick  iron  rod  ;  the  other  end 
of  the  cylinder  has  a  movable  bottom,  and  is  fitted  with  a  loop  or 


HIPPOLOGY.  365 

ring.  The  interior  of  the  cylinder  contains  rings  of  India  rubber, 
such  as  are  used  for  gas  and  steam  checks,  and  thin  metal  disks 
perforated  in  the  centre  with  a  |-inch  to  |^-inch  opening  placed 
alternately,  a  ring  coming  next  to  the  fixed  bottom  of  the  cylinder 
and  a  disk  at  the  other  end  of  the  column  of  rings.  The  iron  rod 
has  one  of  its  ends  shaped  like  a  draught-hook  ;  the  rod  passes 
through  the  hole  in  the  fixed  bottom  of  the  cylinder,  leaving  the 
liook  projecting,  and  up  through  the  centres  of  the  rings  and 
metal  disks,  resting  on  the  topmost  of  these  by  means  of  a  key  ; 
the  whole  is  completed  when  the  movable  bottom  is  fixed  into  the 
cyUnder. 

3016.  Q.  In  what  way  does  Fehrman's  "horse-saver"  work? 
A.  If  a  pair  of  tliem  be  attached  by  their  rings  to  the  draught- 
hooks  of  a  vehicle,  and  by  their  hooks  to  the  trace  of  a  harnessed 
horse,  the  animal  will  exert  its  strength  against  the  elastic  column 
of  rings  and  disks  inside  the  cylinder,  instead  of  immediately 
against  the  rigid  frame  of  the  vehicle.  Overcoming  the  resist- 
ance easily  at  first,  it  does  not  have  recourse  to  a  violent  plunge 
into  the  collar,  and  by  the  time  the  iron  rod  has  begun  to  com- 
press the  rubber  rings  into  a  state  of  rigidity,  the  vehicle,  if  not 
loaded  out  of  proportion  to  the  number  of  horses  attached,  will 
have  begun  to  move. 

3017.  Q.  In  training  horses  for  draught,  what  advantage  is 
derived  from  a  horse  discovering  that  an  immediate  result  follows 
its  first  effort  ?  A.  Practice  has  proved  that  the  animal  seems  to 
be  encouraged  thereby  to  exert  its  strength. 

3018.  Q.  What  appliance  to  a  wagon  diminishes  the  amount  of 
traction  required  ?  A.  The  use  of  springs  very  considerably 
diminishes  it  (although  the  weight  of  the  vehicle  is  increased 
thereby),  for  the  reason  that  the  checks  to  the  collar,  arising  from 
the  inequalities  of  the  ground,  are  greatly  diminished. 

3019.  Q.  Although  in  training  horses  for  draught  it  is  not 
advisable  to  use  a  very  light  bit,  and  a  heavy  one  being  very 
painful,  how  may  the  matter  be  remedied?  A.  By  using  a 
training-halter  and  the  running-reins  combined,  a  common 
snaffle  can  be  put  into  the  young  horse's  mouth  without  incurring 
the  least  risk  of  his  running  away,  as  the  halter  prevents  the  ani- 
mal opening  his  jaws  and  getting  the  snaffle  on  to  his  tongue, 
whilst  the  running-reins  afford  a  perfect  command  over  the  head. 

3030.  Q.  What  should  the  driver  do  when  using  the  training- 
halter  and  running-reins  at  the  first  start  of  the  animal  ?  A.  When 
the  young  horse  makes  his  first  plunge  into  the  collar,  the  driver 
should  give  him  his  head,  and  the  probability  is  that  there  will 
be  no  recoil,  or  at  least  that  it  will  then  be  quite  clear  where  the 
difficulty  lies,  and  therefore  the  remedy  easier  to  find. 

3021.  Q.  What  is  it  advisable  to  do  in  bitting  horses  for  draught 
for  the  first  time  ?  A.  They  should  be  bitted  so  that  they  may 
take  a  firm  leaning  on  the  hand  at  first,  and  then  by  degrees  the 


366  THE   AKMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

bitting  may  be  altered  to  suit  all  the  circumstances,  both  of  the 
animal  and  the  driver. 

3022.  Q.  What  mistake  is  sometimes  made  in  putting  an  un- 
trained horse  to  a  vehicle?  A.  It  is  in  some  narrow  court  or 
yard  which  necessitates,  perhaps,  a  sharp  turning  immediately 
after  starting.  This  should  be  avoided,  and  the  start  made  if 
possible  on  a  straight  line  and  on  a  quiet  road,  and  early  morn- 
ing is  the  best  time  for  this  work. 

3023.  Q.  What  two  parts  of  a  harness  may,  if  carelessly  or 
awkwardly  used,  prove  serious  obstacles  to  the  training  of  a 
young  horse  ?  A.  One  of  these  is  the  crupper,  the  other  the 
bearing-rein.  This  latter  should  be  laid  aside  altogether  with  a 
young  horse  at  the  first  trial ;  if  judiciously  used  subsequently,  it 
may  be  of  good  service  in  getting  the  horse's  head  into  the  proper 
position,  and  making  it  light  in  the  hand  by  dividing  the  pressure 
over  two  mouth-pieces  instead  of  one  ;  and  this  is  its  legitimate 
use. 

3024.  Q.  What  class  of  horses  require  most  caution  in  the  use 
of  the  bearing-rein?  A.  Short-necked  horses  with  ill-set-on 
heads  ;  these  are  the  animals  that  people  are  naturally  tempted 
to  try  it  on. 

3025.  Q.  Of  what  use  is  the  bearing-rein  on  a  horse  ?  A.  If  a 
tolerably  fresh  horse  be  turned  loose  in  a  field,  especially  one  in 
which  other  strange  horses  are  present,  it  will  be  seen,  in  most 
instances,  after  a  few  cautious  movements,  with  the  neck  erect 
and  its  weight  thrown  well  back  on  its  haunches,  in  the  attitude 
of  preparation  for  any  emergency,  suddenly  to  bolt  off,  with  the 
head  and  neck  brought  down  more  and  more  as  it  extends  itself 
and  increases  its  pace,  whilst  reconnoitring  the  ground  and  its 
new  companions  in  a  wide  circle  round  them.  And  this  is  pre- 
cisely what  a  frightened  horse  will  do  in  harness  unless  checked 
by  the  bearing-rein,  which,  if  of  proper  length,  will  prevent  the 
animal  from  laying  itself  out  with  extended  head  and  neck  and 
throwing  all  its  weight  on  the  fore  legs,  which,  of  course,  leaves 
the  hind  pair  their  maximum  power  of  propulsion. 

3026.  Q.  Why  is  the  crupper  still  more  dangerous  than  the 
bearing-rein  ?  A.  Because  it  is  by  far  the  most  usual  primary 
incitement  to  kicking  in  horses. 

3027.  Q.  What  is  one  of  the  most  obvious  of  uses  for  the 
crupper?  A.  It  is  that  it  affords  a  sort  of  counter-check  for  the 
bearing-rein. 

3028.  Q.  As  there  is  really  no  good  reason  why  the  harness- 
saddle  or  terret-pad  should  not  be  so  constructed  as  to  keep  its 
place  sufficiently  well  as  to  afford  a  counter-check  for  the  bearing- 
rein,  what  conclusion  is  arrived  at  by  well-known  horsemen  on 
the  subject  of  the  crupper?  A.  That,  although  a  great  number 
of  horses  willingly  endure  the  crupper,  a  great  many  others, 
especially  mares  and  young  animals,  will  not  do  so,  and  with 


HIPPOLOGT.  367 

them  it  becomes  an  incitement  to  vice  of  one  kind  or  the  other; 
and  finally,  that  it  may  very  well  be  dispensed  with  in  all  cases. 

3029.  Q.  In  placing  a  brake  upon  a  vehicle,  how  should  the 
power  be  applied  ?  A.  As  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the  brake-bar 
as  possible,  and  this  should  act  on  the  tire  of  the  wheel  on  a  level 
with  the  axle-tree.  If  the  power,  as  is  sometimes  the  case,  be 
made  to  act  not  in  the  centre  of  the  brake-bar,  but  at  or  near  one 
end  of  it,  the  consequence  is  that  the  other  end,  not  being  equally 
braced  up,  jerks  and  makes  a  clapping  noise,  not  only  occasion- 
ing loss  of  power,  but  apt  to  frighten  the  horse. 

Kestiveness. 

how  to  render  horses  obedient. 

8030.  Q.  Are  the  terms  restiveness  and  viciousness  synonymous  ? 
A.  No.  Simple  restiveness  or  disobedience  should  not  be  con- 
founded with  the  peculiar  temperament  or  disposition  which 
constitutes  a  really  vicious  horse. 

3031.  Q.  Can  a  vicious  animal's  temper  be  changed?  A. 
Scarcely,  although  it  may  be  dominated  by  force.  The  over- 
awed and  subdued  brute  is  not  thereby  rendered  a  useful  and 
docile  servant. 

3032.  Q.  What  is  the  danger  in  attempting  to  overcome  special 
forms  of  restiveness  or  insubordination  ?  A.  The  natural  ten- 
dency is  to  induce  riders  to  rely  on  forcible  measures  in  all  cases, 

■the  result  of  which  is  but  too  frequently  to  convert  a  simply 
restive  horse  into  a  decidedly  vicious  one. 

3033.  Q.  What  should  never  be  forgotten  in  attempting  to 
overcome  a  horse  by  force  ?  A.  That  in  the  end  the  horse  is 
stronger  than  the  man  ;  that  there  is  very  gi-eat  danger  of  this 
becoming  quite  clear  to  the  former,  when  mere  force  comes  to  be 
opposed  to  force  ;  and  that  this  very  consciousness  is  what  con- 
stitutes restiveness*  and  if  exasperated  by  cruel  treatment,  be- 
comes vice,  pure  and  simple. 

3034.  Q.  Before  the  stigma  of  vice  is  affixed  to  a  horse,  what 
should  be  considered  ?  A.  What  the  poor  thing  might  with  fair- 
ness retort,  and  the  words  ignorance,  timidity,  or  brutality  will 
immediately  suggest  themselves  ;  want  of  judgment  as  to  what  a 
horse  can  fairly  do,  want  of  decision  and  promptitude  in  demand- 
ing this,  or  unnecessary  violence  in  enforcing  a  demand,  especially 
an  unreasonable  one,  are  almost  always  the  first  causes  of 
restiveness. 

3035.  Q.  What  does  the  intelligence  of  the  horse  enable  it  to 
soon  find  out  ?  A.  Whether  its  rider  be  or  be  not  deficient  in  that 
self-same  quality — courage  ;  the  consciousness  of  superior  strength 
encourages  it  to  set  the  rider  at  defiance  and  it  turns  restive. 

3036.  Q.  What  special  thing  is  to  be  considered  with  regard  to 


368  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

the  horse's  character  ?  A.  That  it  loves  to  exercise  its  powers, 
and  it  possesses  a  great  spirit  of  emulation  ;  it  likes  variety  of 
scene  and  amusement,  and  will  work  willingly  to  the  last  gasp 
under  a  rider  that  understands  how  to  indulge  it  in  all  this  with- 
out overtaxing  its  powers. 

3037.  Q.  How  are  the  evils  of  having  horses  refuse  to  go  any 
but  a  certain  way,  or  to  leave  their  stables,  or  cling  to  other 
horses  they  meet  with,  produced  ?  A.  Deficiency  of  exercise  and 
riding  the  same  dull  round,  either  alone  or  in  company  with  other 
horses.  Horses,  like  men,  don't  like  to  be  bored,  and  would 
rather  stick  at  home  ;  they  like  amusement,  variety,  and  society  ; 
give  them  their  share  of  these,  and  avoid  getting  into  a  groove  of 
any  kind,  either  as  to  time  or  place. 

3038.  Q.  What  is  the  peculiar  method  of  treating  restiveness 
by  the  English  and  Continental  systems  ?  A.  The  English  plan 
is  merely  gradually  habituating  the  horse  to  go  in  the  manner 
desired,  and  leaving  it  very  much  to  its  own  will  and  pleasure  to 
do  so.  The  Continental  mode  consists  in  endeavoring  to  obtain, 
by  more  stringent  and  systematic  means,  a  perfect  mastery  over 
its  movements,  aiming  at  complete  mastery  over  the  propelling 
power — that  is,  the  horse's  hind  legs. 

3039.  Q.  What  does  the  Continental  system  tend  to  call  forth  ? 
A.  If  hurried  or  injudiciously  employed,  it  wall  call  forth  the 
spirit  of  resistance  and  insubordination  in  a  horse,  for  it  is  pre- 
cisely this  control  over  their  hind  legs  that  horses  dislike,  and 
seek  to  escape  from  with  the  greatest  pertinacity  and  cunning. 


GENERAL  RULES  FOR  THE  TREATMENT  OF  RESTIVENESS. 

3040.  Q.  What  is  the  first  and  most  important  rule  to  be 
observed  in  the  treatment  of  restiveness  ?  A.  To  ascertain  the 
cause  of  the  restiveness,  and  the  circumstances  under  which  it 
was  first  displayed  and  is  usually  repeated. 

3041.  Q.  Where  are  the  principal  causes  of  restiveness  to  be 
sought?  A.  Either  in  some  physical  defect  of  conformation,  in 
the  condition  of  the  animal,  in  its  disposition,  or  in  its  temper, 
and  sometimes  in  a  combination  of  two  or  more  of  these. 

3042.  Q.  What  frequently  leads  young  horses  into  insubordi- 
nation ?  A.  Defects  of  conformation,  such  as  weak  backs,  hind 
quarters,  or  something  abnormal  about  the  head  and  neck. 

3043.  Q.  How  does  starvation  act  as  a  cure  for  restiveness  ? 
A.  In  most  instances  it  is  positively  injurious,  A  horse's  temper 
may  be  subdued  to  a  certain  extent,  but  then  the  animal  becomes 
unfit  to  do  work. 

3044.  Q.  What  is  the  second  general  rule  for  the  treatment  of 
restiveness  ?  A.  Avoid  giving  the  horse  an  opportunity  of  resist- 
ing your  will  successfully,  so  long  as  it  possesses  the  means  of 


HIPPOLOGY.  369 

doing  so — that  is  to  say,  until  one  has  acquired  complete  control 
over  its  movements. 

3045.  Q.  What  is  a  safe  method  to  adopt  to  secure  control  over 
a  restive  horse  ?  A.  Have  your  horse  led  into  a  riding-school,  or 
some  enclosed  space  where  it  has  never  shown  restiveness,  and 
do  the  work  there  ;  and  after  each  lesson  dismount  again,  loosen- 
ing girth,  etc.,  also  caressing  the  animal  if  obedient,  and  avoid- 
ing to  push  it  prematurely  to  the  verge  of  resistance,  trusting 
-rather  to  gradual  'progress  than  to  violent  measures.  All  horses 
are  very  susceptible  to  and  grateful  for  kindness. 

3046.  Q.  How  should  horses  be  treated  who  refuse  to  leave 
their  stables,  either  from  natural  sluggishness  or  indisposition  to 
leave  their  companions  ?  A.  Lead  the  animal  away  to  some  dis- 
tance, taking  along  a  nose-bag  of  oats,  of  which  give  a  handful 
now  and  then.  You  may  after  a  time  mount  the  horse,  and 
when  on  its  back  give  it  a  haudful  of  oats  from  the  saddle  before 
attempting  to  go  further,  getting  its  head,  of  course,  in  the 
proper  direction.  If  this  does  not  succeed  at  first,  dismount 
again  rather  than  risk  a  conflict,  lead  the  animal  out  a  couple  of 
miles,  and  give  it  the  whole  contents  of  the  nose-bag  at  some 
convenient  place,  taking  each  day  a  different  road,  and  never 
feeding  twice  in  the  same  place.  You  can  always  ride  home, 
and  this  will  be  the  opportunity  for  acquiring  control  over  its 
neck,  head,  and  hind  legs.  The  more  it  hurries  back  to  its  stable, 
the  better  one  will  be  able  to  do  this  work,  dismounting  at  some 
little  distance  and  leading  the  horse  home,  never  repeating  the 
operation  in  exactly  the  same  place. 

3047.  Q.  How  should  a  horse  be  treated  who  has  an  attachment 
to  stable  companions?  A.  Put  a  rider  on  one  of  these,  whose 
business  it  will  be  to  sometimes  keep  ahead  and  then  alongside 
your  own  horse,  or  again  in  rear,  making  circuits,  riding  away, 
and  returning.  The  nose-bag  with  oats  may  also  be  added  to 
'this  method  of  treatment.  Thus  the  animal  may  be  got  and  kept 
under  way  constantly,  which  gives  the  rider  the  desired  oppor- 
tunity of  working  it. 

3048.  Q.  What,  therefore,  is  the  main  object  of  the  preliminary 
treatment  for  restiveness  of  the  above-mentioned  forms  ?  A.  To 
get  the  horse  to  go  somehow  in  the  first  instance,  and  then  by 
degrees  in  obedience. 

3049.  Q.  What  should  be  done  if  the  restiveness  be  traceable 
to  physical  defects?  A.  The  seat  must  be  adjusted  very  care- 
fully, and  sometimes  even  change  the  saddle  with  that  view. 
Never  rest  the  whole  weight  on  the  horse's  loins  by  placing  your- 
self at  one  end  of  a  long  saddle,  and  tuck  up  the  legs  with  short 
stirrups  at  the  other  end.  On  the  contrary,  one  must  get  well 
down  into  the  centre  of  the  saddle,  with  somewhat  of  a  fork  seat, 
and  the  bringing  of  the  weight  forward  must  be  accomplished, 
not  by  bending  in  that  direction  from  the  hips,  which  will  lose 


370  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

you  all  control  over  the  horse's  neck  and  head,  but  by  bringing 
the  seat  itself  into  the  proper  place. 

3050.  Q.  As  it  is  impossible  to  lay  down  any  cut-and-dried  rule 
for  the  treatment  of  restiveness  in  each  individual  horse,  what  is 
it  almost  always  advisable  to  have  recourse  to,  and  why  ?  A.  To 
the  lounge  ;  if  for  no  other  reason,  because  it  affords  the  best 
opportunity  of  seeing  and  studying  the  horse's  action,  and  ascer- 
taining exactly  the  means  by  which  it  resists. 

3051.  Q.  When  using  the  lounge,  at  what  period  should  a  rider 
be  placed  on  the  horse's  back  ?  A.  "When  the  horse  is  inclined  to 
trot  out  well  and  freely  on  the  lounge,  and  then  to  alternate  the 
lounging  and  riding  lessons  as  may  seem  advisable,  until  the 
former  become  unnecessary. 

3052.  Q.  What  is  the  general  plan  for  treating  restiveness? 
A.  First,  lounging  with  loose  reins  ;  second,  lounging  with  reins 
gradually  shortened  until  the  hind  legs  are  brought  under  sub- 
jection, the  horse  still  going  free  ;  third,  riding  with  loose  reins  ; 
fourth,  riding  with  shortened  ones,  varied  with  bending  lessons 
—  at  first  whilst  standing  still,  then  in  motion  ;  fifth,  and  finally, 
occasional  rides  out,  giving  up  the  school  by  degrees,  until  at 
length  it  may  be  dispensed  with  altogether.  Patience,  deter- 
mined, cool  courage,  intelligence,  kind  treatment,  and  persever- 
ance are  the  main  requisites  ;  there  is  no  royal  road— the  thing 
can  only  be  done  by  fair  work. 

3053.  Q.  What  position  will  restive  horses  generally  assume  at 
the  moment  they  defend  themselves  ?  A.  In  almost  all  cases 
they  gather  their  legs  under  the  body,  sinking  their  croup, 
which  may  be  seen  from  the  position  of  the  tail,  getting  the  head 
and  neck  well  down,  and  putting  up  the  back  like  an  angry  cat. 

3054.  Q.  What  is  the  main  thing  to  be  done  in  overcoming  the 
position  thus  assumed  ?  A.  The  main  thing  to  do  is  to  get  the 
horse  to  stretch  himself  by  trying  to  get  the  head  up  a  little  ;  if 
opposition  be  met  with,  give  way,  as  if  you  did  not  perceive  it, 
and  try  again.  In  proportion  as  you  get  the  head  and  neck  up 
gently,  the  back  will  flatten  down  and  the  horse  will  move  one  or 
both  hind  legs  backward  or  one  or  both  fore  legs  forward  ;  by 
degrees  the  horse  will  be  got  to  stretch  himself. 

3055.  Q.  When  a  horse  has  learned  to  stretch  himself  willingly, 
what  will  the  next  object  be  ?  A.  To  get  it  to  move  in  obedience. 
If  it  refuses  to  go  forward,  by  edging  over  its  head  and  neck  in 
the  proper  position,  it  will  step  sidewise,  to  save  itself  from  fall- 
ing ;  reward  the  horse  by  loosing  the  straps,  and  leave  it  to  the 
groom  to  lead  about  for  exercise  and  then  home.  In  a  day  or 
two  it  will  follow  your  hand  forwards  for  the  sake  of  the  oats  you 
show  it ;  then  by  degrees  it  will  learn  to  circle  with  the  croup 
round  the  fore  hand  ;  you  will  "unfix"  the  feet  and  flatten  the 
back  by  degrees,  taking  care  to  stop  each  movement  and  limit  its 
extent  with  the  cavesson  ;  real  obedience  is  thereby  established, 


HIPPOLOGY.  371 

and  the  horse  will  soon  follow  you  in  a  wide  circle,  when,  the 
assistant  taking  your  place  at  its  head,  you  at  length  arrive  at 
lounging. 

3056.  Q.  On  the  whole,  what  is  the  key  to  mastering  the  horse's 
powers  and  utilizing  them  fairly,  whether  merely  for  handling 
young  ones,  or  for  the  prevention  and  cure  of  restiveness  ?  A.  It 
is  to  be  found  only  in  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  mechanism  of 
that  animal's  movements. 

3057.  Q.  Where  is  the  central  point  of  resistance  in  a  horse  that 
coils  himself  up,  as  it  were,  and  how  is  the  rider  to  be  governed 
with  regard  to  his  seat  ?  A.  It  is  the  fourteenth  vertebra,  and 
the  nearer  the  rider's  seat  is  to  that  point  or  centre  of  motion  the 
less  will  it  be  liable  to  disturbance  from  the  violent  efforts  that 
ensue.  If  he  sits  further  back  towards  the  loins,  his  weight  being 
there  will  interfere  with  the  management  of  a  rearer  or  backer 
and  expose  him  directly  to  the  action  of  a  kicker  ;  if,  on  the  con- 
trary, he  sits  close  to  the  horse's  withers,  he  unduly  overweights 
the  fore  hand,  and  loses  most  of  his  control  over  the  hind  legs. 

3058.  Q.  What  should  be  the  position  of  the  rider's  body  from 
the  hips  up,  and  why?  A.  The  getting  up  of  the  horse's  head 
and  neck  to  the  required  position  demands  a  certain  amount  of 
fixity  of  the  spinal  column,  for  the  work  to  be  done  by  the  arms 
brings  into  play  the  muscles  of  the  entire  back.  The  rider  that 
comes  into  antagonism  with  his  horse  is  only  then  safe  in  his  seat 
when  his  own  centres  of  gravity  and  motion  fall  in  the  same  per- 
pendicular line  with  the  horse's  centre  of  motion  ;  otherwise  he 
will  have  to  contend  with  the  centrifugal  motion  by  dint  of  mus- 
cular exertion  alone. 

Special  Forms  of  Restiveness. 

BOLTING. 

3059.  Q.  What  is  the  first  step  to  be  taken  in  the  treatment  of 
a  bolting  horse  ?    A.  To  ascertain  why  the  horse  bolts. 

3060.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  causes  of  bolting  in  horses? 
A.  A  nervous  and  excitable  temperament,  physical  defect,  or 
peculiarity  of  conformation;  it  is  frequently  rather  an  effort  of 
despair  than  anything  else,  and  an  evidence  that  something  has 
been  demanded  of  the  animal  beyond  its  strength. 

3061.  Q.  What  kind  of  horses  endeavor  to  escape  pain,  in  in- 
judicious attempts  to  force  them,  by  running  away  ?  A.  Horses 
with  short  necks,  narrow  jaws,  and  ill-set-on  heads ;  or,  again, 
with  long,  unstable  necks. 

3063.  Q.  What  is  the  first  impulse  of  a  great  many  riders 
whose  animals  bolt  ?  A.  To  put  a  sharper  bit  into  their  mouths, 
or  at  least  to  shorten  the  curb,  and  perhaps  rig  the  horse  out  with 
same  sort  of  a  martingale  that  gives  them  a  good  hold  of  the 


372 

head,  to  secure  which  more  effectually  they  plant  their  feet  firm» 
ly  in  the  stirrups,  probably  at  the  same  time  throwing  their  own 
weight  as  far  back  as  possible  towards  the  horse's  loins. 

3063.  Q.  What  is  the  best  and  only  remedy  for  a  bolter  ?  A. 
A  very  carefully  fitted  and  well-adjusted  bit,  a  perfectly  painless 
curb,  a  light  hand,  and  last,  but  not  least,  a  very  firm,  steady 
seat,  somewhat  forward  with  horses  that  have  weak  hind 
quarters. 

3064.  Q.  Why  is  it  a  good  plan  to  put  a  bolter  on  the  lounge  ? 
A.  For  the  purpose  of  studying  carefully  its  action,  and  finding 
out  by  degrees  in  what  position  or  trim  it  will  go  steadily  and 
quietly  in  different  places. 

BUCKING  OR  PLUNGING. 

3065.  Q.  What  is  the  position  a  horse  assumes  when  bucking  ? 
A.  In  bucking,  the  horse  gather  its  legs  under  its  body,  puts  up 
its  back  and  its  head  down,  and  then  commences  a  series  of  see- 
saw movements,  throwing  itself  from  the  hind  to  the  fore  legs  in 
rapid  succession,  either  without  moving  forwards,  or  in  a  succes- 
sion of  bounds,  which  latter  is  called  plunging. 

3066.  Q.  In  what  kind  of  horses  does  bucking  usually  occur  ? 
A.  With  young  horses,  especially  the  steppe  horses  of  Kussia  or 
the  plains  horses  of  America. 

3067.  Q.  What  is  the  best  method  of  handling  bucking  horses  ? 
A.  On  the  lounge  with  the  dumb-jockey,  the  great  object  being 
to  get  them  to  move  forwards  and  prevent  the  head  from  coming 
down.  As  the  bucking  or  plunging  usually  commences  when  the 
horse  is  put  into  a  trot,  it  should  be  kept  as  long  as  possible  at  a 
walk  on  the  circle,  which  is  best  effected  by  letting  a  man  go 
alongside  its  head,  holding  the  bridle  if  necessary.  The  reins 
should  not  be  buckled  tight,  as  forcing  a  bucker  will  often  make 
it  throw  itself  down,  or  rear  up  and  fall  back.  If  it  does  begin 
to  buck,  let  it  tire  itself  out,  and  when  it  is  well  wearied,  one  or 
two  smart  blows  of  the  whip  applied  under  its  chest  will  make  it 
go  ahead.     Thus  by  degrees  it  will  give  up  the  habit. 

3068.  Q.  If  a  horse  takes  to  bucking  or  plunging  under  the 
rider  how  should  it  be  managed  ?  A.  The  object  should  be  to 
make  it  go  ahead  by  a  few  smart  strokes  of  the  whip  on  its 
shoulders,  even  at  the  risk  of  its  running  away.  This  will  give 
the  rider  an  opportunity  of  getting  the  head  up  by  first  bending 
the  neck  to  one  side. 

REARING. 

3069.  Q.  What  is  rearing  in  horses  the  evidence  of  ?  A.  It  is 
the  evidence  of  injudicious  management  of  some  kind — either 
from  untrained  horses  being  brought  into  positions  for  which 
they  are  as  yet  unfitted  ;  or  from  something  being  demanded  of 


HIPPOLOGY.  :  373 

them  that  was  beyond  their  power ;  or  from  the  rider  not  know- 
ing how  to  recognize  and  subdue  the  very  first  symptoms  of  dis- 
obedience; or,  finally,  from  his  using  violent  and  intemperate 
methods  of  doing  so.  It  is  the  most  dreaded  form  of  vice  that 
occurs,  and  therefore  the  dodge  that  cunning  horses  resort  to 
most  frequently. 

3070.  Q.  What  position  does  a  horse  assume  before  it  actually 
does  rear  up  ?  A.  Its  head  or  mouth  has  shrunk  away  from  the 
feeling  on  the  mouth-piece,  and  it  has  got  its  legs  under  its  body, 
and  is  come  to  a  dead  standstill.  After  slinking  away  from  the 
rider's  hand  and  seat,  so  that  he  loses  all  hold  of  it,  the  animal 
suddenly  stiffens  its  hocks,  throwing  its  whole  weight  on  them, 
and  at  the  same  moment  stiffens  also  its  neck,  and  especially  the 
throat,  so  that  it  becomes  quite  impossible  to  get  a  downward 
pull  at  it. 

3071.  Q.  What  is  the  safest  way  of  managing  confirmed 
rearers?  A.  On  the  lounge,  without  the  dumb-jockey,  which 
would  very  likely  injure  the  horse  severely  in  case  of  its  throw- 
ing itself  back.  The  general  plan  of  treatment  will  consist  in 
getting  the  animal  to  bend  its  hocks  and  neck  ;  bending  lessons, 
when  halted  or  at  a  walk,  must  be  persevered  in  first. 

3072.  Q.  If  a  rearing  horse  is  on  the  lounge  and  suddenly  stops 
and  rears  up,  what  should  the  trainer  do?  A.  He  should  shorten 
the  line  in  coils  in  his  left  hand,  holding  it  firmly  in  the  right, 
just  long  enough  to  keep  him  clear  of  the  horse's  fore  legs,  and 
placing  himself  exactly  opposite  to  the  animal's  head,  so  that  by 
stepping  back  a  pace  or  two  he  is  sure  to  retain  a  good  feeling 
on  the  line  when  its  fore  legs  again  touch  the  ground,  while  an 
assistant  with  a  whip  steps  meanwhile  smartly  up  behind  the 
animal.  The  trainer  should  not  attempt  to  pull  the  horse's  head 
downwards  forcibly,  or  to  jerk  at  the  lounge,  simply  keeping  a 
good  feeling  on  the  line.  He  must  wait  patiently,  watching  the 
horse's  movements,  taking  care  always  to  preserve  his  own  posi- 
tion, so  as  to  be  ready  when  the  moment  for  action  arrives.  But 
the  assistant  with  the  whip  should  meanwhile  deliver  a  few  heavy, 
deliberately-aimed  blows  on  the  animal's  buttocks — taking  care 
to  hit  one  and  the  same  spot  repeatedly,  watching  anxiously  for 
the  moment  when  the  rearer  shows  signs  of  getting  tired,  of  stand- 
ing on  its  hind  legs,  and  is  about  to  go  down.  This  is  the  mo- 
ment at  which  the  last  and  most  effective  cut  of  the  whip  should 
be  inflicted  ;  and  this  the  moment  for  the  trainer  to  give  a  short 
sharp  drag  on  the  lounge  downwards. 

3073.  Q.  What  should  be  done  if  a  horse  makes  a  sudden 
plunge  forward,  when  it  has  consented  to  bring  its  fore-legs  to 
the  ground  under  the  influence  of  the  whip?  The  trainer  must 
then  step  smartly  to  one  side — the  off  one  if  possible  ;  and  catch 
the  horse  cannily  in  mid-air  with  the  lounge,  handling  it  quickly 
and  neatly,  and  taking  especial  care  not  to  stumble  into  the  slack 


374  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN^ER. 

coils  in  his  left  hand.     This  manoeuvre,  if  well  carried  out,  will 
afford  complete  mastery. 

3074.  Q.  What  should  be  done  by  a  rider  when  a  horse  rears 
that  has  never  shown  any  previous  symptoms  of  restiveness  ?  A. 
It  requires  presence  of  mind  and  great  coolness  ;  also,  a  really 
firm  seat,  wholly  independent  of  the  stirrups  on  the  one  hand  and 
the  reins  on  the  other.  The  very  fact  of  the  horse  ever  getting 
to  the  length  of  rearing  is  presumptive  evidence  of  the  rider's  legs 
being  in  the  wrong  place  at  the  time.  But  if  a  man  sits  to  his 
saddle  by  his  thighs,  and  has  his  own  body  in  balance,  he  will 
never  pull  the  horse  over  backwards.  If  he  then  has  presence  of 
mind  suflQcient  to  preserve  a  feeling  with  the  reins,  there  will  be 
a  moment  when  the  animal's  backbone  will  have  assumed  an 
angle  not  greater  than  45  degrees.  This  is  the  moment  to  screw 
both  spurs  as  forcibly  as  possible  into  the  horse's  sides,  the  effect 
of  which  is  to  bend  the  hocks  if  the  hand  be  held  counter  ;  the 
animal  will,  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten,  make  a  plunge  forward,  and 
having  preserved  throughout  a  proper  degree  of  feeling  with  the 
reins,  the  rider  will  be  enabled  to  catch  the  horse  in  the  air  and 
bring  it  to  the  ground,  so  that  the  hind  leg  should  touch  this  a 
moment  sooner  than  the  fore  ones,  or  at  least  so  that  they  should 
get  the  greater  part  of  the  shock. 

KICKING. 

3075.  Q.  When  the  vice  of  kicking  proceeds  from  natural 
causes,  what  help  is  there  for  it  ?  A.  There  is  no  help  but  to 
employ  the  horse  in  whichever  way  it  is  content  to  do  its  work 
quietly. 

3076.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  young  horses  that  simply 
take  to  kicking  during  the  handling  ?  A.  If  the  trainer  has  made 
some  mistake,  or  been  in  too  great  a  hurry,  or  put  the  saddle  too 
far  back,  or  girthed  the  animal  too  suddenly  or  too  tightly,  watch 
for  the  exciting  cause,  and  when  this  is  removed  the  vice  will  dis- 
appear. 

3077.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  those  young  horses  that 
take  to  kicking  simply  because  they  do  not  choose  to  go  ?  A. 
These  should  be  put  on  the  lounge  with  the  dumb-jockey,  which 
will  prevent  their  getting  their  heads  down.  If  the  horse  stops 
on  the  circle  and  begins  to  kick,  the  trainer  should  proceed  pre- 
cisely in  the  same  manner  as  with  the  rearer,  the  assistant,  how- 
ever, waiting  until  the  horse  has  extended  its  hind  legs  to  their 
utmost  stretch.  This  is  the  moment  to  apply  a  good  stroke  of 
the  whip  just  under  the  animal's  belly,  taking  care  never  to  hit 
the  hind  legs,  nor  to  strike  at  all  except  at  the  moment  they  are 
fully  extended.  A  few  well-delivered  strokes  will  generally 
make  the  kicker  only  too  anxious  to  get  away  from  the  whip  and 
go  ahead  quietly. 


HIPPOLOGY.  375 

3078.  Q.  What  should  be  done  if  a  horse,  after  ceasing  to  kick, 
refuses  to  move  forward  ?  A.  The  trainer  must  then  proceed  to 
unfix  his  feet,  or  make  them  rein  back  gradually. 

3079.  Q.  What  should  be  done  if  a  horse,  after  ceasing  to  kick, 
takes  to  running  backwards  ?  A.  All  one  can  do  is  to  follow 
them  quietly,  merely  keeping  their  heads  straight,  so  that  they 
should  not  run  up  against  a  wall  or  the  like,  taking  care  not  to 
press  so  heavily  on  the  lounge  as  to  throw  the  animal's  weight  on 
the  fore  legs,  as  this  will  offer  it  the  opportunity  to  resume  the 
kicking.  When  the  horse  gets  tired  of  backing  he  will  stop  of  his 
own  accord,  and  this  is  the  moment  for  the  assistant  to  give  a 
dexterous  stroke  under  the  belly. 


377 


PAET  IX. 

FIRE  DISCIPLINE. 


Text-book:  BatcJielor's  '* Infantry  Mre, 


Fqe  all  Officers  of  Infantry— Nos.  3080-3247. 


PAET  IX. 
FIRE  DmCIPLINE. 


THE  TRAJECTORY. 

3080.  Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  on  the  bullet  of  the  projec- 
tile force  acting  alone  ?  A.  To  drive  it  straight  ahead  forever  at 
a  uniform  rate. 

3081.  Q.  What  prevents  the  bullet  going  straight  ahead? 
A.  Gravity. 

3083.  Q.  How  does  gravity  affect  the  path  of  the  bullet  ?  A.  It 
bends  it  downward. 

3083.  Q.  What  prevents  a  uniform  rate  of  flight  of  the  bullet  ? 
A.  The  resistance  of  the  air,  which  makes  the  rate  slower  and 
slower. 

3084.  Q.  What  is  the  technical  name  given  to  the  curved  path 
of  the  bullet  ?    A.  Trajectory. 

3085.  Q.  Define  "time  of  flight"  for  any  point  of  the  trajec- 
tory. A.  It  is  the  time  required  for  the  bullet  to  go  from  the 
origin  of  fire  to  the  point  in  question. 

3086.  Q.  What  effect  on  time  of  flight  has  a  change  in  curva- 
ture of  trajectory  ?  A.  Curvature  and  time  of  flight  increase  and 
decrease  together. 

3087.  Q.  Why  should  curvature  of  trajectory  and  time  of  flight 
increase  and  decrease  together?  A.  Because  the  greater  the 
curvature  the  higher  goes  the  bullet  and  the  longer  it  takes  for  it 
to  fall  to  any  given  point. 

3088.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  "  ordinate  "  ?  A.  It  refers 
to  the  points  of  the  trajectory,  and  means  the  distance  of  a  point 
above  the  line  of  sight  measured  vertically. 

3089.  Q.  What  term  is  used  to  specially  designate  the  longest 
ordinate  of  a  trajectory  ?    A.   "  Greatest  height." 

3090.  Q.  What  ratio  measures  the  "  flatness  of  the  trajectory"? 
A.  The  ratio  between  the  range  and  greatest  height. 

3091.  Q.  Define  "first  catch."  A.  It  is  the  first  point  at 
which  the  descent  of  the  bullet  brings  it  within  the  height  of  the 
object. 

379 


380  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIKER. 

3092.  Q.  Define  "first  graze."  A.  It  is  the  point  at  which 
the  bullet,  if  unobstructed,  would  meet  the  ground. 

3093.  Q.  Define  "dangerous  zone."  A.  It  is  the  space  in 
which  the  object  may  be  struck. 

3094.  Q.  Where  does  the  dangerous  zone  begin  and  end  ?  A.  It 
begins  at  "first  catch,"  where  the  bullet  first  comes  within  the 
height  of  the  object  in  its  descent,  and  ends  at  "  first  graze,"  where 
the  bullet,  if  unobstructed,  would  meet  the  ground. 

3095.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  "angle  of  fall"  of  a  bullet? 
A.  It  is  the  angle  with  the  ground  made  by  the  tangent  to  the 
trajectory  where  it  meets  the  ground.  In  the  case  of  an  arrow 
the  shaft  would  represent  the  tangent. 

3096.  Q.  How  would  the  extent  of  the  dangerous  zone  be 
affected  by  a  change  in  the  angle  of  fall  ?  A.  Increase  produces 
decrease,  and  mce  versa. 

3097.  Q.  Besides  long  range  and  penetration,  which  all  rifles 
now  possess  in  a  sufficient  degree,  what  remaining  qualities  are 
mentioned  as  important?  A.  Flatness  of  trajectory,  accuracy 
and  rapidity  of  fire. 

3098.  Q.  Which  is  the  more  important  quality  of  a  rifle — that 
which  secures  flatness  of  trajectory,  or  its  accuracy,  and  why  ? 
A.  That  which  secures  flatness  of  trajectory,  because  greater  flat- 
ness of  trajectory  improves  all  firing,  while  a  rifle's  accuracy  can 
be  utilized  by  good  shots  only. 

VARIATIONS  IN  THE  TRAJECTORY. 

3099.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  individual  fire  and 
collective  fire  as  regards  choice  of  object,  elevation,  and  con- 
sumption of  ammunition  ?  A.  In  individual  fire  these  are  in  the 
discretion  of  the  firer,  and  in  collective  fire  they  are  directed  by 
leaders  ;  the  first  is  uncontrolled,  the  second  is  controlled. 

3100.  Q.  Is  this  regulated  collective  fire  necessarily  simulta- 
neous ?    A.  No  ;  it  may  or  may  not  be. 

3101.  Q.  Define  "shot  group."  A.  A  surface  over  which 
bullets  spread  when  the  rifle  is  aimed  for  a  number  of  shots 
exactly  at  the  same  point  with  the  same  elevation. 

3102.  Q.  What  effect  upon  the  shot  group  has  increase  of  range  ? 
A.  Increase  of  dimensions. 

3103.  Q.  What  three  classes  of  causes  are  assigned  for  this 
spread  of  bullets?  A.  1.  Those  due  to  rifle  and  ammunition. 
2.  Those  due  to  the  firer.     3.  Those  due  to  external  conditions. 

3104.  Q.  How  may  these  causes  be  classed  with  reference  to 
constancy  and  variability  of  effects  in  spreading  bullets  ?  A.  Those 
due  to  rifle  and  ammunition  will  produce  a  nearly  constant  dis- 
persion.    The  others  are  variable. 

3105.  Q.  What  are  the  variable  imperfections  of  the  rifle? 
A.  Fouling,  heating,  and  rust. 


FIRE  DISCIPLINE.  381 

3106.  Q.  "What  are  the  only  suitable  objectives  at  long  ranges? 
A.  Bodies  of  troops  in  close  order. 

3107.  Q.  What  effect  has  an  inclination  of  the  rear  sight  ? 
A.  It  causes  the  bullet  to  fall  short  if  the  inclination  is  forward, 
and  to  the  side  of  the  inclination  also  if  otherwise. 

3108.  Q.  What  effect  upon  the  importance  of  accuracy  in 
adjusting  the  rear  sight  for  elevation  has  increase  of  range? 
A.  Tlie  effect  of  increasing  it. 

3109.  Q.  What  sight,  fine  or  full,  is  best  for  battle  use  ? 
A.  Full  sight. 

3110.  Q.  What  is  the  easiest  way  to  determine  the  range  on  the 
battle  field  ?    A.  Ask  the  artillery. 

3111.  Q.  What  other  ways  are  there  ?  A.  Range-finders,  and, 
as  a  last  resort,  the  eye. 

3113.  Q.  Elevation  being  the  same,  how  is  the  bullet  affected 
with  reference  to  a  hot  or  cold  day,  dry  or  damp,  fair  or  during 
rain  or  snow,  in  high  or  low  altitudes  ?  A.  It  goes  farther  on  a 
hot  day,  farther  on  a  damp  day,  farther  on  a  fair  day,  and  farther 
in  high  altitudes. 

31 13.  Q.  On  a  dry  day  or  on  a  damp  day  ?    A.  On  a  damp  day. 

3114.  Q.  On  a  fair  day  or  during  rain  or  snow  ?  A.  On  a  fair 
day. 

3115.  Q.  In  high  altitudes  or  low  ones  ?    A.  In  high  altitudes. 

3116.  Q.  What  cause  of  error  in  aiming  should  always  be 
guarded  against  in  fine  weather  ?    A.  Side-illumination  of  sights. 

3117.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  upon  the  position  of  a  hit  of  fixing 
the  bayonet  ?  A.  Fixing  bayonet  lowers  the  hit  and  throw-s  it  to 
that  side  upon  which  it  is  attached  to  the  barrel. 

3118.  Q.  The  elevation  being  the  same,  will  the  bullet  go 
farther  in  a  head  wind  or  a  rear  wind  ?    A.  Rear  wind. 

3119.  Q.  In  adjusting  sight  for  cross  wind,  are  points  taken 
towards  the  wind  or  away  from  it?    A.  Towards  the  wind. 

3120.  Q.  Define  "accuracy  of  the  rifle."  A.  The  greater  or 
less  probability  it  gives  of  striking  a  given  object. 

3121.  Q.  What  measures  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle  ?  A.  The 
dispersion  of  shots  due  to  the  rifle  alone. 

3122.  Q  Upon  what  does  accuracy  of  the  rifle  depend?  A. 
Perfection  of  manufacture. 

3123.  Q.  "Accuracy  of  fire"  is  how  measured?  A.  By  the 
dispersion  of  shots  in  the  group,  considering  all  the  causes  of 
deviation. 

3124.  Q.  "Correctness  of  fire "  is  how  measured ?  A.  By  the 
approximation  of  the  centre  of  the  shot  group  to  the  point  of  aim. 

3125.  Q.  What  are  the  two  factors  of  value  of  fire  ?  A.  Accu- 
racy of  fire  and  correctness  of  fire. 

3126.  Q  In  discussing  the  efficacy  of  fire,  what  imperfections 
only  is  it  possible  to  consider, — those  which  effect  nearly  constant 
dispersions  of  shots  within  a  determinable  area,  or  may  there  be 


382  THE  ARMY   OFFICEE'S   EXAMINER. 

included  also  those  which  effect  a  variable  dispersion  over  an  area 
whose  dimensions  are  not  determinable  ?  A.  Only  those  which 
effect  a  nearly  constant  dispersion  within  a  determinable  area. 

3127.  Q.  What  causes  are  these  ?  A.  Those  due  to  rifle  and 
ammunition. 

MEAN  AND  PRACTICAL  TRAJECTORY. 

3128.  Q.  Whatistheshapeof  the  bundle  of  trajectories  described 
by  many  bullets  shot  from  the  same  rifle  under  the  same  condi- 
tions ?  A.  It  is  the  shape  of  a  curved  cone,  analogous  to  a  jet  of 
water  from  a  hose. 

3129.  Q.  What  is  the  "  mean  trajectory  "  ?  A.  It  is  an  imagi- 
nary curve  which  occupies  a  mean  position  among  all  the  trajec- 
tories of  the  cone.     The  axis  of  the  cone. 

3130.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  the  mean  trajectory  of  value  ? 
A.  It  is  the  trajectory  to  which  calculations  are  usually  referred, 
and  gives  the  mean  height  of  the  bullets  above  the  line  of  sight 
at  any  point  of  their  flight. 

3131.  Q.  In  calculating  the  chances  of  hitting  an  object,  how 
much  of  the  cone  should  be  considered  on  the  mean  trajectory  ? 
A.  The  whole  cone. 

3132.  Q.  What  is  the  whole  cone  of  trajectories  called  in  con- 
sequence of  the  necessity  of  taking  all  its  trajectories  into  account 
in  calculating  the  chances  of  hitting  an  object  ?  A.  It  is  called 
the  "practical  trajectory." 

3133.  Q.  Define  "shot-group."  A.  For  any  range  it  is  the 
surface  covered  on  a  vertical  target  by  all  the  shots  fired  at  that 
range. 

3134.  Q.  Describe  the  distribution  of  hits  in  the  shot-group. 
A.  The  hits  are  denser  around  a  mean  point  which  marks  the 
mean  trajectory.  As  the  number  of  hits  increases,  the  form  of 
the  shot-group,  omitting  a  few  abnormal  hits,  constantly  ap- 
proaches that  of  an  ellipse  with  the  greater  axis  vertical. 

3135.  Q.  What  is  the  "point"  and  what  the  "centre  of 
impact "  ?  A.  The  point  where  any  shots  strikes  the  target  is 
its  "point  of  impact;"  and  the  "centre  of  impact"  is  a  point 
having  a  mean  position  in  a  group  of  shots,  and  is  the  point 
where  the  mean  trajectory  would  strike  the  target. 

3136.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "horizontal"  and  "vertical  devia- 
tion "  of  any  hit  ?  A.  Its  horizontal  and  vertical  distances  from 
the  "centre  of  impact." 

3137.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "  mean  absolute  deviation,"  and  of 
what  is  it  the  measure?  A.  It  means  the  average  distance  of 
shots  from  the  "  centre  of  impact."  It  measures  the  accuracy  of 
a  rifle,  and  gives  a  standard  by  which  different  rifles  may  be 
compared. 

3138.  Q.  How  is  the  mean  absolute  deviation  of  the  shots 


FIEE  DISCIPLI2!?^E.  383 

obtained  ?  A.  First  find  the  mean  horizontal  and  vertical  devia- 
tions ;  these  will  measure  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle  in  those  direc- 
tions. Extract  the  square  root  of  the  sum  of  the  squares  of 
these  two  mean  deviations,  and  the  result  will  be  the  mean  abso- 
lute deviation,  and  measures  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle. 

3139.  Q.  For  practical  purposes,  what  portion  of  the  cone  of 
trajectories  may  represent  the  whole  cone,  and  why  ?  A.  The 
vertical  section  showing  the  mean  and  extreme  trajectories  ; 
because  vertical  errors  in  shooting  are  so  much  greater  than 
horizontal  errors. 

3140.  Q.  How  is  the  cone  of  trajectories  expressed ;  that  is, 
what  data  fix  its  dimensions?  A.  It  is  expressed  by  stating 
the  ordinates  of  its  mean  and  extreme  trajectories. 

3141.  Q.  Would  a  firer  kneeling  be  liable  to  change  the  point 
of  impact  of  his  hits  by  changing  his  position  to  standing  ?  and 
if  so  or  if  not,  why  ?  A.  No,  because  of  the  very  small  angle 
between  the  lines  of  sight. 

3142.  Q.  Would  a  firer  standing  get  a  deeper  dangerous  zone 
by  changing  his  position  to  kneeling?  A.  Yes.  A  German 
experimenter  says  that  at  a  range  of  400  metres  a  gain  of  50 
metres  was  thus  obtained. 

3143.  Q.  What  is  the  practical  dangerous  zone?  A.  It  is  that 
which  is  traversed  by  the  whole  cone  of  trajectories. 

3144.  Q.  What  portion  of  the  object  is  the  proper  point  of  aim  ? 
A.  The  foot. 

3145.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from 
aiming  at  the  foot  of  the  object.  A.  It  gives  a  wider  latitude  of 
vertical  error.  It  increases  number  of  hits  and  depth  of  danger- 
ous zone.  Ricochets  from  the  lower  half  of  the  cone  are  effec- 
tive. The  foot  is  least  liable  to  be  obscured  by  smoke.  The 
ground  is  better  covered,  since  there  is  less  space  in  which  the 
bullet  rises  above  the  height  of  the  object.  Slight  errors  of  ele- 
vation are  less  liable  to  cause  misses.  A  slight  upward  movement 
of  the  barrel  would  be  less  liable  to  cause  the  object  to  be 
obscured  by  the  front  sight. 

LIMIT  OF  INDIVIDUAL  FIRE. 

3146.  Q.  What  is  the  "limit  of  profitable  individual  fire"? 
A.  It  is  the  limit  beyond  which  the  results  to  be  expected  will 
not  compensate  for  the  expenditure  of  ammunition. 

3147.  Q.  Name  the  four  cases  in  which  the  limit  of  profitable 
individual  fire  is  reached.  A.  1.  When  the  shot-group  equals 
the  objective  in  either  dimension  ;  2.  When  the  practical  danger- 
ous zone  disappears  ;  3.  When  the  probable  error  in  estimating 
the  distance  becomes  equal  to  the  depth  of  the  practical  dangei 
ous  zone  ;  4.  At  the  range  where  the  bullet  begins  to  '  "  ^ 
the  head  of  a  standing  man  at  any  point  of  its  flight,       J^^9''Z^     a  ^ 


384  THE  AEMY  OFPIOER^S  EXAMINER. 

3148.  Q.  In  the  case  of  opposing  lines  of  battle,  what  is  the 
limit  of  profitable  individual  fire  for  the  Springfield  rifle,  and 
what  fact  establishes  this  limit  ?  A.  The  limit  is  400  yards  ; 
and  is  established  by  the  fact  that  up  to  this  range  the  bullets 
remain  within  the  height  of  a  standing  man's  head  during  their 
entire  flight,  the  aim  being  taken  at  the  feet.  It  is  also  estab- 
lished by  the  fact  that  beyond  this  range  a  slight  error  in  guess- 
ing, or  estimating  the  range  with  an  instrument  even,  will  cause 
the  whole  cone  of  trajectories  to  fall  short  of,  or  go  entirely  over, 
the  dangerous  zone  of  the  exact  range. 

3149.  Q.  When  the  range  is  exactly  known,  under  what  con- 
ditions may  long-range  individual  fire  be  profitably  employed  ? 
A.  When  there  is  plenty  of  ammunition,  and  the  soldier  may  fire 
with  a  rest  behind  cover,  as  in  siege  operations. 

3150.  Q.  What  is  the  long-range  limit  of  profitable  individual 
fire  with  the  Springfield  rifle,  and  why  ?  A.  800  yards  ;  because 
at  that  range  the  practical  dangerous  zone  disappears. 

8151.  Q.  Illustrate  the  disappearance  of  the  practical  danger- 
ous zone.  A.  The  practical  dangerous  zones  are  rectangular 
spaces  in  the  plane  of  the  upper  and  lower  trajectories,  having 
for  uniform  height  that  of  the  object.  The  verticals  dropped 
from  those  points  of  the  upper  trajectories  at  the  height  of  the 
object  are  the  front  edges  of  these  rectangles,  and  the  verticals 
erected  at  those  points  in  rear  where  the  lower  trajectories  meet 
the  ground  are  the  rear  edges,  front  and  rear  having  reference  to 
the  enemy  facing  the  firer.  With  increasing  range,  and  conse- 
quent increasing  angle  of  fall,  these  edges  approach  each  other 
until  a  range  is  reached  at  which  the  lower  trajectory  pierces  the 
ground  at  the  foot  of  the  front  edge.  The  edges  thus  coinciding, 
the  space  between  them  becomes  zero  and  the  zone  disappears. 

3152.  Q.  What  considerations  touching  ammunition-supply 
and  the  physical  endurance  of  the  firer  rigorously  demand  that 
individual  fire  be  confined  within  the  profitable  limit  ?  A.  The 
supply  of  ammunition  is  very  difficult  to  replenish,  and  the  ex- 
haustion of  the  ammunition-supply  before  the  fight  is  won  means 
defeat.  Experience  in  war  shows  that  it  takes  hundreds  of  car- 
tridges to  disable  one  man.  The  wear  and  tear  on  the  muscles 
and  nerves  of  the  firer  from  much  firing  are  so  great  that  fire 
should  be  reserved  as  long  as  possible. 

3153.  Q.  Can  any  approximation  to  the  high  percentages 
made  on  the  target  range  be  reasonably  expected  in  war,  consid- 
ering the  experience  of  recent  wars  ?    A.  No. 

COLLECTIVE  FIRE  AND  COMBINED  SIGHTS. 

3154.  Q.  What  is  "collective  fire,"  and  at  what  range  does  it 
properly  replace  individual  fire  ?  A.  It  is  controlled  fire — that  is, 
fire  which  is  under  such  direction  that  the  bullets  are  concen- 


FIRE   DISCIPLINE.  3F5 

trated  on  chosen  objectives.     It  takes  the  place  of  individual  fire 
beyond  400  yards. 

3155.  Q.  What  are  collective  groups,  and  on  what  surface  are 
they  noted  for  study  ?  A.  When  a  body  of  men  fire  on  the  same 
object  with  the  same  elevation  there  results  a  cone  of  trajectories; 
the  groups  made  by  the  intersection  of  this  cone  with  any  target 
may  be  called  collective  groups.  For  study  it  is  usual  to  note 
these  groupings  on  the  surface  of  the  ground. 

3156.  Q.  What  is  the  law  of  distribution  of  hits  in  collective 
groups?  A.  The  hits  are  distributed  in  groups  having  the  form 
of  an  ellipse  whose  greater  axis  is  in  the  direction  of  tire.  They 
are  more  densely  grouped  towards  the  centre. 

3157.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  beaten  zone  at  short  and 
long  range  for  the  best  90  per  cent  of  the  hits  in  a  collective 
group ;  and  what  the  length  for  the  best  50  per  cent?  A.  For 
the  best  90  per  cent  the  average  depth  of  the  beaten  zone  is  300 
yards  for  the  shorter  and  200  yards  for  the  longer  ranges  up  to 
1400  yards.  For  the  best  50  per  cent  the  corresponding  depths 
are  150  and  100  yards. 

3158.  Q.  Name  and  describe  the  parts  into  which  the  beaten 
zone  is  divided  by  differences  of  density  of  hits,  and  define  "  centre 
of  impact "  as  applied  to  collective  groups.  A.  The  zone  contain- 
ing the  best  50  per  cent  of  the  hits  is  called  the  "  nucleus  ;"  that 
containing  the  next  best  40  per  cent  is  called  the  "envelope  ;" 
and  the  rest  of  the  beaten  zone  is  called  the  "tailings."  The 
middle  line  of  the  nucleus,  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  firing-line, 
is  the  "  centre  of  impact." 

3159.  Q.  What  is  the  depth  of  the  nucleus  from  500  to  1400 
yards  with  trained  and  chosen  firers  ?    A.  One  hundred  yards. 

3160.  Q.  In  view  of  the  monopoly  enjoyed  by  "individual-tire  " 
training  in  our  service  heretofore,  and  also  of  the  fact  that  indi- 
vidual fire  can  be  utilized  only  within  400  yards,  what  kind  of 
instruction  should  now  be  imparted  as  of  equal  importance? 
A.  Instruction  in  collective  fire. 

3161.  Q.  Between  500  and  1000  yards  what  correspondence  is 
there  between  the  range  and  the  width  of  the  beaten  ground  ? 
A.  ]6etween  500  and  1000  yards  the  width  of  the  beaten  ground 
in  yards  is  about  equal  to  the  number  of  hundreds  of  yards  in  the 
range. 

3163.  Q.  Taking  the  effect  of  collective  fire  at  500  yards  as 
unity,  what  is  the  approximate  value  of  collective  fire  at  800, 
1200"^,  and  1700  yards?    A.  Respectively,  ^,  ^V»  tV- 

3163.  Q.  The  depth  of  the  nucleus  at  practicable  ranges  being 
100  yards,  what  is  the  limit  of  error  of  estimation  of  ranges  to 
exceed  which  will  make  the  fire  haphazard?  A.  Fifty  yards; 
half  the  depth  of  the  nucleus. 

3164.  Q.  How  is  the  limiting  range  at  which  collective  firing 
is  advisable  found  ?    A.  By  dividing  50  by  the  probable  error. 


386  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

3165.  Q.  When  the  difficulty  of  estimating  the  range  to  within 
half  the  depth  of  the  nucleus  becomes  great,  what  means  are 
taken  to  insure  some  portion  of  the  nucleus  being  struck,  and  at 
what  range  do  these  means  come  into  play  ?  A.  Combined  sights, 
at  500  yards. 

3166.  Q.  Explain  what  is  meant  by  "combined  sights." 
A.  When  a  body  of  men  firing  are  divided  into  two  or  more 
parts,  and  each  part  uses  a  different  elevation  from  the  others,  at 
the  same  time  firing  at  the  same  object,  the  whole  are  said  to  be 
firing  with  combined  sights. 

3167.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  using  combined  sights  ?  A.  To 
increase  the  depth  of  the  beaten  ground  and  to  lessen  the  density 
of  the  hits. 

3168.  Q.  Since  the  use  of  combined  sights  increases  depth  of 
beaten  ground  at  the  expense  of  density  of  hits,  what  is  it  neces- 
sary to  do  in  order  to  avoid  the  latter  ?  A.  Increase  the  expen- 
diture of  ammunition  either  by  increasing  the  number  of  men 
firing  or  the  number  of  rounds  for  each. 

3169.  Q.  In  practice,  how  much  greater  and  less  than  the 
estimated  range  is  it  usual  to  make  two  elevations,  and  what  ele- 
vations are  taken  when  three  are  used  ?  A.  When  two  elevations 
are  used  one  is  50  yards  less  and  one  50  yards  greater  than  the 
estimated  range  ;  when  three  elevations  are  used  one  is  100  yards 
less  than,  one  100  yards  greater  than,  and  one  for,  the  estimated 
range. 

3170.  Q.  Assuming  that  the  error  of  estimating  the  range  may 
be  reduced  to  .10,  what  rule  may  govern  as  to  the  number  of 
sights  employed  ?  A.  Up  to  500  yards  use  one  elevation  for  the 
range.  From  500  to  1000  yards  use  two  elevations — one  50  yards 
less  and  one  50byards  greater  than  the  supposed  distance  ;  beyond 
1000  yards  use  three  elevations — one  for  the  supposed  range,  and 
one  100  yards  greater  and  one  100  yards  less. 

3171.  Q.  Considering  the  decrease  in  efficacy  of  fire,  using 
combined"  sights,  what  means  should  be  employed  to  make  it 
unnecessary  ?  A.  Every  available  means  to  ascertain  the  range 
within  50  yards. 

THE  EFFECTS  OF  COLLECTIVE '  FIRING. 

3172.  Q.  state  the  relative  values  of  the  results  obtained  in 
experiment,  range  estimated  with  the  use  of  one  and  two  eleva- 
tions ?  A.  The  use  of  two  elevations  gives  better  results  than 
the  use  of  only  one. 

3173.  Q.  Which  formation  is  the  less  vulnerable — the  line  or 
the  column  ?    A.  The  line. 

3174.  Q.  What  is  the  limiting  range  for  collective  firing  at  a 
company  column,  standing,  range  known  1    At  a  company  in  line, 


FIRE  DISCIPLINE.  387 

standing  ?    A.  In  the  first  case  about.  1500  yards.     In  the  second 
case  about  900  yards. 

3175.  Q.  What  effect  has  the  increased  height  of  cavalry  over 
infantry  on  the  limiting  range  ?    A.  To  increase  it. 

3176.  Q.  With  range  known,  at  what  limiting  range  does 
experiment  show  artillery  to  suffer  from  infantry  collective  fire  ? 
A.  Thirteen  hundred  yards. 

3177.  Q.  In  what  ways  may  control  of  fire  increase  its  efficacy  ? 
A.  1.  By  concentrating  it.  2.  By  selection  of  the  most  suitable 
objects.  3.  By  using  the  best  obtainable  information  as  to  the 
range.     4.  By  using  combined  sights. 

3178.  Q.  In  what  way  does  control  of  fire  insure  economy  of 
ammunition  ?  A.  It  prevents  useless  expenditure  at  unprofitable 
ranges,  and  when  the  enemy  are  concealed. 


INFLUENCE  OF  GROUND. 

3179.  Q.  Define  "rising"  and  ''falling"  ground,  tell  what 
ground  the  terms  apply  to,  what  its  extent,  and  which  is  visible 
to  the  firer  and  which  invisible.  A.  By  "  rising"  and  "  falling" 
ground  is  meant  the  kind  of  slope  at  the  points  wiiere  the  bullets 
fall— rising  or  falling,  in  the  direction  of  fire,  with  respect  to  the 
line  of  sight.  In  general  it  is  supposed  to  extend  throughout  the 
dangerous  zone.  Rising  ground  is  visible  and  falling  ground 
invisible  to  the  firers. 

3180.  Q.  What  is  the  "  apparent  crest "  of  "rising  "or  "fall- 
ing "  grouncl  ?  A.  It  is  the  point  where  the  line  of  sight  touches 
it. 

3181.  Q.  What  is  a  "grazing  fire"  as  applied  to  rising  or 
falling  ground  ?  A.  It  is  a  fire  in  which  the  bullets  pass  over 
the  ground  at  a  height  less  than  that  of  the  objective. 

3183.  Q.  What  is  the  "surface  of  reception"?  A.  It  is  the 
portion  of  ground  on  which  the  bullets  fall. 

3183.  Q.  What  is  the  "defiladed  zone"?  A.  It  is  the  depth 
of  ground  that  any  obstacle  shelters  from  bullets  fired  from  any 
distance. 

3184.  Q.  What  is  the  "protected  zone"?  A.  For  any  object 
or  obstacle  it  is  the  difference  between  the  defiladed  and  grazed 
zone. 

3185.  Q.  How  do  rising  and  falling  ground  affect  the  depth  of 
the  dangerous  zone  ?  A.  Falling  ground  increases  it ;  rising 
ground  decreases  it. 

3186.  Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  falling  ground  on  the  depth  of 
the  dangerous  zone  ?  A.  When  the  angle  between  the  surface  of 
reception  and  the  line  of  sight  is  equal  to  the  angle  of  drop  at 
the  crest  the  depth  of  the  dangerous  zone  is  doubled  ;  when  that 


388  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

surface  drops  as  many  yards  in  100  as  there  are  hundreds  of 
yards  in  the  range,  the  depth  of  the  dangerous  zone  is  five  times 
that  on  ground  parallel  to  the  line  of  sight.  A  further  increase 
in  the  inclination  of  the  surface  of  reception  tends  to  form 
defiladed  zones. 

3187.  Q.  In  order  to  sweep  the  summit  of  a  level  plateau  from 
a  point  below  and  in  front  of  the  crest,  at  what  range  should  the 
fire  be  delivered  ?  A.  At  as  many  hundreds  of  yards  range  as 
there  are  units  in  the  square  root  of  the  relief  of  the  crest  in 
yards. 

3188.  Q.  What  influence  on  number  of  elevations  employed 
has  sloping  ground  ?  A.  On  rising  ground  the  dangerous  zones 
are  shorter,  hence  increase  the  number  of  elevations  ;  on  falling 
ground  the  dangerous  zones  are  deeper,  hence  decrease  the  num- 
ber of  elevations. 

3189.  Q.  What  is  the  relative  value  of  ricochets  on  rising  and 
falling  ground  as  compared  with  their  value  on  level  ground? 
A.  Their  value  is  greater  on  falling  ground  and  less  on  rising 
ground. 

3190.  Q.  What  three  ways  are  there  of  occupying  the  ground 
for  the  defense  of  a  position  on  an  elevated  plateau  ?  A.  1.  The 
crest  may  be  strongly  held.  2.  The  crest  may  be  lightly  held  for 
the  sake  of  observation,  and  abandoned  at  an  opportune  moment, 
while  the  main  line  of  defense  is  placed  from  500  to  800  yards  in 
rear  of  it.  3.  A  line  in  front  of  the  crest  may  be  held  by  the 
infantry,  leaving  the  crest  for  artillery  as  a  cover  for  the  reserves. 
(For  discussion  of  this  subject  see  'Infantry  Fire,'  pages  122  to 
140.) 


LONG-RANGE  FIRE. 

3191.  Q.  What  is  the  extreme  range  beyond  which  infantry 
fire  should  not  be  used  ?    A.  1300  yards. 

3192.  Q.  By  which  party,  the  attack  or  the  defense,  is  fire  be- 
tween 800  and  1300  vards  chiefly  used  ?    A.  The  defense. 

3193.  Q.  To  which  arm  should  fire  beyond  1300  yards  be  left  ? 
A.  The  artillery. 

3194.  Q.  Are  battles  ever  won  by  long-range  fire?  A.  No; 
they  are  always  fought  out  at  short  ranges. 

3195.  Q.  Define  "fire  of  position."  A.  It  is  the  fire  of  aux- 
iliary bodies  established  under  cover  at  from  700  to  1300  yards 
from  the  position  to  be  assailed  where  they  can  be  easily  supplied 
with  ammunition.     These  bodies  fire  during  the  advance. 

3196.  Q.  Under  what  topographical  conditions  alone  is  it  ad- 
visable to  resort  to  "fire  of  position"?  A.  When  the  position 
assailed  is  on  falling  ground  situated  above  the  firers. 


FIRE  DISCIPLIKE.  389 


DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL  OF  FIRE: 

3197.  Q.  What  is  the  chief  source  of  superiority  of  fire  ?  A. 
Concentration  on  chosen  objectives. 

3198.  Q.  How  may  the  functions  of  those  concerned  in  the 
firing  in  battle  be  classified?  A.  To  the  commanders  of  the 
firing  line  belongs  the  direction  of  fire ;  to  the  commanders  of 
subdivisions,  the  control ;  to  the  men,  fire  discipline. 

3199.  Q.  Specify  the  duties  of  the  captain  of  a  company  in 
battle  with  reference  to  the  direction  and  control  of  fire.  A.  He 
determines  the  objects  to  be  fired  on,  the  nature  of  the  fire,  and 
the  fractions  of  troops  to  be  thrown  into  the  firing-line  during 
the  whole  period  of  preparation.  He  watches  that  the  fire  does 
not  deviate  from  the  direction  which  he  has  assigned  to  it,  and 
tries  to  control  it  up  to  the  last  moment. 

3200.  Q.  Specify  the  duties  of  sectional  commanders  in  battle 
with  reference  to  the  direction  and  control  of  fire.  A.  In  ac- 
cordance with  orders  received  they  indicate  to  the  men  the  sights 
to  be  used,  point  out  the  objectives  to  be  aimed  at,  the  number  of 
cartridges  to  be  fired,  and  regulate  the  intensity  and  duration  of ' 
the  fire. 

3201.  Q.  Specify  the  duties  of  group  commanders  in  battle 
with  reference  to  the  direction  and  control  of  fire  ?  A.  They  see 
that  the  orders  are  carried  out  concerning  the  sights  to  be  used, 
the  objectives  to  be  fired  on,  the  pauses  and  re-opening  of  the 
fire — in  a  word,  to  assure  the  execution  of  the  orders. 

3202.  Q.  What  general  rule  should  always  govern  the  selection 
of  the  moment  for  opening  fire  in  battle  ?  A.  Reserve  the  fire  as 
much  as  possible  for  the  decisive  ranges. 

3203.  Q.  What  advantage  may  result  from  the  defenders  of  a 
prepared  position  opening  fire  upon  the  assailant  at  considerable 
ranges  ?  A.  Besides  the  actual  loss  inflicted  it  compels  the  assailant 
to  undergo  the  fatigue  and  delay  of  early  deployment  and  a  long 
advance  in  extended  order. 

3204.  Q.  Should  the  assailant  in  battle  be  influenced  by  the 
effectiveness  of  the  enemy's  fire  or  his  own,  in  choosing  the 
moment  for  opening  fire  ?    A.  His  own. 

3205.  Q.  In  the  general  case  of  an  attack  over  ground  which  is 
not  particularly  favorable  to  a  safe  approach  to  within  400  yards 
of  the  enemy,  at  what  range  must  fire  be  opened  by  the  assailant  ? 
A.  At  some  distance  between  800  and  400  yards. 

3206.  Q.  What  practically  determines  the  choice  of  objectives 
for  the  assailant  in  battle  ?  A.  The  point  of  assault.  The  objec- 
tive will  usually  be  the  defender's  firing-line  at  this  point,  includ- 
ing support  and  reserves  if  they  appear  in  sight. 

3207.  Q.  What  is  the  defender's  first  rule  in  choosing  objectives 
in  battle  ?    A.  The  defender,  if  the  enemy  is  making  a  serious 


390  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMIN^ER. 

attack  in  his  front,  will  fire  on  the  leading  echelon  of  that  arm 
which,  for  the  ipoment,  constitutes  the  chief  danger  of  the  de- 
fense, if  this  echelon  be  within  effective  range. 

3208.  Q.  Even  though  a  threatening  advance  of  the  assailants 
in  battle  is  known  to  be  intended  as  a  demonstration  only,  should 
they  not  be  fired  on,  and  why  ?  A.  They  should  be  fired  on  so  as 
to  prevent  any  attempt  to  change  the  demonstration  into  the  real 
attack. 

3209.  Q.  "What  is  the  defender's  second  rule  in  choosing  objec- 
tives in  battle  ?  A.  He  will  choose  the  first  objectives  among  the 
groups  of  the  nearest  echelons  which  threaten  the  greatest  dan- 
ger; that  is,  advanced  groups.  "There  is  not  a  doubt  that  in 
annihilating  them  we  destroy,  in  the  germ,  all  the  nitiative  power 
of  the  rest  of  the  mass." 

3210.  Q.  Name  the  exceptions  to  the  rule  that  the  defender 
should  choose,  as  objectives  in  battle,  the  advanced  groups  of  the 
nearest  echelons  ?  A.  One  is  in  the  case  when  an  attack  begins 
with  an  artillery  duel.  The  fire  will  be  directed  on  the  assailant's 
guns,  or  on  mounted  oflBcers  sent  to  reconnoitre  or  to  carry  orders, 
during  the  preparatory  stage  of  the  attack.  Another  exception  is 
when  the  most  advanced  echelon  of  the  attack  can  no  longer 
advance.  The  fire  will  then  be  directed  on  objectives  in  the 
second  and  third  echelons  as  they  advance  ;  or,  if  the  firing-line 
is  halted  for  any  reason,  and  offers  very  bad  objectives,  then  the 
fire  may  be  directed  on  objectives  in  the  second  and  third  eche- 
lons, if  suitable  ones  can  be  found. 

3211.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  evils  attending  a  too  frequent 
change  of  objectives  in  battle  ?  A.  A  loss  of  time  in  changing 
sights;  a  waste  of  lead  from  firing  at  new  ranges ;  a  scattering  of 
losses,  which  robs  them  of  their  moral  effect. 

3212.  Q.  Defeat  of  the  enemy  being  the  purpose  of  every  action, 
and  shelter  from  his  fire  being  secondary,  what  is  the  prime 
requisite  which  makes  cover  available  for  use  in  battle  ?  A.  It 
should  permit  a  good  view  of  the  enemy. 

3213.  Q.  What  means  should  be  resorted  to,  to  determine  the 
ranges  in  a  defender's  front  while  there  is  yet  time  before  an  at- 
tack ?  A.  The  defender  should  measure  the  distance  of  any  promi- 
nent objects  in  his  front  from  the  various  portions  of  his  position, 
in  order  to  fire  on  the  assailant  as  he  reaches  them.  Information 
should  be  asked  from  the  nearest  troops,  especially  the  artillery  ; 
maps  should  be  consulted,  range-finders  used,  and,  on  ground 
suitable  for  observation,  trial-volleys  employed. 

3214.  Q.  What  effect  upon  shooting  has  the  combination  of  the 
excitement  of  battle  and  a  down-hill  range?  A.  The  men  are  apt 
to  fire  higher  than  when  firing  up  hill;  hence  less  elevations. 

3215.  Q.  At  what  range  only  is  fire  ever  delivered  at  cavalry 
in  battle  ?    A.  At  short  ranges. 

3216.  Q.  What  is  the  principal  effect  sought  in  employing  fire 


FIEE   DISCIPLINE.  391 

against  charging  cavalry  ?    A.  To  break  the  dash  or  elan  of  the 
charge  by  bringing  down  a  number  of  horses. 

3217.  Q.  How  many  rounds  of  ammunition  should  be  provided 
each  man  in  an  advance  on  a  position  beginning  at  800  yards  ? 
A.  130. 

KINDS  OF  FIRE  TO  BE   USED. 

3218.  Q.  What  conclusion  results  from  a  comparison  of  con- 
trolled and  uncontrolled  fire  in  battle  ?  A.  The  conclusion  is  that 
some  one  of  the  forms  of  controlled  fire  should  be  used  as  long  as 
this  is  practicable,  and  that  every  means  should  be  adopted  which 
increases  the  possibility  of  control. 

3219.  Q.  How  are  the  two  kinds  of  controlled  fire  broadly  dis- 
tinguished from  each  other,  and  what  are  they  called  ?  A.  The 
one  kind,  called  mass-firing  (or,  in  the  Drill  Regulations,  "  fire 
with  counted  cartridges  "),  produces  a  rain  of  bullets,  continuous 
while  it  lasts  ;  the  other  kind,  called  volley-firing,  causes  a  mass 
of  bullets  to  fall  suddenly  and  together. 

3220.  Q.  What  particular  attribute  of  volley-firing  gives  it, 
superiority  of  moral  effect  in  battle  ?     A.  Its  suddenness. 

3221.  Q.  What  is  the  number  of  volleys  not  to  be  exceeded  in 
battle  without  a  pause  of  some  length  ?  A.  Not  more  than  four 
successive  volleys  ought  to  be  fired,  without  a  pause  of  some 
length,  in  order  that  control  may  not  be  lost. 

3222.  Q.  During  what  portions  of  a  battle  is  volley-firing  ap- 
propriate for  the  defender  to  use  ?  For  the  assailant  ?  A.  By  the 
defender  volleys  are  employed  as  long  as  possible — even  at  the 
last  moment,  when  the  assailants  dash  forward' to  the  assault. 
For  the  assailant  volleys  belong  to  the  preparatory  or  long-range 
stage  of  the  action.  They  are  delivered  by  those  detailed  for  the 
purpose,  and  not  by  those  who  are  to  actually  make  the  assault. 

3223.  Q.  What  kind  of  controlled  fire  succeeds  volley-firing  as 
a  battle  progresses,  and  how  long  should  it  continue  before  paus- 
ing ?  A.  Mass-firing,  which  should  not  exceed  three  or  four 
rounds ;  the  number  of  rounds  is  fixed  beforehand,  or  the  firing 
may  be  stopped  by  whistle-signal. 

3224.  Q,  When  deployment  becomes  necessary  in  battle,  and 
volley-firing  by  large  bodies  becomes  impracticable  as  a  conse- 
quence, what  form  of  volley-firing  may  yet  be  resorted  to,  in 
preference  to  mass- firing,  and  before  the  fire  passes  beyond  con- 
trol? A.  The  fire  of  group-volleys.  The  firing-line  is  divided 
for  this  purpose  into  groups  under  recognized  leaders. 

THE    FIRE    UNIT. 

3225.  Q.  What  is  the  fire  unit— what  is  its  object,  and  what 
is  its  size  in  our  service  ?  A.  The  groups  into  which  the  firing- 
line  is  divided,  under  recognized  leaders,  are  called  fire  units. 


392 

The  object  of  this  division  is  to  retain  as  long  as  possible,  in  the 
noise  and  excitement  of  battle,  control  over  the  fire,  and  to  insure 
transmission  of  commands  to  the  man  who  holds  the  rifle.  In  our 
service  the  group,  to  which  the  name  "  squad"  has  been  given, 
consists  of  eight  men,  including  the  leader. 

3226.  Q.  What  means  should  be  employed  to  repair  the  damage 
to  groups  in  battle  from  increasing  effectiveness  of  the  enemy's 
fire — the  inevitable  drifting  of  the  men  to  the  right  and  left,  and 
the  unavoidable  mixing  of  the  larger  units  ?  A.  The  men  should 
be  trained  to  form  new  groups  when  their  own  are  broken  up, 
and,  when  their  leaders  are  killed  or  wounded,  to  place  themselves 
voluntarily  under  the  nearest  leader.  Commanders  of  platoons 
and  sections  must  be  on  the  alert  in  battle  to  appoint  fresh  group- 
leaders  in  place  of  those  lost. 

SUPPLY  OF  AMMUNITION  IN  THE  FIELD. 

3228.  Q.  In  a  system  of  ammunition  supply  in  the  field,  how  is 
the  ammunition  carried  ?  A.  Partly  by  the  soldier,  partly  by 
battalion  ammunition  wagons,  and  partly  by  ammunition  parks. 

(For  description  of  a  system  of  ammunition  .supply,  see  text, 
p.  193  et  seq.)  \ 

RAPIDITY    OF    FIRE. 

3229.  Q.  When  is  the  proper  time  to  use  rapid  fire  in  battle, 
and  what  limit  of  time  should  it  not  exceed  without  pause  ?  A. 
Kapid  fire  should  be  used  at  the  favorable,  though  usually  short, 
intervals  which -may  occur  during  all  stages  of  the  fight,  and 
should  not  last  more  than  five  minutes  without  pause. 

TACTICAL  DEDUCTIONS. 

8230.  Q.  Should  Strategy  or  Tactics  be  the  principal  subject  of 
military  study,  and  why  ?  A.  Tactics,  because  few  officers  are 
called  on  to  command  strategical  units,  while  every  officer  ought 
to  know  how  best  to  use  the  men,  arms,  and  ground  at  his  dis- 
posal. 

3231.  Q.  How  is  the  predominant  influence  of  infantry  shown 
by  battle  experience  ?  A.  It  is  shown  by  the  fact  that,  as  infantry 
gains  or  loses  ground,  it  draws  with  it  the  other  arms.  Example  : 
At  the  battle  of  Koniggratz  the  superiority  of  the  Austrian  artil- 
lery and  the  vigor  of  their  cavalry  charges  were  of  no  avail  after 
the  infantry  was  defeated. 

3232.  Q.  What  change  of  formation  for  attacks  has  been 
necessitated  by  the  dissolving  effect  of  modern  fire?  A.  Suc- 
cessive lines  in  extended  order  must  be  substituted  for  the  old 
column  of  attack. 

3233.  Q.  Describe  in  general  terms  the  manner  of  assaulting 


FIEE   DISCIPLINE.  393 

a  position.  A.  Masses  are  sent  forward  over  the  fire-swept 
zone  in  extended  order  and  in  successive  lines  ;  troops  in  rear 
are  the  feeders  for  the  tiring-line,  intended  to  keep  up  its  fire- 
power, carry  forward  the  wave  of  attack,  and  finally,  when  as- 
saulting distance  is  reached,  to  break  the  enemy's  line.  The 
moment  for  reinforcing  the  firing-line  is  when  its  energy  is 
nearly  expended,  and  there  is  a  strong  tendency  to  halt.  When 
the  point  of  assault  has  once  been  determined,  the  movement 
should  be  simultaneous  and  continuous  from  front  to  rear  of  the 
attack,  and  the  reserves  should  be  ready.  Combined  with  this 
frontal  attack  there  should  be  a  flank  attack. 

3234.  Q.  What  is  the  distinction  between  attack  and  assault  ? 
The  attack  is  general  ;  assaults  are  local,  in  order  that  the  as- 
sailants may  be  superior  in  force  at  the  points  of  assault-. 

3235.  Q.  What  are  the  relative  values  of  shock  and  fire  as 
factors  of  victory  in  modern  war?  A.  "Fire  is  the  great,  the 
principal,  and  almost  the  only  force  in  battle  ;  the  shock  is  only 
a  secondary  incident."     (Lewal.) 

3236.  Q.  What  rule  should  always  be  followed  as  to  the  num- 
ber at  first  deployed  in  the  attack  formation  ?  A.  The  firing- 
line  from  the  start  should  have  as  many  rifles  as,  from  the  nature 
of  the  ground,  can  be  brought  effectively  into  play. 

3237.  Q.  In  what  does  preparation  for  an  attack  consist  ?  A. 
It  consists  in  so  demoralizing  the  defenders  by  fire  of  artillery, 
or  of  artillery  and  infantry  combined,  that  the  assaulting  lines 
are  al)le  to  live  and  arrive  at  assaulting  distances. 

3238.  Q.  What  is  the  best  safeguard  from  an  enemy's  fire  at 
the  disposal  of  the  attack  ?  A.  Rapid  movement  over  the  fire- 
swept  zone,  which  reduces  the  time  during  which  fire  can  act, 
and  also  the  chances  of  finding  the  ranges  with  any  accuracy. 

3239.  Q.  Which  dimension,  depth  or  width,  should  char- 
acterize attack  formations,  and  why  ?  A.  Depth,  because  troops 
once  engaged,  can  no  longer  be  moved  to  the  right  or  left,  nor 
can  they  be  withdrawn  and  used  elsewhere  ;  the  front  line  must 
therefore  be  constantly  and  continuously  reinforced  from  the 
rear. 

3240.  Q.  The  attack  having  been  successful,  what  means  should 
at  once  be  employed  to  repair  the  resulting  disorganized  condi- 
tion of  the  victors,  and  what  are  the  benefits  from  such  repair  ? 
The  troops  should  be  re-formed  as  speedily  as  possible.  They  can 
never  know  whether  there  is  not  a  second  line  of  defense  against 
which  a  disorganized  advance  would  be  stopped,  and  a  first  suc- 
cess turned  into  a  defeat. 

3241.  Q.  How  many  lines  of  attack  should  there  at  least  be? 
A.  Nine. 

3242.  Q.  How  is  the  distance  between  lines  of  attack  regu- 
lated ?  A.  Solely  by  the  consideration  of  prompt  and  timely 
reinforcement. 


394  THE   AEMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

3243.  Q.  How  many  men  per  yard  of  front  should  the  attack 
have?  The  defense?  A.  The  attack,  13  to  14;  the  defense,  7 
to  10. 

3244.  Q.  Give  an  account  of  the  normal  attack  formation 
suggested  in  "Infantry  Fire."  A.  See  text,  p.  234;  also,  Plate 
II. 

PLUNGING  FIRE,  ETC. 

3245.  Q.  What  is  "plunging"  and  what  "indirect"  fire?  A. 
Plunging  fire  is  that  which  is  used  against  an  object  close  behind 
a  covering  mass.  Indirect  fire  is  .that  used  against  an  object  at 
a  considerable  distance  behind  a  covering  obstacle.  Both  find 
their  principal  use  in  sieges. 

3246.  Q.  Upon  what  does  the  efficacy  of  plunging  fire  depend  ? 
A.  Upon  the  angle  of  drop  and  the  height  of  the  obstacle ;  know- 
ing which,  the  defiladed  and  protected  zones,  and  therefore  the 
suitable  range,  may  be  calculated. 

3247.  Q.  Up  to  what  range  may  night-firing  be  eflScacious  ? 
A.  600  yards. 

I 


PART  X. 

MINOR   TACTICS. 


_  •  (  Shaw's  "  Elements  of  Modern  Tactics.'* 

Text-books  ■  1 

*  (  Wagner's  "  Security  and  Information,"  etc. 


For  Second  Lieutenants  of  all  Arms— Nos.  3351-3590. 
For  First  Lieutenants  of  all  Arms— Nos.  3248-3590. 
For  Captains  of  all  Arms— Nos.  3248-3837. 


PAET  X. 

MINOR  TACTICS, 


MINOR  TACTICS. 

3248.  Q.  Before  commencing  to  study  the  principles  of  modern 
tactics,  what  is  it  necessary  for  an  officer  to  learn  ?  A.  Not  only 
to  learn  and  understand  the  details  of  his  own  arm  of  the  service, 
but  also  to  have  a  fair  acquaintance  with  the  working  of  the  sister 
arms. 

3249.  Q.  What  method  has  most  commended  itself  to  military 
students  ?  A.  The  method  of  working  out  exercises  or  studies  on 
each  portion  of  the  subject  discussed. 

3250.  Q.  What  should  these  exercises  be  at  first  ?  A.  Of  an 
elementary  character. 

3251.  Q.  When  might  instruction  in  tactics  be  considered  com- 
plete ?  A.  Not  until  the  student  has  had  opportunities  of  work- 
ing out  similar  exercises  practically  on  the  ground,  with  or  without 
the  help  of  troops. 

3252.  Q.  How  should  instruction  in  tactics  be  arranged  ?  A. 
So  that  the  theoretical  and  the  practical  can  go  hand  in  hand, 
and  be  worked  in  one  with  the  other. 

DEFINITIONS. 

3253.  Q.  What  is  the  definition  of  tactics  in  a  military  sense  ? 
A.  Tactics,  as  distinguished  from  strategy,  means  the  art  of 
handling  troops  in  the  presence  or  in  the  immediate  neighborhood 
of  an  enemy.  Strategy  is  the  art  of  conducting  the  greater  opera- 
tions of  war  by  movements  that  take  place  out  of  sight  of  or  at  a 
distance  from  an  enemy. 

3254.  Q.  What  is  a  tactical  unit?  A.  It  is  an  expression 
denoting  the  body  of  troops  of  each  arm  considered  most  suit- 
able for  one  man's  independent  command. 

3255.  Q.  What  is  a  group  f  -K.  A  number  of  men,  whether  of 
infantry  or  cavalry,  of  any  number  from  two  upwards,  until  it 

397 


398  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

arrives  at  the  strength  of  a  sub-unit;  as,  for  instance,  a  section  of 
infantry. 

3256.  Q.  What  is  a  vedette?  A.  A  cavalry  mounted  sentry, 
posted  in  a  fixed  position,  when  a  continual  lookout  is  necessary. 
This  term  is  restricted  to  mounted  sentries  posted  by  cavalry 
pickets. 

8257.  Q.  What  is  a  5cot*i.^  A.  In  cavalry  there  are  two  kinds, 
employed  either  for  the  sole  purpose  of  examining  ground  over 
which  a  body  of  troops  is  to  pass,  which  is  called  a  ground-scout ; 
or  else  being  detached  for  ordinary  reconnoitring  purposes  from 
a  patrol  or  reconnoitring  party,  termed  an  advanced  scout.  A 
scout  in  infantry  is  usually  applied  to  an  ordinary  reconnoitrer 
detached  from  a  patrol. 

3258.  Q.  What  is  meant  hj frontage  f  A.  The  extent  of  ground 
occupied  by  the  front  rank  of  a  body  of  troops,  in  whatever  forma- 
tion they  may  be. 

3259.  Q.  What  is  an  interval  ?  A.  It  is  the  lateral  space  be- 
tween men  or  bodies  of  troops  in  frontage. 

3260.  Q.  What  is  distance  f  A.  The  space  between  men  or 
bodies  of  troops  from  front  to  rear. 

3261.  Q.  What  is  depth  f  A.  The  space  taken  up  by  a  body  of 
troops  from  front  to  rear. 

3262.  Q.  What  is  a  column  of  route?  A.  A  formation  for 
moving  on  a  road  with  a  narrow  front,  when  on  the  line  of 
march.  In  cavalry  the  term  is  more  particularly  applied  to  col- 
umns having  no  broader  front  than  that  presented  by  a  column 
of  sections ;  in  infantry,  the  formation  is  usually  that  of  fours  ; 
in  artillery,  the  front  is  invariably  that  of  one  carriage  only,  the 
guns  and  wagons  of  each  subdivision  succeeding  one  another. 

3263.  Q.  What  does  afield  column  of  route  in  artillery  mean? 
A.  It  means  that  the  wagons  are  detached  and  follow  in  rear  of 
the  guns. 

FUNCTIONS   OF  THE  THREE  ARMS. 

3264.  Q.  Which  of  ttie  three  arms  is  the  only  one  that  can  act 
independently  under  all  circumstances?  A.  Infantry,  whether 
in  attack  or  defense,  in  motion  or  at  rest. 

3265.  Q.  What  is  the  action  of  infantry?  A.  Fire-action,  shock- 
action,  and  a  combination  of  the  two. 

3266.  Q.  Which  action  is  the  most  important  at  the  present 
day  ?  A.  Fire-actiou.  Superior  fire  is  accompanied  by  moral 
effect,  which  helps  to  insure  success  ;  hence  every  means  should 
be  taken  to  increase  the  effect  of  fire-action  upon  the  enemy,  and 
to  neutralize  as  far  as  possible  the  effect  of  fire-action  on  the  part 
of  the  enemy. 

3267.  Q.  To  secure  a  full  completion  of  victory  what  should  the 
offensive  fire-actiou  of  infantry  be  supplemented  by  ?  A.  By  shock- 


MINOR  TACTICS.  399 

action  at  the  right  moment;  as,  for  example,  the  final  assault  of  a 
position,  preceded  by  infantry  fire  during  the  advance. 

3368.  Q.  What  is  necessary  to  give  the  fullest  success  to  the 
defensive  fire-action  of  infantry  in  position  behind  cover?  A. 
AVhen  the  attacking  force  hesitates  or  becomes  demoralized,  the 
action  must  be  changed  into  offensive  fire  and  shock-action  com- 
bined.    This  is  called  giving  the  counterstroke. 

3269.  Q.  In  what  case  should  defensive  fire-action  only  be  per- 
mitted ?  A.  When  the  infantry  is  acting  as  a  support  to  artillery. 
Their  function  is  almost  purely  defensive,  and  they  should  rarely, 
if  ever,  leave  their  position  to  attack  or  pursue. 

3371.  Q.  How  should  the  first  line  of  attack  be  subdivided? 
A.  Into  a  firing-line  in  extended  order,  followed  by  its  immediate 
supports,  broken  up  into  fractions,  more  or  less  dense  and  more 
or  less  separated,  and  backed  up  by  a  reserve  kept  as  long  as 
possible  in  small  columns  or  in  line,  but  liable  to  be  opened  out 
if  the  weight  of  the  enemy's  fire  is  felt. 

3373.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  first  line  in  action  ?  A. 
To  keep  up  a  well-directed  fire  on  the  enemy ;  by  a  steady  ad- 
vance to  establish  itself  as  near  the  position  as  possible ;  and 
thence  to  open  such  a  heavy  fire  that  the  second  line  may  be  en- 
abled to  approach  tlie  point  of  attack  for  the  purpose  of  jissault. 

3373.  Q.  How  may  these  duties  be  best  effected  by  the  firing- 
line  ?  A.  To  effect  this  the  firing-line  is  progressively  reinforced 
from  the  rear  during  the  latter  part  of  the  advance  :  first  by  its 
supports,  and  finally  by  its  reserve,  so  that  its  full  fire-action  is 
developed  at  the  critical  moment. 

3374.  Q.  When  the  second  line  passes  through  the  first  line  to 
assault,  what  is  done  by  the  first  line  ?  A.  It  ceases  its  fire,  and 
joins  in  the  attack  of  the  position. 

3375.  Q.  If  there  be  a  third  line,  what  action  is  taken  ?  A.  It 
follows  and  confirms  the  success. 

TACTICAL  UNIT  OF  INFANTRY. 

3376.  Q.  What  is  the  tactical  unit  of  infantry  for  the  U.  S. 
Army,  and  of  what  is  it  constituted  on  a  war  basis  ?  A.  The  bat- 
talion, composed  of  four  companies,  of  four  hundred  men,  and 
thirteen  officers. 

3377.  Q.  What  is  the  approximate  frontage  of  infantry  ?  A.  A 
company,  about  39  yards  ;  a  battalion,  about  163  yards  ;  in  line  of 
companies  in  columns  of  fours,  the  depth  in  close  column ;  in 
column  of  files,  3  yards,  but  may  be  reduced  to  33  inches  ;  in 
column  of  twos,  4  yards,  but  may  be  reduced  to  50  inches  ;  in 
column  of  fours,  5  yards,  but  may  be  reduced  to  3  yards  ;  in  line 
of  platoon  columns,'  frontage  in  line,  30  yards  ;  in  line  of  platoon 
columns  with  closed  intervals,  100  yards. 

3378.  Q.  What  is  the  approximate  depth  of  infantry  ?    A.  In 


400  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

line,  about  5  yards  ;  in  column  of  fours,  the  frontage  in  line  plus 
18  inches  ;  in  column  at  wheeling  distance,  the  frontage  in  line 
less  the  frontage  of  the  leading  subdivision  plus  depth  of  the 
last ;  in  close  column,  seven  times  the  number  of  companies  less 
2  yards  ;  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  24  yards. 

3279.  Q.  Grive  the  rules  for  calculating  the  frontage  and  depth 
of  infantry,  and  an  example  of  the  calculation  ?  A.  For  the  front 
of  a  company  multiply  the  number  of  files  by  28  inches,  adding 
space  of  right  and  left  guides  minus  6  inches. 

Example. 

48  files  X  28  in.  =  1344  inches. 

K.  and  L.  guides  (less  6  in.)  = 50       " 

1394  -^  12  in.  =  116  ft.  =  39  yds. 

For  the  frontage  of  a  battalion,  multiply  the  frontage  of  a 
company  by  the  number  of  companies  ;  then  multiply  the  space 
between  companies  by  3,  and  add  products  of  both. 

Example.  i 

1394  in.  X  4  =  5576  inches. 
90  in.  X  3  =  270   " 

5846  -i-  12  =  487  ft.  =  162  yds. 

For  the  depth  of  infantry  in  line,  add  the  thickness  of  each  line 
of  officers  and  men  to  the  distance  between  each  line. 

Example. 

12  in.  +  60  in.  +  12  in.  +  16  in.  +  12  in.  +  60  in. 
H-12  in.  =  15i  feet. 

3280.  Q.  How  is  frontage  and  depth  measured  ?  A.  The  front- 
age of  two  battalions  in  line  includes  the  interval  between  one 
battalion  and  the  other  ;  depth  of  a  battalion  in  column  would  be 
measured  from  the  front  of  the  leading  front  rank  to  the  rear  of 
the  extreme  rear  rank  of  the  column,  including  the  distances  be- 
tween one  company  and  another. 

3281.  Q.  What  is  the  ordinary  pace  of  infantry  in  manoeuvre  ? 
A.  On  the  march,  during  field  operations,  about  3  miles  an  hour, 
or  88  yards  per  minute.  In  advancing  after  firing  has  com- 
menced, it  would  be  about  40  yards  per  minute  ;  in  advancing  by 
rushes  (taking  advantage  of  cover),  about  20  yards  per  minute. 
In  double  time,  the  pace  is  increased  to  5  miles  an  hour  for  short 
intervals,  or  about  146  yards  per  minute. 

3282.  Q.  How  may  the  time  required  for  a  movement  be  calcu- 
lated ?  A.  By  knowing  the  distance  to  be  passed  over,  and  the 
pace  decided,  and  applying  the  data  previously  given, 


MINOE  TACTICS.  401 

3283.  Q.  How  may  the  strength  of  a  column  or  party  of  the 
enemy's,  infantry  be  approximately  estimated  ?  A.  By  noting  the 
time  occupied  by  the  force  in  passing  a  fixed  point,  together  with 
its  pace  and  formation,  and  applying  the  data  previously  given, 
deducting,  when  necessary,  in  the  calculation  for  opening  out  or 
straggling  on  the  march. 

3284.  Q.  What  is  the  simple  formula  for  ascertaining  the  num- 
bers in  a  column  ?  A.  The  depth  having  been  ascertained  in 
paces,  twice  the  number  of  paces  gives  the  strength  of  the  column. 

3285.  Q.  A  column  of  infantry  in  fours  takes  5^  minutes  to 

pass  across  an  opening  under  observation.     Pace  88  yards  per 

88 
minute,   what  is  the  strength  of  the  column  ?    A.  88  x  5  +  — 

=  440  +  44  =  484  yards,  the  actual  length  of  the  column,  or  580 
paces.  Deduct  10  per  cent  for  opening  out  =  522  paces,  which 
represents  a  force  of  522  files,  or  1044  men. 

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  CAVALRY. 

3286.  Q.  How  is  the  action  of  cavalry  divided?  A.  Into 
shock-action,  in  line  ;  into  detached  action,  either  singly  or  in 
small  parties  ;  into  dismounted  fire-action. 

3287.  Q.  What  does  the  leading  principle  of  the  action  of 
cavalry  in  battle  consist  in,  and  why  ?  A.  In  attack,  even  while 
acting  on  the  defensive  ;  because  at  the  halt,  unless  dismounted, 
it  is  comparatively  defenseless.  While  mounted  it  should  keep 
out  of  fire  until  it  can  itself  attack. 

3288.  Q.  To  be  eflficacious,  when  should  the  shock-action  of 
cavalry  be  applied  ?  A.  At  the  moment  the  commander  deems 
the  most  propitious  for  a  successful  result,  and  the  charge  should 
then  be  as  impetuous  as  possible  ;  the  main  conditions  for  suc- 
cess being  rapidity  and  surprise  in  the  advance,  and  vigor  and 
momentum  in  the  shock. 

3289.  Q.  What  should  be  done  by  cavalry  after  the  charge  ? 
A.  It  should  either  pursue  the  enemy  or  rally  as  quickly  as  possi- 
ble, according  to  circumstances. 

3290.  Q.  How  should  cavalry  cover  the  retreat  of  a  defeated 
army  ?  A.  It  must  continue  to  act  vigorously  on  the  offensive, 
as  the  best  means  of  defense,  both  for  itself  and  the  other  arms .; 
it  should  operate  under  every  disadvantage  of  time  and  place, 
and  often  at  the  risk  of  total  destruction. 

3291.  Q.  In  what  formation  should  cavalry  always  manoeuvre  ? 
A.  In  column.  The  particular  formation  depends  much  on  the 
ground  ;  but  small  columns  are  the  most  mobile  and  flexible. 

3292.  Q.  In  what  formation  should  cavalry  fight  ?  A.  In  line, 
or  rather  in  a  succession  of  echelon  of  lines. 

3293.  Q.  What  are  the  uses  of  reserves,  echelons,  and  ground- 
scouts  during  an  attack  ?    A.  The  reserve  follows  in  rear,  to  a 


402  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

flank  or  flanks  ;  and  it  must  protect  the  retreat  if  the  charge  is 
unsuccessful,  or  complete  the  victory  if  successful.  Every  attack- 
ing body  of  any  strength  should  protect  its  flanks;  or,  at  all 
events,  its  exposed  flank,  by  echelons,  during  its  advance.  The 
ground  over  which  cavalry  is  to  act  should  be  reconnoitred  by 
ground  scouts  thrown  out  to  the  front  and  flanks,  so  that  the  ad- 
vance may  not  be  checked  by  unforeseen  obstacles. 

3294.  Q.  Which  are  the  weak  points  of  cavalry,  and  where 
should  an  attack  be  made  ?  A.  The  flanks  are  the  weak  points, 
and  if  possible  an  attack  should  be  made  on  them,  and  when  in 
the  act  of  deploying. 

3295.  Q.  Cavalry,  in  attacking  infantry,  should  seek  what  ad- 
vantages ?  A.  Infantry  should  be  attacked  by  cavalry  in  flank 
when  in  motion,  when  demoralized  or  broken  by  artillery  fire,  or 
be  surprised. 

3296.  Q.  When  should  artillery  be  attacked  by  cavalry?  A. 
When  in  motion,  or  when  limbering  or  unlimbering.  Artillery  in 
position  should  only  be  attacked  in  flank  or  in  rear  ;  the  support, 
in  such  case,  if  there  is  one,  must  be  simultaneously  charged  by 
a  portion  of  the  force. 

3297.  Q.  What  is  the  main  use  of  cavalry  of  the  present  day, 
and  what  does  that  include  ?  A.  Its  main  use  is  in  its  detached 
action,  which  includes  all  reconnoitring,  screening,  escort  and 
messenger  duties. 

3298.  Q.  What  has  been  the  value  of  the  dismounted  fire-action 
of  cavalry  ?  A.  It  has  been  pretty  generally  acknowledged  of 
late  that  cavalry  must  fight  on  foot  under  certain  conditions. 
The  dismounted  action  of  cavalry  was  first  employed  by  the 
United  States  forces,  and  with  great  success,  during  the  War  of 
the  Kebellion.  It  has  been  since  employed  with  good  results  in 
the  latest  European  campaign,  by  the  Russians.  [The  tactical 
importance  of  this  subject  may  be  more  fully  discussed  by  the 
student  in  this  answer.] 

TACTICAL  UNIT  OF   CAVALRY. 

3299.  Q.  What  is  the  tactical  unit  of  cavalry  ?  Give  strength. 
A.  The  tactical  unit  is  the  squadron.  It  consists,  on  a  war  foot- 
ing, of  4  troops  of  400  men  and  14  officers. 

•  3300.  Q.  What  is  the  strength  of  a  cavalry  brigade,  in  round 
numbers  ?     A.  3600  men  and  about  140  officers. 

3301.  Q.  What  is  the  rate  of  speed  per  hour  and  per  minute  of 
the  walk  ?  of  the  trot  ?  of  the  gallop  ?  A.  The  rate  of  walk  is  4 
miles  an  hour,  or  117  yards  in  a  minute  ;  the  trot  is  8  miles  an 
hour,  or  235  yards  per  minute  ;  the  gallop  is  12  miles  an  hour,  or 
352  yards  per  minute. 

3302.  Q.  What  is  the  speed  of  an  orderly,  or  messenger  ?  A. 
The  gallop  may  be  taken  for  a  mile ;  beyond  that  distance  it 


MINOR  TACTICS. 


403 


should  be  alternately  trotting  and  galloping  at  10  miles  per  hour, 
or  293  yards  per  minute. 

3303.  Q.  From  the  aforementioned  data,  what  two  simple  prob- 
lems may  be  solved?  Give  example.  A.  First.  The  distance 
passed  over  being  known  and  the  pace  decided,  the  time  required 
for  a  movement  can  be  calculated.  Second.  The  strength  of  a 
force  of  cavalry  may  be  approximately  estimated  by  noting  the 
time  it  occupies  in  passing  a  fixed  point,  together  with  its  pace 
and  formation,  sufficient  deduction  being  made,  when  necessary, 
in  the  calculation  for  opening  out  or  straggling.     Example  : — 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  ARTILLERY. 


A. 


3304.  Q.  How  are  light  field  and  horse  batteries  armed  ? 
With  3^^^-inch  steel  guns  (breech  loading). 

3305.  Q.  How  are  U.  S.  heavy  batteries  armed  ?  A.  Heavy 
field  batteries  are  armed  with  3yVi"ch  guns. 

3306.  Q.  What  is  the  function  of  artillery  in  battle  ?  A.  To 
prepare  for  and  support  the  attacks  of  infantry  and  cavalry,  or 
to  defend  them  when  attacked,  rather  than  to  act  independently, 
without  their  presence. 

3307.  Q.  What  is  the  only  method  of  action  of  artillery  ?  A. 
It  is  confined  to  fire-action. 

3308.  Q.  Give  table  of  zones  of  rifle-fire,  aimed  and  unaimed. 


A. 

Zone. 

Description  of  Fire. 

Limits. 

Range. 

Isfc 
2d 
3d 

(  Useful  field  artillery  ) 
\  Limit  of  Rifle             \ 
Unaimed  Rifle 

Aimed  Rifle 

3000  to  1700  yards 

1700  to  800  yards 
800  to  400  yards 
400  to  position 

Extreme 

Long 

Medium 

Short 

3309.  Q.  Describe  in  detail  the  zones  of  artillery  fire,  and  show 
how  they  are  affected  by  rifle-fire.  A.  With  reference  to  the  dis- 
tance of  the  guns  from  unshaken  hostile  infantry,  artillery  fire 
may  be  divided  into  three  zones,  as  follows  : — 

First  Zone.  From  3000  to  2000  yards.  Within  this  zone  artil- 
lery fire  is  effective,  and  ordinarily  has  very  little  to  fear  from 
the  fire  of  infantry.  Second  Zone.  From  2000  to  800  yards.  As  it 
approaches  and  enters  this  zone  artillery  fire  increases  its  effect,' 
but  is  exposed  to  great  danger  from  infantry  fire,  which  danger 
increases  with  great  rapidity  as  the  range  diminishes.  Tldrd 
Zone.  Within  800  yards.  Unless  well  covered,  artillery  is  brought 
into  action  within  this  zone  only  in  exceptional  cases  of  absolute 
necessity,  and  even  then  at  the  risk  of  annihilation. 


404  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

3310.  Q.  What  is  the  extreme  useful  limit  of  field-artillery  fire 
under  ordinary  conditions  ?  A.  Under  favorable  conditions  artil- 
lery fire  has  been  used  effectively  considerably  in  excess  of  3300 
yards.. 

3311.  Q.  What  is  the  objective  of  artillery  ?  A.  To  direct  guns 
upon  that  arm  of  the  enemy  which  is  at  the  time  the  most  pre- 
dominant. At  each  stage  of  an  action  one  arm  is  for  the  moment 
the  principal  one,  and  should  be  checked  by  opposing  fire  ;  but  if 
any  doubt  arises  as  to  which  threatens  most,  troops  rather  than 
guns  should  then  be  the  objective. 

3312.  Q.  In  selecting  positions  for  artillery,  what  is  the  lead- 
ing consideration?  A.  The  first  and  leading  principle  is  that 
fire-action  against  the  enemy  should  be  as  little  as  possible  im- 
peded by  any  accidents  of  ground. 

3313.  Q.  When  should  the  guns  be  intrenched  ?  A.  When  a 
defensive  position  is  to  be  taken  up  and  held. 

3314.  Q.  What  positions  should  be  avoided  ?  A.  Well-defined 
and  isolated  positions,  and  no  cover  for  the  enemy's  infantry 
should  be  within  effective  rifle  range  unless  the  guns  are  com- 
pletely protected  from  it. 

3315.  Q.  What  should  the  artillery  reserve  consist  of  ?  A.  It 
should  consist  of  men,  horses,  and  ammunition  rather  than  of 
guns,  because  the  guns  themselves  are  seldom  disabled  by  the 
fire  of  the  enemy,  and  can  continue  in  action  as  long  as  they  are 
manned,  and  have  horses  to  move  them  when  necessary. 

3316.  Q.  Compare  the  moral  and  physical  effects  of  artillery 
fire.  A.  The  moral  effect  of  artillery  fire  upon  troops  going  into 
action  is  very  depressing.  Many  instances  occurred,  however, 
during  the  war  of  the  Rebellion  where  the  physical  effect  of  guns 
in  action  decided  the  day ;  and  it  must  be  remembered  that  a 
great  part  of  artillery  fire  is  directed  against  troops  under  cover, 
where,  if  it  produces  but  little  physical  effect,  that  of  infantry 
would  produce  probably  none  at  all. 

3317.  Q.  Name  the  various  kinds  of  artillery  fire,  with  refer- 
ence to  the  horizontal  plane.  A.  Fij^st. — With  reference  to  the 
horizontal  plane  :  Front  or  frontal  fire  is  that  which  is  directed 
perpendicularly,  or  nearly  so,  to  the  general  line  of  troops  fired 
at.  Oblique  fire  is  that  which  is  directed  obliquely  to  the  line  of 
troops  fired  at.  Enfilade  fire  is  one  which  rakes  the  enemy's 
line  of  troops.  Flanking  fire  must  be  directed  along  the  front 
of,  or  nearly  parallel  to,  the  line  to  be  flanked  or  defended. 
Crossfire  means  that  the  projectiles  from  guns  in  different 
positions  cross  one  another  at  a  particular  point  of  ground. 
Second. — With  reference  to  the  vertical  plane  :  Direct  fire  is  that 
from  guns  with  service  charges  at  all  angles  of  elevation  not  ex- 
ceeding 15°.  Indirect  or  curved  fire  is  that  from  guns  with  re- 
duced charges  at  all  angles  of  elevation  not  exceeding  15°.  High- 
angle  fire  is  that  directed  from  guns  at  a  greater  elevation  than 


MINOH  TACTICS.  405 

15^  with  any  charges.    This  term  now  includes  what  used  to  be 
called  vertical  fire. 

3318.  Q.  Describe  Common  Shell,  Shrapnel,  and  Case-shot,  and 
state  where  each  is  chiefly  useful.  A.  Common  shell  is  a  hollow 
cast-iron  elongated  projectile,  filled  with  a  large  bursting-charge 
of  powder.  It  bursts  into  a  few  large  pieces,  and  is  sometimes 
used  at  long  ranges  against  troops  in  mass,  but  chiefly  against 
buildings  or  obstacles,  and  to  fire  combustible  materials.  It  is 
also  employed  for  shelling  villages,  stockades,  etc.  It  is  painted 
black. — Shrapnel  shell  is  packed  with  bullets,  which  are  liber- 
ated in  their  flight  at  the  proper  moment  by  a  small  bursting- 
charge  of  powder  breaking  open  the  outer  case.  This  projectile 
is  used  against  troops  in  all  formations  when  in  open  view.  The 
effect  of  shrapnel  depends  upon  the  velocity  of  the  shell  at  the 
time  of  bursting.  With  the  old  M.  L.  guns  it  was  very  effective 
up  to  2500  yards,  and  moderately  so  up  to  3500  yards ;  but  the 
new  B.  L.  field-guns  have  much  higher  velocities,  and  their 
shrapnel-fire  is  proportionately  more  powerful.  Shrapnel  is  dis- 
tinguished from  common  shell  by  the  head  being  painted  red, 
the  body  black. — Case-shot  consists  of  a  thin  metal  cylinder 
packed  with  small  balls.  The  case  breaking  by  the  discharge, 
the  balls  are  liberated  at  the  muzzle,  and  spread  over  consider- 
able space.  Case-shot  is  used  up  to  an  extreme  range  only  of  350 
to  400  yards.  If  the  ground  in  front  of  the  enemy  is  hard  or 
stony,  the  result  is  more  effective.  Case  is  employed  against 
cavalry  or  infantry  at  close  quarters.  Shrapnel-shell  loaded  the 
reverse  way,  without  plug  or  fuse,  may  also  be  used  as  case,  on 
emergency,  within  100  yards.     Its  effect  is  very  great. 

3319.  Q.  Name  and  describe  the  two  general  classes  of  fuses, 
and  show  where  each  may  be  used  with  best  results.  A.  The 
fuses  used  with  shell  are  either  percussion-fuses  or  time-fuses^ 
names  which  explain  themselves.  Percussion  fuses  are  more 
reliable  than  time-fuses.  They  are  more  generally  used  with 
common  shell  than  time-fuses,  the  limit  for  eiror  permissible  in 
the  case  of  the  common  shell  being  very  small.  It  must  burst  at 
or  close  to  the  object  in  order  to  be  effective.  Time-fuses  are 
more  applicable  to  shrapnel,  which  should  burst  more  or  less 
short  of  the  object  aimed  at.  The  greater  the  range,  the  nearer 
to  the  object  should  the  point  of  bursting  be.  At  short  ranges, 
say  under  1500  yards,  the  distance  may  be  as  much  as  200  yards; 
but  at  long  ranges,  there  is  such  a  loss  of  final  velocity,  and  the 
angle  of  descent  is  so  much  increased,  that  about  50  yards  short 
of  the  object  is  found  to  be  sufficient.  Shrapnel  may  be  used 
effectively  with  percussion-fuses  on  occasions  when  it  can  be  fired 
at  short  ranges  over  hard  ground. 

3320.  Q.  What  ammunition  is  best  to  be  used  against  troops 
in  the  open?  A.  Shrapnel,  as  it  gives  much  more  destructive 
results. 


406  THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

3321.  Q.  What  does  the  effect  of  shrapnel  depend  upon?  A. 
Upon  the  velocity  of  the  shell  at  the  moment  of  bursting  and  the 
exact  timing  of  the  explosion,  so  as  to  give  best  effect  on  the 
object  aimed  at. 

3322.  Q.  What  are  two  general  methods  of  determining 
'ranges  ?  A.  Unless  range-finders  are  in  use  or  the  distance 
be  known,  percussion-fuses  should  be  used  until  the  range  is 
Ascertained. 

3323.  Q.  What  projectile  is  best  to  be  used  against  troops  or 
guns  under  cover,  and  what  is  the  nature  of  its  effect?  A. 
Common  shell  should  be  employed  for  shelling  them  out  of  vil- 
lages, houses,  or  woods,  or  when  behind  obstructions  of  almost 
any  kind.  Its  explosion  creates  much  heat,  and  easily  sets  fire  to 
houses.  Its  effect  upon  the  troops  is  doubtful,  except  as  shaking 
the  nerves  of  the  enemy,  compelling  him  to  lie  close,  while 
infantry  may  advance  unmolested  to  attack. 

3324.  Q.  Is  it  ever  advisable  to  fire  over  the  heads  of  one's 
own  troops  ?  A.  Common  shell  and  shrapnel,  with  proper  care, 
may  be  so  fired  if  necessary;  but  it  is  very  inadvisable  to  do  so, 
unless  the  distance  from  the  guns  to  the  troops  over  whom  it  is 
fired  is  considerable.  The  action  of  case-shot,  being  too  uncer- 
tain and  scattering,  should  never  be  fired  over  the  heads  of  one's 
own  troops. 

TACTICAL  UNIT  OF  ARTILLERY. 

3325.  Q.  What  is  the  tactical  unit  of  U.  S.  artillery,  and  what 
is  its  strength  ?  A.  The  battery,  consisting  of  six  guns,  with  a 
strength  of  5  officers  and  175  men. 

3326.  Q.  What  are  the  limits  of  distance  between  guns  in 
action  and  the  reasons  therefor  ?  A.  They  should  be  not  less 
than  10  nor  more  than  40  yards  apart.  An  interval  of  less  than 
10  yards  would  too  much  increase  the  effect  of  the  enemy's  fire ; 
an  interval  greater  than  40  yards  w^ould  render  the  efficient 
superintendence  of  the  battery  by  the  captain  impossible. 

3327.  Q.  What  is  the  front  occupied  in  action  by  a  battery  and 
by  a  brigade  of  four  batteries  ?  A.  A  battery  occupies  a  front 
wliich  varies  from  62  to  125  yards  ;  a  brigade  of  four  batteries  one 
that  varies  from  300  to  600  yards. 

3328.  Q.  How  are  the  men  in  a  battery  divided?  A.  Into 
gunners  (cannoneers),  drivers,  and  artificers. 

3329.  Q.  How  are  the  guns  and  caissons  horsed  ?  A.  By  teams 
of  from  6  to  8  horses,  with  a  driver  to  each  pair  of  horses.  The 
pairs  are  known  as  lead-,  centre-  (swing),  and  wlieel-hov&QS. 

3330.  Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  the  gun  detachment  of  a 
field-battery,  and  how  mounted?  A.  It  consists  of  8  gunners 
(7  cannoneers,  including  the  gunner  and  caisson  corporal),  who 
march  or  sit  on  the  gun  and  wagon  (chests  of  the  limber  and 


MINOR  TACTI-CS.  407 

caisson),  under  the  commaBd  of  Number  1  of  the  gun  detach- 
ment (chief  of  section),  who  is  mounted. 

3331.  Q.  What  is  the  smallest  number  of  men  by  which  a  gun 
can  be  worked  efficiently  ?  A.  On  firm  ground,  three  men,  with- 
out much  diminution  of  rapidity  of  fire. 

3333.  Q.  What  is  the  rate  of  speed  per  hour  and  per  minute  of 
the  walk,  trot,  gallop,  and  of  the  combination  of  trot  and  walk? 
A.  The  pace  of  the  walk  is  the  same  as  for  cavalry,  not  to 
exceed  4  miles  an  hour,  or  117  yards  per  minute  ;  the  trot  should 
be  8  miles  an  hour,  or  235  yards  per  minute  ;  the  gallop  12  miles 
an  hour,  or  352  yards  per  minute  ;  a  combination  of  the  two,  for 
horse-batteries,  5  miles  an  hour,  or  146  yards  per  minute. 

3333.  Q.  What  are  the  methods  adopted  for  estimating  the 
strength  of  the  enemy's  artillery  ?  A.  The  time  occupied  in  pass- 
ing a  fixed  point  may  form  an  element  for  calculation,  as  in  the 
case  of  the  other  arms,  but  it  is  often  possible  to  count  the  num- 
ber of  guns.  If  the  depth  of  the  column  of  route  of  artillery  be 
obtained  by  observation,  a  fair  estimate  may  be  made  by  assuming 
that  each  artillery  carriage  takes  up  twenty  yards  of  road,  which 
allows  for  intervals  of  distance  and  tailing  on  the  march. 

MOUNTED  INFANTRY. 

3334.  Q.  Various  attempts  have  been  made  to  combine  what 
two  methods  of  action,  and  for  what  reason  ?  A.  To  combine 
the  action  of  cavalry  and  infantry  ;  to  make  a  portion  of  the  infan- 
try so  mobile  as  to  enable  it  to  act  with  cavalry  in  any  required 
enterprise,  and  to  enable  it  to  be  moved  rapidly  from  one  point  to 
another  of  the  scene  of  action. 

3335.  Q.  What  are  the  experiences  derived  from  the  American 
civil  war  ?  A.  That  whenever  these  two  functions  were  combined, 
some  of  the  best  results  were  obtained  ;  and  it  is  remarkable  that 
the  cavalry,  making  use  of  dismounted  action  at  times,  retained 
for  the  most  part  its  power  as  cavalry  at  other  times. 

3336.  Q.  What  is  the  principal  source  of  information  for  all 
writers  on  this  subject  ?  A.  Trench,  in  his  "  Cavalry  in  Modern 
War." 

3337.  Q.  What  is  this  author's  opinion  regarding  dismounted 
cavalry  ?  A.  He  concludes,  from  the  narrative  of  facts  and  feats 
which  he  details,  that  in  the  wars  of  the  future  dismounted  cav- 
alry will  have  a  great  part  to  play. 

3338.  Q.  Examples  from  the  American  war  are  quoted  in  sup- 
port of  what  opinions  ?  A.  The  examples  are  equally  relied  upon 
by  the  advocates  of  mounted  infantry  and  of  dismounted  cavalry. 

3339.  Q.  What  are  the  author's  general  remarks  on  American 
cavalry  ?  A.  That  although  the  cavalry  regiments  on  both  sides 
were  more  or  less  of  an  irregular  type,  the  men  in  most  of  the 
corps,  after  they  had  served  for  a  time,  became  veteran  soldiers, 


408 

not  only  expert  in  their  infantry- work,  but  also  skilled  and  expe- 
rienced in  all  cavalry  exercises.  At  one  time  they  were  on  foot 
as  a  shooting-line  to  meet  the  enemy's  infantry  ;  at  another 
moment  mounted  to  charge  the  enemy's  cavalry. 

3340.  Q.  How  may  an  assailant  use  mounted  infantry  as  a  pre- 
liminary to  the  attack  of  a  position ;  when  artillery  has  opened 
uponthe  enemy  beyond  rifle-range  of  his  position  ;  when  this  fire 
has  become  severe  ?  A.  As  a  preliminary  to  the  attack  of  a  position, 
mounted  infantry  and  machine-guns  may  accompany  cavalry  and 
horse  artillery,  and  join  the  advanced-guard  action  to  drive  in 
the  enemy's  outlying  posts.  When  the  guns  have  come  into  ac- 
tion against  the  posts,  at  a  distance  exceeding  the  infantry  range 
therefrom,  the  mounted  infantry  and  machine-guns,  with  part  of 
the  cavalry,  may  advance  still  further  until  the  posts  can  be 
brought  under  long-range  fire  of  the  infantry  and  machine-guns. 
As  the  fire  of  the  artillery  has  effect,  the  mounted  infantry  and 
cavalry  may  advance  still  closer,  part  of  the  former  dismounting 
to  attack  the  posts  in  front,  and  part  passing  to  a  flank  with  a 
similar  object  ;  the  cavalry  in  each  case  protecting  the  flanks  of 
the  mounted  infantry,  and  also  seizing  upon  any  openings  for 
cavalry  attack  themselves  on  the  enemy's  advanced  troops  or 
guns. 

3341.  Q.  How  might  mounted  infantry  be  used  by  the  defense  ? 
A.  The  mounted  infantry  accompanies  the  cavalry  and  guns  sent 
out  to  delay  the  advance  of  the  attacking  force,  and  to  deny 
them  possession  of  strong  posts  in  front  of  the  position. 
Mounted  infantry  at  this  stage  assists  by  its  fire  to  keep  the 
enemy's  guns  from  deploying  within  effective  range  of  the  posi- 
tion. 

3342.  Q.  In  what  other  situations  would  mounted  infantry  be 
useful  ?  A.  In  making  flank  attacks  and  in  defense  of  the  same  ; 
in  raids  ;  in  the  attack  and  defense  of  convoys  ;  in  seizing  posi- 
tions far  ahead  to  hold  them  till  the  foot- troops  come  up  ;  and  it 
may  at  times  act  independently. 

3343.  Q.  Of  what  value  would  mounted  infantry  be  as  an  escort 
to  artillery  ?  A.  It  would  furnish  very  efficient  aid  on  account 
of  acting  at  a  distance  from  other  troops  ;  and  when  detaclied 
to  act  with  cavalry  and  horse  artillery  mounted  infantry  would 
look  out  for  attacks  on  the  artillery  as  part  of  their  duty,  the  fire 
of  their  rifles  being  especially  utilized  to  keep  off  hostile  cavalry 
while  the  guns  are  changing  position. 

3344.  Q.  Of  what  value  would  mounted  infantry  be  for  recon- 
naissance ?  A.  It  should  not  make  reconnaissances  when  cavalry 
is  available.  As  a  rule  it  should  be  treated  altogether  as  infantry 
fighting  men,  provided  with  means  of  rapid  movement. 

3345.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  mounted  infantry  as  part  of  an 
advance  or  rear  guard  ?  A.  The  detachment  should  move  on  the 
main  route  near  the  van  or  rear,  ready  to  dash  out  rapidly  if  re- 


MINOR  TACTICS.  409 

quired  to  seize,  hold,  or  defend  a  bridge  or  defile.     They  should 
not  be  called  upon  to  do  the  scouting  in  any  direction. 

3346.  Q,  What  should  the  work  of  mounted  infantry  be  con- 
fined to  on  outpost  duty  ?  A.  To  accompanying  strong  patrols 
to  the  front  for  offensive  purposes,  or  like  duty.  They  should 
not  be  expected  to  do  the  reconnoitring ;  but  intelligent,  well- 
mounted  men,  who  have  been  specially  well  instructed,  may  some- 
times be  put  on  an  advanced  look-out  post  on  the  Cossack  system  ; 
or  they  may  move  along  roads  at  night  in  the  direction  of  the 
enemy  as  standing  patrols,  or  patrolling  posts,  to  save  the  cav- 
alry some  of  their  harassing  work. 

SPACE  AND   TIME. 

3347.  Q.  How  may  the  depth  of  columns  on  the  march  be  es- 
timated ?  A.  In  a  similar  manner  to  that  shown  in  the  case  of 
each  arm  taken  separately,  the  infantry  pace  being  necessarily 
assumed  for  the  whole  column. 

3348.  Q.  What  allowance  should  be  made  for  straggling,  from 
a  battalion  to  an  army  corps  ?  A.  One  tenth  for  a  battalion  ; 
one  eighth  for  a  brigade ;  one  seventh  for  a  division  ;  and  one 
fifth  for  an  army  corps. 

3349.  Q.  What  might  be  considered  a  rough  and  ready  rule  for 
calculating  the  depth  required  on  the  road  for  a  column  ?  A.  To 
allow  one  yard  for  each  horseman  ;  one  yard  for  every  two  foot- 
soldiers,  and  twenty  yards  for  every  gun  or  vehicle. 

3350.  Q.  What  is  the  pace  of  small  columns  ?  A.  A  column  of 
all  arms  combined,  restricted  to  one  road,  would  not  exceed  2 
miles  per  hour  for  an  army  corps  ;  a  division  about  2^  miles,  and 
smaller  columns  may  attain  three  miles  under  favorable  condi- 
tions. 

SECURITY  AND  INFORMATION. 

[Under  this  head  candidates  may  elect  to  be  examined  in  Wagner,] 

3351.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  an  army  in  the  field  being  taken  at 
a  disadvantage  ?  A.  When  it  is  not  properly  guarded,  so  as  to  be 
warned  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy. 

3352.  Q.  In  order  to  render  an  army  effective,  what  should  be 
provided  for  its  rest  and  repose?  A.  Covering  detachments, 
which,  composed  only  of  a  small  portion  of  the  whole,  provide 
by  their  watchfulness  for  the  security  and  tranquillity  of  the 
whole  force. 

3353.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  covering  detachments  with  ref- 
erence to  the  main  body,  and  why  should  it  be  so  ?  A.  They  should 
be  advanced  to  a  considerable  distance  from  the  main  body  in  the 
direction  of  the  enemy,  so  as  to  give  timely  notice  of  his  approach 
or  vicinity ;  and,  further,  to  oppose  such  a  preliminary  resistance 


410 

to  his  advance  as  may  give  the  main  body  time  to  prepare  for 
attack. 

3354.  Q.  How  is  the  security  of  the  main  body  provided  for  on 
the  march,  and  how  at  the  halt  ?  A.  On  the  march  it  should  be 
provided  for  in  its  front  by  detached  parties  forming  an  advanced- 
guard  ;  in  its  rear  by  detached  parties  forming  a  rear-guard  ;  and 
by  flank-guards  on  its  flanks.  If  the  force  be  halted,  the  cover- 
ing parties  are  formed  into  a  chain  of  outposts  in  fixed  positions. 

3355.  Q.  To  insure  the  perfect  safety  of  an  army,  what  else  is 
necessary  ?  A.  It  is  also  indispensably  necessary  to  obtain  sure 
and  accurate  information  respecting  the  enemy's  movements. 

3356.  Q.  How  is  information  obtained  ?  A.  In  two  ways  :  first, 
by  the  reports  of  spies,  deserters,  prisoners,  etc.;  second,  by 
reconnoissance. 

3357.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  reconnoissance  ?  A.  It  may  be 
defined  as  any  movement  of  troops  designing  to  observe  the 
enemy — his  strength,  position,  or  movements;  also,  the  country — 
its  nature  and  resources. 

3358.  Q.  By  whom  are  reconnoissances  made  ?  A.  By  a  large 
force,  by  a  small  party,  or  by  a  single  man. 

3359.  Q.  How  are  reconnoissances  usually  effected  ?  A.  By 
detached  forces  of  cavalry  moving  out  far  in  advance  of  the  main 
body,  and  by  reconnoitring  parties  of  cavalry  or  infantry,  or  both, 
or  sometimes  of  the  three  arms  combined,  pushed  out  from  the 
main  body  or  its  advanced  posts. 

3360.  Q.  What  other  duties  have  reconnoitring  parties  besides 
collecting  information  ?  A.  They  have  what  are  called  screening 
duties. 

3361.  Q.  What,  therefore,  constitutes  the  whole  of  the  arrange- 
ments for  security  and  information  ?  A.  The  advanced  cavalry, 
detached  for  screening  and  reconnoitring  duties,  spread  a  veil 
round  the  force  of  which  they  form  a  part,  and  contributa  to  its 
security  by  the  information  which  they  obtain  of  the  country,  the 
scene  of  operations,  and  of  the  numbers,  position  and  probable  in- 
tentions of  the  enemy.  Behind  the  screen  or  veil,  the  main  body  on 
the  march  is  also  protected  by  its  advance-guard,  flank-guards, 
and  rear-guard,  the  duties  of  which  are  carried  out  as  strictly  as 
if  the  cavalry  were  not  in  front.  Similarly,  at  a  halt,  a  chain  of 
outposts  is  immediately  formed  in  front  of  the  army  with  the 
same  regularity  and  care  as  if  the  veil  of  cavalry  did  not  exist. 

3363.  Q.  What  is  done  in  case  of  a  retreat  ?  A.  The  rear- 
guard in  this  case  becomes  the  most  important  section  of  the 
covering  detachments  securing  safety  for  the  army,  and  is  propor- 
tionately stronger  than  the  advance-guard,  as  being  nearer  to  the 
enemy;  the  screen  of  cavalry  is  now  in  rear  to  assist  the  rear- 
guard. 

3363.  Q.  Are  the  arrangements  mentioned  always  practicable  ? 
If  there  is  no  cavalry  available,  there  cannot  be  a  screen  in  ad- 


MlNOft  TACTICS.  411 

Vance  ;  if  the  ground  is  not  favorable  for  the  action  of  cavalry, 
infantry  should  be  substituted  for  it ;  or,  cavalry  may  be  acting 
alone  and  have  to  furnish  its  own  advance-guard  or  ils  own  out- 
posts, as  well  as  its  reconnoitring  parties  ;  or,  infantry  may  be 
acting  alone,  depending  on  itself  for  all  measures  of  security  and 
information. 

3364.  Q.  State  the  names  of  the  detachments  by  which  a  col- 
umn is  made  secure  on  the  march,  and  give  their  strength,  illus- 
trating by  the  case  of  a  battalion,  a  brigade,  and  a  division.  A. 
An  advance-guard  preceding  it,  flank-guards  on  the  flanks,  and 
a  rear-guard  following  it.  An  advance-guard  should  consist  of 
not  less  than  one  sixth  of  the  whole  force  ;  the  rear-guard  one 
twelfth  ;  the  flank-guards,  in  the  case  of  small  forces,  would  be 
taken  from  the  advance-  and  rear-guards.  All  the  detached  par- 
ties combined  should  not  exceed  one  fourth  of  the  whole  body. 
Thus,  a  battalion  on  the  march  would  have  an  advance-guard  of 
one  platoon,  or  one  eighth  of  the  whole  ;  a  brigade,  one  battalion, 
or  one  ninth  of  the  whole  ;  a  division,  one  regiment,  or  one  ninth 
of  the  whole. 

3365.  Q.  How  is  the  strength  of  the  advance-guard  affected  by 
the  commander's  intention  to  fight  or  not  to  fight  ?  A.  If  it  is  the 
intention  to  bring  the  enemy  to  a  decisive  engagement,  the  pro- 
portion of  the  advance-guard  must  be  large,  in  order  to  hold  any 
good  position  it  may  have  seized,  until  the  main  body  comes  up. 
Should  an  engagement  be  not  desired,  the  advance-guard  should 
be  no  stronger  than  absolutely  required  for  security  and  informa- 
tion. 

3366.  Q.  How  is  the  advance-guard  governed  as  to  whether  it 
is  desirable  to  bring  about  an  engagement  ?  A.  Definite  instruc- 
tions upon  this  matter  should  always  be  given  by  the  commander 
of  the  troops  to  the  officer  in  charge  of  an  advance-guard. 

3367.  Q.  How  is  the  strength  of  fiank  guards  determined  ?  A. 
By  the  surrounding  conditions. 

THE  ADVANCE-GUARD. 

[Questions  on  the  subject  of  the  formation  and  subdivision  of 
an  advance-guard  are  to  be  found  in  those  on  the  Drill  Regula- 
tions from  Nos.     652  to  1234 .] 

3368.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  commander  of  the  vanguard  ? 
A.  To  see  that  the  proper  road  is  followed.  He  should  have  a 
map  and  be  able  to  read  it ;  he  should  give  clear  directions  to  the 
non-commissioned  officer  of  the  advanced  party,  and  if  any  doubt 
occurs  he  must  verify  the  direction  himself  by  going  to  the  ex- 
treme front;  he  should  leave  a  man  at  all  cross-roads  where  the 
main  column  might  go  astray;  and  when  approaching  an 
country,  where  his  ordinary  flankers  cannot  work  without 
ing  the  march,  he  must  send  out  special  patrols. 


412  THE  ARMY  officer's  EXAMINER. 

3369.  Q.  What  is  the  great  point  to  be  borne  in  mind  by  the 
commander  of  the  vanguard  ?  A.  That  the  advance  of  the  column 
must  not  be  delayed. 

3370.  Q.  Where  do  the  guides  of  an  advance-guard  march  ?  A. 
They  are  attached  to  and  march  with  the  support,  but  should  be 
sent  to  tlie  extreme  front  whenever  necessary. 

3371.  Q.  How  is  the  support  formed  ?  A.  On  as  broad  a  front 
as  the  road  will  permit. 

3372.  Q.  What  is  done  with  regard  to  reports  from  the  ad- 
vanced party  ?  A.  They  should  be  verified  by  the  commander  of 
the  vanguard  as  far  as  possible  ;  sometimes  it  may  be  desirable 
to  let  the  same  man  who  brings  in  the  news  go  on  with  it  to  the 
commander  of  the  advance-guard. 

3373.  Q.  What  is  the  position  of  the  advance-guard  com- 
mander ?  A.  He  remains  with  the  reserve,  as  a  rule  ;  but  he 
often  has  to  move  to  the  vanguard  when  in  touch  with  the 
enemy. 

3374.  Q.  What  protection  may  the  reserve  furnish  an  advance- 
guard  on  the  road,  and  how  ?  A.  When  specially  required,  flank- 
ing patrols  from  the  reserve  may  move  on  each  flank,  and  be  em- 
ployed in  examining  houses,  farms,  etc.,  standing  back  from  the 
road. 

3375.  Q.  If  the  advanced  party  encounters  serious  resistance, 
by  whom  is  the  fighting  done  ?  A.  By  the  reserve.  The  advance 
parties  feel,  observe,  and  reconnoitre;  but  when  it  comes  to  push- 
ing home  an  attack,  the  reserves  must  be  brought  up  as  quickly 
as  possible. 

3376.  Q.  What  is  the  principle  on  which  the  rules  for  the  action 
of  an  advance-guard  is  based  ?  A.  That  it  is  the  essence  of  the 
duty  of  an  advance-guard  to  be  successful  in  repulsing  the  enemy, 
or  in  holding  him  back  a  suflicient  time. 

3377.  Q.  Does  the  distance*  of  the  advance-guard  from  the 
main  column  vary  ?  State  the  principles.  A.  The  distance  does 
vary,  according  to  circumstances,  and  cannot  be  dictated  by  rule. 
If  the  column  of  the  main  body  is  deep  and  would  take  much 
time  to  form,  the  distance  of  the  head  of  the  advance-guard  must 
be  a  long  way  in  advance;  but  if  the  country  is  difficult  to  tra- 
verse and  the  enemy's  advance  can  be  easily  retarded,  the  head 
of  the  advance-guard  need  not  be  so  far  in  front' as  if  the 
country  was  open;  or,  if  the  advance-guard  is  strong  and  can 
hold  the  enemy,  it  need  not  be  so  far  in  advance  as  if  it  were 
weak.  Again,  in  thick  or  foggy  weather,  or  at  night,  the  distance 
in  front — of  the  head  of  the  advance-guard — would  be  reduced, 
as  would  also  the  breadth  of  front  of  the  scouts  or  flanking- 
parties. 

3378.  Q.  What  might  be  considered  a  rough  rule  to  be  followed 
of  ascertaining  what  the  distance  should  be  from  the  head  of  the 
advance-guard  to  the  head  of  the  main  column  ?  A.  The  distance 


MINOR  TACTICS.  413 

is  to  be  equal  to  the  length  of  the  column  of  the  main  body  eh 
route,  on  the  assumption  that  the  rear  of  the  column  would  then 
have  time  to  form  up  for  action.  This,  however,  only  estimates 
the  minimum  distance;  in  practice,  it  will  be  found  that  a  greater 
depth  is  necessary  for  the  advance-guard. 

3379.  Q.  What  would  be  the  formation  of  an  advance-guard 
composed  of  the  three  arms  ?  A.  The  advanced  party  and  the  lead- 
ing portion  of  the  support  would  be  cavalry.  Mounted  infantry 
and  machine-guns  would  come  next,  in  order  that  they  might  be 
ready  to  be  pushed  forward  to  seize  bridges  or  defiles,  and  hold 
them  until  the  infantry  comes  up.  In  a  large  advance-guard,  the 
support  should  include  some  infantry;  a  small  proportion  of  artil- 
lery would  sometimes  be  added;  a  few  engineers  are  also  necessary 
to  repair  broken  bridges,  or  assist  in  removing  an  obstacle  to  the 
advance.  The  pioneers  of  infantry  would  march  with  the  van- 
guard for  the  same  purpose.  The  reserve  would  be  composed 
of  all  the  three  arms.  It  is  headed  by  a  small  detachment  of 
cavalry. 

3380.  Q.  What  would  be  the  order  of  march  of  an  advance- 
guard  composed  of  the  three  arms  ?  A.  The  mounted  troops ; 
then  artillery,  followed  by  machine-guns  and  the  infantry ; 
lastly,  engineers  not  with  the  vanguard,  ammunition,  reserves, 
and  ambulance. 

3381.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  place  in  the  advance-guard  for 
guns?  A.  They  should  be  with  the  reserve,  being  less  liable  to 
the  effects  of  infantry  fire  at  that  point,  and  yet  close  enough  to 
be  pushed  forward  if  necessary. 

3382.  Q.  What  should  the  advance-guard  do  upon  coming  in 
sight  of  a  village  or  town?  It  should  be  halted  on  the  main 
route. 

3383.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  advanced  party  on  coming 
to  a  village  or  town  ?  A.  Preceded  by  its  point  it  moves  on  to 
reconnoitre.  The  point  is  pushed  well  to  the  front,  and  at  the 
first  houses  outside  the  town  an  inhabitant  must,  if  possible,  be 
seized  to  give  information.  If  any  suspicion  of  the  enemy's  pres- 
ence exists,  the  village  must  be  turned  by  a  portion  of  the  ad- 
vanced party,  or  by  the  support  if  necessary,  and  entered  simul- 
taneously by  the  front  and  flank. 

3384.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  seizing  a  village  not  occupied 
by  the  enemy  ?  A.  The  point  must  at  once  enter,  so  there  may 
be  no  delay.  If  the  enemy's  scouts  or  patrols  be  in  the  vicin- 
ity, the  entrance  to  the  village  may  have  been  ordered  to  be 
secured  on  the  farther  side.  In  this  case,  as  soon  as  it  is  per- 
ceived that  the  patrols  are  not  in  actual  occupation  of  the  town, 
he  should  rush  with  his  party  up  the  main  street  and  seize  upon 
the  farther  outlet.  On  the  other  hand,  should  there  be  no 
immediate  necessity  for  this  action,  the  commander  of  the  point 
would  advance  into  the  village  quietly  and  with  due  precaution. 


414 

The  flank  groups  of  the  advanced  party  would  also  move  up  and 
pass  through  by  any  side  roads  or  streets. 

3385.  Q.  Should  the  point  make  signal  to  the  rear  that  all  was 
safe,  what  must  tlie  advanced  party  do  ?  A.  Close  up  rapidly  to 
its  proper  distance,  and  as  it  enters  the  town  patrols  should  be 
detached  up  any  lateral  streets  or  roads,  always  keeping  up  their 
connection  with  the  centre. 

3386.  Q.  What  should  the  commander  of  the  advanced  party 
seize  upon  entering  a  village  ?  A.  Telegraph  and  post  offices, 
with  all  papers  found  therein.  If  there  is  a  railway  station  it  shonld 
also  be  held,  and  men  must  be  specially  detailed  to  stop  com- 
munication up  and  down  the  line.  All  telegraph  wires  are  to  be 
disconnected,  or  joined  together  and  partly  run  to  earth  in  order 
to  confuse  signals.  The  chief  man  of  the  village,  or  postmaster, 
should  be  seized  and  turned  over  to  the  commander  of  the  van- 
guard on  his  arrival,  together  with  the  documents  seized. 

3387.  Q.  How  should  the  entrance  to  a  village  be  conducted  by 
night  ?  A.  The  operations  of  the  leading  portion  of  the  ad- 
vance-guard should  be  conducted  as  by  day,  but  distances 
between  the  different  parties  of  the  advance-guard  should  be 
lessened.  The  march  should  be  regulated  so  as  to  reach  the  vil- 
lage a  little  before  daybreak,  and  the  advanced  parties  should  use 
care  in  not  disturbing  the  occupants  of  outlying  houses  by  noise 
which  might  set  dogs  to  barking. 

3388.  Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  the  advanced  party,  if  a  vil- 
lage is  found  to  be  occupied  in  any  force  ?  A.  This  would  proba- 
bly be  discovered  by  the  scouts  of  the  point.  Immediately  upon 
this  discovery  the  point  should  fall  back  unperceived,  the  leader 
running  back  with  the  news  till  he  meets  the  commander  of  the 
advanced  party.  The  latter  communicates  the  information  to 
the  rear,  and  the  officers  of  the  vanguard  and  reserve  coming  up, 
the  former  with  his  support,  a  reconnoissance — secret  or  open, 
according  to  circumstances — is  now  made  of  the  village.  This  is 
commonly  done  by  a  strong  patrol  working  round  to  one  flank, 
which  can  first  reconnoitre  and  finally  force  the  village  from  that 
quarter,  combining  with  a  front  attack  of  the  advance-guard. 

3389.  Q.  Of  what  do  the  flank  patrols  and  guards  consist  in 
small  and  large  forces  ?  A.  In  small  forces,  detached  parties  from 
the  advance  and  rear  guards  ;  in  large  bodies,  these  detachments 
are  represented  by  separate  bodies  specially  provided. 

3390.  Q.  If  a  flank  march  has  to  be  undertaken  suddenly, 
how  is  it  conducted  ?  A.  The  advance  or  rear  guard  nearest  to 
the  enemy  will  at  once  assume  the  position  of  flank-guard  on  the 
exposed  flank  ;  a  fresh  guard  being  detailed  as  soon  as  possible 
to  guard  the  front  or  rear  of  the  column. 


MIN^OR  TACTICS.  415 


MARCH  OF  THE  MAIN  COLUMN. 


3391.  Q.  What  is  the  necessity  for  a  correct  order  of  march  of 
the  main  column  ?  A.  In  order  that  it  may  be  always  prepared 
to  meet  the  contingency  of  an  attack. 

3392.  Q.  In  the  forward  march,  when  the  enemy  is  known  to 
be  near  at  hand,  how  should  the  various  arms  be  disposed  ?  A. 
In  column  of  route,  so  as  to  be  enabled  to  be  brought  up,  with 
the  least  delay,  in  the  order  in  which  they  would  necessarily 
come  into  action. 

3393.  Q.  When  the  enemy  is  at  a  distance,  how  may  the  march 
of  the  main  column  be  conducted  ?  A.  Each  arm  may  be  given 
a  separate  route,  as  the  rate  of  march  in  each  case  is  different. 

3394.  Q.  To  whom  is  the  shortest  route  given  as  a  rule  ?  A- 
To  the  infantry. 

3395.  Q.  What  is  considered  a  day's  march  for  a  division  ?  A. 
From  twelve  to  fifteen  miles  ;  anything  over  twenty  is  considered 
a  forced  march. 

3396.  Q.  What  halts  should  be  made  during  a  march  ?  A. 
Short  halts  of  frorfi  5  to  10  minutes  during  every  hour  ;  a  halt  of 
about  30  minutes  at  meal-time,  or  half-way.  If  the  march  is  of 
longer  duration  tlian  five  hours,  a  long  halt  every  two  hours 
may  be  allowed  with  advantage. 

OUTPOSTS. 

8397.  Q.  The  army  having  halted  after  a  march,  what  must  be 
done  at  once?  A.  It  must  at  once  protect  itself  by  advanced 
covering  detachments,  called  outposts. 

3398.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  advance-guard  when  the  column 
halts  after  a  march  ?  It  being  in  front,  it  naturally  assumes  the 
duties  of  the  outposts  ;  but  if  the  advance  guard  has  been  much 
liarassed  during  the  day's  march,  fresh  troops  must  be  sent 
from  the  main  column  for  their  relief ;  until  their  arrival,  the 
advance-guard  must  continue  to  hold  the  ground. 

3399.  Q.  In  what  way  does  a  line  of  outposts  compare  with  an 
advance-guard  ?  A.  The  distribution  of  the  parts  corresponds 
generally  with  that  of  the  advance-guard,  and  their  duties  have 
much  of  the  same  character. 

3400.  Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  the  outpost  line  with  and 
without  a  cavalry  screen.  A.  With  the  screen  its  functions  are 
simple  and  few,  so  long  as  the  cavalry  remain  in  advance  ;  but  if 
the  cavalry  be  driven  in,  or  the  enemy  break  through  the  screen 
at  any  one  point,  the  outpost  line  is  ready  for  action,  and  the 
enemy  should  be  arrested  in  his  progress  at  sufficient  distance 
from  the  main  body  to  enable  the  latter  to  prepare  for  battle. 
In  the  event  of  there  being  no  outside  cavalry  screen,  the  outpost 
line  is  the  sole  protection  to  the  main  body  at  a  halt. 


416  THE  AKMT  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

3401.  Q.  In  what  respect  are  the  functions  of  outposts  at  the 
present  time  different  from  those  of  former  times  ?  A.  In  former 
times  it  was  considered  that  outposts  liadtwo  separate  and  distinct 
functions — one  to  secure  the  safety  of  the  corps  which  established 
them,  and  the  other  to  reconnoitre  and  obtain  information  of  the 
enemy's  movements,  etc.  But  the  second  duty  is  not  a  distinct 
function  equal  in  importance  to  the  first.  Outposts  should  not 
attempt  to  reconnoitre  further  than  is  necessary  for  the  execu- 
tion of  their  main  duty. 

3402.  Q.  In  what  manner  might  outposts  seek  information  ? 
A.  By  careful  watching,  by  observing  indications,  and  by  patrol- 
ling within  certain  limits. 

3403.  Q.  By  whom  should  extended  reconnaissances  be  made  ? 
A.  By  special  parties,  pushed  forward  from  the  main  body, 
sometimes  from  the  reserve  of  the  outposts.  Cavalry  should  be 
used  if  possible,  but  occasionally  infantry  must  be  employed. 

3404.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  outposts  ?  A.  First,  to  check 
the  advance  of  an  attacking  enemy  long  enough  to  insure  the 
safety  of  the  army  by  enabling  it  to  prepare  for  action.*  Second, 
to  secure  repose  for  the  army  by  the  assurance  of  immunity  from 
surprise,  and  by  checking  reconnaissance  on  the  part  of  the 
enemy.  Third,  to  obtain  such  information  about  the  enemy  as 
may  be  necessary  in  carrying  out  the  foregoing  duties. 

3405.  Q.  How  may  the  infantry  and  cavalry  be  united  in  such 
duties  ?  A.  Infantry  are  necessary  to  give  resistance  to  the  ad- 
vance of  an  enemy  ;  cavalry  are  required  to  search  for  the  enemy 
in  front,  and  collect  information  of  his  movements,  as  well  as  for 
the  rapid  transmission  of  intelligence  to  the  rear.  Mounted 
infantry,  if  available,  would  also  be  included  as  part  of  the  out- 
posts, they  being  able  to  serve  in  the  dual  capacity. 

3406.  Q.  How  may  artillery  be  employed  on  outpost  duty  ? 
A.  It  could  be  used  by  being  placed  with  the  reserve,  and  the 
guns  posted  so  as  to  cover  a  retreat  of  the  advanced  posts  ;  or 
held  close  to  a  main  road  to  proceed  to  any  required  point  as  the 
attack  of  the  enemy  developed  itself. 

3407.  Q.  How  might  artillery  be  used  in  more  advanced  posi- 
tion than  with  the  reserve  ?  A.  Guns  may  be  thrown  more  to 
the  front  when,  without  unduly  risking  their  safety,  they  can  be 

*  The  student,  by  carefully  reading  the  reports  on  the  battle  of 
Shiloh,  can  readily  see  how  much  of  the  disaster  on  that  occasion 
might  have  been  avoided  by  having  proper  outpost  duty  wilh 
patrolling  parties.  The  author  of  this  work  knows  that  the  first 
shot  fired  on  this  occasion  was  by  a  Confederate  oflicer,  leading  the 
cavalry  advance,  at  two  men  of  a  Union  picket  force,  who  weie 
seated  on  a  log  playing  cards.  Years  afterwards  this  was  verified 
in  his  presence  by  the  officer  who  fired  the  shot  and  one  of  the  men 
who  sat  on  the  log. 


MINOR  TACTICS.  417 

placed  so  as  to  command  ground,  bridges,  etc.,  which  must  be 
passed  by  the  enemy  in  his  advance. 

3408.  Q.  How  may  horse  artillery  be  used  on  outpost  duty  ?  A. 
When  acting  with  cavalry,  it  may  sometimes,  if  well  supported, 
be  pushed  still  further  to  the  front,  for  the  purpose  of  making 
the  enemy  develop  his  attack  early  in  the  day. 

3409.  Q.  What  is  the  relative  strength  of  infantry  and  cavalry 
on  outpost  duty?  A.  This  must  be  decided  by  circumstances. 
In  a  close  country  infantry  is  more  suitable  ;  in  an  open  country 
cavalry,  from  its  mobility,  possesses  the  advantage  of  being  able 
to  cover  a  large  extent  of  ground  very  quickly.  Whenever  the 
country  is  suitable,  cavalry  in  any  case  undertakes  patrolling 
duties  ;  but  if  the  enemy  is  near,  infantry  should  be  within 
reach  to  cover  the  retreat  of  cavalry,  if  the  latter  is  driven  back. 

3410.  Q.  How  are  outposts  divided  ?  A.  Into  three  portions. 
First,  the  pickets,  including  sentries,  or  vedettes,  patrols,  and 
detached  posts.  Second^  the  supports  to  the  pickets.  Tidrd,  the 
reserve  of  the  outposts. 

3411.  Q.  Of  what  are  each  of  the  three  portions  of  an  outpost 
composed  ?  A.  They  should,  as  far  as  possible,  consist  of  complete 
units  under  their  own  officers,  and  it  is  especially  directed  that 
pickets  and  their  supports  be  furnished  from  the  same  corps. 

3412.  Q.  What  should  be  the  greatest  force  employed  on  out- 
post duty  ?  A.  It  should  never  exceed  one  sixth  of  the  command, 
but  should  a  larger  force  from  necessity  be  temporarily  employed, 
the  extra  duty  should  be  reduced  again  as  soon  as  possible. 

3413.  Q.  When  may  a  reserve  of  an  outpost  be  dispensed  with  ? 
A.  When  the  force  to  be  covered  is  small,  or  when  the  main  body 
bivouacs  in  a  defensive  position,  where  it  can  quickly  form  in 
order  of  battle.* 

3414.  Q.  What  are  the  two  systems  of  outpost  called  ?  A.  The 
cordon  system  and  the  patrol  system.  By  the  first  system  a 
line  of  sentries  prevents  any  passage  wliatever  on  the  part  of  the 
enemy  ;  by  the  second,  constant  patrolling  in  front  of  the  out- 
posts prevents  the  passage  of  bodies  of  the  enemy,  even  if  it  does 
not  completely  bar  the  way  to  individuals. 


POSTING   THE    OUTPOSTS. 

3415.  Q.  What  is  done  preliminary  to  posting  the  outposts? 
A.  The  officer  in  chief  command  appoints  an  experienced  officer 
as  commander  of  the  outposts,  and  to  him  is  made  known  every- 

*  This  was  generally  the  case  in  the  Army  of  the  Potomac  during 
the  Civil  War,  while  campaigning.  Troops  were  massed  in  bivouac, 
and  a  line  of  pickets,  with  sentries  thrown  to  the  front  was  established 
In  camp,  regular  outpost  duty  was  religiously  performed. 


418  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMII^ER. 

thing  as  to  the  general  object — all  that  is  known  of  the  enemy, 
how  far  the  line  of  resistance  should  be  in  front  of  the  force  to 
be  covered,  etc.  The  position  for  the  line  of  observation  is  next 
decided  upon,  as  well  as  the  strength  and  composition  of  the 
reserve  and  its  location  behind  the  line  of  resistance.  These  posi- 
tions, if  selected  from  a  map,  should  be  shown  to  the  command- 
ers of  the  various  lines ;  after  which  the  supports  are  marched 
off  in  the  general  direction  of  the  ground  they  are  to  occupy. 
The  reserve  is  finally  marched  by  the  commander  of  the  outposts 
to  the  spot  selected.  Both  these  bodies  should  advance  with 
great  caution,  preceded  by  scouts. 

3416.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  commanders  of  the  sup- 
ports after  having  proceeded  a  suflQcient  distance  to  the  front  ? 
A.  They  select  positions  for  their  supports,  and  send  forward 
therefrom  the  pickets  intended  to  cover  the  front. 

3417.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  commanders  of  the  pickets 
in  establishing  outposts,  upon  being  sent  forward  from  the  sup- 
ports ?  A.  They  advance  to  their  ground  with  still  greater  care, 
and,  halting  their  pickets  in  rear  of  the  line  of  observation,  they 
post  their  line  of  sentinels,  tentatively  at  first,  with  a  view  to  cover- 
ing the  front  rapidly,  and  establishing  communication  at  once 
from  one  flank  to  another  of  the  line.  The  line  itself  can  be 
corrected  subsequently  by  the  commander  of  the  outposts,  if 
necessary. 

3418.  Q.  What  is  it  usual  for  the  whole  of  the  outposts  to  do 
while  being  posted  ?  A.  To  remain  near  their  arms,  on  the  alert, 
until  the  arrangements  are  completed. 

3419.  Q.  If  the  outposts  are  to  extend  over  a  large  front,  how 
should  the  line  be  divided  ?  A.  Into  sections,  of  from  one  to 
one  and  a  half  miles  for  infantry,  and  three  miles  for  cavalry,  in 
each  section. 

3420.  Q.  Who  should  be  in  command  of  a  local  section,  and 
what  comes  under  his  orders  ?  A.  A  field  officer,  and  he  should 
command  the  supports  and  pickets  in  his  section. 

3421.  Q.  Who,  in  this  case,  commands  the  reserve  ?  A.  The 
commander  of  the  outposts  always  retains  command  of  the  re- 
serve. 

3422.  Q.  What  must  each  picket  furnish  ?  A.  A  chain  of  sen- 
tries by  day  to  watch  the  country  in  front,  and  to  connect  with 
neighboring  pickets.  They  are  placed  in  pairs  or  in  groups,  at  a 
distance  of  from  100  to  400  yards  from  the  picket. 

3423.  Q.  Where  are  the  reliefs  stationed  when  sentinels  are 
posted  in  pairs  ?  A.  With  the  picket,  in  order  to  be  better  pro- 
tected from  the  weather  and  to  obtain  greater  rest. 

3424.  Q.  Where  are  the  reliefs  when  posted  in  groups  ?  A.  The 
sentry  is  accompanied  to  his  post  by  the  remainder  of  the  group 
forming  his  relief,  who  lie  down  close  behind  him,  but  in  such 
jnanner  as  to  screen  themselves  from  the  enemy. 


MIiq^OR  TACTICS.  419 

3435.  Q.  What  change  is  made  in  the  number  of  sentinels  at 
night  ?    A.  At  night  the  sentries  should  always  be  doubled. 

3436.  Q.  Of  how  many  men  is  a  group  composed,  and  who  ex- 
ercises control  over  them  ?  A.  By  day,  three  men  ;  by  night,  six 
men.  A  non-commissioned  officer  is  placed  in  charge  of  from 
one  to  three  groups. 

3437.  Q.  What  are  vedettes  ?    A.  Cavalry  sentries,  mounted. 

3438.  Q.  How  are  vedettes  posted  ?  A.  Either  as  double  ve- 
dettes, relieved  from  the  picket,  and  at  a  distance  of  about  600 
yards,  or  in  groups,  which  are  known  as  Cossack  posts. 

3439.  Q.  What  constitutes  a  Cossack  post  on  outpost  duty  ?  A. 
It  has  only  one  vedette  ;  his  relief,  in  charge  of  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer  or  the  senior  soldier,  being  posted  close  to  him. 

3430.  Q.  For  what  positions  are  the  Cossack  posts  most  suit- 
able ?  A.  For  places  difficult  of  access  from  the  picket,  or  where 
a  vedette  cannot  be  seen  from  the  picket  or  from  the  next  posts. 

3431.  Q.  How  close  to  each  other  may  the  men  of  a  double 
vedette  post  be  located  ?  A.  From  twenty  to  thirty  yards  apart ; 
near  enough  to  communicate  when  required,  but  not  to  encour- 
age conversation. 

3433.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  sentries  and  vedettes  be  gov- 
erned while  on  post  ?  A.  They  should  have  clearly  in  view  the 
men  of  the  posts  on  each  side  of  them,  and  no  ground  in  front  of 
two  adjoining  posts  should  be  unseen  by  the  sentries  of  both 
posts.  They  should  not,  as  a  rule,  fix  bayonets  by  day  nor  on 
bright  moonlight  nights,  but,  as  a  safeguard  against  surprise, 
they  should  invariably  do  so  on  dark  nights  or  in  thick  weather. 
Vedettes  have  their  carbines  drawn,  loaded,  and  at  the  advance. 

3433.  Q.  How  should  sentinels  be  placed  at  night,  with  regard 
to  the  sky-line  ?  A.  If  possible  they  should  be  so  placed  as  to 
bring  any  advancing  person  against  the  sky-line,  they  themselves 
remaining  in  shadow  ;  but  this  cannot  be  done  in  all  cases  with 
the  cordon  system.  A  sentinel  may  sometimes  accomplish  this 
by  lying  prone,  if  he  hears  some  one  advancing  whom  he  cannot 
see.  He,  however,  should  not  await  the  approach  in  that  po- 
sition, 

3434.  Q.  How  are  the  sentinels  numbered,  and  how  often  re- 
lieved ?  A.  Those  furnished  by  each  picket  are  numbered 
continuously  from  the  right ;  they  should  be  relieved  every  two 
hours  by  day  and  every  hour  by  night. 

3435.  Q.  What  are  connecting  sentries  f  A.  Men  used  for 
communication  between  the  chain  of  sentries  or  groups  and  their 
pickets,  and  between  detached  posts  and  the  chain  of  sentries. 

3436.  Q.  What  is  a  sentry  over  picket  f  A.  A  lookout  sentry, 
placed  at  the  picket  to  watch  the  double  sentries  or  the  sentry 
connecting  the  picket  with  them  to  call  attention  to  any  signals 
they  may  make,  or  to  any  unusual  occurrence. 

3437.  Q.  What  are  detached  posts  f    A.  Posts  to  which  access 


420 

from  the  picket  is  difficult,  or  the  distance  of  which  is  beyond 
the  limits  laid  down  ;  or  there  is  an  exposed  flank  which  it  is 
necessary  to  guard.  These  posts  should  be  composed  of  from 
three  to  twelve  men,  under  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer, 
and  form  a  picket  on  a  small  scale.  They  should  be  relieved 
every  six  hours.  They  should  light  no  fire  under  any  circum- 
stances, should  wear  their  equipments  and  have  their  rifles 
always  beside  them.  If  of  cavalry,  one  half  of  the  men  should 
only  dismount  at  a  time,  unless  the  enemy  is  known  to  be  at  a 
distance. 

3438.  Q.  What  is  an  examming  post  ?  A.  It  is  located  on  the 
principal  main  route  of  approach  ;  consists  of  an  officer  or  a 
selected  non-commissioned  officer  and  six  men,  whose  duty  it  is 
to  examine  all  persons  and  their  effects  coming  from  the  outside. 
Should  the  parties  be  deserters  or  suspected  spies,  they  must  be 
forwarded,  without  questioning,  to  the  commander  of  the  out- 
post, under  charge  of  a  guard. 

3439.  Q.  If  there  be  no  examining  post  along  the  line,  what  is 
done  regarding  persons  desiring  to  pass  ?  A.  The  officer  of  the 
nearest  picket  will  receive  the  report  of  the  approach  of  any  one 
to  the  lines. 

PATROLS. 

3440.  Q.  How  many  different  patrols  from  the  outposts  are 
recognized,  and  what  are  they?  A.  Fii^st,  visiting  patrols  ;  secorid, 
reconnoitring  patrols  ;  third,  strong  patrols. 

3441.  Q.  What  are  visiting  patrols,  their  functions,  and  how 
composed  ?  A.  They  are  sent  out  from  each  picket  between  re- 
liefs, and  their  duties  consist  in  keeping  up  the  communication 
between  the  picket  and  its  neighboring  pickets,  as  w^ell  as  with  its 
support  in  rear,  and  with  its  detached  parties  in  advance.  They 
consist  of  (an  officer,  if  necessary)  usually  a  non-commissioned 
officer  or  an  old  soldier  and  one  or  two  men.  They  test  the  watch- 
fulness of  the  sentries,  or  vedettes,  aid  them  in  case  of  sickness 
or  wounds,  or  in  examining  doubtful  objects  from  a  fresh  point 
of  view,  and  bring  back  their  reports. 

3442.  Q.  In  visiting  a  chain  of  sentries,  with  W'hom  should  the 
patrol  communicate  ?  A.  With  the  nearest  sentry  of  the  next 
picket  on  one  flank  first,  and  then  proceeding  along  the  front  of 
the  line  of  sentries,  touch  on  the  nearest  sentry  of  the  picket  on 
the  other  flank. 

3443.  Q.  What  might  a  visiting  cavalry  patrol  do  in  communi- 
cating with  the  line  of  vedettes,  if  the  ground  in  front  of  the  line 
was  exposed  ?  A.  It  might  preferably  move  altogether  in  the 
rear  of  the  line  of  vedettes. 

3444.  Q.  When  are  visiting  patrols  especially  necessary  ?  A. 
In  a  close  country  and  in  bad  weather.  In  an  open  country,  with 
clear  weather,  they  need  not  be  sent  out  so  often  during  the  day. 


MIlfOR  TACTICS.  421 

3445.  Q.  What  may  take  the  place  of  a  visiting  patrol,  if  the 
line  of  sentries  furnished  by  the  picket  can  be  observed  from  some 
vantage-point  ?  A.  A  non-commissioned  officer  may  frequently 
be  sent  to  the  point  indicated,  to  observe  and  report  on  the  ap- 
pearance of  things,  and  thus  enable  some  of  the  daylight  rounds 
to  be  dispensed  with. 

3446.  Q.  If  the  picket  be  short  of  men  for  duty,  what  may  be 
employed  as  visiting  rounds  ?    A.  The  reliefs  must  be  employed. 

3447.  •  Q.  Of  what  do  reconnoitring  patrols  consist,  and  what 
are  their  functions  ?  A.  They  consist  of  an  officer  or  a  non- 
commissioned officer,  and  from  two  to  seven  men,  according  to 
circumstances.  They  are  sent  forward  in  advance,  a  limited 
distance  not  exceeding  from  half  a  mile  to  a  mile  for  infantry,  to 
examine  ground  which  cannot  be  watched  by  the  sentries,  and  to 
give  notice  of  the  enemy's  approach. 

3448.  Q.  To  what  extent  may  the  reconnoitring  patrols  of  cav- 
alry be  used  on  outpost  duty  ?  A.  They  may  be  despatclied  to  a 
much  greater  distance  than  infantry  ;  they  may  safely  go  four  or 
five  miles  to  the  front,  and  if  they  do  not  touch  on  the  enemy, 
they  may  go  as  far  as  ten  miles. 

3449.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  strong  patrols  ?  Describe  them  and 
their  duties.  A.  They  are  of  the  same  character  as  the  recon- 
noitring patrols,  but  of  larger  force,  and  not  necessarily  secret.  If 
of  greater  strength  than  a  dozen  men,  they  should  be  furnished 
from  the  supports  or  reserve.  If  composed  of  infantry,  they  should 
proceed  not  further  than  one  mile  beyond  the  line  of  sentries,  and 
even  then  with  mounted  orderlies  attached,  to  take  information 
rapidly  to  the  rear. 

3450.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  strong  patrols  ?  A.  Generally 
to  obtain  early  information  of  the  enemy's  movements  when  he 
is  at  a  distance,  to  ward  off  his  patrols,  and  to  prevent  surprise  ; 
sometimes  to  engage  a  post,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  enemy's 
strength. 

3451.  Q,  Why  should  strong  patrols  sent  on  reconnaissance 
duty  avoid  unnecessary  firing?  A.  Because  firing  signifies  to 
those  in  rear  that  the  patrol  has  not  only  seen  the  enemy,  but 
the  enemy  has  seen  the  patrol,  and  is  advancing.  An  incessant 
fire,  kept  up  in  retiring,  intimates  that  the  enemy  is  in  force,  and 
pressing  the  pursuit ;  but  this  signal  should  be  abstained  from, 
unless  it  is  necessary  to  rouse  the  troops  in  rear. 

3452.  Q.  What  must  the  outpost  line  do  with  regard  to  false 
alarms  ?  A.  It  must  be  most  careful  not  to  occasion  false  alarms, 
as  such  alarms  are  injurious  to  the  morals  of  the  army. 

3453.  Q.  What  general  rule  is  best  to  follow  by  a  patrol  in  re- 
tiring before  the  enemy,  where  there  are  no  orders  to  the  con- 
trary ?  A.  To  retire  steadily,  unperceived  if  possible,  as  soon  as 
the  enemy  is  touched  upon  ;  but,  if  opportunity  serves,  it  would 


422  THE  AKMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMIKER. 

sometimes  be  well  to  capture  a  prisoner  or  two,  to  obtain  infor- 
mation. 

PICKETS. 

3454.  Q.  How  is  the  strength  of  a  picket  determined  ?  A.  By 
the  number  of  posts  for  which  it  furnishes  sentinels  or  vedettes, 
in  addition  to  the  men  required  for  detached  posts  and  patrols. 

3455.  Q.  Where  is  the  picket  posted,  and  for  what  purpose  ? 
A.  It  is  posted  in  rear  of  the  line  of  sentinels,  as  centrally  as 
possible,  and  on  a  main  route  or  thoroughfare.  It  acts  as  a  sup- 
port to  the  sentries,  vedettes,  or  detached  parties  which  it  fur- 
nishes. 

3456.  Q.  What  should  be  the  position  of  the  picket  with  regard 
to  concealment  ?  A.  It  should  be  so  far  concealed  that  the  enemy 
can  discover  it  only  by  attacking  ;  but  there  should  be  free  move- 
ment in  all  directions,  and  especially  easy  means  of  communica- 
tion, both  with  the  flanking  pickets  and  with  the  supports  in  rear. 

3457.  Q.  Where  should  sentinels  and  pickets  be  posted  when 
stationed  at  bridges,  defiles,  etc.?  A.  The  pickets  should  be  on 
the  near  side,  the  far  side  being  patrolled  or  guarded  by  the  sen- 
tries if  the  distance  is  not  too  great. 

3458.  Q.  Where  should  pickets  avoid  being  posted  ?  A.  They 
should  not  be  posted  in  a  house  or  inclosed  yard  or  garden  ;  and 
a  cavalry  picket  especially  must  take  care  not  to  occupy  any 
position  which  would  cramp  its  movements  on  being  attacked. 

3459.  Q.  How  should  pickets  be  posted  witli  regard  to  the 
joining  or  crossing  of  roads  ?  A.  Those  that  lead  from  the  front 
should  be  in  advance  of  the  picket,  and  any  road  passing  the 
flank  to  the  rear  should  be  carefully  watched. 

8460.  Q.  If  the  flank  of  a  line  of  pickets  is  not  protected  by 
impassable  ground  or  natural  obstacles,  what  should  be  done  ?  A. 
The  flanking  picket  must  be  thrown  back  ;  it  should  furnish  a 
detached  post  to  prevent  a  turning  movement  of  the  enemy,  fre- 
quent patrolling  being  also  kept  up  on  the  exposed  flank. 

3461.  Q.  Should  the  pickets  be  permitted  to  light  fii-es?  A. 
As  a  rule,  no  ;  but  if  permitted  they  should  be  carefully  screened 
from  observation,  and  so  arranged  that  neither  light  nor  smoke 
can  betray  its  position  :  the  fire,  therefore,  in  any  case,  should 
be  small,  and  arrangements  made  to  smother  it  at  a  moment's 
warning. 

3463.  Q.  How  should  cavalry  pickets  hold  themselves  in  readi- 
ness for  prompt  action  ?  A.  By  keeping  the  horses  always  sad- 
dled and  bridled,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  at  a  time.  During 
the  day  the  saddles  should  be  shifted,  so  as  to  ease  their  backs. 

3463.  Q.  What  proportion  of  the  picket  should  be  always  held 
ready  for  immediate  action  by  day  and  night  ?  A.  In  all  cook- 
ing, feeding,  eating,  and  watering  arrangements,  two  thirds  of  a 


MIKOR  TACTICS.  423 

picket  of  either  arm  should  be  held  ready  for  immediate  action. 
As  many  as  possible  should  be  allowed  to  repose  during  the  day, 
but  at  night  all  should  be  on  the  alert. 

3464.  Q.  How  are  the  different  pickets  designated  ?  A.  They 
should  be  numbered  from  a  flank  by  the  commander  of  the  out- 
posts. 

SUPPORTS. 

3465.  Q.  Of  what  strength  should  the  supports  on  outposts  be  ? 
A.  Equal  to  all  in  front  of  them,  and  one  support  to  two  or  three 
pickets. 

3466.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  line  of  resistance  on  outpost 
duty  ?  A.  It  is  the  line  designated  where  the  first  important 
stand  is  to  be  made. 

3467.  Q.  What  portion  of  the  outposts  occupies  the  line  of  re- 
sistance ?  A.  The  supports  are  usually  placed  thereon  as  centrally 
as  possible  to  their  own  group  of  pickets. 

3468.  Q,  If  the  best  line  of  resistance  should  appear  to  be  close 
in  rear  ot  the  best  line  of  observation,  w^here  should  the  supports 
be  ?  A.  They  may  be  posted  immediately  in  rear  of  the  pickets, 
or  even  on  the  same  line. 

RESERVE. 

3469.  Q.  For  what  is  the  reserve  of  outposts  intended  ?  A.  As 
a  general  support  to  the  line  of  pickets  and  supports. 

3470.  Q.  Of  what  should  the  reserve  of  an  outpost  consist  ? 
A.  Generally  of  from  one  third  to  one  half  of  the  whole  strength 
of  the  outpost.  The  subdivision  in  one  case  would  be:  one  third 
for  each  of  the  reserve,  supports,  and  pickets  ;  in  the  other  ease, 
one  half  for  the  reserve,  and  one  fourth  each  for  the  supports 
and  pickets. 

3471.  Q.  Where  should  the  reserve  of  an  outpost  be  posted? 
A.  Out  of  sight  of  the  enemy,  occasionally  divided  into  two  parts, 
on  a  principal  route  or  routes  of  retreat  to  the  main  body. 

3472.  Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  the  reserves  of  outposts  ? 
A.  To  move  to  the  reinforcement  of  the  supports,  if  necessary,  or 
to  occupy  a  good  defensive  position  for  the  troops  in  front  to  fall 
back  upon  if  required. 

3473.  Q.  What  privileges  are  the  men  of  a  reserve  on  outpost 
duty  allowed?  A.  Bivouac,  rest,  cook,  eat,  and  smoke,  but  they 
should  always  be  ready  to  act  at  the  shortest  notice. 

SMALL  POSTS  OR  GROUPS. 

3474.  Q.  Of  what  use  are  small  posts  or  groups  of  four  men  ? 
A.  Sometimes  in  establishing  sentries  and  pickets,  particularly 


424  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

in  close  and  rugged  countries,  great  difficulty  will  be  experienced 
in  placing  the  former,  so  that  they  should  be  in  sight  of  their 
neighboring  sentries  and  of  their  pickets,  and  at  the  same  time 
be  posted  so  as  to  be  easy  of  access  from  the  pickets  m  case  of  need. 
In  such  cases,  during  the  day,  the  line  of  sentries  and  the  hue  of 
pickets  which  supply  them  may  be  replaced  by  one  line  of  groups 
of  four  men  each,  furnished  direct  from  the  supports,  and  com- 
manded by  a  corporal  or  an  old  soldier,  who  would  be  one  of  the 
four  men. 

3475.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  groups  on  outpost  perform 
their  duties  ?  A.  The  three  men  of  the  party  would  furnish  the 
relief  for  the  sentry,  who  would  be  posted  in  the  best  lookout 
position  from  10  to  50  yards  to  the  front.  The  men  not  on  sentry 
would  remain  with  the  commander,  well-hidden  from  view,  keep- 
ing constant  watch  on  their  sentry  or  lookout  man.  One  man 
might  occasionally  be  sent  to  patrol  to  the  next  post  if  desirable, 
but  patrolling  is  not  a  part  of  the  duty.  The  sentry  should  be 
relieved  every  hour,  the  post  every  six  hours. 


THE  OUTPOST  LINE  AT  NIGHT. 

3476.  Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  outpost  at  night  ?  A. 
A  change  of  position  from  that  of  the  day  will  usually  become 
necessary.  Tliis  should  be  carefully  arranged  before  dark,  and 
put  into  execution  just  as  the  light  is  failing,  so  as  not  to  be 
observed  by  the  enemy.  Bridges,  main  routes,  and  obligatory 
points  of  passage  should  be  occupied  by  the  pickets,  the  supports 
or  portions  of  them  being  pushed  close  up  to  the  pickets,  and 
then  patrolling  should  be  frequent  between  the  pickets,  the  ad- 
vanced sentries  being  used  only  on  the  avenues  of  approach. 

3477.  Q.  If  the  outposts  consist  of  a  mixed  force,  what  duties 
devolve  upon  the  cavalry  at  night  ?  A.  It  should  continue  its 
patrols  on  the  main  routes,  but  its  vedettes  should  undergo  a 
thorough  change  of  position.  Cavalry  pickets  which  have  been 
in  open  ground  must  at  dark  be  placed  upon  the  roads,  double 
vedettes  being  advanced  a  short  distance  immediately  in  front, 
up  each  approach. 

3478.  Q.  Upon  which  portion  of  the  outpost  at  night  must  be 
placed  the  principal  reliance?  A.  Upon  the  cavalry  patrols, 
which  are  kept  constantly  in  motion. 

3479.  Q.  What  arrangements  should  be  made  at  night,  with  a 
view  to  holding  an  important  position  which  has  been  occupied 
by  the  outposts  during  the  day  ?  A.  A  number  of  standing  pa- 
trols, or  patrolling  posts  of  four  men  each,  may  be  pushed  for- 
ward at  dusk,  traversing  all  roads,  paths,  or  possible  approaches. 
The  pickets  by  this  would  be  weakened,  and  therefore  the  sup- 
ports must  close  up  on  them.     If  the  whole  of  the  support  has 


MINOR  TACTICS.  '  425 

reinforced  the  pickets,  a  portion  of  the  reserve  must  be  moved 
up  to  take  the  place  of  the  support  at  its  former  post. 

3480.  Q.  "What  should  be  done  by  the  patrolling  posts  at  day- 
break? A.  Make  a  reconnoissance  well  to  the  front  before  rejoin- 
ing their  pickets,  and  obtain  any  possible  information  of  the 
enemy. 

DUTIES  OF  THE  COMMANDER  OF  AN  INFANTRY  PICKET. 

3481.  Q.  What  should  the  commander  of  an  infantry  picket 
provide  himself  with  ?  A.  A  field-glass,  a  compass,  a  map,  a 
watch,  a  note-book,  a  pencil,  and  some  sketching  materials  of 
simple  character. 

3482.  Q.  From  whom  does  the  commander  of  an  infantry 
picket  receive  his  instructions  ?  A.  From  the  commander  of  the 
outposts  or  from  the  field-officer  of  his  section,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances, and  he  must  note  them  down. 

3483.  Q.  What  should  the  picket  commander's  orders  indicate  ? 
A.  The  honr  at  which  he  is  to  mount  picket,  the  ground  he  is 
to  watch,  the  approximate  position  of  the  picket  with  those  of 
neighboring  pickets  and  supports,  the  amount  of  resistance  the 
picket  is  to  make  if  attacked  in  superior  force,  and  in  the  latter 
case  the  general  dispositions  the  officer  is  to  make,  together  with 
his  line  of  retreat. 

3484.  Q.  What  must  the  picket  commander  also  ascertain  ?  A. 
Where  he  is  to  send  his  reports,  from  whence  he  is  to  be  supplied 
with  camp  requisites  or  provisions,  and  where  the  picket  is  to  be 
posted  at  night,  with  the  night  positions  of  neighboring  pickets 
and  supports. 

3485.  Q.  What  should  the  commander  of  a  picket  do  before 
starting  for  his  post  ?  A.  Make  an  inspection  and  rough  nominal 
list  of  his  men,  examining  their  arms,  ammunition,  and  rations. 
He  should  see  that  each  non-commissioned  officer  has  a  pencil 
and  paper,  or  note-book,  with  him. 

3486.  Q.  Having  passed  the  line  of  supports,  how  should  the 
picket  advance  ?  A.  With  great  caution,  moving  with  scouts  out 
in  front,  and  flankers  if  necessary.  The  commander  should  note 
any  position  which  may  be  useful  to  him  for  making  a  stand  in 
retreat. 

3487.  Q.  How  does  the  picket  obtain  position  ?  A.  The  picket 
is  halted  a  little  in  rear  of  the  intended  line  of  observation, 
and  the  officer  proceeds  wjth  an  extended  patrol  to  work  up  to 
the  ground.  He  is  followed  by  a  party,  under  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer,  to  furnish  the  first  relief  of  sentries,  which,  as  it 
advances,  opens  out  by  files  so  as  to.  cover  approximately,  in  ex- 
tended order,  the  whole  of  the  ground  allotted  to  the  picket  to 
guard.  On  arriving  at  the  line  of  observation,  if  nothing  has 
been  seen  of  the  enemy,  the  officer  halts,  permitting  the  patrollers 


426 

to  go  on  to  examine  any  suspicions  ground  within  short  rifle- 
range.  As  the  extended  party  of  sentries  comes  up  to  him,  the 
officer  posts  them  by  files,  tentatively  at  first,  wherever  there 
appears  the  best  lookout. 

3488.  Q.  After  the  picket  commander  posts  his  line  of  observa- 
tion, what  must  he  do  ?  A.  Communicate  with  the  pickets  to  his 
right  and  left,  passing  along  his  double  line  of  sentries  in  doing 
so,  and  correcting  their  positions,  reducing  the  number  of  posts, 
if  possible,  or  replacing  some  by  groups  with  a  single  sentry. 

3489.  Q.  Wliat  should  the  picket  commander  see  that  the  sen- 
tries understand  ?  A.  Tliat  they  are  able  to  answer  three  ques- 
tions :  1.  What  is  known  of  the  enemy  ?  2.  Where  are  their  own 
pickets— detached  or  advanced  posts,  if  any — and  the  other  sen- 
tries ?    3.  Where  do  the  roads  in  sight  lead  to  ? 

3490.  Q.  After  having  seen  that  the  sentries  understand  their 
duties,  what  will  the  picket  commander  do  ?  A.  Keturn  to  his 
picket,  and,  if  necessary,  move  it  to  a  more  suitable  position.  He 
then  posts  a  lookout  sentry,  and  sends  report  of  his  dispositions 
to  the  outpost  commander. 

3491.  Q.  What  should  the  picket  commander  do  with  the  in- 
formation secured  through  his  sentries  and  patrols  ?  A.  He 
should  forward  it  at  once  to  the  commander  of  the  outposts. 
Mutual  information  of  the  enemy's  movements  should  be  given 
to  one  another  by  pickets  and  supports. 

3492.  Q.  How  should  an  infantry  picket  commander  receive  a 
vigorous  attack  by  the  enemy  during  the  day  ?  A.  In  the  ab- 
sence of  other  instructions,  as  a  general  rule,  he  ought  at  once  to 
reinforce  his  line  of  sentries  so  as  to  cover  his  front  with  an 
extended  firing-line,  which  should  retire  slowly  upon  the  general 
line  of  resistance  or  supports,  taking  every  advantage  of  the 
ground.  On  nearing  the  supports,  the  picket  commander  should 
direct  his  retreat  upon  one  flank  of  his  own  support,  so  as  not  to 
mask  its  fire,  and  then  co-operate  with  it  in  defense  of  the  whole 
line. 

3493.  Q.  How  will  the  picket  commander  be  governed  if  the 
stand  is  to  be  made  at  the  line  of  pickets  ?  A.  In  this  event,  the 
picket  commander  would  have  probably  received  instructions  to 
strengthen  his  post  by  every  means  at  his  disposal,  and  would 
continue  to  hold  his  ground  on  the  enemy  advancing,  his  sentries 
falling  back  upon  either  flank  of  the  pickets.  The  support  would 
now  be  brought  up  to  the  assistance  of  the  pickets,  the  whole  re- 
tiring in  one  line  as  soon  as  the  position  becomes  untenable,  or 
the  flanks  commence  to  be  turned. 

3494.  Q.  When  will  the  commander  of  an  infantry  picket  bar- 
ricade the  roads  ?  A.  At  night,  leaving  a  passage  clear  for  patrols 
in  front  to  get  through  in  returning. 


MIK-OR  TACTICS.  .  427 


DETAILS  OF  COMMANDER  OF  CAVALRY  PICKET. 

8495.  Q.  What  are  the  instructions  for  a  commander  of  a  cav- 
alry picket  ?  A.  He  receives  and  notes  his  instructions,  the  same 
as  the  commander  of  an  infantry  picket ;  but  in  addition  to  in- 
specting his  men,  he  examines  carefully  the  horses  of  his  picket, 
and  sees  that  the  forage  they  carry  is  sufficient,  and  ascertains 
whence  he  is  to  receive  such  further  supply  as  may  be  necessary. 

3496.  Q.  Describe  the  details  of  marching  a  cavalry  picket  to 
its  post  ?  A.  He  marches  his  party,  covered  by  advanced  and 
flanking  patrols,  to  about  the  centre'of  the  ground  he  is  ordered 
to  take  up,  halts  a  little  in  rear  of  the  position,  tells  off  his 
picket,  and  sends  out  a  reconnoitring  patrol  to  the  front,  as  well 
as  a  visiting  patrol  to  establish  communication  with  adjoining 
pickets. 

3497.  Q.  How  should  a  cavalry  picket  be  divided  ?  A.  About 
two  thirds  for  vedette  duties  and  one  third  for  patrols. 

3498.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  patrols  and  vedettes  be  se- 
lected ?  A.  The  keenest-sighted  men  should  be  selected  for  ve- 
dettes, and  the  best  mounted  and  most  intelligent  for  patrols. 

3499.  Q.  Describe  the  method  of  posting  vedettes?  A.  The 
vedettes,  after  being  selected,  are  divided  into  three  reliefs  ;  the 
first  relief  and  a  non-commissioned  officer,  with  one  or  two  order- 
lies, move  out  of  the  ranks  and  accompany  the  officer.  The 
picket  remains  mounted  under  the  second  in  command,  the  ad- 
vanced and  flanking  patrols  being  on  the  lookout.  The  officer 
endeavors  to  get  on  some  height  from  which  he  can  view  the 
ground,  to  decide  if  Cossack  posts  or  double  vedettes  will  be 
the  most  suitable.  The  central  post  is  first  placed,  and  then  the 
flank  vedettes  as  quickly  as  possible,  defects  in  their  positions 
being  subsequently  corrected. 

3500.  Q.  When  are  the  advanced  and  flanking  patrols  with- 
drawn ?    A.  As  soon  as  the  vedettes  are  posted. 

3501.  Q.  What  must  the  commander  of  a  cavalry  picket  do, 
upon  rejoining  his  picket,  after  posting  the  vedettes  ?  A.  Select 
a  proper  station  for  the  picket,  and  allow  the  men  to  dismount, 
unless  the  enemy  is  close  at  hand,  when  it  may  be  advisable  to 
permit  only  half  to  dismount  at  a  time.  He  then  places  a  look- 
out, or  picket  sentry,  and  if  necessary  a  mounted  sentry  to  con- 
nect the  latter  with  the  vedette  posts. 

3502.  Q.  What  report  should  the  commander  of  a  cavalry 
picket  send  to  the  rear,  after  posting  his  picket?  A.  When  the 
visiting  patrol  sent  out  has  returned,  a  report  to  the  rear  is 
made,  showing  how  many  vedettes  have  been  posted,  where  they 
stand,  the  position  of  the  picket  and  any  information  brought  in 
by  the  patrol.  If  possible,  a  rough  sketch  should  accompany  the 
report. 

3503.  Q.  Of  how  many  men  will  the  reconnoitring  patrols  con- 


428 

sist.  How  many  should  there  be  at  a  cavalry  picket  post,  and 
why  ?  A.  There  should  be  three  patrols  of  three  men  each,  so 
that  one  may  be  out,  one  ready  to  go,  and  the  other  resting. 

3504.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  reconnoitring  cavalry  patrol? 
A.  To  examine  every  path  or  road  leading  towards  the  enemy, 
and  to  ascertain  whether  they  and  tiie  adjoining  ground  are 
passable,  or  whether  there  are  obstructions  anywhere ;  also,  the 
paths  leading  to  the  flan  lis  and  to  the  supports  must  be  further 
examined.  All  inhabited  places  in  the  immediate  vicinity  must 
be  specially  visited. 

3505.  Q.  When  the  first  reconnoitring  patrol  is  sent  out,  what 
will  the  commander  of  the  picket  do  ?  A.  He  will  again  ride 
aloi>g  the  line  of  his  vedettes,  accompanied  by  an  orderly,  and 
carefully  examine  the  ground  about  each  of  the  posts,  directing 
the  men  by  what  paths  to  retire  if  they  shquld  have  to  fall 
back;  and  should  determine  then  and  there  what  he  would  do  if 
the  picket  was  suddenly  attacked  during  ithe  day. 

3506.  Q.  What  general  instructions  should  be  observed  regard- 
ing tl^e  fighting  of  a  cavalry  picket  ?  A.  In  general  a  cavalry 
picket  should  not  fight,  otherwise  than  to  prevent  the  passage  of 
small  parties  or  reconnoitrers  of  the  enemy  through  the  outpost 
line.  Should  the  enemy  appear  weak  and  the  ground  favorable, 
the  picket  might  advance  to  assist  the  vedettes,  and  make  short, 
rapid  attacks  upon  the  enemy's  patrols  ;  but  if  tlie  enemy  appear 
in  force  beyond  that  of  a  small  patrol,  information  is  at  once 
dispatched  to  the  support,  and  the  picket  and  vedettes  fall  back 
slowly.  If,  however,  the  enemy  appears  to  be  rapidly  advancing 
upon  the  support,  the  picket,  should  the  ground  admit  of  action, 
must  not  hesitate  to  attack,  even  to  sacrificing  itself,  to  prevent 
the  support  being  surprised. 

3507.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  a  cavalry  picket  retire  ?  A. 
It  must  take  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  offensive  forward 
movement  of  the  support,  but  keep  off  to  one  flank. 

3508.  Q.  What  is  done  if  the  enemy  be  repulsed  by  the  out- 
posts ?  A.  The  picket  commander  must  send  out  pursuing  pa- 
trols to  report  where  he  halts,  and  these  patrols  must  be  careful 
not  to  fall  into  ambush,  and  must  go  no  farther  than  the  distance 
indicated  to  them.  In  the  mean  time  the  picket  resumes  its 
former  position,  but  its  ground  should  be  changed  shortly  after- 
wards. 

3509.  Q.  What  should  the  commander  of  a  cavalry  picket  do 
in  case  of  a  night  attack  on  him  ?  A.  He  should  first  endeavor, 
if  he  has  the  time,  to  find  out  by  patrols  the  strength  of  the 
enemy,  so  that  the  main  body  might  not  be  forced  to  move.  His 
main  thoroughfare  might  be  temporarily  barricaded,  and  after 
having  secured  a  safe  passage  for  his  patrols  and  vedettes,  a  few 
men  might  thus  check  the  enemy's  advance,  while  the  picket 
retires. 


MINOR  TACTICS.  429 


DISTANCE  OF  THE  OUTPOSTS  FROM  THE  MAIN  ARMY. 

3510.  Q.  How  is  the  distance  for  the  reserve  of  the  outposts 
from  the  main  army  determined  ?  A.  By  the  distance  that  the 
line  of  resistance  or  supports  should  be  advanced.  All  other 
distances,  whether  to  the  front  or  rear,  should  be  relative  to  this 
line  ;  but  it  is  evident  that  the  necessary  obstruction  to  this  ad- 
vance must  take  place  outside  the  zone  of  effective  artillery  fire, 
whatever  this  may  be,  with  the  weapons  in  use.  An  outpost, 
however,  must  under  no  circumstances  be  advanced  so  far  to  the 
front  that  it  cannot  be  securely  retired  without  undue  loss. 

RECONNOITRING. 
[Under  this  head  candidates  may  elect  to  be  examined  in  Wagner.] 

INFORMATION  BY  MEANS  OF  RECONNOISSANCE. 

3511.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  the  term  reconnoitring,  and 
under  what  heads  may  reconnaissances  be  classed  ?  A.  Recon- 
noitring is  the  act  of  smaller  or  larger  forces  advancing  to  the 
front  or  flanks  of  an  army  for  the  purpose  of  observing  the 
enemy  or  the  country.  Reconnaissances  are  classed  under  the 
heads :  1st.  Reconnaissance  in  force  ;  2d.  Special  reconnais- 
sance ;  3d.  Ordinary  reconnoitring  or  patrolling. 

3512.  Q.  Explain  what  is  meant  by  a  reconnaissance  in  force  ? 
A.  It  is  an  openly  offensive  movement  of  the  three  arms  ordered 
by  the  general-in-chief,  to  be  put  into  execution  for  the  purpose 
of  ascertaining  the  enemy's  strength,  and  if  possible  his  disposi- 
tions.    It  is  commonly  the  precursor  to  a  general  action. 

3513.  Q.  How,  in  general  terms,  should  a  reconnaissance  in 
force  be  conducted?  A.  The  enemy  should  be  threatened  in 
such  manner  as  to  lead  him  to  suppose  that  a  real  attack  is  in- 
tended, and  to  force  him  to  disclose  his  strength  and  position. 
Daring  the  advance  reconnoitring  officers  should  be  well  to  the 
front,  seizing  upon  every  point  of  vantage  for  a  good  lookout, 
noting  the  details  of  the  enemy's  position,  marking  where  his 
troops  and  guns  are  placed,  and  estimating  distances. 

3514.  Q.  For  what  object  must  great  care  be  taken  by  a  rec- 
onnaisance  in  force  ?  A.  Care  must  be  taken  in  order  that  the 
movement  does  not  lead  to  a  general  action,  for  which  the  force 
is  not  prepared. 

3515.  Q.  What  time  in  the  day  is  best  suited  for  reconnais- 
ances  and  why  ?  A.  Late  in  the  day  :  even  if  it  should  be  diffi- 
cult to  withdraw,  darkness  will  enable  the  commander  to  put  a 
stop  to  the  fight. 

3516.  Q.  For  what  purposes  are  special  reconnaissances  made  ? 


430  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

A.  they  are  made  with  a  specific  object  in  view — to  reconnoiter 
a  position,  or  to  attack  a  post  in  order  to  force  the  enemy  to  dis- 
close his  intentions.  It  is  usually  strong,  but  not  of  a  strength 
beyond  what  is  absolutely  deemed  requisite  for  the  purpose,  and 
it  should  fall  back  the  moment  the  object  in  view  is  attained. 

3517.  Q.  What  is  included  under  the  head  of  reconnoitring 
parties  or  patrols  ?  A.  All  small  reconnaissances,  from  the  ex- 
ploring patrol  of  a  corporal  and  file  of  men  to  the  staff  officers, 
party  of  cavalry,  with  infantry  in  support. 

INFANTRY  PATROLS. 

3518.  Q.  Of  what  are  infantry  patrols  composed  ?  A.  They 
should  be  composed  of  picked  men,  instead  of  the  first  files  on 
the  right  or  left  of  a  company,  and  only  those  who  have  an  apti- 
tude for  the  duty,  and  who  have  been  trained  therein. 

3519.  Q.  What  qualification  should  a  good  infantry  patroller 
possess?  A.  His  hearing  and  vision  should  be  perfect,  and  he 
should  possess  a  readiness  of  resource  under  difficulties  ;  be  quick 
at  understanding  and  carrying  out  his  orders,  and  be  familiar 
with  marching  by  the  points  of  the  compass.  The  leader  should 
be  able  to  read  his  orders  and  to  write  a  clear  and  correct  report. 

3520.  Q.  In  wliat  manner  should  an  infantry  patrol  of  three 
men  move  ?  A.  They  should  move  one  behind  the  other  in  single 
file,  the  commander  in  the  centre,  about  50  yards  from  the  leader, 
when  on  a  narrow  road  or  path.  If  the  road  be  sufficiently  wide, 
or  through  fields,  one  man  at  the  head  as  point  of  the  patrol,  the 
others  following  at  50  yards'  distance.  As  the  ground  opens  out, 
the  commander  and  the  second  man  may  be  more  or  less  apart. 
In  open  country,  if  one  flank  is  dangerous,  the  second  man  is 
more  in  that  direction  ;  if  the  two  flanks  are  dangerous,  the  two 
men  of  the  patrol  may  march  abreast  of  each  otlier,  100  yards 
apart,  followed  by  the  commander  50  yards  in  rear. 

3521.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  an  infantry  patrol  of  four 
men  march  ?  A.  They  should  march  in  a  similar  manner  to  that 
prescribed  for  three  men — a  leader  or  point  50  yards  at  least  in 
advance  of  the  others,  who  should  either  remain  with  the  com- 
mander or  be  detached  to  each  flank,  according  to  the  nature  of 
the  route.  In  open  country,  a  more  extended  front,  up  to  200 
yards  from  flanker,  and  even  a  greater  distance  from*  the  point 
to  the  commander  may  be  assumed. 

3522.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  having  the  men  of  patrolling 
parties  separated  ?  A.  To  enable  the  men,  according  as  the  ground 
permits,  to  see,  mutually  support,  and  assist  one  another,  without 
bringing  them  so  close  together  that  they  could  all  be  cut  off  or 
taken  at  once  in  the  event  of  a  surprise. 

3523.  Q.  What  is  a  stealthy  or  sneaking  patrol  ?  A.  One  which 
should  move  by  stealth  along  hedges  and  walls,  by  hollow  roads 


MINOR  TACTICS.  431 

and  ravines,  or  water-course  lines;  disappear  in  woods  and  work 
through  to  the  far  borders  on  the  enemy's  side,  whence,  concealed 
from  view,  the  men  may  observe  all  that  passes. 

3534.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  a  stealthy  patrol  before 
starting  ?  A.  The  men  should  be  led  to  higli  ground,  in  order  to 
observe  the  country  they  are  to  explore,  and  to  have  pointed  out 
to  them  any  landmarks  or  remarkable  objects  already  noticed. 

3535.  Q.  What  should  be  the  line  of  conduct  of  a  stealthy 
patrol  ?  A.  The  men  must  neither  talk  nor  smokej  they  must  be 
careful  that  their  arms  and  accoutrements  do  not  rattle  or  clash, 
and  abstain  from  noise  in  advancing;  walk  on  soft  in  preference 
to  hard  ground,  and  make  frequent  halts  to  observe  their  direction, 
both  for  advance  and  retreat. 

3536.  Q.  What  precautions  are  imposed  on  the  stealthy  patrol 
as  to  its  retirement?  A.  The  men  must  note  any  peculiarities  of 
ground  which  might  be  useful  to  them  in  falling  back;  and  if 
necessary,  in  order  to  be  certain  of  finding  their  road  again  on 
return,  they  must  mark  it  out  by  broken  i)ranches,  by  scores  on 
the  bark  of  trees,  by  straw  fastened  to  trees  or  fences,  or  even  by 
a  heap  of  stones. 

3537.  Q.  What  is  the  mission  of  a  stealthy  patrol  ?  A.  It  is 
intended  to  observe  the  enemy  and  to  avoid  fighting,  unless  it  be 
necessary  to  force  an  opposing  patrol;  in  which  case,  should  the 
enemy's  patrol  or  party  be  repulsed,  the  stealthy  patrol  must  not 
pursue,  unless  it  be  necessary  to  gain  important  information. 

3538.  Q.  What  should  a  stealthy  patrol  do,  if  suddenly  attacked 
in  force  by  the  enemy  ?  A.  To  disperse,  and  the  men  make  their 
way  separately  to  a  fixed  place  of  rendezvous  chosen  by  the  com- 
mander on  the  march  out.  « 

3539.  Q.  What  precautions  are  enjoined  on  stealthy  patrols 
while  advancing?  A.  They  should  never  as  a  body  enter  any 
building,  nor  halt  in  its  neighborhood  longer  than  to  make  in- 
quiries; should  two  friendly  patrols  meet,  it  must  be  without 
noise;  they  should  interchange  news  before  moving  on.  On  nearing 
the  enemy  one  of  the  party  should  now  and  then  place  his  ear  to 
the  ground  and  listen,  and  if  suspicious  sounds  be  heard  the  men 
must  hide;  should  they  perceive  the  enemy  on  the  march,  they 
must  not  fire  nor  show  themselves,  but  seek  to  discover  his  force 
and  design;  if  it  is  possible  for  one  man  to  run  instantly  to  the  rear 
without  being  seen,  he  should  be  dispatched  with  the  news  of  the 
enemy's  presence. 

3530.  Q.  What  precautions  must  be  observed  by  stealthy  pa- 
trols at  night,  if  they  suddenly  come  across  a  sentry  or  party  of 
the  enemy  ?  A.  They  should  halt  and  remain  motionless  with- 
out replying— in  which  case  the  enemy  may  think  he  is  mistaken, 
and  the  patrol  may  retire  without  detection.  If  the  patrol  is 
clearly  discovered  and  one  of  the  men  is  able  to  speak  the  ene- 


432 

my's  language,  time  may  be  afforded  for  retreat,  or  an  approach 
gained,  so  as  to  carry  him  off  before  he  can  fire. 

3531.  Q.  What  should  a  stealthy  patrol  do,  if  it  unexpectedly 
encounters  the  enemy  in  force,  and  be  unable  to  retire  to  give 
warning  ?  A.  It  must  signal  the  fact  by  firing  and  falling  back 
upon  the  route  by  which  it  advanced. 

3532.  Q.  Of  what  advantage  is  a  patrol  of  five  men  ?  A.  It 
attains  its  first  complete  and  perfect  organization  as  a  marching 
body,  having  an  advance-guard,  flankers,  and  a  rear-guard,  the 
commander  representing  the  main  body. 

3533.  Q.  What  advantages  are  gained  by  increasing  the  strength 
of  the  patrol  ?  A.  The  formation  approaches  nearer  in  all  details 
to  that  of  a  column  of  troops  en  route;  the  distances  and  intervals 
are  extended,  but  they  are  always  limited  to  the  extent  that  the 
power  of  directing  the  whole  is  not  removed  from  the  commander 
of  the  patrol. 

MOVEMENTS  OF  A   SMALL  INFANTRY  PATROL. 

8534.  Q.  What  diflBculties  are  met  with  in  patrolling  a  close 
country,  and  how  should  the  men  move  in  consequence  ?  A.  The 
patroller  is  exposed  to  the  chance  of  an  enemy  being  behind 
every  obstacle  he  encounters.  He  must  therefore  move  with  the 
greatest  caution  from  one  point  to  another,  where  he  could  halt 
and  carefully  reconnoitre  before  advancing  to  another.  These 
points  should  be  close  to  one  another,  and  the  movement  from  one 
to  the  other  be  rapid  if  the  enemy  is  near. 

3535.  Q.  What  is  the  difficulty  which  besets  a  patrol  in  moving 
through  an  open  cpuntry,  and  what  is  the  line  of  conduct  ?  A. 
The  difficulty  of  concealment  becoming  greater,  tlie  patroller 
must  be  still  more  cautious  than  in  a  close  country,  to  avoid 
detection.  He  should  take  advantage  of  the  smallest  extent  of 
cover,  work  up  the  roads  close  to  the  fences,  if  there  are  any — even 
in  a  ditch  by  the  roadside. 

3536.  Q.  What  should  a  patrol  do  if  a  column  be  following  in 
rear  ?  A.  Care  must  be  taken  that  its  march  is  in  no  way  retarded 
by  the  patrol.  The  reconnaissance  must  not  only  be  effected  with 
the  requisite  exactness,  but  with  rapidity,  as  time  becomes  an 
important  element. 

3537.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  patrol  in  encountering  lateral 
roads?  A.  When  it  comes  to  a  branch  road,  two  men,  one  in 
advance  of  the  other,  should  push  rapidly  up  it  till  they  come  to 
the  first  turn  in  its  general  direction.  If  nothing  is  in  sight  they 
return;  but,  if  they  should  discover  anything  suspicious,  one  man 
runs  back  rapidly  to  stop  the  patrol's  advance  on  the  main  road, 
while  the  other,  hidden  at  the  turn  of  the  branch- road,  continues 
to  reconnoitre. 

3538.  Q.  What  will  patrols  do  when  crossing  fields  ?    A.  The 


MIKOR  TACTICS.  433 

hedges,  ditches,  banks,  and  the  least  accident  of  ground  must  be 
utilized  to  its  fullest  extent.  If  the  cover  is  parallel  to  the  gen- 
eral route,  the  men  must  keep  it  between  themselves  and  the 
probable  quarter  in  which  the  enemy  may  be ;  if  it  is  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  advance,  they  must  halt  behind  each  obstacle  to  pull 
themselves  together,  look  out  for  a  moment,  then  rapidly"  clear 
it,  and  push  on  to  the  next  spot  with  all  speed. 

3539.  Q-  What  will  patrols  do  when  ascending  hills,  knolls,  or 
high  folds  of  ground?  A.  If  there  are  sufficient  men,  one  or 
more  should  be  sent  around  each  flank  at  the  base,  while  the 
leading  man  advances  up  the  slope,  lowers  his  position  as  he 
arrives  near  the  top,  and,  when  the  crest  is  gained,  drops  flat  on 
the  ground,  and  looks  carefully  over  the  summit.  If  there  are 
only  three  or  four  men  in  the  patrol,  one  advances  to  the  crest, 
followed  by  the  second  at  a  little  distance,  while  the  other  man 
or  men  follow  farther  to  the  rear. 

3540.  Q.  How  should  the  patrol  pass  a  defile  ?  A.  If  the  sides 
or  height  bordering  the  defile  admit  of  examination  without  too 
much  loss  of  time,  they  should  be  reconnoitred  by  flankers 
before  the  leading  man  enters.  If  the  examination  cannot  be 
made,  first  one  man  leads  off  in  a  steady  double  time,  looking  out 
sharp  to  the  right  and  left  as  well  as  front;  then  another  man 
follows  at  a  short  distance  in  the  same  way — that  is,  if  the  defile 
is, not  too  long;  if  it  is,  the  pace  must  be  moderated.  The  third 
man  remains  at  the  entrance  as  long  as  he  can  see  the  others, — 
then  follows  them. 

3541.  Q.  What  should  a  patrol  do  before  crossing  a  bridge? 
A.  The  bridge  should  be  carefully  examined,  to  ascertain  if  the 
enemy  has  tampered  with  it.  Should  the  bridge  appear  safe,  the 
patrol  would  pass  over  it  in  double  time. 

3543.  Q.  What  should  a  patrol  do  at  the  passage  of  a  stream 
or  ford  ?  A.  If  it  is  a  narrow  passage,  the  patrol  must  restrict 
its  front,  and  as  soon  as  the  crossing  is  effected  the  flankers  must 
spread  out  again.  If  a  column  is  following  in  rear  and  a  water- 
course stops  the  advance,  and  no  information  as  to  fords  can  be 
obtained,  the  stream  should  be  sounded.  If  the  patrol  be  alone, 
a  detour  may  be  made,  unless  the  stream  can  be  crossed  by  a 
ready  expedient. 

3543.  Q.  How  should  a  patrol  search  small  woods  or  groves  ? 
A.  The  leading  man  goes  alongside  the  edge  of  the  wood,  fol- 
lowed a  little  in  rear  by  the  commander,  who  works  along  the 
border,  just  inside  of  it,  so  as  to  see  well  into  the  wood  without 
losing  sight  of  the  man  outside.  The  third  man  follows  well  to 
the  rear,  outside  the  wood.  If  the  preliminary  examination  of 
the  border  reveals.no  sign  of  occupation,  the  two  men  in  front 
cautiously  enter  the  wood,  go  through  it,  and  look  out  from  the 
opposite  side,  keeping  concealed.    The  third  man  follows  them 


434  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

up  round  the  outside  edge,  and  joins  when  the  others  emerge  on 
the  farther  side. 

3544.  Q.  What  should  be  done  by  a  patrol  searching  extensive 
woods  ?  A.  A  small  patrol  must  content  itself  with  an  imperfect 
examination.  If  not  intersected  with  roads,  the  borders  alone 
can  be  explored.  Should  there  be  a  road  through  the  wood,  one 
man  would  reconnoitre  up  to  the  first  turn,  while  the  others  ex- 
amine the  borders  on  each  side  near  the  entrance.  If  nothing  is 
discovered,  one  man  leads  on  one  side  of  the  road,  looking  out 
well  to  his  front,  and  also  through  the  wood  to  his  flank ;  the  next 
man  following  at  a  little  distance  on  the  other  side,  keeping  an 
eye  on  the  leading  man,  also  looking  sharply  through  the  trees  on 
his  own  side.  The  third  man  follows,  keeping  the  other  two  just 
in  sight. 

3545.  Q.  How  should  a  patrol  examine  houses,  farms,  etc.  ? 
A.  If  the  patrol  is  small,  it  should  be  reconnoitred  from  a  little 
distance;  and  if  the  inspection  be  satisfactory,  the  commander 
and  another  of  the  party  advance  resolutely  to  the  front  entrance, 
the  third  man  remaining  hidden  about  50  yards  off,  within  sight 
of  the  door.  If  the  party  be  suificiently  large,  tlie  back  and 
front  entrance  should  be  simultaneously  visited.  If  the  owner 
comes  out,  the  commander  obtains  what  information  he  can.  If 
the  summons  is  disregarded,  one  of  the  men  enters  and  brings 
some  one  out.  Should  all  appear  so  far  safe,  the  house  and  en- 
closure is  thoroughly  searched  for  an  enemy  by  two  of  the  party, 
always  leaving  a  guard  outside.  Should  the  searchers  not  appear 
after  a  limited  time,  or  if  they  do  not  answer  when  called  upon, 
the  man  outside  will  fire  a  signal-shot.  If  this  meets  with  no 
response,  information  must  be  taken  or  sent  to  the  rear  by  one 
man;  the  others,  if  there  are  any,  remaining  in  secret  observation 
until  reinforced. 

3546.  Q.  How  should  small  villages  or  hamlets  be  examined 
by  a  patrol  ?  A.  A  large  village  or  town  should  never  be  entered 
by  a  small  patrol.  They  must  merely  be  reconnoitred  from 
favorable  ground.  The  patrol  may  enter  a  small  village  after 
due  precautions,  first  seizing,  if  possible,  an  inhabitant  on  the 
outskirts.  Children  or  youths  should  be  taken  in  preference,  as 
they  are  liable  to  reveal  the  truth.  Should  all  appear  safe,  the 
patrol  will  enter  the  hamlet.  The  two  leading  men  march  one 
behind  the  other,  the  commander  of  the  party  second,  on  one 
side  of  the  road  or  street,  looking  up  at  the  houses  opposite.  The 
third  man  remains  at  the  entrance,  unless  the  road  turns,  when 
he  must  follow  to  keep  the  others  in  sight.  Having  gone  through 
the  village,  two  of  the  party  return  to  obtain  information,  one  or 
more  being  always  outside.  These  should  be  posted  in  some 
good  position  for  observation,  or  to  get  away  if  the  first  man  is 
seized  by  the  enemy  concealed  in  one  of  the  houses. 

3547.  Q.  How  should  a  patrol  act  when  approaching  habita- 


MII^OR  TACTICS.  435 

A.  The  men  must  conceal  themselves  close  by 
and  listen  for  a  few  minutes.  Should  no  unusual  noise  betray 
the  enemy's  presence,  the  two  leading  men  must  creep  up  to  the 
nearest  doors  to  listen,  and  endeavor  to  look  in  any  windows 
where  a  light  is  to  be  seen.  If  information  cannot  be  obtained 
by  these  means,  an  inhabitant  must  be  seized.  If  there  is  a  vil- 
lage watchman,  he  should,  if  possible,  be  taken  by  surprise.  This 
is  especially  important  if  other  troops  are  following  in  rear. 

DUTIES  OF  THE   COMMANDER  OF  A  SMALL  INFANTRY  PATROL. 

3548.  Q.  What  should  the  commander  of  a  small  infantry 
patrol  do  upon  receiving  his  instructions  ?  A.  He  should,  first 
of  all,  ascertain  to  his  entire  satisfaction  that  he  clearly  under- 
stands them,  committing  them  to  paper  if  verbal.  If  there  is 
anything  not  quite  plain,  he  must  ask  for  further  explanation 
and  note  it  down.  If  he  does  not  know  the  ground  he  is  to 
patrol,  he  must  request  information  about  it. 

3549.  Q.  What  must  the  commander  of  a  small  infantry  patrol 
do  before  marching  off  ?  A.  Carefully  inspect  his  party,  and  see 
that  the  ammunition  is  correct,  that  the  rifles  are  in  good  order, 
and  that  no  man  has  a  sore  foot  or  a  boot  or  stocking  likely  to 
cause  one  on  the  march.  He  takes  care  that  the  accoutrements 
are  so  arranged  as  not  to  rattle,  and  that  anything  glittering 
about  the  head-dress  is  removed.  He  must  ascertain  that  the 
men  perfectly  understand  what  signals  are  to  be  used,  and  should 
put  them  through  those  adopted  for  use  between  themselves,  ^e 
should  read  his  orders  to  the  men,  and  explain  to  them  the  object 
of  the  patrol  and  where  the  enemy  is  supposed  to  be;  he  should, 
moreover,  inform  them  of  their  general  route  for  advancing  and 
for  returning. 

3550.  Q.  What  should  the  commander  of  a  patrol  be  provided 
with  ?    A.  Pencil,  paper,  a  watch,  and  a  pocket  compass, 

CAVALRY  PATROLS. 

3551.  Q.  How  are  cavalry  patrols  worked?  A.  On  very  much 
the  same  general  principles  which  guide  those  of  infantry,  but 
the  distances  over  which  they  can  pass,  and  the  intervals  of 
frontage  in  their  formations,  are  of  course  much  greater.  The 
system  of  detaching  groups  of  scouts  from  a  patrol,  if  of  sufficient 
strength  to  furnish  them,  is  moreover  peculiar  to  the  cavalry 
service. 

3553.  Q.  Should  a  cavalry  patrol  fight?  A.  A  reconnoitring 
patrol  should  in  general  avoid  it ;  but  there  will  arise  circum- 
stances at  times  to  occasion  an  action.  It  should  only  be  resorted 
to  where  a  line  of  patrols  covering  their  front  with  scouts  are  re- 
quired t6  hold  their  position  in  advance  of  other  troops,  or  to 


436  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMI:N^ER. 

drive  in  the  enemy's  line  of  scouts  to  prevent  his  attempts  at 
reconnaissance.  In  such  instances,  however,  special  orders  would 
be  issued.  Indeed,  a  patrol  must  be  governed  by  the  orders  it 
receives,  and  these  orders  should  embrace  all  information  in  that 
respect.  ,  ,  .        ,        „     . 

3553.  Q.  What  should  a  cavalry  patrol  do  to  give  alarm  ?  A. 
If  within  the  hearing  of  the  main  body  of  troops,  the  same  rules 
for  firing  to  give  an  alarm  hold  good  for  cavalry  as  regards 
infantry. 

3554.  Q.  What  is  done  if  a  cavalry  patrol  appears  to  be  cut  off  ? 
A.  The  commander  may  disperse  it.  If  there  is  no  necessity  for 
immediate  report  to  the  outposts  it  may  sometimes  be  allowable 
to  retreat  in  the  opposite  direction,  and  return  by  a  detour  under 
cover  of  darkness. 

3555.  Q.  When  does  the  real  work  of  cavalry  patrolling  begin  ? 
A.  Only  when  the  enemy  is  first  touched  upon,  the  results  to  be 
obtained  therefrom  assume  their  highest  value  and  importance 
from  this  time. 

3556.  Q.  What  responsibility  has  the  commander  of  a  small 
cavalry  patrol  as  compared  with  infantry  ?  A.  He  has  much  the 
same  :  he  makes  his  inspection  before  starting  and  pays  particu- 
lar attention  to  his  horses  and  the  shoeing  of  them,  reads  his  or- 
ders to  his  men,  so  that  any  one  of  them  could  continue  the 
patrol  in  case  he  was  cut  off  or  met  with  other  accident. 

3557.  Q.  What  is  the  formation  for  a  small  cavalry  patrol  ? 
A.  If  it  is  of  a  secret  nature,  more  rigid  formations  must  be  pre- 
served in  the  advance,  and  the  same  care  and  caution  exhibited  in 
reconnoitring. 

3558.  Q.  What  precautions  must  be  taken  with  a  cavalry  patrol 
which  are  not  necessary  with  infantry  ?  A.  The  commander 
must  never  permit  his  men  to  enter  upon  ground  that  is  unsuited 
for  the  movement  of  horses,  or  where  insurmountable  obstacles 
bear  on  his  line  of  retreat.  A  man  mounted  should  therefore  not 
be  permitted  to  enter  an  enclosure  that  has  not  a  free  passage 
through  it,  unless  a  comrade  remains  at  the  entrance  to  preserve 
for  him  his  means  of  retreat.  Nor  should  he  go  inside  a  wood, 
unless  it  is  thinly  planted,  so  as  to  allow  free  passage  in  all  direc- 
tions. 

3559.  Q.  Why  is  a  strongly  developed  sense  of  locality  more 
necessary  in  the  commander  of  a  cavalry  than  an  infantry  patrol  ? 
A.  Because  the  distances  over  which  the  former  has  to  travel 
are  greater.  He  should,  therefore,  have  a  good  eye  for  ground, 
be  able  to  read  a  map,  and  find  his  way  by  it,  and  understand 
marching  by  the  compass. 

3560.  Q.  AVhat  are  among  the  most  important  of  the  duties  of 
the  commander  of  a  cavalry  patrol  regarding  information  to  be 
obtained  ?  A.  Should  he  not  toucli  upon  the  enemy,  Jie  must 
make  the  most  diligent  inquiries  wherever  he  can,  as  to  when 


MIKOR  TACTICS.  437 

they  were  seen,  in  what  strength,  and  with  what  kind  of  troops  ; 
how  long  they  halted,  and  in  what  condition  they  were  at  the 
time  ;  what  they  did  while  they  were  halted  ;  what  road  they 
took  on  leaving  ;  whether  they  took  guides  with  them,  and  if  so, 
whether  they  have  returned. 

3561.  Q.  What  must  the  commander  of  a  cavalry  patrol  do  re- 
garding his  main  route  ?  A.  He  must  select  it  and  adhere  to  it, 
should  his  patrol  be  strong  enough  to  admit  sending  out  detached 
men  or  scouts  ;  but  he  must  take  care  that  he  does  not  uselessly 
fritter  away  his  men.  He  must  see  that  such  scouts  distinctly 
understand  how  they  are  to  keep  up  their  touch  with  him,  and 
where  they  are  to  rejoin  him. 

3562.  Q.  What  should  be  done  when  it  becomes  necessary  for 
a  cavalry  patrol  to  halt  for  the  purpose  of  feeding  and  watering 
the  animals  ?  A.  A  lonely  and  isolated  spot  must  be  selected, 
where  a  lookout  man  can  easily  guard  against  surprise.  The 
halt  must  never  be  made  near  inhabited  places,  least  of  all  in  the 
immediate  vicinity  of  an  inn  or  tavern.  In  no  case  must  the 
men  be  separated  from  their  horses. 

3563.  Q.  Upon  what  must  a  cavalry  patrol  rely  at  night  ?  A. 
More  upon  its  ears  than  its  eyes  ;  the  commander  should  there- 
fore often  halt  for  the  purpose  of  listening,  one  man  occasionally 
dismounting  and  placing  his  ear  to  the  ground.  Horses  them- 
selves are  an  assistance  at  night  in  giving  the  earliest  notice  of 
anything  unusual ;  tlierefore  great  attention  should  be  paid  to 
their  actions.  The  vision  and  hearing  of  horses  is  much  superior 
to  that  of  men. 


SCREENING  AND   RECONNOITRING   DUTIES   OF   CAVALRY  IN  ADVANCE 
OF  THE  ARMY. 

3564.  Q.  How  are  the  elementary  details  of  a  screening  force 
in  advance  of  an  army  conducted  with  cavalry  ?  A.  In  accord- 
ance with  the  principles  prescribed  under  the  head  of  patrols. 

3565.  Q.  What  is  done  by  a  screening  or  reconnoitring  force  of 
cavalry  when  the  eneny  is  at  a  distance  and  his  movements  are 
unknown?  A.  He  must  be  constantly  feared,  never  lost  sight  of, 
and  must  be  watched  in  such  manner  as  to  observe  his  movements 
closely  with  a  view  of  estimating  his  designs ;  and  at  the  same 
time  to  prevent  his  attempts  at  reconnaissance  with  like  intentions. 

3566.  Q.  What  constitutes  a  fatal  mistake  that  is  too  often 
made  by  cavalry  when  in  advance  of  an  army  ?  A.  In  supposing 
that  it  is  sufficient  to  reconnoitre  the  enemy  and  return  with  a 
report,  or  even  to  reconnoitre  in  a  certain  direction  and  report 
that  no  enemy  is  seen.  It  is  not  only  necessary  to  find  the  enemy, 
but,  when  found,  to  keep  him  under  constant  observation. 

3567.  Q.  What  course  should  be  pursued  by  cavalry  in  advance 
of  an  army  to  find  the  enemy  and  keep  him  under  observation  ? 


438  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

A.  Detached  bodies  should  be  advanced  to  the  front,  interposing 
between  their  own  troops  and  the  enemy  a  veil  or  screen,  behind 
which  there  is  immunity  from  surprise,  and  in  the  extreme  front 
of  which  feelers  or  reconnoitrers  are  actively  employed,  collecting 
intelligence  for  transmission  to  the  rear. 

3568.  Q.  By  whom  should  the  screening  duties  of  an  army  be 
performed  ?  A.  By  either  the  divisional  cavalry  or  the  cavalry 
division  according  as  the  operators  are  of  a  large  or  small  scale. 

3569.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  divisional  cavalry  and 
cavalry  division  ?  A.  The  former  is  the  cavalry  attached  to  an 
infantry  division  ;  the  latter  is  the  division  of  cavalry,  which  is 
an  iftdependent  tactical  body,  having  relations  to  the  whole  army 
of  a  similar  nature  to  those  borne  by  the  divisional  cavalry  to  its 
own  division. 

3570.  Q.  In  what  case  does  the  divisional  cavalry  perform 
screening  and  reconnoitring  duty,  and  how  is  its  work  con- 
ducted ?  A.  If  several  divisions  were  acting  together,  the  cavalry 
of  each  would  cover  the  immediate  head  of  its  own  column  on 
the  march,  reconnoitre  the  country  to  its  front  and  flanks,  and 
link  the  column  to  others,  jnst  as  in  action  it  would  fight  on  the 
flanks  of  its  own  division,  join  in  its  success,  or  help  to  cover  its 
retreat. 

3571.  Q.  In  what  case  does  the  cavalry  division  perform  screen- 
ing and  reconnoitring  duty,  and  how  is  its  work  conducted  ?  A. 
It  furnishes  the  advance  cavalry  far  to  the  front  when  several 
columns  are  moving  forward  in  combination,  the  divisional  cavalry 
being  answerable  for  the  scouting  in  the  immediate  vicinity  ot 
the  columns.  A  force  of  considerable  strength  is  usually  employed 
on  this  service.  The  principle  adopted  is  that  of  retaining  a  sup- 
port in  rear,  from  which  smaller  parties  are  detached  to  the  front 
and  to  the  flanks;  these  parties  in  their  turn  sending  out  still 
smaller  fractions,  until  the  whole  assumes  the  form  of  an  open  fan, 
upon  the  outer  edge  of  which  the  patrols  are  reduced  to  a  strength 
of  some  eight  or  ten  men,  which  in  their  turn  may  be  covered  in 
extreme  advance  by  groups  of  scouts  of  two  or  three  men  together. 
The  squadrons  detached  to  the  front  are  called  co??,toc^  squadrons, 
and  the  patrols  they  send  out  are  commanded  by  officers  or  non- 
commissioned officers. 

3572.  Q.  Describe  how  a  regiment  of  cavalry  might  be  em- 
ployed in  screening  an  army.  A.  It  may  be  sent  out  to  a  distance 
of  from  ten  miles  to  a  one  or  two  days'  march  in  advance  of  the 
force  it  is  to  cover.  One  squadron  moves  still  farther  to  the  front, 
one  to  each  flank,  while  the  remainder  acts  as  a  support  to  the 
others.  Each  of  the  contact  squadrons  sends  out  patrols  to  its 
own  front  and  flank,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  and 
supposed  position  of  the  enemy.  The  rest  of  the  squadron  re- 
mains in  each  case  in  rear,  moving  along  a  central  route.  The 
patrols  in  thek  turn  detach  advance  scouts,  so  that  every  part  of 


MINOR  TACTICS.  439 

the  ground  may  be  thoroughly  examined.  The  distance  to  whicli 
the  contact  squadrons  should  proceed  from  the  support,  and  also 
the  intervals  to  be  preserved  by  the  squadrons  in  advance,  must 
depencL  upon  the  nature  of  the  country  and  probable  position  of 
the  enemy. 

3573.  Q.  When  the  screen  is  formed  by  a  division  or  brigade  of 
cavalry,  how  much  front  should  be  covered  ?  A.  From  ten  to 
twelve  miles  against  civilized  troops;  but  this  depends  upon  the 
ground,  the  strength,  and  proximity  of  the  enemy. 

3574.  Q.  If  a  brigade  of  cavalry  be  acting  alone  as  a  screen  for 
an  army,  what  would  be  a  possible  formation  ?  A.  As  a  rule,  in 
this  case  a  horse-battery  would  be  attached  to  it  for  duty.  The 
exact  formation  must  be  left  to  the  commander;  but,  a  possible 
disposition  would  be  to  let  two  regiments  furnish  the  necessary 
contact  squadrons,  while  the  remainder  of  the  brigade,  with  the 
guns,  would  follow  as  the  main  body. 

3575.  Q.  In  the  event  of  a  brigade  acting  independently  as  a 
screen,  how  should  the  contact  squadrons  move?  A.  In  a  close 
or  cultivated  country,  each  would  move  on  a  separate  route,  an 
immediate  support  following  the  centre  squadron  of  each  regi- 
ment, and  the  number  of  contact  squadrons  would  depend  on  the 
number  of  main  roads  available  within  the  limits  of  the  front 
taken  up.  In  an  open  country,  half  the  number  of  contact  squad- 
rons might  cover  the  same  ground  ;  the  remaining  squadron  or 
squadrons  in  each  advance  regiment  being  kept  in  hand  by  the 
commanders,  in  a  central  position  as  regards  their  own  contact 
squadrons,  to  act  as  a  local  support. 

3576.  Q.  Should  a  brigade  of  cavalry  engaged  in  screening 
duty  avoid  fighting  ?  A.  Yes,  unless  the  enemy^s  screen  cannot 
be  otherwise  pierced,  or  with  a  view  to  establish  a  moral  superi- 
ority, or  to  prevent  the  enemy  breaking  through  the  screening 
force. 

3577.  Q.  What  should  a  screening  force  of  cavalry  provide  for 
its  rear  ?  A.  A  rear-guard  must  be  provided  by  the  rear  regiment 
to  follow  the  main  body. 

CONNECTING  POSTS. 

3578.  Q.  Explain  the  necessity  for  communication  between  the 
reconnoitring  parties  in  front  and  others  in  rear.  A.  It  is  need- 
ful that  a  detached  patrol  should  be  in  a  position  to  receive  orders 
from  the  rear  as  quickly  as  possible;  hence  arises  the  necessity  for 
connecting  posts  when  reconnoissance  is  being  carried  on  at  some 
distance  in  advance  of  the  main  body. 

3579.  Q.  How  should  connecting  posts  be  established  by  an 
advanced  body  on  reconnaissance  ?  A,  They  should  be  placed  on 
the  main  routes,  generally  at  positions  which  can  be  easily  found, 
such  as  bridges,  or  remarkable  or  well-known  buildings,  and  they 


440  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

are  established  by  each  detached  party  as  it  proceeds  to  the  front, 
about  five  miles  apart;  but,  if  men  can  be  spared,  this  distance 
may  be  reduced  with  advantage  to  two  or  three  miles. 

3580.  Q.  What  force  constitutes  the  best  strength  for  connect- 
ing posts?  A.  A  non-commissioned  officer  and  six  men,  but 
never  less  than  three,  one  of  whom  must  always  be  ready  to 
mount  at  an  instant's  warning  whenever  a  messenger  is  seen 
approaching,  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  on  the  despatch  to  the 

next  post.  -,     ^  .,  ,        ^  ,   ^ 

3581.  Q.  What  should  the  messenger  who  takes  a  despatch  to 
a  connecting  post  do  after  delivering  the  same  ?  A.  After  a  short 
rest  he  should  return  to  the  point  from  which  he  started,  unless 
he  has  different  orders,  taking  with  him  any  information  for  his 
party. 

3582.  Q.  What  should  be  written  on  the  outside  of  a  message 
sent  by  an  orderly  to  a  connecting  post  ?  A.  The  pace  at  which 
he  should  ride,  and  the  exact  place  and  hour  of  the  despatch. 

COMMUNICATING  POSTS  AND  PATROLS. 

3583.  Q.  For  what  purpose  are  communicating  posts  and  pa- 
trols ?  A.  They  are  intended  to  facilitate  the  lateral  communica- 
tions of  advanced  squadrons  during  their  operations,  or  of  par- 
allel colums  on  the  march. 

3584.  Q.  Of  what  strength  should  communicating  posts  or 
patrols  be,  where  are  they  placed,  and  how  do  they  operate? 
A.  They  consist  of  three  men,  one  of  whom  is  always  ready  to 
mount.  They  are  placed  at  points  distinctly  shown  on  the  map 
between  the  routes  to  be  taken  by  the  advancing  troops.  They 
ride  across  from  one  column  to  the  other,  and  keep  up  communi- 
cation in  this  manner. 

STRONG  RECONNOITRING  PARTIES. 

3585.  Q.  From  whence  would  a  strong  reconnoitring  party  be 
detached  ?  A.  Either  from  the  main  body  or  from  the  reserve  of 
the  advanced  covering  detachments;  that  is,  from  the  reserve  of 
the  advance-guard  on  the  march  or  from  the  reserve  of  the  out- 
posts at  the  halt. 

3586.  Q.  What  instructions  should  the  commander  of  a  strong 
reconnoitring  party  receive,  and  what  in  a  general  way  would  be 
the  character  of  those  instructions  ?  A.  He  should  receive  the 
most  precise  instructions  as  to  the  object  to  be  effected;  for  in- 
stance, to  search  for  the  position  to  be  taken  up  by  the  enemy 
and  to  ascertain  the  numbers  of  his  troops  by  such  observations 
as  he  can  make  without  disclosing  his  own  proximity;  or,  he  may 
be  directed  to  feel  for  the  enemy  in  a  particular  quarter  until  he 
strikes  him;  or  he  might  be  directed  to  report  on  the  resources  of 


MINOR  TACTICS.  441 

the  country,  the  facilities  and  obstacles  it  presents  for  advance, 
and  the  general  lines  of  communication. 

3587.  Q.  To  what  extent  may  strong  reconnoitring  parties  push 
their  reconnaissance,  and  by  whom  are  they  ordered  out  ?  A.  The 
reconnaissance  may  be  pushed  far  beyond  the  zone  of  the  smaller 
reconnoitring  patrols.  They  are  generally  ordered  out  by  the  gen- 
eral commanding. 

3588.  Q.  How  may  infantry  and  cavalry  be  combined  in  a 
strong  reconnoitring  party  ?  A.  In  a  varied  country,  infantry  is 
joined  to  cavalry  aa  its  support.  The  infantry  would  accompany 
the  cavalry  to  certain  points,  past  which  the  horse  must  fall  back 
in  retiring.  These  points  the  infantry  would  hold  to  secure  the 
retreat  of  the  cavalry,  which  latter  would  then  advance  rapidly 
to  the  front  to  complete  the  reconnaissance.  The  cavalry,  in  its 
turn,  would  cover  the  retreat  of  the  infantry  across  any  open 
ground. 

3589.  Q.  How  might  mounted  infantry,  with  machine-guns,  be 
employed  on  reconnoitring  duty?  A.  H  they  were  available, 
they  could  take  the  place  of  other  infantry  as  being  more  mobile, 
in  cases  where  the  presence  of  tljis  arm  is  desired.  The  addition 
of  such  troops  gives  to  reconnoitring  parties  of  this  kind  a 
strength  and  power  of  resistance  which  cavalry  can  never  attain 
by  itself. 

3590.  Q.  When  cavalry  and  infantry  are  acting  together  on* 
reconnoitring  duty,  what  should  be  the  relative  position  of  the 
two  arms  ?  A.  The  cavalry  should  be  well  to  the  front  in  the 
advance,  so  long  as  the  ground  permits.  The  infantry  in  rear 
takes  up  successive  positions  favorable  for  defense,  as  it  advances, 
so  that  if  at  any  moment  the  cavalry  is  driven  back,  it  will  be  pro- 
tected in  its  retreat  by  the  infantry.  In  the  return  march  the 
infantry  takes  the  lead,  unless  hard  pressed  in  a  close  country, 
when  the  cavalry  is  sent  on  in  front. 

ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  OF  INFANTRY. 

3591.  Q.  "What  is  the  order  in  which  modem  infantry  must 
fight  ?  A.  In  dispersed  order,  when  opposed  to  the  fire  of  modern 
artillery  and  small  arms. 

3593.  Q.  What  qualities  of  infantry  are  more  necessary  now  than 
ever  before,  and  why  so  ?  A.  Precision  and  steadiness  of  execu- 
tion are  more  than  ever  a  necessity  on  account  of  the  dispersion 
and  isolation  of  individuals  in  the  extended  line  and  of  the  sub- 
stitution of  groups  or  company  columns,  under  many  separate 
leaders,  for  the  battalion  or  brigade  columns  formerly  employed. 

3593.  Q.  In  what  is  the  difference  of  the  military  training  of 
the  soldier  now  and  formerly?  A.  The  steady  work  of  the  drill- 
sergeant  is  now  more  of  a  necessity  than  formerly  to  the  infan- 
try soldier.   His  exercises  in  musketry,  which  teach  him  to  use  his 


442  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

weapon  with  skill  and  to  the  best  advantage,  are  also  indispen- 
sably necessary. 

3594.  Q.  Where  should  the  education  of  the  infantry  soldier  for 
combat  commence?  A.  Where  the  instruction  afforded  by  the 
drill-ground  and  rifle-range  ends. 

3595.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  company  officer  in  connection 
with  the  instruction  of  an  infantry  soldier  for  combat  ?  A.  To 
exercise  the  drilled  soldier  in  all  the  minutest  details  of  the  prob- 
able phases  of  attack  and  defense. 

3596.  Q.  What  should  be  the  individual  inst^ruction  of  an  infantry 
soldier  to  render  him  perfect?  A.  That  which  accustoms  him 
not  only  to  act  in  group  or  company,  but  even  alone  and  unsup- 
ported, when  occasion  demands  it. 

3597.  Q.  What  is  the  general  object  of  all  fighting?  A.  So  far 
as  the  infantry  soldier  is  concerned,  is  either  to  drive  the  enemy 
from  a  position,  in  order  to  occupy  it  himself,  or  to  prevent  the 
enemy  from  seizing  a  position  which  he,  the  soldier,  already  occu- 
pies. 

3598.  Q.  What  constitutes  the  earliest  means  for  attaining  the 
object  sought  in  an  engagement  ?  A.  An  effective  fire  employed 
by  the  assailant  in  one  case,  or  by  the  defender  in  the  other. 

3599.  Q.  What  constitute  the  two  essentials  in  producing  an 
effective  fire?  A.  The  first  essential  is  fulfilled  when  the  soldier 
uses  his  weapon  at  distances  which  give  him  the  best  chance  of 
hitting  his  mark;  the  second  when  he  knows  how  to  reap  advan- 
tage from  cover,  and  how  to  save  himself  from  the  effects  of  hostile 
fire  by  adroit  movement  when  in  open  ground. 

3600.  Q.  What  should  every  man  be  taught  ?  A.  To  utilize  to 
the  fullest  extent  all  kinds  of  cover  that  may  be  available,  either 
in  his  advance  or  when  he  takes  up  a  position  of  rest  or  defense. 
It  is  also  of  paramount  importance  that  he  should  be  practised 
constantly  in  quitting  cover,  both  for  advance  and  retreat. 

3601.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  a  soldier  fire  from  shelter? 
A.  If  behind  a  thick  tree,  he  should  fire  from  the  right  side  of  it, 
resting  his  left  elbow  against  the  trunk,  v»^hich  covers  his  body; 
if  the  tree  is  slight  and  does  not  afford  much  protection,  it  must 
merely  be  used  to  steady  the  rifle.  If  firing  from  a  window  or 
through  an  opening  or  loophole  of  any  kind,  he  should  rest 
agamst  the  left  side  of  it.  If  behind  a  bank,  or  hasty  parapet  of 
earth,  the  rifle  should  be  rested  on  the  crest,  the  soldier  standin'g, 
kneehng  or  lying  down  behind  it,  according  to  its  height  from  the 
ground  or  trench.  If  firing  from  behind  hedges,  standing  corn, 
or  anythmg  which  only  gives  concealment  from  view,  the  soldier 
should,  if  possible,  change  his  position  immediately  after  dis- 
charging his  rifle.  Should  there  be  no  cover,  the  soldier  may  lie 
down  flat  with  his  elbows  on  the  ground  (or  as  taught  in  the 
American  service,  when  acting  individually,  on  his  back)  and 


umon  TACtics.  443 

steadying  his  rifle  with  sticks  or  a  small  pile  of  stones,  or  any- 
thing immediately  available  for  the  moment. 

3602.  Q.  What  should  be  impressed  on  the  men  with  regard  to 
ammunition  before  they  are  permitted  to  fire?  A.  That  the 
ammunition  should  not  be  wasted  during  an  engagement;  that 
not  a  single  round  should  be  expended  without  a  fair  prospect  of 
its  being  effective. 

3603.  Q.  What  is  the  limit  for  aimed  fire  at  short  and  medium 
ranges  against  various  objects  ?  A.  An  enemy  whose  head  can 
only  be  perceived,  up  to  200  yards;  men  half-hidden  by  cover,  up 
to  400  yards;  skirmishers  or  infantry  scouts  advancing  or  retir- 
ing, up  to  500  yards;  extended  infantry  in  the  open,  or  single 
cavalry  scouts,  up  to  600  yards;  groups  or  troops  in  support, 
up  to  700  yards;  reserves,  or  a  battery  of  artillery,  up  to  800 
yards. 

3604.  Q.  When  should  volley-firing  be  generally  employed  and 
at  what  distances  found  effective  by  sections?  A.  At  a  section 
of  infantry  in  close  formation,  up  to  1000  yards;  a  half  company 
of  infantry  or  two  guns  of  artillery,  up  to  1200  yards;  battalion 
or  company  columns,  or  compact  bodies  of  artillery  or  cavalry,  up 
to  1700  yards. 

3605.  Q.  What  should  men  be  taught  with  regard  to  the  lia- 
bility of  tiring  too  high  ?  A.  They  should  be  taught  to  fire  low, 
because  if  too  low,  the  bullets  may  yet  strike  by  ricochet,  and  at 
any  rate  make  the  enemy  hesitate  to  come  nearer.  If  fired  over- 
head they  have  rather  a  tendency  to  encourage  the  enemy  and 
cause  him  to  quicken  his  advance. 

3606.  Q.  What  are  the  general  conditions  under  which  the  sol- 
dier has  to  act  in  infantry  combat  ?  A.  This  is  considered  under 
three  heads.  Fi7'st — When  approaching  to  attack  an  enemy  who 
is  more  or  less  under  cover.  Second — When  approaching  to  at- 
tack an  enemy  who  advances  to  the  encounter.  Third — When 
awaiting  behind  cover  the  expected  attack  of  an  advancing  enemy. 

THE  INFANTRY   SOLDIER    IN  ATTACK  AND   DEFENSE,    ALONE 
OR   IN  DETACHED   GROUPS. 

3607.  Q.  How  should  the  soldier  acting  alone,  when  advancing 
against  an  enemy  more  or  less  under  cover,  govern  himself  ?  A. 
He  should  move  rapidly  from  one  shelter  to  another,  without 
bending  down  or  assuming  a  creeping  attitude  at  the  long  dis- 
tances. The  upright  position  at  long  ranges  is  as  safe  as  the  stoop- 
ing posture,  and  better  enables  a  man  to  keep  his  eye  on  the 
enemy  and  to  select  the  best  cover  for  himself  as  he  advances. 
He  may  carry  the  rifle  at  a  trail  or  in  the  most  convenient  manner 
to  himself. 

3608.  Q.  When  should  the  advancing  soldier  deliver  fire  ?  A. 
When  he  comes  within  medium  ranges,  but  always  at  the  halt  and 


444  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

from  behind  cover  if  it  is  available;  be  should  deliver  it  slowly 
and  deliberately  at  first,  but  more  rapidly  as  he  closes  upon  the 
enemy's  position. 

3609.  Q.  How  should  the  advancing  soldier  work  up  to  the 
enemy  from  800  to  500  yards  ?  A.  The  danger  of  being  hit  being 
not  very  great  for  a  single  man,  he  may  allow  himself  to  be  clearly 
seen  when  crossing  open  spaces,  for  he  can  thus  advance  more 
rapidly  and  with  fewer  halts,  which  are  no  advantage  to  him  until 
he  begins  to  fire. 

3610.  Q.  When  does  cover  to  the  advancing  soldier  become  of 
great  importance  ?  A.  In  crossing  the  space  which  lies  between 
500  and  300  yards.  He  should  rush  from  one  point  of  shelter 
to  another  at  full  speed,  and  if  the  ground  is  bare  he  must 
occasionally  throw  himself  flat  down,  to  take  breath  and  also  to 
fire. 

3611.  Q.  What  action  should  the  advancing  infantry  soldier 
take  when  he  is  nearer  than  300  yards  to  the  enemy  ?  A.  He 
must  select  points  of  shelter  close  to  one  another,  and  either 
dash  on  from  one  to  the  other  with  a  spurt,  or  creep  or  crawl  up. 

3612.  Q.  The  closer  the  soldier  is  to  the  enemy,  what  must  he 
do  regarding  grouping  ?  A.  He  must  endeavor  to  group  with  his 
comrades  behind  each  sheltered  resting-place,  for  the  purpose  of 
bringing  a  rapid  and  continuous  fire  to  bear  on  his  adversaries  in 
preparation  for  the  final  rush. 

3613.  Q.  What  should  be  the  conduct  of  a  scout  in  front  of  a 
group- working  up  to  an  enemy  whose  position  is  not  quite  known  ? 
A.  He  should  not  at  once  double  out  to  a  fixed  distance  and  post 
himself.  He  should  work  gradually  up  to  the  front  with  due 
precaution,  taking  every  advantage  of  the  ground  to  conceal  him- 
self, not  only  to  try  and  get  a  sight  of  the  enemy,  but  also  to  select 
good  cover  for  the  group  to  move  up  to,  while  he  himself  again 
advances  to  reconnoitre. 

3614.  Q.  How  should  a  small  group  advance  against  an  enemy 
for  the  purpose  of  attacking  him  ?  A.  The  group  should  be  ex- 
tended for  attack  by  files,  with  intervals  of  three  paces  between 
the  files,  and  should  advance  from  point  to  point  taking  every 
advantage  of  cover  until  within  firing  distance.  The  rear-rank 
men  then  come  up  into  line  with  their  front-rank  men,  and  the 
group  advances  in  extended  order  as  a  fighting  line.  If  the  group 
be  of  more  than  four  men  some  of  the  party  may  follow  in  sup- 
port until  the  group  nears  the  ememy,  when,  taking  advantage 
of  a  halt  behind  cover,  they  double  up  and  reinforce  the  fighting 
line.  If  a  scout  is  out  in  front,  he  should  wait  under  cover  on 
arriving  near  enough  to  the  position  to  reconnoitre,  and  join  the 
fighting  line  in  the  final  advance. 

3615.  Q.  What  line  of  conduct  should  govern  an  infantry  sol- 
dier, acting  alone  and  separated  from  his  comrades,  who  desires 
to  attack  an  enemy  who  advances  to  meet  him  ?    A.  He  should 


Mmon  TACTICS.  445 

seize  the  opportunity  of  firing  from  behind  his  own  cover  when 
his  adversary  shows  himself  in  the  act  of  advancing,  and  make  a 
rush  forward  to  the  next  cover  at  the  instant  he  sees  the  enemy 
about  to  halt,  and  in  the  act  of  looking  out  for  shelter. 

3616.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  an  infantry  soldier  fire  at  a 
single  cavalryman,  at  mounted  officers,  and  at  artillery  ?  A.  He 
should  endeavor,  if  at  any  distance,  to  aim  at  them  when  a  side- 
view  of  the  horse  is  obtained.  If  they  are  close,  the  horses  should 
be  aimed  at  when  in  motion,  and  the  riders  when  at  the  halt,  or 
when  in  the  act  of  turning  their  horses.  Aim  should  always  be 
taken  at  the  horses  of  guns  when  artillery  is  in  motion ;  when  un- 
limbered,  the  men  of  the  gun  detachments  should  be  fired  at;  if 
at  long  range,  the  moment  of  unlimbering  or  limbering  up  should 
be  watched  for,  as  then  the  men  and  horses  are  all  close  to  one 
another. 

3617.  Q.  "What  should  be  the  action  of  a  group  of  men  behind 
cover  when  the  advancing  enemy  reinforces  his  fighting  line  ?  A. 
The  men  must  increase  the  rapidity  of  their  fire  to  the  utmost, 
preserving  accuracy,  in  order  to  counterbalance  the  enemy's  acces- 
sion of  strength. 

3618.  Q.  How  should  an  individual  soldier  or  group  maintain 
a  running  fight  in  retreat  ?  A.  Whether  the  retreat  be  forced  or 
voluntary,  it  should  always  be  conducted  in  good  order.  The 
soldier  should  fall  back  at  a  rapid  pace  from  one  point  to  another, 
turning  to  fire  when  under  shelter,  and  then  make  up  further 
rushes  to  the  rear,  in  succession,  until  beyond  range.  If  three  or 
four  men  are  falling  back  together,  two  should  first  retire,  a  little 
scattered  and  turn  to  fire  from  behind  cover,  while  the  others  pass 
between  them  at  a  run  to  more  distant  shelter,  when  they  in  turn 
open  fire,  and  so  on.  If  cover  does  not  exist,  the  men  should 
throw  themselves  on  the  ground  and  maintain  the  running  fight 
by  firing  as  above  described  while  on  the  ground. 

3619.  Q.  What  should  be  the  action  of  an  infantry  soldier  if 
attacked  in  the  open  by  cavalry  ?  A.  Unless  the  numbers  be  over- 
powering, if  suddenly  overtaken  his  best  chance  of  escaping  injury 
is  to  throw  himself  flat  on  the  ground — his  worst  chance  is  to  run 
away.  If  the  soldier  is  attacked  by  a  swordsman,  he  should  try 
to  keep  on  the  left  side  of  the  mounted  man,  and  if  he  endeavors 
to  bayonet  his  an  adversary's  horse  he  should  stab  it  in  the  flank, 
never  in  the  chest. 

3620.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  conducting  the  attack  by 
infantry  with  a  group  of  ten  or  twelve  men  ?  A.  A  portion  of 
the  party  would  be  retained  in  support  at  a  convenient  distance 
in  rear.  The  support,  extended  by  files,  at  two  or  three  paces 
intervals  for  the  early  movements,  would  join  the  fighting  line  at 
the  critical  moment  of  the  advance,  or  be  employed  to  turn  the 
enemy's  flank. 

3621.  Q.  If  the  attacking  party  should  have  to  retire  before  the 


416  THE  AKMY  OFFICER'S    EXAMIXj:^. 

reinforcement  of  the  fighting-line  has  taken  place,  what  should  be 
done  ?  A.  The  support  should  cover  the  retreat  of  the  latter  by 
extending  to  open  order,  lying  down  under  cover,  and  opening 
fire  on  the  enemy  when  the  front  is  cleared  by  the  fighting  line 
having  passed  to  the  rear.  The  fighting  line  would  then  take  up  a 
sheltered  position  to  cover  the  retreat  of  the  support. 

3622.  Q.  How  should  a  party  of  ten  or  twelve  infantrymen  act 
on  the  defensive  ?  A.  All  the  men  should  be  kept  together  in  the 
front  line;  but,  position  should,  if  possible,  be  taken  up  in  such 
manner  that  two  or  three  men  would  be  under  cover  in  a  group 
together  at  an  interval  of  some  ten  yards  or  so  from  the  next 
group.  The  disposition  must,  however,  in  all  cases  be  so  much 
influenced  by  the  ground  that  no  precise  course  of  action  can  be 
dictated . 

3623.  Q.  If  men  become  dispersed  in  action,  what  should  they 
do?  A.  If  separated  from  their  own  leaders  they  should  form  in 
groups  under  the  nearest  non-commissioned  officer  or  the  oldest 
soldier,  and  even  if  two  privates  are  alone  together,  one  should  take 
command.  In  the  fighting  line,  small  compact  bodies  here  and 
there,  according  as  cover  enables  them  to  collect,  are  of  great 
value,  forming  good  rallying-points  and  adding  solidity  to  the  line. 

THE  COMPANY  OF  INFANTRY  IN  ATTACK. 

3624.  Q.  What  is  the  strength  of  a  company  of  infantry  on  a 
war-footing,  and  how  divided.  A.  One  hundred  men,  divided  into 
two  platoons  and  four  sections. 

3625.  Q.  How  is  a  force  of  infantry,  intended  for  attack,  di- 
vided ?  A.  Into  first,  second,  and  third  lines.  The  first,  or 
fighting-line,  is  subdivided  into  firing-line,  supports  and  reserves, 
and  is  to  engage  the  enemy  and  break  down  his  resistance  by  fire- 
action,  under  cover  of  which  it  advances  to  charging  distance. 
Thence  it  delivers  such  a  heavy,  rapid  fire  as  to  enable  the  second 
line  to  close  up  immediately  behind  it,  in  readiness  to  pass 
through  the  firing-line  and  assault  the  position.  As  the  second 
line  advances  to  the  assault  through  the  first  line,  the  latter 
ceases  firing  and  joins  in  the  attack.  The  third  line  backs  up  the 
two  front  lines,  and  is  intended  to  confirm  a  success,  or,  in  case 
of  a  reverse,  to  enable  the  leading  troops  to  retire. 

3626.  Q.  What  is  the  normal  procedure  of  a  company  when 
acting  as  a  portion  of  the  first  line  in  attack  ?  A.  The  captain 
should  point  out  to  the  company  the  position  it  is  intended  to 
assail,  and  some  prominent  object  in  a  direct  line  with  it  must  be 
noted,  so  that  the  men  may  dearly  mark  their  line  of  advance. 
A  non-commissioned  officer  is  detailed  to  be  responsible  for  the 
correct  marching  of  the  centre  file  of  the  company— that  is,  for 
the  company  named  as  the  directing  company  of  the  battalion. 

3627.  Q.  When  is  the  attacking  force  said  to  be  within  the  first 


MINOR  TACTICS.  447 

zone  (or  within  the  range  of  artillery  fire),  and  what  is  then  done 
A.  When  within  3500  yards;  it  is  then  formed  for  attack,  the  com- 
pany being  divided  into  the  firing-line  and  supports.  The  second 
and  third  sections  advance  to  form  the  firing-line  under  the  junior 
lieutenant,  the  two  flank  sections  following  at  200  yards'  distance 
as  supports  under  the  senior  lieutenant.  These  frwo  last  sections 
maintain,  as  far  as  possible,  positions  in  rear  of  the  outer  flanks 
of  their  firing-line  ;  scouts  are  sent  out  to  reconnoitre. 

3628.  Q.  What  is  considered  the  second  zone,  and  what  is  then 
done  by  an  attacking  company  in  battalion  ?  A.  The  second  zone 
is  within  1400  yards  of  the  enemy;  here  the  firing-line  forms  line 
of  sections,  and  continues  to  advance;  at  1200  yards  it  forms  line 
of  squads ;  when  about  900  yards  from  the  position,  the  squads 
will  be  deployed  into  a  line  of  skirmishers,  with  three  paces 
interval. 

3629.  Q.  What  is  considered  the  third  zone,  and  what  is  then 
done  by  an  attacking  company  in  battalion  ?  A.  The  third  zone 
is  within  800  yards  of  tlie  enemy,  and  when  that  distance  is 
reached  the  firing  line  has  reached  effective  range  and  firing  is 
permitted;  but,  the  captain  must  decide  when  it  is  to  commence 
and  to  what  extent  it  is  to  be  employed.  At  tliis  stage  the  fire 
will  be  nearly  all  delivered  by  volleys.  The  section  commanders 
in  the  front  line  will  receive  instruction  to  fire  by  volleys  by  al- 
ternate sections,  or  both  sections  to  fire  one  or  more  volleys  at 
each  halt.  In  each  case  of  ordering  a  section  to  fire,  its  com- 
mander will  first  point  out  the  precise  object  at  which  aim  is  to  be 
taken,  and  give  out  the  range  so  that  the  men  can  adjust  their 
sights  thereto.  During  the  short  halts,  the  supporting  sections 
close  up  to  150  yards  from  the  firing-line. 

3630.  Q.  What  must  the  sections  in  the  firing-line  of  an  infan- 
try attack  do,  while  advancing,  as  regards  each  other  ?  A.  They 
should  work  together  as  far  as  possible,  halt  at  or  about  the  same 
time,  advance  again  together  after  the  fire  of  the  section  has  been 
delivered  until  at  500  yards.  Thus,  the  line  may  make  a  momen- 
tary halt  under  any  available  cover,  No.  3  section  delivers  a  vol- 
ley, and  No.  2  section  rushes  to  the  front  to  the  next  suitable 
spot.  If  no  cover  is  to  be  had,  the  section  is  halted  when  it  has 
gained  fifteen  yards,  and  the  men  throw  themselves  flat  on  the 
ground.  They  then  fire  one  or  more  volleys  as  directed,  when 
No.  3  section  will  rush  forward  and  lie  down  about  fifteen  yards 
in  advance  of  the  line  of  No.  2.  In  this  manner  the  advance  will 
continue. 

3631.  Q.  During  an  attack,  while  the  sections  are  advancing 
by  rushes,  what  should  the  support  be  doing  ?  A.  While  the  men 
are  halting  to  fire,  the  support  gradually  approaches  the  firiug- 
line.  On  the  order  to  reinforce  being  given  (which  should  bo 
delayed  as  long  as  possible),  the  sections  in  support  will  extend 
to  open  order,  and  move  up  rapidly  on  the  flank  or  flanks  of  the 


448  THE  ARMY   OFFICEE'S  EXAMIIS'ER. 

firing-line.  When  both  sections  have  reinforced  the  firing-line,  the 
lieutenants  will  each  command  his  own  platoon  in  the  firing-line. 
3633.  Q.  What  i^  the  movement  of  the  firing-line  after  the  sup- 
ports have  joined  it.  A.  The  company  continues  to  advance  by 
alternate  platoon  rushes,  volleys  being  delivered  either  by  pla- 
toons or  sections,  until  some  favorable  ground  about  150  yards 
from  the  position  is  reached,  w^hen  the  captain  selects  some 
favorable  ground  from  which  to  make  the  assault,  and  having 
obtained  this  position  he  causes  rapid  fire  to  be  made.  If  any  of 
the  supports  have  not  been  brought  up,  they  join  the  line  at  the 
command  rapid  fire.* 

3633.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  firing-line  from  the  moment 
it  arrives  within  effective  range  of  the  position  assailed  ?  A.  It 
must  maintain  a  constant  fire  (as  a  rule  by  volleys)  lipon  the 
defenders. 

3634.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  support  as  the  attack  develops  ? 
A.  The  support  must  reinforce  the  firing-line,  in  order  to  keep  up 
a  strong  fire  and  prevent  its  slackening.  It  will  in  the  first  instance 
follow  the  firing  line  in  echelon,  and  must  be  prepared  to  resist  a 
flank  attack  upon  the  firing-line  as  it  advances,  and  generally  to 
give  strength  and  confidence  to  it. 

3635.  Q.  What  must  be  done  if  the  assailed  position  is  taken  ? 
A.  The  commander  must  restrain  his  men  from  pursuit,  and  with 
the  aid  of  his  officers,  reform  the  company  as  soon  as  possible, 
contenting  himself  with  harassing  the  retreating  enemy  by  one 
or  two  parting  volleys. 

3636.  Q.  What  should  a  commander  attacking  a  position,  en- 
deavor to  do,  when  anything  like  equality  of  force  exists  ?  A.  He 
should  endeavor  to  attack  the  flanks  of  his  adversary,  even  by 
the  smallest  possible  detachments.  During  the  progress  of  the 
engagement  no  opportunity  should  be  lost  by  section-leaders,  of 
taking  the  enemy's  line  or  a  part  of  it,  in  flank,  by  small  groups 
of  men  judiciously  disposed.  At  the  final  stage  too,  even  when 
the  reserve  has  been  brought  up  close  to  the  support,  but  is  not 
yet  committed  to  the  fight,  the  commander  may  see  that  a  front 
attack  would  be  unsuccessful,  and  that  a  prolongation  to  a  flank 
may  be  made,  under  cover  of  the  ground,  by  part  or  the  whole 
of  the  force  in  hand,  by  which  means  the  enemy  may  be  suc- 
cessfully taken  in  flank  at  the  moment  when  his  whole  attention 
may  be  absorbed  by  the  rapid  fire  of  the  firing-line. 

3637.  Q.  What  is  the  special  duty  of  the  support  during  the 
preliminary  advance  for  attack?  A.  It  is  to  watch  for  flank 
attacks  from  the  enemy,  notice  of  which  should  be  given  by 

*  All  questions  following  this,  which  relate  to  the  "Attack  and 
Defense  of  Infantry,"  refer  to  general  conduct,  as  the  method  in 
I  lie  text- book  is  somewhat  different  from  the  American  Drill  Regu- 
liilious. 


MII^OR  TACTICS.  449 

flanking  scouts ;  the  reserves  and  second  line,  if  there  is  one, 
must  further  take  their  share  in  resisting  them,  should  the  dan- 
ger from  this  source  be  great,  especially  when  both  flanks  are 
more  or  less  exposed. 

3638.  Q.  When  is  it  advisable  to  retreat,  instead  of  assault- 
ing, at  the  final  stage  of  attack  ?  A.  Should  the  commander, 
at  the  commencement  of  the  final  stage,  see  that  a  front  at- 
tack must  fail,  and  that  a  flank  attack  is  impossible,  he  should 
then  endeavor  to  retire,  although  such  a  movement  can  only  be 
carried  out  with  considerable  loss.  The  rear  sections,  if  acting 
as  a  reserve,  and  not  already  launched  into  the  firing-line,  will 
enable  the  latter  to  fall  back  under  covering  fire.  The  reserve 
itself,  deployed,  may  then  retire  by  echelons  of  sections,  through 
the  firing-line,  each  section  firing  a  volley  before  its  retreat.  The 
firing-line,  lying  down,  or  sheltered  behind  cover,  must  open  a 
rapid  fire  as  the  reserve  retires  through  its  ranks.  The  com- 
manders of  the  sections  should  make  every  effort  to  retire  in  good 
order. 

3639.  Q.  What  is  the  great  difliculty  in  retreats  ?  A.  It  is  to 
choose  the  exact  and  proper  moment  for  retiring,  for  a  retreat 
should  never  be  precipitated  so  long  as  any  chance  of  success  re- 
mains. If,  however,  the  retreat  should  be  protracted  too  long, 
and  the  reserve  be  merged  into  the  front  line  before  the  necessity 
for  falling  back  is  admitted,  the  retirement  might  easily  become 
a  rout;  for  a  line  retiring  under  fire,  without  support  at  hand, 
must  almost  inevitably  fall  into  confusion. 

3640.  Q.  What  is  the  distribution  of  an  infantry  force  on  the 
defensive  ?  A.  It  is  much  the  same  as  in  the  attack,  but  its  duties 
are  necessarily  diiferent.  The  firing-line  will  occupy  as  much 
ground  in  the  extreme  front  of  the  position  as  may  be  decided 
to  be  taken  up.  The  supports  and  reserves  will  be  concealed 
from  the  view  and  fire  of  the  enemy  as  much  as  possible,  and 
near  enough  at  hand  to  feed  the  firing-line,  as  casualties  occur, 
or  to  move  to  whatever  part  may  require  urgent  aid. 

3641.  Q.  What  is  the  mode  of  posting  the  firing-line  on  the 
defensive,  when  the  country  is  close  and  the  position  well  suited 
for  defense  ?  A.  If  on  the  crest-line  of  a  hill,  with  an  easy  line 
of  retreat,  the  supports  and  reserves  may  be  nearer  to  the  front, 
and  the  firing-line  need  not  be  so  strong  as  would  be  necessary  in 
open  ground,  with  hasty  earth-cover  alone  available  to  shelter  the 
defenders.  The  portion  of  the  front  line  of  defense  to  be  held 
being  indicated  to  the  captain,  he  decides  the  manner  in  which  it 
must  be  occupied.  At  the  most  probable  points  of  attack,  the 
men  will  be  as  close  as  possible,  allowing  free  use  of  the  rifle; 
while  at  other  points,  if  the  ground  is  difficult  of  access  in  front, 
they  need  not  be  so  thickly  posted. 

3643.  Q.  The  ground  having  been  marked  out  for  occupation, 
on  the  defensive,  what  should  be  done  with  the  company,  and 


450 

what  should  the  captain  ascertain  at  this  point  ?  A.  The  company 
should  be  kept  back  under  cover  during  the  early  part  of  the 
defense,  and  the  captain  should  take  this  opportunity  of  ascer- 
taining the  ranges  to  all  marked  objects  in  the  line  of  advance; 
both  he  and  his  section -leaders  making  a  careful  note  of  the 
same. 

3643.  Q.  What  should  be  done  by  the  defenders  of  a  position 
when  the  enemy  has  entered  the  second  zone  ?  A.  The  order  for 
the  firing-line  to  move  into  position  is  given,  upon  which  the 
troops  take  post  as  has  already  been  arranged.  Long-range  vol- 
leys by  platoons  or  sections  may  now  be  directed  upon  the  enemy, 
if  a  favorable  opportunity  offers.  Should  casualties  occur  in  the 
two  centre-sections  under  the  enemy's  fire,  they  will  close  on  their 
centre,  and  the  gaps  on  their  flanks  will  be  filled  at  once  from  the 
supporting  sections. 

3644.  Q,  At  medium  ranges,  what  must  be  done  at  the  points 
specially  threatened  by  the  enemy's  advance  ?  A.  They  must  be 
strengthened  by  full  reinforcement  from  the  supports,  and,  if  nec- 
essary, from  the  local  reserves.  If  the  company  is  stationed  at 
one  of  these  points,  the  support  will  be  moved  up  in  full  to  the 
firing-line,  and  the  captain  will  take  post  in  rear  of  its  centre. 
Volleys  will  now  be  fired,  not  only  at  the  enemy's  skirmish-line, 
but  at  his  supports  and  reserves  as  they  come  well  into  view. 

3645.  Q.  At  what  point  of  time  is  it  best  for  the  defense  to  aim 
the  volleys  at  the  enemy's  firing-line  ?  A.  When  each  alternate 
portion  of  it  makes  its  rush  to  the  front,  and  becomes  for  the 
moment  fully  exposed. 

3646.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  defense  at  the  last  stage,  if  the 
enemy  is  not  beaten  back?  A.  The  tiring  line  is  finally  rein- 
forced by  the  reserves,  and  independent  fire  will  be  employed. 

3647.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  second  line  of  the  defense  wiien 
the  enemy  prepares  to  assault  the  position  ?  A.  It  fixes  bayonets 
and  moves  up  to  the  rear  of  the  firing-line,  to  meet  the  assailants, 
if  they  attempt  to  storm  the  position. 

3648.  Q.  If  there  is  a  third  line  of  defense,  what  might  it  do  at 
the  time  the  enemy  assaults  the  position  ?  A.  It  may  possibly,  at 
this  stage,  move  out  to  a  flank,  in  order  to  make  a  counter-attack 
as  the  enemy  assails  the  front. 

3649.  Q.  What  must  be  done  by  the  defenders  if  the  assault 
of  a  position  should  fail  ?  A.  The  troops  remaining  in  posi- 
tion should  fire  volleys  on  the  retreating  enemy,  and  the  third 
line,  if  there  be  one,  make  a  counter-attack,  according  to  circum- 
stances. 

3650.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  defense  if  the  defenders  are 
driven  from  their  position?  A.  The  first  and  second  lines 
must  endeavor  to  retreat  (under  cover  of  the  third  line,  if  there 
oe  one). 


MINOR  TACTICS.  451 


THE  COMPANY  ACTING  ALONE   IN  DEFENSE. 

3651.  Q.  How  should  a  company  ordered  to  take  up  a  position 
of  defense  regulate  its  march  to  such  position  ?  A.  It  should 
move  to  its  ground  in  the  usual  order  of  march,  unless  within 
reach  of  the  enemy,  when  it  should  advance  in  fighting  order, 
preceded  by  scouts.  At  about  150  yards  from  the  position,  the 
leading  section  is  halted,  and  the  scouts  are  reinforced  so  as  to 
enable  a  complete  reconnaissance  to  be  made,  by  which  the  com- 
mander can  learn,  not  only  if  the  ground  itself  is  clear  of  the 
enemy,  but  if  there  is  any  indication  of  his  presence  in  the  imme- 
diate vicinity. 

3652.  Q.  If  an  examination  of  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  a 
company  acting  alone  on  the  defensive  be  satisfactory,  how  should 
the  commander  proceed  to  occupy  it  ?  A.  The  leading  section  may 
be  marched  up  to  the  position,  which  it  occupies  from  flank  to 
flank,  the  men  getting  behind  cover  or  lying  down  in  temporary 
positions  till  the  front  line  is  finally  fixed.  The  commander  looks 
to  the  approaches,  the  flanks,  and  the  best  means  of  retreat,  and 
then  as  quickly  as  possible  decides  upon  the  position  for  his 
tiring-line.  It  may  be  composed  of  the  leading  section,  which  is 
accordingly  posted  in  a  general  line,  behind  the  most  suitable 
cover  from  which  the  ground  in  front  can  be  brought  under  fire. 
A  few  well-advanced  posts  are  occupied  by  groups,  provided  the 
ground  is  favorable,  for  the  purpose  of  making  the  enemy  develop 
his  line  of  attack.  The  support  should  be  placed  in  as  sheltered 
position  as  possible  in  rear  of  the  firing-line,  and  so  close  at  hand 
that  no  difiiculty  can  arise  in  reinforcing  the  latter,  as  required 
during  the  engagement.  It  should  consist  of  No.  2  section.  The 
remainder  of  the  company  should  be  held  in  hand  in  rear,  part 
to  act  as  local  reserve  and  part  as  a  second  line,  or  both  sections 
to  be  employed  in  whatever  way  required  as  the  attack  developed. 
It  may  be  moved,  either  wholly  or  in  part,  so  as  to  be  ip  the  most 
favorable  position,  if  mere  passive  resistance  is  intended,  for 
quickly  reinforcing  the  threatened  part  of  the  front  line,  or  for 
repelling  a  flank  attack  of  the  enemy,  or  for  the  purpose  of  tak- 
ing the  offensive  and  delivering  a  counter-stroke  upon  the  assail- 
ants at  the  proper  moment, 

ATTACKS  WITH  THE  BAYONET. 

3653.  Q.  How  should  attacks  with  the  bayonet  be  conducted  ? 
A.  Except  where  opportunity  arises  of  surprising  an  enemy  by  a 
rush  upon  him,  or  of  seizing  rapidly  upon  a  position  or  ground 
which  he  has  not  yet  altogether  taken  up,  no  attack  with  the 
bayonet  should  be  made  without  having  been  preceded  by  such 
a  heavy  and  close  fire  as  to  break  the  enemy's  line  and  throw 
him  into  confusion.  Attacks  with  the  bayonet,  when  they  are 
premature  or  rash,  result  in  disorder  and  heavy  loss,  and  are 


453  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

easily  converted  into  a  rout.  A  bayonet  charge  once  engaged  in 
should  be  pressed  vigorously  home.  At  the  close  range  at  which 
bayonet  charges  alone  can  take  place,  the  enemy's  fire  is  really 
less  effective  than  at  longer  distances,  and  once  the  charge  has 
commenced,  the  best  chance  of  safety  lies  in  the  advance,  since 
the  loss  would  certainly  be  doubled  by  retreating  at  such  a  stage. 

•    ATTACKS  BY  CAVALRY. 

3654.  Q.  What  should  be  the  conduct  of  a  firing-line  of  infantry 
attacked  by  cavalry?  A.  If  in  the  open,  men  may  form  files  or 
groups,  according  to  the  amount  of  danger  from  the  charge.  It 
is  always  an  advantage  to  have  clear  spaces  in  the  line,  through 
which  a  portion  of  the  cavalry  is  sure  to  pass  without  doing  any 
injury.  The  extended  line  should  then  lie  down  and  allow  the 
supports  to  complete  the  rout  of  the  cavalry,  or  of  what  remains 
of  them  after  the  charge  upon  the  fighting-line.  The  supports, 
as  a  rule,  will  receive  cavalry  in  line  in  double  ranks.  Denser 
formations  can  hardly  ever  be  necessary;  but  if  the  cavalry 
presses  upon  the  support,  the  flanks  of  the  infantry  may  fall 
back  so  as  to  form  in  double-rank  around  the  commander. 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  OF  CAVALRY. 

3655.  Q.  From  what  source  does  the  proper  tactical  employ- 
ment of  cavalry  in  combat  derive  its  special  attributes  ?  A.  The 
horse  gives  to  cavalry  two  qualities — rapidity  of  movement  and 
weight  of  shock.  By  means  of  the  former,  cavalry  can  pass  with 
celerity  from  one  part  of  the  field  to  another  during  action,  in 
order  to  operate  by  surprise  on  distant  points,  to  profit  by  any 
mistakes  on  the  part  of  the  enemy,  or  to  reinforce  quickly  a  weak 
part  of  the  defense.  If  driven  back  or  required  elsewhere,  it  can 
retire  as  rapidly  as  it  has  advanced.  In  the  pursuit,  also,  after 
an  engagement,  cavalry,  by  its  superior  mobility,  comes  into 
preferable  use  before  the  other  arms.  By  its  weight  in  shock  ac- 
tion, cavalry  has  the  power  of  breaking  the  enemy's  formations, 
or  of  exercising  moral  control  over  his  movements  by  its  presence 
close  by  or  near  at  hand. 


CAVALRY  IN  ATTACK. 

C656.  Q.  What  formations  are  used  by  cavalry  in  attack  ? 
A.  In  line,  generally  in  close  order  ;  sometimes  in  extended 
order. 

3657.  Q.  How  is  the  cavalry  attack  in  close  order  made,  and 
for  what  purpose  ?  A.  It  is  made  in  two  ranks,  if  numbers  allow, 
the  m3D  riding  knee  to  knee.    This  compact  formation  gives  the 


MINOR  TACTICS.  453 

greatest  possible  power  of  shock,  and  it  is  always  employed  in 
charging  cavalry. 

3658.  Q.  When  is  extended  order  made  use  of  by  the  cavalry 
in  attack  ?  A.  Against  infantry  or  artillery,  when  it  is  desirable 
not  to  present  a  compact  object  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy,  and  when 
the  effect  of  the  shock  action  of  the  charge  is  not  required  to 
break  a  formation.  It  may  also  be  employed  in  the  pursuit  of  a 
broken  or  dispersed  force  of  the  enemy  of  any  army. 

3659.  Q.  How  does  a  cavalry  attack  commence  ?  A.  By  a  move- 
ment in  advance,  increasing  in  rapidity  as  the  enemy  is  neared, 
which  is  followed  by  the  shock  of  encounter,  and  is  terminated 
by  personal  engagement.  It  is  necessary,  for  complete  success, 
not  only  that  the  enemy's  formation  should  be  broken,  but  tlrnt 
his  tactical  disposition  should  be  altogether  upset,  and  that  he 
should  suffer  such  serious  loss  as  to  be  unable  to  re-enter  the  lists 
as  a  combatant  during  the  engagement. 

3660.  Q.  What  are  the  two  fundamental  principles  for  the  con- 
duct of  cavalry  in  attack  ?  A.  That  it  should  constantly  seek  to 
attack  the  enemy's  flanks,  and  that  it  should  never  attack  at  all 
without  keeping  a  portion  of  its  strength  in  reserve. 

3661.  Q.  Why  is  the  second  of  the  two  fundamental  principles 
of  cavalry  in  attack  in  direct  connection  with  the  first  ?  A,  As 
the  enemy's  flanks  should  be  assailed  because  they  are  the  weak- 
est points,  so  an  ofiicer  of  cavalry  should  protect  his  own  flanks 
from  attack  by  keeping  troops  in  hand. 

3662.  Q.  Why  is  it  absolutely  necessary  to  keep  a  reserve  dis- 
engaged during  a  cavalry  attack  ?  A.  After  a  successful  cavalry 
encounter,  the  victors  and  the  vanquished  are  alike  in  disorder, 
and  the  most  that  can  be  said  in  favor  of  the  former  is  that  they 
can  rally  more  quickly.  K  a  reserve  is  in  hand,  it  will  cover  the 
operation,  and  complete  the  enemy's  defeat.  But  if  no  reserve 
has  been  kept  by  the  victors,  the  smallest  body  of  fresh  troops 
coming  up  in  aid  of  the  enemy  may  rapidly  turn  victory  into  dis- 
aster ;  for  cavalry  are  never  less  able  to  resist  an  attack  than  im- 
mediately after  a  charge. 

3663.  Q.  What  should  be  the  aim  of  a  cavalry  commander,  and 
what  should  he  do  in  preparing  for  an  attack  ?  A.  His  aim 
should  be  to  place  his  men  in  such  a  position  as  to  render  their 
subsequent  charge  upon  the  enemy  as  effective  as  possible.  Thus 
the  force  should  be  kept  out  of  sight  and  out  of  fire  until  the  time 
for  action  comes.  Ground-scouts  should  be  sent  out  to  reconnoi- 
tre to  the  front  and  flanks,  so  as  to  assist  the  commander  by  their 
inspection  of  the  ground,  and  reconnoitring  groups  must  also  be 
dispatched  to  the  front  and  flanks,  in  order  to  afford  early  and 
constant  intimation  of  the  position  of  the  enemy. 

3664.  Q.  What  would  be  considered  the  most  suitable  occasions 
for  a  cavalry  attack  ?  A.  When  accidents  of  the  ground  enable 
the  force  to  reach  striking  distance  unobserved,  so  that  the  at- 


454  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMII^ER. 

tack  becomes  a  surprise  ;  or,  when  the  enemy,  appearing  to  feel 
the  effects  of  infantry  fire,  hesitates  in  his  advance  and  seems 
disorganized;  or,  when  the  infantry  itself,  being  pressed  by  the 
enemy,  requires  time  to  rally  and  reform,  and  to  have  attack  di- 
verted from  it  for  the  moment.  A  careful  watch  should  be  kept 
upon  the  enemy's  artillery  for  opportunities  of  successful  attack 
on  his  guns.  Any  symptoms  of  disorder  among  the  troops  of  the 
enemy  should  be  taken  advantage  of. 

3665.  Q.  Why  should  the  exact  instant  of  time  selected  for  an 
attack  of  cavalry  be  of  the  highest  importance  ?  A.  If  the  attack 
be  premature  there  is  no  chance  of  surprise,  and  the  design  be- 
comes apparent  to  the  enemy ;  should  it,  on  the  other  hand,  be 
too  long  delayed,  not  only  is  the  golden  opportunity  lost,  but  the 
enemy,  warned  in  time,  may  himself  attack  during  the  deploy- 
ment, thus  reversing  the  intended  action. 

3666.  Q.  What  influence  has  the  ground  upon  an  attack  by 
cavalry?  A.  Although  good,  well-trained  and  well-mounted 
cavalry  will  ride  in  fair  order  over  broken  ground,  the  effect  of  a 
charge  under  such  circumstances  is  much  impaired.  If  the  soil 
is  saturated  with  wet  and  the  ground  heavy  or  swampy,  or  if  the 
land  is  plowed,  or  deep  in  sand  cavalry  move  with  more  or  less 
difficulty.  Generally,  open  ground,  even  if  much  more  varied  by 
accidental  features,  is  favorable,  provided  there  are  passages  by 
which  small  columns  can  move  from  one  open  space  to  another. 
In  open,  level  ground  any  attempt  at  surprise  on  the  part  of  cav- 
alry becomes  impossible;  but  open,  undulating  ground  is  the  best 
for  such  purposes,  and  the  next  best  is  a  combination  of  open  and 
enclosed  or  wooded  ground. 

3667.  Q.  What  is  the  actual  space  necessary  for  a  cavalry  at- 
tack ?  A.  There  should  be  room  en(fugh  to  the  front  for  the 
cavalry  to  advance  with  sufficient  force  deployed,  not  only  for  the 
charge,  but  for  the  further  melee^  and  perhaps  pursuit,  and  this 
is  in  proportion  to  the  strength  employed.  There  should  be 
space  at  the  sides  for  the  movements  necessary  in  a  flank  attack. 
The  ground  should  also' afford  means  of  retreat  to  the  rear,  and 
there  should  be  no  insurmountable  obstacle  upon  which,  if  unsuc- 
cessful, the  cavalry  might  be  suddenly  forced  back. 

3668.  Q,  What  may  be  included  under  the  head  of  direct  at- 
tack f  A.  Every  form  of  frontal  encounter,  even  though  the 
direction  of  the  actual  charge  may  be  more  or  less  oblique  to  the 
enemy's  line. 

8669.  Q.  In  the  direct  attack  by  cavalry  what  is  the  result  in 
proportion  to  ?  A.  To  the  weight  and  strength  of  the  horses, 
and  to  the  steadiness  and  compactness  of  the  charge. 

3670.  Q.  What  may  be  included  under  the  head  of  flanh  at- 
ta/ikf  A.  All  cases  of  attack  from  any  direction,  in  which  a 
portion  of  the  assailants'  line  overlaps  or  outflanks  the  enemy, 
and  is,  therefore,  able  to  wheel  up  at  the  moment  of  attack,  as 


MINOR  TACTICS.  455 

well  as  those  in  which  attack  is  made  directly  upon  the  enemy's 
flank. 

3671.  Q.  Why  is  an  overlapping  on  the  flank  dangerous,  if  the 
attacking  line  is  only  equal  to  the  opposing  line  of  cavalry  ? 
A.  By  attaining  advantage  on  the  one  flank,  it  would  lay  itself 
open  to  a  corresponding  disadvantage  on  the  o^ther  flank.  Should 
it  be  attempted,  the  weak  flank  of  the  assailant  must  be  refused 
by  keeping  it  in  echelon. 

3672.  Q.  Which  attack  of  cavalry  is  the  most  telling  in  its 
effects  on  the  enemy  ?  A.  The  direct  attack  upon  a  flank  ;  it  can 
be  effected  by  the  smallest  possible  detachments,  even  against 
larger  bodies  of  troops,  provided  that  the  attack  is  unlocked  for 
on  the  part  of  the  enemy,  and  vigorously  pushed  before  he  has 
time  to  meet  or  avoid  it. 

3673.  Q.  How  should  flank  attacks  by  cavalry  be  carried  out  ? 
A.  By  working  up  under  cover  to  striking  distance  from  the 
enemy's  flanks.  In  a  varied  country,  facilities  are  afforded  for 
such  manoeuvres,  though  a  watchful  enemy  would  hardly  permit 
their  accomplishment.  When  such  mode  of  approach  is  impossi- 
ble, the  flank  attack  must  be  made  in  combination  with  a  front 
attack. 

3674.  Q.  What  are  combinations  of  front  and  flank  attacks 
termed,  and  what  are  the  detachments  by  which  they  are  made 
called  ?  A.  They  are  termed  offensive  flank  attacks,  and  the 
detachments  are  called  offensive  flanks. 

3675.  Q.  How  should  the  offensive  flanks  move  in  an  attack 
by  cavalry?  A.  They  follow  behind  the  wings  of  the  attacking 
line,  echeloned  to  the  flank,  and  move  out  therefrom  at  an  in- 
creased pace  just  before  the  charge,  so  as  to  combine  with  the 
front  attack  by  a  simultaneous  movement  on  the  enemy's  flank. 
They  are  also  employed  to  ward  off  or  resist  counter-flank  attacks 
on  the  part  of  the  enemy  during  the  advance,  when  they  are 
called  defensive  flanks. 

3676.  Q.  If  the  charge  of  an  attacking  force  of  cavalry  is  suc- 
cessful, and  the  support  and  reserve  undertake  pursuit,  what  is 
done  with  the  charging  column  ?  A.  It  is  rallied  and  re-formed 
as  soon  as  possible,  so  as  to  serve  in  its  turn  as  a  support  to  the 
pursuing  force. 

3677.  Q.  If  the  charge  of  an  attacking  force  of  cavalry  is  un- 
successful, what  should  the  attacking  force  do  ?  A.  It  should 
retire  in  such  manner  as  to  avoid  clashing  with  the  support  or 
reserve,  which,  at  this  moment,  should  be  ready  to  attack  the 
enemy  in  flank  on  his  attempting  to  pursue.  With  this  object  in 
view,  the  first  line  should,  as  a  rule,  fall  back  over  the  ground  by 
which  it  has  advanced.  It  should,  of  course,  rally  and  come  up 
again,  if  possible,  in  formation  to  act  as  support  or  reserve. 

3678.  Q.  What  is  said  of  false .  or  threatening  attacks  by 
cavalry  in  combination  with  infantry  ?     A.   A  false  attack  is 


456  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

made  by  cavalry,  which  then  retires  before  the  enemy's  cavalry, 
drawing  the  latter  under  fire  of  concealed  infantry. 

ATTACK  IN  DISPERSED  ORDER. 

3679.  Q.  How,  as  a  rule,  should  attacks  by  cavalry  be  made  in 
dispersed  order  ?  A.  Except  in  the  case  of  very  small  bodies, 
the  attack  in  dispersed  order  should  be  made  only  by  a  portion 
of  the  force,  the  remainder  being  kept  in  reserve,  or  acting  as  a 
second  line  in  close  order.  A  platoon  is  the  smallest  portion 
that  should  be  kept  in  support. 

3680.  Q.  How  might  extended  order  in  combination  with  close 
formation  be  made  use  of  by  cavalry  in  attack  ?  A.  If  a  squadron 
is  directed  upon  artillery  protected  by  an  escort,  a  troop  or  half 
troop  should  "swarm"  upon  the  guns,  while  the  remainder  of 
the  squadron  in  close  formation  attacks  the  escort. 

3681.  Q.  Why  should  a  general  attack  by  cavalry  in  extended 
order  be  rarely  made  ?  A.  It  is  sometimes  necessary  as  being  the 
only  mode  in  which  cavalry  can  advance  in  the  face  of  a  heavy 
fire,  from  which  no  degree  of  gallantry  can  save  it.  Such  an 
attack  in  dispersed  order,  the  line  gradually  closing  in  from  the 
flanks,  may  possibly  succeed ;  but  the  movement  is  al  ways 
dangerous,  and  should  not  be  attempted  unless  the  force  is  ex- 
ceedingly well  disciplined  and  accustomed  to  rally  quickly  after 
attack     It  should  be  well  backed  up  by  cavalry  in  support. 

3683.  Q.  How  might  the  enemy  be  checked  awhile,  and  forced 
to  lose  time  by  manoeuvres  ?  A.  By  making  a  demonstration  in 
dispersed  order  with  a  large  force  of  cavalry,  without  any  real 
intention  of  attack. 

3683.  Q.  In  working  cavalry  in  extended  order,  what  should 
be  done  when  the  rally  is  sounded  ?  A.  Whether  during  the 
advance  or  while  retiring,  every  man  should  close  at  once  on  his 
leader,  facing  towards  his  proper  front  without  regard  to  his 
former  place  in  the  ranks. 

CAVALRY  IN  DEFENSE. 

3684.  Q.  How  should  cavalry  be  employed  in  defense?  A. 
The  enemy's  cavalry  must  be  watched,  especially  in  varied 
fCrouud,  to  forestall  attacks  upon  unprotected  flanks  of  the 
infantry,  and  generally  to  prevent  outflanking  manoeuvres.  The 
flanks  of  infantry  and  artillery  in  forward  movements  must  be 
guarded.  In  the  case  of  attack  by  the  enemy  at  any  special 
points  the  cavalry  should  seize  opportunities  of  time  and  ground 
for  charging,  if  the  assailants  waver  or  hesitate  in  the  advance, 
or  immediately  after  the  assault  has  been  made.  Cavalry  may 
also  be  used  in  large  bodies  for  masking  movements  and  making 
demonstrations. 


MINOR  TACTICS.  457 

3685.  Q.  Why  may  little  be  said  on  the  local  defense  of 
cavalry  ?  A.  Because  the  only  means  of  local  defense  of  cavalry 
lies  in  counter-attack,  or  in  a  quick  avoidance  of  the  enemy  when 
attack  is  impossible. 

THE  CAVALRY  SOLDIER  IN  ATTACK,  ALONE,  OR  IN  GROUPS. 

3686.  Q.  What  is  the  conduct  of  a  cavalry  soldier  in  an  attack 
when  acting  alone  ?  A.  He  must  act  boldly,  but  with  circum- 
spection. He  should  endeavor  to  approach  his  adversary  unseen, 
until  within  charging  distance,  and  then  ride  at  him  with  deter- 
mination. If  the  soldier  carries  a  sword,  he  should  endeavor 
during  the  encounter  to  keep  his  right  front  opposed  to  the 
enemy,  or  at  all  events  to  prevent  the  enemy  getting  upon  his 
left  rear.  Against  infantry,  every  parry  should  be  made  so  that 
the  strong  part  of  the  cavalry  weapon,  that  is  the  fort  of  the 
sword  strikes  the  feeble  part  of  the  infantry  weapon,  which  is 
the  bayonet  fixed  on  the  end  of  the  rifle. 

3687.  Q.  How  should  a  group  or  small  party  of  cavalry  attack  ? 
A.  A  Group  or  patrol  of  some  half-dozen  men  would  probably 
charge  a  similar  cavalry  patrol  knee  to  knee.  If  attacking  an 
infantry  patrol  moving,  as  is  most  likely,  in  open  formation,  the 
cavalry  group  would  swoop  down  in  dispersed  order.  Against 
infantry  in  any  collected  formation,  if  the  ground  be  favorable, 
both  the  moral  and  physical  effects  of  a  charge  in  close  formation 
would  be  greater  than  if  made  in  extended  order. 

3688.  Q.  What  consideration  must  be  shown  the  horse  by 
cavalrymen  when  attacking  in  close  order  ?  A.  The  men  must 
avoid  the  crowding  of  the  files  at  the  instant  of  the  charge,  as  it 
tends  to  impede  the  free  movement  of  the  horse.  At  the  moment 
of  shock,  the  horse,  although  kept  well  in  hand,  should,  if  neces- 
sary, receive  pressure  from  leg  and  spur.  The  greatest  effect  in 
a  charge  being  derived  from  the  uniform  velocity  of  the  force, 
whether  large  or  small,  the  pace  must  not  be  so  hurried  as  to 
bring  up  the  horses  to  the  attack  blown  or  even  distressed.  All 
the  horses  should  be  kept  square  to  the  front,  and  never,  if  it  can 
be  avoided,  allowed  to  get  out  of  hand. 

SMALL  BODIES  OF  CAVALRY  IN  ATTACK. 

3689.  Q.  What  would  be  the  conduct  of  a  very  small  body  of 
cavalry  in  attack  ?  A.  To  retain  a  support  is  not  advantageous. 
One  or  two  ground-scouts  would  precede  the  party  about  200 
yards  to  the  front,  during  the  advance,  in  order  to  reconnoitre 
the  ground.  If  a  surprise  be  intended,  the  scouts  must  be 
especially  careful  to  keep  themselves  concealed  from  the  enemy. 
Where  a  strong  troop  is  acting  alone,  the   attacking  portion 


458  THE  ABMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMIKER. 

might  consist  of  a  platoon  in  double  ranks,  the  other  platoon 
forming  the  support  in  echelon  at  150  or  200  yards'  distance. 

8690.  Q.  How  should  all  bodies  of  cavalry,  under  the  strength 
of  a  troop,  direct  their  charge  ?  A.  As  in  the  case  of  that  body, 
by  the  centre;  the  men  being  careful  to  keep  up  to  and  dress  by 
the  centre,  without  closing  in  or  opening  out  more  than  is  un- 
avoidable, care  being  taken  that  the  flanks  are  not  in  advance  of 
the  centre. 

THE  TROOP  IN  ATTACK. 

3691.  Q.  How  should  an  attack  by  troop  be  carried  out?  A. 
The  point  of  attack  having  been  indicated  at  some  1000  yards  off, 
two  or  three  ground-scouts  should  be  sent  to  the  front  and  a  small 
reconnoitring  group  to  the  front  and  to  either  flank.  The  scouts 
are  to  reconnoitre  the  ground  to  be  passed  over  in  the  advance,  and 
the  groups  are  to  search  carefully  all  ground  that  might  conceal 
an  enemy,  and  thus  prevent  a  sudden  attack  upon  the  squadron, 
by  giving  the  earliest  intelligence  of  the  enemy's  presence.  The 
troop,  on  receiving  the  order  to  advance,  moves  off  at  a  walk  in  a 
small  column  formation.  If  the  column  of  fours  is  made  use  of 
in  the  first  instance,  it  should  be  formed  with  due  regard  to  the 
exposed  flank,  so  as  to  be  more  quickly  brought  into  fighting  for- 
mation. When  the  troop  comes  under  the  effective  fire  of  the 
enemy,  a  brisk  trot  must  be  assumed  and  kept  up  to  within  600 
or  500  yards  from  the  point  of  attack.  Column  of  platoons  may 
then  be  formed,  and  the  rear  platoon  checking  its  pace,  follows 
in  echelon  on  the  exposed  flank,  at  about  150  or  200  yards  dis- 
tance from  the  leading  platoon.  The  latter  now  breaks  into  a 
gallop,  the  rear  rank  taking  a  little  distance  if  the  ground  is  at 
all  broken,  swords  being  sloped.  The  platoon  or  troop  leader 
heads  the  attacking  force ;  *  the  platoon  in  support  is  under  com- 
mand of  its  own  chief. 

3692.  Q.  What  principles  are  to  be  borne  in  mind  in  an  attack 
by  cavalry  on  a  force  in  position  ?  A.  That  whatever  the  distance 
to  be  passed  over  in  the  preliminary  advance  may  be,  it  should 
always  be  traversed  at  a  rapid  pace,  if  under  the  enemy's  fire.  The 
trot  is  therefore  assumed  as  soon  as  the  zone  of  effective  infantry 
fire  is  entered ;  the  column  formation  should  be  preserved  until 
just  before  the  pace  of  the  gallop  is  to  be  assumed.  If  the  enemy 
is  advancing  to  meet  the  attacking  force,  the  pace  must  be  so 
regulated  as  to  be  greatest  at  the  moment  of  actual  encounter. 

3693.  Q.  How  should  the  gallop  be  conducted  in  a  charge  of 
cavalry  ?  A.  It  should  not  be  too  hurried  when  first  entered  upon, 

*  lu  the  English  service  this  attacking  force  is  described  for  a 
squadron;  the  change  to  platoon  is  substituted  for  the  American 
service. 


MIKOR  TACTICS.  459 

but  the  speed  gradually  increased  until  charging  distance,  or  about 
50  yards  from  the  point  of  attack. 

3694.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  support,  and  what  becomes  of 
the  ground-scouts  in  a  charge  of  cavalry  ?  A.  As  the  charge  is 
about  to  commence,  the  scouts  clear  off  to  either  flank;  the  sup- 
port, following  in  echelon  on  the  exposed  flank,  should  endeavor 
to  manoeuvre  against  the  flank  of  the  enemy  or  ward  off  any 
attempted  flank  attack  by  the  latter. 

3695.  Q.  Why  should  cavalry  endeavor  to  charge  down  a  slight 
incline  of  ground  ?  A.  Because  the  slope  of  the  ground  gives  an 
impetus  which  nothing  can  stop. 

3696.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  might  a  troop  of  cavalry  of 
full  strength  attack  infantry  ?  A.  When  the  infantry  is  demor- 
alized or  inferior  in  quality;  or  when  they  may  be  taken  by  sur- 
prise, the  cavalry  having  been  able  to  approach  to  striking  dis- 
tance unobserved;  or  the  infantry  have  expended  their  ammunition 
or  have  broken  by  the  fire-action  of  opposing  troops;  or  the  infantry 
should  be  in  extended  order  and  exposing  unprotected  flanks  to 
sudden  cavalry  attacks;  or  being  in  extended  formation,  induced 
to  close  up  by  the  moral  effect  of  a  demonstration  of  cavalry.  In 
the  last  case,  the  attack  in  extended  order  would  often  be  the  best 
method. 

3697.  Q.  Why  should  cavalry,  if  possible,  attack  the  right  flank 
of  infantry  in  preference  to  the  left  ?  A.  Because  the  effect  of 
the  fire  of  a  line  of  infantry  is  greater  toward  its  left  flank  than 
towards  it  right. 

3698.  Q.  Wliy  should  it  be  of  advantage  to  cavalry  to  charge 
up  a  slight  incline  in  attacking  infantry?  A.  Because  in  this  case 
the  infantry  fire  is  apt  to  be  directed  too  high. 

3699.  Q.  If  the  troop  of  cavalry  is  ordered  to  attack  in  pursuit, 
how  may  that  be  conducted  ?  A.  A  portion  of  its  strength  might 
be  advanced  in  dispersed  order,  the  remainder  following  in  closed 
ranks,  in  case  of  an  offensive  return  being  made  by  the  enemy. 
Should  it,  however,  be  ordered  to  attack  in  dispersed  order,  for 
the  purpose  of  harassing  the  enemy,  or  making  a  demonstration 
against  extended  infantry,  a  small  portion  only  would  be  retained 
for  support. 

3700.  Q.  What  would  be  the  general  conduct  of  attack  on  ar- 
tillery by  cavalry  ?  A.  The  attack  should  be  made,  if  possible, 
when  the  guns  are  limbered  up.  If  the  guns  are  in  position,  they 
should  be  attacked  either  on  the  flanks  or  in  rear.  If  the  guns 
are  escorted  by  other  troops  the  combination  attack  should  be 
made  on  troops  and  guns  at  the  same  time  by  different  por- 
tions of  the  attacking  force.  If  unlimbered,  the  horses  and  lim- 
bers of  the  guns  should  be  carried  off,  or  at  any  events,  attempts 
should  be  made  to  cut  traces  and  kill  horses.  If  the  battery  be 
on  the  move,  no  measure  is  so  effectual  as  shooting  one  or  more 
of  the  wheel-horses. 


460  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 


DISMOUNTED  SERVICE  OF  CAVALRY. 

3701  Q.  When  should  cavalry  never  be  dismounted  ?  A. 
When  mounted  opposing  cavalry  could  attack  them,*  before  they 
can  remount,  or  where  the  led  horses  would  be  under  direct  fire. 

3702  Q.  What  are  the  general  conditions  under  which  cavalry 
mio-ht  be  required  to  act  dismounted  ?  A.  To  hold  localities  until 
the*  arrival  of  the  infantry  ;t  to  force  a  defile  which  blocks  the 
advance,  when  it  would  take  too  much  time  to  turn  it ;  during  a 
retreat  to  offer  enough  resistance  to  compel  the  enemy  to  deploy, 
thus  gaining  time;  as  a  support  to  defeated  cavalry  retreating 
through  a  defile;  and  to  defend  camps,  etc. 

Attack  and  Defense  of  the  Three  Arms. 

3703.  Q.  What  instructions  should  the  commander  of  a  force 
combining  the  three  arms  of  the  service  have,  and  why  ?  A.  He 
should  have  the  clearest  possible  conception  of  the  general 
objects  which  it  is  intended  he  should  carry  out,^n  order  that, 
when  he  comes  in  contact  with  the  enemy,  he  may  form  a 
correct  decision  as  to  w^hether  he  should  attack  or  act  on  the 
defensive. 

3704.  Q.  What  course  of  action  should  be  preferred  if  his  posi- 
tion and  means  at  command  allow  of  either  course  being  pur- 
sued ?  A.  The  preference  should  generally  be  given  fo  the  attack, 
in  order  to  secure  the  moral  advantages  which  attend  this  course 
of  action. 

3705.  Q.  What  should  a  commander  do  with  regard  to  attack, 
if  the  nature  of  his  position  and  resources  necessitate  his  assum- 
ing the  defensive  ?  A.  He  should  seize  upon  the  first  favorable 
opportunity  of  turning  the  defense  with  the  attack. 

the  three  arms  in  attack. 

3706.  Q.  What  is  the  advantage  of  the  offensive  initiative? 
A.  The  commander  who  takes  it  has  the  advantage  of  choosing 
the  time,  and,  within  certain  limits,  the  place  of  attack;  his  adver- 
sary having,  as  it  were,  to  wait  his  pleasure  on  both  these  points 
before  the  final  arrangements  for  defense  can  be  made.  The 
assailant  can  move  his  force  in  any  direction  either  for  the  pur- 

*  An  Indian  woman,  who  was  in  the  camp  when  Major  Reno  at- 
tacked bitting  Bull's  warriors  in  1876,  remarked  that  if  he  had  not 
dismounted  his  men,  but  kept  right  on  mounted,  he  would  have 
thrown  the  village  into  a  state  of  confusion;  but  by  dismounting  he 
gave  time  for  the  warriors  to  collect  their  ponies  and  then  ride  all 
around  him. 

t  As-8heridan  did,  at  Five  Forks  and  at  Appomattox  Court  House, 
in  1865. 


MINOil  TACTICS.  461 

pose  of  real  attack,  or  to  deceive  the  enemy  by  demonstrations  or 
false  attacks,  while  at  the  same  time  he  can  push  his  troops  in 
force  against  a  weak  point  of  the  position.  Attacking  gives 
moral  force  to  the  men,  and  in  advancing,  troops  leave  demor- 
allizing  influences  behind,  such  as  the  sight  of  the  killed  and 
wounded. 

3707.  Q.  As  ground  rarely  presents  advantages  to  the  attack- 
ing force,  what  should  the  commander  of  an  assailing  party  look 
out  for  ?  A.  For  any  accidental  conditions  which  may  be  turned 
to  his  benefit.  High  ground  for  his  artillery  should  be  found,  if 
possible,  within  range  of  the  enemy's  position.  If  the  country  is 
at  all  inclosed,  or  even  undulating  without  inclosures,  it  can  hardly 
happen  that  there  are  not  some  sheltered  places  affording  cover 
for  troops  near  to  the  position.  These  should  be  looked  for  and 
utilized. 

3708.  Q.  What  are  the  three  modes  of  attacks  ?  A.  First,  the 
Frontal;  second,  the  Combined  Attack  on  front  and  flank;  third, 
the  Concentrated  Attack  upon  a  weak  point. 

3709.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  frontal  attack,  and  why  is  this 
form  unadvisable?  A.  A  frontal  attack  means  a  direct  advance 
upon  the  whole  of  the  enemy's  line  or  position.  This  mode  of 
attack  is  unadvisable,  as,  even  in  the  case  of  success,  the  result 
is  not  decisive;  the  enemy's  line  of  retreat  being  unassailed,  he 
simply  falls  back  to  a  position  more  to  the  rear. 

3710.  Q.  When  may  a  frontal  attack  be  made  use  of?  A.  To 
feel  the  enemy  and  ascertain  his  exact  dispositions  while  prepar- 
ing for  a  concentrated  attack  upon  one  of  his  weak  i)oints  as  soon 
as  they  are  discovered. 

3711.  Q.  How  should  a  combined  attack  upon  front  and  flank 
be  conducted  ?  A.  In  this  case  the  enemy  is  attacked  in  front  at 
the  same  time  that  a  portion  of  the  force  is  directed  at  one  of  the 
flanks. 

3712.  Q.  Why  is  an  attack  upon  the  flanks  by  itself  unadvis- 
able ?  A.  Were  a  strong  force  in  position  attacked  solely  on  the 
flank,  it  would  quickly  form  up  its  reserves  to  a  new  front,  the 
troops  of  the  original  front  coming  up  in  support. 

3713.  Q.  When  might  an  attack  on  both  flanks,  combined  with 
a  frontal  attack,  be  attempted  ?  A.  It  can  only  be  attempted 
under  circumstances  of  great  superiority  of  numbers,  without 
which  it  would  become  a  most  dangerous  operation,  enabling  the 
enemy  to  give  the  counter-stroke  at  a  weak  point  of  a  straggling 
line  and  beat  the  assailants  in  detail  by  cutting  their  force  in 
two. 

3714.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  a  concentrated  attack  upon  a 
weak  point  of  the  defense  ?  A.  To  break  through  the  enemy's 
line  or  force  his  position,  as  it  is,  in  case  of  success,  the. most 
decisive,  although  generally  it  is  the  most  difficult  of  execution. 
-   3715.   Q.    How  should  a  concentrated   attack   upon   a  weak 


462  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

point  be  made  ?  A.  The  attack  must  always  be  made  with  force 
sufficient  to  resist  a  counter-enveloping  attack  on  the  part  of  the 
enemy,  which  might  otherwise  be  disastrous  in  its  results. 

3716.  Q.  Why  is  it  that  a  concentrated  attack  upon  a  weak 
point  of  the  enemy  is  more  hazardous  now  than  formerly  ?  A. 
On  account  of  the  increased  range  of  modern  guns  and  rifles;  for 
a  concentrated  fire- action  can  now  be  brought  to  bear  on  the 
assailant,  not  only  from  all  parts  of  the  defense  in  his  immediate 
front,  but  in  most  cases  from  either  flank  as  well.  Unless,  there- 
fore, the  ground  or  other  natural  objects  cover  the  movement  it 
should  not  be  attempted. 

3717.  Q.  What  is  understood  by  a  turning  movement  in  an 
attack  ?  A.  It  is  more  frequently  a  menace  than  an  attack ;  al- 
though it  might  be  looked  upon  as  a  form  of  flank  attack.  It 
differs  from  a  flank  attack  inasmuch  as  it  removes  the  scene  of 
combat  from  the  position  held  by  the  enemy.  This  movement 
may  be  made  with  a  portion  of  the  force  at  command,  or  with  its 
whole  strength. 

3718.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  could  the  turning  movement 
be  attempted  by  a  por^^o?^. of  the  force  at  command?  A.  When 
the  conditions  render  it  improbable,  if  not  impossible,  that  the 
enemy  could  act  offensively  in  turn  upon  each  fraction  of  the 
divided  force.  Otherwise  the  separate  movement  should  not  be 
attempted. 

3719.  Q.  How  should  a  turning  movement  be  conducted  by  a 
portion  of  the  force  at  command,  composed  of  the  three  arms  ? 
A.  When  the  ground  is  favorable,  cavalry  and  horse  artillery, 
mounted  infantry,  and  galloping  machine-guns  would  nearly 
always  form  a  portion,  and  sometimes  the  whole  of  the  force 
employed  on  the  service.  The  relative  proportion  of  the  force 
detached  can  only  be  decided  by  the  circumstances.  If  the  line 
of  retreat  of  the  assailants  must  necessarily  be  preserved  in  rear 
of  the  main  body,  the  latter  must  keep  the  largest  amount  of 
force ;  if  the  retreat  can  be  made  equally  well  to  the  flank,  the 
strongest  force  may  be  detached  for  the  turning  movement. 

3720.  Q.  What  conditions  obtain  in  making  a  turning  move- 
ment by  the  whole  force  of  a  command  composed  of  the  three 
arms?  A.  The  former  line  of  retreat  must  be  abandoned  alto- 
gether ;  or  there  should  be  such  complete  probability  of  success 
that  the  line  may  for  the  moment  be  laid  open  to  the  enemy,  for 
the  sake  of  concentrating  the  whole  force  in  the  attempt  to  turn 
the  position. 

PREPAKATION  FOR  THE  ATTACK. 

3721.  Q.  If  the  commander  does  not  have  the  necessary  infor- 
mation required  before  forming  his  plan  of  attack,  in  what 
manner  does  he  acquire  it  ?  A.  In  ordinary  cases  when  small 
forces  are  engaged,  the  cavalry  reconnoitrers  in  advance  will 


MIKOR  TACTICS.  463 

bring  in  sufficient  information  ;  but  if  the  enemy  should  be 
covered  by  advanced  troops,  it  may  be  necessary  to  make  a 
special  reconnaissance,  sometimes  supported  by  guns. 

3723.  Q.  The  commander  of  a  force  preparing  to  attack,  having 
obtained  all  necessary  information,  what  course  should  he  next 
pursue  ?  A.  He  should  issue  orders,  which  would  consist  of  a 
general  order  for  all,  and  a  special  order  addressed  to  each  com- 
mander when  separate  action  was  required. 

3723.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  the  general  order  be  framed, 
and  what  should  it  contain  ?  A.  It  should  be  clear,  precise,  and 
complete,  and  as  short  as  strict  compliance  witb  these  require- 
ments will  permit.  It  should  contain  :  The  conditions  or  circum- 
stances of  the  intended  action,  with  what  is  known  of  the  enemy  ; 
the  mode  of  action  determined  upon,  and  -how  to  be  undertaken 
(for  instance,  to  attack  the  enemy  when  he  is  touched  on  in  direct 
advance,  or  to  attack  the  whole  or  a  certain  named  part  of  a 
position);  the  strength,  composition,  and  general  division  of  the 
attacking  force,  with  names  of  commanders  (this  may  be  given 
more  in  detail  in  the  margin  of  the  order  if  thought  necessary); 
the  preliminary  positions  to  be  taken  up  by  each  distinct  part  of 
the  force  with  their  directions  of  attack ;  the  hours  at  which 
these  positions  are  to  be  assumed,  and  at  which  the  forward 
movement  or  attack  is  to  be  commenced  ;  the  position  where 
the  commander  of  the  troops  will  be  found  during  the  action,  to 
which  all  references  or  reports  are  to  be  made  or  sent.  And  in 
operations  of  great  magnitude  it  would  be  necessary  to  add  the 
positions  of  the  ambulance  and  field  hospitals,  and  the  order  of 
march  of  the  trains  of  the  various  columns. 

3724.  Q.  What  should  the  special  orders^  in  preparing  for 
attack,  contain  ?  A.  Nothing  that  may  tie  the  hands  of  com- 
manders too  much  in  matters  of  detail.  They  should  be  told  the 
thing  to  do — not  the  manner  of  doing  it,  and  be  allowed  com- 
paratively free  action. 

3725.  Q.  What  is  the  general  principle  of  apportioning  reserves 
for  the  different  arms  in  preparation  for  attack  ?  A.  The  various 
arms  require  reserves  in  exact  proportion  to  their  respective 
liability  to  fall  into  confusion  during  action.  Therefore,  a 
reserve  is  most  necessary  for  cavalry,  next  for  infantry,  es- 
pecially when  attacking,  and  hardly  at  all  for  artillery,  which  has 
no  shock-action.  Although  a  reserve  of  guns  may  not  be  required, 
the  artillery  should  certainly  have  reserves  of  men,  horses,  and 
ammunition.* 

3726.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  cavalry  during  the  progress  of 

*  In  the  American  service  an  artillery  reserve  was  always  main- 
tained, and  proved  not  onl}^  of  great  benefit  in  relieving  batteries, 
but  aided  wonderfully  in  deciding  the  battles  of  Malvern  Hill, 
Antietam,  Gettysburg,  and  others. 


464  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

the  earlier  arrangements  for  an  engagement  ?  A.  The  reconnais- 
sance of  the  enemy  and  ground  would  be  kept  up,  upon  whose 
preliminary  report  the  commander  of  the  entire  force  decides  his 
first  course  of  action.  Great  care  should  therefore  be  taken  that 
there  is  no  confusion  in  forwarding  the  reports  of  patrols.  The 
position  of  the  commander  of  the  troops,  as  mentioned  in  the 
orders  should  therefore  be  impressed  on  each  patrol  leader, 
whose'duty  it  will  be  to  see  that  every  man  sent  back  with  a 
message  distinctly  understands  where  he  is  to  deliver  it. 

3727.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  advance-guard  in  carrying 
out  the  prelimifiary  action  to  cover  the  reconnaissance  prepara- 
tory to  attack?  A.  It  must  do  its  best  to  cause  the  enemy's 
advanced  troops  to  retire.  When  it  finds  itself  definitely  checked, 
it  must  look  for  support  from  the  main  body.  The  artillery  is 
the  first  up,  and  either  Joins  the  battery  of  the  advance-guard, 
or,  taking  a  position  abreast  of  it,  acts  in  combination  and  opens 
fire  in  concert  with  it.  Both  mounted  infantry  and  machine- 
guns  can  be  used  in  these  operations. 

3728.  Q.  If  the  enemy's  advanced  troops  have  been  driven  back 
in  preparation  for  a  general  attack,  what  is  then  done  ?  A.  The 
reconnoitring  position  would  be  abandoned,  and  the  guns  moved 
on  to  the  first  principal  artillery  position.  Accompanied  by  the 
necessary  supports,  they  should  be  pushed  well  to  the  front  and 
come  into  action  at  a  point  selected  with  due  regard  to  the  direc- 
tion of  infantry  attack,  so  far  as  known  at  the  time  and  at  a 
range  of  from  1800  to  1300  yards  from  the  enemy's  general 
position.  The  place  chosen  ought  not  to  be  such  that  the 
advance  of  the  attacking  infantry  will  soon  mask  the  fire  of  the 
guns.  If  centrally  f)laced,  they  will  be  protected  by  the  troops  on 
either  side  ;  if  on  a  flank,  they  need  only  be  escorted  by  cavalry, 
or  by  a  small  force  of  infantry  on  the  exposed  flank. 

3729.  What  would  be  done  with  the  guns  at  the  first  principal 
position  in  the  case  of  large  forces  attacking  an  enemy  ?  A.  The 
guns  would  probably  be  massed  in  one  or  two  strong  batteries, 
and  all  other  available  guns,  exclusive  of  any  required  for  a 
flanking  movement,  should  be  quickly  brought  into  simultaneous 
action. 

3730.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  infantry,  during  the  fire  of  the 
artillery  from  its  first  principal  position,  in  an  attack  ?  A.  The 
tactics  of  the  infantry  should  be  directed  to  covering  much 
ground  with  as  few  men  as  possible  in  extended  order,  the  main 
bulk  of  the  force  being  kept  in  small  columns.  If  there  are  im- 
portant points  in  advance  of  the  position  which  it  appears  desir- 
able to  possess,  they  must  come  under  the  early  fire  of  both 
infantry  and  artillery. 

3731.  Q.  If  any  high  ground  comes  within  reach  while  the  in- 
fantry is  advancing  to  the  attack,  what  should  be  done  ?  A.  It 
should  be  immediately  occupied  by  the  assailants,  even  though 


MINOR  TACTICS.  465 

not  in  the  direct  line  of  the  attack.  In  default  of  high  ground, 
a  church -tower,  high -roofed  house,  or  even  a  tree  should  be 
taken  possession  of  if  it  affords  an  opportunity  of  seeing  the  ene- 
my's disposition. 

3732.  Q.  Where  should  the  commander  of  the  attacking  forces 
post  himself  during  an  attack  ?  A.  He  should,  if  possible  be  on 
an  eminence,  where  he  can  perceive  the  principal  portion  of  the 
ground  over  which  the  troops  are  to  work.  He  should  remain  at 
this  point,  if  possible  ;  or,  if  absenting  himself  for  a  time,  leave 
an  officer  to  direct  all  reports  or  messengers  to  the  new  station. 

3733.  Q.  If  no  high  ground  is  available  for  the  commander  ex- 
cept that  which  is  too  far  in  advance,  where  should  he  place  him- 
self ?  A.  At  the  most  central  and  important  point,  and  detach 
two  or  more  officers,  in  whom  confidence  can  be  placed,  to  other 
parts  of  the  field,  with  directions  to  keep  him  constantly  informed 
of  what  is  passing. 

3734.  Q.  What  should  be  done  where  the  headquarters  of  the 
commander  are  liable  to  change  during  the  action  ?  A.  His  first 
position  should  be  given  in  orders  ;  after  that,  when  making  a 
change,  some  one  should  always  be  left  at  the  first  position  to 
direct  inquirers. 

3735.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  the  commander's  orders  be 
transmitted,  and  what  should  be  their  character  ?  A.  They  should 
be  in  general  harmony  with  the  original  plan  of  attack.  They 
should  not  descend  to  details,  which  are  better  left  to  corps  com- 
manders ;  nor  should  the  commander  of  the  troops  interfere  in  the 
execution  of  his  orders  further  than  to  assure  himself  that  they 
are  being  carried  out. 

3736.  Q.  How  may  the  commander  of  troops  during  an  attack 
assure  himself  that  his  orders  are  being  carried  out?  A.  By 
means  of  constant  reports  and  communications,  which  must  be 
kept  up  without  interruption  during  the  action  between  him  and 
his  corps  or  detachment  commanders. 

DELIVERY  OF  THE   ATTACK. 

3737.  Q.  The  infantry  of  the  first  line,  having  reached  the  zone 
of  effective  rifle-fire  in  attack,  are  how  conducted  ?  A.  They  con- 
tinue their  advance  and  presently  open  fire  on  the  points  of  attack, 
their  firing-line  being  strengthened  as  required  by  its  supports. 
The  local  reserves  of  the  first  line  are  at  such  distance  that  they 
can  either  reinforce  the  original  line  or  be  brought  up  rapidly  to 
support  a  change  of  direction,  should  the  best  point  of  attack 
be  only  now  developed.  The  other  lines  of  infantry  follow  the 
first.     - 

3738.  Q.  The  infantry  having  engaged  the  enemy,  what  should 
the  artillery  do  regarding  the  point  of  attack  ?  A.  It  should  be 
directed  to  concentrate  its  fire  upon  the  intended  points  of  attack, 
in  order  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  infantry  assault. 


466  THE  AKMT  OFFICER'S  EXAMIi^ER. 

3739.  Q.  In  what  way  may  the  cavalry  be  used  with  the  lead- 
ing infantry  in  attack  if  the  ground  permit  ?  A.  The  cavalry 
may  support  the  flanks  by  advancing  under  cover  in  small  col- 
umns, with  strong  supports  close  at  hand,  losing  no  opportunity 
of  attacking  any  advanced  troops  of  the  enemy  and  warding  off 
adverse  cavalry  attacks  in  return. 

3740.  Q.  What  is  the  conduct  of  the  cavalry  on  the  infantry 
flanks  during  an  attack  ?  A.  It  must  be  on  the  watch,  not  only 
to  protect  the  flanks  of  the  infantry,  but  also  to  seize  opportunities 
of  approaching  unseen  the  flanks  of  the  enemy  and  of  throwing 
them  into  disorder,  or  demoralizing  them,  if  not  inflicting  serious 
injury.  If  repulsed  and  in  its  turned  disordered,  it  must  rally 
under  the  protection  of  the  other  arms,  and  again  return  to  exer- 
cise similar  functions. 

3741.  Q.  As  the  attack  advances,  what  is  done  with  the  artil- 
lery ?  A.  A  moment  may  arise  when  a  second  position  more  in 
advance  is  necessary  for  the  guns  on  account  of  their  fire  being 
marked  by  the  infantry.  If  any  of  the  batteries  can  be  advanced 
rapidly  and  placed  in  position  (especially  on  a  flank  whence  they 
can  add  their  own  fire  to  that  of  the  advancing  troops,  which  are 
at  the  time  absorbing  the  attention  of  the  enemy's  infantry),  the 
proximity  to  the  enemy's  line  must  not  be  too  rnuch  limited  by 
ordinary  rules  of  caution.  It  is  advisable,  however,  in  assuming 
this  advanced  position  for  artillery  that  some  of  the  batteries  be 
maintained  in  reserve  in  the  first  position. 

3742.  Q.  What  is  the  conduct  of  the  infantry  in  the  culminat- 
ing phase  of  the  attack  ?  A.  The  leading  infantry  having  arrived 
within  short  range  of  the  chosen  point  of  attack,  the  firing-line  is 
finally  reinforced  by  its  reserves  and  rapid  fire  is  commenced,  and 
it  is  now  that  magazine-fire  will  be  used.  The  dispositions  having 
been  made  under  this  rapid  fire,  the  firing  ceases  and  the  assault 
is  made. 

RE-FORMATION  ON  SUCCESS,    OR  RETIREMENT  ON  REPULSE. 

3743.  Q.  What  should  be  done  by  an  attacking  force,  if  the  at- 
tack is  successful  and  the  enemy  retires  ?  A.  The  position  he 
occupied  is  quickly  assumed  by  the  artillery,  and  a  heavy  fire 
brought  to  bear  on  the  retreating  troops.  The  reserve  cavalry  is 
brought  up  and  launched  in  pursuit,  accompanied  by  horse  artil- 
lery or  machine-guns  ;  the  commander  of  the  troops  should  move 
forward  and  take  his  post  upon  the  position  lately  occupied  by 
the  enemy,  for  further  direction  of  the  movements  ;  the  infantry 
should  reform  the  ranks  broken  by  the  assault,  and  then  furnish 
from  Its  freshest  troops  a  force  to  aid  in  the  pursuit ;  the  field- 
batteries  will  also  push  forward  and  harass  the  enemv  with  their 
fire. 

3744.  Q.  If  the  assault  of  a  position  has  been  unsuccessful,  how 
should  the  retirement  of  the  attacking  force  be  conducted? 


MIKOR  TACTICS.  467 

A.  It  must  retire,  covered,  in  open  ground,  by  the  cavalry  and 
artillery  ;  in  close  ground  by  the  least  disorganized  portion  of  the 
infantry,  supported  by  artillery.  The  latter  arm  now  plays  an 
important  part.  It  must  run  every  risk  to  enable  the  retreat  to 
be  safely  effected  until  a  rear-guard  can  be  organized  to  protect 
the  movement. 

THE  THREE  AKMS  IN  DEFENSE. 

3745.  Q.  What  must  a  commander  of  a  force  of  the  three  arms 
do,  after  he  has  decided  to  stand  on  the  defensive  ?  A.  He  should 
take  up  the  position  most  suited  for  his  purpose  without  delay, 
and  it  should  be  such,  from  a  tactical  point  of  view  that  the 
different  arms  could  be  disposed  for  defense  in  the  manner  most 
suitable  to  their  action,  and  there  should  be  facilities  for  conceal- 
ing their  strength,  etc.,  from  the  enemy's  fire. 

3746.  Q.  What  is  of  the  highest  importance  in  selecting  a  posi- 
tion for  defense  ?  A.  That  the  front  should  be  clear  for  view  and 
fire,  as  should  also  be  the  flanks,  unless  they  rest  on  impassable 
obstacles.  The  extent  of  the  position  should  not  be  dispropor- 
tionate to  the  strength  of  the  defenders. 

3747.  Q.  What,  as  a  rough  r'ule,  might  be  calculated  for  the 
front  of  a  defensive  position  ?  A.  For  each  yard  of  front  de- 
fended, five  men  will  be  required,  including  all  arms  and  reserves 

CONDUCT  OF  THE  DEFENSE. 

3748.  Q.  What  is  the  first  stage  of  conduct  in  the  defense  of  a 
position  ?  A.  If  the  force  be  large,  it  would  of  course  be  covered 
by  advanced  troops,  which  will  probably  involve  an  affair  of  out- 
posts. In  minor  operations  the  front  would  be  covered  by  small 
reconnoitring  parties.  When  the  enemy  is  reported  to  be  ad- 
vancing, the  commander,  should  the  ground  admit  of  it,  and 
render  such  action  safe,  might  employ  part  of  his  artillery  in  an 
advanced  position,  in  order  to  cover  the  reconnaisance  and  enable 
it  to  be  more  active  and  daring,  and  to  check  the  enemy's  attempt 
to  reconnoitre  the  position.  When  the  advanced  troops  have  to 
retire,  it  should  usually  be  by  the  flank  and  under  cover  of  the  fire 
of  the  guns  of  the  main  position.  The  points  to  be  defensively 
occupied  by  each  fraction  of  the  force  would  be  detailed  in  orders, 
and  also  the  relative  positions  of  the  reserves.  The  first  stage  of 
the  defense  would  thus  comprise  the  selection  and  occupation  of 
the  position  by  the  defenders,  as  well  as  the  advanced  action,  if 
any,  of  the  artillery  and  mounted  troops. 

3749.  Q.  What  would  the  selection  of  the  ground  most  suitable 
for  the  artillery  of  the  main  position  in  defense  depend  on  ? 
A.  The  exact  trace  of  the  shooting  line  for  the  infantry.  The 
guns  should,  if  possible,  be  so  placed  as  to  bring  the  enemy's  col- 
umns under  fire  at  long  range,  and  hence  they  ought  to  command 


468  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIi^ER. 

every  distant  approach.  They  should  be  able  to  pour  a  concen- 
trated fire  upon  the  probable  positions  which  will  be  assumed  by 
the  attacking  artillery,  and  be  stationed  so  as  to  sweep  the  ground 
in  front  of  the  position  from  the  earliest  to  the  latest  moment  of 
the  attack.  The  defense  of  the  flanks  in  the  case  of  large  forces 
must  be  specially  provided  for. 

3750.  Q.  AVhat  should  be  the  general  distribution  of  the  infan- 
try ?  A.  The  general  distribution  of  the  infantry  should  be  in 
three  lines.  The  first,  or  line  of  defense,  is  divided  into  three 
parts— a  firing-line,  supports,  and  reserves;  the  second  and  third 
lines  are  held  back,  either  for  reserve  purposes,  or  for  offensive  as 
well  as  defensive  tactics. 

3751.  Q.  If  there  is  time  sufficient,  what  auxiliary  means  of 
defense  should  be  added  to  the  position  to  be  defended?  A. 
Some  sort  of  intrench ment  should  always  be  prepared  for  the 
batteries,  and  shelter-trenches  for  the  infantry  in  the  firing-  and 
supporting-lines.  But  the  newly-broken  earth  should  be  con- 
cealed, if  possible,  by  being  covered  with  dead  leaves  or  green 
brush  if  available.  These  prepared  places,  however,  should  not 
be  occupied  by  guns  or  troops  until  the  proper  moment  for  action 
arrives. 

3752.  Q.  In  making  arrangements  for  the  defensive  position  of 
batteries,  what  must  be  considered.  A.  That  it  is  of  the  utmost 
importance  to  secure  the  artillery  of  the  main  position  against 
the  fire  of  the  enemy's  advanced  skirmishers,  or  marksmen;  and, 
with  this  in  view,  the  batteries  ought  to  be  covered  in  their 
immediate  front  by  a  line  of  extended  riflemen,  placed  either  in 
trenches  or  pits,  or  behind  natural  cover,  some  300  to  500  yards 
in  advance  of  the  guns  which  they  defend.  These  would  remain 
as  long  as  possible  in  position,  and  only  retire  when  driven  back 
by  the  overwhelming  advance  of  the  assailants. 

3753.  Q.  After  all  dispositions  as  regards  ground  and  intrench- 
ments  have  been  made,  what  portion  of  the  troops  as  defenders  < 
should  first  take  position,  and  what  should  be  the  line  of  con- 
duct ?  A.  The  artillery  would  first  take  post,  but  not  too  soon. 
They  should  not  fire  on  small  and  scattered  detachments,  as  it 
would  reveal  their  position  ;  but,  when  the  heads  of  the  enemy's 
columns  can  be  discerned  and  are  within  range,  so  that  they  can 
be  forced  to  deploy,  the  guns  may  move  into  position.  If  the 
advancing  infantry  are  covered  in  their  preliminary  movements, 
the  guns  of  the  main  position  should  not  be  brought  up  until  the 
attacking  artillery  deploys  at  its  first  principal  position. 

3754.  Q.  At  what  period  of  the  first  stage  of  defending  a  posi- 
tion should  the  infantry  take  post  ?  A.  With  the  exception  of  the 
skirmishers  in  front  of  the  guns  and  detachments  holding  ad- 
vanced posts,  the  infantry  should  be  kept  under  cover  in  rear  of 
the  position,  until  the  enemy  comes  within  effective  rifle-range. 

3755.  Q.  How  should  the  defense  occupy  certain  portions  of 


MINOR  TACTICS.  469 

his  position  which  seem  to  possess  tactical  advantages  ?  A. 
These  parts  of  the  position  should  be  occupied  in  force,,  with 
supports  in  close  proximity,  while  still  preserving  the  general 
line.  The  support  should  be  prepared  to  resist  advance  by  rapid 
reinforcement  at  any  of  the  possible  points  of  approach. 

3756.  Q.  What  is  considered  to  be  the  second  stage  in  the 
defense  of  a  position  by  the  three  arms  combined  ?  A.  From 
the  time  the  main  batteries  have  opened  on  the  heads  of  the 
attacking  columns  until  the  enemy  arrives  within  the  third  zone 
of  fire. 

3757.  Q.  What  advantage  have  the  defenders  over  the  assail- 
ants in  the  long-range  fire  of  the  guns  ?  A.  If  the  commander  of 
the  defense  has  attended  to  his  necessary  duties,  he  would  not 
only  have  the  advantage  of  being  intrenched,  but  would  know 
accurately  the  ranges  to  the  various  points  which  must  be  occu- 
pied by  the  enemy  in  his  advance. 

3758.  Q.  How  long  should  the  defender  use  his  guns  against 
the  attacking  artillery  in  its  first  position  ?  A.  Until  the  attack- 
ing infantry  has  passed  the  first  fighting-position  of  its  guns,  and 
is  pushing  into  the  second  zone.  From  this  time  the  guns  of  the 
defense  are  directed  upon  the  attacking  infantry. 

3759.  Q.  When  may  the  advanced  posts  of  the  defense  be  ex- 
pected to  be  forced  back,  and  what  should  be  done  when  that 
occurs  ?  A.  Almost  any  time  after  the  enemy  has  passed  into  the 
second  zone,  upon  which  the  infantry  of  the  first  line  of  the 
defense  should  be  ordered  into  position  and  the  firing-line  may 
fire  platoon  or  section-volleys  to  cover  the  withdrawal  of  the 
advanced  posts.  The  machine-guns  may  now  be  brought  up  and 
placed  on  the  flanks  of  the  firing-line,  or  in  the  interval  between 
battalions. 

3760.  Q.  What  should  be  done  upon  casualties  occurring  in 
the  firing-line  of  the  defenders  ?  A.  Reinforcements  from  the 
supporting-line  must  immediately  fill  up  the  gaps,  as  it  is  a  mat- 
ter of  the  first  importance  that  the  firing-line  be  always  kept  up 
to  its  maximum  strength. 

3761.  Q.  When  may  the  third  stage  in  an  action  be  said  to 
commence  and  at  that  time  what  should  be  the  conduct  of  the 
defense?  A.  The  third  stage  begins  when  the  enemy  enters  the 
limits  of  the  third  zone,  by  which  time  the  defense  has  been  re- 
quired to  show  its  position,  and  the  enemy  commences  his  dispo- 
sitions for  the  real  attack,  which  the  defending  commander  must 
by  every  means  in  his  power  endeavor  to  discover  the  point  of. 
As  the  supports  and  reserves  of  the  assailing  infantry  come 
clearly  into  view  they  should  receive  the  concentrated  fire  of 
part  of  the  artillery  of  the  defense,  as  well  as  volleys  from  the 
firing-line. 

3762.  Q.  The  real  points  menaced  by  the  attack  having  been 
made  apparent  by  the  nearer  approach  of  the  enemy  within  the 


4T0  THE  ARMY  OFFICEE^S  EXAMIKER. 

third  zone,  what  will  the  commander  of  the  defense  do  ?  A.  He 
reinforces  the  menaced  points  so  as  to  meet  the  assailant  with  a 
superior  infantry  fire,  and  the  artillery  of  the  defense  is  now  all 
directed  at  the  infantry  firing-line,  which  the  assailants  have  also 
reinforced.    The  second  line  is  brought  nearer  to  the  first  line. 

3763.  Q.  Should  a  counter-attack  be  projected,  when  should  it 
take  place,  and  what  possible  action  of  the  enemy  should  be  pro- 
vided for?  A.  A  counter-attack  should  be  made  during  the  third 
stage,  unless  it  is  to  be  delayed  until  after  the  assault.  At  this 
time  also,  resistance  to  a  flank  movement  of  the  attacking  troops 
would  also  now  have  to  be  made,  to  meet  which  a  special  reserve 
is  sometimes  held,  or  else  a  portion  of  the  second  or  third  lines 
are  employed. 

3764.  Q.  By  what  portion  of  the  defense  would  a  counter-at- 
tack be  made  ?  A.  It  would  usually  be  made  by  the  third  line, 
and  part  of  the  cavalry  and  horse  artillery  employed  in  support 
of  it. 

3765.  Q.  What  should  the  cavalry  of  the  defense  do  during  the 
third  stage  of  action  ?  A.  It  should  generally  move  forward  to 
seek  for  opportunities  of  throwing  the  flanks  of  the  attacking 
infantry  into  disorder,  or  of  taking  guns  too  rashly  advanced,  or 
of  counteracting  the  movements  of  the  enemy's  cavalry 

3766.  Q.  If  the  assailants  are  not  beaten  back  by  the  time  they 
reach  assaulting  distance,  what  is  then  done  by  the  defense  ?  A. 
The  first  line  of  the  defense  prepares  for  a  final  effort,  and  being 
fully  reinforced  by  its  reserves,  commences  independent  fire;  the 
machine-guns  join,  and  every  gun  of  the  batteries  also  is  served 
as  rapidly  as  possible,  case-shot  and  reversed  shrapnel  being  used; 
if  the  infantry  have  magazines  to  their  rifles,  they  must  now  be 
used. 

3767.  Q.  What  will  be  done  by  the  defense  if  the  assailants  pre- 
pare to  charge  the  position  ?  A.  The  second  line  of  the  defense 
fixes  bayonets,  and  moves  up  to  the  firing-line  to  resist  the  as- 
sault. Should  the  assailants  retire,  the  guns  of  the  position  must 
continue  to  fire  on  them  until  masked  by  the  interposing  troops 
sent  forward  in  pursuit. 

3768.  Q.  If  the  defenders  of  a  position  are  compelled  to  fall 
back,  what  is  the  conduct  of  the  defense  ?  A.  The  guns  must 
cover  the  movement,  and  the  third  line  is  utilized  at  the  same 
time  to  enable  the  first  and  second  lines  to  withdraw.  In  an  open 
country,  the  cavalry  also,  being  comparatively  fresh,  would  aid 
also  m  checking  the  pursuit ;  in  a  close  country  the  infantry  and 
artillery  must  be  depended  on. 

THE  ATTACK   ANT)  DEFENSE  OF  LOCALITIES. 

3769.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  in  modern  campaigns  regarding  the 
tactical  occupation  of  special  localities  ?  A.  It  is  to  occupy  ham- 
lets, farm-houses,  woods,  isolated  hills,  or  even  the  smallest  acci- 


MINOR  TACTICS.  471 

dent  of  ground,  the  possession  of  which  may  often  assure  success 
to  the  side  which  can  hold  them.  The  action  of  a  force  detached 
from  the  main  army,  is  commonly  connected  with  the  seizing  or 
holding  of  such  positions. 

3770.  Q.  What  would  be  the  best  formation  for  an  infantry 
attack  of  isolated  positions  in  connection  with  a  battle-field  ?  A. 
It  would  be  in  small  columns  at  considerable  intervals,  which 
could  profit  by  the  ground  and  advance  without  extending,  close 
up  to  the  point  of  attack.  The  leading  supports  should  be  close  to 
the  front.  The  artillery  would,  as  in  the  attack  of  a  position,  first 
prepare  the  way  for  the  infantry  at  long  range;  and  then,  if 
possible,  move  up  to  telling  distance,  to  cooperate  in  the  final 
assault. 

3771.  Q.  How  should  the  defense  of  an  isolated  position  be 
arranged  ?  A,  Strong  points,  which  the  enemy  cannot  pass  with- 
out taking,  must  be  looked  for.  These  should  be  occupied  by  the 
defenders,  and  the  enemy  forced  to  local  attack  thereon  by  strong 
reserves  so  posted  as  to  prevent  a  turning  movement.  All  ap- 
proaches should  be  brought  under  concentrated  fire,  and  if  the 
defense  is  to  be  made  a  determined  one,  an  inner  line  or  citadel 
should  be  fixed  upon  for  final  resistance.  Guns  must  not  be  slyit 
up  in  any  inclosure;  they  should  rather  be  on  the  flanks  with  tem- 
porary protection.  Under  ordinary  conditions,  as  in  larger  opera- 
tions, the  defenders  should  seize  upon  any  opportunity  for  making 
a  counter-attack. 

REAR-GUARDS. 

[Under  this  head  candidates  may  elect  to  be  examined  in 

Wagner.] 

3772.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  rear-guard  in  a  forward  march  ? 
A.  It  is  principally  of  a  police  character,  remaining  until  the 
last  of  the  impedimenta  have  left  camp,  and  then  marching  in  the 
wake  of  the  other  troops.  It  should  be  of  sufficient  strength  to 
ward  off  any  desultory  attacks  on  the  baggage. 

3773.  Q.  What  is  the  main  duty  of  a  rear-guard  in  retreat  ? 
A.  Its  mission  is  to  retard  the  pursuit  of  the  enemy,  and  to  in- 
terpose between  him  and  the  main  body  on  the  march.  The  very 
best  officers  and  the  freshest  troops  should  be  selected  for  this 
purpose. 

3774.  Q.  With  reference  to  the  close  of  an  engagement  with 
the  enemy,  when  is  a  rear-guard  formed  ?  A.  It  can  never  be 
organized,  nor  can  its  duties  ever  commence  until*after  the  first 
pause  which  separates  the  combatants  at  the  conclusion  of  an 
action. 

3775.  Q.  What  should  be  the  strength  of  a  rear-guard  ?  A. 
It  should  take  the  same  proportion  of  the  covering  detachments 
as  would  be  allotted  to  the  advance-guard  in  a  forward  march. 


472  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIISTER. 

This  proportion  should  commonly  be  about  one  sixth  of  the  whole 
marching  strength.  In  exceptional  cases,  as  when  protecting  the 
rear  of  a  beaten  force  against  a  pressing  pursuit,  it  might  amount 
to  one  fourth  or  even  one  third  of  the  whole. 

3776.  Q.  Why  should  such  a  strong  force  as  one  fourth  or  one 
third  of  the  whole  command  be  used?  A.  To  enable  it  to  with- 
stand the  assaults  of  the  enemy  and  prevent  the  rear-guard  from 
being  constantly  thrown  back  on  the  main  column,  causing  it  to 
become  disordered.  The  mere  knowledge  of  the  fact  that  they 
are  in  retreat  is  demoralizing  in  itself  to  troops  ;  but  should  the 
rear-guard  not  be  strong  enough  to  enable  the  column  to  retire, 
the  feeling  of  depression  will  increase,  the  retreat  will  turn  to  a 
rout,  and  disaster  will  result. 

3777.  Q.  What  should  a  skilful  rear -guard  commander  en- 
deavor to  obtain  ?  A.  Even  small  advantages  over  the  enemy,  in 
order  to  encourage  his  men  and  maintain  their  morale.  Witli 
this  view,  it  is  desirable  that  the  extreme  rear  and  flanking  de- 
tachments should  be  sufficiently  strong  to  take  all  possible  ad- 
vantage of  the  enemy's  imprudence. 

3778.  Q.  What  distance  should  be  interposed  between  the  main 
body  and  the  rear-guard  ?  A.  This  must  depend  upon  circum- 
stances. The  former,  as  is  natural  in  retreat,  or  in  a  strategic 
march  to  elude  the  enemy,  proceeds  as  fast  as  is  convenient  in 
the  desired  direction,  and  as  the  rear-guard  has  to  interpose  be- 
tween the  main  body  and  the  enemy,  it  happens  that  the  distance 
in  two  or  more  cases  may  vary  considerably  ;  but  under  ordinary 
conditions,  the  distances  laid  down  for  the  advanced- guard  in  a 
forward  march  would  be  approximately  suitable  for  the  rear- 
guard in  retreat. 

3779.  Q.  Why  is  it  not  necessary  for  a  rear-guard  to  reconnoi- 
tre in  advance  of  its  march,  while  on  the  retreat  ?  A.  Because 
it  is  the  duty  of  the  commander  of  the  main  body  which  precedes 
it  to  send  back  all  desirable  information  concerning  roads, 
bridges,  fords,  and  positions  suitable  for  making  a  stand. 

3780.  Q.  Where  should  a  rear-guard,  marching  in  retreat,  have 
reconnoitring  parties  ?  A.  On  the  flanks  ;  if  not,  its  protective 
character  as  a  guard  to  the  rear  of  its  own  main  column  ceases 
to  have  effect.  The  parties  sent  out  on  this  duty,  should,  in  all 
possible  cases,  be  composed  of  cavalry. 

3781.  Q.  Mention  some  points  of  resemblance  and  some  of 
difference  between  rear  and  advanced-guards.  A.  The  principles 
of  formation  are  identical  with  an  advanced-guard  reversed  ;  and 
the  same  rules  ^generally  guide  both,  with  this  difference,  that  the 
rear-guard  usually  retires  before  the  enemy,  while  the  advance- 
guard  pushes  against  him. 

3782.  Q.  What  would  the  general  disposition  be  of  a  rear- 
guard ?  A.  The  whole  of  the  mounted  troops,  with  their  machine- 
guns,  should  protect  the  rear,  either  forming  their  own  supports, 


MIITOR  TACTICS.  473 

or  supported  by  a  force  of  infantr3^  The  artillery  moves  at  the 
rear  of  the  reserve,  and  then  the  infantry  still  nearer  to  the  main 
column.  If  the  country  admits  of  it,  the  reserve  in  a  strong 
rear-guard  may  march  with  advantage  in  two  parallel  columns, 
not  too  far  apart. 

3783.  Q.  What  particular  instructions  should  always  be  given 
a  rear-guard  ?  A.  As  to  the  degree  of  resistance  to  be  offered  to 
the  enemy  and  the  extent  to  which  reconnoitring  on  the  flanks  is 
to  be  carried. 

3784.  Q.  How  might  the  extreme  rear  be  formed  in  a  fairly 
open  country  by  a  rear-guard  marching  in  retreat  ?  A.  When 
the  pursuit  is  not  immediate,  by  groups  of  cavalry,  moving  in  a 
line  thrown  back  at  each  end  towards  the  flankers,  until  it  as- 
sumes the  semicircular  form  more  marked  than  it  would  in  the 
advance. 

3785.  Q.  If  the  pursuit  of  a  rear-guard  by  the  enemy  is  active, 
and  an  attack  imnjinent,  what  should  the  rear-guard  do  ?  A.  It 
must  manoeuvre,  and  the  kind  of  manoeuvring  must  depend  on 
the  nature  of  the  country  and  composition  of  the  guard. 

3786.  Q.  What  are  the  special  uses  of  the  different  arms  com- 
posing a  rear-guard  in  an  ordinary  country  ?  A.  In  an  ordinary 
country,  all  arms  are  necessary,  but  cavalry  are  specially  required, 
not  only  for  reconnaissance  to  the  flanks,  but  to  check  the  en- 
emy's cavalry.  Horse-artillery  should  be  used  with  the  cavalry. 
Mounted  infantry,  with  machine-guns  would  be  extremely  useful 
in  delaying  the  enemy's  advancing  columns.  But  infantry  is  in- 
dispensable under  all  circumstances  in  order  to  make  a  stand  at 
suitable  positions  for  defense. 

3787.  What  should  be  the  composition  of  a  rear-guard,  if  the 
force  is  of  any  magnitude  ?  A.  It  should  be  composed  of  the 
three  arms,  in  proportions  suited  to  the  ground  to  be  passed  over. 
Cavalry  to  meet  and  ward  off  the  enemy's  light-horse  and  guns  ; 
artillery  to  take  up  favorable  positions  in  retreat  to  bear  on  pursu- 
ing columns  ;  infantry  to  bear  the  brunt  of  the  enemy's  attack  at 
chosen  points  of  resistance. 

3788.  Q.  Why  is  artillery  especially  useful  as  part  of  a  rear- 
guard ?  A.  Because,  if  the  guns  are  used  with  skill  in  a  retreat, 
they  can  often  save  the  deployment  of  the  infantry,  by  obliging 
the  enemy  to  lose  time  by  halting  and  deploying  for  attack. 

3789.  Q.  Generally  speaking,  what  is  the  great  object  of  a 
rear-guard  ?  A.  To  keep  back  the  enemy,  without  compromising 
the  safety  or  delaying  the  retreat  of  the  main  body. 

3790.  Q.  What  is  the  best  general  method  of  keeping  back  an 
enemy  in  pursuit  of  a  retreating  force  ?  A.  By  continually  offer- 
ing to  fight  and  yet  not  fighting ;  occupying  such  natural  posi- 
tions as  will  cause  the  enemy  not  only  to  deploy  but  even  to 
attack,  and  then  getting  safely  away  without  serious  fighting. 

3791.  Q.  What  may  be  accomplished  by  a  rear-guard  "continu- 


474  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

ally  offering  to  fight  ?  A.  It  delays  the  enemy  without  much  loss, 
and  perhaps  prepares  tiie  way  for  a  successful  offensive  return, 
should  the  defective  dispositions  of  the  enemy,  or  his  careless 
manner  of  pursuit,  afford  an  opportunity. 

3792.  Q.  Why  should  any  attempt  at  the  offensive  by  a  rear- 
guard be  made  with  great  care  and  judgment  ?  A.  Because  a 
commander  should  never  forget  that  he  cannot  stop  long  to  fight, 
every  moment  that  elapses  bringing  the  foe^  assistance,  while  it 
separates  the  rear-guard  from  its  friends. 

3793.  Q.  Why  should  the  temptation  to  pursue  a  repulsed 
enemy  by  a  rear-guard  be  resisted  ?  A.  Because  it  would  result 
in  too  great  an  interval  being  left  between  the  rear-guard  and 
the  main  column,  the  latter  always  continuing  its  march  in 
retreat. 

3794.  Q.  If  seriously  committed  to  an  engagement,  how  should 
the  troops  of  a  rear-guard  withdraw?  A.  Only  by  alternate 
echelons. 

3795.  Q.  What  expedients  may  be  used  for  delaying  a  pursuing 
party  in  addition  to  the  use  of  the  troops  ?  A.  By  breaking  up 
or  barricading  roads  and  destroying  bridges. 

8796.  Q.  Mention  the  methods  of  placing  obstructions  in  the 
way  of  a  pursuing  force.  A.  By  loosening  the  planks  of  a  wooden 
bridge  so  that  the  troops  that  cross  last  can  easily  remove  them 
and  throw  them  in  the  river,  even  in  the  face  of  the  enemy;  gates 
and  narrow  roads  can  be  barricaded  with  carts  loaded  with  stones 
or  earth,  one  wheel  being  removed  from  each  cart  before  being 
placed  in  position;  fords  are  made  difficult  to  pass  by  placing  old 
farming  implements,  such  as  harrows,  ploughs,  etc.,  in  the  line 
of  crossing. 

3797.  Q.  In  what  manner  does  a  rear-guard  possess  superiority 
over  its  pursuers,  if  of  equal  strength  ?  A.  In  taking  up  a  posi- 
tion of  even  small  natural  strength — such  positions  as  are  formed 
by  rivers,  heights  and  gullies,  or  other  accidents  of  ground. 

3798.  Q.  Compare  the  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  a  rear- 
guard in  retreat  with  those  of  an  advance  guard  in  a  forward 
movement.  A.  The  knowledge  which  it  has  of  the  ground  is 
much  to  the  advantage  of  the  rear-guard,  as  it  can  decide  at  what 
points  to  make  a  stand.  The  advance-guard  in  the  forward  march 
can  push  on  with  the  confidence  of  knowing  its  supports  to  be 
approaching  from  the  rear  in  any  required  force  ;  the  rear-guard, 
on  the  other  hand,  cannot  but  feel  that  the  longer  it  is  delayed 
the  farther  it  gets  from  the  main  body,  and  has  to  consider  a 
danger  which  does  not  exist  for  the  advance-guard— that  of  being 
cut  off  from  its  column. 

8799.  Q.  What  is  the  greatest  of  all  dangers  against  which  the 
commander  of  a  rear-guard  must  provide  ?  A.  He  must  not  for- 
get that  he  may  be  pursued  by  a  column  marching  on  a  road  to 
his  flank  iu  addition  to  that  immediately  behind  him. 


IrtlKOB  TACTtQS.    .  #^ 

3800.  Q.  If  the  position  to  be  taken  up  by  the  rear-guard  be 
an  important  one,  how  will  the  reserve  be  governed,  and  what 
will  the  enemy  probably  endeavor  to  do  ?  A.  The  reserve  will, 
after  passing  the  ground,  halt  and  remain  in  such  proximity 
thereto  as  may  enable  it  to  support  the  remainder  of  the  force  so 
long  as  required.  The  enemy  will  probably  endeavor,  in  such  an 
event,  by  every  means  in  his  power  to  push  on  by  the  flanks  and 
forestall  his  opponent  in  possession  of  the  ground.  He  can  lose 
little  by  the  attempt,  and  if  at  all  successful,  the  least  evil  that 
can  result  to  the  rear-guard  will  be  that  it  must  continue  its  re- 
treat in  all  haste,  for  fear  of  the  greater  evil  of  being  cut  off  from 
its  main  body. 

3801.  Q.  What  might  be  adopted  as  a  protection  against  the 
turning  of  a  position  to  be  taken  up  by  a  rear-guard  ?  A.  It 
might  differ  from  that  of  an  advanced-guard  by  having  an  inter- 
mediate body  marching  about  half-way  between  the  reserve  and 
the  main  column,  which  could  push  on  to  hold  any  ground  of  tac- 
tical importance  until  the  reserve  reaches  it;  or,  the  main  retreat- 
ing column  might  leave  troops  behind  it  to  hold  the  tactical  point 
until  the  intermediate  detachment  arrives;  and  to  carry  out  this 
additonal  precautionary  movement  completely,  this  force,  if  mixed, 
should  be  provided  with  artillery  as  that  has  a  special  effect  in 
deceiving  the  enemy  regarding  the  strength  of  the  troops. 

3802.  Q.  If  the  pursuit  of  a  rear-guard,  which  has  been  actively 
carried  on  up  to  a  certain  point,  suddenly  appears  to  cease,  what 
should  be  done  ?  A.  The  commander  should  send  out  strong 
cavalry  patrols  to  ascertain  the  cause— as  to  whether  the  enemy 
has  stopped  his  pursuit  on  the  main  route,  or  has  taken  a  differ- 
ent direction  and  is  still  advancing.  In  the  latter  case,  active 
reconnaissance  by  cavalry  patrols  should  immediately  be  under- 
taken by  the  rear-guard,  and  the  main  column  advised  of  the 
route  taken  by  the  enemy,  that  it  may  send  out  flanking  detach- 
ments to  feel  for  him. 

3803.  Q.  What  precautions  are  necessary  by  a  column  of  troops 
in  retreating  through  a  defile  ?  A.  The  heights  on  each  side 
should  be  held  by  troops  from  the  main  body  until  relieved  by 
the  infantry  of  the  rear-guard.  The  entrance  to  the  defile  must 
then  be  defended  until  the  enemy,  forced  to  deploy,  begins  to 
assault  the  flanks  on  either  side.  The  moment  for  retreat  having 
arrived,  the  guns  fire  a  last  round  of  shrapnel  and  disappear 
through  the  defile  at  a  rapid  pace,  followed  by  the  cavalry  and 
lastly  by  the  infantry,  the  whole  being  covered  by  the  fire  of  the 
flanking  parties  on  the  heights,  which  are  the  last  to  fall  back. 

3804.  Q.  What  reception  might  be  given  an  enemy  in  pursuit  of 
a  rear-guard  on  debouching  from  a  defile  ?    Guns  may  be  so  placed 
as  to  enfilade  completely  the  defile,  or  that  portion  of  it  near  the 
farther  entrance  and  cavalry  held  in  readiness,  if  the  p:round  ad-^ 
mits,  to  charge  the  enemy's  flanks  as  he  comes  out  of  tlio  dc^le^'r-^^^^ 


476  THE  AKMT.  officer's  EXAMINER. 

before  he  has  time  to  form  line.  The  infantry,  in  part,  dispute 
possession  of  the  heights  commanding  the  near  end  of  the  defile, 
while  the  remainder  bring  a  heavy  fire  to  bear  on  the  heads  of 
the  enemy's  columns  as  they  come  in  view. 

3805.  Q.  What  measures  would  be  adopted  by  an  army  retiring 
by  more  tiian  one  road  running  parallel,  or  nearly  so,  to  each 
other  ?  A.  Usually,  there  would  be  a  rear-guard  on  each  road 
under  a  separate  commander,  the  rearmost  groups  being  continued 
across  the  whole  rear,  and  flankers  only  on  the  outer  ranks  of  the 
outer  columns.  The  whole  of  these  rear -guards  would  be  in- 
cluded in  one  high  command. 

CONVOYS. 

3806.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  a  convoy  ?  A.  During  military 
operations,  its  their  object  is  to  transport  under  escort  all  materiel 
required  in  war,  such  as  ammunition,  treasure,  provisions,  bag- 
gage and  equipment,  as  well  as  wounded  men,  sick  and  prisoners 
of  war. 

3807.  Q.  What  means  of  transportation  are  generally  used  on 
interior  lines,  and  why?  A.  Railways,  in  civilized  countries,  on 
account  of  tlie  more  rapid  means  of  communication. 

.  3808.  Q.  What  other  means  of  transportation  are  used  in  military 
operations  ?  A.  Road  and  water,  which  are  often  required  to 
supplement  the  railway  transport,  or  to  connect  the  various  links. 
In  lands  less  favored  it  is  necessary  to  move  all  supplies  by  vehicle, 
pack-animal  or  boat,  and  sometimes  by  human  labor. 

3809.  Q.  What  is  regarded  as  the  duty  of  the  first  line  of  trans- 
port ?  A.  To  convey  supplies  from  the  advanced  magazine  to  the 
divisional  headquarters  of  the  fighting  portion  of  the  troops  ; 
from  this  point  or  points  the  regimental  transport,  if  sufficient 
for  the  purpose,  takes  on  the  supplies  as  required  to  the  various 
corps  at  the  extreme  front. 

3810.  Q.  What  is  considered  the  second  line  of  transport?  A. 
All  other  means  of  transportation  not  mentioned  as  belonging  to 
the  first  line. 

3811.  Q.  What  is  the  military  organization  in  the  first  line  of 
transportation  ?  A.  It  must  be  a  strictly  military  organization, 
with  training  for  the  transport  corps  of  the  army.  This  is  indis- 
pensable, 

3812.  Q.  What  is  the  military  organization  in  the  second  line 
of  transportation?  A.  Although  full  military  organization  may 
be  wantnig,  the  officers  and  conductors  should  be  military,  and 
as  far  as  possible  a  system  in  uniformity  with  that  of  the  trained 
corps  in  front  should  be  introduced. 

3813.  Q.  Under  whom  are  those  portions  of  the  transport 
which  march  with  the  troops  placed?  A.  Under  the  order  of 
a   baggage-master  (wagon-master  in  the  U.  S.  service)  one  to 


MINOR  TACTICS.  477 

each  brigade  or  division,  who  exercise  a  general  control  of  the 
trains  pertaining  to  their  particular  troops.  In  the  U.  S. 
service,  where  bodies  of  troops  move  together,  these  trains  are 
organized  with  brigade,  division  and  corps  quartermasters  in 
charge,  the  corps  train  acting  independently  under  the  orders  of 
the  corps  quartermaster,  with  the  other  quartermasters  as  assist- 
ants and  a  wagon- master  to  each  brigade. 

3814.  Q.  When  transports  do  not  accompany  troops,  but 
move  in  independent  bodies,  how  are  the  convoys  formed  ?  A. 
They  have  a  sufficient  escort  to  protect  them,  in  case  of  an  attack, 
under  charge  of  an  officer  entitled  to  command  troops,  whose 
orders  all  those  marching  with  the  convoy  must  obey. 

3815.  Q.  Who  is  charged  with  the  organization  of  the  trans- 
port service  Attached  to  a  convoy  by  road,  and  for  what  is  he 
responsible  ?  A.  The  senior  officer  is  charged  with  everything 
connected  with  the  men,  horses  and  vehicles  composing  the  trans- 
port. He  is  reS^ionsible  for  the  completeness  of  the  equipment 
and  for  the  loading  being  correctly  affected,  as  well  as  for  the 
animals  being  properly  cared  for,  and  the  drivers  kept  under 
strict  discipline.  AH  arrangements,  however,  as  regards  orders 
of  march,  of  the  carriages  and  matiriel  must  be  made  by  the 
transport  officer  with  due  reference  to  the  commander  of  the  con- 
voy, in  order  to  insure  the  proper  disposal  of  the  escort. 

3816.  Q.  Wliat  should  the  commander  of  a  convoy  by  road,  on 
being  named  for  the  duty,  consider,  with  the  aid  of  his  map?  A. 
1.  The  distance  and  route  which  the  convoy  has  to  travel  ;  2. 
The  position  and  strength  of  the  enemy,  and  the  quarter  from 
which  attack  is  to  be  apprehended  ;  3.  The  nature  of  the  country, 
roads,  etc  ,  to  be  passed  over  ;  4.  The  number  of  carriages  and 
beasts  of  burden  forming  the  convoy,  with  the  nature  of  their 
loads  ;  5.  The  number  and  description  of  the  troops  detached  for 
escort  duty. 

3817.  Q.  Wiiy  should  the  distance  and  route  be  known  by  the 
officer  in  charge  of  a  transport  by  road  ?  A.  In  order  to  arrange 
the  various  details  of  the  march,  especially  as  regards  the  places 
where  halts  are  to  be  made. 

3818.  Q.  Why  should  the  officer  in  charge  of  a  transport  by 
road  be  informed  of  the  position  and  strength  of  the  enemy  ?  A. 
Because  the  advance  of  the  convoy  should  be  conducted  with  due 
regard  to  the  possibility  of  attack,  the  precautions  being  re- 
doubled when  his  close  proximity  renders  attack  probable. 

3819.  Q.  Why  should  the  nature  of  the  country,  roads,  etc., 
be  made  known  to  the  officer  in  charge  of  a  transport  by  road  ? 
A.  In  order. to  decide  where  the  enemy  would  be  likely  to  estab- 
lish ambuscades  or  to  attack  in  the  open.  The  width  and  char- 
acter of  the  roads  are  important  considerations,  as  they  will 
regulate,  to  a  certain  extent,  the  order  and  rate  of  march  of  the 
convoy. 


478  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIN^ER. 

3820.  Q.  Upon  what  general  principles  should  a  convoy  be 
organized  for  the  march  ?  A.  All  the  wagons  should  be  told  oflE 
into  subdivisions  of  suitable  strength  (35  in  the  U.  S.  Army, 
under  a  wagon-master).      These  form  the  tactical  unit  of  the 

convoy.  ^  i     r         j 

3821.  Q.  How  should  the  line  of  march  of  a  convoy  be  formed, 
as  a  rule,  in  a  close  country,  including  cultivated  land,  etc.,  im- 
passable except  on  the  roads  ?  A.  With  a  frontage  of  one  vehicle 
only,  unless  the  roads  are  wide  enough  to  admit  of  two  abreast, 
in  addition  to  space  enough  to  allow  of  combatant  troops  passing 
freely. 

3822.  Q.  How  may  the  line  of  march  be  formed  m  an  open  or 
uncultivated  country  by  a  convoy?  A.  The  wagons  may  march 
with  as  broad  a  frontage  as  circumstances  will  permit. 

3823.  Q.  If  there  be  pack  or  led  horses  with  the  convoy  how 
should  they  be  placed  ?  A.  If  the  country  permits  it,  they  march 
on  one  or  both  flanks  of  the  convoy,  leaving  the  road  clear  for 
the  wagons.  If  placed  behind  the  carriages,  they  suffer  from  the 
dust  raised  by  the  column  in  dry  weather,  and  in  wet  weather 
from  the  roads  being  cut  up  by  the  wheel  of  the  vehicles  ? 

3824.  Q.  How  should  an  escort  to  a  convoy  of  a  mixed  force 
be  disposed  as  a  rule  ?  A.  By  forming,  first,  advanced  scouting 
parties  of  cavalry,  and  as  reconnaissance,  not  resistance,  being 
their  business,  they  need  not  be  strong.  They  patrol  to  the  front 
and  to  the  flanks,  extending  in  an  open  country  to  a  distance  of 
from  3  to  5  miles.  Second.  Advance-guard  preceeding  the  con- 
voy well  to  the  front,  having  its  point  at  least  one  mile  from  the 
first  carriage.  This  would  usually  consist  of  infantry,  with  some 
cavalry  to  reconnoitre.  Third.  Flank-guards  on  exposed  flanks. 
Which  would  march  on  either  side  of  the  convoy,  in  an  open 
country,  not  less  than  half  a  mile  from  the  main  route.  If  only 
one  flank  is  dangerous,  one  flank-guard  will  be  sufficient ;  if  the 
country  be  close,  the  flank-guard  might  be  able  to  march  on 
a  parallel  road,  keeping  roughly  abreast  of  the  convoy;  the  flank- 
guards  in  a  large  convoy  would  be  composed  of  cavalry,  mounted 
infantry,  and  guns.  Fourtti.  Main  body  accompanying  the  con- 
voy, which,  composed  of  infantry,  with  artillery  added  in  a  strong 
escort,  would  march  near  the  centre  of  the  convoy,  accompanied 
by  the  commander  of  the  escort.  The  main  body  would  usually 
furnish  three  small  detachments,  one  for  the  front,  another  for 
the  centre,  and  another  for  the  rear  of  the  convoy  ;  they  would 
always  closely  accompany  the  wagons.  A  few  pioneers  should 
accompany  the  advance-guard  to  repair  bridges  or  roadways. 

3825.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  main  body  of  an  escort  to  a 
convoy  when  any  portion  of  the  convoy  is  threatened  ?  A.  To  at 
once  move  to  the  threatened  portion.  If  a  bridge,  defile,  or  ford 
is  about  to  be  passed,  if  the  rear  appears  secure,  the  main  body 
or  a  portion  of  it,  should  push  on  and  march  in  front  of  the  con- 


MmOR  TACTICS.  479 

voy,  next  after  the  advance-guard.  If  the  rear  is  threatened, 
it  should  of  course  fall  back,  and  follow  the  convoy  in  front  of 
the  rear-guard. 

3826.  Q.  "What  has  a  convoy  most  to  fear  on  the  roaid  ?  A.  An 
attack  from  cavalry  with  guns. 

3837.  Q.  What  precautions  should  be  adopted  to  prevent  the 
convoy  coming  under  the  guns  of  an  attacking  force  ?  A.  The 
advanced  cavalry  should  give  information  to  the  advance-guard  or 
to  the  flank-guard,  as  the  case  may  be,  of  the  enemy's  presence;  and 
the  body  so  informed  should  then  ward  off  the  attack  at  such  a  dis- 
tance from  the  convoy  as  to  prevent  the  carriages  from  coming 
under  hostile  fire,  and  the  main  body  must  not  hesitate  to  support 
the  action  of  the  party  attacked — even  to  advance  and  give  the 
enemy  combat  on  some  distant  position,  should  such  be  well  suited 
to  cover  the  march  of  the  convoy  and  save  it  from  the  dire  effects 
of  long-range  fire. 

3828.  Q.  In  the  event  of  successfully  repulsing  an  attack  upon 
a  convoy,  should  the  escort  pursue  the  enemy?  A.  Under  no 
circumstances  should  it  do  so ;  the  commander  of  the  escort  must 
remember  that  the  fate  of  the  main  body  will  probably  decide 
that  of  the  convoy. 

3829.  Q.  What  speed  may  be  expected  of  a  convoy  on  the  road  ? 
A.  The  pace,  including  short  halts,  will  rarely  exceed  two  miles 
per  hour.  If  the  roads  are  heavy  and  the  country  hilly,  no  esti- 
mate whatever  can  be  given,  as  hours  may  be  consumed  in  advanc- 
ing a  single  mile. 

3830.  Q.  What  kind  of  halts  should  be  made  by  a  road-convoy, 
and  when  should  they  be  made  ?  A.  Short  halts  and  long  halts  ; 
the  former  should  take  place  every  hour  or  half  hour,  according 
to  requirements  ;  they  are  made  in  open  ground  and  near  water. 
The  long  halts  are  for  the  purpose  of  resting  and  of  providing 
refreshment  for  men  and  animals  ;  they  should  only  be  made  in 
positions  well  explored  in  advance. 

3831.  Q.  How  may  the  wagons  of  a  convoy  be  parked  ?  A.  If  the 
enemy  is  at  a  distance  they  may  be  parked  by  being  drawn  up  in 
any  open  space  in  column  of  subdivisions,  the  wagons  of  each  sub- 
division being  axle-tree  to  axle-tree  and  a  distance  of  twenty  yards 
between  the  lines.  The  animals  may  either  be  fed  as  they  stand 
in  the  teams,  or  they  may  be  taken  out  and  picketed  in  front  of 
the  wagons.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  enemy  is  near,  and  there 
is  danger  of  attack,  the  best  formation  is  that  which  will  allow  of 
the  escort  in  immediate  charge  of  the  wagons  and  drivers  defend- 
ing themselves  and  the  horses  to  the  best  advantage.  The  system 
of  coralUng  is  the  most  frequent  used  in  the  U.  S.  Army. 
This  is  done  by  forming  a  circle  or  an  ellipse,  the  animals  all 
being  turned  towards  the  interior,  each  wagon  being  run  up  close 
to  the  other  in  echelon,  thus  forming  a  barricade,  which  can  be 
used  for  defensive  purposes  as  well  as  a  protection  to  the  animals. 


480  THE  AEMY   OFFICEE^S   EXAMINER. 


CONVOY  OF  PRISONERS. 

3832.  Q.  "What  must  the  commander  of  a  convoy  of  prisoners 
consider  ?  A.  The  certain  existence  of  a  hostile  feeling  amongst 
them,  and  to  guard  against  internal  revolt  as  well  as  against  ex- 
ternal attack.  He  should  speak  the  language  of  the  prisoners,  or 
else  an  interpreter  should  accompany  him. 

3833.  What  should  the  commander  of  a  convoy  of  prisoners  do 
before  starting  out  ?  A.  Make  out  a  li&t  of  the  prisoners  turned 
over  to  him,  and  tell  them  off  into  squads  or  companies  under 
their  own  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers. 

3834.  Q.  What  should  the  prisoners  under  convoy  be  told 
before  starting?  A.  That  no  communication  whatever  will  be 
permitted  between  them  and  the  people  while  passing  through  the 
enemy's  country;  that  they  will  have  their  wants  as  regards  food, 
etc.,  attended  to;  that  those  who  attempt  to  escape  will  be  shot, 
and  that  in  the  event  of  any  hostile  act  on  their  part  the  guard 
will  fire  upon  them  without  hesitation. 

3835.  Q.  Where  should  prisoners  under  convoy  be  placed  at 
night?  A.  In  walled  inclosures,  or  in  any  large  buildings  that 
may  be  at  hand,  and  a  cordon  of  sentries  posted  around  them, 
with  orders  to  shoot  any  one  attempting  to  run  the  gauntlet  and 
escape. 

3836.  Q.  What  should  be  the  conduct  of  the  commander  of  a 
convoy  toward  prisoners?  A.  He  cannot  be  too  kind  or  consid- 
erate, but  he  must  also  be  firm  and  determined  in  putting  down 
all  attempts  on  their  part  to  resist  or  escape. 

3837.  Q.  How  should  the  commander  of  a  convoy  of  prisoners 
dispose  of  his  escort  ?  A.  He  should  make  the  usual  disposition  of 
the  escort  on  the  march  to  secure  the  convoy  from  attack,  and 
should  detail  a  special  guard  each  day  to  immediate  charge  of 
the  prisoners. 


PART  XL 

MILITARY  TOPOGBAPHY.l 


Text-book  -.—Richards*. 


For  all  FmsT  Lieutenants  of  the  Line— Nos.  3838-3939. 


PAKT  XI. 

MILITARY  TOPOeRAPHY, 


Military  Topography. 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  SCALES. 


3838.  Q.  "What  is  the  object  of  surveying  as  applied  to  the  Art 
of  War  ?  A.  To  explain,  by  plan  and  by  report,  the  tactical  capa- 
bilities of  ground  in  anticipation  of  some  military  operation,  or  to 
illustrate  operations  that  have  taken  place. 

3839.  Q.  How  should  a  military  sketch  be  made  in  order 
to  render  it  valuable  ?  A.  With  rapidity,  combined  with  a  fair 
degree  of  accuracy. 

3840.  Q.  Is  draughtmanship  an  essential  qualification  in  the 
military  topographer ?  A.  No:  mere  draughtmanship,  although 
a  valuable  aid  to  the  topographer,  is  of  minor  importance  in  the 
present  system  of  representing  ground. 

3841.  Q.  Define  the  "  scale  "  of  a  plan,  and  illustrate  by  an  ex- 
ample. A.  The  "scale"  of  a  plan  is  the  proportion  the  latter 
bears  to  the  object  that  it  represents.  ^Example. — For  instance, 
a  scale  of  one  inch  to  a  mile  implies  that  every  mile  on  the  ground 
is  represented  by  an  inch  on  the  plan.] 

3842.  Q.  What  method  is  in  general  use  by  all  countries  of 
representing  the  scales  of  their  military  plans,  and  what  is  the 
advantage  of  this  method  ?  A.  The  method  by  what  is  known  as 
the  "Representative  Fraction."  The  advantage  of  this  method 
is  that  if  the  Representative  Fraction  is  marked  on  a  sketch, 
the  scale  can  be  understood  and  the  sketch  used  by  anyone,  even 
though  it  be  a  foreign  one;  but  without  the  Representative 
Fraction  it  might  be  useless.  For  instance,  an  officer  might  be 
required  to  read  distances  on  a  sketch  whose  scale  was  laid  of  in 
Russian  versts.  If  you  did  not  happen  to  know  how  much  a 
m7-st  is,  he  would  be  at  a  loss,  but  if  the  sketch  had  on  it  the  Rep- 
resentative Fraction  toHtt?  ^^  would  at  once  know  that  the  scale 
was  6  inches  to  a  mile. 

3843.  Q.  Define  the  Representative  Fraction,  and  explain  its 
significance.   A.  A  Representative  Fraction  is  a  fraction  of  which 


484  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

the  numerator  bears  the  same  proportion  to  the  denominator 
that  the  map,  or  any  distance  on  it,  bears  to  the  ground  that  it 
represents.  Thus,  if  the  R.  F.  of  a  map  is  -^^i^,  it  means  that 
1  inch  on  the  map  represents  63360  inches  (i.e.,  one  mile)  of  the 
ground.  The  numerator  of  the  K.  F.  must  always  be  1,  and 
this  1  is  always  taken  to  mean  1  inch;  therefore  the  denominator 
must,  of  course,  be  invariably  expressed  in  inches. 
3844.  Q.  The  scale  of  a  map  is  3  inches  to  a  mile.    Give  its  R.F. 

^  ^        3  inches  3  1     . 

A.— R.  F.  =  ~ 


Imile         1x1760x3x12       21120 

3845.  Q.  You  measure  the  distance  between  two  villages,  and 
find  it  to  be  1500  yards;  on  a  map  of  the  ground  they  are  shown 
exactly  4.3  inches  apart.     What  is  the  R.  F.  of  the  map  ?    A.  : 

_,  ^        4.3  inches  4.3  4.3  1      . 

K.  i^.  = 


1500  yards       1500  x  3  x 12       54000       125581 

3846.  Q.  Explain  the  method  and  draw  a  scale  of  which  the 
primary  divisions  are  tens  and  the  secondary  divisions  units 
of  yards,  R.  F.  4^^.  A.  Here  the  first  thing  to  do  is  to  decide 
how  many  yards  will  give  a  line  about  6  inches  long  (6  inches 
being  a  convenient  and  usual  length  for  a  scale,  and  therefore  a 
good  guide  to  adhere  to).  We  see  at  once  from  the  R.  F.  that 
468  inches,  or  13  yards,  are  represented  by  1  inch;  therefore, 
clearly,  78  yards  will  go  to  6  inches.  But  the  scale  must  show 
complete  divisions  of,  in  this  case,  tens  of  yards.  So  we  fix  on  80 
yards  as  a  suitable  length,  as  it  complies  with  this  condition,  and 
we  know  it  will  give  a  line  about  6  inches  long.  Now,  we  must 
find  the  exact  length  of  the  line  required.  The  following  propor- 
tion gives  it : 

468  inches :  80  x  3  x  12  inches. : :  1  inch  :  x  inches, 
from  which  a;  =  6.15  inches. 

To  draw  the  scale  :  Take  a  line  6.15  inches  long,  divide  it  into  8 
equal  parts  ;  each  will  represent  10  yards.  Divide  the  left  part 
into  10  equal  parts;  each  will  represent  1  yard.    Thus  : 

107dB.6         0                   10                  20>                  30                 40                   50                  60        70yds. 
Illilliiill 1 I I I I L_ I 

Scale  of  Yards,  R.  F.  ,  Jg. 

3847.  Q.  Construct  comparative  scales  suitable  for  sketching  on 
horseback,  having  ascertained  that  in  a  measured  distance  of  300 
yards  your  horse  takes  120  strides  at  a  canter,  270  steps  at  a  walk, 
and  that  in  trotting  that  distance  you  rise  in  the  saddle  90  times  : 


MILITARY   TOPOGRAPHY.  485 

R.  F. ,  1-2^-5^'  A.  Here,  three  scales  at  least  are  required  and  a  fourth 
to  show  yards  would,  of  course,  be  added  in  practice.  First  take 
the  strides  cantering.  We  are  told  that  120  strides  =  300  yards, 
.  • .  1  stride  =  f f f .  Upon  comparing  the  proportion  revealed  by 
the  R.  F.  with  the  proportion  that'a  stride  bears  to  a  yard,  we  see 
at  once  that  800  strides  will  be  a  proper  number  to  take  for  our 
scale— e.g., — 1  stride  =  fff  yards.  From  the  R.F.,  13,000  inches 
=  333i  yards,  are  represented  by  1  inch;  therefore, 
333i 
-j^Y  yards  =  133J^  yards  =  number  of  strides  represented  by  1 

inch.  But  our  line  must  be  about  6  inches  long,  therefore  multi- 
plying 133i  by  6  we  have  800,  the  right  number  to  take.  Now  to 
get  the  length  of  line  to  represent  800  strides,  we  have  : 

12,000  inches :  800  x  f  f^  x  3  x  12  inches : :  1  inch :  x  inches 
x  =  6  inches.       • 

Now  for  the  steps  at  a  walk  :  270  steps  =  300  yards  .'.1  step  = 
If^  yards.  Following  the  same  course  of  reasoning  as  above,  we 
find  that  1800  steps  will  be  the  right  number  to  take,  and  the 
length  of  line  representing  1800  steps  is  found  from  the  following 
proportion  : 

12,00C  i-iches :  1800  x  ff^  x  3  x  12  inches : :  1  inch :  x  inches. 
x  =  Q  inches. 

Finally,  for  the  rises  at  a  trot :  90  rises  =  300  yards  .  *.  1  rise  = 
^V-  yai'ds.  Therefore,  600  rises  will  be  the  right  number  to  take, 
and  the  length  of  line  representing  is  found  by  the  following 
proportion : 

12,000  inches  :  600  x  ^^  x  3  x  12  inches  : :  1  inch  :  x  inches. 
X  =  Q  inches. 

The  scales  should  be  all  drawn  and  figured  as  shown  below. 


ICO  >  50         0 

100        .        200                300               m                600 

600 

700 

l,,t,l,    M,l 

1             1             1             1             1 

1 

1 

U.^ 

Scflle  of  strides  at  a  Canter,  R.  F.  f^J^. 

100  60  0  ^  100       2 

8        4        6       6    *  ^        8        9      1000     11  •  12      13 
1         1         1         1         I         1         1         1         1         1         1 

u 

15 

1«'    1700 

Scale  of  Steps  at  a  Walk,  R.  F.  Tshjs* 

100         60            0 

1    .    M    1    1    1    i    1    1    1 

100        «              200                       300     . 

1                      1                       1 

m 

'  ™1 

Scale  of  "  Rises ''  at  a  Trot,  R.  F.  xilso. 


486 


THE  ABMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 


COPTING,   REDUCING,  AND  ENLARGING  PLANS. 

8848  Q  How  should  a  plan  be  copied  generally  ?  A.  Plans,  to 
be  simply  copied  without  reduction  or  enlargement,  may  be  simply 
traced  on  .transparent  paper,  or  what  is  known  as  tracing-  men, 
from  the  original;  or  a  piece  of  carbon-paper  being  placed  between 
the  original  and  the  copy,  and  both  being  firmly  fastened  down 
by  drawing-pins;  the  original  may  ;  transferred  by  following  the 
lines  with  a  pointed  instrument.  ^  .         -, 

3849  Q  What  is  the  quickest  and  best  way  of  copying  when 
the  original  is  on  thin  paper  ?  A.  Pin  the  copy  on  it,  and  trace  it 
through  against  a  window-pane.  ,        ,  . 

3850.  Q.  What  are  the  methods  of  making  an  enlargement 
or  reduction  of  a  plan  ?  A.  By  photography ;  by  means  of  an 
instrument  called  the  "  pantagraph  ";  or,  by  the  following  :  First, 
draw,  upon  the  original,  squares  of  any  convenient  size,  arbi- 
trarily selected  ;  then  prepare  the  paper  for  the  copy  with 
squares  in  the  required  proportion  to  those  on  the  original ;  the 
original  can  then  be  easily  copied  by  eye,  objects  being  placed 
in  the  copy  in  the  same  positions  that  they  occupy  relatively  in 
the  squares  on  th  eoriginal. 

3851.  Q.  The  scale  of  a  map  is  tq}-^.  A  copy  is  wanted  on  a 
scale  of  5  inches  to  a  mile.  Explain  how  you  will  make  it.  A. 
In  this  case  the  copy  is  to  be  on  a  smaller  scale  than  the  original. 
Two-inch  squares  are  decided  on  for  the  original,  and  the  size  of 
the  squares  for  the  copy  are  calculated  thus : 

— - —  : (i.e.,  5  inches  to  mile)  : :  2-inch  squares  :  x  inch 

10560     12672  ^      ' 

squares,  from  which  a;  =  If  inches. 

THE  CONVENTIONAL  SIGNS. 

3852.  Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  term  "conventional 
sign  "  ?  A.  A  conventional  sign  is  a  particular  way  of  represent- 
ing on  a  sketch  a  natural  feature  and  object,  such  as  a  road, 
railroad,  telegraph-line,  troops,  etc. 

3853.  Q.  Illustrate  by  drawings  the  following  conventional 
signs:  Battery  of  field-artillery  ;  battalion  of  infantry  ;  squadron 
of  cavalry  ;  a  road  inclosed  by  a  fence  ;  a  road  uninclosed  by  a 
fence ;  a  railroad,  single  and  double  tracked  ;  a  telegraph-line  ; 
a  marsh  ;  cultivated  ground  ;  a  wood  ;  buildings.  A.  The  con- 
ventional signs  are  represented  in  the  frontispiece  plate  in  the 
*' Text-book  of  Military  Topography,"  edition  of  1888. 

3854.  Q.  What  two  styles  only  of  printing  (i.e.,  lettering)  are 
now  used  in  military  sketches?  A.  Italics  for  all  ordinary 
detail  and  description ;  upright  block-printing  for  titles. 


MILITARY   TOPOGRAPHY.  487 


TERMS  USED  IN  DESCRIBING  HILLS. 

3855.  Q.  Define  the  following  terms  :  1.  Watershed.  2.  "Water- 
course. 3.  Col.  4.  Ravine.  5.  Spur.  6.  Underfeatures.  A. 
1.  The  line  which  defines  the  highest  part  of  any  feature  or 
chain  of  hills.  The  ridge  of  roof  illustrates  this  term.  2.  The 
line  defining  the  lowest  part  of  a  valley,  whether  occupied  by  a 
stream  or  not.  3.  The  neck  or  saddle  that  connects  adjacent 
heights.  4.  A  narrow  valley  with  steep  sides.  5.  A  prominent 
feature  projecting  from  high  ground.  6.  The  minor  features 
"which  spring  from  main  features. 

THE  REPRESENTATION  OF  HILLS. 

3856.  Q.  What  was  the  old  method  of  representing  sloping 
ground  ?  Explain  it  briefly.  A.  By  shading,  produced  by  short 
strokes  called  hdchures,  the  thickness  and  number  of  which 
were  regulated  by  a  "  scale  of  shade,"  according  to  the  degree 
of  slope.  Each  stroke,  or  lidcliure^  is  horizontal;  therefore  the 
greatest  slope  at  any  place  is  a  line  intersecting  the  hdchures 
perpendicularly.  The  "  scale  of  shade  "  is  the  key  to  the  expres- 
sion of  such  a  drawing  as  regards  steepness  of  ground. 

3857.  Q.  What  is  the  present  system  of  representing  slopes  and 
hill-features?  A.  By  continuous  contours,  sometimes  supple- 
mented by  lead-shading. 

3858.  Q.  Define  a  contour.  How  do  the  vertical  intervals 
between  contours  compare  with  each  other  ?  A.  A  contour  is  the 
lino  of  intersection  of  a  hill  by  a  horizontal  plane.  In  a  survey, 
contours  are  placed  at  equal  vertical  intervals.  For  instance,  the 
line  defined  by  the  edge  of  the  sea  on  a  shelving  beach  might  be 
regarded  as  a  contour,  and  others  might  be  traced  at,  say,  5  feet 
intervals  by  marking  the  edge  of  the  water  each  time  its  surface 
had  fallen  that  quantity. 

THE  SCALE  OF  HORIZONTAL  EQUIVALENTS. 

3859.  Q.  In  military  topography,  what  does  the  term  "  Hori- 
zontal Equivalent "  imply  ?  A.  It  implies  the  horizontal  distance 
(expressed  in  yards)  in  which  a  given  difference  of  level  will 
occur  at  a  given  degree  of  slope.  For  example,  you  ascend  a 
slope  of  5°  until  you  are  20  feet  vertically  above  your  starting- 
point.  You  will  find  that  your  horizontal  distance  from  your 
starting-point  is  76.4  yards.  In  other  words,  the  "Horizontal 
Equivalent"  (H.  E.)  of  5°  (the  vertical  interval  (V.  I.)  being  20 
feet),  is  76.4  yards. 

3860.  Q.  Explain  the  method  of  calculating  the  Horizontal 
Equivalents,  and  then  illustrate  by  a  drawing  the  method  of 
constructing  a  "scale  of  horizontal  equivalents"  for  10  feet  at  6 
inches  to  a  mile.     A.  A  difference  of  level  of  1  foot  will  occur  in 


488  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIN^ER. 

57.3  feet  on  a  slope  of  1°  (57.29  being  the  natural  cotangent  of 
1°).    On  a  slope  of  2°  the  same  difference  of  level  occurs  nearly 

57  3  57  3 

in  half  the  horizcftital  distance,  or  2°  =  -— ^ ;  then  3°  =  — ^ , 

-«  o 

57  3 
10**  =  — ^,  and  so  on. 
10  ' 
The  horizontal  equivalent  for  any  given  conditions  can  at  once 
be  found  by  using  the  above  number.     For  instance,  if  the  con- 
stant vertical  interval  be  10  feet,  the  horizontal  equivalent  for  1 
foot  at  1°  being  57.3  feet  =  19.1  yards,  10  feet  at  1°  will  be  57.3 
X  10  =  5.73  feet  =  191  yards. 

191 
10  feet  at  2°  =  — -  =  95  yards,  nearly. 
2 

191 
10  feet  at  3°  =  — -  =  64  yards,  nearly. 
3 

These  diatftnces,  being  drawn  to  the  scale  of  the  plan,  constitute 
the  scale  of  horizontal  equivalents. 

At  6  inches  to  a  mile,  the  distances  calculated  as  above  will 
produce : 

I  I        2°     1     3°    I    4°  I  5°|6°|10?  etc. 

^"'^  Scale  of  H.  E.  at  6  inches  to  mile,  V.  1. 10  feet. 

By  measuring  the  distance  between  the  contours  on  the  plan 
by  this  scale,  the  steepness  of  the  ground  at  any  place  may  be 
known. 

3861.  Q.  Two  hills  are  400  yards  apart.  The  angle  of  eleva- 
tion from  one  to  the  other  is  3°.  What  is  the  difference  in  their 
height?    A.  : 

oo       57.3  60       1 

'   =-^'    ^^   ¥  =  2b- 
400 

— -  =  20  yards  or  60  feet. 
1*0 

60  is  generally  used  instead  of  57.3  for  slopes  less  than  20°,  the 
ensuing  error  being  very  smalL 

SECTIONS. 

3862.  Q.  What  is  a  section  ?  A.  A  section  is  a  representation 
of  the  surface  that  would  be  exposed  by  a  vertical  plane  cutting 
through  a  hill  in  any  given  direction. 

3863.  Q.  Explain  how  to  draw  a  section  at  an  indicated  place 
on  a  plan.  A.  Lay  a  straight-edged  piece  of  paper  along  the 
scction-line  in  the  plan,  and  mark  on  it  the  exact  points  in  which 
tne  contours  cut  this  line.    Number  these  points  so  as  to  identify 


MILITARY    TOPOGRAPHY.  489 

the  contours,  calling  the  lowest  contour  0;  care  must  be  taken 
that  each  time  the  same  contour  cuts  the  section-line  it  is  similarly 
figured. 

Take  a  number  of  equidistant  parallel  lines,  at  a  distance  apart 
according  to  the  exaggerated  vertical  scale  determined  on,  to 
represent  the  planes  of  the  contour ;  figure  them  0,  1,  2,  8,  etc., 
from  the  lowest  upwards.  Transfer  the  points  from  the  edge  of 
the  piece  of  paper  to  the  lowest  of  these  lines,  and  raise  perpen- 
diculars to  meet  the  corresponding  contour  planes.  Join  the 
heights  so  found  by  a  line  ;  this  line  will  be  the  required  sec- 
tion. 

3864.  Q.  What  is  usually  the  object  of  drawing  a  section  ? 
A.  To  decide  a  question  of  relative  height  between  two  points  on 
a  map,  or  to  say  whether  the  ground  between  them  was  of  such 
a  nature  that  one  could,  or  could  not,  be  seen  from  the  other. 
There  are,  however,  quicker  ways  of  deciding  these  questions  than 
by  drawing  a  section  ;  so,  generally,  a  section  would  only  be  re- 
quired to  test  one's  ability  to  understand  a  contoured  plan. 

MAKING  USE  OF  PLANS  ON  THE  GROUND. 

3865.  Q.  Having  a  map  of  a  piece  of  country,  and  wishing  to 
make  use  of  it  on  the  site  in  the  identification  of  particular  points, 
what  methods  would  you  pursue  ?  A.  The  first  thing  necessary 
is  to  study  the  scale  and  to  impress  thoroughly  on  the  mind  the 
space  in  plan  which  such  distances  as  100  yards,  one  half  mile, 
and  a  mile  will  occupy.  The  map  should,  if  possible,  be  first 
taken  to  some  commanding  spot  which  can  be  identified  thereon. 
Here  it  will  be  spread  out,  and  placed  so  that  its  position  shall 
correspond  with  that  of  the  country.  This  may  be  done  in  two 
ways.  First,  if  any  other  distant  conspicuous  point  can  be  iden- 
tified, a  straight-edge  or  rale  is  laid  with  its  edge  connecting  the 
two  points  on  the  map  (the  observed  place  and  the  distant 
point).  The  map  is  now  turned  round  until  the  edge  of  the 
ruler,  so  placed,  is  aimed  at  the  distant  point  in  the  country. 
Secondly,  by  means  of  a  common  pocket-compass.  Most  maps 
have  their  side-margins  practically  true  north  and  south.  Know- 
ing the  magnetic  variation  of  the  needle,  a  magnetic  meridian  is 
drawn  by  means  of  a  protractor  to  the  right  (or  left)  of  one  of  the 
side-edges  of  the  map,  to  correspond  with  the  magnetic  needle. 
The  compass  is  laid  immediately  over  this  line,  and  the  whole 
map  turned  until  the  needle  corresponds  with  it  (the  line).  Your 
map  is  now  what  is  known  as  "oriented."  (Care  must  be  taken 
that  there  is  no  mass  of  iron  close  by.)  The  map  being  arranged 
by  either  of  these  methods,  and  weighted  down,  the  observer  may 
aim  the  ruler  towards  distant  points,  pivotting  it  always  on  the 
spot  in  the  plan  that  represents  his  place. 

3866.  Q.  Being  able  to  recognize  three  distant  points,  explain 


THE  ARMY  OFFICEK's   EXAMINER. 


490 

how  to  find  the  observer's  place  by  what  is  known  as  the  ♦'  method 
of  adjustment "  on  the  map.  A.  Lay  a  sheet  of  paper,  or  open 
note-book,  level  on  the  ground.  Upon  this  mark  a  point  to 
represent  one's  place.  By  aiming  a  ruler  or  straight-edge  of  any 
sort  draw  three  lines  from  this  point  towards  the  thr(!e  distant 
objects  Now  if  this  paper  be  placed  on  the  map,  and  its  posi- 
tion adjusted  so  as  to  bring  the  three  lines  to  pass  through  the 
three  corresponding  places  on  the  map,  one's  position  may  be 
pricked  off. 

MEASUREMENT  OF  DISTANCES. 

3767.  Q.  How  are  distances  usually  measured  in  military 
sketching?  A.  Merely  by  pacing  or  counting  the  paces  of  a 
horse. 

3868.  Q.  For  a  practical  topographer,  what  is  the  maximum 
error  in  distance  by  these  methods  of  measurements  ?  A.  Not 
exceeding  3  per  cent. 

3869.  Q.  How  should  the  length  of  a  man's  pace  and  that  of  a 
hoi-se,  both  at  a  walk  and  a  trot,  be  tested  ?  A.  By  going  carefully 
over  a  measured  distance  beforehand.  In  trotting,  the  number  of 
times  the  rider  rises  in  the  saddle  should  be  counted. 

3870.  Q.  What  are  the  methods  of  estimating  distances? 
A.  First,  by  the  time  taken  in  traversing  them  ;  and  secondly, 
and  by  far  the  most  important  of  all,  by  the  correct  estimation  of 
distance  by  the  eye. 

3871.  Q.  Is  the  ability  to  correctly  estimate  distance  by  the  eye 
an  essential  requisite  in  the  military  topographer  ?  A.  Yes  ;  with- 
out this  faculty,  an  officer  will  never  be  an  expert  military  topog- 
rapher. 

THE  PLANE-TABLE  ILLUSTRATED   IN  INTERSECTION  AND  RESECTION. 

3872.  Q.  Explain  by  a  drawing  how  the  plane-table  is  employed 
in  determining  stations  by  intersections.  A.  The  answer  to  this 
question  is  to  be  found  on  page  37  of  the  text. 

3873.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  "  orienting  "or  "  setting  " 
as  applied  to  plane-table  work  ?  A.  "Orienting"  or  "setting"  the 
table  means  placing  it  in  a  position  parallel  to  its  original  position, 
and  therefore  in  a  correct  position  with  regard  to  surrounding 
objects.  In  other  words,  when  a  table  is  "  set,"  every  line  on  the 
sketch  will  be  parallel  to  its  corresponding  line  on  the  ground. 

3874.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  ' '  resection  "  ?  Having  a 
compass  on  your  plane-table,  and  knowing  the  position  of  two 
points  by  intersection,  explain  how  to  find  one's  position  on  the  sur- 
vey by  "  resection."  A.  "  Kesection  "  is  the  finding  of  the  posi- 
tion of  the  surveyor  on  his  map  from  the  points  previously  deter- 
mined by  intersection.     (For  illustration  of  method  as  required 


MILITARY  TOPOGRAPHY.  491 

by  last  part  of  question,  see  page  38  of  text  and  plates  on 
page  39.) 

THE  PRISMATIC  COMPASS  AND  THE  PROTRACTOR. 

3875.  Q.  What  does  the  graduated  card  of  a  prismatic  compass 
give?  A.  What  is  known  as  the  "bearing  "  of  an  object;  that 
is,  the  angle  contained  between  the  magnetic  north  line  and  a  line 
from  the  observer  to  the  object,  or  angular  distance  from  the 
magnetic  north. 

3876.  Q.  How  are  the  numbers  on  the  card  marked  with  refer- 
ence to  the  direction  of  the  needle,  and  why  ?  A.  They  are 
reversed.  That  is  to  say,  the  north  point  is  numbered  180°  in- 
stead of  360°;  the  east  is  marked  270°  instead  of  90°,  and  so  on. 
This  is  done  in  order  to  bring  the  observed  bearing  under  the 
eye. 

3877.  Q.  What  is  the  chief  merit  of  this  instrument  ?  Is  it  ac- 
curate ?  A.  Its  chief  merit  is  portability ;  but  it  cannot  be 
relied  on  for  great  accuracy. 

3878.  Q.  Describe  the  sketching  protractor.  A.  It  is  a  thin, 
rectangular  slab  of  ivory,  about  6  x  If  inches,  with  bevelled 
edges.  The  degrees  of  the  semicircle  from  0°  to  180° — that,  is  from 
north  to  south,  by  the  east — are  marked  on  the  outer  edge  of  the 
protractor  ;  the  western  semicircle  is  figured  inside  these,  from 
180°  to  360°.    The  centre  is  marked  by  a  broad  arrow. 

3879.  Q.  What  is  the  use  of  the  protractor?  A.  To  "plot" 
the  bearings  found  with  the  prismatic  compass. 

3880.  Q.  Describe  the  method  of  determining  points  by  inter- 
section with  the  prismatic  compass,  and  plot  with  your  protractor 
the  following  bearings,  scale  6  inches  to  a  mile: 

A  to  B,  bearing  215°,  distance  500  yards. 
BtoC         "       172°        "         340     " 
CtoD         **       113°        "         460     " 
DtoE         "       158°        "         370     " 
EtoF  "       182°        "         480     " 

FtoG  "       250°        "         320     " 

A.  A  base  is  first  selected,  carefully  measured,  and  its  bearing 
taken.  The  bearing  should  be  taken  from  both  ends.  It  is  then 
plotted.  The  next  step  is  to  fix  the  position  of  important  points 
over  the  ground  to  be  sketched.  This  is  commenced  by  taking 
bearings  to  them  from  both  ends  of  the  base.  Fix  one  or  two 
stations  on  each  side  of  the  base  by  observation  from  its  ends  ; 
from  them,  as  though  from  the  ends  of  a  new  base,  fix  more  dis- 
tant stations.  (Correctness  of  answer  to  example  tested  by  the 
protractor.) 

3881.  Q.  How  would  the  place  in  the  sketch  corresponding 
with  that  on  the  ground  be  "resected"  by  means  of  the  pris- 


49:2  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

matic  compass  and  protractor  ?  A.  If  the  bearing  of  any  station, 
as  A,  be  given,  then  the  observer's  place  on  the  sketch  is  in  such 
a  position  with  reference  to  A  that  the  bearing  when  protracted 
would  pass  through  it.  The  simplest  way  of  determining  this 
line  is  to  protract  the  bearing  at  A  in  the  reverse  direction.  Then 
if  the  bearing  of  another  station,  B,  be  given,  this  would  be  laid 
off  at  B,  but  reversed.  The  intersection  of  these  two  lines  deter- 
mines the  observer's  place. 

MAGNETIC  VARIATION. 

3882.  Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  Magnetic  Variation  ? 
A.  The  magnetic  needle  in  various  parts  of  the  world  deviates 
more  or  less  from  the  meridian  ;  this  angle  of  deviation,  or  angle 
formed  by  the  needle  with  the  true  meridian  at  any  place,  is  called 
the  "  variation  "  or  declination  of  the  compass. 

3883.  Q.  In  America  is  the  deviation  to  the  east  or  west? 
A.  To  the  east  or  west,  according  to  locality. 

3884.  Q.  What  are  the  conventional  signs  for  true  north  and 
magnetic  north  ?    A.  (See  frontispiece  plate  of  text.) 

3885.  Q.  Explain  the  manner  of  finding  the  true  north  by  the 
sun  by  the  method  of  equal  altitudes.  Draw  a  diagram.  A.  See 
page  48  of  text. 

3886.  Q.  Having  found  the  true  north,  how  is  the  variation  of 
the  compas  ascertained  ?  A.  Take  the  bearing  of  true  north.  If 
the  bearing  is  not  360°,  then  the  variation  is  the  number  of  de- 
grees between  360°  and  the  observed  bearing  ;  and  it  is  east  or 
west,  according  as  the  needle  points  to  the  east  or  west  of  true 
north. 

3887.  Q.  The  bearing  of  the  sun  when  on  the  meridian  is  163°. 
What  js  the  variation  of  the  compass  ?  A.  South  end  of  compass 
is  180°  —  163°  =  17°;  north  end  to  east  of  bearing  hence  17°  east 
=  Aus.     A  diagram  will  show  this  clearly. 

TRAVERSING  WITH  THE  COMPASS  AND  FIELD-BOOK. 

3888.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  "  traversing  "  ?  A.  Trav- 
ersnig  is  the  operation  of  measuring  the  length  and  observing 
the  direction  of  a  series  of  straight  lines  along  a  road,  or  through 
a  country;  also,  determining  the  position  of  adjacent  objects  with 
reference  to  these  lines,  which  are  termed  "  traverse  lines." 

3889.  Q  Describe  the  Field-book.  A.  The  field-book  is  a  large 
pocket-book  witli  a  column  about  three  quarters  of  an  inch  wide, 
ruled  lengthwise  down  the  centre  of  each  page;  this  is  called  the 

chain  column"  (whether  the  chain  be  used  or  not);  in  it  (the 
column)  are  booked  only  ih^foricard  angles,  or  direction  of  the 
travei^e-Imes,  and  the  forward  distances.  The  side  columns  are 
used  tor  the  offsets,  or  measurements  made  perpendicular  to  the 
traverse-lines. 


MILITARY  TOPOGRAPHY.  493 

3890.  Q.  Make  a  rough  drawing  of  a  page  of  the  field-book, 
showing  the  traverse  of  a  road  with  four  stations  from  which 
bearings  were  taken  and  with  offsets  right  and  left.  A.  See  Plate 
11,  page  53  of  text. 

PLOTTING. 

3891.  Q.  Explain  briefly  the  method  of  plotting,. with  the  pro- 
tractor, the  notes  taken  from  the  field-book.  A.  See  page  53  of 
text. 

TRAVERSING  AND  PLOTTING  AT   SIGHT. 

3892.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  traversing  with  a  field- 
book  and  traversing  and  plotting  at  sight  ?  A.  The  only  differ- 
ence is  that  in  the  former  case  you  record  your  observations  in  a 
book  to  be  plotted  afterward  at  your  leisure;  whereas,  in  the  lat- 
ter, your  sketching-board  and  protractor  are  taken  with  you,  and 
you  plot  each  observation  on  the  spot. 

3893.  Q.  How  should  the  sketch  be  held  with  reference  to  the 
forward  angle  ?  A.  It  should  be  held  in  the  hand  (not  attached 
to  the  body),  and  turned  so  that  the  forward  angle  on  paper  cor- 
responds in  direction  with  the  traverse-line  on  the  ground;  this 
enables  the  draughtsman  to  realize  the  connection  between  them. 

3894.  Q.  After  halting  to  sketch  or  to  measure  an  offset,  how 
is  the  counting  of  paces  to  be  resumed  ?  A.  At  the  last  number, 
not  at  zero,  except  on  starting  to  measure  a  fresh  traverse-line. 

TRAVERSING   WITH    THE    PLANE-TABLE. 

3895.  Q.  In  "  filling  in  "  the  details  of  a  survey,  to  what  should 
the  work  be  referred  as  much  as  possible  and,  therefore,  where 
should  it  be  commenced  ?  A.  To  the  stations  fixed  by  intersection, 
and  it  should  therefore  becommencedatoneof  these  stations  with 
the  intention  of  working  up  to  and  closing  on  another. 

3896.  Q.  AVhen  the  station  is  inconveniently  situated  or  inac- 
cessible, how  may  the  starting-point  for  a  traverse  have  to  be 
found  in  working  with  a  plane-table  ?  A.  By  resection ;  or,  if  the 
plane-table  can  be  set  up  within  a  short  distance,  50  yards  or  so, 
of  such  a  station  this  distance  may  be  estimated,  and  the  starting 
point  taken  on  the  paper  at  the  corresponding  distance  and  direc- 
tion. 

3897.  Q.  Explain  by  a  rough  drawing  the  method  of  making  a 
traverse  of  a  road  with  the  plane-table.  A.  See  page  55  of  the 
text. 

HILL  AND   MOUNTAIN  SKETCHING. 

3898.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  present  system  of  hill-sketch- 
ing by  contours?  A.  (1)  To  represent  the  ground  with  as  little 
drawing  as  possible  in  the  field,  time  being  too  valuable  for  the 


494  THE  AKMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

exercise  of  mere  draughtsmanship.     (2)   To  give  a  more  exact 
and  scientiflc  representation  of  the  features  than  was  formerly 

3899.  Q.  In  order  to  sketch  ground  intelligently,  what  is  it 
essential  that  the  surveyor  should  be  able  to  do  ?  A.  He  should 
be  able  to  form  some  conception  of  the  shape  of  the  features,  and 
of  the  general  appearance  they  will  present  in  plan,  before  he 
proceeds  to  the  application  of  measurements. 

3900.  Q.  Can  a  "hard-and-fast"  rule  be  laid  down  for  hill- 
sketching  ?  A.  No,  hill-sketching  in  its  variety  of  forms  can  only 
be  acquired  by  actual  practice,  and  facility  in  the  work  requires 
special  aptitude  and  good  judgment. 

3901.  Q.  What  instrument  is  useful  in  hiU-sketchmg  ?  A.  The 
clinometre,  or  hand-level. 

3902.  Q.  To  what  particular  use  is  the  clinometer  put  in  hill- 
sketching  ?  A.  The  clinometer  is  an  instrument  for  measuring 
vertical  angles;  therefore  it  is  useful  in  determining  the  degree  of 
slope  of  the  ground. 

3903.  Q.  Make  a  rough  drawing,  showing  how  the  contours 
would  run  in  a  simple  salient  spur.  A.  See  figure  on  p;.-e  60  of 
text. 

3904.  Q.  Indicate  by  a  line  a  watershed,  and  on  each  side  of  it 
a  water-course,  and  then  show  how  a  series  of  contours  would 
cross  these  lines.    A.  See  figure  on  page  63  of  text. 

3905.  Q.  Explain  what  is  meant  by  "  form-lines."  A.  Suppose 
we  are  pacing  horizontal  equivalents  of  76  yards  down  a  section- 
line,  the  slope  being  5°.  In  the  middle  of  our  pacing— that  is, 
when  we  have  come  only  38  yards  from  the  last  contour — the 
slope  suddenly  changes  to  10°.  Now,  the  H.  E.  for  10°  is  38 
yards  ;  but,  as  we  have  already  come  down  half  a  vertical  inter- 
val, we  only  go  half  this  distance,  19  yards,  and  then  put  in 
another  contour.  The  spot  where  the  slope  changed  is  marked  by 
a  dotted  line  called  a  "  form-line." 

3906.  Q.  How  does  mountain-sketching  differ  from  hill-sketch- 
ing? A.  1.  In  the  employment  of  much  greater  vertical  inter- 
vals in  the  former  than  in  the  latter;  the  usual  vertical  intervals 
should  be  at  least  doubled.  The  slopes  in  mountains  being  all 
precipitous  ones,  their  horizontal  equivalents  on  the  normal  sys- 
tem would  be  so  small  that  the  contours  would  be  crowded  up,  and 
almost  touching  each  other.  2d.  As  the  nature  of  the  ground  in 
mountain-sketching  precludes  measurements  by  pacing,  the  judg- 
ment of  the  top'^grapher  comes  more  into  play  in  the  placing  of 
his  contours,  and  the  determination  of  inaccessible  points  by  in- 
tersection has  to  be  resorted  to  more  than  in  hill-sketching. 

3907.  Q.  What  instrument  gives  valuable  aid  in  mountain- 
sketching  ?    A.  The  aneroid  barometer. 


MILITARY   TOPOGRAPHY.  495 


SKETCHING  WITHOUT  INSTRUMENTS. 

3908.  Q.  In  an  eye-sketch  what  implements  are  at  the  disposal 
of  the  topographer  ?  A.  A  sheet  of  paper  fastened  to  a  board,  a 
pencil  and  a  flat  ruler. 

3909.  Q.  How  is  a  scale  improvised  ?  A.  By  making  equal 
divisions  on  the  edge  of  a  carol,  or  on  a  slip  of  paper,  and  letting 
each  of  tliem  stand  for  100  yards.  The  representative  fraction  of 
yeur  scale  can  afterwards  be  found  at  any  time  that  a  foot-rule 
or  scale  of  inches  is  available. 

3910.  Q.  Of  what  kind  of  work  is  the  knowledge  particularly 
valuable  in  eye-sketching  ?  A.  Any  one  who  has  worked  a  plane- 
table  will  make  an  eye  sketch  without  the  least  difficulty,  and 
with  ordinary  precautions,  will  turn  out  very  accurate  work. 

3911.  Q.  What  is  eye-sketching  practically?  A.  It  is  simply 
plane-tabling  without  a  compass,  and  without  the  tripod-stand 
for  the  board. 

3912.  Q.  Explain  the  method  of  aligning  your  ruler  on  a  dis- 
tant object,  or,  in  other  words,  how  to  "  take  a  sight,"  in  eye- 
sketching.  A.  Lay  the  sketch  on  the  ground  about  two  yards 
from  your  hand.  Then  lay  the  ruler  on  the  sketch  and  stand  be- 
hind the  board  on  which  it  is  laid,  hold  the  pencil  near  the  eye 
in  the  same  vertical  plane  as  the  distant  point,  and  move  the  ruler 
until  it  comes  into  this  vertical  plane. 

^913.  Q.  How  is  the  degree  of  slope  ascertained  in  this  method 
of  sketching.  A.  It  must  be  judged  by  the  eye.  The  correctness 
of  the  contours  depends  on  the  skill  of  the  sketcher. 


GENERAL  REMARKS   ON  SKETCHING. 

3914.  Q.  Give  the  detailed  operations  of  making  a  sketch  in  the 
order  they  would  be  performed  by  a  beginner.  A.  First,  the 
measurement  of  base  and  fixing  of  stations  by  intersection  ;  next, 
traversing  the  roads  and  sketching  the  detail ;  and,  lastly,  sketch- 
ing the  hill  features. 

3915.  Q.  What  is  specially  important  in  selecting  a  traverse- 
line  ?    A.  That  it  should  be  as  long  as  possible. 

3916.  Q.  How  are  the  contours  shown  on  a  sketch  to  distinguish 
them  from  other  lines,  say  those  of  water-courses  ?  A.  Contours 
are  usually  drawn  in  a  finished  sketch  with  a  red  pencil,  water- 
courses with  a  blue  one. 

3917.  Q.  If  a  sketch  should  get  wet,  what  precaution  is  neces- 
sary ?  A.  To  be  careful  not  to  attempt  any  erasing  on  it.  Wait 
until  it  gets  dry,  when  the  erasing  can  be  done  without  injury  to 
the  sketch. 

3918.  Q.  When  a  traverse  line  crosses  a  stream,  deep  railway 
cutting,  etc.,  how  is  it  best  to  obtain  the  distance  to  the  farther 


496 


THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 


side  ?    A.  It  is  better  to  estimate  the  distance  to  the  farther  side, 
and  then  resume  the  pacing  than  attempt  to  pace  the  distance. 

REACHING  CONTOURED  PLANS. 

3919.  Q.  When  a  contoured  plan  is  about  to  be  examined,  what 
preliminary  points  are  to  be  attended  to  before  commencing  to 
answer  questions  in  connection  with  it  ?  A.  1.  What  is  the  scale 
of  the  map  ?  2.  Is  it  contoured  on  the  normal  system,  or  not  ? 
3.  Where  is  the  north  point  ? 

3920.  Q.  What  common  and  practical  questions  suggest  them- 
selves to  you  as  likely  to  be  asked  in  regard  to  a  contoured  map  ? 
A.  1.  Questions  regarding  slopes,  and  their  practicability  for  the 
manoeuvres  or  movements  of  troops.  2.  Questions  regarding 
the  gradients  of  roads.  3.  Questions  regarding  the  relative  height 
of  points,  and  the  view  obtainable  from  any  given  spot. 

3921.  Q.  In  examining  a  contoured  plan,  what  is  the  first  thing 
that  should  be  recognized  ?  A.  The  lowest  part  of  the  country 
represented,  which  is  usually  occupied  by  the  largest  body  of 
running  water. 

3922.  Q.  What  is  the  next  thing  to  be  recognized  ?  A.  The 
watersheds  occupying  the  ground  between  the  water-courses. 

3923.  Q.  How  are  the  relative  heights  of  hills  compared,  and 
how  is  the  difference  of  level  found  ?  A.  The  relative  heights  are 
compared  by  counting  the  contours  from  the  col  which  connects 
them,  or,  if  more  convenient,  count  the  numbers  from  the  inter- 
vening water-course.  The  difference  of  level  is  found  by  multi- 
plying the  vertical  in-terval  between  the  contours  by  their  number. 

(Note. — With  the  assistance  of  a  good  contoured  map,  a  number 
of  practical  questions  and  answers  can  be  used  by  the  examiners.) 

RECONNAISSANCE  OF  A  DEFENSIVE  POSITION. — SKETCH  AND  REPORT. 

3924.  Q.  How  is  the  reconnaissance  of  a  position  made  avail- 
able to  a  commanding  general  ?  A.  By,  in  the  first  place,  an  as 
accurate  a  sketch  as  the  limited  time  at  the  disposal  of  the  officer 
will  allow,  and  by  a  report,  supplemental  to  the  sketch,  including 
in  it  all  the  information  desired,  and  supplying  the  points  in 
which  the  sketch  is  deficient. 

3925.  Q.  How  does  the  scale  of  a  sketch  of  a  position  compare 
with  that  for  a  sketch  of  a  road  ?  A.  It  should  be  much  larger. 
For  instance,  the  usual  scale  for  a  road-sketch  is  3  inches  to  a 
mile,  or  even  smaller,  while  that  of  a  position  should  be  at  least 
6  inches  to  a  mile. 

3926.  Q.  In  sketching  a  position  before  an  engagement,  would 
there  ordinarily  be  time  to  use  the  prismatic  compass  or  plane- 
table  ?   If  not,  how  should  the  sketch  be  made  ?    A.  No  ;  the  sketch 


MILITARY  TOPOGRAPHY.  497 

would  have  to  be  made  generally  with  the  eye,  or  by  the  aid  of 
what  is  known  as  the  "  Cavalry  Sketching-case." 

3927.  Q.  Is  it  necessary  to  include  in  the  sketch  any  details 
of  the  surrounding  country  ?  A.  Yes  ;  the  general  lay  of  the 
ground  in  front,  rear,  and  on  the  flanks  should  be  shown,  and 
prominent  details  put  in. 

3928.  Q.  Give  under  the  following  heads  of  a  report  on  a 
position,  the  information  that  a  reconnoitring  officer  should 
furnish:  1.  The  Position.  2.  Advantages.  3.  Disadvantages. 
4.  The  Country  in  the  Vicinity.  5.  Communications.  6.  Bridges. 
7.  Rivers.  8.  Woods.  9.  Fences.  10.  Obstructions  and  Demo- 
litions, Trenches,  and  other  Works.    A.  See  page  97  of  text. 

SKETCHING  ON   HORSEBACK. 

3929.  Q.  What  implement  is  generally  used  in  sketching  on 
horseback  ?  A.  What  is  known  as  the  "  Cavalry  Sketching-case," 
or  "  Field  Sketching-board." 

3930.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  Cavalry  Sketching-case  ? 
A.  To  simplify  the  performance  of  rapid  sketches  on  active 
service,  a  high  degree  of  accuracy  not  being  necessary. 

3931.  Q.  Explain  how  to  draw  the  direction  of  a  road,  or  of 
any  object,  with  the  cavalry  sketching-case.  A.  1.  Turn  the 
horse  exactly  in  the  direction  of  the  object.  .2d.  Revolve  the 
board  on  the  wrist  until  the  meridian-line  corresponds  with  the 
needle.  3d.  By  moving  the  arm  to  the  right  or  left,  bring  the 
point  from  which  the  line  is  to  be  drawn  on  the  sketch,  opposite 
the  centre  of  the  body.  Now,  turn  the  ruler  in  the  required 
direction,  its  edge  corresponding  with  this  point,. and  draw  the 
line  ;  but  just  before  doing  this,  glance  again  at  the  meridian-line, 
to  see  that  it  coincides  with  the  needle,  and  that  the  latter  does 
not  touch  the  box. 

3932.  Q.  How  are  contours  determined  in  a  sketch  on  horse- 
back ?  A.  They  are  determined  in  the  usual  manner,  either  by 
the  eye,  or  by  the  aid  of  a  clinometer,  independent  of  the 
sketching-case,  or  sometimes  by  the  aid  of  a  clinometer  on  the 
back  of  a  special  pattern  of  case  and  a  part  of  it. 

3933.  Q.  What  scales  are  used  in  a  sketch  on  horseback,  and 
where  are  they  generally  put  for  convenience  ?  A.  A  scale  of 
horse-paces  -and  a  scale  of  hundreds  of  yards,  both  to  be  con- 
structed on  the  edge  of  the  ruler.  The  scale  of  paces  should  not 
be  numbered,  so  that  it  may  not  be  necessary  to  adjust  its  zero 
to  a  point  on  paper. 

LAYING  OUT  AND  CONSTRUCTING  ROADS. 

3934.  Q.  What  are  the  conditions  desirable  in  a  road  connect- 
ing two  places  ?    A.  That  it  should  be  straight  and  level. 


498  THE   A.RMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMIl^^ER. 

3935.  Q.  Can  both  these  conditions  be  fulfilled  by  a  road  in  an 
ordinary  country  ?  If  not,  which  condition  should  be  sacrificed 
to  the  other  ?  A.  No.  If  level,  it  must  follow  a  winding-course, 
avoiding  the  eminences  ;  if  straight,  it  must  ascend  and  descend 
them.    As  a  rule,  straightness  should  be  sacrificed  to  levelness. 

3936.  Q.  For  military  roads,  what  should  be  the  maximum 
gradient  ?    A.  It  should  rarely  exceed  1  in  20. 

3937.  Q.  What  is  a  suflScient  width  for  military  roads  ?  A. 
Sixteen  feet,  or  wide  enough  to  permit  wagons  to  pass  each  other. 

3938.  Q.  How  is  the  centre  of  roads  made  with  reference  to 
the  sides,  and  why  ?  A.  The  centre  is  made  somewhat  higher 
than  the  sides,  so  that  rain-water  may  at  once  run  ofl!  into  the 
ditches  on  either  side.  A  slope  of  1  in  24  is  usually  given  from 
the  centre. 

3939.  Q.  Give  in  detail,  briefly,  the  operations  in  laying  out  a 
road  on  the  ground  and  the  details  of  construction  of  a 
"metalled"  road.    A.  See  pages  K7  to  171  of  text. 


PART  XII. 


AEMY  REGULATIONS. 


For  Captains  of  the  Q.  M.  Dept. — Nos.  3940-4161. 

For  Captains  of  the  Sub.  Dept.— Nos.  3940-4073  and  4162-4330. 


PAET  xn. 

ARMY  REQULATIOm. 


Article  LVI. 
public  money,  property  and  accounts. 

3940.  Q.  What  is  required  by  the  Revised  Statutes  and  act 
of  Congress  regarding  the  purchase  of  supplies  for  the  army? 
A.  They  require  advertising  a  sufficient  time  for  proposals  for  all 
purchases  and  contracts  for  supplies,  except  personal  services, 
unless  public  exigency  requires  immediate  delivery  or  perform- 
ance ;  and  that  purchases  for  the  Quartermaster's  and  Subsistence 
Departments  shall,  except  in  case  of  emergency,  be  made  only 
after  public  notice  of  not  less  than  ten  days  for  small  amounts 
for  immediate  use,  and  of  not  less  than  from  30  to  60  days. 

3941.  Q.  Is  advertising  restricted  solely  to  newspapers  ?  A.  No  ; 
proposals  may  be  invited  through  hand-bills,  posted  in  public 
places,  or  circular-letters' ;  but  advertising  in  newspapers  will  be 
resorted  to  when  time  permits,  and  when,  in  the  judgment  of  the 
disbursing  officer,  the  proposed  expenditure  is  sufficiently  large  to 
justify  it. 

3942.  Q.  By  whom  will  notices  inviting  proposals  be  issued, 
and  what  will  be  done  with  such  notices  ?  A.  Notices  will  be  is- 
sued by  the  officer  who  is  to  make  the  contract  or  purchase  ;  in 
special  cases,  however,  if  competent  authority  direct  it,  by  any 
other  officer.  All  such  notices  will  be  promptly  forwarded  direct 
to  the  proper  bureaus,  of  the  War  Department,  together  with  all 
information  required  for  a  complete  understanding  of  the  neces- 
sity for  the  proposed  contract  or  purchase. 

3943.  Q.  When  any  notice  or  proposal  for  the  War  Department 
or  any  of  its  bureaus  is  published  in  a  newspaper,  what  authority 
therefor  must  be  obtained,  and  how  will  such  authority  be  des- 
ignated ?  A.  The  written  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  War 
must  be  obtained,  and  it  will  be  either  "  special"  or  "  general." 

3944.  Q.  When  the  authority  for  advertising  is  "special,"  or 
"general,"  what  will  it  authorize?  A.  The  publication  of  the 
particular  advertisement  therein  when  special ;  when  general,  it 

501 


502  THE  ARMY   OFFICER  S  EXAMINER. 

will  authorize  the  oflBcer  to  whom  it  is  granted  to  publish  from 
time  to  time,  in  the  newspapers  designated  in  the  letter  of  author- 
ity, such  advertisements  for  proposals,  for  labor  or  supplies,  as 
as  he  may  find  necessary  during  a  specified  period. 

3945.  Q.  To  whom  will  "general"  authority  for  advertising 
be  granted  ?  A.  Only  to  disbursing  officers  who  are  required  to 
purchase  or  contract  for  supplies  or  services. 

3946.  Q.  What  must  a  request  for  authority  from  the  Secretary 
of  War  to  advertise  state  ?  A.  It  must  name  the  paper  or  papers 
on  the  official  list  of  the  department,  in  which  it  is  deemed  proper 
to  make  publication,  and  will  set  forth  the  schedule  of  advertis- 
ing rates  of  such  papers.  If  it  be  considered  desirable  to  adver- 
tise in  a  locality  where  there  is  no  official  newspaper,  or  in  a 
paper  not  on  the  list,  the  request  will  so  state,  and  with  this  re- 
quest a  sworn  schedule  of  the  advertising  rates  of  such  papers 
will  be  submitted. 

3947.  Q.  When  advertising  sales  of  property,  or  for  proposals 
for  labor  or  supplies,  how  much  time  should  be  allowed  to  inter- 
vene between  the  date  of  the  first  publication  of  the  advertise- 
ment and  the  day  of  sale  or  date  designated  for  the  opening  of 
proposals  ?  A.  Thirty  days.  A  shorter  period  may  be  named  if 
the  necessities  of  the  service  render  it  advisable  ;  but  no  period 
less  than  ten  days  shall  be  designated  except  in  case  of  emergency. 

3948.  Q.  How  many  insertions  of  advertisements  will  ordinarily 
be  permitted  ?  A.  Six  insertions  in  daily  or  four  in  weekly 
papers  ;  four  consecutive  at  the  beginning  and  two  just  before 
date  of  opening  bids,  when  more  than  two  days  are  to  intervene. 

3949.  Q.  In  cases  of  great  emergency,  how  may  authority  be 
obtained  for  advertising?  A.  Requests  may  be  made  by  tele- 
graph, the  date  and  nature  only  of  the  advertisement  to  be 
stated. 

3950.  Q.  What  is  required  in  order  to  settle  bills  for  advertising 
in  newspapers?  A.  Prior  to  payment  they  must  be  submitted  to 
the  Secretary  of  War  for  approval.  The  officer  who  issues  the 
advertisement  will  cause  the  publishers  to  furnish  him  with  their 
bills  in  duplicate  and  copies  of  the  paper  containing  the  adver- 
tisement, and  he  will  cause  the  vouchers  to  be  prepared  and  cer- 
tified on  the  official  forms,  with  the  nature  of  the  advertisement 
clearly  described.  A  copy  of  the  advertisement,  cut  from  the 
newspaper  will  be  attached  to  each  voucher,  and  indorsed  thereon 
will  appear  a  copy  of  the  letter  of  authority.  The  accounts,  thus 
prepared,  together  with  the  original  bills  will  be  forwarded  direct 
to  the  chief  clerk  of  the  War  Department. 

3951.  Q.  In  the  event  of  accounts  being  presented  to  officers 
for  advertismg  which  they  have  not  ordered,  but  which  may  have 
been  ordered  by  the  Secretary  of  War,  what  certificate  is  attached 
to  the  account  before  sending  u  to  the  War  Department  ?  A.  "  I 
certify  that  the  annexed  advertisement  was  cut  from  the  news- 


ARMY  REGULATIOlfS.  503 

paper  named  in  the  above  account,  and  that  it  was  inserted  in 
that  newspaper  for  the  period  stated." 

3952.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  the  outstanding  bills  for  ad- 
vertisements pertaining  to  his  office  in  the  event  of  the  death, 
removal,  resignation,  or  transfer  to  another  station  of  an  officer  ? 
A.  They  will  be  prepared,  certified,  and  forwarded  by  his  succes- 
sor, who  is  authorized  to  vary  the  form  according  to  the  facts. 

3953.  Q,  What  are  officers  changing  station  required  to  leave 
with  their  successors  concerning  advertisements  ?  A.  Complete 
records  relative  to  unsettled  accounts  for  the  same. 

3954.  Q.  What  will  the  heads  of  the  several  bureaus  of  the  War 
Department  furnish  to  officers  charged  with  the  publication  of 
advertisements  ?  A,  Complete  lists  of  newspapers  designated  by 
the  Secretary  of  War,  and  all  necessary  blanks  for  compliance 
with  the  regulations. 

3955.  Q.  Where  are  all  blank  forms,  blank  books,  etc.,  as  a 
rule  prepared,  and  what  publication  in  newspapers  is  forbidden  ? 
A.  Blank  forms  and  blank-books  are  prepared  at  the  Government 
Printing-office  and  can  be  obtained  by  requisition  upon  the  heads 
of  the  proper  staff  departments.  The  publication  of  military 
orders  and  circulars  in  newspapers  is  forbidden. 

3956.  Q.  How  is  the  printing  for  division  and  department 
headquarters  done  ?  A.  It  will  be  advertised  for  under  the  law 
giving  30  days'  notice.  Bids  for  printing  will  be  invited  and  con- 
tracts made  for  so  much  per  1000  "ems,"  the  agreement  to  pro- 
vide for  as  speedy  prosecution  of  the  work  as  may  be  required. 
The  contract  should  run  through  the  fiscal  year. 

3957.  Q.  How  are  the  bills  paid  for  contract  printing  ?  A. 
They  will  be  submitted  for  approval  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  in 
the  same  manner  as  accounts  for  advertising. 

CONTRACTS  AND    PURCHASES. 

3958.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  upon  officers  regarding 
the  making  of  contracts  or  purchases  on  behalf  of  the  United 
States?  A.  No  contract  or  purchase  shall  be  made  unless  the 
same  is  authorized  by  law,  or  is  under  an  appropriation  adequate 
to  its  fulfilment,  except  in  the  War  and  Navy  Departments,  for 
clothing,  subsistence,  forage,  fuel,  quarters,  or  transportation — 
which,  however,  shall  not  exceed  the  necessities  of  the  current 
year. 

3959.  Q.  When  may  purchases  be  made  or  services  engaged  in 
open  market  ?  A.  When  the  emergency  is  such  that  there  is  not 
time  to  invite  sealed  proposals  by  advertising,  or  by  posters  and 
circular-letters,  or  when  such  proposals  have  been  invited  and  no 
bids  have  been  received. 

3960.  Q.  What  are  bidders  for  supplies  to  be  informed  of  ?  A. 
The  kind,  quantity,  and  quality  of  articles  required  ;  place,  time. 


504  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

and  rate  of  delivery,  and  conditions  of  payment.  They  will  be 
furnished  with  such  specifications  as  have  been  adopted,  and  will 
be  permitted  to  examine  the  standard  samples  at  the  place  where 
they  are  deposited. 

3961.  Q.  What  are  bidders  for  labor  to  be  informed  of?  A. 
The  nature  and  extent  of  the  services  required,  where  they  are  to 
be  performed,  and  the  time  allowed  for  performance.  They  will 
be  furnished  with,  or  allowed  to  examine,  plans  and  specifications 
of  all  works  upon  which  they  desire  to  bid,  and  will  be  furnished 
with  any  necessary  information  needed  to  enable  them  to  act 
understandingly. 

3962.  Q.  What  information  is  to  be  conveyed  to  a  bidder  rela- 
tive to  other  bidders  ?  A.  No  bidder  will  be  informed,  directly  or 
indirectly,  of  the  name  of  any  person  intending  to  bid  or  not  to 
bid,  or  to  whom  information  in  respect  to  proposals  has  been 
given. 

3968.  Q.  How  should  proposals  be  prepared  ?  A.  In  strict  ac- 
cordance with  the  requirements  of  the  advertisement  or  circular 
of  instructions.  A  copy  of  such  advertisement  or  circular  will  be 
attached  to  the  proposal,  and  form  a  part  of  it.  Plans  or  specifi- 
cations which  have  been  furnished  to  a  bidder  will  be  referred  to 
by  him  in  his  proposal.  Numbers  and  prices  will  be  written  in 
words  as  well  as  expressed  in  figures;  but  when  a  great  variety  of 
articles  are  required,  such  as  stationery,  hardware,  etc.,  quantities 
and  prices  may,  if  the  amounts  involved  are  inconsiderable,  and  the 
forms  of  proposals  so  indicate  be  expressed  only  in  figures.  Era- 
sures or  interlineations  should  be  explained  by  the  bidder,  in  the 
proposal,  over  his  signature. 

3964.  Q.  What  assistance  by  the  military  authorities  may  be 
given  to  a  bidder  in  the  preparation  of  proposals?  A.  None 
whatever  by  any  person  in  the  military  service. 

3965.  Q.  How  many  copies  of  a  proposal  should  be  made,  and 
how  signed  ?  A.  As  many  as  may  be  required  by  the  officer 
making  the  contract ;  they  will  be  signed  by  the  bidder  submit- 
ting them,  with  his  usual  signature  in  full. 

_  3966.  Q.  What  is  done  when  a  firm  is  the  bidder,  and  an  agent 
signs  for  the  firm  ?  A.  The  member  or  agent  who  signs  the  firm- 
name  to  the  proposal  will  state  the  names  of  all  the  individuals 
composmg  the  firm.  If  an  agent  signs,  he  must  file  legal  evidence 
of  his  authority  to  do  so. 

3967  Q.  When  no  gurantee  is  required,  what  must  bidders  do 
If  called  for  by  the  awarding  officer  ?  A.  Furnish  satisfactory 
evidence  before  the  award  is  made  of  their  ability  to  carry  the 
proposals  into  effect 

3968.  Q  In  what  manner  must  proposals  be  inclosed  ?  A. 
Ihey  will  be  securely  sealed  in  suitable  envelopes,  indorsed  and 
aauressed  as  required  by  the  advertisement,  and  must  be  in  the 


ARMY   REGULATIOKS.  505 

possession  of  the  officer  addressed  before  the  hour  appointed  for 
the  opening. 

3969.  Q.  When  an  advertisement  calls  for  proposals  to  furnish 
labor  or  supplies  at  more  than  one  place,  what  will  be  done  ?  A. 
A  separate  proposal  will  be  made  for  performance  at  each  place, 
but  all  may  be  submitted  in  one  envelope. 

3970.  Q.  What  is  done  with  proposals  received  prior  to  the  time 
of  opening  the  same  ?  A.  They  will  be  securely  kept,  so  that  they 
cannot  be  tampered  with.  The  officer  whose  duty  it  is  to  open 
them  will  decide  when  that  time  has  arrived,  and  no  proposal  for 
that  opening  will  thereafter  be  received. 

3971.  Q.  When  may  a  bidder  withdraw  his  proposal,  and  how 
should  it  be  accomplished  ?  A.  If  a  bidder  wishes  to  withdraw 
his  proposal,  he  may  do  so  before  the  time  fixed  for  the  opening, 
witiiout  prejudice  to  himself,  by  communicating  his  purpose  in 
writing  to  the  officer  who  holds  it;  and  when  reached,  it  shall  be 
handed  to  him  or  his  authorized  agent,  unread. 

3972.  In  what  manner  will  proposals  be  opened  ?  A.  They 
will  be  opened  and  read  aloud  at  the  time  and  place  appointed 
for  the  opening.  All  the  bidders  have  the  right  to  be  present, 
and  a  record  of  each  proposal  shall  then  and  there  be  made  upon 
an  abstract  prepared. 

3973  Q.  To  what  bidder,  as  a  rule,  will  contracts  be  awarded  ? 
A.  To  the  lowest  responsible  boiiafide  bidder,  who,  when  required, 
produces  a  proper  article,  and  whose  proposal  therefor  is  not 
unreasonable.  In  rare  cases,  the  United  States  may  elect  to  exer- 
cise the  right  to  reject  proposals. 

3974.  Q.  What  guarantees  will  be  required  to  accompany  pro- 
posals? A.  Written  guarantees,  signed  by  two  responsible  parties, 
whenever  in  the  opinion  of  the  officer  authorized  to  make  the  con- 
tract such  guarantees  are  necessary  to  protect  the  interests  of  the 
Government. 

3975.  Q.  When  guarantee  is  required,  how  will  bidders  be  in- 
formed of  the  fact  ?  A.  The  fact  will  be  stated  either  in  the 
advertisement  or  in  the  printed  circular  of  instructions.  The  sum 
of  the  gurantee  and  the  period  that  will  be  allowed  after  the  date 
of  award,  for  execution  of  the  contract  and  bond  will  also  be 
stated  therein. 

3976.  Q.  When  proposals  for  supplies  for  the  general  service  of 
a  department  are  received  at  its  headquarters,  what  will  the  chief 
officer  of  that  branch  to  which  they  pertain  do?  A.  He  will  sub- 
mit them  to  the  department  commander,  and  under  his  supervi- 
sion shall  make  the  award  and  contract,  unless  higher  authority 
be  necessary. 

3977.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  proposals  for  supplies  re- 
ceived at  a  post  ?  A.  After  having  been  carefully  examined,  in- 
dorsed, and  abstracted,  they  will  be  submitted  by  the  officer 
receiving  them,  with  his  recommendation  as  to  the  proper  person 


506  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

to  whom  the  contract  should  be  awarded,  to  the  post  commander, 
who  will  forward  them  with  his  recommendation  to  the  depart- 
ment headquarters,  where  necessary  action  is  taken. 

Article  LVII. 

8978.  Q.  How  many  copies  of  contracts  will  be  executed,  and 
for  whom  are  they  intended  ?  A.  They  will  be  executed  in 
quintuplicate  :  one  is  for  the  contractor  ;  one  for  the  contracting 
officer  or  inspector  who  receires  the  supplies  ;  one  for  the  proper 
Comptroller  of  the  Treasury  ;  one  for  the  head  of  the  bureau  of 
the  War  Departtnent  to  which  the  contract  pertains,  and  one  for 
the  Returns  officer  of  the  Interior  Department.  The  latter  will  be 
accompanied  by  copies  of  the  advertisement  in  writing  proposals, 
and  of  all  bids,  offers,  and  proposals  received  under  it  and  by  the 
affidavit  prescribed. 

3979.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  all  papers  relating  to  any  con- 
tract ?  A.  They  will  finally  be  transmitted  to  the  bureau  of  the 
War  Department  to  which  they  pertain. 

3980.  Q.  What  assistance  is  forbidden  contractors?  A.  The 
labor  of  troops  or  Government  employes,  or  means  of  transporta- 
tion shall  not  be  used  to  enable  contractors  to  fulfil  contracts, 
except  in  cases  of  manifest  necessity,  and  then  only  on  the 
written  authority  of  the  proper  commander,  and  full  deduction 
shall  be  made  for  the  services  rendered, 

3981.  Q.  When  may  contracts  be  made  at  posts  ?  A.  Only 
when  specially  ordered  by  superior  authority,  and  they  will  not 
be  ordered  unless  the  stores  or  services  required,  of  proper 
quality,  can  be  procured  as  cheaply  there  as  elsewhere. 

3983.  Q.  What  amount  of  penalty  is  to  be  entered  in  the  con- 
tractor's bond  ?  A.  Not  less  than  one  tenth,  nor  more  than  the 
full  amount  of  the  total  consideration  of  the  contract. 

3983.  Q.  In  what  amount  will  the  sureties  jointly  justify,  and 
before  whom  will  the  affidavit  be  taken  ?  A.  They  will  justify  in 
double  the  amount  of  the  penalty.  The  affidavit  will  be  taken 
before  any  official,  or  person,  authorized  by  the  laws  of  the 
United  States,  State,  Territory  or  district  to  administer  oaths. 

3984.  Q.  What  shall  the  justification  of  guarantors  and 
sureties  be  followed  by?  A.  The  certificates  of  the  judge  of  a 
United  States  court,  or  United  States  district  attorney,  or,  in 
their  absence,  by  some  other  civil  official  of  the  United  States, 
who  shall  certify  that  the  guarantors  or  sureties  are  known  to 
him,  and  that  to  the  best  of  his  knowledge  and  belief  each  is 
pecuniarily  worth  over  and  above  all  his  debts  and  liabilities,  the 
sum  stated  in  his  affidavit  of  justification.  If  necessary,  or  more 
convenient,  separate  certificates  may  be  furnished  as  to  each 
guarantor  or  surety. 

3985.  Q.  How  are  bonds  to  be  executed  ?     A.    By  the  con- 


ARMY  HEGULATIGNS.  507 

tractor  as  principal,  and  two  sufficient  and  responsible  persons  as 
sureties.  Each  must  affix  to  his  signature  a  formal  seal  of  wax, 
or  other  adhesive  substance,  and  each  signature  must  be  attested 
by  at  least  one  witness.  When  practicable  there  will  be  a  sepa- 
rate witness  to  each  signature.  Sureties  must  be  citizens  of  the 
United  States. 

3986.  Q.  What  parties  will  not  be  accepted  as  sureties  ?  A.  A 
firm  will  not  be  accepted,  nor  will  a  partner  be  accepted  as  a 
surety  for  a  co-partner,  or  for  a  firm  of  which  he  is  a  member  ; 
nor  will  an  officer  of  a  corporation  be  accepted  as  surety  for  such 
corporation. 

3987.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  the  surety  of  a  guarantor 
or  the  guarantors  to  a  bidder's  guarantee  be  accepted  ?  A.  When 
they  are  able  to  justify,  as  required  for  the  bond. 

3988.  Q.  How  many  copies  of  a  bidder's  guarantees  and  con- 
tractor's bonds  will  be  executed,  and  what  is  done  with  them  ? 
A.  In  duplicate  :  one  copy  of  the  bond  accompanies  the  contract 
sent  to  the  Treasury,  and  the  other  is  retained  by  the  officer  who 
makes  the  contract. 

3989.  Q.  What  will  be  attached  to  the  quintuplicate  copy  of 
the  contract  prepared  for  the  Keturns  Office  ?  A.  The  certificate 
of  the  officer  making  the  contract  in  the  language  prescribed  in 
the  regulations. 

3990.  Q.  When  may  a  simple  contract,  properly  prepared,  be 
substituted  for  a  formal  contract  under  seal  ?  A.  When  its 
stipulations  are  to  be  fully  performed  within  30  days  from  its 
date,  and  when  it  involves  a  sum  not  greater  than  $3000. 

3991.  Q.  When  purchases  are  made  under  sealed  proposals 
without  executing  formal  written  contracts,  what  must  the  suc- 
cessful bidders  be  furnished  with  ?  A.  A  written  notification  of 
the  acceptance  of  their  proposals,  which  will  expressly  state  the 
name  of  the  article,  quantity,  quality,  price,  kind  of  package, 
and  time  and  place  of  delivery. 

3992.  Q.  When  services  other  than  personal,  are  engaged 
under  sealed  proposals  without  executing  formal  written  con- 
tracts, what  must  the  successful  bidders  be  furnished  with  ?  A. 
Written  notifications  of  the  acceptance  of  their  proposals,  which 
will  show  clearly  the  nature  and  extent  of  the  services,  the  dates 
when  they  begin  and  end,  and  the  price  agreed  upon. 

3993.  Q.  How  are  emergency  purchases  made  ?  A.  When -the 
emergency  is  such  that  there  is  not  time  for  inviting  sealed  pro- 
posals by  advertising  purchases  may  be  made,  or  services  engaged 
in  open  market,  in  the  manner  usual  among  business  men. 

3994.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  officer  making  emergency 
purchases  with  regard  to  them  ?  A.  He  will  at  once  transmit,  to 
the  head  of  the  bureau  to  which  thema^^rpertains,  a  report, 
setting  forth  in  detail  the  quanJ^^^^^njgSH^^sellers,  etc., 
of  the  supplies  purchased, ^^i^Ji0M[^^^  "wi.,[^^btie  services 

W 


:i 


••I 


508  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

employed,  together  with  a  statement  of  the  circumstances  of  the 
case,  and  his  reasons  for  not  inviting  proposals. 

Article  LVIII. 

3995.  Q.  In  what  manner  and  to  whom  may  advances  of 
public  money  be  made  ?  A.  To  no  one,  except  disbursing  officers 
of  the  Government  as  may  be  necessary  to  the  fulfilment  of  the 
public  engagements.  The  President  may,  however,  direct  such 
advances  as  he  may  deem  necessary  and  proper  to  be  made  to 
persons  in  the  military  service,  employed  on  distant  stations, 
when  they  cannot  regularly  receive  the  pay  to  which  they  may  be 
entitled. 

3996.  Q.  What  are  disbursing  officers  forbidden  to  do  regarding 
indebtedness  on  account  of  the  Government  ?  A.  They  are  for- 
bidden to  pay  any  account  or  indebtedness  until  it  is  fully  due, 
except  as  provided  for. 

3997.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's 
and  Subsistence  Departments  before  entering  upon  the  duties  of 
their  respective  offices  ?  A.  They  will  give  good  and  sufficient 
bonds  to  the  United  States,  in  such  sums  as  the  secretary  may 
direct,  faithfully  to  account  for  all  public  moneys  and  property 
which  they  may  receive. 

3998.  Q.  Can  the  amount  of  bonds  given  by  officers  upon  en- 
tering on  their  duties  be  increased  ?  A.  Yes  ;  the  President  may, 
at  any  time,  increase  the  sums  so  prescribed. 

3999.  Q.  What  will  occasion  a  disbursing  officer  being  deemed 
guilty  of  embezzlement  ?  A.  One  failing  to  deposit  promptly  with 
the  treasurer,  assistant  treasurer,  or  designated  depositary  of  the 
United  States  the  public  money  intrusted  to  his  charge,  or  who 
fails  to  keep  safely,  without  loaning,  using,  or  converting  in  any 
way,  or  exchanging  for  other  filnds,  or  depositing  in  other  than 
a  designated  depository  the  public  money  or  any  portions  thereof 
collected  or  received  by  him  until  he  is  duly  authorized  to  transfer 
or  disburse  the  same. 

4000.  Q.  What  must  be  done  with  public  money  transferred  to 
a  disbursing  officer  ?  A.  It  must  be  immediately  deposited  to  his 
official  credit,  either  with  the  U.  S.  Treasurer,  Assistant  Treasurer, 
or  designated  depositary. 

4001.  Q.  In  what  case  may  a  disbursing  officer  keep  Govern- 
ment funds  in  his  own  possession  ?  A.  If  specially  authorized  by 
the  Secretary  of  War,  when  stationed  on  the  extreme  frontier,  or 
at  places  far  remote  from  depositories,  he  may  keep  at  his  own 
risk  such  public  funds  as  may  be  intrusted  to  him  for  disburse- 
ment. An  officer  receiving  money  remitted  to  him  upon  specific 
estimates  may  disburse  it  without  waiting  to  place  it  in  a  deposi- 
tary, provided  the  payments  are  due. 

4003.  Q.  In  what  cases  may  a  disbursing  officer  draw  his  check 


ARMY   REGULATIONS.  509 

in  favor  of  himself  or  bearer  ?  A.  To  make  payments  of  amounts 
not  exceeding  twenty  dollars  ;  to  make  payments  at  a  distance 
from  a  depositary  ;  and  to  make  payments  of  fixed  salaries  due 
at  a  certain  period. 

4003.  Q.  If  there  be  two  or  more  designated  depositaries  in  the 
same  place,  how  must  a  disbursing  officer  regulate  his  deposits, 
disbursements,  and  transfers  ?  A.  So  as  to  maintain  as  far  as 
possible  a  proportion  between  his  deposits  with  the  said  deposi- 
taries and  the  amount  of  securities  filed  by  the  latter  with  the 
U.  S.  Treasurer.  This  will  not  authorize  the  transfer  from  one 
depositary  to  another  of  funds  placed  by  the  Treasury  Depart- 
ment to  the  credit  of  disbursing  officers. 

4004.  Q.  When  a  disbursing  officer  serves  in  two  distinct 
capacities,  how  must  he  deposit  the  funds  advanced  to  him  ? 
A.  Separately  and  according  to  the  bureau  to  which  they  belong, 
and  the  balance  to  the  credit  of  each  bureau  w'ill  be  reported  on 
separate  weekly  statements  of  funds. 

4005.  Q.  Who  designates  the  depositaries  for  the  use  of  dis- 
bursing officers  ?  A.  The  names  of  the  depositaries  are  published 
from  time  to  time  in  orders  from  the  Adjutant-General's  office. 

4006.  Q.  In  making  payments  by  check,  what  checks  will  be 
used  ?  A.  Only  those  authorized  and  supplied  in  blank  check- 
books by  the  heads  of  the  departments  to  which  the  disburse- 
ments pertain. 

4007.  Q.  What  will  be  entered  in  the  check-books  at  the  close  of 
business  on  the  last  day  of  each  calendar  month  ?  A.  The  ac- 
counts carried  on  both  sides  of  the  stub  pages  will  be  balanced  to 
include  the  last  deposit  made  and  check  issued  within  the  month. 
The  balance,  which  will  show  the  amount  on  deposit  subject  to 
check,  will  be  carried  to  the  head  of  the  deposit  account  for  the 
next  month.  The  monthly  list  of  outstanding  checks  will  be  filed 
with  the  check- book. 

4008.  Q.  What  will  be  entered  upon  the  ^deposit  page  of  a 
check-book  opposite  the  last  check  drawn  on  Saturday  of  each 
week  ?  A.  A  memorandum  (in  red  ink)  showing  the  balance  with 
the  depositary  at  the  close  of  business  on  that  day,  and  the  data 
upon  which  it  is  based. 

4009.  Q.  When  an  officer  is  relieved  from  disbursing  duty, 
what  will  he  do  with  regard  to  unused  checks  ?  A.  He  will  turn 
all  of  them  over  to  his  successor,  taking  duplicate  receipts  there- 
for. He  will  also  notify  the  depositary  and  the  chief  of  the  bureau 
to  which  the  disbursements  pertain  of  the  serial  numbers  of  the 
checks  so  transferred.  Checks  will  be  transferred  from  one 
officer  to  another  in  a  similar  manner.  Should  the  accounts  of 
the  officer  be  closed,  all  unused  checks  and  blank  check-books 
will  be  transmitted  to  the  chief  of  the  bureau  from  whom  they 
were  received. 

4010.  Q.  What  must  a  disbursing  officer  state  upon  the  face  of 


510  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

each  check  ?  A.  A  disbursing  officer  drawing  checks  on  moneys 
deposited  to  his  official  credit  will  state  on  the  face  of  each  check 
the  object  or  purpose  to  which  the  avails  are  to  be  applied  ;  and, 
in  case  of  payment  to  officers  or  enlisted  men,  the  period  covered 
by  the  payment.  -,<,-,         «     i  ^ 

4011.  Q.  In  what  manner  will  the  proceeds  of  sales  of  old 
materials,  condemned  stores,  or  other  public  property  be  disposed 
of  ?  A.  They  will  be  deposited  and  covered  into  the  treasury  as 
miscellaneous  receipts  on  account  of  "Proceeds  of  Government 
Property,"  and  shall  not  be  withdrawn  or  applied  without  a  sub- 
sequent appropriation  by  law  ;  except  that  moneys  received  from 
the  sale  of  stores,  materials,  or  supplies  to  officers  and  enlisted 
men,  or  to  any  exploring  or  surveying  expedition  authorized  by 
law,  and  all  sales  of  subsistence  supplies,  shall  respectively  revert 
to  the  appropriation  out  of  which  they  were  originally  expended, 
and  shall  be  applied  to  the  purposes  for  which  they  were  appro- 
priated by  law. 

4012.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  the  proceeds  of  sales  of  all 
public  property  not  specially  excepted  ?  A.  They  will  be  deposited 
as  miscellaneous  receipts,  without  abatement  or  reduction,  to  the 
credit  of  the  Treasurer  of  the  United  States,  either  at  the  Treas- 
urer's office  or  at  the  office  of  one  of  the  assistant  treasurers,  or 
with  some  designated  depositary  of  the  United  States. 

4013.  Q.  How  will  military  stores  and  property  condemned 
and  ordered  sold  be  disposed  of  ?  A.  At  auction,  for  cash,  on 
due  public  notice,  and  in  such  market  as  the  public  interests  may 
require.  Tiie  officer  making  the  sale  will  suspend  it  when,  in  his 
opinion,  better  prices  can  be  obtained,  except  in  the  case  of  con- 
demned animals.  The  auctioneer's  certified  detailed  account  of 
the  sale,  and  the  vouchers  for  the  expenses  attending  it,  will  be 
reported  on  the  proper  forms  to  the  chief  of  the  department  to 
which  the  property  belonged. 

4014.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  upon  the  expenditures  of 
public  moneys  appropriated  for  fiscal  years  ?  A.  Funds  appro- 
priated for  one  fiscal  year  cannot  be  used  to  liquidate  liabilities 
incurred  in  another,  nor  can  funds  be  used  for  any  other  purpose 
than  that  for  which  they  were  appropriated.  No  department  of 
the  Government  shall  expend  in  any  one  fiscal  year  any  sum  in 
excess  of  appropriations  made  by  Congress  for  that  fiscal  year,  or 
involve  the  Government  in  any  contract  for  the  future  payment 
of  money  in  excess  of  such  appropriations. 

4015.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  time  allowed  for  outstanding 
checks,  and  what  should  he  done  at  the  end  of  that  period  ? 
A.  At  the  end  of  each  fiscal  year  all  amounts  of  money  repre- 
sented by  checks  or  drafts,  drawn  three  or  more  years  prior 
thereto,  by  any  disbursing  officer,  upon  the  treasurer,  an  assistant 
treasurer,  or  any  designated  depositary,  and  w^hich  remain 
credited  to  such  officer,  shall  be  covered  into  the  treasury,  and 


AEMY   REGULATIOlfS.  511 

there  stand  to  the  credit  of  the  payees  or  bona  fide  holders  of  such 
checks  or  drafts. 

4016.  Q.  How  long  may  a  disbursing  officer  be  credited  with 
an  unchanged  account  in  a  depositary,  and  what  will  be  done 
with  the  same  ?  A.  All  amounts  of  money  held  by  the  treasurer, 
and  assistant  treasurer,  or  a  designated  depositary,  credited  to  a 
disbursing  officer  whose  account  has  remained  unchanged,  either 
by  deposit  or  payment,  for  the  space  of  three  years,  shall  likewise 
be  covered  into  the  treasury,  to  be  placed  to  the  credit  of  such 
officer,  if  it  be  found  that  he  is  entitled  to  the  credit. 

4017.  Q.  When  money  is  deposited,  what  is  to  be  noted  on  the 
account  current  of  an  officer  ?  A.  The  date  and  the  amount  of 
the  deposit,  and  the  number  of  the  certificate,  together  with  the 
appropriation,  if  specified,  will  be  noted  on  the  account  current 
upon  which  the  depositor  desires  to  be  credited  with  the  money 
so  deposited. 

4018.  Q.  What  are  the  regulations  concerning  certificates  of 
deposits  ?  A.  The  originals  of  all  certificates  of  deposit  for  the 
deposit  of  public  moneys  of  every  character,  except  as  stated,  will 
be  forwarded  to*the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  immediately  upon 
their  issue  by  the  depositors  (not  the  depositaries),  who,  before 
transmitting  them,  will  see  that  their  amounts  correspond  with 
the  sums  actually  deposited.  Those  issued  to  disbursing  officers, 
for  funds  deposited  to  their  official  credit,  subject  to  the  payment 
of  their  checks,  and  more  properly  called  disbursing  officers'  re- 
ceipts, will  be  retained  in  their  own  possession.  Those  issued  for 
the  transfer  of  funds  from  one  depositary  to  another,  will  be  for- 
warded to  the  Treasurer  of  the  IFnited  States.  In  no  case  will 
certificates  of  deposit  be  filed  with  accounts-current,  rendered  by 
officers  to  the  accounting  officer  of  the  treasury.  In  taking  credit 
thereon  for  deposits,  officers  will  state  specifically  the  date  of  the 
deposit  and  the  designation  and  location  of  the  depositary. 

4019.  Q.  What  will  officers  who  make  deposits  of  public  funds 
to  the  credit  of  the  Treasurer  of  the  United  States  forward  with 
the  original  certificates  ?  A.  A  statement  showing  distinctly  the 
source  from  which  the  money  was  derived,  i.e. :  If  a  balance  of 
funds  for  disbursement,  the  appropriation  and  fiscal  year  will  be 
correctly  named;  if  in  refundment  of  an  overpayment,  when,  by 
whom,  and  upon  what  voucher  the  overpayment  was  made ;  if 
from  stoppages  on  pay-rolls,  on  account  of  loss  of,  or  damage  to» 
property  by  employes,  or  on  account  of  sales  to  them,  for  which 
property  the  depositing  officer  is  himself  responsible,  the  char- 
acter of  the  property  and  the  date  of  loss  or  sale  will  be  given, 
and  a  reference  made  to  the  officer's  property  voucher  accounting 
for  the  stores ;  if  from  stoppage  on  account  of  loss,  damage,  or 
sale  of  property  for  which  an  officer,  other  than  the  depositing 
officer,  is  responsible,  the  name  of  the  responsible  officer  will  be 
given,  together  with  a  list  of  the  persons  from  whom  deductions 


513  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIl^ER. 

were  made,  stating  the  character  of  the  property  and  the  amount 
deducted  in  each  individual  case ;  in  like  manner,  deposits  of 
funds  received  from  collections,  from  sales  to  officers  and  enlisted 
men,  or  on  account  of  losses  or  forfeitures,  will  be  fully  ex- 

4020.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  duplicate  checks  be 
i.-^sued  by  disbursing  officers  ?  A.  When  an  original  check  not 
exceeding  in  amount  $3500  is  lost  or  destroyed,  the  disbursing 
officer  may,  after  six  months  and  within  three  years  of  its  date, 
issue  a  duplicate  of  the  same,  which  the  treasury  or  designated 
depositary  may  pay,  upon  the  fulfilment  of  certain  conditions, 
which  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  is  authorized  to  prescribe. 

4021.  Q.  What  is  required  uf  a  party  in  order  to  obtain  a  du- 
plicate check  ?  A.  The  party  in  interest  must  furnish  the  officer 
or  agent  who  issued  the  original  with  an  affidavit  giving  the  name 
and  residence  of  the  applicant  in  full,  describing  the  check  and 
its  indorsements,  showing  his  interest  therein,  detailing  the  cir- 
cumstances attending  its  loss,  and  what  action,  if  any,  he  has 
taken  to  stop  payment  thereon.  The  affidavit  must  be  made  and 
signed,before  an  officer  authorized  to  administer*oaths  generally, 
and  he  must  certify  that  he  administered  the  oath.  The  claimant 
must  also  furnish  to  the  same  officer  or  agent  a  bond,  prepared  and 
executed  on  the  blank  form  which  will  be  furnished  to  any  officer 
or  agent  applying  therefor.  The  affidavit,  and  the  bond,  when 
executed,  are  to  be  indorsed  by  the  officer  or  agent  as  having  been 
submitted  to  him,  and  as  being  tlie  proof  and  security  upon 
which  he  has  acted.  After  the  expiration  of  six  months  from  the 
time  the  original  check  was  issued,  the  officer  or  agent  will  issue 
a  duplicate^  which  must  be  an  exact  transcript  of  the  original, 
especially  as  to  number  and  date. 

4022.  Q.  How  many  copies  of  an  account-current  will  be  made, 
and  what  will  be  done  with  them  ?  A.  Accounts-current  will  be 
made  in  duplicate.  One  copy,  accompanied  by  abstract  and 
vouchers  complete,  will  be  forwarded  to  the  chief  of  the  bureau 
within  ten  days  after  the  end  of  every  calendar  month;  the  other, 
with  the  duplicate,  abstracts,  and  vouchers,  will  be  retained  by  the 
officer. 

4023.  Q.  How  will  money  received  and  disbursed  under  the 
appropriation  for  "  Contingencies  of  the  Army  "  be  accounted  for? 
A.  In  a  separate  account  current. 

4024.  Q.  What  will  officers  in  rendering  accounts  which  event- 
ually pass  to  the  Treasury  Department  for  settlement  do  ?  A.  Send 
them,  with  the  necessary  vouchers,  direct  to  the  bureau  of  the 
War  Department  to  which  they  pertain. 

4025.  Q.  What  is  required  of  disbursing  officers  regarding  a 
rendition  of  their  accounts?  A.  Disbursing  officers  are  required 
to  prepare  their  accounts  and  deposit  them  in  the  post-office  on  or 
before  the  tenth  day  of  each  month.    Irregularities  in  the  mail- 


ARMY  BEGULATIOKS.  513 

service  or  want  of  blank  forms  will  not  excuse  non-compliance 
with  this  paragraph.  If  printed  blanks  are  not  furnished,  the 
forms  will  be  prepared. 

4036.  Q.  How  will  accounts-current  be  kept  as  regards  fiscal 
years,  and  what  must  be  noted  in  red  ink  ?  A.  No  account  cur- 
rent will  contain  accounts  of  different  years  ;  and  no  item  will  be 
entered  thereon,  unless  it  pertains  to  the  fiscal  year  to  which  the 
account  pertains.  Accounts-current,  abstracts  and  vouchers,  in- 
cluding transfers  and  refundments,  will  have  noted  in  red  ink  on 
the  face,  and  indorsed  in  the  brief  on  the  back,  the  fiscal  year  to 
which  the  funds  pertain. 

4027.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  public  funds  on  hand  at  the 
close  of  the  fiscal  year  ?  A.  Except  those  required  to  pay  out- 
standing liabilities  incurred  during  such  year  (a  schedule  of  which 
will  accompany  the  last  account-current  rendered  for  the  year)  all 
funds  will  be  deposited,  and  the  disbursing  officers'  account  closed 
by  a  credit  for  such  deposit. 

4038.  Q.  For  what  purposes  may  balances  be  retained,  and  how 
will  they  be  accounted  for  ?  A.  Balances  may  be  retained 
after  the  close  of  the  fiscal  year  for  the  purpose  of  paying  out- 
standing liabilities;  they  will  be  carried  to  a  "supplemental 
account-current "  for  the  fiscal  year  to  which  the  funds  pertain. 
When  disbursements  are  made  from  such  balances,  accounts  will 
be  rendered  as  "supplemental  accounts"  for  the  fiscal  year  to 
which  the  funds  pertain. 

4039.  Q.  How  many  copies  of  money-vouchers  must  be  made, 
what  will  they  specify,  and  what  must  be  expressed  on  their  face? 
A.  Vouchers  will  ordinarily  be  made  out  in  duplicate  ;  occasion- 
ally, in  special  cases,  in  triplicate.  The  number  executed  will  be 
distinctly  stated  on  each  copy.  Vouchers  for  the  disbursement  of 
money  will  specify  the  quantity  and  price  of  each  article  bought, 
the  name  and  place  of  business  of  the  person  from  whom  it  is  pro- 
cured, and  the  date  and  manner  of  purchase.  When  the  vouchers 
are  for  services  rendered,  they  will  state  the  nature  and  period  of 
service,  with  rate  of  pay  per  day  or  month.  The  facts  on  which 
an  account  depends  must  be  stated  and  vouched  by  the  certificate 
of  an  officer.  All  vouchers  for  purchases  or  service,  except  per- 
sonal, must  have  expressed  on  their  face,  immediately  below  the 
statement  of  the  account,  the  mode  of  purchase  or  engagement. 

4030.  Q.  In  what  terms  will  accounts  be  expressed  ?  A.  Ac- 
counts will  be  expressed  in  terms  of  dollars  and  cents.  When 
fractions  of  less  than  one  half  cent  occur  in  the  footing  of  a 
voucher,  they  will  be  disregarded;  if  the  fraction  be  one  half  or 
greater,  it  will  be  reckoned  as  a  cent. 

4031.  Q.  What  will  be  forwarded  with  the  accounts  and  returns 
of  a  disbursing  officer  regarding  money-vouchers  ?  A.  All  orders 
of  commanding  officers,  and  other  papers,  upon  which  the  officer 
accountable  relies  to  relieve  himself  from  responsibility. 


514  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

4033  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  money  be  paid  to  an 
authorized  agent  or  attorney  ?  A.  Upon  his  producing  and  filing 
with  the  disbursing  officer  or  the  accounting  officers  a  power  of 
attorney,  or  other  written  authority  properly  executed,  authoriz- 
ing him  to  receive  such  money  and  to  give  a  receipt  or  acquit- 
tance therefor,  and  a  voucher,  signed  with  the  name  of  such  per- 
son, firm,  or  corporation,  by  the  agent  or  attorney,  will  be  deemed 
sufficient.  If  the  authority  of  the  agent  or  attorney  is  produced 
to  the  disbursing  officer  and  filed  with  his  account,  it  must  be 
returned  by  him  to  the  accounting  officers,  with  the  vouchers  and 
other  papei-s  relating  to  the  payments. 

4033.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  small  sums  for  local 
service  be  paid  by  disbursing  officers  ?  A.  Eeceipts  for  small 
sums  for  occasional  service  paid  to  corporations,  such  as  rail- 
roads, telegraph,  turnpike,  transfer,  express,  steamboat,  hotel, 
newspaper,  and  ice-companies,  may  be  signed  by  the  local  agent 
in  charge  of  the  business  of  the  company  at  the  place  where  tlie 
service  is  rendered,  ^r  where  it  begins  or  terminates,  and  the 
certificate  of  the  officer  making  payment  that  the  person  to  whom 
payment  was  thus  made  was  then  the  local  agent  of  the  company, 
in  charge  of  its  business  at  the  place  designated,  will  be  sufficient 
evidence  of  the  agent's  authority  to  receive  and  receipt  for  the 
money  paid. 

4034.  Q.  What  is  done  with  original  money-vouchers,  and 
under  what  circumstances  may  copies  be  furnished  ?  A.  Original 
vouchers  will  accompany  the  accounts  ;  copies  will  not  be  ad- 
mitted, unless  accompanied  by  satisfactory  evidence  of  the  loss 
or  destruction  of  the  originals  ;  or  that  their  retention  is  indis- 
pensable to  the  performance  of  duty  by  an  officer  acting  under 
orders.  When  originals  cannot  be  furnished,  copies  duly  certi- 
fied as  true,  by  a  disinterested  officer,  will  be  accepted.  If  no 
other  officer  than  the  payor  or  payee  is  at  the  post  when  pavment 
is  made,  both  will  certify  to  that  fact,  and  also  to  the  correctness 
of  the  copy.  When  vouchers  are  not  sent  with  the  account  to 
which  they  belong,  but  are  subsequently  rendered,  suitable  ex- 
planation will  be  made. 

4035.  Q.  How  must  money-vouchers  be  made  out  before 
receipts  are  given  or  taken  by  officers  ?  A.  All  officers  are  for- 
bidden to  give  or  take  receipts  in  blank  for  public  money  or 
property  ;  in  all  cases  the  voucher  will  be  made  out  in  full,  and 
the  date  place,  and  exact  amount  of  money,  in  words,  will  be 
written  out  in  the  receipt  before  it  is  signed. 

4036.  Q.  What  must  be  done  with  mutilated  checks?  A. 
Mutilated  checks  will  be  forwarded  to  the  depositary  to  which 
they  pertain,  and  a  record  made,  on  the  stub  of  the  check-book, 
01  the  date  of  transmission. 

iO'Sl  Q.  To  whom  will  disallowed  accounts  be  charged  ?  A. 
An  officer  shall  have  credit  for  an  expenditure  of  money  or 


ARMY   REGULATIONS.  515 

property  made  in  obedience  to  the  order  of  his  commanding 
oflBcer.  If  the  expenditure  is  disallowed,  it  shall  be  charged  to 
the  oflBcer  who  ordered  it. 

4038.  Q.  When  will  disbursing  officers  make  statements  of 
funds  on  hand  ?  A.  Disbursing  officers  will,  at  the  close  of  busi- 
ness on  Saturday  of  each  week,  make  and  forward  to  their  re- 
spective chiefs  of  bureaus  weekly  statements  of  funds,  showing 
exactly  where  their  funds  are  deposited.  A  monthly  statement 
of  funds  will  be  rendered  when  the  last  day  of  the  montli  does 
not  fall  on  Saturday. 

4039.  Q.  What  will  be  done  when  an  officer  is  relieved  from 
duty  in  a  staflf  department  at  any  station,  relative  to  Government 
indebtedness  ?  A.  He  will  certify  the  outstanding  debts,  if  any, 
to  his  successor,  and  transmit  an  account  of  the  same  to  the 
head  of  the  proper  bureau.  Unless  otherwise  ordered,  he  will 
turn  over  to  his  successor  the  public  money,  property,  books,  and 
papers  pertaining  to  the  service  from  which  he  is  relieved. 

4040.  Q.  What  number  of  days  per  month  is  used  for  the  com- 
putation of  time  in  the  payment  for  services  rendered  ?  A. 
Thirty  days  will  be  assumed  as  the  length  of  the  month  whatever 
be  the  number  of  daj^s  therein. 

4041.  Q.  What  are  the  regulations  concerning  disbursing 
officers  betting  at  cards  or  games  of  hazard?  A.  If  any  disburs- 
ing officer  shall  bet  at  cards  or  any  game  of  hazard,  his  com- 
manding officer  shall  suspend  his  functions,  require  him  to  turn 
over  all  public  funds  in  his  keeping,  and  shall  immediately  report 
the  case  to  the  proper  bureau  of  the  War  Department.  In  every 
instance  where  an  officer  intrusted  with  the  care  or  disbursement 
of  public  funds  shall  violate  this  regulation,  he  will  be  brought 
to  trial  before  a  general  court-martial  by  the  department  com- 
mander. 

4042.  Q.  What  are  the  regulations  concerning  the  interest  of 
officers  or  others  in  the  purchase  of  supplies  ?  A.  No  officer  dis- 
bursing money  for  the  military  service,  or  directing  the  disburse- 
ment thereof,  shall  be  concerned,  individually,  directly  or  indi- 
rectly in  the  purchase  or  sale  of  any  article  intended  for,  making  a 
part  of,  or  pertaining  to,  the  department  of  the  public  service  in 
which  he  is  engaged.  No  officer,  or  clerk  of  a  disbursing  officer, 
shall  be  interested  in  the  purchase  of  any  soldier's  certificate  of 
pay  due,  or  any  other  claim  against  the  United  States.  Officers 
or  agents  in  the  military  service  shall  not  purchase  supplies  for 
the  Government  from  any  other  person  in  the  military  service  ; 
nor  shall  they  contract  with  any  such  person  to  furnish  supplies 
or  service  to  the  Government,  nor  make  any  Government  pur- 
chase or  contract  in  which  such  person  shall  be  admitted  to  share 
or  receive  benefit. 


516  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIIJ^ER. 


Article  LIX: 

4043.  Q.  What  must  be  done  with  property  coming  into  an 
officer's  possession,  and  what  will  be  done  when  transferring  the 
same  ?  A.  All  property,  whether  paid  for  or  not,  which  comes 
into  the  possession  of  an  officer,  must  be  properly  accounted  for 
on  his  returns.  An  officer  transferring  stores  will  furnish  the 
receiving  officer  with  invoices,  in  duplicate,  in  which  such  stores 
shall  be  accurately  enumerated,  and  the  latter  will  return  his 
duplicate  receipts.  The  transaction  will  appear  on  the  property 
returns  rendered  by  each. 

4044.  Q,  What  will  be  done  when  an  officer  to  whom  public 
property  has  been  transferred  refuses  to  receipt  for  it  ?  A.  The 
officer  who  invoiced  it  will  report  the  facts  to  the  proper  com- 
manding officer  of  the  former,  and  ask  redress.  Copies  of  all 
papers  relating  to  the  transaction  will  be  filed  with  his  returns. 

4045.  Q.  What  will  be  done  upon  the  receipt  of  public  property 
by  an  officer  ?  A.  He  will  make  a  careful  examination  of  the 
same  to  ascertain  its  quality  and  condition,  but  will  not  break 
original  packages  until  issues  are  to  be  made,  unless  he  has 
reason  to  believe  that  the  contents  are  defective.  Should  he 
discover  defect  or  shortage,  he  will  apply  for  a  board  of  survey 
to  determine  it  and  to  fix  the  responsibility  therefor.  Should  he 
consider  the  property  unfit  for  use,  he  will  also  submit  in- 
ventories, in  triplicate,  and  request  the  action  of  an  inspector. 
The  same  rule  will  be  observed  in  regard  to  packages  when  first 
opened  for  issue,  and  for  property  damaged  or  missing  while  in 
store. 

4046.  Q.  What  must  be  done  to  be  relieved  of  responsibility 
for  property  worn  out  in  the  public  service  ?  A.  The  preliminary 
action  of  a  board  of  survey  is  not  necessary,  and  the  officer  re- 
sponsible will  submit  inventories  thereof  and  ask  for  an  in- 
spector's action.  When  the  action  of  a  board  of  survey  and  an 
inspector  are  necessary,  the  inventory  will  be  accompanied  by  a 
copy  of  the  proceedings  of  the  board. 

4047.  Q.  What  must  be  done  when  packages  of  military  sup- 
plies are  opened  for  the  first  time  after  coming  into  possession  of 
an  officer,  whether  because  of  apparent  affect,  or  for  issue  ?  A. 
He  or  some  other  commissioned  officer  will  be  present  and  verify 
the  contents  by  actual  weight,  count,  or  measurement,  as  circum- 
stances may  require  ;  and,  in  case  of  deficiency  or  damage,  he 
will  make  written  report  of  the  facts  to  the  post  commander.  If 
the  responsible  officer  be  present  and  make  the  report,  he  will 
secure  the  attendance  of  one  or  more  civilians  or  enlisted  men,  to 
make  sworn  statements  in  writing  regarding  the  condition  of  the 
property  wiion  examined. 

^^•^^•^9u  y^'"^^  ^^}^^^  ^^^^  ^®  ^^^^^^  whenever  information  is 
receivea  that  animals,  or  other  property  belonging  to  the  United 


ARMY   REGULATIOITS.  517 

States,  are  unlawfully  in  the  possession  of  anj^  person  not  in  the 
military  service  ?  A.  The  quartermaster,  or  other  responsible 
officer,  will  cause  proper  proceedings  to  be  promptly  instituted 
and  diligently  prosecuted,  before  the  civil  authorities,  for  the 
recovery  of  the  property;  and,  if  the  same  has  been  stolen,  for  the 
arrest,  trial  and  conviction,  and  due  punishment  of  the  offenders 
and  their  accomplices. 

4049.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  might  property  of  the 
U.  S.  be  seized  ?  A.  Upon  satisfactory  information  that  United 
States  property,  unlawfully  in  the  possession  of  any  parties,  is 
likely  to  be  taken  away,  concealed,  or  otherwise  disposed  of, 
before  the  necessary  proceedings  can  be  had  in  the  civil  tribunals 
for  its  recovery,  the  post  or  detachment-commander  will  at  once 
cause  the  same  to  be  seized,  and  will  hold  it  subject  to  any  legal 
proceedings  that  may  be  instituted  by  other  parties.  Persons 
caught  in  the  act  of  stealing,  or  making  away  with  recently 
stolen  public  property,  will  be  summarily  arrested  by  the  troops, 
and  turned  over  to  the  civil  authorities  for  trial. 

4050.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  rewards  be  offered,  and 
what  amount  is  authorized  ?  A.  Quartermasters,  after  they  have 
failed  to  get  possession  of  a  lost  or  stolen  animal  by  the  ordinary 
means,  may  authorize  the  payment  of  a  reward  of  |25.00  for  its 
recovery.  If  the  animal  has  been  stolen,  they  may  offer  an  addi- 
tional reward  of  like  amount  for  each  person  arrested,  tried,  con- 
victed, and  sentenced  for  the  theft. 

4051.  Q.  What  will  be  done  when  an  officer  is,  by  order,  leave 
of  absence,  or  any  other  cause,  removed  from  the  care  of  public 
property  in  his  charge  ?  A.  The  commanding  officer,  or  an  officer 
designated  by  him,  shall  receive,  receipt,  and  care  for  it,  until  a 
successor  is  regularly  appointed;  and,  if  it  becomes  necessary  to 
remove  all  officers,  the  commanding  officer  will  take  measures  to 
secure  it  and  report  the  circumstances  to  the  proper  autiiority. 
When  it  can  be  avoided,  an  officer  will  not  be  detailed  for  duty 
which  will  separate  him  from  the  public  property  for  which  he  is 
accountable. 

4052.  Q.  Who,  by  virtue  of  his  office,  becomes  responsible  for 
public  property  ?  A.  Although  an  officer  who  has  receipted  for 
public  property  is  pecuniarily  accountable  therefor,  the  command- 
ing officer  is  also  responsible  for  its  security,  and  for  the  strict 
observance  of  the  regulations  in  regard  to  its  preservation,  use, 
and  issue.  He  will  therefore  see  that  none  but  reliable  agents  are 
allowed  control  over  or  access  to  it. 

4053.  Q.  What  kind  of,  and  how  will  U.  S.  property  for  use 
in  the  service  be  marked  ?  A.  Public  animals,  means  of  trans- 
portation, tools,  and  all  other  movable  public  property  that  it  is 
practicable  to  mark,  will  be  conspicuously  branded  "U.  S."  before 
being  used  in  the  service. 

4054.  Q.  How  will  public  property  lost  or  destroyed  in  the  mili- 


518  THE  ARMY  officer's  EXAMINER. 

tary  service  be  accounted  for  ?    A.  By  affidavit,  or  the  certificate 
of  a  commissioned  officer,  or  other  satisfactory  evidence. 

4055  Q.  In  case  of  deficiency  of  any  article  of  military  sup- 
plies on  the  settlement  of  the  accounts  of  any  officer  charged 
with'the  issue  of  the  same,  what  is  done  ?  A.  The  value  thereof 
shall  be  charged  against  the  delinquent  and  deducted  from  his 
monthly  pay,  unless  he  shall  show  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Sec- 
retary of  War,  by  one  or  more  depositions  setting  forth  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  case,  that  said  deficiency  was  not  occasioned 
by  any  fault  on  his  part.  And  in  case  of  damage  to  any  military 
supplies,  the  value  of  such  damage  shall  be  charged  against  such 
officer  and  deducted  from  his  monthly  pay,  unless  he  shall,  in 
like  manner,  show  that  such  damage  was  not  occasioned  by  any 
fault  on  his  part. 

4056.  Q.  How  may  affidavits  or  depositions  be  taken,  when 
necessary  for  government  purposes  ?  A.  Before  any  officer  in  the 
following  list,  wheii  recourse  cannot  be  had  to  any  before  named 
on  said  list,  which  fact  shall  be  certified  by  the  officer  offer- 
ing the  evidence,  i.e. :  1st,  a  civil  magistrate  competent  to  ad- 
minister oaths ;  2d,  the  judge-advocate  of  a  court-martial ;  3d, 
the  adjutant  of  a  regiment  or  post ;  4th,  a  commissioned  officer. 
When  affidavits  are  taken  for  the  interest  of  the  public  service, 
the  Quartermaster's  Department  will  pay  the  notarial  fees. 

4057.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  permanent  military  build- 
ings be  constructed  ?  A.  Permanent  military  buildings  will  only 
be  constructed  under  special  authority  granted  by  an  act  of  Con- 
gress, unless  the  work  or  labor  connected  therewith  is  performed 
by  troops;  and  in  such  case,  the  authority  of  Congress  must  first 
be  obtained  if  the  estimated  cost  of  the  building  or  structure 
exceeds  $30,000. 

Article  LX. 

4058.  Q.  What  is  necessary  in  order  to  relieve  an  officer  from 
liability  on  account  of  public  property  which  has  been  damaged, 
except  by  fair  wear  and  tear,  or  which  is  believed  to  be  unsuitable 
for  the  service  ?  A.  It  shall,  before  being  submitted  to  an  inspector 
for  condemnation,  be  examined  by  a  board  of  survey.  Exceptions 
will  be  made  in  cases  of  animals  or  other  public  property  infected 
with  contagious  disease,  which  may  be  summarily  disposed  of  by 
order  of  a  commanding  officer. 

4059.  Q.  How  may  boards  of  survey  be  convened  and  consti- 
tuted ?  A.  A  board  of  survey  will  be  convened  by  the  command- 
ing officer  of  the  post  or  station  where  it  is  to  meet.  It  will  be 
composed  of  three  officers,  exclusive  of  the  commanding  officer 
and  those  whose  actions  and  responsibilities  are  to  be  inquired 
into,  if  that  number  are  present  for  dut> ;  otherwise,  of  as  many 
as  are  so  present,  exclusive  of  the  commanding  and  interested  offi- 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  519 

cers;  or,  if  the  latter  alone  are  present  for  duty,  then  of  the  dis- 
interested officer.  When  only  the  responsible  or  interested  officer 
is  present,  he  will  not  constitute  himself  a  board  of  survey,  but 
will  furnish  his  certificate  of  facts  and  circumstances  which  de- 
mand special  determination,  supported  by  the  affidavits  of  enlisted 
men  or  others  who  are  cognizant  thereof,  w^hich  he  will  forward 
to  department  headquarters. 

4060.  Q.  What  duties  are  imposed  upon  boards  of  survey  ?  A. 
Boards  of  survey  must  fully  investigate  the  matters  submitted  to 
them.  They  will  call  for  all  evidence  attainable,  and  will  not 
limit  their  inquiries  to  the  proofs  or  statements  presented  by  the 
party  or  parties  in  interest.  They  will  rigidly  scrutinize  the  evi- 
dence, especially  in  those  cases  wherein  property  is  alleged  to 
have  been  stolen,  or  embezzled,  and  will  not  recommend  the  relief 
of  officers  or  soldiers  from  responsibility  for  property  until  it  shall 
be  proved  that  they  have  fully  performed  their  duty  in  regard  to 
it.  In  no  case,  however,  will  the  report  of  the  board  overrule  or 
take  the  place  of  the  depositions  which  the  law  requires. 

4061.  Q.  What  will  the  party  responsible  for  the  property  to  be 
surveyed  in  all  cases  furnish?  A.  The  original  certificates  or 
affidavits  and  the  number  of  duly  attested  copies  thereof  required 
by  a  board  of  survey  to  accompany  its  proceedings. 

4062.  Q.  What  oaths  are  boards  of  survey  empowered  to  ad- 
minister ?  A.  A  board  of  survey  has  no  legal  power  to  administer 
oaths,  either  to  its  members  or  to  witnesses  before  it. 

4063.  Q.  What  powers  are  conferred  upon  boards  of  survey  ? 
A.  Boards  of  survey  cannot  condemn  public  property.  Their  ac- 
tion is  purely  advisory.  They  are  called  for  the  purpose  of 
ascertaining  and  reporting  facts  ;  of  submitting  opinions  and 
making  recommendations  upon  questions  of  administrative  re- 
sponsibility, which  may  arise  through  accident,  mistake,  neglect, 
or  unusual  act,  and  which  cannot  be  determined  by  established 
rules,  in  order  that  the  adjustment  of  accounts  may  be  facilitated. 
For  example,  they  investigate  and  determine  questions  involving 
the  character,  amount,  and  cause  of  damage  or  deficiency  which 
public  property  may  have  sustained  in  transit,  in  store,  or  in  act- 
ual use,  and  which  is  not  the  result  of  ordinary  wear  and  tear, 
or  of  some  accepted  contingency  of  the  service,  and  report  the 
investigation  made,  their  opinions  thereon,  and  fix  responsibility 
therefor  upon  the  party  at  fault,  whether  the  carrier,  the  one 
having  it  in  immediate  charge,  or  the  one  called  upon  to  account 
for  the  property.  They  make  inventories  of  property  ordered 
to  be  abandoned,  when  the  articles  have  not  been  enumerated  in 
the  orders  ;  recommend  .the  prices  at  which  damaged  clothing 
may  be  issued  to  troops,  and  the  proportion  in  which  supplies 
shall  be  issued  in  consequence  of  damage  that  renders  them,  at 
the  usual  rate,  unequal  to  the  allowance  which  the  regulations 
contemplate.    They  verify  the  discrepancy  between  the  invoices 


520  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIJTER. 

and  the  actual  quantity  or  description  of  property  transferred 
from  one  officer  to  another ;  fix  definitely  amounts  received  for 
wliich  the  receiving  officer  must  receipt,  and  ascertain,  as  far  as 
possible,  where  and  how  the  discrepancy  has  occurred.  They  in- 
ventory and  report  the  condition  of  property  in  the  possession  of 
deceased  officers  as  provided  for, 

4064.  Q.  How  many  copies  of  the  proceedings  of  boards  of 
survey  must  be  prepared  and  what  will  be  done  with  them  ? 
A.  The  proceedings  of  a  board  of  survey  will  be  prepared  in 
triplicate  and  signed  by  each  member.  In  cases  when  they  are 
deemed  complete  by  the  approval  or  disapproval  of  the  convening 
officer,  one  of  the  set  will  be  forwarded  by  him  to  the  head- 
quarters of  the  department,  and  the  remaining  two  to  the  officer 
whose  responsibility  they  affect.  When  the  action  of  authority 
higher  tlian  that  by  which  the  board  has  been  convened  is  neces- 
sary, all  of  the  set  will  be  forwarded.  Upon  completion,  one 
will  be  retained  at  the  place  of  final  action  and  two  will  be  re- 
turned to  the  responsible  officer. 

4065.  Q.  What  is  necessary  to  render  the  proceedings  of  boards 
of  survey  complete?  A.  When  the  value  of  the  property  sub- 
mitted for  survey,  or  the  loss  or  damage  to  be  inquired  into,  does 
not  exceed  five  hundred  dollars,  the  proceedings  of  the  board  will 
be  considered  complete  upon  the  approval  or  disapproval  of  the 
convening  officer,  although  they  may  be  revised  by  higher 
authority.  If  such  value,  or  the  loss  or  damage,  exceed  that 
amount,  the  proceedings  will  be  acted  upon  by  the  department 
commander,  and  if  the  amount  involved  be  large,  they  will  be 
forwarded  to  the  division  commander  for  action.  If,  on  exami- 
nation in  the  proper  bureau,  they  exhibit  serious  error  or  defect, 
either  of  investigation  or  finding,  they  will  be  submitted  to  the 
Secretary  of  War  for  his  instructions.  In  all  cases,  however,  and 
whatever  the  amount  involved,  they  shall,  upon  the  request  of  an 
officer  pecuniarily  interested,  be  submitted  to  the  department 
commander  before  they  shall  be  deemed  complete  for  any  purpose. 

4066.  Q.  What  is  done  if  an  inspection  of  property  follows  the 
action  of  a  board  of  survey  thereon  ?  A.  A  copy  of  the  proceed- 
ings will  accompany  the  inventory  and  inspection  report  which  is 
transmitted  as  a  voucher  to  the  officer's  returns.  Another  copy 
of  the  proceedings  and  of  the  inventory  and  inspection  report 
will  be  filed  by  the  officer  mth  his  retained  papers.  Whenever  a 
board  recommends  a  stoppage  against  an  enlisted  man  and  the 
recommendation  is  approved,  the  convening  authority  will  cause 
a  copy  of  the  proceedings  to  be  furnished  to  the  man's  company 
commander,  who  will  charge  the  amount  on  the  next  muster  and 
pay-rolls  of  the  company. 


ARMY   REGULATIONS.  521 


Article  LXII. 


4067.  Q.  What  powers  are  conferred  by  law  upon  the  Secretary 
of  War  ?  A.  The  supply,  payment,  and  recruitment  of  the  army, 
and  the  direction  of  the  expenditures  of  the  appropriations  for  its 
support,  are,  by  law,  intrusted  to  the  Secretary  of  War.  He  ex- 
ercises control  through  the  bureaus  of  the  War  Department.  He 
determines  where  and  how  particular  supplies  shall  be  purchased, 
where  they  shall  be  delivered,  inspected,  and  stored,  and  how 
distributed. 

4068.  Q.  How  are  assignments  of  officers  and  men  of  the  staff 
departments  made  ?  A.  The  assignment  to  stations  of  officers  or 
enlisted  men  of  the  staff  departments,  except  as  provided  in  the 
regulations  for  troops  in  campaign,  will  be  made  by  the  Secretary 
of  War,  through  the  General  of  the  Army,  or  by  commanders  of 
geographical  divisions  and  departments,  under  the  special  author- 
ity of  the  War  Department.  The  commander  of  a  department, 
who,  in  consequence  of  the  movement  of  troops,  or  other  necessity 
of  service,  removes  an  officer  from  the  station  to  which  he  has 
been  assigned  by  the  Secretary  of  War,  will  promptly  report  the 
case  to  the  Ajutant-General. 

4069.  Q.  What  will  be  done  when  chiefs  of  staff  departments 
desire  to  change  the  stations  of  officers  or  enlisted  men  belonging 
thereto,  or  to  send  them  on  duty  peculiar  to  their  own  departments  ? 
A.  Such  chiefs  shall  (except  in  cases  of  officers  employed  under 
the  appropriation  for  the  improvement  of  rivers  and  harbors,  and 
of  enlisted  men  belonging  to  tlie  Signal  Corps  or  detailed  to  duty 
therewith)  make  application,  through  the  Adjutant-General,  to 
the  Secretary  of  War,  setting  forth  the  reason  for  the  change  or 
the  purpose  of  the  journey,  when,  should  the  Secretary  assent, 
the  proper  orders  will  be  issued. 

4070.  Q.  Under  whose  control  are  the  staff  officers  assigned  to 
the  command  of  a  general  or  other  officer.  A.  They  are  under 
his  supervision  and  control  in  all  matters  pertaining  to  or  affect- 
ing the  command  not  specially  excepted  therefrom  by  the  regula- 
tions or  orders  of  the  War  Department. 

4071.  Q.  To  whom  must  officers  of  staff  departments,  or  officers 
doing  duty  therein  at  military  posts,  submit  their  requisitions  for 
supplies  or  property,  and  estimates  for  money  ?  A.  To  their  im- 
mediate commanding  officers  for  revision  and  approval,  prior  to 
forwarding  them. 

4072.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  chief  of  each  branch  of  the 
staff  of  any  command  regarding  estimates  ?  A.  He  will  care- 
fully revise  all  estimates  for  money  and  requisitions  for  supplies 
for  his  department.  In  acting  upon  them  he  will  ascertain  and 
be  guided  by  the  cheapest  markets  and  most  economical  routes  of 
transportation.  Such  officers  should  receive  from  their  com- 
manders timely  instructions  as  to  all  contemplated  movements  of 


522 


THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 


troops  and  as  to  any  probable  increase  or  diminution  of  the  gar- 
rison at  any  particular  post,  that  a  proper  and  economical  distri- 
bution of  the  supplies  may  be  made.         ^    ^     ^  «,  ,        ,        , 

4073  Q  What  estimates  will  officers  of  the  staff  departments 
assigned  to  the  charge  of  general  depots,  or  to  the  duty  of  pur- 
chasing supplies  for  troops  not  included  in  the  military  depart- 
ment in  which  they  are  located,  submit  to  the  deparfment  com- 
mander ?  A.  Such  estimates  only  as  relate  to  the  service  under 
his  command.  In  all  other  matters  they  will  communicate 
directly  with  the  chiefs  of  their  bureaus  in  Washington. 

4074.  Q.  How  will  every  order  issued  by  any  military  authority, 
i^hich  may  cause  an  expenditure  of  money  in  a  staff  department, 
be  given  ?  A.  In  .writing.  One  copy  thereof  will  be  forwarded, 
by  the  officer  receiving  it,  to  the  head  of  his  department ;  the 
other  will  be  filed  by  the  disbursing  officer  with  his  voucher  for 
the  disbursement.  If  the  expenditure  is  disallowed,  it  will  be 
charged  to  the  officer  who  ordered  it. 

Article  LXVIII. 

4075.  Q.  With  what  duty  is  the  Quartermaster's  Department 
charged  ?  A.  With  the  duty  of  providing  the  means  of  trans- 
portation of  every  character,  either  under  contract  or  in  kind, 
which  may  be  needed  in  the  movement  of  troops  and  material  of 
war.  It  furnishes  all  Government  animals  employed  in  the  ser- 
vice of  the  Army,  the  forage  consumed  by  them,  the  wagons  and 
all  articles  necessary  for  their  use,  with  the  exception  of  the 
equipment  of  cavalry  and  artillery.  It  furnishes  clothing,  camp 
and  garrison  equipage  for  the  troops,  the  shelter  and  buildings 
for  them  and  for  the  stores  which  they  require,  constructs  and 
repairs  roads,  railways,  and  bridges  needed  for  military  purposes, 
builds  and  charters  ships,  boats,  docks,  and  wharves,  and,  finally, 
attends  to  all  those  matters  connected  with  military  operations 
which  are  not  expressly  assigned  to  some  other  bureau  of  the 
War  Department. 

4076.  Q.  Where  are  general  depots  for  the  collection,  manu- 
facture, and  preservation  of  quartermaster's  stores,  until  they 
are  required  for  distribution,  established,  and  under  whose  con- 
trol are  they  ?  A.  They  are  established  in  different  sections  of 
the  country.  They  are  under  the  immediate  control  of  the  Quar- 
termaster-General. For  the  protection  and  preservation  of  stores 
belonging,  or  already  issued,  to  a  particular  military  division  or 
department,  its  commander  will  exercise  control  so  far  as  his 
command  is  interested  in  such  property.  In  all  other  matters 
the  officers  in  charge  act  under  the  sole  direction  of  the  Quarter- 
master-General. 

4077.  Q.  What  will  the  Quartermaster's  Department  provide, 
in  all  permanent  barracks,  for  the  use  of  enlisted  men  ?    A.  A 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  523 

box  or  locker  for  each  enlisted  man,  in  which  to  store  his  full- 
dress  uniform  and  extra  clothing.  Each  man  will  provide  his 
own  padlock.  Chairs  will  be  supplied  for  enlisted  men  in  bar- 
racks, at  a  rate  not  exceeding  one  for  each  non-commissioned 
officer  and  one  for  every  two  enlisted  men  of  other  grades. 
Bunks,  benches,  chairs,  tables,  lockers,  and  other  articles  of 
furniture  provided  for  soldiers'  barracks,  will  not  be  removed 
therefrom  without  the  order  of  the  post-commander,  nor  will  they 
be  removed  from  a  post  or  station  except  by  order  of  the  Quar- 
termaster-General. 

4078.  Q.  What  annual  inspection  is  made  by  the  commanding 
officer  and  quartermaster  at  military  posts,  and  for  what  pur- 
pose ?  A.  An  annual  inspection  of  the  public  buildings  at  the 
several  posts  will  be  made  on  the  31st  of  March  by  the  com- 
manding officer  and  quartermaster,  and  immediately  thereafter 
the  quartermaster  will  submit  a  report  showing  the  condition 
and  capacity  of  the  buildings,  and  the  character  and  extent  of 
any  additions,  alterations,  and  repairs  that  have  been  made  upon 
them  during  the  year  closing  with  the  inspection,  with  the  cost  of 
the  same ;  also  the  additions,  alterations,  and  repairs  that  are 
needed,  with  plans  and  estimates  thereof  in  detail.  Whenever 
the  31st  of  March  falls  on  Sunday,  the  inspection  will  be  made 
the  following  day.  The  commanding  officer  will  examine  the  re- 
port and  estimates,  and  forward  them,  with  an  expression  of 
his  views,  through  the  proper  channel,  to  the  Quartermaster- 
General. 

4079.  Q.  When  private  buildings  occupied  as  barracks  or  quar- 
ters, or  lands  occupied  as  encampments,  are  vacated,  what  is 
done  ?  A.  The  commanding  officer  and  quartermaster  will  make 
an  inspection  of  them,  and  the  latter  will  report,  through  the 
prescribed  channels,  to  the  Quartermaster-General,  their  con- 
dition, and  any  injury  which  has  resulted  to  them  by  reason  of 
such  occupancy. 

4080.  Q.  What  is  required  regarding  the  numbering  of  build- 
ings at  a  post  ?  A.  Every  public  building  at  a  military  post  will 
be  numbered  by  the  post-quartermaster,  and  each  new  building 
constructed  will  he  given  its  proper  numerical  designation.  All 
buildings  shall  retain  permanently  then  umbers  originally  given, 
which  shall  be  entered  by  the  post  quartermaster  in  a  book,  to  be 
retained  in  his  office  as  a  permanent  and  continuing  record. 
Against  each  building  he  shall  charge  all  expenditures  made 
thereon,  noting  the  sums  authorized,  the  authority  therefor,  and 
the  amounts  actually  expended  carefully  itemized,  showing  sepa- 
rately the  sums  paid  for  material  and  labor.  All  expenditures 
made  for  the  erection  of  new  buildings,  as  well  as  for  additions, 
alterations,  or  repairs  of  others,  will  be  so  entered  that  the  book 
will  accurately  exhibit  the  cost  of  each  building  to  date. 

4081.  Q.  By  whom  will  quarters  at  military  posts  be  allotted  ? 


524  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

A  The  post-quartermaster,  under  the  direction  of  the  command- 
ing officer,  will  allot  to  each  officer  the  quarters  to  which  his  rank 
entitles  him.  ,   ,       ..,      .  .  ^    ^ 

4082.  Q.  If  there  are- officers  on  duty  without  troops,  at  sta- 
tions where  there  are  public  quarters,  how  will  they  be  provided 
for  ?  A.  They  will  be  furnished  quarters  in  kind.  If,  however, 
the  quarters  are  insufficient,  the  Quartermaster's  Department  will 
hire  those  necessary  for  the  officers  who  are  unprovided  for. 

4083.  Q.  To  what  extent  may  an  officer  on  sick-leave  hold  his 
quarters  ?  A.  An  officer  on  sick-leave  is  entitled  to  public  quar- 
ters at  his  station  during  the  period  of  sick-leave,  not  exceeding 
six  months,  provided  he  or  his  family  actually  occupy  them.  He 
can  only  hold  hired  quarters,  however,  while  he  is  personally  an 
occupant. 

4084.  Q.  How  are  officers  supplied  with  fuel?  A.  Officers 
may  purchase  the  fuel  actually  needed  for  their  own  use  from  the 
Quartermaster's  Department,  For  the  quantity  allowed  them 
they  shall  pay  at  the  rate  of  three  dollars  per  cord  for  standard 
oak-wood,  or  its  equivalent  in  other  kinds  of  fuel,  as  determined 
by  the  Quartermaster-General.  For  any  additional  quantity  they 
shall  pay  the  contract  price,  or  three  dollars  per  cord,  if  the 
contract  price  is  less  than  three  dollars.  This  privilege  shall  not 
extend  to  retired  officers.  The  Quartermaster's  Department  may 
sell  fuel  to  contract-surgeons  and  to  the  families  of  officers  who 
are  temporarily  absent. 

4085.  Q.  What  are  the  regulations  governing  the  sale  of  fuel 
to  officers  ?  A.  Officers  who  desire  to  purchase  fuel  of  the  Quar- 
termaster's Department  will  make  requisition  therefor.  Payment 
will  be  made  at  the  time  of  sale,  and  the  purchasing  officer  will 
be  given  a  receipt  for  the  amount  paid.  The  law  permits  the  sale 
to  officers  of  such  fuel  only  as  they  actually  use.  They  have  no 
right  to  sell,  barter,  exchange,  or  dispose  of  it.  Fuel  will  be  sold 
only  on  the  officer's  certificate  that  it  is  for  his  personal  or  family 
use.  An  officer  may  procure  by  purchase  from  the  Quarter- 
master's Department  one  sixth  of  his  allowance  of  fuel  in  kindling- 
wood,  which  will  be  issued  as  equivalent  in  quality  to  standard 
oak-wood. 

4086.  Q.  What  is  the  standard  by  which  fuel  is  issued  or  sold  ? 
A.  Merchantable  oak-wood  is  the  standard  ;  the  cord  is  138  cubic 
feet.  A  scale  of  equivalents,  to  govern  in  the  issue  and  the  sale 
of  fuel,  is  published  from  time  to  time  in  general  orders. 

4087.  Q.  What  provision  is  made  for  the  issue  of  fuel  to 
troops  ?  A.  Fuel  issued  to  troops  is  public  property.  Any  por- 
tion not  actually  consumed  by  them  shall  be  returned  to  the 
quartermaster  and  taken  up  on  his  quarterly  return.  Fuel  so 
issued,  however,  and  not  consumed  in  quarters,  may  be  used 
in  baking  the  soldiers'  bread  ;  and  at  any  post  where  coal  is  used 
for  fuel  exclusively,  the  Quartermaster's  Department  may,  upon 


ARMY   REGULATION'S.  525 

the  request  of  the  post-commander,  provide,  as  part  of  the  fuel 
allowance,  an  equivalent  of  wood  in  lieu  of  coal  sufficient  for  the 
post-bakery.  Fuel  will  be  issued  only  in  the  month  when  due. 
The  cheapest  fuel  at  the  place  of  issue  will,  all  things  considered, 
be  furnished. 

4088.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  an  increase  of  fuel 
allowance  be  permitted,  and  what  is  required  of  the  quartermaster 
in  this  case  ?  A.  If  at  a  military  post,  situated  between  the  36th 
and  43d  degrees  of  latitude,  the  mean  temperature  for  twenty 
consecutive  days  of  any  calendar  month  is  not  above  20  degrees 
Fahrenheit,  an  increase  of  fuel  of  one  third  instead  of  one  fourth, 
as  shown  in  the.  table,  shall  be  allowed.  If  the  temperature  is 
not  above  10  degrees,  an  increase  of  one  half  shall  be  allowed, 
whatever  the  latitude  of  the  place.  When  an  increased  issue  is 
made  under  the  preceding  paragraph,  the  certificate  of  the  post- 
surgeon  as  to  the  mean  temperature,  and  the  order  of  the  post- 
commander  for  the  issue,  will  be  filed  with  the  "Abstract  of 
Issues." 

4089.  Q.  What  kind  of  illuminating  supplies  are  provided  for 
posts,  and  how  are  matches  furnished  ?  A.  The  Quartermaster's 
Department  provides  electric-lights,  lamps,  lanterns,  mineral  oil, 
wicks,  and  lamp-chimneys.  Matches  are  purchased  by  the  Quar- 
termaster's Department  from  the  Subsistence  Department,  and 
issued  in  such  quantities  as  commanding  officers  may  order  and 
certify  as  necessary  for  the  purpose. 

4090.  Q.  How  is  the  issue  of  illuminating  supplies  regulated  ? 
A.  By  the  department  commander,  upon  the  recommendation  of 
the  post-commander. 

4091.  Q.  How  frequent  should  requisitions  be  made  for  illumi- 
nating supplies  at  posts  ?    A.  Once  each  month. 

4092.  Q.  How  is  ^stationery  issued  by  the  Quartermaster's 
Department?  A.  That  for  individual  officers  upon  requisition 
made  once  each  quarter  ;  that  for  commands  upon  requisition  by 
the  commander  of  the  organization,  approved  by  th*3  post-com- 
mander ;  that  for  courts  and  boards  on  requisition  of  the  judge- 
advocate  or  recorder,  approved  by  the  presiding  officer. 

4093.  Q.  How  are  animals  provided  for  the  army?  A.  Pur- 
chase of  horses  for  the  cavalry  and  artillery,  for  Indian  scouts, 
and  for  such  infantry  as  may  be  mounted,  shall  be  made  by 
contract,  after  competition  duly  invited  by  the  Quartermaster's 
Department,  and  an  inspection  by  such  department,  all  under  the 
direction  and  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  War. 

4094.  Q.  What,  in  brief,  should  be  the  character  of  horses  pur- 
chased for  the  cavalry  ?  A.  The  cavalry  horse  must  be  sound, 
free  from  vicious  habits,  gentle  under  the  saddle,  with  free  action 
at  the  walk,  trot,  and  gallop  ;  a  gelding  of  uniform  and  hardy 
color  ;  in  good  condition  ;  from  fifteen  to  seventeen  hands  high  ; 
weight  not  less  than  900  nor  more  than  1200  pounds;  from  five 


526  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

to  nine  years  old;  head  and  ears  small;  forehead  broad  ;  eyes 
large  and  prominent,  vision  perfect  in  every  respect ;  shoulders 
lono-,  and  sloping  well  back ;  chest  full,  broad,  and  deep ;  fore- 
legs* straight,  and  standing  well  under  ;  barrel  large  and  increas- 
ing from  girth  toward  flank  ;  withers  elevated  ;  back  short  and 
straight ;  loins  and  haunches  broad  and  muscular ;  hocks  well 
bent  and  under  the  horse  ;  pasterns  slanting  and  feet  small  and 
sound. 

4095.  Q.  What  kind  of  horses  should  be  provided  for  the 
artillery  ?  A.  The  artillery  horse  must  be  sound  ;  free  from 
vicious  habits ;  a  square  trotter,  well  broken  to  harness  ;  a  geld- 
ing of  uniform  and  hardy  color  ;  in  good  condition  ;  from  fifteen 
to  seventeen  hands  high  ;  weight  of  the  lead-horse  not  less  than 
1050  pounds,  and  that  of  the  wheel  not  more  than  1300  pounds  ; 
from  five  to  nine  years  old  ;  full-chested  ;  shoulders  sufficiently 
broad  to  support  the  collar,  but  not  too  heavy  ;  full-barrelled, 
with  broad,  deep  loins,  short  coupled  with  solid  hind-quarters ; 
feet  sound  and  in  good  order.  Long-legged,  loose-jointed,  long- 
bodied,  and  narrow-chested  horses,  as  well  as  those  which  are 
restive,  vicious,  or  too  free  in  harness,  are  to  be  rejected. 

4096.  Q.  What  kind  of  mules  should  be  provided  for  the  mili- 
tary service?  A.  They  should  be  strong,  stout,  compact;  sound 
and  kind ;  free  from  defects  in  every  particular ;  from  four  to 
nine  years  old ;  from  850  to  1200  pounds  in  weight  ;  from  four- 
teen to  sixteen  hands  high,  and  suitable  in  all  respects  for  the 
transportation  service  of  the  army.  If  for  draft  purposes,  they 
are  to  be  well  broken  to  harness  ;  if  for  pack  purposes,  they  need 
not  be  broken,  and  the  standard  of  height  may  be  reduced  to 
thirteen  and  a  half  hands,  if  the  animals  be  in  other  respects 
suitable. 

4097.  Q.  How  will  animals  purchased  fer  the  Government  be 
marked?  A.  Every  animal  will  be  branded  with  the  letters 
"  U.  S.,"  on  the  left  fore-shoulder,  on  the  day  he  is  received. 

4098.  Q,  What  kind  of  record  must  be  kept  of  public  animals  ? 
A.  A  complete  descriptive  list  will  be  made  of  each  animal  at  the 
time  of  purchase,  which  will  accompany  him  wherever  he  may  be 
transferred,  and  a  descriptive-book  shall  be  kept  with  every  troop 
of  cavalry,  and  battery  of  light  artillery,  and  with  the  records 
of  every  officer  responsible  for  public  animals.  It  shall  contain 
a  description  of  every  animal  received  and  transferred,  showing 
the  kind,  name,  age,  size,  color,  marks,  brands,  or  other  pecul- 
iarities of  each ;  how  and  when  acquired  and  disposed  of  ;  the 
name  of  its  rider  or  driver,  and  the  particular  use  to  which  it  is 
applied. 

4099.  Q.  What  is  done  when  public  animals  are  issued  or  trans- 
ferred? A.  The  person  in  charge  shall  be  provided  with  full 
descriptive  lists,  which  will  be  delivered  to  the  receiving  officer  at 


ARMY   EEGULATIONS.  527 

time  of  transfer,  by  whom  they  will  be  taken  up  in  his  descriptive 
book  of  public  animals. 

4100.  Q.  How  will  public  animals  be  cared  for?  A.  Public 
animals  will  be  habitually  assigned  to  their  riders  or  drivers,  who 
shall  not  exchange  or  surrender  them  to  the  use  of  any  other  per- 
son without  the  permission  of  the  company  commander,  quarter- 
master, or  other  oflficer  responsible  for  them.  Every  animal's  feet 
shall  be  examined  by  his  rider  or  driver  after  each  day's  work,  to 
ascertain  whether  the  shoes  are  in  good  order.  Should  any 
defect  be  discovered,  the  fact  will  be  reported  to  the  officer  respon- 
sible. A  farrier  should  examine  each  animal's  feet  twice  a  week, 
to  replace  broken  nails,  fasten  loose  shoes,  and  reduce  projecting 
clinches.  ,  The  appearance  of  thrush  or  any  unhealthy  condition 
of  the  feet  will  be  reported  without  delay  to  the  officer  responsible 
for  the  animal. 

4101.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  public  animals  be  con- 
demned and  disposed  of?  A.  Public  animals  will  not  be  con- 
demned for  temporary  disease,  or  want  of  condition,  when  they 
may  be  expected  to  recuperate,  within  a  reasonable  time,  by  rest 
and  treatment.  Horses  and  mules  inspected  and  condemned  as 
unfit  for  service  will  be  advertised  for  sale,  and  disposed  of  within 
ten  days  from  date  of  advertisement. 

4103.  Q.  How  and  for  whom  are  veterinary  medicines  sup- 
plied? A.  Veterinary  medicines,  instruments,  and  supplies  for 
the  treatment  of  all  public  animals,  and  the  authorized  private 
horses  of  mounted  officers,  are  furnished  by  the  Quartermaster's 
Department. 

4103.  Q.  What  is  the  forage-ration  for  public  animals,  and 
when  may  it  be  increased  or  diminished  ?  A.  The  forage-rations 
for  a  horse  is  fourteen  pounds  of  hay  and  twelve  pounds  of  oats, 
corn,  or  barley;  for  a  mule,  fourteen  pounds  of  hay,  and  nine 
pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley.  In  special  cases  of  hard  ser- 
vice or  exposure,  the  Quartermaster-General  may  authorize  the 
grain-ration  to  be  increased  not  to  exceed  three  pounds,  when 
recommended  by  the  chief  quartermaster  of  a  department, 
or  of  an  army  in  the  field.  Division  and  department  com- 
manders will  reduce  the  forage-ration,  when  necessary,  to  keep 
purchases  within  the  remittances  made  to  liquidate  them.  In 
localities  where  good  grazing  is  practicable  for  a  considerable 
portion  of  the  day,  or  during  seasons  when  little  labor  is  required 
of  animals,  commanding  officers  will  order  a  judicious  reduction 
of  the  forage-ration,  bearing  in  mind  however  the  fact  that  the 
animals  should  always  be  kept  in  condition  to  perform  the  ser- 
vice for  which  they  are  intended.  Whenever  the  state  of  the 
supplies  or  circumstances  make  it  necessary  to  reduce  the  forage- 
ration,  commanding  officers  will  direct  what  part  of  the  same 
shall  be  issued. 

4104.  Q.  When  and  under  what  conditions  will  forage  be  fur- 


538  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIKER. 

nished  to  officers  ?  A.  Forage  in  kind  will  be  issued  only  during 
the  month  when  due.  It  is  only  furnished  to  olficers  for  the 
horses  owned  and  actually  kept  by  them  in  the  perforinance  of 
their  official  duties,  when  serving  with  troops  m  the  held  or  at 
military  posts  and  stations,  and  for  the  following  number  of 
horses  •  To  the  Lieutenant-General,  four  ;  to  a  major-general  or 
a  britradier-general,  three;  to  a  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  major, 
captain,  or  lieutenant,  mounted,  and  adjutant  and  regimental 
quartermaster,  each  two.  ,       .  ^  ,  -,    ^ 

4105.  Q.  How  will  the  deliveries  of  fuel  and  forage  be  made  by 
contractors,  and  for  what  purpose  ?  A.  Deliveries  under  contract 
will  be  made  monthly,  when  practicable,  in  order  to  avoid  un- 
necessary accumulation  at  posts  and  to  distribute  expenditure 
throughout  the  year.  Hay  and  straw  will  be  carefully  stored  in 
barns  provided  for  that  purpose,  or  properly  stacked.  The  stacks 
will  be  raked  down  so  as  to  shed  the  rain  freely.  The  tops  should 
be  covered,  if  possible,  with  old  canvas,  kept  in  place  by  poles  or 
ropes  weighted  at  their  lower  ends.  If  canvas  cannot  be  had,  the 
stacks  will  be  thatched. 

4106.  Q.  What  is  to  be  done  with  grain,  hay,  straw,  and  coal 
when  received  ?  A.  They  will  be  carefully  weighed.  Hay -scales 
for  this  purpose  will  be  supplied  upon  proper  requisition  to  any 
established  post.  Wood  will  be  carefully  piled,  and  measured  or 
weighed. 

4107.  Q.  What  is  the  Government  standard  weight  of  grain 
per  bushel  ?  A.  There  is  no  Government  standard  weight  of  grain 
per  bushel.  The  weight  is  a  matter  of  state  regulation.  Short 
forage  should  be  contracted  for  by  the  hundred  pounds;  but 
when  a  contract  for  grain  is  made  by  the  bushel,  the  number  of 
pounds  per  bushel  will  be  specified  in  the  contract. 

4108.  Q.  When  should  fuel,  forage,  and  straw  be  verified  ?  A. 
At  the  end  of  each  quarter,  and  also  when  transferring  to  suc- 
cessor, verify  by  actual  weight  or  measurement,  the  quantities 
actually  on  hand.  In  case  of  transfer,  the  verification  will  be  made 
in  the  presence  of  the  relieving  officer. 

4109.  Q.  How  can  the  quantity  of  hay  and  straw  in  stack  be 
determined  ?  A.  If  the  hay  and  straw  are  in  stack,  the  quanti- 
ties can  be  determined  by  ascertaining  the  cubical  contents  of  the 
stack,  then  cutting  therefrom  a  cube  of  definite  size,  not  less  than 
seven  feet,  and  weighing  it.  The  quantities  of  hay  and  straw  in 
barns  will  be  ascertained  in  a  similar  manner. 

4110.  Q.  How  may  the  quantity  of  grain  and  coal  on  hand  be  as- 
certained ?  A.  By  weight  or  measurement.  If  in  a  bin,  the  num- 
ber of  pounds  can  be  determined  by  measuring  the  bin,  allowing 
2150.43  cubic  inches,  or  1.245  cubic  feet,  of  space  to  the  bushel, 
and  then  allowing  fifty-six  pounds  weight  to  a  bushel  of  corn, 
torty-eight  to  a  bushel  of  barley,  and  thirty-two  to  a  bushel  of 
oats ;  or,  if  there  are  scales  at  the  post,  the  actual  number  of 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  539 

pounds  of  grain  on  hand  may  be  ascertained  by  weighing  accu- 
rately ten  or  more  bushels  of  it,  and  then  using  the  actual  instead 
of  the  standard  weight  in  the  computation.  If  coal  is  to  be  de- 
termined by  measurement,  the  quantity  on  hand  in  cubic  feet,  and 
the  weight  of  a  cubic  foot,  will  be  ascertained. 

4111.  Q.  What  will  be  done  in  case  excess  or  deficiency  between 
actual  and  reported  quantities  of  supplies  shall  be  found  to  exist 
by  the  directed  verification  ?  A.  A  board  of  survey  will  be  called, 
which  shall  determine  discrepancies,  fix  responsibility  therefor, 
and  recommend  what  quantities  shall  be  taken  up  or  dropped. 
In  case  of  deficiency,  the  board  will  make  full  investigation  of 
the  facts,  which  it  will  report,  together  with  its  conclusions  as  to 
cause  for  the  same,  with  such  recommendations  as  it  may  deem 
to  be  warranted. 

4112.  Q.  In  what  way  may  sales  of  public  horses  be  made  to 
officers  ?  A.  In  the  field,  on  the  frontier,  or  in  active  service, 
sales  of  horses  held  in  the  Quartermaster's  Department  for  issue, 
sale,  or  keeping,  may,  with  the  approval  of  the  General  com- 
manding the  Army,  or  on  the  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  War, 
be  made  to  mounted  officers.  Horses  belonging  to  troops  of  cav- 
alry and  to  batteries  of  artillery  will  not  be  sold  ;  nor  shall  they 
be  turned  in  to  the  Quartermaster's  Department  without  being 
previously  inspected  and  condemned  as  unserviceable. 

4113.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  horses  belonging  to  offi- 
cers be  transported?  A.  The  Quartermaster's  Department  will 
transport,  for  officers  changing  station,  the  number  of  horses 
for  which  they  are  legally  entitled  to  forage,  provided  such  horses 
are  owned  and  actually  used  in  service  by  them.  The  expense 
paid  by  the  United  States  shall  not  exceed  $50  for  each  horse 
transported.  If  the  change  of  station  is  to  effect  a  voluntary 
transfer,  no  expense  for  transportation  of  animals  will  be  allowed. 

4114.  Q.  By  whom  is  the  allotment  of  draught  and  pack  ani- 
mals to  each  military  division  fixed?  A.  By  the  Quartermaster- 
General  under  the  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  and  division 
commanders  will  allot  the  same  to  the  several  departments  com- 
posing their  commands. 

4115.  Q.  What  governs,  in  the  transportation  of  persons  and 
property?  A.  In  providing  transportation  for  persons  and  prop- 
erty the  public  interests  will  govern  as  to  the  route.  As  a  rule, 
the  shortest  practicable  travelled  route  will  be  adopted.  A  longer 
route  may  be  used  to  secure  lower  rates  when  the  time  consumed 
will  not  be  detrimental  to  the  public  interests.  When  there  are 
competing  routes  which  furnish  equal  facilities,  advantages,  and 
rates,  each  will  be  given  a  proportional  share. 

4116.  Q.  How  are  ambulances  for  sick  and  wounded  provided  ? 
A.  Tiie  Quartermaster's  Department  will  procure  the  necessary 
ambulances  for  transporting  the  sick  and  wounded,  upon  the 
requisition  of  the  proper  medical  officer. 


530  THE  ABMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

4117.  Q.  What  is  every  expedition  having  a  wagon-train  re- 
quired to  take  with  it  ?  A.  A  supply  of  horse  and  mule  shoes,  a 
smith's  bellows,  a  set  of  smith's  tools,  spare  iron  enough  to  make 
ordinary  repairs  ;  in  case  there  is  no  smith  or  farrier  attached  to 
the  command,  one  of  the  civilian  smiths  at  the  post  will  accom- 
pany the  train. 

4118.  Q.  When  troops  are  moved,  how  will  transportation  be 
provided  ?  A.  For  the  whole  command.  Proper  orders  in  the 
case,  and  exact  return  of  the  command,  will  be  furnished  to  the 
quartermaster  who  is  to  provide  the  same. 

4119.  Q.  What  is  required  in  order  to  secure  transportation 
for  persons  in  the  military  service  ?  A.  Every  person  requiring 
transportation  must  show  that  he  is  entitled  to  it  by  an  order 
from  competent  authority,  a  certified  copy  of  which  will  be  made 
by  the  quartermaster  who  furnishes  the  transportation,  and  filed 
with  the  records  of  his  oflice.  The  latter  will  indorse  on  the  order, 
over  his  signature,  the  fact  that  transportation  has  been  provided, 
the  places  from  and  to  which  it  has  been  provided,  and  the  num- 
ber of  pounds  of  extra  baggage  transported,  if  any.  The  order 
will  be  retained  by  the  party  who  receives  the  transportation. 

4120.  Q.  What  is  done  to  avoid  delay  in  movement  of  troops  ? 
A.  The  quartermaster  who  provides  the  transportation  will  notify 
by  mail  or  telegraph,  as  may  be  required,  the  quartermasters  at 
places  where  changes  of  route  are  to  be  made,  or  means  of  trans- 
portation are  to  be  changed,  of  the  day  on  which  the  troops  will 
start,  their  route,  destination,  the  number  of  officers,  enlisted 
men,  and  animals,  and  the  quantity  of  public  property  and  bag- 
gage for  which  transportation  will  be  required. 

4121.  Q.  What  will  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's  Department 
issue  to  each  carrier,  over  whose  road  or  line  transportation  is 
required  for  troops  or  individuals  (except  as  otherwise  provided)? 
A.  A  request,  setting  forth  date  and  place  of  issue  ;  time  for 
which  it  will  be  valid  ;  name  of  company  required  to  furnish 
transportation  ;  name  of  the  person,  or  of  the  one  in  charge  of 
the  party  to  be  transported,  with  number  thereof,  pounds  of  ex- 
tra baggage,  if  any  ;  company  and  regiment  to  which  person  be- 
longs, if  an  officer  or  enlisted  man  ;  the  places  of  original 
departure  and  ultimate  destination,  with  the  initial  letters  of  each 
road  or  line  to  be  used  on  the  journey. 

4122.  Q.  What  is  to  be  stated  on  the  back  of  transportation 
requests?  A.  The  officer  issuing  the  request  shall  state  on  its 
back  by  what  authority  it  is  issued,  giving  the  number,  date,  and 
place  of  issue  of  the  order  requiring  transportation  to  be  furnished, 
and  the  nature  of  the  journey,  or  purpose  for  which  it  is  to  be 
performed. 

4123.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  party  using  transportation 
requests  ?  A.  Requests  should  be  properly  receipted  by  the  party 
named  therein,  and  tickets  procured  thereon,  whenever  it  can  be 


AKMY   REGULATIONS.  631 

done,  before  comnlencing  the  journey  ;  otherwise  they  will  be 
given  to  the  conductor  of  the  train,  or  agent  of  the  carrier.  If 
more  than  one  person  is  to  be  transported,  the  officer  or  person 
in  charge  of  the  party,  in  filling  the  receipt,  will  state  the  number 
of  the  persons  and  pounds  of  extra  baggage  actually  carried,  and 
the  class  and  description  of  transportation  actually  furnished. 
In  no  case  will  a  receipt  be  given  for  transportation  of  a  greater 
number  of  persons,  or  a  greater  number  of  pounds  of  extra  bag- 
gage, than  the  request  calls  for. 

4124.  Q.  What  is  to  be  done  with  unused  tickets  or  parts  of 
tickets  ?  A.  All  unused  tickets  or  parts  of  tickets,  procured  on 
transportation  requests  will  be  returned  to  the  officer  who  issued 
the  request,  and  the  value  thereof  will  be  deducted  from  any 
money  due,  or  to  become  due,  the  company  for  which  they  were 
obtained.  On  the  collection  of  the  value  of  such  unused  tickets 
they  will  be  returned  to  the  company  by  which  they  were  issued. 

4125.  Q.  Whenever  it  shall  be  necessary  for  troops.  Govern- 
ment teams,  or  employes  in  the  military  service  to  pass  on  public 
duty  over  a  legally  constituted  toll-bridge,  ferry,  or  turnpike,  what 
will  the  commander  or  the  party  in  charge  do  ?  A.  He  will  apply 
to  the  nearest  officer  of  the  Quartermaster's  Department  for  a 
request  for  such  passage.  If  he  cannot  obtain  it,  he  will  give  to 
the  agent  of  the  ferry,  bridge,  or  turnpike  a  certificate  stating  the 
number  of  persons  and  whether  mounted  or  on  foot,  the  number 
of  loose  animals,  the  number  of  teams,  and  the  number  of  ani- 
mals to  each  team,  for  which  toll  or  ferriage  should  be  paid,  and 
setting  forth  that  the  travel  is  on  public  duty. 

4126.  Q.  To  whom  will  accounts  for  ferriage,  toll-roads,  etc., 
be  presented  for  payment  ?  A.  To  the  nearest  disbursing  quar- 
termaster. Before  payment,  the  latter  will  satisfy  himself  that 
the  rates  charged  do  not  exceed  those  authorized  or  paid  by  pri- 
vate individuals,  and  that  the  indebtedness  was  necessarily  in- 
curred for  the  public  service.  Payment  may  be  made  at  the 
authorized  or  usual  rates,  unless  more  favorable  terms  can  be 
obtained  by  special  agreement. 

4127.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  are  sleeping  and  parlor  car 
accommodations  furnished  by  the  Quartermasters  Department  ? 
A.  Officers  of  the  Army  travelling  on  duty  with  troops,  clerks  and 
agents  in  the  military  service  travelling  under  orders  on  public 
business,  sergeants  of  the  post,  non-commissioned  staff,  hospital 
stewards,  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  like  grade,  sergeants 
of  the  Signal  Service,  and  general-service  men,  when  travelling 
on  duty  without  troops,  and,  when  necessary,  invalid  soldiers 
travelling  under  orders,  will  be  allowed  one  double  berth  in  a 
sleeping-car,  or  the  customary  stateroom  accommodations  on  boats, 
and  steamers  where  extra  charge  is  made  for  such  accommoda- 
tions. Officers  of  the  Army  travelling  as  aforesaid  shall  also  be 
allowed  one  seat  in  a  day  parlor-car.     Officers  when  travelling 


532  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

without  troops  are  also  allowed  the  cost  of  one  double  berth  for 
each  night  only  of  a  continuous  journey. 

4128.  Q.  What  is  the  allowance  of  baggage  for  oflBcers  to  be 
transported  at  public  expense  ?  A.  In  the  field  :  major-general, 
1000  pounds ;  brigadier-general,  700  ;  field-officer,  500  ;  captain, 
200;  first-lieutenant,  150;  second-lieutenant,  150;  acting  assistant- 
surgeon,  150  ;  veterinary  surgeons,  150.  In  changing  stations : 
major-general,  3500;  brigadier-general,  3800;  field-officers,  2400; 
captain,  2000  ;  first-lieutenant,  1700  ;  second-lieutenant,  1500 ; 
acting  assistant-surgeon,  1200 ;  veterinary  surgeons,  500 ;  post 
and  regimental  non-commissioned  officers,  etc.,  500. 

4129.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  having  quartermaster's  stores 
sealed,  weighed,  and  plainly  marked  when  turned  over  to  carriers 
for  shipment?  A.  To  protect  the  Government  from  loss  while 
stores,  boxed  or  baled,  are  in  the  hands  of  carriers ;  also  to  trace 
responsibility  when  such  boxes  or  bales  remain  in  Government 
storehouses  at  military  posts  and  stations,  and  are  transferred 
unopened  by  one  officer  to  another. 

4130.  Q.  When  is  an  officer  relieved  from  responsibility  in  the 
shipment  .of  stores  ?  A.  An  officer  who  turns  over  stores  to  an- 
other for  transportation  in  the  best  condition  in  which  it  is  pos- 
sible for  him  to  put  them,  is  relieved  from  any  further  responsi- 
bility therefor  by  the  receipt  of  the  officer  to  whom  they  are 
intrusted  for  transportation. 

4131.  Q.  When  a  quartermaster  receives  stores,  transported  by 
a  common  carrier,  under  agreement  with  the  Quartermaster's 
Department,  which  do  not  correspond  with  the  invoice  because  of 
damage  or  deficiency  not  attributable  to  ordinary  loss  or  wastage, 
what  is  done  ?  A.  The  fact  shall  be  fully  investigated  by  a  board 
of  survey,  unless  the  carrier  voluntarily  assumes  liability  for  the 
loss,  and  the  money  value  of  the  damage  or  deficiency  shall  be 
charged  to  the  party  responsible  therefor,  whether  the  shipping- 
officer  or  carrier.  In  case  the  responsibility  is  fixed  upon  the 
carrier,  the  receiving- officer  shall  note  on  the  bill  of  lading  the 
deductions  which  should  be  made  for  such  loss  or  damage,  by 
the  quartermaster  who  pays  the  accounts,  by  whom  the  deduc- 
tion Avill  be  made  and  the  amount  stopped  refunded  to  the  proper 
department.  A  copy  of  the  proceedings  will  accompany  the  bill 
of  lading. 

4132.  Q.  When  and  under  wiiat  conditions  may  funds  be  shipped 
by  express?  A.  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary  to  send  to  the 
chief  quartermaster  or  chief  commissary  of  subsistence  of  a  de- 
partment, or  to  the  nearest  public  depository,  the  quartermaster's 
or  subsistence  funds  which  have  accumulated  at  a  post  remote 
from  any  public  depository,  they  may  be  transported  by  express. 
If  there  be  no  other  safe  way  of  sending  them.  Application  for 
authority  to  transport  the  funds  will  be  made,  through  the  chief 
quartermaster  or  chief  commissary  of  subsistence,  to  the  depart- 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  533 

ment  commander,  and  if  granted,  the  transportation  will  be  fur- 
nished in  accordance  therewith. 

4133.  Q.  For  what  particular  departments  of  the  Government 
and  for  what  institutions  may  the  Quartermaster's  Department 
ship  stores  ?  A.  Any  of  the  executive  departments  of  the  Gov- 
ernment ;  also  donations  to  the  medical  museum  at  Washington; 
the  library  and  museum  of  the  Military  Service  Institution  at 
Governor's  Island,  N.  Y.;  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy  at  West 
Point,  N.  Y.;  and  articles  purchased  with  hospital  or  company 
funds,  provided  the  articles  are  purchased  at  the  nearest  acces- 
sible market. 

4134.  Q.  By  what  means  will  property  be  transported  ?  A.  On 
bills  of  lading. 

4135.  Q.  How  will  bills  of  lading  be  numbered,  how  prepared, 
and  what  must  they  show  ?  A.  The  bills  as  issued  will  be  num- 
bered consecutively  from  one  upwards,  in  the  order  of  the  date  of 
shipment — numbers  beginning  with  the  first  sliipment  of  the  fiscal 
year,  and  ending  on  the  30th  of  June,  the  end  of  that  year.  They 
will  consist  of  two  parts,  the  original  and  duplicate,  each  to  be 
certified  by  the  shipping-officer  and  receipted  by  the  carrier. 
They  will  be  prepared  in  the  name  of  the  carrier,  and  will  show 
the  points  between  which  transportation  is  required  ;  also  places 
of  original  departure  and  ultimate  destination  of  the  freight,  and 
will  show  the  number,  marks,  contents,  and  weight  or  measure- 
ment of  each  package  or  class  of  packages  to  be  transported. 

4136.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  the  bills  of  lading?  A.  The 
original  will  be  given  to  the  carrier  at  the  time  the  shipment  is 
made  ;  and,  upon  the  delivery  of  the  property  in  good  order  and 
condition,  will  be  receipted  by  the  consignee  and  returned  to  the 
carrier,  with  such  further  indorsement  as  may  be  necessary  to 
insure  settlement  for  the  service.  The  duplicate  will  be  promptly 
transmitted  by  mail,  or  otherwise,  by  the  shipping-ofiicer  to  the 
officer  to  whom  the  stores  are  consigned  ;  and  upon  delivery  of 
the  property  will  be  receipted  by  the  latter  in  like  manner  as  the 
original,  and  forwarded  to  the  paying-officer,  to  be  used  in  settle- 
ment for  the  service.  If  the  shipping-officer  is  not  the  paying- 
officer,  he  will  be  notified  by  letter  of  the  receipt  of  the  stores, 
and  their  condition  when  received. 

4137.  Q.  In  case  of  loss  or  damage  to  public  property  while  in 
possession  of  the  carrier,  what  is  done  with  the  bills  of  lading  ? 
A.  They  will  not  be  receipted  until  such  loss  or  damage  is  decided 
upon,  and  the  responsibility  therefor  fixed  ;  except  that  when  the 
loss  or  damage  has  been  ascertained  and  the  responsibility  fixed 
without  the  action  of  a  board,  the  bill  may  be  receipted  and  an 
indorsement  made  thereon  stating  the  kind  of  property  lost  or 
damaged,  its  weight  or  measurement,  and  full  value,  including 
transportation,  and  the  name  of  the  company  or  party  responsi- 
ble therefor;  also,  that  when  a  receipted  bill  of  lading  is  de- 


634  THE  ARMY  OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

manded  by  the  carrier,  it  may  be  receipted  by  the  receiving  officer, 
after  noting  thereon  the  loss  or  damage  lA'hich  is  apparent,  and 
adding  that  final  settlement  will  await  the  action  of  the  board  of 
survey.  All  the  indorsements  that  are  made  by  the  receiving 
officer  on  the  original  bill  of  lading  will  be  put  upon  the  duplicate. 

4138.  Q.  How  will  payments  be  made  on  bills  of  lading? 
A.  Payment  will  be  made  on  the  original  bill  of  lading  properly 
receipted  and  accomplished,  but  not  until  the  duplicate  has  been 
received  by  the  paying-officer,  except  as  provided  for. 

4139.  Q.  What  is  done  in  case  of  the  loss  or  destruction  of  one 
or  more  parts  of  the  bill  of  lading  ?  A.  In  case  of  the  loss  or 
destruction  of  one  part  of  the  bill  of  lading,  the  paying-officer, 
after  satisfying  himself  of  the  fact,  will,  if  he  does  not  ^now  any 
good  reason  to  the  contrary,  report  it  to  the  Quartermaster-Gen- 
eral, with  recommendation  that  payment  be  made  for  transporta- 
tion on  the  part  in  his  possession.  The  Quartermaster-General, 
being  satisfied  that  payment  should  be  made,  will  authorize  it  as 
recommended.  In  case  both  parts  of  the  bill  of  lading  have  been 
lost  or  destroyed,  the  shipping-officer  will,  upon  the  application 
of  either  the  carrier,  the  consignee,  or  the  paying-officer,  issue 
certificate  to  him. 

4140.  Q.  Under  whose  direction  are  all  matters  pertaining  to 
the  transportation  of  troops,  munitions  of  war,  equipments,  mili- 
tary property  and  stores,  involving  the  use  of  land-grant  and 
bond-aided  railroads?  A.  They  are  under  the  direction  of  the 
Quartermaster-General  of  the  Army,  who  will  exercise  general 
control  and  supervision  of  the  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's 
Department  in  their  duties,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  Army  trans- 
portation and  the  preparation  of  accounts  for  such  service. 

4141.  Q.  How  often  will  estimates  of  clothing  and  equipage  be 
made?  A.  Estimates  of  clothing  and  equipage,  based  on  the 
organic  strength  of  the  command  and  stating  the  quantities  and 
sizes  of  articles  required,  will  be  made  by  the  commander  of  each 
company  or  separate  detachment  in  the  early  part  of  each  calen- 
dar year.  Any  estimate  for  more  than  ten  per  cent  in  excess  of 
the  annual  allowance  must  contain  full  explanation  of  the  neces- 
sity therefor. 

4142.  Q.  What  will  be  done  regarding  the  clothing  for  troops 
if  a  change  of  station  is  ordered  ?  A.  If,  at  the  time  estimates 
are  prepared,  it  be  known  that  troops  are  to  change  stations, 
their  estmiate  will  not  be  included  in  the  post  or  consolidated 
estimates,  but  will  be  forwarded  separately.  The  new  station  to 
which  the  supplies  are  to  be  sent  should  be  distinctly  given. 

4143.  Q.  Should  the  quantity  of  clothing  and  equipage  supplied 
upon  the  annual  requisition   prove  inadequate,   what  may  be 

uVi  u  ^_fP^cial  requisition,  giving  reasons  therefor  in  detail, 
should  be  made  and  forwarded,  through  the  proper  channels,  to 
the  Quartermaster-General.  o  *-    r  » 


ARMY   REGULATIONS.  535 

4144.  Q.  What  kind  of  unmade  clothing  may  be  issued  to  en- 
listed men,  and  how  is  it  obtained  ?  A.  Unmade  uniform  coats, 
blouses,  and  trousers  may  be  issued  to  enlisted  men  at  cost  of 
materials.  They  will  be  obtained  from  the  Quartermaster's  De- 
partment in  the  same  manner  as  other  articles  of  clothing.  The 
materials  for  each  coat,  blouse,  or  pair  of  trousers,  with  the  but- 
tons, thread,  needles,  and  all  necessary  trimmings,  will  be  rolled 
in  a  bundle,  which  will  be  securely  fastened  and  marked  with  the 
size  of  the  garment. 

4145.  Q.  When  unmade  articles  of  clothing  received  by  officers 
at  military  posts  are  found  to  be  incomplete,  but  otherwise  in 
good  condition,  what  is  done  ?  A.  They  will  not  be  submitted  to 
an  inspector  for  condemnation,  but  will  be  turned  over  to  the 
nearest, manufacturing  depot  to  be  completed  ;  or  a  requisition 
for  the  missing  parts  may  be  made. 

4146.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  clothing  estimated  for  by  each 
company  or  detachment  commander  ?  A.  It  should,  as  a  rule,  be 
held  subject  to  its  wants  ;  but,  in  case  of  need,  it  may  be  other- 
wise issued,  and  the  post-quartermaster  will  then  call  for  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  to  replace  it,  if  the  state  of  his  supplies  so  require. 

4147.  Q.  By  whom  will  clothing  be  issued  to  enlisted  men,  and 
when  are  their  accounts  to  be  settled  ?  A.  Clothing  will  be  issued 
by  company  commanders  ;  but  this  does  not  apply  to  men  of  the 
Signal  Corps  at  isolated  stations  and  to  soldiers  on  detached  duty; 
the  receipts  of  these  two  classes  of  men  being  passed  as  vouchers 
to  the  returns  of  the  issuing  officer.  The  company  or  detachment 
commander  will  settle  the  clothing  accounts  of  all  men  of  his 
command  on  June  30th  and  December  31st  of  each  year,  except 
certain  cases  prescribed  in  circular  No.  6,  A.  G.  O.  1889. 

4148.  Q.  How  may  officers  of  the  Army  provide  themselves 
with  uniform  clothing  and  materials  ?  A.  Officers  of  the  Army 
may  purchase  from  the  post-quartermaster,  at  the  regulation 
prices,  such  articles  of  uniform  clothing,  clothing  materials,  and 
equipage  as  they  actually  need,  provided  the  property  is  available. 
They  should  certify  that  it  is  intended  for  their  personal  use. 

4149.  Q  What  articles  are  officers  permitted  to  drop  from  their 
returns  on  certificates,  and  what  should  those  certificates  specify  ? 
A.  Officers  are  authorized  to  drop  from  their  returns  of  clothing, 
camp,  and  garrison  equipage,  tent-pins,  and  axe,  pick-axe,  and 
hatchet-helves,  upon  their  certificates  that  they  have  been  worn 
out  in  service.  Service  chevrons,  when  issued,  will  be  dropped 
from  returns,  and  will  not  be  charged  in  the  clothing-account  of 
the  soldier. 

TELEGRAPHING  AND  TELEGRAPH  ACCOUNTS. 

4150.  When  will  the  telegraph  be  used  ?  A.  The  telegraph  will 
only  be  used  in  cases  of  urgent  and  imperative  necessity,  in  which 


536  THE  ABMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIKER. 

the  delay  consequent  upon  transmission  by  niail  would  be  preju- 
dicial to  public  interests. 

4151.  Q.  What  accounts  for  telegrams  on  military  business 
^vill  be  paid,  and  by  whom  ?  A.  Accounts  for  telegrams  on  mili- 
tary business  prepared  in  the  name  of  the  proper  telegraph  com- 
pany, will,  with  the  following  exceptions,  be  settled  and  paid  by 
the  Quartermaster's  Department:  (a.)  Accounts  for  telegrams 
which  pass  over  any  of  the  lines  constructed  and  operated  along 
the  bonded  Pacific  railroads.  (&.)  Accounts  for  reimbursement 
of  accounts  paid  by  officers  of  the  Army  for  telegraphic  service, 
which  will  be  prepared  upon  Form  No.  13|^.  (c. )  Accounts  for 
telegrams  on  public  business  of  a  confidential  nature  where,  in 
the  opinion  of  the  officer  receiving  or  sending  them,  it  isimproper 
that  copies  should  accompany  the  accounts,  or  where  copies  can- 
not be  procured;  or  where  it  is  questionable  whether  the  tele- 
grams are  on  official  business  or  that  the  telegraph  should  have 
been  used. 

4152.  Q.  When  will  explanatory  letters  for  telegraphing  ac- 
company the  accounts  of  officers  ?  A.  When  the  originals  or  cer- 
tified copies  of  the  telegrams  ai*e  furnished  with  the  accounts,  or 
when  it  is  questionable  whether  the  telegrams  are  on  official  busi- 
ness, or  tbat  the  telegraph  should  have  been  used,  an  explanatory 
letter  from  the  officer  who  sends,  or  the  officer  who  receives,  the 
telegram  will  accompany  the  account. 

4153.  Q.  In  framing  telegrams  what  words  will  be  omitted? 
A.  All  superfluous  words  not  important  to  the  sense  of  the  com- 
munication will  be  omitted.  The  last  name  of  the  officer  ad- 
dressed, or  his  title,  and  the  last  name  of  the  officer  sending  the 
telegram,  are  generally  sufficient  for  the  purpose  in  view,  and 
officers  are  enjoined  to  be  discreet  in  using  as  few  words  as  pos- 
sible to  convey  the  message  intelligibly. 

4154.  Q.  By  whom  are  telegraphic  accounts  paid  ?  A.  In  each 
military  department  an  officer  of  the  Quartermaster's  Department 
will  be  assigned,  by  the  department  commander,  to  the  duty  of 
adjusting  and  settling  telegraph  accounts,  under  the  instructions 
of  the  Quartermaster-General ;  and,  so  far  as  possible,  arrange- 
ments should  be  made  to  have  all  such  accounts  which  may  accrue 
in  each  department  presented  to  the  officer  so  assigned,  who  will 
prepare  and  pay  them,  or  forward  them  for  payment,  as  the  case 
may  require.  At  independent  posts,  or  depots,  the  officer  of  the 
Quartermaster's  Department  there  serving  will  perform  this 
duty. 

4155.  Q.  Howls  an  account  for  telephoning  paid  ?  A.  In  cases 
where  telephoning  is  possible— there  being  no  telegraphic  com- 
munication between  the  points— an  account  for  telephoning  may 
be  paid  from  the  appropriation  for  the  payment  of  telegrams. 


AEMY  REGULATIONS.  537 


RECORDS. 


4156.  Q.  What  books  will  be  kept  in  the  office  of  every  officer 
performing  duty  in  the  Quartermaster's  Department?  A.  1.  A 
cash-book,  in  which  will  be  entered,  according  to  appropriations, 
all  amounts  received  and  disbursed,  the  date  thereof,  from  whom 
received  or  to  whom  paid,  and  on  what  account.  2.  A  book  of 
letters  received,  including  a  record  of  indorsements.  3.  A  book 
of  letters  sent,  in  which  will  be  entered  in  full  all  letters  written 
from,  and  pertaining  to,  the  duties  of,  the  office,  including  esti- 
mates for  funds  and  requisitions  for  quartermaster's  supplies. 
4.  A  record-book  of  barracks  and  quarters,  kept  as  directed  in 
paragraph  1075.  5.  A  descriptive  book  of  public  animals,  kept 
as  directed  in  paragraph  1132.  6.  A  record  of  interments  (in 
case  of  station  at  a  military  post),  kept  as  directed  in  paragraph 
592.  7.  A  book  of  stores  and  property  shipped,  kept  as  provided 
in  paragraph  1321.  8.  A  book  of  stores  and  property  received, 
kept  as  provided  in  paragraph  1322. 

4157.  Q.  Where  will  the  quartermaster's  books  be  kept,  and 
who  is  required  to  see  that  they  are  properly  kept,  etc.?  A.  They 
will  not  be  removed  from  the  office  except  on  its  discontinuance, 
when  they  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Quartermaster-General.  Com- 
manding officers  and  inspectors  will  see  that  they  are  neatly  kept, 
and  contain  complete  and  correct  records  of  all  matters  which 
should  be  recorded  therein.  Commanding  officers  will  also  see 
that  they  are  properly  transferred  by  officers  relieved  to  their  suc- 
cessors. 

4158.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  the  book  of  stores  and  property 
shipped  kept?  A.  In  the  book  of  stores  and  property  shipped 
will  be  entered  each  shipment,  with  number  and  date.  The  num- 
ber and  date  will  correspond  to  the  number  and  date  of  the  bill 
of  lading,  and  the  carrier  or  agent  in  receipting  will  write  his 
name  on  the  line  on  which  the  number  and  date  are  entered. 
Should  it  be  attended  with  risk,  or  grpat  inconvenience,  for  the 
shipping- officer  to  obtain  the  signature  of  the  carrier  or  his  agent, 
that  officer  will  certify  to  the  shipment,  and  state  that  the  bill  of 
lading  was  signed  by  A.  B.,  carrier  or  agent.  The  names  of  the 
officers  to  whom  the  stores  are  shipped,  and  where,  and  from 
whom,  will  be  entered  in  their  appropriate  places;  and  when  the 
stores  are  consigned  to  an  agent  of  a  connecting-line,  or  to  a 
quartermaster  or  agent  of  the  Quartermaster's  Department,  to  be 
forwarded  to  ultimate  destination,  the  name  of  the  agent  or  officer, 
and  the  initial  letters  of  the  line  he  represents,  will  be  given  so  far 
as  practicable.  The  kind  of  conveyance,  whether  by  rail,  boat,  or 
wagon,  and  the  name  or  initial  letters  of  each  railroad,  or  the 
general  route  by  which  the  stores  are  shipped,  as  shown  by  the 
bill  of  lading,  and  the  name  of  the  contractor,  if  there  be  one, 
will  be  entered  in  its  proper  column.    A  full  and  complete  list  of 


538  THE  ARMY  OFPICER'S  EXAMINER. 

all  stores  shipped  as  entered  on  the  bill  of  lading,  with  the  weight 
or  measurement,  rates  and  remarks,  will  be  entered  in  the  book, 
and  any  other  matters  that  are  necessary  to  show  the  condition 
in  which  the  stores  are  shipped. 

4159.  Q.  For  what  purpose  is  the  book  of  stores  and  property 
received  kept?  A.  In  the  book  of  stores  and  property  received 
will  be  entered  each  invoice  of  stores  received,  with  number  and 
date ;  the  number  will  correspond  to  the  number  of  the  bill  of 
lading,  and  the  officer  in  receipting  will  write  his  name  on  the 
line  on  which  the  number  and  date  are  entered.  The  names  of 
the  officers  by  whom  the  stores  were  shipped  and  whence,  to 
whom  shipped  and  where,  and  for  whom,  will  be  entered  in  their 
appropriate  places.  The  kind  of  conveyance,  whether  by  rail, 
boat,  or  wagon,  and  the  name  or  initial  letters,  of  each  railroad, 
or  the  general  route  by  which  the  stores  were  transported,  as 
shown  by  the  bill  of  lading,  will  be  entered  in  its  proper  column. 
A  full  and  complete  list  of  all  stores  received,  as  stated  on  the 
bill  of  lading,  with  the  weight  or  measurement,  rates,  and  remarks, 
will  be  entered  ;  also  all  other  matters  that  may  be  necessary  to 
show  the  condition  in  which  the  stores  are  received. 

4160.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  letters  received  by  accounting 
officers  ?  A.  All  letters  received  and  copies  of  all  orders  for  the 
expenditures  of  money  cr  property,  will  remain  on  file  as  part  of 
the  records  of  the  office.  When  it  is  necessary  to  withdraw  a 
letter  for  file  with  the  officer's  accounts,  a  duly  certified  copy 
will  be  made  to  replace  it  in  the  office-file.  Letters  pertaining 
exclusively  to  the  settlement  of  an  officer's  accounts  belong  to 
him  and  not  to  the  office-files. 

RETURNS  AND  REPORTS. 

4161.  Q.  What  returns  and  reports  will  be  made  by  all  officers 
in  the  Quartermaster's  Department?  A.  Statement  of  public 
funds  ;  report  of  persons  and  articles  employed  and  hired  ;  list 
of  pei-sons  and  articles  employed  and  hired  and  transferred  ;  roll 
of  enlisted  men  employed  on  extra  duty;  consolidated  report  of 
Government  troops  and  stores  transported;  statement  of  out- 
standing debts  ;  quarterly  returns  of  quartermaster's  stores  and 
C.  C.  &  G.  E. 

4162.  Q.  When  one  officer  relieves  another  as  quartermaster, 
how  are  receipts  entered  ?  A.  The  transferring  officer  will  not 
enter  the  receipt  for  quartermaster's  stores  upon  the  abstract, 
but  directly  on  the  return,  as  "transferred  to  successor."  The 
receiving  officer,  in  such  case,  may  enter  the  invoice  upon  the 
returns  as  "  on  hand  at  the  post,  received  from  predecessor." 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  639 

Article  LXXIX. 
Subsistence  Department. 

4163.  Q.  What  does  the  Subsistence  Department  provide? 
A.  The  Subsistence  Department,  under  direction  of  tlie  Secretary 
of  War,  provides  for  the  distribution  and  expenditure  of  the 
money  appropriated  for  the  subsistence  of  the  Army,  and  for  the 
purchase,  issue,  and  sale  of  subsistence  supplies.  This  depart- 
ment also  furnishes,  for  sales  to  posts,  such  seed,  potatoes,  and 
garden-seeds  as  are  necessary  for  the  cultivation  of  gardens.  It 
furnishes,  builds,  and  repairs  ovens  for  baking  bread  for  the 
troops,  but  not  bake-houses.  When  a  bakery  is  not  managed  by 
the  Subsistence  Department,  the  expenses  for  hops,  yeast,  hire  of 
bakers,  etc.,  are  paid  from  the  bakery-savings. 

SUBSISTENCE  SUPPLIES. 

4164.  Q.  What  do  subsistence  supplies  comprise  ?  A.  1.  Arti- 
cles composing  the  ration,  or  those  authorized  to  be  issued  in  lieu 
of  parts  of  the  same,  and  those  authorized  to  be  furnished  for 
sales  to  officers  and  enlisted  men  ;  also  forage  for  beef- cattle. 
These  are  denominated  subsistence  stores.  2.  The  necessary 
means  for  handling,  preserving,  issuing,  selling,  and  accounting 
for  these  supplies,  as  tools,  scales,  measures,  utensils,  stationery, 
safes,  office-furniture,  etc.  These  are  denominated  subsistence 
property. 

4165.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  a  view  to  the  selection  of  the 
best  markets,  when  subsistence  supplies  are  required  in  consider- 
able quantities  for  any  section  of  the  country  ?  A.  The  chief 
commissary  of  subsistence  of  the  department  or  district  will  sub- 
mit to  the  Commissary-General,  through  the  chief  commissary  of 
his  division,  a  tabular  statement  showing  the  quantities  required, 
the  quality,  the  prices  at  which  they  were  last  obtained,  and  from 
what  places,  the  prices  at  which  they  can  be  purchased  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  several  stations  at  which  needed,  together  with 
such  other  information  as  will  enable  the  Commissary-General  to 
determine  the  places  and  methods  of  procuring  them. 

4166.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  upon  the  transfer  of  snb- 
sistence  supplies  ?  A.  Subsistence  supplies  shall  not  be  trans- 
ferred gratuitously  to  another  staff  department,  nor  obtained, 
issued,  sold,  or  otherwise  disposed  of,  except  as  prescribed  by 
regulations. 

4167.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  will  a  purchasing  officer 
pay  for  supplies  purchased  ?  A.  A  disbursing  officer  of  the 
Subsistence  Department,  when  provided  with  sufficient  funds, 
will  pay  promptly,  for  subsistence  supplies  purchased  by  him. 
When  funds  to  pay  for  them,  in  the  month  in  which  purchased, 


540  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

are  not  on  hand,  he  will  furnish  the  seller  with  a  certified  account 
of  the  purchase,  in  duplicate,  stating  thereon  the  cause  of  non- 
payment, and  on  what  return  he  has  taken  up  the  articles. 

4168.  Q.  When  a  claim  for  supplies  delivered  to  a  predecessor 
or  other  officer  is  presented  to  a  commissary,  what  will  he  do  ? 
A.  He  will  require  the  certified  account,  in  duplicate,  of  the  officer 
to  whom  the  supplies  were  delivered,  and  the  affidavit  of  the 
claimant  that  he  has  not  been  paid,  directly  or  indirectly,  for 
such  supplies  or  any  part  thereof,  and  that  he  has  not  authorized 
any  person  to  receive  payment  for  him,  and  the  commissary  will 
transmit  the  claim  to  the  Commissary-General  of  Subsistence  for 
his  instructions,  unless  previously  authorized  by  the  latter  to 
pay  it. 

4169.  Q.  What  is  required  when  supplies  are  to  be  delivered  by 
contractors  or  other  sellers  ?  A.  They  will  be  thoroughly  in- 
spected before  acceptance  by  the  commissary  ;  or  when  he  does 
not  deem  his  own  personal  inspection,  or  that  of  one  of  his  regu- 
lar employes,  to  be  sufficient,  or  when  the  quantity  to  be  delivered 
is  large,  he  may  employ  a  competent  expert  to  make  such  inspec- 
tion, and  pay  therefor  as  an  expense  of  the  Subsistence  Depart- 
ment. Certificates  that  such  service  has  been  rendered  must 
accompany  the  accounts. 

4170.  Q.  What  officers  are  required  to  make  monthly  statements 
of  the  cost  and  quality  of  the  ration,  in  all  its  parts,  at  their  sta- 
tions ?  A.  Officers  in  charge  of  principal  depots  and  purchasing 
stations. 

REQUISITIONS  FOR  SUBSISTENCE  SUPPLIES. 

4171.  Q.  What  are  officers  doing  duty  in  the  Subsistence  De- 
partment who  have  not  been  authorized  to  purchase  the  subsist- 
ence supplies,  including  seed,  required  by  them  for  issue  or  sale  ? 
A.  They  will  make  timely  requisition  therefor.  If  any  of  the 
supplies  can  be  obtained  in  the  vicinity  of  the  place  in  which  re- 
quired, on  terms  advantageous  to  the  Government,  the  requisitions 
will  be  accompanied  by  detailed  statements  showing  the  facts. 

4172.  Q.  What  officers  are  required  to  scrutinize  all  requisitions 
for  supplies  ?  A.  Chief  commissaries  of  subsistence  of  divisions 
and  departments  will  carefully  scrutinize  all  requisitions  for  sub- 
sistence supplies  and  will  reduce  or  increase,  the  quantities  to 
be  supplied,  as  may  be  judicious  in  view  of  the  quantities  on  hand 
and  the  probable  demands. 

4173.  Q.  What  is  required  of  post-commanders  with  regard  to 
a  probable  excess  of  stores  at  their  posts  ?  A.  Post-commanders 
will  make  monthly  examinations  of  the  stores  on  hand,  and  see 
that  the  wants  of  the  officers  and  troops  at  their  posts  are  met,  in 
the  requisitions  made  by  the  post- commissaries,  and  will  cause 
the  chief  commissary  to  be  notified  if  any  article  is  accumulating 
m  excess  of  probable  demands. 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  541 


STORAGE  AND  CARE  OF  SUBSISTENCE  STORES. 

4174.  Q.  How  are  storage-rooms,  etc.,  for  subsistence  supplies 
obtaiued  ?  A.  Good  and  sufficient  store-houses,  sheds,  paulins, 
or  other  proper  and  adequate  means  of  covering  and  protecting 
subsistence  supplies,  should  be  provided  by  the  Quartermaster's 
Department.  Care  must  be  taken  to  keep  store-rooms  dry  and 
well  ventilated. 

4175.  Q.  What  precautions  are  required  to  be  taken  against 
fires  ?  A.  Officers  doing  duty  in  the  Subsistence  Department  will 
make  daily  inspections  of  their  store-houses,  and  see  that  water- 
barrels,  buckets,  and  other  means  of  extinguishing  fires  are  ready 
for  use,  and  that  all  proper  precautions  are  taken  to  guard  against 
loss  thereby.  Coal-oil,  gunpowder,  quick-lime,  or  other  articles 
of  like  dangerous  nature?  will  not  be  kept  in  or  about  subsistence 
store-houses. 

4176.  Q.  How  is  the  issue  of  stores  as  regards  length  of  time 
on  hand  regulated  ?  A.  Stores  longest  on  hand,  if  in  fit  condi- 
tion, will  be  first  used  for  issues,  transfers  and  sales. 

4177.  Q.  What  is  required  of  officers  of  the  Subsistence  Depart- 
ment regarding  examination  of  stores  ?  A.  At  least  once  in 
each  month  officers  responsible  for  subsistence  stores  will  examine 
all  packages  on  hand,  and  set  apart  those  that  require  further 
inspection,  early  issue,  repacking,  rebrining,  etc.,  and  will  take 
the  necessary  steps  in  regard  to  them.  As  soon  as  it  is  discovered 
that  stores  are  not  in  fit  condition  for  issue  or  sale,  the  officer 
will  submit  an  inventory  thereof  to  the  commanding  officer  for 
the  action  of  an  inspector. 

Inventories  of  Subsistence  Stores. 

losses  and  gains. 

4178.  Q.  At  what  stated  times  are  inventories  of  subsistence 
stores  required  to  be  made  ?  A.  Once  in  each  calendar  month 
(usually  at  its  close)  an  accurate  and  detailed  inventory  of  the 
stores  actually  on  hand  will  be  taken  by  the  commissary,  and  all 
deficiencies  and  gains  found  to  exist  will  be  reported  by  him  on 
his  return  of  subsistence  stores.  Commanding  officers  will  see 
that  the  monthly  inventory  is  taken,  and,  when  practicable,  will 
cause  it  to  be  made  under  their  personal  supervision.  They  will 
also  examine  and  approve  the  monthly  statements  of  ' '  gains  " 
and  "  wastages"  submitted  by  post-commissary. 

4179.  Q.  AVhen  deficiency  has  arisen  from  ordinary,  unavoid- 
able, and  actual  waste  what  is  done  ?  A.  In  such  cases,  the 
commissary's  certificate,  examined  and  approved  by  the  com- 
manding officer  of  the  post,  will  be  accepted  as  a  voucher  therefor, 
as  also  for  salt  and  vinegar  used  in  rebrining  or  pickling  stores, 


543  THE  AEMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

or  for  waste  of  stores  in  overhauling  or  repacking.  Ordinary 
wastage  will  not  be  allowed  on  fresh  beef  furnished  directly  by  a 
contractor.  Wastage  will  not  be  reported  on  the  presumption 
that  it  exists,  or  will  exist  in  the  future  ;  but  on  the  fact  that  it 
actually  exists,  as  determined  by  examination. 

4180.  Q.  How  will  deficiencies  exceeding  the  percentage  speci- 
fied in  the  preceding  paragraph  ;  or  in  articles  for  which  a  limit 
of  ordinary  wastage  is  not  therein  indicated  ;  or  arising  from 
losses  by  straying  or  death  of  beef-cattle,  or  from  errors  in  their 
estimated  net  weight ;  or  from  losses  by  theft,  fire,  or  vermin  ; 
or  from  deficient  or  unsuitable  means  of  storage,  etc.,— be  ac- 
counted for.  A.  1st,  by  boards  of  survey  ;  2d,  by  affidavits ; 
3d,  by  certificates  of  disinterested  commissioned  officers.  Boards 
of  survey  should  generally  be  assembled  to  report  upon  such  de- 
ficiencies ;  affidavits  or  certificates  being  used  only  in  cases  where 
the  amount  invoiced  is  very  small,  or  when  it  is  impracticable  to 
assemble  a  board.  Affidavits  or  certificates  accounting  for  losses, 
extraordinary  wastage,  or  for  stores  or  property  expended  in  pre- 
serving supplies,  must  set  forth  fully  and  clearly  the  facts  of  the 
case,  and  the  quantities  involved. 

4181.  Q.  What  will  be  done  when  subsistence  supplies  are  to  be 
transported  from  one  point  to  another  ?  A.  The  invoicing  com- 
missary will  make  timely  requisition,  in  writing,  upon  the  proper 
quartermaster,  stating  as  nearly  as  possible  the  kind  and  amount 
of  supplies  to  be  transported,  when  they  will  be  ready  for  deliv- 
ery, when  they  should  reach  their  destination,  and  give  any 
other  information  relating  thereto  which  the  quartermaster  pos- 
sesses. The  commissary  will  also  give  the  quartermaster  transpor- 
tation invoices  in  duplicate,  of  the  packages  and  their  contents  as 
marked,  and  obtain  from  him  receipts  in  duplicate.  The  commis- 
sary will  forward  similar  invoices  in  duplicate,  with  letter  of 
transmittal,  to  the  officer  for  whom  the  supplies  are  intended. 

4183.  Q.  What  is  done  by  the  commissary  who  receives  stores  ? 
A.  The  receiving  commissary  will  transmit  to  the  invoicing  offi- 
cer receipts  in  duplicate,  corresponding  with  the  invoices,  if  the 
supplies  received  agree  with  them.  If  a  deficiency  is  found,  but 
does  not  exceed  the  small  amount  of  wastage  usually  and  un- 
avoidably attending  transportation,  he  will  receipt  for  the  sup- 
plies actually  received,  attaching  to  the  invoices  and  receipts  a 
certificate  of  such  wastage. 

4183.  Q.  When  should  a  board  of  survey  be  asked  for  by  an 
officer  receiving  subsistence  stores,  and  what  is  required  in  the 
case?  A.  If  the  receiving  commissary  finds  any  discrepancy 
between  the  invoices  and  the  quantities,  description,  or  condition 
of  the  supplies  received,  not  attributable  to  ordinary  wastage  in 
transportation,  he  will  at  once  apply  to  the  commanding  officer  for 
a  board  of  survey  to  ascertain  the  quantity  and  nature  of  the 
discrepancy,  and  fix  the  responsibility  therefor.     The  receiving 


ARMY  REGULATIO2S1S.  543 

commissary  will  transmit  to  the  invoicing  oflScer  receipts  in 
duplicate,  for  the  supplies  actually  received,  stating  on  the  re- 
ceipts the  discrepancy  ascertained,  and  how,  and  file  a  copy  of 
the  proceedings  of  the  board  with  his  return.  The  invoicing 
officer  will  file  with  his  return  the  receipts  accompanied  by  the 
quartermaster's  transportation  receipts.  When  the  board  finds 
tlie  carrier  responsible  for  the  loss  or  damage,  it  will  fix  the 
amount  in  money  to  be  charged  to  the  carrier,  which  amount 
will  be  charged  gn  the  bill  of  lading,  deducted  from  the  freight- 
bill,  and  paid  to  the  Subsistence  Department. 
'  4184.  Q.  When  the  receipts  of  the  officers  to  whom  the  stores 
are  invoiced  are  not  received  in  time  to  accompany  the  return  of 
the  invoicing  officer,  what  should  be  done?  A.  The  quarter- 
master's transportation  receipts  should  be  forwarded  instead,  and 
the  former  should  be  transmitted  when  received. 

4185.  Q.  When  subsistence  supplies  are  transferred  by  one 
commissary  to  another  at  the  same  station,  without  being  turned 
over  to  a  quartermaster  for  transportation,  what  is  required?  A. 
The  invoicing  and  receiving  commissaries  will  interchange  du- 
plicate invoices  and  receipts  therefor.  Should  any  of  the  supplies 
not  be  in  good  condition,  a  board  of  survey  will  be  applied  for  at 
once  to  examine  and  report  upon  them.  The  condition  as  deter- 
mined by  the  board  will  be  noted  upon  the  invoices  and  receipts, 
and  a  copy  of  the  proceedings  of  the  board  will  accompany  each 
officer's  returns. 

BEEF-CATTLE. 

4186.  Q.  How  should  beef-cattle  be  purchased,  and  what  weight 
should  they  be  ?  A.  Beef-cattle  should  be  purchased  by  gross  or 
net  weight,  preferably  however  the  latter,  and  all  advertisements 
and  contracts  should  state  the  average  weight  desired,  and  that 
none  below  a  specified  weight  should  be  received.  Generally,  cattle 
weighing  less  than  1000  pounds  should  not  be  accepted,  unless  it 
is  impracticable  to  procure  them  of  that  weight  at  economical 
rates,  or  smaller  ones  are  preferred  on  account  of  the  limited 
number  of  troops  to  be  supplied,  or  for  other  sufficient  reasons. 

4187.  Q.  What  character  of  cattle  should  be  received,  and  how 
may  the  net  weight  be  estimated  ?  A.  Bulls,  cows,  stags,  and 
hornless  cattle  should  not  be  received.  When  beef-cattle  are  ac- 
cepted, whether  under  formal  contracts  or  otherwise,  they  must 
be  accurately  weighed,  if  practicable,  and  will  be  accounted  for 
in  the  return  of  subsistence  stores  by  number  and  aggregate  net 
weight.  The  net  weight  will  be  estimated  at  55  per  cent  of  the 
gross  weight  when  the  animal  weighs  1300  or  more  pounds;  50 
per  cent  when  weighingl  ess  than  1300  and  over  800  pounds ;  and  40 
per  cent  when  weighing  800  pounds  or  less.  This  mode  of  de- 
termining the  net  weight  will  govern  only  when  the  cattle  are  in 
condition  to  yield  fresh  beef  of  good  and  marketable  quality;  if 


544  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

not  in  such  condition  they  will  be  rejected,  unless  circumstances 
render  acceptance  or  purchase  indispensable,  when  a  lower  and 
specially  determined  percentage  to  determine  their  net  weight 
will  be  adopted. 

4188.  Q.  When  the  cattle  of  a  herd  cannot  be  weighed,  how 
must  their  net  weight  be  determined  ?  A.  The  herd  will  be  sepa- 
rated into  three  lots,  according  to  apparent  weight— heavy,  me- 
dium, and  light— or  into  a  greater  number  of  lots  if  the  herd  is 
large  and  the  cattle  are  of  great  diversity  in  size  ;  from  each  of 
these  lots  one  average  animal  will  be  selected,  killed,  dressed,  and 
trimmed,  as  prescribed  in  the  ordinary  beef  contract,  and  accu- 
rately weighed ;  the  dressed  weight  thus  ascertained  will  be 
accepted  as  the  average  net  weight  of  the  lot  from  which  selec- 
tion was  made. 

4189.  Q.  How  should  fresh  meat  be  supplied  to  troops  ?  A.  All 
supplies  of  fresh  meats  for  troops  should  be  contracted  for  and 
delivered  from  the  block  when  it  can  be  done  economically,  and 
cattle  on  the  hoof  purchased  only  for  troops  in  campaigns  or  on 
the  march.     . 

4190.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  the  hides  of  slaughtered 
cattle  ?  A.  Hides  of  slaughtered  cattle  should  be  taken  up  and 
accounted  for  on  the  returns  of  subsistence-stores,  and  sold  as 
soon  as  practicable.  Care  must  be  exercised  to  preserve  them,  by 
either  drying  or  salting,  while  they  remain  on  hand. 

4191.  Q.  What  should  contracts  for  beef-cattle  stipulate  ? 
A.  Contracts  for  beef-cattle  should  stipulate  that  the  cattle  shall 
be  kept  without  food  and  water  for  twelve  hours  immediately 
preceding  the  time  of  weighing,  and  the  manner  for  determining 
the  net  weight  must  be  inserted  therein.  When  open-market 
purchases  are  made,  and  time  or  special  circumstances  do  not 
admit  of  reducing  to  writing  the  terms  of  purchase  agreed  on, 
the  mode  of  determining  the  net  weight  must  be  stated  to,  and 
accepted  by,  the  party  supplying  the  cattle. 

4192.  Q.  How  may  food  for  beef -cattle  be  obtained  ?  A.  Hay, 
corn,  or  other  articles  of  food  suitable  for  beef-cattle  may  be 
purchased  for  their  subsistence  when  sufficient  pasturage  cannot 
be  secured  ;  the  articles  to  be  accounted  for  on  the  return  of  sub- 
sistence stores,  and  to  be  fed  to  the  cattle  in  such  quantity  as 
may  be  necessary  in  order  to  supply  the  troops  with  beef  of  a 
good  and  marketable  quality. 

THE  RATION. 

4193.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  ration  ?  A.  A  ration  is  the  es- 
tablished daily  allowance  of  food  for  one  person. 

4194.  Q.  In  what  proportion  is  the  ration  of  vegetables  issued  ? 
A.  One  hundred  per  cent  in  fresh  potatoes  ;  or,  eighty  per  cent 
in  fresh  potatoes  and  twenty  per  cent  in  fresh  onions  ;  or  seventy 


ABMY  REGULATIONS.  545 

per  cent  in  fresh  potatoes  and  thirty  per  cent  in  canned  tomatoes, 
or  in  such  fresh  vegetables  as  can  be  procured  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  station,  or  which  it  may  be  practicable  to  furnish  from  a  dis- 
tance in  wholesome  condition — such  as  onions,  cabbages,  beets, 
turnips,  carrots  and  squash. 

4195.  Q.  What  men  of  the  army  are  entitled  to  more  than  one 
ration  a  day  ?  A.  Sergeants  and  corporals  of  the  Ordinance  De- 
partment are  entitled,  each,  to  one  and  one  half  rations  per  day. 

4196.  Q.  What  is  done  reguarding  the  rations  when  men  leave 
their  company  ?  A.  When  men  leave  their  company,  the  rations 
drawn  for  them  and  left  with  it  will  be  deducted  from  the  next 
ration-return  for  the  company  ;  a  like  rule  will  govern  in  case  of 
men  leaving  the  hospital. 

4197.  Q.  When  and  how  are  settlements  of  rations  made  at 
military  stations  ?  A.  On  each  issuing  day  a  settlement  will  be 
made,  between  each  company  and  the  hospital,  of  any  difference 
of  rations  arising  from  men  entering  or  leaving  the  hospital  for 
whom  rations  had  been  previously  drawn  by  the  company  or 
hospital.  Such  settlement  will  be  submitted  to  the  commanding 
officer,  with  tlie  returns,  and  he  will  see  tliat  it  is  correct. 

4198.  Q.  What  certificate  is  furnished  by  the  commissary  when 
troops  are  detached  from  a  post  or  command?  A.  The  com- 
manding officer  of  each  company  or  smaller  detachment  will  be 
furnished  by  the  commissary  with  a  certificate  setting  forth  the 
date  to  which,  and  by  whom,  rations  were  last  issued.  This 
certificate  will  be  presented  to  the  commissary  from  whom  rations 
may  next  be  dmwn,  and  will  be  transmitted  by  him,  with  his  ab- 
stract of  issues,  to  the  Commissary-General.  Similar  certificates 
will  be  given  to  civilian  employes  entitled  to  rations.  - 

4199.  Q.  When  may  back-rations  be  issued  ?  A.  Back-rations 
will  not  be  issued,  unless  troops  have  not  been  sufficiently  sub- 
sisted, and  then  only  to  such  an  extent  as  may  be  necessary  for 
their  health  and  comfort ;  no  sales  thereof  will  be  allowed. 

4200.  Q.  What  substitutive  issues  may  be  made  in  the  ration  ? 
A.  Fresh  mutton  may  be  issued  in  lieu  of,  and  at  the  same  rate 
as,  fresh  beef,  when  the  cost  of  the  former  does  not  exceed  that 
of  the  latter.  Fourteen  ounces  of  dried  fish,  or  eighteen  ounces 
of  pickled  or  fresh  fish,  may  be  issued  in  lieu  of  the  meat  compo- 
nents of  the  ration.  Molasses,  or  syrup,  may  be  issued  in  lieu  of 
sugar,  at  the  rate  of  two  gallons  to  fifteen  pounds  of  sugar. 


THE  TRAVEL-RATION. 

4201.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  travel-ration  ?  A.  When  troops 
are  travelling  by  cars,  stages,  transports,  or  otherwise  than  on  the 
march,  or  when  for  short  periods  they  may  be  separated  from 
necessary  cooking  facilities,  articles  may  be  issued  in  lieu  of  all 


546  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMIN^ER. 

components  of  the  ordinary  ration.    They  will  constitute  and  be 
referred  to  as  the  "  travel-ration." 

4202.  Q.  When  articles  composing  the  "travel-ration"  accu- 
mulate at  posts  in  excess  of  anticipated  demands,  what  will  be  done 
with  them  ?  A.  They  may,  to  prevent  loss  by  deterioration,  be 
issued  to  troops,  upon  the  orders  of  commanding  officers,  accord- 
ing to  the  equivalents  prescribed. 

4203.  Q.  When  and  how  can  liquid  coffee  be  issued  to  troops  ? 
A.  To  troops  travelling  by  cars,  stages,  transports,  or  otherwise 
than  on  the  march,  and  supplied  with  cooked  or  travel-rations, 
liquid  coffee  may  be  furnished  in  lieu  of  the  coffee  and  sugar 
portion  of  the  ration,  provided  the  cost  thereof  does  not  exceed 
twenty-one  cents  per  man  per  day.  The  accounts  therefor  will 
show  that  coffee  and  sugar  were  not  drawn  for  the  time  for  which 
the  liquid  coffee  was  furnished,  and  by  what  officers  the  other 
portion  of  the  ration  were  issued. 

4204.  Q.  By  what  means  can  liquid  coffee  be  provided  for 
troops,  and  how  is  it  accounted  for  ?  A.  For  an  organized  com- 
mand or  a  large  detachment  in  charge  of  commissioned  officers, 
funds  for  the  purchase  of  liquid  coffee  will  be  transferred  to,  and 
be  disbursed  and  accounted  for  by,  a  designated  officer.  At  the 
end  of  the  journey  the  unexpended  balance  will  be  transferred  to 
the  nearest  commissary.  For  a  small  detachment  the  twenty-one 
cents  per  day  authorized  for  the  number  of  days  for  which  travel- 
rations  are  furnished,  may,  on  the  order  of  the  commanding 
officer  directing  the  journey,  be  paid  directly  to  the  men,  and 
their  individual  receipts  will  be  taken  and  filed  (with  a  copy  of 
the  order)  with  the  account-current  of  the  commissary. 

4205.  Q»  What  may  be  done  when  an  excess  of  subsistence 
stores  that  have  been  provided  for  sales  to  officers  and  enlisted 
men  exists  at  a  post  ?  A.  Whenever  subsistence  stores  (articles  of 
food)  furnished  for  sales  to  officers  and  enlisted  men,  have  accu- 
mulated at  a  post  in  excess  of  the  wants  for  that  purpose,  and 
are  liable  to  damage  if  kept  on  hand  solely  for  sales,  the  excess 
may  be  issued  to  troops  on  ration-returns,  in  lieu  of  some  com- 
ponent parts  of  the  ration  of  equal  money  value.  In  cases,  how- 
ever, of  bams,  white  sugar,  Java  coffee,  dried  or  pickled  fish,  or 
other  articles  which  are  equivalents  of  some  of  the  components 
of  the  ration,  the  issue  will  be  made  at  the  rate  per  ration  desig- 
nated therefor. 

4206.  Q.  In  the  event  of  a  company  or  detachment  failing  to 
consume  all  the  rations  issued  to  it,  what  may  be  done  with  the 
excess?  A.  It  may  be  sold,  and  the  amount  received  therefor 
applied  to  the  improvement  of  the  soldiers'  mess. 

4207.  Q.  What  issues  of  subsistence  stores  may  be  made  to  civil- 
ians? A.  One  ration  a  day  may  be  issued  to  each  civilian  em- 
ployed with  the  Army  when  the  rate  of  pay  does  not  exceed  $60 
per  month,  and  when  the  circumstances  of  his  service  make  it 


'  ARMY  REGULATIONS.  547 

f 
necessary,  and  the  terms  of  his  engagement  provide  for  it.  These 
issues  will  be  on  ration-returns  similar  to  those  used  for  troops, 
signed  by  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  employes,  and  ordered  by 
the  post-commander.  One  ration  per  day,  in  kind,  may  be  issued 
to  a  contract  physician  when  the  stipulations  of  his  contract  pro- 
vide for  it.  Such  rations  will  be  drawn  on  ration-returns,  ap- 
proved by  post-commanders,  and  in  the  month  when  due. 

4208.  Q.  How  may  destitute  persons  be  provided  with  some- 
thing to  eat  ?  A.  Rations  will  not  be  issued  to  destitute  persons, 
except  when,  to  prevent  starvation  or  extreme  suffering,  the  over- 
ruling demands  of  humanity  shall  move  the  commanding-officer 
to  assume  the  responsibility  of  ordering  limited  issues — he  trusting 
to  the  circumstances,  which  will  be  fully  stated  in  the  order  for 
the  issue^  that  the  Secretary  of  War  will  sustain  his  action. 

4209.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  issues  of  rations  be  made 
to  Indians  ?  A.  When  issues  are  made  to  visiting  Indians  the 
orders  therefor  will  be  in  writing,  and  will  state  the  necessity  for 
the  issue,  the  number  of  Indians,  the  tribe  or  tribes  to  which  they 
belong,  the  number  of  days  for  which  the  issues  are  made,  and 
the  articles  and  quantities  to  be  issued.  A  copy  of  the  order  will 
accompany  the  abstract  of  such  issues.  The  cost  of  the  articles 
issued,  including  cost  of  transportation  (when  it  can  be  ascer- 
tained), will  be  reported  upon  the  abstract. 

4210.  Q.  What  articles  are  considered  as  "  extra  issue  "  ?  A. 
Adamantine  candles,  lantern-candles,  salt,  and  vinegar. 

SALES. 

4211.  Q.  How  will  sales  of  damaged  subsistence  supplies  be 
made?  A.  On  due  public  notice,  and  in  such  market  as  the 
interests  of  the  service  may  require.  A  copy  of  the  inspection 
report,  order,  or  authority  for  the  sale;  the  notice  of  sale;  the  auc- 
tioneer's statement  of  sales  will  accompany  the  proper  returns. 

4212.  Q.  How  will  subsistence  supplies  in  good  condition,  but 
not  required  for  use,  be  disposed  of  ?  A.  By  orders  from  the 
Commissary-General  of  Subsistence.  In  urgent  cases,  such  as  a 
sudden  abandonment  of  the  post,  their  rapid  deterioration,  etc., 
these  supplies  may  be  sold  as  prescribed,  or  otherwise  properly 
disposed  of,  on  the  written  advice  of  an  inspecting  officer,  ap- 
proved by  a  commanding  general. 

4213.  Q.  What  supplies  may  be  sold  to  the  Quartermaster's 
Department  ?  A.  The  Subsistence  Department  will  sell  to  the 
Quartermaster's  Department,  at  cost  price,  the  flour  which  the 
latter  is  required  to  provide,  for  use  in  target  practice;  also  the 
matches  which  the  latter  is  directed  to  issue  to  troops. 

4214.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  proceeds  of  all  sales  of  sub- 
sistence supplies  ?  A.  The  proceeds  of  all  sales  of  subsistence 
supplies  are  exempt  from  being  covered  into  the  treasury,  but 


548  THE   AKMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

will  be  taken  up  on  the  oflBcer's  account-current  as  being  immedi- 
ately available  for  the  purchase  of  supplies. 

SALES  TO  OFFICERS  AND  ENLISTED   MEN. 

4215.  Q.  What  is  the  Subsistence  Department  authorized  to 
provide  for  sales  to  officers  and  enlisted  men,  and  who  furnishes 
the  list  of  articles  ?  A.  Articles  composing  the  ration,  and  such 
other  articles  as  may  be  designated  by  the  Inspectors- General  of 
the  Army.  The  Commissary-General  of  Subsistence  will,  from 
time  to  time,  furnish  the  proper  officers  with  lists  of  such  articles, 
and  instructions  for  procuring,  selling,  and  accounting  for  the 
same. 

4216.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  subsistence  supplies  be 
sold  to  officers  and  enlisted  men  ?  A.  Articles  purchased  by  the 
Subsistence  Department,  by  actual  net  weight,  will  be  sold  to 
officers  and  enlisted  men  at  actual  net  weight  at  the  time  of  sale; 
but  articles  put  up  in  wrappers  or  canvas  covers — such  as  hams, 
or  breakfast  bacon,  which  are  usually  bought  by  weight,  includ- 
ing wrappers  and  covers — and  articles  purchased  in  sealed  cans, 
cartoons,  or  packets,  will  be  sold  as  purchased.  Subsistence 
supplies  sold  to  officers  and  enlisted  men  and  employes  are  for 
the  use  of  purchasers,  and  must  not  be  sold  or  bartered  by  them. 

4217.  Q.  What  rule  obtains  as  to  furnishing  subsistence  sup- 
plies to  the  families  of  absent  officers  ?  A.  When  an  officer  of 
the  Army  is  absent  from  his  family,  any  member  thereof  author- 
ized by  him  may,  in  his  name,  make  purchases,  as  specitied  in 
the  preceding  paragraph,  upon  his  written  request  to  the  commis- 
sary at  the  place  where  the  purchases  are  to  be  made. 

4218.  Q.  What  sales  of  subsistence  stores  are  to  be  regarded  as 
cash  sales  ?  A.  Whenever  subsistence  stores,  sold  to  officers,  are 
paid  for  within  the  calendar  month  in  which  they  are  sold,  the 
sales  shall  be  regarded  as  cash  sales  ;  if  not  paid  for  within  that 
month,  they  will  be  regarded  and  reported  as  credit  sales,  and 
the  amounts  due  will  be  collected  through  the  Pay  Department. 

4219.  Q,  Under  what  conditions  may  stores  be  sold  on  credit? 
A.  Subsistence  stores  may  be  sold  on  credit  to  an  officer  who  has 
not  been  regularly  paid,  or  who  is  in  the  field  where  it  is  imprac- 
ticable to  procure  funds,  u^on  his  certificate  that  the  stores  are 
required  for  the  use  of  himself  and  his  family,  and  his  written 
receipt  for  the  articles.  Subsistence  stores  may  be  sold  on  credit 
to  enlisted  men  who  have  not  been  regularly  paid,  or  who  are  in 
the  field  where  it  is  impracticable  to  procure  funds,  on  written 
permits,  signed  by  their  respective  company  commanders  and 
approved  by  their  commanding  officers  ;  but  such  permit  shall 
not  be  given  to  any  enlisted  man  in  excess  of  the  amount  of  un- 
incumbered pay  due  him,  nor  in  any  month  in  excess  of  the 
amount  of  bis  monthly  pay. 


ARMY  REGULATIONS.  54^ 

4220.  Q.  How  are  the  abstracts  of  sales  on  credit  to  be  made  ? 
A.  ';  Abstracts  of  sales  to  officers  on  credit"  will  be  made  in 
duplicate,  one  tb  accompany  the  return  of  subsistence  stores  and 
the  other  to  be  filed  with  the  one  retained.  A  "  Statement  of 
dues  to  the  Subsistence  Department  from  officers  for  subsistence 
stores  sold  to  them  on  credit "  will  be  made  in  duplicate,  one  to 
be  attached  to  the  "  Abstract  of  sales  to  officers  on  credit,"  which 
accompanies  the  return  of  stores,  and  the  other  to  be  attached  to 
the  retained  abstract.  "Abstracts  of  sales  to  enlisted  men  on 
credit"  will  be  made  in  duplicate,  one  to  accompany  the  return 
of  subsistence  stores  and  the  other  to  be  filed  with  the  retained 
return.  A  "Statement  of  dues  to  the  Subsistence  Department 
from  enlisted  men,  of  subsistence  stores  sold  to  them  on  credit," 
will  be  made  in  triplicate,  at  the  end  of  each  month  (or  earlier  if 
the  officer  ceases  to  perform  subsistence  duty,  or  the  company 
leaves  the  post  or  station),  for  each  company  to  the  enlisted  men 
of  which  sales  have  been  so  made.  One  of  the  triplicates  will  be 
filed  with  the  "  Abstract  of  statements  of  dues  to  the  Subsistence 
Department  from  enlisted  men  for  stores  sold  to  them  on  credit ;" 
one  will  be  filed  with  the  retained  abstract,  and  the  third  delivered 
by  the  commissary  to  the  company  commander  for  file  with  the 
company  records. 

4221.  Q.  How  are  prices  of  stores  to  be  sold  to  officers  and  en- 
listed men  prepared?  A.  On  the  first  day  of  each  calendar 
month  officers  doing  duty  in  the  Subsistence  Department  will  pre- 
pare a  list,  showing  the  cost  prices  at  which  stores  will  be  sold  to 
officers  and  men  during  that  month.  Such  cost  price  for  each 
article,  will  be  the  invoice  price  of  the  last  lot  of  that  article  re- 
ceived by  the  officer  prior  to  the  first  day  of  said  month. 

4222.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  subsistence  stores  be 
sold  to  civil  employes  of  the  Government  ?  A.  Civilians  employed 
with  the  Army  at  remote  posts,  where  food  cannot  otherwise  be 
procured,  may  purchase  stores  from  the  Subsistence  Department 
in  limited  quantities,  for  their  own  personal  use  only,  paying  cash 
therefor  on  delivery  at  invoice  on  contract  price,  with  10  per  cent 
added. 

4223.  Q.  To  whom  will  commutation  of  rations  be  paid? 
A.  No  persons,  except  enlisted  men,  will  be  paid  commutation  of 
rations  by  the  Subsistence  Department. 

4224.  Q.  To  what  enlisted  men  will  commutation  of  rations 
not  be  allowed  ?  A.  Commutation,  in  lieu  of  rations,  will  not  be 
allowed  to  recruiting  parties  while  at  their  stations,  nor  to  soldiers 
serving  where  subsistence  in  kind  is  provided  by  the  Government, 
unless  it  is  specially  authorized  by  the  Secretary  of  War.  Com- 
mutation of  rations  will  not  be  allowed  to  men  travelling  under 
orders  when  they  can  be  subsisted  by  cooked  rations. 

4225.  Q.  What  kind  of  rations  will  as  a  rule  be  furnished  to 
enlisted  men  travelling  ?    A.  Eations  in  kind  will  be  furnished 


550  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

to  men  travelling  under  orders  in  all  cases  where  they  can  carry 
and  cook  them ;  when  they  cannot  cook  them  eti  route,  cooked 
rations,  or  the  prescribed  travel-ration,  will  be  furnished  when 
practicable. 

4236.  Q.  What  are  the  different  rates  of  commutation  for 
rations,  and  to  whom  are  these  rates  paid  ?  A.  Sergeants  of  the 
post  non-commissioned  staff,  on  duty  at  forts  and  stations,  where 
there  are  no  other  troops,  to  be  commuted  at  the  rate  of  forty 
cents  per  day  ;  thirty  cents  per  day  may  be  paid  to  soldiers  -sta- 
tioned where  the  Government  does  not  otherwise  provide  for  their 
subsistence,  on  satisfactory  evidence  that  they  have  not  received 
rations,  or  an  equivalent  therefor,  during  the  period  for  which 
commutation  is  claimed  ;  there  may  be  paid  to  a  soldier  detached, 
travelling  under  orders,  at  the  rate  of  one  dollar  and  fifty  cents 
per  day,  or  less,  as  the  Secretary  of  War  may  direct,  when  it  is 
impracticable  for  him  to  be  subsisted  as  required.  The  amount 
will  be  paid  by  the  commissary  when  due,  or  in  advance,  upon 
the  order  of  the  commanding  oflBcer,  for  the  necessary  number  of 
days'  travel  over  the  shortest  travelled  route.  The  voucher  will 
show  the  nature  and  extent  of  the  duty  and  kind  of  transporta- 
tion, and  will  be  accompanied  by  the  order  directing  the  journey 
to  be  made,  or  a  duly  authenticated  copy  thereof,  which  order 
will  state  that  the  journey  is  necessary  for  the  public  service,  that 
it  is  impracticable  for  the  soldier  to  carry  rations  of  any  kind, 
and,  if  payment  of  commutation  is  ordered  in  advance,  the  num- 
ber of  days  for  which  it  is  to  be  made.  When  it  is  proper  that 
the  original  order  shall  be  retained  by  the  soldier,  the  amount 
paid  him  will  be  noted  thereon,  with  the  date  and  place  of  jmy- 
ment  duly  signed  by  the  commissary.  There  must  be  added  to 
the  voucher  the  certificate  of  a  commissioned  officer  (in  all  prac- 
ticable cases  that  of  the  officer  ordering  the  journey)  that  the 
number  of  days  charged  for  is  (or  was)  the  actual  time  required 
to  make  the  journey,  and  that  he  is  satisfied  that  it  is  (or  was) 
impracticable  for  the  soldier  to  be  subsisted  as  required  otherwise. 

4327.  Q.  Under  what  conditions  will  the  commutation  of  one 
dollar  and  fifty  cents  be  allowed  ?  A.  As  a  rule,  only  in  case  of 
a  soldier  travelling  alone  under  orders.  It  will  not  be  paid  to 
detachments  consisting  of  more  than  two  men,  nor  in  any  case 
where  the  travel  can  be  accomplished  in  less  than  twenty-four 
hours,  excfept  in  case  of  an  enlisted  man  ordered  from  the  place 
or  station  where  his  rations  have  been  regularly  commuted,  or 
where  rations  in  kind  cannot  be  furnished. 

4338.  Q.  What  commutation  for  rations  will  be  paid  a  soldier 
on  furlough,  and  what  is  required  before  payment  ?  A.  Commu- 
tation of  rations,  at  twenty-five  cents  per  day,  will  be  paid  to  a 
soldier  on  furlough  by  competent  authority,  provided  he  has 
reported  for  duty  at  his  proper  station,  as  required  by  the  fur- 
lough, on  or  before  the  date  of  its  expiration.     The  furlough 


ARMY   REGULATION'S.  551 

must  show  the  date  to  which  the  soldier  has  been  subsisted,  and 
must  be  presented  with  the  claim  for  commutation,  with  the  cer- 
tificate of  a  commissioned  officer  that  the  soldier  has  returned  to 
duty  at  its  expiration.  Payment  will  not  be  made  until  the  expi- 
ration of  the  furlough  and  return  therefrom.  The  officer  making 
the  payment  will  indorse  the  fact  upon  the  furlough,  and  certify 
on  the  voucher  for  the  payment  that  he  has  made  such  indorse- 
ment. 

4229.  Q.  How  are  the  extra- duty  men  in  the  Subsistence  De- 
partment paid?  A.  The  per  diem  allowed  by  law  to  enlisted 
men  detailed  on  extra  duty  in  the  Subsistence  Department  will 
be  paid  bjr  the  commissary  at  the  end  of  each  calendar  month,  or 
when  relie'ved. 

BOOKS  AND  RETURNS. 

4230.  Q.  What  books  are  required  to  be  kept  in  the  Subsistence 
Department  at  posts,  and  for  what  purpose  ?  A.  At  each  mili- 
tary post  a  "  Letter-book,"  a  "  Commissary-book,"  and  a  "  Record- 
book  "  will  be  kept  by  the  commissary,  and  will  not  be  removed 
therefrom.  In  the  commissary-book  will  be  entered  all  the  re- 
turns of  subsistence  stores.  In  the  record-book  will  be  copied  all 
letters,  orders,  instructions,  and  other  authoritative  papers,  not 
printed,  relating  to  the  administration  of  the  duties  of  the  Sub- 
sistence Department,  which  are  received  by  a  commissary  and 
which  should  be  brought  to  the  attention  of  his  successor.  Every 
disbursing  officer  of  the  Subsistence  Department  will  keep,  in  a 
"Cash-book,"  a  detailed  record  of  all  moneys,  item  by  item, 
received  or  disbursed  by  him.  The  book  will  be  balanced  at  the 
end  of  each  calendar  month  (or  more  frequently  if  necessary),  to 
exhibit  the  precise  condition  of  his  money  responsibility.  A  de- 
tailed account  of  all  sales  to  officers  and  enlisted  men  shall  be 
made,  at  the  time  of  sale,  in  a  book  kept  for  that  purpose,  and, 
at  the  close  of  each  day,  such  sales  shall  be  made  up  and  recorded; 
the  cash  sales  in  one  book,  those  on  credit  in  another. 

4231.  Q.  What  returns  and  accounts  in  the  Subsistence  De- 
partment will  be  prepared  and  when  returned  ?  A.  An  Account- 
current  by  all  officers  responsible  for  subsistence  funds,  and 
rendered  within  ten  days  after  the  close  of  each  month  ;  weekly 
and  monthly  statement  of  funds ;  return  of  subsistence  stores ; 
return  of  subsistence  property,  rendered  quarterly. 


PAET  xni. 

TROOPS  IN  CAMPAIGN. 


Text-book:— CT.  8.  Army  Begulations, 


Fob  all  Officers  of  the  Line— Nos.  4232-4427. 


PART  xni. 

TROOPS  m  cAMPAieir, 


ORGANIZATION  OF  AN  ARMY  IN  THE  FIELD. 

4232.  Q.  When  it  becomes  necessary  to  concentrate  the  land 
forces  of  the  United  States  for  field  operations,  how  will  they  be 
organized  ?  A.  Into  brigades  and  divisions,  and  if  necessary  into 
army  corps  and  separate  armies. 

4233.  Q.  Of  what  is  a  Brigade  composed,  how  commanded,  and 
what  kind  of  unit  is  it  ?  A.  A  brigade  will  ordinarily  be  com- 
posed of  troops  of  one  arm  of  the  service.  It  is  a  tactical  unit, 
requiring  an  administrative  staff  only  when  acting  separately. 
It  is  composed  of  two  or  more  regiments,  depending  on  their 
strength,  and  is  commanded  by  a  brigadier-general,  or  by  the 
senior  colonel. 

4234.  Q.  Of  what  is  a  Division  composed,  how  commanded,  and 
•what  kind  of  unit  is  it  ?  A.  A  division  is  ordinarily  composed  of 
two  or  more  brigades  of  infantry  or  cavalry  ;  but  under  special 
circumstances,  may  embrace  troops  of  all  arms  of  the  service.  It 
is  the  command  of  a  major-general.  The  division  is  the  basis  of 
organization  of  an  army,  and  is  both  a  tactical  and  administrative 
unit.  The  administrative  control  in  matters  relating  to  courts- 
martial,  the  supply  service,  and  money  and  property  accountabil- 
ity, vested  in  the  commanders  of  territorial  departments,  devolve, 
in  the  field,  upon  division  commanders,  under  the  orders  of  the 
commanding  general  of  the  army  or  department. 

4235.  Q.  Of  what  does  an  Army  Corps  consist,  how  organized, 
and  under  whose  control  is  it?  A.  An  army  corps  will  ordinarily 
consist  of  two  or  more  divisions  of  infantry  or  cavalry  and  a 
brigade  of  artillery ;  but,  when  designed  to  act  independently, 
should  contain  such  proportions  of  all  arms  of  the  service  as  to  be 
self-sustaining.  An  army  corps  detached  from  the  main  army, 
but  operating  in  the  same  theatre  of  operations,  remains  under 
control  of  the  general  commanding  the  main  army.  Army  corps 
are  only  organized  by  special  authority  from  the  President. 

4236.  Q.  How  are  brigades,  divisions,  army  corps  and  armies 
designated?    A.  Brigades  in  divisions,  and  divisions  in  army 

5d5 


556  THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S  EXAMINER. 

corps,  receive  numerical  designations  upon  their  organization;  as, 
"first  brigade,  second  division;"  "tliird  division,  first  army 
corps,"  etc.  Army  corps  are  numbered  in  the  order  of  their  or- 
ganization.    Separate  armies  receive  territorial  designations. 

4237.  Q.  How  are  temporary  organizations,  such  as  wings, 
centres,  and  reserves  formed  ?  A.  Temporary  organizations  con- 
sisting of  more  than  one  division,  as  wings,  centre,  and  reserve, 
may  be  formed  under  temporary  commanders,  but  such  tem- 
porary commanders  will  not  interfere  with  the  organization  or 
administration  of  the  divisions  thus  united,  and  will  only  direct 
their  movements  in  marches  and  on  the  field  of  battle. 

4238.  Q.  How  should  troops  arriving  at  rendezvous  or  places 
of  organization  be  assigned  ?  A.  They  will  be  assigned  to  brigades 
and  divisions  by  the  commanding  general. 

COMMANDS. 

4239.  Q.  How  are  the  commanders  of  army  corps  and  separate 
armies  assigned  ?    A.  By  the  President. 

4240.  Q.  When  two  or  more  armies  are  combined  for  military 
operations,  what  is  the  title  of  the  commander  ?  A.  General-in- 
chief. 

4241.  Q.  In  case  of  death  or  disability  of  the  commanding 
general  of  an  army  or  corps,  who  exercises  command  ?  A.  The 
next  in  rank  shall  exercise  the  command  until  the  will  of  the 
President  be  known. 

4242.  Q.  By  whom  are  the  commanders  of  brigades  and  divi- 
sions assigned  ?  A.  If  the  commanders  of  brigades  and  divisions 
be  not  designated  by  the  War  Department,  they  will  be  assigned 
by  the  commanding  general  of  the  army  in  the  field. 

4243.  Q.  How  are  the  functions  of  a  commanding  general  facili- 
tated? A.  By  the  existence  of  the  organized  fractions  of  the 
army,  since  he  communicates  only  with  the  generals  who  com- 
mand those  fractions.  He  is  also  assisted  in  his  duties  by  a  chief 
of  staff,  by  one  or  more  officers  of  the  Adjutant-General's  De- 
partment, an  officer  of  the  Inspector-General's  and  Judge- Advo- 
cate General's  Departments,  and  by  the  chiefs  of  the  several 
administrative  services. 

4244.  Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  a  chief  of  staff  ?  A.  To 
transmit  the  orders  of  the  commanding  general  and  to  attend  to 
the  execution  of  orders  directing  movements  and  other  necessary 
labors,  as  the  construction  of  works  and  lines  of  defense  ;  the 
opening  and  repair  of  roads  and  communications  :  the  construc- 
tion of  bridges  and  the  establishment  of  camps  and  posts ;  to  see 
that  directed  reconnaissances  are  properly  made,  and  that  all 
branches  of  the  service  are  efficiently  conducted.  He  will  be 
assisted  in  the  performance  of  these  duties  by  as  many  officers  of 
the  Adjutant-General's  Department  as  may  be  necessary. 


TROOPS  11^   CAMPAIGN.  557 

4245.  Q.  What  staff  officers  shall  be  attached  to  each  army  and 
to  each  army  corps  for  the  direction  of  administrative  purposes 
and  what  is  their  special  duty  ?  A.  Superior  officers  of  the  Ord- 
nance, Quartermaster's,  Subsistence,  Pay,  Medical,  and  Signal 
Departments,  an  officer  of  the  Judge- Ad vocafte-General's  Depart- 
ment, and  a  chief  commissary  of  musters,  with  such  inferior  offi- 
cers, assistants,  and  employes  as  may  be  required.  They  report 
to  and  receive  the  orders  of  the  general  under  whom  thev  are. 
employed,  either  directly  or  through  the  chief  of  staff,*  and 
centralize  all  the  details  of  administration  of  their  respective 
services. 

4346.  Q.  By  whom  are  the  means  and  methods  of  obtaining 
supplies  loeked  after  ?  A.  By  the  chiefs  of  the  several  adminis- 
trative services,  whose  duties  are  performed  in  conformity  with 
the  regulations  prescribed  for  those  services. 

4247.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  provost-marshal-general, 
and  what  command  will  he  have  ?  A.  He  will  have  under  his 
command  the  force  necessary  to  preserve  a  proper  police  through- 
out the  lines  of  the  army;  to  protect  the  inhabitants  of  the 
country  from  pillage  and  violence ;  to  keep  watch  on  all  non- 
military  persons  and  camp-followers ;  to  follow  the  column  on 
the  march  and  bring  up  stragglers,  and  to  arrest  skulkers  and 
fugitives  from  the  battlefield.  He  will  take  charge  of  all  pris- 
oners of  war  and  deserters  from  the  enemy,  and,  under  the 
direction  of  the  commanding  general,  will  superintend  the  secret 
service.  He  will  receive  his  orders  through  the  chief  of  staff,  and 
make  such  written  reports  as  may  be  required. 

4248.  Q.  Who  is  responsible  for  the  establishing,  arranging, 
and  commanding  the  camp  of  the  army  headquarters,  and  what 
are  his  especial  duties  ?  A.  There  will  be  attached  to  the  general 
headquarters  an  officer  vested  wMth  authority  to  establish,  ar- 
range, and  command  the  camp,  place  the  posts  and  guards,  and 
control  the  administrative  services  of  the  headquarters.  He  will 
also  direct  the  movements  of  its  train,  and,  in  conjunction  with 
the  provost-marshal-general,  or  by  means  of  the  necessary  guard 
allowed  him,  preserve  order  at  headquarters. 

4249.  Q.  What  is  the  title  given  officers  detailed  at  the  head- 
quarters of  an  army  or  army  corps  or  of  divisions  or  separate 
brigades  to  muster"  in  troops,  and  what  are  their  duties  ?  A.  A 
commissary  of  musters,  and  an  assistant  commissary  of  musters, 
whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  make  all  musters  into  and  out  of  the 
military  service,  to  give  any  information  upon  the  subject  of 
musters  that  may  be  needed  by  officers  serving  in  the  command 
to  which  they  are  attached,  and  to  exercise  such  supervision  over 
the  preparation  of  the  regular  muster  and  pay-rolls  as  Will  secure 
their  uniformity,  accuracy,  and  completeness.  They  will  conduct 
the  business  of  their  offi'ce  and  will  render  reports  and  returns 
thereof  in  accordance  with  such  instructions  as  may  be  pre- 


558  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMII^ER. 

scribed  from  time  to  time  in  orders  from  the  Adjutant-Getierars 
Office. 

4250.  Q.  Of  what  shall  the  staff  of  an  army  corps  consist? 
A.  One  assistant  adjutant-general,  one  quartermaster,  one  com- 
missary of  subsistence,  and  one  inspector-general,  who  shall  bo 
assigned  from  the  army  or  volunteer  force  by  the  Secretary  of 
War;  also,  the  authorized  aides-de-camp  of  the  commanding  gen- 
eral. The  senior  officer  of  artillery  in  each  army  corps  shall,  in 
addition  to  his  other  duties,  act  as  chief  of  artillery  and  ordnance 
at  the  headquarters  of  the  corps. 

4251.  Q.  What  staff  officers  are  attached  to  the  headquarters 
of  a  division  ?  A.  The  number  and  rank  depend,  to  a  certain 
extent,  on  creations  made  by  Congress.  There  should  be  an 
assistant  adjutant-general,  an  inspector,  a  judge-advocate,  a 
medical  director,  a  commissary  of  musters,  a  provost-marshal, 
and  chief  of  the  several  administrative  services,  with  the  number 
of  inferior  officers  and  employes  required  by  each. 

4252.  Q.  How  are  brigades  provided  with  staff  officers  ?  A. 
Brigades  will  be  provided  with  such  administrative  staffs  as  are 
necessary.  Separate  brigades — that  is,  brigades  not  assigned  to 
divisions — will  be  provided  with  such  administrative  staffs  as  are 
deemed  necessary  by  the  authority  creating  them.  Commanders 
of  such  brigades  have  the  powers  of  division  commanders  in  all 
that  regards  discipline  and  administration. 

4253.  Q.  What  is  required  of  all  staff  officers  in  time  of  battle  ? 
A.  All  staff  officers  who  are  not  otherwise  employed  at  the  time 
act  as  aids  to  their  commanding  general  on  the  field  of  battle. 

ARTILLERY   AND  ENGINEERS. 

4254.  Q.  How  will  the  artillery  and  engineers  be  organized  in 
each  army  ?  A.  According  to  the  nature  of  the  service  and  the 
theatre  of  operations.  They  will,  as  a  rule,  constitute  special 
commands,  under  their  own  officers  ;  but,  when  assigned  to  army 
corps  and  divisions,  will  be  on  the  footing  of  other  troops  attached 
for  service. 

4255.  Q.  In  what  manner  will  the  batteries  be  distributed  in 
an  army  in  the  field  ?  A.  Under  ordinary  circumstances,  from 
two  thirds  to  three  fourths  of  the  field-batteries  will  be  distributed 
to  the  army  corps,  or  to  divisions,  and  in  proportion  to  the 
strength  of  those  commands.  The  remaining  batteries  will  bo 
organized  into  brigades,  and  will  constitute  the  reserve  artillery 
of  the  army. 

4256.  Q.  What  will  the  ammunition  columns,  with  artillery 
material,  'the  tools,  etc.,  required  for  general  repairs,  constitute  ? 
A.  The  grand  park  of  the  artillery  ;  those  required  for  each  army 
corps  will  constitute  the  artillery  park  of  that  corps. 

4257.  Q.  If  it  is  probable  that  a  siege-train  will  be  required, 


TROOPS  IN  CAMPAIQSf.  659 

what  is  done  with  it  ?  A.  It  should  he  organized,  instructed,  and 
held  in  depot  until  needed.  When  brought  forward  it  will  report 
directly  to  the  commander  of  the  artillery  for  instructions, 

4258.  Q.  In  what  manner  is  the  reserve  artillery  of  the  army 
and  the  artillery  brigade  of  a  corps  disposed  of  ?  A.  The  reserve 
artillery  of  the  army  and  the  artillery  brigade  of  each  army  corps 
should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  kept  together  ;  but  on  the  march, 
or  in  camp,  or  when  near  the  enemy,  additional  batteries  may  be 
attached  temporarily  to  divisions,  due  provision  being  made  for 
their  proper  supply. 

4259.  Q.  If  an  army  is  not  organized  into  army  corps,  how  is 
the  artillery  commanded  ?  A.  A  superior  officer  of  artillery  will 
be  assigne^l  to  command  the  artillery  of  each  division.  He  shall 
also  act  as  chief  of  artillery  upon  the  staff  of  the  division  com- 
mander. 

4260.  Q.  How  is  the  organization,  distribution,  and  service  of 
the  engineers  arranged  ?  A.  On  the  same  general  principles  as 
the  artillery.  The  engineer-park,  with  the  reserve  pontoon-trains, 
and  two  or  more  regiments  of  engineer  troops,  will  be  under  the 
command  of  an  engineer  officer,  who  reports  to  and  receives  the 
orders  of  the  officer  commanding  the  engineers  of  the  army. 
When  circumstances  make  it  expedient,  either  on  the  march  or 
near  the  enemy,  engineer  troops  and  bridge  equipage  may  be  dis- 
tributed to  army  corps  or  to  divisions. 

4261.  Q.  If  the  army  is  not  organized  into  army  corps,  how 
will  the  distribution  of  the  engineers  be  made  ?  A.  A  superior 
officer  of  engineers  will  be  assigned  to  the  command  of  the  engi- 
neers of  each  division,  which  will  consist  of  one  or  more  battalions 
of  engineer  troops  and  the  necessary  bridge  equipage,  material, 
and  stores.  He  shall  also  act  as  chief  engineer  on  the  staff  of  the 
division  commander. 

4262.  From  whom  will  the  commander  of  artillery  and  engi- 
neers receive  orders,  and  what  are  they  prohibited  from  doing? 
A.  Commanders  of  artillery  and  engineers  receive  directly,  or 
through  the  chief  of  staff,  the  orders  of  the  general  officer  under 
whom  they  serve.  They  are  prohibited  from  communicating  to 
others  than  the  commanding  general,  or  the  general  officer  under 
whose  immediate  orders  they  serve,  any  information  as  to  the 
state  of  material  and  stores  under  their  charge,  or  as  to  plans  of 
position,  or  works  executed  or  to  be  executed  under  their  direc- 
tion. .„ 

4263.  Q.  What  is  required  of  an  officer  of  the  artillery,  engi- 
neers, or  of  the  staff,  charged  with  the  construction  of  works,  or 
with  the  direction  of  other  military  labors  to  be  performed  by 
troops?  A.  He  will  make  a  requisition  for  the  necessary  detail, 
specifying  the  number  of  men  required,  the  time  and  place  at 
which  they  will  assemble,  and  the  time  for  which  they  will  be 
required,  and  the  name  and  rank  of  the  officer  to  whom  they  will 


560  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIKER. 

report,  and  from  whom  they  are  to  receive  instructions.  This 
officer  will  direct  what  is  to  be  done,  how  it  is  to  be  done,  and 
will  see  that  it  is  done  correctly.  It  will  be  the  duty  of  all  officers 
commanding  working-parties,  whatever  may  be  their  rank,  to  see 
that  such  instructions  are  duly  followed. 

4264.  Q.  What  report  will  be  made  by  officers  of  engineers 
attached  to  headquarters  at  the  close  of  a  campaign  ?  A.  They 
will  report  their  operations  in  all  that  concerns  their  specialty  to 
the  headquarters  of  their  corps.  Those  having  commands  will 
also  submit  copies  of  the  reports  of  battles,  etc.,  rendered  to  the 
general  under  whom  they  serve,  together  with  such  special  reports 
as  may  be  necessary  or  useful  for  the  records  of  the  Engineer 
Bureau.  These  reports  will  embrace  plans  of  military  works 
erected,  and  in  case  of  siege  operations  the  journals  of  attack  and 
defence. 

THE  ADMINISTRATIVE  SERVICES. 

4265.  Q.  What  reports  will  the  chiefs  of  administrative  services 
render  at  the  close  of  a  campaign  ?  A.  They  will  render  reports 
to  their  respective  bureaus,  with  such  information  and  suggestions 
for  the  improvement  of  these  services  as  they  may  be  able  to 
furnish. 

GENERAL  POLICE. 

4266.  Q.  What  are  civilians  employed  with  the  army  required 
to  carry  with  them  ?  A.  Certificates  of  their  employment  from 
the  headquarters  employing  them. 

4267.  Q.  How  are  private  servants  with  an  army  to  be  clothed 
and  recognized  ?  A.  Private  servants  will  not  be  allowed  to  wear 
the  uniform  of  any  corps  of  the  army  ;  and  each  will  be  required 
to  carry  with  him  a  certificate  from  the  officer  who  employs  him, 
verified,  for  regimental  officers,  by  the  signature  of  the  colonel; 
or  other  officers  under  the  rank  of  colonel,  by  the  chief  of  their 
corps  or  department. 

4268.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  the  arms  and  accoutrements 
of  deserters  from  the  enemy  ?  A.  They  will  be  turned  over  to 
the  Ordnance  Department,  and  their  horses  and  other  public 
property  in  their  possession  to  the  Quartermaster's  Department. 
The  compensation  to  be  accorded  to  deserters  for  such  objects 
will  be  according  to  appraisement  made  under  the  direction  of 
that  department. 

4269.  Q.  How  may  deserters  from  the  enemy  be  enlisted  ?  A. 
The  enlistment  of  deserters  from  the  enemy,  without  express  per- 
mission from  general  headquarters,  is  prohibited. 

TENTS,  BAGGAGE,  AND  BAGGAGE- TRAINS, 

4270.  Q.  By  what  means  are  tents  supplied,  and  how  will  their 
use  be  regulated  ?    A.  Tents  are  supplied  \>j  the  Quartermaster's 


TEOOPS  11^  CAMPAIGIT.  561 

Department  on  requisitions  approved  by  commanding  generals. 
The  number  for  each  regiment,  for  general  and  staff  officers,  for 
hospitals,  etc.,  will  depend  to  a  great  extent  upon  the  season, 
climate,  and  nature  of  service.  They  may  be  dispensed  with,  if, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  general  commanding  in  chief,  it  becomes 
absolutely  necessary.  Hospital  tents  are  for  the  sick  and  wounded, 
and  must  not  be  diverted  from  their  proper  use. 

4271.  Q.  How  is  the  amount  of  baggage  to  be  carried  by  offi- 
cers regulated  ?  A.  The  commanding  general  of  an  army  will 
regulate  and  limit  the  amount  of  baggage  to  be  carried  by  each 
officer,  in  accordance  with  the  exigencies  of  the  service. 

4273.  Q.  Under  whose  charge  will  the  baggage-train  be,  and 
what  are  th^  rules  governing  such  trains  ?  A*  The  baggage-trains 
belonging  to-  headquarters,  and  to  the  headquarters  of  army 
corps  and  divisions,  will  be  in  charge  of  officers  of  the  Quarter- 
master's Department  attached  to  those  headquarters.  The  train 
of  each  regiment  will  be  under  the  control  of  the  regimental 
quartermaster.  When  the  several  trains  of  a  division,  corps,  or 
command  are  united,  the  senior  officer  of  the  Quartermaster's 
Department  present  shall  have  charge  of  the  whole.  Each  quar- 
termaster, with  his  assistants,  must  be  with  the  train.  He  will 
require  it  to  take  and  keep  its  appropriate  place  in  the  column, 
and  will  see  that  his  wagons  do  not  check  the  march  of  the  troops 
or  movements  of  trains  in  the  rear.  None  but  authorized  wagons 
are  allowed  to  move  with  the  train.  Those  of  the  several  head- 
quarters, the  regimental  wagons,  and  those  of  traders  will  bo 
conspicuously  marked. 

4273.  Q.  How  will  baggage-trains  not  under  convoy  be  guarded  ? 
A.  In  every  case  where  practicable,  generals  who  have  head- 
quarter guards  will  detach  sentinels  therefrom  to  protect  their 
baggage  during  the  night,  rather  than  cause  a  distinct  detail  to 
be  made  for  the  purpose.  The  trains  of  brigade  commanders 
will  join  with,  and  be  protected  in  march  by,  the  men  attached 
to  the  trains  of  the  regiments  in  their  respective  brigades.  The 
regimental  trains  will  be  guarded  in  march,  as  far  as  practicable, 
by  convalescents,  or  men  non-effective  in  the  ranks,  and  in  the 
cavalry  by  dismounted  men. 

4274.  Q.  When  are  trains  said  to  be  convoys  ?  A.  When  trains 
are  to  be  escorted  with  a  view  to  defense,  they  will  then  become 
convoys,  and,  in  such  cases,  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  same  will 
be  under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  escort. 

4275.  Q.  In  what  order  will  trains  move?  A.  In  the  order 
corresponding  with  the  position  in  the  column  of  march  of  the 
corps  to  which  they  belong.  The  general  supply-trains  of  the 
armv  will  have  a  place  especially  assigned  them. 

4276.  Q.  What  is  required  of  general  officers  regarding  unau- 
thorized transportation,  dismounting  of  troopers  or  use  of  public 
animals  for  private  vehicles  ?    A.  General  officers  will  not  permit 


562 

officers  of  their  commands,  nor  any  persons  whatsoever  attached 
thereto,  to  have  more  than  the  authorized  amount  of  transporta- 
tion ;  and,  to  properly  enforce  this  regulation,  they  will  make  or 
cause  to  be  made,  frequent  inspections  of  the  trains.  They  will 
not  permit  a  trooper  to  be  dismounted  that  an  officer  may  use  his 
horse,  nor  to  be  employed  to  lead  a  private  horse,  nor  allow  a 
soldier  to  drive  a*  private  vehicle.  They  will  not  permit  the 
wagons  of  the  artillery,  or  trains,  to  carry  anything  but  the  au- 
thorized articles,  nor  a  public  horse,  on  any  occasion,  to  be  har- 
nessed to  a  private  carriage. 

HEADQUARTERS,   DEPOTS,    ETC. 

4277.  Q.  "Where  should  a  general  officer  encamp  ?  A.  Near 
the  centre  of  his  command  on  the  main  line  of  communication. 
If  his  troops  bivouac  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  he  should 
bivouac  with  them. 

4278.  Q.  Where  are  the  general  depots  of  an  army  established  ? 
A.  At  points  that  are  not  threatened  by  military  operations. 
Minor  depots  are  established  at  convenient  points  for  the  tempo- 
rary supply  of  an  army  or  fractions  thereof,  where  also  may  be 
located  general  hospitals  and  convalescent  camps,  to  which  the 
disabled  are  sent  for  treatment,  and  from  which  those  fit  for  ser- 
vice may  be  forwarded.  They  may  also  be  made  points  for  the 
receipt  and  distribution  of  recruits  and  detachments. 

ISSUE  OF  RATIONS. 

4279.  Q.  How  and  for  what  time  will  rations  be  issued  ?  A. 
The  time  and  period  for  the  issue  of  rations  will  depend  on  cir- 
cumstances, and  will  be  regulated  in  orders.  When  a  command 
is  not  moving,  they  will  be  made  for  the  period  of  three  or  four 
days.  Issues  to  the  companies  of  a  regiment  will  be  superin- 
tended by  an  officer  detailed  for  that  purpose. 

INTRENCHED  POSTS. 

4280.  Q.  What  are  intrenched  posts,  and  by  whose  order  es- 
tablished ?  A.  An  intrenchment  that  requires  artillery  is  con- 
sidered a  post,  and  a  guard  or  garrison  and  commander  are 
assigned  to  it.  Posts  connected  with  the  operations  of  an  army 
are  established  only  by  the  order  of  the  general  commanding  the 
army. 

4281.  Q.  From  whom  does  the  commander  of  an  intrenched 
post  receive  his  orders,  and  what  are  the  duties  of  that  com- 
mander ?  A.  The  general  who  establishes  an  intrenched  post, 
gives  to  its  commander  detailed  instructions  in  regard  to  its  de- 
fense, and  the  circumstances  under  which  the  defense  should 


TEOOPS  IIT  CAMPAIGIS".  563 

cease.  The  commander  reconnoitres  his  post ;  distributes  the 
troops ;  posts  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers ;  forms 
a  reserve,  and  gives  orders  for  all  the  contingencies  which  he  can 
foresee.  Having  defended  his  post  to  the  last  extremity,  or  until 
the  purpose  of  the  defense  is  served,  he  may  then  disable  his  guns 
and  rejoin  the  army,  under  cover  of  night,  or  by  cutting  his  way 
through  the  enemy. 

CAMPS. 

4283.  Q.  Where  and  how  should  troops  encamp?  A.  In  the 
selection  of  camp-grounds  great  care  will  be  exercised  as  to  wood, 
water,  healthy  location,  and  the  roads  by  which  the  supplies  are 
to  reach .  them.  Troops  will  encamp  in  strict  military  order, 
ready  at  any  moment  to  form  in  order  of  battle  or  march.  The 
front  of  the  camp  should  be  on  or  near  the  line  of  battle,  and 
should  be  equal  to  the  front  of  the  command  when  deployed  in 
strong  battle  order.  Camps  near  the  enemy  should  be  covered 
by  light  intrench ments. 

MILITARY  EXERCISES. 

4283.  Q.  When  are  troops  in  campaign  required  to  have  mili- 
tary exercise  ?  A.  When  troops  remain  in  camps  or  cantonments 
many  days,  regimental  commanders  will  require  them  to  be  ex- 
ercised in  the  school  of  the  battalion.  They  will  not  be  exercised 
at  firing  without  the  authority  of  the  general  commanding  in 
chief.  The  practice  of  the  field-music  must  never  begin  with  the 
"general,"  the  "march,"  "boots  and  saddles,"  or  "to  arms." 
The  hour  for  practice  is  always  announced. 

Article  V. 

RECONNAISSANCES. 

4284.  Q.  By  whom  and  under  whose  orders  are  special  recon- 
naissances made?  A.  Under  the  instructions  of  the  general 
commanding,  and  by  such  officers,  and  with  such  force,  as  he 
may  direct.  . 

4285.  Q.  What  are  offensive  or  forced  reconnaissances  made 
for?  A.  They  are  to  ascertain  with  certainty,  points  in  the 
enemy's  position,  or  his  strength.  They  are  sometimes  preludes 
to  actions,  and  sometimes  only  demonstrations.  They  drive  m 
his  outposts,  and  may  engage  special  corps  of  his  line.  They  will 
only  be  made  by  order  of  the  general  commanding  m  chief,  or  by 
the  commander  of  an  isolated  corps. 

MILITARY  OCCUPATION,    CONTRIBUTIONS,    AND  REQUISITIONS. 

4286  Q.  What  is  the  extent  of  military  jurisdiction  in  the 
enemy's  country,  and  how  is  it  exercised?    A.  Under  the  laws 


564  THE  AKMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMINER. 

and  usages  of  war,  it  extends  to  property  and  persons  within  the 
territory  occupied  or  controlled  by  the  Army.  It  is  exercised  by 
commanding  generals,  under  the  instructions  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment. It  is  based  upon  military  necessity,  and  applies  those 
measures  that  are  indispensable  for  securing  the  objects  and 
ends  of  the  war,  and  for  the  protection  of  life  and  property  of 
non-combatants. 

4287.  Q.  What  do  the  laws  of  war  admit  of  ?  A.  The  laws  of 
war  admit  of  all  direct  destruction  of  armed  enemies,  and  other 
persons  whose  destruction  is  iticidentally  unavoidable  in  armed 
contests.  They  permit  the  capture  of  every  armed  enemy,  and  of 
every  enemy  of  importance  to  the  hostile  government  or  of  danger 
to  the  captor.  They  allow  the  destruction  of  property  ;  the  ob- 
struction of  the  ways  and  channels  of  traffic,  travel,  or  communi- 
cation ;  the  withholding  of  subsistence  or  means  of  life  from  the 
enemy,  and  the  appropriation  of  whatever  an  enemy's  country 
affords  necessary  for  the  subsistence  and  safety  of  the  army. 

4288.  Q.  In  what  manner  may  military  authority  affect  the 
laws  of  a  hostile  and  occupied  country  ?  A.  Military  authority 
may  suspend  the  execution  of  the  laws  of  the  hostile  and  occupied 
country.  It  may  suspend  or  change  the  relations  which  arise 
from  the  services  due,  according  to  the  existing  laws  of  the  in- 
vaded country,  from  one  citizen  or  subject  of  the  same  to  another. 
It  may  collect  and  appropriate  public  revenue  and  taxes,  and 
confiscate  public  property.  Unarmed  citizens  are  to  be  spared 
and  protected  in  their  persons  and  property,  in  so  far  as  the 
exigencies  of  war  will  admit,  and  they  will  be  as  little  disturbed 
in  their  private  rdations  as  possible. 

4289.  Q.  When  may  contributions  be  levied  on  an  enemy's 
country  ?  A.  When  the  needs  of  the  army  absolutely  require  it, 
and  in  other  cases,  under  special  instructions  from  the  War  De- 
partment, the  general  commanding  the  army  may  levy  contribu- 
tions, in  money  or  kind,  on  the  enemy's  country  occupied  by  the 
troops.  No  other  officer  can  levy  contributions,  except  under 
special  authority  from  the  War  Department. 

4290.  Q.  What  is  to  be  done  with  property  taken  from  the 
enemy's  country?  A.  All  property,  public  or  private,  lawfully 
taken  from  the  enemy,  or  from  the  inhabitants  of  an  enemy's 
country,  by  the  forces  of  the  United  States,  instantly  becomes 
the  public  property  of  the  United  States,  and  must  be  accounted 
for  as  such.  Property  captured  or  taken  by  way  of  requisition 
belongs  to  the  United  States,  and  cannot,  under  any  circum- 
stances, be  appropriated  to  individual  benefit. 

4291.  Q.  How  is  property  taken  from  Enemies  to  be  accounted 
for  ?  A.  Officers  will  be  held  strictly  responsible  that  all  prop- 
erty taken  from  alleged  enemies  by  them,  or  with  their  authority, 
is  inventoried  and  duly  accounted  for.  If  the  property  taken  can 
be  claimed  as  private,  receipts  must  be  given  to  the  claimants  or 


TROOPS  IK  CAMPAIGN.  665 

their  agents,  and  it  must  be  accounted  for  in  the  same  manner  as 
pubhc  property.  When  a  foraging  party  is  sent  out  for  provisions 
or  other  stores,  the  commanding  officer  will  be  held  accountable 
for  the  conduct  of  his  command,  and  that  a  true  report  is  made 
of  all  property  taken. 

4393.  Q.  How  may  officers  and  soldiers  render  themselves 
subject  to  a  death  penalty  in  taking  property  ?  A.  No  officer  or 
soldier  shall,  without  authority,  leave  his  colors  or  ranks  to  take 
private  property,  or  to  enter  a  private  house  for  that  purpose. 
All  such  acts  are  punishable  with  death,  and  any  officer  who  shall 
permit  them  will  be  equally  guilty  with  the  actual  pillager. 

4393.  Q.  In  the  purchase  of  horses  in  an  enemy's  country  what 
is  required  ?  A.  It  is  forbidden  to  purchase  horses  without  ascer- 
taining the  right  of  the  party  to  sell.  Stolen  horses  shall  be 
restored.  Estrays  in  the  enemy's  country,  when  the  owners  are 
not  discovered,  will  be  taken  for  the  Army. 

4394.  Can  an  officer  or  soldier  make  use  of  his  official  position 
in  an  enemy's  country  for  commercial  transactions?  A.  No; 
neither  officers  nor  soldiers  are  allowed  to  make  use  of  their  posi- 
tions or  power  in  the  enemy's  country  for  private  gain,  even  for 
commercial  transactions  otherwise  legitimate.  Offences  to  the 
contrary,  committed  by  commissioned  officers,  will  be  punished 
with  cashiering,  or  such  other  punishments  as  the  nature  of  the 
offence  may  require ;  if  by  soldiers,  they  shall  be  punished  ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  offence. 

4395.  What  are  the  penalties  against  wanton  violence  in  the 
enemy's  country?  A.  All  wanton  violence  committed  against 
persons  in  the  invaded  country  may  be  punished  with  the  death 
of  the  offender,  or  such  other  punishment  may  be  inflicted  as  may 
be  deemed  adequate  to  the  gravity  of  the  offence.  Any  officer  or 
enlisted  man  committing  such  violence,  and  disobeying  a  superior 
ordering  him  to  abstain  therefrom,  may  be  lawfully  killed  on  the 
spot  by  such  superior. 

SAFEGUARDS. 

4396.  What  are  safeguards  ?  A.  Safeguards  are  written  pro- 
tections, granted  to  persons  or  property,  by  the  commanding 
general  of  an  army  in  the  field.  They  are  usually  given  to  pro- 
tect hospitals,  museums,  establishments  of  religion,  charity,  or 
education,  mills,  post-offices,  and  other  institutions  of  public 
benefit ;  also  to  individuals  whom  it  may  be  to  the  interest  of  the 
Army  to  respect. 

4397.  What  is  the  form  of  a  safeguard  ?    A. 

FORM  OF  A  SAFEGUARD. 

By  order  of . 

A  safeguard  is  hereby  granted  to  (A.  B. ;  stating  precisely 

the  place,  nature,  and  description  of  the  person,  property,  or 


566  THE  ARMY   OFFICER*S   EXAMINER. 

buildings).  All  officers  and  soldiers  belonging  to  the  Army  of 
the  United  States  are  therefore  commanded  to  respect  this  safe- 
guard, and  to  afford,  if  necessary,  protection  to  (person,  family, 
or  property  of ,  as  the  case  may  be). 

Given  at  Headquarters  of  the day  of . 

A.  B. 

Major-General  Commanding  in  Chief. 

CD. 

Assistant  Adjutant- General. 

The  Act  of  February  13,  1862,  will  be  printed  or  written  across 
the  face  of  the  safeguard.  Safeguards  will  be  numbered  and 
registered. 

4298.  How  may  persons  know  that  property  is  under  the  pro- 
tection of  a  safeguard  ?  A.  A  safeguard  will  be  conspicuously 
posted  upon  the  property  which  it  is  intended  to  protect.  If  the 
commanding  general  deem  it  necessary,  a  suitable  escort  or  guard 
may  be  furnished  to  enforce  respect  to  its  terms.  Men  thus  fur- 
nislied  from  a  corps  and  left  in  rear  will  be  replaced  by  men  of 
the  corps  following  ;  or  they  may  be  withdrawn  when  the  country 
is  evacuated.  Should  they  have  orders  to  await  the  arrival  of 
the  enemy's  troops,  they  will  apply  to  the  commander  of  the  same 
for  safe  conduct  to  the  outposts. 


PRISONERS  OF  WAR. 

4299.  Q.  What  constitutes  a  prisoner  of  war,  and  what  classes 
of  persons  are  subject  to  be  held  as  such  ?  A.  A  prisoner  of  war 
is  a  person  who,  by  capture  or  surrender,  falls  into  the  hands  of 
the  enemy.  The  following  persons,  or  classes  of  persons,  are 
subject  to  capture  and  detention  as  prisoners  of  war  :  All  soldiers 
of  the  enemy  of  every  grade,  to  whatever  arm  of  the  service  they 
may  belong ;  all  individuals  who  take  part  in  a  rising  en  masse 
in  hostile  territory  ;  all  persons  attached  to  an  army  who  con- 
tribute to  its  efficiency,  and  promote  directly  the  object  of  the 
war ;  the  sovereign,  or  chief  executive  of  a  hostile  state  ;  members 
of  his  family ;  the  chief  officers  of  the  government ;  its  diplo- 
matic agents,  and  in  general  any  civil  officer  whose  services  are 
of  importance  to  the  enemy,  or  whose  detention  would  be  preju- 
dicial to  his  military  operations ;  citizens  who  are  authorized  to 
accompany  an  army  for  any  purpose,  as  sutlers,  traders,  or  cor- 
respondents of  newspapers. 

4300.  Q.  What  persons  are  not  entitled  to  the  right  of  prisoners 
of  war.  A.  Spies  ;  armed  prowlers,  by  whatever  name  they  may 
be  called,  who  lurk  in  the  vicinity  of  the  army  and  commit  acts 
of  hostility  without  the  authorization  of  their  government,  or  who 
carry  on  their  operations  in  violation  of  the  laws  of  war  ;  troops 
of  the  enemy  who  are  known  to  give  no  quarter  ;  deserters  from 


iTROOPS  IK  CAMPAIGN.  567 

the  military  service  of  the  United  States  who  have  voluntarily 
entered  the  service  of  the  enemy. 

4301.  Q.  What  consideration  should  be  shown  to  medical 
officers  and  hospital  people  generally  when  captured?  A.  The 
prmciple  being  recognized  that  the  medical  officers,  stewards, 
nurses,  attendants,  and  chaplains  should  not  be  held  as  prisoners 
of  war,  they  will  be  immediately  and  unconditionally  discharged, 
unless  the  enemy  has  previously  failed  to  take  like  action  in  like 


4302.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  prisoners  of  war  when  taken, 
and  how  will  they  be  accounted  for  ?  A.  Prisoners  of  war  will 
be  disarmed  and  sent  to  the  rear,  and  reported  as  soon  as  prac- 
ticable to'  the  general  headquarters.  Commanders  of  department 
or  armies  in  the  field  having  prisoners  of  war  in  their  possession 
will  require  full  descriptive  rolls  to  be  prepared,  showing  the 
rank,  regiment,  and  company  or  corps  of  each  prisoner  and  the 
time  and  place  of  his  capture.  These  rolls  will  be  forwarded 
without  delay  to  the  adjutant-general,  with  a  letter  of  transmit- 
tal, showing  what  disposition  has  been  made  of  the  prisoners, 
and  giving  any  other  information  that  may  be  usefuL  They 
should  be  signed  by  the  officer  taking  charge  of  the  prisoners  at 
the  time  they  are  captured. 

4303.  Q.  How  may  prisoners  of  war  be  sent  to  depots,  and 
what  must  be  furnished  in  their  cases  when  so  sent  ?  A.  Gen- 
erals commanding  departments  or  armies  in  the  field  may,  at 
their  discretion,  send  prisoners  of  war  to  the  general  depots,  fur- 
nishing them  with  proper  descriptive  rolls,  showing  in  each  case 
the  rank,  regiment,  and  company  or  corps,  and  place  and  date  of 
capture  ;  after  which  their  charge  of  them  will  cease. 

4304.  Q.  What  is  the  penalty  for  killing  or  wounding  an  enemy 
already  disabled  ?  A.  Whoever  intentionally  kills  or  wounds  an 
enemy  already  disabled,  or  who  orders  or  encourages  others  to  do 
80,  shall  suffer  death. 

4305.  Q.  How  are  prisoners  of  war  to  be  treated  ?  A.  Every 
prisoner  of  war  will  be  treated  with  the  consideration  due  his 
rank.  He  is  required  to  obey  the  necessary  orders  given  him, 
and  upon  being  duly  interrogated,  is  required  to  disclose  his 
name,  rank,  and  designation  in  the  military  service.  Wounded 
prisoners  are  to  be  treated  with  the  same  care  as  the  wounded  of 
the  army.  Every  prisoner  of  war  is  entitled  to  one  ration  per 
day,  regardless  of  rank  ;  other  allowances  to  them  will  depend  on 
conventions  with  the  enemy.  Prisoners'  horses,  arms,  and  other 
public  property  will  be  taken  up  and  accounted  for  as  captured 
property,  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  paragraph  38  of 
Army  Regulations. 

4306.  Q.  How  will  money  and  valuables  on  a  prisoner  of  war 
be  considered  ?  A.  Money  and  other  valuables  on  the  person  of  a 
prisoner,  such  as  watches  and  jewelry,  as  well  as  extra  clothmg, 


568  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIiq"ER. 

will  be  regarded  as  private  property.     The  appropriation  of  such 
property  is  considered  dishonorable  and  is  prohibited. 

4307.  Q.  What  is  the  regulation  concerning  ransoms  for  pris- 
oners of  war  ?  A.  A  prisoner  of  war,  being  a  public  enemy,  is 
the  prisoner  of  the  Government  and  not  of  the  captor.  No  ran- 
som can  be  paid  by  a  prisoner  of  war  to  his  individual  captor  or 
to  any  officer  in  command.  The  Government  alone  releases  cap- 
tives, according  to  rules  prescribed  by  itself. 

4308.  Q.  How  should  the  liberty  of  a  prisoner  of  war  be  re- 
strained ?  A.  Prisoners  of  war  are  subject  to  such  confinement 
or  restraint  as  may  be  deemed  necessary,  but  they  are  to  be 
subjected  to  no  other  intentional  suffering  or  indignity.  The 
confinement  of  a  prisoner  may  be  varied  during  his  captivity, 
according  to  the  demands  of  safety. 

4309.  Q.  What  is  done  with  prisoners  of  war  who  attempt  to 
escape,  who  are  recaptured  after  escaping,  or  who  form  plots  to 
escape  ?  A.  A  prisoner  of  war,  while  attempting  to  escape,  may 
be  shot ;  but  if  recaptured  neither  death  nor  any  other  punish- 
ment shall  be  inflicted  upon  him  simply  for  his  attempt  to  escape, 
which  the  laws  of  war  do  not  consider  a  crime.  More  rigorous 
methods  of  confinement  may  be  resorted  to  after  an  unsuccessful 
attempt.  If,  however,  a  conspiracy  be  discovered,  the  purpose 
of  which  is  a  united  or  general  escape  by  force,  the  conspirators 
may  be  severely  punished,  even  with  death.  Capital  punishment 
may  also  be  inflicted  upon  prisoners  of  war  who  have  plotted 
rebellion  against  the  capturing  authority,  whether  in  combination 
with  fellow-prisoners  or  other  persons. 

4310.  Q.  In  what  way  does  a  prisoner  of  war  remain  answer- 
able for  offences  committed  by  him  ?  A.  A  prisoner  of  war 
remains  answerable  for  offences  against  the  captor's  army  or 
people  committed  previous  to  his  capture,  and  for  which  he  has 
not  been  punished  by  his  own  government.  All  prisoners  of  war 
are  liable  to  the  infliction  of  retaliatory  measures,  if  such  are 
found  necessary. 

4311.  Q.  How  will  sick  and  wounded  prisoners  of  war  be  cared 
for  ?  A.  As  far  as  practicable,  they  will  be  collected  in  hospitals 
designated  by  the  surgeon-general  for  their  exclusive  use.  A 
suitable  guard  will  be  detailed  by  the  commander  of  the  depart- 
ment in  which  such  hospitals  are  situated.  The  commander  of 
the  guard  will  make  the  returns  and  reports  required  of  depot 
commanders.  Convalescent  prisoners  will  be  sent  to  permanent 
depots  as  often  as  may  be  convenient. 

THE  COMMISSARY-GENERAL  OF  PRISONERS. 

4312.  Q.  When  is  the  office  of  commissary-general  of  prisoners 
created,  and  what  duties  are  connected  with  it  ?  A.  In  time  of 
war  a  commissary-general  of  prisoners  will  be  announced,  and  all 


TEOOPS  IIT  CAMPAIGN-.  569 

commumcations  relating  to  prisoners  will  pass  through  him 
Depots  for  prisoners  will  be  designated  by  the  Secretary  of  War 
to  which  suitable  and  permanent  guards  will  be  assigned  the 
whole  to  be  under  the  orders  of  the  commissary-general  of  prison- 
ers. He  will  establish  regulations  for  issuing  clothing,  and  will 
direct  the  manner  in  which  funds  arising  from  the  saving  of 
rations  at  the  prison  hospitals  or  stations  shall  be  accounted  for 
and  disbursed,  to  provide  such  articles  as  he  may  deem  necessary 
for  the  welfare  of  the  prisoners.  He  is  authorized  to  grant 
paroles,  on  the  recommendation  of  the  medical  officer  attached 
to  the  prison,  in  cases  of  extreme  illness,  but  under  no  other  cir- 
cumstances. 

4313.  Q.  How  are  the  guards  for  depots  and  prison -stations 
detailed  ?  A.  If  not  otherwise  provided,  guards  for  depots  and, 
prison-stations  will  be  detailed  by  the  commander  of  the  depart- 
ment in  which  such  depots  are  situated  on  the  application  of  the 
commissary-general  of  prisoners.  Such  guards  will  not  be  relieved 
or  changed  without  informing  him  of  the  fact ;  but  all  returns 
and  reports  of  these  guards  will  l)e  made  to  the  department  com- 
manders, who  are  responsible  for  their  discipline,  as  in  the  case 
of  other  troops. 

4314.  Q.  What  reports  will  the  commanders  of  prison  depots 
make  to  the  commissary-general  of  prisoners  ?  A.  The  commis- 
sary-general of  prisoners  has  authority  to  call  for  such  reports 
from  officers  commanding  depots  of  prisoners  as  may  be  necessary 
for  the  proper  discharge  of  his  duties. 

4315.  Q.  What  kind  of  record  will  be  kept  of  prisoners,  and 
where  will  it  be  preserved  ?  A.  A  full  record  of  all  prisoners  of 
war  will  be  kept  in  the  office  of  the  commissary-general  of  pris- 
oners, in  suitable  books,  giving  the  name,  rank,  regiment,  and 
company  or  corps  of  each  military  prisoner,  and  the  residence  of 
each  civil  prisoner,  with  the  charges  against  him,  and  the  time 
and  place  of  his  capture  or  arrest.  Any  special  information  of 
importance  will  be  added  from  time  to  time  in  the  column  of 
remarks.  When  disposed  of  by  exchange,  parole,  or  release,  the 
fact  of  such  disposal,  the  authority  for  it,  and  the  date  will  be 
noted  on  the  record. 

PAROLE  AND  EXCHANGE  OF  PRISONERS. 

4316.  Q.  What  are  the  rules  relative  to  the  exchange  and  re- 
lease of  prisoners  of  war  ?  A.  The  exchange  of  prisoners,  and 
the  release  of  officers  on  parole,  depend  on  the  orders  of  the  War 
Department.  The  release  of  prisoners  of  war  by  exchange  is  the 
general  rule  ;  release  by  parole  is  the  exception.  The  exchange 
of  prisoners  is  made  under  a  cartel,  mutually  agreed  upon  by  the 
belligerents,  stating  at  what  times,  in  what  manner,  and  at  what 
rates  the  exchange  shall  be  made  and  the  prisoners  delivered. 


570  The  army  officer^s  examiner. 

4317.  Q.  Whence  must  a  declaration  of  exchange  emanate,  and 
in  what  way  are  commanders  charged  with  exchanges  restricted  ? 
A.  A  declaration  of  exchange  can  only  properly  emanate  from 
the  oflBce  of  the  adjutant-general.  Whenever  commanders  are 
authorized  to  make  exchanges,  their  authority  is  restricted  to  the 
delivery  of  prisoners  of  war  and  to  the  receipt  of  others  as  equiv- 
alents. They  will  furnish  the  commissary -general  of  prisoners 
with  lists  of  all  pei"sons  thus  received  and  delivered,  upon  the 
receipt  of  which  the  order  declaring  the  exchange  will  be  issued 
by  the  adjutant-general.  Such  lists  should  be  full  as  to  names, 
rank,  place  of  capture,  and  place  and  date  of  delivery. 

4318.  Q.  What  is  a  parole  ?  A.  The  parole  is  a  promise,  given 
by  an  individual  of  the  enemy,  by  which,  in  consideration  of 
certain  privileges  or  advantages,  he  pledges  his  honor  to  do,  or 
refrain  from  doing,  certain  acts.  The  pledge  of  the  parole  is  an 
individual  but  not  a  private  act. 

4319.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  paroles  on  the  battle-field 
and  in  capitulations  ?  A.  No  paroling  on  the  battle-field,  no  pa- 
roling of  entire  bodies  of  troops  after  a  battle,  and  no  dismissal 
of  large  numbers  of  prisoners  with  a  general  declaration  that  they 
are  paroled,  is  permitted.  In  capitulations  for  the  surrender  of 
fortified  places  the  commanding  officer  may,  in  case  of  urgent 
necessity,  agree  that  the  troops  under  his  command  shall  not 
fight  again  during  the  war,  unless  exchanged. 

4320.  Q.  When  paroles  are  given,  w^hat  must  there  be  an  ex- 
change of  ?  A.  When  paroles  are  given  and  received  there  must 
be  an  exchange  of  two  written  documents,  in  each  of  which  the 
conditions  of  the  parole  and  the  name  and  rank  of  the  paroled 
individual  are  accurately  and  truthfully  stated. 

4321.  Q.  What  persons  are  permitted  to  give  their  paroles  ?  A. 
Commissioned  officers  only  are  allowed  to  give  their  paroles  ;  and 
they  can  give  them  only  with  the  permission  of  their  superiors,  so 
long  as  a  superior  in  rank  is  within  reach. 

4322.  Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  an  enlisted  man  be 
paroled?  A.  An  enlisted  man  cannot  give  his  parole  except 
through  an  officer.  Paroles  not  given  through  an  officer  are  void, 
and  subject  the  individuals  giving  them  to  punishment.  The 
only  admissible  exception  is  where  individual  enlisted  men,  sepa- 
rated from  their  commands,  have  suffered  long  confinement  with- 
out the  possibility  of  being  paroled  through  an  officer. 

4323.  Q.  To  whom  does  the  parole  chiefly  apply  ?  A.  The 
parole  applies  chiefly  to  prisoners  of  war  whom  the  captor  allows 
to  return  to  their  country,  or  to  live  in  greater  freedom  within 
the  captor's  territory,  on  conditions  stated  in  the  parole. 

4324.  Q.  What  is  the  usual  pledge  given  in  the  parole  ?  What 
are  the  penalties  for  violation  of  it,  and  what  may  the  paroled 
individual  engage  in  ?  A.  Not  to  serve  during  an  existing  war, 
unless  exchanged.     This  pledge  refers  only  to  active  service  in 


THOOPS  IK  CAMPAIGK.  571 

the  field  against  the  paroling  belligerent  or  his  allies.  The 
breach  of  such  a  parole  can  be  punished  with  death.  The  pled<^e 
of  the  parole,  however,  does  not  refer  to  internal  services,  such 
as  i-ecruiting,  mustering,  or  drilling  recruits ;  fortifying  places 
not  besieged  ;  quelling  civil  disorder ;  fighting  against  belligerents 
m  no  way  connected  with  the  paroling  belligerents ;  or  to  any 
civil  or  diplomatic  service  upon  which  the  paroled  officer  may  be 
employed. 

4335.  Q.  What  must  be  done  if  the  Government  does  not  ap- 
prove of  the  parole  given  ?  The  officer  giving  it  must  return 
into  captivity.  Should  the  enemy  refuse  to  receive  him,  he  is 
absolved  from  all  obligation. 

4326.  Q.  What  declarations  are  made  by  governments  regard- 
ing paroles  ?  A.  A  belligerent  government  may  declare,  by  a 
general  order,  whether  it  will  allow  paroling,  or  on  what  con- 
ditions it  will  allow  it.  Such  orders  are  communicated  to  the 
enemy. 

4337.  Q.  Is  a  prisoner  of  war  compelled  to  parole  himself  ?  A. 
No  prisoner  of  war  can  be  forced,  by  the  hostile  government,  to 
parole  himself;  and  no  government  is  obliged  to  parole  prisoners 
of  war,  or  to  parole  all  captured  officers  if  it  paroles  any.  As  the 
pledge  of  the  parole  is  an  individual  act,  so  is  paroling,  on  the 
other  hand,  an  act  of  choice  on  the  part  of  the  belligerent. 

4328.  Q.  What  is  required  whenever  prisoners  of  war  are  re- 
leased on  parole  and  sent  through  the  lines  ?  A.  The  officer  who 
releases  them  will  immediately  send  descriptive  rolls  to  the  adju- 
tant-general, containing  an  exact  list  of  the  prisoners,  with  rank, 
regiment,  and  company,  date  and  place  of  capture,  and  parole. 
These  rolls  are  indispensable  in  effecting  exchanges  of  prisoners. 

4329.  Q.  Who  takes  charge  of  paroled  officers  and  men  of  the 
U.  S.  Army,  as  well  as  all  correspondence  relating  to  them  ?  A. 
The  commissary -general  of  prisoners. 

MARCHES. 

4330.  Q.  What  determines  the  order  of  march  of  an  army? 
A.  The  strength  of  the  army,  the  objects  to  be  accomplished,  the 
position  of  the  enemy,  and  the  number  of  available  road^,  the 
number  of  columns,  and  the  character  of  troops  of  which  each 
column  is  composed.  The  intervals  between  columns  should  be 
such  as  will  enable  them  to  readily  communicate  with  and  mutu- 
ally sustain  each  other,  and  to  reunite  with  facility  whenever, 
necessary. 

4331.  Q.  When  should  "the  general "  be  sounded,  and  what  is 
it  the  signal  for  ?  A.  One  hour  before  the  time  designated  for 
marching  is  the  signal  to  strike  tents,  load  wagons,  pack  animals, 
and  send  them  to  the  place  of  assembly. 

4333.  Q.  Of  what  troops  is  the  advance  and  rear  guard  formed  ? 


673 

What  should  be  their  strength  and  composition,  and  where  located 
in  the  march  ?  A.  The  advance  and  rear  guard  are  ordinarily 
formed  of  light  troops.  Their  strength  and  composition  in  dif- 
ferent arms  are  regulated  according  to  the  nature  of  the  country 
and  position  of  the  enemy.  The  entire  advance-guard  does  not 
always  precede  the  column  ;  most  of  it  may  be  deployed  to  cover 
a  flank  exposed  to  the  enemy's  attack.  The  deployed  men  will 
move  on  the  exposed  flank,  and  resist  any  demonstration  on  the 
part  of  the  enemy  as  best  they  can,  until  the  column  is  prepared 
to  meet  it. 

4333.  Q.  Where  will  the  pioneers  march  ?  A.  The  pioneers  of 
each  brigade  or  division  will  be  united  at  the  head  of  the  column, 
when  their  services  are  necessary  to  remove  obstacles  or  overcome 
difficulties  on  the  roads  to  be  traversed  by  the  troops. 

4334.  Q.  What  are  the  rules  governing  night  marches  ?  A. 
Night  marches  should  not  be  undertaken  except  for  urgent  rea- 
sons. When  made,  great  caution  should  be  exercised  to  prevent 
straggling.  Guides  will  be  posted  at  cross-roads,  or  at  localities 
where  the  proper  route  may  be  difficult  to  determine,  in  order  to 
point  out  the  direction  to  be  taken. 

4335.  Q.  Who-  designates  the  hour  for  marching,  and  what 
should  be  the  order  of  march  ?  A.  The  hour  of  march  for  each 
corps,  when  several  are  to  take  the  same  route,  will  be  regulated 
by  the  general-in-chief,  or  by  the  senior  general  present,  in  case 
the  former  has  not  given  his  orders  on  the  subject.  On  the 
march,  when  practicable,  the  battalions  of  a  brigade  will,  in  turn, 
have  the  advance,  the  battalion  leading  one  day  being  placed  in 
rear  upon  the  following  day.  Battalions  will  be  marched  by  the 
right  and  left  flanks  alternately,  so  that  the  head  of  a  battalion 
column  upon  one  day  will  become  its  rear  on  the  day  succeeding. 
The  led  horses  of  officers,  and  the  horses  of  dismounted  men, 
follow  their  regiments.  When  the  general  orders  the  field-train 
and  ambulances  to  take  places  in  the  column,  he  designates  the 
position  they  shall  take. 

4336.  Q.  How  often  should  a  column  halt,_  and  how  will  com- 
manders keep  posted  on  the  condition  of  their  commands  ?  A. 
The  column  will  halt  as  often  as  the  object  of  the  march  and  the 
distajice  to  be  traversed  will  permit.  Frequent  and  short  halts 
serve  the  purpose*of  resting  and  re-forming  the  troops,  enabling 
them  to  adjust  their  equipments  and  to  obey  the  calls  of  nature. 
Commanders  of  divisions,   brigades,   and   regiments  frequently 

•  send  officers  to  the  rear  to  see  that  the  troops  of  their  commands 
march  in  the  prescribed  order  and  keep  their  distances.  To 
quicken  the  march,  the  general  warns  the  colonels,  and  may 
direct  a  prescribed  signal  to  be  sounded,  which  will  be  repeated 
in  all  the  regiments. 

4337.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  on  firing  or  giving  sig- 
nals from  a  column  en  route  ?    A.  On  the  march,  no  one  shall 


TKOOPS  m  CAMPAIGiq-.  573 

fire  a  gun,  or  give  the  signal  for  the  halt  or  march,  unless  ordered 
to  do  so. 

4338.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  troops  be  assembled  ? 
A.  When  it  can  be  avoided,  troops  should  not  be  assembled  at 
places  where  they  will  impede  the  movements  of  other  troops.  A 
staff  officer  should  be  sent  by  the  division  commander  to  the  ap- 
pointed rendezvous  to  receive  them  as  they  arrive,  and  place  them 
in  their  proper  positions  in  order  of  battle,  or  of  march,  as  may 
be  contemplated.    • 

4339.  Q.  If  two  corps  advancing  in  opposite  directions  meet 
on  the  same  road,  what  is  done  ?  A.  Each  passes  to  the  right, 
unless  their^future  routes  require  otherwise,  and  both  continue 
the  march,  if  the  road  is  sufficiently  wide  ;  if  it  is  not,  the  first 
in  order  of  battle  takes  the  road,  and  the  other  halts. 

4340.  Q.  What  rule  must  be  enforced  with  regard  to  corps 
meeeing  at  cross-roads  ?  A.  A  corps  in  march  must  not  be  cut 
by  another.  If  the  corps  meet  at  cross-roads,  that  which  arrives 
last  halts  if  the  other  is  in  motion.  A  corps  in  march  passes  a 
corps  at  a  halt,  if  it  has  precedence  in  the  order  of  battle,  or  if 
the  halted  corps  is  not  ready  to  move  at  once. 

4341.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  a  column  that  halts  to  al- 
low another  to  pass  ?  A.  It  resumes  the  march  in  advance  of  the 
latter's  train.  If  a  column  must  pass  a  train,  the  train  halts,  if 
necessary,  until  the  column  passes.  The  column  that  has  pre- 
cedence must  yield  it,  if  its  commander,  on  seeing  the  orders  of 
the  others,  finds  that  the  interests  of  the  service  demand  it. 

4343.  Q.  What  should  be  provided  for  those  taken  sick  or  dis- 
abled on  the  march  ?  A.  A  wagon,  or  ambulance,  will  be  attached 
to  the  rear-guard  of  each  battalion,  when  practicable ;  and  a  sur- 
geon will  be  present  to  give  assistance,  and  to  see  that  no  im- 
proper persons  are  suffered  to  avail  themselves  of  the  transporta- 
tion. If  a  man  is  taken  sick,  the  company  commander  may  direct 
a  corporal  to  remain  with  and  report  him  to  the  surgeon. 

4343.  Q.  What  should  be  done  to  prevent  straggling  and  its 
attendant  evils  ?  A.  Commanding  officers  of  regiments  may  re- 
quire the  rolls  of  companies  to  be  called,  and  results  to  be  re- 
ported to  them,  after  the  troops  are  formed  for  and  before  com- 
mencing the  march. 

4344.  Q.  What  is  required  of  company  commanders  to  keep 
men  in  the  ranks  ?  A.  Captains  will  cause  an  officer  to  march  in 
the  rear  of  their  companies,  with  instructions  not  to  allow  any 
man  to  leave  the  ranks  without  written  permission,  and  without 
leaving  his  arms  and  equipments  with  his  company  if  his  absence 
is  to  be  of  short  duration. 

JOURNALS   OF  MARCHES,    MILITARY  MAPS. 

4345.  Q.  How  will  field-notes  and  sketches  of  routes  be  made  ? 
A.  The  commanding  officer  of  every  body  of  troops  ordered  to 


574  THE  AEMY  OFFICEE'S  EXAMIKER. 

march  will  select  a  competent  person,  preferably  a  commissioned 
officer,  to  whom  he  will  intrust  the  special  duty  of  making  the 
field-notes  and  sketches,  and  keeping  the  journals  requii;ed 
for  the  preparation  of  a  map  of  the  route  traversed.  The 
person  so  selected  will  be  relieved  of  so  much  of  his  routine  duties 
as  will  enable  him  to  give  due  attention  to  the  subject.  The  com- 
manding officer  will,  daily  or  more  frequently,  inspect  and  verify 
the  notes  and  journals. 

4346.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  officer  detailed  for  topographi- 
cal duty  with  a  column  regarding  journals  and  maps  ?  A.  A 
journal  will  be  kept  in  note-books,  issued  by  the  Engineer  Depart- 
ment for  that  purpose.  If  they  cannot  be  obtained,  it  will  be 
kept  in  books  made  of  sheets  folded  to  half  the  letter-paper  size. 
Note-books  will  be  freely  used,  and  to  guard  against  loss  of  valu- 
able data,  copies  will  be  made,  verified,  and  retained,  and  the 
originals  forwarded  to  Army  or  Department  Headquarters  at 
every  available  opportunity.  Whenever  a  sufficient  halt  is  made, 
a  map  of  the  route  up  to  that  point,  together  with  a  report  there- 
on, will  be  transmitted  in  the  same  manner.  When  passing  over 
known  routes,  the  notes  will  be  kept  with  the  same  care  as  upon 
routes  which  are  new. 

CONVOYS  AND  THEIR   ESCORTS. 

[This  subject  is  so  thoroughly  treated  under  ' '  Minor  Tactics  " 
that  questions  in  connection  therewith  would  be  superfluous.  If  it 
is  desired  to  ask  any  under  this  heading,  see  questions  from  3806 
to  3837.] 

MOVEMENT  OF  TROOPS  BY   RAIL  AND  WATER. 

4347.  Q.  When  troops  are  ordered  to  move  by  rail  or  water, 
what  will  the  commanding  officer  thereof  furnish  to  the  quarter- 
master, to  whom  application  is  made  for  the  necessary  transpor- 
tation ?  A.  (1)  An  exact  return  of  the  command,  showing  the 
number  of  officers,  enlisted  men,  and  animals,  and  weight  of 
baggage  to  be  transported.  (2)  A  copy  of  the  order  directing  the 
movement.  Sufficient  notice  will  be  given  in  every  case  to  enable 
the  Quartermaster's  Department  to  prepare  the  requisite  trans- 
portation. The  length  of  such  notice  will  depend  upon  the  ur- 
gency of  the  movement,  the  strength  of  the  command,  and  the 
amount  of  railway  or  water  transportation  available. 

4348.  Q.  When  moving  by  rail,  what  will  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  detachment  do  as  soon  as  transportation  is  provided  ? 
A.  It  will  be  carefully  inspected  by  the  commanding  officer  of  the 
detachment,  to  see  that  the  cars  are  in  proper  condition,  and 
sufficiently  supplied  with  fuel  and  water. 

4349.  Q.  In  the  transportation  of  organized  commands,  what 
regulations  will  be  observed  ?    A.  The  cars  will  be  assigned  to 


TROOPS  m   CAMPAIGIT.  575 

the  several  companies  by  tlie  commanding  officer,  who  will  cause 
to  be  marked,  with  chalk,  on  the  steps  of  each  passenger  car  and 
on  the  side  of  each  freight  or  stock  car,  the  designation  of  the 
company  or  detachment  to  which  it  is  assigned.  The  field-baggage 
will  be  loaded  by  details  from  the  several  companies,  under  the 
direction  of  the  quartermaster  of  the  detachment  or  command. 
The  rations,  forage,  and  a  sufficient  number  of  buckets  to  water 
the  animals  of  each  company  will  be  so  loaded  as  to  be  readily 
accessible.  Artillery  carriages,  army  wagons,  and  other  vehicles 
will  be  transported  on  platform  cars,  and  will  be  lashed,  if  need 
be,  to  keep  them  in  place. 

4350.  Q.  If  the  command  consists  of  cavalry  or  light  artillery, 
how  will  it  proceed  to  embark  by  rail  ?  A.  Each  company  will  form 
in  line  opposite  the  cars  that  its  animals  are  to  occupy,  where  it 
will  dismount,  and  unsaddle  or  unharness.  The  horses  will  be 
loaded  under  the  direction  of  the  company  commanders,  after 
which  the  horse  equipments  (each  set  secured  in  a  separate 
bundle),  and  the  harness  of  light  artillery  (inclosed  in  harness 
sacks,  each  marked  with  the  designation  of  the  horse,  team,  and 
carriage  to  which  it  belongs),  will  be  loaded  in  the  cars  set  apart 
for  that  purpose. 

4351.  Q.  'After  the  field-baggage  and  animals  have  been  loaded, 
how  will  the  men  be  put  on  board  ?  A.  The  companies  will  be 
formed  each  one  opposite  the  car  or  cars  it  is  to  occupy,  and  will 
enter  the  same  under  the  direction  of  its  company  officers.  Eachi 
soldier  will  retain  possession  of  his  arms  unless  arm-racks  have 
been  provided.  Equipments  and  accoutrements  will  be  placed 
under  the  seats.     Arms  will  never  be  placed  on  the  car  floors. 

4352.  Q.  What  is  required  of  company  and  detachment  com- 
manders en  route  by  rail  ?  A.  They  maintain  order  in  their 
commands  during  the  journey.  They  will  inspect  them  frequently 
and  will  not  allow  the  cars  to  be  damaged.  During  halts  the 
cars  will  if  practicable  be  thoroughly  policed,  and  water  and  fuel 
will  be  placed  on  board.  On  long  journeys  animals  will  be  un- 
loaded at  least  once  in  every  twenty-four  hours,  if  possible— ad- 
vantage being  taken  of  stock-yards,  at  convenient  points  on  the 
route,  and  particular  attention  will  be  paid  to  grooming  and 
feeding.  When  the  train  is  ready  to  proceed,  the  "  assembly  "  will 
be  sounded  and  the  troops  will  be  re-embarked. 

4353.  Q.  What  is  the  order  of  disembarkation  by  rail  ?  A.  At 
the  end  of  the  journey  the  troops  will  be  disembarked,  and  the 
animals  unloaded  under  the  direction  of  the  company  com- 
manders. The  baggage  will  be  unloaded  by  details  from  the  sev- 
eral companies  under  direction  of  the  quartermaster.  The  com- 
manding officer  will  then  cause  the  cars  to  be  inspected.  If  it  is 
found  that  they  have  been  damaged  by  the  troops,  he  will  call  a 
board  of  survey  to  investigate  the  circumstances  ;  to  ascertain 
the  amount  of  damage,  and  to  report  the  party  or  parties  respon- 


576  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

sible  for  it,  against  whom  he  will  proceed  as  contemplated  in  the 
fifty- fourth  Article  of  War, 

4354.  Q.  What  will  military  commanders  charged  with  the 
embarkation  of  troops,  and  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's  De- 
partment intrusted  with  the  selection  of  transports  see  to  particu- 
larly ?  A.  They  will  see  that  the  vessels  employed  are  entirely 
seaworthy  and  proper  for  such  service,  and  that  suitable  arrange- 
ments are  made  in  them  for  the  health  and  comfort  of  the  troops. 

4355.  Q.  If,  in  the  opinion  of  the  officer  commanding  the 
troops  to  be  embarked,  the  vessel  is  not  proper  or  suitably  ar- 
ranged, what  will  be  done?  A.  The  officer  charged  with  the 
embarkation  shall  cause  her  to  be  inspected  by  competent  and 
experienced  persons. 

4356.  Q.  In  inspecting  water  transportation  for  troops,  how  must 
the  inspector  be  governed  ?  A.  By  circumstances  and  necessities, 
but  not  to  the  extent  of  endangering  life.  Ordinarily,  and  es- 
pecially in  voyages  of  any  length,  vessels  that  would  furnish 
reasonable  comfort  to  passengers  must  be  provided.  If  there  be 
anything  to  indicate  necessity  for  a  critical  inspection,  the  ser- 
vices of  an  expert  will  be  employed. 

4357.  Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  inspector  of  water  transporta- 
tion ?  A.  The  inspector  will  call  for  the  written  contract,  if  there 
be  one,  and  see  that  its  stipulations  are  complied  with.  He  will 
report  whether  the  vessel  is  adapted  to  the  purpose  and  voyage 
designed,  or  in  what  particular,  if  any,  she  may  be  defective,  and 
whether  any  repairs  or  alterations  are  necessary  before  sailing. 
He  will  ascertain  how  the  vessel  is  rated  at  the  underwriters,  the 
apparent  age  of  the  hull  and  machinery,  and  their  existing  con- 
dition. He  will  inquire  when  the  vessel  was  last  in  dock,  the 
condition  of  the  engines  and  boilers,  and  ascertain  when  they 
were  put  in.  He  will  examine  whether  the  pumping  machinery 
outfit  of  tackle,  spare  spars,  etc.,  are  sufficient ;  whether  there  is 
an  ample  provision  of  boats,  life-buoys,  and  spare  parts  of 
machinery,  and  whether  there  is  sufficient  deck-room  for  quarters 
for  officers  and  enlisted  men,  and  will  see  that  the  limit  of  ton- 
nage and  passengers  prescribed  by  law  is  not  exceeded.  He  will 
see  that  the  vessel's  crew  is  large  enough  for  her  proper  working, 
and  inquire  into  the  competency  of  the  officers  ;  he  will  see  that 
the  proper  instruments  of  navigation,  compasses,  etc. ,  are  pro- 
vided. He  will  report  if  the  chronometers  have  been  rated,  and 
if  there  is  a  supply  of  charts.  The  distilling  apparatus,  water- 
tanks,  and  butts  will  be  examined  to  see  if  there  is  sufficient  water 
for  passengers  and  crew.  He  will  especially  inspect  the  cooking 
arrangements,  see  that  the  vessel  is  clean,  and  that  the  portion 
occupied  by  troops  is  dry  and  well  ventilated. 

4358.  Q.  What  is  required  to  secure  and  preserve  discipline, 
provide  against  disaster  from  the  elements,  or  attack  by  the  en- 
emy on  a  transport  vessel  ?    A.  The  senior  officer  in  the  military 


TROOPS  m   CAMPAIGN.  577 

service,  present  upon  any  transport,  will  assume  command  of 
the  troops  (unless  he  finds,  on  going  on  board,  a  commander  al- 
ready designated  by  proper  authority),  and  he  will  take  all  neces- 
sary pleasures  to  put  his  command  into  the  best  state  of  efficiency 
to  meet  any  emergency,  and  will  enforce  an  observance  of  the 
requirements  of  the  Army  Kegulations. 

4359.  Q.  What  will  be  done  immediately  after  troops  have  em- 
barlied  ?  A.  At  the  earliest  moment  after  the  embarkation,  the 
troops  will  be  inspected,  organized  into  detachments  or  companies, 
officers  and  quarters  being  assigned  to  each  organization.  So  far 
as  practicable  the  men  of  each  company  will  be  assigned  to  the 
same  part  of  the  vessel,  and  squads  to  contiguous  berths. 

4360.  Q.  What  will  be  don^  with  the  arms  and  ammunition  of 
troops  embarked  on  a  transport  ?  A.  Arms  will  be  so  placed,  if 
there  be  no  racks,  as  to  be  secure  from  injury,  and  enable  the 
men  to  reach  them  promptly.  Ammunition  and  cartridge  boxes 
will  be  secured  from  fire;  reserve  ammunition  to  be  reported  to 
the  master  of  the  transport,  with  request  that  he  designate  a  safe 
place  of  deposit. 

4361.  Q.  How  is  the  guard  duty  on  shipboard  arranged? 
A.  The  guard  will  be  proportioned  according  to  the  number  of 
sentinels  required.  At  sea  the  guards  will  mount  with  side-arms 
only.  Sentinels  will  be  kept  near  the  fires,  with  buckets  of  water 
at  hand,  promptly  to  extinguish  them  if  necessary. 

4362.  Q.  What  are  the  rules  with  regard  to  lights  and  smok- 
ing ?  A.  Smoking  will  not  be  allowed  between  decks  or  in  the 
cabins;  nor  shall  lights  be  permitted  between  decks,  except  such 
ship-lanterns  as  the  master  of  the  transport  may  direct,  or  those 
carried  by  the  officer  of  the  guard  in  the  execution  of  his  duty. 

4363.  Q.  What  will  be  done  with  regard -to  calling  troops  to 
quarters  in  the  event  of  alarms?  A.  The  commanding  offi- 
cer will  make  arrangements  in  concert  with  the  master  of 
the  vessel  for  calling  the  troops  to  quarters,  so  that  in  case  of 
alarm  on  account  of  storm  or  fire,  or  the  approach  of  an  enemy, 
every  man  may  repair  promptly  to  his  station  ;  but  he  will  take 
care  not  to  crowd  the  deck.  The  troops  not  required  at  the  guns 
or  to  assist  the  sailors,  and  those  who  cannot  be  advantageously 
employed  with  small  arms,  will  be  formed  as  a  reserve  between- 

4364  Q.  When  and  how  will  troops  be  inspected  on  transports? 
A  All'  the  troops  will  turn  out  for  inspection  at  a  prescribed 
hour  in  the  morning  without  arms  (in  warm  weather  without 
shoes  or  stockings),  when  every  individual  wi  1  be  clean-his 
hands,  face,  and  feet  washed  and  his  hair  combed.  The  same 
personal  inspection  will  be  repeated  thirty  minutes  before  sunset, 
fhe  cooks  may  be  exempted  from  one  of  these  daily  inspections 

if  necessarv  ^  a 

4365.  Q.  How  will  cleanliness  be  preserved  on  transports? 


578  THE  AEMT   OFFICER'S   EXAMIiq^ER. 

A.  Officers  will  enforce  cleanliness.  The  weather  permitting, 
bedding  will  be  brought  on  deck  every  morning  for  airing.  la 
harbor,  where  there  is  no  danger  from  sharks,  the  men  may  bathe, 
but  not  more  than  ten  at  a  time,  and  attended  by  a  boat. 

4366.  Q.  How  often  will  between-decks  be  washed  ?  A.  Be- 
tween-decks  will  not  be  washed  oftener  than  once  a  week,  and 
only  when  the  weather  is  fine.  The  boards  of  the  lower  berth 
will  be  removed  once  or  twice  a  week  to  remove  the  straw.  Un- 
der the  direction  of  the  surgeon  and  the  officer  of  the  day,  fre- 
quent fumigations  will  be  performed  between-decks. 

4367.  Q. 'What  is  required  with  regard  to  wind-sails  on  a 
transport  ?  A.  During  voyages  in  hot  weather  the  master  of  the 
vessel  will  be  required  to  provide  n\^ind-sails,  which  will  be  con- 
stantly hung  up,  and  frequently  examined,  to  see  that  they  draw 
well  and  are  not  obstructed. 

4368.  Q.  What  is  required  regarding  the  preparation  of  food 
for  troops  on  transports  ?  A.  During  cooking-hours  officers  of 
companies  visit  the  caboose,  and  see  that  the  food  is  properly  pre- 
pared. The  coppers  and  other  cooking-utensils  are  to  be  regularly 
washed,  both  before  and  after  use,  and  frequently  scoured. 

4369.  Q.  When  will  bedding  be  replaced  in  births  and  what  is 
required  regarding  the  men  turning  in  ?  A.  The  bedding  will  be 
replaced  in  the  berths  at  sunset,  or  at  an  earlier  hour  when  there 
is  prospect  of  bad  weather.  At  taps  every  man  not  on  duty  will , 
be  in  his  berth.  To  insure  the  execution  of  this  regulation,  the 
officer  of  the  day  will  inspect  between-decks. 

4370.  Q.  What  is  the  officer  of  'the  day  charged  with  regarding 
lights  on  a  transport  ?  A.  Lights  will  be  extinguished  at  tattoo, 
except  such  as  are  placed  under  sentinels.  The  officer  of  the  day 
will  attend  to  this*  requirement,  and  report  to  the  commanding 
officer.  Officer's  lights  will  be  extinguished  at  10  o'clock,  unless 
special  permission  be  given  to  continue  them  for  a  longer  time. 

4371.  Q.  What  exercise  will  be  given  to  troops  on  transports  ? 
A.  The  troops  will  occasionally  be  called  to  quarters  by  the  beat 
"  to  arms."  Those  appointed  to  the  guns  will  be  frequently  ex- 
ercised in  their  use.  The  arms  and  accoutrements  will  be  fre- 
quently inspected.  The  metallic  parts  of  the  former  will  be  often 
wiped  and  oiled.  They  will  be  encouraged,  and  required,  to  take 
exercise  on  deck  in  squads,  by  succession  when  necessary.  Re- 
cruits, and  all  enlisted  men  requiring  it,  will  be  frequently  drilled 
in  the  manual  of  arms. 

4373.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  medical  officers  on  transports 
with  troops  ?  At  morning  and  evening  parades  the  surgeon  will 
examine  the  men,  to  observe  whether  they  exhibit  any  indications 
of  disease.  The  sick  will,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  separated  from 
the  well.  On  the  first  appearance  of  malignant  contagion  a  sig- 
nal will  be  made  for  the  hospital  vessel  (if  there  be  one  in  the 
pompany),  and  the  sick  removed  to  her.    A  good  supply  of  hos- 


TROOPS  m  CAMPAIGl^.  .579 

pital  stores  and  medicines  will  be  taken  on  each  vessel,  and  used 
only  for  the  sick  and  convalescent.  The  surgeon  will  warn  the 
men  against  costiveness  on  approaching  a  hot  climate  In  pass- 
ing the  West  Indies  to  the  southern  coast,  for  instance,  and  for 
some  weeks  after  landing  in  that  latitude,  great  care  is  required 
in  the  use  of  fruit,  as  strangers  are  not  competent  to  judge  of  its 
effects,  and  most  kinds  after  long  voyages  are  injurious. 

4373.  Q.  What  will  the  commanding  officer,  on  arriving  in  sight 
of  port,  require?  A.  Written  reports  of  the  voyage  from  the 
senior  officer  of  each  staff  department  on  board.  These  reports 
he  will  transmit,  with  his  own,  through  the  proper  channel  to  the 
Adjutant-(^eneral.  The  reports  should  give  any  facts  of  interest 
relating  to  the  accommodation  and  health  of  the  troops,  the  manner 
in  which  the  officers  and  crew  of  the  transport  have  performed 
their  duties,  the  length  of  the  voyage,  and  any  observations  which 
may  enable  the  War  Department  to  detect  and  correct  abuses  and 
punish  neglect. 

4374.  Q.  How  should  stores  be  shipped  to  accompany  a  mili- 
tary expedition  ?  A.  In  loading  vessels  with  subsistence  supplies 
or  other  stores  for  a  military  expedition  the  cargo  of  each  should 
be  composed  as  far  as  practicable  of  a  full  assortment  of  such 
iimmunitiou,  supplies,  and  stores  as  may  be  needed  by  the  troops 
upon  arrival,  that  they  may  be  used  at  once  in  case  of  necessity- 
should  other  storeships  be  delayed  or  lost.  Stores  or  supplies 
should  be  placed  on  board  so  that  they  may  be  readily  reached 
in  the  order  in  which  they  may  be  required.  Every  storeship 
should  be  marked  at  the  bow  and  stern  and  on  both  sides  in 
large  characters,  with  a  distinctive  letter  and  number.  A  list  of 
the  stores  on  each  vessel,  with  the  place  they  are  to  be  found, 
should  be  prepared  and  a  copy  sent  to  the  chief  officer  of  the 
proper  department,  whether  he  accompanies  the  expedition  or  is 
at  the  place  for  which  the  stores  are  destined. 

4375.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  the  quartering  and  mess- 
ing when  officers  of  the  Army  are  embarked  with  troops  in  h 
ship  in  charge  of  officers  of  the  Navy?  A.  The  latter  will 
occupy  the  apartments  allotted  to  them,  arid  separate  accoitt- 
modation  will  be  provided  for  officers  of  the  Army  and  those 
under  their  command.  The  officers  of  the  Army  will  mess  to- 
gether and  not  with  the  officers  of  the  Navy,  unless  otherwise 
agreed  upon  with  the  sanction  of  the  commanding  officers  of  tlie 
vessel  and  troops. 

4376.  Q.  To  what  laws  will  troops  be  subject  when  embarked 
in  any  vessel  of  the  Navy  ?  A.  Any  part  of  the  Army,  volun- 
teers or  militia,  embarked  in  any  vessel  of  the  Navy  for  duty 
therein  shall,  until  detached,  be  subject  to  the  laws  for  the 
government  of  the  Navy,  and  the  regulations  of  the  vessel,  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  marines.  Any  part  of  the  Army,  volun- 
teers, or  militia,  embarked  on  a  vessel  of  the  Navy  for  transpor- 


580 

tation  only,  shall  not  be  subject  to  the  laws  and  regulations  of 
the  Navy,  but  f o  the  laws  for  the  government  of  the  Army ;  but 
shall,  nevertheless,  be  subject  and  conform  to  the  regulations  of 
the  vessel,  upon  pain  of  confinement  by  its  commanding  officer 
while  on  board,  and  of  such  punishment  as  an  Army  court-mar- 
tial shall  direct  after  landing. 

4377.  Q.  What  are  the  rules  governing  Army  courts-martial  or 
punishments  on  vessels  of  the  Navy  ?  No  Army  court-martial 
shall  be  held  on  board  any  vessel  of  the  Navy,  when  in  commis- 
sion; nor  shall  army,  volunteer,  or  militia  officers  order  any  pub- 
lic punishment,  or  confinement  in  irons  to  be  inflicted  on  board 
without  in  every  case  the  previous  approval  of  her  commanding 
officer. 

TRANSPORTATION  OF   HORSES. 

4378.  Q.  What  is  of  primary  importance  on  board  of  trans- 
ports for  horses,  and  how  provided  for?  A.  Ventilation  is  of 
primary  importance,  the  safety  and  condition  of  the  horses 
mainly  depending  upon  their  having  plenty  of  fresh  air.  Large 
air-ports  or  scuttles  are  indispensable,  and  wind-sails  down 
every  hatch,  to  each  deck,  will  be  insisted  upon.  If  time  per- 
mits, fixed  air-shafts  should  be  provided  for  each  deck.  The 
ventilation  of  steamers  may  be  assisted  by  using  the  donkey- 
engines  for  this  purpose. 

4379.  Q.  How  should  horses  be  provided  with  stalls  on  a 
transport  ?  A.  Stalls  are  preferable  between-decks  ;  never,  if  it 
can  be  avoided,  in  the  hold.  Should  horses  be  put  on  the  spar- 
deck,  nothing  will  be  stowed  on  the  stall-sheds.  Stalls  should  be 
about  six  and  one  half  feet  long,  and  twenty-eight  inches  wide  ; 
tail-boards  fastened  to  the  rear-posts,  and  padded  as  low  as  the 
hock  ;  breast-boards  and  side-boards  fitted  in  grooves  about  four 
feet  from  the  floor,  the  first  padded  on  the  inner  side  and  upper 
edge,  the  latter  on  both  sides;  the  floors  of  the  stalls  set  on  blocks, 
that  the  water  may  pass  under  them ;  four  slats  across  each 
floor  to  give  the  horses  foothold.  Troughs  should  be  made  to 
hang  with  hooks,  so  as  to  be  easily  removed.  Before  the  em- 
barkation the  side-boards  will  be  removed,  and  replaced  as  each 
horse  is  put  in  his  stall. 

4380.  Q.  How  should  horses  be  embarked  on  a  transport  ?  A. 
In  embarking  horses  from  the  wharf  they  are  slung  ;  or,  if  the 
height  of  the  vessel's  sides  permit,  they  are  led  by  ramps  to  the 
deck,  and  then  lowered.  If  the  transport  cannot  lie  at  a  wharf, 
the  horses  are  brought  alongside  in  lighters  and  transferred  by 
slings.  In  hoisting  horses  on  board  the  slings  are  made  fast  to  a 
hook  at  the  end  of  the  fall,  or  the  knot  is  tied  by  an  expert  sea- 
man, so  that  it  will  be  well  secured  and  easily  loosed.  Each 
horse  is  run  up  quickly  to  prevent  him  from  plunging,  his  ascent 
and  descent  being  regulated  by  two  guys  attached  to  the  halter— 


TROOPS  m  CAMPAIGN".  581 

one  held  on  the  wharf  or  lighter,  and  the  other  on  the  transport. 
A  portable  stall  may  also  be  employed,  into  which  a  horse  may 
be  led  ;  the  stall  is  then  hoisted  by  a  donkey-engine.  Horses 
will  not  be  put  on  board  after  severe  exercise  nor  unless  perfectlv 
cool .  ^  "^ 

4381.  Q.  How  will  horses  be  cared  for  regarding  their  health 
on  transports  ?  A.  Horses  must  not  be  overfed,  and  bran  should 
form  part  of  their  diet.  At  the  usual  hour  for  stable  duty  the 
eyes  and  nostrils  of  each  horse  should  be  wiped  with  a  wet  rag. 
Occasionally  the  nostrils  will  be  sponged  with  vinegar  and  water 
and  the  troughs  washed.  Should  any  contagious  disease  appear, 
the  animal  attacked  will  be  promptly  killed  and  thrown  overboard, 
and  precautions  against  infection  taken. 

GRAND  GUARD  AND  OUTPOSTS. 

[This  subject  being  treated  of  under  *  *  Minor  Tactics, "  qnestiona 
are  omitted  here.  Q.  and  A.,  however,  will  be  found  from  Noa. 
3368  to  3510.] 

SIEGES. 

4382.  Q.  Who  is  the  director  of  a  siege  ?  A.  The  commanding 
general  ;  or  he  may  select  a  general  officer  as  "Director  of  the 
Siege,"  wiio,  under  the  instructions  of  the  commanding  general, 
shall  have  immediate  charge  of  all  the  siege  operations. 

4383.  Q.  What  constitutes  the  preliminaries  to  a  siege  ?  A. 
The  commandants  of  engineers  and  artillery  accompany  the  first 
troops  before  the  place  to  examine  the  works  and  approaches. 
When  the  engineers  have  completed  the  reconnaissance  of  the 
works  and  of  each  front  as  far  as  practicable,  the  commander  of 
engineers  makes  as  exact  and  detailed  a  plan  thereof  as  possible^ 
and,  under  the  instructions  of  the  general  commanding,  draws  up 
the  general  plan  of  the  siege,  and  discusses  it  with  the  command- 
ant of  artillery  in  regard  to  the  best  employment  of  that  arm. 
These  officers  then  submit  their  joint  or  separate  opinions  to  the 
general,  who  decides  on  the  plan  of  the  siege,  and  give  the  ordera 
for  its  execution.  The  commandant  of  the  engineers  directs  the 
construction  of  all  the  siege-works,  under  the  authority  of  the 
general,  and  lays  before  him  every  day  a  report  of  operations 
and  a  plan  showing  the  progress  of  the  attack.  The  commander 
of  artillery  makes  daily  reports  to  the  general  of  all  that  relates 
to  his  branch  of  the  service. 

4384.  Q.  How  are  the  troops  encamped  during  a  siege  ?  A. 
The  divisions,  brigades,  regiments,  and  battalions  are  encamped,, 
during  the  siege,  in  the  order  of  battle,  or  in  such  formation  as 
the  commanding  general  may  prescribe. 

4385.  Q.  What  officers  serve  as  general  of  the  trenches,  and 
what  are  their  duties  ?     A.  The  brigade  commanders  serve,  in 


582:  THE  ARMY   O^I'ICER^S  EXAMINER. 

turn,  as  general  of  the  trenches— one  or  more  being  detailed 
daily,  according  to  the  front  and  number  of  attacks ;  they  super- 
intend the  operations,  and  dispose  the  guards  of  the  trenches  to 
repulse  sorties  and  protect  the  works. 

4386.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  colonels  and  lieutenant- 
colonels  of  infantry  during  a  siege?  A.  In  each  division  the 
colonels  and  lieutenant-colonels  of  infantry  alternate  for  duty  in 
the  trenches ;  one  or  more  are  detailed  daily ;  they  superintend 
the  service  of  guards  and  workmen  in  the  part  of  the  work  to 
which  the  general  of  the  trenches  assigns  them,  being  posted  with 
troops  of  their  own  regiments  in  preference.  The  commander  of 
the  siege  may  place  the  colonels  on  the  roster  with  the  brigadier- 
generals. 

4387.  Q.  Can  the  cavalry  be  employed  in  the  trenches  ?  A. 
The  cavalry  is  employed  in  outpost  service ;  in  detachments 
placed  in  observation  to  protect  the  siege,  and  in  escort  to  con- 
voys. When  these  duties  are  not  suflBcient  to  employ  them  they 
take  their  share  of  duty  in  the  trenches. 

4388.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  commanders  of  divisions 
during  a  siege?  A.  The  commanding  general  of  each  division 
appoints  a  field-officer  of  the  trenches,  who  is  aided  by  one  or 
two  subordinate  officers.  He  is  charged  with  all  the  details  rel- 
ative to  the  assembling  of  guards  and  workmen.  He  distributes 
the  guards  on  the  different  points  of  the  attack  agreeably  to  the 
orders  of  the  general  of  the  trenches,  and  forms  the  detachments 
of  workmen  for  the  engineer  and  artillery  ;  that  he  may  be  pre- 
pared for  this  distribution,  he  receives  every  day  from  the  ad- 
jutant-general a  statement  of  details  for  the  next  day. 

4389.  Q.  What  is  done  on  the  arrival  of  the  general  of  the 
trenches  ?  The  field-officer  of  the  trenches  gives  him  all  the  in- 
formation necessary  to  enable  him  to  station  the  troops  ;  attends 
him  in  his  visit  to  the  trenches,  and  takes  his  orders  on  the 
changes  to  be  made  in  the  position  of  troops.  The  execution  is 
intrusted  to  the  commanders  of  the  troops.  One  or  more  com- 
panies of  the  guards  of  the  trenches  are  put  under  his  immediate 
orders  for  the  preservation  of  order  and  police. 

4390.  Q.  What  kind  of  trench-service  does  the  infantry  per- 
form ?  A.  The  infantry  has  two  kinds  of  siege-service — the 
guard  of  the  trenches  and  the  work  of  the  trenches. 

4391.  Q.  How  are  the  guards  of  the  trenches  detailed  and 
mounted  ?  A.  The  guards  of  the  trenches  mount  every  day,  by 
battalions,  in  such  order  of  detail  that  all  the  troops  may  take  an 
equal  share,  and  no  part  of  the  line  be  left  too  weak.  Battalions 
of  the  same  division  are  not  taken  from  the  same  brigade. 

4392.  Q.  What  other  details  are  furnished  by  troops  who  guard 
and  work  in  the  trenches  ?  A.  The  battalions  first  for  detail  for 
^uard  of  the  trenches,  and  the  companies  first  for  detail  for  work 
in  the  trenches,  furnish  no  other  details,  but  are  held  in  reserve. 


TROOPS  IK  CAMPAIGN.  583 

dei!u%  ?'  T^rV^^^'n^^^'^  H^^P'  ^^" ^"^^^  ^°  *h«  trenches  be 
detailed?  A.  The  battalions  for  guard  are  detailed  at  least 
twelve  hours  111  advance ;  they  furnish  no  other  details  during 
their  tour.  If  a  whole  regiment  be  detailed,  it  leaves  a  sufficient 
police-guard  in  camp.  "iv.iv.iil 

4394.  Q  What  restrictions  are  placed  upon  the  detail  of  work- 
men for  the  trenches  ?  A.  For  twenty-four  hours  before  mount- 
ing guard  in  trenches,  the  battalions  detailed  for  guard  do  not 
turnish  workmen  and  the  companies  of  those  battalions  whose 
tour  It  would  have  been  to  work  in  the  trenches  do  not  work 
for  twenty-four  hours  after  guard. 

4395.  Q.  What  is  the  method  of  obtaining  workmen  for  the 
trenches  ?  A.  The  chiefs  of  engineers  and  artillery  make  requi- 
sitions for  workmen  in  advance,  that  details  may  be  made  in 
time  to  prevent  delay.  They  should  exceed  the  exact  number 
required,  that  there  may  be  a  reserve  for  unforeseen  wants. 

4396.  Q.  How  is  the  detail  for  work  in  the  trenches  made  ?  A. 
The  detail  for  work  in  the  trenches  is  by  company,  from  all  the 
regiments  at  one  time,  or  in  turns  ;  it  continues  generally  twelve 
hours.  The  detail  from  a  regiment  should  never  be  less  than  a 
company. 

4397.  Q.  How  are  workmen  needed  for  other  work  than  the 
trenches  detailed?  A.  Workmen  required  for  other  work  are 
taken  by  roster  from  the  battalions  not  employed  in  the  trenches. 

4398.  Q.  How  should  guards  and  workmen  march  to  the 
trenches  ?  A.  Guards  and  working-parties  march  to  the  trenches 
in  silence,  fully  armed  and  equipped.  Their  arms  are  kept  near 
them  while  at  work.  Everything  likely  to  attract  the  attention 
of  the  enemy  is  avoided,  especially  on  the  day  the  trenches  are 
opened.  For  this  purpose  the  hour  of  relieving  guards  may  be 
varied. 

4399.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  field-officer  of  the  day  before 
troops  commence  work  in  the  trenches  ?  A.  Before  the  guards 
and  workmen  march,  the  field-officer  of  the  trenches  arranges 
them  so  that  each  detachment  can  reach  its  ground  without  con- 
fusion. The  troops  are  posted  in  the  trenches  according  to  the 
position  of  their  regiments  in  order  of  battle.  The  reserves  of 
workmen  are  placed  at  the  depot  of  the  trenches,  or  the  nearest 
suitable  place  to  the  works. 

4400.  Q.  What  do  the  workmen  carry  to  the  trenches,  and  how 
do  they  and  the  guards  enter  and  leave  the  trenches  ?  A.  The 
workmen,  in  going  to  the  trenches,  carry  such  tools  and  materials 
as  arc  required  by  the  engineers  and  artillery.  The  guards  enter 
and  leave  the  trenches  with  arms  trailed,  and  the  workmen  also 
unless  they  carry  materials  or  tools,  when  their  arms  are  slung. 
A  corporal  is  sent  to  the  opening  of  the  trenches  to  guide  the 
relief. 

4401.  Q.  For  what  purpose  are  sandbags  used  in  trench- work  ? 


584 

A.  Sandbags  are  placed  on  the  parapet,  at  intervals,  to  cover  the 
sentinels  ;  they  are  more  numerous  than  the  sentinels,  so  that 
the  enemy  may  not  know  where  the  sentinels  are  placed. 

4403.  Q.  What  is  done  when  detachments  are  posted  at  night, 
in  advance  of  the  trenches,  to  cover  the  workmen  ?  A.  The  men 
lie  down  to  hide  themselves  better  from  the  enemy.  To  prevent 
mistakes,  the  workmen  are  told  what  troops  cover  them. 

4403.  Q.  What  honors  are  paid  in  the  trenches?  A.  No 
honors  are  paid  in  the  trenches.  When  the  general  commanding 
the  siege  visits  them,  the  guards  place  themselves  in  the  rear  of  the 
banquette.  The  colors  are  never  carried  to  the  trenches,  unless  a 
regiment  marches  to  repulse  a  sortie  or  make  an  assault.  Even 
in  this  case  they  are  not  displayed  until  the  general  commanding 
the  siege  gives  a  formal  order. 

4404.  Q.  Where  are  the  tools  for  trench-work  collected,  and 
who  has  charge  of  them  ?  A.  Tools  and  siege  materials  of  all 
kinds  are  collected  in  such  places  as  the  field-officer  of  the 
trenches  may  appoint,  on  the  advice  of  the  commanders  of  artil- 
lery and  engineers.  They  are  in  charge  of  officers  of  engineers 
and  artillery,  with  guards  or  non-commissioned  officers  of  both 
corps. 

4405.  Q.  What  is  done  in  case  of  a  sortie?  A.  The  guards 
move  rapidly  to  the  places  designated  by  the  general  of  the 
trenches.  Having  lined  the  banquette  to  fire  on  the  enemy,  the 
troops  form  on  the  reverse  of  the  trench  to  receive  him.  The 
workmen  take  arms  and  retain  their  positions,  or  retire  with 
their  tools,  as  ordered.  The  officers  commanding  the  detach- 
ments of  workmen  see  that  their  movements  are  made  promptly 
and  without  confusion. 

4406.  Q.  How  sliould  the  troops  that  advance  beyond  the 
trenches  to  repulse  the  sortie  proceed  ?  A.  They  must  not  follow 
in  pursuit.  The  general  takes  care  that  they  return  to  the 
trenches  before  the  retreat  of  the  sortie  allows  the  artillery  of  the 
place  to  open  on  them.  When  the  workmen  return,  the  officers 
and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  detachments  call  the  roll 
without  interrupting  the  work,  which  is  immediately  resumed. 

ASSAULTS. 

4407.  Q.  In  making  assaults,  what  should  the  troops  be  supplied 
with  ?  A.  However  practicable  the  breach  may  appear,  or  how- 
ever ruined  the  works  in  rear  of  it,  the  heads  of  columns  must 
always  be  supplied  with  ladders  to  get  over  unexpected  obstacles. 

4408.  Q.  What  is  required  regarding  property  in  the  event  of 
a  successful  assault  on  a  place  ?  A.  The  general  commanding 
the  siege  causes  picked  companies  to  be  designated  to  protect 
property  and  persons,  and  prevent  pillage  and  violence,  from  the 
moment  the  place  is  carried.     The  officers  exert  themselves  to 


TROOPS  IN  CAMPAIGN.  685 

restrain  the  men.  The  General  designates  the  place  requirin*^ 
particular  protection,  such  as  churches,  asylums,  hospitals,  coC 
leges,  schools,  and  magazines.  The  order  for  their  protection 
should  remind  the  soldiers  of  the  penalty  of  disobedience. 
Whether  the  place  be  taken  by  assault  or  by  capitulation,  the 
provisions  and  military  stores  and  the  public  funds  are  reserved 
for  the  use  of  the  Army. 

4409.  Q.  What  returns  and  reports  are  the  officers  of  engineers 
and  artillery  required  to  make  in  regard  to  a  siege  ?  A.  The 
oflBcers  of  engineers  and  artillery  make,  to  the  general  of  the 
trenches,  a  return  of  all  losses  in  their  troops,  and  such  other 
reports  on  the  work  as  he  requires  in  addition  to  the  reports 
direct  to  their  respective  chiefs  on  the  details  of  the  siege. 

4410.  Q.  What  is  the  commander  of  engineers  required  to  keep 
during  a  siege  ?  A.  The  commander  of  engineers  will  keep  a 
journal  of  the  siege,  showing  the  operations  of  each  day  in  detail, 
the  force  employed,  the  kind  and  quantity  of  materials  used.  He 
will  also  note  on  a  plan  the  daily  progress  of  the  works,  and 
make  the  necessary  drawings  explanatory  of  their  construction. 

4411.  Q.  What  report  will  the  field-officer  of  the  trenches 
make?  A.  At  the  end  of  each  tour  the  field-officer  of  the 
trenches  will  draw  up  a  report,  for  the  preceding  twenty-four 
hours,  to  the  general  of  the  trenches. 

4413.  Q.  What  report  will  the  commander  of  the  troops  in  the 
trenches  make?  A.  The  commanders  of  the  several  corps  in 
the  trenches  report,  when  relieved,  to  their  respective  headquar- 
ters, their  losses  during  the  tour,  and  the  conduct  of  the  oflBcers 
and  men. 

4413.  Q.  What  is  the  commander  of  the  artillery  required  to 
keep  during  a  siege  ?  A.  The  commander  of  the  artillery  will 
keep  a  daily  journal  of  the  operations  under  his  direction,  show- 
ing the  number  and  kind  of  pieces  in  battery,  the  forces  em- 
ployed in  serving  them,  the  kind  and  quantity  of  ammunition 
expended,  the  number  of  rounds  fired  from  each  piece  of  ord- 
nance, the  effect  of  the  fire,  and  all  other  particulars  relative  to 
his  branch  of  the  service. 

4414.  Q.  What  is  done  with  the  journals  and  drawings  after  a 
siege?  A.  The  journals  and  drawings  will  be  sent,  after  the 
siege,  with  the  report  of  the  general  commanding,  to  the  War 
Department. 

DEFENSE  OF  FORTIFIED  PLACES. 

4415.  Q.  What  is  required  of  the  commander  of  a  fortified 
place  regarding  his  preparations  for  defense  ?  A.  In  war  every 
commander  of  a  fortified  place  shall  always  hold  himself  pre- 
pared with  his  plan  of  defense,  as  if  at  all  times  liable  to  attack. 
He  arranges  this  plan  according  to  the  probable  mode  of  attack  ; 
determines  the  posts  of  the  troops  in  the  works,  the  reliefs. 


586  THE   ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

feserves,  and  details  of  service  in  all  the  corps.  He  draws  up 
instructions  for  a  case  of  attack,  and  exercises  the  garrison 
according  to  his  plan  of  defense.  In  framing  his  plan  he  studies 
the  works,  and  the  exterior  with  the  radius  of  attack  and  invest- 
ment, the  strength  of  the  garrison,  the  artillery,  the  munitions 
of  war,  subsistence  and  supplies  of  all  kinds,  and  takes  im- 
mediate measures  to  procure  whatever  is  deficient  of  troops  or 
supplies,  either  by  proper  requisitions,  or  from  the  means  at  his 
disposal.  • 

4416.  Q.  Wliat  is  required  of  the  commander  of  a  fortified 
place  in  time  of  war  on  the  approach  of  an  enemy?  A.  On  the 
approach  of  an  enemy,  he  removes  all  houses  and  other  objects, 
within  or  without  the  place,  that  cover  the  approaches,  or  inter- 
rupt the  fire  of  guns  or  movements  of  troops.  He  assures  him- 
self personally  that  all  posterns,  outlets,  embrasures,  etc.,  are  in 
proper  state  of  security. 

4417.  Q.  What  is  the  commander  of  a  fortified  place  furnished 
with  from  the  War  Department  ?  A.  He  shall  be  furnished  by 
the  War  Department  with  a  detailed  plan  of  the  works :  with  a 
map  of  the  environs  within  the  radius  of  investment ;  with  a 
map  of  the  vicinity,  including  the  neighboring  works,  roads, 
water-channels,  coasts,  etc.;  with  a  memoir  explaining  the  sit- 
uation and  defense  of  the  place,  and  the  relations  and  bearings 
of  the  several  works  on  each  other,  and  on  the  approaches  by- 
land  and  water — all  of  which  he  carefully  preserves,  and  com- 
municates only  to  the  council  of  defense. 

4418.  Q,  Who  should  the  commander  of  a  fortified  place  con- 
sult? A.  He  consults  his  next  in  rank  and  the  senior  officers  of 
the  engineers  and  artillery,  either  separately  or  as  a  council  of 
defense.  In  the  latter  case  he  designates  an  ofiicer  to  act  as  sec- 
retary to  the  council  and  to  record  its  proceedings  and  the  joint 
and  separate  opinions  of  the  members,  which  are  kept  secret  dur- 
ing the  siege.  The  members  record  their  own  opinions  over  their 
own  signatures.  In  all  cases  the  commander  decides  on  his  own 
responsibility. 

4419.  Q.  Who  are  required  to  keep  journals  in  a  fortified  posi- 
tion ?  What  will  they  embrace  and  where  will  they  be  sent  ?  A. 
The  commander  of  the  place  and  the  senior  ofl&cers  of  engineers 
and  artillery  shall  keep  journals  of  the  defense,  in  which  shall  be 
entered  in  order  of  date,  without  blank  or  interlineation,  the 
orders  given  or  received,  themanner  in  which  they  were  executed, 
their  results,  and  every  event  and  circumstance  of  importance 
in  the  progress  of  the  defense.  These  journals  and  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  council  of  defense  shall  be  sent,  after  the  siege,  to  the 
War  Department. 

4420.  Q.  What  shall  be  kept  in  the  office  of  the  commander  of 
a  fortified  position  in  a  state  of  defense,  and  what  will  be  done 
with  the  same  ?    A.  There  shall  be  kept  in  the  office  of  the  com- 


TROOPS  m  CAMPAlGir.  58t 

mander  of  the  place,  to  be  sent  after  the  siege  to  the  War  Depart- 
ment, a  map  of  the  environs,  a  plan  of  the  fortifications,  and  a 
special  plan  of  the  front  of  attack,  on  which  the  chief  engineer 
will  trace  in  succession  the  positions  occupied  and  the  works 
executed  by  the  enemy,  and  also  the  works  of  counter-attack  or 
defense,  and  the  successive  positions  of  the  artillery  arid  other 
troops  of  the  garrison  during  the  progress  of  the  siege. 

4421.  Q.  In  defending  a  fortified  place,  what  is  required  of  the 
commander  with  regard  to  holding  the  position  ?  A.  The  com- 
mander shall  defend  in  succession  the  advanced  works,  the 
covered  way  and  outworks,  the  body  of  the  work,  and  the 
interior  intrenchments.  He  shall  not  be  content  with  clearing 
away  the  ,foot  of  the  breaches  and  defending  them  by  abatis, 
mines,  and  all  the  means  used  in  sieges,  but  shall  begin  in  good 
time,  behind  the  bastions  or  front  of  attack,  the  necessary  in- 
trenchments to  resist  assaults  on  the  main  work.  He  shall  use 
his  means  of  defense  in  such  manner  as  to  have  at  all  times  a  re- 
serve of  fresh  troops,  chosen  from  his  best  soldiers,  to  resist 
assault,  retake  the  outworks,  and  especially  to  resist  assaults  on 
the  body  of  the  place,  and  a  reserve  for  the  positions  of  the  last 
period  of  the  siege,  and  of  ammunition  for  the  last  attack.  He 
must  compel  the  besieging  force  to  approach  by  the  slow  and  suc- 
cessive works  of  siege,  and  must  sustain  at  least  one  assault  on  a 
practicable  breach  in  the  body  of  the  place. 

4422.  Q,  What  will  be  done  when  the  commander  thinks  that 
the  end  of  the  defense  has  come  ?  A.  He  shall  still  consult  the 
council  of  defense  on  the  means  that  may  remain  to  prolong  the 
siege.  But  in  all  cases  he  alone  must  decide  on  the  time,  manner, 
and  terms  of  surrender.  In  the  capitulation  he  shall  not  seek  or 
accept  better  terms  for  himself  than  for  his  garrison,  but  shall 
share  its  fate  and  exert  his  best  endeavors  to  care  for  the  troops, 
especially  the  sick  and  wounded. 

4423.  Q.  What  restrictions  are  placed  upon  the  withdrawal  of 
troops  or  supplies  from  a  fortified  place  ?  A.  No  commander  in 
the  field  shall  withdraw  troops  or  supplies  from  any  fortified  place, 
or  exercise  any  authority  over  its  commander,  unless  it  has  been 
placed  uner  his  command  by  competent  authority. 

BATTLES. 

4424.  Q.  Before  an  action,  what  will  the  generals  indicate? 
A.  The  places  where  they  will  be ;  if  they  change  position,  they 
gi^^e  notice  of  it,  or  leave  a  staff  oflBcer  to  show  where  they  have 

gone.  ,  .    .       ,    - 

4425.  Q.  What  is  expected  of  officers  and  non-commissioned  of- 
ficers during  an  engagement  ?  A.  That  they  will  keep  the  men  in 
the  ranks  and  enforce  obedience  if  necessary.  Soldiers  must  not 
be  permitted  to  leave  the  ranks  to  strip  or  rob  the  dead,  nor  even 


588  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

to  assist  the  wounded,  except  by  express  permission,  which  is  only 
to  be  given  after  the  action  is  decided.  The  highest  interest  and 
most  pressing  duty  is  to  win  the  victory,  by  winning  which  only 
can  proper  care  of  the  wounded  be  insured. 

4426.  Q.  What  is  required  of  ordnance  officers  and  quarter- 
masters'after  an  engagement?  A.  After  an  action  the  officers 
of  ordnance  collect  the  munitions  of  war  left  on  the  field,  and 
make  a  return  of  them  to  headquarters.  The  Quartermaster's 
Department  collects  tiie  rest  of  the  public  property  captured,  and 
makes  returns  to  headquarters. 

4427.  Q.  What  reports  of  battles,  actions,  or  affairs  will  be 
made  ?  A.  Within  ten  days  after  the  close  of  every  engagement, 
or  affair,  the  commanding  officer  of  each  regiment,  separate  bat- 
talion, and  light  battery  concerned  will  prepare  and  forward  to 
the  next  superior  headquarters  a  concise  report  of  the  part  taken 
therein  by  his  command,  including  the -effective  strength  of  the 
same,  and  the  losses  incurred,  under  the  separate  heads  of  killed, 
wounded,  and  missing.  A  duplicate  of  the  report  will  be  for- 
warded direct  to  the  Adjutant- General.  Brigade  commanders 
within  ten  days  after  the  receipt  of  the  reports  of  the  organiza-- 
tions  composing  them,  division  commanders  within  twenty  days, 
and  corps  commanders  within  thirty  days  thereafter,  will  prepare 
and  forward  similar  reports  to  the  next  superior  headquarters. 
They  will  be  accompanied  by  appendices  containing  consolidated 
reports  of  the  effective  strength  and  casualties  of  the  several 
commands,  of  the  losses  of  property  incurred,  and  a  nominal  list 
of  the  officers  attached  to  their  respective  staffs.  Duplicates  of 
these  reports  will  be  forwarded  direct  to  the  Adjutant- General. 


PART  XIV. 

SPECIAL  QUESTIONS. 


For  Artillery  Officers  Only, 


Ballistics.— Nos.  4428-4438. 
Electricity. — Nos.  4439-4456. 
Sea-coast  Defense. — Nos.  4457-4465. 
Explosives. — Nos.  4466-4488. 
Gunnery.— Nos.  4489-4551. 


PART  XIV. 

SPECIAL  QUESTIONS, 


BALLISTICS. 

4428.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  general  method  pursued  in 
determining  the  muzzle  velocity  of  a  projectile  by  means  of  an 
electro-ballistic  machine.  A.  Two  targets,  each  carrying  a 
number  of  tightly -stretched  copper  wires,  are  set  up :  the  first 
at  a  given  distance  from  the  muzzle  of  the  gun,  and  the  second 
at  a  known  distance  from  the  first.  Each  is  electrically  con- 
nected with  the  ballistic  machine,  which  records  the  instant  the 
current  is  broken  at  each  target  by  the  passage  of  the  projectile 
through  the  net-work  of  wires.  Having  a  scale  of  time,  the  in- 
terval between  the  breaks  thus  registered  is  known,  and,  being 
corrected  for  errors,  gives  the  time  of  passage  between  targets ; 
from  which  the  initial  velocity  is  easily  obtained. 

4429.  Q.  How- is  the  time  consumed  by  a  projectile  in  passing 
between  the  screens  determined  by  the  Bouleng6  chronograph? 
A.  The  break  of  the  current  of  the  first  target  permits  the  long 
rod  (chronometer)  of  the  instrument  to  fall.  This  rod,  when  in 
use,  is  enveloped  by  a  zinc  or  copper  tube,  called  the  recorder, 
upon  which  a  mark  is  made  by  the  knife,  while  the  chronometer 
is  suspended  from  the  magnet.  The  break  of  the  current  of  the 
second  target  causes  the  small  rod  (the  registrat)  to  fall,  thereby 
releasing  the  knife,  which  makes  a  mark  on  the  recorder  as  it  is 
falling.  The  time  corresponding  to  the  distance  between  the  knife- 
marks,  corrected  for  errors,  is  obtained,  and  from  this  the  initial 
velocity.    The  time  {T)  corresponding  to  the  distance  {h)  between 

/2ih    • 
the  knife-marks  is  obtained  from   the  equation  T=  y  —,  m 

which  9  is  the  force  of  gravity. 

4430.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  taking  ithe  disjunction,  and  what 
is  its  object  ?  A.  Obtaining  the  total  error  to  be  applied  to  the 
time  obtained,  as  just  indicated.  This  is  obtained  by  breaking 
both  currents  at  the  same  instant  by  means  of  the  disjunctor, 
thereby  determining  the  height  through  which  the  chronometer 

591 


592  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

falls  due  to  the  errors  of  the  instrument.  The  time  correspond- 
ing to  this  height  is  the  sum  of  the  errors  to  be  applied  to  the 
time  obtained  in  firing. 

4431.  Q.  Describe  the  chronometer  and  register-circuits  of  a 
Boulenge  chronograph  arranged  for  taking  the  velocity  of  a  pro- 
jectile. A.  The  two  rods  are  suspended  from  electro-magnets, 
each  having  its  own  current  and  its  own  target,  and  are  indepen- 
dent of  each  other.  The  targets  consist  of  wooden  frames  carry- 
ing a  number  of  tightly-drawn  copper  wires  the  distances  between 
which  are  such  that  it  would  be  impossible  for  the  projectile  to 
pass  through  without  breaking  a  wire.  The  current  entering  on 
one  side  of  the  target  must  traverse  the  whole  system  of  wires 
before  passing  out  on  the  other  side,  so  that  the  breaking  of  any 
wire  will  break  the  current. 

4432.  Q.  Referring  to  a  charge  of  gunpowder,  define  the  terms 
ignition,  inflammation,  and  combustion.  A.  Ignition  is  the 
setting  on  fire  of  a  particular  point  of  a  grain  or  charge.  In- 
flammation  is  the  spreading  of  the  fire  from  point  to  point  on 
the  surface  of  the  grain,  or  from  one  granular  surface  to  another 
throughout  the  charge.  Combustion  is  the  propagation  of  the 
fire  into  the  interior  of  the  charge  or  grain. 

4433.  Q.  Define  the  terms  gravimetric  density  and  absolute 
density  as  applied  to  gunpowder.  A.  Gravimetric  density  is 
the  weight  of  a  standard  volume  of  the  powder  not  pressed  to- 
gether except  by  its  own  weight — i.e.,  it  is  the  specific  gravity  of 
powder  in  its  nattiral  form.  Absolute  density  is  the  ratio  of  the 
weight  of  a  given  quantity  of  powder  to  the  weight  of  an  equal 
volume  of  water  at  the  standard  temperature — i.e.,  it  is  the  spe- 
cific gravity  of  solid  powder. 

4434.  Q.  Give  the  difference  of  behavior  of  two  charges  of 
powder  in  the  same  gun,  the  charges  differing  in  this  respect 
only — that  one  charge  consists  of  small-service  grains  and  the 
other  of  large-service  grains.  A.  Enlarging  the  grain  decreases 
the  velocity  of  emission  in  the  first  instants,  and  afterwards 
causes  it  to  fall  off  more  slowly ;  hence  the  small-grain  charge 
would  give  a  quick,  high  pressure,  whereas  the  large-grain  would 
give  a  lower,  gradual,  uniform  pressure.  In  other  words,  the  first 
would  be  like  a  blow  and  the  second  like  a  push. 

4435.  Q.  Define  density  of  loading,  and  show  how  it  is  deter- 
mined for  any  gun  and  charge.  A.  It  is  the  ratio  of  the  weight 
of  the  charge  of  powder  to  the  weight  of  the  water,  at  its  maxi- 
mum density,  which  will  completely  fill  the  volume  in  which  the 
charge  is  fired. 

4436.  Q.  Define  the  following  terms  employed  in  Exterior 
Ballistics :  trajectory,  angle  of  departure,  angle  of  fall,  direct 
fire,  curved  fire,  high-angle  fire.  A.  Trajectory :  the  curve 
described  in  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  projectile.  Angle  of 
departure :  the  angle  which  the  line  of  departure  makes  with 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  693 

the  horizontal  plane.  Angle  of  fall :  the  angle  which  the  tan- 
gent to  the  trajectory  at  the  point  of  fall  makes  with  the  horizon- 
tal plane  passing  through  the  muzzle.  Direct  fire  :  the  fire  of 
guns  with  full  charges  at  angles  of  elevation  not  exceeding  15". 
Indirect  fire:  the  fire  of  guns  with  reduced  charges,  howitzers, 
and  mortars  at  angles  of  elevation  not  exceeding  15°.  High- 
angle  fire  :  the  fire  of  guns,  howitzers,  and  mortars  at  angles  of 
elevation  exceeding  15°. 

4437.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  ce7itre  of  impact  as  applied  to  a 
group  of  hits  on  a  target?  Give  one  or  more  of  its  properties. 
A.  It  is  the  central-point  of  a  group  of  shots  fired  under  the 
same  conditions  at  a  given  target ;  and  the  algebraic  sums  of 
the  horizontal  and  vertical  distances  of  each  shot  from  this  point 
are  zero.  Hence  the  shots  are  symmetrically  grouped  about  this 
point;  also,  if  horizontal  and  vertical  wires  be  drawn  through 
it,  the  number  of  hits  in  each  of  the  quadrants  will  be  nearly 
equal,  and  the  ratio  of  these  numbers  very  nearly  unity. 

4438.  Q.  Define  mean  and  probable  deviation.  A.  Mean  de- 
viation is  the  sum  of  the  absolute  deviations  divided  by  the  num- 
ber of  shots.  Probable  deviation  is  the  deviation  with  respect 
to  which  the  probabilities  of  obtaining  greater  or  less  deviations 
are  equal. 

ELECTRICITY. 

4439.  Q.  Explain  why  greater  heat  is  generated  in  the  bridge 
of  an  electric  fuse  than  in  any  other  equal  length  of  the  circuit. 
A.  Because  the  resistance  is  greater. 

4440.  Q.  Name  all  the  different  methods  of  generating  elec- 
tricity. A.  Friction-machines,  including  hydro-electric  of  Arm- 
strong ;  induction-machines  (as  Holtz,  electropones,  etc.) ;  bat- 
teries (voltaic);  thermo-electric  batteries;  dynamo-machines, 
including  the  various  forms. 

4441.  Q.  How  would  you  determine  w^hether  a  given  wire  was 
carrying  a  current  or  not  ?  If  there  is  any  way  without  opening 
the  circuit,  state  it.     A.  By  means  of  the  magnetic  needle. 

4442.  Q.  What  kinds  of  cell  should  be  used  {a)  with  the  Morse 
telegraph  ;  (6)  for  firing  fuses  ?  A.  {a)  Daniell's  gravity  cells  ; 
•(6)  Nitric-acid  and  chromic-acid  cells. 

4443.  Q.  What  number  of  volts  is  regarded  as  dangerous  to 
human  life?    A.  1000  and  above. 

4444  Q.  May  either  the  arc  or  the  incandescent  lamp  be  em- 
ployed "to  light  the  interior  of  a  powder  magazine?  A.  Incan- 
descent only— safest  and  best  illuminant  for  the  purpose  known. 

4445  Q.  What  is  the  object  (a)  of  a  galvanometer ;  (6)  of  a 
Wheatstone  bridge  ?  A.  {a)  The  galvanometer  measures  the 
strength  of  a  current ;  (6)  the  Wheatstone  bridge  measures  resist- 
ances of  conductors  of  various  kmds.  ^ 

4446.  Q.  What  advantage  has  the  electric  motor  over  all  other 


594  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

means  of  distributing  power  ?  A.  Utilization  of  waste  forces  of 
nature ;  small  percentage  of  loss  of  elBiciency  ;  extreme  porta- 
bility— i.e. ,  carried  over  long  distances  with  any  desired  change  in 
direction  and  intensity. 

4447.  Q.  Give  Ohm's  Law.  A.  The  strength  of  the  current 
varies  directly  as  the  electromotive  force,  and  inversely  as  the 
resistance  to  the  current.  This  applies  to  steady  currents  or  cur- 
rents of  constant  strength. 

4448.  Q.  What  are  the  practical  units  of  the  quantities  that 
enter  Ohm's  Law  ?  A.  The  Ampere  (C),  the  Volt  {E),  and  the 
Ohm  {R). 

4449.  Q.  Name  the  essential  parts  of  a  dynamo-electric  machine, 
and  the  part  in  which  the  current  is  generated.  A.  The  apparatus 
consists  of  strong  electro-magnets,  between  the  pole-pieces  of  which 
revolves  an  armature.  The  armature  is  composed  of  coils  of  copper 
wire  wound  upon  a  soft  iron  core.  The  extremities  of  the  arma- 
ture wires  connect  with  the  strips  of  the  commutator,  which  is 
mounted  on  the  axis  of  the  armature.  The  brushes  take  the  cur- 
rent from  the  commutator-strips.  The  current  is  generated  in 
the  armature-coils,  and  is  due  to  the  variation  in  the  number  of 
lines  of  force  cut  by  the  coils,  or  the  number  embraced  by  the 
coils. 

4450.  Q.  What  are  the  plates,  the  liquid,  the  electromotive 
force,  and  some  of  the  military  uses  of  the  Le  Clanche  cell  ?  A. 
The  plates  are  zinc  and  carbon,  the  latter  contained  in  a  porous 
pot  and  surrounded  by  coarse  grains  of  peroxide  of  manganese 
and  carbon.  The  liquid  is  sal-ammoniac.  The  electromotive 
force  is  1.46  volts.  Military  uses,  for  bells,  telephones,  and  point- 
iug  apparatus,  and  in  France  for  telegraphing. 

4451.  Q.  Draw  a  diagram  of  a  simple  Morse  telegraph  circuit 
for  two  stations. 


Phlladelpbi'a 

UfiC 

lo6al 
L|,I,|,|,|H> 


American  System  <^ 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  595 

r    4452.  Q.  Name  the  various  applications  of  the  electric  current 
to  military  purposes  that  have  come  within  your  reading     A 
Telephoning  telegraphing,  in  pointing  guns,  applied  to  torpedoes' 
hring  guns,  firing  mines,  manufacture  of  shrapnel,  lighting  and 
for  welding.  ^      ,    &       &,      ^a 

4453.  Q.  How  will  the  resistance  of  one  copper  wire  compare 
with  that  of  another  copper  wire  of  equal  length  and  double  the 
diameter  ?  A.  That  of  the  smaller  will  be  four  times  that  of  the 
larger. 

y  4454.  Q.  Why  is  not  the  filament  at  a  white  heat  in  an  incan- 
descent lamp  speedily  burned  out  ?    A.  Because  it  is  in  a  vacuum. 

4455.  Q.  What  is  an  insulator?  Name  three  or  four  of  the 
best  conductors  of  electricity.  A.  A  body  that  offers  great  re- 
sistance to  the  flow  of  electricity  through  it— silver,  pure  copper 
gold,  zinc,  or  iron.  ' 

4456.  Q.  State  the  principle  by  which  we  know  that  a  current 
,is  induced  in  a  coil  as  in  a  dynamo-machine,  and  the  rules  for 
■the  direction  and  intensity  of  the  current.  A.  Whenever  a  coil 
forming  a  closed  circuit  or  a  part  of  a  closed  circuit  is  revolved 
in  a  magnetic  field,  so  as  to  vary  the  number  of  lines  of  force 
/that  are  inclosed  by  the  coil,  a  current  is  induced  in  the  circuit. 
In  the  dynamo-machine  the  armature  turns,  changing  the  num- 
ber of  lines  of  force  embraced  by  its  coils,  and  a  current  flows 
around  the  circuit;  of  which  these  coils  form  a  part.  Direction  : 
a  =  direction  of  motion  of  armature ; 
b  =  positive  direction  of  the  lines  of 
force  ;  c  =  (the  closed  fingers)  the  di- 
rection of  the  current  in  coils  of  a  be 
Siemens  armature.  Intensity:  The 
strength  of  the  current,  or  the  electro- 
motive force  induced,  due  to  a  given 
angular  turn,  depends  upon  the  rate  of  cutting  of  the  line  of 
force,  or  change  in  the  number  embraced  by  the  armature-coils. 

4457.  Q.  What  are  the  objects  sought  in  preparing  works  of 
coast  defense,  and  what  are  the  elements  of  a  first-class  system  ? 
A.  The  objects  sought  are:  1.  To  forbid  distant  bombardment;  3. 
To  control  important  anchorages  ;  3.  To  close  important  channels, 
which  is  by  far  the  most  common  and  urgent.  This  consists  in  the 
effective  obstruction  of  all  water  approaches  against  the  enemy, 
leaving  free  entrance  and  exit  for  a  nation's  own  vessels  ;  protec- 
tion for  these  obstructions,  and  security  for  their  operation  and 
their  flanking-guns  against  escalade  by  boat  parties ;  so  heavy  a  fire 
of  modern  high-power  guns  and  mortars  over  all  the  approaches 
as  to  defy  the  most  powerful  armored  fleet  able  to  operate  in  the 
channels  leading  to  these  auxiliary  defenses  ;  a  heavy  flanking 
fire  of  medium  rapid-fire  guns  over  the  obstructed  zone  ;  provi- 
sion  for  offensive  returns  against  armore^^jwjj^ijjljlljllli^the 
power  of  illumiiiatiug  the  obstructions^' 


596  THE   ARMY   OFFICER'S   EXAMINER. 

physically  possible  ;  a  swarm  of  torpedo-boats,  which,  safe  behind 
the  barrier,  are  always  ready  to  sally  out  and  carry  the  war  to  the 
enemy's  fleet  when  favorable  opportunities  occur,  A  nation 
should,  therefore,  be  prepared  for  encountering  vessels  with  guns 
of  the  largest  calibres  that  the  draught  of  water  in  the  channel 
will  admit ;  from  five  to  ten  ships,  carrying  from  thirty  to  sixty 
guns  of  six-inch  calibre  and  upward,  should  be  estimated  for  each 
mile  of  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  attack  to  be  met  will  be  made  at 
anchor,  or  at  least  from  fixed  buoys,  in  order  to  increase  the  pie- 
cision  of  fire,  and  at  as  close  quarters  as  possible.  The  elements 
of  a  first  class  system  are:  1.  High-power  guns  and  mortars  for 
keeping  the  armored  ships  of  the  enemy  at  a  distance  ;  2.  Land 
fortifications  to  hold  the  position ;  3.  Obstructions  in  the  chan- 
nels of  approach  ;  4.  Flanking-guns,  movable  torpedoes,  and  tho 
electric  light  to  cover  the  obstructions  ;  5.  Vidette  and  toi'pede 
boats  to  watch  the  enemy  and  make  otfensive  returns. 

4458.  Q.  How  may  the  number  of  guns  likely  to  be  brought 
against  a  fort  be  determined  ?  A.  By  drawing  on  the  map,  the 
fort  being  the  common  centre,  circles  with  radii  varying  from 
one  to  three  miles,  and  note  the  lengths  that  fall  on  water  of  suf- 
ficient depth  for  occupation  by  warships.  The  nature  of  the 
channel  and  strength  of  the  current  will  indicate  about  how  near 
together  Hie  ships  can  be  placed.  Generally  speaking,  allow  to 
each  vessel  six  effective  guns,  of  calibres  varying  from  six  inches 
upward,  according  to  her  draught.  There  may  be  anticipated  a 
possible  fire  at  the  rate  of  thirty  to  sixty  guns  per  mile  of  avail- 
able development,  depending  on  the  nature  of  the  site. 

4459.  Q.  Discuss  the  selection  of  sites  to  prevent  bombardment 
or  to  cover  anchorages,  and,  in  this  connection,  the  extreme 
ranges  to  be  expected  of  naval  guns.  A.  The  sites  should  be  so 
selected  as  to  keep  the  enemy  beyond  the  extreme  range  to  the 
object  covered — which  would  place  the  defensive  works  at  six 
miles  from  the  depots,  city,  etc.,  to  be  defended  ;  and  if  practica- 
ble at  reasonable  expense,  one  would  even  place  them  ten  miles 
distant.  They  should  consist  of  groups  of  heavy  mortars,  hav- 
ing a  range  of  five  miles,  placed  in  pits  and  under  fire  control  of 
a  single  officer ;  and  they  should  be  supplemented  by  outlying 
groups  of  detached  mines  and  by  a  swarm  of  fast  torpedo-boats. 
In  general,  the  problem  involves  :  1.  The  effective  range  of 
modern  high-power  guns  mounted  on  shipboard  ;  2.  The  amount 
of  damage  they  will  probably  inflict  upon  the  port  in  question  ; 
3.  What  kind  and' amount  of  land  fire,  and  what  other  expedients, 
will  best  produce  the  desired  conviction  that  bombardment  is 
inexpedient.  Shaw  lays  down  the  extreme  range  of  naval  guns 
at  4.5  to  6  miles. 

4460.  Q.  Discuss  the  relative  advantages  and  disadvantages  of 
high  and  low  sites.  A.  The  great  advantage  of  a  low  site — to 
wit,  ricochet  fire— has  been  greatly  modified  by  the  introduction  of 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  597 

nfled  guns  and  armored  ships,  whereas  its  disadvantages  are  that 
It  affords  no  direct  fire  on  the  deck  of  a  ship  ;  permits  the  latter 
to  dispense  with  high-angle  tire,  and  places  fort  and  ship  on  an 
equality  as  to  energy  of  impact.  A  high  site  requires  ships  to 
use  high-angle  tire  ;  makes  the  trajectories  of  their  projectiles 
at  short  ranges  more  oblique  still  to  the  parapet ;  while  the  tra- 
jectories of  projectiles  fired  against  the  ships  are  more  nearly 
normal  to  the  decks.  They  also  compel  the  ships  to  keep  a  certain 
distance,  owing  to  the  limit  of  their  angle  of  fire. 

4461.  Q.  How  does  the  height  of  a  site  exercise  a  controlling 
influence  upon  the  mode  of  mounting  and  covering  guns  ?  A. 
The  object  sought  is  to  combine  the  widest  possible  range  and 
traverse  with  the  least  risk  of  being  silenced  by  the  enemy's  fire; 
and,  on  account  of  the  last-named,  the  kinds  of  mountings  and 
protections  used  depend  on  the  site.  For  low  sites  turrets  and 
casements  are  required.  For  heights  o/300  or  AOO  feet  barbette 
batteries  are  used.  For  intermediate  heights^  especially  for  shoal 
water  and  mine-fields,  disappearing-guns  in  barbette.  On  cliffs 
^OQ  feet  high,  which  have  great  advantages,  provision  must  be 
made  to  cover  the  dead-angle  near  shore  (with  a  depression  of 
7°,  which  is  about  the  maximum  provided  for,  the  dead-angle  in 
front  of  a  gun  200  feet  above  the  water  would  cover  543  yards, 
and  if  400  feet  it  would  cover  1086  yards). 

4462.  Q.  What  are  the  limitations  imposed  by  depth  of  water, 
rapidity  of  current,  and  tidal  range  on  blocking  the  channel  by 
submarine  mines?  How  are  excessive  tidal  ranges  overcome? 
What  is  the  admissible  depth  of  water  and  rapidity  of  current  ? 
A.  Shallow  water,  gentle  currents,  and  small  tidal  ranges  should 
have  great  weight  in  choosing  sites.  Practically,  a  depth  of  100 
feet,  with  a  current  of  7  feet  per  second,  fixes  the  limit  in  which 
submarine  mining  in  the  United  States  is  effective.  Ten  feet  is 
about  the  maximum  tidal  range  of  any  of  its  first-class  harbors. 
Excessive  tidal  ranges  (20  feet)  can  only  be  overcome  by  a  double 
system  of  mines — one  for  low  water  and  another,  in  rear  of  the 
first,  for  high  water. 

4463.  Q.  What  are  the  general  conditions  that  should  be  ful- 
filled by  a  system  of  channel  obstructions  by  submarine  mines  ?  A. 
1.  The  mines  must  be  so  arranged  as  to  admit  of  the  safe  passage 
of  a  nation's  own  vessels,  while  they  can  be  instantly  rendered 
dangerous  to  the  enemy.  2.  This  system  must  be  automatic,  the 
explosion  occurring  in  consequence  of  the  touch  of  the  enemy ; 
but  it  should  also  admit  of  frequent  firing  by  groups  when  de- 
sired. 8.  The  mines  should  be  so  disposed  as  to  cover  a  large  area 
of  the  channel.  4.  The  system  must  provide  electrical  tests,  so 
that  the  condition  of  every  part  may  often  be  verified  in  detail, 
and  also  so  arranged  as  to  admit  of  repairs  in  case  of  need.  5. 
All  of  the  mechanical  arrangements  of  the  mine  must  be  simple, 
enduring,  and  strong  enough  to  resist  shocks  from  friendly  vessels, 


598 

and  from  the  explosion  of  neighboring  mines  ;  also,  special  pre- 
cautions against  twisting  and  undue  depression  by  currents  must 
be  taken  for  all  floating  parts.  6.  Every  practicable  auxiliary  ex- 
pedient should  be  adopted. 

4464.  Q.  What  is  the  nature  of  attacks  on  submarine  mines 
that  may  be  expected  by  daylight ;  by  night  or  during  a  f og ; 
and  how  should  these  attacks  be  met  ?  A.  By  dayligJit. —^hips 
with  outrigger  frames  or  wire-rope  crinoline  may  try  to  explode, 
at  a  safe  distance,  such  mines  as  may  be  encountered.  Meet  this 
attack  by  delaying  explosion  until  the  torpedo  has  passed  under 
her  bottom.  Finally,  the  crinoline  will  be  swept  away  by  the  first 
explosion,  leaving  the  ship  exposed  among  other  mines  equally 
dangerous.  If  divers  be  sent  forward  to  destroy  the  system,  fire 
a  mine  in  their  vicinity  ;  if  old  hulks  steered  by  electricity,  or 
drifting  rafts  with  grapnels,  switch  off  the  batteries.  Of  course 
the  guns  of  the  forts  will  sweep  the  mine-zones  when  necessary. 
Abbot  believes  that  the  only  successful  method  of  attack  will  be 
by  counter-mines.  This  will  require  steam-launches,  controlled 
by  electricity  or  otherwise,  or  small,  heavily-armored  vessels 
made  for  the  purpose,  to  move  up  to  the  supposed  outer  limit  of 
danger;  plant  from  one  to  four  500-pound  counter-mines  ;  back 
off  and  explode  them,  to  destroy  any  mines  in  the  immediate 
vicinity.  The  vessels  will  then  steam  forward  into  the  vorticaSj 
and  place  one  or  more  buoys,  and  so  on  until  the  channel  is  clear. 
The  fire  from  guns  and  mortars  and  the  movable  torpedoes  will 
be  used  against  such  vessels,  and  at  night  new  mines  will  be 
dropped  in  her  buoyed  channel.  By  night  or  during  fog. — The 
attacks  by  night  will  be  made  by  boats  sent  forward  to  do  system- 
atic mischief  and  place  buoys.  The  best  defense  against  such 
boat  attacks  would  be  by  a  flotilla  of  naval  picket  and  torpedo- 
boats  ;  but  when  they  cannot  be  had,  four  useful  auxiliaries  may 
be  employed,  viz. :  fouling-lines,  automatic  action  of  the  guns, 
electric  lights,  and  movable  torpedoes  under  control  from  the 
shore.  - 

4465.  Q.  What  use  is  made  of  vertical  fire  ?  and  mention  some 
of  the  advantages  of  this  kind  of  fire  in  seacoast  defense.  A. 
In  coast  defense,  and  sieges  also,  small  mortars  are  now  being 
adopted  for  field  service.  The  blow  is  struck  precisely  where 
armor  protection  is  least  effective,  and  where  shot  and  shell  are 
most  destructive  in  their  effect.  It  cannot  be  silenced,  even  on 
land,  when  the  mortars  are  properly  covered.  The  greatly  in-, 
creased  precision  of  modern  vertical  fire,  owing  to  rifling, 
superior  construction  and  mounting,  range-finding,  and  the  fact 
that  mortars  are  cheaper  than  guns,  renders  it  an  exceedingly 
valuable  ally,  but  not  a  substitute  for  the  fire  obtained  from 
guns. 


SPECIAL   QUESTION'S.  599 


EXPLOSIVES. 


4466.  Q^  What  is  gunpowder,  and  what  proportions  of  the  sev- 
eral ingredients  have  been  generally  adopted  as  giving  the  best 
results  ?  A.  It  is  a  very  intimate  mixture  of  nitre,  charcoal,  and 
sulphur.  The  proportions  adopted  are  75  parts  of  nitre,  15  parts 
of  charcoal,  and  10  parts  of  sulphur. 

4467.  Q.  Enumerate  the  special  powders  used  in  the  service  of 
guns  of  different  calibre  in  the  United  States  Army,  and  explain 
the  objects  sought  to  be  obtained  thereby.  A.  Mammoth,  Hex- 
agonal, Sphero-hexagonal,  I.E.,  and  Brown  Prismatic.  The  ob- 
ject sought  is  to  regulate  the  rate  of  combustion  so  as  to  reduce 
the  strains  on  the  gun  as  much  as  possible,  while  at  the  same 
time  preserving  high  initial  velocity. 

4468.  Q.  What  is  Cocoa,  or  Brown  Prismatic  Powder?  How 
does  it  differ  from  ordinary  gunpowder  ?  What  are  the  advan- 
tages claimed  for  this  powder,  and  to  what  are  they  due  ?  A.  It 
is  a  powder  in  the  form  of  perforated  hexagonal  prisms,  cocoa- 
colored,  introduced  into  Germany  in  1882,  which  gives  results 
superior  in  every  respect  to  those  obtained  with  ordinary  cannon 
powders,  from  which  it  differs  :  1.  In  the  proportion  of  its  ingre- 
dients ;  2.  In  containing  hrown  instead  of  black  charcoal ;  3.  It 
burns  much  more  slowly.  The  advantages  are  high  initial  veloc- 
ity to  the  projectile,  with  relatively  low  pressures  on  the  walls  of 
the  gun,  and  these  are  due  :  1.  To  the  form  of  the  grain  ;  2.  To 
the  size  of  the  grain  ;  3.  To  the  great  density  of  the  grain  ;  4.  To 
the  hardness  of  the  grain  ;  5.  To  the  small  percentage  of  sulphur; 
6.  To  easy  inflammability  of  the  charcoal,  or  carbohydrates ;  7. 
To  the  relatively  great  heat  evolved  ;  8.  To  the  simplicity  of  the 
chemical  reaction. 

4469.  Q.  Enumerate  the  properties  of  good  gunpowder  ;  state 
which  property  exercises  the  greatest  influence  upon  the  general 
character  of  the  powder,  and  explain  why.  A.  It  should  be  com- 
posed of  hard  angular  grains,  which  do  not  soil  the  fingers  ;  of 
-perfectly  uniform  dark-gray  color,  free  from  dust,  and  leaving 
no  residue  or  foulness  when  a  gramme  is  flashed  on  copper  or 
porcelain,  of  the  proper  specific  gravity  ;  should  not  absorb  more 
than  .5  to  1.5^  of  moisture,  and  give  the  required  initial  velocity 
with  not  more  than  the  maximum  strain.  Form  and  size  of 
grain  exercise  the  greatest  influence,  as  they  regulate  the  time 
of  burning  and  hence  the  velocity  of  emission,  and  this  governs 
the  pressure.     The  density  is  also  an  important  factor. 

4470.  Q.  How  is  the  specific  gravity  of  gunpowder  determined, 
and  on  what  principle  does  this  process  depend  ?  A.  By  means 
of  the  densimeter.  The  globe  and  nozzle  having  been  carefully 
cleaned,  the  tip  of  the  latter  is  immersed  in  the  mercury,  the 
lower  stop-cock  closed,  all  the  others  opened,  and  the  air  ex- 
hausted from  the  globe  and  tube  by  means  of  the  air-pump.    As 


V^J 


600  THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S   EXAMIl^ER. 

soon  as  the  vacuum-gauge  indicates  a  perfect  (or  nearly  perfect) 
vacuum  the  lower  stop-cock  is  opened,  and  as  soon  as"^  the  mer- 
cury, rising  in  the  tube,  becomes  stationary,  it  is  again  closed. 
Air  is  then  admitted  to  the  top  of  the  tube  by  opening  the  stop- 
cock attached  to  the  catch-bottle.  The  other  stop-cocks  of  the 
globe  and  tube  are  then  closed,  the  globe  disconnected,  the  nozzle 
removed,  and  all  traces  of  mercury  brushed  off.  The  globe,  filled 
with  mercury,  is  then  weighed  and  the  weight  noted  {W).  The 
globe  is  cleaned,  the  sample  of  powder  (^^0  (at  Artillery  school 
9  oz.)  placed  therein,  and  in  operations  just  described  the  mer- 
cury raised  to  exactly  the  same  point  as  before.  The  globe,  con- 
taining powder  and  mercury,  is  weighed  and  the  weight  noted 
{W).  Then  :  d  =  density  of  the  sample  of  powder  ;  D  =  den- 
sity of  mercury,  corresponding  to  the  temperature  ;  w  W  and  W\ 
as  indicated  ;  D  :d  ::  W—  (W  —  w)  :w.  This  depends  on  the 
principle  that  the  specific  gravities  of  two  substances  are  propor- 
tional to  the  weights  of  equal  volumes  of  those  substances. 

4471.  Q.  State  the  relative  advantages  and  disadvantages  in 
using  potassium  chlorate  as  a  substitute  for  nitre  in  gunpowder. 
A.  The  advantage  obtained  in  the  superior  explosive  power  fails 
to  affect  the  danger  attending  manufacture,  storage,  and  manipu- 
lation. 

4472.  Q.  Explain  the  difference  between  an  explosive  mixture 
and  an  explosive  compound.  A.  The  former  is  merely  the  inti- 
mate mechanical  mixture  of  certain  ingredients,  which  can  be 
again  separated  more  or  less  completely  by  mechanical  means, 
not  involving  chemical  action.  The  latter  is  one  in  which  chem- 
ical combination  occurs  so  that  each  explosive  molecule  contains 
the  combustible  and  supporter  of  combustion  in  closest  possible 
union. 

4473.  Q.  "What  is  a  nitro-substitution  compound  ?  Enumerate 
the  more  important  explosives  of  this  class  that  have  been  pro- 
posed for  military  purposes,  A.  One  in  which  part  of  the  hydro- 
gen in  the  original  compound  is  replaced  by  its  equivalent  of 
NO2  ;  guncotton,  nitro-glycerine,  and  their  derivatives. 

4474.  Q.  To  what  causes  were  the  first  unsuccessful  efforts  to 
make  stable  guncotton  due?  A.  To  the  failure  to  purify  the 
cotton  perfectly  ;  or  to  the  use  of  weak  acids  ;  or  to  too  short  an 
immersion,  so*  that  the  conversion  was  incomplete ;  or  to  the 
failure  to  remove  the  acids  completely  from  the  guncotton,  due 
to  the  fact  that  the  cotton-fibres  were  not  cut  up  into  short 
lengths.  The  improved  process,  due  to  Abel,  consists  in  pulp- 
ing the  cotton  after  it  has  been  immersed  in  the  acids  and 
washed. 

4475.  Q.  Give  an  outline  of  Von  Lenk's  process  of  making  gun- 
cotton.  A.  It  consisted  in  :  1.  The  cleansing  and  perfect  de- 
siccation of  the  cotton  ;  3.  The  employment  of  the  strongest  acids, 
nitric  and  sulphuric,  obtainable  in  commerce  ;  3.  The  steeping  of 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  601 

the  cotton  in  a  fresh  strong  mixture  of  acids  after  its  first  immer- 
sion and  partial  conversion  into  guncotton  :  4.  The  contiimanop 
o  the  steeping  for  24  to  48  hours";  5.  The  thorough  p"at?on 
''^^^^/''^'^^i^'''''  '^  produced,  from  every  trace  of  frie  acid 

S  L  \S'  ?""^?erate  the  several  service-tests  by  means  of 
which  the  chemical  character  of  guncotton  is  determined  A 
1.  Determination  of  moisture  in  guncotton  ;  2.  Determination  of 
ash  of  guncotton  ;  3.  Test  for  the  pressure  of  free  acid  :  4  Heat 
or  stability  test;  5.  Solubility  test;  6.  Test  for  unconverted 
cotton;  7.  Test  for  nitrogen  in  guncotton  ;  8.  Determination  of 
alkaline  substances  in  guncotton. 

4477.  Q.  How  is  finished  guncotton  prepared  for  testing  ?  A 
A  disk  or  block  of  guncotton  is  split,  and  then,  by  gentle  rasp- 
ing or  scraping,  about  600  grains  are  removed  from  the  centre  of 
the  mass.  These  are  placed  in  a  litre-flask,  and  a  half  litre  of 
distilled  water,  at  39°  C,  poured  upon  it,  after  which  the  flask  is 
covered  and  shaken  violently  for  two  or  three  minutes.  Its  con- 
tents are  then  filtered  through  muslin,  and  then,  wrapped  in  the 
filter,  subjected  to  a  moderate  pressure  in  a  hand-press.  This 
operation  is  repeated  three  times,  when  the  sample  is  dried  and 
taken  out  in  the  form  of  a  cake,  which  is  broken  up  into  fine 
particles  and  rubbed  between  the  hands.  About  200  grains  are 
then  placed  in  a  paper  tray,  which  is  placed  upon  the  top  of  an 
oven  heated  to  120°  F.,  care  being  taken  that  the  tray  does  not 
come  in  contact  with  the  walls  of  the  oven.  The  mass  is  thus 
heated  with  constant  stirring  for  fifteen  minutes.  When  per- 
fectly dry,  the  sample  is  transferred  to  a  covered  glass  funnel 
with  roughened  sides,  the  neck  of  which  is  connected  with  a  bel- 
lows through  an  ordinary  aspirator-bottle.  The  mouth  of  the 
funnel  is  covered  with  a  piece  of  muslin,  and  by  means  of  the 
bellows  the  finest  particles  of  the  guncotton  are  blown  to  the 
sides  of  the  funnel,  from  which  they  are  carefully  removed. 
After  these  particles  have  been  exposed  to  the  atmosphere  of  a 
normally  dry  and  warm  room  for  two  hours,  the  sample  is  ready 
for  testing. 

4478.  Q.  Upon  what  principles  do  the  heat,  solubility,  and 
nitrogen  tests  depend  ?  A.  Heat. — When  potassium  iodide  is 
decomposed  in  the  presence  of  starch,  the  iodide  is  liberated  and 
reacts  with  the  starch  to  form  a  colored  body.  /Solubility. — 
The  lower  cellulose  nitrates  are  soluble  in  a  mixture  of  ether  and 
alcohol,  while  the  tri-nitro-cellulose  is  insoluble  in  such  a  mixt- 
ure. Niti^ogen. — When  cellulose  nitrates  are  treated  with  pure 
concentrated  sulphuric  acid  in  the  presence  of  mercury,  they  are 
decomposed,  all  of  the  nitrogen  being  evolved  in  the  form  of 
nitrogen  oxides. 

4479.  Q.  Give  an  outline  of  Sobrero's  process  of  making  nitro- 
glycerine. A.  One  half  ounce  of  anhydrous  glycerine  is  poured, 
with  constant  stirring,  into  a  mixture  of  two  ounces  of  concen- 


602 

• 
trated  sulphuric  acid  (sp.  gr.  1.845)  and  one  ounce  of  fuming 
nitric  acid  (sp.  gr.  1.52),  the  temperature  of  the  mixture  being 
kept  below  24°  C.  by  external  cooling  with  ice  ;  and  after  the  oily- 
drops  have  formed  on  the  surface  the  mixture  is  poured,  with 
constant  stirring,  into  fifty  ounces  of  cold  water.  The  nitro- 
glycerine will  settle  at  the  bottom  of  the  vessel,  so  that  the  super- 
natant liquid  may  be  decanted  and  the  product  purified  by  wash- 
ing it  with  clean  water,  and  drying  it,  in  small  portions,  in  a 
vapor-bath. 

4480.  Q.  Give  an  outline  of  the  French  method  of  making 
nitro-glycerine  as  practised  at  Vouges.  A.  Two  mixtures  are 
first  prepared — one  a  mixture  of  nitric  and  sulphuric  acids  in 
equal  proportions,  the  other  a  mixture  of  one  part  of  glycerine  to 
3.2  parts  of  sulphuric  acid.  These  are  thoroughly  cooled  and 
mixed  together  in  the  proportion  of  5.6  parts  of  nitric-sulphuric 
mixture  to  4.2  parts  of  sulpho-glycerine  mixture.  The  whole  is 
placed  in  an  earthen  pot,  surrounded  only  by  the  atmosphere, 
and  the  operation  is  left  to  take  place,  which  it  does  quietly,  the 
nitro-glycerine  separating  as  formed  and  rising  to  the  surface  of 
the  liquid  mass,  from  which  it  is  eventually  skimmed  ofl!,  washed 
and  purified. 

4481.  Q.  How  should  frozen  nitro-glycerine  and  dynamite  be 
thawed  ?  A.  Nitro-glycerine  may  be  conveniently  and  safely 
thawed  by  placing  the  vessel  containing  it  in  another  containing 
water  not  hotter  than  100°  F.  Dynamite. — The  best  way  is  to 
open  the  package  and  place  it  in  a  room  where  the  temperature 
does  not  exceed  212°  F.  and  allow  it  to  thaw  gradually.  The  next 
best  way  is  to  place  the  cartridges  in  a  water-tight  can  (tin  or 
copper),  and  place  this  can  inside  of  another  vessel  containing 
boiling-hot  (not  boiling)  water. 

4482.  Q.  What  is  dynamite,  and  how  may  dynamite  be  classi- 
fied ?  Give  an  example  of  each  class.  A.  Dynamite  is  nitro- 
glycerine absorbed,  and  held  through  the  force  of  capillarity  by 
some  porous,  inexplosive  substance,  such  as  charcoal,  paper, 
silica,  etc.  It  is  classified  into  :  1.  Dynamites  with  an  inert  base; 
2.  Dynamites  with  an  active  base.  Kieselguhr  is  of  the  first 
class.  The  second  class  is  subdivided,  according  as  the  base  is  : 
1.  Combustible,  like  charcoal — carbo-dynamite  ;  2.  An  explosive 
mixture,  chlorate  or  nitrate — dynamite  No.  2 ;  3.  An  explosive 
compound — explosive  gelatine. 

4483.  Q.  Enumerate  the  principal  characteristics  of  nitro-gly- 
cerine and  dynamite.  A.  Nitro-glycerine^  at  ordinary  tempera- 
tures, is  an  oily  liquid  (sp.  gr.  1.6).  Freshly  made,  by  the  Mowbray 
process,  it  is  creamy  white  and  opaque,  but  becomes  transparent 
and  nearly  colorless.  When  produced  by  "skimming"  it  is 
transparent,  but  is  often  found  in  commerce  to  have  a  yellow  or 
brownish-yellow  color.     Although  slightly  soluble  in  water  it  does 

,iiot  naix  with, it,  and  isninaffected  by  cold  water.     It  has  a  sweet, 


SPECIAL  QUESTION'S.  603 

'  PJi^gent  aromatic  taste,  and  is  an  active  poison.  It  is  soluble  in 
alcohol  benzine    carbon  disulphide,  ether,  and  chloroform   and 

-sparingly  so  m  glycerine,  and  is  rapidly  decomposed  in  alkaline 

:  sulphides  Freshly-made  opaque  nitro-glycerine  freezes  at  from 
3-5  F  while  transparent  freezes  at  39-40°  F.;  in  both  cases  to 
a  white  crystalline  mass,  and  remains  in  that  state  even  when 
exposed  for  some  time  to  a  temperature  sensibly  above  its  freez- 

,  ing-point.  Dynamite  is  in  a  high  degree  insensible  to  shocks 
and  can  be  burned  over  a  fire  without  exploding. 

4484.  Q  How  may  smokeless  powders  be  classified  ?  State  the 
relative  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  each  class.  A  1st 
those  derived  from  picric  acid  and  the  picrates;  2d,  those  having 
ammonium  nitrate  as  a  principal  constituent ;  3d,  those  consist- 
ing essentially  of  nitro-cotton,  or  other  kind  of  nitro-cellulose 
specially  treated  with  the  view  of  producing  a  slower-burning 
substance,  or  of  nitroglycerine  and  nitro-cotton.  The  advantages 
and  disadvantages  generally  applicable  to  each  class  are :  Ad- 

.  mnto^e^.— Approximate  smokelessness,  completeness  of  combus- 
tion, high  and  regular  velocities  with  moderate  and  uniform 
pressures.     Disadvantages.— T\\q  pressure  acts  along  the  walls 

•  of  the  gun,  a  lubricant  is  necessary,  lacks  stability  under  varying 
conditions  of  climate,  etc. 

4485.  Q.  Enumerate  the  precautions  to  be  observed  in  handling, 
transporting,  and  storing  high  explosives.  A.  Handli7ig  should 
be  done  under  the  immediate  supervision  of  persons  thoroughly 

.familiar  with  the  proper  methods  to  be  pursued,  and  who  will 
;  exercise  great  care  and  judgment.  Transpm-tation  should  be 
.  packed  in  light  wooden  boxes  properly  marked.  On  steamers, 
put  them  in  a  well- ventilated  place  remote  from  the  engine.  On 
.railways,  if  the  weather  be  hot,  there  should  be  good  ventilation 

•  and  ice  in  the  car,  so  placed  that  water  cannot  reach  the  explo- 
sives. In  winter  protect  it  from  freezing,  if  possible.  Packing  in 
straw  or  sawdust  may  be  useful.  Under  no  circumstances  should 
cases  of  fuses  be  in  the  same  car,  or  vicinity  of  the  explosive. 
Storage. — At  military  posts,  in  ordinary  service  magazines,  over 
which  are  erected  light  wooden  roofs,  so  as  to  insure  a  draught 
of  air  during  the  hot  summer.  The  usual  precautions  against 
fire  and  for  storage  of  ordinary  powder  must  be  taken  ;  and 
neither  fuses,  caps,  nor  detonators  of  any  kind  should  ever  be 
allowed  in  the  magazine  containing  the  explosives.  Before  being 
placed  in  the  magazine  the  boxes  should  be  given  a  coat  of  paint 
or  shellac,  to  protect  them  from  moisture.  They  should  also  be 
placed  on  skids,  and  the  space  between  the  skids  partially  filled 
with  sawdust,  to  absorb  any  exuding  nitroglycerine.  If  any  powder 
should  be  spilled  on  the  floor  or  nitro-glycerine  exude  and  be 
absorbed  by  the  sawdust,  it  should  be  removed  at  once  and  burned. 
The  boxes  should  be  turned  over  every  month  or  two,  and  if  kept 


604 

long  on  hand  they  should  be  opened  and  the  powder  tested  from 
time  to  time. 

4486.  Q.  Explain  briefly  how  to  prepare  a  charge  of  high 
explosive  to  be  fired  by  electricity— the  precautions  necessary  as 
to  the  connecting-wires  and  the  igniting-apparatus.  A.  Special 
care  is  taken  that  the  fuse  is  deeply  imbedded  in  the  pinning- 
charge.  Two  lines  are  used,  one  known  as  the  conducting- wire, 
which  cmiducts  the  current  to  the  point  of  application  ;  and  the 
other,  or  return-wire,  completes  the  circuit  back  to  the  igniter. 
Any  good  conductor,  insulated  or  not,  depending  on  circumstances, 
may  be  used.  The  best  is  a  perfectly  clean  copper  wire  covered 
with  india-rubber.  The  ends  of  the  wire  should  be  perfectly 
clean  and  joined  to  the  fuse-wires  by  bending  them  back  and 
twisting  them  snugly  around  each  other.  The  other  ends  are 
attached  to  the  igniter,  the  best  kind  being  Lafiin  &  Eand's 
Magneto  No.  3.  Precautions. — Never  connect  the  fuse- wires  with 
the  connecting- wires  until  you  are  absolutely  sure  that  the  igniter 
ends  of  the  connecting-wires  are  disconnected  from  the  machine 
or  battery.  The  connecting-wires  should  never  be  attached  to 
the  terminals  until  everything  is  in  readiness  for  the  blast. 

4487.  Q.  Enumerate  the  conditions  to  be  fulfilled  by  a  military 
explosive.  A.  It  must  be  powerful,  insensible  to  the  shock  of 
projectiles,  plastic,  easily  and  safely  exploded,  and  as  stable  as 
possible,  so  that  it  can  be  kept  without  alteration  when  in  damp 
places. 

4488.  Q.  Give  a  brief  r4sum4  of  some  of  the  principal  experi- 
ments with  a  view  of  adopting  high  explosives  as  bursting  charges 
for  shells.  A.  Ouncotton.—ln  1864  an  English  committee  ex- 
perimented with  dry  long-staple  guncotton,  and  most  of  the  shots 
w^ere  successful.  The  experiments,  three  years  later,  with  com- 
pressed-pulp guncotton  were  unsuccessful.  In  1882  Germany 
made  similar  experiments,  in  order  to  determine  the  possibility  of 
using  large  charges  of  guncotton  in  the  21-c.  mortar.  They  were 
successful.  In  1884  Commodore  Folger,  U.  S.  Navy,  experimented 
with  shells  filled  with  guncotton  saturated  with  water,  a  one- 
fourth  inch  layer  of  oakum  being  at  the  base  of  the  shell.  These  ex- 
periments have  since  been  continued  at  the  U.  S.  Naval  Ordnance 
Proving-grounds.  It  has  been  proved  that  it  is  possible  to  fire 
shell  loaded  with  guncotton,  wet  or  dry,  from  the  ordinary 
powder-guns  using  service  charges  under  service  conditions. 
Nitro- glycerine. — ^In  1885  unsatisfactory  experiments  were  made 
with  a  shell  wherein  the  bursting-charge  of  nitro-glycerine  was 
made  during  the  flight  of  the  projectile,  and  fired  upon  impact. 
In  1887  Smolianinoff's  secret  method,  whereby  the  nitro-glycerine 
was  first  rendered  insensible  by  treating  it  with  a  liquid,  was 
successfully  tried  at  the  Torpedo  Station,  and  also  at  the  U.  S. 
Ordnance  Proving-grounds.  Dynamite.  —Experiments  were  made 
with  dynamite  in  1867  in  Sweden,  1870-71  in  Germany,  1874  at 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  605 

the  U.  S.  Torpedo  Station,  and  in  1886  with  the  Graydon  shell- 
and  It  was  found  that  it  could  be  fired  with  small  charges  of 
powder.  Explosive  Gelatine.— The  U.  S.  Ordnance  Board  made 
unsuccessful  experiments  with  it  in  1883.  Helloffite.—Tha  Gur- 
sou  experiments  with  it  were  successful ;  but  it  is  not  so  good 
as  guncotton.  MelUnite.— Recent  experiments  with  it  by  the 
French  authorities  have  been  highly  successful. 

GUNNEBY. 

4489.  Q.  Name  and  describe  briefly  the  gauge  used  to  deter- 
inine  powder-pressure  in  a  gun.  A.  The  Crusher-gauge.  It  con- 
sists of  a  removable  steel  cylinder,  of  the  same  diameter  as  a  vent- 
bush,  having  an  interior  chamber.  A  nozzle  containing  a  piston 
screws  into  the  inner  end.  A  copper  disk  (.5  in.  long,  -^  sq.  in. 
in  sectional  area),  which  is  lightly  held  in  the  middle  of  the 
chamber  by  a  piece  of  watch-spring,  permitting  free  lateral  expan- 
sion, is  first  placed  in  the  cylinder.  The  nozzle  containing  the 
piston  is  then  screwed  in,  and  a  small  brass  cup  is  put  below  the 
piston  to  act  as  a  gas-check.  After  the  discharge  of  the  piece, 
the  amount  of  compression  of  the  disk  is  measured  with  a  mi- 
crometer, and  the  corresponding  pressure  obtained  from  the  re- 
ference-table. The  hard-steel  anvil  is  no  longer  used -with  this 
instrument. 

4490.  Q.  What  is  the  usual  basis  of  comparison  of  guns  with 
each  other?  A.  The  amount  of  work  producible  with  safety  per 
ton  iveight  of  gun. 

4491.  Q.  State  the  advantages  of  rifled  over  smooth-bore  guns. 
A.  Greater  accuracy,  increased  range,  greater  energy,  bursting- 
charges  of  shell  increased,  better  penetration,  simpler-range 
tables,  action  of  percussion-fuse  simplified. 

4492.  Q.  How  can  greater  energy  be  obtained  from  a  gun 
without  increase  of  calibre?  A.  By  improvements  in  the 
strength  of  the  gun,  longer  bores,  and  higher  charges  of  slower 
powder. 

4493.  Q.  Define  steel.  A.  Steel  is  an  alloy  of  iron,  cast,  while 
in  a  fluid  state,  into  a  malleable  ingot. 

4494.  Q.  What  is  the  distinction  between  mild  or  low  steel  and 
high  steel  ?  A.  The  distinction  is  in  the  amount  of  carbon,  mild 
steel  containing  less  than  high  steel.  The  former  is  used  for 
guns,  the  latter  for  tools,  etc.  ^ 

4495.  Q.  What  in  general  is  the  effect  on  the  elastic  limit, 
tenacity,  and  elongation  of  an  increase  of  carbon  in  steel  ?  A. 
Small  differences  in  the  proportion  of  carbon  make  very  great 
differences  in  the  elasticity,  tenacity,  hardness,  and  elongation  ; 
the  first  three  being  increased^  and  the  fourth  decreased,  before 
fracture.  .  ,  ,         ,        .         ,  , 

4496.  Q.  What  kind  of  steel,  with  respect  to  carbon,  is  used  for 


606  THE   ARMY   OFFICER^S  EXAMINER.   ' 

gun-forgings  ?    A.  That  containing  about  0.35  to  0.5  percentage 
of  carbon. 

4497.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  crucible  process  of  making  steel. 
A.  Carefully  weighed  proportions  of  wrought-iron  (with  some- 
times a  little  steel  or  good  cast-iron  of  known  composition),  pow- 
dered charcoal,  and  spiegeleisen  are  placed  in  a  crucible  capable 
of  holding  60-100  lbs.  A  number  of  such  crucibles,  fitted  with  fire- 
clay covers,  are  placed  in  a  specially  constructed  furnace,  and 
subjected  to  a  high  degree  of  temperature  for  2i  to  3  hours, 
after  which  their  melted  contents  are  poured  into  the  same 
ingot  mould  as  rapidly  as  possible.  The  carbon  alloys  with  the 
iron  to  form  steel,  and  the  manganese  in  the  spiegeleisen  reduces 
any  ferrous  oxide  present.  The  liquid  clay  which  forms  on  top 
and  the  cover  prevent  oxidation. 

4498.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  open-hearth  process  of  making 
steel.  A.  The  hearth  is  spoon-shaped,  sloping  down  to  a  point 
where  the  tapping-hole  is  situated,  and  covered  with  partly-fused 
sand.  Good  cast  iron  is  placed  therein,  and  subjected  to  the  heat 
and  flame  of  the  low-roofed  reverberatory  furnace.  When  the 
iron  is  sufficiently  fluid,  steel-scrap  or  wrought-iron,  previously 
warmed  by  the  waste  heat,  is  thrown  in,  and  when  well  melted 
down  a  further  reduction  in  carbon  is  obtained  by  the  addition 
of  known  "quantities  of  good  Spanish  haematite  ore.  During  the 
process  then  occurring,  termed  boiling,  tests  are  made  and  ore 
or  iron  added  until  the  desired  conditions  obtain.  Just  before 
pouring  out,  the  addition  of  the  proper  quantity  of  speigeleisen, 
or  ferro-manganese,  is  made.  This  is  previously  heated,  and 
scattered  over  and  stirred  up  in  the  steel,  and  after  its  thorough 
incorporation  two  spoon-tests  are  taken,  the  tap-hole  opened,  and 
the  steel  run  into  a  warmed  large  iron  ladle  lined  with  fire-clay, 
and  the  ladle,  by  means  of  a  powerful  crane,  is  carried  to  the 
ingot  mould,  to  which  the  steel  is  transferred.  Sometimes  the 
steel  is  run  into  the  mould  without  the  use  of  the  ladle. 

4499.  Q.  Describe  briefly  the  Bessemer  process  of  making 
steel.  A.  The  steel  is  made  in  an  egg-shaped  iron  receptacle, 
called  a  converter,  revolving  on  trunnions,  one  of  which  has  teeth 
to  work  in  a  gearing  for  turning  it  up  or  down,  while  the  other  is 
hollow  to  admit  of  the  passage  of  a  pipe  that  communicates  with 
a  large  number  of  small  holes  fitted  in  the  fire-bricks  in  the  bot- 
tom of  the  vessel,  and  through  which  a  powerful  blast  of  air  is 
forced.  The  converter  is  also  provided  with  a  short  chimney  on 
top,  and  is  lined  with  a  very  refractory  material  called  gamster. 
In  order  to  make  the  steel,  the  converter  is  turned  down,  melted 
cast-iron  poured  in  until  it  is  one  eighth  full,  the  blast  turned  on, 
and  the  converter  turned  up.  When  the  flame  indicates  to  the 
eye,  by  certain  spectroscopic  lines,  that  the  proper  moment 
has  arrived,  manganese  is  added,  the  "  blow  "  continued  for  less 


SPECIAL   QUESTIONS.  607 

than  a  minute,  and  then  the  steel  is  run  off  and  cast  into  an 
ingot,  the  same  as  in  the  open-hearth  process. 

4500.  Q.  State  how  a  steel  ingot  is  forged.  A.  It  is  reheated, 
carefully  inspected,  cracks  cut  out,  and  either  hammered,  rolled, 
or  pressed  to  the  required  shape,  great  care  being  taken  about 
the  temperature. 

4501.  Q.  State  how  a  steel  ingot,  after  forging,  is  tempered, 
and  discuss  the  effect  of  tempering  on  the  forging.  A.  The  in- 
got is  subjected  to  a  certain  degree  of  heat,  and  then  slowly 
cooled,  generally  in  rape-oil.  Tempering,  which  varies  with  the 
amount  of  carbon'in  the  steel,  the  temperature,  and  the  nature 
of  the  cooling  material,  increases  the  tenacity  and  elasticity  at 
the  expense  of  the  elongation  before  fracture.  As  it  alters  the 
specific  gravity  slightly,  often  producing  warping  and  surface- 
cracks  in  large  masses,  the  effect  is  sometimes  modified  by  after- 
wards heating  the  mass  in  boiling  tallow  for  several  days,  and 
then  allowing  it  to  cool  slowly. 

4502.  Q.  State  the  general  advantages  of  a  wire  gun.  A.  The 
tension  of  the  wire  can  be  well  adjusted  in  winding  on,  and,  as  it 
is  thin  and  wound  many  times,  each  part  can  be  strained  almost 
to  its  elastic  limit  on  firing  ;  if  flaws  exist,  they  can  generally  be 
detected,  and  steel  in  the  form  of  wire  can  be  made  to  have  the 
greatest  elastic  limit  of  any  known  material.  The  wire,  however, 
does  not  give  any  assistance  for  longitudinal  strength. 

4503.  Q.  Explain  how  the  longitudinal  tension  in  a  built-up 
gun  is  provided  for.  A.  By  firmly  locking  the  parts  together 
and  placing  the  breech  mechanism  in  the  jacket. 

4504.  Q.  How  have  the  contour-lines  of  a  gun  been  changed 
by  the  adoption  of  slow-burning  powders  yielding  only  moderate 
pressures  ?  A.  The  guns  are  made  longer,  the  metal  at  the  breech 
reduced,  and  at  the  muzzle  increased,  so  that  the  line  is  longer 
and  flatter. 

4505.  Q.  What  mechanical  precautions  must  be  taken  in  mak- 
ing the  grooves  in  rifles  ?  A.  To  make  a  smooth,  unbroken  sur- 
face, devoid  of  small  cracks  and  tool-marks,  numerous  shallow 
and  rounded  grooves  are  to  be  preferred. 

4506.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  uniform  twist  and 
an  increasing  twist  of  rifling  ?  A.  Uniform  twist  imparts  angu- 
lar velocity  to  the  projectile  very  rapidly  at  first,  but  adds  little 
to  it  during  the  latter  part  of  its  passage  down  the  bore.  In- 
creasing twist  gives  rotation  gradually,  with  nearly  uniform 
pressure.  A  combination  is  now  used,  the  part  nearest  the 
muzzle  being  uniform. 

4507.  Q.  What  is  the  vent  of  a  gun,  and  m  general  how  are 
vents  placed  ?  A.  The  opening,  which  must  exist  in  the  cham- 
ber of  the  gun  for  communicating  fire  to  the  charge.  Vents  may 
be  radial  or  axial ;  the  former  entering  the  bore  at  right  angles, 
or  nearly  so,  to  the  axis  of  the  gun,  and  either  forward,  .4  of  the 


608 


THE  ARMY  OFFICER  S  EXAMINER. 


length  of  the  cartridge  from  its  front  end,  or  rear,  near  the  junc- 
tion of  the  cylindrical  part  of  the  chamber  with  the  flat  end  of 
the  bore.     The  latter  is  in  prolongation  of  the  axis. 

4508.  What  are  the  form  and  dimensions  of  the  chamber  of  a 
high-power  gun?  A.  It  is  cylindrical  and  considerably  larger 
than  the  bore. 

4509.  Q.  Give  the  calibres  of  B.  L.  cannon  of  the  mountain, 
field,  siege,  and  seacoast  artillery,  U.  S.  Army,  and  what  you  re- 
member in  regard  to  the  weight  of  pieces,  weight  and  kind  of 
powder-charge,  weight  of  projectile  for  each  piece;  also,  what 
you  remember  in  regard  to  the  energy  and  penetration  in  steel 
armor  at  the  muzzle  for  each  piece  of  the  siege  and  seacoast 
artillery.     A. : — 


4i 

Powder-charge. 

0-1      . 

O  D 

At  the  Muzzle. 

£sR 

Kind. 

W 

''P^ 

11 

Wt. 
Lbs. 

Kind. 

Energy. 
Foot- 
tons. 

Penetr.* 
Inches. 

1.65 

IHotchkiss  rifle, 

f     steel. 

121 

5.5  oz. 

Mortar. 

1.95 

3 

218 

14  oz. 

I.K. 

12 

3.2 

Rifle,  St.,  mod.  '85 

829 

3.5 

Sph.-hex. 

13.5 

3.2 

"      -        "     '90 

805 

3.5 

*' 

13.5 

3.6 

Rifle,  steel. 

1181 

^i\ 

" 

20 

3.6 

Mortar,  steel. 

244 

15  oz. 

" 

20 

5 

Rifle,  steel 

3660 

12.5 

Sph.-hex. 

45 

1045 

6.2 

7 

Howitzer,  steel. 

3710 

10 

I.K. 

105 

856.9 

3.8 

7 

Moitar, 

1732 
Tons. 

5.5 

125 

412.5 

2.2 

8 

Rifle,  steel. 

14.5 

125 

Brown  pris. 

300 

7907.5 

16 

10 

30 

250 

" 

575 

1.5548 

20.4 

12 

Model,  1888. 

52 

4.50 

" 

1000 

27040 

20.9 

12 

"      1891. 

57 

520 

" 

1000 

30570 

27.1 

16 

Rifle,  steel. 

125 

1060 

" 

2370 

64084 

33.8 

12 

Mortar,  cast-iron, 

J    800 

liooot 

hooped  witti 
steel. 

14.25 

80 

i( 

5769.7 

8.2 

12 

Mortar,  steel. 

13 

105 

" 

j    800 

liooot 

7206.9 

9.7 

*  In  steel  armor. 

+  This  shell  is  used  for  a  range  up  to  2^  miles,  with  reduced  charges. 

4510.  Q.  "What,  briefly,  is  the  French  fermature,  and  in  which 
B.  L.  U.  S.  Army  guns  is  this  fermature  used  ?  A.  It  consists 
in  field  and  siege  guns,  principally  of  a  breech-block  and  a  car- 
rier-ring. In  larger  guns  the  carrier-ring  is  replaced  by  a  tray, 
or  console.  The  interrupted  screw  is  used  to  lock  the  block  in 
the  firing  position.  The  other  parts  are  the  spindle,  the  obtu- 
rator, the  lever,  the  fixed  handle,  the  hinge-pin,  the  latch-pin, 
and  stops.    It  is  used  in  all  field,  siege,  and  seacoast  guns. 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  609 

4511.  Give  a  brief  description  of  the  De  Baiige  gas-check.  A 
It  consists  of  a  compressed  pad  of  asbestos  and  tallow  encased 
in  canvas  enclosed  between  two  steel  plates,  acted  on  by  a  circu- 
lar steel  block  with  mushroom  head  at  the  end  of  the  bore.  The 
head  of  the  spindle,  which  passes  through  the  breech-block,  is 
mushroom-shaped. 

4512.  Q.  What  are  the  trunnions,  and  what  is  their  use  ?  A 
They  are  cylindrical  projections  on  either  side  of  the  gun,  hav- 
ing a  common  axis  perpendicular  to  and  intersecting  the  axis  of 
the  gun  at  a  point  a  little  way  in  front  of  the  centre  of  gravity  of 
the  gun.  They  give  means  of  support  to  the  gun,  transmit 
shock  of  discharge  to  the  carriage,  and  allow  of  easy  alteration 
in  the  elevation  of  the  piece. 

4513.  Q.  When  a  gun  is  too  large  to  be  mounted  on  trunnions, 
how  is  it  mounted  ?    A.  It  is  rigidly  attached  to  its  carriage. 

.4514.  Q.  Explain  the  general  principles  of  pointing  a  gun.  A. 
Giving  the  proper  direction,  by  traversing ;  the  proper  elevation, 
depending  on  the  distance  of  the  object ;  allowing  for  drift  and 
wind  ;  and  when  the  wheels,  as  in  the  case  of  field-guns,  are  not 
on  the  same  level  and  compensating  sigfits  are  not  used,  making 
the  necessary  correction. 

4515.  Q.  Explain  the  "  indirect  system  of  pointing,"  and  give 
a  brief  illustration.  A.  The  method  pursued  when  the  target 
cannot  be  directly  seen  from  the  gun.  The  German  cupola,  in 
which  is  a  small  hole  near  the  top,  at  the  opposite  side  to  the  muz- 
zle of  the  piece,  permitted  obtaining  direction  through  the  hole. 
The  cupola  was  then  revolved  exactly  180°,  elevation  obtained  by 
means  of  the  quadrant,  and  the  gun  fired.  Also,  see  Dyer's 
method  of  pointing  mortars. 

4516.  Q.  Explain  briefly  any  method  by  which  a  garrison  gun 
may  be  pointed  at  a  hidden  target.  A.  By  using  a  depression- 
range  and  position-finder  in  electric  communication  with  the 
battery,  where  is  placed  an  indicating-instrument,  which  auto- 
matically records  the  range  and  direction  of  the  ship  from  each 
group  of  guns.  The  range  and  direction  are  given  by  means  of 
the  elevating-arcs  and  graduated  arcs  on  the  traverse- circle. 

4517.  Q.  What  is  the  jump  of  a  gun  ?  A.  It  is  the  angle  be- 
tween the  line  of  departure  and  the  axis  of  the  piece  before 
firing,  caused  by  the  blow  on  the  elevating-gear  produced  by  the 
friction  of  the  trunnion  against  its  bearing. 

4518.  Q.  How  does  the  weight  of  a  gun  and  carriage  affect 
the  recoil  ?  A.  The  recoil  diminishes  as  the  weight  of  the  gun 
and  carriage  are  increased. 

4519.  Q.  State  briefly  in  how  many  ways  the  recoil  of  guns 
may  be  controlled.  A.  By  raising  a  weight ;  by  the  friction  of 
solids  ;  by  the  resistance  of  liquids ;  by  the  resistance  of  the 
air. 

4530.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  blast  of  a  gun,  and  what  is  the 


610  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMII^ER. 

effect  on  embrasures  ?  A.  The  long  flash  from  the  muzzle  and 
the  rapid  rush  of  the  powder-gas.  The  effect  on  embrasures  is 
very  destructive. 

4521.  Q.  What  are  the  chief  causes  of  inaccuracy  of  fire  ?  A. 
"Want  of  accuracy  in  the  gun  ;  variation  in  the  mounting  and 
drift ;  want  of  uniformity  in  the  ammunition  ;  errors  in  laying  ; 
external  causes,  such  as  wind. 

4522.  Q.  What  is  a  range-finder  ?  Describe  briefly  the  feat- 
ures of  any  range-finder  you  are  familiar  with.  A.  A  range- 
finder  is  an  instrument  used  for  determining  the  range.  They 
generally  depend  on  the  principle  of  the  solution  of  the  right- 
angled  triangle.  The  Berdan,  consisting  of  two  telescopes 
mounted  at  the  extremities  of  a  fixed  base,  one  being  at  right 
angles  to  the  base,  and  the  other  so  connected  with  a  drum  tha* 
when  brought  on  the  object  the  range  is  read  directly  from  the 
drum. 

4523.  Q.  What  is  ricochet-fire,  and  when  is  it  used  ?  A.  It  is 
the  fire  in  which  the  projectile  is  so  fired  that  it  will  bound  along 
the  surface  of  the  ground.  It  was  employed  with  smooth  bores 
for  dismounting  guns  behind  traverses  ;  but  with  rifle  projectiles 
it  is  very  uncertain.  With  considerable  angles  of  descent  there 
is  no  ricochet,  hence  it  is  not  used  at  long  ranges. 

4524.  Q.  Explain  the  Rodman  system  of  obtaining  initial  tpn- 
sion  in  cast-iron  guns.  A.  Rodman  cooled  his  guns  from  the 
interior,  thereby  introducing  a  strain  of  compression  upon  the 
interior  layers  of  the  gun,  such  that  each  one  of  the  indefinitely 
thin  cylinders  composing  the  thickness  of  the  gun  should  be 
brought  to  the  breaking-strain  at  the  same  instant.  Practically, 
this  desired  initial  tension  could  not  be  produced  with  any  de- 
gree of  certainty. 

4525.  Q.  What  three  different  methods  have  been  used  for  con- 
verting the  Rodman  S.  B.  into  M.  L.  R.  ?  A.  1.  The  muzzle  in- 
sertion with  wrought-iron  tube ;  2.  The  breech  insertion  with 
wrought-iron  tube  ;  3.  The  muzzle  insertion  with  steel  tube. 

4526.  Q.  What  are  the  advantages  claimed  for  the  multi- 
charge  gun  ?  A.  Very  high  velocity,  with  low  pressures.  This 
gun  is  built  on  the  accelerating  principle  as  applied  to  the  action 
of  the  powder  upon  the  projectile. 

4527.  Q.  Describe  the  friction-primer  used  in  the  B.  L.  sea- 
coast  guns,  and  explain  how  the  obturation  of  the  powder-gas  is 
effected.  A.  The  case  is  made  of  hard-rolled  brass,  reduced  at 
one  end  to  form  the  shank,  or  part  containing  the  powder-charge. 
The  middle  portion,  or  body,  is  chased  with  a  screw-thread,  either 
entire  or  interrupted,  while  the  other  extremity,  or  head,  is  flat- 
tened so  that  a  wrench  may  be  used  when  required,  either  in  in- 
serting the  primer  or  extracting  it  after  firing;  and  it  is  ignited 
by  a  serrated  wire  acting  upon  friction  composition.  The  gas- 
check  is  either  at  the  top  of  the  shank,  with  a  brass  plug  in  the 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  611 

primer  to  act  as  gas-check,  or  the  metal  at  the  mouth  of  the 
shank  is  made  thin  enough  to  act  as  a  gas-check. 

4528.  Q.  Describe  the  electric-primer  used  in  the  B.  L.  sea- 
coast  guns,  and  explain  how  the  obturation  of  the  powder-gas  is 
effected.  A.  It  consists  of  a  shank,  body,  and  head,  as  described 
in  4527,  and  is  ignited  by  a  platinum  wire  in  an  electric  circuit, 
the  wire  being  wrapped  in  guncotton.  It  contains  an  insulating- 
block,  which  is  driven  against  a  sharp-edged  ring,  in  order  to 
stop  the  flow  of  gas. 

4529.  Q.  Why  is  the  forged  ingot  annealed  before  tempering, 
and  how  is  the  annealing  effected  ?  A.  In  order  to  get  rid  of  the 
internal  tensions  induced  by  forging,  thereby  avoiding  cracks.  It 
is  effected  by  heating  the  ingot  to  a  red  heat  and  allowing  it  to 
cool  slowly. 

4530.  What  is  the  effect  of  oil-tempering  and  annealing  upon 
the  physical  properties  of  steel  ?  A.  Oil-tempering  increases  the 
homogeneity  of  medium  steel,  and  also  increases  its  resistance 
to  percussion ;  or  it  increases  the  elastic  and  tensile  strength 
and  reduces  the  elongation.  Annealing  reduces  the  elastic 
strength  and  restores  the  ductility. 

4531.  Q.  How  are  the  physical  properties  of  metals  deter- 
mined ?  A.  By  subjecting  specimens  to  the  action  of  different 
stresses  in  testing-machines,  and  observing  the  effect  on  the 
specimens  in  alteration  of  volume  and  figure  by  means  of  accu- 
rate measuring-instruments. 

4532.  Q.  What  is  a  high-power  gun  ?  A.  A  gun  with  which 
the  attainable  velocity  is  2000  f.s.  and  upward. 

4533.  Q.  What  are  the  advantages  of  breech-loading  ?  A.  In- 
crease in  diameter  of  powder-chamber ;  rapidity  of  fire ;  less 
exposure ;  decrease  of  labor  in  loading ;  safety  in  loading ; 
accuracy  of  fire  ;  increased  muzzle  velocity  ;  reduction  in  depth 
of  rifling  ;  facility  for  examination  of  the  bore. 

4534.  Q.  Explain  the  principles  of  "  initial  tension."  A.  *'  In- 
itial tension  "  consists  in  giving  to  the  exterior  portion  of  a  gun 
a  certain  permanent  tension  gradually  decreasing  toward  the  ex- 
terior, and  giving  to  the  interior  part  a  certain  normal  state  of 
compression  by  the  grip  of  the  outer  cylinder  and  coils.  The 
compression  of  the  interior  within  the  elastic  limit  must  then 
first  be  overcome  before  the  powder-gas  can  exert  a  tension  on 
the  interior  tube.  .    _,     . 

4535.  Q.  Explain  "shrinkage."  A.  The  inner  diameter  of  the 
outside  tube,  when  cool,  must  be  a  little  smaller  than  the  outer 
diameter  of  the  inside  tube.  This  difference  of  diameters  is 
called  shrinkage,  and  is  equal  to  the  compression  of  the  inner 
plus  the  extension  of  the  outer  tube  when  as-sembled.  ^    ^^    ^     ^ 

4536.  Q.  Explain  the  "  heat "  used  for  shrinkage.  A.  The  heat 
used  is  not  very  great,  the  temperature  not  being  over  600°  for 
wrought-iron  and  steel.    Increased  temperature  is  of  no  conse- 


612  THE  ARMY   OFFICER'S  EXAMIi^TER. 

quence,  provided  it  is  not  raised  high  enough  to  form  scales  on 
the  surface  of  the  metal ;  and  in  all  cases  the  interior  of  the  coil 
to  be  shrunk  on  must  be  swept  clear  of  ashes,  etc.,  when  it  is 
withdrawn  from  the  fire. 

4537.  Q.  Give  the  general  features  of  a  built-up  gun.  A.  It 
consists  of  a  steel  tube  in  one  piece,  extending  the  whole  length 
of  the  boro  ;  a  jacket,  shrunk  over  the  tube,  from  the  breech- 
end,  and  extending  two  fifths  of  the  tube  ;  a  layer  of  steel  hoops 
shrunk  over  the  jacket;  tapeing  and  locking-hoops,  the  chase- 
hoops  extending  to  the  muzzle  in  all  calibres  excepting  the  5-ineh 
gun.  A  trunnion-hoop,  which  serves  to  lock  the  parts  together, 
is  placed  in  position  so  as  to  give  no  preponderance  in  all  calibres 
up  to  and  including  13-inch  guns.  Tlie  heavier  calibres  have  no 
trunnions,  the  hoops  over  the  forward  ends  being  so  shaped  as 
to  allow  the  gun  to  rest  in  a  saddle.  A  narrow  hoop  is  placed 
around  the  gun  outside  of  all  in  rear  of  the  trunnions  for  the 
larger  guns,  to  which  is  attached  the  elevating-arc. 

4538.  Q.  Explain  how  the  parts  of  a  built-up  gun  are  assem- 
bled. A.  The  parts  are  received  rough-bored,  and  turned. 
They  are  then  turned  and  bored  with  the  greatest  accuracy  to 
the  necessary  size  for  final  assembling.  The  jacket  is  bored  out 
and  finished  on  the  interior,  and  the  portion  of  the  tube  over 
which  it  is  to  fit  is  then  turned  down  to  diameters  corresponding 
to  those  on  the  interior  of  the  jacket  plus  the  shrinkage  between 
the  tube  and  the  jacket.  The  tube  is  then  placed,  muzzle  down, 
in  the  shrinking- pit  on  heavy  blocks  (from  which  extends  a  stout 
iron  bar  up  through  the  bore  and  some  distance  beyond  the 
breech),  so  that  the  forward  end  of  the  jacket  when  in  place  will 
come  a  little  above  the  floor  of  the  foundry.  At  the  level  of  the 
floor  is  built  a  water-tight  dam,  surrounding  the  tube,  and  about 
two  feet  deep,  or  the  water  is  applied  by  means  of  a  ring  of  wa- 
ter-pipe full  of  holes.  The  jacket  is  then  expanded  by  heating  it 
in  a  sheet-iron  cylinder  with  a  light  wood-fire,  heaping  on  the 
wood  until  the  embers  cover  the  entire  jacket.  At  intervals 
these  are  brushed  aside  and  the  jacket  calipered.  When  it  has 
expanded  sufficiently  a  sling-band  is  put  on  with  set  screws,  the 
crane  is  hooked  on,  and  the  jacket  is  swung  over  and  lowered 
into  place  on  the  tube  ;  when  nearly  in  its  seat  the  chain  of  the 
crane  is  let  go,  and  the  jacket  falls  five  or  six  inches,  thus  setting 
it  up  hard  on  the  shoulders.  A  crossbar  is  then  placed  over  the 
breech,  the  rod  through  the  bore  is  attached  to  the  crossbar  by 
means  of  a  nut  and  screw,  and  the  jacket  is  then  held  firmly  in 
place.  At  the  same  time  water  is  put  in  the  dam  around  the 
forward  end  of  the  jacket,  ice  being  added  to  keep  the  tempera- 
ture down.  In  this  way  the  jacket  is  made  to  nip  at  its  forward 
end,  so  that  all  further  contraction  is  toward  this  point.  The 
exterior  of  the  jacket  and  also  of  the  tube  is  prepared  for  the 
reception  of  the  hoops  by  being  accurately  turned  in  a  lathe  to 


SPECIAL  QUESTION'S.  613 

the  finished  diameter  of  the  hoops  at  the  several  points  plus  the 
shrinkage  at  those  points.  The  hoops  are  shrunk  on  with  the 
gun  horizontal,  working  from  the  trunnions  each  way;  the  hoops 
being  cooled  first  at  the  shoulders,  or  at  points  of  contact  with 
the  preceding  hoop,  until  only  the  trunnion-band  remains.  This 
piece  is  screwed  on  cold  on  navy  guns  and  shrunk  on  the  army 
guns.  The  narrow  band  around  the  cylinder  of  the  gun  to  which 
the  elevating  gear  is  attached  is  shrunk  on  after  the  guu  is 
otherwise  complete. 

4539.  Q.  How  is  the  rifling  of  a  gun  accomplished  ?  A.  The 
gun  is  placed  on  a  planing-machine  and  rests  in  collars,  so  that 
it  can  be  given  a  motion  of  rotation  as  each  cut  is  made.  The 
rifling-bar  is  set  in  a  horizontal  position  in  the  prolongation  of 
the  axis  of  the  bore,  and  is  so  secured  that  it  has  no  motion  of 
translation.  The  curve  of  rifling  is  cut  on  the  bar  in  the  shape 
of  a  slot.  Just  in  front  of  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  tlie  bar  passes 
through  a  support  resting  on  the  planer-bed,  in  which  there  is  a 
stud  which  moves  in  a  slot  on  the  bar.  As  the  gun  moves  for- 
ward and  backward  with  the  bed  of  the  planer,  the  rifling-bar  is 
made  to  revolve  by  means  of  the  stud  in  the  rifle-support  and 
the  slot  in  the  bar,  so  that  the  cutter  on  the  end  of  the  bar  re- 
produces the  curve  of  rifling  in  the  bore  of  the  gun.  Cutter- 
heads  have  been  designed  to  cut  four  or  eight  grooves  at  one  op- 
eration. As  each  cut  is  finished  the  gun  is  turned  on  its  sup- 
ports. The  rifling  of  guns  for  the  Navy  is  done  as  above  de- 
scribed ;  but  in  the  manufacture  of  guns  for  the  Army  a  special 
machine  for  rifling  is  used,  the  bar  of  which  has  a  motion  of 
translation  and  also  of  rotation,  the  gun  remaining  fixed. 

4540.  Q.  What  are  the  requirements  of  a  breech  mechanism  ? 
A.  1.  It  must  completely  stop  all  escape  of  gas  to  the  rear;  2. 
It  should  not  weaken  the  gun  ;  3.  It  should  not  be  easily  put  out 
of  order ;  4.  All  parts  exposed  to  wear  should  be  capable  of 
being  readily  and  easily  replaced ;  5.  The  obturation  should  be 
automatic,  and  the  greater  the  pressure  the  more  complete  the 
closing  of  the  mechanism  against  the  escape  of  gas  to  the  rear. 

4541.  Q.  Define  a  rapid-fire  gun,  and  give  an  example.  A.  A 
single-shot  breech-loading  gun,  using  fixed  ammunition,  capable 
of  firing  several  shots  a  minute— the  Hotchkiss  Rapid-fire  Gun. 

4542.  Q.  Define  a  machine-gun,  and  give  an  example.  A.  A 
gun  loaded  and  fired  by  machinery— the  Gatling. 

4543.  Q.  What  are  the  different  kinds  of  projectiles  and  their 
uses?  A.  Shot,  shell,  and  shrapnel.  Also,  rifled  canister. 
Shot  are  used  for  racking  or  punching.  Shell  are  of  two  kinds, 
battering  and  ordinary.  The  former  are  cast  or  forged  with  a 
solid  head,  and  have  no  fuse,  ignition  for  bursting-charge  being 
effected  by  the  heat  of  impact.  The  latter  have  a  fuse  fitted  m 
either  head  or  base.  Shot  and  shell  are  used  against  materiel ; 
shrapnel  and  canister  against  personnel. 


614  THE  ARMY   OFFICER^S   EXAMIN"ER. 

4544.  Q.  What  are  "armor-piercing  shells,"  and  how  may  they 
be  tempered  ?  A.  They  are  made  of  forged  or  rolled  tempered 
steel.  They  are  first  treated  to  a  cherry  red  throughout,  then 
plunged  in  oil  and  kept  immersed  until  cold.  They  are  again 
heated  to  a  cherry  red,  and  are  hung  with  the  head,  as  far  as  the 
front  band,  in  cold  water,  kept  eight  or  ten  minutes,  and  then 
wholly  immersed  in  oil  until  cold. 

4545.  Q.  How  are  common  shell  cast  ?  A.  They  are  cast  point- 
down  in  flasks  of  iron  lined  with  sand,  with  a  core  of  sand 
formed  on  a  hollow  iron  spindle  for  shell.  In  recent  castings  at 
Washington  the  position  has  been  reversed,  in  order  to  obtain 
sufficient  density  at  the  base  to  withstand  the  modern  high 
pressures. 

4546.  Q.  Explain  how  rotation  is  given  to  a  projectile.  A. 
Bands  of  soft  metal,  brass,  copper,  or  composition  are  firmly 
attached  to  the  projectile,  and  either  by  expansion  or  compres- 
sion, by  the  action  of  the  powder-gas,  are  forced  to  take  the 
grooves.  The  stud  system  is  used,  and  also  the  Whitworth,  but 
not  by  the  United  States. 

4547.  Q.  What  is  the  relative  penetration  of  steel  armor  as 
compared  with  wrought-iron  by  the  same  projectile  with  the. 
same  striking  velocity  ?  A.  Eoughly  speaking,  with  compound 
or  steel  armor  the  penetration  is  about  two  thirds  that  in  wrought- 
iron. 

4548.  Q.  Give  the  rules  for  the  attack  of  armored  ships.  A. 
1.  Against  iron  armor.  The  projectile  must  have  at  least  1000 
feet  striking  velocity  for  each  calibre  in  thickness  of  armor. 
Steel- forged  armor  piercing-shells,  unfilled,  should  be  used  when 
perforation  is  to  be  attempted,  unless  the  guns  are  of  very  high 
power  compared  to  the  armor.  Steel-filled  shells  or  drilled*^  iron- 
filled  shells  are  useless  against  thick  armor.  2.  Against  steel 
or  compound  armor.  The  chance  of  penetration  by  a  single  blow 
is  small,  but  continued  fire  may  break  up  the  armor.  This  armor 
must  be  fractured.  3.  Against  wrought-iron  armor.  This  must 
be  penetrated,  and  is  effected  by  the  power  of  the  gun  for  pene- 
tration. When  ships  are  at  anchor,  or  steaming  in  a  narrow 
channel,  high-angle  fire  from  rifled  mortars  to  penetrate  the  decks 
will  be  used.  In  all  cases  the  guns  incapable  of  doing  the  primary 
work  indicated  would  be  used  against  the  tops,  exposed  guns,  and 
unarmored  parts. 

4549.  Q.  In  the  destruction  of  armor,  what  is  the  difference 
between  "  punching"  and  "  racking"  ?  A.  Punching  is  the  dis- 
tribution of  the  blow  over  a  small  area.  An  elongated  projectile 
moving  with  high  velocity  is  used,  the  object  being  to  pierce  a 
hole  through  the  target.  Racking  is  the  distribution  of  the  blow 
over  a  large  area,  by  large  spherical  projectiles,  the  object  being 
to  rack  or  shake  the  target  to  pieces. 

4550.  Q.  What  is  the  Orde-Brown  rule  of  thumb  for  the  pene- 


SPECIAL  QUESTIONS.  6l5 

tration  of  armor?    A.  One  calibre  for  every  thousand  feet  of 
velocity. 

4551.  What  is  the  best  weight  for  a  projectile  of  given  diam- 
eter ?    A.  4.6  times  the  cube  of  the  radius  in  inches.     (Also 

W 

^,  =  .45  to  .5,  d  being  diameter,  is  a  rule.)  « 


INDEX. 


Act  op  Congress  requiring  examinations ^ v 

Artillery,  Drill  Regulations  for 147 

organization  of 182 

Army  Regulations  499 

Quartermaster's  Department — 

Account  Current 512 

Boards  of  Survey  on  property 518 

Contracts  and  purchases 503 

how  made 506 

guarantors  and  penalties 506 

Forage,  how  received,  kept  and  issued 527 

Fuel  and  lights,  how  supplied 524 

Horses  and  mules 526 

Money  vouchers  and  checks 514 

Powers  of  Secretary  of  War  and  Chiefs  of  Bureaus 521 

Public  funds,  how  kept  and  disbursed 508 

Public  money,  property  and  accounts 501 

Responsibility  for  property 516 

Records 537 

Returns  and  reports 538 

Rewards  for  criminals 517 

Telegraphing  and  telegraph  accounts 535 

Transportation 529 

Subsistence  Department— 

Beef-cattle • 543 

Books  and  returns 551 

Inventories  of  stores 541 

Losses  and  gains 541 

Ration 544 

Requisitions  for  supplies 54U 

gales ^' 

Storage  and  care  of  stores 541 

Supplies ^ 

Travel  ration ^*^ 

Ballistics ^ 

Bayonet  Exercise .••••/ 5 

Boards  of  Examination,  remarks  on  action  of. xxvi 

617 


618  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Drill,  Cavalry— 

Advance  and  rear  guards 127 

Brigade,  ibe : 139 

Camping 130 

Cavalry,  employment  of 123 

against  artillery 124 

against  cavalry 123 

against  infantry 124 

Ceremonies 141 

Convoys,  escort  of 126 

Corps,  the 141 

Defensive— squadron  alone 123 

squadron  in  regiment 122 

Definitions 89 

Dismounted  squadron  in  action 119 

Division,  the 141 

Elementary  drills 93 

Escorts 126 

Escort  of  honor 143 

funeral 143 

Evolutions  of  the  regiment 135 

Extended  order,  general  principles 110 

Fencing  exercise 99 

Foragers  and  skirmishers 125 

Front  of  action 120 

General  principles 92 

Horses,  cavalry 132 

Individual  instruction  with  arms 94 

Leading  the  squad Ill 

■'     Manual — of  the  carbine 94 

of  the  pistol 97 

of  the  sabre 98 

Marches 129 

Offensive — squadron  alone 122 

squadron  in  regiment 120 

Outposts 128 

Packing 134 

Pursuit 125 

Raids 126 

Regiment  in  brigade 139 

Reviews,  general  rules  for 142 

School  of  the  soldier 93 

trooper 100 

troop 102 

squadron 105 

Screening  and  reconnoitring 127 

Setting-up  exercises 94 

Signals 91 

Squad,  the Ill 

Squad  drill,  dismounted 96 

Squadron,  the 117 


INDEX.  619 


Drill,  Qa.ym;b.y— {Continued.) 

Stable  duty 131 

Steps,  the  .   .'.*.'!!!!.*.*.*.*!!  94 

Troop,  the i  *..!!!....!!...*!!!!!..  i  115 

Drill,  Light  Artillery— 

Artillery,  field,  cover  for 186 

horse V.'.W.WV.W  1^1 

in  the  field 182 

organization  of !!!.'.*!!'.  182 

transportation  of .*.*.*'.!!!!  177 

Battalion,  parade  of  the 199 

school  of  the ,,,',  i89 

Battery,  formation  of ] . , .  174 

iuspection  of \\\\  200 

school  of  the 173 

dismounted,  school  of  the 159 

Camping 187 

Cannoneer,  school  of  the 148 

Ceremonies 196 

Commands 148 

Driver,  school  of  the 169 

Escort,  funeral 201 

General  principles 147 

Gun-detachment  exercise 163 

Reviews,  general  rules  for 196 

of  a  battery 197 

of  a  battalion 198 

of  a  brigade 199 

of  two  or  more  battalions 198 

Route  marches 177 

Sabre  and  pistol .^ 

Section  exercise ..« ,'j^.^.^ij^  *p^^ 

Soldier,  mounted,  school  of  th^r'^Air^^,rt»«''^v 
Drill,  Infantry—  .^^'^-^  OF  TilH  » 

Advance  and  rear  guards. .  /ftf 'W'T'IT-TJI'T^' vI'T*  ¥«H' 

Brigade,  the  .,.^.^.iy.M,r:.:,\.*.*M. 

in  battle .^^ .  ..«> oX..^a  W^** 

Camping • ••♦f\^ 

Ceremonies,  general  rules  for v.i'i 

Close  order,  general  principles 

Alignments '• 242 

Battalion,  school  of  the 286 

formation  of  the 239 

Bayonet  exercise 227 

Color  guai*d 237 

Company,  school  of  the 228 

Firings,  battalion 241 

squad 227 

Individual  instruction  with  arms 217 

Manual 214 

Manual  of  arms  (squad) 318 


620  IKDEX. 


PAGE 

Drill,  I'^-pantuy— (Continued.) 

Movements. 241 

Movements  by  platoon,  company 233 

battalion 251 

Posts  of  field,  staff  and  band 238 

Soldier,  school  of  the. 210 

Squad 224 

Steps,  the 215 

Successive  formations,  general  rules  for 243 

Turnings 226 

Color,  escort  of  the 290 

Corps,  the, 281 

Definitions 205 

Division,  the. 281 

inbattle 282 

Extended  order,  general  principles 253 

Action  against  cavalry 261 

Battalion,  the 262 

Battalion  in  regiment  on  the  offensive 263 

defensive 264 

Battalion  alone,  on  the  offensive. 264 

defensive 265 

Company,  the. . 257 

Company  alone,  on  the  offensive 260 

in  battalion ,  on  the  offensive 259 

alone,  on  the  defensive 261 

in  battalion,  on  the  defensive 261 

Defense  and  attack  of  artillery 262 

Officers,  position  and  duties  of 258 

Electricity 593 

Explosives 597 

Field  Engineering — 

Bridges 72 

Camping  arrangements........ 75 

Casemates,  field. 67 

Clearing  the  ground 61 

Cordage  and  use  of  spars. 71 

Deliberate  intreuchments 66 

Defense  of  posts 64 

Elementary 61 

Geometry  and  field  level 65 

Hasty  demolition 76 

Hasty  iutrenchments 62 

Obstacles. >. 63 

Revetments. 68 

Roads 70 

Siege  trenches 69 

Working  parties 69 

Findings  of  Boards  of  Examination,  remarks  on xxv 


Fire  Discipline—  ^-^^^ 

Ammunition,  supply  of,  in  the  field qoo 

Fire,  collective .....!.!.*.!! 384 

direction  and  control  of  .....'.*!!!!]  ^  *  1  ]*]]].'.*''""*  3^9 

effects  of .*.*.'.'.* 3,s6 

individual,  limit  of ••*•'  ^  **!*'•'.!*.!'.!!!*.'.!!.'.'!.*.  383 

kinds  to  be  used .*.*.*.'.'.!.*.*! 391 

long-range ..  ..I ....[[[['.'.'.'.    ".  388 

Pluugiug ;  394 

rapidity  of 393 

unit 39J 

Ground,  influence  of .'.*.'.*.!.*.*.*.*!!!.'!.'  387 

Tactical  deductions *.!!!!!!! 392 

Trajectory,  the '. '. '.  379 

mean  and  practical 382 

variations  in  the 380 

General  Orders  No.  128.  1890,  prescribing  rules  for  examina- 
tion  V vi 

Ko.    80,  1891,  prescribing  rules  for  examina- 
tion after  Jan.  1,  '93 xi 

No.  6,  1893,  amending  G.  O.  No.  80,  1891. . .  xxii 

Guard-duty— 

Color-line  and  sentinels 19 

Commanding  oflficer 5 

Commander  of  the  guard 8 

Corporal  of  the  guard 11 

Countersigns  and  paroles 22 

Flags  and  colors 24 

Guards,  compliments  from. 18 

Miscellaneous 22 

Musicians  of  the  guard 14 

Officer  of  the  day 6 

Orderly  for  the  commanding  officer 14 

Patrols  of  the  guard 22 

Police  and  fatigue  duty 23 

Prisoners 20 

Privates  of  the  guard 14 

Property  under  charge  of  the  guard 23 

Rosters 3 

Sentinels  on  post,  orders  for 15 

Sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard,  orders  for 17 

Sentinels,  compliments  from 17 

Sergeant  of  the  guard 10 

Special  orders 19 

Supernumeraries 20 

Gunnery ; 605 

HiPPOLOGY — 

Angle  of  traction,  the 360 

Collar,  the 360 

Harness 361 


622  ii^DEX. 


PAGE 

HippoTjOOy— Continued. 

Angle  of  traction— {Contt7iued.) 

Pole  and  pole-chuins,  length  of 303 

Trace 361 

Tiaiuiug  for  draught 368 

Wheel,  height  of 363 

Bits  and  bitting,  general  principles *. 344 

Bit  and  curb,  lever,  bridle 353 

Oavesson,  snaffle,  noseband,  etc 349 

Horse,  the  neck,  head,  mouth,  etc 346 

Measure  for  bit—  month-gauge 358 

Restiveness,  rules  for  treatment  of ..,...,  368 

Bolting 371 

Bucking  or  plunging 372 

How  to  render  horses  obedient 367 

Kicking 374 

Rearing 372 

Seats  and  saddles 335 

Horse,  framework  of 335 

Saddle,  the,  and  its  influence  on  the  seat 339 

Seats 343 

Stables,  ventilation  and  construction  of 395 

Horse,  conformaiion  of  the 320 

exercise  of  the 317 

grooming  of  the 313 

shoeing  of  the 329 

watering  and  feeding  of  the 305 

Hay 313 

Oats,  characteristics  of  good 309 

Stable  fittings 303 

management 319 

Military  Law — 

Action  on  proceedings,  reviewing  authority 37 

Armies  in  the  field,  instructions  for  government  of 45 

Arrest 30 

Challenges 38 

Charge,  the 31 

Civil  functions  and  relations  of  the  military 58 

Civil  rights  of  persons  in  the  military  service 57 

Couit-martial,  the 29 

assembling  and  opening  of.   33 

constitution  and  composition  of  the  general.  29 

judge  advocate  of 33 

jurisdiction  of 30 

president  and  members  of 33 

Evidence .  35 

Finding 36 

Habeas  coi-pus 56 

Inferior  courts-martial 38 

Inquiry,  court  of 39 


INDEX.  023 


PAOB 


Military  Law— (Continued.) 

Law  of  war 50 

Ollenses  specified  in  Articles  of  War !!*.!.'.'.*!!!     39 

Organization  of  courts,  arraignment,  pleas,  and  motions.. . .'     33 

Sentence  and  punishment 37 

Subject  defined  and  divided .*     27 

Summary  Court '. .' .  *.     53 

Trial,  the ]     34 

Unwritten  law 28 

Written  law 27 

Minor  Tactics— 

Advance-guard,  the 411 

main  column,  march  of  the 415 

Artillery,  characteristics  of 403 

tactical  unit  of 406 

Cavalry,  attacks  by 453 

attack  and  defense  of 452 

attack  in  dispersed  order  of 456 

characteristics  of 401 

dismounted  service  of 460 

•  in  attack 452 

in  defense ; 456 

screening  and  reconnoitring  duties  of 437 

small  bodies  of,  in  attack  457 

soldier  in  attack,  alone 457 

troop,  in  attack 458 

Convoys 476 

of  prisoners 480 

Definitions 397 

Infantry,  attack  and  defense  of 441 

attack  with  the  bayonet , 451 

company  in  attack 446 

company  in  defense,  alone 451 

mounted 407 

soldier  in  attack,  alone 443 

Localities,  attack  and  defense  of 470 

Outposts 415 

at  night 424 

distance  of,  from  main  army 429 

posting  the 417 

Patrols 420 

cavalry 435 

infantry 430 

infantry,  duties  of  commander  of 435 

infantry,  movements  of  small 432 

Pickets 422 

cavalry,  duties  of  commander  . . .  ^. 427 

infantry,     "       "  "        425 

Posts,  communicating 440 

connecting  439 

or  groups,  small 423 


624  INDEX. 

PAGE 

Minor  Tactics — {Continued.) 

Rear-guards  471 

Reconnaissance,  information  by  means  of 429 

Reconnoitring 429 

Reconnoitring  parties 440 

Security  and  information 409 

Space  and  time 409 

Supports  and  reserves 423 

Three  arms,  functions  of 398 

attack  and  defense  of  the 460 

conduct  of  the  defense 467 

delivery  of  the  attack 465 

in  attack 460 

in  defense 467 

preparation  for  the  attack 463 

re-formation  on  success 466 

retirement  on  repulse 466 

Oaths,  form  of,  for  members,  recorder  and  witness  of  boards. .     ix 

Procedure,  when  found  not  incapacitated xi 

Quartermaster's  Department  (see  Army  Regulations) 499 

Rules  of  Procedure  for  Boards  of  Examination viii 

Signalling,  characters  used  for 81 

Conventional  signals  for  flag  or  torch 83 

for  heliograph  or  flash  lantern b3 

for  telegraph 84 

Naval  code,  for  visual  and  telegraphic 84 

with  flag  or  torch 85 

fog  signals 86 

Subheads  for  the  written  examination xiii 

Subjects  of  examination — 

For  second  lieutenants  of  artillery xxix 

cavalry xxix 

infantry xxx 

Foa  first  lieutenants  of  artillery xxx 

cavalry xxx 

infantry xxxi 

For  captains  of  artillery xxxi 

cavalry xxxi 

infantry xxxi 

quartermaster's  department xxxii 

subsistence  department xxxii 

Subsistence  Department  (see  Army  Regulations) xiii 

Topography,  Military — 

Contoured  plans , , . . .  496 

Distances,  measurement  of ..,,,,,..,,,.,.,...,.,«..,,,. ..  490 


INDEX.  625 


ToPOGKAPHY,  Mim&rj—iContmued.)  ^^°" 

Hills,  terms  used  in  describing 437 

representation  of .*..'*...*.**..'.*  487 

Horizontal  equivalents,  scale  of .*.....*.'.*.*.*.'  487 

Magnetic  variation !*.!!!!!!!     492 

Plane  table *..!.*.'..*."!*..*...  490 

Plans,  copying,  reducing  and  enlarging * .  *,".". *. *.'.*. '  .*.*.'.]  486 

Plans  on  the  ground,  making  use  of .'.**  439 

Prismatic  compass  and  protractor ....[,  491 

Reconnaissance  of  a  defensive  position,  sketch  of 496 

Roads,  laying  out  and  constructing 497 

Scales,  construction  of .*.  .'.'."*  433 

Sections 488 

Signs,  conventional .'.*..'.'.*.*  486 

Sketching,  hill  and  mountain *.  493 

general  remarks  on 495 

on  horseback 497 

without  information 495 

Traversing  and  plotting  at  sight  493 

with  compass  and  field-book 493 

with  the  plane-table 493 

Troops  in  campaign— 

Administrative  services , 560 

Artillery  and  engineers 558 

Assaults 584 

Battles 587 

Camps 563 

Commands 556 

Commissary-General  of  prisoners 568 

Convoys  and  their  escorts 574 

Defense  of  fortified  places 585 

Horses,  transportation  of 580 

Headquarters,  depots,  etc 562 

Intrenched  posts 562 

Journal  of  marches,  military  maps 573 

Marches 571 

Military  exercises 563 

Military  occupation,  contributions  and  requisitions 563 

Organization  of  an  army  in  the  field 555 

Parole  and  exchange  of  prisoners 569 

Police,  general 560 

Prisoners  of  war 566 

Rations,  issue  of 562 

Reconnaissances 563 

Safeguards 565 

Sieges 581 

Ten ts,  baggage  and  baggage-trains 560 

Troops,  movement  of,  by  rail  and  water 574 


BOOKS    FOR 

ARMY  AND  NAVY  OFFICERS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

JOHN  WILEY  &  SONS. 


ORDNANCE  AND  GUNNERY. 

For  the  use  of  the  Cadets  of  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy     By 
Captain  Henry  Metcalf,  Ordnance  Department,  U.  S.  Army 
Instructor  of  Ordnance  and  Gunnery,  UiS.M.A.   13mo,  500  pp 
cloth,  with  separate  atlas  containing  350  cuts,     .  .       $5.d3 

MODERN  FRENCH  ARTILLERY. 

The  St.  Chamond,  De  Bange,  Canet  and  Hotchkiss  systems,  with 
illustrations  of  French  War  Ships,   By  James  Dredge.  4to,  half 

morocco, S20.00  net 

HANDBOOK  OF  PROBLEMS  IN  DIRECT  FIRE. 

By  James  M..Ingalls,  Captain  First  Artillery,  U.  S.  A,  8vo, 
cloth, ^4.00 

BALLISTIC  TABLES. 

Reprinted  from  the  Handbook  for  "West  Point  Cadets.  By 
(^apt.  Jas.  M.  Ingalls.    8vo,  cloth,     ....       $1.50 

SUBMARINE  MINES  AND  TORPEDOES. 

As  applied  to  Harbour  Defense.  By  John  Townsend  Bucknill, 
Honorary  Lieutenant-Colonel  (late  Major  Royal  Engineers) 
Reserve  of  OflScers.    With  illustrations.    8vo,  cloth,   .       $4.00 

PRACTICAL  SEAMANSHIP. 

By  John  Todd,  Master  Mariner,  and  W.  B.  Whall,  Extra  Master 
Younger  Brother  Trinity  House.  Royal  Svo,  full  cloth,  with 
343  Illustrations  and  Diagrams,         ....       $7.50 

NOTES  ON  MILITARY  HYGIENE. 

For  Officers  of  the  Line.  A  Syllabus  of  I^ectures  at  the  TJ.  S. 
Infantry  and  Cavalry  School.  By  Alfred  A.  Woodhull,  Major 
of  Medical  Dep't.,  Bvt.  Lt.  Col.  U.  S.  Army.    12mo,  morocco, 

$2.50 

SIMPLE  ELEMENTS  OF  NAVIGATION. 

By  Lucien  Young,  U.  S.  Navy.    Pocket-book  form,     .       $2.00 


THE  SOLDIERS'  FIRST  AID  HANDBOOK. 

Coraprisinf?  a  Series  of  Lectures  to  Members  of  tlie  Hospital 
Corps  and  Company  Bearers.  By  William  D.  Dietz,  Late  Cap- 
tain and  Assistant  Surgeon  U.  S.  Army.    18mo,  morocco,  $L35 

PERMANENT  FORTIFICATIONS. 

By  Prof.  D.  H.  Mahan,  Revised  and  brought  up  to  date  by  Col. 
James  Mercur,  U.  S.  Military  Academy,  West  Point.  Numer- 
ous plates,  1887.    8vo,  half  morocco,  .  .  .       $7.50 

ELEMENTS  OF  THE  ART  OF  WAR. 

By  James  Mercur,  Professor  of  Civil  and  Military  Engineering, 
United  States  Military  Academy.  Illustrated  with  full-page 
and  folding  plates.    Third  edition.    8vo,  cloth,    .  .       $4.00 

PRACTICAL  MARINE  SURVEYING. 

By  Harry  Phelps,  U.  S.  Navy.    Svo,  cloth,  .  .       $2.50 

" WRINKLES''  IN  PRACTICAL  NAVIGATION. 

By  S.  T.  S.  Lecky,  Master  Mariner,  Commander  R.  N.  R.  Second 
edition.    80  illustrations.    Svo,  cloth,  .  .  .       $6.00 

AN  ABRIDGEMENT  OF  MILITARY  LAW. 

By  Lt.  Col.  W.Winthrop,  Deputy  Judge  Advocate-General  F.  S. 
Army,  late  Professor  of  Law,  TJ.  S.  Military  Academy.  Second 
and  revised  edition.    12mo,  red  cloth,       .  .  .       $3.50 

A  MANUAL  FOR  COURTS-MARTIAL. 

Prepared  by  Lt.  Arthur  Murray,  1st  Artillery,  late  Actmg 
Judge  Advocate-General,  U.  S.  A.  Third  edition.  18mo,  mo- 
rocco, flap,  .......       $L50 

CAVALRY  OUT-POST  DUTIES. 

By  F.  De  Brack,  translated  from  the  French  (third  edition,  1863) 
by  Major  Camillo  C.  C.  Carr,  8th  Cavalry,  U.  S.  A.  18mo,  mo- 
rocco, flap,  .......       $3.00 

GUNNERY    FOR    NON-COMMISSIONED    OFFI- 
CERS. 
Compiled  by  Lt.  Adelbert  Cronkhite,  4th  Artillery,  with  Ballis- 
ticTables,  by  Capt.  James  Chester,  3d  Artillery,  18mo,  morocco, 
flap,  ........       $3.00 

ART  OF  SUBSISTING  ARMIES  IN  WAR. 

By  Capt.  H.  G.  Sharpe,  U.  S.  A.    18mo,  cloth,      .  .       g.35 

morocco,     .....«••       $1.50 

THE  ARMY  OFFICER'S  EXAMINER. 

By  Lt.  Col.  W.  H.  Powell,  U.  S.  A.    12mo,  cloth,  .       $4.00 

ELEMENTARY  NAVAL  TACTICS.     „  ^^     „ 

By  Commander  Wm.  Bainbridge-Hofl,  U.  S.  N.    8vo,  cloth, 
(in  preparation.) 


r-i?Slt^/^  0^.25  CENTS 


^I>2l-ioo,n-7.'39(402.) 


